Manual de Mantenimiento

AIRPLANE MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CARD 1 OF 9
PA-46-350P
(S/N’s 4636001 AND UP)
PIPER AIRCRAFT, INC.

PART NUMBER 761-876 February 28, 2007
1A1
Published by
Technical Publications
©Piper Aircraft, Inc.

2926 Piper Drive
Vero Beach, Florida 32960
U.S.A.
Member
General Aviation
Manufacturers Association
1A2
PA-46-350P, MALIBU MIRAGE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
AEROFICHE REVISION STATUS
Revisions to this Maintenance Manual, P/N 761-876, issued July 12, 1995 and reissued February 28, 2007
are as follows:
Revision Publication Date Aerofiche Card Effectivity
ORG950712 June 19, 1996 All

PR980101 January 1, 1998 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6
CR981223 December 23, 1998 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6
PR000201 February 1, 2000 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6
PR010515 May 15, 2001 1
CR050730 July 30, 2005 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8
PR060207 February 7, 2006 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8
CR070228* February 28, 2007 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 and 9
* COMPLETE REVISION OF MAINTENANCE MANUAL 761-876

Revisions appear in all Aerofiche Cards. Accordingly, discard your
entire existing Aerofiche Card Set and replace it with this one dated
02/28/07.
Consult the Customer Service Information Aerofiche (P/N 1753-755) for current revision dates for this
manual.
1A3 AEROFICHE EFFECTIVITY PAGE 1

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
PAGE 1
Feb 28/07 AEROFICHE EFFECTIVITY 1A4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTRODUCTION
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES
CHAPTER CHAPTER
SECTION PAGE DATE SECTION PAGE DATE
Intro-List of 1 Feb 28/07

Effective Pages 2 Feb 28/07
Intro-Table of Contents 1 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07
Introduction 1 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07
5 Feb 28/07
6 Feb 28/07
7 Feb 28/07
8 Feb 28/07
9 Feb 28/07
10 Feb 28/07
11 Feb 28/07
12 Feb 28/07
13 Feb 28/07
14 Feb 28/07
15 Feb 28/07
16 Feb 28/07
Index 1 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07
5 Feb 28/07
6 Feb 28/07
7 Feb 28/07
8 Feb 28/07
9 Feb 28/07
10 Feb 28/07
1A5 INTRO - LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 INTRO - LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES 1A6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTRODUCTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SUBJECT SECTION PAGE GRID NO.
INTRODUCTION
Instructions for Continued Airworthiness 1 1A9
General 1 1A9
Effectivity 2 1A10
Serial Number Explanation 2 1A10
Assignment of Subject Material 2 1A10
Pagination 3 1A11
Aerofiche Effectivity 3 1A11
Identifying Revised Material 3 1A11
Indexing 3 1A11
List of Effective Pages 3 1A11
Warnings, Cautions, and Notes 3 1A11
Accident/Incident Reporting 4 1A12
Supplementary Publications 4 1A12
Piper Publications 4 1A12
Vendor Publications 4 1A12
Chapter/Section Index Guide 9 1A19
INDEX
Index 1 1B1
1A7 INTRO - CONTENTS FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 INTRO - CONTENTS 1A8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTRODUCTION
1. Instructions for Continued Airworthiness

WARNING: INSTRUCTIONS FOR CONTINUED AIRWORTHINESS (ICA) FOR ALL NON-PIPER
APPROVED STC INSTALLATIONS ARE NOT INCLUDED IN THIS MANUAL. WHEN A
NON-PIPER APPROVED STC INSTALLATION IS INCORPORATED ON THE AIRPLANE,
THOSE PORTIONS OF THE AIRPLANE AFFECTED BY THE INSTALLATION MUST BE
INSPECTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE ICA PUBLISHED BY THE OWNER OF THE
STC. SINCE NON-PIPER APPROVED STC INSTALLATIONS MAY CHANGE SYSTEMS
INTERFACE, OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS AND COMPONENT LOADS OR
STRESSES ON ADJACENT STRUCTURES, THE PIPER PROVIDED ICA MAY NOT BE
VALID FOR AIRPLANES SO MODIFIED.
The PIPER PA-46-350P Malibu Mirage Maintenance Manual constitutes the Instructions for Continued
Airworthiness as required by Federal Aviation Regulations (FAR) Part 23, Appendix G. Chapter 4
contains the Airworthiness Limitations section (4-00-00) and the Inspection Program is in Chapter 5
(5-20-00).
2. General
This publication is prepared in accordance with the General Aviation Manufacturers Association (GAMA)
Specification No. 2, with respect to the arrangement and content of the System/Chapters within the
designated Chapter/Section-numbering system.
WARNING: USE ONLY GENUINE PIPER AIRCRAFT PARTS OR PIPER AIRCRAFT APPROVED
PARTS OBTAINED FROM PIPER APPROVED SOURCES, IN CONNECTION WITH THE
MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR OF PIPER AIRPLANES.
Genuine PIPER parts are produced and inspected under rigorous procedures to ensure airworthiness
and suitability for use in PIPER airplane applications. Parts purchased from sources other than PIPER,
even though identical in appearance, may not have had the required tests and inspections performed,
may be different in fabrication techniques and materials, and may be dangerous when installed in an
airplane.
Reworked, salvaged or those parts obtained from non-PIPER approved sources, which the service
history is unknown or cannot be authenticated, may have been subjected to unacceptable stresses or
temperatures or have other hidden damage, not discernible through routine visual or usual
nondestructive testing. This may render the part, component or structural assembly, even though
originally manufactured by PIPER AIRCRAFT unsuitable and unsafe for airplane use.
PIPER AIRCRAFT, INC. expressly disclaims any responsibility for malfunctions, failures, damage or
injury caused by use of non-PIPER approved parts.
NOTE: PIPER AIRCRAFT, INC. expressly reserves the right to supersede, cancel and/or declare
obsolete any part, part numbers, kits or publication that may be referenced in this manual
without prior notice.
Any question concerning the care of your airplane, be sure to include the airplane serial number in any
correspondence.
1A9 INTRODUCTION PAGE 1

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. Effectivity
This maintenance manual is effective for PA-46-350P Malibu Mirage airplane serial numbers
4636001 and up. This encompasses the following model years:
NOTE: The following is provided as a general reference only.
Model Year Serial Numbers Model Year Serial Numbers
1995 4636001 thru 4636020 2004 4636349 thru 4636363

1996 4636021 thru 4636076 2005 4636364 thru 4636374
1997 4636077 thru 4636131 2006 4636375 thru 4636399
1998 4636132 thru 4636186 2007 4636400 and up
1999 4636187 thru 4636247
2000 4636248 thru 4636313
2002 4636299, and
4636314 thru 4636338
2003 4636339 thru 4636348
4. Serial Number Explanation

Example:
46 36 001
TYPE CERTIFICATE DESIGNATION SEQUENCE NUMBER

MODEL CODE
36 = PA-46-350P MALIBU MIRAGE
5. Assignment of Subject Material

This publication is divided into industry standard, three element, numeric subject groupings as follows:
A. System/Chapter - The various groups are broken down into major systems such as Environmental
Systems, Electrical Power, Landing Gear, etc. They are assigned a number, which becomes the first
element of the standardized numbering system. Thus, the element “28” of the number 28-40-01
refers to the chapter “Fuel”. Everything concerning the fuel system will be covered in this chapter.
B. Sub-System/Section - The major systems/chapters of an airplane are broken down into
subsystems. These sub-systems are identified by the second element of the standard numbering
system. The element “40” of the number 28-40-01 concerns itself with the indicating section of the
fuel system.
C. Unit/Subject - The individual units within a sub-system/section may be identified by the third
element of the standard numbering system. The element “01” of the number 28-40-01 is a subject
designator. This element is assigned at the option of the manufacturer and is normally zeroed out by
PIPER.
Refer to paragraph 12, Chapter/Section Index Guide, for a complete breakdown and list. The material is
arranged in ascending numerical sequence.
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 INTRODUCTION 1A10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6. Pagination
The Chapter - Section (i.e. - 28-40-00) numbering system explained above forms the primary page
numbering system for this manual. Within each Section, pages are numbered consecutively beginning
with Page 1 (i.e. - 28-40-00, Page 1).
7. Aerofiche Effectivity
A. The General Aviation Manufacturers Association (GAMA) have developed specifications for
microfiche reproduction of aircraft publications. The information compiled in this Aerofiche
Maintenance Manual will be kept current by revisions distributed periodically. These revisions will
supersede all previous revisions and will be complete Aerofiche card replacements and shall
supersede Aerofiche cards of the same number in the set. The “Aerofiche Effectivity” page at the
front of this manual lists the current revision for each card in this set.
B. Conversion of Aerofiche alpha/numeric grid code numbers:
First number is the Aerofiche card number.
Letter is the horizontal row reference per card
Second number is the vertical column reference per card.
Example: 2J16 = Aerofiche card number two, row J, column 16.
C. To aid in locating information, the following is provided at the beginning of each aerofiche card:
(1) A complete Introduction containing the Chapter/Section Index Guide for all fiche in this set.
(2) A complete subject Index for all fiche in this set.
8. Identifying Revised Material
A revision to a page is defined as any change to the printed matter that existed previously.
Revisions, additions and deletions are identified by a vertical line (i. e. - change bar) along the left-
hand margin of the page opposite only that portion of the printed matter that was changed.
A change bar in the left-hand margin opposite the footer (i.e. - chapter/section/subject, page
number and date), indicates that the text was unchanged but the material was relocated to a
different page.
Example.
NOTE: Change bars are not used in the title pages, list of effective pages, or index. Likewise, all
change bars are removed when a publication is completely revised (i.e. - reissued).
9. Indexing
An alphabetically arranged Subject Index follows this introduction to assist the user in locating desired
information. In addition, each System/Chapter begins with an individual Table of Contents.
10. List of Effective Pages
Each System/Chapter has a List of Effective Pages preceding the Table of Contents to identify the
effective revision date for each page in that chapter.
11. Warnings, Cautions and Notes
These adjuncts to the text are used to highlight or emphasize important points when necessary.
WARNINGS call attention to use of materials, processes, methods, procedures or limits which must be
followed precisely to avoid injury or death to persons. CAUTIONS call attention to methods and
procedures which must be followed to avoid damage to equipment. NOTES call attention to methods
which make the job easier. Warnings and Cautions precede and Notes follow the text to which they
apply.

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
12. Accident/Incident Reporting

To improve our Service and Reliability system and aid in Piper’s compliance with FAR 21.3, knowledge
of all incidents and/or accidents must be reported to Piper immediately. To expedite and assist in
reporting all incidents and accidents, Piper Form 420-01 has been created. See Service Letter 1041 for
latest revision. This procedure is to be used by all Dealers, Service Centers and Repair Facilities.
13. Supplementary Publications
The following is a list of publications providing servicing, overhaul and parts information on various
components on the PA-46-350P airplane, which you should use to supplement this manual.
A. Piper Publications: Part Number
(1) Parts Catalog: P/N 761-878
(2) Periodic Inspection Report Form: P/N 767-011
(3) Progressive Inspection Manual (50 hour): P/N 767-013
B. Vendor Publications:
WARNING: FAILURE TO CONSULT APPLICABLE VENDOR PUBLICATION(S), WHEN
SERVICING OR INSPECTING VENDOR EQUIPMENT INSTALLED IN PIPER
AIRCRAFT, MAY RENDER THE AIRCRAFT UNAIRWORTHY.
(1) AIR CONDITIONING COMPRESSOR:
Vendor Address: Sanden International (USA), Inc. PH: (972) 442-8400
601 South Sanden Blvd. FAX: (972) 442-8700
Wylie, Texas 75098
http://www.sanden.com/
(2) AIR CONDITIONING EVAPORATORS AND BLOWERS:
Vendor Address: Enviro Systems, Inc. PH: (405) 382-0731
P.O. Box 1404
Seminole, Oklahoma 74868
(3) ALTERNATOR:
Vendor Address: Kelly Aerospace, Power Systems PH: (888) 461-6077
Airport Complex
P. O. Box 273
Fort Deposit, Alabama 36032
http://www.kellyaerospace.com/
(4) AUTOFLIGHT:
Vendor(s): Honeywell (or) S-TEC Corporation
One Technology Center One S-TEC Way
23500 W. 105th St., M/D #45 Mineral Wells, TX 76067
Olathe, Kansas 66061-1950 PH: (940) 325-9406
http://www.bendixking.com/ http://www.s-tec.com
PAGE 4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(5) BATTERY:
Vendor Address: Gill/Teledyne Battery Products PH: (800) 456-0070
840 W. Brockton Ave.
Redlands, California 92374
http://www.gillbatteries.com/
(6) BRAKES:
Vendor Address: Parker Hannifin Corp. PH: (800) 272-5464
Aircraft Wheel and Brake Division
1160 Center Road
Avon, Ohio 44011
http://www.parker.com/cleveland/Universe/book.pdf
(7) DEICE SYSTEM (PNEUMATIC):
Vendor Address: De-Icing and Specialty Systems PH: (330) 374-3040
Goodrich Corporation FAX: (330) 374-2290
1555 Corporate Woods Parkway
Uniontown, Ohio 44685-8799
Technical Assistance: PH: (800) 334-2377
(330) 374-3743
FAX: (330) 374-2290
Email: [email protected]
http://www.deicingsystems.goodrich.com/
Black Standard
Pneumatic De-Icer
Installation,
Maintenance and
Repair Manual: ATA 30-10-31
SmartBoot System: ATA 30-10-65
(8) ELECTRONIC FLIGHT INSTRUMENT SYSTEM (EFIS):
Vendor Address: Meggitt Avionics, Inc. PH: - (603) 669-0940
10 Ammon Drive FAX: - (603) 669-0931
Manchester, NH 03103-7406
http://www.meggittavi.com/
or,
Vendor Address: Avidyne Corporation PH: - (800) 284-3963
55 Old Bedford Road
Lincoln, MA 01773
http://www.avidyne.com/index.htm

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(9) EMERGENCY LOCATOR TRANSMITTER:

Vendor Address: Artex Aircraft Supplies PH: (800) 547-8901
14405 Keil Road NE
Aurora, Oregon 97002
http://www.artex.net/
(10) ENGINE:
Vendor Address: Textron Lycoming PH: (717) 323-6181
652 Oliver Street FAX: (717) 327-7101
Williamsport, Pennsylvania 17701
http://www.lycoming.textron.com/main.html
Overhaul Manual: Direct Drive Models - P/N 60294-7
Parts Catalog: TIO-540-AE2A - P/N PC-315-7
Operator’s Manual: TIO-540-AE2A Engines - P/N 60297-27
NOTE: The above Lycoming publications can be ordered as a set on CD-ROM from Avantext.
See www.avantext.com or PH: (800) 998-8857.
(11) FIRE EXTINGUISHER (PORTABLE):
Vendor Address: H3R Inc. PH: (800) 249-4289
43 Magnolia Ave. #4
San Francisco, California 94123-2911
http://www.h3r.com/index.htm
(12) FORCE APPLICATOR KIT:
Vendor Address: Safe Flight Instrument Corp. PH: (914) 946-9500
20 New King Street
White Plains, New York 10602
(13) FUEL BOOST PUMP:
Nichols Airborne Division
711 Taylor Street
Elyria, Ohio 44036
http://www.parker.com/eac
(14) GROUND BLOWER (OPTIONAL):
Vendor Address: Electro-Mech Inc.
2600 S. Custer
Wichita, Kansas
(15) GEAR LOCKING ACTUATORS, NOSE, GEAR DOOR ACTUATOR, HYDRAULIC PUMP,
AND ALL HYDRAULIC COMPONENTS:
Vendor Address: Parker Hannifin Corp.
(See Brakes, above)
or,
Frisby Aerospace PH: (336) 766-9036
4520 Hampton Rd. FAX: (336) 766-9040
Clemmons, NC 27012
http://frisbyaerospace.com/
PAGE 6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(16) HI-LOK FASTENERS AND TOOLS:

Vendor Address: Hi-Shear Corporation PH: (213) 326-8110
2600 Skypark Drive
Torrance, California 90509
(17) LIGHTS - NAVIGATION/STROBE, STANDBY/MAP:
Vendor Address: Whelen Engineering Co. Inc. PH: (860) 526-9504
Route 145, Winthrop Rd. FAX: (860) 526-2009
Chester, Connecticut 06412
http://www.whelen.com/
(18) MAGNETOS:
Vendor Address: Slick Aircraft Products PH: (904) 739-4000
Unison Industries FAX: (904) 739-4006
Attn: Subscription Dept.
7575 Baymeadows Way
Jacksonville, FL 32256
http://www.unisonindustries.com/index4.html
Installation, Operation F1100 MASTER SERVICE MANUAL,
and Maintenance 4300/6300 SERIES MAGNETO MAINTENANCE AND
Instructions: OVERHAUL MANUAL - L-1363
(19) NAVIGATION, COMMUNICATIONS, AND GPS (NAV/COM/GPS):
Vendor Address: Garmin International PH: (913) 397-8200
1200 East 151ST Street
Olathe, KS 66062
http://www.garmin.com
(20) OXYGEN SYSTEM:
Vendor Address: Scott Aviation PH: (716) 683-5100
2225 Erie Street
Lancaster, New York 14086
http://www.scottaviation.com/
(21) PRESSURIZATION VALVES; SAFETY AND OUTFLOW VALVE & CONTROLLER VALVE:
Vendor Address: AlliedSignal Aerospace PH: (310) 323-9500
Aerospace Equipment Systems FAX: (310) 512-2221
2525 W. 190th Street
Torrance, CA 90504
http://www.alliedsignalaerospace.com/aerospace/
(22) PROPELLER DEICE
Vendor Address: See DEICE SYSTEM (PNEUMATIC)

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(23) PROPELLER AND PROPELLER GOVERNOR:

Vendor Address: Hartzell Propeller Inc. PH: (937) 778-4379
One Propeller Place FAX: (937) 778-4321
Piqua, OH 45356-2634
http://www.hartzellprop.com/index2.htm
Propeller
Overhaul Instructions: Manual No. 113
Composite Blade
Maintenance: Manual No. 135
Propeller Owner’s
Manual: Manual No. 115
Aluminum Blade
Inspection, Repair,
and Overhaul Instructions: Manual No. 133
(24) RADAR (WEATHER), RDR - 2000:
Vendor Address: Honeywell (Bendix/King)
(See Autoflight, above)
Maintenance Manual: Bendix/King ART 2000
P/N 006-05332-0001
(25) RADIO COOLING BLOWER:
Vendor Address: Globe Motors PH: (937) 228-3171
2275 Stanley Ave. FAX: (937) 229-8531
Dayton, Ohio 45404
http://www.globe-motors.com/home.html
(26) STARTER:
Vendor Address: Kelly Aerospace
(See Alternator, above)
or,
Sky-Tec Partners, Ltd. PH: (800) 476-7896
350 Howard Clemmons Rd. FAX: (817) 573-2252
Granbury, TX 76048
http://www.skytecair.com
(27) TURBOCHARGER:
Vendor Address: Turbocharging Systems PH: (310) 791-9101
Worldwide HQ FAX: (310) 534-5941
Building #10, Ste. 200
23326 Hawthorne Blvd.
Torrance, CA 90505
http://www.alliedsignal.com/turbos/products/index.html
PAGE 8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(28) VACUUM PUMP:

Vendor Address: Aero Accessories, Inc. PH: (800) 822-3200
1240 Springwood Avenue
Gibsonville, NC 27249
http://www.aeroaccessories.com/index.html
(29) VACUUM REGULATORS:
(see “Fuel Boost Pump,” above)

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
13. Chapter/Section Index Guide
NOTE: The following GAMA Specification No. 2 standard chapters are not included in this Maintenance
Manual: 36, 38, 49, 53, 54, 60, 72, 75, 78, and 83. These chapters are omitted because the
subject system is either: not installed in these airplanes; adequately covered in vendor or other
manuals; or, for ease of use, has been combined with another chapter.
CHAPTER SECTION TITLE GRID NO.
4 AIRWORTHINESS LIMITATIONS 1C1
00 Airworthiness Limitations
5 TIME LIMITS/MAINTENANCE CHECKS 1C9
00 General
10 Time Limits
20 Scheduled Maintenance Checks
30 Special Inspections
50 Unscheduled Maintenance Checks
6 DIMENSIONS AND AREAS 1E13
00 General
7 LIFTING AND SHORING 1F1
10 Jacking
8 LEVELING AND WEIGHING 1F9
10 Weighing and Balancing

20 Leveling
9 TOWING AND TAXIING 1F21
00 General
10 Towing
20 Taxiing
10 PARKING AND MOORING 1G9
10 Parking
20 Mooring
11 PLACARDS AND MARKINGS 1G19
20 Exterior Placards and Markings

30 Interior Placards and Markings
12 SERVICING 1I3
00 General
10 Replenishing
20 Scheduled Servicing

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
20 STANDARD PRACTICES - AIRFRAME 1J19
00 General
20 Painting
21 ENVIRONMENTAL SYSTEMS 2C1
00 General
20 Distribution
30 Pressurization Control
40 Heating
50 Cooling
60 Temperature Control
22 AUTOFLIGHT 2F11
10 Autopilot
23 COMMUNICATIONS 2G19
00 General
50 Audio Integrating
60 Static Discharging
24 ELECTRICAL POWER 2H11
00 General
30 DC Generation
40 External Power
60 Electrical Load Distribution
25 EQUIPMENT/FURNISHINGS 2J11
10 Flight Compartment
20 Passenger Compartment
50 Cargo Compartments
60 Emergency
26 FIRE PROTECTION 2K15
20 Extinguishing
27 FLIGHT CONTROLS 3C1
00 General
10 Aileron and Tab
20 Rudder and Tab
30 Elevator and Tab
50 Flaps
60 Speedbrakes
PAGE 12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
28 FUEL 3F9
00 General
10 Storage
20 Distribution
40 Indicating
29 HYDRAULIC POWER 3H1
00 General
10 Main
30 ICE AND RAIN PROTECTION 3I3
00 General
10 Airfoil
30 Pitot and Static
40 Windows, Windshields and Doors
60 Propellers/Rotors
31 INDICATING/RECORDING SYSTEMS 4C1
50 Central Warning Systems
32 LANDING GEAR 4C13
00 General
10 Main Gear and Doors
20 Nose Gear and Doors
30 Extension and Retraction
40 Wheels and Brakes
50 Steering
60 Position and Warning
33 LIGHTS 4G5
30 Cargo and Service Compartments
40 Exterior
34 NAVIGATION 5C1
00 General
10 Flight Environment Data
20 Attitude & Direction
40 Independent Position Determining
50 Dependent Position Determining
35 OXYGEN 6C1
10 Crew
20 Passenger

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
37 VACUUM 6C15
00 General
10 Distribution
20 Indicating
39 ELECTRICAL / ELECTRONIC PANELS 6D13
10 Instrument and Control Panels

20 Accessory Compartments
51 STRUCTURES 6F1
00 General
10 Investigation, Cleanup, and Aerodynamic Smoothness
70 Repairs
80 Electrical Bonding
52 DOORS 6G13
10 Passenger/Crew
20 Emergency Exit
30 Cargo
70 Monitoring and Operation
55 STABILIZERS 6H13
00 General
10 Horizontal Stabilizers
20 Elevator
30 Vertical Stabilizer
40 Rudder
56 WINDOWS 6I19
00 General
20 Cabin
30 Door
57 WINGS 6K5
40 Attach Fittings
50 Flight Surfaces
61 PROPELLERS 7C1
10 Propeller Assembly
20 Controlling
70 STANDARD PRACTICES - ENGINE 7C21
00 General
PAGE 14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
71 POWER PLANT 7D5
00 General
10 Cowling
20 Mounts
70 Engine Drains
73 ENGINE FUEL AND CONTROL 7E13
10 Distribution
30 Indicating
74 IGNITION 7F5
10 Electrical Power Supply

20 Distribution
76 ENGINE CONTROLS 7G17
10 Power Control
77 ENGINE INDICATING 7H3
10 Power
20 Temperature
40 Integrated Engine Instrument Systems
79 OIL 7J3
20 Distribution
30 Indicating
80 STARTING 7J15
10 Cranking
81 TURBINES 7K9
20 Turbo-Supercharger
91 CHARTS & WIRING DIAGRAMS 8C1
10 Charts
21 and up Electrical Schematics
91 (CONT.) CHARTS & WIRING DIAGRAMS (CONT) 9C1
Electrical Schematics (cont)
APPENDIX 1 GROUND TEST PROCEDURE 5K19

(Meggitt Magic ADAHRS and Pitot-Static System)

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A Air Distribution System: 2C12 Brake System: 1I19

Bleed Air Check Valve: 2C13 Actuator Installation
Access and Inspection Provisions:
Bleed Air Dump Valve: 2D5 Main Gear: 4E13
1E23
Bleed Air Shutoff Valve: 2D14 Nose Gear: 4E10
Accident/Incident Reporting: A12
Rigging: 2D6 Nose Gear Door: 4E15
Aerofiche Effectivity: A11
Air Selector Valve: 2D12 Adjustment and Lining
Ailerons
Airspeed Indicator: 5C22 Tolerance: 4F4
Balancing: 6L9
Airworthiness Bleeding Procedure: 4F9
Control Column
Directives (AD’s): 1C15 Draining: 1I19
Installation: 3C24
Limitations: 1C7 Filling Reservoir: 1I19
Control System
Alternator. See Electrical Parking Brake Valve: 4F10
Aileron - Rudder
Altimeter: 5C20 System Installation: 4F7
Interconnect: 3D7
Annunciator: 4C7 System Leak Check: 4F10
Control Cables: 3D2
Lamp Replacement: 4C8 Toe Brake Cylinder Assembly:
Installation: 3D3
Wiring: 4C8 4F6
Rigging and Adjustment: 3D5
Attach Fittings Wheel Brake Assembly: 4F5
Troubleshooting: 3C20
Corrosion Control
Control Wheel C
Wing: 6L3
Installation: 3C21
Attitude Indicator: 5D5 Cabin Heat: 2D11
Installation: 6L7
Autopilot: 2F17 Cabin Pressure Control System:
Tab: 3D5
Component Locator: 2G2 2C20
Air Conditioning System: 2D17,
Installation: 2F18, 2F20 Cabin Pressure Controller: 2D3
2D22
Maintenance: 2F23 Operational Check: 2D4
Compressor: 2E22
Operational Checkout: 2F24 Cargo Compartments: 2K7
Dipstick: 2E23
Pitch Servo: 2G12 Aft Baggage Net: 2K7
Mounting Angle: 2E24
Pressure Transducer: 2G6 Chapter/Section Index Guide: A19
Oil Level: 2F1
Roll Servo: 2G4 Cherrylock Rivet Removal: 1K3
Positioning Internal Parts:
Servo Clutch Torque Cleaning: 1I9
2E22
Adjustment: 2G15 Aircraft Finish Care: 1I9
Slip Torque: 2F1
Trim Monitor: 2G3 Carpets: 1I13
Service Valves: 2D24
Trim Servo: 2G6 Interior: 1I12
Servicing: 2D23
Yaw Amplifier: 2G14 Pilot's Windshield: 1I11
Ambient Temperature
Yaw Servo: 2G10 Relief Tube System: 1I13
Indication: 2E14
Avionics Cooling: 2C14 Windshield and Windows: 1I10
Charging Hookup: 2E10
Avionics Master Switch: 2H1 COM/NAV/GPS: 5F5
Evacuation Hookup: 2E19
Kent Moore J23500 Charging Final Check Configuration: 5F5
B Main ARINC 429 Config Page:
Stand: 2E7
Leak Test Hookup: 2E19 Ball Diameters for Testing Hose 5F6
Manifold Set Operation: 2E18 Restrictions: 1K4 Main Lighting Page: 5F7
Recommended Torque Battery. See Electrical Main RS-232 Config Page: 5F7
Specifications: 2E5 Blowers VOR/LOC/GS ARINC 429
Robinair 34700 Charging Avionics Cooling: 2C13 Config Page: 5F8
Station Hose Hookup: Cabin Recirculation: 2C11 Conical Seals: 1K6
2E13 Ground: 2C11 Consumable Materials: 8D3
Test Gauge and Manifold Set: Muffin Fan: 2C13 Control Cable Air Seals: 3C16
2E16 Conversion Tables: 8C17
Using Vacuum to Evacuate Decimal: 8C21
Moisture: 2E8 Drill Sizes: 8D1
Temperature vs. Pressure: 2E2 Metric: 8C24
Troubleshooting: 2D17 Temperature: 8C22
Weights and Measures: 8C23
1B1 INDEX FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Corrosion Electrical C/B Panel Lights: 9C15

Control: 6F11 Alternator Control Units: 2I3 Cabin Heater: 8E3
Inspections Alternators: 2I2 Cabin Lights: 9D11, 9D15
Attach Fittings Belt Tension: 2I2 Cabin Pressurization: 8D23
Elevator Trim Tab Rods: 6I7 Battery CHT Indicator: 9I5, 9I13
Horizontal Stabilizer: 6H24 Charging: 2I10, 2I14 CHT Scanner: 9H9
Vertical Stabilizer: 6I12 Cleaning: 2I9, 2I14 Cigar Lighter: 8G2
Constant Current Charge: Clocks: 8G4, 8G6
D 2I15 Combustion Analyzer: 9H6
Defroster: 2D11, 2D13 Discharge Rates: 2I12 Courtesy Lights: 9D15
Dimensions and Areas: 1E17 Dry-Charged Lead-Acid: 2I6 Data Acquisition Unit: 9I13
Doors Electrolyte Freezing Points: DAU: 9I13
Baggage Compartment: 6H7 2I12 DC Coupler: 9G2
Seal: 6H7 Electrolyte Temperature Deice
Cabin: 6G19 Corrections: 2I11 Detection: 8H18
Latching Mechanism: 6G20 Gill Model G-243: 2I6 Pitot and Lift Detector: 8I1
Seal: 6G24 Gill Model G-250S: 2I13 Propeller: 8I11
Support: 6G19 Installation: 2I6, 2I14 Surface: 8H13
Emergency Exit: 6H5 Removal: 2I6, 2I13 Windshield: 8I7
Seal: 6H5 Specific Gravity Temperature Digital Voice Recorder Clock:
Warning Correction: 2I10 8G6
Baggage Compartment Door: Troubleshooting: 2I7, 2I13 Door Ajar Warning: 9G16
6H10 Valve-Regulated Lead-Acid: Door Lights: 9D15
Cabin Door: 6H9 2I13 EFIS
Troubleshooting: 6H9 Bonding: 6G9 ADAHRS: 9E23, 9F4
Resistance Index: 6G10 Avidyne Entegra: 9F2
E Buses DAU: 9F4, 9F7
Effectivity: A10 Avionics: 2H19 Meggitt: 9E20
EFIS: 5D10 Main: 2H19 MFD - Multi-Function
Avidyne Entegra: 5D22 Circuit Breaker Panel: 6D22 Display: 9F7, 9F10
Component Locator: 5E3 Electrical Shelf: 6E7 ND - Navigation Display:
Description: 5D22 External Power: 2I19 9E22
Maintenance: 5D22 Load Distribution: 2J1 PFD - Primary Flight
MFD: 5D23 Relay Installation Display: 9E22, 9F2,
PFD: 5D22 Co-Pilot’s Side: 6E10 9F4
Port Information Page: 5E3 K1 thru K8: 6E10 Electroluminescent Panel
Meggitt: 5D10 Pilot’s Side: 6E9 Lighting: 9C15
Air Data & Attitude Heading Schematics Engine Ignition: 9G20
Reference System: Air Conditioning: 8E7 Engine Start: 9G20
5D21 Airspeed, Standby: 9E19 Enhanced Digital Indicator
Calculating Heading Error: Altimeter, Radar: 9F14 (EDI): 9H16
5E11 Altimeter, Standby: 9E19 Exceedance Alert Horn: 9F7
Calibration Harness Annunciator: 8J1 Exceedance Audio Alert:
Assembly: 5E11 Attitude Indicator, Standby: 8J19
Heading System 9E19 Fin Strobe (Optional): 9D23
Calibration: 5E13 Autopilot: 9E23, 9F2 Flaps: 8G17
Indexing Data: 5E13 Autopilot, 55X: 8E14 Fuel Flow Gauge(s): 9G18
Basic Functional Test: 5D10 Avionics Cooling: 8D19 Fuel Flow Indicator: 9I1, 9I13
Electronic Horizontal Avionics Dimming: 9D7 Fuel Pumps: 8H1
Situation Indicator: 5D14 Avionics Lighting: 9D7 Fuel Quantity Indicator: 8H5
Navigation Display: 5D18 Baggage Compartment GMA-340: 8F2
Color Coding: 5D18 Lights: 9D15 GNS 430: 9F2, 9F17
Default Settings: 5D18 Ground Blocks: 8F20
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 INDEX 1B2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Electrical (cont.) Stormscope: 9F11 Fuel

Schematics (cont.) Strobe Lights: 9D19 Air Bleed Nozzle: 7E21
Ground Clearance: 8E17 Summing Amp: 8F4, 9F12, Flow Gauge: 7F1
GTX 330: 9F3, 9F22 9F14 Troubleshooting: 7F1
Hour Meter: 8I17 Tachometer: 9H2, 9H19, 9I13 Flow Transducer: 7F2
Hydraulic Pump: 8H9 Tail Light (Optional): 9D22, Injection System: 7E19
Ice Detection System: 8H18 9E1 Pressure Low Warning Light:
Ice Light: 9E5 Taxi Lights: 9E9 7F1
IHAS - Integrated Hazard TIT Indicator: 9H4, 9I1, 9I13 Pump
Alert System: 9F12 Turn Coordinator(s): 9E16 Adjusting Output Pressure:
Instrument Panel Switch Vacuum Indicator: 9I5, 9I13 7F1
Lights: 9C23 Vacuum Low Indicator: 9G14 System Fluid Diagram: 7E20
Junction Blocks: 8F22 Vent Blowers: 8E7 Idle Speed and Mixture
KMC 850: 9F12 Vent Defogger: 8E3 Adjustment: 7G23
KMH-820: 9F12 Weather Radar: 9F9 Installation: 7D20
KN-63: 9F24 Wing Inspection Light: 9E5 Instruments
KPA 900: 9F10 WX-500: 9F11 Combustion Analyzer Gauge:
KR-87: 9G1 XM Receiver: 8E23 7H16
KRA 10A: 9F14 Switch Panels: 6E1 Troubleshooting: 7H16
Landing Gear Position and Symbols: 8D14 Cylinder Head Temperature
Warning: 8K1 System: 2H17 (CHT) Scanner: 7H19
Landing Light: 9E9 Troubleshooting: 2H20 Troubleshooting: 7H19
Lift Computer: 8G16 Tie Bus Panel Connections: Cylinder Head Temperature
Lighting Blocks: 8F24 6E3 Indicator: 7H20
MAP Indicator: 9H19, 9I13 Volt / Ammeter: 2J4 Calibration Check: 7H20
Map Lights: 9C11 Voltage Regulation and Control: Engine Oil Pressure Gauge:
OAT: 9I13 2H19 7J11
Oil Pressure Indicator: 9I9, Wire Coding: 8D13 Engine Oil Temperature
9I13, 9I18 Elevator Gauge: 7J12
Oil Temperature Indicator: Balancing: 6I3 Manifold Pressure Gauge:
9I9, 9I13, 9I18 Control System 7H9
Oxygen System: 9G10 Installation: 3D23 Troubleshooting: 7H9
Position Lights: 9D19 Rigging and Adjustment: Tachometer: 7H10
Post Lights: 9C19 3D24 Troubleshooting: 7H10
Power Distribution and Troubleshooting: 3D19 Transicoil Electronic Module
Control: 8F7 Torque Tube Bearing Changes: Instrument System
Power Monitor and Meters: 3D20 (EMIS): 7I1
8F15 Trim Controls Calibration: 7I23
Power Point: 8G2 Actuator Assembly: 3E3 Dual Analog Module
Quad Digital Indicator (QDI): Corrosion Control: 3E4 Indicator
9H14 Rigging and Adjustment: 3E5 Specifications: 7I7
Radar Altimeter: 9F14 Trim Tab: 6I6 Installation: 7I6
Radar, Weather: 9F9 Push Rods Attach Brackets: Troubleshooting: 7I3
Radio Master Switch: 8F13 6I6 Turbine Inlet Temperature
RDR 2000: 9F10 Rods Corrosion Control: 6I6 (T.I.T.) Gauge: 7H13
RPM Indicator: 9H2, 9H19 ELT: 2K9 Cleaning and Inspection:
Skywatch: 9E23 Emergency Locator Transmitter: 7H13
SMARTboots: 8H18 2K9 Probe Installation: 7H15
SpeedBrakes: 8G21 Empennage Installation: 6H19 System Calibration and
Stall Detection and Warning: Engine Test: 7H14
8G13 Cowling: 7E1 Troubleshooting: 7H13
Standby Instruments: 9E18 Description: 7D11
Stereo: 8G8 Drains: 7E11
1B3 INDEX FebPAGE 3

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Engine (cont.) Elevator. See Elevator Hydraulic System

Mounts: 7E5 Rudder. See Rudder Bleeding: 3H21
Oil System Standard Practices: 3C9 Description: 3H7
Fluid Diagram: 7J9 Cable Blocking Methods: Fluid Diagram: 3H12
Setup Procedures: 7G23 3C23 Installation: 3H11
Shock Mount: 7E8 Flight Deck View: 6D19 Leading Particulars: 3H7
Starter Fluid Tubing Support Distances: Lines: 3H23
Control Circuit: 7K7 1K9 Pump (Frisby): 3H18
Cranking Tests: 7K1 Fresh Air System: 2D11 Testing: 3H20
Service Replacement: 7K4 Fuel System: 1I18 Pump (Parker Hannifin): 3H11
Troubleshooting: 7J21 Anti-icing: 1I19 Servicing: 3H24
Throttle Categorizing Fuel Leaks: 3F24 Testing: 3H23
Troubleshooting: 7D12 Description: 3F15
Turbocharger Drain Valve: 3G8 I
Inspections: 7K20 Draining: 1I19 Ice Protection: 3I9
Pre - Lubrication: 7K15 Draining Moisture: 1I18 Ignition System
System Diagram: 7K19 Fuel Filter: 3G7 Description: 7F11
Troubleshooting: 7K15 Fuel Pumps Harness: 7G7
Variable Pressure Controller Specifications: 3G5 Inspection: 7G7
Adjustment: 7G24 Fuel Quantity Magnetos
Rigging: 7G24 Gauge Carbon Brush Assembly:
Enhanced Digital Indicator (EDI). Accuracy Test: 3G14 7F16
See Engine - Instruments - Full Range Check: 3G20 Exploded View: 7F18
Transicoil EMIS Senders: 3G13 Inspection: 7F11
Environmental Systems: 2C5 Leak Test Setup: 3G1 Overhaul: 7F11
Selector Switch and Valve: 3G6 Replacement: 7F11
F Cable Adjustment: 3G7 Slick T - 100 Assembly and
Fiberglass Repairs: 6F19 Troubleshooting: 3F16 Timing Tool Kit: 7F17
Filling Fuel Cells: 1I18 Leak Evaluation: 3F22 Testing: 7G3
Fire Extinguisher, Portable: 2K21 Indexing: A11
Flaps
G Inspection
Adjustment: 3E22 GMA-340 Audio Panel Definitions: 1C19
Control System Adjustments: 2H6 Procedures
Installation: 3E12 Installation: 2H3 Annual / 100 Hour Inspection:
Troubleshooting: 3E11 System Functional Test: 2H4 1C22
Inspection GNS-430: 5F5 Control Cable: 3C11
Flap Bellcrank Distortion: GNS-530: 5F5 Cable Fittings: 3C14
3E23 Ground Clearance Switch: 2H1 Corrosion Control
Installation: 6L11 GTX-327: 5F9 Elevator Trim Tab Rods: 6I6
Rigging: 3E21 GTX-330: 5F9 Vertical Fin Attach Fittings:
Warning 6I11
Functional Test: 3E22 H Crack Inspection - Acrylic
Flareless Tube Fittings: 1K8 Heat Exchanger: 2D12, 2D13 Windows and
Flight Controls Heating: 2D11 Windshields: 6J8
Ailerons. See Ailerons HI-LOK Fasteners Installation: Electrical Bonding: 6G9
Control Cables 6K16 Engine Mount
Air Seals: 3C16 Horizontal Stabilizer: 6H23 100 Hour: 7E5
Control Wheel. See Ailerons Hose Specifications: 8D2 Corrosion: 7E7
Description: 3C9 Hose, Tube, and Line Markings: Fixed Oxygen Generator
1K5 System: 6C9
PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 INDEX 1B4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Inspection (cont.) Main: 4C23 Environmental/De-ice Switch

Intercooler Attachment Clips: Actuator: 4E13 Panel: 4G17
7K21 Adjustment: 4D5 Illuminated Switch Assembly:
Propeller Heat: 3K8 Alignment: 4D5 4G17
SpeedBrakes: 3F2 Door: 4D8 Post Lights: 4G11
Turbocharger and Exhaust Installation: 4D3 Post-Installation Set-up:
System - Visual: 7K20 Oleo Strut Assembly: 4C24 4G18
Vacuum Pump Vane Wear: Toe-In / Toe-Out Corrections: Reading: 4G21
6D4 4D6 Standby-Map Light: 4G12
V-Band Coupling 100 Hour: Tolerances: 4D7 List of Effective Pages: A11
7K22 Troubleshooting: 4C23 Lockwiring V-Band Couplings:
Requirements: 1C21 Nose: 4D11 7K22
Annual / 100 Hour Inspection: Actuator: 4E11 Lubrication Charts: 1J6
1C21 Adjustment: 4D19 Cabin Door, Baggage Door, and
Overlimits Inspections: 1C21 Alignment: 4D19 Seats: 1J7
Progressive Inspection Door: 4D22 Control System: 1J10, 1J11,
Program: 1C21 Actuator: 4E15 1J12
Unscheduled Inspection: 1E3 Installation: 4D17 Main Landing Gear and
Instrument Panel Installation: Oleo Strut Assembly: 4D14 Hydraulic System: 1J8
6D20 Rudder Pedal Neutral: 4D20 Nose Gear: 1J9
Instruments Tolerances: 4D21 Propeller: 1J13
Removal / Installation Troubleshooting: 4D11 Special Instructions: 1J6
Face-Mounted: 6D19 Position and Warning: 4F19
Rack-Mounted: 6D21 Landing Gear Up / Power M
Reduced Warning Switch Magnetic Compass: 5E18
J Adjustment: 4G2 Magnetic Heading Systems
Jacking: 1F7 Troubleshooting: 4F20 Calibration: 5E6, 5E14
Leading Particulars and Principal Compensation: 5E6
L Dimensions: 1E20 Flux Detector: 5E7
Landing Gear Leveling: 1F17 Magnetometer: 5E14
Description and Operation: Life Limited Parts: 1C7 ST-180 Deviation Graphs: 5E9
4C21 Lifting: 1F7. See also 57-40-00 Main Gear. See Landing Gear -
Extension and Retraction: 4E1 Lights Main
Emergency Gear Release Exterior: 4H3 Main Wheel. See Wheels
Valve: 4E18 Landing: 4H7 Millivolt Drop Test: 6G10
Functional Test: 4E4 Position: 4H4 Mooring: 1G17
Sequence Valve: 4E16 Pulse: 4H7
Troubleshooting: 4E1 Strobe: 4H3 N
Limit Switches Taxi: 4H6 Nose Gear. See Landing Gear -
Adjustment: 4F22, 4F23 Wing Inspection Light: 4H7 Nose
Main Gear: 4F23 Interior: 4G11 Nose Wheel. See Wheels
Nose Gear: 4F22 Annunciator Panel: 4G12
Troubleshooting: 4F19 Baggage Area: 4G21 O
Forward: 4H1
Rear: 4G21 Outside Air Temperature (OAT):
Circuit Breaker Panels 5C23
Electroluminescent Oxygen
Lighting: 4G17 Fixed Generator System
Courtesy: 4G21 Description: 6C9
Dimmer Control Unit: 4G11 Inspection: 6C9
Dimming Rheostat: 4G12 Installation: 6C10
1B5 INDEX FebPAGE 5

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
P Propeller Rudder
Blade Inspection and Repair: Balancing: 6I15
Pagination: A11
7C11 Control System
Parking: 1G15
Blade Track: 7C11 Installation: 3D11
Locking Airplane: 1G15
Cleaning, Inspection, and Rigging and Adjustment:
Piper
Repair: 7C11 3D13
Service Bulletins: 1C15
Description: 7C7 Troubleshooting: 3D9
Service Letters: 1C15
Governor: 7C17 Pedal Assembly: 3D10
Service Spares Letters: 1C15
Heat: 3J19 Trim Controls
Subscription Service: 1C15
Brush Modules: 3K3 Installation: 3D15
Piper Publications: A12
Alignment: 3K1 Rigging and Adjustment:
Pitch Servo: 2G12
Centering Brushes on Slip 3D16
Pitot and Static Systems
Rings: 3K10
Description and Operation: S
Measuring: 3K3
5C11
Components: 3K2 Safety and Outflow Valves: 2D2
Installation: 5C12
Deicer Electrical Resistance: Safety Walk Installation: 6G4
Pitot Head: 5C18
3K7 Seats
Test: 5C11
Description: 3J19 Lumbar Support: 2J19
Inspections: 3K8 Passenger: 2K3
Placards: 1G23
Installation: 3J24 Pilot's / Copilot's: 2J17
Exterior: 1H1
Testing: 3K6 Serial Number Explanation: A10
Interior: 1H9
Troubleshooting: 3J20 Service Points: 1I17
Meyercord Decals: 1I1
Propeller Assembly: 7C9 Servicing: 1I7
Plenum Assembly: 2D12
Publications Servicing, Scheduled : 1J5
Pneumatic Deice System
Piper: A12 Airframe Lubrication: 1J5
Adjustments and Test: 3J8
Vendor: A12 Grease Application: 1J5
Components: 3I11
Deicers (Boots): 3I17 Oil Application: 1J5
Q Servo Clutch Torques, Autopilot:
Operating Pressures: 3J1
Required Materials: 3I18 Quad Digital Indicator (QDI). See 2G15
Fluid Diagram: 3I14 Engine - Instruments - Shoring: 1F5
Maintenance: 3J2 Transicoil EMIS Skin Material Specifications: 6F7
Repair SMARTboot Ice Detection
R System: 3J9
Limits: 3J4
Procedures: 3J5 Radar: 5F1 Spark Plugs
Troubleshooting: 3I11 Repairs Inspection: 7G13
Power Plant. See Engine Fiberglass: 6F19 Removing Frozen: 7G13
Pressure Transducer: 2G6 Metal / Wire Stitching: 6G5 Special Inspections: 1D17
Pressurization Control: 2C19 Thermoplastic: 6F21 Special Tools. See Tools
Components: 2D1 List of Materials: 6F24 Specifications
Troubleshooting: 2C19 Window / Windshield (Acrylic): SpeedBrakes
Principal Airplane Dimensions: 6J10 Inspections: 3F2
1E19 Restraint System: 2J23 Testing: 3F4
Inertial Reel Adjustment: 2J23 Troubleshooting: 3F1
Inspection: 2J23 Squat Switch
Revised Material: A11 Adjustment: 4G1
Robinair 34700 Charging Stand: Troubleshooting: 4F19
2E6 Stall Warning System
Rod End Bearing Installation: 1K2 Flap Switch Input Test: 3E8
Roll Servo: 2G4 Flight Test Procedure: 3E9
Force Applicator Kit Test: 3E7
Functional Test: 3E6
PAGE 6
Feb 28/07 INDEX 1B6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Standard Practices Tools Troubleshooting

Engine: 7D3 Aileron and Flap Travel: 3C15 Aileron Control System: 3C20
Procedures: 7D3 Control Surfaces Balancing: 6I5 Air Conditioning System: 2D18
Standard Practices Airframe: 1J23 Control Wheel Neutral: 3C15, Airspeed Tubes and Indicator:
Standby Attitude Indicator: 5D6 4C22 5C22
Emergency Power Supply: 5D6 Elevator / Elevator Trim Travel: Altimeter: 5C21
Static Wicks: 2H9 3C15 Attitude Indicator: 5D5
Station References: 1E22 Nose Gear Actuator Alignment: Cabin Door Ajar Warning: 6H9
S-TEC System 55/55X. See 4C22 Combustion Analyzer Gauge:
Autopilot Nose Gear Downspring 7H18
Steering: 4F15 Disassembly/Reassembly: Cylinder Head Temperature
Arm: 4F16 4C22 (CHT) Scanner: 7H19
Bellcrank: 4F15 Remove/Install: 4C22, 4E11 Dual Analog Module Indicators:
Bungee Assembly: 4F15 Nose Gear Steering: 4C22 7I4
Pushrod: 4F15 Bellcrank Centering: 4C22 Electrical System: 2H20
Pushrod Bellows: 4F16 Horn / Arm Gap: 4C22 Elevator Control System: 3D19
Structural Inspection and Nose Wheel Centering: 3C15, Engine: 7D12
Replacement: 1C7 4C22 Engine Oil Pressure Gauge:
Rudder Pedal Neutral 7J11
T Alignment: 3C15, 4C22 Engine Oil Temperature Gauge:
Taxiing: 1G7 Rudder Travel Tool: 3C15 7J12
Temperature Control: 2F9 Torque Flap Control System: 3E11
Testing Conversion: 8C20 Fuel Flow Gauge: 7F1
ELT: 2K12 Torque Wrench Formula: 1K2 Fuel System: 3F16
Equalizer: 2I4 Towing: 1G5 Heading Indicator
Flap Position Indicator: 3E22 Transponder: 5F9 Air Driven: 5D9
Flap Warning System: 3E22 GTX-327: 5F9 Electric: 5D8
Fuel Quantity Guage Accuracy: GTX-330: 5F9 Heated Windshield: 3J15
3G14 Post Installation Setup Ignition System: 7F12
Fuel System Leaks: 3G2 Procedure: 5F10 Landing Gear
Heated Windshield: 3J15 ARINC 429 Configuration Extension and Retraction:
Hydraulic System: 3H23 Page: 5F11 4E1
Landing Gear Retraction Display Mode and Key Main: 4C23
System: 4E4 Lighting: 5F11 Nose: 4D11
Magnetos: 7G3 Hexadecimal Conversion: Warning Systems: 4F19
Overvoltage Protection: 2I5 5F13 Magnetic Compass: 5E19
Pitot/Static System: 5C11 Operation Configuration: Manifold Pressure Gauge: 7H9
Pressurization System Test: 5F12 Meggitt EFIS Option
2D6 RS-232 Input and Output: EADI: 5D12
SpeedBrakes: 3F4 5F12 ND: 5D15
Stall Warning System: 3E6 Voice and Volume: 5F10 PFD: 5D10
Voltage Regulator: 2I3 Trim Monitor: 2G3 Pitot and Static Systems: 5C11,
Thermoplastic Repairs: 6F21 Trim Servo: 2G6 5C15
Toe Brake Cylinder Assembly: Pneumatic Deice System: 3I12
4F6, 4F8 Pressurization System: 2C21
Toe-In / Toe-Out Correction Chart: Propeller Heat: 3J20
4D6 Rudder Control System: 3D9
SpeedBrake System: 3F1
Standby Attitude Indicator: 5D6
1B7 INDEX FebPAGE 7

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Troubleshooting (cont.) Windows and Windshields

Starter: 7J23, 7K3 Door Window: 6K3
Tachometer Indicator: 7H10 Heated Windshield
Turbine Inlet Temperature Testing: 3J15
(T.I.T.) Gauge: 7H13 Troubleshooting: 3J15
Turbocharger System: 7K16 Inspection and Repair
Turn Coordinator: 5E20 Definitions: 6J1
Vacuum System: 6D1 Limitations: 6J1
Vertical Speed Indicator: 5C19 Crack Limitations: 6J11
Turbocharger System. See Engine Passenger Windows: 6K1
- Turbocharger Pilot’s / Copilot’s Window: 6J18
Installation: 6J17, 6J19
V Storm Window: 6J20, 6J21
Vacuum System Windshield: 6J15
(Suction) Gauge: 6D11 Installation: 6J16
Description: 6C21 Windshield Heat: 3J16
Filter: 6D3 Wing
Pump: 6D4 Attach Fittings Corrosion
Inspection: 6D4 Control: 6L4
Regulator(s): 6D6 Inboard Wing
Troubleshooting: 6C21 Installation: 6K19
Vendor Installation: 6K12
Contact Information: 8D11 Outboard Wing
Publications: A12 Installation: 6K13
Vertical Fin: 6I11
Vertical Speed Indicator: 5C18
Y
Volt / Ammeter. See Electrical Yaw Amplifier: 2G14
Yaw Servo: 2G10
W
Warnings, Cautions and Notes:
A11
Weather Radar: 5F1
Weighing: 1F15
Wheel Brake Assembly: 4F4
Wheels
Bearing Cup: 4F4
Main Wheel Assembly: 4F2
Nose Wheel Assembly: 4F1
Repairs: 4F3
PAGE 8
Feb 28/07 INDEX 1B8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1B9 INDEX FebPAGE 9

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GRIDS 1B10 THRU 1B24

INTENTIONALLY BLANK
PAGE 10
Feb 28/07 INDEX 1B10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER
4
AIRWORTHINESS
LIMITATIONS
1C1
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1C2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 4
CHAPTER CHAPTER
4-List of 1 Feb 28/07

4-Table of Contents 1 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07
4-00-00 1 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07
1C3 4 - LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 4 - LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES 1C4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 4 - AIRWORTHINESS LIMITATIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
AIRWORTHINESS LIMITATIONS 4-00-00 1 1C7
1C5 4 - CONTENTS FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 4 - CONTENTS 1C6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
AIRWORTHINESS LIMITATIONS
NOTE: The Airworthiness Limitations section is FAA approved and specifies maintenance required
under §§ 43.16 and 91.403 of the Federal Aviation Regulations unless an alternative program
has been FAA approved.
1. The following limitations, related to fatigue life of the airplane and its components, have been established
for the PA-46-350P:
A. Refer to Chart 1 for Structural Inspection and Replacement.
B. The safe life limit of propeller blades is unlimited.
2. Refer to 5-20-00 for Piper’s recommended Inspection Program.
3. Life Limited Parts Marking and Disposition
14 CFR Part 43.10, Disposition of Life-Limited Aircraft Parts requires that proper procedures are
followed when removing life limited parts with time and/or cycles remaining on them as well as the
disposition of life limited parts with no time and/or cycles left. Life limited parts defined by Type
Certificate (TC) are listed in paragraph 1, above. Other parts which are replaced or rebuilt at specific
intervals are listed in Chapter 5.
A. Parts that are removed prior to accumulating their life limit, are to be marked with indelible ink or
marker with the part number, serial number and accumulated life status as defined in 14 CFR Part
43.10 in a manner that does not effect part structural integrity, i.e., no surface deformation such as
vibration/etching allowed.
B. Parts that have accumulated the life limit shall be disposed of in accordance with the applicable
FARs. Piper recommends life limited parts with no time and/or cycles remaining be completely
destroyed.
CHART 1
STRUCTURAL INSPECTION AND REPLACEMENT (PIR-TCDS A25SO, Rev. 15.)
COMPONENT LIFE INSPECTION INTERVALS

(Flight Hours) (Flight Hours)
Wing and Associated Structure 15,580 N/A
Pressurized Structure 10,145 N/A
1C7 4-00-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 4-00-00 1C8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER
5
TIME LIMITS /
MAINTENANCE
CHECKS
1C9
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1C10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 5
CHAPTER CHAPTER
5-List of 1 Feb 28/07 5-50-00 1 Feb 28/07

Effective Pages 2 Feb 28/07 2 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07
5-Table of Contents 1 Feb 28/07 4 Feb 28/07
2 Feb 28/07 5 Feb 28/07
6 Feb 28/07
5-00-00 1 Feb 28/07 7 Feb 28/07
2 Feb 28/07 8 Feb 28/07
9 Feb 28/07
5-10-00 1 Feb 28/07 10 Feb 28/07
2 Feb 28/07
5-20-00 1 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07
5 Feb 28/07
6 Feb 28/07
7 Feb 28/07
8 Feb 28/07
9 Feb 28/07
10 Feb 28/07
11 Feb 28/07
12 Feb 28/07
13 Feb 28/07
14 Feb 28/07
15 Feb 28/07
16 Feb 28/07
17 Feb 28/07
18 Feb 28/07
19 Feb 28/07
20 Feb 28/07
21 Feb 28/07
22 Feb 28/07
5-30-00 1 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07
5 Feb 28/07
6 Feb 28/07
7 Feb 28/07
8 Feb 28/07
9 Feb 28/07
10 Feb 28/07
1C11 5 - LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 5 - TIME LIMITS AND MAINTENANCE CHECKS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
GENERAL 5-00-00 1 1C15
TIME LIMITS 5-10-00 1 1C17
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE CHECKS 5-20-00 1 1C19

Description 1 1C19
Definitions 1 1C19
Inspection Requirements 3 1C21
Annual / 100 Hour Inspection 3 1C21
Progressive Inspection 3 1C21
Overlimits Inspections 3 1C21
Annual / 100 Hour Inspection Procedure 4 1C22
Scheduled Maintenance 7 1D1
Propeller Group 7 1D1
Engine Group 7 1D1
Turbocharger Group 10 1D4
Cabin and Cockpit Group 10 1D4
Fuselage and Empennage Group 12 1D6
Landing Gear Group 14 1D8
Wing Group 15 1D9
Special Inspection 16 1D10
Operational Inspection 17 1D11
General 17 1D11
Notes 18 1D12
SPECIAL INSPECTIONS 5-30-00 1 1D17

Per Flight Hour 1 1D17
Per Calendar Year 4 1D20
Per Specific Operation / Operating Environment 6 1D22
Operation in High Dust or Industrial Pollution Environment 6 1D22
Operation in High Salt or High Humidity Environment 7 1D23
Operation in Extreme Cold 8 1D24
Operation from Soft or Unusual Terrain 8 1D24
UNSCHEDULED MAINTENANCE CHECKS 5-50-00 1 1E3

Lightning Strike 1 1E3
Engine Overspeed, Overtemp, Loss of Oil or Sudden Stoppage 2 1E4
Severe Turbulence, Hard or Overweight Landing 2 1E4
Flaps Extended Above Maximum Flap Extension Speed 3 1E5
Flood Damage, Immersion in Water 4 1E6

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GENERAL
Piper Aircraft, Inc. (Piper) takes a continuing interest in having the owner get the most efficient use from
his airplane, and keeping the airplane in the best mechanical condition. To that end, Piper publishes a
recurring maintenance schedule which is supplemented with Service Bulletins, Service Letters and
Service Spares Letters as required.
A. The recurring maintenance schedule for the PA-46-350P Malibu Mirage is available in two forms: an
Annual / 100 Hour Inspection Program, which is provided in 5-20-00 (and is available separately as
P/N 767-011), and a Progressive (50 Hour) Inspection Program, which will be available only in
manual form as P/N 767-013.
B. Piper Service Bulletins are of special importance and Piper considers compliance mandatory.
These are sent to the latest U.S. registered owners and Piper Service Centers.
C. Service Letters deal with product improvements and service hints pertaining to the aircraft. They are
sent to Piper Service Centers and sometimes directly to owners, so they can properly service the
aircraft and keep it up to date with the latest changes. Owners should give careful attention to the
service letter information.
D. Service Spares Letters, which are sent only to Piper Service Centers, offer improved parts, kits and
optional equipment which were not available originally and which may be of interest to the owner.
NOTE: Piper mails Service Bulletins, Service Letters, and P.O.H. Revisions to the registered
owner’s name and address as shown on the Aircraft Registration Certificate. If the aircraft
is based and/or operated at a different location (or locations) and/or by a person (or
persons) other than those recorded on the aircraft registration, then the registered owner(s)
is responsible for forwarding these Bulletins and Letters to the operating location(s) or
person(s).
Changes in aircraft registration may take a substantial amount of time to be recorded by
the Federal Aviation Administration and received by Piper to change the mailing address.
Owners and operators should make arrangements to keep abreast of service releases
during this interim period through their Piper Service Center.
The Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) publishes Airworthiness Directives (AD’s) that apply to
specific aircraft. They are mandatory changes and are to be complied within a time limit set by the FAA.
When an AD is issued, it is sent to the latest registered owner of the affected aircraft and also to
subscribers of the service. The owner should periodically check with his Piper Service Center or A & P
mechanic to see whether he has the latest issued AD against his airplane. The owner is solely
responsible for being aware of and complying with airworthiness directives.
NOTE: A searchable database of AD’s is available on the FAA website. See the “Airworthiness
DIrectives” link at “www1.faa.gov”. Additionally, Avantext offers a free email notification service
for new AD’s as well as the last six weeks worth of AD’s at “www.avantext.com”.
An owner should periodically check with a Piper Service Center to find out the latest information to keep
his aircraft up to date.
Piper Aircraft, Inc. has a subscription service for the Service Bulletins, Service Letters, and Service
Spares Letters. This service is offered to interested persons such as owners, pilots, and mechanics at a
nominal fee and may be obtained through Piper Service Centers. Owners residing outside of the United
States are urged to subscribe to this service since Piper cannot otherwise obtain the addresses of
foreign owners. Maintenance Manuals and Illustrated Parts Catalogs are also available through Piper
Service Centers and Distributors world wide.
1C15 5-00-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 5-00-00 1C16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TIME LIMITS
1. Refer to 4-00-00 for the FAA-approved airworthiness limitations section. It sets forth each mandatory
replacement time, structural inspection interval, and related structural inspection procedure required for
type certification.
2. Refer to 5-20-00 for Piper’s recommended Inspection Program. It includes the frequency and extent of
the inspections required for the continued airworthiness of the airplane.
3. Inspections required by Flight Hour or Calendar Year, if due, are included as part of the Annual / 100
Hour Inspection and/or the Progressive Inspection Event cycles. They are also listed individually in
5-30-00.
1C17 5-10-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 5-10-00 1C18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
WARNING: GROUND THE MAGNETO PRIMARY CIRCUIT (P LEAD), BEFORE PERFORMING ANY
MAINTENANCE OPERATION ON THE ENGINE.
1. Description
WARNING: FAILURE TO CONSULT APPLICABLE VENDOR PUBLICATION(S), WHEN SERVICING
OR INSPECTING VENDOR EQUIPMENT INSTALLED IN PIPER AIRCRAFT, MAY
RENDER THE AIRCRAFT UNAIRWORTHY. (SEE INTRODUCTION - SUPPLEMENTARY
PUBLICATIONS.)
The recurring maintenance schedule for the PA-46-350P Malibu Mirage is available in two forms: an
Annual / 100 Hour Inspection Program, which is provided in paragraph 4, and a Progressive (50 Hour)
Inspection Program, which will be available separately.
Piper inspection programs comply with the Federal Aviation Regulations Parts 43, 91 and 135. The
owner/operator is primarily responsible for maintaining the airplane in an airworthy condition, including
compliance with all applicable Airworthiness Directives and conformity with the requirements in
FAR 91.409, 91.411 and 91.413.
The first overhaul or replacement of components should be performed at the given periods. The
condition of various components can then be used as criteria for determining subsequent periods
applicable to the individual airplane, depending on usage, providing the owner/operator has an
established Part 91 Progressive Inspection Program (see 91.409(d)) or Part 135 Approved Aircraft
Inspection Program (see 135.419).
The time periods given for inspections of various components are based on average usage and
environmental conditions.
NOTE: The listed inspection, overhaul and replacement schedules do not guarantee that a particular
item or component will reach the listed time without malfunction. Unique operating conditions
encountered by individual airplanes cannot be controlled by the manufacturer.
2. Definitions
A. Inspections - Must be performed only by Certified Mechanics who are qualified on this aircraft,
utilizing acceptable methods, techniques and practices to determine physical condition and detect
defects.
(1) Routine Inspection - Consists of a visual examination or check of the aircraft and its
components and systems without disassembly.
(2) Detailed Inspection - Consists of a thorough examination of the appliances, the aircraft and the
components and systems with such disassembly as is necessary to determine condition.
(3) Special Inspection - Involves those components, systems or structure which by their
application or intended use require an inspection peculiar to, more extensive in scope or at a
time period other than that which is normally accomplished during the event inspection.
B. Checks - Can be performed by pilots and/or mechanics who are qualified on this aircraft and
consists of examinations in the form of comparisons with stated standards for the purpose of
verifying condition, accuracy and tolerances.
C. Approved Inspection - Means a continuing airworthiness inspection of an airplane and its various
component and systems at scheduled interval in accordance with procedures approved by the FAA
under FAR Part 91.409(d) or Part 135.419.
1C19 5-20-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
D. Tests - Operation of aircraft components, appliances or systems to evaluate functional performance.

(1) Operational Test - A task to determine that an item, is fulfilling its intended purpose.The task
does not require quantitative tolerances. This is a fault finding task.
(2) Functional Test - A quantitative check to determine, if one or more functions of an item
performs within specified limits. This test may require the use of supplemental bench test
equipment.
(3) In addition, each of the above tests must be performed by an FAA Certified Repair Station with
appropriate ratings or by a Certified Mechanic who is qualified on this aircraft. The recording of
the above function must be made in the permanent aircraft records by the authorized individual
performing the test.
E. Bench Test - Means removal of component from the aircraft to inspect for cleanliness, impending
failure, need for lubrication, repair or replacement of parts and calibration to at least the
manufacturers specifications using the manufacturers recommended test equipment or standards
or the equivalent.
Each bench test will be performed by a Piper Service Center, FAA Certified Repair Station with
appropriate rating or by a certified mechanic. This test will be performed at the scheduled interval
regardless of any bench test performed on a particular component while being repaired/overhauled
before scheduled interval bench test. After the component is installed into the aircraft, an
operational test of the component and its related system should be performed to ensure proper
function. Serviceable parts that were issued to the component will be filed in the aircraft permanent
records. The person performing the test must make appropriate entries in the aircraft’s permanent
maintenance record.
F. Maintenance - The word maintenance as defined by FAR Part 1, means “inspection, overhaul,
repair, preservation and the replacement of parts, but excludes preventive maintenance.”
G. On Condition Maintenance - A primary maintenance process having repetitive inspections or tests
to determine the condition of units, systems, or portions of structures with regard to continued
serviceability (corrective action is taken when required by item condition).
H. Time - as used in this manual.
(1) Time-in-service for aircraft components, unless otherwise specified, is a cumulative total of
flight hours or calendar time calculated for the time a new or overhauled component was first
installed in any aircraft, and including:
(a) the aircraft time that elapses from the initial installation to the first removal, if any; and,
(b) the aircraft time that elapses from each subsequent installation to each subsequent
removal, if any; or,
(c) the calendar time elapsed since the installation.
NOTE: Dates stamped on individual components at the time of manufacture are typically
applied to determine shelf life- i.e. the maximum time allowed from manufacture/
assembly/cure until actually installed in an aircraft and are not relevant.
Do not, however; ignore markings applied to life-limited parts when removed with time
and/or cycles remaining on them.
(2) Aircraft time flight hours, or aircraft hours are the Hobbs Time shown on, or calculated from the
installed Hour Meter.
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 5-20-00 1C20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. Inspection Requirements
A. Annual / 100 Hour Inspection (See paragraph 4.)
Owners/operators may maintain the airplane solely under FAR 91.409 (a) and (b) inspection
requirements. The 100 hour inspection cycle is a complete inspection of the airplane and is identical
in scope to an annual inspection. Inspections must be accomplished by persons authorized by the
FAA.
B. Progressive Inspection
The Progressive Inspection Program is designed to permit the best utilization of the aircraft by
scheduling inspections through the use of a planned inspection schedule. This schedule will be
published in a separate manual form, which, when available, may be ordered from Piper Distributors
under P/N 767-013. Refer to Piper Customer Service Info Aerofiche revision checklist for availability
and to ensure obtaining latest issue.
NOTE: The PA-46-350P Malibu Mirage 50 Hour Progressive Inspection Manual (P/N 767-013)
referenced above will not be a stand-alone document. The Progressive Inspection Manual
will constitute a snapshot of the Airworthiness Limitations and Inspection sections of the
Instructions for Continued Airworthiness (ICA) and will be current only at the time of
printing. Use it as follows:
(1) Owners/operators desiring to establish a Part 91 Progressive Inspection Program
(PIP) (see 91.409(d)) or a Part 135 Approved Aircraft Inspection Program (AAIP)
(see 135.419) should use the Progressive Inspection Manual as a template for
submission to the appropriate FAA office.
(2) Service centers conducting Event Cycle inspections under a FAA-approved PIP or
AAIP can use the Progressive Inspection Manual as a working check-off list/form,
provided they verify its currency against the FAA-approved PIP or AAIP.
C. Overlimits Inspections
If the airplane has been operated so that any of its components have exceeded their maximum
operational limits, special inspections may be required by Piper and/or the component
manufacturer. See 5-50-00 and applicable vendor publications.
1C21 5-20-00 FebPAGE 3

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4. Annual / 100 Hour Inspection Procedure

A. Scheduled Maintenance (i.e. - paragraph 5)
(1) The required periodic inspection procedures are listed in paragraph 5. These inspection
procedures are broken down into major groups which include Propeller, Engine, Cabin and
Cockpit, Fuselage and Empennage,Wing, Landing Gear, Special Inspections, Operational
Inspection and General. The first column in each group lists the inspection or procedure to be
performed. The second column is divided into two sub-columns indicating the required
inspection interval of 50 hours or 100 hours. Each inspection or operation is required at each
of the inspection intervals indicated by a circle (O). When vendor publications specify times
other than those designated in the the various columns, it will be indicated as:
As required by
“applicable vendor See Note “X”
or
publication”
in the inspection interval columns, or listed as a special inspection in 5-30-00, or both.

(2) Refer to the applicable chapter of this manual for instructions on how to gain access to remove
any item that must be removed and is not completely accessible.
(3) Inspection Report Forms.
To help in the performance of periodic inspections, Inspection Report forms are available
through Piper Dealers as P/N 767-011.
NOTE: Service centers conducting Part 91 Annual / 100 Hour Inspections can use the
Inspection Report Form (P/N 767-011), as a working check-off list, provided they
verify its currency against an up-to-date copy of the ICA (i.e. - this Maintenance
Manual, Chapters 4 and 5).
(4) In addition to inspection intervals required in scheduled maintenance (i.e. - paragraph 5),
preflight inspection must also be performed.
(5) References to maintenance manual applicable areas are per the “chapter - system/sub-
system” assignment of subject material numbering system.
B. Special Inspections (5-30-00)
(1) Per Flight Hour
(2) Per Calendar Year
(3) Per Special Operation / Operating Environment
C. Unscheduled Maintenance (5-50-00)
PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 5-20-00 1C22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1C23 5-20-00 FebPAGE 5

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 6
Feb 28/07 5-20-00 1C24
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
5. Scheduled Maintenance
Refer to Notes 1, 2, 3, and 4 before performing any of the following inspections.
Inspection
NATURE OF INSPECTION Interval (Hrs)
50 100
A. PROPELLER GROUP
WARNING: USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN ROTATING PROPELLER BY
HAND; PROPELLER MAY KICK BACK. PRIOR TO ROTATING
PROPELLER ENSURE BOTH MAGNETO SWITCH(S) ARE OFF
(GROUNDED). IF MAGNETO(S) ARE NOT GROUNDED, TURNING
PROPELLER MAY START ENGINE.
1. Inspect spinner and spinner bulkhead for cracks .................................................. O O
2. Remove and inspect spinner and spinner bulkhead for cracks ............................. O
3. Inspect blades for cracks, nicks and gouges ......................................................... O O
4. Inspect for grease and oil leaks............................................................................. O O
5. Inspect propeller mounting bolts and safety.
(Check torque if safety is broken.)......................................................................... O
6. Inspect hub parts for cracks, corrosion, and wear................................................. O O
7. Rotate blades and check for tightness in hub pilot tube ........................................ O
8. Check condition of propeller deicer system (if installed) ....................................... O
9. If installed, inspect propeller deice slip rings, brush block and brush length,
replace as required ............................................................................................... O
10. Lubricate propeller.
(See appropriate Hartzell Owner’s Manual and Lubrication Chart, 12-20-00.) ..... O
11. Install spinner ........................................................................................................ O
B. ENGINE GROUP
WARNING: GROUND MAGNETO PRIMARY CIRCUIT BEFORE WORKING ON
ENGINE.
NOTE: Read Note 5, 50 and 51 before completing this group.
1. Remove engine cowling ........................................................................................ O O
2. Clean and check cowling for cracks, distortion,
and loose or missing fasteners.............................................................................. O O
3. Compression check while engine is warm ............................................................ O
4. Drain oil sump while engine is warm ..................................................................... O O
5. Inspect oil temperature sender unit for leaks and security .................................... O
6. Inspect cylinder head temperature probe and wires for security........................... O
7. Inspect oil lines and fittings
for leaks, security, chafing, dents, and cracks ....................................................... O
8. Clean and inspect oil radiator cooling fins............................................................. O
9. Change full flow (cartridge type) oil filter element, check element
for foreign particles. (See 12-10-00.)..................................................................... O O
10. Fill engine with oil. (See 12-10-00.) ....................................................................... O O
11. Clean engine. (See Note 7.) .................................................................................. O
1D1 5-20-00 FebPAGE 7

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
5. Scheduled Maintenance (continued)

Inspection
50 100
B. ENGINE GROUP (cont)

12. Inspect condition of spark plugs, clean and adjust gap as required...................... O
NOTE: If fouling of spark plugs is apparent, rotate bottom plugs to upper plugs.
NOTE: Piper does not recommend that Iridium spark plugs be cleaned using
abrasive or glass bead materials except as specified in the latest revision of
Champion Aviation Technical Bulletin 85-10 for servicing Champion Iridium
"S" spark plugs.
13. Inspect spark plug cable, lead spring, and silicone collar
for corrosion, deposits, and condition.................................................................... O
14. Check ignition harnesses and insulators
for high tension leakage and continuity ................................................................. O
15. Check cylinders for cracked or broken fins. (See Note 8.)..................................... O
16. Inspect rocker box covers for evidence of oil leaks, if leaks are
detected replace gasket and torque cover screws to 50 in-lbs.............................. O O
17. Inspect wiring to engine and accessories.
Replace damaged wires and clamps. (See Note 10.) ........................................... O
18. Inspect terminals for security and cleanliness....................................................... O
19. Check magneto main points for clearance.
(See 74-10-00, Magnetos, 100 Hour Inspection.) ................................................. O
20. Inspect magnetos for oil leaks............................................................................... O
21. Check magneto to engine timing. (See Note 6.).................................................... O O
22. Inspect security of injector nozzle and sense line. (See Note 9.) .......................... O
NOTE: Clean injector nozzles as required. (Clean with acetone only.)
23. Remove air filter and clean per 12-10-00, replace as required. (See Note 28.) .... O O
24. Inspect intake ducts for leaks and all wires that form duct
must be in place and secure ................................................................................. O
25. Inspect condition and operation of alternate air door and box .............................. O
26. Inspect alternate air door assembly (flapper valve plate)
for cracks and condition ........................................................................................ O
27. Inspect flexible hoses for condition. (See Note 15.) .............................................. O O
28. Inspect fuel system for leaks including flow dividers, lines, and fittings.
(See Note 39.) ....................................................................................................... O
29. Check fuel pumps for operation and pressure. (See 28-20-00;
73-30-00, Fuel Pump, Pressure Operational Check; and Note 22.) ...................... O
30. Check condition of vacuum pumps and security of hoses .................................... O
31. Check throttle, mixture, and propeller governor controls for travel
and operating condition. (Ensure full stop to stop travel.)...................................... O
32. Check mixture control cable for heat damage and routing .................................... O
33. Inspect exhaust stacks for cracks, hot spots, and security. Inspect
gaskets for leakage and condition. (Replace gaskets as required.) ...................... O O
PAGE 8
Feb 28/07 5-20-00 1D2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Inspection
50 100
34. Inspect exhaust pipe and heat exchanger (Refer to 81-20-00,

Turbocharger and Exhaust System Visual Inspection.) ......................................... O O
35. Inspect exhaust heat shield and cross-over tubes
for cracks and condition ........................................................................................ O
36. Inspect breather tube for obstructions, coking, and security ................................. O
37. Check security and condition of oil separator........................................................ O
NOTE: On left-hand tailpipe, disconnect breather tube hose connection. Remove
lower tube assembly from tailpipe at slip joint. Remove any contaminate
buildup.
38. Inspect crankcase for cracks, leaks, and security of seam bolts........................... O
39. Inspect engine mounts for cracks, corrosion, and loose mounting bolts.
(See 100 Hour Engine Mount Inspection, 71-20-00.)............................................ O
40 Inspect engine mount heat shield for cracks, corrosion and condition. ................ O
41. Check all engine baffles for cracks and security ................................................... O
42. Inspect rubber engine shock (isolator) mounts for deterioration.
Replace as required .............................................................................................. O
43. Inspect firewall for cracks, condition, and security ................................................ O
44. Check condition of firewall sealing ........................................................................ O
45. Inspect alternator(s) for cracks, condition, and security ........................................ O
46. Inspect condition and tension of alternator drive belts
(Refer to 24-30-00.)............................................................................................... O
47. Inspect starter for cracks, condition, and security. (See Note 43.) ........................ O
48. Check air conditioning system for evidence of refrigerant leakage.
(Refer to 21-50-00.)............................................................................................... O
NOTE: If cooling system has leaked refrigerant or is discharged, the compressor
oil level must be checked. Environmental regulations may prohibit adding
refrigerant until the cause of the loss has been determined and repaired.
49. Inspect condition and tension of compressor drive belt.
(Refer to 21-50-00.)............................................................................................... O
50. Inspect security of compressor mounting.............................................................. O
51. Inspect compressor clutch security and condition of wiring .................................. O
52. Check engine accessory case and components
for leakage, condition, and security....................................................................... O
53. Inspect bleed air ducts for condition and security ................................................. O
CAUTION: DO NOT LUBRICATE TEFLON LINERS IN CONTROL CABLES.
54. Lubricate all controls per Lubrication Chart, 12-20-00 .......................................... O
55. Inspect sonic nozzle for condition and security ..................................................... O
1D3 5-20-00 FebPAGE 9

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Inspection
50 100
C. TURBOCHARGER GROUP
1. Visually inspect system for oil leaks, exhaust system leaks
and general condition. (See Note 20 and 81-20-00, Turbocharger
and Exhaust System Visual Inspection.) ............................................................... O O
2. Inspect the compressor wheel for nicks, cracks, or broken blades ....................... O
3. Check for excess bearing drag or wheel rubbing against housing ........................ O
4. Inspect turbine wheel for broken blades or signs of rubbing ................................. O
5. Inspect oil inlet and outlet ports in center housing for leaks.................................. O
6. Inspect turbo gaskets for leaks.............................................................................. O O
7. Inspect turbo clamp for cracks and torque. (If the clamp nut
is removed, replace with a new nut (P/N 755-657). Torque the nut
on installation and recheck torque after first engine run.) ..................................... O O
8. Inspect mounts for cracks, corrosion, clearance, and security.............................. O
9. Check wastegate actuator linkage, rod ends, springs, butterfly, and bushings
for condition. Maintain wastegate per the component manufacturer’s
instructions. Replace as required .......................................................................... O
10. Inspect drain line from actuator for presence of oil ............................................... O O
11. Inspect induction and exhaust components for worn
or damaged areas, loose clamps, cracks, and leaks. (See Note 45.) ................... O O
12. Inspect intercooler clips for condition and security.
(See 81-20-00, Intercooler Attachment Clips Inspection/Replacement.) .............. O O
13. Inspect turbo and controller system oil lines for leaks and security ...................... O O
14. Inspect for oil leakage from controller and sense lines ......................................... O O
15. Install engine cowling ............................................................................................ O O
D. CABIN AND COCKPIT GROUP
1. Remove inspection covers and panels (seats and carpet must be
removed for access to inspection covers on cabin floor)....................................... O
2. Inspect cabin entrance door and emergency exit door seals ................................ O
3. Inspect cabin door and emergency exit for proper rigging, and check
retainer pins and striker plates for bending, cracks, proper
engagement, pulled or sheared fasteners and bending of the
frame web. (See Note 33.) .................................................................................... O
CAUTION: WITH CREW SEATS OCCUPIED AND AT THE LOWEST VERTICAL
POSITION, CHECK SEATS FOR PROPER ENGAGEMENT OF PINS
TO SEAT TRACK.
4. Inspect crew seats for proper vertical and horizontal operation. (See Note 30.)... O O
5. Inspect seats, seat belts, shoulder harnesses, security brackets, and
bolts. (See Restraint System - Inspection, 25-10-00.) (See Notes 17 and 26.)..... O
6. Inspect electric trim operation and indicators for full travel,
binding, damage, and correct control deflection.................................................... O
7. Check rudder pedals and toe brakes for travel, binding, and security.
(See Note 31.) ....................................................................................................... O
8. Inspect parking brake for condition, security and operation.
(See Note 19.) ....................................................................................................... O
PAGE 10
Feb 28/07 5-20-00 1D4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Inspection
50 100
9. Inspect control wheels, column, and switches

for damage, operation, and full travel. (See Notes 11 and 41.) ............................. O
10. Inspect push pull tubes, torque tubes, levers, pillow blocks,
bellcranks, and connections for condition and security. (See Note 38.) ................ O
11. Check operation of strobe, landing, navigation, cabin,
and instrument lights ............................................................................................. O O
12. Inspect condition of instruments, lines, hoses, and attachments .......................... O
13. Check pneumatic and electric gyro instruments
(overhaul or replace as required) .......................................................................... O
14. Check or replace vacuum regulator filter............................................................... O
15. Inspect pitot/static and alternate static lines, hoses
for condition and security ...................................................................................... O
16. Inspect altimeter and transponder for installation/certification per
latest revision of AC 43.13-1 and tested/inspected per FAR’s 91.411
and 91.413, respectively ....................................................................................... O
17. Inspect and test ELT per FAR 91.207. (See Testing ELT, 25-60-00.)..................... O
18. Check operation and security of fuel selector valve linkage
at fuel selector ....................................................................................................... O O
19. Check condition of safety wire on screw attaching valve cam............................... O
20. Check operation of cabin heat and defrost controls .............................................. O
21. Inspect all knobs, switches, and levers for security
of attachment and condition .................................................................................. O
22. Check condition of environmental system ducts ................................................... O
WARNING: BE SURE SKIN AND CLOTHING ARE FREE OF GREASE, OIL, OR
OTHER PETROLEUM PRODUCTS BEFORE CHECKING OR
PERFORMING MAINTENANCE ON ANY COMPONENT OF THE
OXYGEN SYSTEM.
23. Inspect crew and passenger oxygen systems per 100 Hour Inspection,
Fixed Oxygen Generator System, 35-20-00. (See Note 42.) ................................ O
24. Check flap and main landing gear switches
for operation, security, and condition..................................................................... O
25. Check fluid in hydraulic reservoir. Fill as required ................................................. O O
26. Inspect hydraulic power pack for condition, leaks, and security.
(See Note 24.) ....................................................................................................... O
27. Inspect all fluid lines for leakage, condition, and security.
(See Note 15.) ....................................................................................................... O O
28. Inspect electrical panel components and circuit breakers
for condition and security of installation. (See Notes 18 and 34.) ......................... O O
29. Inspect forward side of outflow and safety valves
for condition and security. Remove and clean per 21-30-00 ................................. O
NOTE: Outflow and safety valves may require cleaning prior to 100 hour intervals,
if heavy smoking or dusty conditions exist.
30. Inspect filters on controller and safety valve for contamination.
Clean or replace as required. (Refer to 21-30-00.)................................................ O
1D5 5-20-00 Feb

PAGE 11
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Inspection
50 100
D. CABIN AND COCKPIT GROUP (cont.)

31. Inspect aft face of F.S. 100.00 bulkhead and forward face
of F.S. 273.746 bulkhead for bulging, cracks, dents, loose,
or missing fasteners, condition and security of components................................. O
32. If installed, inspect portable fire extinguisher minimum weight
as specified on nameplate. (See Note 25.) ........................................................... O
33. Inspect avionics compartment, components, and wiring
for condition, security, and operation. (See Notes 40 and 49.).............................. O
34. Inspect control cable boots for condition and security........................................... O
35. Check air conditioning evaporators (if installed).................................................... O
36. Lubricate per Lubrication Chart, 12-20-00 ............................................................ O
37. Install inspection covers and panels...................................................................... O
E. FUSELAGE AND EMPENNAGE GROUP
NOTE: Check that all fuselage and empennage drain holes are clear and open.
1. Remove inspection covers and panels.................................................................. O
2. Inspect skins, bulkheads, frames, stringers, and longerons for damage or
irregularities (i.e. - cracks, distortion, dents, corrosion and excessive paint
build up); structural defects (i.e. - loose or missing rivets); misrigging
or structural imbalance; and attachment points for missing or
worn hardware ...................................................................................................... O
CAUTION: PRESSURIZED FLIGHT IS PROHIBITED WITH DISCOLORATION,
CRACKS, OR CRAZING.
3. Inspect windshield and windows for nicks, scratches,
cracks, crazing, and discoloration ......................................................................... O
4. Inspect avionics compartment, components, and wiring
for condition, security, and operation..................................................................... O
5. Inspect control cable boots for condition and security........................................... O
6. Check fuel sump drains for water and proper operation........................................ O O
7. Drain static lines. (Refer to 34-10-00.)................................................................... O
8. Inspect antennas/coaxial cables for condition and security .................................. O
9. Inspect dorsal fin for condition and security .......................................................... O
10. Inspect vertical fin and rudder for surface damage or irregularities
(i.e. - skin cracks, distortion, dents, corrosion, and excessive paint build up);
structural defects (i.e. - loose or missing rivets); misrigging or structural
imbalance; hinge damage, excessive wear, freedom of movement and proper
lubrication; and attachment points for missing or worn hardware ......................... O
11. Check rudder hinges and attachments for damage and operation ....................... O
12. Check rudder hinge bolts for excessive wear........................................................ O
13. Check rudder trim mechanism installation ............................................................ O
14. Check vertical fin attach points and wiring ............................................................ O
15. Check forward vertical fin attach fittings for corrosion and damage.
(See 55-30-00, Attach Fittings Corrosion Control.) ............................................... O
16. Inspect condition of deice system (if installed) ...................................................... O
PAGE 12
Feb 28/07 5-20-00 1D6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Inspection
50 100
17. Inspect horizontal stabilizer and elevator for surface damage or irregularities
(i.e. - skin cracks, distortion, dents, corrosion, and excessive paint build up);
structural defects (i.e. - loose or missing rivets); misrigging or structural
imbalance; hinge damage, excessive wear, freedom of movement and proper
lubrication; and attachment points for missing or worn hardware ......................... O
18. Check elevator hinge bolts, trim tab hinges, and attachments for damage and
operation. (See 55-20-00, Elevator Trim Tab Rods Corrosion Control.) ................ O
19. Check elevator and trim tab hinge bolts and bearings
for excessive wear................................................................................................. O
20. Check horizontal stabilizer attachments................................................................ O
21. Check forward and aft horizontal stabilizer attach fittings for corrosion
and damage. (See 55-10-00, Attach Fittings Corrosion Control) .......................... O
22. Check elevator trim mechanism installation .......................................................... O
23. Inspect battery, battery compartment, and vent system for water, corrosion,
etching, condition, and security. Flush compartment as required ......................... O
24. Inspect external power supply receptacle, battery relay, fuses,
and vent blower assembly for cleanliness, corrosion, condition,
and security. (See Notes 13 and 21.) .................................................................... O
25. Check fuel filter. Clean or replace as required....................................................... O O
26. Inspect deice system pneumatic valves and lines for condition and
security (if installed) .............................................................................................. O
27. Check baggage compartment door, latches, and hinge for operation,
condition, and security .......................................................................................... O
28. Check baggage compartment upholstery for condition......................................... O
29. Check baggage compartment light and switch for operation, condition,
and security........................................................................................................... O
30. Inspect ELT battery for condition/date per FAR 91.207. (See Note 12.)................ O
31. Inspect ELT installation and antenna for condition and security.
Replace antenna if bent or damaged .................................................................... O
32. Check fluid level in hydraulic reservoir. Fill as required ......................................... O
33. Inspect all fluid lines for leakage, condition, and security.
(See Note 15.) ....................................................................................................... O
34. Check autopilot servo and controls (if installed) per
manufacturer’s instructions.................................................................................... O
35. Check aileron, rudder, elevator, autopilot trim cables, terminals, turnbuckles,
guides, fittings, and pulleys for safety, condition, and operation. (See Note 16.) .. O
36. Check all electronic installations for security and operation.................................. O
37. Inspect all control cables, air ducts, electrical leads, harnesses, and attaching
parts for security, routing, chafing, deterioration, wear and correct installation.
(Perform 100 Hour Inspection, 51-80-00.) ............................................................ O
38. Inspect heater ducting for obstruction, condition, and security ............................. O
39. Check air conditioning evaporators and clean fins ................................................ O
40. Inspect electric windshield for general condition, correct fit, distortion,
cracking, delamination, security, and proper operation ......................................... O
1D7 5-20-00 Feb

PAGE 13
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Inspection
50 100
E. FUSELAGE AND EMPENNAGE GROUP (cont.)

CAUTION: THE FLUX DETECTOR IS SECURED TO THE MOUNTING BRACKET
WITH BRASS SCREWS. ENSURE ONLY BRASS SCREWS ARE
USED WHEN REINSTALLING.
41. Inspect flux detector .............................................................................................. O
42. Check outflow and safety valves
for cleanliness, looseness, and condition .............................................................. O
NOTE: Outflow and safety valves may require cleaning prior to 100 hour intervals,
if heavy smoking or dusty conditions exits.
43. Inspect all hoses and lines for leakage, condition, and security.
(See Note 15.) ....................................................................................................... O
44. Lubricate per Lubrication Charts, 12-20-00 .......................................................... O
NOTE: Ensure correct hardware is used when reinstalling vertical fin dorsal fairing
over flux detector.
F. LANDING GEAR GROUP
1. Check oleo struts for proper extension and evidence of fluid leakage.
(See Landing Gear, 12-10-00.) ............................................................................. O O
CAUTION: WHEN AIRCRAFT HAS OPTIONAL RADAR POD INSTALLED ON
RIGHT WING, ENSURE THAT JACK DOES NOT COME INTO
CONTACT WITH RADAR POD.
2. Place airplane on jacks. (Refer to 7-10-00.) .......................................................... O
4. Inspect nose gear steering control and travel ....................................................... O
5. Inspect nose gear installation for condition and security.
(See Notes 27, 35 and 36.) ................................................................................... O
6. Inspect nose gear trunnion for cracks and condition............................................. O O
7. Inspect nose wheel steering cam and rotator for cracks ....................................... O
8. Check squat switch for security and adjustment ................................................... O
9. Inspect tires for cuts, uneven or excessive wear, and slippage............................. O O
10. Remove wheels and clean, check and repack bearings ....................................... O
11. Inspect wheels for cracks, corrosion, and broken bolts......................................... O
12. Inspect brake disc/linings for wear, condition, and security................................... O O
13. Check tires for proper pressure.
(Refer to 12-10-00, Tires and 6-00-00, Chart 1.)................................................... O O
14. Check brake hydraulic lines for leakage, condition, and security .......................... O
15. Inspect hydraulic lines, electrical leads, and attaching parts for
condition and security (i.e. - routing, chafing, damage, wear, etc.) ....................... O
16. Check brake reservoir for proper fluid level, leaks,
condition, and security .......................................................................................... O O
17. Inspect gear fork for damage ................................................................................ O
PAGE 14
Feb 28/07 5-20-00 1D8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Inspection
50 100
18. Inspect struts for fluid/pressure leaks and scoring ................................................ O

19. Check torque links, bolts, and bushings. Rebush as required............................... O
20. Check gear struts, trunnion pins and attachments
for condition and security ...................................................................................... O
21. Inspect bolt, bushings, trunnion pins, and attachments
for condition and security. Rebush as required...................................................... O
22. Check retraction actuators and attachments for condition and security................ O
23. Check condition and security of flexible hydraulic lines to actuator.
(Replace flexible hoses as required -- see Note 15.) ............................................ O
24. Inspect main and nose gear doors, and rod assemblies
for corrosion, security, and freedom of movement ................................................ O
25. Check locking actuator for operation and adjustment. (See Note 23.) ................. O
26. Inspect nose gear door actuator for operation and adjustment............................. O
27. Check warning horn and lights for operation......................................................... O
29. Inspect wiring and wiring harness for condition, security,
damage, chafing, and corrosion.
Check switches for adjustment, security and operation ........................................ O
30. Check actuating cylinders for leakage and security. (See Note 23.) ..................... O
31. Perform gear retraction and extension operation check.
(Per Landing Gear Retraction System Functional Test, 32-30-00.) ....................... O
32. Place weight of aircraft on landing gear. (DO NOT REMOVE JACKS.)................. O
33. Check anti-retraction system on gear lever for proper operation........................... O
34. Install inspection covers and panels...................................................................... O O
WARNING: DO NOT REMOVE JACKS UNTIL IT HAS BEEN DETERMINED THAT
THE LANDING GEAR IS DOWN AND LOCKED AND ANTI-
RETRACTION SYSTEM HAS BEEN CHECKED.
35. Ensure all gears are down and locked, then remove jacks ................................... O
36. Check wheel alignment ......................................................................................... O
G. WING GROUP
2. Check surfaces, skins, and tips for damage and loose or missing fasteners.
(See Note 44.) ....................................................................................................... O O
3. Inspect forward and aft wing spar to fuselage attach fittings
for corrosion and condition. (See Note 14 and
57-40-00, Attach Fittings Corrosion Control.)........................................................ O
4. Inspect aileron for surface damage or irregularities (i.e. - skin cracks,
distortion, dents, corrosion and excessive paint build up); structural
defects (i.e. - loose or missing rivets); misrigging or structural
imbalance; hinge damage, excess wear, freedom of movement and
proper lubrication; and attachment points for missing or worn hardware .............. O
5. Inspect aileron bellcranks for damage and operation............................................ O
6. Inspect aileron cables, terminals, turnbuckles, fittings, guides, pulleys,
and bellcranks for safety, condition, and operation. (See Note 16.) ...................... O
1D9 5-20-00 Feb

PAGE 15
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Inspection
50 100
G. WING GROUP (cont.)

7. Inspect flaps for surface damage or irregularities (i.e. - skin cracks, distortion,
dents, corrosion, and excessive paint build up); structural defects (i.e. - loose
or missing rivets); misrigging or structural imbalance; hinge damage, excessive
wear, freedom of movement and proper lubrication; and attachment points
for missing or worn hardware ................................................................................ O
8. Inspect the flap actuation system rod end bearings for binding or
seizing of the ball bearings. Pay particular attention to the rod end
bearings attached to the inboard bellcrank assembly located in each
main gear well (See Notes 32 and 48.) ................................................................. O
9. Inspect static discharge wicks for security of attachment and condition ............... O
WARNING: PHYSICAL MANIPULATION OF LIFT TRANSDUCER ON PA-46-350P
AIRPLANES MAY RESULT IN ERRONEOUS STALL WARNINGS
NECESSITATING CALIBRATION OF SYSTEM. SEE CHAPTER 27.
10. Inspect lift transducer for security of attachment, spring centering
of switch blade, and corrosion. Check heat element for operation ........................ O
11. Inspect wing inspection light for broken lens, security, wiring,
and attachment (if installed) .................................................................................. O
13. Check condition of hydraulic, fuel, and pneumatic hoses and lines.
(Refer to Note 15.)................................................................................................. O
14. Check condition and security of wiring and connectors ........................................ O
15. Check fuel tanks and lines for leaks...................................................................... O
NOTE: Any fuel leaks within the wing will show at the lower wing root fairing,
between wing and fuselage.
16. Check fuel filler cap, O-ring, and receptacle for condition ..................................... O O
17. Check fuel tanks marked for proper octane rating................................................. O O
18. Check radome for erosion, cracks, or delamination (if installed)........................... O
19. Inspect condition of pneumatic deicer (if installed) ............................................... O
20. Inspect wing tip navigation lights for broken lenses,
security, wiring, and attachment. (See Note 37.)................................................... O O
21. If installed, inspect SpeedBrakes per 50 Hour Inspection, 27-60-00 .................... O
H. SPECIAL INSPECTION
See 5-30-00.
PAGE 16
Feb 28/07 5-20-00 1D10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Inspection
50 100
I. OPERATIONAL INSPECTION
- ENGINE OFF
1. Check electronic equipment operation .................................................................. O O
2. Check operation of flight controls .......................................................................... O O
3. Check operation of flaps........................................................................................ O O
4. If installed, check and self-test Transicoil EMIS Instrument Stack.
(See 77-40-00, Dual Analog Module Indicator, Performance.).............................. O O
- ENGINE RUNNING
5. Check fuel pump and fuel tank selector ................................................................ O O
6. Check fuel quantity and flow gauges..................................................................... O O
7. Check oil pressure and temperature ..................................................................... O O
8. Check manifold pressure....................................................................................... O O
9. Check tachometer ................................................................................................. O O
10. Check alternator output on #1 alternator and #2 alternator .................................. O O
11. Check parking brake and toe brakes..................................................................... O O
12. Check vacuum gauge and standby vacuum pump................................................ O O
13. Check gyros for noise and roughness................................................................... O O
14. Check cabin heat and defroster operation ............................................................ O O
15. Check magneto switch operation .......................................................................... O O
16. Check magneto RPM variation.............................................................................. O O
17. Check throttle and mixture operation .................................................................... O O
18. Check propeller smoothness................................................................................. O O
19. Check constant speed propeller action ................................................................. O O
20. Check engine idle.................................................................................................. O O
21. Check alternate air ................................................................................................ O O
22. Check air conditioning compressor clutch operation............................................. O O
23. Check cabin pressure controller.
(See Operational Inspection, Cabin Pressure Controller, 21-30-00.) .................... O
J. GENERAL
1. Aircraft conforms to FAA Specifications ................................................................ O O
2. All Airworthiness Directives, Service Bulletins, Letters,
and Instructions complied with. (See Notes 46 and 47.) ....................................... O O
3. Current FAA Pilot’s Operating Handbook is in the aircraft. (See Note 29.) ........... O O
4. Appropriate entries made in the Aircraft and Engine Log books........................... O O
5. Registration Certificate is in the aircraft and properly displayed ........................... O O
6. Radio Station FCC Licenses is in the aircraft and properly displayed................... O O
7. Aircraft Equipment List, Weight and Balance and FAA Form 337
(if applicable) are in the aircraft and in proper order ............................................. O O
8. Operational inspection and run-up completed ...................................................... O O
9. Aircraft cleaned and lubricated after wash, as required ........................................ O O
1D11 5-20-00 Feb

PAGE 17
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
K. NOTES
1. Refer to Piper’s Customer Service Information Aerofiche P/N 1753-755, for latest revision
dates to Piper Inspection Reports/Manuals and this maintenance manual. References to
Section are to the appropriate Section in this manual.
WARNING: INSTRUCTIONS FOR CONTINUED AIRWORTHINESS (ICA) FOR ALL NON-
PIPER APPROVED STC INSTALLATIONS ARE NOT INCLUDED IN THIS
MANUAL. WHEN A NON-PIPER APPROVED STC INSTALLATION IS
INCORPORATED ON THE AIRPLANE, THOSE PORTIONS OF THE AIRPLANE
AFFECTED BY THE INSTALLATION MUST BE INSPECTED IN ACCORDANCE
WITH THE ICA PUBLISHED BY THE OWNER OF THE STC. SINCE NON-PIPER
APPROVED STC INSTALLATIONS MAY CHANGE SYSTEMS INTERFACE,
OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS AND COMPONENT LOADS OR STRESSES
ON ADJACENT STRUCTURES, THE PIPER PROVIDED ICA MAY NOT BE
2. Inspections or operations are to be performed as indicated by a “O” at the 50 to 100 hour
inspection interval. Inspections or operations (i.e. - component overhauls/replacements, etc.)
required outside the 100 hour cycle are listed as special inspections in section 5-30-00.
Inspections must be accompanied by persons authorized by the FAA.
(a) The 50 hour inspection accomplishes preventative maintenance, lubrication and servicing
as well as inspecting critical components.
(b) The 100 hour inspection is a complete inspection of the airplane, identical to an annual
inspection.
NOTE: A log book entry should be made upon completion of any inspections.
3. Piper Service Bulletins are of special importance and Piper considers compliance mandatory.
In all cases, see Service Bulletin/Service Letter Index P/N 762-332 or Service Bulletin/Service
Letter Aerofiche Set P/N 1762-331 to verify latest revision.
4. Piper Service Letters are product improvements and service hints pertaining to servicing the
airplane and should be given careful attention.
5. Inspections given for the power plant are based on the engine manufacturer’s operator’s
manual ( 60297-27 ) for this airplane. Any changes issued to the engine manufacturer’s
operator’s manual shall supersede or supplement the inspections outlined in this report.
6. On new engines, check after the first 25 hours of operation, then at each subsequent 50 hour
inspection.
7. Cover or remove all filters, plug all openings, cover the ignition lead at the spark plug and
magneto. Solvent will contaminate the air and fuel filters and will corrode the springs in the
ignition leads.
8. Check cylinders for evidence of excessive heat which is indicated by burned paint on the
cylinders. This condition is indicative of internal damage to the cylinder, and if found, its cause
must be determined and corrected before the airplane is returned to service.
Heavy discoloration and the appearance of seepage at the cylinder head and barrel
attachment area are usually due to emission of thread lubricant used during assembly of the
barrel at the factory, or by slight gas leakage which stops after the cylinder has been in service
for a while. This condition is neither harmful nor detrimental to engine performance and
operation. If it can be proven that leakage exceeds these conditions, the cylinder should be
replaced.
PAGE 18
Feb 28/07 5-20-00 1D12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
9. Check security of injector nozzles after the first 50 hours of engine operation, then at each
subsequent 100 hours of engine operation.
10. In S/N’s 4636001 thru 4636089 only, verify compliance with Piper Service Bulletin No. 1000.
11. In S/N’s 4636001 thru 4636110 only, verify compliance with of Piper Service Bulletin No. 1021
or installation of Kit No. 766-654.
14. In S/N’s 4636001 thru 4636175 only, verify compliance with of Piper Service Bulletin No. 1027
or installation of Kit No. 766-656.
15. Flexible hose replacement times are in-service times. In-service dates must be determined by
(1) the date the aircraft was licensed, if new or (2) the date entered in the logbook for the
replacement hose placed in service. Do not use the date stamped on the hose, as time may be
included for shelf life, and not in-service use.
16. Examine cables for broken strands by wiping them with a cloth for their entire length. Visually
inspect the cable thoroughly for damage not detected by the cloth. Replace any damage or
frayed cables.
(a) See Control Cable Inspection, 27-00-00, or the latest edition of FAA AC 43.13-1.
(b) At fifteen (15) years time-in-service, begin Cable Fittings 100 Hour Special Inspection, 27-00-00.
19. In S/N’s 4636021 thru 4636190 only, verify compliance with Piper Service Letter No. 1023.
20. In S/N’s 4636001 thru 4636198 only, verify compliance with Piper Service Bulletin No. 1029
and Lycoming Service Bulletin No. 534.
22. In S/N’s 4636001 thru 4636221 only, in airplanes which have not installed a Lear Romec P/N
RG9080-J4A/M engine driven fuel pump, verify compliance with latest revisions of Piper
Service Bulletin No. 1035, Lycoming Service Bulletin No. 529A, and Crane/Lear Romec
Service Bulletin No. 101SB020. See also FAA AD 98-18-12.
23. In S/N’s 4636001 thru 4636030 only, verify compliance with Piper Service Bulletin No. 994 or
Parker Hannifin Service Bulletin No. 7049.
24. In S/N's 4636001 thru 4636043 only, verify compliance with Piper Service Bulletin No. 964B or
Cleveland ESB 7029A or Cleveland SB 7047.
25. In S/N's 4636001 thru 4636013 only, verify installation of Kit No. 766-613 per Piper Service
Bulletin No. 993.
26. In S/N's 4636001 thru 4636088 only, verify compliance with Piper Service Bulletin No. 999.
27. In S/N's 4636001 thru 4636093, 4636095, 4636096 and 4636099 only, verify compliance with
Piper Service Bulletin No. 1001.
28. In S/N's 4636001 thru 4636284 only, verify compliance with Piper Service Bulletin No. 1041 or
Airborne Service Letter No. 56.
Bulletin No. 1066.
1D13 5-20-00 Feb

PAGE 19
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
K. NOTES (cont)
Bulletin No. 1067A.
35. In S/N's 4636001 thru 4636313 only, verify compliance with Piper Service Bulletin No. 1075A.
36. In S/N's 4636001 thru 4636313 only, verify compliance with Piper Service Bulletin No. 1087B.
Bulletin No. 1108.
Bulletin No. 1126.
39. In S/N's 4636001 thru 4636343 only, verify compliance with Piper Service Bulletin No. 1134 or
Lycoming SB 557 or Precision Airmotive SB PRS-105.
40. In S/N's 4636160, 4636248 thru 4636272, 4636274 thru 4636336, and 4636338 only, verify
compliance with Piper Service Bulletin No. 1135.
41. In S/N's 4636132 thru 4636348 only, verify compliance with Piper Service Bulletin No. 1139A.
43. In S/N's 4636001 thru 4636326 only, in airplanes which have installed Lycoming starter P/N
31B22474, verify installation of Kit No. 767-337 per Piper Service Letter No. 1053.
44. In S/N's 4636001 thru 4636338 only, verify installation of Kit No. 767-352 or 767-353 per Piper
Service Letter No. 1057.
45. Each 100 hours, perform V-Band Coupling 100 Hour Inspection, 81-20-00.
46. In S/N’s 4636350 thru 4636351 only, verify compliance with Piper Service Bulletin No. 1151E.
47. In S/N’s 4636362 and up, for airplanes delivered from the factory in bare metal, verify
compliance with Piper Service Letter No. 1089.
48. In S/N’s 4636001 thru 4636368 only, verify compliance with Piper Service Letter No. 1097.
49. In S/N’s 4636001 thru 4636334 only, verify compliance with Garmin Service Bulletin No. 0204
per Piper VSP No. 142.
50. In S/N’s 4636001 and up, for airplanes with engines affected by Lycoming SB 554, verify
compliance with same per Piper VSP No. 148.
51. In S/N’s 4636001 thru 4636313 only, verify engine serial number against those listed in
Lycoming Special Advisory 59-800 and verify compliance with same per Piper VSP No. 127.
52. In S/N’s 4636375 and up, verify compliance with AVIDYNE Service Alert No. SA 05-001.
53. In S/N’s 4636001 and up, for airplanes with engines affected by Lycoming SB 569, verify
compliance with same per Piper VSP No. 174.
54. In S/N’s 4636160, 4636248 and up, verify compliance with S-TEC Service Bulletin No. SB 06-
001 Per Piper VSP No. 175.
55. In S/N’s 4636001 and up, verify compliance with Hartzell Propeller, Inc. Service Bulletin HC-
SB-61-284 Revision 1 & Service Bulletin Appendix HC-SBA-61-284 Per Piper VSP No. 173.
56. In S/N’s 4636375 thru 4636378, 4636380 thru 4636382 and 4636384 only, verify compliance
with Piper Special Advisory 46-16.
PAGE 20
Feb 28/07 5-20-00 1D14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1D15 5-20-00 Feb

PAGE 21
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 22
Feb 28/07 5-20-00 1D16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
SPECIAL INSPECTIONS
WARNING: FAILURE TO CONSULT APPLICABLE VENDOR PUBLICATION(S), WHEN SERVICING OR

INSPECTING VENDOR EQUIPMENT INSTALLED IN PIPER AIRCRAFT, MAY RENDER THE
AIRCRAFT UNAIRWORTHY. (SEE INTRODUCTION - SUPPLEMENTARY PUBLICATIONS.)
The following inspections are required in addition to those listed in 5-20-00. These inspections are required at
intervals of:
A. Flight hours;
B. Calendar Year; or
C. the specific operation being conducted or the environment being operated in.
Unless otherwise indicated, these inspections are to be repeated at each occurrence of the specified interval.
Note that the items listed herein are guidelines based on past operating experience. Each operator should
closely monitor his own unique operating conditions/environment and react accordingly to keep his aircraft
airworthy.
1. Per Flight Hour

First 50 Hours
Check security of injector nozzles.
Each 50 Hours
For airplanes with pilot’s side cockpit windows which have accumulated 350 hours time-in-service,
perform the 50 Hour Pilot’s Side Cockpit Window Inspection, under Pilot’s/Copilot’s Window in 56-10-00.
Each 250 Hours
Replace Turbine Inlet Temperature (TIT) probe. See TIT Gauge, Probe Replacement, 77-20-00, and FAA
Airworthiness Directive (AD) 99-15-04.
Comply with the latest revisions of Textron Lycoming Service Bulletins No. 521 and 531.
Each 400 Hours
Inspect Airborne pressure manifold every 400 hours. (See Pressure Manifold Check Valve Testing, 30-10-00.)
For airplanes equipped with Gill G-243 or G-250S battery, beginning initially at 800 +/- 50 flight hours or
11 +/-1 calendar months, and each 400 +/- 50 flight hours or 11 +/-1 calendar months thereafter, the
battery should be removed and capacity tested per Battery Capacity Test, 24-30-00.
Each 500 Hours
For airplanes equipped with Aero Accessories, Inc. Tempest Dry Air Pumps only, beginning at 500 hours
time-in-service, and each 100 hours thereafter, inspect engine-driven vacuum pump vane wear per
Vacuum Pump(s), Inspection, 37-10-00.
For airplanes equipped with Parker Hannifin Airborne Dry Air Pumps only, replace engine-driven vacuum
pump.
Replace central gyro filter. (Replace filter at more frequent intervals if heavy contamination is noted.)
Check cabin pressurization system operation. (See 21-00-00, Pressurization System Test.)
Check condition of exterior bearings.
Drain wing fuel tanks.
Check fuel transmitters and electrical connectors for cleanliness, condition, and security.
1D17 5-30-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Each 500 Hours (cont.)

Every two (2) years or after 500 hours, whichever occurs first, check that fuel transmitter floats (mounted
on forward access panels #2 and #5 from the wing tip) are secure and that fuel strainers (three in each
wing tank) are secure and unobstructed. Strainers maybe inspected by removing the forward and aft
access covers, fifth in from the wing tip.
Check fuel tank sealing material.
Remove propeller; remove sludge from propeller and crankshaft.
Remove and flush oil radiator.
Inspect magneto(s) distributor block for cracks, burned areas or corrosion. (See 74-10-00, Magnetos,
500 Hour Inspection and Cleaning.)
Replace engine air filter.
Coin-tap erosion shield on composite blades. (See latest revision Hartzell Composite Blade Manual No. 135.)
Each 1000 Hours
Replace engine compartment flexible hoses (fuel, oil, etc.) as required; but not to exceed 1000 hours
time-in-service, eight (8) years, or engine overhaul, whichever comes first.
Coin-tap the entire blade on composite blades. (See latest revision Hartzell Composite Blade Manual No. 135.)
Inspect condition of bolts used with flap rollers and aileron hinges. (Replace as required.)
Inspect flap tracks for security of attachment, damage, condition, and corrosion.
If installed, remove SpeedBrake cartridges and return to Precise Flight Inc. for clutch lubrication and
spring replacement.
Each 1500 Hours
Replace flexible bleed air lines (high temp) each 1500 hours time-in-service or every seven (7) years,
whichever occurs first.
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 5-30-00 1D18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Each 2000 Hours

Each 2000 hours or seven (7) years, whichever occurs first, remove interior panels, and headliner and
conduct detailed inspection of aircraft structure (skin, bulkheads, stringers, etc.) for condition and
security. Inspection of structure concealed by headliner may be accomplished by alternate means (i.e. -
through the use of a borescope) without removing the headliner, providing access is obtained to all
concealed areas and borescope provides sufficient detail to adequately accomplish the inspection.
Each 2000 hours, or as specified in the latest revision of Lycoming Service Instruction No. 1009,
overhaul or replace engine.
At engine overhaul, each 2000 hours, or as specified in the latest revision of Hartzell Service Letter No.
61, whichever comes first, overhaul or replace the propeller governor.
Overhaul or replace Hartzell propellers each five or six years or each 2000 or 2400 hours. (Refer to
latest revision of Hartzell Service Letter No. 61 to determine specific requirements for individual
airplanes.)
At engine overhaul or each 2000 hours, whichever comes first, overhaul or replace alternators.
Each 2400 Hours
airplanes.)
Each 2700 Hours
Overhaul the Sky Tec Starter Model No. 149-NL each 2700 hours or when major overhaul is performed
on the engine on which it is installed. No other maintenance is required or recommended.
Each 5000 Hours
If installed, remove SpeedBrake cartridges and return to Precise Flight Inc. for drive assembly
replacement.
Each 7500 Hours
Replace engine mount bolts located at the firewall (F.S. 95.00).
1D19 5-30-00 FebPAGE 3

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2. Per Calendar Year

Each Thirty (30) Days
Check standby attitude indicator emergency power supply (in radar pod aft compartment) for condition
and security. Self-test unit using integral test switch - see 34-20-00. Hand-tighten electrical connector.
Inspect battery, battery compartment, and vent system for water, corrosion, etching, condition, and
security. Flush compartment as required.
If installed, check portable fire extinguisher for condition and charge. Verify nozzle is unobstructed and
safety seal is intact. Determine charge by “hefting” extinguisher.
Each Ninety (90) Days
Check fuel filter. Clean or replace as required.
Each Six (6) Months
If annual usage is significantly less than 100 Hours, lubricate Hartzell propeller each six (6) months. See
Hartzell Standard Practices Manual No. 202A.
Each Eleven (11) Months
For airplanes equipped with Gill G-243 or G-250S battery, beginning initially at 800 +/- 50 flight hours or
11 +/-1 calendar months, and each 400 +/- 50 flight hours or 11 +/-1 calendar months thereafter, the
battery should be removed and capacity tested per Battery Capacity Test, 24-30-00.
Each Twelve (12) Months
Lubricate Hartzell propeller every 100 Hours or annually, whichever comes first. If annual usage is
significantly less than 100 Hours, lubricate propeller each six (6) months. See Hartzell Standard
Practices Manual No. 202A.
If installed, each twelve (12) calendar months, conduct SpeedBrake Annual Inspection per Annual
Inspection, 27-60-00.
Each Two (2) Years
Every two (2) years or after 500 hours, whichever occurs first, check that fuel transmitter floats (mounted
on forward access panels #2 and #5 from the wing tip) are secure and that fuel strainers (three in each
wing tank) are secure and unobstructed. Strainers maybe inspected by removing the forward and aft
access covers, fifth in from the wing tip.
Test and inspect the static pressure system and altimeters. Ensure compliance with the requirements of
FAR 43, Appendix E. (See FAR 91.411.) If optional Meggitt EFIS installed, see Appendix 1, grid 4K1.
Test and inspect the transponder. Ensure compliance with the requirements of FAR 43, Appendix F.
(See FAR 91.413.)
For airplanes equipped with the Avidyne FlightMax Entegra EFIS: swing the magnetic compass and
recalibrate the magnetometer(s) every (2) years. See Magnetometer(s), 34-20-00.
PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 5-30-00 1D20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Each Five (5) Years

WARNING: DO NOT USE GREASE OR ANY TYPE OF GREASE FITTING ON ANY OXYGEN
SYSTEM. WHEN WORKING WITH AN OXYGEN SYSTEM MAKE SURE HANDS,
CLOTHING, TOOLS, AND IMMEDIATE AREA ARE FREE OF GREASE.
Remove and hydrostatically test oxygen cylinder every five (5) years. (i.e. - standard weight cylinders -
ICC or DOT 3AA1800.)
Inspect the Attach Fittings and Push Rods listed below. Repair or replace as required and, when
finished, reapply Dinitrol AV8 Corrosion Inhibiting Compound (P/N 89500-800).
Fwd and aft wing spar to fuselage attach fittings. (See Attach Fittings Corrosion Control, 57-40-00.)
Fwd vertical fin attach fittings. (See Attach Fittings Corrosion Control, 55-30-00.)
Elevator trim tab push rods. (See Elevator Trim Tab Push Rod Corrosion Control, 55-20-00.)
Fwd and aft horizontal stabilizer attach fittings. (See Attach Fittings Corrosion Control, 55-10-00.)
Overhaul or replace Hartzell propellers each five or six years or each 2000 or 2400 hours. (See latest
revision of Hartzell Service Letter No. 61 to determine specific requirements for individual airplanes.)
Each Six (6) Years
airplanes.)
Each Seven (7) Years
Each 2000 hours or seven (7) years, whichever occurs first, remove interior panels, and headliner and
conduct detailed inspection of aircraft structure (skin, bulkheads, stringers, etc.) for condition and
security. Inspection of structure concealed by headliner may be accomplished by alternate means (i.e. -
through the use of a borescope) without removing the headliner, providing access is obtained to all
concealed areas and borescope provides sufficient detail to adequately accomplish the inspection.
Replace flexible bleed air lines (high temp) each 1500 hours time-in-service or every seven (7) years,
whichever occurs first.
Each Eight (8) Years
Replace engine compartment flexible hoses (fuel, oil, etc.) as required; but not to exceed 1000 hours
time-in-service, eight (8) years, or engine overhaul, whichever comes first.
Each Ten (10) Years
Each ten (10) years time-in-service, test fuselage and wing fluid hoses to system pressure. Visually
inspect for leaks. Hoses that pass inspection may remain in service, but must be rechecked each five (5)
years additional time-in-service. No fluid hose may exceed twenty (20) years total time-in-service.
For airplanes equipped with the Avidyne FlightMax Entegra EFIS: replace the CMOS battery in the
multifunction display (MFD) as required, but at least each 10 years. See Multifunction Display, 34-20-00.
Each Twelve (12) Years
Replace Fixed Oxygen Generators at twelve (12) years from date of manufacture as indicated on the
unit data plate.
Each Twenty (20) Years
No fluid hose may exceed 20 years total time-in-service.
1D21 5-30-00 FebPAGE 5

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. Per Specific Operation / Operating Environment

A. Operation in High Dust or Industrial Pollution Environment
CAUTION: DISCONNECT LINES FROM PITOT/STATIC SYSTEM BEFORE CONDUCTING THIS
INSPECTION.
Item Inspection Inspection Interval
Engine Air Filter. Clean and inspect. Daily.
Cabin Environmental and Inspect and replace if necessary. 100 Hours.
Instrument Air Filters.
Pitot/Static system. Check for obstruction. Reverse 100 Hours or
flow to lines. as required.
Landing Gear Actuators Clean. Before each flight.
and Oleos.
Inspect. 100 Hours.
Landing Gear Wheel Clean, inspect and repack. 50 Hours.
Bearings.
Windows. Inspect for cracks, erosion, crazing, Daily.
visibility, and cleanliness.
Structure drain holes. Clean with pipe cleaner. Before each flight.
PAGE 6
Feb 28/07 5-30-00 1D22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B. Operation in High Salt or High Humidity Environment

Fuselage, Empennage Remove floor panels and exterior 200 Hours.
and Wings. access plates; inspect for corrosion.
Landing Gear. Inspect for corrosion and lubrication; 200 Hours.
switches and wiring for condition.
WARNING: ENSURE BOTH MAGNETO SWITCHES ARE OFF (GROUNDED), BEFORE TURNING
PROPELLER. ENGINE MAY START IF BOTH SWITCHES ARE NOT OFF. USE EXTREME
CAUTION WHEN ROTATING PROPELLER BY HAND; PROPELLER MAY KICK BACK.
Engines with more than Each five days, pull prop through five Each 5 days
50 hours total time. complete revolutions. and
Each 30 days, fly aircraft for 30 minutes each 30 days.
or, ground run until oil temperature is in
the green arc. Avoid excessive ground run.
Engines with less than Each day, pull prop through five Daily
50 hours total time. complete revolutions. and
Each 30 days, fly aircraft for 30 minutes each 30 days.
or, ground run until oil temperature is in
the green arc. Avoid excessive ground run.
Instruments and Wiring. Inspect for proper seal of cases and 100 Hours.
corrosion.
Interior. Inspect upholstery, seat belts, seats and 100 Hours.
rugs for corrosion and integrity.
NOTE: Do not use metallic tie downs (i.e. - chains, cables, etc.) in high salt or high humidity
environments.
1D23 5-30-00 FebPAGE 7

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C. Operation in Extreme Cold

Hydraulic, Pneumatic Check all fittings and attachments for First 100 Hour, then
and Environmental. security and leaks. as required.
D. Operation from Soft or Unusual Terrain
Landing Gear. Inspect for cracks, attachment, 100 Hours.
damage, cleanliness and lubrication.
Wheels. Inspect for cracks, damage, chipped 100 Hours.
rims; bearings for damage, corrosion
and lubrication.
Tires. Inspect for cuts, wear, inflation and Daily.
deterioration.
Wheel Wells. Inspect for foreign material, damage 100 Hours.
and corrosion.
Brakes. Inspect for damage, foreign material, Daily.
cracks and overheating.
Flaps, Lower Fuselage Inspect for damage, cracks and 100 Hours.
and Wing. corrosion.
PAGE 8
Feb 28/07 5-30-00 1D24
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1E1 5-30-00 FebPAGE 9

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 10
Feb 28/07 5-30-00 1E2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
UNSCHEDULED MAINTENANCE CHECKS
WARNING: FAILURE TO CONSULT APPLICABLE VENDOR PUBLICATION(S), WHEN SERVICING OR

INSPECTING VENDOR EQUIPMENT INSTALLED IN PIPER AIRCRAFT, MAY RENDER THE
AIRCRAFT UNAIRWORTHY. (SEE INTRODUCTION - SUPPLEMENTARY PUBLICATIONS.)
The following inspections are required in response to specific anomalies encountered during aircraft
operation. Note that the items listed herein are guidelines based on past operating experience. Each operator
should closely monitor his own unique operating conditions/environment and react accordingly to keep his
aircraft airworthy.
NOTE: A log book entry should be made upon completion of any inspections.
1. Lightning Strike
Propeller. Refer to latest Hartzell Service Letter. Each occurrence,
Overhaul prior to return to service. before further flight.
Propeller Deice System. Replace MOV module(s). Each occurrence,
(Opt. 3-blade only.) before further flight.
Engine. See latest revisions of appropriate Each occurrence,
Textron-Lycoming Service Bulletins before further flight.
and Overhaul Manual.
Electrical and Avionics Inspect and check harness, connections, Each occurrence,
Systems. and equipment for high voltage damage, before further flight.
burns and insulation degradation.
Replace or overhaul as required.
Consult with appropriate avionics
vendor(s) for inspections and operational
checks. Bench check alternator and
voltage regulator(s), see 24-30-00.
All exterior surfaces, skins, Inspect for burns, evidence of arcing, Each occurrence,
and structure. and damage on surfaces and bearings. before further flight.
Check for correct material properties in
the area of the strike path. Degauss
engine mount. Replace or repair
affected areas/parts.
System Components. Inspect instrumentation, hydraulic, Each occurrence,
vacuum, pitot/static, and fuel systems, before further flight.
for damage and correct operation.
Static Wicks. Replace. Each occurrence,
before further flight.
Bearings. Inspect all control surface hinges and Each occurrence,
bearings, and landing gear and wheel before further flight.
bearings for pitting and damage.
Replace as required.
1E3 5-50-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2. Engine Overspeed, Overtemp, Loss of Oil, or Sudden Stoppage

Engine. See latest revision of Textron-Lycoming Each occurrence,
Service Bulletin 369J before further flight.
and Overhaul Manual.
Propeller. Propeller overspeed exceeding certified Each occurrence,
max RPM. Comply with latest revision of before further flight.
Hartzell Service Letter HC-SL-61-251 and
Standard Practice Manual 202A.
Engine Mount and Inspect for distortion and Each occurrence,
Attachments. damage. Replace or repair before further flight.
as required.
3. Severe Turbulence, Hard or Overweight Landing

CAUTION: MINOR OR APPARENTLY SUPERFICIAL DAMAGE MAY INDICATE A MORE SEVERE
CONDITION SOMEWHERE ELSE IN THE STRUCTURE.
A. Place aircraft in a normal level attitude.
B. Make a preliminary inspection of checking alignment and out-of-track condition of engine, wings,
tail, landing gear and doors.
C. Follow Piper and Textron-Lycoming Maintenance Manual procedures. If there are any questions
regarding repairs or procedures, contact your Piper Distributor’s Service Advisor (DSA).
D. Inspect the following items closely to determine the extent of damage:
Landing Gear Struts. Cracks, signs of overstress Each occurrence,
(Not required for deformation, loose or damaged before further flight.
severe turbulence.) trunnion mounts. Axles for cracks,
bending or flat spots. Damaged oleos
and seals, hydraulic leaks and landing
gear alignment.
Wheels, Tires, Brakes. Cracks, chips, loose or cracked Each occurrence,
(Not required for mounting bolts, alignment of slippage before further flight.
severe turbulence.) marks, sidewall distress, hydraulic or
air leaks. Inspect the wheels (dye
penetrant method) and wheel bolts
(magnetic particle method).
Wheel Wells and Landing Buckling, cracks, overstress, wing skin Each occurrence,
Gear attach points. buckling, actuator and side brace before further flight.
(Not required for damage and condition. Magnaflux
severe turbulence.) landing, gear attachment and drag
link bolts.
Wings. Wing attach bolts for slippage, damage Each occurrence,
and overstress. Upper and lower wing before further flight.
skins for wrinkles, cracks, popped or
loose rivets.
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 5-50-00 1E4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. Severe Turbulence, Hard or Overweight Landing (continued)

Wings (cont.). Remove access plates and inspect for
internal damage to ribs, stringers and
sparwebs; and fuel tanks for damage,
attachment, and leaks.
Engine. Engine mounts for distortion and Each occurrence,
damage to elastomeric parts. before further flight.
Propeller for evidence of ground strike
(i.e. - hard or overweight landing).
Fuselage. Loose or missing rivets, door alignment, Each occurrence,
windows and attachments for overstress, before further flight.
cracks or damage. Wing carry through
member for overstress damage.
Stringers, bulkheads, keel beams for
buckling, cracks, or damage. Forward
and aft pressure bulkheads for buckling,
cracks and damage. Avionics,
instruments and accessories installation
for security and operation.
Perform ground pressurization check.
(See 21-30-00 - Pressurization System
Test.)
Empennage. Skins for buckling wrinkles, loose or Each occurrence,
missing rivets. Elevator, rudder, vertical before further flight.
fins and horizontal stabilizer for security
of attachment and overstress of bolts.
Ribs, stringers for buckling, cracks
and damage.
Wheels, tires, brakes. Cracks, chips, loose or cracked Each occurrence,
(Not required for severe mounting bolts, alignment of slippage before further flight
turbulence) marks, sidewall distress, hydraulic or
air leaks. Inspect the wheels (dye
penetrant method) and wheel bolts
(magnetic particle method.)
4. Flaps Extended Above Maximum Flap Extension Speed (VFE)

Flap bellcranks. Inspect for distortion. Replace as Each occurrence,
required. (See Flap Bellcrank Distortion before further flight.
Inspection, 27-50-00.)
Flaps. Inspect for damage to the skin and Each occurrence,
attach points. Replace as required. before further flight.
1E5 5-50-00 FebPAGE 3

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
5. Flood Damage, Immersion in Water

A. These guidelines are general in nature and should be applied or varied to fit the individual aircraft
according to water level, length of time of exposure and other variables. Only those areas that might
not be obvious to the mechanic are addressed.
CAUTION: MAKE ALL REPAIRS AND/OR ADJUSTMENTS IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE
APPROPRIATE PIPER MAINTENANCE MANUAL, THE COMPONENT
MANUFACTURER'S MAINTENANCE MANUAL, AND FAR PART 43. PAY
PARTICULAR ATTENTION TO SILT, CORROSION AND CONTAMINANTS.
B. Follow Piper and Textron-Lycoming Maintenance Manual procedures. If there are any questions
regarding repairs or procedures, contact your Piper Distributor’s Service Advisor (DSA).
C. Determine the water level on the aircraft. Determine which operating and/or electrical components
have been exposed to the water.
D. If the following items were immersed, inspect them closely to determine the extent of damage:
Airframe Clean silt and contaminants from airframe. If immersed, each event,
Tubular Structures Check for internal corrosion. If immersed, each event,
(i.e. - Engine Mounts, etc.) Clean and represerve as required. before further flight.
(See 71-20-00 - Engine Mount Corrosion
Inspection, Immersion in Water.)
Wings Inspect to ensure that contaminants If immersed, each event,
are cleaned from fuel cell areas. before further flight.
Landing Gear and associated Check all limit switches, replace If immersed, each event,
Bearings, Locks, Torque Links, non-sealed type. Jack airplane and before further flight.
Shimmy Dampeners, etc. cycle landing gear to ensure
proper operation.
Control Surfaces Remove surface, clean and check If immersed, each event,
all bearings - relube or replace before further flight.
as necessary.
Rebalance before installation.
Flight Control System Clean and inspect all cables, pulleys, If immersed, each event,
and bearings for evidence of corrosion. before further flight.
Replace corroded cables.
Re-preserve galvanized cable
with MIL- C-11796 Class 2 (hot).
Trim Control System Clean and inspect all trim system If immersed, each event,
cables, pulleys, drums, bearings, before further flight.
jack screws, etc. Do not apply
preservation to trim cables.
Actuating Cables Inspect "push-pull" actuating cables If immersed, each event,
for powerplant, heating and before further flight.
ventilating system, fuel system, etc.
for proper operation.
PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 5-50-00 1E6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
5. Flood Damage, Immersion in Water (continued)

Engine Remove, disassemble, and inspect. If immersed, each event,
Examine all parts paying particular before further flight.
attention for evidence of corrosion,
rust or contaminants imbedded on
bearing surfaces, piston, mounting
flanges or any aluminum, magnesium
or bronze surface that may be porous.
Remove evidence of rust, or corrosion.
If pitting in stressed areas is found the
part should not be reused. Silt imbedded
in porous surfaces may be removed.
Be certain oil passages, dowel holes and
similar hidden openings and recesses
are thoroughly free from contaminants.
Test electrical components and fuel
metering devices in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions to determine
fitness for future use.
Reassemble engine using new seals,
gaskets, stressed bolts nuts and
crankshaft sludge tubes. All reused parts
must conform with Lycoming Table of
Limits No. SSP-2070 for fits and
clearances.
See latest revision of Lycoming Service
Bulletin No. 357.
Engine Accessories Inspect. Aircraft systems that supply If immersed, each event,
either fuel or oil to the engine must be before further flight.
thoroughly cleaned, including oil cooler,
lines,valves, etc. to prevent
contamination of the engine after
reinstallation.
Propellers Inspect and repair as necessary If immersed, each event,
in an authorized propeller shop. before further flight.
Hydraulic System Replace hydraulic powerpak. If immersed, each event,
Electrical Systems Replace all circuit breakers and If immersed, each event,
switches (except sealed landing gear before further flight.
limit switches).
Replace all solenoids, relays and
master contactors.
Replace battery.
1E7 5-50-00 FebPAGE 5

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Electrical Systems (cont.) Disassemble all connectors; clean
and inspect for corrosion. Replace all
corroded or pitted connectors. Inspect
for wire corrosion at connector.
Check all harness assemblies for
entrapped contaminants. Clean and
check for short circuits.
Remove electric motors and electric
pumps.
Remove all potted solid state electrical
equipment such as flap time delay relays,
alternator inop. switches, windshield heat
timers, low fuel warning switches, etc.
Clean, dry and bench check per
appropriate maintenance manual.
Replace de-icer timers. Clean and check
prop de-icer brush holders.
Clean and check voltage regulators and
overvoltage relays. Replace as necessary
Clean and check aIl strobe light power
supplies. Refer to appropriate
maintenance manual.
Replace all fuel senders, trim tab sender
pots, flap position senders, etc.
Clean, inspect and check heated
pitot systems.
Inspect and check harness, connections, Each occurrence,
and equipment for high voltage damage, before further flight.
burns and insulation degradation. Replace
or overhaul as required. Consult with
appropriate avionics vendor(s) for
inspection and operational checks. Bench
check alternator and voltage regulator(s)
(See 24-30-00).
Autopilot System Bench check in accordance with If immersed, each event,
appropriate maintenance manual. before further flight.
Pay particular attention to clutch settings.
PAGE 6
Feb 28/07 5-50-00 1E8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Vacuum and Pitot-Static Replace gyros. If immersed, each event,
Systems before further flight.
Replace filters.
Clean and inspect all lines, and pitot
and static vents.
Clean and check all regulating valves.
Remove and inspect engine driven and
auxiliary vacuum pumps.
Induction and Bleed Air Clean and inspect for silt and If immersed, each event,
Systems corrosion. Check all ducts and gaskets. before further flight.
Replace as necessary.
Clean and inspect all heat shrouds
and ducting.
Fuel Systems Remove access panels and clean fuel If immersed, each event,
tank (wet wing) and clean all associated before further flight.
lines and pumps and header tanks.
Clean and inspect all fuel tank vents,
cap vents and vent lines.
Instruments Clean and inspect instruments. Bench If immersed, each event,
check per appropriate maintenance before further flight.
manual.
Heating and Ventilating Replace blowers. If immersed, each event,
Systems before further flight.
Clean and inspect all distribution boxes,
ducting and valves.
Inspect and check system control cables.
Replace corroded or binding cables.
Clean and inspect air conditioning
evaporator, condenser, and compressor.
Pressurization Systems Remove and replace all system controls If immersed, each event,
and valves. before further flight.
Oxygen Systems Disconnect all lines from source and If immersed, each event,
outlets; clean all fittings and lines before further flight.
per MIL-I-5585A.
Remove and clean regulator valve per
appropriate Scott publication.
Replace pressure gauge.
Replace oxygen generator units.
1E9 5-50-00 FebPAGE 7

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Avionics Systems Replace avionics. If immersed, each event,
Clean and inspect antennas
and connectors.
Avionics Systems (cont.) Inspect and check harness, connections, Each occurrence,
and equipment for high voltage damage, before further flight.
burns and insulation degradation. Replace
or overhaul as required. Consult with
appropriate avionics vendor(s) for
inspection and operational checks. Bench
check alternator and voltage regulator(s)
(See 24-30-00).
Insulation and Upholstery Remove all wet insulation and upholstery. If immersed, each event,
Thoroughly clean and dry (or replace) before further flight.
to ensure corrosion is not promoted in
adjacent structures.
PAGE 8
Feb 28/07 5-50-00 1E10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1E11 5-50-00 FebPAGE 9

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 10
Feb 28/07 5-50-00 1E12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER
6
DIMENSIONS AND
AREAS
1E13
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1E14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 6
CHAPTER CHAPTER


2 Feb 28/07
6-00-00 1 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07
5 Feb 28/07
6 Feb 28/07
1E15 6 - LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES PAGE 1

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 6 - LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES 1E16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 6 - DIMENSIONS AND AREAS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
GENERAL 6-00-00 1 1E19

Leading Particulars and Principal Dimensions 2 1E20
Station References 4 1E22
Access and Inspection Provisions 5 1E23
1E17 6 - CONTENTS FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 6 - CONTENTS 1E18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GENERAL
The principal airplane dimensions are shown in Figure 1, and the leading particulars/principal
dimensions are listed in Chart 1. The airplane serial number is located on the Manufacturers Aircraft
Association (MAA) plate, which is located below the tailcone at approximately F.S. 311.50. The engine
serial number plate is located on the right side of the engine between cylinders 1 and 3.
14.5 '
(4.42 m)
Wing Area (sq ft) 175.0

Min. Turning Radius (ft) 35.4
(from pivot point to wing tip)
7.43 ' 11.59 '

(2.28 m) (3.53 m)
43.0 '
(13.11 m)
4.58 '
(1.38 m) 80.0 " DIA
(2.03 m)
4.42 '
(1.35 m) 4.5˚
Dihedral
6.17 '
(1.88 m)
12.3 '
(3.7 m)
28.9 '
(8.81 m)
11.3 '
(3.4 m)
5.17 '
2.25 ' (1.57 m)
(.68 m)
8.04 ' Static Ground Line

(2.45 m)
Three View (PA-46-350P)

Figure 1
1E19 6-00-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1. Leading Particulars and Principal Dimensions

Chart 1 (Sheet 1 of 2)
Leading Particulars and Principal Dimensions
MODEL PA-46-350P
ENGINE
Manufacturer Textron Lycoming Motors

Model TIO-540-AE2A
FAA Type Certificate

Rated Horsepower (Sea Level) 350
Rated RPM 2,500
Oil Specification Refer to 12-10-00 and latest

revision of Textron Lycoming
Service Bulletin
“Fuel and Oil Grades”.
Oil Sump Capacity 12.0 quarts
Fuel Specification 100 or 100LL (Aviation Grade)

Fuel Injection System Textron Lycoming Motors
Magnetos (Pressurized) Slick

Left 6363
Right 6360
Magneto Timing 20° BTC
Magneto Breaker Point Clearance .008 - .012
(Using “E”-gap method)
Spark Plugs (Shielded): Refer to latest revision of

Textron Lycoming
Service Bulletin No. 1042
Spark Plug Gap Setting .019
Firing Order 1, 4, 5, 2, 3, 6
Starter (24 volt)

Kelly Aerospace (S/N’s 4636001 thru 46360402) MHB 4016 or MHB 6016
Sky Tec (S/N’s 4636403 and up) 149NL
Alternator - (2) Belt Driven (24 volt)

Kelly Aerospace (70 amp) (S/N’s 4636001 thru 46360131) ALU-8421LS
Kelly Aerospace (75 amp) (S/N’s 4636132 and up) ES4039-LS
Voltage Regulator (2)

Lamar Inc. B-00382-1
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 6-00-00 1E20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Chart 1 (Sheet 2 of 2)
Leading Particulars and Principal Dimensions
MODEL PA-46-350P
PROPELLER
Manufacturer Hartzell
Type Constant Speed
Hub HC-I2YR-1BF HC-I3YR-1E *
Blade F8074 Standard 7890K

F8074K Optional
Diameter (Inches)
Minimum 79 80
Maximum 80 80
Blade Angle, Low Pitch (High RPM) 17.6° ± 0.2° 13.65° ± 0.15°
Blade Angle, High Pitch (Low RPM) 40.0° to 41.0° 38.7° ± 0.5°
Governor Model Hartzell - V-5-2
FUEL SYSTEM
Fuel Tank Capacity (Gal.) 61 per wing
Total Fuel Onboard (Gal.) 122
Total Usable Fuel (Gal.) 120
Fuel
Minimum Grade 100 / 100LL (Aviation Grade)
LANDING GEAR
Type Retractable - Hydraulic
Shock Strut Design Combination Air and Oil
Turning Radius 35.4 ft
Nose Gear Travel 30° Left and Right
Wheel, Nose McCauley D-30500, Cleveland 40-77B

Wheel, Main Parker Hannifin 40-120C
Brakes Cleveland 30-83A
Tire, Main 6.00 x 6, 8 ply rating
Tire, Nose 5.00 x 5, 6 ply rating
Tire Pressures Main - 55 psi
Nose - 50 psi
* - Optional on S/N’s 4636132 and up.
1E21 6-00-00 FebPAGE 3

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2. Station References
To locate various airplane components that require maintenance and servicing, a method using wing
fuselage station, wing station, buttock line and waterline designations is frequently used in this manual.
Fuselage stations (F.S.), buttock lines (B.L.), and waterlines (W. L.) are reference points measured by
inches in the vertical or horizontal direction from a given reference line. These points indicate station
locations of airplane structural members.
F.S.
341.98
F.S.
329.41
F.S. F.S.
F.S. 263.75 323.14
F.S. 171.40 W.L.
F.S. F.S. W.L.
F.S. 158.30 153.70
198.00 226.30 F.S. 148.26
117.00 F.S.
F.S. 164.80 257.70 W.L.
F.S. F.S. F.S.
42.00 214.90 147.23
F.S. 100.00 135.90 F.S. F.S. F.S. F.S.
F.S. 79.00 186.30 241.50 273.75 331.27
32.990
W.L. W.L.
67.00 88.56
W.L.
84.31
W.L. F.S.
55.00 F.S. 344.39
282.00 F.S.
W.L. F.S. F.S. F.S.
F.S. 317.48
46.00 F.S. 207.00 233.90 265.80
178.60 F.S. F.S.
132.00 F.S.
F.S. F.S. 311.40 326.00
108.00 189.60 F.S.
218.60 249.60
B.L. B.L.
00.00 37.50
B.L.
6.62 B.L. W.S. W.S. W.S.
B.L. 29.00 93.00 115.25 257.50
87.00
W.S. W.S. W.S. W.S. W.S. W.S. W.S.
51.54 107.56 134.00 156.00 182.00 209.00 240.00
B.L. B.L.
37.36 86.00
B.L.
80.31
W.S.
258.75
Station References
Figure 2
PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 6-00-00 1E22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. Access and Inspection Provisions

Airplane access and inspection provisions are shown in Figure 3. Components to be serviced or
inspected through each opening are identified in the illustration by an assigned index reference number.
All access plates and panels are secured by metal fasteners or screws.
NOTE: Review Consumable Materials, 91-10-00, for sealant requirements before removing any access
plates or panels.
Gain access to floor panel attachment screws by removing seats and carpeting. To enter aft section of
the fuselage, remove access panels on the lower side of the fuselage, aft of station 265.00.
14 15
16
1
TOP VIEW
2 2 13
3
3 17 12
12
BOTTOM VIEW
4
5
10
8 9 11
7
6
SIDE VIEW
1. Elevator Trim Jackscrew 6. Propeller Attaching Bolts

Elevator Up Stop 7. Alternator(s)
Elevator Sector Deicer Brush Block
Rudder Sector 8. Engine
Rudder Stops Oil Filter
Emergency Locator Transmitter Fuel Filter
Elevator Cable Turnbuckles 9. Battery, External Power Supply Plug
Condenser and Condenser Fan Brake Reservoir
2. Collector Tank Vacuum Regulator(s)
Main Landing Gear Actuator 10. ELT Antenna
Flap Bellcranks 11. Elevator Trim Tab Adjustment
Up Limit Switch 12. Fuel Tank Access Cover (Wet Wing)
Squat Switch (L/H side) 13. Fuel Transmitters
3. Strobe Power Supply 14. Oil Dipstick
4. Nose Landing Gear Actuator 15. Hydraulic Pump/Reservoir
Steering Bellcrank 16. Annunciator Dimmer Assy.
Steering Bungee 17. O. A. T. Sensor
5. Induction Air Filter
Access and Inspection Provisions

Figure 3
1E23 6-00-00 FebPAGE 5

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 6
Feb 28/07 6-00-00 1E24
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER
7
LIFTING AND
SHORING
1F1
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1F2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 7
CHAPTER CHAPTER


2 Feb 28/07
7-10-00 1 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07
1F3 7 - LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES PAGE 1

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 7 - LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES 1F4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 7 - LIFTING AND SHORING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
JACKING 7-10-00 1 1F7

General 1 1F7
Jacking 1 1F7
1F5 7 - CONTENTS FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 7 - CONTENTS 1F6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
JACKING
1. General
Jacking the airplane is necessary to service the landing gear and other operations. The jacking operation
can be performed by using tripod jacks; in other situations (emergency, post-accident lifting), slings or
airbags should be used.
If wing or fuselage shoring is required, make sure the support is contoured to conform with the surface it
is supporting.
2. Jacking
CAUTION: DISABLE LIFT DETECTOR, WINDSHIELD HEAT, AND PITOT HEAT PRIOR TO JACKING
AIRCRAFT.
CAUTION: WHEN THE AIRCRAFT HAS OPTIONAL RADAR POD ON RIGHT WING ENSURE JACK
DOES NOT COME IN CONTACT WITH RADAR POD
A. Align jacks under wing with respective pads on the wing main spar.
CAUTION: ENOUGH SUPPORT BALLAST MUST BE ADDED TO THE TAILSTAND TO
PREVENT THE AIRPLANE FROM TIPPING FORWARD ON ITS NOSE SECTION.
MAKE SURE TO ACCOUNT FOR SOMEONE IN THE FUSELAGE IF APPLICABLE.
B. Attach tail stand with approximately 400 pounds ballast to the tail skid.
C. Carefully raise jacks until all three wheels are clear of surface.
Jacking Arrangement
Figure 1
1F7 7-10-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 7-10-00 1F8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER
8
LEVELING AND
WEIGHING
1F9
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1F10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 8
CHAPTER CHAPTER


2 Feb 28/07
8-10-00 1 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07
8-20-00 1 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 8 - LEVELING AND WEIGHING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
WEIGHING 8-10-00 1 1F15

LEVELING 8-20-00 1 1F17

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
WEIGHING
The airplane may be weighed by the following procedure:

A. Position a scale and a ramp in front of each of the three wheels.
B. Secure the scales from rolling forward, tow the airplane up onto the scales and block the wheels.
C. Remove the ramp so as not to interfere with the scales.
D. If the airplane is to be weighed for weight and balance computations, level the airplane per
instructions given in the paragraph titled Leveling.
E. Fill engine with oil to full capacity.
F. Place pilot and copilot seats in fifth notch aft of forward position. Put flaps in the fully retracted
position and all control surfaces in the neutral position. Tow bar should be in the proper location and
all entrance and baggage doors should be closed.
G. Weigh the airplane inside a closed building to prevent errors in scale readings due to wind.
H. With the airplane level and brakes released, record the weight shown on each scale. Deduct the
tare weight, if any, from each reading.
Weighing
Figure 1
1F15 8-10-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 8-10-00 1F16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
LEVELING
The airplanes are provided with a means for longitudinal and lateral leveling. The airplanes may be
leveled while on jacks, during the weighing procedure while the wheels are on scales, or while the
wheels are on the ground. To level the airplane for purposes of weighing or rigging, the following
procedures may be used:
NOTE: Always level the airplane laterally first, then level the airplane longitudinally.
A. To laterally level the airplane, place a level across the forward edge of the rear baggage
compartment. If the airplane is resting on its gear, raise or lower one wing tip by deflating the main
gear tire on the high side of the airplane until the bubble of the level is centered. If the airplane is on
jacks, adjust either wing jack until the bubble of the level is centered.
Leveling Laterally
Figure 1
1F17 8-20-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B. To longitudinally level the airplane, place a level against the centerline of the bottom fuselage skin,
behind the forward pressure bulkhead and adjust the jacks until the level is centered. Should the
airplane be either on scales or on the floor, first insert a 3.4 inch spacer on each of the main gear
struts and a 3.0 inch spacer on the nose gear strut. Level airplane by deflating (or inflating, as
required) the nose wheel tire to center the bubble in the level.
Leveling Longitudinally
Figure 2
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 8-20-00 1F18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1F19 8-20-00 FebPAGE 3

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 8-20-00 1F20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER
9
TOWING AND TAXIING
1F21
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1F22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 9
CHAPTER CHAPTER


2 Feb 28/07
9-00-00 1 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07
9-10-00 1 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07
9-20-00 1 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 9 - TOWING AND TAXIING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
GENERAL 9-00-00 1 1G3
TOWING 9-10-00 1 1G5
TAXIING 9-20-00 1 1G7
1G1 9 - CONTENTS FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 9 - CONTENTS 1G2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GENERAL
Before towing or taxiing airplane, ground personnel must be informed by a qualified pilot or other
personnel about tow turning limits of nose gear, engine starting and shutdown procedures, and any
other system functions required to properly and safely move the airplane.
NOTES:
1. Inner Main Gear 7 ft 8 inches

2. Nose Gear 16 ft 1 inch
3. Outer Main Gear 20 ft 1 inch
4. Outer Wing Tip 35 ft 5 inches
Pivot Point
2
27 ' 6 " 30˚
3
27 ' 10 "
49 ' 4 "
70 ' 10 "
Turning Radius and Limits

Figure 1
1G3 9-00-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 9-00-00 1G4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TOWING
CAUTION: WHEN TOWING WITH POWER EQUIPMENT, DO NOT TURN THE NOSE GEAR IN
EITHER DIRECTION BEYOND ITS STEERING RADIUS LIMITS AS THIS WILL RESULT
IN DAMAGE TO THE NOSE GEAR AND STEERING MECHANISM.
The airplane may be moved by using the nose wheel steering bar that is stowed in the forward baggage
area or by using power equipment that will not damage or cause excess strain to the nose gear steering
assembly. The stem on the bar is inserted in the hollow of the nose wheel axle at its right side.
In the event towing lines are necessary, lines (rope) should be attached to both main gear struts as high
up on the tubes as possible. Lines should be long enough to clear the nose and/or tail by not less than
15 feet, and a qualified person should ride in the pilot’s seat to maintain control by use of the brakes.
1G5 9-10-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 9-10-00 1G6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TAXIING
Before attempting to taxi the airplane, ground personnel should be checked out by a qualified pilot or
other responsible person. Engine starting and shut-down procedures should be covered as well. When it
is ascertained that the propeller back blast and taxi areas are clear, apply power to start the taxi roll and
perform the following checks:
CAUTION: DO NOT OPERATE THE ENGINE AT HIGH RPM WHEN RUNNING UP OR TAXIING
OVER GROUND CONTAINING LOOSE STONES, GRAVEL OR ANY LOOSE MATERIAL
THAT MAY CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE PROPELLER BLADES.
CAUTION: OBSERVE WING CLEARANCES WHEN TAXIING NEAR BUILDINGS OR OTHER
STATIONARY OBJECTS. IF POSSIBLE, STATION A GUIDE OUTSIDE THE AIRPLANE TO
OBSERVE.
CAUTION: WHEN TAXIING ON UNEVEN GROUND, AVOID HOLES AND RUTS.
A. Taxi forward a few feet and apply brakes to determine their effectiveness.
B. Taxi with propeller set in low pitch, high RPM setting.
C. While taxiing, make slight turns to ascertain the effectiveness of steering.
1G7 9-20-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 9-20-00 1G8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER
10
PARKING AND
MOORING
1G9
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1G10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 10
CHAPTER CHAPTER


2 Feb 28/07
10-10-00 1 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07
10-20-00 1 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07
1G11 10 - LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES PAGE 1

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 10 - LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES 1G12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 10 - PARKING AND MOORING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SUBJECT SECTION PAGE grid no.
PARKING 10-10-00 1 1G15

Parking 1 1G15
Locking Airplane 1 1G15
MOORING 10-20-00 1 1G17

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PARKING
1. Parking
When parking the airplane, ensure it is sufficiently protected against adverse weather conditions and
presents no danger to other aircraft. When parking the airplane for any length of time or overnight, it
must be moored according to sub-system section on mooring below.
NOTE: Care should be taken when setting brakes that are overheated, or when setting brakes during
cold weather when moisture can freeze the brakes.
2. Locking Airplane
The cabin and baggage compartment doors are provided with a key lock on the outside. These locks use
the same key. A separate key is provided for the optional locking gas cap.
1G15 10-10-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 10-10-00 1G16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
MOORING
CAUTION: WHEN MOORING, USE SQUARE OR BOWLINE KNOTS. DO NOT USE SLIP KNOTS.
The airplane is moored to ensure its security and protection under various weather conditions. To moor
the airplane, use the following procedures:
A. Head airplane into wind, if possible.
B. Block wheels.
C. Lock aileron and elevator controls with front seat belts.
CAUTION: WHEN USING ROPE OF NON-SYNTHETIC MATERIAL, LEAVE SUFFICIENT SLACK
TO AVOID DAMAGE TO AIRPLANE.
D. Secure wing tie down ropes to retractable tie down rings (located on underside of wings, outboard
of the main gear) and to tail tie down ring at approximately 45 degrees.
NOTE: Additional preparations for high winds include using tie down ropes from the landing gear
forks, and securing the rudder.
E. Install pitot tube cover.
1G17 10-20-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 10-20-00 1G18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER
11
PLACARDS
AND MARKINGS
1G19
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1G20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 11
CHAPTER CHAPTER


2 Feb 28/07
11-20-00 1 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07
5 Feb 28/07
6 Feb 28/07
7 Feb 28/07
8 Feb 28/07
11-30-00 1 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07
5 Feb 28/07
6 Feb 28/07
7 Feb 28/07
8 Feb 28/07
9 Feb 28/07
10 Feb 28/07
11 Feb 28/07
12 Feb 28/07
13 Feb 28/07
14 Feb 28/07
15 Feb 28/07
16 Feb 28/07
17 Feb 28/07
18 Feb 28/07

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 11 - PLACARDS AND MARKINGS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
EXTERIOR PLACARDS AND MARKINGS 11-20-00 1 1H1
INTERIOR PLACARDS AND MARKINGS 11-30-00 1 1H9

Meyercord Decals 14 1G1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EXTERIOR PLACARDS AND MARKINGS
The airplane nameplate placard (i.e. - Item 7, Figure 1) is located below the tailcone at approximately
F.S. 311.50. The placard identifies the airplane by its model number and serial number. Should a
question arise concerning the care of the airplane, it is important to include the airplane serial number in
any correspondence to Piper Aircraft, Inc.
NOTE: Any time an airplane is repainted or touched up, inspect all placards to ensure that they are not
covered with paint, are legible, and securely attached.
NOTE: Item numbers refer to Decal and Placard detail views shown in Sheets 3 thru 6.
89502 AY
1 1
2, 3 2, 3
TOP VIEW
14 6
1 7
SIDE VIEW
Exterior Placards and Markings
Figure 1 (Sheet 1 of 6)
1H1 11-20-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
89502 AY
9 9
10
BOTTOM VIEW
11 11
12, 13
FRONT VIEW

PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 11-20-00 1H2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
DURING FUELING AND DEFUELING OPERATIONS,

STATIC VENTS
ATTACH GROUNDING CABLE TO GROUND ATTACH
KEEP CLEAN
PIN LOCATED ON MAIN STRUT.
Decal #1 Decal #2
GRADE GRADE
100LL 100
Decal #3
* RECOMMENDED SAE GRADE OIL

AVERAGE
AIR TEMP.
ALL TEMPS
MIL-L-22851
ASHLESS DISPERSANT
15W-50W OR 20W-50W
NO
ABOVE 80° F 60
ABOVE 60° F
30° F TO 90° F
0° F TO 70° F
40 OR 50
40
30, 40 OR 20W-40
STEP
BELOW 10° F 30 OR 20W-30
* REFER TO LATEST REV OF LYCOMING S.I. 1014
Placard #4 Placard #5

1H3 11-20-00 FebPAGE 3

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Stencil #6
(89910-2)
(S/N’s 4636001
thru 4636363)
(105030-2)
(S/N’s 4636364 & UP)
Placard #7
(S/N’s 4636001 thru 4636374) (S/N’s 4636375 & UP)
TC PC TC PC
MANUFACTURED BY
THE NEW PIPER AIRCRAFT, INC.
VERO BEACH, FLORIDA
VERO BEACH, FLORIDA
MODEL MODEL
SERIAL NO. SERIAL NO.
PLATE NO. PLATE NO.
PIPER PART NO. 100697-3 PIPER PART NO. 100697-004

PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 11-20-00 1H4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
DRAIN
FUEL SUMP
DRAIN
Decal #9
Decal #8
GROUND ATTACH POINT

FUEL FILTER
Decal #11
DRAIN - PUSH
Decal #10
STRUT AND TIRE

SERVICE INSTRUCTIONS
PLACE AIRPLANE ON JACKS AND EXTEND STRUT COMPLETELY.

RELEASE AIR AND REMOVE AIR VALVE. SLOWLY COMPRESS THE
STRUT. SLOWLY FILL COMPRESSED STRUT WITH MIL-H-5606
HYDRAULIC FLUID THROUGH THE FILLER OPENING UNTIL IT
REACHES THE TOP OF THE FILLER PLUG HOLE. MANUALLY
COMPRESS AND EXTEND STRUT SEVERAL TIMES TO REMOVE
TRAPPED AIR. ADD FLUID EACH TIME IF REQUIRED. REPLACE
VALVE AND, WITH NOSE GEAR STILL CLEAR OF GROUND, INFLATE
STRUT TO 110 PSI AIR PRESSURE. INFLATE NOSE TIRE TO 50 PSI
AIR PRESSURE. REMOVE JACKS FROM AIRPLANE (NORMAL NOSE
GEAR STRUT EXTENSION IS 1.70 INCHES WITH APPROX. 720 LBS.
STATIC LOAD ON NOSE GEAR).
Placard #12

1H5 11-20-00 FebPAGE 5

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TURN
LIMIT
Decal #13
Decal #14
(S/N’s 4636349 thru 4636363 only)

PAGE 6
Feb 28/07 11-20-00 1H6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1H7 11-20-00 Feb PAGE

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 8
Feb 28/07 11-20-00 1H8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTERIOR PLACARDS AND MARKINGS
89502 AY
83985 R
1B
6
2
3
1A
5
7
4
TOP VIEW
11
20 8, 9, 10
7
FRONT VIEW SIDE VIEW
(RIGHT WING ONLY)
19
21
12
O
P H
E I
N G
I
P N H
O C
R
W I
E D
R P
L
R E
L
E O
V P L
E
R E O
S L W
I E
D R I
L
E D
L
R E
E
V
E
R S
S T
E O
T P
H
E
R
13 18
16
14 OR 14A
14A
17
15
FLIGHT DECK VIEW
Interior Placards and Markings

1H9 11-30-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Decal #1A Decal #1B

(100700-62) (83998-2)
EMERGENCY OXYGEN EMERGENCY OXYGEN

IN DRAWER UNDER SEAT IN DRAWER UNDER SEAT
(AISLE ACCESS)
PULL MASK OUT OF DRAWER FULLY PULL MASK OUT OF DRAWER FULLY
AT FULL EXTENSION GIVE CORD A TUG AT FULL EXTENSION GIVE CORD A TUG
MAXIMUM DURATION — 15 MINS MAXIMUM DURATION — 15 MINS
SEE POH SEE POH

NO SMOKING WHILE IN USE NO SMOKING WHILE IN USE
100700-062
EMERGENCY EXIT
REMOVE GLASS
Decal #2
TABLE MUST BE STOWED Decal #3

DURING TAKE-OFF & LANDING
FLUID LEVEL LINE
BRAKE FLUID RESERVOIR

FILL TO FLUID LEVEL LINE WITH PETROLEUM
BASE (RED) HYDRAULIC OIL *
* UNIVIS #40 OR MIL-H-5606 OR EQUIVALENT
Placard #4

PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 11-30-00 1H10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EXTERNAL POWER
28 VOLTS D.C. FIRE
TURN MASTER SWITCH
AND ALL EQUIP. OFF EXTINGUISHER
BEFORE INSERTING
OR REMOVING PLUG.
Decal #6
Decal #5
MAXIMUM BAGGAGE THIS COMPARTMENT 100 LBS.
Decal #7
PULL LATCH
OPEN — ROTATE HANDLE UP
CLOSE — ROTATE HANDLE DOWN

INSURE PIN WINDOWS GREEN
Decal #8
INSURE PIN
OPEN CLOSE
WINDOWS GREEN
Decal #9
OPEN
COURTESY LIGHT
RESET
Decal #11
Decal #10

1H11 11-30-00 FebPAGE 3

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
POSITION STROBE LANDING TAXI ICE
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
LTNG INSTR ANNUN AVIONICS

PROT PANEL DIMMING
INTERIOR LIGHTS
VENT PROP STALL PITOT SURFACE WNDSHLD HEAT

DEFOG HEAT HEAT HEAT DE-ICE CONTROL POWER
ICE PROTECTION
Decal #12
(Typical)
EMERG L BOOST R BOOST FUEL FUEL ELEC ENGINE ENGINE

FUEL PUMPS QTY FLOW TAC GAGES MONITOR
ENGINE SYSTEMS
TURN LANDING GEAR HYDRAULIC PUMP STALL FUEL

COORD INDICATION WARNING CONTROL POWER WARN MGT
FLIGHT SYSTEMS
ALTERNATOR MAP FLAP FLAP HOUR

NO. 1 NO. 2 LIGHT MOTOR WARN METER
CABIN ENGINE CO-PILOT CABIN CABIN AIR CONDITIONING

PRESS START TURN LIGHTS FANS CONTROL POWER
DUMP COORD
Decal #13
(Typical)

PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 11-30-00 1H12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
STATIC DRAIN
PUSH
INDUCTION
Decal #14 AIR
PITOT STATIC STATIC PRIMARY

DRAIN DRAIN DRAIN
LEFTHAND SIDE
PITOT STATIC
DRAIN DRAIN
RIGHTHAND SIDE
ALTERNATE
Decal #14A
(S/N’s 4636375 and up)
TRANSFERS OR DECALS
(104349-023) PITOT DRAIN/STATIC DRAIN
Decal #15
(104349-025) STATIC DRAIN (100700-065)
(104349-026) PITOT DRAIN (100700-066)
DME 1 SPEAKER NAV 1 COMM 1 COMM 2 NAV 2 HEAD SET DME 2

AMP AMP
RMI ENCODER 1 XPDR 1 ADF 1 ADF 2 XPDR 2 ENCODER 2 GPS
PITCH AUTO COMPASS RADAR STORM RADAR

TRIM PILOT ALT SCOPE
AVIONICS LORAN BUS TIE FLITE INV

COOLING PHONE
Decal #16
(Typical)

1H13 11-30-00 FebPAGE 5

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
O I R
P N I
E C C
N R H
I
N
C T
R P
H M
R D E
R I
F O N L
O X
R P E
T T
I U V
C T R N
L R
T P T
E E
I M R
O C D L U I
N L
O
E
C
E
A
P M
S R N
E
D
E
C
R
L NOSE R
Silkscreen #17

PAGE 6
Feb 28/07 11-30-00 1H14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
THE MARKINGS AND PLACARDS INSTALLED IN THIS AIRPLANE CONTAIN OPERATING

LIMITATIONS WHICH MUST BE COMPLIED WITH WHEN OPERATING THIS AIRPLANE
IN THE NORMAL CATEGORY. OTHER OPERATING LIMITATIONS WHICH MUST BE
COMPLIED WITH WHEN OPERATING THIS AIRPLANE IN THIS CATEGORY ARE CONTAINED
IN THE AIRPLANE FLIGHT MANUAL. NO AEROBATIC MANEUVERS, INCLUDING SPINS,
APPROVED.
THIS AIRCRAFT APPROVED FOR V.F.R., I.F.R., DAY AND NIGHT ICING FLIGHT
WHEN EQUIPPED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE AIRPLANE FLIGHT MANUAL.
WARNING
AIR CONDITIONER MUST BE OFF TO INSURE NORMAL TAKEOFF CLIMB PERFORMANCE.
WARNING
TURN OFF STROBE LIGHTS WHEN IN CLOSE PROXIMITY TO GROUND OR DURING FLIGHT
THROUGH CLOUD, FOG OR HAZE.
PRESSURIZED LANDING NOT APPROVED.
Placard #18
CAUTION
COMPASS
CAL. MAY
BE IN ERROR
WITH ELECT.
EQUIPMENT
OTHER THAN
AVIONICS ON.
Placard #19
MAX WEIGHT 5 LBS (2.2 KGS)

Placard #20
(100700-037)
(Mounted inside radome door.)
ALTERNATE STATIC SOURCE

(LOCATED PILOTS SIDE BELOW PANEL) See Figure 2,
UP - ALTERNATE Decal #4, for
DOWN - PRIMARY S/N’s 4636001
(SEE POH SECTION 5 FOR ALTERNATE thru 4636374
STATIC SYSTEM CORRECTION)
Placard #21
(100700-064)
(Mounted below pilot’s side window.)
(S/N’s 4636375 and up)
1H15 11-30-00 FebPAGE 7

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 8
Feb 28/07 11-30-00 1H16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Interior Placards and Markings Effectivity

Figure 2 (Sheet 1 of 8) 4636001 thru 4636131
1H17 11-30-00 FebPAGE 9

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Effectivity
4636132 thru 4636313, Interior Placards and Markings
less 4636299 Figure 2 (Sheet 2 of 8)
PAGE 10
Feb 28/07 11-30-00 1H18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Effectivity
Interior Placards and Markings 4636299,
1H19 11-30-00 Feb

PAGE 11
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6
2
24 38
21 28 39
25
37 OFF
ON
TEST
OFF ATTITUDE
MFD
PFD #1 PFD #2
AIRSPEED
(OPT)
COUPLED
P
F
D
UNCOUPLED
ALTITUDE
S-TEC A/P GMA-340

GI-106 ADF IND.
(OPT) GNS-430 GNS-430
KRA-10A
(OPT)
ADF REC. (OPT)
DME (OPT)
330 XPONDER 1 330 XPNDR 2
(OPT)
7 16
1 12 3
40
5 11
22 8
S/N’s 4636375 and up
NOTE: Part numbers shown in Sheets 4 thru 8 are reference only. See parts catalog to order.
VA 133 KIAS AT 4300 LBS. VLO 165 DN, 126 UP

STALL (SEE AFM) VLE 195 MAX
TEST
Placard #2
Placard #1 (See appropriate POH for specific limitations.)
(84967-100) (84967-093 - S/N’s 4636001 thru 4636020,
84967-209 - S/N’s 4636021 thru 4636195,
84967-258 - S/N’s 4636196 thru 4636374,
84967-336 - S/N’s 4636375 and up.)

PAGE 12
Feb 28/07 11-30-00 1H20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TIE BUSS
ALTR NON BAT TERY ALTR

NO. 1 ESSEN NO. 2
TIE BUSS
MAIN AVIONICS AVIONICS MAIN
1 2
MAIN MAIN
S/N'S 4636001 THRU 4636020 ONLY

(84967-091)
AVIONICS AVIONICS
1 2
TIE BUSS
BAT TERY MAIN ALTR AVIONICS

NO. 1 1
ALTR NON BAT TERY ALTR

NO. 1 ESSEN NO. 2
NON MAIN ALTR AVIONICS
ESSEN NO. 2 2
S/N'S 4636021 THRU 4636374 ONLY

(84967-186 - S/N's 4636021 thru 4636131,
84967-228 - S/N's 4636132 thru 4636374.) S/N'S 4636375 AND UP
(84967-337)
Decal #3
ALTERNATE STATIC SOURCE See Figure 1,

(LOCATED BELOW PANEL) Placard #21, for
UP–ALTERNATE S/N’s 4636375
DOWN–PRIMARY and up.
Decal #4
(84967-022)
(S/N’s 4636001 thru 4636374 only)

1H21 11-30-00 Feb

PAGE 13
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1 2 3 4 5 6
DIMMING CYLINDER NUMBER
SWITCH PANEL AVIONICS Decal #9

(84967-109)
(In S/N’s 4636132 & up, cut decal in
half and install above and below
indicator.)
Decal #5
(84967-101)
C.H.T.
CYCLE
Decal #10
(84967-110)
N XXXXX
Plate #6
(19099-000) LANDING
GEAR
UP
CABIN PRESS
PULL OFF
Decal #7
(84967-107) DOWN
Decal #11
(84967-111)
LEFT RIGHT
FUEL SELECTOR
OFF LEFT RIGHT
OFF
FUEL SELECTOR
S/N’S 4636001 thru 4636374 original equipment S/N’S 4636375 and up;
(84967-024) Service replacement for 4636001 thru 4636374
(84967-024)
Decal #8

PAGE 14
Feb 28/07 11-30-00 1H22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EMERGENCY GEAR EXTENSION

PULL TO RELEASE. SEE A.F.M. FLAPS
BEFORE RE-ENGAGEMENT.
Decal #15
Decal #12 (84967-002)
(84967-015)
AMP
ALTR DEFROST CABIN TEMP
#1 PULL ON PULL HOT
Decal #16
SYST
0 (84967-097)
VOLT
10
AMP
20
ALTR
#2
36 PRESS TO
TEST
Decal #13 Decal #14 Decal #17

(84967-098) (84967-099) (84967-106)
DO NOT EXCEED
36" MP
BELOW 2400 RPM
DO NOT EXCEED
32" MP 36" MP BELOW 2400 RPM
BELOW 2300 RPM 32" MP BELOW 2300 RPM
S/N’s 4636001 thru 4636020 only S/N’s 4636021 and up

(84967-195) (84967-208)
Decal #18

1H23 11-30-00 Feb

PAGE 15
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
HOLD
NAV 1 NAV 2 PARK
TRIM BRAKE
DME
PULL
SELECT
(84967-244) YAW (35669-081)
DAMPER
EADI DISPLAY Placard #21

PUSH ON / OFF
DOWN (84967-256 - S/N's 4636299
and 4636314 thru 4636374, Placard #23
Placard #20 84967-317 - S/N's 4636375 and up) (84967-216)
(84967-260)
ELEV. TRIM GROUND
(84967-215 - S/N's 4636299 and

S ON G CLEAR
4636314 thru 4636374) T Y Placard #26

OFF OFF (84967-241)
ELEV. TRIM
B R
PUSH ON/OFF Y TEST O 28 VDC
5 AMPS MAX
(84967-316 - S/N's 4636375 & up)
Placard #24 (84967-267) (84967-259)
COUPLED
STORMSCOPE NOT TO BE USED FOR
THUNDERSTORM AREA PENETRATION
RMI P
F
NAV 2 D
F 0°
Placard #28 UNCOUPLED
L
Placard #33 A
(84967-049)
(84967-243) Placard #37 P KIAS
(84967-312) S
STORMSCOPE FD 165 10°
RADAR
ALT PLX ADJ TAS
CLEAR 130 20°
Placard #31 Placard #34 ON
Placard #29 36°
(84967-240) (84967-247) STBY 116
(84967-268)
TEST
ARGUS
ADF Placard #38 Placard #40
XPNDR
1
(84967-313) (84967-335)
A/P
Placard #35
NAV 2
(84967-238)
XPNDR Placard #32
2 (84967-242) RADIO TOTAL USABLE FUEL CAPACITY 120 U.S. GALLONS (454 LITERS)
MASTER
Placard #30 Placard #36 Placard #39
(84967-270) (84967-239) (104349-027)
PAGE 16
Feb 28/07 11-30-00 1H24
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Meyercord Decals (PIR-PPS-65104, Rev. G.)
Decals installed on the instrument panel are Meyercord type manufactured by Mark-It Company, 291
Oswalt Ave, Batavia. IL 60510. The following procedures should be followed in the event one or more of
these decals must be replaced.
A. Removal
CAUTION: DO NOT USE LACQUER THINNER ON ANY PANEL THAT HAS BEEN PAINTED
WITH ENAMEL OR LACQUER. INSTRUMENT PANELS ARE PAINTED AT THE
FACTORY WITH POLYURETHANE PAINTS.
Remove placard to be replaced with a clean cloth dampened with lacquer thinner.
CAUTION: MARK-IT J-70 SOLVENT WILL REMOVE ENAMEL, LACQUER, AND
POLYURETHANE BASED PAINT PRODUCTS IF LIQUID IS DROPPED ONTO
PAINTED SURFACE AND NOT REMOVED IMMEDIATELY.
If panel is painted with enamel or lacquer use a clean cloth dampened with Mark-It J-70 solvent to
remove placard to be replaced.
B. Installation
(1) If required, clean surface to receive decal using alcohol. Newly painted surfaces need no
preparation.
(2) Mix a solution consisting of six (6) parts water and one (1) part J-70 solvent (P/N 179-497).
(3) Submerge decal in the mixed J-70 solution for approximately 3 to 5 seconds.
(4) Remove decal from mixed solution and lay in position.
(5) Using a plastic squeegee, squeegee out from center to edges to remove excess solution.
(6) Wait approximately 30 to 60 seconds, then slide the backing paper off and wipe up the excess
solution with a damp cloth.
(7) Wait at least 30 minutes at room temperature before wiping the face of the decal with a damp
cloth to remove excess solvent residue.
(8) Allow the decal to dry thoroughly, (tack free in 2 hours at room temp) before handling.
1I1 11-30-00 Feb

PAGE 17
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 18
Feb 28/07 11-30-00 1I2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER
12
SERVICING
1I3
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1I4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 12
CHAPTER CHAPTER


2 Feb 28/07
12-00-00 1 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07
5 Feb 28/07
6 Feb 28/07
7 Feb 28/07
8 Feb 28/07
12-10-00 1 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07
5 Feb 28/07
6 Feb 28/07
7 Feb 28/07
8 Feb 28/07
9 Feb 28/07
10 Feb 28/07
11 Feb 28/07
12 Feb 28/07
12-20-00 1 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07
5 Feb 28/07
6 Feb 28/07
7 Feb 28/07
8 Feb 28/07
9 Feb 28/07
10 Feb 28/07
11 Feb 28/07
12 Feb 28/07
13 Feb 28/07
14 Feb 28/07
1I5 12 - LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES PAGE 1

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 12 - LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES 1I6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 12 - SERVICING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
GENERAL 12-00-00 1 1I9

Aircraft Finish Care 1 1I9
Dupont Imron 6000 Paint System 1 1I9
Cleaning 2 1I10
Cleaning 2 1I10
Exterior Surfaces 2 1I10
Engine Compartment 2 1I10
Windshield and Windows 2 1I10
Pilot's Windshield 3 1I11
Landing Gear 3 1I11
Surface Deice Equipment 4 1I12
Interior 4 1I12
Carpets 5 1I13
Cleaning and Maintenance of Relief Tube System 5 1I13
REPLENISHING 12-10-00 1 1I17

Service Points 1 1I17
Fuel System 2 1I18
Filling Fuel Cells 2 1I18
Draining Moisture From Fuel System 2 1I18
MIL-I-27686 Fuel Anti-icing Inhibitors 3 1I19
Draining Fuel System - Complete 3 1I19
Brake System 3 1I19
Filling Brake System Reservoir 3 1I19
Draining Brake System 3 1I19
Landing Gear Oleo Struts 4 1I20
Filling Oleo Struts 4 1I20
Inflating Oleo Struts 5 1I21
Tires 5 1I21
Hydraulic System 6 1I22
Servicing Hydraulic Pump/Reservoir 6 1I22
Engine Lubrication 6 1I22
Draining Oil Sump 7 1I23
Oil Filter - Full Flow 7 1I23
Filling Oil Sump 7 1I23
Electrical System 8 1I24
Battery 8 1I24
Power Plant 8 1I24
Propeller 8 1I24
1I7 12 - CONTENTS FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 12 - SERVICING
TABLE OF CONTENTS (continued)
REPLENISHING (cont.)
Induction Air Filter 9 1J1
Removal 9 1J1
Installation 9 1J1
Cleaning and Inspection 9 1J1
Alternate Air Door 9 1J1
SCHEDULED SERVICING 12-20-00 1 1J5

Airframe Lubrication 1 1J5
Application of Grease 1 1J5
Application of Oil 1 1J5
Lubrication Charts 2 1J6
Chart 1 Special Instructions 2 1J6
Chart 2 Cabin Door, Baggage Door, and Seats 3 1J7
Chart 3 Main Landing Gear and Hydraulic System 4 1J8
Chart 4 Nose Gear 5 1J9
Chart 5 Control System 6 1J10
Chart 6 Propeller 9 1J13
Tire Balance 10 1J14
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 12 - CONTENTS 1I8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GENERAL
This chapter covers all routine servicing of airplane, scheduled and non-scheduled, including
replenishment of fuel, oil, hydraulic fluid, oxygen, tire pressure, lubrication requirements, servicing of
oleo struts with air and oil, etc. Pay special attention to all WARNINGS or CAUTIONS.
1. Aircraft Finish Care
WARNING: DO NOT USE GASOLINE, KEROSENE, ALCOHOL, BENZENE, CARBON TETRACHLORIDE,
THINNER, ACETONE OR WINDOW CLEANING SPRAYS TO CLEAN AIRPLANE.
The entire airplane is carefully finished inside and out to assure maximum service life. The external
surfaces are coated with durable polyurethane enamel.
A. Dupont Imron 6000 Paint System
CAUTION: FAILURE TO OBSERVE THE PROPER "FINISH CARE" GUIDELINES MAY RESULT
IN DAMAGE OR LOSS OF SHINE OF THE AIRCRAFT PAINT. IMPROPER CARE
MAY ALSO VOID THE WARRANTY REGARDING THE AIRCRAFT FINISH.
Piper aircraft delivered in 1999 and later (i.e. - Mirage S/N’s 4636187 and up), use the new Dupont
Imron 6000 paint system. The guidelines outlined below must be followed to prevent damage to the
finish and ensure long paint life.
(1) For the first 30 days after painting:
(a) Hand wash the aircraft often. Use fresh water only.
(b) Avoid parking under trees or places where birds roost. If sap, bird droppings, or insect
remains are discovered, rinse them off immediately. (Sap, bird droppings, or insect
remains will damage the paint during this period.)
(2) For the first 120 days after painting:
(a) To remove heavy soil, use mild liquid soap. Never use detergent.
(b) DO NOT WAX THE AIRCRAFT WITHIN 120 DAYS OF PAINTING!
(3) For long term paint finish protection:
(a) Park in a sheltered area whenever possible.
(b) Never use a scraper to remove ice or snow from painted surfaces.
(c) Never let avgas, oil, or hydraulic fluid stand on painted surfaces. (This will permanently
damage the finish.)
(d) Never wash the aircraft in the hot sun.
(e) Never wipe the finish with a dry cloth, always use fresh water.
(f) Avoid abrasive cleaners, chemicals, abrasive wax, or brushes.
(g) Have paint nicks or scratches touched up as soon as possible to maintain the aircraft's
corrosion protection.
To summarize, Piper aircraft using the new Dupont paint system need special attention in the early
days of ownership.
1I9 12-00-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B. Cleaning
CAUTION: IF PAINT IS LESS THAN SIX MONTHS OLD, SEE “DUPONT IMRON 6000 PAINT
SYSTEM,” ABOVE.
CAUTION: DO NOT DIRECT ANY STREAM OF WATER OR CLEANING SOLUTIONS AT THE
OPENINGS IN THE PITOT HEAD, STATIC PORTS, ALTERNATE STATIC PORTS OR
FUSELAGE BELLY DRAINS.
The airplane should be washed with a mild soap and water solution. Harsh abrasives or alkaline
soaps or detergents could scratch painted or plastic surfaces or corrode metal. Cover areas where
a cleaning solution could cause damage. To wash the airplane use the following procedure:
(1) Flush away loose dirt with water.
(2) Apply cleaning solution with a soft cloth, a sponge or a soft brush.
(3) To remove exhaust stains, allow the solution to remain on the surface longer.
(4) To remove stubborn oil and grease stains, use a soft cloth dampened with naphtha.
(5) Rinse all surfaces thoroughly.
(6) Any good automotive wax may be used to protect and preserve painted surfaces. Soft cleaning
cloths or a chamois should be used to prevent scratches when cleaning or polishing. A heavier
coat of wax on leading surfaces will reduce the abrasion problems in these areas. Refer to
surface de-ice cleaning procedures.
2. Cleaning
A. Exterior Surfaces - see “Aircraft Finish Care,” above, and “Windshields and Windows,” below.
B. Engine Compartment
Before cleaning the engine compartment:
(1) Place a pan under the engine to catch waste.
CAUTION: DO NOT SPRAY SOLVENT IN TO THE ALTERNATOR(S), STARTER, AIR
INTAKE, AND ALTERNATE AIR INLETS.
(2) With the engine cowling removed, spray or brush the engine with solvent or a mixture of
solvent and degreaser, as desired. It may be necessary to brush areas that were sprayed
where heavy grease and dirt deposits have collected in order to clean them.
(3) Allow the solvent to remain on the engine from five to ten minutes, then rinse the engine clean
with additional solvent and allow to dry.
CAUTION: DO NOT OPERATE THE ENGINE UNTIL THE EXCESS SOLVENT HAS
EVAPORATED OR OTHERWISE BEEN REMOVED.
(4) Lubricate controls, bearing surfaces, etc, per Lubrication Chart, 12-20-00.
C. Windshield and Windows (Except Pilot's Windshield, see below.)
WARNING: DO NOT USE GASOLINE, ALCOHOL, BENZENE, CARBON TETRACHLORIDE,
THINNER, ACETONE, STRONG SOLVENTS OR WINDOW CLEANING SPRAYS. DO
NOT USE PLASTIC CLEANER ON HEATED GLASS WINDSHIELDS.
CAUTION: USE ONLY WATER AND MILD SOAP WHEN CLEANING THE HEATED
WINDSHIELD. USE OF ANY OTHER CLEANING AGENT OR MATERIAL MAY
CAUSE DISTORTION OR DAMAGE TO WINDSHIELD COATINGS.
(1) Remove dirt, mud and other loose particles from exterior surfaces with clean water.
(2) Wash interior and exterior window surfaces with mild soap and warm water. Use a soft cloth or
sponge in a straight back and forth motion. Do not rub harshly.
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 12-00-00 1I10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(3) Remove oil and grease with a cloth dampened with Plexiglas Polish and Cleaner, P/N 403D or
similar substance conforming to Federal Specification (P-P-560) or kerosene.
(4) Rinse windows thoroughly and dry with soft lint-free cloth.
(5) A superficial scratch or mar in plastic can be removed by polishing out the scratch with
jeweler's rouge.
(6) When windows are clean, apply a thin coat of polishing wax. Rub lightly with a soft cloth. Do
not apply wax to heated windshields with electrical heating elements.
(7) Apply REPCON repellent or equivalent to windows and windshield to improve visibility during
flights through rain. Apply only according to manufacturer’s instructions. (Refer to 91-10-00,
Consumable Materials.)
D. Pilot's Windshield
WARNING: DO NOT USE GASOLINE, ALCOHOL, BENZENE, CARBON TETRACHLORIDE,
THINNER, ACETONE, STRONG SOLVENTS OR WINDOW CLEANING SPRAYS. DO
NOT USE PLASTIC CLEANER ON HEATED GLASS WINDSHIELDS.
CAUTION: USE ONLY WATER AND MILD SOAP WHEN CLEANING THE HEATED
WINDSHIELD. USE OF ANY OTHER CLEANING AGENT OR MATERIAL MAY
CAUSE DISTORTION OR DAMAGE TO WINDSHIELD COATINGS.
The surface of the pilot's windshield should be cleaned in a manner that will protect the special
water repellent coating.
(1) Flush with clean water to remove excessive amounts of dirt and other substances. Adhered
particles should be dislodged using fingers or fingernails.
(2) Use only clean materials such as a soft cloth or clean sponge or soft paper towel (such as
Kaydry® Wipers). Wash with a 50/50 solution of isopropanol and water. Alternative cleaning
solutions that can be used if isopropanol is not available include:
(a) 50/50 solution of rubbing alcohol and water.
(b) Mild liquid detergents (such as Ivory Dishwashing Liquid or Joy® Dishwashing Liquid
mixed 1/4 oz. per gallon of water).
(c) Windex® Glass Cleaner
NOTE: Do not use any abrasive materials (such as pumice or any strong acids or bases
as these materials may damage the coating.
(3) Flush thoroughly with clean water and dry. Wipe dry with strokes in one direction using only
clean materials such as a damp soft cloth, damp sponge, or soft paper towel (such as Kaydry®
Wipers).
NOTE: Do not apply any polish or wax to the glass surface.
E. Landing Gear
(1) Struts and Torque Links
Before cleaning landing gear struts and torque links, place plastic cover or similar material over
wheel and brake assembly.
(a) Place can under gear to catch waste.
(b) Spray (low pressure only) or brush gear area, as required, with solvent or mixture of
solvent and degreaser.
(c) Allow solvent to remain on gear for 5 to 10 minutes. Rinse gear with additional solvent and
allow to dry.
(d) Remove cover from wheel and remove catch can.
(e) Lubricate gear per Lubrication Chart, 12-20-00.
1I11 12-00-00 FebPAGE 3

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(2) Wheels and Brakes

CAUTION: DO NOT USE HIGH PRESSURE SPRAY WASH EQUIPMENT. ITS USE CAN
INJECT SOAP SOLUTION AND WATER INTO THE WHEEL BEARINGS AND
OTHER INTERNAL CAVITIES RESULTING IN CORROSION AND REDUCED
SERVICE LIFE.
(a) Hand wash wheels and brakes with a mild soap and water solution.
(b) Rinse with low pressure spray.
(c) Lubricate gear per Lubrication Chart, 12-20-00.
F. Surface Deice Equipment
The deice boots should be cleaned when the aircraft is washed using a mild soap and water
solution.
In cold weather, wash the boots with the airplane inside a warm hangar if possible. If the cleaning is
to be done outdoors, heat the soap and water solution before taking it out to the airplane. If difficulty
is encountered with the water freezing on boots, direct a flow of warm air along the region being
cleaned, using a portable type ground heater.
As an alternate cleaning solvent, use benzol or non-leaded gasoline. Moisten the cleaning cloth in
the solvent, scrub lightly and then with a clean dry cloth, wipe dry so that the cleaner does not have
time to soak into the rubber.
CAUTION: PETROLEUM PRODUCTS SUCH AS THESE ARE INJURIOUS TO RUBBER AND
THEREFORE SHOULD BE USED SPARINGLY IF AT ALL.
When deice boots are clean, a coating of B.F. Goodrich Icex should be applied. Icex is compounded
to lower the strength of adhesion between ice and rubber surface of the deice boots.
G. Interior
NOTE: It is best to test the cleaner on an inconspicuous portion of the fabric to test for
discoloration. Also avoid soaking or harsh rubbing.
(1) Vinyl interior surfaces may be cleaned with a damp cloth and mild soap and water solution.
(2) Leather may be cleaned with a mild hand soap and water solution or with a saddle soap.
Follow the precautions which apply to the cleaning of any fine leather product. Avoid saturation
and never use detergents or harsh cleaning solutions on leather.
CAUTION: USE OF COMMON HOUSEHOLD CLEANERS AND POLISHES ON WOOD
LAMINATED SURFACES COULD BE VERY HARMFUL.
(3) Wood laminated surfaces should be maintained using only a high grade furniture wax.
(4) All upholstery fabrics are Scotchguard treated and may be cleaned as follows:
Spilled oily and watery liquids will generally bead up on the fabric and can be blotted away
leaving little or no stain. Blot spills up as quickly as possible with an absorbent cloth, tissue or
sponge. If the material is a solid or semi-solid, such as butter, remove the excess by gently
scraping with a table knife. Often, blotting will remove all traces of stain but if the staining agent
is not completely removed by blotting, the following techniques are suggested:
(5) Water-based stains such as ketchup, milk, ice cream, coffee:
(a) Wipe the stain with a cloth wet with water containing a detergent or ammonia (4 fluid
ounces of ammonia to one gallon of water). Repeat if necessary.
(b) Oil based stains such as salad dressing, butter or mayonnaise may be removed by either
of the following procedures:
PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 12-00-00 1I12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(c) Apply “Texize K-2R Spot Remover” by spraying or rubbing into the fabric and let dry.
Vacuum off the residual powder. Repeat if necessary or wet a cloth with a solvent type
spot cleaner such as “Energine” or “Renuzit” and wipe or gently rub the stained area. Turn
cloth and rewet with solvent often. Repeat until stain disappears.
(d) To remove residual detergent left on the fabric, wipe the entire fabric surface with a cloth
dampened with water. The cloth should be rinsed in clean water several times. This
procedure will ensure that the treatment will continue to function.
H. Carpets
WARNING: SOLVENT CLEANERS REQUIRE ADEQUATE VENTILATION.
Use a small whisk broom or vacuum cleaner to remove dirt. For soiled spots, use a nonflammable
dry cleaning fluid. Floor carpets may be removed and cleaned like any household carpet.
I. Cleaning and Maintenance of Relief Tube System
CAUTION: THE CORROSIVE AFFECTS OF URINE ON PAINTED AND UNPAINTED SURFACES
CANNOT BE UNDERSTATED. CORROSION MAY APPEAR IN SURROUNDING
AREAS IF CLEANING IS DEFERRED FOR EVEN ONE DAY!
For airplanes equipped with a relief tube system, the corrosive effects of urine or other liquids
poured through the system are extreme and heightened attention to the cleanliness of this system
is indicated, both inside and outside the aircraft. In the interior, the funnel tube assembly, rubber
hose and surrounding sheet metal must be cleaned at the termination of each flight, if the system
has been used. Likewise, attention to the exterior of the aircraft is equally important and exterior
surfaces must be cleaned as described below.
(1) Interior
CAUTION: SHOULD SPILLAGE EXTENDING INTO THE FUSELAGE BE EVIDENT,
PROMPT MAINTENANCE ACTION IS REQUIRED TO ENSURE URINE
SPILLAGE IN THE FUSELAGE STRUCTURE IS NEUTRALIZED. REMOVE
PANELS TO ACCESS THE FLOOR STRUCTURE AS REQUIRED.
(a) After each use of the relief tube, the area surrounding the relief tube should be examined
for spillage and cleaned according to the procedures in paragraphs E (4) and E (5),
above. Clean the area inside the box and access door, funnel, and tube using mild soap
and water. After cleaning, flush with clean water to ensure that no soapy residue remains.
Dry system thoroughly.
(b) Prepare to flush the relief tube assembly by placing a catch can underneath the relief tube
outlet. Flush tube by pouring a solution of baking soda (10%) and water through the tube,
flushing out the entire system. Flush again with at least 1/2 gallon of clean water. Low
pressure (LP) shop air may be blown through the relief tube system to dry it.
(2) Exterior
Exterior bottom painted surfaces of the airplane must be cleaned from the firewall to the tip of
the tail, including the bottom of the tail surfaces, at termination of each flight during which the
relief tube system was used. Cleaning should occur per paragraph C, above, with the
exception that after completion of washing, a solution of baking soda (10%) and water should
be applied to the entire area and allowed to remain for a few minutes. The area must then be
thoroughly rinsed with clean water. Dry the area thoroughly and inspect for paint chipping
and/or corrosion. Touch up paint as necessary.
1I13 12-00-00 FebPAGE 5

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 6
Feb 28/07 12-00-00 1I14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1I15 12-00-00 FebPAGE 7

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 8
Feb 28/07 12-00-00 1I16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
REPLENISHING
1. Service Points
Service Points
Figure 1
1I17 12-10-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2. Fuel System
At intervals of 50 hours or 90 days, whichever comes first, clean the fuel strainer screen, located in the
fuel bowl mounted on the lower right side of the forward baggage compartment, below the floors, and
clean the screen in the inlet side of the injector. Remove and clean the fuel strainer screen in
accordance with the instructions outlined in 28-00-00. Additional fuel system service information may
also be found in Chapter 28. Inspection intervals of the various fuel system components may be found in
5-20-00.
A. Filling Fuel Cells
WARNING: DURING FUEL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE PRACTICES, A GROUND WIRE
ATTACHED FROM EACH MAIN GEAR GROUNDING PIN TO SEPARATE APPROVED
GROUNDING STAKES SHOULD BE USED TO PREVENT UNGROUNDING OF THE
AIRCRAFT DUE TO ACCIDENTAL DISCONNECTION OF ONE GROUND WIRE.
Observe all required precautions for handling gasoline. Fill the fuel tanks with the fuel as specified
on the placard adjacent to the filler neck. Each wing tank has a capacity of 61 U.S. gallons, for a
total capacity of 122 U.S. gallons. Two U.S. gallons are considered unusable fuel.
B. Draining Moisture From Fuel System
CAUTION: WHEN DRAINING ANY AMOUNT OF FUEL, CARE SHOULD BE TAKEN TO
ENSURE THAT NO FIRE HAZARD EXISTS BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE.
The fuel tanks and fuel strainer should be
drained daily prior to first flight and after
refueling to avoid the accumulation of water
or sediment. Each fuel header tank is
equipped with an individual quick drain
located at the lower inboard rear corner of
the tank. The fuel strainer with a quick drain
valve is located on the lower right side of the
forward baggage compartment. Drain fuel
tanks and strainer per the following:
(1) Drain each tank through its individual
quick drain located at the lower inboard
rear corner of the header tank, making
sure that enough fuel has been drained
to ensure that all water and sediment is
removed.
(2) Place a container under the fuel strainer
drain. Drain the fuel strainer by opening
the quick drain on the strainer.
(3) Examine the contents of the container
placed under the fuel strainer drain for
water and sediment, then dispose of the
contents.
(4) After refueling, delay sump sampling by
several minutes. This will permit water Fuel Strainer
and contaminants to flow to the sump Figure 2
drains for detection.
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 12-10-00 1I18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C. MIL-I-27686 Fuel Anti-icing Inhibitors

CAUTION: ASSURE THAT THE ADDITIVE IS DIRECTED INTO THE FLOWING FUEL STREAM.
THE ADDITIVE FLOW SHOULD START AFTER AND STOP BEFORE THE FUEL
FLOW. DO NOT PERMIT THE CONCENTRATED ADDITIVE TO COME IN CONTACT
WITH THE AIRCRAFT PAINTED SURFACES OR THE INTERIOR SURFACES OF
THE FUEL TANKS.
CAUTION: SOME FUELS HAVE ANTI-ICING ADDITIVES PREBLENDED IN THE FUEL AT THE
REFINERY, SO NO FURTHER BLENDING SHOULD BE PERFORMED.
CAUTION: THIS ADDITIVE SHOULD NOT BE USED AS A REPLACEMENT FOR PREFLIGHT
DRAINING OF THE FUEL SYSTEM DRAINS.
The MIL-I-27686 Fuel Anti-Icing Inhibitor, primarily is an anti-icing agent , however it also has
excellent microbiological sludge deterrent characteristics. It is very soluble in water, and only slightly
soluble in fuel, which mandates that the blending with fuel be accomplished in a precise manner.
Such a device permits injection of the agent into a flowing stream of fuel to ensure even
disbursement. When blending the additive, the concentration should not be less than 0.10 percent
or more than 0.15 percent by volume. Except for the information contained herein and in the Pilot’s
Operating Handbook, the manufacturer’s mixing or blending instructions should be carefully
followed.
D. Draining Fuel System - Complete
Fuel may be drained from the system by opening the valve at the inboard end of each fuel tank. The
drain valve requires the drain cup pin to hold the valve open. The remaining fuel in the system may
be drained through the filter bowl.
3. Brake System
The brake system contains a hydraulic fluid reservoir through which the brake system is periodically
serviced. Fluid is drawn from the reservoir by the brake master cylinders to maintain the volume of fluid
required for maximum braking efficiency. Spongy brake pedal actions is often an indication that the brake
fluid reservoir is running low on fluid or air. When repairs to brake system components or bleeding the
system are required, refer to instructions in 32-40-00.
A. Filling Brake System Reservoir
The brake system reservoir must be filled with hydraulic fluid (MIL-H-5606) to the level marked on
the reservoir. The reservoir, located on the left side of the aft wall of the forward baggage
compartment, must be checked at every 50 hour inspection and replenished as necessary. Access
to the reservoir is through the door on the upper right portion of the nose section. If fluid level is low,
it must be filled with filtered hydraulic fluid (MIL-H-5606). No adjustment to the brakes is necessary,
but they must be checked periodically per instructions given in 32-40-00.
B. Draining Brake System
To drain the brake system, disconnect the supply hose from the fitting on the bottom of the cylinder
and open the bleeder valve at the top of the cylinder. This will empty the piston chamber. Pump the
desired brake pedal to clear the line of fluid. To clean system, flush with denatured alcohol.
NOTE: If brake system is drained, parts replaced, or line connections broken, pressure fill and
bleed system per procedure in 32-40-00. Procedure assures air is not trapped in system.
1I19 12-10-00 FebPAGE 3

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4. Landing Gear Oleo Struts

WARNING: DO NOT RELEASE AIR BY REMOVING THE STRUT VALVE CORE OR FILLER PLUG.
DEPRESS THE VALVE CORE PIN UNTIL STRUT CHAMBER PRESSURE HAS
DIMINISHED.
CAUTION: DIRT AND FOREIGN PARTICLES FORM AROUND THE FILLER PLUGS OF THE
LANDING GEAR STRUTS, THEREFORE, BEFORE ATTEMPTING TO REMOVE THESE
PLUGS, THE TOPS OF THE STRUTS SHOULD BE CLEANED WITH COMPRESSED AIR
AND/OR WITH A QUICK DRYING SOLVENT.
Air-oil type oleo struts should be maintained at proper strut tube exposure for best oleo action. Nose
gear strut piston tube exposure is 1.7 ± .25 inches. Main gear strut piston tube exposure is 3.5 ± .25
inches - except in S/N’s 4636196 and up where 3.4 ± .25 inches is required. Measure with the airplane
sitting on a level surface under normal static load. (Empty weight of airplane plus full fuel and oil). If the
strut has less tube exposure than prescribed, determine whether it needs air or oil by rocking the
airplane. If the oleo strut oscillates with short strokes (approximately one inch) and the airplane settles to
its normal position within one or two cycles after the rocking force is removed, the oleo strut requires
inflating. Check the valve core and filler plug for air leaks, correct if required, and add air or nitrogen as
described in Inflating Oleo Struts. If the oleo strut oscillates with long strokes (approximately three
inches) and the airplane continues to oscillate after the rocking force is removed, the oleo struts require
fluid. Check the oleo for indications of oil leaks, correct if required and add fluid as described in Filling
Oleo Struts. For landing gear and/or oleo strut repair procedures, refer to 32-10-00 and 32-20-00.
A. Filling Oleo Struts
To fill the nose or main gear oleo strut with fluid (MIL-H-5606), whether it be the addition of a small
or large amount, proceed as follows:
(1) Raise the airplane on jacks.
(2) Place a pan under the gear to catch spillage.
(3) At the filler plug, relieve air pressure from the strut housing chamber by removing the cap from
the air valve and depressing the valve core.
(4) There are two methods by which the strut chamber may be filled. They are as follows:
(a) METHOD I.
1 Remove the valve core from the filler plug at the top (or side) of the gear strut
housing. Allow the filter plug to remain installed.
2 Attach one end of a clean plastic hose to the valve stem of the filler plug and
submerge the other end in a container of hydraulic fluid.
NOTE: An air-tight connection is necessary between the plastic tube and the valve
stem. Without such a connection, a small amount of air will be sucked into
the oleo strut during each sequence, resulting in an inordinate amount of air
bubbles and a prolonged filling operation.
3 Fully compress and extend the strut thus drawing fluid from the fluid container and
expelling air from the strut chamber. By watching the fluid pass through the plastic
hose, it can be determined when the strut is full and no air is present in the chamber.
4 When air bubbles cease to flow through the hose, compress the strut fully and
remove the hose from the valve stem.
5 With the strut compressed, remove the filler plug to determine that the fluid level is
visible up to the bottom of the filler plug hole.
6 Reinstall the core in the filler plug and apply thread lubricant (Parker No. 6PB) to the
threads of the filler plug and install the plug in the top of the strut housing. Torque the
plug from 350 to 400 inch pounds.
PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 12-10-00 1I20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(b) METHOD II.

1 Remove the filler plug from the top (or side) of the gear strut housing.
2 Raise the strut piston tube until it is fully compressed.
3 Pour fluid from a clean container through the filler opening until it reaches the bottom
of the filler plug hole. (Air pressure type oil container may be helpful.)
4 Install the filler plug finger tight and extend and compress the strut two or three times
to remove air from the housing.
5 Remove the filler plug, raise the strut to full compression and fill with fluid if needed.
6 Apply thread lubricant (Parker No. 6PB) to the threads of the filler plug. Reinstall the
filler plug and torque from 350 to 400 inch pounds.
7 With the airplane raised, compress and extend the gear strut several times to
ascertain that the strut actuates freely. The weight of the gear fork and wheel should
extend the strut.
8 Clean off overflow of fluid and inflate the strut as described in Inflating Oleo Struts.
9 Check that fluid is not leaking around the strut piston at the bottom of the housing.
B. Inflating Oleo Struts
After making certain that an oleo strut has sufficient fluid, attach a strut pump to the air valve and
inflate the oleo strut. The strut should be inflated until the correct inches of piston is exposed with
normal static load (empty weight of the airplane plus full fuel and oil) on the gears. Rock the
airplane several times to ascertain that the gear settles back to the correct strut position. If a strut
pump is not available, the airplane may be raised and line pressure from a high pressure air system
used.
NOTE: Moisture free compressed air may be used in lieu of nitrogen gas on a temporary basis;
however, the strut should be deflated and serviced with nitrogen as soon as possible.
Lower the airplane and, while rocking it, let air from the valve to bring the strut down to the proper
extension. (Before capping the valve, check for valve core leakage.)
If the airplane is on jacks, ensure that the struts are fully extended. Inflate the nose gear strut to
110 ± 11 psi and the main gear struts to 250 ± 25 psi. This is the preferred method.
5. Tires
Tubeless tires are designed to permit any air or nitrogen that is trapped in the cords or that diffuses
through the liner to escape through special sidewall vents. This venting prevents pressure build-up within
the cord body which might cause tread, sidewall or ply separation. Discounting tire growth after initial
inflation, once the tire has been inflated, the maximum permissible pressure drop due to diffusion is 5%
in any 24 hour period.
Vent holes penetrate the sidewall rubber to, or into, the cord body and may vary in size, depth and angle.
Therefore, the amount of diffusion through these holes will vary.
When water or a soap solution is brushed over the outside of an inflated tubeless tire, bubbles form.
Some vents may emit a continuous stream of bubbles. Others may produce intermittent bubbles. And
some may not bubble at all. This variety is normal and does not mean that there is anything wrong with
the tire. In fact, as long as a tubeless tire is inflated, there will be some diffusion from the vents. When
the loss rate exceeds 5% in 24 hours, recheck for possible injuries. Vents should remain open, so check
periodically to make sure they have not been covered over or closed by tire paint or spilled solvent. And
since vents may be covered during retreading, check for evidence that your retreads have been
revented.
1I21 12-10-00 FebPAGE 5

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A. Several basic characteristics of tubeless aircraft tires may be mistaken for problems:
(1) Tire growth in the first 12 to 24 hours after inflation will result in a seemingly severe pressure
drop. Simply inflate, wait for another 24 hours, then check pressure. It will probably be within
specs.
(2) Make sure that initial inflation is to recommended operating pressure to ensure full tire growth.
(3) It is normal for tubeless tires to show a small amount of pressure leakage throughout the life of
the tires.
B. Maintain tires at pressure specified in Chart 1 (Sheet 2 of 2), 6-00-00. When checking tire pressure,
examine tires for wear, cuts, bruises, and slippage. Apply Age-Master #1 to tires to protect against
ozone attack and weathering as follows:
(1) Clean oil and grease from all tire surfaces.
(2) Apply single heavy coat using brush at 0.4 - 0.5 fluid ounces per square foot. Cover surface
completely and evenly; allow to dry for 5 - 10 minutes.
(3) Apply second coat per step B; allow to dry for 20 - 30 minutes before handling.
(4) Remove agent on wheel assembly with cleaning solvent.
(5) Apply as conditions dictate.
6. Hydraulic System
The general condition of the hydraulic pump and landing gear actuating cylinders should be checked.
Ensure that there are no leaks and that the line fittings are tight. The cylinder rods are to be free of all
dirt and grit. To clean the rods use a rag soaked in hydraulic fluid and carefully wipe them. All the
hydraulic lines should also be checked for leaks, kinks, and corrosion. Check the tightness of the
attachment fittings.
Repair and inspection procedures for the hydraulic pump, cylinders and various components may be
found in 29-10-00 of this manual.
Servicing Hydraulic Pump/Reservoir
The fluid level of the reservoir of the combination pump and reservoir should be checked every 50
hours by viewing the fluid through the transparent reservoir on the hydraulic pump. Access to the
pump is through view port in rear baggage compartment panel behind rear seat.
Should fluid be below the full mark, add fluid MIL-H-5606 through the filler hole until full. Ensure that
the landing gears are down and the flaps up when filling the reservoir. Reinstall the filler plug and
tighten.
7. Engine Lubrication
CAUTION: DO NOT INTRODUCE ANY TRADE ADDITIVE TO THE BASIC LUBRICANT UNLESS
RECOMMENDED BY THE ENGINE MANUFACTURER.
A. General
(1) The engine oil and oil filter should be changed every 50 hours of engine operation (or less,
depending upon dust, humidity or engine conditions) or every 4 months, whichever comes first.
(2) For new, overhauled or re-manufactured engine, use ashless dispersant oil conforming to
MIL-L-22851 specifications. After 25 hours, change oil and filter.
(3) It is recommended after the first 25 hours of engine operation that the operator continues to
use ashless dispersant oil conforming to MIL-L-22851 specifications.
PAGE 6
Feb 28/07 12-10-00 1I22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(4) The Textron Lycoming engine is provided with a wet sump pressure oil system having a
capacity of twelve (12) quarts. The minimum safe quantity of oil in the sump is 2-3/4 quarts.
Single or multi viscosity aviation grade oils, in accordance with latest issue of Textron Lycoming
Service Instruction 1014, are required. (See 11-20-00, Figure 1, Placard #4)
NOTE: When operating temperatures overlap the indicated ranges, use the lighter grade oil.
(5) Refer to 81-20-00, Turbocharger Pre-Lubrication, for information on prelubricating the
turbochargers after the engine oil change.
B. Draining Oil Sump
The engine should be warmed to operating temperature to ensure complete draining of the used oil.
An oil quick drain valve is located on the lower left side of the oil sump. To drain the oil, install a
suitable length of inch I.D. hose on the outlet port. Remove the safety wire from the locking device,
push “IN’’ and lock to begin draining. After all oil has drained from the sump, pull “OUT’’ and lock the
outlet port closed. Safety wire the drain outlet port closed (“OUT’’ position). Remove the drain hose
and service with the correct grade and amount of oil. Check for oil leakage and correct oil level after
ground run-up.
C. Oil Filter - Full Flow
(1) Change the oil filter after the first 25 hours of engine operation for new, overhauled or re-
manufactured engines and there after every 50 hours of engine operation; this is accomplished
by removing the lockwire from the bolt head at the end of the filter, loosening the bolt, and
removing the filter assembly from the adapter.
(2) Before discarding the filter element, remove the outer perforated paper cover and, using a
sharp knife, cut through the folds of the element at both ends, close to the metal caps. Then,
carefully unfold the pleated element and examine the material trapped in the filter for evidence
of internal engine damage such as chips or particles from bearings. In new or newly
overhauled engines, some particles of metallic shavings might be found, these are generally of
no consequence and should not be confused with particles produced by impacting, abrasion or
pressure. Evidence of internal engine damage found in the oil filter justifies further examination
to determine the cause.
(3) Install new oil filter as follows:
(a) Before installing the new filter, lubricate the gasket on the filter with engine oil, then install
it. Tighten slightly more than hand tight or to 1 full turn after gasket makes contact. Do not
over torque.
(b) Run the engine and check for oil leaks; then install lockwire between nut on filter and oil
filter adapter assembly.
D. Filling Oil Sump
The oil sump should normally be filled with oil to the 12 quart mark on the engine dipstick. The
quantity of oil required for the engine may be found in 6-00-00. The specified grade of oil may be
found on the oil filter access door or in the latest revision of Textron Lycoming Service Instruction
1014. To service the engine with oil, open the access door and remove the oil filler cap.
1I23 12-10-00 FebPAGE 7

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
8. Electrical System
Servicing the electrical system involves adding distilled water to the battery to maintain correct
electrolyte level (Dry-Charged Lead-Acid - S/N’s 4636001 thru 4636374), checking for any spilled
electrolyte that would lead to corrosion and checking cable connections. The security of all electrical
connections should be checked, as well as the operation of all lights, general condition of the
alternator(s) and starter. All electrical wires should be inspected for chafing and bare wires. For detailed
information on this system, refer to Chapter 24 of this manual.
A. Battery (Dry-Charged Lead-Acid - S/N’s 4636001 thru 4636374)
Access to the 24-volt battery is gained by opening the forward baggage door and removing the left
floor of the forward baggage compartment.
The battery should be checked for proper fluid level. DO NOT fill the battery above the baffle plates.
DO NOT fill the battery with acid - use water only. A hydrometer check will determine the percent of
charge in the battery.
Inspect overflow sump for presence of battery fluid. Fluid in the sump is not a normal condition and
indicates either a battery or charging system problem. If fluid is present, the electrical system must
be serviced to eliminate the cause and the neutralizer media in the sump jar replaced.
If the battery is not up to charge, recharge starting at a 4-amp rate and finishing with a 2-amp rate.
Quick charges are not recommended.
B. Battery (Valve-Regulated Lead-Acid - S/N’s 4636375 and up)
Access to the 24-volt battery is gained by opening the forward baggage door and removing the left
floor of the forward baggage compartment.
Gill valve-regulated non-maintainable batteries are fully charged when they leave the factory. Non-
maintainable means that this type of battery cannot be opened to add fluid. Periodic maintenance is
still required in the form of boost charging if the battery becomes discharged.
9. Power Plant
Regularly check the engine compartment for oil and fuel leaks, chafing of lines, loose wires and
tightness of all parts. Maintenance instructions for the power plant may be found in Chapter 71 of this
manual and in the appropriate manufacturer’s manuals.
10. Propeller
The spinner, back plate and propeller surfaces should be cleaned and inspected frequently for nicks,
scratches, corrosion and cracks. Minor nicks and scratches may be removed per instructions in
61-10-00 or the appropriate Hartzell Blade Manual (for composite blades see latest revision Hartzell
Composite Blade Manual No. 135). The face of each blade should be painted when necessary with a flat
paint to retard glare. To prevent corrosion, wipe surfaces with a light oil or wax.
In addition, propellers should be inspected for grease or oil leakage and freedom of rotation on the hub
pilot tube. To check freedom of rotation, rock the blade back and forth through the slight freedom allowed
by the pitch change mechanism. Lubricate the propeller at 100-hour intervals per the appropriate
Hartzell Owner’s Manual.
Additional service information for the propeller may be found in 61-10-00.
PAGE 8
Feb 28/07 12-10-00 1I24
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
11. Induction Air Filter

A. Removal
The induction air filter is located in the forward portion of the lower engine cowls.
Remove the filter as follows:
(1) Remove the induction air panel from the nose cowl and from the lower engine cowls.
(2) Remove the filter assembly from the induction box assembly.
(3) Clean or replace the filter.
B. Installation
After cleaning and inspection, install the filter element and cover in reverse order of removal
instructions.
C. Cleaning and Inspection
(1) The filter should be cleaned daily when operating in dusty conditions, and if any holes or tears
are noticed, the filter should be replaced immediately. For replacement filter, refer to Parts
Catalog.
(2) Remove the filter element and blow out with compressed air from gasket side or wash in warm
water and mild detergent and allow to dry.
(3) The filter housing can be cleaned by wiping with a clean cloth soaked in suitable quick drying
type solvent. When the housing is dry, reinstall in accordance with Installation of Air Filter.
12. Alternate Air Door
The alternate door is located in the air induction box to provide a source of air to the engine should there
be an air stoppage through the filter system. The following should be checked during inspection:
A. Check that air door seals are tight and that the hinge is secure.
B. Check that when the cockpit control is in the closed position the door is properly seated in the
closed position.
C. Actuate the door by operating the control lever in the cockpit to determine that it is not sticking or
binding.
D. Check the cockpit control cable for free travel.
1J1 12-10-00 FebPAGE 9

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 10
Feb 28/07 12-10-00 1J2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1J3 12-10-00 Feb

PAGE 11
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 12
Feb 28/07 12-10-00 1J4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
SCHEDULED SERVICING
1. Airframe Lubrication
Proper lubrication procedures are valuable for prolonging the service life of the airplane and as a means
of reducing the frequency of extensive and expensive repairs. The periodic application of recommended
lubricants to relevant bearing surfaces combined with cleanliness, as detailed in the following
paragraphs, ensures maximum efficiency and utmost service of all moving parts. Lubrication instruction
regarding locations, time intervals, and type of lubricants used are found in proper lubrication charts. To
ensure the best possible results from lubricant application, observe the following precautions:
NOTE: If the airplane is inactive for long periods of time, it should be lubricated in accordance with the
Lubrication Chart every 90 days.
A. Use only recommended lubricants. Where general purpose lubricating oil is specified, but
unavailable, clean reciprocating engine oil is a satisfactory substitute.
B. Check components for evidence of excessive wear and replace as necessary.
C. Removal all excess lubricants from components to prevent collecting dirt and sand in quantities
capable of causing excessive wear or damage to bearing surfaces.
2. Application of Grease
When lubricating bearings and bearing surfaces with a grease gun, ensure gun is filled with new, clean
grease specified for the particular application before applying lubricant to grease fittings.
A. If a reservoir is not provided around a bearing, apply lubricant sparingly and wipe off excess.
B. Remove wheel bearings from wheel hub and clean thoroughly with suitable solvent. When
repacking with grease, ensure lubricant enters space between rollers in retainer ring. Do not pack
grease into wheel hub.
C. Use extra care when greasing Hartzell propeller hub to avoid blowing clamp gaskets. Remove one
grease fitting while applying grease to other fitting. Uneven greasing effects propeller balance.
3. Application of Oil
If specific lubrication instructions for certain components are not available, observe the following
precautions:
CAUTION: AFTER THOROUGHLY WASHING AIRPLANE, ENSURE LANDING GEAR, FLIGHT
SURFACE WINGS, FLAP TRACKS, ELEVATOR TRIM SCREW, AND ENGINE
COMPARTMENT ARE STILL PROPERLY LUBRICATED.
A. Apply oil sparingly. Never apply more than enough to coat bearing surfaces.
B. Do not oil control cables.
1J5 12-20-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4. Lubrication Charts
The lubrication charts consist of individual illustrations for the various aircraft systems. Each component
to be lubricated is indicated by a number, the type of lubricant and the frequency of application. Special
instructions are listed at the beginning of the lubrication charts and with the applicable component
illustration.
The following lubricants, MIL-G-23827 and MIL-G-81322, contain chemicals which may be harmful to
painted surfaces.
CHART 1
SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS
1. AIR FILTER - TO CLEAN FILTER TAP GENTLY TO REMOVE DIRT PARTICLES. NO NOT BLOW OUT WITH COMPRESSED
AIR OR USE OIL. REPLACE FILTER IF EXCESSIVELY CONTAMINATED, DAMAGED, OR PUNCTURED.
2. LUBRICATION POINTS - WIPE CLEAN OR GREASE, OIL, DIRT, ETC., BEFORE LUBRICATING.
3. BEARING AND BUSHINGS - CLEAN EXTERIOR WITH A DRYING TYPE SOLVENT PRIOR TO LUBRICATING.
4. WHEEL BEARINGS - CLEAN OLD GREASE FROM WHEEL HOUSING, OUTER RACE AND BEARING ASSEMBLY USING
DRYING TYPE SOLVENT. PACK GREASE BETWEEN ROLLERS AND CONE. GREASE OUTER ROLLER PERIMETER.
DO NOT PACK GREASE IN WHEEL HOUSING.
5. OLEO STRUTS, HYDRAULIC PUMP RESERVOIR, AND BRAKE SYSTEM RESERVOIR - FILL PER INSTRUCTIONS ON UNIT
OR IN MAINTENANCE MANUAL.
6. PROPELLER - REMOVE ONE OF THE TWO GREASE FITTINGS FOR EACH BLADE. APPLY GREASE THRU FITTING UNTIL
FRESH GREASE APPEARS AT HOLE OF REMOVED FITTING. SEE LATEST REVISION OF HARTZELL MANUAL NO. 202.
7. BUNGEE - LUBRICATE SPRINGS IF BUNGEE IS DISASSEMBLED.
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 12-20-00 1J6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 2
LUBRICATION CHART (Cabin Door, Baggage Door, and Seats)
COMPONENT LUBRICANT FREQUENCY

1. BAGGAGE DOOR HINGE (Special Instruction #2) MIL-PRF-7870C 100 HRS
2. BAGGAGE DOOR LATCH MECHANISM (Special Instruction #2) DRY LUBRICANT 100 HRS
3. PILOT AND COPILOT SEAT ADJUSTMENTS MIL-PRF-7870C 100 HRS
4. CABIN DOOR HINGES (Special Instruction #2) MIL-PRF-7870C 100 HRS
5. CABIN DOOR LATCH MECHANISM (Special Instruction #2) DRY LUBRICANT 100 HRS
6. ACCESS DOOR - HINGE * (Special Instruction #2) MIL-PRF-7870C 100 HRS
7. ACCESS DOOR - LATCH * (Special Instruction #2) DRY LUBRICANT 100 HRS
* If installed.
1J7 12-20-00 FebPAGE 3

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 3
LUBRICATION CHART (Main Landing Gear and Hydraulic System)

1. BRAKE RESERVOIR (Special Instruction #5) MIL-H-5606 50 HRS
2. HYDRAULIC PUMP/RESERVOIR (Special Instruction #5) MIL-H-5606 50 HRS
3. RETRACTION CYLINDER ROD END BEARINGS (Special Instruction #3) MIL-PRF-7870C 100 HRS
4. MAIN GEAR TORQUE LINKS (Special Instruction #2) MIL-PRF-7870C 100 HRS
5. MAIN GEAR WHEEL BEARINGS (Special Instruction #4) MIL-G-81322 100 HRS
PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 12-20-00 1J8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 4
LUBRICATION CHART (Nose Gear)

1. STEERING BELLCRANK PIVOT POINTS AND ROD ENDS (Special Instruction #3) MIL-PRF-7870C 100 HRS
2. RETRACTION CYLINDER AND ASSIST SPRING ROD END BEARINGS (Special Instruction #3) MIL-PRF-7870C 100 HRS
3. NOSE GEAR PIVOT POINT (Special Instruction #2) MIL-G-7711 100 HRS
4. TORQUE LINK ASSEMBLY (Special Instruction #2) MIL-PRF-7870C 100 HRS
5. NOSE WHEEL BEARINGS (Special Instruction #4) MIL-G-81322 100 HRS
6. STEERING BELLCRANK AND ROD ENDS (Special Instruction #3) MIL-PRF-7870C 100 HRS
7. NOSE GEAR DOOR HINGE (Special Instruction #2) MIL-PRF-7870C 100 HRS
1J9 12-20-00 FebPAGE 5

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 5
LUBRICATION CHART (Control System - Sheet 1 of 3)
FLAP TRACKS AND ROLLERS (Special Instruction #2) MIL-G-23827 100 HRS
1. FLAP CONTROL ROD END BEARINGS (Special Instruction #3) MIL-PRF-7870C 100 HRS
2. RUDDER CONTROL SECTOR (Special Instruction #3) MIL-PRF-7870C 100 HRS
3. ELEVATOR TRIM ROD END BEARINGS (Special Instruction #3) MIL-PRF-7870C 100 HRS
4. ELEVATOR SECTOR AND CONTROL ROD END BEARINGS (Special Instruction #3) MIL-PRF-7870C 100 HRS
5. ELEVATOR TRIM SCREW (Special Instruction #2) MIL-G-23827 100 HRS
PAGE 6
Feb 28/07 12-20-00 1J10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 5

1. AILERON TORQUE ROLLER ASSEMBLY (Special Instruction #3) MIL-PRF-7870C 100 HRS
1. AILERON TORQUE ARM ASSEMBLY (Special Instruction #3) MIL-PRF-7870C 100 HRS
2. CONTROL COLUMN ATTACHMENT ARM (Special Instruction #3) MIL-PRF-7870C 100 HRS
3. ELEVATOR TORQUE TUBE ASSEMBLY (Special Instruction #3) MIL-PRF-7870C 100 HRS
4. RUDDER TORQUE TUBE ASSEMBLY (Special Instruction #2) MIL-PRF-7870C 100 HRS
5. BRAKE ROD ENDS (Special Instruction #2) MIL-PRF-7870C 100 HRS
6. BUSHING, RUDDER PEDAL MOUNT (Special Instruction #3) MIL-PRF-7870C 100 HRS
* AILERON, ELEVATOR, RUDDER AND TRIM CABLES (Special Instruction #2) MIL-G-23827 100 HRS
(Grease cables where they pass through a fair lead or over a pulley.) (Not shown.)
1J11 12-20-00 FebPAGE 7

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 5

1. PULLEYS AND TRIM WHEELS (Special Instruction #3) MIL-PRF-7870C 100 HRS
2. AILERON HINGES (Special Instruction #3) MIL-PRF-7870C 100 HRS
3. AILERON SECTOR (Special Instruction #2) DRY LUBRICANT 100 HRS
* AILERON, ELEVATOR, RUDDER AND TRIM CABLES (Special Instruction #2) MIL-G-23827 100 HRS
(Grease cables where they pass through a fair lead or over a pulley.) (Not shown.)
PAGE 8
Feb 28/07 12-20-00 1J12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 6
LUBRICATION CHART (Propeller)

1. COMPOSITE BLADE PROPELLERS (Special Instruction #6) AEROSHELL 6 GREASE 100 HRS / 12 MONTHS
(whichever comes first)
1. ALUMINUM BLADE PROPELLERS (Special Instruction #6) AERO SHELL 6 GREASE 100 HRS / 12 MONTHS
(whichever comes first)
NOTE: If annual operation is significantly less than 100 hours, calendar lubrication intervals should be reduced to six months.
1J13 12-20-00 FebPAGE 9

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
5. Tire Balance
Proper balancing is critical for the life of aircraft tires. If a new tire is balanced upon installation it will
usually remain balanced for the life of the tire without having any shimmy or flat spots. An inexpensive
balancer can be made that will balance almost any tire for light aircraft. Balance the tire as follows:
A. Mount the tire and tube (if one is used) on the wheels, but do not install the securing bolts. Install
the wheel bearings in the wheels; then, using the -7 bushings, -6 spacers, and -5 nuts, install the
wheel/tire assembly on the -8 pipe. Secure the -5 nuts finger tight so that the wheel halves touch
each other. Be sure the bolt holes are aligned. Insert the -4 axle through the -8 pipe and place the
wheel in the center of the balancer. Make sure the axle is only on the chamfered edges of the
balancer and that it is at 90° to the sides of the balancer.
B. Release the tire. If it is out of balance it will rotate, coming to rest with the heaviest point on the
bottom. Tape a ounce patch across the top center of the tire. Rotate the tire 45° and release it
again. If the tire returns to the same position, add a 1 ounce patch and again rotate the tire and
release it. Continue this procedure until the tire is balanced.
C. When balance is attained, put a chalk mark on the sidewall directly below the patch. Use one mark
for each half ounce of weight needed. Mark the valve stem location on the tire and the opposite
wheel half to assure reassembly in the same position. Remove the wheel from the balance stand,
break it down and clean the inside of the tire with toluol. Apply a coat of patch cement to both the
patch and the inside center of the tire in line with the chalk marks. When the cement has dried,
install the patches making certain they are on the centerline of the tire and aligned with the chalk
marks on the sidewall. Burnish the patches to remove trapped air, etc.
D. When reassembling the wheel, powder the inside of the tire. Mount the tire on the valve side of the
wheel in the same position it was in when it was balanced. Install the other wheel half, aligning the
chalk marks. Install the bolts and tighten to required torque, then inflate the tire to the pressure
specified in Chart 1, 6-00-00. and recheck the balance. The wheel should not be more than ounce
out of balance.
PAGE 10
Feb 28/07 12-20-00 1J14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A useful tire balancing fixture can be built as follows:
A. Chamfer top edges of -3 sides, leaving 1/16 inch flat on top of the inboard edge. Rivet -2 tee’s to -3
sides using AN 470-AD5 rivets, with 2 inch spacing, and using AN 426-AD5 rivets ( 2 inch center to
center ) to secure -2 tee’s to -1 base. If tee extrusion is unavailable, heavy angle extrusion could be
used. -3 sides must be vertical.
B. The -4 axle must slide through the -8 pipe, the -5 nuts are made by reaming the existing threads in
the AN 365-624 nuts with an R drill, then tapping them with a 1/8-27 pipe tap.
C. The -6 spacers were made from 1/2 inch aluminum tubing, the two lengths of spacers are suitable
for balancing most any aircraft wheel.
D. The -7 bushings may be made from one inch phenolic or aluminum using a 1-1/2 inch hole saw to
cut out the smaller bushing and a 1-3/4 hole saw to cut out the larger. By inserting a 1/4 inch long
threaded bolt through the pilot hole and securing with a washer and nut, a drill press and file may
be used to make the off-set on the bushing. The turned-down part should just slide inside the
bearing race and then ream the pilot hole to slide over the -8 pipe threads.
E. The -8 pipe was made from a piece of 1/8 inch black pipe and threaded with a 1/8-27 pipe die, this
will be thread 3 inches in from each end of the pipe.
Tire Balancer
Figure 1
1J15 12-20-00 Feb

PAGE 11
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 12
Feb 28/07 12-20-00 1J16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1J17 12-20-00 Feb

PAGE 13
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 14
Feb 28/07 12-20-00 1J18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER
20
STANDARD
PRACTICES -
AIRFRAME
1J19
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1J20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 20
CHAPTER CHAPTER


2 Feb 28/07
20-00-00 1 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07
5 Feb 28/07
6 Feb 28/07
7 Feb 28/07
8 Feb 28/07
9 Feb 28/07
10 Feb 28/07
11 Feb 28/07
12 Feb 28/07
20-20-00 1 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07
5 Feb 28/07
6 Feb 28/07
1J21 20 - LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES PAGE 1

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 20 - LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES 1J22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 20 - STANDARD PRACTICES - AIRFRAME
TABLE OF CONTENTS
GENERAL 20-00-00 1 1K1

Description 1 1K1
Torque Wrenches 1 1K1
Installing Rod End Bearings 2 1K2
Removing Cherrylock Rivet 3 1K3
Identification of Fluid Lines 4 1K4
Inspection of Flexible Hoses 4 1K4
Flared Tube Assemblies 6 1K6
Flareless Tube Assemblies 7 1K7
Support Clamps 9 1K9
Dye Penetrant Inspection 10 1K10
Threaded Fastener Installation 10 1K10
Lubrication of Threads 11 1K11
PAINTING 20-20-00 1 1K13

Painting Safety 1 1K13
Polyurethane Paint Safety 1 1K13
Paint Application 2 1K14
Painting Sequence 2 1K14
Color Matching 2 1K14
Trim and Registration Numbers 2 1K14
Paint System Compatibility 3 1K15
Common Paint Troubles 3 1K15
Storage 4 1K16
Painting Facility 4 1K16
Aircraft Finish Care 4 1K16
1J23 20 - CONTENTS FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 20 - CONTENTS 1J24
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GENERAL
1. Description
This chapter contains general information pertaining to standard aircraft hardware installation and
removal practices, as well as general information on corrosion control and painting issues.
For standard repair practices of a minor nature, see 51-70-00 and AC 43.13-1 (latest revision).
If non-destructive testing is needed after repair of 4130 steel, use a magnetic particle inspection method
such as Magnaflux.
Testing and inspecting of aluminum castings and machined aluminum parts may be done by the dye
penetrant method.
Usually, a good visual inspection with a 10X magnifying glass will show any damage or defect in a repair
that is of a significant nature.
2. Torque Wrenches
Torque wrenches should be checked daily and calibrated by means of weights and a measured lever
arm to ensure that inaccuracies are not present. Checking one torque wrench against another is not
sufficient and is not recommended. Some wrenches are quite sensitive to the way they are supported
during a tightening operation. Any instructions furnished by the manufacturer must be followed explicitly.
When it is necessary to use a special extension or adapter wrench together with a torque wrench, a
simple mathematical equation must be worked out to arrive at the correct torque reading. Following is
the formula to be used: (Refer to Figure 1.)
T = Torque desired at the part.
A = Basic lever length from center of wrench shank to center of handle or stamped on wrench or
listed for that model wrench.
B = Length of adapter extension, center of bolt to center of shank.
C = Scale reading needed to obtain desired torque (T).
The formula: C=AxT
A+B
EXAMPLE: A bolt requires 30 foot pounds and a 3 inch adapter (one-quarter of a foot or
0.25’) is needed to get at it. You want to know what scale reading it will take on
a one-foot lever arm wrench to obtain the 30 foot pounds at the bolt.
C = 1 x 30 or C= 30
1 + 0.25 1.25
Remember, the 3 inch adapter must be projecting 3 inches straight along the wrench axis. In
general, avoid all complex assemblages or adapters and extensions of flex joints.
1K1 20-00-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Torque Wrench Formula

Figure 1
3. Installing Rod End Bearings

Install rod end bearings as shown in Figure 2.
Installing Rod End Bearings

Figure 2
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 20-00-00 1K2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4. Removing Cherrylock Rivets

Use following procedure to remove cherrylock rivets:
A. To remove from thick material, use a tapered steel drift
pin to drive out rivet stem. (See Figure 3, View 1.)
CAUTION: DRIVING OUT THE LOCKED STEM OF
RIVETS INSTALLED IN THIN MATERIAL
MAY DAMAGE THE MATERIAL.
NOTE: Drilling completely through the rivet sleeve,
when removing rivets, tends to enlarge hole.
B. To remove from thin material, drill away tapered portion
of stem to destroy the lock. Use a small center drill bit
on top of the rivet stem to provide a guide for a larger
bit. (See Figure 3, Views 2 and 3.)
C. Pry remainder of locking collar out of rivet head with a
drift pin. (See Figure 3, View 3.)
D. Drill almost, but not completely, through head of rivet.
Use a drill bit the same size as the rivet shank.
(See Figure 3, View 4.)
E. Use a drift pin as a lever to break off rivet head.
(See Figure 3, View 5.)
F. Drive out remaining rivet shank with a pin having same
diameter as rivet shank. (See Figure 3, View 6.)
Removing Cherrylock Rivets

Figure 3
1K3 20-00-00 FebPAGE 3

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
5. Identification of Fluid Lines (Refer to Figure 4.)

Aircraft fluid lines are identified by color code markers, words and geometric symbols. The markers
identify each line`s function, content, primary hazard, and the direction of fluid flow.
Most fluid lines are marked with 1 inch tape or decals. Paint is used on lines in the engine induction
system.
Certain lines may also be identified as to the specific function within a system. For example: DRAIN,
VENT, PRESSURE or RETURN.
Lines conveying fuel may be marked FLAM. Lines containing toxic materials are marked TOXIC. Line
containing physically dangerous materials, such as oxygen, nitrogen, or freon, are marked PHDAN.
The aircraft and engine manufacturer is responsible for the original installation of identification markers,
Aircraft maintenance personnel are responsible for their replacement when it becomes necessary.
Tapes, paint, tags and decals are placed on both ends of a line and at least once in each compartment
through which the line runs. Identification markers are also placed immediately adjacent to each valve,
regulator, filter or other accessory within a line.
6. Inspection of Flexible Hoses
NOTE: During the manufacturing process, a condition known as “rubber strike-through” occasionally
occurs. This condition is such that rubber material protrudes through the wire braid cover. This
condition has no effect on hose quality.
It is recommended that flexible hoses be inspected every 100 hours, especially those in the engine
compartments. When inspecting hoses, look for the following conditions:
A. Check each installation to be sure the hose is not kinked, twisted, or distorted. Check for evidence
of abrasion, cuts, and broken wires. Random broken wires are acceptable since wire breaks
sometimes occur during manufacture. Discard hose if two or more broken wires are found per plait
(braid) or more than six broken wires per lineal foot. Broken wires in an area where kinking is
evident is also a cause for rejection.
CAUTION: PUNCTURING THE OUTER COVER OF THE HOSE MAY CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE
HOSE.
B. Check each assembly for deterioration, ply separation of cover or braid, cracks, weather checking,
lack of flexibility, blisters or bulging, collapse, or sharp bending. Blisters on the outer synthetic cover
do not necessarily indicate a faulty hose.
C. Remove hose from assembly if hose shows any visible wear. Inspect hose interior and check for
signs of deterioration, tube collapse, cut rubber, wire braid puncture, or restriction. To inspect hoses
with elbow fittings, use flexible inspection light and viewer, or inspection ball as described in Chart 1
Replace hose if any deterioration exists.
CHART 1
BALL DIAMETERS FOR TESTING HOSE RESTRICTIONS
Hose Size Ball Size
-4 ................................................. 5/64
-5 ................................................. 9/65
-6 ................................................ 13/64
-8 ................................................. 9/32
- 10 ................................................. 3/8
- 12 ................................................. 1/2
- 16 ............................................... 47/64
- 20 ............................................... 61/64
PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 20-00-00 1K4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Hose, Tube, and Line Markings

Figure 4
1K5 20-00-00 FebPAGE 5

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
7. Flared Tube Assemblies (Refer to Figure 5.)

When any fitting containing conical seals is disconnected the following steps must be performed when
connecting the fitting.
A. Lubricate threads of nut with a substance compatible with the fluid that is to be contained in the line
NOTE: Conical seals are never to be reused. If a connection is broken the seals must be replaced.
B. Install new conical seals
CAUTION: ANGULAR MISALIGNMENT BETWEEN TUBE AND FITTING WILL OVER-STRAIN
SLEEVE AND NUT DURING TORQUE -UP. APPLY TORQUE ONLY AFTER TUBE
CENTER LINE IS SQUARELY MATED TO THE FITTING CENTER LINE.
NOTE: Apply torque on back portion of nut next to shoulder to minimize distortion of thread.
C. Tighten fitting one (1) to one and one half (1 1/2) hex flats from position of sharp torque rise (finger
tight).
Conical Seal 37 Deg. Flared Fitting

Tube
Sleeve
Nut
Conical Seals
Figure 5
PAGE 6
Feb 28/07 20-00-00 1K6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
8. Flareless Tube Assemblies

The use of flareless tube fittings eliminates all tube flaring. An operation, referred to as presetting, is
necessary prior to installing a new flareless tube assembly. Presetting is performed as follows:
A. Cut tube to correct length. Ensure ends are perfectly square. Deburr inside and outside of tube. Slip
nut, then sleeve, over the tube. (Refer to Figure 6, Step 1.)
B. Lubricate fitting and nut threads as specified in table contained in Figure 6.
C. Place fitting in a vise (refer to Figure 6, Step 2). Hold tubing firmly and squarely on seat in fitting.
(Tube must bottom firmly in the fitting.) Tighten nut until cutting edge of sleeve grips tube. This point
is determined by slowly turning tube back and forth while tightening nut. When tube no longer turns,
nut is ready for final tightening.
D. Final tightening depends upon type and size of tubing. On aluminum alloy tubing up to and including
half inch outside diameter, tighten nut from 1 to 1-1/6 turns. On aluminum alloy tubing over half inch
outside diameter, or steel tubing, tighten nut from 1-1/6 to 1-1/2 turns.
E. After presetting the sleeve, disconnect tubing from fitting and check the following points (refer to
Figure 6, Step 3):
(1) Tube extends 3/32 to 1/8 inch beyond sleeve pilot to prevent blow off.
(2) Sleeve pilot contacts tube. A maximum clearance of 0.005 inch for aluminum alloy tubing, or
0.015 inch for steel tubing, is acceptable.
(3) A slight collapse of tube at sleeve cut is permissible. No movement of sleeve pilot, except
rotation, is permissible.
1K7 20-00-00 FebPAGE 7

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Flareless Tube Fittings

Figure 6
PAGE 8
Feb 28/07 20-00-00 1K8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
9. Support Clamps
CAUTION: MAKE CERTAIN THAT CLAMPS ARE OF THE CORRECT SIZE. CLAMPS OR
SUPPORTING CLIPS SMALLER THAN THE OUTSIDE DIAMETER OF THE HOSE MAY
RESTRICT THE FLOW OF FLUID THROUGH THE HOSE.
Support clamps are used to secure the various lines to the airframe or power plant assemblies. Several
type of support clamps are used for this purpose. The rubber cushioned and plain are the most
commonly used clamps. The rubber cushioned clamp is used to secure lines subject to vibration; the
cushioning prevents chafing of the tubing. The plain clamp is used to secure lines in areas not subject to
vibration.
A teflon cushioned clamp is used in areas where the deteriorating effects of hydraulic fluid or fuel is
expected, however, because it is less resilient, it does not provide as good a vibration damping effect as
other cushion materials.
Use bonded clamps to secure metal hydraulic, fuel and oil lines in place. Unbonded clamps should be
used only for securing wiring. Remove any paint or anodizing from the portion of the tube at the bonding
clap location.
All plumbing lines must be secured at specified intervals. The maximum distance between supports for
rigid fluid tubing is shown in Chart 2.
CHART 2
MAXIMUM DISTANCE BETWEEN SUPPORTS FOR FLUID TUBING
Distance Between Supports (IN.)
Tube O.D. (IN.) Aluminum Alloy Steel
1/8 9-1/2 11-1/2
3/16 12 14
1/4 13-1/2 16
5/16 15 18
3/8 16-1/2 20
1/2 19 23
5/8 22 25-1/2
3/4 24 27-1/2
1 26-1/2 30
1K9 20-00-00 FebPAGE 9

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
10. Dye Penetrant Inspections

NOTE: The following procedure is general in nature. See manufacturer's instructions, included with dye
penetrant kit, for specifics.
A. Using a volatile cleaner, thoroughly remove dirt, loose scale, oil and grease from surface to be
inspected.
B. Heat surface to at least 70°F (21°C), but not exceeding 130°F (54°C).
C. Apply penetrant by brushing, spraying, or dipping. Let stand 2 to 15 minutes, depending on
temperature.
D. Remove surplus penetrant by applying special cleaner recommended by penetrant manufacturer, or
by rinsing with water. Allow housing to dry.
E. Apply a light, even coat of developer by spraying, brushing, or dipping. Cracks or other opening in
surface being inspected will appear as bright red. An indication of size of the defect may be
obtained by watching the size and rate of growth of red indication.
11. Threaded Fastener Installation (PIR-PPS20015-1, Rev. S.)
A. Fastener Lengths
Fastener lengths must be long enough to prevent bearing loads on threads. The complete chamfer
or end radius of the fastener or screw must extend through the nut.
The specified fastener grip length can be varied by one size (longer or shorter) to meet
requirements stated above. Where needed, use a maximum of two standard filler washers (spacers)
under the nut to adjust for fastener length or alignment of cotter key hole. Where nutplates are used,
adjust for protruding head fastener length by using up to a maximum of two standard filler washers
under the fastener head.
B. Washer Usaqe
Add a maximum of two NAS1149 washers (of the correct diameter, material and finish that matches
the fastener being installed) under fastener heads or nuts to correct for variations in material
thickness within the tolerances permitted.
C. Self-locking Fasteners
The use of self-locking nuts, fasteners and screws, including fasteners with non-metallic inserts is
subject to the following limitations:
(1) Fasteners incorporating self-locking devices must not be re-used if they can be run up using
less than the required minimum torque values specified or as shown in Chart 2, 91-10-00.
They may be reused, if hand tools are required to run them up, providing there is no obvious
damage to the self-locking device prior to installation.
(2) Fasteners 5/16 inch diameter and over with cotter pin holes may be used with self-locking nuts.
Nuts with non-metallic locking devices may be used in this application only if the fasteners are
free from burrs around the cotter pin holes.
(3) Self-locking nuts must not be used at joints which subject either the nut or the fastener to
rotation.
(4) Self-locking fasteners shall never be tapped or rethreaded. Nuts, fasteners and screws with
damaged threads or rough ends shall not be used, or rethreaded.
D. Torque
See Torque Requirements, 91-10-00.
PAGE 10
Feb 28/07 20-00-00 1K10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
12. Lubrication of Threads

Lubricate all fittings on external lines, including attachment points at engine and other components, with
proper lubricant (specified in Chart 3).
When applying thread lubricants, proceed as follows:
A. Thoroughly clean threads before applying lubricant.
B. Use thread lubricant sparingly.
C. Apply thread lubricant to male threads only.
D. Lubricate first three threads only on straight fittings.
E. Do not lubricate first two threads on tapered fittings; apply lubricant to next three threads only.
F. Ensure lubricant does not enter fittings or flared areas.
G. Lubricate any fittings going to engine with same fluid going through lines.
CHART 3
THREAD LUBRICANTS
TYPE OF LINE TYPE OF LUBRICANT

Brake MIL-H-5606, Tite Seal 3-Y3
Deicer (Air) TT-A-580 (JAN-A-669), Anti-Seize Compound
(White Lead Base)
Freon TT-A-580 or MIL-T-5544, Anti-Seize Compound
Fuel MIL-T-5544, Anti-Seize, Graphite Petrolatum
Oil MIL-G-6032, Lubricating Grease (Gasoline and
Oil Resistant)
Oxygen MIL-T-27730, Thread Compound, Anti-Seize and Sealing,
Ribbon Dope Thread Sealant, Permacel 412
Pitot and Static TT-A-580 (JAN-A-669), Anti-Seize Compound
(White Lead Base)
NOTE: Lubricate engine fittings only with fluid contained in particular lines.
1K11 20-00-00 Feb

PAGE 11
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 12
Feb 28/07 20-00-00 1K12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAINTING
1. Painting Safety
WARNING: OVERSPRAY FROM CERTAIN ENAMELS, IF PUT IN WATER, IS FLAMMABLE. STORE
ALL OVERSPRAY IN COVERED CONTAINERS AWAY FROM BUILDINGS WHERE
SPRAYING OPERATIONS ARE CONDUCTED.
WARNING: WASH ALL RAGS AND SPONGES USED TO APPLY ANY PHOSPHORIC ACID
CONVERSION COATINGS (ALODINE) BEFORE DISPOSAL. IF MATERIAL DRIES ON
RAG, THERE IS DANGER OF SPONTANEOUS COMBUSTION.
WARNING: MIX DOPES AND LACQUERS WITH AIR DRILL. DO NOT USE ELECTRIC DRILL.
ARCING ELECTRIC DRILL MOTOR WILL IGNITE FUMES.
WARNING: VERIFY SPRAY ROOM IS WELL VENTILATED. A CONCENTRATION OF FUMES WILL
CAUSE A DANGEROUS FIRE HAZARD OR INSUFFICIENT OXYGEN FOR THE
OPERATOR.
CAUTION: DO NOT ALLOW PAINT STRIPPER TO CONTACT FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PARTS
SUCH AS RADOMES, RADIO ANTENNAS, WING PARTS, OR WING TIPS. FIBERGLASS
STRUCTURES MAY BE FINISHED WITH ACRYLIC LACQUER OR POLYURETHANE
ENAMEL AND ARE DAMAGED BY THE STRIPPER.
2. Polyurethane Paint Safety
WARNING: POLYURETHANE PAINT MAY BE DANGEROUS TO YOUR HEALTH. SERIOUS INJURY
WILL RESULT IF SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ARE NOT FOLLOWED.
WARNING: DURING TRANSIT AND STORAGE CHECK FOR SIGNS OF A BULGING CAN, OTHER
THAN NORMAL ODOR, OR A CHANGE IN RESIN FROM A CLEAR TO A CLOUDY
STATE. A SLOW CARBON DIOXIDE BUILDUP WILL CAUSE CAN TO BURST. REMOVE
AND PROPERLY DISPOSE ANY DEFECTIVE CANS.
WARNING: ENSURE ADEQUATE VENTILATION AND WEAR APPROPRIATE BREATHING
PROTECTION FACE MASK WHEN PAINTING.
WARNING: POLYURETHANE PAINTS CAN PRODUCE IRRITATION OF THE SKIN, EYES, AND
RESPIRATORY TRACT DURING MIXING AND APPLICATION. EXPOSURE TO SPRAY
VAPORS AND MISTS DURING SPRAY APPLICATION MAY CAUSE BREATHING
DIFFICULTY, SHORTNESS OF BREATH, AND DRY COUGH. INDIVIDUAL
SUSCEPTIBILITY IS A CONTROLLING FACTOR. ONCE SENSITIZED, MANY PEOPLE
CANNOT TOLERATE ANY EXPOSURE AND MUST THEREAFTER AVOID EXPOSED
WORK AREAS.
WARNING: PRODUCTION TYPE MIXING AND SPRAY PAINTING OPERATIONS MUST BE IN
SPECIALLY DESIGNED, EXHAUST-VENTILATED AREAS.
WARNING: PAINTERS MUST BE FULLY CLOTHED WITH COLLARS BUTTONED AND SLEEVES
TAPED AT THE WRIST. PAINTERS MUST WEAR FITTED, DOUBLE CARTRIDGE
ORGANIC VAPOR RESPIRATOR WITH FRESH CARTRIDGE INSERTED DAILY,
SOLVENT-RESISTANT GAUNTLET STYLE GLOVES, AND SAFETY GOGGLES.
1K13 20-20-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. Paint Application
WARNING: GROUND AIRCRAFT BEFORE PAINTING SO NO STATIC ELECTRICITY CHARGES
BUILD UP AND DISCHARGE.
CAUTION: PROTECT WINDSHIELD WHEN MASKING AIRCRAFT. PAINT STRIPPERS, METAL
BRIGHTENERS, AND SOLVENTS WILL DAMAGE WINDSHIELD.
CAUTION: BALANCE MOVABLE CONTROL SURFACES AFTER PAINTING. REFER TO
APPROPRIATE MAINTENANCE MANUAL SECTIONS.
CAUTION: BEFORE FORCE DRYING AT ELEVATED TEMPERATURES, VERIFY THAT ALL FUEL
TANK VENTS ARE UNOBSTRUCTED AND WILL NOT RESULT IN EXPANDED FUEL
SPILLING ON NEWLY PAINTED SURFACES OR PAINT BOOTH FLOOR.
CAUTION: DO NOT PAINT PITOT TUBES, GAS CAPS, OR ANTENNA COVERS THAT WERE NOT
FACTORY PAINTED.
CAUTION: DO NOT USE METALLIC PAINTS ON RADAR CONES OR ANTENNA COVERS.
CAUTION: DO NOT ALLOW SILICONE LUBRICANTS TO CONTACT ANY SURFACES TO BE
PAINTED. SILICONE LUBRICANT IS VERY DIFFICULT TO REMOVE COMPLETELY.
4. Painting Sequence
For primer, tack, finish coats, and lacquer application:
A. Position airplane so airflow is from tail toward nose and overspray ahead of you.
B. To minimize overspray problems, have two painters work simultaneously on opposite sides of
airplane.
C. Paint difficult areas such as landing gear, and wheel wells before flat surfaces. Paint the ends and
leading edges of ailerons and flaps. Paint flap and aileron wells, wing tips, and leading and trailing
edges.
D. Paint the bottom of the airplane first including bottom of horizontal tail surfaces. Starting at the root
and working outward, spray chordwise. Work up fuselage and allow spray to cover sides. Work up to
engine. Spray wing bottom. Start each painter at the root and work toward tip, spraying chordwise.
E. Lower airplane tail enough to reach fin top. When spraying fuselage top, tilt spray gun so overspray
is ahead of area being painted and new paint will wipe out overspray. Spray primer across fuselage,
vertical and horizontal tail surfaces, and wing.
5. Color Matching
See aircraft logbooks for color codes.
6. Trim and Registration Numbers
Apply predominant color first over entire surface. Apply trim colors over base color after it dries. When
top of fuselage is to be painted white with a dark color adjoining it, apply light color and feather into area
to be painted with dark color. When light color dries, place masking tape and paper along separation line,
and apply dark color.
Allow paint to dry several hours before removing masking tape. Remove tape by pulling slowly parallel to
surface. This will reduce the possibility of peeling off finish with tape.
Apply registration numbers by painting or affixing self-adhering plastic figures. They must be solid color
lines contrasting with background. Location and size of identification numbers vary, per aircraft size.
Location and size is found in Federal Aviation Regulations.
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 20-20-00 1K14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
7. Paint System Compatibility

Before applying new paint, find what type finish was used previously. Refer to the Piper parts catalog for
correct paint number and color.
Identify paint finishes by applying engine oil to a small surface area. Old nitrocellulose finishes will soften
in a few minutes. Acrylics, urethanes, and epoxy finishes show no effects.
If not identified, wipe down a small area with rag wet with methy ethyl ketone. MEK picks up pigments
from acrylic finishes, but not from epoxy or cured urethane coatings. Wipe surface, do not rub. Heavy
rubbing picks up epoxy and urethane pigments from coatings not fully cured.
The use of different types of paint, with several coatings, make repair of damaged and deteriorated
areas difficult. Paint finishes are not always compatible. The following are general rules for compatibility
and are not necessarily listed in order of importance.
A. Old type zinc chromate primer may be used directly for touchup of bare metal surfaces and on
interior finishes. It may be overcoated with wash primers if in good condition. Acrylic lacquer finishes
will not adhere to this material.
B. Modified zinc chromate primer will not adhere to bare metal. Never use it over a dried film of acrylic
nitrocellulose lacquer.
C. Nitrocellulose coatings will adhere to acrylic finishes, but reverse is not true. Do not use acrylic
nitrocellulose lacquers over old nitrocellulose finishes.
D. Acrylic nitrocellulose lacquers will not adhere to nitrocellulose and epoxy finishes and to bare metal.
For best results, apply lacquers over fresh, successive coatings of wash primer and modified zinc
chromate. They also adhere to freshly applied epoxy coatings (dried less than 6 hours).
E. Epoxy topcoats adhere to all paint systems in good condition. Use epoxy for general touch touchup,
including touchup of defects in baked enamel coatings.
F. Old wash primer coats may be overcoated directly with epoxy finishes. Apply a new second coat of
wash primer if an acrylic finish is to be applied.
G. Old acrylic finishes may be refinished with new acrylic provided old coating is thoroughly softened
using acrylic nitrocellulose thinner before paint touchup.
H. Repair damage to epoxy finishes by using more epoxy. Neither lacquer finish will stick to epoxy
surfaces. In some instances, air drying enamels may be used for touchup of epoxy coatings if edges
of damaged areas are roughened with abrasive paper.
8. Common Paint Troubles
A. Poor Adhesion - Paint properly applied to correctly pretreated surfaces will adhere satisfactorily.
When thoroughly dry, paint must not be easily removed. Poor adhesion can result from:
(1) Inadequate cleaning and pretreatment.
(2) Inadequate stirring of paint or primer.
(3) Coating at incorrect time intervals.
(4) Application under adverse conditions.
(5) Bad application.
B. Spray Dust - Spray dust caused by atomized particles drying before reaching surface being painted
fail to flow as a continuous film. Usual causes are incorrect air pressure or distance gun is held from
work.
1K15 20-20-00 FebPAGE 3

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C. Sags and Runs - Excess paint causes wet paint film to move by gravity and presents a sagging
appearance. Incorrect viscosity, air pressure, and gun handling, or inadequate surface preparation
are frequent causes.
D. Spray Mottle - Sometimes known as orange peel or pebble, is caused by incorrect paint viscosity,
air pressure, spray gun setting, or the distance the gun is held from work.
E. Blushing is one of the most common troubles. It appears as clouding or blooming of paint film. It is
more common with cellulose than synthetic materials. It may be caused by moisture in air supply
line, adverse humidity, drafts, or sudden temperature changes.
9. Storage
A. Store paint, enamel, and other finishing material in dry storage away from direct sunlight and heat.
Mark each container with a code for identification.
B. Storage facilities must comply to Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA) requirements
regarding air circulation, lighting, and fire protection. Lock storage facilities to prevent children and
unauthorized personnel entry.
C. Invert pigmented materials every inventory so pigments will not pack to can bottom. Properly
dispose of empty containers.
D. Use older materials first. Useful life of some finishes is limited.
E. Storage area temperatures must be approximately 50-90°F. If finishes are stored in temperature
extremes, allow them to return to room temperature before using.
10. Painting Facility
WARNING: DO NOT BREATHE PAINT FUMES. FUMES DEPLETE THE OXYGEN SUPPLY
REQUIRED BY THE BODY.
A. Painting facilities must conform to local, state, and OSHA standards with respect to air circulation,
exhaust emissions, lighting, and fire protection.
B. Provide sufficient air movement in painting area so there is only a slight finishing material odor.
Exhaust fans must be belt-driven and located near floor level. Locate fan’s motor away from fumes.
C. All spraying area personnel must wear approved respiration safety equipment.
11. Aircraft Finish Care
See Aircraft Finish Care, 12-00-00.
PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 20-20-00 1K16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1K17 20-20-00 FebPAGE 5

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GRIDS 1K18 THRU 1L24

INTENTIONALLY BLANK
PAGE 6
Feb 28/07 20-20-00 1K18
CARD 2 OF 9
PA-46-350P
(S/N’s 4636001 AND UP)

2A1
Published by

2926 Piper Drive
U.S.A.
Member
General Aviation
2A2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
are as follows:
ORG950712 June 19, 1996 All

PR980101 January 1, 1998 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6
CR981223 December 23, 1998 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6
PR000201 February 1, 2000 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6
PR010515 May 15, 2001 1
CR050730 July 30, 2005 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8
PR060207 February 7, 2006 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8
CR070228* February 28, 2007 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 and 9

02/28/07.
manual.

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 1
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTRODUCTION
CHAPTER CHAPTER


2 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07
5 Feb 28/07
6 Feb 28/07
7 Feb 28/07
8 Feb 28/07
9 Feb 28/07
10 Feb 28/07
11 Feb 28/07
12 Feb 28/07
13 Feb 28/07
14 Feb 28/07
15 Feb 28/07
16 Feb 28/07
Index 1 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07
5 Feb 28/07
6 Feb 28/07
7 Feb 28/07
8 Feb 28/07
9 Feb 28/07
10 Feb 28/07

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTRODUCTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION
General 1 2A9
Effectivity 2 2A10
Pagination 3 2A11
Indexing 3 2A11
INDEX
Index 1 2B1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTRODUCTION

(5-20-00).
2. General
airplane.
correspondence.

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. Effectivity
1995 4636001 thru 4636020 2004 4636349 thru 4636363

1996 4636021 thru 4636076 2005 4636364 thru 4636374
1997 4636077 thru 4636131 2006 4636375 thru 4636399
1998 4636132 thru 4636186 2007 4636400 and up
1999 4636187 thru 4636247
2000 4636248 thru 4636313
2002 4636299, and
4636314 thru 4636338
2003 4636339 thru 4636348

Example:
46 36 001

MODEL CODE

fuel system.
PIPER.
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6. Pagination
with Page 1 (i.e. - 28-40-00, Page 1).
different page.
Example.
9. Indexing
apply.

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Wylie, Texas 75098
P.O. Box 1404
(3) ALTERNATOR:
Airport Complex
P. O. Box 273
(4) AUTOFLIGHT:
Olathe, Kansas 66061-1950 PH: (940) 325-9406
PAGE 4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(5) BATTERY:
(6) BRAKES:
1160 Center Road
Avon, Ohio 44011
(330) 374-3743
FAX: (330) 374-2290
Black Standard
Pneumatic De-Icer
Installation,
Maintenance and
10 Ammon Drive FAX: - (603) 669-0931
or,
55 Old Bedford Road
Lincoln, MA 01773

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

14405 Keil Road NE
(10) ENGINE:
43 Magnolia Ave. #4
20 New King Street
711 Taylor Street
Elyria, Ohio 44036
2600 S. Custer
Wichita, Kansas
(See Brakes, above)
or,
4520 Hampton Rd. FAX: (336) 766-9040
Clemmons, NC 27012
PAGE 6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

2600 Skypark Drive
(18) MAGNETOS:
7575 Baymeadows Way
Olathe, KS 66062
(20) OXYGEN SYSTEM:
2225 Erie Street
Torrance, CA 90504

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Piqua, OH 45356-2634
Propeller
Composite Blade
Propeller Owner’s
Aluminum Blade
Inspection, Repair,
P/N 006-05332-0001
2275 Stanley Ave. FAX: (937) 229-8531
Dayton, Ohio 45404
(26) STARTER:
or,
Granbury, TX 76048
(27) TURBOCHARGER:
Torrance, CA 90505
PAGE 8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(28) VACUUM PUMP:


Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
00 General
10 Time Limits
00 General
10 Jacking

20 Leveling
00 General
10 Towing
20 Taxiing
10 Parking
20 Mooring

12 SERVICING 1I3
00 General
10 Replenishing

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
00 General
20 Painting
00 General
20 Distribution
40 Heating
50 Cooling
22 AUTOFLIGHT 2F11
10 Autopilot
00 General
00 General
30 DC Generation
40 External Power
60 Emergency
20 Extinguishing
00 General
10 Aileron and Tab
20 Rudder and Tab
30 Elevator and Tab
50 Flaps
60 Speedbrakes
PAGE 12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
28 FUEL 3F9
00 General
10 Storage
20 Distribution
40 Indicating
00 General
10 Main
00 General
10 Airfoil
30 Pitot and Static
00 General
50 Steering
33 LIGHTS 4G5
40 Exterior
34 NAVIGATION 5C1
00 General
35 OXYGEN 6C1
10 Crew
20 Passenger

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
37 VACUUM 6C15
00 General
10 Distribution
20 Indicating

51 STRUCTURES 6F1
00 General
70 Repairs
52 DOORS 6G13
10 Passenger/Crew
20 Emergency Exit
30 Cargo
55 STABILIZERS 6H13
00 General
20 Elevator
40 Rudder
56 WINDOWS 6I19
00 General
20 Cabin
30 Door
57 WINGS 6K5
40 Attach Fittings
50 Flight Surfaces
61 PROPELLERS 7C1
20 Controlling
00 General
PAGE 14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
71 POWER PLANT 7D5
00 General
10 Cowling
20 Mounts
70 Engine Drains
10 Distribution
30 Indicating
74 IGNITION 7F5

20 Distribution
10 Power Control
10 Power
20 Temperature
79 OIL 7J3
20 Distribution
30 Indicating
80 STARTING 7J15
10 Cranking
81 TURBINES 7K9
10 Charts


Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

1E23
Ailerons
Balancing: 6L9
Control Column
Installation: 3C24
Control System
Aileron - Rudder
Interconnect: 3D7
Control Cables: 3D2
Installation: 3D3
Wiring: 4C8 4F6
Corrosion Control
Control Wheel C
Wing: 6L3
Installation: 3C21
Installation: 6L7
Tab: 3D5
2D22
Compressor: 2E22
Dipstick: 2E23
Oil Level: 2F1
2E22
Slip Torque: 2F1
Servicing: 2D23
Ambient Temperature
Indication: 2E14
Stand: 2E7
2B1 INDEX FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 INDEX 2B2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

OAT: 9I13 2H19 7J11
2B3 INDEX FebPAGE 3

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Flaps
G Inspection
Warning 6I11
1K5 System: 6C9
PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 INDEX 2B4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Forward: 4H1
2B5 INDEX FebPAGE 5

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
P Propeller Rudder
Pagination: A11
7C11 Control System
Parking: 1G15
Piper
Repair: 7C11 3D13
Pitch Servo: 2G12
Rings: 3K10
Measuring: 3K3
5C11
Installation: 5C12
Pitot Head: 5C18
3K7 Seats
Test: 5C11
Placards: 1G23
Exterior: 1H1
Interior: 1H9
Components: 3I11
R System: 3J9
Limits: 3J4
PAGE 6
Feb 28/07 INDEX 2B6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

2B7 INDEX FebPAGE 7

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Filter: 6D3 Wing
Vertical Fin: 6I11
Y
Yaw Servo: 2G10
W
A11
Weather Radar: 5F1
Weighing: 1F15
Wheels
Bearing Cup: 4F4
Repairs: 4F3
PAGE 8
Feb 28/07 INDEX 2B8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2B9 INDEX FebPAGE 9

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

INTENTIONALLY BLANK
PAGE 10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER
21
ENVIRONMENTAL
SYSTEMS
2C1
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2C2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 21
CHAPTER CHAPTER
21-List of 1 Feb 28/07 21-50-00 1 Feb 28/07

3 Feb 28/07
2 Feb 28/07 5 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07 6 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07 7 Feb 28/07
8 Feb 28/07
21-00-00 1 Feb 28/07 9 Feb 28/07
2 Feb 28/07 10 Feb 28/07
11 Feb 28/07
21-20-00 1 Feb 28/07 12 Feb 28/07
2 Feb 28/07 13 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07 14 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07 15 Feb 28/07
5 Feb 28/07 16 Feb 28/07
6 Feb 28/07 17 Feb 28/07
7 Feb 28/07 18 Feb 28/07
8 Feb 28/07 19 Feb 28/07
20 Feb 28/07
21-30-00 1 Feb 28/07 21 Feb 28/07
2 Feb 28/07 22 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07 23 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07 24 Feb 28/07
5 Feb 28/07 25 Feb 28/07
6 Feb 28/07 26 Feb 28/07
7 Feb 28/07 27 Feb 28/07
8 Feb 28/07 28 Feb 28/07
9 Feb 28/07 29 Feb 28/07
10 Feb 28/07 30 Feb 28/07
11 Feb 28/07 31 Feb 28/07
12 Feb 28/07 32 Feb 28/07
13 Feb 28/07 33 Feb 28/07
14 Feb 28/07 34 Feb 28/07
15 Feb 28/07 35 Feb 28/07
16 Feb 28/07 36 Feb 28/07
37 Feb 28/07
21-40-00 1 Feb 28/07 38 Feb 28/07
2 Feb 28/07 39 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07 40 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07
5 Feb 28/07 21-60-00 1 Feb 28/07
6 Feb 28/07 2 Feb 28/07
2C3 21 - LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES PAGE 1

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 21 - ENVIRONMENTAL SYSTEMS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
GENERAL 21-00-00 1 2C9
DISTRIBUTION 21-20-00 1 2C11

Ground Blower 1 2C11
Removal 1 2C11
Installation 1 2C11
Cabin Recirculation Blowers 1 2C11
Removal 1 2C11
Installation 1 2C11
Bleed Air Check Valve 3 2C13
Removal 3 2C13
Installation 3 2C13
Avionics Cooling Blower 3 2C13
Removal 3 2C13
Installation 3 2C13
Muffin Fan 3 2C13
PRESSURIZATION CONTROL 21-30-00 1 2C19

General 1 2C19
Troubleshooting 1 2C19
Components 7 2D1
Cabin Outflow Valve / Cabin Safety Valve 7 2D1
Removal 7 2D1
Installation 7 2D1
Servicing 7 2D1
Auxiliary Volume Tank 7 2D1
Vacuum Regulator 7 2D1
Cabin Pressure Controller 10 2D4
Description 10 2D4
Operational Check 10 2D4
Vacuum Relief Solenoid Valve 11 2D5
Description 11 2D5
Removal 11 2D5
Installation 11 2D5
Bleed Air Dump Valve 11 2D5
Removal 11 2D5
Installation 11 2D5
Rigging Bleed Air and Bleed Air Condition System 12 2D6
Pressurization System Test 12 2D6

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
HEATING 21-40-00 1 2D11

Heat Exchanger/Air Selector Valve/Plenum Assembly 2 2D12
Removal 2 2D12
Installation 2 2D12
Air Selector Valve 2 2D12
Removal 2 2D12
Installation 2 2D12
Heat Exchanger 3 2D13
Removal 3 2D13
Installation 3 2D13
Plenum 3 2D13
Removal 3 2D13
Installation 3 2D13
Defroster 3 2D13
Removal 3 2D13
Installation 3 2D13
Rigging 4 2D14
Bleed Air Shutoff Valve 4 2D14
Removal 4 2D14
Installation 4 2D14
Auxiliary Cabin Heater 4 2D14
Removal 4 2D14
Installation 4 2D14
COOLING 21-50-00 1 2D17

General 1 2D17
Troubleshooting 1 2D17
Servicing Cooling System 7 2D23
Definitions 7 2D23
Service Valves 7 2D23
Description 7 2D23
Replacement 7 2D23
Malfunction Detection 9 2E1
Special Servicing Procedures 11 2E3
Refrigerant Safety Precautions 11 2E3
System Servicing Precautions 12 2E4
Servicing the System (with a Charging Stand) 13 2E5
Discharging 13 2E5
Evacuating the System 16 2E8
Leak Detection 19 2E11
Charging the System 20 2E12
Post Charging Operational Check 22 2E14
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
COOLING (continued) 21-50-00

Servicing the System (with a Manifold Set) 25 2E17
Test Gauge and a Manifold Set 25 2E17
Evacuating the System 25 2E17
Leak Detection 25 2E17
Charging the System 28 2E20
Post Charging Operational Check 29 2E21
Compressor 30 2E22
Compressor Service 30 2E22
Removal 30 2E22
Installation 31 2E23
Checking Compressor Oil Level 31 2E23
Adjustment of Drive Belt Tension 32 2E24
Refrigerant Lines and Routing 33 2F1
Evaporator/Blower Assembly 34 2F2
Removal 34 2F2
Installation 34 2F2
Expansion Valve 34 2F2
Removal 34 2F2
Installation 34 2F2
Condenser 35 2F3
Removal 35 2F3
Installation 35 2F3
Condenser Blower Motor Assembly 35 2F3
Removal 35 2F3
Installation 35 2F3
Receiver - Dehydrator 36 2F4
Removal 36 2F4
Installation 36 2F4
Manifold Assembly 36 2F4
Removal 36 2F4
Installation 37 2F4
Pressure Switches 37 2F5
Removal 37 2F5
Installation 37 2F5
TEMPERATURE CONTROL 21-60-00 1 2F9

Cabin Air Temperature Control Valve 1 2F9
Removal 1 2F9
Installation 1 2F9

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GENERAL
The environmental system consists of an engine bleed air and conditioning system, cabin air distribution
system, pressurization and control system, ventilating air system and air conditioning system (if installed).
The engine bleed air system provides the air supply for pressurizing the cabin. Temperature of the bleed air is
controlled using an air to air heat exchanger which utilizes ambient air to cool the bleed air, hot air from an
exhaust shroud to heat the bleed air, or a mixture of ambient and hot air to obtain the bleed air temperature
necessary to maintain the desired cabin comfort level.
The cabin pressurization and control system consist of an outflow valve (isobaric), safety valve, cabin altitude
and rate selector, electrically operated vacuum solenoid valve, surge tank and associated inter-connecting
plumbing and wiring. Cabin altitude, differential pressure, and rate of change are displayed on a single 3-inch
diameter indicator. Pilot warning (displayed on the annunciator panel) is provided to indicate a cabin altitude
above 10,000 feet.
2C9 21-00-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 21-00-00 2C10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
DISTRIBUTION
The cabin air distribution system consists of left and right side panel ducting, windshield defrost, foot warmer
(if installed) and ventilation blowers. The side panel ducts provide for overall air distribution throughout the
length of the cabin as well as individual controllable air outlets at each seat (eyeball outlets). The defrost
control will allow part of the bleed air to be diverted to the windshield defrost outlet. Separate and individual
controls for the two foot warmer outlets (if installed) are also provided. The outlets are located between the
rudder pedals on each side of the cockpit. The ventilation blowers supply airflow to the portion of the sidewall
ducts containing the individual seat outlets (eyeballs).
Cabin ventilating air, for ground and unpressurized flight operation, is supplied from the ambient air source to
the bleed air heat exchanger through a ram air selector valve and check valve. This will supplement air flow
primarily in ground operation. This air source is capable of being heated by mixing with hot air from the
exhaust shroud.
1. Ground Blower
A vane-axial ground blower is installed in the left duct below the forward baggage compartment floor.
This blower supplements air flow during ground operation. Flapper-type check valves are located at the
forward pressure bulkhead.
A. Removal
(1) Loosen the two clamps that secure the flexible adapter ducts to the blower.
(2) Loosen the two clamps that secure the flexible adapter ducts to the inlet and outlet ducts.
(3) Slide the aft flexible adapter duct rearward over the outlet duct.
(4) Disconnect the electrical leads from the blower.
(5) Slide the blower aft and down to remove it.
B. Installation
(1) Position blower in place, ensuring that the airflow arrow is pointing aft.
(2) Slide the aft flexible adapter duct forward onto blower and secure it with the clamp.
(3) Secure the forward flexible adapter duct to the blower with the clamp.
(4) Tighten clamps that secure the flexible adapter ducts to the inlet outlet ducts.
(5) Connect leads from the blower.
2. Cabin Recirculation Blowers
The left and right cabin recirculation blowers are beneath the rear baggage compartment floor between
F.S. 233.87 and F.S. 241.50.
A. Removal
(1) Remove the rear seats, the rear baggage compartment carpet, and the two large access
panels in the rear baggage compartment floor.
(2) Disconnect the duct from the outboard side of the blower.
(3) Disconnect the electrical lead going to the blower motor.
(4) Remove the bolts, nuts and washers that attach the blower to the evaporator shell.
(5) Remove the blower from its cavity.
B. Installation
(1) Position the blower in place on the evaporator shell and secure it with the bolts, nuts and
washers.
(2) Connect the electrical leads going to the blower motor. (See Chapter 91 for electrical schematic.)
2C11 21-20-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
Feb 28/07
PAGE 2
Defrost
FWD Control
21-20-00
DEFROST
PULL ON Cabin Press
Control
Aft Pressure Bulkhead Pressure
Check CABIN
Bulkhead PRESS
Valve
PULL OFF
Flow Restrictor Electric

Eyeballs (6) Duct Heater Sonic
Ground Nozzle

Blower
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Bleed Temperature
Air Distribution System
Safety Air Control

Valve Dump
Figure 1
Valve CABIN
Defroster TEMP
Recirculation Blower Air Selector PULL HOT
And Evaporators Box Temperature
Check
Valve Control Valve
Outflow
Valve
NACA
Bleed Air
Conditioned Air Flush Inlet
Shutoff Valve
Check
Valve Sonic Heat Muff
Nozzle
Heat Bleed
Exchanger Air
Firewall
2C12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(3) Connect the duct to the outboard side of the blower.

(4) Reinstall access panels, carpeting, and rear seats.
3. Bleed Air Check Valve (See Figure 1.)
A. Removal
(1) On left hand side, remove the six bolts attaching cabin air supply tube and auxiliary electric
heater to forward pressure bulkhead.
(2) Break seal and remove check valve.
(3) On right hand side, loosen band clamps on flexible hoses connecting bleed air tubes.
(4) Remove the six bolts connecting cabin air supply tube and bleed air supply tube to forward
pressure bulkhead.
(5) Break seal and remove check valve.
B. Installation
(1) Apply GE RTV 1508 sealant to mating surface of check valves.
(2) On left hand side, position valve and gaskets (with flapper on aft side) between auxiliary heater
and forward pressure bulkhead.
(3) Secure valve, auxiliary heater, and cabin air supply tube to forward pressure bulkhead with six
bolts.
(4) On right hand side, position valve and gaskets (with flapper on aft side) between bleed air
supply tube and forward pressure bulkhead.
(5) Secure valve, bleed air supply tube, and cabin air supply tube to pressure bulkhead with six
bolts.
4. Avionics Cooling Blower (See Figure 2.)
The avionics cooling blower is installed on the right side of the fuselage, behind the instrument panel, at
FS 108.00. The cooling air is directed through ducts to installed avionics equipment.
NOTE: Actual equipment served will vary depending on optional equipment installed.
A. Removal
(1) Remove ducts from top of blower. (Ducts are held in place by Ty-Raps.)
(2) Disconnect blower motor wires at connector.
(3) Remove screws, washers and nuts that attach the blower assembly to its mounting bracket.
B. Installation
(1) Attach the blower assembly to the mounting bracket with the screws, washers and nuts.
(2) Reconnect the blower motor wires.
(3) Attach the ducts to the tops of the blower assembly. Ensure that the duct ends overlap the
ports on top of the blower one-half inch minimum. Secure with Ty-Raps.
5. Muffin Fan
In S/N’s 4636314 and up, in airplanes equipped with the Single Side EFIS option, a muffin fan is
installed in the control pedestal as shown in Figure 2, Sheet 2.
2C13 21-20-00 FebPAGE 3

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A
A
BLOWER
DUCT
TUBING
J308
P308
Avionics Cooling
PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 21-20-00 2C14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TO XPNDR #1
TO XPNDR #2 TO FLIGHT MAX DISPLAY

(S/N'S 4636299, 4636314 THRU 4636374)
TO AUTOPILOT COMPUTER
TO GNS-530 NO. 2
TO GNS-530 NO. 1
DUCT TUBING
BLOWER
ACFT SKIN
SCREW (2)
WASHER (2) FWD
+
-
AV5
F.S.
MUFFIN FAN 108.00
VIEW A-A
ROTATED 180°
D
FW
104468 F
UP
Avionics Cooling
2C15 21-20-00 FebPAGE 5

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TO XPNDR #1
TO XPNDR #2 PLACE CAP ON OUTLET
TO AUTOPILOT COMPUTER
TO GNS-430 NO. 2
TO GNS-430 NO. 1
DUCT TUBING
BLOWER
ACFT SKIN
SCREW (2)
WASHER (2) FWD
+
-
AV5
F.S.
MUFFIN FAN 108.00
VIEW A-A
ROTATED 180°
D
FW
105121 M
UP
Avionics Cooling
PAGE 6
Feb 28/07 21-20-00 2C16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2C17 21-20-00 FebPAGE 7

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 8
Feb 28/07 21-20-00 2C18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PRESSURIZATION CONTROL
1. General
The cabin pressurization and control system consists of an outflow valve (isobaric), safety valve, cabin
altitude and rate selector, electrically operated vacuum solenoid valve, surge tank and associated inter-
connecting plumbing and wiring. Cabin altitude, differential pressure, and rate of change are displayed
on a single 3-inch diameter indicator. Pilot warning (displayed on the annunciator panel) is provided to
indicate a cabin altitude above 10,000 feet.
The cabin safety valve is held open on the ground with the engine operating by a vacuum applied to the
control chamber of the safety valve. The vacuum regulator of the vacuum system provides a vacuum of
4.8-5.2 in. mercury referenced to cabin pressure. This vacuum holds the safety valve open while on the
ground through the action of the landing gear squat switch, which energizes the vacuum relief solenoid
valve to the open position. A cabin dump switch is also provided to rapidly depressurize the cabin in
flight, by energizing the vacuum relief valve solenoid valve.
See Chapter 91 for electrical schematics.
2. Troubleshooting
See Chart 1.
2C19 21-30-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Cabin Pressure Control System

Figure 1
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 21-30-00 2C20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 1 (Sheet 1 of 3)
TROUBLESHOOTING (PRESSURIZATION SYSTEM)
Trouble Cause Remedy
Cabin will not pressurize. Blocked safety valve cabin Replace filter and check
air filter or orifice. orifice.
Blocked controller cabin air Clean filter and check
filter with orifice. orifice on controller.
Internal malfunction in the Remove and replace
isobaric valve. isobaric valve.
Internal malfunction in the Remove and replace safety
safety valve. valve.
controller. controller.
Defective landing gear Remove and replace
safety switch. switch.
Dump switch incorrectly Replace switch.
positioned or defective.
No pressure to door seal. Check and repair door
seal or door seal valve.
Excessive leakage in Locate leak and tighten
pressurization ducts. connections.
Excessive cabin leakage. Locate and repair leak.
Solenoid valve malfunctions Replace valve.
in the open position.
Cabin pressurizes to full Vacuum tube not connected Connect vacuum tube.
positive differential to controller.
pressure after takeoff.
Malfunction in aircraft Check aircraft vacuum
vacuum supply. supply.
Rupture in volume tank. Replace tank.
Internal malfunction in the Remove and replace valve.
outflow isobaric valve.
2C21 21-30-00 FebPAGE 3

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Cabin altitude decreases Low aircraft vacuum supply. Check aircraft vacuum
below selected altitude. supply.
Minor leak in tube between Remove and replace tube
controller and volume tank or volume tank.
or in volume tank.
Minor leak in tube between Remove and replace tube
controller and isobaric valve or isobaric valve.
or in isobaric valve.
Minor leak in the controller. Remove and replace
controller.
Minimum rates unbalanced. Minor leak in tube between Remove or replace tube
Down rate faster than up controller and volume tank or volume tank.
rate. or in volume tank.
Minor leak in the controller. Remove and replace
controller.
Pressurized operation Solenoid valve malfunction Replace valve.
before takeoff and in the closed position.
after landing.
Landing gear safety switch/ Remove and replace
dump switch malfunction in the switch.
open position.
Broken wiring to the Repair wiring.
solenoid valve.
Loose or damaged pneumatic Check tube connections or
tube between solenoid valve replace damaged tube.
and safety valve.
Internal malfunction in the Remove and replace valve.
safety valve.
Cabin exceeds full positive True static atmosphere tube Securely connect or
differential calibrated blocked or not connected on remove blockage from
setting. isobaric valve and safety the true static atmosphere
valve. tube on isobaric valve and
safety valve.
Loose or damaged pneumatic Repair or replace tubing.
tubing from port “1” of
safety and isobaric valve to
atmosphere.
Cabin climbs and descends Internal malfunction in Remove and replace
at a fixed rate regardless controller. controller.
of rate selection.
PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 21-30-00 2C22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Cabin rate exceeds selected Malfunction in controller. Remove and replace
rate valve during aircraft controller.
climb to cruise altitude.
Defective cabin rate of Remove and replace
climb indicator. indicator.
Cabin pressure rapidly Malfunction in controller. Remove and replace
increases or decreases controller.
with reselection of cabin
altitude.
Cabin altitude exceeds Loss of airflow into cabin. Repair bleed air supply.
selected value.
Internal malfunction in Remove and replace valve.
isobaric valve.
Internal malfunction in Remove and replace valve.
safety valve.
Internal malfunction in Remove and replace
Excessive cabin leak rate. Seal leaks.
Cabin pressure will not Defective outflow valve. Remove and replace valve.
maintain control setting.
Defective safety valve. Remove and replace valve.
Defective cabin altitude Remove and replace cabin
controller. altitude controller.
Pressurization duct leakage. Locate leak and tighten
connection.
Cabin leakage Locate and repair leak.
Defective cabin altitude Remove and replace
pressure gauge. gauge.
Foreign matter on isobaric Clean valve seats.
outflow control valve or
safety valve seats.
Leak in outflow isobaric Locate leak and tighten
valve control line. connection.
Cabin pressure excessively Isobaric outflow valve static Clean static line.
high. line clogged.
Defective cabin over pressure Remove and replace
switch. switch.
Safety valve static vent Clean vent line.
clogged.
Defective safety valve. Remove and replace valve.
2C23 21-30-00 FebPAGE 5

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 6
Feb 28/07 21-30-00 2C24
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. Components
A. Cabin Outflow Valve / Cabin Safety Valve (See Figure 2.)
The outflow valve consists of two sections, a head section and a base section. The head section
contains port "2" (controller connection) and a plugged cabin air port. Mounted on the head is the
differential control, which contains port "1" (true static atmosphere connection with orifice). The
base assembly encloses a poppet outflow valve which seats on a surface of the base assembly
when in the closed position.
The safety valve consists of two sections, a head section and a base section. The head section
contains port "2" depressurization connection and a cabin air filter with orifice. Mounted on the head
is a differential control which contains port "1" (true static atmosphere connection with orifice). The
base assembly encloses a poppet outflow valve which seats on a surface of the base assembly
when in the closed position.
(1) Removal
(a) Disconnect the two lines from the valve being removed.
(b) Remove the three nuts which secure the valve to the aft pressure bulkhead.
(c) Remove the valve from the pressure bulkhead.
(2) Installation
(a) When reinstalling outflow and/or safety valve, the gasket dimension shown in Detail A of
Figure 2 must be met to ensure proper sealing. To provide proper clearance between nuts
and gasket face, adjust for clearance as follows:
1 Remove nuts using a deep socket and remove enough shims to meet dimensional
requirements. A minimum of one shim is required each place for installation of nut.
2 Install nuts and tighten.
3 Apply a drop of locking compound, MIL-S-22473-EV, to the top of nuts between nuts
and studs.
(b) Position the valve on the rear pressure bulkhead.
(c) Install the three nuts which hold the valve to the aft pressure bulkhead. Torque nuts to 20
in. lbs.
(d) Reconnect the two lines to the valve.
(3) Servicing
Routine maintenance of the valves is limited to the replacement of the filter in the safety valve
and cleaning of the seats in both valves.
Using Joy detergent or isopropyl alcohol, clean the seats of either valve thoroughly.
B. Auxiliary Volume Tank
This is a small sealed chamber located close to the controller; and when connected to the
controller, it provides additional volume to the rate pressure chamber in the controller, thus
providing greater accuracy of the cabin rate-of-control.
C. Vacuum Regulator (See also 37-10-00.)
Vacuum to operate the safety valve and controller is obtained from the vacuum system which
utilizes its own regulator. The regulator, set to provide 4.8 to 5.2 inches of mercury (relative to cabin
pressure), is incorporated in the system between the vacuum-driven instruments and the pump.
2D1 21-30-00 FebPAGE 7

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Safety and Outflow Valves

Figure 2
PAGE 8
Feb 28/07 21-30-00 2D2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Cabin Pressure Controller

Figure 3
2D3 21-30-00 FebPAGE 9

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
D. Cabin Pressure Controller (See Figure 3.)

(1) Description
The body of the controller is composed of three elements. The lower element forms a chamber
which is open to cabin pressure and houses the absolute bellows. It also is the face of the
controller, and has the cabin altitude selector knob and the cabin rate control knob. The middle
element, when assembled to the lower element, completes the cabin pressure chamber and
seals the cabin pressure chamber from the rest of the controller with a sealing diaphragm. The
opposite side of the middle element forms a rate pressure chamber which houses the rate
spring. The upper element, when assembled to the rate diaphragm and other two elements,
forms a reference pressure chamber which houses the reference pressure metering valve and
metering valve follower spring. This element also contains the various air connections for
installation of the controller into the cabin pressure control system.
(2) Operational Check (PIR-Garrett Report No. 4-360.)
This check verifies minimum ▲P operation, cabin altitude control, and cabin pressure rate-of-
change control are operational.
(a) Close and secure cabin door.
(b) Rotate cabin rate control selector knob to the 9 o’clock position.
(c) Rotate cabin altitude selector knob until CABIN ALT indicates approximately 500 feet
above field altitude.
(d) Set brakes, start engine, and establish a steady cabin air inflow.
(e) Pull landing gear warning circuit breaker and note that safety valve closes and outflow
valve remains open.
(f) Rotate cabin altitude selector knob counterclockwise until CABIN ALT indicates
approximately 1500 feet below field altitude or until it reaches its stop. Cabin pressure will
increase on rate-of-change operation.
(g) Rotate cabin rate control selector knob counterclockwise and note a reduction in cabin
pressurization rate-of-change.
(h) Rotate cabin rate control selector knob clockwise and note an increase in cabin
pressurization rate-of-change. Return selector knob to the 9 o’clock position.
(i) Allow cabin pressure to stabilize at the selected value.
(j) Rotate cabin altitude selector knob until CABIN ALT indicates approximately 500 feet
above field altitude.
(k) Rotate cabin rate control selector knob counterclockwise and note a reduction in cabin
pressurization rate-of-change.
(l) Rotate cabin rate control selector knob clockwise and note an increase in cabin
pressurization rate-of-change; then, allow cabin pressure to return to field altitude and
outflow valve to move to the full-open position.
(m) Push-in landing gear warning circuit breaker and note that safety valve also fully opens.
(n) Shutdown engine.
PAGE 10
Feb 28/07 21-30-00 2D4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
E. Vacuum Relief Solenoid Valve

(1) Description
The solenoid valve is mounted on the left-hand side of the F.S. 108.00 bulkhead at W.L. 57.00.
This valve is normally closed. It is in the control line between the cabin pressure controller
vacuum port and the safety valve. When energized, vacuum is applied to the diaphragm of the
safety valve, holding it open. The vacuum relief solenoid valve is open under either of the
following conditions:
(a) On the ground with the landing gear squat switch energized.
(b) In flight whenever the cabin dump switch is in the DUMP position.
(2) Removal
(a) Gain access to the solenoid valve.
(b) Disconnect the lines from the valve.
(c) Remove the screws and washers that attach the valve to the bulkhead. Remove the valve.
(3) Installation
(a) Secure the valve to the bulkhead with the screws and washers.
(b) Reconnect the lines to the valve.
(c) Tighten the nuts finger tight plus one and one-half turns.
F. Bleed Air Dump Valve
The bleed air dump valve is just forward of the firewall (F.S. 79.00) and above the bleed air
crossover duct assembly. It is actuated by the cabin pressure control knob on the instrument panel.
A. Removal
(1) Disconnect control cable from top of bleed dump valve.
(2) Remove bolts, nuts and washers that secure the bleed dump valve to the duct and
exhaust duct/cable support.
(3) Remove bleed dump valve.
B. Installation
(1) Position bleed dump valve in place.
(2) Ensure that gaskets are installed between bleed dump valve and ducts.
(3) Install bolts (heads pointing inboard) through duct flange, bleed dump valve, control cable
support and exhaust duct flange. Secure bolts with nuts and washers. Torque the nuts
from 10 to 12 in. lbs.
(4) Attach control cable rod end to dump valve arm.
2D5 21-30-00 Feb

PAGE 11
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4. Rigging Bleed Air and Bleed Air Condition System

A. Rig cabin pressure system as follows:
(1) Push cabin pressure control knob into the instrument panel.
(a) Verify that bleed dump valve is in closed position.
(b) Verify that air selector valve and bleed air shutoff valve are in open position.
(2) Pull cabin pressure control knob out from instrument panel.
(a) Verify that bleed dump valve is in open position.
(b) Verify that air selector valve and bleed air shutoff valve are in closed position.
B. Rig cabin air temperature system as follows:
(1) Push control cable knob into the instrument panel.
(2) Verify that the cabin temperature control valve is open for ram air flow and closed to the heat
muff hot air flow.
5. Pressurization System Test (PIR-PPS60144-2, Rev. E.)
WARNING: DO NOT APPLY ELECTRICAL POWER ON BUS UNLESS AIRCRAFT IS ON JACKS AND
STRUTS ARE FULLY EXTENDED.
A. Equipment Required
Pressurization Test Cart (commercially available)
B. Procedure
NOTE: Remove cowling before beginning.
(1) Plug cabin altimeter indicator (3-in-1 indicator) sensing port (marked “C.P.”).
(2) Disconnect vacuum line at the tee on the rear of the cabin pressurization controller. Cap tee
and plug vacuum line.
CAUTION: IMPROPER SETTING WILL CAUSE DAMAGE TO CABIN PRESSURIZATION
CONTROLLER.
(3) Turn rate selector on cabin pressurization controller full clockwise. Turn cabin altitude selector
full counter-clockwise.
(4) Ensure that pilot’s storm window emergency exit, and cabin door are properly installed and
secured closed. Strap or net cabin door.
NOTE: Perform the following steps outside aircraft by monitoring test stand operation and
inspecting gauge through cockpit window.
(5) Connect instrument line connector port on test cart to the 1/4 inch bulkhead fitting on forward
pressure bulkhead.
(6) Disconnect flexible connectors at bleed air supply connections on firewall. (See Figure 1,
21-20-00 and Figure 1, 21-40-00.)
(7) Connect test cart air outlet port to either left or right flexible connector. Plug opposite flexible
connector.
PAGE 12
Feb 28/07 21-30-00 2D6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
WARNING: DO NOT OCCUPY CABIN DURING TESTS.

CAUTION: TEST STAND OPERATOR MUST CONTINUALLY MONITOR STAND
OPERATION DURING ALL TIMES THAT CABIN IS PRESSURIZED. DURING
INITIAL PRESSURIZATION, ENSURE BY INSPECTION THROUGH COCKPIT
WINDOW THAT AIRCRAFT AND CABIN ALTITUDE, AIRSPEED, AND RATE OF
CLIMB INDICATORS ARE STABLE AND UNAFFECTED BY CABIN PRESSURE.
ANY OF THE ABOVE INSTRUMENTS BEING AFFECTED INDICATES A LEAK
IN THE STATIC SYSTEM. CORRECT BEFORE PROCEEDING.
(8) Start airflow into fuselage slowly and at a rate not to exceed 1,500 feet per minute rate of
change in cabin altitude.
(9) When cabin differential gauge indicates one (1) pound per square inch differential (psid),
maintain only sufficient airflow to hold one (1) psid. Inspect complete cabin structure, bleed air
system, outflow and safety valves, etc. Identify major leaks for corrective sealing/repair.
(10) Continue to pressurize the cabin at a rate not to exceed 1,500 feet per minute until a maximum
cabin differential of 5.25 psid occurs. Determine airflow required to maintain 5.25 psid and
record. If airflow exceeds 40 SCFM*, or a major leak is occurring in one or more places, or if
excessive noise is found, identify for corrective sealing.
* SCFM = CFM obs

[( P obs + 29.92
29.92 )( 520 ˚F
T obs + 460 ˚R )]
Where: P obs = PSID observed x 2.036
T obs = Temperature (˚F) observed
CFM obs = Cubic Feet per Minute observed
SCFM = Standard Cubic Feet per Minute (flow)
NOTE: If cabin will not pressurize above 1 psid due to excessive leakage:
(a) Disconnect cabin controller line at outflow valve.
(b) Pressurize to not more than 5.25 psid to identify all leaks.
(c) Repair leaks.
(d) When an acceptable leak rate is achieved, depressurize cabin.
(e) Connect cabin controller line to outflow valve.
WARNING: DO NOT EXCEED 5.60 MAXIMUM DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE IN NEXT STEP.

EXCESSIVE PRESSURE CAN CAUSE STRUCTURAL DAMAGE OR
PERSONAL INJURY.
(11) Continue to pressurize the cabin at a rate not to exceed 1,500 feet per minute until either the
outflow or safety valve starts to relieve. Note differential pressure and which valve operated.
Correct operating range is 5.50 + 0.1, - 0.15 psid.
(12) Lower cabin pressure to 4.0 ± 0.2 psid.
(13) Plug the ambient sensing port of the valve which operated above.
2D7 21-30-00 Feb

PAGE 13
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

PERSONAL INJURY.
(14) Slowly increase cabin pressure at a rate not to exceed 1,500 feet per minute and observe the
differential pressure at which the remaining valve starts to relieve. Record. Correct operating
range is 5.50 + 0.1, - 0.15 psid.
(15) Lower cabin pressure to 4.0 ± 0.2 psid.
(16) Unplug the ambient sensing port of the valve which operated first and was subsequently
plugged.
PERSONAL INJURY..
(17) Repeat step 11. Verify that the same valve operates first and that it operates within the correct
pressure range (i.e. - 5.50 + 0.1, - 0.15 psid).
(18) Depressurize cabin at a rate not exceeding 1,500 fpm.
(19) Remove instrument line connector and pressurization outlet connections installed in steps (5)
thru (7). Plug 1/4 inch fitting in forward pressure bulkhead used for instrument line connector.
(20) Unstrap (or remove net from) cabin door.
(21) Inside cabin, remove plug installed in cabin altitude indicator sensing port (i.e. - “C.P.”). Unplug,
uncap, and reconnect vacuum line and tee at controller.
(22) Turn rate and cabin altitude selectors on cabin controller full counterclockwise.
(23) Reconnect left and right flexible connectors at firewall to bleed air supply lines.
(24) Reinstall cowling.
PAGE 14
Feb 28/07 21-30-00 2D8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2D9 21-30-00 Feb

PAGE 15
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 16
Feb 28/07 21-30-00 2D10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
HEATING
Cabin Heat, Defroster, and Fresh Air System

Figure 1
2D11 21-40-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1. Heat Exchanger/Air Selector Valve/Plenum Assembly

A. Removal
(1) Loosen band clamp and remove flexible hose from bottom of fiberglass discharge plenum.
(2) Loosen band clamps and remove flexible hose from bleed air supply manifold (part of heat
exchanger/selector valve assembly).
(3) Disconnect and remove cabin pressurization control cable and bleed air dump cable from air
selector valve/heat exchanger assembly.
(4) Remove the four bolts and washers that secure heat exchanger/selector valve assembly
brackets to mounting brackets on baggage compartment skin.
(5) Remove six bolts, nuts, and washers from the two inch diameter bleed air tube at the firewall.
(6) Remove the four bolts attaching air temperature control valve to forward side of firewall.
(7) Remove assembly from aircraft.
B. Installation
(1) Align assembly in proper position as shown in Figure 1.
(2) Attach air temperature control valve to forward side of firewall with four bolts.
(3) Attach six bolts and hardware to the two inch diameter bleed air tube at the firewall.
(4) Secure heat exchanger/selector valve assembly brackets to mounting brackets on baggage
compartment skin with four bolts and washers.
(5) Connect cabin pressure control cable and bleed air dump cable to air selector valve/heat
exchanger assembly.
(6) Attach flexible hose to bleed air supply manifold (part of heat exchanger/selector valve
assembly) and tighten band clamps.
(7) Attach flexible hose to bottom of fiberglass discharge plenum and tighten band clamp.
2. Air Selector Valve
NOTE: Remove heat exchanger/air selector valve/plenum assembly before individually removing air
selector valve.
A. Removal
(a) Loosen closure assembly (arm) and slide it to the right, off of the selector crank assembly.
(b) Remove the four bolts that attach the check valve assembly (including gaskets) to the air
selector valve.
(c) Remove the twelve screws attaching the air selector valve to the heat exchanger.
(d) Remove selector valve from heat exchanger.
B. Installation
(a) Position air selector valve onto heat exchanger.
(b) Attach air selector valve to heat exchanger with twelve screws.
(c) Attach check valve assembly (including gaskets) to air selector valve with four bolts.
(d) Slide closure assembly (arm) onto the selector crank assembly and tighten.
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 21-40-00 2D12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. Heat Exchanger
NOTE: Remove heat exchanger/air selector valve/plenum assembly before individually removing heat
exchanger.
A. Removal
(a) Remove four bolts and hardware attaching bleed air shutoff valve to heat exchanger.
(b) Remove twelve screws attaching heat exchanger to selector valve.
(c) Remove twelve screws attaching heat exchanger to plenum.
(d) Remove heat exchanger from assembly.
B. Installation
(1) Align heat exchanger into proper position.
(2) Attach heat exchanger to plenum with twelve screws.
(3) Attach heat exchanger to selector valve with twelve screws.
(4) Attach bleed air shutoff valve to heat exchanger with four bolts and hardware.
4. Plenum
NOTE: Remove heat exchanger/air selector valve/plenum assembly before individually removing
plenum.
A. Removal
(1) Remove twelve screws attaching plenum to heat exchanger.
(2) Remove plenum.
B. Installation
(1) Seal plenum to heat exchanger with RTV 106 sealant.
(2) Install plenum to heat exchanger with twelve screws.
5. Defroster
A. Removal
(1) Remove closeout panel covering magnetic (float) compass and windshield defroster.by
removing compass deviation and removing screw securing deviation card holder and close out
panel
(2) Remove the four screws and nylon spacers securing defroster to windshield post.
(3) Loosen clamps securing defrost hoses to defroster. Remove hoses.
(4) Remove defroster.
B. Installation
(1) Connect defrost hoses to appropriate fittings on defroster. Tighten clamps screws.
(2) Position defroster at windshield post. Secure with four nylon spacers and screws
(3) Position closeout panel in appropriate position over defroster and magnetic (float) compass
(4) Position compass deviation card holder in proper location. Be sure screw hole in deviation card
holder aligns with screw hole in closeout panel. Secure both in position with brass screw
previously removed.
NOTE: Only a brass screw may be used to secure compass card holder and close out panel
to windshield post.
2D13 21-40-00 FebPAGE 3

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C. Rigging
(1) Push defroster control knob in.
(2) Ensure that the defroster restrictor valve is fully open.
6. Bleed Air Shutoff Valve
A. Removal
(1) Disconnect control linkage to shutoff valve.
(2) Loosen bleed air flexible hose band clamps.
(3) Remove four bolts and hardware attaching shutoff valve (including gaskets) to heat exchanger.
(4) Remove valve.
B. Installation of Bleed Air Shutoff Valve
(1) Align shutoff valve into proper position.
(2) Attach shutoff valve (including gaskets) to heat exchanger with four bolts and hardware.
(3) Tighten bleed air flexible hose band clamps.
(4) Connect control linkage to shutoff valve.
(5) Check rigging of shutoff valve.
7. Auxiliary Cabin Heater
A. Removal
(1) Loosen clamps attaching flex adapter to aft side of blower.
(2) Slide adapter forward over blower.
(3) Remove the six bolts attaching cabin air supply tube and auxiliary heater to forward pressure
bulkhead.
(4) Disconnect electrical leads to heater.
(5) Remove heater.
B. Installation
(1) Apply GE RTV 1508 sealant to gasket.
(2) Position heater and gasket on forward side of bleed air check valve at forward pressure
bulkhead.
(3) Secure heater, check valve, and cabin air supply tube to forward pressure bulkhead with six
bolts.
(4) Slide flexible blower adapter duct aft over heater and secure with band clamps.
(5) Connect electrical leads.
PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 21-40-00 2D14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2D15 21-40-00 FebPAGE 5

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 6
Feb 28/07 21-40-00 2D16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
COOLING
1. General
PUBLICATIONS.)
WARNING: REFRIGERANT R12 IS USED IN S/N’s 4636001 THRU 4636186 ONLY. REFRIGERANT
HFC-134A IS USED IN S/N’S 4636187 AND UP. ANYONE SERVICING THE AIR
CONDITIONING SYSTEM MUST BE FAMILIAR WITH THE REFRIGERANT, LUBRICANT,
AND COMPONENTS USED IN THAT PARTICULAR SYSTEM.
This installation consists of a compressor with its special brackets, two evaporator modules and blowers,
a condenser, a receiver dehydrator, a manifold assembly which incorporates dual pressure switches,
high and low service ports, and related plumbing.
The evaporators filter, dehumidify and cool the air. The evaporator modules are mounted underneath the
floor between the ribs at F.S. 233.87 and F.S. 241.50 along with the blowers, expansion valves, ducting,
service ports, and related tubing.
The compressor is a five cylinder, rotary, piston type which is supported by special brackets at the
forward, left area of the engine. A V-belt connected to the starter ring gear pulley, drives the compressor
through a magnetic clutch.
The condenser is located in the aft fuselage. Air is drawn through the condenser and vented overboard
by means of a blower and duct.
The manifold assembly incorporates high and low service ports, a high pressure switch, and a low
pressure switch that control the condenser head pressure by engaging or disengaging the compressor
via a magnetic clutch.
The air conditioning system uses refrigerant HFC-134a, except in S/N’s 4636001 thru 4636186 only -
which use R-12. The refrigerant enters the compressor as a vapor. The compressor pressurizes the
heat-laden vapor until its pressure and heat reach a point much hotter than the outside air. The
compressor then pumps the vapor to the condenser where it cools and changes to a liquid. The liquid
then passes to the receiver-dehydrator. The receiver-dehydrator’s function is to filter, remove any
moisture and ensure a steady flow of liquid refrigerant into the evaporators through the expansion
valves. The expansion valves are temperature controlled metering valves which regulate the flow of liquid
refrigerant to the evaporators. Inside each evaporator the liquid refrigerant changes state to a gas and, in
doing so, absorbs heat. The evaporators then absorb the heat from the air passing over the coils. From
the evaporators, the refrigerant vapor returns to the compressor where the cycle is repeated.
NOTE: The air conditioning system should be operated at least once a month to prevent sticking valves
and to keep the system lubricated.
2. Troubleshooting
See Chart 1.
2D17 21-50-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TROUBLESHOOTING (AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM)
High discharge pressure. Overcharge of refrigerant. Purge excess refrigerant.
Air in system. Check for leaks. Bleed
charge from system.
Evacuate and recharge
system.
Overheated condenser due to Clean bugs and dirt from
blocking air passage. condenser fins. Straighten
fins if bent.
Flooded evaporator indicated Replace expansion valve.
by heavy frosting on suction
line and compressor suction
service valve.
Restriction in liquid line Check for kinked hoses and
from condenser. stopped up filter.
Low discharge pressure. Undercharge of refrigerant. Add refrigerant until
Sight glass shows bubbles bubbles disappear. Check
or foam. system for leaks.
Damaged compressor valves Replace compressor.
or dirt under valves.
Damaged compressor. Worn Replace compressor.
or broken piston or piston rings.
Low suction pressure Low air supply through Repair blower or blower
(Accompanied by icing evaporator. motor. Clean stoppage in
evaporator.) air ducts.
Very dirty evaporator fins Clean and flush with water.
and coils.
Low suction pressure. Undercharge of refrigerant. Add refrigerant. Install new
(Evaporator not cold enough.) Moisture freezing in expansion dryer. Evacuate and
Suction gauge may read a valve. Valve will show frost. recharge. Remove screen.
vacuum indicating Expansion valve inlet screen Clean with solvent and
evaporator lacks refrigerant. clogged. Inoperative replace. If suction pressure
expansion valve. Valve stuck does not change,
closed. replace expansion valve.
Restriction anywhere in Locate restriction and
liquid line. Restriction will repair.
show frost.
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 21-50-00 2D18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
High suction pressure. Expansion valve not closing. Replace expansion valve.
Evaporator flooded. Suction
line frosted to compressor.
Compressor drive belt Adjust belt tension.
slipping.
Magnetic clutch slipping. Check electrical circuit for
correct voltage to clutch
coil. Clean clutch surfaces
of oil.
Leaking or broken Replace compressor.
compressor valves.
System produces no
cooling. Electrical
Blown fuse in control head. Replace fuse.
Open circuit breaker. Reset circuit breaker.
Broken or disconnected Check all terminals for
electrical wire. loose connections; check
wiring for hidden breaks.
Broken or disconnected Check ground wire to see if
ground wire. loose, broken, or
disconnected.
Clutch coil burned out or Check current flow to
disconnected. clutch, replace if
inoperative.
Thermostat sensing element Check thermostat and
defective. cabin comfort control
panel.
Blower motor disconnected Check current flow to
or burned out. blower motor. Repair or
replace if inoperative.
Mechanical
Loose or broken drive belt. Replace drive belts and/or
tighten to specifications.
Compressor partially or Remove compressor for
completely frozen. service or replacement.
Expansion valve stuck in Replace expansion valve.
open position.
2D19 21-50-00 FebPAGE 3

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
System produces no
cooling. (continued) Refrigeration
Broken refrigerant line. Examine all lines for
evidence of breakage by
external stress or rubbing
wear.
Leak in system. Evacuate system, apply
static charge, leak test
system, and repair leak as
necessary.
Compressor shaft seal Replace compressor.
leaking.
Clogged screen or screens in Repair as necessary.
receiver dehydrator or expansion
valve; plugged hose or coil.
System will not produce
sufficient cooling. Electrical
Blower motor sluggish in Remove blower motor for
operation. service or replacement.
Mechanical
Compressor clutch slipping. Remove clutch assembly
for service or replacement.
Obstructed blower passage. Examine entire passage for
obstruction. Correct as
necessary.
Insufficient air circulation Clean condenser coils.
over condenser coils; fins
clogged with dirt or bugs.
Evaporator filter clogged. Clean with cleaning solvent
to remove cigarette tars.
Refrigeration
Insufficient refrigerant in Recharge system until
system. bubbles disappear in
receiver dehydrator and
gauge readings stabilize to
specifications.
PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 21-50-00 2D20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
System will not produce
sufficient cooling. (continued) Refrigeration (continued)
Clogged screen in Purge system and replace
expansion valve. expansion valve.
Clogged screen in receiver Purge system; replace
dehydrator. receiver dehydrator.
Excessive moisture in Purge system; replace
system. receiver dehydrator.
Air in system. Purge, evacuate and
charge system. (Replace
receiver dehydrator)
Excessively noisy system. Mechanical
Loose or excessively worn Tighten or replace as
drive belt. required.
Noisy clutch. Remove clutch for service
or replacement
as necessary.
Compressor noisy. Check mountings and
repair; remove compressor
for service or replacement.
Compressor oil level low. Fill with correct amount of
specified oil.
Electrical
Defective winding or Replace or repair as
improper connection in necessary.
compressor clutch coil.
Refrigeration
Excessive charge in system. Discharge excess
refrigerant until high
pressure gauge drops
within specifications.
Low charge in system. Check system for leaks;
charge system.
Excessive moisture in Replace dehydrator; purge,
system. evacuate, and charge
system.
2D21 21-50-00 FebPAGE 5

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Air Conditioning System

Figure 1
PAGE 6
Feb 28/07 21-50-00 2D22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. Servicing Cooling System (PIR-PPS50003-4, Rev. C.)
NOTE: The maximum refrigerant capacity is 2.75 pounds. The total refrigerant capacity required is
determined separately for each system and is the amount that will result in bubble-free
operation at the sight gauge, as specified in the post charging operational check.
A. Definitions
(1) High Side. The “high side” consists of all lines and components between the compressor outlet
and the expansion valves. It includes the condenser and receiver/dryer sight gage.
(2) Low Side. The “low side” consists of all lines and components between the expansion valves
and the compressor inlet. It includes the evaporators.
B. Service Valves (i.e. - ports) (See Figures 1 and 2.)
(1) Description
The service valves are installed to Test, Bleed (Discharge), Evacuate and Charge the air
conditioning system. This airplane is equipped with inline service valves mounted on the
manifold assembly. All normal air conditioning service should be performed at the manifold
assembly mounted valves.
NOTE: Service valves are also located on the compressor in S/N’s 4636001 thru 4636186
only. However, use of these valves in servicing is not recommended.
NOTE: In S/N’s 4636001 thru 4636186 only, the service valves are screw-on type Schrader
valves.
In S/N’s 4636187 and up, the service valves are quick-disconnect type Schrader
valves.
NOTE: If a Schrader service valve is not serviceable, the core assembly must be replaced.
(2) Replacement
CAUTION: WHENEVER THE AIR CONDITIONING REFRIGERANT LINES OR SYSTEM
ARE OPENED FOR ANY REASON, THE LINES AND FITTINGS SHOULD BE
CAPPED AND SEALED IMMEDIATELY TO PREVENT DIRT AND OTHER
CONTAMINANTS FROM ENTERING THE SYSTEM. (DO NOT PUT A PLUG
INTO THE HOSES OR FITTINGS.)
The valves on the compressor, when installed, are sealed with a gasket placed beneath the
service port. Lubricate the gasket with refrigerant oil of the type used in the compressor, place
the valves on the compressor. Torque the port from 9 to 12 ft. lbs.
When installing the valves on the manifold assembly, lubricate the threads with Tite Seal 3 (Do
not apply to the first two threads).
2D23 21-50-00 FebPAGE 7

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Service Valves
Figure 2
PAGE 8
Feb 28/07 21-50-00 2D24
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C. Malfunction Detection
NOTE: If the cooling system has leaked refrigerant or is discharged, the compressor oil level must
be checked.
The detection of system malfunction largely depends on the mechanic’s ability to interpret the
gauge pressure readings into system problems. A system operating normally will have a low side
gauge pressure reading that will correspond with the temperature of the refrigerant evaporating in
the evaporator, allowing for a few degrees temperature rise due to loss in the tube walls and fins.
The high side will have a gauge pressure that will correspond with the temperature of the refrigerant
condensing in the condenser, allowing for a few degrees temperature drop due to loss in the tube
walls and fins.
Any deviation from that which is normal indicates a malfunction within the system due to a faulty
control device, obstruction, defective part, or improper installation.
Detection of system malfunction is made easier with knowledge of the relationship between
temperature and pressure of the refrigerant (R-12 or HFC-134a). They are in close proximity
between the pressures of twenty and eighty pounds per square inch (psi). A glance at the
temperature-pressure chart (i.e. - Chart 2) will show that there is only a slight variation between the
temperature and pressure of the refrigerant in the lower range.
It is correct to assume that for every pound of pressure added to the low side, a temperature
increase of about one degree Fahrenheit takes place. For instance, a pressure of 23.8 on the chart
indicates a temperature of 24°F. A change of pressure of almost one pound to 24.6 psi gives us a
temperature increase to 25°F.
NOTE: For each 1,000 feet of elevation above sea level, the gauge readings will be about one inch
of mercury or 1/2 psi higher than the chart indicates.
It must be pointed out that the actual temperature of the air passing over the coils of the evaporator
will be several degrees warmer than the fins, allowing for a temperature rise caused by the loss in
the fins and tubing of the evaporator.
The importance of a seasonal check up of the air conditioning system should be brought to the
attention of the customer whenever possible. A thorough check of the system performed in a
methodical manner will reveal trouble the customer is often not aware of. Locating and repairing the
trouble early will usually result in savings to the customer both in time and additional troubles that
too often result from neglect.
A performance test of the system is the only positive way in which the complete system can be
checked for efficient operation. The air conditioning system should be given this test before work is
begun on the system whenever possible. However, if the system is completely inoperative, repairs
must be performed before the system can be properly tested. The test can uncover further work that
must be performed before the system is brought to its full operating efficiency. The performance test
should always be performed after repair work has been done and before the airplane is released to
the customer. The serviceman performing this test carefully will ensure that the repairs have been
properly performed and that the system will operate satisfactorily.
The performance test, when properly performed includes a thorough examination of the outside of
the system as well as the inside. Many related parts are overlooked because it is felt they are of no
bearing on the operating efficiency of the unit. For this reason, a thorough visual inspection of the
complete system should be performed, followed by an operating inspection of the system.
2E1 21-50-00 FebPAGE 9

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 2
TEMPERATURE vs. PRESSURE
Refrigerant R12 Refrigerant R12 Refrigerant HFC134a Refrigerant HFC134a

Evaporator Pressure Evaporator Temperature Evaporator Pressure Evaporator Temperature
Gauge Reading psi °F Gauge Reading psi °F
0 -21 -5 -27
2.4 -15 0 -15
4.5 -10 2 -9
10.1 2 4 -4
11.2 4 6 0
12.3 6 8 4
13.4 8 10 7
14.6 10 12 11
15.8 12 14 14
17.1 14 16 17
18.3 16 18 20
19.7 18 20 22
21 20 22 25
22.4 22 24 28
23.1 23 26 30
23.8 24 28 33
24.6 25 30 35
25.3 26 32 37
26.1 27 34 39
26.8 28 36 41
27.6 29 38 43
28.4 30 40 45
29.2 31 42 47
30 32 44 49
30.9 33 46 51
31.7 34 48 53
32.5 35 50 54
33.4 36 55 58
34.3 37 60 62
35.1 38 65 66
36 39 70 69
36.9 40
37.9 41
38.8 42
39.7 43
41.7 45
43.6 47
45.6 49
48.7 52
49.8 53
55.4 57
60 62
64.9 66
PAGE 10
Feb 28/07 21-50-00 2E2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
D. Special Servicing Procedures

The air conditioning system should be serviced by a qualified shop with trained personnel. The
following procedures and precautions should be observed.
CAUTION: UNITED STATES ENVIRONMENTAL REGULATIONS REQUIRE THAT AIR
CONDITIONING SYSTEM REPAIRS BE ACCOMPLISHED BY A QUALIFIED SHOP
WITH APPROPRIATELY TRAINED PERSONNEL.
The efficiency of this system depends upon the pressure-temperature relationship of pure
refrigerant. As long as the system contains only pure refrigerant plus a specified amount of
compressor oil (which is mixed with the refrigerant), it is considered to be chemically stable. Foreign
materials within the system will affect the chemical stability, contaminate the system, and decrease
its efficiency.
(1) Refrigerant Safety Precautions.
WARNING: REFRIGERANTS R12 ("FREON") AND HFC-134A ARE ODORLESS AND
COLORLESS IN EITHER THE LIQUID OR GASEOUS STATE. REFRIGERANT
FOR CHARGING REFRIGERATION SYSTEMS IS SUPPLIED IN
PRESSURIZED CONTAINERS (APPROX. 70 PSI AT 70°F) IN LIQUID FORM.
SINCE THIS MATERIAL IS ESSENTIALLY INERT AT ROOM TEMPERATURES
THE DANGERS ARE PRIMARILY ASSOCIATED WITH THE PRESSURE AND
THE REFRIGERATION EFFECTS OF THE RELEASE AND SUBSEQUENT
EVAPORATION OF THIS PRESSURIZED LIQUID.
WARNING: WEAR SUITABLE EYE PROTECTION WHEN HANDLING REFRIGERANT DUE
TO THE POSSIBILITY OF FREEZING OF THE EYE IF CONTACTED BY
ESCAPING LIQUID REFRIGERANT. IF LIQUID REFRIGERANT DOES STRIKE
THE EYE, THE FOLLOWING ACTIONS SHOULD BE TAKEN:
(1) DO NOT RUB THE EYE.
(2) Splash large quantities of cool water into the eye to raise the temperature.
(3) Tape on an eye patch to avoid the possibility of dirt entering the eye.
(4) Rush to a physician or hospital for immediate professional aid.
(5) DO NOT ATTEMPT TO TREAT IT YOURSELF.
WARNING: IF LIQUID REFRIGERANT STRIKES THE SKIN, FROSTBITE CAN OCCUR.

TREAT WITH COOL WATER AND PROTECT WITH PETROLEUM JELLY.
WARNING: DO NOT DISCHARGE LARGE QUANTITIES OF REFRIGERANT INTO CLOSED
ROOMS. IT MAY DISPLACE MOST OF THE AIR IN THE ROOM AND THIS
COULD CAUSE OXYGEN STARVATION. GASEOUS REFRIGERANT IS
HEAVIER THAN AIR AND FLOWS TO THE BOTTOM OF A CONTAINER.
WARNING: DO NOT DISCHARGE REFRIGERANT INTO AN OPEN FLAME OR ONTO A
VERY HOT SURFACE (500°F). POISONOUS PHOSGENE GAS IS GENERATED
BY THE ACTION OF THE HEAT ON REFRIGERANT R12.
WARNING: DO NOT APPLY DIRECT FLAME OR OTHER HIGH HEAT SOURCE TO A
REFRIGERANT CONTAINER DUE TO THE HIGH PRESSURES WHICH WILL
RESULT. IF ANY HEATING IS DONE TO REFRIGERANT CONTAINERS THE
CONTAINER PRESSURE SHOULD BE MONITORED AND KEPT BELOW 150
PSI.
2E3 21-50-00 Feb

PAGE 11
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(2) System Servicing Precautions.

WARNING: DISCHARGE SYSTEMS SLOWLY TO PREVENT THE ESCAPE OF LIQUID
REFRIGERANT AND THE LOSS OF THE LUBRICATING OIL.
NOTE: The term “Discharge,” as used throughout this section, in no sense implies or
suggests discharging refrigerant to atmosphere. In all cases when discharging, an
environmentally approved refrigerant recovery station is to be used.
WARNING: DO NOT LEAVE SYSTEMS OPEN TO THE ATMOSPHERE WHEN
DISCHARGED. MOISTURE AND OTHER CONTAMINATION MAY ENTER AND
DAMAGE OPEN SYSTEMS.
NOTE: A very strong acid (HCL) is formed when R-12 comes in contact with moisture. When
HFC-134a comes in contact with moisture it absorbs it into the system, which will lead
to system failure.
WARNING: USE ONLY APPROVED REFRIGERATION OIL IN THE COMPRESSOR:
-- MINERAL OIL FOR R12 SYSTEMS (S/N’S 4636001 THRU 4636186 ONLY);
AND,
-- POLYALKYLENE GLYCOL (PAG) FOR HFC-134a SYSTEMS (S/N’S 4636187
AND UP).
IF ANY DOUBT EXISTS ABOUT THE CLEANLINESS OF THE COMPRESSOR
OIL, REPLACE IT WITH NEW OIL.
WARNING: NEVER INTRODUCE ANYTHING BUT PURE REFRIGERANT AND THE
APPROPRIATE REFRIGERANT OIL INTO A SYSTEM.
WARNING: KEEP REFRIGERANT OIL CONTAINERS TIGHTLY SEALED AND CLEAN TO
PREVENT ABSORPTION OF MOISTURE OR OTHER CONTAMINATION.
WARNING: NEVER REUSE OIL REMOVED FROM THE SYSTEM -- DISCARD IT.
CAUTION: WHEN LOCTITE REFRIGERANT SEALANT HAS BEEN USED ON A JOINT IT
MUST BE HEATED TO 400°F PRIOR TO DISASSEMBLY. LOCTITE MUST BE
USED TO SEAL ANY PIPE THREADS IN THE SYSTEM LINES.
CAUTION: REPLACE THE RECEIVER-DEHYDRATOR ASSEMBLY ON ANY SYSTEM
WHICH HAS BEEN OPERATING WITH A LEAK ALLOWING AIR TO ENTER
THE SYSTEM. IF A RECEIVER-DEHYDRATOR IS LEFT OPEN TO THE
ATMOSPHERE IT SHOULD BE REPLACED DUE TO THE LOSS OF
EFFECTIVENESS OF THE DRYING COMPOUND IT CONTAINS.
CAUTION: A NEW RECEIVER-DEHYDRATOR SHOULD BE OPENED AND CONNECTED
TO THE SYSTEM ONLY WHEN READY TO CHARGE THE SYSTEM WITH
REFRIGERANT.
CAUTION: RECOMMENDED TORQUE VALUES MUST BE USED ON ALL FLARE FITTING
AND O-RING JOINTS. SEE CHART 3.
CAUTION: IF AIR CONDITIONING REFRIGERANT LINES OR SYSTEM IS OPENED,
LINES AND FITTINGS MUST BE CAPPED AND SEALED IMMEDIATELY TO
PREVENT DIRT AND OTHER CONTAMINANTS FROM ENTERING THE
SYSTEM. (DO NOT PUT A PLUG INTO THE HOSES OR FITTINGS.)
CAUTION: UNITED STATES ENVIRONMENTAL REGULATIONS PROHIBIT THE RELEASE
OF REFRIGERANT INTO THE ATMOSPHERE. SPECIAL EQUIPMENT IS
REQUIRED WHEN TESTING, DISCHARGING, OR CHARGING THE SYSTEM.
PAGE 12
Feb 28/07 21-50-00 2E4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 3
RECOMMENDED TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
ALUMINUM TUBING
Metal Tube O.D. Thread and Fitting Size Ft./Lb.
1/4 7/16 5-7

3/8 5/8 11-13
1/2 3/4 15-20
5/8 7/8 21-27
3/4 1-1/16 28-33
FLARE CONNECTIONS O-RING CONNECTIONS

Tube OD Thread size Ft./Lb. Tube OD Thread size Ft./Lb.
3/8 5/8 18-20 3/8 5/8 11-13

1/2 3/4 36-39 1/2 3/4 15-20
5/8 7/8 52-57 5/8 7/8 21-27
CAUTION: UNITED STATES ENVIRONMENTAL REGULATIONS REQUIRE THAT AIR

CONDITIONING SYSTEM REPAIRS BE ACCOMPLISHED BY A QUALIFIED
SHOP WITH APPROPRIATELY TRAINED PERSONNEL.
E. Servicing the System (with a Charging Stand)
CAUTION: MINERAL OIL AND PAG ARE NOT COMPATIBLE. USE A SEPARATE MANIFOLD
TEST SET AND / OR TEST/CHARGING STAND AND RECOVERY SYSTEM FOR
EACH REFRIGERANT TYPE.
CAUTION: USE RECOVERY UNIT SPECIFICALLY DESIGNED FOR THE TYPE OF
REFRIGERANT USED IN THE AIRCRAFT SYSTEM. UNINTENDED AFFECTS MAY
OCCUR IF REFRIGERANTS ARE COMBINED.
(1) Discharging (Bleeding/Purging) the System
CAUTION: APPLIES TO ROBINAIR 34700 OR SIMILAR CHARGING/RECOVERY STATION.
SEE OPERATOR'S MANUAL OF STATION BEING USED FOR DETAILED
INSTRUCTIONS FOR DISCHARGING SYSTEM.
This procedure is for a Robinair 34700 or similar charging stand/recovery station, see Figure 3.
Required only if the system contains refrigerant.
NOTE: The term “Discharge,” as used throughout this section, in no sense implies or
suggests discharging refrigerant to atmosphere. In all cases when discharging, an
environmentally approved refrigerant recovery station is to be used.
(a) Gain access to service valves by removing rear access panel.
(b) Remove protective caps from access valves.
(c) Connect high side (red) hose to air conditioner high side service valve. On systems
equipped with quick disconnect connections, open coupler valve.
(d) Connect low side (blue) hose to air conditioner low side service valve. On systems
equipped with quick disconnect connections, open coupler valve.
2E5 21-50-00 Feb

PAGE 13
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(e) Check the low side gauge (GAUGE 1) and high side gauge (GAUGE 2) to determine that
there is pressure in the system. If there is no pressure, there is no refrigerant in the
system to recover.
(f) Check that the oil drain valve is closed.
(g) Open both the low side and high side valves on control panel.
(h) Open the red GAS (vapor) valve and the blue LIQUID valve on the charging station's
refrigerant tank.
(i) Slowly open the oil drain valve to see if system oil separator contains oil. If it does, let oil
drain into the oil drain bottle (located at the bottom of the rear side of the charging station)
until separator is empty.
(j) Close the oil drain valve. Dispose of collected oil in an environmentally accepted manner.
Return collection bottle to its place on the charging stand.
(k) Plug unit into a proper voltage outlet. Turn MAIN POWER switch ON.
(l) Press the RECOVER key on charging station keypad.
(m) To assure complete recovery of refrigerant:
(a) Wait 5 minutes. Observe pressure gauges for a rise above zero.
(b) If a rise occurs, press the HOLD/CONT key.
(c) Repeat as necessary until system maintains pressure for two minutes.
(n) Slowly open oil drain valve. Drain oil into the oil catch bottle. When all recovered oil has
been completely drained, close oil drain valve.
NOTE: Drain oil separator after each job. Display will indicate OIL (OUNCES) or OIL
(GRAMS) as a reminder.
Robinair 34700 Charging Stand

Figure 3
PAGE 14
Feb 28/07 21-50-00 2E6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(o) Measure the amount of oil in the catch bottle. The same amount of new oil must be added
to the system before charging the system.
(p) To enter diagnostic mode, simultaneously press the SHIFT/RESET and ENTER keys. To
display amount of refrigerant recovered by the unit, press the 3 key. The panel display will
read the amount of recovered refrigerant in pounds or kilograms.
(q) Simultaneously press the SHIFT/RESET and ENTER keys to clear internal counter. Press
SHIFT/RESET to return to the main menu.
Kent Moore J23500 Charging Stand

Figure 4
2E7 21-50-00 Feb

PAGE 15
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(2) Evacuating the System

If the system has been operated in a discharged condition or anytime the system has been
open to atmospheric pressure, the receiver-dehydrator must be replaced and the system
evacuated to remove any trapped air and moisture which has entered it. A vacuum pump
capable of pulling 29 inches of mercury or better should be used. As the pressure in the air
conditioning system is lowered, the boiling temperature of the water (moisture) that may be
present is also lowered. This then forces any moisture, in the form of water vapor, out of the
system. Chart 4 demonstrates the effectiveness of moisture removal under a given vacuum.
(a) Using a Kent Moore J23500 or similar charging stand: (See Figure 4.)
Turn aircraft power OFF before beginning.
1 Remove the access panel at the rear of the cabin floor to gain access to the service
valves on the manifold assembly.
2 Remove the protective caps from the high and low side service ports on the manifold
assembly.
3 Close all valves on the charging stand.
4 Remove the protective cap from the vacuum pump outlet.
5 Connect the blue and red hoses to the service ports (see Figures 1 and 2).
6 Start the vacuum pump.
7 Open the valve on the vacuum pump. Open the low pressure control valve and the
vacuum control valve on the charging stand.
8 After five minutes of pump operation, the high pressure gauge should indicate
slightly below zero.
a If it doesn’t, stop the pump and eliminate the blockage in the system replacing
the faulty component, then repeat steps (1) - (8).
b If it does, open the high pressure control valve on the charging stand and
continue to evacuate the system.
9 Operate the vacuum pump for fifteen minutes, or until the compound gauge indicates
24 to 26 in. Hg. whichever occurs first.
CHART 4
USING VACUUM TO EVACUATE MOISTURE
System Vacuum Boiling Point of Water (°F)

27.95 101
COMPOUND GAUGE 28.74 84
READING IN INCHES 29.53 52
OF MERCURY VACUUM 29.76 29
29.84 15
29.88 1
NOTE: Compound gauge reading will be approximately one inch lower, numerically, for
each 1000 feet elevation above sea level.
PAGE 16
Feb 28/07 21-50-00 2E8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
10 Close the low pressure control valve and the high pressure control valve on the
charging stand. Stop the vacuum pump and observe the compound gauge. If the
gauge rises at a rate faster than 1 in. Hg. in 5 minutes, there is a leak in the system.
Locate and fix the leak. Repeat the evacuation steps above.
11 Open the low pressure control valve and the high pressure control valve on the
charging stand. Continue pumping and hold the system pressure below 26 in. Hg. for
a minimum of 30 minutes. All the pumping time specified above may be included in
the 30 minutes provided that no leaks or blockages are noted, and provided that the
system is not opened by removal or disconnection of components.
12 Close the low pressure control valve, the high pressure control valve and the vacuum
control valve. Stop the vacuum pump and perform the charging procedure
immediately.
(b) Using a Robinair 34700 or similar charging/recovery stand: (See Figures 3 and 6.)
Turn aircraft power OFF before beginning.
1 Remove access panel at rear of cabin to gain access to service valves.
2 Remove protective caps from the high and low side service ports on the evaporator
unit.
3 Close both the low side and high side valves on charging unit.
4 Connect the blue and red hoses to the service ports (see Figures 1 and 2). On
systems equipped with quick disconnect connections, open coupler valves.
5 Open blue (low side) valve (1) on unit’s control panel.
6 Open both the red GAS (vapor) valve and the blue LIQUID valve on the tank.
7 Program the length of evacuation time.
a Press the VACUUM key on control panel key pad.
b Display will show unit is in VACUUM mode.
c Refer to operator’s manual for further detail.
8 Enter the required time in minutes and seconds (30:00 minutes minimum) by
pressing appropriate keys and then ENTER on keypad. The display will show
selected time in minutes and seconds. Example: one hour and fifteen minutes (1:15)
would be entered as 7500. The display will show 75:00. Thirty minutes is entered as
3000. the display will show 30:00.
9 To start the vacuum pump press the VACUUM key on keypad again.
10 Vacuum sequence will continue for the programmed time. Digital display will then
show CPL, indicating that the evacuation is completed.
11 If, after 5 minutes of pump operation, the RED gauge does not indicate a little below
zero:
a Stop the pump by pressing the 1 key or the SHFT/RESET key.
b Eliminate blockage in the system by replacing faulty parts.
c Repeat steps (1) through (8) above.
12 After 5 minutes of pump operation, when RED gauge indicates a little below zero,
open red (high side) valve (2), and continue evacuation.
a System vacuum should attain 24 to 26 inches of mercury (in. Hg.) in 10 to 15
minutes.
b Allow pump to hold system vacuum at or below 26 in. Hg. for a minimum of 15
minutes.
c Failure to achieve or hold a vacuum at or below 26 in. Hg. indicates a leak in the
system. Perform Leak Detection, below, to locate and repair all leaks.
2E9 21-50-00 Feb

PAGE 17
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Charging Hookup
Figure 5
PAGE 18
Feb 28/07 21-50-00 2E10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
13 When evacuation sequence has continued for the programmed length of time and
the panel display reads CPL (complete), close both the low side valve (1) and the
high side (2) valves.
14 Perform charging procedure immediately. (See Charging the System, below.)
(3) Leak Detection (See Figures 3 and 4.)
(a) Using Nitrogen
1 Prepare aircraft so as to provide access to all air conditioning components and fitting
connections being leak checked.
2 Ensure that aircraft and ground power are OFF or disconnected.
3 Close all valves on the charging station.
4 Remove the protective caps from the high and low side service ports on the
evaporator unit.
5 Connect the blue and red hoses to the service ports as shown in Figure 5.
6 Slowly pressurize the system to 200 psig max. with nitrogen and turn off the nitrogen
source. Ensure gages used have a 0-400 psig range.
7 Monitor pressure on the charging station gauge for 20 minutes. A leak free system
will maintain the 200 psig pressure for 20 minutes.
8 If there is no pressure drop for 20 minutes, slowly release nitrogen pressure and
disconnect the nitrogen source from the evaporator assembly. Re-install the pressure
switch per drawing requirements. The leak check procedure is completed.
9 If there is a pressure drop, find leak(s) by applying a soap solution to all connections.
10 Rework system as required to stop leaks and repeat Leak Check Procedure.
(b) Using HFC-134a (PIR-PPS50003-4, Rev. A.)
A leak may be located while a charging stand is hooked up to the system as follows:
1 Ensure that there is at least one pound of refrigerant in the charging cylinder.
2 Open the high pressure control valve and the refrigerant control valve on the
charging stand. Allow one pound of refrigerant to enter the system.
3 Close the high pressure control valve and the refrigerant control valve.
CAUTION: USE A THICK SOLUTION OF SOAP AND WATER TO CHECK FOR
LEAKS INSTEAD OF THE PROPANE LEAK DETECTOR THAT IS
PROVIDED WITH SOME BRANDS OF CHARGING STANDS.
4 Locate leak(s) using an electronic leak detector designed to detect HFC134a
refrigerant. Or, use soap and water in a thick solution.
5 Tighten/re-tighten fittings as necessary to stop leak(s). If leaks are due to damaged
or worn components, proceed with refrigerant recovery/system discharge, perform
repairs or component replacement and repeat leak detection procedure.
6 Discharge the system.
NOTE: The term “Discharge,” as used throughout this section, in no sense implies
or suggests discharging refrigerant to atmosphere. In all cases when
discharging, an environmentally approved refrigerant recovery station is to
be used.
7 Evacuate the system.
8 Immediately recharge the system as described in Charging the System, below.
2E11 21-50-00 Feb

PAGE 19
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(4) Charging the System

NOTE: The following assumes the charging stand is already connected to the airplane as
described in Evacuating the System, above.
NOTE: A Post Charging Operational Check is required immediately upon completion of
charging. Accordingly, choose a location where engine run-up is allowed and set up
the airplane and the charging stand with the airplane headed into the wind.
(a) Using a Kent Moore J23500 or similar charging stand (see Figures 4 and 5).
Ensure aircraft power is OFF before beginning.
1 Open the valve at the base of the charging cylinder and fill the charging cylinder with
sufficient refrigerant to charge the system. If refrigerant stops filling the cylinder, open
the bleed valve at the top of the charging cylinder to relieve head pressure and allow
refrigerant to continue filling the charging cylinder.
2 Close the bleed valve and the valve at the base of the charging cylinder.
3 Turn the charging cylinder sight glass to match the pressure reading on the charging
cylinder pressure gauge. Keep the sight glass in this position during the remainder of
the charging operation.
4 Connect the heating element plug to a 110 volt power outlet.
5 With the low pressure control valve (3) closed, open the refrigerant control valve (11)
and the high pressure control valve (10).
6 Allow the correct amount of refrigerant to enter the high side of the system.
7 Close the high pressure control valve (10) and the refrigerant control valve (11).
8 Perform Post Charging Operational Check, below.
(b) Using a Robinair 34700 charging station or equivalent (See Figures 3 and 6.)
CAUTION: THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURE APPLIES TO ROBINAIR 34700 OR
SIMILAR CHARGING STATION. SEE OPERATOR'S MANUAL OF
CHARGING STATION BEING USED, FOR DETAILED INSTRUCTIONS FOR
CHARGING SYSTEM.
1 Check that main power switch is OFF.
CAUTION: DO NOT PLACE ANY WEIGHT, INCLUDING HANDS AND/OR FEET,
ON REFRIGERANT TANK OR SCALE DURING CHARGING
PROCESS. ANY WEIGHT DISTURBANCE WILL CAUSE AN
INDIRECT TRANSFER OF REFRIGERANT.
2 Check that the LBS/KG selector switch on back of unit is in desired measurement
mode.
NOTE: You may enter the amount of refrigerant to be charged when the unit is
turned ON. The unit will store the amount in memory until it is turned off.
3 Open the low side (blue) valve on the unit's control panel.
4 If the messages PROGRAM and CHARGE do not display, press the CHG key to
enter the PROGRAM mode.
CAUTION: ADD REFRIGERANT THROUGH THE LOW PRESSURE SIDE ONLY.
NOTE: The amount of refrigerant required must be determined for each airplane. It
is the amount that will result in bubble-free operation at the system sight
gauge. 1.5 lbs. is the nominal amount of refrigerant for the PA-46-350P.
5 Enter amount of refrigerant required to charge the system by pressing the
appropriate number keys and ENTER on keypad.
PAGE 20
Feb 28/07 21-50-00 2E12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
LOW SIDE SERVICE PORT

EVAPORATOR COILS
HIGH SIDE SERVICE PORT
INLET
MANIFOLD COMPRESSOR
SYSTEM LOW SIDE

SYSTEM HIGH SIDE
OUTLET
EXPANSION VALVES
RECEIVER - DRYER
AND SIGHT GLASS CONDENSER
GAUGE 2
LOW PRESSURE HIGH PRESSURE CHARGING LINE (RED )
CHARGING LINE (BLUE )
LOW HIGH
SIDE SIDE
MICROPROCESSOR
CONTROLLED
LOW SIDE HIGH SIDE

CHARGING
VALVE VALVE
GAUGE 1 (1) (2)
VALVE
VACUUM RECOVERY PRESSURE

PUMP AUTOMATIC
SWITCH
PROTECTION EXPANSION VALVE
SWITCH
RECOVERY RECYCLING
VACUUM VALVE VALVE
SOLENOID MOISTURE
INDICATOR
AIR PURGE
VACUUM
PUMP ROBINAIR
OIL SEPARATOR MODEL
HEAT EXCHANGER
34700
SERVICE PORT STATION
OIL
DRAIN HIGH
FILTER - DRIER VALVE PRESSURE GAS LIQUID
OIL SWITCH (VAPOR)
DRAIN
BOTTLE
50 LB. (23 KG)
RECOVERY REFILLABLE
FAN REFRIGERANT
COMPRESSOR
TANK
COMPRESSOR
OIL SEPARATOR
PRESSURE EQUALIZING &

OIL RETURN VALVE
SCALE ASSEMBLY
Robinair 34700 Charging Station Hose Hookup

Figure 6
2E13 21-50-00 Feb

PAGE 21
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6 To begin charging process, press CHG key on keypad.

a The digital display will read AUTOMATIC and show the amount of refrigerant
programmed for the charge.
b As the solenoid opens, it will make an audible sound.
c The display will count down to zero, and display message CPL, when charging
is complete.
7 Close low side (blue) valve. Check that the high (red) valve is also closed. Also close
coupler valves.
8 Perform Post Charging Operational Check, below.
(5) Post Charging Operational Check
NOTE: The following assumes the charging stand is already connected to the airplane as
described in Evacuating the System, above.
This procedure can also be used to top off a partially charged system with refrigerant.
(a) Using a Kent Moore J23500 or similar charging stand (See Figures 4 and 5 - numbers in
parentheses refer to Figure 4.)
1 Ensure that the low pressure control valve (3) and the high pressure control valve
(10) are closed.
CAUTION: ASCERTAIN THAT THE AREA AROUND THE AIRPLANE IS CLEAR
AND THAT A QUALIFIED PERSON IS AT THE CONTROLS OF THE
AIRPLANE. ENSURE AIRPLANE IS HEADED INTO WIND.
2 Activate the system and operate the engine at 1,000 rpm for 2 minutes. Then operate
the engine at 2,000 rpm for 2 minutes.
3 Check the sight gauge on the receiver-dehydrator during the engine operation at
1,000 and 2,000 rpm. Any indication of bubbles passing the sight gauge indicates
that additional refrigerant is required.
4 If additional refrigerant is required, add it slowly through the refrigerant control valve
(11) and the low pressure control valve (3) until the sight glass remains free of
bubbles. Regulate the flow of refrigerant with the low pressure control valve. Do not
allow the compound gauge (2) to exceed a reading of 40 psi.
5 With the engine operating of 1,000-1,500 rpm, the low and high side gauges should
indicate as shown in Chart 5.
6 With the charge properly established, stop the engine.
7 Close the low pressure control valve (3) and the refrigerant control valve (11).
8 Remove the charging stand. Replace all protective caps, covers, and access panels.
CHART 5
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE INDICATION
Ambient
Gauge Temperature Indication
Low Pressure All 10 to 35 psig
High Pressure Up thru 75°F 125 psig min to 175 psig max
High Pressure Over 75°F 150 psig min to 275 psig max
PAGE 22
Feb 28/07 21-50-00 2E14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(b) Using a Robinair 34700 charging station or equivalent (See Figures 3 and 6 - numbers in
parentheses refer to Figure 6.)
CAUTION: THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURE APPLIES TO ROBINAIR 34700 OR
SIMILAR CHARGING STATION. SEE OPERATOR'S MANUAL OF
CHARGING STATION BEING USED, FOR DETAILED INSTRUCTIONS FOR
CHARGING SYSTEM.
1 Ensure that the low pressure control valve (1) and the high pressure control valve (2)
are closed.
2 Ensure coupler valves are open.
CAUTION: ASCERTAIN THAT THE AREA AROUND THE AIRPLANE IS CLEAR
AND THAT A QUALIFIED PERSON IS AT THE CONTROLS OF THE
AIRPLANE. ENSURE AIRPLANE IS HEADED INTO WIND.
3 Activate the system and operate the engine at 1,000 rpm for 2 minutes. Then operate
the engine at 2,000 rpm for 2 minutes.
4 Check the sight gauge on the receiver-dehydrator during the engine operation at
1,000 and 2,000 rpm. Any indication of bubbles passing the sight gauge indicates
that additional refrigerant is required.
5 If additional refrigerant is required, add it slowly through the low pressure control
valve (1) until the sight glass remains free of bubbles. Regulate the flow of refrigerant
with the low pressure control valve. Do not allow the gauge (1) to exceed a reading of
40 psi.
6 With the engine operating of 1,000-1,500 rpm, the low (1) and high (2) side gauges
should indicate as shown in Chart 5.
7 With the charge properly established, stop the engine and close the coupler valves.
8 Close the low pressure control valve (1).
9 Remove the charging stand. Replace all protective caps, covers, and access panels.
2E15 21-50-00 Feb

PAGE 23
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Test Gauge and Manifold Set

Figure 7
PAGE 24
Feb 28/07 21-50-00 2E16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
F. Servicing the System (with a Manifold Set)

(1) Test Gauge and Manifold Set
The proper testing and diagnosis of the air conditioning system require that a manifold gauge
set (or a charging stand) be attached to the system. This set consists of two gauges mounted
to a manifold. One gauge is a high pressure gauge used in the discharge side of the system.
The other is a low pressure gauge used in the suction side of the system. The manifold is a
device having fittings for both gauges and connection hoses with provisions for controlling the
flow of refrigerant through the manifold. (See Figures 7 and 8.)
The center port of the manifold set is used for charging or evacuation procedures, or any other
service that may be necessary.
Both the high or low side of the manifold have hand shut-off valves. When the hand valve is
turned all the way in, in a clockwise direction, the manifold is closed. The pressures on that
side of the system will, however, be recorded on the gauge above the hose.
Cracking the hand valve, in the counterclockwise direction, opens the systems to the middle
service port of the manifold set. This is desirable only when it is necessary to let refrigerant out
of or into the system. (See Figures 7 and 8.)
(2) Evacuating the System (See Figure 9.)
(a) Ascertain that all system pressure is released.
(b) Connect the manifold set hoses to the service ports and vacuum pump as shown in
Figure 9.
(c) Close the high side (pressure) and low side (suction) hand valves on the manifold set.
(d) Start the vacuum pump.
(e) Open the low side manifold set hand valve. The low side gauge should show a vacuum.
(f) After five minutes of pump operation the high side gauge should indicate slightly below
zero. If it does not, stop the pump and eliminate the blockage in the system by replacing
the faulty component, then repeat the previous evacuation steps.
(g) Operate the vacuum pump for fifteen minutes or until the low side gauge indicates 24 to
26 In. Hg. whichever occurs first.
(h) Close the low side hand valve, stop the vacuum pump and observe the low side gauge. If
the gauge rises at a rate faster than 1 In. Hg. in 5 minutes, there is a leak in the system.
Locate and repair the leak (per the following instructions), then repeat the previous
evacuation steps.
(i) With both the low and high side valves open, continue the pumping and hold the system
below 26 In. Hg. for a minimum of 30 minutes. All the previous pumping time may be
included in the 30 minutes provided that no leaks or blockages are noted, and provided
that the system is not opened by removal or disconnection of components.
(j) Close the low and high side hand valves, stop the vacuum pump and perform the
charging procedure immediately.
(3) Leak Detection (See Figure 10.)
(a) Close both the low side and high side valves on manifold hand set.
(b) Disconnect manifold hand set middle port (yellow) hose from low side port on charging
stand and connect it to a container of R12 or HFC134a refrigerant, as appropriate.
(c) Open refrigerant container service valve.
(d) Open the manifold hand set high side valve until a pressure of 50 psig is reached on low
side gauge. Close high side valve.
(e) Locate leak(s) using an electronic leak detector designed to detect R12 and/or R134a
refrigerant, as appropriate. Or, use soap and water in a thick solution.
2E17 21-50-00 Feb

PAGE 25
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Manifold Set Operation

Figure 8
PAGE 26
Feb 28/07 21-50-00 2E18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Evacuation Hookup
Figure 9
Leak Test Hookup

Figure 10
2E19 21-50-00 Feb

PAGE 27
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(f) Tighten/re-tighten fittings as necessary to stop leak(s). If leaks are due to damaged or
worn components, proceed with refrigerant recovery/system discharge, perform repairs or
component replacement and repeat leak detection procedure.
(g) Check that the both high side and low side valves on the manifold hand set are closed.
(h) Close service valve on refrigerant container. Disconnect yellow manifold hand set center
hose from refrigerant container.
(i) On systems equipped with quick disconnect connections, close coupler valves.
Disconnect manifold hand set red and blue hoses from airplane service ports. Remove
manifold hand set.
(j) Recover remaining refrigerant from system using the Robinair 34700 (or other approved)
charging station (ref. paragraph 3.C.(1)). Any quantity of oil recovered from aircraft must
be measured and an equal amount of new oil (mineral oil or P. A. G., as appropriate) must
be added to system before recharging.
(k) On systems equipped with quick disconnect connections, close coupler valves.
Disconnect charging/test station from service ports.
(l) Perform evacuation procedure per Evacuating the System, above.
(m) Immediately charge system per Charging the System, above or below.
(4) Charging the System
This method is the least desirable due to the requirement of operating the airplane’s engine to
run the compressor.
CAUTION: ASCERTAIN THAT THE AREA AROUND THE AIRPLANE IS CLEAR AND THAT
A QUALIFIED PERSON IS AT THE CONTROLS OF THE AIRPLANE.
(a) Keep the system under the vacuum established during the evacuating procedure with
both hand valves in the closed position. Disconnect evacuation set-up, if not already
disconnected.
(b) Attach a container of the appropriate refrigerant to the manifold set and open the
container service valve.
(c) Loosen the center hose at the manifold set until a hiss can be heard. Allow the gas to
escape for 2 to 3 seconds, then tighten the connection.
(d) Open the high side manifold set hand valve, observe the low side gauge, then close the
high side hand valve. The low side gauge should immediately change from an indication
of a vacuum to an indication of pressure. If it does not, the system is blocked, and the
blockage must be corrected before proceeding.
(e) Start the engine and operate it at 1000 rpm.
(f) Adjust the airplane air conditioning controls for maximum cooling, high blower speed.
(g) Keep the refrigerant cylinder in an upright position. A slug of liquid refrigerant entering the
system would damage the compressor.
(h) Open the low side manifold set hand valve and allow 1.5 pounds of refrigerant in the gas
state to enter the system.
(i) Close the low side manifold set hand valve.
(j) Proceed with the Post Charging Operation Check, below.
PAGE 28
Feb 28/07 21-50-00 2E20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(5) Post Charging Operational Check

This procedure can also be used to top off the system with refrigerant.
CAUTION: ASCERTAIN THAT THE AREA AROUND THE AIRPLANE IS CLEAR AND THAT
A QUALIFIED PERSON IS AT THE CONTROLS OF THE AIRPLANE.
NOTE: Head the airplane into the wind during these checks.
(a) With the manifold set installed, and both hand valves closed, actuate the system and
operate the engine at 1,000 rpm for two minutes, then operate the system at 2,000 rpm
for 2 minutes.
(b) Check the system sight gauge (on the receiver-dehydrator) during operation at 1,000 and
2,000 rpm. Any indication of bubbles passing the sight gauge indicates that additional
refrigerant is required.
(c) Add additional refrigerant slowly through the low side manifold set hand valve until the
sight glass remains free of bubbles.
(d) Close the low side hand valve and refrigerant container valve.
(e) With the engine operating at 1,000 to 1,500 rpm, the gauges should indicate as shown in
Chart 6.
(f) Once the charge is properly established, stop the engine, close the refrigerant container
service valve. Remove the manifold set and replace all protective caps, covers, and
access panels.
CHART 6
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE INDICATION
AMBIENT
GAUGE TEMPERATURE INDICATION
Low Pressure All 10 to 35 psig
High Pressure Up thru 75°F 125 psig min to 175 psig max
High Pressure Over 75°F 150 psig min to 275 psig max
2E21 21-50-00 Feb

PAGE 29
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Positioning Sanden Compressor Internal Parts

Figure 11
G. Compressor
The engine driven compressor is mounted on the forward, left section of the engine. A V-belt
connected to the starter ring gear pulley drives the compressor through a magnetic clutch.
(1) Compressor Service
It is not advisable to service the compressor in the field. It should be done by a qualified shop
which has the special equipment and trained personnel required to properly service the unit.
Maintenance to the Sanden compressor is limited to Removal and Installation of Compressor,
checking the compressor oil level and replacement of worn drive belt. Contact Sanden
International, for special tools and instructions for detailed compressor maintenance. (Refer to
the Vendor List in the Introduction Section for the address, and phone number.)
CAUTION: AN IMPORTANT FACTOR IN AIR CONDITIONING SERVICING IS
CLEANLINESS. TAKE CARE TO PREVENT DIRT OR FOREIGN MATERIAL
FROM ENTERING THE SYSTEM. ALL HOSE AND TUBING ENDS SHOULD BE
CAPPED IMMEDIATELY. ANY LUBRICATION REQUIRED IN THE ASSEMBLY
OF THE COMPONENTS SHOULD BE REFRIGERANT OIL OF THE TYPE
USED IN THE COMPRESSOR.
(2) Removal
Remove the compressor as follows:
(a) Be sure the air conditioning circuit protector is in the off position.
(b) Remove upper engine cowling and left hand half of nose bowl cowling.
(c) Disconnect the electrical leads to the magnetic clutch on the compressor.
(d) Discharge the air conditioning system to an appropriate environmentally approved
refrigerant recovery station. See Servicing the System, Discharging, above.
PAGE 30
Feb 28/07 21-50-00 2E22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
0.118 " (3mm) INCREMENTS
TYPICAL FOR
20 NOTCHES
30˚
4.115 "
Fabricated Dipstick for Sanden Compressor Oil Check

Figure 12
(e) Remove the suction and discharge lines from the connections on the compressor.
NOTE: All open lines should be capped immediately to prevent dirt and moisture from
entering the system.
(f) Remove forward, left hand engine baffles as required.
(g) Loosen compressor attach bolts to relieve belt tension.
(h) Remove belt.
(i) Support compressor and remove the attachment bolts.
(3) Installation
Install the compressor as follows:
(a) Place compressor in mounting brackets and install attach bolts.
(b) Install compressor drive belt. Rotate compressor drive belt. Adjust belt tension (see
below).
(c) Check oil level in compressor. (See Checking Compressor Oil Level, below.)
(d) Connect the discharge and suction lines to their respective fittings.
(e) Install engine baffles.
(f) Evacuate and charge the system per instructions given above.
(4) Checking Compressor Oil Level
Whenever a system component has been replaced or there is an obvious leak, use the
following procedure to check the compressor oil level (after making necessary repairs):
(a) Run compressor for 10 minutes at engine idle rpm.
(b) Recover all refrigerant from the system. See Servicing the System, Discharging, above.
Be careful not to lose oil.
(c) Determine the compressor mounting angle by positioning the angle gauge (Sanden P/N
32448 or a propeller protractor) across the flat surfaces of the two front mounting ears.
(d) Center the bubble and read the mounting angle to the closest degree.
(e) Remove the oil filler plug.
(f) While looking through the oil filler plug hole and observing the internal parts (see Figure
11), rotate the counterweight. Stop the counterweight in the position shown in Figure 13
as the internal parts are moving to the rear of the compressor (discharge stroke).
NOTE: This step clears the internal parts to allow the dipstick to be inserted to full depth.
2E23 21-50-00 Feb

PAGE 31
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
DIPSTICK
STOP
PA TOP
RA
LL
EL
60˚
OIL FILLER HOLE
CLUTCH FRONT PLATE
COUNTERWEIGHT
Sanden Compressor Mounting Angle

Figure 13
(g) Insert the dipstick to its stop position (Refer to Figure 13). The stop is the angle near the
top of the dipstick.
1 The point of the angle must be to the left if the mounting angle is to the right.
2 The bottom surface of the angle must be flush with the surface of the oil filler hole.
(h) Remove the dipstick and count the increments of oil.
(i) Use Chart 7 to determine the correct oil level for the mounting angle of the compressor.
(j) If the increments read on the dipstick do not match the table, add or subtract oil to obtain
the mid-range value.
(k) Install the oil filler plug, first checking that the sealing O-ring is not twisted. Ensure that the
seat and O-ring are clean.
(l) Torque the plug from 6 to 9 foot-pounds (0.8 to 1.2 kg-m). Do not over tighten the plug to
stop a leak, If plug leaks, remove it, and install a new O-ring.
(m) Recharge the system per Servicing the System, Charging, above.
(5) Adjustment of Drive Belt Tension
NOTE: An alternate method of checking belt tension is by measuring the torque required to
“slip” the belt at the small pulley. See Chart 8.
Adjust the A/C compressor belt tension as follows:
(a) Initial adjustment of a new belt requires a mid-span deflection of .31 IN. at 14 lbs. load.
(b) Service adjustment of a used belt is a mid-span deflection of .31 IN. at 10 lbs. load.
PAGE 32
Feb 28/07 21-50-00 2E24
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 7
SANDEN SD 505 COMPRESSOR MOUNTING ANGLE/OIL LEVEL
Mounting Angle Degree Acceptable Oil Level
In Increments
0 4-6
10 6-8
20 8-10
30 10-11
40 11-12
50 12-13
60 12-13
90 15-16
CHART 8
SLIP TORQUE
Belt Width Belt Condition “Slip”Torque
3/8 NEW 12 FT.LBS ±1
3/8 USED 8 FT. LBS. ±1
1/2 NEW 14 FT. LBS. ±1
1/2 USED 10 FT. LBS. ±1
H. Refrigerant Lines and Routing

NOTE: In S/N’s 4636187 and up (i.e. - HFC-134a equipped), hoses are nylon-lined.
The refrigerant lines in this airplane are flexible high pressure hoses and should be handled
accordingly. The hoses in the power plant area are routed so as to provide maximum protection
from heat and abrasion.
From the firewall, the hoses are routed underneath the battery, underneath the left cabin floor back
to the manifold assembly, receiver-dehydrator and evaporators. From these components, the lines
continue back to the condenser.
NOTE: Before any of the hose couplings are uncoupled, the system must be completely
discharged.
2F1 21-50-00 Feb

PAGE 33
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
I. Evaporator/Blower Assembly
The two evaporators are located beneath the floor aft of the rib at F.S. 233.87.
(1) Removal
(a) Discharge the system into an appropriate, environmentally-approved, refrigerant recovery
station.
(b) Remove the refrigerant lines from the inboard side of the evaporator.
(c) Disconnect the duct from the lower outboard side of the blower.
(d) Remove the nuts and washers that secure the evaporator/blower assembly to the F.S.
233.87 rib.
(e) Disconnect the electrical leads from the motor.
(f) Remove the evaporator/blower assembly.
(2) Installation
(a) Position the evaporator/blower assembly on the rib at F.S. 233.87 and secure it there with
the nuts and washers.
(b) Connect the electrical leads to the motor.
(c) Connect the duct to the lower outboard side of the blower.
(d) Connect the refrigerant lines to the inboard side of the evaporator.
(e) Charge the system.
J. Expansion Valve
NOTE: If this part is not serviceable, it must be replaced with a new part.
(1) Removal
The expansion valves are located on the
upper inboard corners of the evaporator
assemblies between the receiver-
dehydrator and the evaporator inlet.
(a) Remove the necessar y access
panels and discharge system into
an appropriate, environmentally-
approved, refrigerant recover y
station.
(b) Uncouple all related tube fittings.
(see Special Servicing Procedures,
above.)
(2) Installation
(a) Install the expansion valve in the
inlet line of the evaporator core by
coupling the related fittings. (In R-12
systems only, seal all couplings with
sealant (i.e. - Loctite Refrigerant
Sealant) applied to tube flanges
only.) Torque fittings per Chart 3.
(b) Evacuate and charge the system.
Check for leaks. (See Servicing the
System, above.)
(c) Reinstall any access panels that Expansion Valve
were previously removed. Figure 14
PAGE 34
Feb 28/07 21-50-00 2F2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
K. Condenser
The condenser, blower motor and exhaust duct assemblies are located in the aft fuselage between
F.S. 282.00 and F.S. 292.00 (forward of the aft fuselage access panel).
(1) Removal
(a) Remove the aft fuselage access panel.
(b) Discharge the air conditioning system.
(c) Disconnect and cap the lines going to the condenser. Cap inlet and outlet ports on the
condenser.
(d) Remove the screws which secure the lower end of the duct to the fuselage skin forward of
the aft fuselage access panel.
(e) Remove the bolts, washers, screws and nuts that secure the upper end of the duct to the
supports and to the condenser assembly.
NOTE: With the bolts and screws removed from the duct assembly, there is no support
for the condenser and it is free to fall.
(f) Carefully position the duct out of the way and remove the condenser.
(2) Installation
(a) Remove caps from lines and ports on condenser.
(b) Position condenser between brackets and align the bolt holes in the supports, condenser
and upper end of the duct. Install the bolts, washers, screws and nuts.
(c) Secure the lower end of the duct to the fuselage skin with the screws.
(d) Reconnect the lines to the condenser.
NOTE: Whenever the air conditioning system has been open to the atmosphere, it is
recommended that the receiver-dehydrator be replaced.
(e) Evacuate and recharge the system per instructions in this section.
(f) When the system is completely charged, check it for any leaks.
(g) Reinstall the aft fuselage access panel.
L. Condenser Blower Motor Assembly
The condenser blower motor assembly is located in the condenser exhaust duct. Access to the
motor is through the rear fuselage access panel and the removable access panel on the aft side of
the duct assembly.
(1) Removal
(a) Remove the aft fuselage access panel.
(b) Remove the bolts, washers and nuts that secure the duct access panel to the duct,
condenser and condenser support. Remove the duct access panel.
(c) Disconnect the electrical leads from the blower motor.
(d) Lift the blower motor and bracket from the duct.
(2) Installation
(a) Position the blower motor and bracket assembly in the duct.
(b) Connect the electrical leads to the blower motor.
(c) Secure the duct access panel to the duct, condenser and condenser supports with the
bolts, washers, screws and nuts.
(d) Reinstall the aft fuselage access panel.
2F3 21-50-00 Feb

PAGE 35
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
M. Receiver - Dehydrator
The receiver-dehydrator is located beneath the floor on the left hand side. It is aft of the left
evaporator module. The receiver-dehydrator is mounted to the aft side of the frame at F.S. 241.50.
The receiver-dehydrator should be replaced if the air conditioning system has been operating with a
leak that would have allowed air to enter the system if the receiver-dehydrator is left open to the
atmosphere, it should be replaced due to the loss of effectiveness of the drying compound it
contains.
(1) Removal
(a) Discharge the system into an appropriate, environmentally-approved, refrigerant recovery
station.
(b) Remove the two refrigerant lines that connect to the top of the receiver-dehydrator. Cap
the lines.
(c) In S/N’s 4636187 and up, disconnect wiring to receiver-dehydrator mounted pressure
switches.
(d) Loosen the two clamps that secure the receiver-dehydrator and lift the receiver-dehydrator
from its mount.
(2) Installation
(a) Place the receiver-dehydrator in its mount.
(b) Connect the two refrigerant lines to the top of the receiver-dehydrator.
(c) Secure the receiver-dehydrator to its mount by tightening the two clamps around the
receiver-hydrator body.
(d) In S/N’s 4636187 and up, connect wiring to receiver-dehydrator mounted pressure
switches.
(e) Service the air conditioning system.
N. Manifold Assembly
The manifold assembly is located behind the receiver-dehydrator and is mounted to the forward
face of the frame at F.S. 249.60.
The manifold assembly has the high pressure switch screwed into the high pressure port that goes
through the manifold body and the low pressure switch screwed into the low pressure port that
passes through the manifold body.
Two service valves are located on the top side of the manifold body. These service valves, and not
the compressor mounted service valve, should be used for any hook ups when servicing the
system. See Service Valves, above.
(1) Removal
(a) Discharge the air conditioning system into an appropriate, environmentally-approved,
refrigerant recovery station.
(b) Disconnect the four refrigerant lines that go to the manifold assembly.
(c) In S/N’s 4636001 thru 4636186 only, disconnect wiring to manifold-mounted pressure
switches.
(d) Remove the two screws that secure the manifold to its mounting bracket and remove the
manifold assembly.
PAGE 36
Feb 28/07 21-50-00 2F4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(2) Installation
(a) Secure the manifold assembly to its mounting bracket with the two screws. The “H” for
stamping should be forward.
(b) In S/N’s 4636001 thru 4636186 only, connect wiring to manifold-mounted pressure
switches.
(c) Connect the four refrigerant lines to the manifold assembly.
(d) Service the air conditioning system.
O. Pressure Switches
In S/N’s 4636001 thru 4636186 only, separate high and low pressure switches are located
underneath the manifold assembly. See paragraph L, above.
In S/N’s 4636187 and up, the high and low pressure switches have been incorporated into a single
housing and are located on the receiver-dehydrator.
In either case, they control the system pressure by energizing or de-energizing the compressor
clutch.
(1) Removal
(a) Discharge the air conditioning system into an appropriate, environmentally-approved,
refrigerant recovery station.
(b) Gain access to the manifold assembly or receiver-dehydrator.
(c) Remove the electrical connections from the switch.
(d) Turn the switch out of the manifold or receiver-dehydrator body.
(e) Plug the switch hole in the manifold or receiver-dehydrator body.
(2) Installation
(a) Remove the plug from the switch hole in the manifold or receiver-dehydrator body.
(b) Lubricate the switch threads and packing with refrigerant oil and install the switch in the
manifold or receiver-dehydrator body.
(c) Service the air conditioning system.
(d) Check operation of the switches.
2F5 21-50-00 Feb

PAGE 37
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 38
Feb 28/07 21-50-00 2F6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2F7 21-50-00 Feb

PAGE 39
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 40
Feb 28/07 21-50-00 2F8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TEMPERATURE CONTROL
Cabin Air Temperature Control Valve

A. Removal
(1) Disconnect the hose from between the heat muff and the duct on the left side of the cabin
temperature control valve.
(2) Disconnect the duct between the air inlet scoop and the under side of the cabin temperature
control valve.
(3) Disconnect the cabin temperature control valve flapper control cable from the cabin
temperature control valve.
(4) Remove the four bolts that attach the cabin air temperature valve to the air selector valve
(through the firewall).
(5) Remove the valve from the airplane.
B. Installation
(1) Position the cabin temperature control valve in place.
(2) Attach the cabin temperature control valve to the air selector valve through the firewall with four
bolts. Ensure that the gasket is installed between the valves and firewall.
(3) Attach the cabin temperature control valve flapper control cable to the cabin temperature
control valve.
(4) Connect the duct from the air inlet scoop to the under side of the cabin temperature control
valve.
(5) Connect the hose from the heat muff to the duct on the left side of the cabin temperature
control valve.
2F9 21-60-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 21-60-00 2F10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER
22
AUTOFLIGHT
2F11
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2F12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 22
CHAPTER CHAPTER


2 Feb 28/07
22-10-00 1 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07
5 Feb 28/07
6 Feb 28/07
7 Feb 28/07
8 Feb 28/07
9 Feb 28/07
10 Feb 28/07
11 Feb 28/07
12 Feb 28/07
13 Feb 28/07
14 Feb 28/07
15 Feb 28/07
16 Feb 28/07
17 Feb 28/07
18 Feb 28/07
19 Feb 28/07
20 Feb 28/07
21 Feb 28/07
22 Feb 28/07
23 Feb 28/07
24 Feb 28/07
25 Feb 28/07
26 Feb 28/07

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 22 - AUTOFLIGHT
TABLE OF CONTENTS
AUTOPILOT 22-10-00 1 2F17

General 1 2F17
S-TEC System 55 / 55X 1 2F17
S-TEC System 55 1 2F17
S-TEC System 55X 1 2F17
Description 1 2F17
Troubleshooting 7 2F23
GPSS (System 55X only) 7 2F23
System Operation 7 2F23
Maintenance 7 2F23
Post-Maintenance Operational Checkout 8 2F24
Components 11 2G3
Panel-Mounted Components 11 2G3
Component Locator 11 2G3
Trim Monitor 11 2G3
Removal 11 2G3
Installation 11 2G3
Roll Servo 12 2G4
Removal 12 2G4
Installation 12 2G4
Pressure Transducer 14 2G6
Removal 14 2G6
Installation 14 2G6
Trim Servo 14 2G6
Removal 14 2G6
Installation 16 2G8
Yaw Servo 18 2G10
Removal 18 2G10
Installation 18 2G10
Pitch Servo 20 2G12
Removal 20 2G12
Yaw Amplifier 22 2G14
Removal 22 2G14
Post-Installation Ground Checks 22 2G14
Servo Clutch Torque Adjustment 23 2G15

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
AUTOPILOT

PUBLICATIONS.)
1. General (See Figure 1.)
An Autopilot/Flight Director (APFD) system is installed as standard equipment in the PA-46-350P.
A. S/N’s 4636001 thru 4636247, less 4636160, (1995 - 1999)
A Bendix/King Autopilot/Flight Director (AP/FD), manufactured by then Allied Signal (now
Honeywell), was installed in these airplanes. Maintenance information for those systems is not
included in this manual. Follow the service literature published by the AP/FD equipment
manufacturer. This includes mechanical service such as: adjusting bridle cable tension, servo
removal and installation, servo clutch adjustments, etc.
King/Allied Signal technical support, parts support, and service literature can be obtained from:
Honeywell
One Technology Center
23500 W. 105th St., M/D #45
Olathe, Kansas 66061-1950
http://www.bendixking.com/
B. S/N’s 4636160, 4636248 and up (2000 and up):
The S-TEC System 55/55X is installed in these airplanes. Maintenance information for this system
only is provided herein.
2. S-TEC System 55 / 55X
A. S-TEC System 55 (2000)
This system was adopted in 2000 and is installed as standard equipment in S/N’s 4636160,
4636248 thru 4636313 only.
B. S-TEC System 55X (2002 and up)
This system was adopted in 2001 and is installed as standard equipment in S/N’s 4636314 and up.
NOTE: No model year 2001 PA-46-350P airplanes were built.
NOTE: In S/N’s 4636299 and 4636333 & up, for airplanes equipped with the Single Side EFIS
Option or Avidyne Entegra EFIS (see 34-20-00); many of the individual components listed
below (i.e. - HSI, Deviation Indicators, etc.) are replaced by the Primary Flight Display
(PFD). See Figure 1 and the Avidyne AFM Supplement.
C. Description
The S-TEC System 55/55X is a rate based autopilot that controls the roll and pitch axis of the
aircraft. The autopilot's main function is to convert pilot commands to logic signals for the roll and
pitch computers. As the pilot enters the desired mode by pressing the appropriate mode selector
switch, the computer acknowledges the mode, causing the appropriate annunciator to illuminate.
The Roll Computer receives select input signals from the Directional Gyro (DG) or Horizontal
Situation Indicator (HSI), VHF Omnidirectional Radio (VOR), Localizer (LOC) or Global Positioning
System (GPS), Deviation Indicators, and the Turn Coordinator. It then computes roll servo
commands for stabilization, turns, navigation intercepts, and tracking.
2F17 22-10-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
101349 H
101486 E
104585 NEW/E
TRIM T2 (BLK)
MASTER (3 PIN MOLEX) TO A/C GND
SWITCH
TRIM MONITOR (RED)
TRIM MASTER SW
TO DIMMER LIGHT RHEOSTAT (WHT)
T1
(RED) TRIM CB
(3 PIN MOLEX)
TRIM
TRIM MONITOR PROG/COMP
MONITOR
TO A/C GND
(BLK)
(WHT) (WHT)
A
P1-36 MOLEX PILOT'S CONTROL WHEEL
HORN T3
TO A/C GND P1-37 (6 PIN)
IN S/N'S 4636248 THRU 4636313 ONLY, (BLK) TO A/C
A/P A+ (RED)
TO PIN 6 OF A/S 1 GND
(WHT) NOT INSTALLED
P1-32
P1-33 Y2 (1 PIN MOLEX)
F/D 1 (4 PIN MOLEX)

PROG/COMP
P2 (REF.)
OPTION-F/D A/S
39237-4
PROGRAMMER / OR 39328-4
A/S 1 (6 PIN MOLEX)
COMPUTER P1 (REF.)
39236-4
(BLK)
TO A/C GND
(WHT) TO RADIO
YAW YAW LIGHT RHEOSTAT
(WHT)
MASTER POTENTIOMETER TO A/P DISC (PIN 11 NAV/HDG
CONTROL WHEEL CONN)
SWITCH
Y1
Y1
YAW MASTER
YAW MASTER
OPTIONAL
(WHT)
ALTITUDE SELECTOR /
ALERTER ALT. SEL.
(ENC. ALT. )
TO
CODE LINES
TO (BLK) AP C/B (5 AMP)
ENCODING A/C GND
ALTIMETER (WHT)
TO A/P DISC
(IF INSTALLED) (RED)
TO 28 VDC
(WHT)
S/N'S 4636333 THRU 4636348 ONLY P1-34
P1-35 A/C BUSS
(WHT)
TO LIGHT DIMMER
(RED)
TO T&B C/B (3 AMP MAX.)
TURN COORDINATOR (BLK) (BLK)
TO AIRFRAME GND TO A/C GND
TURN COORDINATOR
NOT INSTALLED WITH SINGLE-SIDE EFIS OPTION A/P RAD

F/D 2
B
NOT INSTALLED WITH
SINGLE-SIDE EFIS OPTION
MOLEX
A/P RAD
(12 PIN)
STEERING HORIZON STR HRZ

PROG/COMP
ANNUNCIATOR ANNUNCIATOR
Effectivity
4636160, S-TEC System 55/55X Autopilot/Flight Director Installation
4636248 thru 4636374 Figure 1 (Sheet 1 of 5)
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 22-10-00 2F18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TRIM
2 AMP C/B
CO-PILOT CONTROL WHEEL
R/H CB
PNL DISC
A/C BUSS PITCH SERVO
CO-PILOT
CONTROL WHEEL 30D05
DIODE
TRIM RELAY
A CONTROL WHEEL
(BLK)
(WHT)
(BLK) T4
(WHT) (BLK)
(WHT)
PILOT
CONTROL WHEEL PITCH SERVO
NOT INSTALLED WITH SINGLE-SIDE EFIS OPTION
PILOT CONTROL WHEEL

INSTALLED WITH
SINGLE-SIDE EFIS OPTION ONLY
PB1 PB1 YAW SERVO
TRANSDUCER
PRESSURE
TRANSDUCER
YAW SERVO
F/D A/P
MASTER SW
(WHT)
(RED) A/P C/B FD/AP SW
(RED) A/P A+
YAW UP
(RED) A/P A+ AMP

ROLL SERVO
B ROLL
SERVO
0121
YAW AMP
TRIM SERVO
TRIM
SERVO
Effectivity
S-TEC System 55/55X Autopilot/Flight Director Installation 4636160,
2F19 22-10-00 FebPAGE 3

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TRIM
2 AMP C/B
105129 C/F
A/C BUS
GB3A
(BLK)
D
J565/J565 P1E/J1E
(RED)
TRIM 3 3
TRIM MONITOR
MASTER
SWITCH
J564/P564
CONTROL WHEEL
B
P555
TRIM
TRIM MONITOR
MONITOR PROG/COMP
(RED)
(BLU) LB2
C
(BLK) GB3A
A
HORN
(WHT) JB1
(BLK) GB3A J
PILOT'S CONTROL WHEEL
B
(WHT) JB1
N
P552
PROGRAMMER/
COMPUTER
A
P551
P557
(BLU) LB2 TRANSDUCER
D
(BLK) GB3A PRESSURE
E
TRANSDUCER
YAW YAW
MASTER POTENTIOMETER
SWITCH
YAW POT
YAW MASTER
Y1
J553/P553
P7321
AP C/B (5 AMP)
F/D A/P MASTER SW PFD #1
P1E/J1E A/C BUS

2 PFD #1
GB3A P7331
(BLK)
C
T&B
3 AMP C/B
(RED) P1E/J1E
4 4
A/C BUS
TURN COORDINATOR P558 (BLK) GB2A
L
TURN COORDINATOR
Effectivity S-TEC System 55/55X Autopilot/Flight Director Installation

4636375 and up Figure 1 (Sheet 3 of 5)
CABLE HARNESS ASSEMBLY WITH AVIDYNE DI
PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 22-10-00 2F20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
JB14
P561 G
STALL WARN
TRIGGER
CO-PILOT CONTROL WHEEL
CO-PILOT
CONTROL WHEEL
GB4A PITCH SERVO

B H
P566
RELAY P461
P567 (BLK) GB3A

P
P554
PILOT
CONTROL WHEEL
PITCH
SERVO
PILOT CONTROL WHEEL
A
P318 P418
YAW SERVO
P456
0121 YAW AMP

UP
YAW
SERVO
P562
P460
ROLL SERVO
ROLL
YAW AMP
SERVO
P559
TRIM SERVO
TRIM
SERVO
S-TEC System 55/55X Autopilot/Flight Director Installation Effectivity

Figure 1 (Sheet 4 of 5) 4636375 and up
E HARNESS ASSEMBLY WITH AVIDYNE DISPLAY
2F21 22-10-00 FebPAGE 5

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Effectivity
4636160, S-TEC System 55/55X Autopilot/Flight Director Installation
PAGE 6
Feb 28/07 22-10-00 2F22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
The Pitch Computer receives select input signals from the Altitude Pressure Transducer,
Accelerometer, Glideslope Deviation Indicator and Altitude Selector/Alerter (if installed). It then
computes pitch servo commands for vertical speed, altitude hold and glideslope intercept and
tracking. Sensing for trim annunciation or automatic stabilator trim is provided by the pitch servo.
Drive for the stabilator trim servo is provided by the pitch computer.
A typical S-TEC System 55/55X Autopilot installation includes the following:
(1) Panel Mounted:
Programmer/Computer, Turn Coordinator, Annunciator, D.G. or HSI, altitude selector/alerter,
and Steering Horizon.
(2) Remote Mounted:
Roll Servo, Pitch Servo, Trim Servo, Trim Monitor, A/P Disconnect switch, and Altitude
(Pressure) Transducer.
Servo installations use aluminum brackets to secure the servos to the airframe. Attachment to the
airplane’s primary flight control and trim systems is accomplished with bridle cables and extension
attachments.
D. Troubleshooting
System functionality can be determined using functional checks described in the AFM Supplement
and autopilot Pilot’s Operating Handbook. More detailed troubleshooting should be accomplished by
authorized S-TEC Dealers, holding the appropriate FAA certification, with required test equipment
and service data.
E. GPSS (System 55X only.)
The Global Positioning System Steering (GPSS) is a function of the 55X autopilot only. In the GPSS
mode, the converter receives ground speed and bank angle digital signals that are calculated and
converted to a commanded turn rate. The turn rate is then scaled and converted to a DC heading
error signal that is compatible with S-TEC autopilots. The end result is an autopilot that can be
directly coupled to the roll steering commands produced by the GPS Navigator, eliminating the
need for the pilot to make any further adjustments to the HSI course arrow or the DG's heading
bug.
F. System Operation
Operation of the autopilot and other systems is described in the FAA-approved Airplane Flight
Manual Supplement (AFMS) - see airplane Pilot‘s Operating Handbook (POH), Section 9.
Specialized controls, annunciation, operation and interpretation are covered in this supplement and
in the S-TEC Autopilot POH that supplements the approved AFMS.
G. Maintenance
Except as provided in 5-20-00, servicing and/or maintenance of the autopilot system is On-
Condition.
NOTE: Servicing of S-TEC System 55/55X Autopilot installations is best accomplished by
approved S-TEC dealers holding the appropriate FAA-certification. Locations of and access
to the components installed are described and depicted individually below. Removal and
replacement of components is generally indicated by functional checks provided in the
AFM Supplement, S-TEC Autopilot POH and/or below.
2F23 22-10-00 FebPAGE 7

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
H. Post-Maintenance Operational Checkout

Complete the following checkout procedure after any maintenance to the system is performed.
NOTE: The Systems 55/55X incorporate a SELF-TEST that requires a 100% pass rate before the
autopilot can be engaged.
NOTE: In S/N’s 4636299 and 4636333 & up, for airplanes equipped with the Single Side EFIS
Option or Avidyne Entegra EFIS (see 34-20-00), references below to the remote
annunciator, flight director and HSI are to those functions in the Primary Flight Display
(PFD).
(1) Apply aircraft power.
(2) Avionics Master Switch ON
(3) Autopilot Master Switch Set to FD / AP
NOTE: Observe that all segments of the Programmer / Computer display and annunciators
illuminate for five (5) seconds during test. Satisfactory completion of the SELF-TEST
is indicated when the Ready (RDY) annunciator remains on at the end of the five (5)
second self-test. Should a fault be detected, the FAIL annunciator will remain on at the
conclusion of the self-test and the autopilot will not operate.
(4) Trim Master (ON / OFF) Switch ON
(5) HDG and VS switches PRESS / RELEASE
Ensure that HDG and VS illuminate on the Fifty Five X annunciator.
(6) VS Knob ROTATE CW
Pitch control (i.e. - the control yoke) should move slowly out (pilot may have to assist a heavy
yoke).
(7) VS Knob ROTATE CCW
Pitch control should move slowly in.
(8) A/P DISC Trim Interrupt Switch (on control yoke) PRESS
Verify the autopilot disconnects.
(9) HDG Mode ENGAGE
(10) DG or HSI HDG bug MOVE LT / RT
Roll control should follow the HDG bug.
NOTE: If HSI equipped, center the course arrow under the lubber line and push the NAV
button. Move the course arrow on the HSI left then right. Roll control should follow the
course arrow. Channel a valid VOR signal and move course arrow just enough to
deflect the left / right needle one (1) or two (2) dots. Roll control should follow the
Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) left / right needle during the test. (This test is only
valid if the left / right needle is centered with the course arrow under the lubber line.)
NOTE: If DG equipped, center the HDG bug under the lubber line. Channel a valid VOR
signal. Move the OBS to cause left / right CDI needle deflection. The roll control
should follow the left / right needle movement.
(11) REV Mode button PUSH
Roll control should respond opposite to the course arrow and CDI left / right needle inputs.
PAGE 8
Feb 28/07 22-10-00 2F24
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(12) Altitude Hold (ALT) button PUSH

Slowly pull out (nose up) on the pitch control (i.e. - control yoke). Autotrim should run nose
down with TRIM flashing on the remote annunciator and the autopilot computer / programmer
after approximately 3 seconds. Slowly move control yoke forward (nose down). After 3
seconds, autotrim should move nose up with TRIM flashing on the remote annunciator and the
autopilot computer / programmer after approximately 3 seconds.
(13) Trim Master (ON / OFF) Switch OFF
(14) Manual Electric Trim Test:
(a) Trim Master (ON / OFF) Switch ON
1 Move each segment of the Manual Electric Trim Command Switch FWD and AFT.
Trim should not run.
2 Move both segments of the Trim Command switch FWD.
Trim should run nose down.
3 Move both segments of the Trim Command switch AFT.
Trim should run nose up.
(b) Re-trim aircraft for takeoff and check controls for freedom of movement. Be sure the
autopilot and trim servos are dis-engaged.
(15) Flight Director Test:
(a) Autopilot Master Switch SELECT FD
Note the roll, pitch and trim servos are disengaged. The steering bar should be in view on
the attitude indicator.
(b) HDG Mode ENGAGE
MOVE HDG bug 45 degrees left. The roll steering bar should slowly indicate a left
steering command. Repeat the same test for the right side.
(c) VS Mode ENGAGE
SELECT 1500 FPM rate of climb. Note the pitch steering bar moves slowly up. Repeat the
same test for the down direction.
(d) Autopilot Master Switch SELECT FD / AP
The servos should re-engage.
(e) Trim Master ON / OFF Switch ON
(f) Manual Electric Trim Command Switch MOVE FWD or AFT
The autopilot should disconnect.
NOTE: The Manual Electric Trim Command Switch will disconnect the autopilot only if
there is a Pitch Mode engaged.
2G1 22-10-00 FebPAGE 9

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TURN COORDINATOR
(S/N'S 4636375 AND UP)
PROGRAMMER/COMPUTER
TRIM RELAY
ALTITUDE SELECTOR*
TRIM MONITOR TRIM/MASTER ANNUNCIATOR SWITCH

TRIM SERVO
TRANSDUCER
CONTROL WHEEL
HORN
ANNUNCIATOR ROLL SERVO

FD PARALLEX POTENTIOMETER*
STEERING HORIZON*
TURN COORDINATOR YAW SERVO
(S/N'S 4636160, AND 4636248 THRU 4636374)
PITCH SERVO
YAW AMPLIFIER
F.S.
AFT PRESSURE BULKHEAD
100.00
ALTITUDE SELECTOR* F.S.
273.75
ANNUNCIATOR
TRIM/MASTER ANNUNCIATOR SWITCH

FD PARALLEX POTENTIOMETER*
TRANSDUCER
STEERING HORIZON*
YAW AMPLIFIER
PITCH SERVO
YAW SERVO
HORN
TRIM SERVO
ROLL SERVO
TURN COORDINATOR TRIM MONITOR
*COMPONENTS NOT INSTALLED IN S/N'S 4636375 AND UP
105129
104585
101486
101349
Component Locator
Figure 2
PAGE 10
Feb 28/07 22-10-00 2G2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. Components
A. Panel-Mounted Components
The flight director, HSI, autopilot programmer/computer, altitude selector/alerter (if installed),
remote annunciator, and turn coordinator are either face-mounted or rack-mounted in the
instrument panel. See 39-10-00 for removal and installation instructions.
B. Component Locator
See Figure 2.
C. Trim Monitor
The trim monitor is mounted on the underside of the fwd-most access panel in the cockpit floor at
the co-pilot’s feet.
(1) Removal
(a) Remove carpet to expose access panel.
(b) Remove screws holding access panel to floor and open access panel to expose trim
monitor and autopilot harness.
(c) Disconnect autopilot harness.
(d) Remove screws (4) holding trim monitor to access panel and remove trim monitor.
(2) Installation
(a) Place trim monitor in position on underside of access panel and and secure with screws (4).
(b) Connect autopilot harness.
(c) Place access panel in position and secure with screws.
(d) Replace carpet over access panel.
(e) Check system operation - perform Manual Electric Trim Test under Post-Maintenance
Operational Checkout, above.
2G3 22-10-00 Feb

PAGE 11
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
D. Roll Servo (See Figure 3.)

The roll servo is mounted underneath the left aft facing passenger seat or the entertainment
cabinet, whichever is installed.
(1) Removal
(a) Remove the aft facing passenger seat or entertainment cabinet, whichever is installed.
(b) Remove adjacent carpet.
(c) Remove screws securing centerline floor access panel and remove access panel.
(d) Disconnect autopilot harness.
(e) Remove nuts and bolts (2 ea.) securing each cable clamp (2) and remove cable clamps
from aileron balance and autopilot bridle cables.
(f) Remove nuts, washers, and bolts (4 ea.) securing roll servo to mounting brackets and
remove roll servo with attached bridle cable.
(2) Installation
(a) Rig ailerons per Aileron Control Rigging and Adjustment, 27-10-00.
(b) Lock the control wheels together in the aileron neutral position using a suitable tool.
(c) Lock the ailerons in neutral position using a suitable contour fixture at the inboard ends of
the ailerons. Neutral position is defined by wing loft contour at this location.
(d) Remove screws (4) and remove capstan cover and cable guards from servo.
(e) Adjust roll servo clutch torque per Servo Clutch Torque Adjustment, below.
(f) Wrap autopilot bridle cable, align capstan, and and tighten center-ball setscrew as shown
in Figure 3.
(g) Replace cable guards and capstan cover, secure with screws (4).
(h) Position servo as shown in Figure 3 and install and secure nuts, washers, and bolts (4
ea.) holding servo to mounting brackets.
(i) Position cable clamps (2) as shown in Figure 3 and tighten nuts and bolts (2 ea.). Adjust
cable clamps in or out along the aileron balance cable to obtain a bridle cable tension as
shown in Figure 3. Torque cable clamp bolts as specified in Figure 3.
(j) Remove the locking fixtures. Aileron neutral position should be maintained at 0 ± 1 degree
with the control wheels in neutral.
(k) Use the pilot’s control wheel to move the ailerons and verify aileron travel at the primary
stops (at the aileron drive sectors on the wing spars) remains 18 ± 1 degree up and down.
(l) Use the pilot’s control wheel to hold the ailerons firmly against the primary stops. Verify
the secondary aileron stops (on the forward pressure bulkhead) retain a cushion (gap) of
0.09 ± 0.03 inch in each direction.
(m) If either step (i) or (j) reveal the aileron controls out of rig, repeat steps (a) thru (j), above.
(n) Connect autopilot harness.
(o) Check autopilot system for binding and proper operation, see Post-Maintenance
Operational Checkout, above.
(p) Check aileron controls for free and correct movement.
(q) Replace centerline floor access panel and secure with screws.
(r) Replace carpeting.
(s) Replace the aft facing passenger seat or entertainment cabinet, whichever is installed.
PAGE 12
Feb 28/07 22-10-00 2G4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ROLL SERVO
(SEE DETAIL BELOW FOR
BULKHEAD F.S. 171.40
BRIDLE CABLE WRAP INFORMATION.)
AILERON CABLE
CL OF A/C
CHAFE BLOCK
CABLE CLAMP
AILERON
ADJUST AUTOPILOT BALANCE CABLE
BRIDLE CABLE TENSION PULLEY
TO 15 ± 2 LBS.
AILERON FWD
BOLT, AN3-4A BALANCE
WASHER, NAS1149F0363P CABLE
NUT, NAS679A3W BULKHEAD F.S. 178.60
(4 EACH REQ'D) LEFT
(VIEW LOOKING DOWN AT INSTALLATION)
CABLE CLAMP
.005 MIN GAP BETWEEN CLAMP
HALVES AFTER TORQUING
AILERON BALANCE CABLE TORQUE CLAMP BOLTS

(BRIDLE CABLE BEHIND) TO 55 ± 5 IN. LBS
CABLE CLAMP DETAIL
LOCATION OF CENTER-BALL WITH AILERONS

IN NEUTRAL POSITION. DEPRESS CENTER-BALL
TO BOTTOM OF HOLE AND TIGHTEN SETSCREW.
ROLL SERVO
AUTOPILOT
BRIDLE
CABLE
AFT
°
10
105129 WRAP SHORT END 440° WRAP LONG END 280°

104585 AND OUTBOARD AND INBOARD
101486 BRIDLE CABLE WRAPPING DETAIL
101349 (VIEW LOOKING UP, CAPSTAN COVER AND CABLE GUARDS REMOVED FOR CLARITY.)
Effectivity
Roll Servo Installation System 55X shown
Figure 3 System 55 similar
2G5 22-10-00 Feb

PAGE 13
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
E. Pressure Transducer
The pressure transducer is mounted just forward of the aft pressure bulkhead (F.S. 273.75) slightly
to the right of the aircraft centerline and just below the aircraft upper skin. Access is through the
cabin rear closeout panel.
(1) Removal
(a) Disconnect the transducer from the static-system by cutting the Ty-wrap and pulling the
static hose off of the transducer hose barb.
(b) Disconnect the autopilot harness.
(c) Remove screws, washers, and nuts (2 ea.) and remove transducer.
(2) Installation
(a) Place transducer in position on bracket. Secure to bracket with screws, washers, and nuts
(2 ea.)
(b) Slide the static hose over the transducer hose barb and secure with a Ty-wrap.
(c) Connect the autopilot harness.
F. Trim Servo (See Figure 4.)
The trim servo is located on the centerline underneath the baggage compartment floor, just forward
of F.S. 249.60.
(1) Removal
(a) Remove rear seats. Remove carpet and access panels from baggage compartment floor.
(b) Remove the centerline access panels in the cabin floor to expose the plastic tube that
protects the trim cables.
(c) Remove the pins from both ends of the plastic tube.
(d) Slide the tube forward.
(e) Rotate the elevator trim control wheel until the right trim cable turnbuckle clears the aft
end of the tube.
(f) Tie a pull rope to the right trim cable forward of the exposed turnbuckle.
(g) Tie a pull rope to the right trim cable aft of the idler pulley.
(h) Tie-off both pull ropes to maintain tension on the left trim cable and the extreme forward
and aft segments of the right trim cable (i.e. - forward of the turnbuckle and aft of the idler
pulley).
NOTE: Tension must be applied to the trim cables to prevent the cables from unwrapping
from the trim wheel drum or the trim actuator, and to prevent the cables from
fouling at any of the pulleys.
(i) Slack off the exposed turnbuckle to relieve tension on the right trim cable segment
between the turnbuckle and idler pulley.
(j) Disconnect the autopilot harness.
(k) Remove the capstan cover and cable guards (4) by removing the retaining screws (4).
(l) Remove the bolt, nut, and washer securing the idler pulley to the trim servo baseplate and
mounting bracket and remove the idler pulley components.
NOTE: The idler pulley breaks down into the following components upon removal of the
bolt, above: mounting plate/cable guard assembly, idler pulley, and two washers.
(m) Remove the remaining bolts, nuts, and washers (3 ea.) securing the trim servo to its
mounting bracket and remove the trim servo.
PAGE 14
Feb 28/07 22-10-00 2G6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TRIM SERVO
CABLE GUARDS BULKHEAD F.S. 249.60

(4 REQ'D)
C
L OF A/C
VIEW LOOKING DOWN AT TRIM SERVO INSTALLATION
BOLT, AN3-5A (3 REQ'D)

BULKHEAD F.S. 241.50 WASHER, NAS1149F0363P (6 REQ'D)
NUT, NAS679A3W (3 REQ'D)
CAPSTAN COVER
FOR BUILD-UP SEE DETAIL
RIGHT ELEVATOR TRIM CABLE

(LEFT NOT SHOWN FOR CLARITY)
VIEW LOOKING RIGHT
WASHER, NAS1149F0363P
IDLER PULLEY
CENTER SPACER
NUT, NAS679A3W
CABLE GUARDS (3 REQ'D)
WASHER, NAS1149C0632P WASHER, NAS1149F0363P
MOUNTING PLATE TRIM SERVO BASEPLATE

STAR WASHER, BRACKET
MS35333-36 (6 REQ'D)
105129 BOLT WASHER, NAS1149C0632P

104585 SCREW (3 REQ'D)
101486
101349
IDLER PULLEY DETAIL
Effectivity
Trim Servo Installation System 55X shown
Figure 4 System 55 similar
2G7 22-10-00 Feb

PAGE 15
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(2) Installation
(a) Adjust trim servo clutch torque per Servo Clutch Torque Adjustment, below.
(b) With the capstan cover and cable guards removed, position the trim servo as shown in
Figure 4. Secure with bolts, nuts, and washers (3 ea. - i.e. - top two and bottom forward).
(c) Assemble the idler pulley cable guards (3) to the mounting plate with screws (1 ea.) and
star washers (2 ea.). Place the center bolt through the mounting plate/cable guard
assembly and slide a washer over the threaded end and up against the mounting plate.
Set the mounting plate/cable guard/bolt assembly aside.
(d) Drape the slack left trim cable over the servo capstan.
(e) Place thumb and forefinger on top of the capstan over the trim cable in its groove.
Pressing the trim cable into its groove, slide thumb and forefinger down around opposite
sides of the servo capstan and pull the trim cable slack to the lower rear quadrant.
(f) Holding the trim cable in that position, install the capstan cover and cable guards as
shown in Figure 4.
(g) Hold the idler pulley on the forward side of the trim servo and align it with the left trim
cable. Move the idler pulley down to the left trim cable forward of the trim servo and
capture the trim cable in the left cable groove on the bottom of the idler pulley.
(h) Slide the idler pulley along the trim cable, underneath the servo capstan, and bring it
approximately to its installed position (see Figure 4). At this point, the forward portion of
the trim cable should be routed under, around the rear, and over the top of the idler pulley
and under, around the front, and over the top of the capstan.
(i) Holding the idler pulley in this position, reach to the rear and pull the aft portion of the trim
cable under the idler pulley and seat it in the right cable groove on the idler pulley. The left
trim cable should now be routed as shown in Figure 4.
(j) Place the spacer inside the idler pulley.
(k) Position the mounting plate/cable guard/bolt assembly as shown in Figure 4 and slide the
bolt through the spacer inside the idler pulley.
(l) Place a washer over the bolt end and put the bolt through the trim servo mounting bracket
and baseplate. Secure with a nut and washer, taking care to ensure that the cable guards
are positioned, and the left trim cable is routed, as shown in Figure 4.
(m) Rig elevator trim per Elevator Trim Controls Rigging, 27-30-00.
(n) Connect the autopilot harness.
(o) Check autopilot system for proper operation.
(p) Check elevator trim controls for free and correct movement.
(q) Replace access panels and carpet in cabin and baggage compartment floors.
(r) Replace rear seats.
PAGE 16
Feb 28/07 22-10-00 2G8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2G9 22-10-00 Feb

PAGE 17
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
G. Yaw Servo (See Figure 5.)

The yaw servo is located in the unpressurized aft fuselage.
(1) Removal
(a) Remove the aft fuselage access panel (see #1, Figure 3, 6-00-00).
(b) Disconnect autopilot harness.
(c) Remove nuts and bolts (2 ea.) securing each cable clamp (2) and remove cable clamps
from rudder cables and autopilot bridle cables.
(d) Remove nuts, washers, and bolts (4 ea.) securing yaw servo to mounting brackets and
remove yaw servo with attached bridle cable.
(2) Installation
(a) Rig rudder controls per Rudder Control Rigging, 27-20-00.
(b) Lock rudder in its neutral (streamlined) position.
(c) Remove screws (4) and remove capstan cover and cable guards from servo.
(d) Adjust yaw servo clutch torque per Servo Clutch Torque Adjustment, below.
(e) Wrap autopilot bridle cable, align capstan, and and tighten center-ball setscrew as shown
in Figure 5.
(f) Replace cable guards and capstan cover, secure with screws (4).
(g) Position yaw servo as shown in Figure 5 and secure with bolts, nuts, and washers (4 ea.)
(h) Remove tape or clip holding bridle cable on capstan and attach left and right autopilot
bridle cables to the left and right rudder cables with cable clamps (2).
(i) Evenly adjust the cable clamps up the rudder cables until the tension on both left and right
autopilot bridle cables is as specified in Figure 5.
(j) Connect autopilot harness.
(k) Remove rudder lock.
(l) Check autopilot system for binding and correct operation.
(m) Check rudder controls for free and correct movement.
(n) Replace and secure the aft fuselage access panel.
PAGE 18
Feb 28/07 22-10-00 2G10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EA
CL OF AIRCRAFT
CABLE CLAMP
(2 REQ"D)
RIGHT
RUDDER CABLE
SEE DETAIL (BELOW)

BOLT, AN3-5A FOR BRIDLE CABLE
UP WASHER, NAS1149F0363P WRAP INFORMATION.
NUT, NAS679A3W
(4 EACH REQ'D)
FWD
ADJUST BRIDLE
CABLE TENSION
CABLE PER NOTE 1.
GUARDS
CAPSTAN
LEFT
COVER
RUDDER CABLE
RIGHT
YAW SERVO RUDDER CABLE
(LEFT OMITTED
FOR CLARITY)

EA VIEW DOWN AND AFT
VIEW EA-EA
(LOOKING LEFT) (RUDDER PULLEYS OMITTED FOR CLARITY)
NOTE 1: SYSTEM 55 (S/N'S 4636160 AND 4636248 THRU 4636313 ONLY) = 15 ± 2 LBS.
SYSTEM 55X (S/N'S 4636314 AND UP) = 30 ± 2 LBS.
WRAP 450° AND UP
WRAP 450° AND UP WRAP 450° AND UP
BRIDLE CABLE
BRIDLE CABLE
YAW SERVO
(ORIENTATION FOR S/N'S 4636375 AND UP)

LOCATION OF CENTERBALL WITH RUDDER
105129 IN NEUTRAL. DEPRESS CENTERBALL TO
104585 BOTTOM OF HOLE & TIGHTEN SET SCREW.
101486
(CAPSTAN COVER AND CABLE GUARDS OMITTED FOR CLARITY)
Effectivity
Yaw Servo Installation System 55X shown
Figure 5 System 55 as noted
2G11 22-10-00 Feb

PAGE 19
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
H. Pitch Servo (See Figure 6.)

The pitch servo is located in the unpressurized aft fuselage.
(1) Removal
(c) Remove locking clips (2) from turnbuckle in autopilot bridle cable. Let the upper segment
of the autopilot bridle cable remain on top of the autopilot sector assembly.
(d) Remove cotter pins (cable guards) (2) holding the lower segment of the autopilot bridle
cable on idler pulley and remove the bridle cable from the idler pulley.
(e) Remove cotter pin (cable guard) holding the autopilot bridle cable to the bottom of the
autopilot sector assembly.
(f) Remove cotter pin, clevis pin, washers (2), and autopilot bridle cable fork end from
autopilot sector assembly.
(g) Remove nuts, washers, and bolts (4 ea.) securing pitch servo to mounting brackets and
remove pitch servo with attached bridle cable.
(2) Installation
(a) Rig elevator controls per Elevator Controls Rigging, 27-30-00.
(b) Remove screws (4) and remove capstan cover and cable guards from servo.
(c) Adjust pitch servo clutch torque per Servo Clutch Torque Adjustment, below.
(d) Wrap autopilot bridle cable, align capstan, and and tighten center-ball setscrew as shown
in Figure 6.
(e) Replace cable guards and capstan cover, secure with screws (4).
(f) Position pitch servo as shown in Figure 6 and secure with bolts, nuts, and washers (4
ea.).
(g) Position autopilot bridle cable fork end on autopilot sector assembly and secure with
clevis pin, washers (2), and cotter pin.
(h) Ensuring bridle cable is in bottom groove of sector assembly, insert and secure cotter pin
(cable guard).
(i) Loop bridle cable over idler pulley and install cotter pins (cable guards) (2).
(j) Connect bridle cable turnbuckle and adjust cable tension as specified in Figure 6.
(k) Install bridle cable turnbuckle locking clips (2).
(l) Connect autopilot harness.
(m) Check autopilot system for binding and correct operation.
(n) Check elevator controls for free and correct movement.
(o) Replace and secure the aft fuselage access panel.
PAGE 20
Feb 28/07 22-10-00 2G12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CLEVIS PIN, (2 REQ'D) ADJUST BRIDLE CABLE TENSION:

WASHER, NAS1149F0363P (4 REQ'D) - SYSTEM 55 (S/N'S 4636160 AND 4636248 THRU 4636313 ONLY) = 15 ± 2 LBS.
COTTER PIN, MS24665-134 (2 REQ'D) - SYSTEM 55X (S/N'S 4636314 AND UP) = 30 ± 2 LBS.
(CUT TO LENGTH)
EXISTING ELEVATOR CABLE
W.L.
77.25 TURNBUCKLE
LOCKING CLIP,
MS21256-1 (2 REQ'D)
BOLT, AN3-4A
WASHER, NAS1149F0363P
NUT, NAS679A3W
(4 EACH REQ'D)
PITCH SERVO
(SEE DETAIL, BELOW, FOR BRIDLE
CABLE WRAP INFORMATION.)
COTTER PINS
F.S. INSTALLED AS
311.00 CABLE GUARDS
(2 PLCS)
AUTOPILOT SECTOR ASSEMBLY
EXISTING PITCH CABLE

COTTER PINS,
MS24665-134,
EXISTING ELEVATOR TRIM CABLE
INSTALLED AS
CABLE GUARDS UP
(2 PLCS)
FWD
VIEW LOOKING LEFT FROM CENTERLINE OF AIRCRAFT

(ELEVATOR SECTOR OMITTED FOR CLARITY)
BRIDLE CABLE
PITCH SERVO
WRAP TERMINAL END 315° AND UP
WRAP FORK END 495° AND AFT
45°
UP
AFT POSITION OF BRIDLE CABLE CENTER BALL

WITH ELEVATOR CONTROL IN FULL DOWN
105129 POSITION. DEPRESS CENTER BALL TO
104585 BOTTOM OF HOLE AND TIGHTEN SETSCREW.
101486
(CAPSTAN COVER AND CABLE GUARDS OMITTED FOR CLARITY)
Effectivity
Pitch Servo Installation System 55X shown
Figure 6 System 55 as noted
2G13 22-10-00 Feb

PAGE 21
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
F.S. 311.40
C
L OF A/C
.125 MIN
AUTOPILOT SECTOR
ELEVATOR SECTOR
UP
YAW AMPLIFIER
SCREW, AN525-832R7 (4 REQ'D)

WASHER, NAS1149FN832P (4 REQ'D)
105129
104585
101486
101349
VIEW LOOKING AFT

Effectivity
System 55X shown Yaw Amplifier Installation
System 55 similar Figure 7
I. Yaw Amplifier (See Figure 7.)

The yaw amplifier is located in the unpressurized aft fuselage.
(1) Removal
(c) Remove screws and washers (4 ea.) and remove the yaw amplifier.
(2) Installation
(a) Position yaw amplifier and secure with screws and washers (4 ea.)
(b) Connect autopilot harness.
(c) Check autopilot system for correct operation.
(d) Replace and secure the aft fuselage access panel.
(3) Post-Installation Ground Checks
(a) Level aircraft laterally per 8-20-00.
(b) Center trim pot on instrument panel.
(c) Align the cap on the yaw trim pot knob (on instrument panel) so that the white line is
centered vertically.
(d) Adjust the pot in the yaw amplifier (located under plug in top of amplifier) to provide a null
(i.e. - no servo action) at the yaw servo.
PAGE 22
Feb 28/07 22-10-00 2G14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(e) Align the cap on the yaw trim pot knob (on instrument panel) so that the white line is
centered vertically.
(f) Check operation of yaw trim pot by turning trim pot both left and right and verify rudder
pedal movement in the same direction (i.e. - turning trim pot left causes left rudder pedal
depression, etc.)
4. Servo Clutch Torque Adjustment (See Figure 8.)
A. Remove servo per instructions under specific servo, above.
B. Place servo in a holding fixture (i.e. - vice) with capstan up.
C. Remove capstan cover, cable guards, and cable.
D. Check capstan torque by attaching the capstan adjusting tool (special tool - see parts catalog) to
the capstan and using a currently calibrated torque wrench as shown in Figure 8.
(1) Acceptable torque is specified in Chart 1.
(2) If adjustment is required, proceed as follows.
E. Remove cotter pin from end of servo shaft and remove castle nut, shim washers, and tension
washers.
F. Replace tension washers as required (see Chart 1).
G. Replace shim washers and castle nut.
H. Tension castle nut so that capstan torque is as specified in Chart 1.
CHART 1
AUTOPILOT SERVO CLUTCH TORQUE
TORQUE (In. Lbs.) WASHERS
SERVO System 55/55X System 55/55X
Roll 40 ± 2* Three P/N 1253-1 (Blue)
Pitch 27 ± 2* One P/N 1253 (Red)
Two P/N 1253-1 (Blue)
Trim 21 ± 2* Three P/N 1253 (Red)
Yaw 30 ± 2* One P/N 1253 (Red)
Two P/N 1253-1 (Blue)
* ± 3 in S/N’s 4636375 and up
2G15 22-10-00 Feb

PAGE 23
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
SCREW (4 REQ'D.)
WASHER (4 REQ'D.)
AN936-A4
CAPSTAN COVER
TORQUE WRENCH
S-TEC TOOL
(SEE PARTS CATALOG)
CASTLE NUT COTTER PIN

AN320-5 MS24665-134
SHIM WASHER (MIN. 1 REQ'D.)
USE AS REQUIRED TO ALIGN
COTTER PIN WITH SHAFT HOLE.
TENSION WASHERS
(SEE CHART 1)
CABLE GUARD (4 REQ'D.)
SERVO
105129
104585
101486
101349
Servo Clutch Torque Adjustment

Figure 8
PAGE 24
Feb 28/07 22-10-00 2G16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2G17 22-10-00 Feb

PAGE 25
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 26
Feb 28/07 22-10-00 2G18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER
23
COMMUNICATIONS
2G19
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2G20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 23
CHAPTER CHAPTER


2 Feb 28/07
23-00-00 1 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07
23-50-00 1 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07
5 Feb 28/07
6 Feb 28/07
23-60-00 1 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 23 - COMMUNICATIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
GENERAL 23-00-00 1 2H1

Avionics Master Switch 1 2H1
Ground Clearance Switch 1 2H1
AUDIO INTEGRATING 23-50-00 1 2H3

Removal and Installation 1 2H3
System Functional Test 2 2H4
On Ground 2 2H4
In Flight 2 2H4
Adjustment 3 2H5
STATIC DISCHARGING 23-60-00 1 2H9

Static Wicks 1 2H9

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GENERAL
1. Avionics Master Switch

Avionics Bus #1 and #2 are fed direct from the tie bus via the avionics master solenoids which in turn are
energized by the avionics master switch. Refer to Chapter 24 and to schematics in 91-24-30.
2. Ground Clearance Switch (Optional)
The ground clearance switch furnishes power to the Comm 1 and speaker panel direct from the battery
bus through the ground clearance relay. Refer to 91-23-00 for schematic interface and troubleshooting.
2H1 23-00-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 23-00-00 2H2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
AUDIO INTEGRATING

PUBLICATIONS.)
The Garmin GMA-340 Audio Panel is installed as standard equipment in S/N’s 4636248 and up. It
integrates the audio switching, amplifier, and intercom system with a marker beacon receiver.
Maintenance of the GMA-340 is “on condition” only and, with the exception of swapping complete units,
should be performed only by a qualified avionics shop in accordance with the GMA-340 Audio Panel
Maintenance Manual (Garmin P/N 190-00149-02).
Information provided in this manual is intended to aid the removal and installation of the GMA-340 unit
and its associated wiring and to permit basic system functional test and adjustment. In addition, a
detailed electrical schematic is provided in 91-23-50.
1. Removal and Installation (See Figure 1.)
See 39-10-00 - Avionics, Removal and Installation.
WIRE CODE RP6A22 TO AUDIO AMP CKT BKR

101341 D
WIRES CW15J & CW16J TO CO-PILOT CONTROL WHEEL
TO MKR/BCN ANTENNA
GROUND BLOCK AUDIO PANEL
HARNESS ASSY
CONNECTOR J17 TO EFIS HARNESS
WIRES CW15 & CW16

TO PILOT CONTROL WHEEL
BLUE WIRE TO
P-1
J-1 AVIONICS LIGHT
DIMMING BUS
TO
INTERCOM
JACKS
P317
SEE DETAIL J317
RELAY
PANEL (REF)
P317 J317
RED WIRE "RP7" FROM AUDIO HARN
RED WIRE "RP7" FROM AUDIO HARN 4 4
TO AUDIO AMP CKT BKR RP6A22 (REF) 5 5
DETAIL
GMA-340 Audio Panel Installation Effectivity

Figure 1 4636248 and up
2H3 23-50-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2. System Functional Test (See Figure 2.)

A. On Ground
The following known good equipment is required prior to performing this test: microphone, headset,
speaker and avionics receivers.
(1) Lamp Test
(a) Apply power to the unit by rotating the pilot intercom knob clockwise.
(b) The test button checks the internal LED annunciator and marker beacon lamps. Press
TEST to confirm operation of the LED’s. Cover the photocell with a finger and observe
that the LED annunciators dim automatically. Check the front panel back-lighting and
dimming function. Each annunciator contains a lamp for illumination.
(2) Fail-safe Operation Check
(a) Turn the unit off by rotating the pilot intercom knob counterclockwise.
(b) Check fail-safe operation by exercising the COM 1 microphone, microphone key and
audio over the headphones.
(c) Turn the unit back on to continue testing.
(3) Transceiver Operational Check
(a) Perform a ramp test radio check by exercising the installed transceivers, microphone,
microphone key and audio over the headphones and speaker.
(b) Verify that communications are loud and clear and push-to-talk (PTT) operation is correct.
(4) Intercom System (ICS) Check
(a) Set the intercom to the ALL mode (Crew and Pilot LED’s off).
(b) Plug in headsets at each ICS position.
(c) Adjust squelch and volume for each position and verify that the ICS is working properly.
(d) Check Pilot and Copilot ICS positions for isolation and proper operation of volume and
squelch controls.
(e) Press the PA button. Verify that microphone audio is heard over the speaker.
(5) Aircraft Receivers Check
(a) Select the audio source corresponding to each installed avionics unit and check for audio
over the headsets.
(b) Check for Pilot/Copilot audio isolation when pressing the COM 1/2 button.
(c) Press the SPKR button and verify that any selected audio is heard over the speaker.
(6) Music System Check
Connect a stereo music source to MUSIC 2. Press the CREW button to set the ICS to the crew
mode. Verify that stereo audio is heard in the passenger headsets only.
B. In Flight
Verify proper operation of the marker lamps and marker audio, including the marker audio mute
function. Check proper operation of the marker sensitivity selection (using the SENS button) by
flying towards the outer marker position initially using HI sensitivity. When the OM audio is just
barely audible in the headset, switching to LO sensitivity should reduce or eliminate the audio.
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 23-50-00 2H4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GARMIN GMA 340
A OM MKR
MUTE
COM1 COM2 COM3 NAV1 NAV2 DME ADF TEST
SQ HI SPKR PILOT SQ
LO COM1 COM2 COM3 COM

OFF/ CABIN AUDIO ICS ISOLATION VOL
VOL MIC MIC MIC 1/2 PULL
SENS PA CREW PASS
PILOT VOL CO-PILOT
GMA-340 Audio Panel Effectivity

3. Adjustment (See Figure 3.)

CAUTION: USE ONLY A 2 MM (MAX BLADE WIDTH) FLAT-BLADE NON-CONDUCTIVE SCREW
DRIVER AS AN ADJUSTMENT TOOL. BE CAREFUL WHEN INSERTING ADJUSTMENT
TOOL THROUGH THE TOP COVER. THE UNIT MAY BE DAMAGED IF AN ADJUSTMENT
TOOL IS ACCIDENTALLY FORCED AGAINST UNINTENDED COMPONENTS OR
CIRCUIT BOARD PATHS.
The following adjustments can be made through access holes in the top cover of the GMA 340:
A. Marker beacon audio level.
Counter-clockwise adjustment increases the marker audio level.
B. Marker beacon sensitivity.
Clockwise (CW) adjustment increases the sensitivity. LOW sensitivity can be adjusted without
affecting HIGH sensitivity setting. Adjusting HIGH sensitivity will, however, affect the LOW
sensitivity. If the HIGH sensitivity setting is adjusted, then the LOW sensitivity setting should be
checked and adjusted afterwards, as needed. If your GMA-340 top cover does not have the marker
beacon sensitivity adjustment access holes as indicated in Figure 3, and you need to adjust the
sensitivity, contact Garmin for instructions.
C. Aircraft radio speaker output level.
D. Pilot PA microphone speaker output level.
E. Copilot PA microphone speaker output level.
2H5 23-50-00 FebPAGE 3

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
MARKER BEACON HIGH SENSITIVITY
MARKER BEACON LOW SENSITIVITY
PILOT PA MIC SPKR LEVEL AIRCRAFT RADIO SPKR LEVEL
CO-PILOT PA MIC SPKR LEVEL
MARKER BEACON AUDIO LEVEL
MUSIC 1 MUTE TRIP LEVEL

(NOT USED IN THIS INSTALLATION)
FRONT
(VIEW LOOKING DOWN)
Effectivity GMA-340 Audio Panel Adjustments

4636248 and up Figure 3
PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 23-50-00 2H6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2H7 23-50-00 FebPAGE 5

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 6
Feb 28/07 23-50-00 2H8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
STATIC DISCHARGING
Static Wicks (PIR-PPS55006, Rev. U.)
This airplane is equipped with 16 static wicks: three on the outboard end of each aileron, three on the
outboard half of each side of the elevator; two on the right-hand side of the rudder and one on the left-
hand side of the rudder and one in the center of the elevator trim tab.
To aid in dissipating static electricity buildup, the ailerons, elevator and rudder are bonded to either the
control’s hinge or spar.
When replacing the jumper assemblies (bonding straps), secure the end of the jumper that mounts to
the control’s hinge or spar as follows: (see also 51-80-00)
A. Clean an area of 1 1/2 times the diameter of the jumper’s washer down to bare metal.
B. Attach the jumper and washer to the control’s hinge or spar.
C. Seal the cleaned area with a light coat of epoxy primer within 24 hours.
2H9 23-60-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 23-60-00 2H10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER
24
ELECTRICAL POWER
2H11
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2H12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 24
CHAPTER CHAPTER


2 Feb 28/07
24-00-00 1 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07
24-30-00 1 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07
5 Feb 28/07
6 Feb 28/07
7 Feb 28/07
8 Feb 28/07
9 Feb 28/07
10 Feb 28/07
11 Feb 28/07
12 Feb 28/07
13 Feb 28/07
14 Feb 28/07
15 Feb 28/07
16 Feb 28/07
17 Feb 28/07
18 Feb 28/07
19 Feb 28/07
20 Feb 28/07
21 Feb 28/07
22 Feb 28/07
24-40-00 1 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07
24-60-00 1 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07
5 Feb 28/07
6 Feb 28/07
2H13 24 - LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES PAGE 1

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 24 - LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES 2H14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 24 - ELECTRICAL POWER
TABLE OF CONTENTS
GENERAL 24-00-00 1 2H17
DC GENERATION 24-30-00 1 2H19

Alternator System 1 2H19
Main Electrical Bus 1 2H19
Avionics Bus 1 2H19
Voltage Regulation and Control 1 2H19
Troubleshooting 1 2H19
Distribution 1 2H19
Alternators 8 2I2
Alternator Belt Tension 8 2I2
Alternator Control Units (Voltage Regulators) 9 2I3
Adjusting Voltage Regulator Units 9 2I3
Bench Tests (Lamar B-00382-1) 9 2I3
Battery (Lead-Acid) 12 2I6
Troubleshooting 12 2I6
Removal 12 2I6
Installation 15 2I9
Cleaning 15 2I9
Battery 15 2I9
Acid Recovery Jar and Vent Lines 15 2I9
Charging - (Gill Model G-243) 16 2I10
Hydrometer Reading and Battery Charge 17 2I11
Discharge 18 2I12
Temperature Considerations 18 2I12
Repairs, Storage, and Service Tips 19 2I13
Preparing New Dry-Charged Battery for Installation 19 2I13
Battery (Valve-Regulated Lead-Acid) 19 2I13
Removal 19 2I13
Installation 20 2I14
Cleaning 20 2I14
Battery 20 2I14
Charging - (Gill Model G-250S) 20 2I14
Battery Capacity Test 21 2I15
EXTERNAL POWER 24-40-00 1 2I19

Emergency Starting through External Power Receptacle 1 2I19
ELECTRICAL LOAD DISTRIBUTION 24-60-00 1 2J1

Emergency Operation 1 2J1
Electrical Load 1 2J1
Volt / Ammeter 4 2J4
2H15 24 - CONTENTS FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 24 - CONTENTS 2H16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GENERAL
This section contains information to assist in servicing the electrical power distribution systems and
components. This chapter does not include autopilot or avionics service information. Refer to Chapter 91
for electrical systems schematics.
The electrical system is 28 Vdc, negative ground, consisting of:
A. Two 70-amp, Prestolite alternators (S/N’s 4636001 thru 4636131) standard, or
Two 75-amp, Electrosystems alternators (S/N’s 4636132 and up) standard
B. Two Lamar Alternator Control Units standard
C. One Digital volt meter standard
D. Two ammeters standard
E. Dual main power distribution bus/tie bus standard
F. One 10 amp-hour lead acid battery-manifold type-Gill
(S/N’s 4636001 thru 4636374) standard
One 10 amp-hour lead acid battery-recombinant gas type-Gill
(S/N’s 4636375 and up) standard
G. One acid recovery jar with venting overboard
(S/N’s 4636001 thru 4636374) standard
H. External power provisions standard
I. Visual annunciation with alternator “OUT’’ sensors standard
Each of the dual alternators provides 28 Vdc electrical power. Both are negative grounded. The 10 amp-
hour lead acid battery is located beneath the floor of the forward baggage compartment, pilot’s side. The
battery is hard wired directly to the battery bus. An external power circuitry is provided for ground
operational requirements. The manifold-type battery (S/N’s 4636001 thru 4636374) is vented overboard
through an acid recovery system.
2H17 24-00-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 24-00-00 2H18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
DC GENERATION
1. Alternator System (Refer to Figure 1)

The PA-46-350P uses a dual 70-amp (S/N’s 4636001 thru 4636131) or 75-amp (S/N’s 4636132 and up)
alternator system, consisting of two belt driven alternators that feed their individual positive outputs to
the main bus through separate 60-amp (S/N’s 4636001 thru 4636131) or 80-amp (S/N’s 4636132 and
up) main bus circuit breakers. Shunts in each alternator output feed total current flow to the respective
ammeter. Each ammeter circuit is protected by two 5-amp fuses.
2. Main Electrical Bus
Operational check of bus isolation diodes
A. Turn on external or battery power.
B. Check to see that landing gear indication circuit breaker is in.
C. Check to see that gear position lights are on.
D. Pull one of the Main circuit breakers. The gear position lights should remain on.
E. Reset the Main circuit breaker that was pulled in Step D. Pull the other Main circuit breaker. The
gear position lights should remain on.
F. If gear position lights are inoperative when either Main circuit breaker is pulled, troubleshoot the
Main electrical bus system.
3. Avionics Bus
A separate avionics bus is provided. This bus is powered through a main bus tie and controlled by the
avionics master switch.
4. Voltage Regulation and Control
WARNING: USE ONLY AN INSULATED SCREWDRIVER TO MAKE THIS ADJUSTMENT.
Voltage regulation and control is provided for both alternators by Lamar solid-state alternator control
units that regulate voltage through control of field voltage and automatic overvoltage protection. The only
adjustment is the voltage adjust potentiometer located under the removable cover plug.
System voltage should be set at 28.5 Vdc maximum. Should an overvoltage condition occur, the unit can
be reset by cycling the alternator switch “OFF’’ and back to “ON’’. The Lamar alternator low output sensor
will activate the alternator output warning lamp on the annunciator panel. If an overvoltage trip occurs,
an alternator is switched off or an abnormally low voltage exists due to a faulty system.
5. Troubleshooting
See Chart 1.
A simple in-aircraft check can be made to determine if an alternator warning light illumination is caused
by either a low voltage or an overvoltage condition. Turn both alternator switches “OFF’’ and then back
“ON’’ again, one at a time. If the alternator annunciator(s) extinguish(es), the system(s) can be
considered normal and can be verified so by the ammeter indication. In any case, either alternator
system output can be read on the appropriate ammeter.
NOTE: Illumination of the alternator warning annunciator at low engine idle speeds, with high electrical
loads on the systems, may occur and are considered normal, especially if the battery is
requiring a heavy charge. Under such conditions, the annunciator will extinguish at an
increased rpm, as the battery charge returns to normal and the electrical load is reduced.
6. Distribution
See Figure 1.
2H19 24-30-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TROUBLESHOOTING (ELECTRICAL SYSTEM)
Zero output indicated on Open field circuit. With the battery switch
ammeter regardless of rpm turned on, check for battery
(refer to alternator system voltage from the airplane’s
test procedure). main bus through the entire
field circuit to the alternator
field terminal. Measure the
voltage from the ground (-)
to the following points (+) in
sequence: bus bar, field
circuit breaker (5A), field
terminals of master switch
voltage regulator and
alternator field terminal.
Interruption of voltage
through any of these points
isolates the faulty
component or wire which
must be replaced. (See
wiring schematic,
Chapter 91.)
Open output circuit. With the battery switch
turned on, check for battery
voltage from the airplane’s
main bus through the entire
output circuit to the
alternator battery post.
Measure voltage from
ground (-) to the following
points (+) in sequence: bus
bar, output current limiter,
ammeter, and alternator
battery post. Interruption of
voltage through any of
these points isolates the
faulty component or wire
which must be replaced.
(See wiring schematic,
Chapter 91.)
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 24-30-00 2H20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Zero output indicated on Open field winding Disconnect field terminal of
ammeter regardless of rpm. in alternator. alternator from field wiring
(continued) and check for continuity
from field terminal to
ground with ohmmeter
(20-100 ohms) depending
on brush contact
resistance.
CAUTION: TURN MAGNETO SWITCH TO OFF BEFORE TURNING PROP.

(Pull propeller slowly by
hand turning alternator
rotor through 360 of travel.)
If resistance is high, check
brushes for spring tension
and excessive wear and
replace if necessary. If
brushes are okay and field
reads open, replace
alternator.
Shunt load resistor 5 amp Replace fuse after
fuse open. continuity check to ground.
Output indicated on Faulty voltage Start engine, turn on load
ammeter does not meet regulator. (ref. alternator test
minimum values specified procedure), set throttle at
in alternator control unit 2300 RPM. Check voltage
test procedure. at buss bar [convenient
check point, remove cigar
lighter and check from
center contact (+) to
ground (-). Voltage should
be 28 volts minimum. If
voltage is below this value,
replace regulator.
2H21 24-30-00 FebPAGE 3

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Output indicated on High resistance connections Check visually for loose
ammeter does not meet in field or output circuit. binding posts at the various
minimum values specified junction points in system,
in alternator control unit alternator battery post, lugs
test procedure. on ammeter, connections at
(continued) voltage regulator, circuit
breaker, etc. (See wiring
schematic, Chapter 91.)
Examine crimped terminal
ends for signs of
deterioration at crimp or
strands of broken wire at
crimp. Tighten any loose
binding posts or replace
bad wire terminals.
Open rectifier. If any of the rectifiers of the
alternator open up
internally, it will result in a
definite limitation on the
current that can be drawn
from the alternator. After
having checked the
previous causes of low
output it can be assumed
that a faulty rectifier exists.
Field circuit breaker trips. Short circuit in field Disconnect field wiring at
circuit. terminal of alternator. Turn
on master switch. If breaker
continues to trip, proceed
to disconnect each leg of
field circuit, working from
the alternator towards the
circuit breaker until breaker
can be reset and will hold.
Replace component or wire
which was isolated as
defective. (See wiring
schematic, Chapter 91.)
PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 24-30-00 2H22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Field circuit breaker trips. Short circuit in field Disconnect field wiring at
(continued) winding of alternator terminal of alternator.
Turn on master switch.
Reset breaker, and if
breaker fails to retrip, this
isolates short circuit to field
of alternator itself. Check
brush holders for shorting
against frame. If there are
no obvious signs of a
physical short circuit at field
terminal or brush holder,
replace alternator.
NOTE: Intermittent short circuit.

Internal short circuiting of
the field can occur at
various positions of the
rotor, therefore, reconnect
field, reset breaker.
CAUTION: TURN MAGNETO SWITCH TO OFF BEFORE

TURNING PROP.
Pull propeller slowly by
hand turning alternator
rotor through 360° of travel.
Observe circuit breaker for
signs of tripping.
Excessive ammeter fluctuation. Excessive resistance Check all connections and
in field circuit. wire terminals in field circuit
for deterioration such as
loose binding posts, broken
wire strands at terminals,
etc. Tighten all connections
and replace faulty
terminals.
2H23 24-30-00 FebPAGE 5

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Excessive ammeter fluctuation. High field circuit If problem persists, jump
(continued) resistance. across the terminals of the
following components one
at a time until the faulty unit
is isolated.
a. Field 5-amp
(alternator circuit
protector).
b. Alternator switch.
c. Overvoltage relay.
Defective voltage Replace voltage regulator.
regulator.
Faulty grounds. Completely clean all
corrosion from grounding
points.
PAGE 6
Feb 28/07 24-30-00 2H24
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Alternator #1 Alternator #2
Master Switch Master Switch
LO BUS VOLTS 15 A 3A 3A
Annunciator Panel Main Bus Non-Essen Bus
Position Lights Windshield Heat Control Map Light
Low Strobe Lights Windshield Heat Power Flap Motor
Voltage Taxi Lights Emergency Fuel Pump Flap Warning
Monitor Ice Lights
Lightning Protection
Left/Right Fuel Pump
Fuel Quantity
Hour Meter
CoPilot Turn Coordinator
Instrument Panel Lights Fuel Flow Cabin Lights
Annunciator Lights Electric Tach Air Conditioner Control
Vent/Defog Blower Engine Gauges Air Conditioner Power
Propeller Heat Engine Monitor
Stall Heat PilotÕs Turn Coordinator
ALT #1 INOP Pitot Heat Landing Gear Indicator Lights
Surface Deice Hydraulic Pump Control
Annunciator Panel Landing Gear Warning Horn Hydraulic Pump Power ALT #2 INOP
Stall Detector Cabin Pressure Dump Annunciator Panel
Fuel Management Engine Start
Voltage
Regulator Voltage
#1 70 A
1A
60 A 60 A 70 A 70 A Regulator
Tie Bus #2
5A 40 A Radio Master 40 A 5 A 80 A
1A
5A Switch
F2
AUX
Shunt +
M
F1
F2
5A 5A
+
AUX
M Shunt
F1
Avionics Bus #1 Avionics Bus #2
5A 5A Alternator #2
DME #1 Bus Tie COM #2
Speaker Amplifier NAV #2
Alternator #1 NAV #1 Headset Amplifier Battery Bus
COM #1 DME #2
RMI #1 ADF #2
Encoder #1 Transponder #2
Transponder #1 Encoder #2 Digital Clock
ADF #1 Marker Beacon Cigar Lighter
Pitch Trim Storm Scope Stereo Player
Compass Radar Forward Baggage Compart. Light
Radar Altimeter Flite Phone Aft Cabin Courtesy Light
Avionics Cooling Blower Global Positoning System Ground Clearance
A339A
A339B A339C
Supplemental
Heat Battery
250 A
35 A
Battery
Switch
External Battery
Power Contactor
Ammeter Contactor
BRT DIM Ammeter To Starter
Volt Meter
External
Power
Receptacle
Bright/Dim Relay
DC Power Distribution, Dual Alternator (Typical)

Figure 1
2I1 24-30-00 FebPAGE 7

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
7. Alternators
Electrical power for the 28 Vdc, negative ground, dual fed split bus electrical system is supplied by two
belt driven, parallel connected 28Vdc: 70-amp Prestolite alternators, No. ALV-8421-LS (S/N’s 4636001
thru 4636131); or, 75-amp Electrosystems alternators, No. ES4039-LS (S/N’s 4636132 and up).
Voltage regulation is provided by a solid state voltage regulator, which automatically monitors and
controls alternator output by controlling the alternator field winding current. Also, an overvoltage control
is provided to shut down alternator output should an overvoltage condition occur. The alternator’s output
can also be shut off manually by individual alternator ON-OFF switches, which interrupts field winding
voltage to the voltage regulator.
CAUTION: DO NOT MANUALLY OPERATE (PULL) THE ALTR1 OR ALTR2 CIRCUIT BREAKER
WHEN THE ENGINE IS RUNNING AND THE ALTERNATOR IS OPERATING PROPERLY.
Over current protection is provided by the 70-amp (S/N’s 4636001 thru 4636131) or, 80-amp (S/N’s
4636132 and up) tie bus ALTR 1 and ALTR 2 circuit breakers. Two ammeters. located on the lower center
section of the instrument panel, are fed from taps an each shunt resistor , and indicate the individual
electrical load of each alternator. Should an overvoltage condition occur in either alternator, its voltage
regulator will shut off the field winding voltage of that alternator, thus overvoltage relays are not required.
When either alternator fails, or is selected OFF, the appropriate ALTERNATOR INOP annunciator light
will illuminate.
A. Alternator Belt Tension
(1) If properly installed, tensioned, and checked periodically, the alternator drive belt will give very
satisfactory service. However, an improperly tensioned belt will wear rapidly and may slip and
reduce alternator output. Consequently, a belt should be checked for proper tension at the time
it is installed, again after 25 hours operation and each 100 hours thereafter, or whenever any
work is performed that would affect belt tension.
(2) Adjust the alternator belt tension as follows:
(a) Adjust the belt to obtain a tension of 45 pounds for a new belt or 23 to 34 lbs for an old
belt.
NOTE: The higher tension specified for a new belt is to compensate for the initial stretch
that takes place as soon as it is operated. These higher tension values should not
be applied to previously used .
(b) Run the engine for a 15 minute period at idle.
(c) Shut down engine and recheck the belt tension. New belt tension should fall back to
desired tension of 23 to 34 lbs. Old belts reinstalled should retain the 23 to 34 lbs tension.
(d) This tension check should be made at every 100 hours or annual inspection, whichever
occurs first.
PAGE 8
Feb 28/07 24-30-00 2I2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B. Alternator Control Units (Voltage Regulators)

The system uses two Lamar B-00382-1 alternator control units (voltage regulators).
(1) Adjusting Voltage Regulator Units
The only adjustment necessary to maintain the alternator system is the adjustment of the
voltage control on the voltage control unit. A voltage of 28.8 Vdc is automatically maintained.
All other adjustments are made at the time of installation and need not be reset.
(2) Bench Tests (Lamar B-00382-1)
CAUTION: IN-AIRCRAFT TESTING WITH ALTERNATOR RUNNING IS NOT
RECOMMENDED. DO NOT BYPASS REGULATOR BUS TO FIELD AS A
MEANS OF CHECKING ALTERNATOR OR OVER VOLTAGE PROTECTION
WITH ALTERNATOR RUNNING.
(a) Set-up
1 Remove unit from aircraft.
2 Set up the following equipment as shown in Figure 2:
Power: Pure dc regulated power supply (A) 28.8V 5A
Adjustable 6-12V power supply (B) 0.05A
Resistors: R1 1
R2 650 fine adjustment
R3 7.2 dummy load 4A
Ammeter: 0-5A dc
Voltmeters: Precision meter between pins 1 and 8;

between pin 3 and power (B) ground;
50 MV precision meter between shunts at pins 6 and 7.
Switch: Between R1 and R2

Indicator: 28V light (Mazda #1829 or equivalent)
3 Set up load resistance as follows:

a Jumper pins 1 and 2.
b Set dummy load resistance for 4A 28.8V (approximately 7.2).
c Remove jumper.
(b) Voltage Regulator Test
1 Turn power off.
2 Mate unit with test connector.
3 Open switch #1.
4 Apply regulated power supply (A). Hold constant @ 28.8 V ± 0.025 V.
NOTE: Power supply should be adequate for load. If fluctuation occurs, assist with
28 V battery to stabilize current.
5 Allow unit a 2 minute warm up.
6 Reset adjustment on alternator control unit for 1.0 A field current.
7 Decrease power supply (A) to approximately 28.6 V until ammeter shows 3 A field
current.
8 Check alternator inoperative indicator by varying power supply (B) to 10.25 ± 0.75 V.
2I3 24-30-00 FebPAGE 9

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Red + (A)
1 28.8 VDC
Lavender
Regulated
-
Orange 7 R1 Switch 1
R2
V
Yellow 6 V Precision Volt
Meter
Grey 4
Dummy Load
Blue 2 A
R3
+
Brown 3 (B)
6-12 VDC
V V Variable
Green 5 -
Black 8
Case
Test
Connection 9
Bench Test of Alternator Control Unit - Lamar #B-00382-1
Figure 2
(c) Equalizer Test

1 Apply voltmeter at pins #5 and #8 (equalizer and ground). Equalizer voltage should
read 5.75 V ± 0.1 V.
NOTE: Equalizer voltage outside 5.65 - 5.85 V limits may still be acceptable
because of meter calibration differences and temperature. If error is several
times the stated 0.1 V tolerance, have the unit rechecked by a fully equipped
test facility.
2 Set R2 for maximum resistance (650 ).
3 Close switch #1.
4 Adjust R2 for 50 MV across R1.
5 Read equalizer voltage.
6 Subtract from reading in step 1. Difference should be 10.0 V ± 0.25 V.
PAGE 10
Feb 28/07 24-30-00 2I4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
+
1
PTT (A)
7 R1 Switch 1
R2
6
V
Blue 2
K1
+
3
Switch 2 (B)
R3
5
Black 8 Case
Overvoltage Test of Alternator Control Unit

Figure 3
(d) Overvoltage Protection Test (refer to Figure 3)

1 Revise connections as follows:
a Disconnect dummy load.
b Add 28 V relay (K1). No other connections should be on pin #2.
c Add a press-to-test (PTT) switch between power supply (A) and pin #1.
d Add resistor R3 and switch #2.
2 Open switches #1 and #2. Set power supply (B) at 11 V.
3 Set power supply (A) at 31.8 V. Depress PTT and hold for 5 seconds. No activation
should occur.
4 Increase power (A) to 32.2 V. Depress PTT. Relay should activate almost instantly.
5 Close switch #2. Increase power to 33.8 V. Depress PTT for 5 seconds. No activation
should occur.
6 Increase power to 34.5 V. Depress PTT. Relay should activate almost instantly.
2I5 24-30-00 Feb

PAGE 11
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
8. Battery (Dry-Charged Lead-Acid - Gill Model G-243) (S/N’s 4636001 thru 4636374)
Service includes the entire battery system consisting of the battery, acid recovery jar, vents, and battery
compartment. These services shall be completed every 50 operating hours or 30 days, whichever occurs
first, and at every 100 hour inspection.
A. Troubleshooting
See Chart 2.
B. Removal
(1) Remove battery access plate from floor of forward baggage compartment.
CAUTION: REMOVE NEGATIVE CABLE FIRST, BEFORE EXPOSING AND LOOSENING
POSITIVE TERMINAL WING NUT, TO AVOID SHORT CIRCUITS AND
ELECTRICAL BURNS.
(2) Pull back rubber battery terminal boots, loosen wing nuts and disconnect battery cables.
(3) Remove vent hose at battery manifold.
(4) Remove battery hold down bolts. Lift battery manifold cover off battery and place cover away
from carpeting etc, due to acid contamination on inside surface.
Battery System Installation

Figure 4
PAGE 12
Feb 28/07 24-30-00 2I6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TROUBLESHOOTING (BATTERY SYSTEM)
Battery installed with Battery charged backwards. Remove battery. Connect
reversed polarity. load, such as landing light
lamp or similar load, and
discharge battery.
Recharge with correct
polarity and test each cell
for signs of damage due to
reversed charging. Reinstall
with corrected polarity.
NOTE: This type of condition can only occur in a case where a discharged battery has been removed
from the airplane and put on a charger with the polarity reversed. This reversal in polarity cannot
occur in the airplane due to any fault in the alternator system.
Battery will not hold charge. Battery worn out. Replace battery.
Standing too long. Remove and recharge
battery if left in unused
airplane one week or more.
Equipment left “ON” Remove and recharge.
accidentally.
Impurities in electrolyte. Replace battery, clean and
recharge acid recovery jar.
Short circuit (ground) Check wiring.
in wiring.
Broken cell partitions. Replace battery, clean and
Battery life is short. Overcharge due to level Maintain electrolyte level.
of electrolyte being below Clean and recharge acid
tops of plates. recovery jar.
Heavy discharge. Replace battery, clean and
Sulfation due to disuse. Replace battery, clean and
Impurities in electrolyte. Replace battery, clean and
Cracked cell. Hold down was loose. Replace battery and
tighten, clean and recharge
acid recovery jar.
Frozen battery. Replace battery, clean and
2I7 24-30-00 PAGE 13

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TROUBLESHOOTING (BATTERY SYSTEM)
Electrolyte runs out Too much water added Drain and keep at proper
of vent plugs. to battery. level. Clean and recharge
battery, vents and acid
recovery jar.
Excessive corrosion Spillage from over- Use care in adding water.
inside container. fillings.
Vent lines leaking or Replace vent lines. Also,
clogged. clean and recharge acid
recovery jar.
Battery freezes. Discharged battery. Replace battery, clean and
Water added and battery Always recharge battery
not charged immediately. at least 1/2 hour when
adding water in freezing
weather.
Leaking cell. Replace battery. Clean and
Battery polarity reversed. Connected backwards on Battery should be slowly
airplane or charger. discharged completely
and then charged
correctly and tested.
Battery consumes Cracked jar (one cell only). Replace battery. Clean and
excessive water. recharge acid recovery jar.
Battery Disconnect Solenoid Open circuit. Repair wiring.
does not operate.
Open-circuited solenoid coil. Replace unit.
Battery Disconnect Solenoid Short-circuited coil. Replace coil.
intermittent operation.
Loose electrical connection. Clean and tighten electrical
connections.
Badly burned points. If points cannot be dressed
down, replace the unit.
PAGE 14
Feb 28/07 24-30-00 2I8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(5) Lift battery out of compartment.

(6) Remove the vent hose that connects through the firewall from the acid recovery jar cover.
(7) Remove the two screws securing acid recovery jar cover to bracket. Slide the acid jar assembly
upward off of the battery hold-down bar. Keep the jar upright in a vertical position.
C. Installation
(1) Keeping the jar upright in a vertical position, slide the acid jar assembly and bracket downward
on to the battery hold-down bar. Secure recovery jar cover to bracket with the two screws
previously removed.
(2) Install the vent hose that connects through the firewall at the acid recovery jar end.
(3) Place the battery into the compartment.
(4) Place battery manifold cover on battery and install battery hold down bolts.
(5) Install vent hose at battery manifold.
(6) Push rubber battery terminal boots back on, tighten wing nuts and connect battery cables.
(7) Install battery access plate to floor of forward baggage compartment.
D. Cleaning
(1) Battery
(a) Remove all accumulated contamination from the battery exterior with a stiff bristle brush.
(Do not use a metal brush or abrasive materials.) Wipe exterior of battery and interior of
manifold, including manifold top cover, with a cloth saturated with a solution of
bicarbonate of soda mixed - one part soda to twenty parts of water. (Check that cell plugs
are tight - do not allow soda solution to enter any cells.)
(b) Wash entire battery with clear water and dry thoroughly.
(c) Wash down the battery support and floor area, hold down supports, connectors and cable
ends with a soda solution followed by clear water. Dry entire area and component parts
thoroughly. Apply fresh acid resistant paint if required.
(2) Acid Recovery Jar and Vent Lines
(a) Visually inspect all vent lines for kinks, cracks, flexibility, and loose connections. Replace
only with special hoses from parts manual. (DO NOT REPLACE WITH ORDINARY
RUBBER HOSE.)
(b) Slowly pour the soda solution into the vent hose, still attached to the firewall fitting, using
a small funnel. The solution will flow out the bottom fuselage vent.
(c) Follow with a final purge of clear water to flush the vent line and then blow dry with low
pressure air. This ensures that the vent line is not kinked or restricted and that it is
neutralized.
(d) Wipe down the lower fuselage area surrounding the vent with soda solution and clear
water. Apply a fresh coat of high quality aircraft wax to entire area.
(e) Unscrew the bottom of the recovery jar and separate from the top. Remove jar pad and
empty jar contents into suitable container for safe disposal.
(f) Thoroughly wash and neutralize the jar, pad, top (including bracket), and the short length
of vent hose still attached to the jar top with a soda solution and a clear water rinse.
(g) Thoroughly dry all components and recharge the jar with 0.75 of bicarbonate of soda.
Place dry jar pad in the jar on top of the soda charge.
(h) Screw jar back together and keep it in a vertical position.
(i) Install in aircraft per preceding installation instructions.
2I9 24-30-00 Feb

PAGE 15
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
E. Charging - (Gill Model G-243)

CAUTION: WEAR EYE PROTECTION WHEN CHARGING A BATTERY - DO NOT TAKE
CHANCES. MAKE SURE THE CHARGING AREA IS WELL VENTILATED. IF
CENTRAL AIR CONDITIONING IS USED, THE BATTERY CHARGING AREA
SHOULD BE VENTED TO THE OUTSIDE AIR TO PREVENT HYDROGEN GASSES
FROM BEING CIRCULATED THROUGHOUT THE BUILDING.
The National Electric Code forbids charging batteries installed in aircraft or within 10 feet of fuel
tank areas. The battery must be removed from the aircraft for charging. Further, an aircraft battery
should not be allowed to deteriorate to the point where safety of flight is jeopardized. The batteries
emergency capacity should be sufficient to power the essential bus for a minimum of thirty minutes.
(1) Remove cell plugs and ensure that vents in plugs are open and that vent valves operate freely.
(2) Check that the electrolyte level in each cell is at the bottom of the split ring.
(3) A hydrometer check of each cell should be accomplished. (See Hydrometer Reading and
Battery Charge, below.)
(4) It is recommended that vent caps be left on the battery while charging. In addition a wet cloth
should be placed over the vent caps within the manifold.
(5) The battery may be charged at any rate, in amperes, not to exceed that point which would
produce bubbling and gassing of the electrolyte or a cell temperature of 115° F in any case.
NOTE: If a cell temperature reaches the 115° F. limit, the charging rate shall be reduced and
the charge completed at 3 amperes or less. DO NOT CHARGE AT A HIGHER RATE
WHEN CELLS ARE GASSING. Refer to Gill Service Manual G.S.M.-682 for alternate
charging methods and service procedures.
CHART 3
SPECIFIC GRAVITY TEMPERATURE CORRECTION
Electrolyte Temperature
°C °F Correction
60 140 1.024
55 130 1.020
49 120 1.016 Add To
43 110 .012 Reading
38 100 .008
33 90 .004
---------27----------------80 ------------------------.000 -------------------------
23 70 -.004
15 60 -.008
10 50 -.012
5 40 -.016 Subtract
-2 30 -.020 From
-7 20 -.024 Reading
-13 10 -.028
-18 0 -.032
-23 -10 -.036
-28 -20 -.040
-35 -30- -.044
PAGE 16
Feb 28/07 24-30-00 2I10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(6) If a constant current (recommended) charge is available, the charge should be started at 3
amperes and reduced in half if and when cells start gassing until fully charged.
(7) As charging occurs, if any cells sputter or flood, the electrolyte level is too high and the excess
must be removed. In any case the electrolyte level shall be adjusted at the end of the charge.
The level will rise due to acid returning to the electrolyte mix, normal gassing, and expansion
due to temperature rise.
(8) Thoroughly clean battery after charging to prevent remaining acid bridges which can form
during charging.
NOTE: Never allow lead acid batteries or tools used on them to be near Ni-Cad batteries and
Ni-Cad battery tools.
F. Hydrometer Reading and Battery Charge
Whenever checking the battery, ascertain that all connections are clean and tight and that the fluid
level is above the baffle plates. If it is necessary to add fluid, fill cell with distilled water to the bottom
of the split ring. After adding water, charge the battery until gassing before taking a hydrometer
reading. Otherwise, the water and electrolyte will not be mixed, giving a false reading. Temperatures
different from the established norm will effect the hydrometer readings. Refer to Chart 3 for the
temperature corrections. Specific gravity values for a fully charged battery are shown in Chart 4.
To adjust low specific gravity, charge the battery (see Charging, above) until it is gassing and until
the specific gravity rises no higher over a 3-hour period. Then remove some electrolyte and replace
with 1.300 specific gravity electrolyte. Repeat this step if, after one hour of charging, the specific
gravity is still too low. DO NOT ADJUST A CELL THAT DOES NOT GAS.
CAUTION: IN THE OPERATION OF THE BATTERY, GASES ARE FORMED WHICH MAY BE
EXPLOSIVE IF IGNITED. NEVER CREATE SPARKS OF ANY KIND OR BRING AN
OPEN FLAME NEAR THE BATTERY. VENTILATE THE BATTERY WHEN CHARGING
TO DISPOSE OF THE GAS GENERATED BY THE BATTERY.
To adjust high specific gravity, charge the battery (see Charging Battery) until it is gassing and until
the specific gravity rises no higher over a 3-hour period. Remove some electrolyte and replace with
distilled water. Repeat this step if, after one hour of charging, the specific gravity is still too high.
CHART 4
ELECTROLYTE TEMPERATURE CORRECTIONS
Electrolyte Temperature Specific Gravity
47° F 1.280 to 1.300
77° F 1.280 to 1.290
107° F 1.260 to 1.280
Temperature change of 30° F changes the reading 0.010.
2I11 24-30-00 Feb

PAGE 17
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 5
DISCHARGE RATES
TELEDYNE (5 HRS.)
Battery Ampere
Type Volts Hours
GILL-G243 24 15.5
G. Discharge
The capacity of a storage battery is measured in units of ampere hours, which is the product of the
electrical current in amperes multiplied by the time in hours. Although current may be obtained after
the end of the time, the voltage of the battery has dropped to a point beyond which it is not very
useful. The ampere hours which may be obtained from a battery are greater for a long low-rate or
intermittent rate discharge than for a short high-rate discharge because the voltage will drop faster
at the higher discharge rate. The maximum permissible rate of discharge is limited only by the
current-carrying ability of the wiring, motor, or other apparatus to which the battery is connected or
by the current-carrying ability of the cell terminals and connectors and not by the plates themselves.
Recommended discharge rates are listed in Chart 5.
H. Temperature Considerations
Operation of storage batteries beyond their ambient temperature or charging voltage limits will
result in excessive cell temperatures leading to electrolyte boiling, rapid deterioration of the cell, and
finally battery failure. The relationship between the maximum charging voltage and the number of
cells in the battery is also significant, since this will determine (for a given ambient temperature and
state of charge) the rate at which energy is absorbed as heat within the battery. The maximum
voltage per cell should not exceed 2.35 - volts, and the maximum temperature should not exceed
115° F.
Low electrolyte temperatures temporarily reduce the battery capacity and the freezing point
depends on the specific gravity. To prevent freeze damage, maintain the specific gravity at a
reasonably high level as indicated by Chart 6.
NOTE: Lead-acid batteries are subject to a constant discharge due to the internal chemical action.
CHART 6
ELECTROLYTE FREEZING POINTS
Freezing Point
Specific Gravity °C °F
1.300 -70 -95
1.275 -62 -80
1.250 -52 -62
1.225 -37 -35
1.200 -26 -16
1.175 -20 -4
1.150 -15 5
1.125 -10 13
1.100 -8 19
PAGE 18
Feb 28/07 24-30-00 2I12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
I. Repairs, Storage, and Service Tips

The internal parts of the battery have been designed to wear at approximately the same rate,
making it uneconomical to replace any of the parts with new ones. Replacing the entire battery is
simpler and cheaper.
Before storing the battery, it should be properly charged, the vent plugs put tightly in place, and the
leads disconnected to prevent use during idle periods. The battery should be charged at intervals
during the idle period. Before returning the battery to service, it should be thoroughly charged. The
battery will be sufficiently charged when, after a 3-hour period, the specific gravity does not rise any
higher with the electrolyte gassing and a charging rate of 1-1/2 amperes.
Long battery life and trouble-free service is obtained from the battery if the following simple tips are
observed:
(1) Keep it clean.
(2) Keep it charged.
(3) Maintain proper electrolyte levels.
(4) Keep specific gravity equal among all cells.
J. Preparing New Dry-Charged Battery for Installation
CAUTION: PRIOR TO INSTALLING A NEW DRY-CHARGED BATTERY, FOLLOW THE
PREPARATION INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FURNISHED WITH THE BATTERY
BY TELEDYNE.
The Teledyne, dry-charged, Model GILL/G-243 Battery shall be stored as received from Teledyne.
Do not remove vent seals, add acid, nor attempt to charge a dry-charged battery until the time
arrives to install the battery into an airplane.
9. Battery (Valve-Regulated Lead-Acid - Gill Model G-250S) (S/N’s 4636375 and up)
Gill valve-regulated lead-acid (VRLA) non-maintainable batteries are fully charged when they leave the
factory. Service includes the entire battery system consisting of the battery and battery compartment.
These services shall be completed every 50 operating hours or 30 days, whichever occurs first, and at
every 100 hour inspection.
A. Troubleshooting
See Chart 2.
B. Removal
(1) Remove battery access plate from floor of forward baggage compartment.
CAUTION: REMOVE NEGATIVE CABLE FIRST, BEFORE EXPOSING AND LOOSENING
POSITIVE TERMINAL WING NUT, TO AVOID SHORT CIRCUITS AND
ELECTRICAL BURNS.
(2) Pull back rubber battery terminal boots, loosen wing nuts and disconnect battery cables.
(3) Remove vent hose at battery manifold.
(4) Remove battery hold down bolts. Lift battery manifold cover off battery and place cover away
from carpeting etc, due to acid contamination on inside surface.
(5) Lift battery out of compartment.
(6) Remove the vent hose that connects through the firewall.
2I13 24-30-00 Feb

PAGE 19
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C. Installation
(1) Install the vent hose that connects through the firewall.
(2) Place the battery into the compartment.
(3) Place battery manifold cover on battery and install battery hold down bolts.
(4) Install vent hose at battery manifold.
(5) Push rubber battery terminal boots back on, tighten wing nuts and connect battery cables.
(6) Install battery access plate to floor of forward baggage compartment.
D. Cleaning
(1) Battery
(a) Remove all accumulated contamination from the battery exterior with a stiff bristle brush.
(Do not use a metal brush or abrasive materials.) Wipe exterior of battery and interior of
manifold, including manifold top cover, with a cloth saturated with a solution of
bicarbonate of soda mixed - one part soda to twenty parts of water. (Check that vent caps
are sealed in place - At no time must these vents caps be removed.)
(b) Wash entire battery with clear water and dry thoroughly.
(c) Wash down the battery support and floor area, hold down supports, connectors and cable
ends with a soda solution followed by clear water. Dry entire area and component parts
thoroughly. Apply fresh acid resistant paint if required.
E. Charging - (Gill Model G-250S)
CAUTION: WEAR EYE PROTECTION WHEN CHARGING A BATTERY - DO NOT TAKE
CHANCES. MAKE SURE THE CHARGING AREA IS WELL VENTILATED. IF
CENTRAL AIR CONDITIONING IS USED, THE BATTERY CHARGING AREA
SHOULD BE VENTED TO THE OUTSIDE AIR TO PREVENT HYDROGEN GASSES
FROM BEING CIRCULATED THROUGHOUT THE BUILDING.
The National Electric Code forbids charging batteries installed in aircraft or within 10 feet of fuel
tank areas. The battery must be removed from the aircraft for charging. Further, an aircraft battery
should not be allowed to deteriorate to the point where safety of flight is jeopardized. The batteries
emergency capacity should be sufficient to power the essential bus for a minimum of thirty minutes.
Check battery voltage and date of manufacture prior to installation. If the open circuit voltage is less
than 25.0 volts, or if 90 days has passed since date of manufacture, the battery should be charged
before placing into service.
(1) If the battery voltage is below 25.0 volts, the battery should be recharged.
(2) Remove the battery from the aircraft and recharge in a well ventilated area. To avoid water loss
and possible overcharge, the manufacturer recommends a constant potential (tapering)
charge.
NOTE: Non-maintainable means that this type of battery cannot be opened to add fluid.
Periodic maintenance is still required in the form of boost charging if the battery
becomes discharged.
(3) CONSTANT POTENTIAL (TAPERING) CHARGE: Charge the battery at 28.2 to 28.6 volts for a
period of 24 hours. Inrush current can be as high as 100 amps, provided voltage does not
exceed as mentioned above.
(4) CONSTANT CURRENT CHARGE: Charge the battery at rate listed (see Chart 7) for a period
of 10 to 13 hours, unless otherwise stated, or until the battery voltage stabilizes for three (3)
consecutive hours, or drops.
PAGE 20
Feb 28/07 24-30-00 2I14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 7
CONSTANT CURRENT CHARGE
TELEDYNE CONSTANT CURRENT CHARGING RATES/CAPACITY 1 HOUR
Battery CHARGE RATES 30 MIN EMERGENCY RATE
Type (AMPS) RATE (AMPS) (AMPS)
GILL-G250S 1.0 23 15.0
10. Battery Capacity Test

A. Remove battery from aircraft.
B. Charge it in compliance with our charging instructions for sealed batteries.
C. Allow battery to stand on open circuit for one (1) hour.
D. Connect fully charged battery to capacity tester that incorporates a load resistance, amp meter,
voltmeter and a time clock (timer).
E. Discharge battery at the 1 hour capacity rate to 1.67 volts per cell (21.0 volts). Note the discharge
time to the end voltage.
The battery is considered airworthy if it meets 80% of the 1 hour capacity rating (minimum of 48 minutes
to the cut off voltage).
If the battery fails to meet the minimum run time, recharge using the constant potential method until
charge current stabilizes (this could take 10 to 24 hours). Allow the battery to stand on open circuit for
one (1) hour after recharging. Repeat the above capacity test. If the failure persists, replace the battery.
If battery is found to be airworthy as noted above, recharge the battery prior to re-installing it in the
aircraft.
2I15 24-30-00 Feb

PAGE 21
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GRIDS 2I16 THRU 2I18

INTENTIONALLY BLANK
PAGE 22
Feb 28/07 24-30-00 2I16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EXTERNAL POWER
Emergency Starting through External Power Receptacle

CAUTION: DO NOT CONNECT EXTERNAL POWER PLUG TO AIRCRAFT’S EXTERNAL POWER
RECEPTACLE WITH A DISCHARGED OR “RUN-DOWN” AIRCRAFT BATTERY, UNLESS
THE AIRCRAFT’S BATTERY MASTER SWITCH IS TURNED “OFF” AND LEFT “OFF”.
A. Place ground power unit on the pilot’s side of the nose in full view of pilot’s window. Upon
connecting ground power to the aircraft, the External Power Contactor will energize immediately,
supplying electrical power to all aircraft electrical buses.
B. With Battery Master Switch left in the “OFF” position, turn “OFF” all unnecessary electrical loads as
in a normal start.
CAUTION: EXERCISE GREAT CARE DISCONNECTING GROUND POWER PLUG.
DISCONNECT THE PLUG ONLY FROM THE PILOT’S SIDE OF THE AIRPLANE.
C. Start engine and move ground power unit well away from aircraft.
D. Turn “ON” Battery Master Switch.
E. Observe Ammeter indicates Alternator electrical power is available.
F. With the alternator on-line, observe charging current on ammeters.
G. Do not take-off until charging current falls below 20 AMPS.
NOTE: The aircraft battery must be removed from the airplane if it is to be charged with a ground
power dc supply.
CHART 1
CAPACITY RATINGS AT DISCHARGE RATES
Battery = Teledyne/Gill G243 (24 Volts)
Capacity Ratings
1 Hour Emergency Cold Cranking
(Amp Hours) (30 minutes) (60 Seconds)
(Amps) (Amp @ 0°F)
10 17 150
Definitions
1 Hour: The ampere hours shown divided by one hour
is the rate of discharge to 1.5-volts per cell.
Emergency: The amperes shown is the rate of discharge
for 30 minutes to a cut-off voltage of 1.75-volts
per cell.
Cold Cranking: The amperes shown in discharge current
used to crank an engine for 30 seconds at 0°
F to 1.2-volts per cell.
2I19 24-40-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 24-40-00 2I20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2I21 24-40-00 FebPAGE 3

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

INTENTIONALLY BLANK
PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 24-40-00 2I22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ELECTRICAL LOAD DISTRIBUTION
1. Emergency Operation
NOTE: All equipment will be operational with only one alternator functioning. To prevent overload with
only one alternator functioning, turn off non-essential equipment and any other equipment
necessary to reduce the load to less than 70 amps (S/N’s 4636001 thru 4636131) or 75 amps
(S/N’s 4636132 and up).
CAUTION: DO NOT MANUALLY OPERATE (PULL) THE ALTR1 OR ALTR2 CIRCUIT BREAKER
WHEN THE ENGINE IS RUNNING AND THE ALTERNATOR IS OPERATING PROPERLY.
A. With engine operating, turn Alternator No. 2 OFF. Check the appropriate ALTERNATOR INOP light
is illuminated.
CAUTION: SHOULD THE LOW BUS VOLTAGE LIGHT ILLUMINATE WHILE ENGAGING
ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT, IMMEDIATELY REDUCE ELECTRICAL LOAD TO LESS
THAN:
-- 70 AMPS in S/N’s 4636001 THRU 4636131, OR
-- 75 AMPS in S/N’s 4636132 AND UP
B. Turn ON essential electrical equipment, one unit at a time. Essential electrical equipment may
consist of:
1. Instrument Panel Lights. 12. Landing Gear Indicator Lights
2. Annunciator Lights 13. Hydraulic Pump Control
3. Landing Gear Warning Horn 14. Hydraulic Pump Power
4. Stall Detector 15. One Communication Transceiver
5. Fuel Management 16. One Navigation receiver.
6. Left and Right Fuel Pumps 17. Speaker Amplifier
7. Fuel Quantity 18. One Transponder
8. Electric Tachometer 19. Compass
9. Engine Gauges 20. Avionics Cooling Fan
10. Engine Monitor 21. Any other equipment that may be
11. Pilots Turn Coordinator essential for flight operations
C. Turn Alternator No. 2 ON; turn Alternator No. 1 OFF. Check to be sure that all equipment that was
supported by the No. 1 Alternator is supported by the No. 2 Alternator.
D. If necessary, the non-essential bus, and it’s related equipment, can be eliminated by pulling the
non-essential 70-amp circuit breaker on the Tie Bus Circuit Breaker panel.
E. Upon completing the foregoing checks, be sure that all electrical switches are OFF and all circuit
breakers have been reset.
2. Electrical Load
See Chart 1.
2J1 24-60-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM LOAD DISTRIBUTION (PIR-VB-1349.)
Component / No. Duty CB Max. Drain

Bus System Electrical Load Units Cycle Amps Amps (28 Vdc)
TIE Master Contactor Relay 1 Cont. N/A .60
TIE Volt/Amp/Pwr Supply 1 Cont. 1.20
Volt / Ammeter
Solid State Meter Inductive 1/2 Cont. N/A N/A
M Vent / Defog Blower Blower Motor 1 Int. 10 7
Relay 1 .35
M Stall Warn. Heat Heating Element 2 Int. 25 16.10
Relay 2 Int. .35
M Heated Windshield Heating Elements 2 Int. 25 HI 20.74/
LO 13.59
M Relay 2 Int.
M Controller and Relay 1 Int. 5 1.40
M Pitot Heat Heating Elements 1 Int. 10 3.2
Relay 1 Int. .07
Propeller Heat
M 3-Blade Heating Elements 3 Int. 20 16
2-Blade 2 Int. 20 10
Timer 1 Int.
Relay 1 Int. .29
M Surface Deice Timer 1 Int. 5 1.85
M Alternator Field 1/2 Voltage Regulator Solid State 2 Cont. 3.0 1.50
M Starter Contactor 1 Int. 5.0 1.47
Motor 1 Int. 185.0
M Annunciator Panel Lamps 1 Int. 3 .46
M Fuel Pump Motor 2 Int. 5 4.0
M Hydraulic Pump Motor 1 Int. 25 26.0
M Relay 1 .35 .35
Control 1 3
M Strobe Light Light 2/3 Int. 5 4.0
M Landing Light Lamp - (250W) 1 Int. 10 9.0
Relay .29 .29
M Taxi Lights Lamps - (50W) 2 Int. 5 1.75
Relay 1
M Position Lights Lamps 2 Cont. 5 1.5
M Wing Inspect. (Ice) Light Lamp 1 Int. 3 2.3
Map Lights Lamps 2 Int. 3 .60
M Instrument Lights Lamps 28 Cont. 5 2.00
M Gear Position Lights Lamps 3 Cont. 3 .24
M Stall and Gear Horn 1 Int. 3 .25
Warning Horn
M Avionics Cooling Blower Motor 1 Cont. 0.50
M Eng. Gauge Cluster (1) Oil Pressure 1 Cont. 3 .30
Oil Temperature
Cylinder Head Temperature
M Cylinder Head Scanner All Cylinder Head Temperatures 1 Cont. 1.5 .25
M CHT/VAC Ind. Cont. 0.25
M MAP/RPM Ind. Cont. 0.25
M Oil Press/Oil Temp Ind. Cont. 0.25
M TIT/ FF Ind. Cont. 0.25
M E. L. Panels Inverter Cont. 0.50
M Electric Flaps Int. 6.00
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 24-60-00 2J2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

M Emergency Fuel Pump Int. 4.50

M Fuel Quantity (L & R) Cont. 0.25
M Ignition Int. 3.50
M Regular Alt. #1 Cont. 0.07
M Regular Alt. #2 Cont. 0.07
M Turn Coordinators Cont. 0.60
NE Cabin Heat Heater 1 Int. 35 Fuse 33.0
NE Relay 1 .35
NE Cabin Lights Lamps 4 Int. 5 .30
NE Air Conditioning Condenser Blower 1 Int. 25 16.00
NE Cabin Fans 2 Int. 15 9.71
NE Control, Clutch, and Relay 1 Int. 5 2.29
NE Avionics Lighting Cont. 1.00
NE Cabin Dump Solenoid Int. 0.29
NE CD Player Cont. 0.20
NE Hourmeter Cont. 0.05
NE Ice Detector Cont. 1.00
NE Inverter Int. 2.70
AVI Transicoil EMIS Quad Digital Indicator (2) 1 Cont. 3 .14
Digital Indicators Enhanced Digital Indicator (3) 1 Cont. 3 .14
AVI Transicoil EMIS Oil Pressure/Oil Temperature 1 Cont. 5 .50
Analog Indicators (4) MAP 1 Cont. 3 .25
RPM 1 Cont. 3 .25
TIT 1 Cont. 3 .25
Fuel Flow 1 Cont. 3 .25
CHT 1 Cont. 3 .25
Fuel Quantity 1 Cont. 5 .50
AVI #1 KX-155A COMM/NAV Cont. 0.06/6.0
AVI #2 KX-155A COMM/NAV Cont. 0.06/6.0
AVI Argus 7000 Cont. 0.54
AVI Avionics #1 Contactor Int. 0.70
AVI Avionics #2 Contactor Int. 0.70
AVI Clock DVR 3001-XT Cont. 0.10
AVI KAS-297 Alt. Alert Cont. 0.70
AVI KCS-55A Compass Cont. 1.60
AVI KEA-130A Encoding Alt. Cont. 0.24
AVI KEA-346 Encoding Alt. Cont. 0.24
AVI KFC-150 Autopilot Int. 8.73
AVI KLN-90B GPS Cont. 1.00
AVI KN-40 Cont. 1.00
AVI KN-63 DME Cont. 0.60
AVI KN-72 Converter Cont. 0.05
AVI KR-87 ADF Cont. 0.45
AVI KRA-10A Radar Altimeter Cont. 0.20
AVI KT-76C Transponder Cont. 0.70
AVI PMA 6000 M-S Cont. 1.00
AVI RDR-2000 Radar Cont. 4.30
AVI SG-465 Cont. 3.20
2J3 24-60-00 FebPAGE 3

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

AVI Vibrator Int. 2.00

AVI WX-1000 Stormscope Cont. 1.00
AVI Yaw Damper Int. 1.80
Notes: (1) S/N’s 4636001 thru 4636020 only.

(2) S/N’s 4636021 thru 4636131 only.
(3) S/N’s 4636132 and up.
(4) S/N’s 4636021 and up.
General: “Bus” Abbreviations: AVI = Avionics, M = Main, NE = Non-Essential, TIE = Tie
Avionics listed above include optional installations.
“# Units” default value is one.
“Duty Cycle” = Intermittent or Continuous.
Annunciator Control bulbs (.04 EA.) are normally OFF.
Windshield Heat Relays and High and Lo are each 50% duty cycle.
Prop Feather engages at engine shutdown.
Rudder Trim is 20% duty cycle.
S-TEC Autopilot draws 0.68 for 50% and 0.90 for 50% when in cruise; and 0.68 during takeoff and landing.
3. Volt / Ammeter
The volt / ammeter combination indicator consists of two ammeters and a volt meter mounted in one
case. The ammeters indicate amperage load on each alternator. The voltmeter indicates total system
voltage. The best troubleshooting approach to determine this instruments condition, is to compare the
readings with a known good meter.
Should rapid and steady state ammeter needle oscillation occur, first thoroughly clean all traces of
corrosion from all grounding points throughout the electrical power distribution system. This is not to be
confused with normal ammeter fluctuations showing changing current flow within the aircraft’s electrical
system. The combined ammeter readings indicates the total current flow, except for the engine starter.
The voltmeter portion of the instrument shows main bus voltage. Should the instrument fail to indicate
correctly, substitute a known good voltmeter before condemning the instrument. Placing a good
voltmeter in parallel with the indicator is the best practice.
PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 24-60-00 2J4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2J5 24-60-00 FebPAGE 5

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GRIDS 2J6 THRU 2J10

INTENTIONALLY BLANK
PAGE 6
Feb 28/07 24-60-00 2J6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER
25
EQUIPMENT /
FURNISHINGS
2J11
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2J12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 25
CHAPTER CHAPTER


2 Feb 28/07
25-10-00 1 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07
5 Feb 28/07
6 Feb 28/07
7 Feb 28/07
8 Feb 28/07
9 Feb 28/07
10 Feb 28/07
25-20-00 1 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07
25-50-00 1 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07
25-60-00 1 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07
5 Feb 28/07
6 Feb 28/07

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 25 - EQUIPMENT / FURNISHINGS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
FLIGHT COMPARTMENT 25-10-00 1 2J17

Pilot’s / Copilot’s Vertically Adjustable Seat
Removal 1 2J17
Installation 1 2J17
Disassembly 1 2J17
Assembly 1 2J17
Lumbar Support 3 2J19
Carpets 6 2J22
Restraint System 7 2J23
Inspection 7 2J23
Inertial Reel Adjustment 7 2J23
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT 25-20-00 1 2K3

Aft Facing Passenger Seats 1 2K3
Removal 1 2K3
Installation 1 2K3
Gas Spring Support 1 2K3
Removal 1 2K3
Installation 1 2K3
Forward Facing Passenger Seats 1 2K3
Removal 1 2K3
Installation 2 2K4
Cabinets 2 2K4
Conference Table 2 2K4
CARGO COMPARTMENTS 25-50-00 1 2K7

Aft Baggage Net 1 2K7
EMERGENCY 25-60-00 1 2K9

Artex 110 Emergency Locator Transmitter 1 2K9
Description 1 2K9
Battery Removal and Installation 1 2K9
Emergency Locator Transmitter Testing 4 2K12

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FLIGHT COMPARTMENT
1. Pilot's / Copilot's Vertically Adjustable Seat

A. Removal
(1) Remove front stops from seat tracks.
(2) Lift lever underneath front lip of seat.
(3) Slide seat off of tracks.
B. Installation
CAUTION: WITH SEAT OCCUPIED AND AT LOWEST VERTICAL POSITION, CHECK SEAT
FOR PROPER ENGAGEMENT OF PINS TO SEAT TRACK.
(1) Lift lever under front lip of seat and slide seat onto tracks.
(2) Install front stops on seat tracks.
C. Disassembly
(1) To remove the armrest from the seat back:
(a) Reach up inside seat and carefully remove spring from armrest pivot bar.
(b) Remove bushing from armrest pivot bar.
(c) Slide armrest and pivot bar assembly from seat back.
(2) To remove the seat back assembly from the seat assembly:
(a) Remove nuts, bolts and washers from upper part of seat back support.
(b) Remove seat back.
(3) To remove seat track plunger cable:
(a) Remove cotter pin, washer and pin that secures cable yoke to track plunger actuating
lever.
(b) Remove the clamps which secure the upper portion of the cable sheath to the bottom of
the seat frame.
(c) Remove the cotter pin, washer and pin that secure the remaining end of the cable to the
plunger actuating arm.
(d) Remove the two clamps which secure the cable sheath end to the mount on the lower
seat frame cross member.
(4) To remove the gas spring cylinder from the seat:
(a) Remove the two bolts and washers that secure the upper end of the gas spring cylinder to
the adapter on the seat frame.
(b) Remove the nut, bolt and washer that secures the lower end of the gas spring cylinder to
the rear seat tube assembly.
D. Assembly
(1) To install the gas spring cylinder in the seat:
(a) Attach the lower end of the gas spring cylinder to the rear seat tube assembly with nut,
bolt and washer.
(b) Attach the upper end of the gas spring cylinder to the adapter on the seat frame with two
bolts and washers.
2J17 25-10-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
89976 AD
Bend end of
spring as shown.
Put free end inside
coils of spring.
VIEW A
Track Plunger
Actuating Lever
Cotter Pin, .50± .00

.05
Washer and
Pin Yoke Cable Yoke
Plunger
Actuating
Arm
Pilot’s / Copilot’s Vertically Adjustable Seats (Typical)

Figure 1
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 25-10-00 2J18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(2) To install the seat track plunger cable:

(a) Attach the cable sheath end to the mount on the lower seat frame cross member with the
two clamps. Ensure that the cable end protrudes .03 (+.00/-.05) inch from the end of the
forward clamp. (See View B of Figure 1)
(b) Attach the lower end of the cable to the plunger actuating arm with the pin, washer and
cotter pin.
(c) Attach the upper end of the cable sheath to the bottom of the seat frame with the clamp.
Ensure that the cable end protrudes .50 (+.00/-.05) inch from the clamp. (See View A of
Figure 1)
(d) Attach the cable yoke to the track plunger actuating lever with the pin, washer and cotter
pin.
(3) To install the seat back assembly:
(a) Position seat back in place.
(b) Secure seat back with bolts, nuts and washers inserted in upper part of hinge.
(4) To attach the armrest to the seat back:
(a) Slide armrest and pivot bar assembly into seat back.
(b) Place bushing into pivot bar.
(c) Attach spring to armrest pivot bar.
E. Rigging
After installation of the seat track plunger cable, verify that when the handle assembly is in the
normal (Hands Off) position the seat plunger should be full down and locked into the seat track.
When the handle assembly is operated, the seat plungers must retract sufficiently into the seat
assembly to allow fore and aft movement of the seat along the seat tracks.
2. Lumbar Support (Refer to Figure 2.)
A. Description
The pilot and co-pilot seats incorporate a Lumbar support feature. The installation consists of an
inflatable bladder attached to the seat back filler and a inflation bulb located under and on the
inboard side of each pilot and co-pilot seat.
B. To remove the Lumbar bladder for repair or replacement:
(1) Remove seat from airplane.
(2) Loosen velcro securing seat back filler cover.
(3) Remove only enough of seat back filer cover to expose lumbar bladder.
NOTE: Inflation tube may be removed before or after bladder is removed from seat back filler.
Tube is not glued to nipple attachment; it can be removed by carefully pulling on tube.
(4) Remove inflation tube from bladder.
CAUTION: DO NOT USE A CHEMICAL SOLVENT TO REMOVE BLADDER. SOLVENT MAY
DAMAGE SEAT BACK FILLER
CAUTION: TO AVOID OR MINIMIZE DAMAGE TO SEAT BACK FILLER DURING
REMOVAL, USE ONE HAND TO RETAIN SEAT BACK FILLER IN PLACE,
WHILE GENTLY REMOVING BLADDER WITH OTHER HAND.
(5) Starting at either right or left edge of bladder, carefully and slowly pull bladder and pad
assembly from seat back filler.
2J19 25-10-00 FebPAGE 3

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C. To assemble pad and bladder:

CAUTION: CARE MUST BE TAKEN WHEN USING THE APPROVED SOLVENTS AS THEY
HAVE A LOW FLASH POINT. SOLVENTS SHOULD NOT BE USED IN CLOSE
AREAS WHERE APPLICATOR CANNOT GET SUFFICIENT FRESH AIR FOR
BREATHING.
NOTE: Acetone cleans well but evaporates so fast that it is difficult to wipe dry before solvent
evaporates.
(1) Surfaces to be joined shall be clean, dry, and oil free. Abrade rubber or plastic surfaces lightly
with Scotch BriteTM or fine sand paper and then clean with solvent again.
(a) Surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned by wiping with a clean cloth wet with solvent
followed by wiping dry with a clean cloth before the solvent evaporates. The cleaning
operation shall be repeated using a new clean cloth until all soil and grease is removed as
evidence by a clean cloth after wiping. Clean cloths and clean solvent shall be used in the
cleaning operation.
(b) APPROVED SOLVENTS: Acetone 193-035
Citra-Safe 279-112
Safe Care 193-051
Dupont 2319S/Plastic Prep. 279-081
Isopropyl Alcohol 179-918
(2) Apply a layer of 3M Scotch Grip 2210 or Delta Laboratories Contact Adhesive B-10161 (P/N
179-853) cement to smooth side of bladder pad.
(3) Apply a layer of 3M Scotch Grip 2210 or Delta Laboratories Contact Adhesive B-10161 (P/N
179-853) cement to back side of bladder (side away from inflation tube nipple).
(4) Allow the adhesive to dry for 15 minutes minimum, 60 minutes maximum.
NOTE: If the adhesive is allowed to dry more than 60 minutes, another coat may be applied to
one of the surfaces, and then bonded after 15 minutes minimum. Both surface do not
need to be tacky to achieve a bond.
(5) Attach bladder pad to bladder.
(a) Assemble materials when adhesive is dry to touch, but tacky under slight pressure.
Position the surfaces to be joined carefully before allowing adhesive to adhesive contact.
NOTE: Repositioning after contact will not be possible without destroying the bond. If this
occurs, the adhesive shall be removed and the process repeated.
(b) Press firmly into position over the entire area of the bond.
NOTE: While cement does not set immediately, there is no need to wait before attaching
bladder and pad to seat back filler.
PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 25-10-00 2J20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Lumbar Seat Bladder Installation

Figure 2
2J21 25-10-00 FebPAGE 5

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
D. To install Lumbar bladder

CAUTION: CARE MUST BE TAKEN WHEN USING THE APPROVED SOLVENTS AS THEY
HAVE A LOW FLASH POINT. SOLVENTS SHOULD NOT BE USED IN CLOSE
AREAS WHERE APPLICATOR CANNOT GET SUFFICIENT FRESH AIR FOR
BREATHING.
NOTE: Acetone cleans well but evaporates so fast that it is difficult to wipe dry before solvent
evaporates.
(1) Surfaces to be joined shall be clean, dry, and oil free. Abrade rubber or plastic surfaces lightly
with Scotch BriteTM or fine sand paper and then clean with solvent again.
(a) Surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned by wiping with a clean cloth wet with solvent
followed by wiping dry with a clean cloth before the solvent evaporates. The cleaning
operation shall be repeated using a new clean cloth until all soil and grease is removed as
evidence by a clean cloth after wiping. Clean cloths and clean solvent shall be used in the
cleaning operation.
(b) APPROVED SOLVENTS: Acetone 193-035
Citra-Safe 279-112
Safe Care 193-051
Dupont 2319S/Plastic Prep. 279-081
Isopropyl Alcohol 179-918
(2) Apply a layer of 3M Scotch Grip 2210 or Delta Laboratories contact adhesive B-10161 (P/N
179-853) cement to rough side of bladder pad.
(3) Apply a layer of 3M Scotch Grip 2210 or Delta Laboratories contact adhesive B-10161 (P/N
179-853) cement to seat back filler where bladder is to be located.
(4) Allow the adhesive to dry for 15 minutes minimum, 60 minutes maximum.
NOTE: If the adhesive is allowed to dry more than 60 minutes, another coat may be applied to
one of the surfaces, and then bonded after 15 minutes minimum. Both surface do not
need to be tacky to achieve a bond.
(5) Assemble materials when adhesive is dry to touch, but tacky under slight pressure. Position
the surfaces to be joined carefully before allowing adhesive to adhesive contact.
NOTE: Repositioning after contact will not be possible without destroying the bond. If this
occurs, the adhesive shall be removed and the process repeated.
(6) Press firmly into position over the entire area of the bond.
(7) Install seat back filler cover and secure velcro fastenings.
(8) Install seat in airplane.
3. Carpets
The carpets are individually fastened to the floor with Velcro fasteners and adhesive (Hysol EA9309 NA).
PAGE 6
Feb 28/07 25-10-00 2J22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4. Restraint System
A. Inspection
(1) In S/N’s 4636001 thru 4636247 only:
(a) Shoulder Harness
1 Inspect ends and attachment points for condition and security.
2 Inspect harness web material for condition and wear over its entire length.
Particularly look for wear and fraying where harness web passes in and out of inertial
reel. If excessively worn, replace.
(b) Lap Belt
1 Inspect ends and attachment points for condition and security.
2 Inspect harness web material for condition and wear over its entire length.
Particularly look for wear and fraying where harness web passes in and out of
adjustable buckle end. If excessively worn, replace.
3 Inspect shoulder harness keeper nylon bushing. If excessively worn or missing,
replacement of that half of the lap belt is required.
(2) In S/N’s 4636248 and up:
Integrated Shoulder Harness / Lap Belt (Schroth)
(a) Inspect ends and attachment points for condition and security.
(b) Inspect harness web material for condition and wear over its entire length. Particularly
look for wear and fraying where harness web passes in and out of inertial reel and in and
out of the adjusting buckle. If excessively worn, replace.
(c) Check inertia reel mechanism by pulling sharply on strap. Verify reel will lock in place
under sudden stress.
B. Inertial Reel Adjustment
The inertial reel locking feature prevents the shoulder strap from extending and holds occupant in
place. For normal movement strap will extend and retract as required. If required, adust inertial reel
as follows:
(1) Allow harness to wind up on reel as much as possible.
(2) On end of reel, pry off plastic cover over spring. Make sure spring does not come out of plastic
cover. Set aside plastic cover.
(3) Unwind the harness completely. Measure and mark the harness 24 inches from the reel center.
(4) Wind harness onto reel until the 24 inch mark is reached. Hold reel and place cap with spring
over reel shaft end.
(5) Align slot in shaft with spring tang. Wind spring 6 1/2 turns and snap plastic cover into holes in
reel end shaft.
(6) Release harness and allow harness to wind up. Extend harness several times to check reel for
smooth operation.
(7) Hold inertia reel with reel completely wound and inertia mechanism end up. Pry off plastic
cover over mechanism and set reel aside.
(8) Install nut in plastic cover so that stud in cover is flush with nut surface. Position cover over reel
and snap cover into place. Extend harness several times to ensure reel operates smoothly.
2J23 25-10-00 FebPAGE 7

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 8
Feb 28/07 25-10-00 2J24
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2K1 25-10-00 FebPAGE 9

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 10
Feb 28/07 25-10-00 2K2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
1. Aft Facing Passenger Seats (See Figure 1.)

A. Removal
(1) Disconnect the upper end of the gas spring support from the bracket on the outboard side of
the seat back.
(2) Remove the bolts and washers that secure the seat pedestal to the floor.
(3) Remove the seat.
B. Installation
(1) Position seat on floor.
(2) Secure seat pedestal to floor with bolts and washers.
(3) Connect the upper end of the gas spring support to the bracket on the outboard side of the
seat back.
C. Gas Spring Support
WARNING: DO NOT ATTEMPT TO DISASSEMBLE THE GAS SPRING.
(1) Removal
(a) Disconnect the upper end of the gas spring support from the bracket on the outboard side
of the seat back.
(b) Disconnect the lower end of the gas spring support from its lower bracket by removing the
cotter pins, washers (if any) and pins from the gas spring support’s attach stop.
(c) Remove the gas spring support.
(2) Installation
(a) Place the gas spring support in position.
(b) Connect the lower end of the gas spring to its lower bracket with the washers (if any), pins
and cotter pins.
(c) Connect the upper end of the gas spring to its upper support (on the outboard side of the
seat back) with the bolt, washer, nut and cotter pin.
2. Forward Facing Passenger Seats (Not Shown)
A. Removal
(1) Remove the seat bottom filler assembly from the seat bottom pan assembly to gain access into
the interior of the pan.
(2) Disconnect the cable from the forward end of the seat back actuator and remove the seat back
actuator from the channel as follows:
(a) Remove the forward bolt from the channel and remove the seat back release cover from
the channel.
(b) Remove the two cotter pins from the retaining pins in the stop assembly and remove the
retaining pins from the stop assembly.
(c) Remove the nut, bolt and washers from the aft end of the seat back actuator. Lift the
actuator from the channel.
(3) Remove the bolts that hold the channel, seat back supports and armrest supports to the
bottom of the seat pan. Lift the seat back with its supports from the seat assembly.
2K3 25-20-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(4) The armrest may be removed from the side of the pan assembly by removing the nuts, bolts
and washers that attach the armrest to the armrest support/side of the pan assembly.
(5) Remove the pan assembly from the floor.
B. Installation
(1) Position the pan assembly on the floor.
(2) Attach the armrest (if previously removed) to the side of the pan with the nuts, bolts and
washers.
(3) Secure the channel to the outboard side of the pan bottom/floor with the aft three bolts and
washers.
(4) Secure the armrest support and the seat back assembly support to the inboard side of the pan
bottom with the bolts and washers. Install the forward inboard bolt.
(5) Install the seat back actuator into the channel as follows:
(a) Position the seat back actuator into the channel.
(b) Slide the bolt into the aft holes in the channel, placing on the bolt (in order): washer (if
required), bushing, aft fitting of seat back actuator, roller, washer (if required) and nut.
(c) Insert a pin in each side of the stop assembly and secure them with cotter pins.
(d) Secure the seat back release cover to the forward portion of the channel with the nut and
bolt.
(e) Attach the cable assembly to the forward end of the seat back actuator.
(6) Attach the seat back/seat back support to the bottom of the pan assembly and aft portion of
channel.
(7) Reinstall the seat bottom filler assembly on the seat bottom pan assembly.
3. Cabinets (Optional)
The two cabinets are located between the crew seats and the forward passenger seats. They are
secured to the floor by four bolts and washers (torque to 20-25 in. lbs.).
4. Conference Table (Optional)
The conference table is located between the center and aft passenger seats on the right side panel just
below window level opposite the cabin door. The table assembly is secured by 3 screws and washers.
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 25-20-00 2K4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Passenger Seats - Aft Facing

Figure 1
2K5 25-20-00 FebPAGE 3

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 25-20-00 2K6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CARGO COMPARTMENTS
Aft Baggage Net

The lower edge of the aft baggage net is secured to the F.S. 233.87 frame by four screws. The upper
edge of the baggage net is secured to two stud assemblies (one on either side of the interior). The studs
are located slightly aft of the shoulder harness inertia reel for the aft seat.
In the stowed position, the net may be rolled and left on the baggage floor at the base of the aft seat
backs.
2K7 25-50-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 25-50-00 2K8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EMERGENCY
1. Artex 110 Emergency Locator Transmitter

A. Description
The Artex ELT-110 transmits on 121.5 mHz and 243.0 mHz, and is designed to meet or exceed the
requirements of TSO C91a and FAR Part 91. Electrical power for the ELT transmissions is totally
supplied by its own self-contained battery. The battery must be replaced if the transmitter has been
used in an emergency situation or if accumulated test time exceeds one hour, or no later than the
replacement date marked on the transmitter label, whichever comes first.
The Artex 110 cannot be accidentally activated by dropping the unit, handling it roughly, or during
shipping. However, when properly mounted, and locked into its mounting tray, the ELT will activate
in a crash, regardless of the cockpit remote switch and ELT switch position. The normal position of
the ELT switch is in the down or OFF position. The normal position of the remote cockpit switch is in
down or ARM position
Whenever the ELT is activated, a red light located just above the remote cockpit switch will blink to
alert the pilot or maintenance personnel. Should the ELT be activated accidentally, it must be reset.
To reset:
(1) Position the remote cockpit switch to ON, then immediately reposition it to ARM, or;
(2) Position the switch on the ELT to ON, then immediately reposition it to OFF.
B. Battery Removal and Installation (Refer to Figure 1)
(1) Disconnect and remove positive cable from battery.
(2) Remove ELT from the airplane by:
(a) Loosening the two screws on the front of the mounting tray and pull mounting tray cap off.
(b) Disconnecting coax (antenna) cable.
(c) Disconnecting the Molex cable from the ELT unit.
(d) Remove unit from airplane.
(3) Remove the four screws on the bottom of the ELT securing the battery pack.
(4) Disconnect battery pack connector from main unit.
(5) Remove battery pack from unit.
(6) Securely plug in new battery pack connector to main unit.
(7) Immediately reset unit by positioning unit switch to ON, then to OFF.
(8) Fit new battery pack into place. Ensure all gaskets are properly aligned.
(9) Replace the four screws. Dress wires away from standoffs to avoid pinching wires between
standoffs and the battery pack.
(10) Install unit into mounting tray:
(a) Connect molex and coax cables to ELT unit.
(b) Install mounting tray cap and secure to front of mounting tray with the two screws.
(11) Install positive cable to battery.
(12) Test transmitter.
2K9 25-60-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
MOLEX
CONNECTOR
3 6 9 12
2 5 8 11
SIDE VIEW 1 4 7 10
ON
MOUNTING BATTERY
OF F
HOLES COVER
SCREWS
FRONT
VIEW
BOTTOM VIEW END

CAP
ELT ANTENNA ACCESS
ELT ACCESS COVER AFT PRESSURE BULKHEAD
Artex 110 ELT

Figure 1
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 25-60-00 2K10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
AFT
PRESSURE COCKPIT
BULKHEAD PANEL
ARTEX
SWITCH
ELT 110-4
P203 P401 P301 J501

WH WH
LIGHT 1 1 1 8
WH/BLU WH/BLU
RESET 1 3 3 3 5
WH/ORG WH/ORG
RESET 2 6 6 6 2
WH/GRN WH/GRN
EXTERNAL ON 7 7 7 7
WH/RED WH/RED
20B GROUND 11 2 2 6
G-SWITCH LOOP 5 22
G-SWITCH LOOP 8
1A TO ELT
SW
+28 VDC 3 20R
PWR
GROUND 9 20B
Artex 110 ELT Wiring Schematic

Figure 2
2K11 25-60-00 FebPAGE 3

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C. Emergency Locator Transmitter Testing

The transmitter operates on the emergency frequencies of 121.5 and 243.0 MHz; both of these
frequencies are monitored by the various FAA installations. Before performing any operational test
of the ELT, the following precautions should be observed:
CAUTION: TESTING OF AN ELT SHOULD BE CONDUCTED IN A SCREEN ROOM OR METAL
ENCLOSURE TO ENSURE THAT ELECTROMAGNETIC ENERGY IS NOT
RADIATED DURING TESTING. IF A SHIELDED ENCLOSURE IS NOT AVAILABLE,
TESTING MAY BE PERFORMED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING
PROCEDURES:
(1) Test should be no longer than three audio sweeps.
(2) Test should be conducted only within the time period made up of the first five minutes after any
hour.
(3) If the operational tests must be made at a time not included within the first five minutes after
the hour, the test should be coordinated with the closest FAA Tower or Flight Service Station.
CAUTION: CONSULT FAA ADVISORY CIRCULAR AC 20-81 FOR DETAILED
INFORMATION CONCERNING UNSHIELDED TESTING.
(4) Turn the airplane master switch ON.
(5) Tune airplane communications receiver to 121.5 mHz. Check that aircraft battery and radio
master switches are ON.
(6) Position ELT cockpit switch to ON. The ELT should immediately begin signaling and the panel
light should immediately come ON. Although the light may illuminate after a few seconds,
failure of the light to immediately come ON indicates trouble with the G-Switch circuit, pins 5
and 8 on tray connector, and that the unit is not working properly. Repairs should be done only
by a licensed aviation radio repair shop.
PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 25-60-00 2K12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2K13 25-60-00 FebPAGE 5

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 6
Feb 28/07 25-60-00 2K14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER
26
FIRE PROTECTION
2K15
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2K16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 26
CHAPTER CHAPTER


2 Feb 28/07
26-20-00 1 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07
2K17 26 - LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES PAGE 1

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 26 - LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES 2K18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 26 - FIRE PROTECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
EXTINGUISHING 26-20-00 1 2K21

Portable Fire Extinguisher 1 2K21
2K19 26 - CONTENTS FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 26 - CONTENTS 2K20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EXTINGUISHING
WARNING: AFTER DISCHARGE OF EXTINGUISHER AVOID EXPOSURE TO SMOKE, VAPORS AND

OTHER BY-PRODUCTS OF FIRE. DO NOT INCINERATE EXTINGUISHER.
CAUTION: EXTINGUISHER IS A PRESSURE VESSEL. PROTECT FROM CORROSIVE
CONDITIONS. IF THERE IS ANY CORROSION OR DAMAGE, EXTINGUISHER SHOULD
BE CAREFULLY EMPTIED AND DISCARDED. USE ONLY AS DIRECTED.
Portable Fire Extinguisher
A. Description
A portable, disposable, Class 2B:C fire extinguisher (Model No. A600) is installed as standard
equipment. Containing 1.2 lbs. (550 grams) of Halon 1211/1301 blend, the extinguisher is located
either in the top of the right-hand pyramid cabinet (if installed) or on the floor just aft of the spar
carry thru and behind the co-pilot’s seat (see Figure 1). When floor-mounted, the extinguisher is
secured by a quick release bracket.
To operate the extinguisher, remove it from the quick-release bracket, hold it upright in either hand
by the handgrip, with the spray nozzle pointing forward. Remove the safety pin, direct the nozzle
towards the base of the fire source, depress the lever. Maximum extinguishing effect is obtained if
the fire fighter uses side to side motion and keeps moving in towards the base of the fire source as
it is extinguished. Releasing the lever closes a secondary seal inside the operating head. This
interrupts the flow of extinguishant, thus retaining part of the charge, for dealing with a flash back or
re-ignition should they occur, without waste or leakage. A partly or totally discharged extinguisher
should be replaced immediately after use.
B. Inspection
Disposable type fire extinguishers should be maintained and inspected in accordance with the
nameplate instructions.
(1) Monthly
Inspect monthly or more frequently. Ensure nozzle is not obstructed and safety seal is intact.
Inspection is a "quick check" that an extinguisher is available and will operate. It is intended to
give reasonable assurance that the extinguisher is fully charged and operable. This is done by
seeing that it is in its designated place, that it has not been actuated (discharged) or tampered
with, and that there is no obvious physical damage or condition to prevent operation.
Determine fullness by weighing or "hefting."
(2) 100 Hour / Annual
Each 100 hours or annually, whichever comes first, weigh the extinguisher. Replace and return
to manufacturer if gross weight is below the minimum specified on the nameplate.
2K21 26-20-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FS
152.00
FIRE EXTINGUISHER
LOCATED INSIDE
REFRESHMENT CENTER
FWD
A B
CABINET FOAM GROMMET
FWD
FIRE EXTINGUISHER
A600
CABINET DOOR
A B
FOAM
GROMMET
CABINET
VIEW A-A VIEW B-B

Fire Extinguisher Locator
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 26-20-00 2K22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FS
151.00
FWD
FIRE EXTINGUISHER BRACKET ACCESS PANEL

MOUNTED ON FLOOR
BL
0.0
Fire Extinguisher Locator

2K23 26-20-00 FebPAGE 3

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

INTENTIONALLY BLANK
PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 26-20-00 2K24
CARD 3 OF 9
PA-46-350P
(S/N’s 4636001 AND UP)

3A1
Published by

2926 Piper Drive
U.S.A.
Member
General Aviation
3A2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
are as follows:
ORG950712 June 19, 1996 All

PR980101 January 1, 1998 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6
CR981223 December 23, 1998 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6
PR000201 February 1, 2000 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6
PR010515 May 15, 2001 1
CR050730 July 30, 2005 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8
PR060207 February 7, 2006 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8
CR070228* February 28, 2007 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 and 9

02/28/07.
manual.

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 1
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTRODUCTION
CHAPTER CHAPTER


2 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07
5 Feb 28/07
6 Feb 28/07
7 Feb 28/07
8 Feb 28/07
9 Feb 28/07
10 Feb 28/07
11 Feb 28/07
12 Feb 28/07
13 Feb 28/07
14 Feb 28/07
15 Feb 28/07
16 Feb 28/07
Index 1 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07
5 Feb 28/07
6 Feb 28/07
7 Feb 28/07
8 Feb 28/07
9 Feb 28/07
10 Feb 28/07

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTRODUCTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION
General 1 3A9
Effectivity 2 3A10
Pagination 3 3A11
Indexing 3 3A11
INDEX
Index 1 3B1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTRODUCTION

(5-20-00).
2. General
airplane.
correspondence.

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. Effectivity
1995 4636001 thru 4636020 2004 4636349 thru 4636363

1996 4636021 thru 4636076 2005 4636364 thru 4636374
1997 4636077 thru 4636131 2006 4636375 thru 4636399
1998 4636132 thru 4636186 2007 4636400 and up
1999 4636187 thru 4636247
2000 4636248 thru 4636313
2002 4636299, and
4636314 thru 4636338
2003 4636339 thru 4636348

Example:
46 36 001

MODEL CODE

fuel system.
PIPER.
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6. Pagination
with Page 1 (i.e. - 28-40-00, Page 1).
different page.
Example.
9. Indexing
apply.

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Wylie, Texas 75098
P.O. Box 1404
(3) ALTERNATOR:
Airport Complex
P. O. Box 273
(4) AUTOFLIGHT:
Olathe, Kansas 66061-1950 PH: (940) 325-9406
PAGE 4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(5) BATTERY:
(6) BRAKES:
1160 Center Road
Avon, Ohio 44011
(330) 374-3743
FAX: (330) 374-2290
Black Standard
Pneumatic De-Icer
Installation,
Maintenance and
10 Ammon Drive FAX: - (603) 669-0931
or,
55 Old Bedford Road
Lincoln, MA 01773

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

14405 Keil Road NE
(10) ENGINE:
43 Magnolia Ave. #4
20 New King Street
711 Taylor Street
Elyria, Ohio 44036
2600 S. Custer
Wichita, Kansas
(See Brakes, above)
or,
4520 Hampton Rd. FAX: (336) 766-9040
Clemmons, NC 27012
PAGE 6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

2600 Skypark Drive
(18) MAGNETOS:
7575 Baymeadows Way
Olathe, KS 66062
(20) OXYGEN SYSTEM:
2225 Erie Street
Torrance, CA 90504

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Piqua, OH 45356-2634
Propeller
Composite Blade
Propeller Owner’s
Aluminum Blade
Inspection, Repair,
P/N 006-05332-0001
2275 Stanley Ave. FAX: (937) 229-8531
Dayton, Ohio 45404
(26) STARTER:
or,
Granbury, TX 76048
(27) TURBOCHARGER:
Torrance, CA 90505
PAGE 8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(28) VACUUM PUMP:


Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
00 General
10 Time Limits
00 General
10 Jacking

20 Leveling
00 General
10 Towing
20 Taxiing
10 Parking
20 Mooring

12 SERVICING 1I3
00 General
10 Replenishing

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
00 General
20 Painting
00 General
20 Distribution
40 Heating
50 Cooling
22 AUTOFLIGHT 2F11
10 Autopilot
00 General
00 General
30 DC Generation
40 External Power
60 Emergency
20 Extinguishing
00 General
10 Aileron and Tab
20 Rudder and Tab
30 Elevator and Tab
50 Flaps
60 Speedbrakes
PAGE 12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
28 FUEL 3F9
00 General
10 Storage
20 Distribution
40 Indicating
00 General
10 Main
00 General
10 Airfoil
30 Pitot and Static
00 General
50 Steering
33 LIGHTS 4G5
40 Exterior
34 NAVIGATION 5C1
00 General
35 OXYGEN 6C1
10 Crew
20 Passenger

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
37 VACUUM 6C15
00 General
10 Distribution
20 Indicating

51 STRUCTURES 6F1
00 General
70 Repairs
52 DOORS 6G13
10 Passenger/Crew
20 Emergency Exit
30 Cargo
55 STABILIZERS 6H13
00 General
20 Elevator
40 Rudder
56 WINDOWS 6I19
00 General
20 Cabin
30 Door
57 WINGS 6K5
40 Attach Fittings
50 Flight Surfaces
61 PROPELLERS 7C1
20 Controlling
00 General
PAGE 14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
71 POWER PLANT 7D5
00 General
10 Cowling
20 Mounts
70 Engine Drains
10 Distribution
30 Indicating
74 IGNITION 7F5

20 Distribution
10 Power Control
10 Power
20 Temperature
79 OIL 7J3
20 Distribution
30 Indicating
80 STARTING 7J15
10 Cranking
81 TURBINES 7K9
10 Charts


Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

1E23
Ailerons
Balancing: 6L9
Control Column
Installation: 3C24
Control System
Aileron - Rudder
Interconnect: 3D7
Control Cables: 3D2
Installation: 3D3
Wiring: 4C8 4F6
Corrosion Control
Control Wheel C
Wing: 6L3
Installation: 3C21
Installation: 6L7
Tab: 3D5
2D22
Compressor: 2E22
Dipstick: 2E23
Oil Level: 2F1
2E22
Slip Torque: 2F1
Servicing: 2D23
Ambient Temperature
Indication: 2E14
Stand: 2E7
3B1 INDEX FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 INDEX 3B2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

OAT: 9I13 2H19 7J11
3B3 INDEX FebPAGE 3

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Flaps
G Inspection
Warning 6I11
1K5 System: 6C9
PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 INDEX 3B4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Forward: 4H1
3B5 INDEX FebPAGE 5

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
P Propeller Rudder
Pagination: A11
7C11 Control System
Parking: 1G15
Piper
Repair: 7C11 3D13
Pitch Servo: 2G12
Rings: 3K10
Measuring: 3K3
5C11
Installation: 5C12
Pitot Head: 5C18
3K7 Seats
Test: 5C11
Placards: 1G23
Exterior: 1H1
Interior: 1H9
Components: 3I11
R System: 3J9
Limits: 3J4
PAGE 6
Feb 28/07 INDEX 3B6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

3B7 INDEX FebPAGE 7

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Filter: 6D3 Wing
Vertical Fin: 6I11
Y
Yaw Servo: 2G10
W
A11
Weather Radar: 5F1
Weighing: 1F15
Wheels
Bearing Cup: 4F4
Repairs: 4F3
PAGE 8
Feb 28/07 INDEX 3B8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3B9 INDEX FebPAGE 9

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

INTENTIONALLY BLANK
PAGE 10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER
27
FLIGHT CONTROLS
3C1
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3C2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 27
CHAPTER CHAPTER
27-List of 1 Feb 28/07 27-30-00 1 Feb 28/07

3 Feb 28/07
2 Feb 28/07 5 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07 6 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07 7 Feb 28/07
8 Feb 28/07
27-00-00 1 Feb 28/07 9 Feb 28/07
2 Feb 28/07 10 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07 11 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07 12 Feb 28/07
5 Feb 28/07 13 Feb 28/07
6 Feb 28/07 14 Feb 28/07
7 Feb 28/07 15 Feb 28/07
8 Feb 28/07 16 Feb 28/07
9 Feb 28/07
10 Feb 28/07 27-50-00 1 Feb 28/07
2 Feb 28/07
27-10-00 1 Feb 28/07 3 Feb 28/07
2 Feb 28/07 4 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07 5 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07 6 Feb 28/07
5 Feb 28/07 7 Feb 28/07
6 Feb 28/07 8 Feb 28/07
7 Feb 28/07 9 Feb 28/07
8 Feb 28/07 10 Feb 28/07
9 Feb 28/07 11 Feb 28/07
10 Feb 28/07 12 Feb 28/07
11 Feb 28/07 13 Feb 28/07
12 Feb 28/07 14 Feb 28/07
13 Feb 28/07
14 Feb 28/07 27-60-00 1 Feb 28/07
2 Feb 28/07
27-20-00 1 Feb 28/07 3 Feb 28/07
2 Feb 28/07 4 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07 5 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07 6 Feb 28/07
5 Feb 28/07 7 Feb 28/07
6 Feb 28/07 8 Feb 28/07
7 Feb 28/07
8 Feb 28/07
9 Feb 28/07
10 Feb 28/07

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 27 - FLIGHT CONTROLS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
GENERAL 27-00-00 1 3C9

Description and Operation 1 3C9
Standard Practices and Procedures 1 3C9
Control Cable Inspection 3 3C11
Special Tools 7 3C15
Fin Type Control Cable Air Seals 8 3C16
AILERON AND TAB 27-10-00 1 3C19

Control Wheel 1 3C19
Control Column 4 3C22
Aileron Control Cables 9 3D3
Removal 9 3D3
Installation 10 3D4
Rigging and Adjustment 11 3D5
Aileron Tab 11 3D5
Aileron - Rudder Interconnect 12 3D6
RUDDER AND TAB 27-20-00 1 3D9

Rudder Pedal Assembly 2 3D10
Rudder Controls 2 3D10
Removal 2 3D10
Installation 2 3D10
Rudder Trim Controls 6 3D14
Removal 6 3D14
Installation 6 3D14
ELEVATOR AND TAB 27-30-00 1 3D19

Elevator Torque Tube Bearing Changes 2 3D20
Elevator Controls 2 3D20
Removal 2 3D20
Installation 3 3D21
Elevator Trim Controls 6 3E1
Trim Wheel and Cables 6 3E1
Removal 6 3E1
Installation 6 3E1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ELEVATOR CONTROLS (continued) 27-30-00

Elevator Trim Controls (continued)
Elevator Trim Actuator 7 3E2
Removal 7 3E2
Installation 7 3E2
Disassembly 8 3E4
Assembly 8 3E4
Elevator Trim Tab Push Rod Corrosion Control 8 3E4
Rigging and Adjustment 10 3E5
Stall Warning System 11 3E6
Description and Operation 11 3E6
Lift Detector Assembly 11 3E6
Removal 11 3E6
Installation 11 3E6
Dual Warning Unit (Horn) 11 3E6
Removal 11 3E6
Installation 11 3E6
Stall Warning Functional Test 11 3E6
Force Applicator Kit Test 12 3E7
Flap Switch Input Test 13 3E8
Stall Warning Flight Test Procedure 14 3E9
FLAPS 27-50-00 1 3E11

Flap Drive System 1 3E11
Troubleshooting 1 3E11
Flap Controls 3 3E13
Removal 3 3E13
Installation 7 3E17
Flap Motor-Actuator 10 3E20
Removal 10 3E20
Flap System Rigging 11 3E21
Flap System Adjustment 12 3E22
Flap Position Indicator and Flap Warning System Functional Test 12 3E22
Flap Bellcrank Distortion Inspection 13 3E23
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
SPEEDBRAKES 27-60-00 1 3F1

Description and Operation 1 3F1
Inspections 2 3F2
50 Hour 2 3F2
Annual 2 3F2
SpeedBrake Cartridges 2 3F2
Removal 2 3F2
Installation 2 3F2
Asymmetric Logic Switching 4 3F4
SpeedBrake Switch 4 3F4
SpeedBrake Annunciator 4 3F4
Testing 4 3F4

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GENERAL
1. Description and Operation

The airplane is controlled in flight by the use of three primary control surfaces, consisting of ailerons,
elevator and rudder. Operation of these controls is through movement of the dual control wheels and
rudder pedals. On the forward end of each control wheel is a quadrant assembly to which the aileron
control cables are fastened. Also connected to the control wheel push-pull tubes are interconnect arms
to the elevator torque tube located behind the instrument panel. Mounted on this torque tube are sectors
to which the elevator control cables are fastened; thus the forward and aft movement of the control
wheels in turn moves the torque tube and sectors thus transmitting movement thru the control cables to
the elevator.
The rudder controls are driven from dual rudder pedals through torque tubes which have dual sectors
connected and control cables from these sectors to the rudder sector located in the aircraft tail section.
Provisions for elevator and rudder trim are provided by adjustable trim mechanisms. The trim controls
and indicators are in the pedestal located on the instrument panel. Elevator trim is through cables routed
to the elevator trim screw located in the tail cone which drives dual actuators to the trim tab. The rudder
trim is controlled by a trim wheel and screw assembly connected to a bungee assembly connected to the
rudder torque tube behind the instrument panel.
The ailerons and rudder are interconnected through a spring system which is activated only when
controls are out of harmony. In normal coordinated flight it is inactive.
2. Standard Practices and Procedures
Tips for the removal, installation and rigging of the various assemblies:
A. It is recommended, though not always necessary, to level and place the airplane on jacks during
rigging and adjustment.
B. Remove turnbuckle barrels from cable ends before withdrawing the cables through the structures.
C. Tie a cord to the cable end before withdrawing the cable through the structures to facilitate
installation of cable.
D. When referring to marking cable end, etc., before disconnecting, use a felt tip marking pen.
E. Assemble and adjust the turnbuckles so that each terminal is screwed an approximately equal
distance into the barrel. Do not turn the terminals in such a manner that will put a permanent “twist”
into the cables.
F. Cable tensions should be taken with the appropriate control surface in its neutral position.
G. After completion of each adjustment, check the turnbuckles to be sure not more than three terminal
threads are visible outside the barrel. Install the locking clips, and check for proper installation by
trying to remove the clips using fingers only. Both locking clips may be installed in opposite holes.
Locking clips which have been installed and removed must be scrapped and not reused.
Turnbuckles may be safetied in accordance with Advisory Circular 43.13-1, latest revision.
H. When pushrods or rod ends are provided with an inspection hole, the screw must be screwed in far
enough to pass the inspection hole. This can be determined visually or by feel, inserting a piece of
wire into the inspection hole. If no hole is provided, there must be a minimum of .375 of an inch
thread engagement.
I. When installing rod end jamnuts, refer to 20-00-00, Figure 2, for proper installation method.
3C9 27-00-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
J. After completion of adjustments, each jam nut must be tightened securely.

NOTE: Cable rigging tensions specified must be corrected to ambient temperature in the area
where the tension is being checked, using Chart 1. On new airplanes, it is suggested that
cables initially be tensioned 25 to 30 percent over nominal tension, then loosened to the
“High Side” of the tolerance. This will aid in maintaining specified tension after flight testing.
K. Torque all nuts in the flight control system (including nose wheel steering), refer to Recommended
Nut Torques Chart in Chapter 91.
L. Check all cable ball ends for proper seating in retainers after setting cable tension.
CHART 1
CABLE TENSION vs. AMBIENT TEMPERATURE
120
110
Temperature, Degrees Fahrenheit (˚F)
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
-10 -8 -6 -4 -2 0 2 4 6 8 10
Subtract Add
Rigging Load Correction, Pounds
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 27-00-00 3C10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. Control Cable Inspection

Aircraft control cable systems are subject to a variety of environmental conditions and forms of
deterioration that, with time, may be easy to recognize as wire/strand breakage or the not-so-readily
visible types of wear, corrosion, and/or distortion. The following data may help in detecting the presence
of these conditions:
A. Cable Damage
Critical areas for wire breakage are sections of the cable which pass through fairleads and around
pulleys. To inspect each section which passes over a pulley or through a fairlead, remove cable from
aircraft to the extent necessary to expose that particular section. Examine cables for broken wires
by passing a cloth along length of cable. This will clean the cable for a visual inspection, and detect
broken wires, if the cloth snags on cable. When snags are found, closely examine cable to
determine full extent of damage.
The absence of snags is not positive evidence that broken wires do not exist. Figure 1A shows a
cable with broken wires that were not detected by wiping, but were found during a visual inspection.
The damage became readily apparent (Figure 1B) when the cable was removed and bent using the
techniques depicted in Figure 1C.
Control Cable Inspection

Figure 1
3C11 27-00-00 FebPAGE 3

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
External Cable Patterns

Figure 2
B. External Wear Patterns

Wear will normally extend along cable equal to the distance cable moves at that location. Wear may
occur on one side of the cable only or on its entire circumference. Replace flexible and non-flexible
cables when individual wires in each strand appear to blend together (outer wires worn 40-50
percent) as depicted in Figure 2.
C. Internal Cable Wear
As wear is taking place on the exterior surface of a cable, the same condition is taking place
internally, particularly in the sections of the cable which pass over pulleys and quadrants. This
condition, shown in Figure 3, is not easily detected unless the strands of the cable are separated.
Wear of this type is a result of the relative motion between inner wire surfaces. Under certain
conditions the rate of this type wear can be greater than that occurring on the surface.
PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 27-00-00 3C12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Internal Cable Patterns

Figure 3
Pulley Wear Patterns

Figure 4
3C13 27-00-00 FebPAGE 5

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
D. Corrosion
Carefully examine any cable for corrosion that has a broken wire in a section not in contact with
wear producing airframe components such as pulleys, fairleads, etc. It may be necessary to remove
and bend the cable to properly inspect it for internal strand corrosion as this condition is usually not
evident on the outer surface of the cable. Replace cable segments if internal strand rust or
corrosion is found.
Areas especially conducive to cable corrosion are battery compartments, lavatories, wheel wells,
etc., where concentrations of corrosive fumes, vapors, and liquids can accumulate.
NOTE: Check all exposed sections of cable for corrosion after a cleaning and/or metal-brightening
operation has been accomplished in that area.
E. Cable Maintenance
CAUTION: TO AVOID REMOVAL OF CORROSION-PREVENTATIVE COMPOUNDS AND
CABLE INTERNAL LUBRICANT, DO NOT USE VAPOR DEGREASING, STEAM
CLEANING, METHYLETHYLKETONE (MEK) OR OTHER SOLVENTS.
CAUTION: DO NOT OIL CONTROL CABLES.
Frequent inspections and preservation measures such as rust prevention treatments for bare cable
areas will help to extend cable service life. Where cables pass through fairleads, pressure seals, or
over pulleys, remove accumulated heavy coatings of corrosion prevention compound. Provide
corrosion protection for these cable sections by lubricating as specified in the Lubrication Chart,
12-20-00.
F. Cable Fittings
(1) 100 Hour Standard Inspection
Check swaged terminal reference marks for any indication of cable slippage within fitting.
Inspect fitting assembly for distortion and/or broken strands at the terminal. Check that all
bearings and swivel fittings (bolted or pinned) pivot freely to prevent binding and subsequent
failure. Check turnbuckles for proper thread exposure and broken or missing safety wires/clips.
Pay particular attention to corrosion and “pitting” on cable terminals, turnbuckles and cable
fittings. Any corrosion or pitting found requires replacement of the corroded fitting and/or cable.
(2) 100 Hour Special Inspection
For airplanes 15 years old or older, using a 10X magnifier, visually inspect the entire surface of
each cable terminal, turnbuckle, or other cable fitting for corrosion or cracking. Inspect under
safety wire or clips wrapped around the cable or fitting. Any evidence of corrosion or cracking,
however minute, is cause for replacement. A logbook entry documenting the replacement of a
cable terminal, turnbuckle, or other cable fitting relieves the inspection requirement for that
fitting only, until such time as that fitting has been in service for 15 years.
G. Pulleys
Inspect pulleys for roughness, sharp edges, and presence of foreign material embedded in the
grooves. Examine pulley bearings to assure proper lubrication, smooth rotation, freedom from flat
spots, dirt, and paint spray. Periodically rotate pulleys, which turn through a small arc, to provide a
new bearing surface for the cable. Maintain pulley alignment to prevent the cable from riding on
flanges and chafing against guards, covers, or adjacent structure. Check all pulley brackets and
guards for damage, alignment, and security.
PAGE 6
Feb 28/07 27-00-00 3C14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
H. Pulley Wear Patterns

Various cable system malfunctions may be detected by analyzing pulley conditions. These include
such discrepancies as too much tension, misalignment, pulley bearing problems, and size
mismatches between cables and pulleys. Examples of these conditions are shown in Figure 4.
4. Special Tools
These tools are used at the factory and are recommended where the following rigging and/or alignment
procedures specify “use a suitable tool.” Order them through any Piper Dealer.
Tool (Tool Number) Piper P/N
Rudder Pedal Neutral Alignment Tool (HF 622724) 762-151
Elevator / Elevator Trim Travel Tool (HF 689259) 762-144
Nose Wheel Centering (i.e. - Neutral) Tool (HF 622722) 762-147
Aileron and Flap Travel Tool - Left Wing (CKJ 622719) 762-149
Aileron and Flap Travel Tool - Right Wing (CKJ 622720) 762-150
Rudder Travel Tool (TL 622721) 762-153
Control Wheel Neutral Tool (HF 622725) N/A
3C15 27-00-00 FebPAGE 7

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
5. Fin Type Control Cable Air Seals (Refer to Figure 5.)

This airplane is equipped with ten fin type control cable air seals. Six seals (one for each control cable
going to the empennage) are located on the aft pressure bulkhead. Two seals are located in each wing
root for the aileron cables.
A. Drawing Cables Through
It is not necessary to completely remove the seal from the bulkhead in order to draw a cable
turnbuckle through the seal.
To draw a cable turnbuckle through the seal.
(1) Remove the three seal clips (per seal).
(2) Grease the cable and turnbuckle with MIL-G-21164 grease.
(3) Slowly pull the cable through the seal.
B. Removal
(1) Remove the three seal clips (per seal).
(2) Compress the seal and pull it from the hole in the bulkhead.
(3) Remove the seal from the cable.
C. Installation
(1) Fill the cable air seal with MIL-G-21164 grease.
(2) Apply MIL-G-21164 grease to the full travel of the cable section that passes through the seal
when the control is actuated.
(3) Apply a light coat of MIL-G-21164 on the external small end and tapered section of the seal for
ease of insertion.
(4) Place the seal on the cable, on the non-pressurized side of the bulkhead with the small end of
the seal pointing towards the bulkhead.
(5) Insert the seal in the bulkhead hole so that the bulkhead sheet is entirely within the seal
retaining groove.
(6) Install the proper retaining rings on the seal, two on the small end and one on the large end.
Cable
Retaining
Groove
Pressurized Side
Restraining Seal
Rings
Fin Type Control Cable Air Seal

Figure 5
PAGE 8
Feb 28/07 27-00-00 3C16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3C17 27-00-00 FebPAGE 9

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 10
Feb 28/07 27-00-00 3C18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
AILERON AND TAB
1. Troubleshooting
See Chart 1.
2. Control Wheel
A. S/N’s 4636001 thru 4636020 only.
NOTE: In these airplanes, the control wheel and tube can be removed as a unit, see Control
Column, S/N’s 4636001 thru 4636020, below. Disassembly of the control wheel from the
tube is not normally required.
(1) Removal
(a) Remove two screws from bottom of control wheel and remove cover/pad assembly to gain
access to locknut.
(b) Remove control wheel attachment bolt, spacer, washer, and locknut. Note build up to
facilitate reinstallation.
(c) Slide control wheel off of tube.
(d) If not already done, disconnect control wheel switches wiring harness.
(2) Installation
(a) Connect control wheel switches wiring harness.
(b) Slide control wheel onto tube.
(c) Position and secure control wheel attachment bolt, spacer, washer, and locknut.
(d) Position cover/pad assembly and secure with two screws from bottom of control wheel.
B. S/N’s 4636021 thru 4636131 only.
(1) Removal
(a) Remove two screws from bottom of control wheel and remove cover/pad assembly to gain
access to locknut.
(b) Remove control wheel attachment bolt, spacer, washer, and locknut. Note build up to
facilitate reinstallation.
(d) If not already done, disconnect control wheel switches wiring harness.
(2) Installation
(a) Connect control wheel switches wiring harness.
(b) Slide control wheel onto tube.
(c) Position and secure control wheel attachment bolt, spacer, washer, and locknut.
(d) Position cover/pad assembly and secure with two screws from bottom of control wheel.
3C19 27-10-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 1
TROUBLESHOOTING AILERON CONTROL SYSTEM

Lost motion between Cable tension too low. Adjust cable tension.
control wheel and aileron.
Linkage loose or worn. Check linkage and tighten
or replace.
Broken pulley. Replace pulley.
Cables not in place on Install cables correctly.
pulleys. Check cable guards.
Resistance to control System not lubricated Lubricate system.
wheel rotation. properly.
Cable tension too high. Adjust cable tension.
Control column horizontal Adjust cable tension.
cable improperly adjusted.
Pulleys binding or rubbing. Replace binding pulleys
and/or provide clearance
between pulleys and
brackets.
Bent aileron and/or hinge. Repair or replace aileron
and/or hinge.
Cables crossed or routed Check routing of control
incorrectly. cables.
Control wheels not Incorrect control column Re-rig control column.
synchronized. rigging.
Control wheels not Incorrect rigging of Re-rig aileron system.
horizontal when ailerons aileron system.
are neutral.
Incorrect aileron travel. Aileron stops not adjusted Adjust stops.
properly.
Correct aileron travel Incorrect rigging of Re-rig controls.
cannot be obtained by aileron cables, and/or
adjusting stops. control wheel.
Control wheel stops Incorrect rigging between Re-rig controls.
before control surfaces control wheel and control
reach full travel. cables.
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 27-10-00 3C20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Control Wheel Installation

Figure 1
3C21 27-10-00 FebPAGE 3

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C. S/N’s 4636132 and up. (See Figure 1.)

The retainer clip (P/N 104687-002) and MS24693-S40 screws (2 ea.) are factory installed in S/N’s
4636345 and up. S/N’s 4636132 thru 4636344 must individually procure and retrofit the retainer clip
and screws.
(1) Removal
(a) Remove two (2) screws and retainer clip.
(b) Remove control wheel attachment screw and spacer.
(d) Disconnect control wheel switches wiring harness.
(2) Installation
(a) Degrease aft end of tube and inside of control wheel using acetone or naptha. Allow to
dry.
(b) Degrease control wheel attachment screw, the spacer, and the nutplate (inside the tube)
using acetone or naptha. Allow to dry.
(c) Prime inside of control wheel with Loctite 7649 (Piper P/N 279-073). Allow to dry.
(d) Connect control wheel switches wiring harness.
(e) Install control wheel onto tube using Loctite 271 (Piper P/N 279-128). Take care to ensure
screw hole in control wheel aligns with screw hole in tube.
NOTE: This step must be accomplished promptly due to short cure time.
(f) Prime threads of control wheel attachment screw with Loctite 7649 (Piper P/N 279-073).
Allow to dry.
(g) Install control wheel attachment screw (with spacer) into nutplate using Loctite 271 (Piper
P/N 279-128).
NOTE: This step must be accomplished promptly due to short cure time.
(h) Position retainer clip to capture spacer and control wheel attachment screw. Secure with
screws (2), being careful not to over tighten the screws and damage the logo medallion.
3. Control Column (See Figure 3.)
A. S/N’s 4636001 thru 4636020 only.
(1) Removal
(a) Control wheel and tube:
1 Remove the four cap screws securing the tube and control wheel to the guide
assembly. Note the relation of the tube to the guide.
2 Pull the wheel and tube out from the instrument panel.
3 If not already done, disconnect control wheel switches wiring harness.
(b) Forward control column assembly:
CAUTION: LOOSEN BALANCE CABLES BEFORE REMOVING CONTROL COLUMN,
TO PREVENT STRUCTURAL DAMAGE.
1 Block (see Figure 2) the aileron primary cables at the pulleys mounted on the
pressure bulkhead (F.S. 100.00) prior to loosening the balance cable between the
control wheels.
2 Loosen the clamps securing the protective tube over the control wheel balance cable
turnbuckle. Slide the tube to one side and loosen the turnbuckle to relieve tension on
the cables.
PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 27-10-00 3C22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Cable Blocking Methods

Figure 2
3 Remove the screws securing the cable retainers, both primary and balance, to the
aileron quadrant at the forward end of the control columns.
4 Remove the nut and bolt securing the arms to the elevator torque tube behind the
instrument panel.
5 Disconnect the control wheel switches electrical harness (if installed).
6 Remove the bolt, washers, and nut securing the control column tube to the quadrant
shaft and separate the tube from the shaft. Make a note of washer buildup for
reinstallation.
NOTE: The control column stop assy is fitted over the tube, secured by the same
bolt, and will be removed with the tube.
7 The control column can now be removed from under the instrument panel.
(2) Installation
(a) Forward control column assembly:
NOTE: First, ensure that the nut attaching control column rod to mount on forward end of
control column is tightened to a torque of 40 to 45 inch-pounds.
1 Position the forward portion of the control column assembly in place behind the face
of the instrument panel.
2 Ensuring the control column stop assembly is in place over the forward end of the
control column tube, slide the tube over the quadrant shaft. Secure the control
column tube and control column stop assembly to the quadrant shaft with bolt,
washers, and nut.
3C23 27-10-00 FebPAGE 5

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Control Column Installation

Figure 3
PAGE 6
Feb 28/07 27-10-00 3C24
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3 Attach the arms on the control column to the arm on the elevator torque tube. (The
bolt beads should point outboard.)
4 Reconnect the control wheel switches electrical harness (if installed.)
5 Attach the primary and control wheel balance cables to the aileron quadrant at the
forward end of the control column assembly and secure each cable end retainer (i.e.
- lockplate) with a screw (see note below). Safety the cable end retainer screws with
MS20995-C32 safety wire.
NOTE: As of early 2006, the original MS35265-42 fillister head screw has been
replaced by a higher strength MS24674-8 (P/N 520-036) socket head screw.
In earlier airplanes, anytime the cable end retainer screws are removed, if
the original fillister head screws are still installed, they must be replaced with
the socket head screws upon reassembly. Additionally, when using the
MS24674-8 (P/N 520-036) socket head screws, torque to 12 to 15 in.-lbs.
6 Remove the aileron primary cable blocks from the pulleys at F.S. 100.00.
7 Rig the aileron control system in accordance with instructions given in this chapter.
Ensure that turnbuckles are safetied with locking clips and that protective tube is
installed over turnbuckle on the control wheel balance cable.
(b) Control wheel and tube:
1 Connect the control wheel switches wiring harness.
2 Slide the wheel and tube assembly into the instrument panel.
NOTE: If bearing on instrument panel is loose when inserting wheel and tube
assembly, use LOC-498-50 or LOC-495-50 Super Bond adhesive to bond
bearing onto instrument panel.
3 Secure the tube and control wheel to the guide assembly with the four cap screws.
Safety the screws.
4 Rig the aileron control system in accordance with instructions given in this chapter.
(c) Check the system for proper operation and freedom from binding.
B. S/N’s 4636021 and up.
(1) Removal
(a) Control wheel:
Remove control wheel as described for the appropriate serial number range under Control
Wheel, above.
(b) Forward control column assembly:
CAUTION: LOOSEN BALANCE CABLES BEFORE REMOVING CONTROL COLUMN,
TO PREVENT STRUCTURAL DAMAGE.
1 Block (see Figure 2) the aileron primary cables at the pulleys mounted on the
pressure bulkhead (F.S. 100.00) prior to loosening the balance cable between the
control wheels.
2 Loosen the clamps securing the protective tube over the control wheel balance cable
turnbuckle. Slide the tube to one side and loosen the turnbuckle to relieve tension on
the cables.
3 Remove the screws securing the cable retainers, both primary and balance, to the
aileron quadrant at the forward end of the control columns.
4 Remove the nut and bolt securing the arms to the elevator torque tube behind the
instrument panel.
5 Disconnect the control wheel switches electrical harness (if installed).
3D1 27-10-00 FebPAGE 7

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6 Remove the bolt, washers, and nut securing the control column tube to the quadrant
shaft and separate the tube from the shaft. Make a note of washer buildup for
reinstallation.
NOTE: The control column stop assy is fitted over the tube, secured by the same
bolt, and will be removed with the tube.
7 The control column can now be removed by lifting the forward end and sliding the
assembly forward until the tube clears the instrument panel.
(2) Installation
(a) Forward column assembly:
NOTE: Check bearing on instrument panel for security. If it is loose, use LOC-498-50 or
LOC-495-50 Super Bond adhesive to bond bearing onto instrument panel.
1 Place the control column assembly under and behind the instrument panel, keeping
the forward end raised until the aft end of the tube can be inserted into the bearing in
the instrument panel. Slide the assembly aft and lower the forward end to its installed
position.
2 Ensuring the control column stop assembly is in place over the forward end of the
control column tube, slide the tube over the quadrant shaft. Secure the control
column tube and control column stop assembly to the quadrant shaft with bolt,
washers, and nut.
3 Attach the arms on the control column to the arm on the elevator torque tube. (The
bolt beads should point outboard.)
4 Reconnect the control wheel switches electrical harness (if installed.)
5 Attach the primary and control wheel balance cables to the aileron quadrant at the
forward end of the control column assembly and secure each cable end retainer (i.e.
- lockplate) with a screw (see note below). Safety the cable end retainer screws with
MS20995-C32 safety wire.
NOTE: As of early 2006, the original MS35265-42 fillister head screw has been
replaced by a higher strength MS24674-8 (P/N 520-036) socket head screw.
In earlier airplanes, anytime the cable end retainer screws are removed, if
the original fillister head screws are still installed, they must be replaced with
the socket head screws upon reassembly. Additionally, when using the
MS24674-8 (P/N 520-036) socket head screws, torque to 12 to 15 in.-lbs.
6 Remove the aileron primary cable blocks from the pulleys at F.S. 100.00.
(b) Control wheel:
Install control wheel as described for the appropriate serial number range under Control
Wheel, above.
(c) Rig the aileron control system in accordance with instructions given in this chapter.
Ensure that turnbuckles are safetied with locking clips and that protective tube is installed
over turnbuckle on the control wheel balance cable.
(d) Check the system for proper operation and freedom from binding.
3. Aileron Control Cables (See Figure 4.)
A. Removal
(1) For removal of any control cables in the fuselage or wings, first determine which cables are to
be removed and then proceed with the appropriate set of instructions which follow.
(2) To remove either right or left primary control cables that are located in the fuselage, the
following procedures may be used.
PAGE 8
Feb 28/07 27-10-00 3D2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(a) Remove access panels from the cabin floor at fuselage station 171.43. This will allow you
access to either turnbuckle.
(b) Separate the primary control cable at the turnbuckles.
(c) Remove the access panels from the cockpit floor and then remove pulley cable guards
from pulleys located in front of the pressure bulkhead.
(d) Disconnect the primary cables from the control column quadrant assemblies.
(e) Draw the cables back through the floor.
(3) To remove the primary control cable in either wing, proceed as follows:
(a) Remove the access panel from the cabin floor at fuselage station 171.43.
(b) Separate the primary cable at the turnbuckle within the fuselage and disconnect the
opposite end at the sector out in the wing located aft of the rear spar at wing station
175.498.
(c) Remove the cable guards at the pulleys located along the aft side of the wing rear spar.
(d) Remove the control cable from the fuselage by removing the retaining rings on the fin
type air seal and pulling the cable from the fuselage.
Aileron Controls
Figure 4
3D3 27-10-00 FebPAGE 9

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(4) Either balance cable may be removed by the following procedure:

(a) Remove the access panels from the cabin floor.
(b) Separate the balance cables at the turnbuckle located below the right side of the cabin
floor at F.S. 171.43.
(c) Disconnect the balance cable from the sector in the wing located at wing station 175.498
along the aft side of the rear spar.
(d) Remove the cable guards at the pulleys along the wing rear spar.
(e) Remove the control cable from the fuselage by removing the retaining rings on the fin
type air seal and pulling the cable from the fuselage.
B. Installation
(1) The installation of either the right or left primary control cable, located in the fuselage may be
accomplished as follows:
(a) Draw the cable through the floor, and around the pulleys at the forward pressure
bulkhead.
(b) Connect the cable end to the quadrant assembly at the forward end of the control column
and secure the cable end retainer (i.e. - lockplate) with a screw (see note below). Safety
the cable end retainer screw with MS20995-C32 safety wire.
NOTE: As of early 2006, the original MS35265-42 fillister head screw has been replaced
by a higher strength MS24674-8 (P/N 520-036) socket head screw. In earlier
airplanes, anytime the cable end retainer screws are removed, if the original
fillister head screws are still installed, they must be replaced with the socket head
screws upon reassembly. Additionally, when using the MS24674-8 (P/N 520-036)
socket head screws, torque to 12 to 15 in.-lbs.
(c) Ensure that the cable is properly placed around the pulley and install cable guards.
(d) Route cable around the pulley at fuselage station 171.43 and install cable guard.
(e) Connect cable turnbuckle to primary cable end from wing, and ensure proper rigging of
system.
(f) Install all access panels removed.
(2) The primary control cable in either wing may be installed by the following procedure:
NOTE: Make sure that fairlead P/N 89637-003 attaching nuts and washers are installed
against the aft wing spar just outboard of flap actuator push rod cutout, not on fairlead.
(a) Draw the central cable along the wing rear spar, ensuring proper routing around the
pulleys.
(b) Connect the end of the primary cable to the aileron sector at wing station 175.498 and
secure the cable end retainer (i.e. - lockplate) with a screw (see note below). Safety the
cable end retainer screw with MS20995-C32 safety wire.
(c) Install the fin type cable air seal on the cable and install the seal in the bulkhead.
(d) Route the cable through the fuselage.
PAGE 10
Feb 28/07 27-10-00 3D4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(e) Connect the turnbuckle to the primary cable within the fuselage, and ensure proper
rigging of system.
(f) Install all access panels removed.
(3) Either balance cable may be installed by the following procedure:
(a) Connect the cable end to the sector in the wing at wing station 175.498 and secure the
cable end retainer (i.e. - lockplate) with a screw (see note below). Safety the cable end
retainer screw with MS20995-C32 safety wire.
(b) Route the cable along the rear spar ensuring its proper routing through the pulleys.
(c) Route the cable through the fuselage and then place the retainer rings on the seal. (Refer
to Figure 5, 27-00-00.)
(d) Connect the balance cable turnbuckle ends together and rig the ailerons as required.
Check complete system for operation, see Caution under Rigging and Adjustment.
(e) Install all access panels removed.
C. Rigging and Adjustment (PIR-PPS50056-2. Rev. P.)
(1) Lock the control wheels together in the aileron neutral position using a suitable tool.
(2) Lock the ailerons in neutral position using a suitable contour fixture at the inboard ends of the
ailerons. Neutral position is defined by wing loft contour at this location.
(3) Adjust the aileron control cables to a tension of 30 ± 5 pounds.
(4) Remove the locking fixtures. Aileron neutral position should be maintained at 0 + 1, - 0 degree
with the control wheels in neutral.
(5) Use the pilot’s control wheel to move the ailerons and adjust the aileron travels at the primary
stops (at the aileron drive sectors on the wing spars) to give the ailerons their 18 ± 1 degree up
and down movement. Total freeplay measured at the aileron inboard trailing edge shall not
exceed .120 inches.
(6) Use the pilot’s control wheel to hold the ailerons firmly against the primary stops. Adjust the
secondary aileron stops (on the forward pressure bulkhead) to maintain a cushion (gap) of
0.09 ± 0.03 inch in each direction.
CAUTION: VERIFY FREE AND CORRECT MOVEMENT OF AILERONS. WHILE IT WOULD

SEEM SELF-EVIDENT, FIELD EXPERIENCE HAS SHOWN THAT THIS CHECK
IS FREQUENTLY MISINTERPRETED OR NOT PERFORMED AT ALL.
ACCORDINGLY, UPON COMPLETION OF AILERON RIGGING AND
ADJUSTMENT, VERIFY THAT THE RIGHT AILERON MOVES UP AND THE
LEFT AILERON MOVES DOWN WHEN THE CONTROL WHEEL IS TURNED
RIGHT; AND THAT THE LEFT AILERON MOVES UP AND THE RIGHT AILERON
MOVES DOWN WHEN THE CONTROL WHEEL IS TURNED LEFT.
(7) Check system for proper operation.
4. Aileron Tab (PIR-PPS50056-2. Rev. P.)
A fixed trim tab is located on the trailing edge of the right aileron. The tab is ground adjustable only.
Adjust tab as needed within limits shown in Figure 5.
3D5 27-10-00 Feb

PAGE 11
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
38 o
22 o
TRIM TAB
Aileron trim tab Adjustment Limits.

Figure 5
5. Aileron - Rudder Interconnect (See Figure 6.)

The aileron - rudder interconnect installation is located underneath the floor between the frames at F.S.
131.84 and F.S. 139.80. The aileron - rudder interconnect is bolted to the left aileron cable. The aileron -
rudder interconnect guide is bolted to the left rudder cable.
The aileron-rudder interconnect is rigged and adjusted as follows:
NOTE: All aileron and rudder rigging must be completed prior to rigging the aileron - rudder
interconnect.
A. Gain access to the aileron rudder interconnect.
B. Lock the aileron and rudder systems in neutral (with the control wheels and rudder pedals neutral,
the rudder is 2° right of 0°).
C. Ensure that the aft cable clamp on the left rudder cable is positioned 3.3 to 3.6 inches from the aft
face of the F.S. 139.80 fuselage frame.
D. Ensure that the aft cable clamp on the left aileron cable is positioned 2.00 inches from the aft face
of the F.S. 139.80 fuselage frame.
E. Ensure that the forward side of the forward arm of the aileron - rudder interconnect is positioned
1.70 inches from the aft face of the F.S. 131.84 fuselage frame.
F. Ensure that the forward side of the guide (on the left rudder cable) is positioned 3.50 inches from
the aft side of the F.S. 131.84 fuselage frame.
CAUTION: AFTER RIGGING THE INTERCONNECT, DEMONSTRATE THAT BOTH THE
AILERONS AND THE RUDDER CAN OBTAIN FULL TRAVEL AND BE DEFLECTED
TO THEIR RESPECTIVE STOPS WITHOUT INTERFERING WITH EITHER FRAME
F.S. 131.84 OR FRAME F.S. 139.80. WHEN DEMONSTRATING THIS, MOVE BOTH
THE AILERON AND RUDDER IN THE SAME DIRECTION TO THEIR RESPECTIVE
STOPS AND THEN HOLD FIRMLY IN POSITION WHILE THE FRAMES ARE
INSPECTED FOR INTERFERENCE WITH THE INTERCONNECT.
G. After adjustment, verify smooth free operation by watching the aileron - rudder interconnect while
an assistant cycles the yoke and pedals through full control movement.
PAGE 12
Feb 28/07 27-10-00 3D6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
83305-002 H
* See Note in Text
STA STA
131.84 139.80
See Note Below.
3.5 * LEFT RUDDER
CABLE
Arm 3.3 - 3.6
LBL
1.602
CABLE GUIDE
2.0
1.70 * GUIDE
LBL
4.732
CONTROL CABLE AFT FACE OF FUSELAGE

SLEEVE CLAMPS LEFT AILERON CABLE LOWER FRAME
(4 REQUIRED)
NOTE; In early production airplanes, these pins may interfere with the F.S. 139.80 frame.
If so, reverse the pins and add two (2) NAS 1149FN416P washers between the
cotter pin and the plate.
Aileron - Rudder Interconnect Installation

Figure 6
3D7 27-10-00 Feb

PAGE 13
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 14
Feb 28/07 27-10-00 3D8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
RUDDER AND TAB
1. Troubleshooting
See Chart 1.
CHART 1
TROUBLESHOOTING RUDDER CONTROL SYSTEM

rudder pedals and rudder.
or replace.
Bolts attaching forward or Tighten sector bolts.
aft sectors are loose.
Excessive resistance to System not lubricated Lubricate system.
rudder pedal movement. properly.
Rudder pedal torque tube Lubricate torque tube
bearing in need of lubrication. bearings.
between pulleys and
brackets.
Incorrect rudder travel. Rudder sector stop Re-rig sector stops.
incorrectly adjusted.
Nose wheel contacts stops Re-rig nose wheel stops.
before rudder.
Trim control knob moves System not lubricated Lubricate system.
with excessive resistance. properly.
3D9 27-20-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2. Rudder Pedal Assembly

To change bearings on rudder bar assembly, follow these steps:
A. Remove nut and washers from end of rudder bar assembly.
B. Remove nuts, bolts and washers that secure the bearing block to the tube support bracket.
C. Remove bearing.
D. Replace bearing using the shrink fit process. Bond the bearing with Loctite 290.
E. Securing bearing block to tube support bracket with nuts, bolts and washers.
F. Place two washers over the threaded end of the rudder bar and secure with the nut.
3. Rudder Controls
A. Removal
(1) To remove the rudder torque tube sectors:
(a) Loosen cables.
(b) Remove the screw which secures the rudder cable end retainer (i.e. - lockplate) to the
sector.
(c) Remove the nuts, bolts and washers that attach the sector to the rudder torque tube.
(d) Remove the sector.
(2) To remove the forward rudder control cables.
(a) Remove the screw which secures the rudder cable end retainer (i.e. - lockplate) to the
rudder bar sector. Remove the cable from the sector.
(b) Remove the aft fuselage access panel.
(c) Disconnect the rudder turnbuckles by the rudder tube sector in the aft section of the
fuselage.
(d) At the aft pressure bulkhead, pull the control cable through the fin type air seal. (Refer to
Figure 5, 27-00-00.)
(e) Pull the cable aft and remove it from the airplane.
(3) To remove the aft rudder cable.
(a) Remove the screws and washers that secure the two cable guard plates at both sides of
the sector. Remove the safety plates.
(b) Disconnect the turnbuckles if not previously accomplished.
(c) Remove the cotter pins from the rear of the sector and remove the aft cable from the
sector.
(4) To remove the rudder torque tube sector:
(a) Remove the aft rudder cable if not previously accomplished.
(b) Remove the nuts, bolts and washers that attach the rudder sector to the rudder torque
tube.
(c) Remove the rudder sector.
B. Installation
(1) To install the rudder torque tube sector:
(a) Position the sector on the torque tube.
(b) Attach the sector to the torque tube with nuts, bolts and washers.
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 27-20-00 3D10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Rudder Controls
Figure 1
3D11 27-20-00 FebPAGE 3

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(2) To install the rudder bar sector:

(a) Position the sector on the rudder bar assembly.
(b) Secure the sector to the rudder bar assembly with nuts, bolts and washers.
(3) To install the aft rudder cable:
(a) Position the cable on the sector.
(b) Install the two guard plates with screws and washers. Replace the cotter pins in the rear
of the sector.
(c) Attach the aft cable to the forward cables at the turnbuckles. Safety the turnbuckles with
locking clips.
(4) To install the forward rudder cable:
(a) Push the cable through the fin type air seal. (See Figure 5, 27-00-00.) Thread the cable
forward through the airplane.
(b) Connect the forward and aft rudder cables at the turnbuckles in the aft end of the airplane.
(c) Attach the forward ends of the forward cables to the rudder bar sector and secure the
cable end retainer (i.e. - lockplate) with a screw (see note below). Safety the cable end
retainer screw with MS20995-C32 safety wire.
Cable Guard Installation (Typical)

Figure 2
PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 27-20-00 3D12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(5) Ensure that all pulley cable guards have been properly installed (i.e. - with the cables routed
inside/under the cable guards - see Figure 2).
(6) Set the rudder cable tension and check the rigging per instruction in this chapter.
(7) After setting the cable tension, check all cable ball ends for proper seating in the retainers.
(8) Check the system for proper operation. See the Caution under Rigging and Adjustment.
(9) Rig the rudder control system.
(1) Use a suitable tool to check the rudder travel for its proper travel (perpendicular to the hinge
line) left and right from the zero degree position (streamlined with the vertical stabilizer). The
left travel should be 26 + 1, -0 degrees and the right travel should be 30 + 1, -0 degrees. Adjust
the stops on the rudder sector as required.
(2) Move the rudder 2 degrees right of the zero degrees (streamlined) position. Lock the rudder in
this position.
(3) Lock rudder pedals together, in alignment with each other, at F.S. 105.700. See 32-20-00,
Figures 4 and 5.
(4) Disconnect bungee from forward steering arm.
(5) Install a suitable tool which will lock the nose wheel in alignment with the longitudinal axis of
the aircraft .
(6) Adjust clearance between rollers on the nose gear and forward steering arm from 0.010 to
0.030 inch by loosening the steering arm mounting nut and using the adjuster underneath the
steering arm mount plate. (See Figure 3, 32-20-00.)
NOTE: Measure the gap with the steering arm parallel to the steering horn rollers. While
measuring this clearance, the gear should be down and locked and the airplane’s
weight should be on the gear.
(7) Torque the steering arm mounting nut and the adjuster jam nuts.
(8) Ensure that the two steering pushrods are holding the steering bellcrank perpendicular to B.L.
0.00 (refer to 32-50-00, Steering Pushrods Installation, if adjustment is necessary).
(9) Reconnect the steering bungee between the steering arm and the steering bellcrank. Adjust
length as required so that there is no load on the bungee springs while the nose wheel is
aligned with the longitudinal axis of the airplane. Tighten jam nuts.
(10) Adjust the rudder cable turnbuckles to obtain 40 ± 5 pounds of tension with the rudder set at 2
degrees right of neutral. Adjust the cables evenly to avoid uneven strain on airplane components.
(11) Remove any centering tools that had been previously installed.
(12) Place the airplane on jacks (refer to 7-10-00).
(13) Depress each of the pilot’s rudder pedals until the rudder sector firmly contacts its stops.
Adjust the forward stops (on the bellcrank in the nose gear tunnel) to provide 0.06 to 0.09 inch
clearance in each direction.
CAUTION: VERIFY FREE AND CORRECT MOVEMENT OF RUDDER. WHILE IT WOULD
ACCORDINGLY, UPON COMPLETION OF RUDDER RIGGING AND
ADJUSTMENT, VERIFY THAT THE RUDDER MOVES RIGHT WHEN THE
RIGHT PEDAL IS DEPRESSED; AND, THAT THE RUDDER MOVES LEFT
WHEN THE LEFT PEDAL IS DEPRESSED.
(14) Check the system for binding and proper operation.
(15) Remove the airplane from jacks.
3D13 27-20-00 FebPAGE 5

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4. Rudder Trim Controls

A. Removal
(1) To remove rudder trim controls in console:
(a) Remove access panel on left side of pedestal.
(b) Remove nut, washer and teflon-faced washer from bottom of rudder trim control shaft.
(c) Remove cotter pins and washers from the follower; remove the bellcrank arms from the
arms on the follower.
(d) Rotate the trim wheel until roll pins in shaft point fore and aft. Drive roll pins out (three
places).
(e) Remove the three screws which hold the wheel to the shaft.
(f) Slide the wheel aft through the wheel slot in the console.
(g) Slide the rudder trim control shaft down and out of the console.
(h) Remove the follower, worm and washer from inside the console.
(2) To remove the rudder trim bungee:
(a) Remove the nut, bolt and washers that secure rod end to bellcrank in console.
(b) Remove nut, bolt, cotter pin and washers that secure bungee housing to rudder bar
assembly. Remove bungee from airplane.
(3) To disassemble rudder trim bungee:
(a) Note length of trim bungee.
(b) Cut safety wire and remove the two clips from the housing.
(c) Slide shaft assembly from housing.
B. Installation
(1) To assemble the rudder trim bungee assembly:
(a) Slide forward clip onto housing.
(b) Lubricate shaft at each end of spring with Aero Lubriplate (white) and insert shaft
assembly into housing. Install aft clip.
(c) Check for 0.020 inch max. end play. Add 62833-127 washers as required between forward
clip and end of spring on the shaft assembly to bring the end play into tolerances.
(d) Ensure that length of trim bungee is correct (as recorded in step (3), Removal, above).
(2) To install rudder trim bungee:
(a) Attach the housing end of the bungee to the rudder bar assembly. Secure with bolt,
washers and nut. The thin washer goes under the nut. Safety the nut with a cotter pin.
(b) Attach the rod end of the bungee to the bellcrank. Safety the nut with a cotter pin.
(3) To install the rudder trim controls in the console:
(a) Slide the rudder trim control shaft partially up through the hole in the support bracket in
the console.
(b) Place over the shaft, in order, the washer and worm. Screw the follower onto the worm.
Slide the shaft all the way up into the upper hole.
(c) Align the holes in the worm and the holes in the shaft. Install roll pins in the hole.
(d) Place trim wheel flange on top of the shaft. Align holes in shaft and flange. Install roll pins.
(e) Slide wheel into slot on face of console. Align ends of spiral groove with roll pin hole in
flange. Secure wheel to flange with screws and washers.
(f) On bottom of rudder trim shaft, place the teflon-faced washer (teflon side up) and washer.
PAGE 6
Feb 28/07 27-20-00 3D14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Rudder Trim Installation

Figure 3
3D15 27-20-00 FebPAGE 7

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(g) Install nut and washer on end of shaft. The shaft should rotate freely with minimum end
play. Install the cotter pin.
(h) Attach bellcrank arms to follower with washers and cotter pins.
(i) Rig the rudder trim system.
(1) Ensure rudder rigging is correct per Rudder Controls - Rigging and Adjustment, above.
(2) Using a suitable tool, set rudder at 3 degrees to left of 0.
(3) Disconnect bungee from bellcrank in pedestal.
(4) Mark rudder trim wheel and count revolutions for full travel, stop to stop.
(5) Set trim wheel and trim indicator at midpoint of trim wheel travel with rudder set 3 degrees to
the left of 0.
(6) Adjust length of bungee rod as required to reconnect it with no load on the bungee springs.
(7) Check full range travel to ensure that indicator guide pin does not reach either end of spiral
groove in trim wheel before the stop is engaged (at roll pin on worm).
CAUTION: VERIFY FREE AND CORRECT MOVEMENT OF RUDDER. WHILE IT WOULD
ACCORDINGLY, UPON COMPLETION OF RUDDER TRIM RIGGING AND
ADJUSTMENT, VERIFY THAT THE RUDDER MOVES LEFT WHEN THE
RUDDER TRIM WHEEL IS TRIMMED LEFT; AND, THAT THE RUDDER MOVES
RIGHT WHEN THE RUDDER TRIM WHEEL IS TRIMMED RIGHT.
PAGE 8
Feb 28/07 27-20-00 3D16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3D17 27-20-00 FebPAGE 9

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 10
Feb 28/07 27-20-00 3D18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ELEVATOR AND TAB
1. Troubleshooting
See Chart 1.
TROUBLESHOOTING ELEVATOR CONTROL SYSTEM
control wheel and elevator.
or replace.
pulleys.
Resistance to elevator System not lubricated Lubricate system.
control movement. properly.
Binding control column. Adjust and lubricate.
between pulleys and
brackets.
pulleys.
Incorrect elevator travel. Elevator stops Adjust stop screws.
Correct elevator travel Elevator cables incorrectly Re-rig elevator cables.
cannot be obtained by rigged.
adjusting stops.
Lost motion between trim Cable tension too low. Adjust cable tension.
control wheel and trim tab.
Cables not in place on Install cables properly.
pulleys.
Linkage loose or worn. Check linkage and
tighten or replace.
3D19 27-30-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TROUBLESHOOTING ELEVATOR CONTROL SYSTEM
Trim control wheel moves System not lubricated Lubricate system.
with excessive resistance. properly.
Pulleys binding or rubbing. Replace binding pulleys.
Provide clearance between
pulleys and brackets.
Cables not in place on Install cables properly.
pulleys.
Trim tab hinge binding. Lubricate hinge.
If necessary, replace.
incorrectly. cable.
Trim tab fails to System incorrectly rigged. Check and/or adjust
reach full travel. rigging.
Trim indicator fails to Trim indicator unit not Adjust trim indicator.
indicate correct trim adjusted properly.
position.
2. Elevator Torque Tube Bearing Changes

A. Remove nut and washers from end of elevator torque tube assembly.
B. Remove nuts, bolts and washers that secure the bearing block to the tube support bracket.
C. Remove bearing.
D. Replace bearing using the shrink fit process. Bond the bearing with Loctite 290.
E. Secure bearing block to tube support bracket with nuts, bolts and washers.
F. Place two washers over the threaded end of the elevator torque tube and secure with nut.
3. Elevator Controls
A. Removal
(1) To remove elevator torque tube quadrant:
(a) Remove elevator downspring.
(b) Remove the two quadrant cable guards.
(c) Loosen cables.
(d) Remove the screw which retains the elevator cable lockplates.
(e) Remove the cable end retainer (i.e. - lockplate) screws and remove the cables.
(f) Remove the bolts, nuts and washers that secure the quadrant to the elevator torque tube.
(g) Remove the quadrant.
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 27-30-00 3D20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(2) To remove the elevator forward cable assemblies:

(a) Disconnect the elevator cable turnbuckles (located forward of the aft elevator quadrant).
(b) Remove the screw that secures the elevator cable end retainers (i.e. - lockplates) to the
forward quadrants (on the elevator torque tube).
(c) Pull the cables aft through the fuselage after removing the cable guards at the elevator
pulleys and the fin type control cable air seal clips.
(3) To remove the aft elevator cable assemblies:
(a) Disconnect the cable turnbuckles (located forward of the aft elevator quadrant).
(b) Cut safety wire on cable end retainer (i.e. - lockplate) screws. Remove screws.
(c) Remove cable guards and remove cables.
(4) To remove the elevator aft quadrant:
(a) Remove the elevator aft cable assemblies from the quadrant (refer to step 3).
(b) Remove the bolt, nut, washers and bushings which secure the quadrant assembly to the
bulkhead (note position of bushings as removed).
(c) Remove the quadrant assembly.
B. Installation
(1) To install the elevator aft quadrant:
(a) Position the elevator quadrant in place.
(b) Refer to Figure 1 for correct placement of hardware on bolt when installing rear quadrant.
(c) Attach cables to quadrant assembly and secure the cable end retainers (i.e. - lockplate)
with screws (see note below). Safety the cable end retainer screws with MS20995-C32
safety wire. Ensure the safety wire is installed so that the wire is inside and clear of the
elevator pushrod fork through the full travel of the quadrant.
(d) Adjust cable guards to be 0.01 ± 0.01 inch from the edge of the quadrant.
(e) Refer to steps (5) and (6).
(2) To install the elevator torque tube quadrant:
(a) Position the quadrant assembly on the torque tube.
(b) Secure quadrant with bolt, nut and washer (two places).
(c) Attach cables to quadrant assembly and secure the cable end retainers (i.e. - lockplate)
with screws (see note below). Safety the cable end retainer screws with MS20995-C32
safety wire.
(d) Adjust cable guard to provide 0.08 ± 0.01 inch of clearance from the edge of the
quadrant.
3D21 27-30-00 FebPAGE 3

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(e) Refer to steps (5) and (6).

(f) Attach the elevator downspring.
(3) To install the elevator forward cable assemblies:
(a) Insert the cables through the fin-type air seals on the aft pressure bulkhead and draw
them forward through the fuselage, positioning them on the proper pulleys.
(b) Attach cables to forward quadrant and secure the cable end retainers (i.e. - lockplate) with
screws (see note below). Safety the cable end retainer screws with MS20995-C32 safety
wire.
(c) Adjust cable guards so that there is 0.08 ± 0.01 inch of clearance from edge of the
quadrant.
(d) Attach forward cable assemblies to aft cable assemblies at the turnbuckles located just
forward of the aft quadrant.
(e) Ensure that all cable guards are in place.
(f) Refer to steps (5) and (6).
(g) Attach the elevator downspring.
(4) To install the elevator aft cable assemblies:
(a) Attach cables to quadrant and secure the cable end retainers (i.e. - lockplate) with screws
(see note below). Safety the cable end retainer screws with MS20995-C32 safety wire.
(b) Attach the rear cables to the forward cables at the turnbuckles.
(c) Reinstall cable guards and adjust them to provide 0.01 ± 0 .01 inch of clearance from the
edge of the quadrant.
(d) Refer to steps (5) and (6).
(5) Set cable tension.
(6) Check control system for proper rigging and operation.
(7) Attach the elevator downspring (refer to Figure 1).
PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 27-30-00 3D22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Elevator and Elevator Trim Installation

Figure 1
3D23 27-30-00 FebPAGE 5

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
NOTE: The neutral position of the elevator is when the leading edges of the aerodynamic balances
are lined up with the leading edges of the horizontal stabilizer.
(1) Adjust the elevator stops to obtain the travel specified in Chart 2.
(2) Lock the elevator in its neutral position using a suitable tool.
(3) Position the pilot’s control wheel with the forward face of the wheel mounting boss as shown in
Figure 3, 27-10-00 and secure with a suitable tool.
(4) Adjust the cable turnbuckles evenly to obtain 30 ± 5 lbs. cable tension.
(5) Remove the locking devices from the control wheel and elevator.
(6) With the elevator held against the trailing edge down primary (aft) stop, push the pilot’s wheel
full forward. The control wheel travel between the primary (aft) and secondary (forward) stops
should be 0.30 ± 0.10 inch. There is no adjustment on the secondary stop.
NOTE: If necessary, use the cable rigging turnbuckles to bring the control wheels into their
neutral position.
(7) With the elevator physically held against the trailing edge up primary (aft) stop, adjust the
secondary stop on the channel ahead of the instrument panel to provide a cushion (gap) of
0.06 - 0.09 inch. Lock the jamnut.
CAUTION: VERIFY FREE AND CORRECT MOVEMENT OF ELEVATOR. WHILE IT WOULD
ACCORDINGLY, UPON COMPLETION OF ELEVATOR RIGGING AND
ADJUSTMENT, VERIFY THAT THE REAR EDGE OF THE ELEVATOR MOVES
UP WHEN THE WHEEL IS PULLED BACK; AND, THAT THE REAR EDGE OF
THE ELEVATOR MOVES DOWN WHEN THE WHEEL IS PUSHED FORWARD.
(8) Check system for binding and proper operation.
CHART 2
ELEVATOR RIGGING POSITIONS
Elevator Trailing Elevator Trailing Elevator Tab Elevator Tab
Edge Up Edge Down Elevator Neutral Elevator Neutral
Trailing Edge Up Trailing Edge Down
23.5° ± .5° 14.5° ± .5° 19° + 0°, - 1° 24.5° + 0°, - 1°
PAGE 6
Feb 28/07 27-30-00 3D24
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4. Elevator Trim Controls

A. Trim Wheel and Cables
(1) Removal
To remove elevator trim controls in the console:
(a) Remove access panel on left side of console.
(b) Disconnect elevator trim cables by:
1 Remove the center access panels on the floor to gain access to the plastic tube that
protects the elevator trim cables.
2 Remove the pins from both ends of the plastic tube.
3 Slide the tube forward.
4 Rotate the elevator trim control wheel until one of the trim cable turnbuckles clears
the aft end of the tube.
5 Tie a pull rope forward of the exposed turnbuckle on the forward cable.
NOTE: Tension must be applied to the ends of the trim cables as soon as the
turnbuckles are disconnected to prevent the cables from unwrapping from
the trim wheel drum or the trim actuator, and to prevent the cables from
fouling at any of the pulleys.
6 Disconnect the cables, keeping tension on both ends of cable.
7 Have an assistant in the cockpit rotate the elevator trim control wheel until the
opposite elevator trim turnbuckle clears the aft end of the plastic tube. Keep tension
on both ends of the disconnected cable while the assistant is rotating the trim wheel.
8 Have the assistant tie another pull rope forward of the turnbuckle on the remaining
cable.
9 Have the assistant disconnect his cables, keeping tension on both ends of the cable.
10 Transfer the cable ends to one man. Have him keep tension on all four cable ends.
11 Have the remaining man slide the plastic tube aft until the cables are exposed aft of
the F.S. 124.125 frame.
(c) Remove the nut and washer from trim wheel pivot bolt.
(d) Push the trim wheel pivot bolt out the right hand side of the quadrant.
(e) Remove the trim wheel from the console, pulling the control cable along with it.
(f) To disassemble the elevator trim wheel:
1 Remove the three screws which attach the cable drum to the wheel.
2 Remove the cable from the drum.
(2) Installation
(a) To assemble the elevator trim wheel:
1 Place the cable ends in the drum.
2 Secure the cable drum to the wheel with the three screws.
3 Wrap the cable ends around the drum 3 1/4 turns in opposite directions.
(b) Position the trim wheel/cable in place in the console.
(c) Slide the trim wheel pivot bolt through the pivot holes in the trim wheel and the rudder trim
indicator bracket.
(d) Secure the pivot bolt with the nut and washer.
3E1 27-30-00 FebPAGE 7

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(e) Connect the elevator trim cables by:

1 Have the assistant keep tension on the trim cables while the cable blocks at F.S.
207.00 and F.S. 124.125 are removed.
2 Slide the plastic tube forward.
3 Connect one set of cables at the turnbuckles and remove the pull rope. Keep tension
on the remaining cables.
4 Have the assistant rotate the elevator trim control wheel until the remaining
(unconnected) turnbuckle clears the aft end of the tube.
5 Connect the remaining cables and remove the pull rope. Set cable tension to 12 ± 2
pounds.
NOTE: Both the up and down cable turnbuckle assemblies should be within 0.10 of
an inch of the same length upon completion of adjustment.
6 Slide the tube in place and insert the pins in both ends of the tube.
7 Check to ensure that the cables have not loosened on the trim drum or actuator.
Check that they have not fouled on any of the pulleys.
8 Check the system for restrictions or binding.
9 Reinstall the floor access panels that were previously removed.
(f) Ensure that the pulley cable guards are installed at all elevator trim cable pulleys.
(g) Replace the access panel on the console.
(h) Check operation of elevator trim controls. See Caution under Rigging.
B. Elevator Trim Actuator
(1) Removal
(a) Block the cables at the actuator drum.
(b) Disconnect the trim cable turnbuckles (inside the plastic tube under the floor). (See
Elevator Trim Controls, Removal, above.)
(c) Cut safety wire and remove bolts that attach actuator to elevator trim forward rod
assembly.
(d) Remove four bolts and washers that secure the actuator to its supporting bracket.
(e) Remove actuator and trim cable from aircraft.
(2) Installation
(a) Position actuator/trim cable assembly on actuator bracket. Fasten in place with bolts and
washer.
(b) Attach elevator trim forward rod assembly to actuator with bolts and washers. Safety bolts.
(c) Connect the trim cables. (See Elevator Trim Controls, Installation, above.)
(d) Ensure that cables are in pulleys and that pulley cable guards are installed.
(e) Attach three cable clips (per seal) to the fin type control cable air seals in the aft pressure
bulkhead.
(f) Set cable tension.
(g) Check system for smooth and proper operation.
PAGE 8
Feb 28/07 27-30-00 3E2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Elevator Trim Actuator Assembly

Figure 2
3E3 27-30-00 FebPAGE 9

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(3) Disassembly
(a) Remove nut and washer from the end of the actuator screw.
(b) Remove the bolt, nut and washer that secures the actuator screw to the actuator frame.
(c) Turn the screw out of the housing assembly and then out of the frame.
(d) Remove the drum from the housing assembly by removing the bolts which secure the aft
retainer to the housing.
(e) Unwrap cable from drum (if desired).
(4) Assembly
(a) Place trim cable in slot in trim drum. Cable end Y should be 17.5 inches longer than cable
end X.
(b) Wrap each end of the cable nine and one-quarter turns toward the center of the drum.
One series of wraps should be clockwise and the other series should be
counterclockwise. Hold the cable in place.
(c) Insert the drum into the housing assembly.
(d) Secure the aft retainer and guide to the aft side of the housing with the screws, nuts and
washers.
NOTE: Refer to Figure 2 for information on setting trim drum end play.
(e) Place the housing/drum assembly into the actuator frame.
(f) Insert the actuator screw through the frame and then into the housing/drum assembly.
(g) Rotate the screw until the housing/drum assembly is positioned as shown in Figure 2.
Cable end “Y” should be 17.5 inches longer than cable end “X” after installation and
wrapping on the drum before fastening the screw in position.
(h) Attach the aft end of the actuator screw to the actuator frame by installing the bolt, nut
and washer. The bolt shank should point in the same direction as the cable ends.
(i) Attach the forward end of the actuator screw to the frame with the nut and washer.
(j) Check for free, smooth full range travel.
C. Elevator Trim Tab Push Rod Corrosion Control
Inspect elevator trim rods and reapply Dinatrol AV 8 each five years. See 55-20-00, Elevator Trim
Tab Push Rod Corrosion Control.
PAGE 10
Feb 28/07 27-30-00 3E4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
D. Rigging and Adjustment (PIR-PPS50056-2. Rev. P.)
NOTE: The neutral position of the elevator tab is with the tab trailing edge lined up with the
elevator trailing edge.
(1) Check the tension of the elevator trim tab cables. Adjust the tension to 12 ± 2 pounds. The up
and down cable turnbuckle assemblies should be within 0.10 inch of the same length upon
completion of adjustment.
NOTE: Obtain access to the turnbuckles by rolling the trim wheel to the “full nose up” position
and sliding the tube that surrounds the cables fore and aft, as required.
(2) Place the elevator tab in the neutral position and set the tab indicator at the neutral position
using a suitable locating fixture.
(3) Move the elevator trim wheel aft (nose up) until the positive stop (spacer) on the actuator frame
engages the trim drum housing. Check to ensure that the tab indicator guide pin has not
bottomed out in its slot in the trim wheel.
CAUTION: DO NOT ADJUST THE TWO AFT CURVED RODS WHICH ATTACH TO THE
TAB. THESE RODS MUST NOT BE CHANGED FROM THEIR ORIGINAL
LENGTH OF 9.12 INCHES BETWEEN THE CENTERS OF THE ROD END
HOLE AND THE MOUNTING BUSHING HOLE. A CHANGE IN THEIR LENGTH
WOULD ALTER THE PROPER TAB OPERATING GEOMETRY.
(4) Set the tab to the Elevator Tab (Elevator Neutral) Trailing Edge Down angle specified in Chart 2,
by adjusting the two straight rods which penetrate the aft fuselage bulkhead. The rods must be
within 0.010 inch of the same length upon completion of adjustment. Lock the jam nuts on the
rods.
(5) Move the elevator trim wheel forward (nose down) until the elevator tab is at the Elevator Tab
(Elevator Neutral) Trailing Edge Up angle specified in Chart 2. Check to ensure that the tab
indicator guide pin has not bottomed out in its slot in the trim wheel. Set the adjustable stop
mounted on the stabilizer spar to maintain the specified tab angle. Lock the jam nut.
(6) Operate the elevator through its full travel range with the tab set at both full nose up and full
nose down positions. Operation should be smooth and free.
(7) With the tab neutral and the elevator held securely against each stop, determine the free play
of the tab. Total free play measured at the tab trailing edge should not exceed 0.06 inch.
CAUTION: VERIFY FREE AND CORRECT MOVEMENT OF ELEVATOR TAB. WHILE IT
WOULD SEEM SELF-EVIDENT, FIELD EXPERIENCE HAS SHOWN THAT THIS
CHECK IS FREQUENTLY MISINTERPRETED OR NOT PERFORMED AT ALL.
ACCORDINGLY, UPON COMPLETION OF ELEVATOR TRIM RIGGING AND
ADJUSTMENT, VERIFY THAT THE ELEVATOR TAB MOVES UP WHEN THE
TRIM WHEEL IS TRIMMED DOWN; AND, THAT THE ELEVATOR TAB MOVES
DOWN WHEN THE TRIM WHEEL IS TRIMMED UP.
3E5 27-30-00 Feb

PAGE 11
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
5. Stall Warning System

A. Description and Operation
WARNING: PHYSICAL MANIPULATION OF LIFT TRANSDUCER ON PA-46-350P AIRPLANES
MAY RESULT IN ERRONEOUS STALL WARNINGS NECESSITATING CALIBRATION
OF SYSTEM.
The stall warning system’s major components consist of a lift transducer located in the leading edge
of the left wing, the sensing source of the transducer protrudes into the air stream and during flight
is positioned by local airflow velocity and direction. By correlating lift with airflow characteristics at
the stagnation point on the wing, the lift transducer measures changes in angle-of-attack, or
airspeed deviations from an airspeed represented by a reference angle-of-attack.
The output signal, combining angle-of-attack and local dynamic pressure, enters the lift computer
which contains power regulators, signal processor and control circuitry. Provisions are included for
monitoring the entire stall warning system.
B. Lift Detector Assembly
(1) Removal
(a) Remove the four screws which hold lift detector to leading edge of wing.
(b) Pull lift detector partially out of opening in wing and disconnect wires at connector.
(c) Remove lift detector.
(2) Installation
(a) Connect wires from detector to harness.
(b) Position lift detector in the opening in the wing and secure with the four screws.
(c) Check lift detector for operation per Stall Warning Functional Test.
C. Dual Warning Unit (Horn)
(1) Removal
(a) Disconnect wires coming from warning unit.
(b) Remove the four screws and washers that secure the unit to the bulkhead.
(2) Installation
(a) Position dual warning unit on the bulkhead and secure with screws/washers.
(b) Connect electrical leads to unit (refer to electrical schematic in 91-27-30).
D. Stall Warning Functional Test (PIR-PPS-60089-2, Rev. E)
(1) Locate the stall warning test switch on the pilot’s instrument panel and the lift transducer which
is located in the inboard left wing leading edge.
(a) Activate the test switch.
(b) Verify that the transducer vane moves forward (up); the stall warning activates.
(2) Locate the stall warn heat switch on the center instrument panel (if installed).
CAUTION: DO NOT ACTIVATE STALL WARN HEAT SWITCH FOR MORE THAN FIVE (5)
SECONDS.
(a) Depress left main gear uplock switch.
(b) Activate the stall warn heat switch.
(c) Check that the lift transducer vane and mounting plate become warm.
PAGE 12
Feb 28/07 27-30-00 3E6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
E. Force Applicator Kit Test

The lift computer is factory set by Safe Flight Instrument Corp. to produce the required outputs to
activate the stall horn. Final adjustments are then made to each installation by Piper during fight
test. At the completion of individual system adjustment by Piper the actual tip gram value will be
recorded in the aircraft logbook as follows:
Tipgrams ± 1/2
STALL WARNING TIP GRAMS
POWER FLAPS ACTUAL
SETTINGS EXAMPLE
Off Full Up 0° x.x (+1.5)
Off 10°-20° x.x (+1.0)
Off Full Down 36° x.x (0)
On Full Up 0° x.x (+0.5)
On 10°-20° x.x (0)
On Full Down 36° x.x (-0.75)
Should it become necessary to check the values shown in the airplane log book, use Safe Flight
Instrument Corp's. Force Applicator Kit, P/N 1952-1, to measure the “tip-grams” of force settings
required at the lift transducer vane to energize the signal.
(1) Attach the positioner to the lift transducer cavity as shown in Figure 2-1 in Safe Flight's Force
Applicator Kit operation manual. The squat switch shall be in the in-flight condition.
(a) Position the cockpit pedestal power lever to the power off position and flaps to the full up
position. The prestall horn shall activate at tip grams recorded in the airplane log book.
(b) Place the cockpit pedestal power lever in the power off position and flaps to the 10°-20°
position. The prestall horn shall activate at tip grams recorded in the airplane log book.
(c) Place the cockpit pedestal power lever in the power off position and the flaps at the full
(36°) down position. The pre-stall horn shall activate at tip grams recorded in the airplane
log book.
(2) To make necessary adjustments, remove the access plate from the lift computer. Locate the
four adjustment screws number “0, 1, 2, and 3” (refer to Figure 3).
3E7 27-30-00 Feb

PAGE 13
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Vane Tip-Grams
10˚-20˚ Flaps
Vane Tip-Grams Pwr Off Bias
0˚ Flaps
Pwr Off Bias
0 1 2
3
Access Cover
Vane Tip-Grams
36˚ Flaps
Vane Tip-Grams Pwr Off Bias
Pwr On Bias
LIFT COMPUTER
Lift Computer “Tip Grams” Adjustment

Figure 3
F. Flap Switch Input Test (PIR-PPS60089-2, Rev. E.)
(1) Set flap to 0° with aircraft power on.

(2) Remove electrical connector P376 from lift computer.
(3) With continuity tester monitor pins 4 and 5 of P376. Verify open circuit.
(4) Move flap position switch to 10°. Verify continuity between pins 4 and 5.
(5) Move flap position switch to 20°. Verify continuity between pins 4 and 5.
(6) Move flap position switch to 36°. Verify open circuit between pins 4 and 5. Verify continuity
between pins 4 and 6.
(7) Move flap position switch back to 20°. Verify open circuit between pins 4 and 6. Verify continuity
between pins 4 and 5.
(8) Move flap switch to 0°. Verify open circuit between pins 4 and 5.
(9) If all tests pass reinstall P376 on lift computer. If all do not pass verify flap microswitch
installation and adjustment. Repeat steps 3 thru 8.
PAGE 14
Feb 28/07 27-30-00 3E8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
G. Stall Warning Flight Test Procedure (PIR-FTP2001-8, Rev. E.)
NOTE: Required whenever a “replacement” wing is installed.

This test is performed with gear down, flaps set as indicated, and power ON = 31 In. Hg. @ 2400
RPM. Fly airplane and at a rate of 1 KT/SEC maximum record the following warning and stall
speeds:
Trim Desired Maximum Record

Flaps Power Speed Warning Warning Warning / Stall
0° IDLE 110 6-9 5 - 10 ________/________
0° ON 110 6-9 5 - 10 ________/________
20° IDLE 100 6-9 5 - 10 ________/________
20° ON 100 6-9 5 - 10 ________/________
36° IDLE 90 6-9 5 - 10 ________/________
36° ON 90 6-9 5 - 10 ________/________
(1) Verify that the stall warning system performs within the following limits:
(a) Maximum: stall warning begins at 5 to 10 KIAS prior to stall and continues until stall
occurs.
(b) Desired: stall warning begins at 6 to 9 KIAS prior to stall and continues until stall occurs.
(2) If the stall warning system fails to perform within the limits above, adjust the system and refly
the test.
(3) If not able to adjust the stall warning system sufficient to achieve the limits above, recheck the
“replacement” wing installation to ensure it is installed and rigged correctly.
3E9 27-30-00 Feb

PAGE 15
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 16
Feb 28/07 27-30-00 3E10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FLAPS
1. Flap Drive System (Refer to Figure 1)

The flaps are driven by an electric motor-actuator unit. The motor-actuator is mounted below the floor at
fuselage station (F.S.) 167.97. Remove the seat, cabinet (if necessary), and floor boards to gain access
to the motor.
The drive system contains two movable micro-switches on a cam mechanism (one each for up and down
flap movement), warning horn micro-switch on cam bracket, current sensor, relay, and mechanical
linkages. A removable cover on the right forward floor gives access to the switches. The sensor and relay
are located on a plate assembly aft of motor. The cover is secured with velcro tabs for easy removal.
Pushrods are connected to the actuator at both ends. These pushrods extend out through the fuselage
and connect to bellcranks in the wings at wing station (W.S.) 29.00. Additional pushrods extend out
along the wing rear spar to an idler arm at W.S. 64.00 and on to another bellcrank at W.S. 93.00.
Pushrods connected to the bellcranks at W.S. 64.00 and W.S. 93.00 connect the flaps to complete the
drive system.
To ensure a good pressure seal at the fuselage exit points of the flap drive pushrods, a bellows is
connected to the pushrods and tube assemblies which are part of the fuselage structure, thus sealing
the opening and preventing any air loss from the pressurized cabin.
The flap selector provides four positions: Full up (0°), 10°, 20°, and full down (36°). All positions are
preselected by the flap control lever on the instrument panel. A flap position warning system is provided
to warn when the flaps are extended to or beyond the approach position without the landing gear fully
extended and locked.
2. Troubleshooting
See Chart 1.
CHART 1
TROUBLESHOOTING FLAP CONTROL SYSTEM
Flaps fail to extend or Motor-Actuator inoperative. No electrical power to
retract. motor. Check circuit
breaker.
Flaps not synchronized Incorrect rigging of Adjust flaps.
or fail to move evenly system.
when retracted.
3E11 27-50-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Flap Motor-Actuator and Drive System

Figure 1
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 27-50-00 3E12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. Flap Controls
A. Removal (PIR-85068 AL.)
(1) To remove link “E”: (See Figure 2.)

(a) Remove AN4-13A bolt, NAS1149F0463P washer, and MS21042-4 nut that secures link
“E” to the arm assembly and pushrod assembly.
(b) Remove the AN4-16A bolt, MS21042-4 nut, NAS1149F0463P washer, NAS1149F0432P
washer, and two 82695-96 bushings that secures link “E” to the pushrod and the motor-
actuator unit.
(c) Remove safety wire from AN4H30 bolt that secures link “E” to its support bracket. Remove
the bolt, AN310-4 nut, one each NAS1149F0463P and NAS1149F0432P washers (under
nut), and cotter pin.
(d) Remove link “E”.
(2) To remove the 85097-2 pushrod assembly: (See Figure 2.)
(a) Remove AN4-13A bolt, NAS1149F0463P washer, and MS21042-4 nut connecting the
pushrod assembly to the arm assembly and link “E.”
(b) Remove AN24-14A bolt, one each NAS1149F0463P and NAS1149F0432P washers, and
MS21042-4 nut connecting the pushrod assembly to the cam assembly.
(c) Remove the 85097-2 pushrod assembly.
(3) To remove arm assembly: (See Figure 2.)
(a) Remove AN4-13A bolt, NAS1149F0463P washer, and MS21042-4 nut connecting the
arm assembly to the pushrod assembly.and link “E”.
(b) Remove the AN24-34A bolt, MS21042-4 nut, two 82695-97 bushings, an
NAS1149F0432P washer, two NAS1149F0663P and two NAS1149F0632P washers that
secure the arm assembly to the tube assembly and aft link assembly.
(c) Remove arm assembly.
(4) To remove the aft link assembly: (See Figure 2.)
(a) Disconnect the flap position indicator cable from arm of the aft link assembly by removing
the PS10036 swing keeper.
(b) Remove the AN24-34A bolt, MS21042-4 nut, two 82695-97 bushings, an
NAS1149F0432P washer, two NAS1149F0663P and two NAS1149F0632P washers that
secure the aft link assembly to the tube assembly and arm assembly.
(c) Remove safety wire from AN4H34 bolt that secures the aft link to its support bracket.
Remove the bolt, AN310-4 nut, two NAS1149F0463P washers (under nut), and and cotter
pin.
(d) Remove link.
(5) To remove the flap drive pushrod assembly: (See Figures 2 and 3.)
(a) Loosen appropriate hose clamp on small end of bellows.
(b) For left flap drive pushrod:
1 Remove the AN4-16A bolt, MS21042-4 nut, NAS1149F0463P washer,
NAS1149F0432P washer, and two 82695-96 bushings that secures the pushrod
clevis to link “E” and the actuator- motor assembly.
2 Remove NAS464-P5A9 bolt, and MS 21042-5 nut that secures the pushrod clevis to
the left inboard bellcrank assembly.
3E13 27-50-00 FebPAGE 3

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(c) For right flap drive pushrod

1 Remove AN24-34A bolt, two 82695-97 bushings, one NAS1149F0432P washer, two
each NAS1149F0663P and NAS1149F0632P washers, and MS21042-4 nut securing
pushrod clevis to the tube assembly, the aft link assembly, and the arm assembly.
2 Remove NAS 464-P5A9 bolt, and MS 21042-5 nut that secures the pushrod clevis to
the right inboard bellcrank assembly.
(d) Slide pushrod from flap drive housing and remove.
(6) To remove the inboard bellcrank: (See Figure 3.)
(a) Remove the NAS 464-P5A9 bolt and MS21042-5 nut that secures the bellcrank to the flap
drive pushrod.
(b) Remove the AN310-4 nut, AN4-11 bolt, NAS1149F0463P washer, NAS1149F0432P
washers and MS24665-134 pin that secures the inboard bellcrank to the interconnect
pushrod assembly.
(c) Remove the NAS464-P4A8 bolt, MS21042-4 nut, and NAS1149F0463P washer that
secures the bellcrank to the 82913-2 pushrod.
(d) Remove the AN4-45 bolt, AN310-4 nut, 82695-38 bushing, and MS24665-134 pin that
secures the bellcrank to its support bracket.
(e) Remove bellcrank.
(7) To remove the 82913-2 inboard flap actuator pushrod assembly: (See Figure 3.)
(a) Remove the NAS464-P4A8 bolt, MS21042-4 nut, and NAS1149F0463P washer that
secures the pushrod to the bellcrank.
(b) Remove the AN4-12A bolt, MS21042-4 nut, and two NAS1149F0463P washers, that
secures the pushrod to the support bracket on the flap.
(c) Remove the pushrod.
(8) To remove the flap interconnect pushrod assembly: (See Figure 3.)
(a) Remove the AN310-4 nut, AN4-11 bolt, NAS1149F0463P washer, NAS1149F0432P
washers and MS24665-134 pin that secures the interconnect pushrod assembly to the
inboard bellcrank.
(b) Remove the AN310-4 nut, AN4-13 bolt, two NAS1149F0463P washers, MS24665-134 pin
and two 82695-39 bushings that secures the pushrod to the 82977-2 pushrod assembly.
(9) To remove the idler: (See Figure 3.)
(a) Remove the AN310-4 nut, AN4-13 bolt, two NAS1149F0463P washers, MS24665-134 pin
and two 82695-39 bushings that secures idler arm assembly to the interconnect pushrod
assembly and the 82977-2 pushrod assembly clevis.
(b) Remove the AN310-4 nut, AN4-16 bolt, two NAS1149F0463P washers, MS24665-134 pin
and 82695-40 bushing that secures the pushrod to its support bracket.
(c) Remove the idler arm assembly.
(10) To remove the 82977-2 pushrod assembly: (See Figure 3.)
(a) Remove the AN310-4 nut, AN4-13 bolt, two NAS1149F0463P washers, MS24665-134 pin
and two 82695-39 bushings that secures 82977-2 pushrod assembly clevis to the idler
arm assembly.
(b) Remove the NAS464-P4A8 bolt, MS21042-4 nut, and NAS1149F0432P washer, that
secures the pushrod to the outboard bellcrank assembly.
(c) Remove the 82977-2 pushrod assembly.
PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 27-50-00 3E14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Flap Motor-Actuator and Drive System - Fuselage Components

Figure 2
3E15 27-50-00 FebPAGE 5

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Flap Motor-Actuator and Drive System - Wing Components

Figure 3
PAGE 6
Feb 28/07 27-50-00 3E16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(11) To remove outboard bellcrank assembly: (See Figure 3.)

(a) Remove the NAS464-P4A8 bolt, MS21042-4 nut, and NAS1149F0432P washer, that
secures the 82977-2 pushrod assembly to the outboard bellcrank assembly.
(b) Remove the NAS464-P4A8 bolt, MS21042-4 nut, and NAS1149F0432P washer, that
secures the 82913-3 pushrod assembly actuator to the outboard bellcrank assembly.
(c) Remove the AN4-20 bolt, AN310-4 nut, two NAS1149F0463P washers, 82695-37
bushing, and MS24665-134 cotter pin that secures the outboard bellcrank assembly to
the support bracket on the flap.
(d) Remove the outboard bellcrank assembly.
(12) To remove outboard actuator pushrod assembly: (See Figure 3.)
(a) Remove the NAS464-P4A8 bolt, MS21042-4 nut, and NAS1149F0432P washer, that
secures the pushrod assembly to the outboard bellcrank arm.
(b) Remove the AN4-12A bolt, MS21042-4 nut, two 82695-42 bushings, and two
NAS1149F0463P washers, that secures the pushrod to the support bracket on the flap.
B. Installation (PIR-85068 AL.)
(1) To install outboard actuator pushrod assembly: (See Figure 3.)

(a) Ensure that the pushrod assembly measures 4.53 inches between the centers of the rod
end holes. (Rod ends should be evenly spaced and locknuts loose)
(b) Attach rod end of pushrod assembly to outboard bellcrank arm with NAS464-P4A8 bolt,
MS21042-4 nut, and NAS1149F0432P washer.
(c) Position pushrod’s aft rod end bearing on flap support. Install AN4-12A bolt (with head
pointing outboard), two 82695-42 bushings, two NAS1149F0463P washers (under nut),
and MS21042-4 nut.
(2) To install the outboard bellcrank: (See Figure 3.)
(a) Position bellcrank in support.
(b) Install AN4-20 bolt (head pointing down), 82695-37 bushing, two NAS1149F0463P
washers (under nut), and AN310-4 nut. Tighten nut until support arms seat on bushing,
then tighten one to two more castellations. Ensure that bellcrank operates freely and
install MS24665-134 cotter pin.
(c) Check for a maximum of 0.035 inch vertical end play of bellcrank. NAS1149F0532P
washers may be added as required between the bearing surfaces of the bellcrank and the
bellcrank lower supporting bracket, maintaining bellcrank freedom of rotation after
pushrod installation. Verify installation of MS24665-134 cotter pin.
(d) Attach the 82913-3 pushrod assembly actuator to the outboard bellcrank assembly. Install
NAS464-P4A8 bolt, MS21042-4 nut, and NAS1149F0432P washer.
(e) Attach the 82977-2 pushrod assembly to the outboard bellcrank assembly by installing a
NAS464-P4A8 bolt, MS21042-4 nut, and NAS1149F0432P washer.
(3) To install the 82977-002 pushrod assembly: (See Figure 3.)
(a) Ensure that the pushrod assembly measures 24.70 inches between the centers of the rod
end holes.
(b) Attach outboard end of the pushrod to the outboard bellcrank assembly by installing NAS
464-P4A8 bolt, MS21042-4 nut, and NAS1149F0432P washer.
3E17 27-50-00 FebPAGE 7

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(c) Position flap drive interconnect pushrod end into flap 82977-2 pushrod assembly clevis.
Install the two 82695-39 bushings. Position this assembly into the idler arms and secure
with AN4-13 bolt (head pointing down), two NAS1149F0463P washers (under nut), and
AN310-4 nut. Tighten nut until idler arms seat on bushing, then tighten one to two more
castellations. Ensure that idler operates freely, then install MS24665-134 cotter pin.
(4) To install the idler: (See Figure 3.)
(a) Place idler in position.
(b) Install AN4-16 bolt (head pointing down), 82695-40 bushing, two NAS1149F0463P
washers (under nut), and AN310-4 nut. Tighten nut until support arms seat on bushing,
then tighten one to two more castellations. Ensure that idler operates freely and install
MS24665-134 cotter pin.
(c) Check for a minimum of 0.035 inch vertical end play of idler. NAS1149F0532P washers
may be added as required between the bearing surfaces of the idler and the idler lower
supporting bracket. Verify installation of MS24665-134 cotter pin.
(d) Position flap drive interconnect pushrod end into flap 82977-2 pushrod assembly clevis.
(5) To install flap interconnect pushrod assembly: (See Figure 3.)
(a) Ensure that the pushrod measures 32.12 inches between the centers of the rod end hole
and clevis hole.
(b) Position flap drive interconnect pushrod end into flap 82977-2 pushrod assembly clevis.
(c) Place remaining rod end of pushrod between arms on inboard bellcrank. Use
NAS1149F0432P washers as required (Max. 4 top, 4 bottom permitted), maintaining
neutral alignment of bearing within the bellcrank. Secure pushrod with AN4-11 bolt (head
pointing down), one NAS1149F0463P washer (under nut), and AN310-4 nut. Install
MS24665-134 cotter pin.
(6) To install the inboard flap 82913-2 actuator pushrod assembly: (See Figure 3.)
(a) Ensure that pushrod measures 4.86 inches between the centers of the rod end bearings.
(Rod ends should be evenly spaced and locknuts loose).
(b) Attach rod end of the pushrod assembly to the outboard bellcrank arm with the NAS464-
P4A8 bolt, NAS1149F0463P washer, and MS21042-4 nut.
(c) Position the pushrod aft rod end bearing on the flap supports. Place one 82695-42
bushing on each side of the bearing. Install the AN4-12A bolt (head pointing outboard),
two NAS1149F0463P washers (under nut), and MS21042-4 nut.
(7) To install the inboard bellcrank: (See Figure 3.)
(a) Position bellcrank on support bracket.
(b) Install AN4-45 bolt (head pointing down), 82695-38 bushing and AN310-4 nut. Tighten the
nut until the bracket arms seat on the bushing, then tighten one to two more castellations.
(c) Check for a maximum of 0.035 inch vertical end play of the bellcrank. As required on top
of bellcrank, use NAS1149F0432P washers to reduce end play to a minimum and allow
free rotation without any binding. As required on bottom of bellcrank, use
NAS1149F0632P washers to reduce end play to a minimum and allow free rotation
without any binding. Install MS24665-134 cotter pin.
PAGE 8
Feb 28/07 27-50-00 3E18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(d) Attach flap interconnect pushrod to upper arms on bellcrank. Use NAS1149F0432P
washers as required (Max 4 top, 4 bottom permitted), maintaining neutral alignment of
bearing within the bellcrank. Secure pushrod with AN4-11 bolt (head pointing down), one
NAS1149F0463P washer (under nut), and AN310-4 nut. Install MS24665-134 cotter pin.
(e) Attach inboard flap actuator 82913-2 pushrod to long arms on bellcrank with NAS464-
P4A8 bolt, NAS1149F0463P washer, and MS21042-4 nut.
(f) Attach flap drive pushrod to lower arms on bellcrank with the NAS464-P5A9 bolt and
MS21042-5 nut.
(8) To install the flap drive pushrod assembly: (See Figures 2 and 3.)
(a) Adjust the pushrod(s) being installed to measure as follows (rod end holes - center to
center):
- right pushrod = 27.34 inches
- left pushrod = 18.58 inches.
(b) Slide the pushrod through appropriate flap drive housing.
(c) For left flap drive pushrod:
1 Position flap drive pushrod clevis in center of U bracket on actuator-motor assembly.
Insert the two 82695-96 bushings. Place U shaped clevis of link “E” over actuator-
motor bracket. Secure with AN4-16A bolt, NAS1149F0432P washer (under bolt
head), NAS1149F0463P washer (under nut), and MS21042-4 nut.
2 Secure other end of pushrod to the left inboard bellcrank assembly with a NAS464-
P5A9 bolt, and MS21042-5 nut.
(d) Attach right flap drive pushrod:
1 Position flap drive pushrod in U shaped bracket on end of tube assembly. Insert the
two 82695-97 bushings. Position the U shaped bracket on end of arm assembly over
bushings with one each NAS1149F0663P and NAS1149F0632P washers between
bushings and arm assembly bracket. Secure with the AN24-34A bolt, placing
NAS1149F0432P washer under the nut. Install MS21042-4 nut.
2 Secure other end of pushrod to the right inboard bellcrank assembly with a NAS464-
P5A9 bolt, and MS21042-5 nut.
(e) Tighten the hose clamp on the small end of the bellows.
(9) To install the aft link assembly: (See Figure 2.)
(a) Position aft link on mounting brackets. Secure with AN4H34 bolt, two NAS1149F0463P
washers (under nut), and AN310-4 nut. Tighten nut finger tight plus one or two
castellations. Ensure that the aft link operates freely. Install MS24665-132 cotter pin and
safety with MS20995C32 wire.
(b) Install two 82695-97 bushings in hole in tube assembly. Move aft link arms over hole in
tube assembly. Move arm assembly yoke over hole, placing one each NAS1149F0663P
and NAS1149F0632P washers between yoke and aft link arms. Insert AN24-34A bolt
through yoke, arms, and actuator. Secure bolt with NAS1149F0432P washer and
MS21042-4 nut.
(c) Connect the flap position indicator cable to arm of the aft link assembly using the
PS10036 swing keeper.
3E19 27-50-00 FebPAGE 9

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(10) To install arm assembly: (See Figure 2.)

(a) Install two 82695-97 bushings in hole in tube assembly. Move aft link arms over hole in
tube assembly. Move arm assembly yoke over hole, placing one each NAS1149F0663P
and NAS1149F0632P washers between yoke and aft link arms. Insert AN24-34A bolt
through yoke, arms, and actuator. Secure bolt with NAS1149F0432P washer and
MS21042-4 nut.
(b) Secure the arm assembly to the pushrod assembly.and link “E” with an AN4-13A bolt,
NAS1149F0463P washer, and MS21042-4 nut.
(11) To install the 85097-2 pushrod assembly: (See Figure 2.)
(a) Secure the pushrod assembly to the cam assembly with an AN24-14A bolt, one each
NAS1149F0463P and NAS1149F0432P washers, and a MS21042-4 nut.
(b) Secure the pushrod assembly to the arm assembly and link “E” with an AN4-13A bolt,
(12) To install “E” link: (See Figure 2.)
(a) Position link “E” between support brackets.
(b) Install AN4H30 bolt, one each NAS1149F0463P and NAS1149F0432P washers (under
nut), and AN310-4 nut. Tighten nut finger tight plus one to two castellations. Ensure that
the link is free to pivot, then install MS24665-132 cotter pin. Safety with MS20995C32
wire.
(c) Secure link “E” to the pushrod and the motor-actuator unit with two 82695-96 bushings,
NAS1149F0463P washer (under nut), NAS1149F0432P washer (under bolt head),
AN4-16A bolt, and MS21042-4 nut.
(d) Secure link “E” to connecting arm assembly and pushrod assembly with an AN4-13A bolt,
C. Flap Motor-Actuator (See Figure 2.) (PIR-85068 AL.)
(1) Removal
(a) Lower flaps to the full down position
WARNING: PULL ELECTRIC FLAP CIRCUIT BREAKER, DISCONNECT BATTERY,
AND CHECK THAT NO EXTERNAL POWER IS CONNECTED TO
AIRPLANE IN ORDER TO ENSURE THAT NO ELECTRICAL POWER IS
BEING APPLIED TO FLAP SYSTEM.
(b) Disconnect flap actuator motor wiring.
(c) Remove the AN4-16A bolt, MS21042-4 nut, NAS1149F0463P washer, NAS1149F0432P
washer, and two 82695-96 bushings connecting left end of actuator left flap drive pushrod
and “E” link.
(d) Remove the AN24-34A bolt, MS21042-4 nut, two 82695-97 bushings, an
NAS1149F0432P washer, two NAS1149F0663P and two NAS1149F0632P washers
securing right pushrod clevis to the tube assembly, the aft link assembly, and the arm
assembly.
(e) Remove motor-actuator and attached tube from aircraft.
(f) Remove the two MS51966-112 set screws from actuator jackscrew coupling.
(g) Unscrew tube from actuator.
NOTE: Motor and actuator remain together as one unit.
PAGE 10
Feb 28/07 27-50-00 3E20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(2) Installation
WARNING: PULL ELECTRIC FLAP CIRCUIT BREAKER, DISCONNECT BATTERY, AND
CHECK THAT NO EXTERNAL POWER IS CONNECTED TO AIRPLANE IN
ORDER TO ENSURE THAT NO ELECTRICAL POWER IS BEING APPLIED TO
FLAP SYSTEM.
NOTE: It may be necessary to rotate the flap motor-actuator coupling by hand to extend
actuator jackscrew to full down position.
(a) Insert actuator into push tube and secure with the two MS51966-112 set screws.
(b) Install actuator-push tube assembly to right pushrod assembly, the aft link assembly, and
the ar m assembly. Secure with AN24-34A bolt, two 82695-97 bushings, one
NAS1149F0463P washer one each NAS1149F0663P and NAS1149F0632P washer
between bushings and arm assembly bracket, and MS21042-4 nut.
(c) Connect the left flap drive pushrod clevis in center of U bracket on actuator-motor
assembly. Insert the two 82695-96 bushings. Place U shaped clevis on link “E” over
actuator-motor bracket. Secure with AN4-16A bolt, NAS1149F0432P washer (under bolt
head), NAS1149F0463P washer (under nut), and MS21042-4 nut.
(d) Connect flap motor-actuator wiring.
(e) Connect battery terminals.
(f) Check flap rigging and operation (refer to Rigging Flaps).
4. Flap System Rigging (PIR-PPS50056-2. Rev. P.)
WARNING: PULL ELECTRIC FLAP CIRCUIT BREAKER, BEFORE BEGINNING.

CAUTION: DO NOT ADJUST PRESET LENGTH OF COMPONENTS UNLESS SPECIFIED BELOW.
A. Before rigging flaps
(1) If necessary, disconnect flap pushrods from wing bellcranks.
(2) Rig flaps before lubricating flap tracks.
(3) Check that the length of the arm assembly (Figure 2) is 14.92 inches. If necessary to reset,
adjust the rod end on arm assembly.
B. Rigging flaps
(1) Check the jack screw set dimension is 0.20 ± 0.06 inches as shown in Figure 2. If adjustment
is necessary, hand turn jack screw by grasping rubber universal on motor shaft.
(2) Check that selector lever is in up (0°) position on instrument panel.
(3) Position limit switches at null point by adjusting clevis end of selector cable.
(4) Set circuit breaker. Motor should not run. Move selector lever to 10° position. Motor should run
and extend jack screw. Return to up position. Jack screw should return to the 0.20 ± 0.06 inch
dimension.
(5) Hold flap trailing edge at approximately W.S. 93.00. Cycle flaps by hand through full travel
several times. Flap rollers should operate smoothly in the track without a tendency to grab or
bind.
(6) Keep flap rollers firmly bottomed out in forward end of center and inboard flap track slots.
Attach flap rods to wing bellcranks. Outboard flap rod is to be snug, allowing no flap end play.
Inboard rod is to be snugged and then tightened one half turn.
3E21 27-50-00 Feb

PAGE 11
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(7) Move selector lever to Full flaps down position. Verify flap position of 36° +0°, -1°. Right and left
flap shall be within one (1) degree of each other.
NOTE: Maintain a slight up pressure on the underside of flap trailing edge when checking this
position.
(8) Move selector lever to the Full up position. Verify flap position of 0° ± 1°.
NOTE: Maintain a slight up pressure on the underside of flap trailing edge when checking this
position.
CAUTION: VERIFY FREE AND CORRECT MOVEMENT OF FLAPS. WHILE IT WOULD

ACCORDINGLY, UPON COMPLETION OF FLAP RIGGING AND ADJUSTMENT,
VERIFY THAT THE FLAPS MOVE UP WHEN THE SELECTOR LEVER IS UP;
AND, THAT THE FLAPS MOVE DOWN WHEN THE SELECTOR LEVER IS
DOWN.
5. Flap System Adjustment (PIR-PPS50056-2. Rev. P.)
Use the following procedure to adjust flap system:

A. To align flaps within one (1) degree of each other, adjust the inboard rod end on either the left or
right pushrod assembly (i.e. - 82977-2, Figure 3).
NOTE: Maintain a slight up pressure on the underside of the flaps when checking flap travel.
B. The outboard rod end of the pushrod 85097-2 (see Figure 2) bolts to a slot in the cam assembly. To
increase flap travel, move that rod end forward in the slot. To decrease flap travel, move that rod end
aft in the slot. Adjust rod end as required to allow the cam assembly to activate the warning horn
switch.
NOTE: It is acceptable to have up to 3/16th inch vertical end play at flap trailing edge in the 0° flap
position, measured at center of flap track.
C. After any adjustment to the flap system, check for proper operation. See Caution under Rigging.
6. Flap Position Indicator and Flap Warning System Functional Test (PIR-PPS50056-2. Rev. P.)
A. Rig the flaps as described above.

B. Place the airplane on jacks and fully retract the landing gear.
C. Place flap handle in 10° position. Flaps shall extend to first mid position and landing gear warning
horn does not sound.
D. Place flap handle in 20° position. Flaps shall extend to second mid position and warning horn
sounds.
E. Place flap handle in full down position. Flaps shall extend fully, and warning horn sounds.
F. Place flap handle in full up position. Flaps shall travel to up position and warning horn should stop
sounding.
G. Extend landing gear until fully down and locked. Remove airplane from jacks.
H. Move flap handle thru 10°, 20° and full down position, the warning horn should not sound. Check
the flap indicator to confirm the indicator correctly follows the flap handle and correctly displays the
appropriate flap position.
PAGE 12
Feb 28/07 27-50-00 3E22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
7. Flap Bellcrank Distortion Inspection

If flaps have been extended at or above VFE, inspect the flap bellcranks for evidence of distortion.
A. Access the flap bellcrank through the main landing gear wheel well. The bellcrank is outboard the
wing root rib at W.S. 29.00 and adjacent to the aft spar.
B. If the paint is cracked or peeling anywhere along the bellcrank (see Figure 4), torsional movement
may have occurred.
C. Remove the paint with a commercially available paint stripper, such as Cee-Bee E2012 or E2060.
D. Using a dye penetrant method of inspection per latest revision of AC 43.13-1.
(1) Inspect for cracks at either arm on the bellcrank shaft near the welds.
(2) Inspect for cracks on the shaft itself as shown in Figure 4.
E. If no cracks are found, repaint the bellcrank(s) and reinstall.
F. If cracks are found:
(1) Replace the cracked bellcrank with a new part as follows:
(a) Lefthand side = 82905-010 bellcrank assembly.
(b) Righthand side = 82905-011 bellcrank assembly.
(2) Inspect the rest of the flap system for distortion or damage to the extension rods and rod ends.
G. Make a logbook entry.
Flap Bellcrank Distortion Inspection

Figure 4
3E23 27-50-00 Feb

PAGE 13
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 14
Feb 28/07 27-50-00 3E24
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
SPEEDBRAKES
WARNING: DO NOT PUT FINGERS IN HOLES OF EXTENDED SPEEDBRAKE BLADES. IF POWER

TO THE SYSTEM IS INTERRUPTED, THE SPEEDBRAKE BLADES WILL CLOSE WITH
SUFFICIENT FORCE TO AMPUTATE FINGERS.
A Precise Flight SpeedBrake 2000 System is available as an option on S/N’s 4636187 and up. When
installed, the system provides expedited descents at low cruise power, glide path control on final
approach, and an aid to the prevention of engine shock cooling.
The system consists of wing mounted electric SpeedBrake Cartridges, an asymmetric logic switching
unit, an annunciator light, a 3-amp circuit breaker, and a yoke mounted actuator switch. Operation is
simple ON or OFF, when power is supplied to the cartridges, the blades extend; when power is
interrupted, powerful springs retract the blades.
CHART 1
TROUBLESHOOTING SPEEDBRAKE SYSTEM

SpeedBrake fails to retract, Retract Microswitch fails Replace or repair
and to operate Microswitch - if Microswitch
pulling circuit breaker returns is OK, use schematic to
brakes to stowed. find break in wiring.
Switch inoperative Replace or repair switch
- if switch OK use
schematic to find break in
circuit.
Motor and Asymmetric Logic Replace Asymmetric Logic
Control Unit failed. Control Unit.
CAUTION: DO NOT PUSH SPEEDBRAKE BLADES DOWN, IF THEY FAIL TO RETRACT.
FORCING SPEEDBRAKE BLADES DOWN WILL DAMAGE THE UNIT.
SpeedBrake fails to retract, Clutch Failure Pull brakes apart slightly, if
and this does not provide
pulling circuit breaker fails to remedy replace clutch assy.
return the brakes to stowed.
Spring Failure Replace Spring.
SpeedBrake fails to extend Extend Microswitch fails Replace or repair
to operate. Microswitch - if Microswitch
NOTE: If one SpeedBrake fails is OK, use schematic to
to extend, the Logic find break in wiring.
Interconnect Box will cut
clutch power to the other Clutch Inoperative. Replace Clutch Assembly.
SpeedBrake Cartridge
after 4 seconds - the Switch Inoperative. Replace or repair switch
cartridge motor, however - if switch OK, use
will continue to run. schematic to find break in
circuit.
Motor and Asymmetric Logic Replace Asymmetric Logic
Control failed. Control Unit.
3F1 27-60-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2. Troubleshooting
See Chart 1, above.
3. Inspections
A. 50 Hour Inspection (See Figure 1.)
(1) Inspect Cap Strip Cover Screws and Top Attachment Screws for security. If loose, remove
screws and reinstall using Locktite 242. Torque to eight (8) in. lbs.
(2) Inspect drain tube for obstructions or debris.
B. Annual Inspection
(1) Remove SpeedBrake Cartridge as described under SpeedBrake Cartridges, Removal, below.
(2) Clean and inspect unit for damage, corrosion, looseness, and proper operation.
(3) Lubricate worm and worm gear with Aeroshell 22.
(4) Reinstall SpeedBrake Cartridge as described under SpeedBrake Cartridges, Installation,
below.
4. SpeedBrake Cartridges
WARNING: DO NOT PUT FINGERS IN HOLES OF EXTENDED SPEEDBRAKE BLADES. IF POWER
TO THE SYSTEM IS INTERRUPTED, THE SPEEDBRAKE BLADES WILL CLOSE WITH
SUFFICIENT FORCE TO AMPUTATE FINGERS.
CAUTION: DO NOT PUSH SPEEDBRAKE BLADES DOWN, IF THEY FAIL TO RETRACT. FORCING
SPEEDBRAKE BLADES DOWN WILL DAMAGE THE UNIT.
The SpeedBrake Cartridges (which are in each wing between W.S. 93.00 and 107.50) consist of a
gearmotor and clutch assembly driving the interconnected blades through a worm gear set. The blades
are loaded to the retracted position by a constant force spring.
The SpeedBrake cartridge also contains two microswitches; one for the retracted position and one for
the extended position. The microswitches control gearmotor power, gearmotor direction, signals the
cockpit annunciator and signals the logic-switching unit.
A. Removal
(1) Remove access plates and covers.
NOTE: If installed, the radome on the right wing will need to be removed first.
(2) Disconnect wiring harness.
(3) Pull the drain tube up through the wing skin.
(4) Remove the spring clip on each side of the SpeedBrake cartridge and remove the cartridge.
B. Installation
(1) Insert the SpeedBrake cartridge through the access hole ensuing that the spring clip hinge
halves are on the aft side of the cartridge.
(2) Position the cartridge aligned with and between the spring clip hinge halves on the mounting
brackets. Secure with spring clips.
(3) Feed the drain tube through the wing skin.
(4) Connect the wiring harness.
(5) Reinstall access plates and covers.
NOTE: If required, reinstall the radome on the right wing.
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 27-60-00 3F2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Effectivity
SpeedBrake 50 Hour Inspection 4636187 and up,
Figure 1 If Installed
3F3 27-60-00 FebPAGE 3

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
5. Asymmetric Logic Switching

The Asymmetric Logic Switching Unit (which is located under the rear co-pilot floor closeout) monitors
SpeedBrake Cartridge position and will cut power to both SpeedBrake Cartridge clutches causing
instant blade retraction. This happens for two conditions:
A. Both SpeedBrake Cartridge fails to extend completely within four (4) seconds, or
B. One SpeedBrake Cartridge is contacted after extension (birdstrike, large hail etc).
NOTE: The gearmotors will continue to run after clutch power has been disconnected, with the
SpeedBrake switch in the ON position.
6. SpeedBrake Switch
The control yoke-mounted SpeedBrake Switch controls SpeedBrake extension and retraction.
7. SpeedBrake Annunciator
The SpeedBrake Annunciator is mounted (separately) on the instrument panel above the pilot’s airspeed
indicator. It illuminates after both SpeedBrakes are extended and extinguishes after both SpeedBrakes
are stowed.
8. Testing
A. Basic Functional Test
A properly operating SpeedBrake system should function as specified below:
(1) Turn on aircraft power.
(2) Switch SpeedBrakes ON. Full deployment should occur in no more than 2.5 seconds.
WARNING: DO NOT PUT FINGERS IN HOLES OF EXTENDED SPEEDBRAKE BLADES. IF
POWER TO THE SYSTEM IS INTERRUPTED, THE SPEEDBRAKE BLADES
WILL CLOSE WITH SUFFICIENT FORCE TO AMPUTATE FINGERS.
(3) Verify motor stop. Verify full blade extension. Proper blade position is 87° ± 2°.
(4) Switch SpeedBrakes OFF. Full retraction should occur in no more than 2.0 seconds.
(5) Verify motor stop. Verify full blade retraction. Proper blade position is 0° ± 2°.
(6) Repeat steps (2) thru (5) several times to verify proper operation.
(7) Turn off aircraft power.
B. Speedbrake Cartridge Tester
Precise Flight offers a speedbrake cartridge test connector which is used to conduct a more precise
functional test. The cartridge test connector is available from your Piper Distributor as P/N 762-138
and is used as follows:
(1) Turn aircraft power OFF.
(2) Remove left speedbrake access panel.
(3) Disconnect left speedbrake cartridge from wiring harness.
(4) Connect the cartridge test connector to the left speedbrake wiring harness.
PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 27-60-00 3F4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(5) Turn aircraft power ON and operate speedbrake system.


(6) With the right speedbrake extended, press on the extended blades to simulate air loading.
(a) If the blades drop, turn aircraft power OFF, replace the right speedbrake, and start with
step (5), above.
(b) If the blades remain extended, turn aircraft power OFF, remove the cartridge test
connector from the left speedbrake wiring harness, and reconnect the wiring harness to
the left speedbrake cartridge.
(7) Turn aircraft power ON and operate speedbrake system.

(8) Press on the extended blades of the left speedbrake to simulate air loading.
(9) If the blades on both the left and right speedbrakes drop, turn aircraft power OFF, replace the
left speedbrake, and start with step (7), above.
(10) When the blades on both speedbrakes remain extended, the test has been completed
successfully.
3F5 27-60-00 FebPAGE 5

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 6
Feb 28/07 27-60-00 3F6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3F7 27-60-00 FebPAGE 7

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 8
Feb 28/07 27-60-00 3F8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER
28
FUEL
3F9
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3F10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 28
CHAPTER CHAPTER


2 Feb 28/07
28-00-00 1 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07
5 Feb 28/07
6 Feb 28/07
28-10-00 1 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07
5 Feb 28/07
6 Feb 28/07
7 Feb 28/07
8 Feb 28/07
28-20-00 1 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07
5 Feb 28/07
6 Feb 28/07
7 Feb 28/07
8 Feb 28/07
28-40-00 1 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07
5 Feb 28/07
6 Feb 28/07
7 Feb 28/07
8 Feb 28/07
9 Feb 28/07
10 Feb 28/07
11 Feb 28/07
12 Feb 28/07

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 28 - FUEL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
GENERAL 28-00-00 1 3F15

Fuel System 1 3F15
Description 1 3F15
STORAGE 28-10-00 1 3F21

Access Covers 1 3F21
Leak Evaluation 2 3F22
Fuel System Leak Test 6 3G2
DISTRIBUTION 28-20-00 1 3G5

Collector Tank 1 3G5
Description 1 3G5
Electric Fuel Pump 1 3G5
Removal 1 3G5
Installation 1 3G5
Fuel Selector Valve 2 3G6
Description 2 3G6
Removal 2 3G6
Installation 2 3G6
Switches Adjustment 3 3G7
Fuel Selector Cable Adjustment 3 3G7
Fuel Filter 3 3G7
Removal 3 3G7
Installation 3 3G7
Fuel Drain Valve 4 3G8
Description 4 3G8
O-ring Replacement 4 3G8
Electric Boost Pump 4 3G8
Emergency Fuel Pump 5 3G9
Removal 5 3G9
Installation 5 3G9
INDICATING 28-40-00 1 3G13

Fuel Quantity Senders 1 3G13
Removal 1 3G13
Installation 1 3G13
Fuel Quantity Gauge Accuracy Test (S/N’s 4636001 thru 4636020 only) 2 3G14
Pre-Installation Check 2 3G14
Post-Installation Functional Check 2 3G14

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 28 - FUEL
INDICATING (continued) 28-40-00

Fuel Quantity Gauge Calibration (S/N’s 4636021 thru 4636374) 4 3G16
Set up 4 3G16
Non-Programmable Transicoil EMIS Gauge (S/N’s 4636021 thru 4636131 only) 4 3G16
Programmable Transicoil EMIS Gauge (S/N’s 4636132 thru 4636374) 6 3G18
Complete 8 3G20
Fuel Gauge Full Range Check (S/N’s 4636021 thru 4636374) 8 3G20
Set up 8 3G20
Non-Programmable Transicoil EMIS Gauge (S/N’s 4636021 thru 4636131 only) 8 3G20
Programmable Transicoil EMIS Gauge (S/N’s 4636132 thru 4636374) 10 3G22
Complete 10 3G22
Fuel Quantity Indicator Calibration (S/N’s 4636375 and up) 11 3G23
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GENERAL
WARNING: DURING ANY FUEL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE, USE A GROUND WIRE ATTACHED
FROM EACH MAIN GEAR GROUNDING PIN TO SEPARATE APPROVED GROUNDING
STAKES TO PREVENT THE ACCIDENTAL DISCONNECTION OF AIRPLANE
GROUNDING.
Fuel System
A. Description
The fuel system consists of an integral fuel tank in each outboard wing section, having a usable
capacity of 60 U.S. gallons for a total usable capacity of 120 U.S. gallons. The fuel tanks are part of
the wing structure - i. e. - a wet-wing configuration. Each tank has an anti-icing fuel vent and forward
and aft fuel supply lines with finger screens. Fuel flows from these finger screens thru lines to a one
(1) U.S. gallon collector tank located in each wing wheel well area. Installed in each collector tank is
an electrically driven centrifugal fuel boost pump which is activated in conjunction with the fuel
selector control in the cockpit. A sump drain is also located in each collector tank.
Fuel leaving the left or right collector/sump tank flows to a selector valve which is located on the
right fuselage side behind the copilot’s seat in a non-pressurized compartment. All fuel lines
passing through the pressurized cabin are metal tubes surrounded by plastic cushion and encased
by a second metal tube. This second tube is sealed from the cabin environment to preclude fuel
from entering the cabin area or pressurized cabin air from entering fuel lines in the event of a leak.
The selector valve is cable controlled by a thumb-sized handle (just below the fuel quantity gauges)
with detents at the OFF, LEFT, and RIGHT positions. Selecting LEFT or RIGHT directs fuel flow to
the engine from the tank selected. To select OFF the fuel selector must be moved to the left tank
position, moved down against spring pressure, then moved to the far left, or OFF position.
Fuel flows from the fuel selector valve forward to the fuel filter located below the baggage floor on
the right side. The filter drain is a nylon tube located on the right side of the aircraft, forward of the
wing. Fuel flows from the filter, forward through the emergency fuel pump and fire wall, into the
engine compartment, to the engine driven fuel pump.
B. Troubleshooting
Chart 1 lists troubles which may occur in the mechanical or electrical portions of the fuel system,
the probable cause and suggested remedy. When troubleshooting, first check from the fuel supply
or power source to the item effected.
3F15 28-00-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 1
TROUBLESHOOTING FUEL SYSTEM
Failure of fuel to flow. Fuel line blocked. Flush fuel system.
Fuel vent cap blocked. Check and clean vent
hole in cap.
Mechanical or electrical Check and replace if
fuel pump failure. necessary.
Fuel selector valve Reposition as required.
in improper position.
Check for obstructions
in the fuel selector
leverage mechanism.
Damaged fuel selector Replace fuel selector
valve. valve.
Fuel quantity gauge Broken wire. Check and repair.
fails to operate.
Gauge inoperative. Replace gauge.
Fuel sender float Replace sender.
partially or completely
filled with fuel.
Circuit breaker open. Check and reset.
Float and arm assembly Check.
of fuel sender sticking.
Bad ground. Check for good contact
at ground lip or rear
of gauge.
No fuel pressure Fuel selector valve Check fuel selector
indication. stuck. valve.
Fuel tanks empty. Check fuel tanks and fill.
Defective gauge. Replace gauge.
Fuel selector valve Reposition fuel selector
in improper position. valve lever.
Lower pressure or Obstruction in inlet Trace lines and
pressure surges. side of pump. locate obstruction.
Air in line to Bleed line.
pressure gauge.
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 28-00-00 3F16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
View A - A Nozzles vented

Rotated 90° clockwise to Deck Pressure
Vapor Line
Fuel Nozzle
Fuel Line
(3 places)
To Intake Metering Flow Divider

Manifold Unit
Deck
Fuel Flow
Transducer
Turbochargers
Differential
Pressure
Engine Driven Fuel Pump Switch
Seal Drain
Firewall
Manifold Pressure
and Flow Gauge Filter Electric Emergency
and Drain Fuel Pump
Supply Line
Fuel Pressure
ON
LEFT RIGHT Switch
OFF
Fuel Selector Handle
Fuel Selector Valve
Fuel Boost Fuel Lines
A Pump
Left Tank Right Tank

Filler
Cap
A Collector Vent Line

Tank Drain Finger
NACA Vent Screens
Fuel Quantity
Gauge
Fuel System
Figure 1
3F17 28-00-00 FebPAGE 3

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 28-00-00 3F18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3F19 28-00-00 FebPAGE 5

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 6
Feb 28/07 28-00-00 3F20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
STORAGE
The wing tanks are an integral part of the outboard wing sections. The liquid tight wing tanks are formed
by bonding the wing skins with the ribs and stringers (i.e. - wet-wings). Holes in the ribs and spar permit
movement of the fuel within the wings. There are ten access covers on the underside of each wing for
access to the sealed portion of the tank.
1. Access Covers
In S/N’s 4636021 thru 4636379, wet-wing access covers are sealed with sealant and secured with screws.
In S/N’s 4636380 and up, the wet-wing access covers use Mold-in-Place seals and are secured with
screws.
NOTE: In S/N’s 4636380 and up, the early plain access covers can be used if the newer Mold-in-Place
seal access covers are not available, but they then must be installed using sealant as described
for S/N’s 4636021 thru 4636379 under Installation, below.
A. Removal
(1) Drain all fuel from the wing tank being serviced.
(2) Ensure electrical power is “OFF”.
(3) Remove the access cover as follows:
(a) In S/N’s 4636021 thru 4636379, remove the screws securing the access cover. With a
suitable tool, pry the access cover away from the wing, taking care not to damage the
mating surfaces - especially on the wing. When the access cover becomes free, carefully
lower the cover and sender out of the wing until the electrical connection can be reached
and disconnected.
(b) In S/N’s 4636380 and up, remove the screws securing the access cover and carefully
and disconnected.
B. Installation (PIR-PPS50076, Rev. New.)

(2) In S/N’s 4636021 thru 4636379, apply Products Research Co. (PRC) PR1428-B-2 (or
PR1403G-B-2) sealant and install the access cover on the wing with screws. Allow sealant to
cure 72 hours before refilling tanks.
CAUTION: DO NOT USE ACETONE TO CLEAN COVER AND MATING SURFACE, AS IT IS
NOT COMPATIBLE WITH MOLD-IN-PLACE SEAL MATERIAL.
(3) In S/N’s 4636380 and up, clean access cover and mating surface using isopropyl alcohol. Allow
to air dry for 15 minutes minimum. Loosely install all screws to hold the panel in place. Using
the sequence in Figure 1, lightly snug all screws. Following the same pattern torque all screws
to 25 inch.-lbs.
3F21 28-10-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Final torque all screws to 25 to 30 inch pounds
8 4 1 6 10
12 14
16 18
20 19
15
17
11
13 9 5 3
2 7
PPS 50076 New
Effectivity Fuel Access Cover Torque Pattern

2. Leak Evaluation
Routine monitoring of the fuel storage system and prompt attention to any anomalies discovered will
ensure trouble-free operation. Most fuel leaks will be identified by the pilot during pre-flight inspection
and will generally consist of a stain or leak around the vent scoop, filler, drain valves, and wing surface in
the wet-wing or along the plumbing lines in the wing or engine compartment. The following provides
criteria for evaluating various categories of leaks and the maintenance action required.
A. Wing tanks.
WARNING: CAREFULLY EXAMINE ANY LEAKAGE TO ENSURE THAT IT IS NOT
PROGRESSING TO A CRITICAL AREA OF THE AIRPLANE AND THAT THERE IS
NO POSSIBILITY OF FUEL BEING BLOWN INTO THE FUSELAGE AREAS.
(1) Upper wing surface.
The airplane may be released for flight with a fuel leak in the upper wing surface provided the
required fuel load will allow the fuel level to remain below the leak area.
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 28-10-00 3F22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 1
WET-WING FUEL LEAK EVALUATION
FUEL TANK HEAVY RUNNING AND
LEAKAGE LOCATION STAIN SEEP SEEP RUN DRIPPING
Upper Wing Surface 1 1 2 3 4
Rear of Fwd. Spar 1 2 3 3 4
Behind Leading Edge 2 2 3 4 4
Lower Wing Surface 1 2 3 4 4
REQUIRED ACTION
1. No repair action required, frequent inspections must be made to assure that leak does not progress.
2. No immediate repair required. Frequent inspection must be made to assure that leak does not progress.
Repair must be made within the next 100 hours.
3. Flight may be continued to base or to repair facility for repair at pilot’s discretion.
4. Immediate repair required.
(2) Lower wing surface.

Aircraft may be released for flight with fuel leaks in the lower wing skin as follows: (See Figure 2)
Stain (Detail A), Seep (Detail B), and Heavy Seep (Detail C).
(3) Fuel leakage from the integral fuel tanks (i.e. - wet-wing) can be divided into the five categories
shown in Figure 2. Each category is identified by a visual examination of the wetted area
around the source of leakage over time.
To evaluate a leak, clean all wetted area in the vicinity of a leak. Wait two (2) hours and
reexamine the leak area and apply the following criteria to identify the leak category and
required maintenance action. (See Figure 2 and Chart 1.)
(a) A stain (Detail A) is evaluated as a leak where fuel wets an area around the apparent leak
source such that the wetted area width is not over two (2) inches.
(b) A seep (Detail B) is defined as a leak where the fuel wets an area around the apparent
leak source such that the wetted area width is not over six (6) inches. The fuel must not
run, flow, drip, or have any resemblance to any one of these conditions.
(c) A heavy seep (Detail C) is a leak where fuel appears to spread very slowly and covers an
area larger than the six (6) inches specified under seep, but does not flow, run or drip.
(d) A run (Detail D) is defined as a leak where the fuel is dripping at a rate of less than ten
(10) drops per minute or flowing slowly. A leak of this type is readily identifiable as fuel will
appear immediately after wiping the area clean.
(e) A running or dripping leak (Detail E) is any leak in excess of the run leak (Detail D). This
type requires immediate repair of the leak.
NOTE: These five (5) categories are based on reexamination of the leak two (2) hours after
the wetted area has been thoroughly cleaned.
B. Fuel plumbing.
WARNING: EVIDENCE OF FUEL LEAKAGE IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT MUST BE
REPAIRED AND THE AREA CLEANED PRIOR TO STARTING ENGINE.
All such leaks must be repaired before further flight.
3F23 28-10-00 FebPAGE 3

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Categorizing Fuel Leaks in the Wet-Wing

Figure 2
PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 28-10-00 3F24
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ENGINE DRIVEN
FUEL PUMP FUEL SYSTEM LEAK TEST SETUP
(RIGHT SIDE SHOWN, LEFT SIDE OPPOSITE)
FIREWALL
FUEL SUPPLY HOSE
(DISCONNECT AND CAP HERE)
FILTER
AND ELECTRIC EMERGENCY FUEL PUMP
DRAIN
SUPPLY LINE
FUEL PRESSURE
SWITCH
CLEAR PLASTIC HOSE
MANOMETER HOSE SCALE

(EACH MINOR TICK = 0.2 IN. H2O)
OPEN TO AMBIENT
MAX. HEIGHT = 43 IN. H2O
42 IN. H2O TEST PRESSURE
ZERO MARK
22 IN.
1. FILL TO 22 IN. MARK
WITH COLORED WATER.
2. ADJUST SCALE TO ZERO MARK.
FUEL
SELECTOR WATER MANOMETER
VALVE
FUEL LINES
SPECIAL FUEL FILLER CAP

SMALL ORIFICE FITTING SHOP AIR HOSE
FUEL BOOST
PUMP
RIGHT WING FUEL TANK VENT

TANK (PLUG HERE)
DRAIN FINGER SCREENS

VENT LINE
SHOP AIR SOURCE

FUEL QUANTITY GAUGE QUICK DISCONNECT NEEDLE VALVE
Fuel System Leak Test Setup

Figure 3
3G1 28-10-00 FebPAGE 5

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. Fuel System Leak Test (PIR-PPS60049-2, Rev. B.)
A. Set Up
(1) Locate the airplane and remove appropriate cowlings, and access plates and panels to provide
access to the fuel lines and fuel system components.
(2) Make available appropriate caps and plugs for closing lines and vents.
(3) Prepare a mild solution of soap and water for leak detection. Use only Colgate-Palmolive Co.,
Liquid M Mild 1 Hand Soap in this solution.
B. Test Fixture (See Figure 3.)
Construct or procure a test fixture with the following features:
(1) A quick-disconnect fitting for quickly removing shop air.
(2) A needle valve to shut-off shop air and hold pressure in the fuel system.
(3) A special fuel filler cap with fittings to accept shop air input (small orifice) and output to a water
manometer.
NOTE: The shop air fitting must incorporate a small orifice (approximately 0.025 inch) to
restrict shop air inflow and minimize the chance of over-pressurizing the system. Mark
the small orifice fitting to identify it from the other fitting.
(4) Appropriate hoses to connect shop air and the manometer to the special fuel filler cap.
NOTE: To minimize the chance of cross-connecting shop air and the manometer to the wrong
fitting, these hoses should be semi-permanently connected to the special fuel filler
cap.
(5) The water manometer must be marked in inches at two-tenths of an inch intervals, have a
height of no more than 43 inches, and must be open to the ambient air as a safety.
C. Procedure
NOTE: Possible areas for leaks in the system are all fuel system hoses, lines and component
connections, wet-wing and collector tank access covers, fuel tank fillers and tank skin
joints.
NOTE: Use appropriate caps for closing open lines and vents. Use soap and water mixture spray
to check for leaks.
(1) Defuel the aircraft.
(2) Disconnect fuel supply hose from engine-driven fuel pump and cap hose.
(3) Check left wing system as follows:
(a) Install special fuel filler cap on left wing fuel filler.
NOTE: Verify that shop air hose is connected to the fitting with the small orifice and
manometer hose is connected to the other fitting.
(b) Verify needle valve is fully closed and connect shop air to the quick disconnect fitting.
(c) Plug left wing fuel tank vent.
(d) Set fuel selector handle on LEFT tank position.
PAGE 6
Feb 28/07 28-10-00 3G2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
WARNING: IF MANOMETER FAILS TO RISE, CLOSE NEEDLE VALVE IMMEDIATELY

AND DETERMINE CAUSE.
CAUTION: TO PREVENT FUEL TANK DAMAGE, DO NOT EXCEED 42 IN. H20 (1.5 PSI).
(e) Slowly open needle valve and watch manometer for a rise in pressure.
(f) Allow manometer to rise to a test pressure of 42 ± ¼ In. H2O and close needle valve.
(g) Disconnect shop air and monitor leakage rate. A maximum leakage rate of ½ In. H2O in
five (5) minutes is permissible. If the leakage rate exceeds this, detect the leak location
and repair. Use soap solution as required.
(h) At the end of the five (5) minute period, turn the fuel selector valve handle rapidly to the
RIGHT position, the OFF position, and back to the LEFT position. The right wing system
should not pressurize during this test.
NOTE: Moving the selector valve handle rapidly reduces the pressure lost when the left
and right ports overlap as the tanks are switched.
(i) Remove plug from left wing fuel tank vent and allow pressure to exhaust to ambient.
Watch the manometer and verify that the vent relief valve closes between 27.7 In. H2O
(1.0 PSI) and 2.8 In. H2O (0.1 PSI).
(j) Remove all caps, plugs, and test equipment. Proceed to right wing system check or
reinstall fuel supply hose to engine-driven fuel pump, if finished.
(3) Check right wing system as follows:
(a) Install special fuel filler cap on right wing fuel filler.
NOTE: Verify that shop air hose is connected to the fitting with the small orifice and
manometer hose is connected to the other fitting.
(b) Verify needle valve is fully closed and connect shop air to the quick disconnect fitting.
(c) Plug right wing fuel tank vent.
(d) Set fuel selector handle on RIGHT tank position.
WARNING: IF MANOMETER FAILS TO RISE, CLOSE NEEDLE VALVE IMMEDIATELY
AND DETERMINE CAUSE.
CAUTION: TO PREVENT FUEL TANK DAMAGE, DO NOT EXCEED 42 IN. H20 (1.5 PSI).
(e) Slowly open needle valve and watch manometer for a rise in pressure.
(f) Allow manometer to rise to a test pressure of 42 ± ¼ In. H2O and close needle valve.
(g) Disconnect shop air and monitor leakage rate. A maximum leakage rate of ½ In. H2O in
five (5) minutes is permissible. If the leakage rate exceeds this, detect the leak location
and repair. Use soap solution as required.
(h) At the end of the five (5) minute period, turn the fuel selector valve handle rapidly to the
LEFT position, the OFF position, and back to the RIGHT position. The left wing system
should not pressurize during this test.
NOTE: Moving the selector valve handle rapidly reduces the pressure lost when the left
and right ports overlap as the tanks are switched.
(i) Remove plug from right wing fuel tank vent and allow pressure to exhaust to ambient.
Watch the manometer and verify that the vent relief valve closes between 27.7 In. H2O
(1.0 PSI) and 2.8 In. H2O (0.1 PSI).
(j) Remove all caps, plugs, and test equipment. Reinstall fuel supply hose to engine-driven
fuel pump.
3G3 28-10-00 FebPAGE 7

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 8
Feb 28/07 28-10-00 3G4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
DISTRIBUTION
Fuel distribution consists of the collector tanks, two electric boost pumps, an emergency electric fuel
pump, fuel selector and switches, inline filter, and engine driven fuel pump.
1. Collector Tanks
A. Description
Each collector tank is accessible through the main landing gear wheel well access panel. The
collector tank contains the electric boost pump, flapper valves and drain valve.
NOTE: Because both collector tanks are the same, only one removal/installation sequence will be
given.
B. Electric Fuel Pump
(1) Removal
(a) Defuel the wing tank of the appropriate side.
(b) Ensure selector valve is in the OFF position.
(c) Drain remaining fuel from the collector tank.
(d) Remove the access panel from the collector tank and lower wing forward of the collector
tank.
(e) Disconnect the electrical connection to the pump and the fuel line from the pump. Cap the
open line to prevent any possible contamination.
(f) Remove the four nuts securing the collector tank and remove the tank.
(g) Remove the two screws securing the pump to the tank and remove the pump.
(2) Installation
(a) Position fuel pump with gasket into the tank and secure in place with the two pump
mounting screws.
(b) Install tank into place and secure with the four nuts.
(c) Remove the protective cap from the fuel line and connect to the fuel pump outlet.
(d) Connect the electrical connector to the pump leads.
(e) Ensure collector tank is clean, then install the tank access cover. Seal the access cover
using MIL-S-8784.
(f) Reinstall the access panel on the lower wing.
CHART 1
ELECTRIC FUEL PUMP SPECIFICATIONS
DESCRIPTION AIRBORNE 2C6-7 AIRBORNE 1B9-4
EMERGENCY
Voltage (Vdc) 28 28
Current (Amps) 4.0 (Max.) 6.0 (Max.)
Fuel Flow 0 - 340 PPH 0 - 375 PPH
Fuel Pressure 7 (MIN.) - 12 (MAX.) 35 (MIN.) - 47 (MAX.)
Proof pressure 60 PSI 60 PSI
(Zero external leakage)
3G5 28-20-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2. Fuel Selector Valve

CAUTION: NO FIELD DISASSEMBLY OR REPAIR OF FUEL SELECTOR VALVES IS AUTHORIZED.
MAINTENANCE IS LIMITED TO REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT OF THE WHOLE UNIT.
A. Description
The selector valve is located behind an access panel (pressure closeout plate) on the right hand
side of the fuselage interior. The valve is mounted aft of the F.S. 139.8 frame in a compartment that
is sealed off from the pressurized interior.
B. Removal
(1) Drain both fuel tanks. (Refer to 12-10-00, Draining Fuel System.)
(2) Gain access to the pressure closeout panels on the right hand side of the fuselage interior.
(3) Loosen the hose clamps which secure the fuel line pressure seal halves to the fuel line going
to the left tank.
(4) Remove the screws and washers that secure the base of the pressure closeout plate to the
frames. Slide the pressure closeout plate inboard along the fuel line going to the left tank.
(5) Disconnect the fuel selector cable from the actuating arm on the bottom of the fuel selector
valve.
(6) Disconnect the switches electrical connector.
(7) At the fittings on the valve, remove the three fuel lines that connect to the valve.
(8) Remove the screw that holds the fuel selector support to the frame.
C. Installation
(1) Position the fuel selector valve in the compartment. Secure the valve support to the frame with
the screw.
(2) Attach the three fuel lines to the valve.
(3) Reconnect the switches’ electrical connector.
(4) Reconnect the fuel selector cable to the actuating arm on the bottom of the fuel selector valve.
(5) Secure the base of the pressure closeout plate to the frames with screws and washers.
Fuel Selector Switch and Valve

Figure 1
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 28-20-00 3G6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(6) Tighten the hose clamps on the fuel line pressure seal halves which are on the fuel line going
to the left tank.
(7) Fill the fuel tanks and check for proper operation of the fuel selector valve.
D. Switches Adjustment
With the selector valve/switch removed from the airplane:
(1) Ensure that the switch has a pin overtravel of 0.06 in.
(2) When the handle is moved to its various positions, ensure that:
(a) The left switch should make contact (closed circuit) when the handle is in its mid position.
The left switch should be an open circuit when the handle is in the off and right positions.
(b) The right switch should make contact (closed circuit) when the handle is in the right
position. The right switch should be an open circuit when the handle is in the off and left
positions.
(3) Ensure that the plungers point to the axis of handle rotation. Adjust the switches on the cam by
moving them towards or away from the cam, not by twisting the switches to one side.
3. Fuel Selector Cable Adjustment
Adjust fuel selector cable so that the fuel selector arm will be in the (center) detent position when the
selector knob, located on the instrument panel, is moved to the left tank (center) position from the right
tank position. Visually check the fuel selector arm and cam to confirm proper adjustment. Properly
adjusted, the selector knob will not reach the instrument panel slot travel limits when resting in the right
tank and off positions. Travel should be equal distance from center ± .10.
4. Fuel Filter
NOTE: For routine filter servicing, refer to 12-10-00, Fuel System.
A. Removal
Access to the fuel filter is through the forward baggage compartment, right side floor panel access
cover.
(1) Ensure fuel selector control is in the OFF position.
(2) Remove the forward baggage compartment carpet.
(3) Open the right side floor access panel.
(4) Drain all fuel from the filter bowl, thru the outside drain valve.
(5) Disconnect and cap both fuel lines at the filter assembly.
(6) Cut safety wire and remove the two mounting bolts from the filter and remove assembly from
airplane.
B. Installation
(1) Position filter into airplane with the inlet port facing the outboard skin and the drain valve
inserted in the lower opening of the fuselage.
(2) Secure the filter assembly to its mounting bracket with two bolt and washer sets. Torque to
standard value and safety with 0.020 wire per MIL-W-6713.
(3) Remove protective caps from fuel lines and connect to filter assembly.
(4) Position fuel selector control to one of the ON positions and check fittings for leaks. Upon
completion of check return selector to the OFF position.
(5) Install the floor access panel and secure in place.
(6) Install the baggage compartment carpet.
3G7 28-20-00 FebPAGE 3

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
5. Fuel Drain Valve

A. Description
Fuel drain valves are located under each inboard wing. They are actuated either: by pushing up on
the screwdriver slot for fuel check or by removal of the entire valve for rapid draining.
NOTE: Nut and nut retainer are secured inside tank and do not need to be removed.
B. O-ring Replacement
(1) Drain fuel by turning hexagonal base of drain valve. Remove drain valve from wing.
(2) Remove external O-ring located on hexagonal base.
(3) Remove snap ring to release inner assembly.
(4) Remove inner assembly by pushing up on drain screw with a screwdriver.
(5) Remove internal O-ring.
(6) Soak replacement O-rings in hydraulic fluid and coat with fluid compatible gel.
(7) Install O-rings.
(8) Replace inner assembly. Replace snap ring.
(9) Install drain valve in wing.
6. Electric Boost Pump
These pumps are located in each collector tank built into each wing wheel well area. Access to each
pump is through the wheel well and removal of the sealed access cover on the side of the collector tank.
NOTE: Wing tank and collector tank must be drained prior to removal of the collector tank access cover.
Refer to Collector Tank for removal and installation instructions for the electric boost pump.
Fuel Drain Valve

Figure 2
PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 28-20-00 3G8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
7. Emergency Fuel Pump

The emergency fuel pump is mounted on brackets attached to the forward, right hand side of the forward
pressure bulkhead below the floor.
A. Removal
(1) Turn fuel selector to OFF position.
(2) Disconnect electrical leads.
(3) Drain fuel from engine to shutoff valve through fuel filter drain valve.
(4) Disconnect fuel supply hose from emergency fuel pump fitting.
(5) Disconnect fuel supply hose from fuel filter inlet.
(6) Disconnect pressure switch fuel hose from fuel filter.
(7) Remove safety wire and two mounting bolts from fuel filter.
(8) Remove safety wire and three mounting bolts from emergency fuel pump.
(9) Remove emergency fuel pump and filter assembly from aircraft.
(10) Loosen jam nut at fuel pump inlet fitting.
(11) Remove emergency fuel pump.
B. Installation
NOTE: Be sure to replace O-rings at inlet and discharge pump fittings.
(1) Position emergency fuel pump onto filter and tighten jam nut at emergency fuel pump inlet
fitting.
(2) Position emergency fuel pump and filter assembly into place in aircraft.
(3) Secure emergency fuel pump to mounting brackets with three mounting bolts and safety wire.
(4) Secure fuel filter to mounting bracket with two mounting bolts and safety wire.
(5) Connect pressure switch fuel hose to fuel filter.
(6) Connect fuel supply hose to fuel filter inlet.
(7) Connect fuel supply hose to emergency fuel pump fitting.
(8) Connect electrical leads.
(9) Check system for leaks.
3G9 28-20-00 FebPAGE 5

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 6
Feb 28/07 28-20-00 3G10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3G11 28-20-00 FebPAGE 7

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 8
Feb 28/07 28-20-00 3G12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INDICATING
NOTE: Serial numbers (S/N’s) 4636021 and up incorporate Integrated Engine Instrumentation
Systems. See Chapter/Section 77-40-00 for more information.
1. Fuel Quantity Senders
NOTE: Two fuel quantity senders are mounted in each fuel tank and transmit electrically the quantity of
the fuel in each tank, to the fuel quantity gauge/indicator mounted in the instrument panel.
The senders are located within the wing tank at W.S. 125.00 and 195.50. Both units are mounted on
pedestals which are part of the forward access covers in the lower surface of the wing tank.
A. Removal
CAUTION: IN S/N’S 4636021 AND UP, INBOARD AND OUTBOARD FUEL QUANTITY
SENDERS IN EACH WING MUST BE REPLACED AS A MATCHED SET.
IN S/N’S 4636021 THRU 4636379, ORDER KIT NO. 766-673 (L.H. WING) AND/OR
KIT NO. 766-674 (R.H. WING) AS REQUIRED. (EACH KIT CONSISTS OF ONE
INBOARD AND ONE OUTBOARD SENSOR.)
IN S/N’S 4636380 AND UP, ORDER KIT NO. 767-521 (L.H. WING) AND/OR KIT NO.
767-520 (R.H. WING) AS REQUIRED. (EACH KIT CONSISTS OF ONE INBOARD
AND ONE OUTBOARD SENSOR.)
NOTE: Kits No. 766-673 and 766-674 can be used in S/N’s 4636380 and up, but
must be installed using sealant as described for S/N’s 4636021 thru
4636379 under Installation, below.
(1) Drain all fuel from the wing tank being serviced.
(3) Using a temporary marker or tape, mark the sender access cover to indicate aircraft forward.
(4) Remove the sender access cover as follows:
(a) In S/N’s 4636021 thru 4636379, remove the screws securing the access cover. With a
suitable tool, pry the access cover away from the wing, taking care not to damage the
mating surfaces - especially on the wing. When the access cover becomes free, carefully
and disconnected.
(b) In S/N’s 4636380 and up, remove the screws securing the access cover and carefully
and disconnected.
(5) Note the position of the sender unit to its mounting pedestal prior to removing the sender from
the access cover/pedestal.
B. Installation
(1) Install sender unit on its mounting pedestal on the bracket (if previously removed). Ensure the
sender unit is properly positioned on the bracket.
(2) Connect the electrical leads (from inside the tank) to the sender assembly.
CAUTION: ENSURE THAT WIRES ARE ROUTED ON FORWARD SIDE OF SENDER
PRIOR TO SECURING SENDER PLATE TO WING.
(3) In S/N’s 4636021 thru 4636379, ensure that the sender unit/access cover is properly
positioned in relation to the wing, apply Products Research Co. (PRC) PR1428-B-2 (or
PR1403G-B-2) sealant and install the sender unit/access plate on the wing with screws. Allow
sealant to cure 72 hours before refilling tanks.
(4) In S/N’s 4636380 and up, ensure that the sender unit/access cover is properly positioned in
relation to the wing, and install the sender unit/access plate with screws. Torque the screws per
Figure 1, 28-10-00.
3G13 28-40-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FUEL QUANTITY
INDICATOR 102.3 OHMS
(REAR VIEW)
A B 75.2 OHMS
28 VDC
+ GND
C 58.7 OHMS
D 38.8 OHMS
SWITCH
E 29.5 OHMS
LEFT RIGHT
F 16.1 OHMS
DUMMY RESISTOR G
( ANY VALUE 6.8 OHMS
6.8 TO 102.3 OHMS )
LEFT RIGHT
NULL AND GAIN NULL AND GAIN
POTENTIOMETERS POTENTIOMETERS
Pre-Installation Test Set-up (S/N’s 4636001 thru 4636020 only.)

Figure 1
2. Fuel Quantity Gauge Accuracy Test (S/N’s 4636001 thru 4636020 only.) (PIR-PPS60032-8, Rev. B.)
A. Pre-installation check.
Prior to installation, bench test the gauge as follows:
(1) Install dummy resistor across left or right sender as shown in Figure 1.
(2) Connect resistance decade across sender terminals not used by dummy resistor.
(3) Apply 28 ±1 VDC to the positive and negative terminals at the rear of the gauge and through
the resistance decade as shown in Figure 1.
(4) Low end adjustment: Select position “G” on resistor decade. Verify that instrument needle
points to “E.” If not, adjust respective “NULL” potentiometer to center needle on “E” radial.
(5) High end adjustment: Select position “A” on resistor decade. Verify that instrument needle
points to “F.” If not, adjust respective “GAIN” potentiometer to center needle on “F” radial.
(6) Full range check: After low and high end adjustments have been made, verify that for each
resistive value the gauge indication is as specified in Chart 1.
B. Post-installation functional check.
(1) Set up:
(a) Level the airplane ±1 degree laterally and longitudinally. See 8-20-00.
(b) Place the battery switch in the OFF position.
(c) Connect the external power supply unit.
(d) Adjust the power supply to provide 28 ±1 VDC.
(e) Continue with procedure below, record test results when completed.
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 28-40-00 3G14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 1
PRE-INSTALLATION GAUGE CHECK
SWITCH* RESISTANCE GAUGE TOLERANCE**
POSITION IN OHMS INDICATION (NEEDLEWIDTHS)
G 6.8 E + 0, - 1/2
F 16.1 5 ± 1/2
E 29.5 10 ± 1/2
D 38.8 15 ± 1/2
C 58.7 30 ± 1/2
B 75.2 45 ± 1/2
A 102.3 F ± 1/2
* - SEE FIGURE 1
** - SEE FIGURE 2
CHART 2
FULL RANGE CHECK
TOTAL FUEL QUANTITY (US GAL) GAUGE TOLERANCE*
(INCLUDES 1 GAL UNUSABLE) INDICATION (NEEDLEWIDTHS)
1 E + 0, - 1
6 5 ± 3/4
11 10 ± 3/4
16 15 ±1
31 30 ± 1 1/2
46 45 ± 1 1/2
60 F ± 1 1/2
* - SEE FIGURE 2.
1 / 2 NEEDLE WIDTH
APPROPRIATE
RADIAL MARK
NEEDLE DEVIATION
NEEDLE
Needlewidth
Figure 2
3G15 28-40-00 FebPAGE 3

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(2) Low end gauge check: With the tanks completely dry, turn the fuel selector to Left or Right. Add
one gallon (unusable) fuel to each tank. Check that the needle of each gauge points to “E.” If
not, adjust the respective “NULL” potentiometer until the needle centers on “E” (± 0, -1/2).
(3) High end gauge check: With the tanks full, check that the needle of each gauge points to “F.” If
not, adjust the respective “GAIN” trim potentiometer until the needle centers on “F.”
(4) Full range gauge check, use either of the following methods:
(a) With the tanks full, defuel each tank fifteen gallons at a time until 15 gallons is reached
and then, five gallons at a time until empty. Check the gauge indication at each increment
against the tolerances specified in Chart 2.
(b) Starting with the tanks empty, add fuel to each tank to the increments specified in Chart 2.
Check the gauge indication at each stage against the tolerances specified in Chart 2.
NOTE: With either of the above methods, be sure and vibrate the tank by hand bumping its lower
surface and vibrate the gauge by finger tapping the glass at each measurement point.
3. Fuel Quantity Gauge Calibration (S/N’s 4636021 thru 4636374.) (PIR-PPS60032-13, Rev. O.)
NOTE: S/N’s 4636021 thru 4636374 - Review Chapter/Section 77-40-00: Transicoil Electronic Module
Instrument System (EMIS) to ensure a basic understanding of the system components and their
operation before proceeding
NOTE: S/N’s 4636021 thru 4636131 only - If utilizing resistance measurements from Chart 4, it will be
necessary to connect a digital ohmmeter per Chart 4. To troubleshoot outputs from fuel tank
senders, disconnect harness from back of gauge and read resistance across the appropriate pins.
A. Set up:
(1) Level the airplane ±1 degree laterally and longitudinally. See 8-20-00.
(2) Place the battery switch in the OFF position.
(3) Connect the external power supply unit.
(4) Adjust the power supply to provide 28 ±1 VDC.
(5) Continue with procedure below, record test results in Chart 4 when completed.
B. Non-Programmable Transicoil EMIS Gauge (S/N’s 4636021 thru 4636131 only)
NOTE: The Programmable Transicoil EMIS Gauge (P/N 602-222) installed in S/N’s 4636132 thru
4636374 as original equipment is backwardly compatible and may be found installed in
S/N’s 4636021 thru 4636131 as a service spare. These modules can be identified by the
absence of potentiometers and the presence of a calibration switch on the left side of the
module. If found, calibrate per Programmable Transicoil EMIS Gauge, below, substituting
Quad Digital Indicator (QDI) for each reference to the Enhanced Digital Indicator (EDI).
PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 28-40-00 3G16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
“E” (Empty) Needle Tolerance

Figure 3
“F” (Full) Needle Tolerance

Figure 4
(1) Low End Gauge Check

CAUTION: USE NON-CONDUCTIVE BLADE SCREWDRIVER TO ADJUST
POTENTIOMETERS.
With both tanks completely dry, add one gallon (unusable) fuel to each tank. After the
measured amount has been put in the tank, vibrate the tank by bumping its lower surface.
Adjust potentiometers marked "Z" (clockwise to lower reading) until the analog pointers are at
the center of the "E" (empty) graduations. Allow indicators to stabilize for 30-40 seconds.
Readjust as required. Check digital readout for a "0" gallon indication. If digital does not
indicate "0", readjust appropriate "Z" potentiometer until both analog and digital read zero.
NOTE: The potentiometers are in cavities on the right and left sides of the fuel quantity
module (right potentiometer adjusts right gauge, left adjusts left gauge).
NOTE: Needles on analog gauges must not go below the "E" (empty) graduations. See
Figure 3. Tolerance on ''E" (empty indication) is ±0 gallons.
3G17 28-40-00 FebPAGE 5

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 3
FUEL QUANTITY MODULE DUAL ANALOG INDICATOR CALIBRATION RESISTANCE
Calibration Points - GAL E-0 5 15 30 45 F-60
Minimum Ohms 1.75 13.6 32.15 52.55 72.85 98.75
Nominal Ohms 6.75 18.6 42.15 62.55 80.85 108.75
Maximum Ohms 11.75 28.6 51.15 70.55 90.85 113.75
Acceptable Tolerance ±5 -5/+10 -10/+9 -10/+8 -8/+10 -10/+5
(2) Full End Gauge Check

Add 60 gallons of fuel to each tank. After the measured amounts have been put in tanks,
vibrate the tanks by bumping their lower surfaces. Adjust "S" (span) potentiometers (counter-
clockwise to lower reading) so the analog needles point to "F" (full) graduations. Turn "S"
potentiometers so digital indicators read 58 gals. Turn "S" potentiometers in opposite direction
until digital readings just change from 59 to 60 gals. At this point turn the "S" potentiometers
1/4 turn more in the increasing reading direction. Permissible to have analog needles touching
top edges of (F) graduations after the adjustments have been made. Allow indicators to
stabilize for 30-40 seconds. Readjust as required. Check digital readout for 60 gallon
indication. If digital does not indicate "60", readjust "S" (span) potentiometer so both analogs
and digital read 60.
NOTE: The potentiometers are in cavities on the right and left sides of the fuel quantity
module (right potentiometer adjusts right gauge, left adjusts left gauge).
NOTE: Needles on analog gauges must not go above "F" (full) graduations. See Figure 4.
C. Programmable Transicoil EMIS Gauge (S/N’s 4636132 thru 4636374)
(1) Initiation of Calibration Mode.
The left and right Fuel Quantity Module Analog Indicators are calibrated individually. The
following instructions specifically address the left indicator.
(a) If fuel quantity indicator is installed in instrument panel, remove gauge from panel far
enough to move calibration switch on left side of the module from “RUN” to “CAL” position
(move switch toward front of gauge). This will place left fuel quantity instrument in auto-
calibration mode.
NOTE: Instrument power must be maintained to the Enhanced Digital Indicator
(EDI) and Fuel Quantity Module during the entire process. Any interruption
of power to the Fuel Quantity Module will reset the calibration sequence to 0.
(b) When the calibration switch is moved to “CAL” position, the EDI is automatically selected
and a fuel quantity will be displayed in the left window. Also, the yellow LED for the tank
being calibrated will be flashing.
(c) If the sensor input resistance from the left tank is within tolerance for the first calibration
step (E-0) as specified in Chart 3, then the green and yellow LED’s will flash alternately. If
the left sensor is out-of-range, only the yellow LED will flash on the left indicator. See
Figure 5.
PAGE 6
Feb 28/07 28-40-00 3G18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Fuel Quantity Module Dual Analog Indicator Enhanced Digital Indicator (EDI)
Figure 5
(2) Calibration Procedure

NOTE: The select button (see Figure 6) on the front of the fuel quantity module analog
indicator being calibrated will be used to set the calibration points and advance to the
next step.
(a) Add one (1) gallon (unusable) fuel to the left tank and allow the instrument and fuel to
settle for two (2) minutes.
NOTE: At each calibration step, vibrate the tank by bumping its lower surface.
(b) After two (2) minutes, the green and yellow LED’s on the module indicator will be flashing
alternately, the EDI will display “0” and the analog gauge will display “E” (see Figure 5).
(c) Press the left “SEL” button and hold for two (2) seconds. If the sensor is in tolerance for
the step being recorded, the LED’s will stop flashing and remain on, the external alarm
will sound and the EDI display and the fuel quantity module pointer will advance to the
next step. The external alarm will continue to sound as long as the “SEL” button is held.
NOTE: If the sensor is out-of-range for the calibration step being programmed, then
pressing the left “SEL” button will not advance the module to the next step.
(d) The calibration step sequence is: “E”, 5, 15, 30, 45, and “F”.
(e) When the module advances to the next step, normally only the yellow LED will flash until
fuel is added.
(f) Add the appropriate amount of fuel for the fuel point displayed. Do not press the left “SEL”
button when the green LED starts to flash. Allow the fuel and module to settle for two (2)
minutes, then press the left “SEL” button and advance to the next step.
(g) When 60 gallons of fuel have been added and a two (2) minute settling time has passed,
press the left “SEL” button. When you release the button, only the green LED will be
flashing. This indicates that the calibration is finished.
3G19 28-40-00 FebPAGE 7

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Fuel Quantity Module Dual Analog Indicator

Figure 6
(h) Reset the left indicator calibration switch (on the left side of the fuel quantity module) from
“CAL” to “RUN” (i.e. - move it towards the rear of the module). This will return the module
to normal operating mode.
(i) Initiate calibration for the right fuel quantity module analog indicator per (1) above and
then steps (2) (a) thru (h). The right indicator calibration switch is on the right side of the
fuel quantity module.
(j) Reinstall the fuel quantity module in the instrument panel.
D. Complete procedure as follows:
(1) If used, disconnect the digital ohmmeter.
(2) Disconnect the external power supply unit.
(3) Replace access covers.
4. Fuel Gauge Full Range Check (S/N’s 4636021 thru 4636374.) (PIR-PPS60032-13, Rev. O.)
NOTE: Full Range Check for S/N’s 4636001 thru 4636020 only, is provided under Fuel Quantity Gauge
Accuracy Test, above.
A. Set up per Fuel Quantity Gauge Calibration, Set up, above.
B. Non-Programmable Transicoil EMIS Gauge (S/N’s 4636021 thru 4636131 only).
NOTE: The Programmable Transicoil EMIS Gauge (P/N 602-222) installed in S/N’s 4636132 thru
4636374 as original equipment is backwardly compatible and may be found installed in
S/N’s 4636021 thru 4636131 as a service spare. These modules can be identified by the
absence of potentiometers and the presence of a calibration switch on the left side of the
module. If found, full range check per Programmable Transicoil EMIS Gauge, below.
(1) Defuel both fuel tanks. As fuel level decreases to 5 +0/-1 gals, verify the low fuel alarms sound.
(2) When defueling is complete, verify that the needles on analog gauges are pointing to the areas
of the "E" graduations as described in Fuel Quantity Gauge Calibration, Non-Programmable
Transicoil EMIS Gauge, above. If pointers are out of prescribed range, vibrate the tanks by
bumping their lower surfaces. Repeat Fuel Quantity Gauge Calibration, Non-Programmable
Transicoil EMIS Gauge, above, if the pointers do not return to the prescribed range.
PAGE 8
Feb 28/07 28-40-00 3G20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(3) When pointers are adjusted correctly, fill each tank with 5 gals of fuel (after (1) gal. unusable
has been added) and record data in Chart 4.
(4) Fill tanks in 15, 30, 45 and 60 gal. increments and record data in Chart 4. Vibrate the tanks by
bumping their lower surfaces at each calibration point.
(a) While filling the tanks, check operation of imbalance fuel annunciator light by adding 10
+1/-0 gals more to right tank than left. Light should illuminate.
(b) Reverse procedure and fill left tank with 10 +1/-0 gals more fuel than right. Again, light
must illuminate. (Tanks do not need to be drained for this check). 60 seconds required
from time imbalance exists until light illuminates.
(5) Finish filling tanks to 60 gals capacity each. Tolerance on gauge readings at each increment
between "E" and "F" but not including "E" and "F" is ± 2 gallons.
(6) After refueling verify that needles on analog gauges are pointing to the areas of the "F"
graduations as described in Fuel Quantity Gauge Calibration, Non-Programmable Transicoil
EMIS Gauge, above.
CHART 4
FUEL CALIBRATION WORKSHEET
FUEL CALIBRATION LEFT TANKS

RIGHT TANKS
RESISTANCE (OHMS) 1
CONNECTOR P336 **
TANK CAPACITY LEFT RIGHT GAUGE READINGS 2 TOLERANCE (GALS)
(GALLONS) PINS *** PINS *** ANALOG DIGITAL (ON GAUGE READING)
0.0 7.1 6.4 ±0
(1) Gal. Unusable 7.1 6.4 ±0
5 17.9 19.3 ±2
15 42.6 41.7 ±2
30 64.2 60.9 ±2
45 81.5 80.2 ±2
60 109.4 108.1 +0, -1
** This connector is located behind instrument.

*** For pin locations, refer to Fuel Quantity Electrical Schematic (S/N’s 4636021 and
up) in Chapter 91-28-40.
1 - Reference only - not a required measurement. Data applicable to S/N’s 4636021
thru 4636131 only.
2 - Allowed 2 gallon spread between analog and digital readings except at "0", "(1)
gal unusable" and "Full". Digital and analog must read the same at "0", "(1) gal
unusable" and "Full".
3G21 28-40-00 FebPAGE 9

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C. Programmable Transicoil EMIS Gauge (S/N’s 4636132 thru 4636374).

(1) Defuel both fuel tanks. As fuel level decreases to 5 +0/-1 gals, verify the low fuel alarms sound.
(2) When defueling is complete, verify that the needles on analog gauges are pointing to the areas
of the "E" graduations as shown in Figure 3 when tanks are empty. Tolerance on “E” (empty
indication) is ± 0 gallons. If pointers are out of prescribed range, vibrate the tanks by bumping
their lower surfaces. If pointers are out of the prescribed range after vibrating tanks, one or
both senders in the tank in question may have to be replaced.
(3) When pointers are indicating correctly, fill each tank with 1 gal (unusable) fuel. Indicators must
read “E” as described in Figure 3. Record data in Chart 4.
(4) Fill tanks in 5, 15, 30, 45 and 60 gal. increments and record data in Chart 4. Vibrate the tanks
by bumping their lower surfaces at each calibration point.
(a) While filling the tanks, check operation of imbalance fuel annunciator light by adding 10
+1/-0 gals more to right tank than left. Light should illuminate.
(b) Reverse procedure and fill left tank with 10 +1/-0 gals more fuel than right. Again, light
must illuminate.
(5) Finish filling tanks to 60 gals capacity each. Tolerance on gauge readings at each increment
between "E" and "F", but not including "E" and "F" is ± 2 gallons. “E” and 1 gal unusable have a
tolerance of ± 0 gal. “F” has tolerance of +0/-1 gal.
(6) After refueling verify that needles on analog gauges are pointing to the areas of the "F"
graduations as described in Figure 4.
D. Complete procedure as follows:
(1) If used, disconnect the digital ohmmeter.
(2) Disconnect the external power supply unit.
(3) Replace access covers.
PAGE 10
Feb 28/07 28-40-00 3G22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
5. Fuel Quantity Indicator Calibration (S/N’s 4636375 and up.) (PIR-PPS60226, Rev. NEW.)
A. Setup:
(1) Level the airplane per 8-20-00.
(2) Drain the fuel tanks per 12-10-00, Fuel System, Draining Fuel System - Complete.
B. From the MFD Maintenance page, depress the Line Select Key (L4) to access the Engine Setup
page.
C. Depress the “Fuel Cal” button (L1) to enter Fuel Calibration page.
(4) Depress the “Begin Cal”button (R3) and follow the on-screen calibration procedure for left and
right tank zero fuel (1.0 + .1-0 gal. unusable) and full calibration (60 + 0-1 gal. usable) points.
Wait approximately 3 minutes for fuel level to stabilize.
(5) Use the Right Knob to select the current calibration point. The selected calibration point is
highlighted and the value displayed is the current reported fuel quantity from the DAU. A
message at the bottom of the screen prompts the operator to add the appropriate amount of
fuel and then to select the “Accept Value” button (R3) once the value reported from the DAU
has stabilized.
NOTE: If the DAU reported value is not within 2.5 gallons of the test point value, a message
“DAU reported Fuel Quantity Out of Tolerance” will be presented and the value will not
be accepted.
(6) Once all points have been calibrated, the operator presses “Calibration Complete” to cause the
calibration factors to be computed and applied to the DAU reported fuel quantity.
(7) Other options from the Calibration Underway state are to “Restore Last Cal” and “Clear Cal”.
(a) Pressing “Restore Last Cal” causes the calibration values from the last completed
calibration to be restored and the state to change to Calibrated.
(b) Pressing “Clear Cal” causes all calibration values to be cleared and the state to change to
“Not Calibrated”. An “Are You Sure?” prompt will give the operator a chance to reconsider
the decision to either “Restore Last Cal” or “Clear Cal”.
(8) When the calibration procedure has been completed, press the Save button. If you decide not
to save the changes, pressing the Cancel button from the Underway state causes the current
calibration session to be aborted with any unsaved interim calibration values being discarded.
Changed will not take effect until the MFD has been restarted.
NOTE: The “empty” and “full” fuel readings on this setup page will NOT display zero (0) or 60
gallons usable fuel for respective empty and full calibration points. However, the
appropriate zero and full (60 U.S. gallons) will be displayed on the MFD in normal
operation mode (not maintenance setup.)
(9) Verify DAU Status Box reads: DAU(s) configured for Piper PA-46-350P (Mirage).
(10) Verify Calibration Status Box reads:
“Left Fuel Tank: Calibrated”
“Right Fuel Tank: Calibrated”
3G23 28-40-00 Feb

PAGE 11
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 12
Feb 28/07 28-40-00 3G24
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER
29
HYDRAULIC POWER
3H1
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3H2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 29
CHAPTER CHAPTER


2 Feb 28/06
29-00-00 1 Feb 28/06

2 Feb 28/06
3 Feb 28/06
4 Feb 28/06
29-10-00 1 Feb 28/06

2 Feb 28/06
3 Feb 28/06
4 Feb 28/06
5 Feb 28/06
6 Feb 28/06
7 Feb 28/06
8 Feb 28/06
9 Feb 28/06
10 Feb 28/06
11 Feb 28/06
12 Feb 28/06
13 Feb 28/06
14 Feb 28/06
15 Feb 28/06
16 Feb 28/06

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 29 - HYDRAULIC POWER
TABLE OF CONTENTS
GENERAL 29-00-00 1 3H7

Description and Operation 1 3H7
Hydraulic System Leading Particulars 1 3H7
MAIN 29-10-00 1 3H11

Description 1 3H11
Hydraulic Pump (Parker Hannifin) 1 3H11
Removal 1 3H11
Installation 3 3H13
Disassembly 3 3H13
Assembly 5 3H15
Hydraulic Pump (Frisby) 8 3H18
Removal 8 3H18
Installation 8 3H18
Testing 10 3H20
Bleeding Hydraulic System 11 3H21
Hydraulic Lines - Removal and Installation 11 3H21
Hydraulic System Testing 13 3H23
Hydraulic Pump / Reservoir Servicing 13 3H23

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GENERAL

The hydraulic system components covered in this chapter consist of the combination hydraulic pump/
reservoir and hydraulic lines. The brake system, although hydraulically operated, is not included in this
section as it has its own hydraulic system independent of the gear system. The brake system and
landing gear are covered in Chapter 32. The flap system in this aircraft is electric and is covered in
Chapter 27.
WARNING: PRIOR TO CHECKING OUT THE HYDRAULIC SYSTEM, PLACE THE AIRPLANE ON
JACKS. (REFER TO JACKING, 7-10-00.)
The hydraulic system provides the power to operate the landing gear using an electrically driven
hydraulic pump operating at 1350 to 1400 maximum psi. The hydraulic pump is located behind the aft
baggage compartment with access through a removable panel. The pump has a fluid sight gauge for
ease of checking fluid level, as an integral part of the unit. A relief valve in the pump prevents system
pressure from exceeding 1600 psi during pump operation. A thermal relief valve prevents hydraulic
pressure from exceeding 2600 psi when the landing gear is down and locked and airplane is on the
ground.
The landing gear selector is an electrical switch that commands the pump to operate in either the up or
down position. The gear is held in the up position by hydraulic pressure. Emergency gear extension is
accomplished by a free fall function of the gear selector valve which releases gear up hydraulic pressure,
allowing the gear to extend and lock.
2. Troubleshooting
If trouble develops in landing gear, place the airplane on jacks (refer to Jacking, 7-10-00), and proceed to
find the cause of the trouble. A hydraulic system operational check is provided under Hydraulic System
Testing, 29-10-00. See also Landing Gear Retraction System Functional Test, 32-30-00. When the
trouble has been recognized, the first step is to isolate the cause. After isolation of a particular cause or
problem, refer to the individual Chapter pertaining to that subject matter, i.e. Landing Gear: Chapter 32.
Hydraulic system troubles are not always traceable to one cause. It is possible that a malfunction may be
the result of more than one trouble in the system. Start with the most obvious and most probable
reasons for the trouble, check each possibility and, by process of elimination, isolate the troubles.
3. Hydraulic System Leading Particulars
See Charts 1 and 2.
3H7 29-00-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 1
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM LEADING PARTICULARS (PARKER HANNIFIN)
Hydraulic Pump, Electrically Driven, Reversible

Flow Rate @ 1350 psi 1 gpm
Hydraulic Fluid MIL-H-5606
Normal Operating Pressure 1350 psi
Relief Valve (Thermal) Opens at 2600 +0 /- 50 psig
Relief Valve (Pressure) Opens at 1600 +0 /- 50 psig
Pressure Switch
Open 1350 - 1400 psig max.
Close 1170 psig min.
Electrical Characteristics
Voltage 24 - 28 Vdc
Operating Current @ 1350 psig 55 Amps Max. @ 27 Vdc
Operating Time Gear Up 7 - 8 sec
Gear Down 7 - 8 sec
Overload Protection 25 Amp Circuit Breaker
CHART 2
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM LEADING PARTICULARS (FRISBY)
Hydraulic Pump, Electrically Driven, Reversible

Flow Rate @ 1350 psi 1 gpm
Hydraulic Fluid MIL-H-5606
Reservoir Capacity 30 cu. in. ( .49 liters)
Normal Operating Pressure 1350 psi
Relief Valve (Thermal) Opens at 2525 ± 75 psig
Relief Valve (Pressure) Opens at 1600 +0 /- 50 psig
Pressure Switch
Open 1350 - 1400 psig max.
Close 1170 psig min.
Electrical Characteristics
Voltage 24 - 28 Vdc
Operating Current @ 1350 psig 55 Amps Max. @ 27 Vdc
Operating Time Gear Up 7 - 8 sec
Gear Down 7 - 8 sec
Overload Protection 25 Amp Circuit Breaker
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 29-00-00 3H8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3H9 29-00-00 FebPAGE 3

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 29-00-00 3H10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
MAIN
1. Description
The PA-46-350P is equipped with a electrically driven, reversible hydraulic pump. The pump is mounted
on a floor bracket just forward of the aft pressure bulkhead. It is not always necessary to remove the
pump for repairs or to replace the fill plug.
2. Hydraulic Pump (Parker Hannifin) (S/N’s 4636001 thru 4636313 only.) (See Figure 3.)
WARNING: PLACE AIRPLANE ON JACKS PRIOR TO CHECKING OUT THE HYDRAULIC SYSTEM.
(REFER TO 7-10-00)
A. Removal
The hydraulic pump is located on a floor bracket just forward of the aft pressure bulkhead assembly.
(1) Place airplane on jacks (refer to 7-10-00, Jacking).
(2) Reduce hydraulic pressure as follows:
(a) Place gear switch in up position.
(b) Allow gear to retract until pressure drops.
(c) Pull hydraulic pump circuit breaker.
Hydraulic System Installation

Figure 1
3H11 29-10-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Fluid Diagram of Hydraulic System

Figure 2
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 29-10-00 3H12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(3) Set BATT MASTER switch to OFF position.

(4) Disconnect aft baggage net assembly.
(5) Remove access panel aft of baggage compartment.
(6) Disconnect electrical wires and tie to pump.
(7) Disconnect and rapidly cap hydraulic lines and hoses.
(8) Remove four sets of mounting bolts, washers, rubber washers, and nuts.
(9) Remove pump from airplane to a clean bench.
(10) Drain reservoir into a suitable container.
B. Installation
WARNING: BE SURE AIRPLANE IS ON JACKS BEFORE TESTING HYDRAULIC SYSTEM.
(1) Place pump assembly in aircraft.
NOTE: Align pump assembly so that sight glass is visible.
(2) Install four sets of mounting bolts, washers, and rubber washers.
(3) Uncap and reconnect hydraulic lines.
(4) Fill reservoir with hydraulic fluid.
(5) Set BATT MASTER switch on.
(6) Reset hydraulic pump circuit breaker.
(7) Cycle landing gear in accordance with Landing Gear Retraction Functional Test, 32-30-00.
Verify that the gear operates smoothly and there are no leaks.
C. Disassembly (See Figures 3, 4, and 5.)
NOTE: Pump may not require complete disassembly. Follow steps (1) thru (8) as needed for
access to air vent, motor, pump, reservoir, pressure relief valves, and O-rings. Sight glass
may be removed (step (4)) without removing other parts.
NOTE: Follow steps (9) thru (13) as needed (prior steps not necessary) for removal of pressure
switches, elbow/restrictor fittings, upper manifold, and lower manifold.
NOTE: Drain pump prior to disassembly. Mark pump assembly along length for ease in aligning
parts.
(1) Remove air vent by removing lockwire, bolt, and washer. Discard O-ring.
NOTE: Hold cap plate down while removing hardware to prevent spillage of any remaining
hydraulic fluid.
(2) Remove three bolts and washers from cap plate.
(3) Remove coupler, O-ring, motor and plate. Motor and plate remain as one unit.
NOTE: If necessary, separate motor from plate by removing screws. Check and replace shaft
seal on plate as needed. Do not disassemble motor.
(4) Remove reservoir. If necessary, remove sight glass by removing four screws and gasket.
Discard gasket.
NOTE: Perform steps (5), (6), (7), or (8) only as needed for parts beneath reservoir: pump,
filters, O-rings, and pressure relief valves.
(5) Remove pump by removing lockwire, four screws, and four washers that secure oil deflector
and pump.
(6) Remove intake filters by removing retaining rings.
3H13 29-10-00 FebPAGE 3

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Effectivity Hydraulic Pump (Parker Hannifin)

4636001 thru 4636313 Figure 3
(7) Remove small O-rings under filters and large O-ring on upper manifold.
(8) Remove pressure relief valves from upper manifold.
NOTE: Follow steps (9) thru (13) as needed to remove pressure switches and manifolds.
(9) Remove pressure switches. Discard O-rings.
(10) Remove elbow and restrictor fitting by loosening nut(s), unscrewing elbow(s) from lower
manifold, and discarding O-ring(s).
NOTE: Upper and lower manifolds must be replaced as a set in pump serial numbers 156 and
up. These can be distinguished by gold color instead of gray in earlier models. Refer to
PA-46-350P Parts Catalog.
(11) Remove and discard large O-ring from upper manifold if not already performed in step (10).
PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 29-10-00 3H14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(12) Separate upper and lower manifolds, if necessary, by removing lockwire, four screws, and
washers.
(13) Remove and discard O-rings between upper and lower manifolds.
D. Assembly (See Figures 3, 4, and 5.)
WARNING: USE MEK IN WELL-VENTILATED AREA. KEEP AWAY FROM FLAME OR HEAT.
AVOID CONTACT WITH SKIN OR EYES.
CAUTION: DO NOT SOAK ELECTRICAL PARTS.
CAUTION: DO NOT REUSE LOCKWIRE OR O-RINGS. COAT REPLACEMENT O-RINGS WITH
HYDRAULIC FLUID.
(1) Check and replace parts as needed. If necessary, clean with MEK or other suitable solvent.
(2) Replace O-rings between upper and lower manifolds. Secure manifolds with screws and
washers. Torque 45 - 55 in.-lbs. in a crossing pattern in four steps: 20, 30, 40 and 50 in.-lbs.
Install lockwire.
(3) Install pump, oil deflector, four screws, and washers. Take care in aligning. (See Figures 4 and
5.) Torque screws 10 - 14 in.-lbs. Secure with lockwire.
(4) Install pressure relief valves and O-rings. Torque 65 - 70 in.-lbs.
(5) Replace O-rings at intake filters. Install intake filters. Secure with retaining rings.
(6) If replacing sight glass, install gasket, glass, and cover onto reservoir with four screws. Torque
8 - 12 in.-lbs.
(7) Install O-ring onto upper manifold.
(8) Install reservoir. Align carefully on manifold. (See Figures 4 and 5.)
(9) If cap plate and motor have been separated:
(a) Install new shaft seal onto cap plate.
(b) Assemble cap plate to motor with four screws, washers, and seals.
(c) Torque 25 - 35 in.-lbs.
CAUTION: DO NOT ALLOW LOCKWIRE TO INTERFERE WITH MOTOR SHAFT.
(d) Lockwire screws. (See Figure 5.)
(10) Install O-ring on cap plate assembly.
(11) Install coupler onto hydraulic pump shaft.
(12) Align cap plate bolts with threaded inserts of upper manifold. Lift plate and turn coupler so that
slot aligns with motor shaft.
(13) Install cap plate assembly onto reservoir so that coupler and motor shaft engage. Align bolt
holes with threaded inserts.
(14) Secure with bolts and washers. Torque 25 - 35 in.-lbs. Secure with lockwire.
(15) Install O-ring in air vent assembly. Secure air vent to cap plate assembly with bolt and washer.
Torque 25 - 35 in.-lbs. Secure with lockwire.
(16) Replace O-rings for pressure switches. Install pressure switches. Torque pressure switches 65
- 70 in.-lbs.
(17) Install O-rings for elbow fittings. Thread elbow fittings into UP and DOWN ports in lower
manifold so that fittings point downward. Torque nut to 65 - 70 in.-lbs.
3H15 29-10-00 FebPAGE 5

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Effectivity Hydraulic Pump (Parker Hannifin) - Disassembled

4636001 thru 4636313 Figure 4
PAGE 6
Feb 28/07 29-10-00 3H16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Hydraulic Pump (Parker Hannifin) - Subassembly Alignment Effectivity

Figure 5 4636001 thru 4636313
3H17 29-10-00 FebPAGE 7

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. Hydraulic Pump (Frisby) (S/N’s 4636314 and up.) (See Figure 6.)
CAUTION: THE HYDRAULIC PUMP IS NOT SERVICEABLE IN THE FIELD. REPLACE WITH NEW
OR FACTORY REBUILT UNIT. RETURN DEFECTIVE AND OVERLIMIT UNITS TO THE
FACTORY FOR REBUILD.
A. Removal
WARNING: PLACE AIRPLANE ON JACKS PRIOR TO WORKING ON THE HYDRAULIC
SYSTEM. (REFER TO 7-10-00)
The hydraulic pump is located on a floor bracket just forward of the aft pressure bulkhead assembly.
(1) Place airplane on jacks (refer to 7-10-00, Jacking).
(a) Place gear switch in up position.
(b) Allow gear to retract until pressure drops.
(c) Pull hydraulic pump circuit breaker.
(3) Set BATT MASTER switch to OFF position.
(4) Disconnect aft baggage net assembly.
(5) Remove access panel aft of baggage compartment.
(6) Disconnect electrical wires and tie to pump.
(7) Disconnect and rapidly cap hydraulic lines and hoses.
(8) Install vent screw, washer, and warning tag.
(9) Remove four sets of mounting bolts, washers, rubber washers and nuts.
(10) Remove pump from airplane to a clean bench.
(11) Drain reservoir into a suitable container.
B. Installation
WARNING: BE SURE AIRPLANE IS ON JACKS BEFORE BLEEDING AND TESTING
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM.
(1) Place pump assembly in aircraft.
NOTE: Align pump assembly so that fill plug is to the front.
(2) Install four sets of mounting bolts, washers, and rubber washers.
(3) Uncap and reconnect hydraulic lines.
(4) Fill reservoir with hydraulic fluid.
NOTE: Do not overfill. Add fluid only when level falls below the “L” mark. When filling, allow
fluid level to stabilize before comparing fluid level to fill marks. Overfilling will result in
excess fluid being expelled from reservoir vent pipe.
(5) Remove vent screw, washer and warning tag.
(6) Set BATT MASTER switch on.
(7) Reset hydraulic pump circuit breaker.
(8) Bleed hydraulic system per Bleeding Hydraulic System, below.
(9) Conduct Landing Gear Retraction System Functional Test, 32-30-00. Verify that the gear
operates smoothly and there are no leaks.
PAGE 8
Feb 28/07 29-10-00 3H18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
102559 B
PUMP MOTOR
VENT SCREW
- REMOVE BEFORE FLIGHT
- REPLACE BEFORE
REMOVING PUMP
FROM AIRCRAFT
FILL VENT
- REMOVE SCREW
WHILE FILLING
RESERVOIR
FIL REW
G
LIN
NG E SC
DU MOV
RI
RE
FILL PLUG
DOWN
PRESSURE
SWITCH
D
O
W
N SEE-THRU
FLUID RESERVOIR
U
P
UP PRESSURE SWITCH
Hydraulic Pump (Frisby) Effectivity

3H19 29-10-00 FebPAGE 9

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C. Testing
(1) Normal Operation Test (See Figure 7.)
Connect the hydraulic pump into a system as shown in Figure 7 to check normal pump
operation. Maintain 27-28 VDC during all testing.
(a) Fill pump reservoir to full line (“F” mark on the reservoir) with clean filtered MIL-H-5606
hydraulic fluid. Ensure that pump vent is open (remove screw, washer and warning tag, if
installed). With the shut-off valve open, run the pump in the gear “UP” position for
approximately 10 seconds. Slowly close the valve to build up 50-100 psig, and bleed air
from the “UP” side of the system. Refill reservoir as required to keep fluid level between
“F” and “L” marks during all testing.
NOTE: Do not overfill. Add fluid only when level falls below the “L” mark. When filling,
allow fluid level to stabilize before comparing fluid level to fill marks. Overfilling
will result in excess fluid being expelled from reservoir vent pipe.
(b) With the shut-off valve in the open position, apply power to the pump with the gear switch
in the gear “UP” position. Allow the pump to operate approximately 15 seconds. Slowly
close the shut-off valve. The pressure switch shall turn the pump off at 1400 psig
maximum. Continue to supply electrical power to the pump and observe for pressure drop
and no pump operation for 5 minutes. Except, if the pump operates once momentarily
during this five minute period there shall be no repeated pump operation during the
subsequent fifteen minutes.
(c) Repeat (b), above, with the gear switch in the gear “DOWN” position.
(d) With the shut-off valve open, the gear selector switch in the gear “DOWN” position and the
pressure switch disconnect switch in the “DOWN” position, allow the pump to operate
approximately 10 seconds. Slowly close the shut-off valve. Observe the maximum
pressure indicated and immediately shut pump off. The maximum pressure shall be at
least 1550 psig but not more than 1800 psig. With the pump off observe that the pressure
does not fall below 1350 psig in 5 minutes.
(e) Repeat (4), above, with the gear switch and pressure switch disconnect switch in the gear
“UP” position. The maximum pressure shall be at least 1550 psig but not more than 2000
psig.
NOTE: If pump is not installed in an aircraft, reinstall vent screw, washer, and warning
tag upon completion of test.
(2) Thermal Relief Valve Operation Test
(a) Fill pump reservoir to full line (“F” mark on the reservoir) with clean filtered MIL-H-5606
hydraulic fluid. Ensure that pump vent is open (remove screw, washer and warning tag, if
installed).
(b) With a suitable pump and calibrated gauge, slowly apply hydraulic pressure individually to
the pump “UP” and “DOWN” outlet ports. The first indication of pressure relief shall occur
at 2450 to 2600 psig for both “UP” and “DOWN” sides of the pump assembly.
NOTE: If pump is not installed in an aircraft, reinstall vent screw, washer, and warning
tag upon completion of test.
PAGE 10
Feb 28/07 29-10-00 3H20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4. Bleeding Hydraulic System (PIR-PPS60033-7, Rev. G/-9, Rev. J/-13, Rev. NEW.)
WARNING: BE SURE AIRPLANE IS ON JACKS BEFORE BLEEDING AND TESTING HYDRAULIC

SYSTEM.
A. Set up
(1) Place the airplane on jacks per 7-10-00.
(2) Connect a 28 Vdc regulated power source capable of supplying a minimum of 50 amperes to
the aircraft electrical system.
NOTE: With power supplied through the auxiliary power plug the batt-master switch should
remain in the "OFF" position. The APU circuit bypasses the batt-master switch to
energize the ship power circuits.
NOTE: Before starting test, check for adequate clearance of nose gear lights, sequence
valves, actuators, hoses, etc.
NOTE: Never operate the emergency gear release piston with the hydraulic pump circuit
breaker “IN”.
(3) During all tests, add clean filtered MIL-H-5606 (Revision "F" or higher) hydraulic fluid to the
reservoir as necessary to keep fluid level at the "F" (full) mark on the sight gauge with the gear
down.
B. Procedure
CAUTION: DO NOT PULL THE EMERGENCY GEAR RELEASE KNOB WHILE THE HYDRAULIC
PUMP IS OPERATING. ALWAYS PULL THE HYDRAULIC PUMP CIRCUIT BREAKER
BEFORE TESTING THE EMERGENCY GEAR RELEASE SYSTEM. FAILURE TO
COMPLY WILL DAMAGE THE EMERGENCY GEAR RELEASE VALVE.
CAUTION: DO NOT OVERFILL AND DO NOT ALLOW HYDRAULIC FLUID LEVEL TO DROP
BELOW THE "L" (LOW) MARK ON THE SIGHT GAUGE WITH THE GEAR IN THE
DOWN POSITION.
NOTE: Follow this sequence below to reduce foaming. Add fluid to reservoir as needed.
(1) Disconnect rod assemblies between nose gear doors and door actuating torque tube assembly
to prevent door actuation.
(2) Screw the sequence valve plunger adjustment screw all the way IN.
(3) In S/N’s 4636001 thru 4636313 only (i.e. - airplanes equipped with Parker Hannifin hydraulic
pumps only):
(a) With the gear down, pull OUT the emergency gear release knob.
(b) Place the gear selector in the UP position. Operate pump for 10 to 15 seconds.
(c) Return the gear selector to the DOWN position. Push the emergency gear release knob IN.
(4) Operate the gear through at least five (5) complete cycles, adding fluid to the reservoir as
required.
(5) Starting with the gear down, pull the hydraulic pump circuit breaker and place the gear selector
switch in the UP position.
(6) Using the circuit breaker as a switch, allow the gear to retract until the nose gear is about half
way up and then pull the circuit breaker.
3H21 29-10-00 Feb

PAGE 11
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
28 VDC
25A
RED WHT
UP
DN UP
3A
DN GEAR SELECT
SWITCH
PUMP-DN PUMP-UP
PRESS SW PRESS SW
P P
PRESSURE SWITCH
DISCONNECT
OFF
HYDR DN UP
BLK
PUMP
DN UP
GAUGE SHUT-OFF VALVE GAUGE
Effectivity Hydraulic Pump (Frisby) Test Set-up

PAGE 12
Feb 28/07 29-10-00 3H22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(7) Loosen the “B” nut on hose assembly at nose gear door actuator. Depress plunger on
sequence valve to purge air from line.
NOTE: Move nose gear downward if necessary to create sufficient pressure and flow to
completely bleed air from the line.
Repeat as necessary until all air is removed and then retighten the “B” nut.
(8) Loosen the “B” nuts at the main gear UP fittings. Move the main gears downward to bleed air
from the actuators. Tighten the “B” nuts.
(9) Push IN the circuit breaker and complete the retraction cycle.
(10) Place gear selector in DOWN position and loosen “B” nut on DOWN fittings on all three gear
actuators to bleed any trapped air. Retighten “B” nuts.
NOTE: Pump may run intermittently during bleeding procedure.
(11) In S/N’s 4636001 thru 4636313 only (i.e. - airplanes equipped with Parker Hannifin hydraulic
pumps only):
(a) With the gear down, pull OUT the emergency gear release knob.
(b) Place the gear selector in the UP position. Operate pump for 10 to 15 seconds.
(c) Return the gear selector to the DOWN position. Push the emergency gear release knob IN.
(12) Operate the landing gear through at least three (3) complete cycles.
5. Hydraulic Lines - Removal and Installation
A. Remove damaged hydraulic lines by disconnecting the fittings at each end and where it is secured
by brackets. See Figure 1 as an aid in locating the attaching brackets and bends in the lines.
B. Provide a small container for draining the line.
C. Install new or repaired line in the reverse order of removal.
D. Bleed system and lines.
E. Check fluid level in reservoir.
6. Hydraulic System Testing
WARNING: BE SURE AIRPLANE IS ON JACKS BEFORE BLEEDING AND TESTING HYDRAULIC
SYSTEM.
WARNING: SET BATT MASTER SWITCH TO THE OFF POSITION BEFORE INSERTING OR
REMOVING EXTERNAL POWER SUPPLY PLUG.
The hydraulic system should be tested to check that it functions properly after performing any service or
repairs. It is suggested that the airplane be connected to an outside power source in order to conserve
the battery. See also Landing Gear Retraction System Functional Test, 32-30-00.
A. Place airplane on jacks (refer to 7-10-00).
B. With the gear down, place the BATT MASTER switch to the on position, and circuit breaker closed.
Place the landing gear selector in the UP position. Pump should immediately operate and gear
retract. The red gear unsafe light on the instrument panel should illuminate, until the gear is fully
retracted. The hydraulic pump should stop after full gear retraction.
C. Place the gear selector in the DOWN position. The gear should extend and lock. The gear down
lights on the instrument panel will illuminate when all three gears are locked in the down position.
Inspect hydraulic system for leakage.
3H23 29-10-00 Feb

PAGE 13
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
D. Recycle landing gear to check that it functions properly.

WARNING: PRIOR TO REMOVING THE AIRPLANE FROM THE JACKS, TURN MASTER
SWITCH ON AND VERIFY THAT ALL THREE GREEN LIGHTS ARE ILLUMINATED.
THIS WILL INDICATE THE LANDING GEAR IS DOWN AND LOCKED.
E. Remove airplane from jacks.
7. Hydraulic Pump / Reservoir Servicing
A. Parker Hannifin
The fluid level of reservoir of the combination pump and reservoir is checked every 50 hours by viewing
fluid levels in the sight gauge. If fluid is below the fill-line,remove filler plug and fill with MIL-H-5606
hydraulic fluid. Install filler plug and tighten.
B. Frisby
Check fluid level in reservoir every 50 hours by viewing fluid level directly. If fluid is below the
fill-line (i.e. - the “L” mark), remove fill plug and fill vent screw and add MIL-H-5606 hydraulic fluid.
Ensure that the landing gear is down when filling the reservoir. Re-install fill plug and fill vent screw
and tighten.
NOTE: Do not overfill. Add fluid only when level falls below the “L” mark. When filling, allow fluid
level to stabilize before comparing fluid level to fill marks. Overfilling will result in excess
fluid being expelled from reservoir vent pipe.
PAGE 14
Feb 28/07 29-10-00 3H24
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3I1 29-10-00 Feb

PAGE 15
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 16
Feb 28/07 29-10-00 3I2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER
30
ICE AND RAIN
PROTECTION
3I3
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3I4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 30
CHAPTER CHAPTER
30-List of 1 Feb 28/07 30-60-00 1 Feb 28/07

3 Feb 28/07
2 Feb 28/07 5 Feb 28/07
6 Feb 28/07
30-00-00 1 Feb 28/07 7 Feb 28/07
2 Feb 28/07 8 Feb 28/07
9 Feb 28/07
30-10-00 1 Feb 28/07 10 Feb 28/07
2 Feb 28/07 11 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07 12 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07 13 Feb 28/07
5 Feb 28/07 14 Feb 28/07
6 Feb 28/07 15 Feb 28/07
7 Feb 28/07 16 Feb 28/07
8 Feb 28/07 17 Feb 28/07
9 Feb 28/07 18 Feb 28/07
10 Feb 28/07
11 Feb 28/07
12 Feb 28/07
13 Feb 28/07
14 Feb 28/07
15 Feb 28/07
16 Feb 28/07
17 Feb 28/07
18 Feb 28/07
19 Feb 28/07
20 Feb 28/07
21 Feb 28/07
22 Feb 28/07
23 Feb 28/07
24 Feb 28/07
25 Feb 28/07
26 Feb 28/07
30-30-00 1 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07
30-40-00 1 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 30 - ICE AND RAIN PROTECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
GENERAL 30-00-00 1 3I9

Description and Operation 1 3I9
SMARTbootTM Ice Detection System 2 3I10
AIRFOIL 30-10-00 1 3I11

Components
Deice Boots 1 3I11
Deice Flow Valve Assembly 1 3I11
Removal 1 3I11
Installation 1 3I11
Pressure Control Valve 1 3I11
Removal 1 3I11
Installation 1 3I11
Vacuum Manifold/Check Valve 3 3I13
Removal 3 3I13
Installation 3 3I13
Pressure Manifold/Check Valve 6 3I16
Removal 6 3I16
Installation 6 3I16
Testing 6 3I16
Timer 6 3I16
Removal 6 3I16
Installation 6 3I16
Deicers (Boots) (Pneumatic Deice System) 7 3I17
Removal 7 3I17
Installation 10 3I20
Inspection 15 3J1
Maintenance 16 3J2
Repair Limits 18 3J4
Repair Procedures 19 3J5
Resurfacing 21 3J7
Pneumatic Deice System Adjustments and Test 22 3J8
SMARTbootTM Ice Detection System 23 3J9
Description 23 3J9
Verification 23 3J9
PITOT AND STATIC 30-30-00 1 3J13

Heated Pitot Head 1 3J13
Description 1 3J13
Removal, Installation and Testing 1 3J13

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 30 - ICE AND RAIN PROTECTION
WINDOWS AND WINDSHIELDS 30-40-00 1 3J15

Heated Windshield 1 3J15
Troubleshooting 1 3J15
Testing 1 3J15
PROPELLERS 30-60-00 1 3J19

Propeller Heat System 1 3J19
Description and Operation 1 3J19
Components 8 3K2
Deicers (i.e. - Heater Boots) 8 3K2
Inspection and Testing 8 3K2
Removal and Installation 8 3K2
Brush Modules 9 3K3
Replacement 9 3K3
Alignment 9 3K3
Metal Oxide Varistor (MOV) Module 10 3K4
Slip Ring Assembly 10 3K4
Replacement 10 3K4
Alignment 10 3K4
Deicer (Heater Boot) Wiring Harness 12 3K6
Testing 12 3K6
Resistance Test 12 3K6
Ammeter 12 3K6
Using the Ammeter 12 3K6
Ammeter Test 13 3K7
Propeller Deicers (i.e. - Heater Boots) 13 3K7
Final Electrical Check 13 3K7
Functional Check 13 3K7
BFG Timer 14 3K8
Inspections 14 3K8
50 Hour 14 3K8
100 Hour 15 3K9
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GENERAL
The ice protection system is made up of six separate systems: an optional pneumatic wing deice
system, an optional electrical propeller heat system, an optional electrically heated windshield, standard
heated stall warning, standard heated pitot, and a wing inspection light installation. The systems can be
installed individually or in any combination. The systems are controlled from a control panel on the right
instrument panel.
The pneumatic system utilizes boots to displace ice from the leading edges of the flight surfaces. The
boots are inflated by the vacuum pumps. See 37-10-00 for pump maintenance. Along with the boots and
related plumbing, the system also utilizes a flow valve assembly which incorporates three deicer flow
valve assemblies, three pressure switches, a check valve, a vacuum manifold, and a vacuum
manifold/check valve assembly.
Boots are attached to the leading edge of the wings, vertical stabilizer, and elevator. The boots are made
up of a fabric-reinforced rubber containing built-in span-wise inflation tubes. The boots are secured to the
leading edges with cement and are connected to the plumbing through the skin by flexible or aluminum
air connections.
The propeller heat system consists of an electrically heated boot bonded to each blade, a slip ring
assembly connected to the hub of the propeller, a timer, a circuit breaker, a control switch located on the
deice switch panel; and, in S/N’s 4636001 thru 4636131 only, a dedicated ammeter and shunt. In S/N’s
4636132 and up, the BFG timer is replaced by a Moritz unit.
The B. F. Goodrich propeller heat system installed on this airplane uses a single element type heater
boots. In this type system each heater has one electrothermal heating element. When the PROP HEAT
switch on the instrument panel is turned ON, the timer directs power through the modular brush
assembly and slip ring to all the heating elements for approximately 90 seconds. The timer then switches
power off for approximately 90 seconds. This cycle will continue as long as the PROP HEAT switch is in
the ON position. In S/N’s 46360132 and up only, there is a test mode which uses a squat switch relay to
turn the propeller heat off if the airplane remains on the ground more than 30-45 seconds after PROP
HEAT is switched ON. When the airplane becomes airborne, PROP HEAT exits the test mode and enters
in-flight mode.
NOTE: In S/N’s 4636001 thru 4636131 only, heating may begin at either phase of the cycle depending
on the timer position when the switch was turned off from previous use.
When installed, the heated windshield consists of an electrically heated left windshield. Circuit protection
is provided by the windshield heat CONTROL and POWER breakers in the ICE PROTECTION section of
the pilot’s circuit breaker panel.
Heated pitot and stall warning systems are standard on the airplane. These systems are operated by
switches on the deice panel. Other components of the systems include a heated pitot head with a 10-
amp circuit breaker and a heated lift detector with a 25 amp circuit breaker.
To aid the pilot in inspecting the leading edge of the left wing for any ice formation, a wing inspection
light may be installed in the left hand side of the fuselage. Information on the wing inspection light may
be found in Chapter 33 (Lights).
NOTE: For wiring schematics not found in this chapter, refer to Chapter 91.
3I9 30-00-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2. SMARTbootTM Ice Detection System (S/N’s 4636132 thru 4636313 only.)

The optional pneumatic wing deice system, as installed in S/N’s 4636132 thru 4636313 only,
incorporates the B.F. Goodrich SMARTbootTM Ice Detection System. This system advises the pilot of icing
conditions on the empennage of the airplane. Electrical sensors integrated directly into the surface of the
pneumatic de-icers on the vertical fin and right horizontal stabilizer advise the presence of ice and
appropriate time to de-ice.
NOTE: The system is installed as and performs only an advisory function.
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 30-00-00 3I10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
AIRFOIL
1. Pneumatic Deice System

The pneumatic system utilizes boots to displace ice from the leading edges of the flight surfaces. The
boots are inflated by the vacuum pumps. See 37-10-00 for pump maintenance. Along with the boots and
related plumbing, the system also utilizes a flow valve assembly which incorporates three deicer flow
valve assemblies, three pressure switches, a check valve, a vacuum manifold, and a vacuum
manifold/check valve assembly.
air connections.
The system is controlled from a control panel on the right side of the instrument panel.
2. Troubleshooting
See Chart 1.
3. Components
A. Deice Boots
See Deicers (Boots) (Pneumatic Deice System), below.
B. Deice Flow Valve Assembly
The deice flow valve assembly is located behind the firewall on the right hand side of the airplane. It
is mounted to the lower fuselage.
(1) Removal
(a) Disconnect the electrical leads to the individual deice valves at the (three) connectors.
(b) Disconnect the five hoses from the deice flow valve assembly.
(c) Remove the bolts which secure the deice flow valve assembly to the lower fuselage.
Remove the deice flow valve assembly.
(2) Installation
(a) Position the deice flow valve assembly on the lower fuselage and secure it with the bolts.
(b) Reconnect the five hoses to the deice flow valve assembly.
(c) Reconnect the electrical leads from the (three) deice valves.
C. Pressure Control Valve
The pressure control valves are located on the forward right hand side of the firewall.
(1) Removal
(a) Disconnect the two hoses from the pressure control valve (on the forward side of the
firewall).
(b) Disconnect the electrical leads from the valve at the electrical connector.
(c) Remove the screws and washers that secure the valve to the firewall and remove the
valve.
(2) Installation
(a) Position the valve in place on the firewall and secure it with the previously removed
screws and washers.
(b) Reconnect the two leads to the valve.
(c) Reconnect the two hoses to the valve.
3I11 30-10-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TROUBLESHOOTING PNEUMATIC DEICE SYSTEM
Deicers do not inflate. Open circuit breaker. Push circuit breaker
Engine operating at to reset.
minimum cruise RPM.
System connection loose Tighten or repair as
or wire broken. required.
Timer not functioning. Test or replace as
required.
Pressure regulator valves not Make electrical test.
functioning. Check for sticking
poppet. Clean. Ensure
that both vent ports on
solenoid valves are open.
Lines blocked or not Blow out lines and
connected. inspect connections.
Make air leakage test.
Deicers do not inflate Pressure regulator valves Remove and clean.
or inflate slowly. clogged.
Deicers inflate slowly Lines partially blocked Blow out lines and
(normal time - 6 seconds). or not connected securely. inspect connections.
Make air leakage test.
Deflate solenoid valves not Ensure that both vent
functioning properly. ports on solenoid are open.
System pressure not Check performance to
being reached. manufacturer’s
specifications.
Deicer puncture. Repair per specification
or replace.
Deicers deflate slowly. Lines partially blocked. Inspect and blow out lines.
Deflate solenoid valve not Ensure that both vent
functioning properly. ports on solenoid are open.
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 30-10-00 3I12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TROUBLESHOOTING PNEUMATIC DEICE SYSTEM
Deicers inflate, indicator Indicator lamp burned out. Replace lamp.
light does not function.
(Check that deicer boot
switch is ON.)
System pressure not Check “Deicers Inflate
being reached. Slowly” above.
Pressure regulator valve Make electrical test
switch not functioning. and replace if required.
Wires loose or broken. Make electrical test.
Repair or replace
broken wires.
Poor grounding of Check for
pressure regulator valve proper ground.
switch.
Deicer boots do not Deflate valve not Remove and trouble-
hold their form in functioning properly shoot valve. Replace
flight or vacuum to if necessary.
the system is inadequate.
Vacuum line restricted. Disconnect line from
instruments, deflate
valve, and blow out line.
Broken line. Inspect system and repair.
D. Vacuum Manifold/Check Valve

The vacuum manifold/check valve is located aft of the forward pressure bulkhead, slightly to the
right of the airplane centerline.
(1) Removal
(a) Disconnect the three (or four) hoses from the manifold body.
(b) For the forward manifold, remove the screw which secures the manifold bracket to the
pressure bulkhead.
(c) Remove the vacuum manifold/check valve assembly.
(2) Installation
(a) Position the vacuum manifold/check valve in place.
(b) Secure the forward vacuum manifold/check valve in place with the previously removed
screws.
(c) Reconnect the three (or four) hoses to the manifold body.
3I13 30-10-00 FebPAGE 3

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Fluid Diagram of Pneumatic Deicer System

PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 30-10-00 3I14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Fluid Diagram of Pneumatic Deicer System

3I15 30-10-00 FebPAGE 5

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
E. Pressure Manifold/Check Valve

The pressure manifold/check valve is located on the forward side of the firewall to the right.
(1) Removal
(a) Disconnect the three hoses from the pressure manifold/check valve.
(b) Remove the screw that secures the pressure manifold/check valve to the firewall.
(c) Remove the pressure manifold/check valve.
(2) Installation
(a) Position the pressure manifold/check valve on the forward side of the firewall. Secure it
with the screws.
(b) Reconnect the three hoses to the pressure manifold/check valve.
(3) Testing
(a) Remove pressure manifold/check valve by disconnecting vacuum pump discharge lines
and the pressure line to the pressure control valve.
(b) Connect a line from a regulated air source to the pressure control manifold at the
pressure control valve connection.
(c) Slowly apply 20 psig of air pressure to the pressure manifold/check valve.
(d) Close off regulated air.
(e) Check for leaks by noting the pressure drop in the pressure manifold/check valve. A
pressure drop of not more than 5 psig in 10 seconds is permitted.
(f) If air flows through the pressure manifold/check valve and out the vacuum pump
discharge side of the manifold, the diaphragm is ruptured and the manifold must be
replaced.
(g) If unit passes leak test, or if a new manifold is required, install in the airplane by
connecting both vacuum pump discharge and the pressure control valve hoses.
F. Timer
The pneumatic system timer is mounted to the upper right hand corner of the forward side of the
F.S. 108.00 frame.
(1) Removal
(a) Disconnect the electrical leads from the timer at the connector.
(b) Remove the screws, nuts and washers that secure the timer to the frame. Remove the
timer.
(2) Installation
(a) Position the timer on the F.S. 108.00 frame. Secure it in place with the screws, nuts and
washers.
(b) Reconnect the electrical leads at the connector.
PAGE 6
Feb 28/07 30-10-00 3I16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Pneumatic Deicer Boot Operation

Figure 2
4. Deicers (Boots) (Pneumatic Deice System)

air connections.
WARNING: CEMENTS AND SOLVENTS USED TO REMOVE AND INSTALL DEICERS ARE
EXTREMELY FLAMMABLE AND TOXIC. EXTINGUISH OPEN FLAMES. AVOID SPARKS.
USE IN WELL-VENTILATED AREA. AVOID SKIN CONTACT AND/OR PROLONGED
BREATHING OF VAPORS. CONSULT MSDS FOR ADDITIONAL SAFETY INFO.
CAUTION: DISPOSE OF UNUSED MEK AND OTHER CHEMICALS AND SOLVENTS IN A MANNER
CONSISTENT WITH LOCAL LAWS AND/OR ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
REGULATIONS.
CAUTION: DO NOT USE MEK ON SMARTBOOTTM INSTALLATIONS (VERTICAL FIN AND RIGHT
STABILIZER) AS MEK WILL ATTACK ESTANE® MATERIAL. USE TOLUENE INSTEAD.
NOTE: Goodrich Black Standard Pneumatic De-Icer Installation, Maintenance & Repair Manual, ATA
Report No. 30-10-31, provides approved, alternate procedures for removing and installing deice
boots. Reference to it is highly recommended. It can be obtained online at
http://www.goodrich.com/TechPubs.
A. Removal.
See Chart 2, for required materials.
NOTE: Disconnect line fittings from boot fittings.
(1) Starting at one corner of the upper trailing edge of the deicer, apply a minimum amount of
solvent to the seam line while tension is applied to peel back the corner of the deicer.
(2) Using a pressure handle squirt can filled with solvent, separate the deicer boot from the
surface for a distance of four (4) inches all the way along the upper trailing edge.
(3) The area between the deicer and the wing which has now been separated will act as a
reservoir for the solvent, therefore, the deicer can be pulled down towards the leading edge
with a uniform tension.
3I17 30-10-00 FebPAGE 7

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
REQUIRED MATERIALS - PNEUMATIC DEICER - INSTALLATION / REMOVAL / REPAIR
Adhesive * - Choose One System (Goodrich Part Number)

3M 1300L System (preferred adhesive) and, A-851-B Fuel Barrier Adhesive
1300L Cement [Piper P/N 179-929 = 1 qt.] (74-451-99) = 1 qt.
or
Bostik 1096M System or, British Bostik 2402 System
1007 or 1007M Bostik Primer 9252 British Bostik Primer
1096M Bostik Cement 2402 British Bostik Cement
Boscodur 9R Accelerator Bostikure D Accelerator
* use Boar's Bristle brush
Filler - Choose One Product (If Required)
PRC1422 or PRC1425 or equivalent
Sealer * - Choose One Product (Goodrich Part Number)
A-56-B*** (74-451-11) = 1/2 pt **; or, Edge Sealer Kit (74-451-P)
(74-451-11-1) = 1 qt. (Black Estane® or Neoprene Deicers)
Edge Sealer Kit (74-451-K)
(Black Estane® Deicers only)
* use Pure Bristle brush ** Piper P/N 279-142 *** Neoprene deicers only
Solvents
CAUTION: DO NOT USE MEK ON ESTANE® (I.E. - SMARTBOOTSTM ) DEICERS INTENDED FOR
REUSE OR CONTINUED USE.
Item Where Used
Toluene Leading edge and deicer cleaning solvent
Toluene, or Leading edge stripping solvent
Peerco #321 stripper, or
Methyl Ethyl Ketone (MEK)
MEK or Toluene or Acetone Prop deicer removal and tackifying solvent *
* Toluene is the preferred tackifying solvent. Methylethylketone (MEK) can be used, but causes very
rapid drying and provides only 10 seconds working time compared with 40 seconds for Toluene.
Tools and Miscellaneous (Goodrich Part Number)
2 x 2 1/2 in. Rubber roller (74-451-74) 1/4 in. Steel stitcher roller (74-451-89)
1 in. Paint brush Lint-free cloths
Scissors 1 in. masking tape
Emery Buffing Stick (74-451-75) 6 ea. Sharp knife
Steel measuring tape (6 ft.) Fine sharpening stone
Steel wool pads Hypodermic needles (22 gauge or smaller)
Straight edge Carpenter's chaulk line
Hook knife (74-451-45) 3M EC 801 filler
FASTpatchTM Primer - 1/2 oz. crush tube (74-451-190)
PAGE 8
Feb 28/07 30-10-00 3I18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
REQUIRED MATERIALS - PNEUMATIC DEICER - INSTALLATION / REMOVAL / REPAIR
Goodrich Kits
Goodrich Part No. Quantity Description
74-451-AA 1 Universal FASTpatchTM Repair Kit
74-451-206 1 Primer Pen (2 oz.)
74-451-187 30 Small Oval Patch
(1-1/4 x 2-1/2 in.)
74-451-188 30 Medium Oval Patch
(2-1/2 x 5 in.)
74-451-189 10 Large Oval Patch
(5 x 10 in.)
74-451-75 3 Emery Cloth
(9 x 11 in.)
74-451-87 1 Buffing Shield
74-451-AE 1 Pinhole Repair Kit
74-451-201 8.5 grams Accelerator
74-451-202 1 Buffing Shield
74-451-205 1 Application Tool
74-451-209 24 Cement
74-451-210 24 Mixing Cup
74-451-211 24 Mixing Tool
74-451-212 50 Application Template
74-451-K 1 Edge Sealer Kit
(Black Estane® Deicers only)
74-451-117-1 1 qt. Sealer/Cement
74-451-120 4 oz. Accelerator
74-451-L 1 Resurfacing Kit *
74-451-122 1 qt. Primer
74-451-123 1 qt. Resurfacing Coat
* after P/N 74-451-L is applied to a neoprene deicer, the deicer should be treated as an Estane® deicer for
maintenance purposes.
74-451-P 1 Edge Sealer Kit
(Black Estane® or Neoprene Deicers)
74-451-20 1 pt. Cement
74-451-148 50 ft. Edge sealer strip
74-451-185 1 pt. Primer
74-451-Z 1 Maintenance Kit
74-451-127 1 qt. AgeMaster® No. 1
74-451-178 1 pt. ShineMaster®
74-451-179 1 qt. ShineMaster® Prep Cleaner
ICEX® II 16 oz. Ice Adhesion Inhibitor
3I19 30-10-00 FebPAGE 9

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(4) From the centerline of the leading edge to the lower trailing edge of the deicer, use the
pressure handle squirt can to soften the bond between the deicer and the wing skin.
(5) Use Toluene or Peerco #321 to clean the dry cement off the exposed wing area, and clean the
area thoroughly with MEK (methylethylketone).
B. Installation.
See Chart 2, for required materials.
(1) Leading Edge Preparation.
(a) Dry fit deicer on leading edge. Make sure deicer air connection fits in air connection hole
in leading edge and cut-outs are properly aligned. Use deicer as template to mask
installation area with one (1) inch masking tape. For non-recessed deicers, add at least
one-half (1/2) inch extra around perimeter of deicer. Mark deicer centerline on masking
tape at each end.
NOTE: Masking accurately will eliminate the need for cleaning off excess cement later.
(b) Remove paint and primer in masked area with stripper or sand painted/primed area to
roughen. Use clean pressurized air or dry cloth to remove sanding particles before
proceeding with deicer installation.
NOTE: Deicers can be installed on alodined or anodized surfaces, and over zinc
chromate primer that cannot be removed by scrubbing with solvent.
(c) Clean the metal surfaces thoroughly, at least twice, with MEK or Toluene. For final
cleaning, wipe the solvent film off quickly with a clean dry cloth before it has time to dry.
(d) Fill gaps of skin splices that lead under deicers with any epoxy compound meeting PMS-
C1004.
(e) On wings only, apply fuel barrier cement over fuel tank rivets and edges of fuel tanks
which will lie under the installed deicer. Proceed as follows:
1 Stir cement thoroughly to blend solids.
2 Apply one even brush coat and let dry one (1) hour.
3 Apply a second coat and let dry two (2) hours.
(f) Remove the sump plugs from the air connection grommets. In some cases, it will be
necessary to remove sections of doped fabric used to cover the air connection holes.
Draw out the ends of the non-kink hose section so that they protrude through the
connection holes in the leading edge. If hose is cracked or deteriorated, replace with new
hose.
(2) Deicer Preparation.
CAUTION: DO NOT USE MEK TO CLEAN SMARTBOOTSTM OR ESTANE® AS MEK WILL
ATTACK ESTANE® MATERIAL.
Moisten a clean cloth with Toluene and carefully clean the rough, back surface of the boot at
least twice. Change cloths often to avoid recontaminating the cleaned area.
PAGE 10
Feb 28/07 30-10-00 3I20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(3) Cement Application.

CAUTION: DO NOT INSTALL IF HUMIDITY IS ABOVE 90% OR IF TEMPERATURE IS
BELOW 50° F. AT THESE EXTREMES, PROPER ADHESION MAY NOT BE
OBTAINED REGARDLESS OF DRYING TIME ALLOWED.
CAUTION: DRY FIT DEICER BEFORE APPLICATION OF CEMENT. SEE LEADING EDGE
PREPARATION, ABOVE.
NOTE: Deicer and leading edge may be cemented for a maximum of 48 hours before actual
installation, if cemented parts are covered and kept clean.
(a) Thoroughly mix cement before using. Apply one even brush coat to the cleaned back
surface of the boot and to the cleaned metal surface of the leading edge.
(b) Allow the cement to air dry for a minimum of one hour at humidity of 75% or lower. If
humidity is 75-90%, drying time will be longer.
(c) Snap a chalk line along the leading edge of the airfoil section. Intensify chalk line on
leading edge and the white reference line on the boot with a ball point pen.
(d) Stir cement and apply a second coat to both surfaces and allow to air dry per (b), above.
(4) Mounting Deicer on Leading Edge.
CAUTION: DO NOT TRIM DEICER CLOSER THAN ONE (1) INCH FROM TUBE AREA AT
ENDS OR CUT-OUT AREAS, AS AIR LEAKAGE OR SEAM SEPARATION CAN
RESULT.
Most boots are made with an excess of material at the inboard and outboard edges for final
trimming after installation and some recessed boots trim on the upper and lower edges.
(a) Holding the backside of the boot close to the leading edge, fasten the end of each non-
kink hose to the corresponding air connection stem. Tinnerman or other suitable non-kink
hose clamps should be used for this purpose. Tighten each clamp with a pair of slip joint
pliers but do not squeeze the clamp so tight that the hose is damaged.
NOTE: If non-kink hose clamps are not available, wrap each hose connection with
several turns of friction tape. Over the tape wrap two separate bindings of safety
wire, about one-half (1/2) inch apart. Each of these bindings should consist of
several turns of wire. Twist together the ends of each binding to tighten. Press the
twisted ends down against the hose. Finally, wrap the wire with several additional
turns of friction tape.
(b) Push the hose connections into the leading edge grommets or seals, as the case may be.
Obtain sufficient personnel to hold boot steady during installation. (Limit handling
cemented side of boot with fingers.)
(c) Continue installation by reactivating the cement along the centerline leading edge surface
and boot in spanwise strips approximately three (3) to four (4) inches wide by eighteen
(18) to thirty-six (36) inches long. Use a clean lint free cloth dampened with Toulene.
Wring and shake cloth to remove excess solvent.
NOTE: Application of vacuum is recommended and makes installation easier.
(d) Using a rubber roller, press the deicer firmly against the wing leading edge, being careful
not to trap any air under the deicer. Always roll parallel to the inflatable tubes. Position the
deicer centerline to coincide with leading edge centerline. Hold boot in this position while
reactivating about three (3) inches around connections and around corresponding holes
in leading edge, using a clean, lint-free cloth moistened with Toluene. Insert connections
in leading edge holes when cement has dried to a tacky state, and press boot to leading
edge with roller in tackified area.
3I21 30-10-00 Feb

PAGE 11
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(e) If the deicer should attach "off course," use MEK to remove and reposition properly. Avoid
twisting or sharp bending of the deicer.
(f) Using the rubber roller, apply pressure over entire surface of the deicer. All rolling should
be done parallel to the inflatable tubes. Roll edges with a one-quarter (1/4) inch stitcher
roller.
CAUTION: AVOID EXCESSIVE SOAKING OR RUBBING OF THE CEMENT WHICH

COULD REMOVE THE CEMENT FROM THE SURFACE.
Remove all masking tape and clean surfaces carefully with Toluene so that no solvent will
run under deicer edges.
(g) Mask areas to be edge filled - i.e. - fair full thickness deicer edges to adjacent aircraft
structure, around cut-outs, recessed edges, and/or between two deicers installed close
together. Apply two lines of masking tape bordering fill area:
1 apply one line on deicer surface one-sixteenth (1/16) to one-eighth (1/8) inch from
edge; and,
2 one line on leading edge one-quarter (1/4) to one-half (1/2) inch from deicer edge.
NOTE: Width between masking tape lines may vary depending on area to be filled; use
narrowest width possible.
(h) Apply edge filler to fair full thickness deicer edges to adjacent aircraft structure, around
cut-outs, recessed edges, and/or between two deicers installed close together.
(i) Let edge filler dry per manufacturer's instructions.
(j) Apply edge sealer using one of the following methods, appropriate to the deicer installed:
1 A-56-B (Neoprene deicers only.)
a Apply masking tape on deicer surface around deicer and cutouts at least 1/4
inch from edge. If edge filler has been used, make sure masking tape applied on
deicer is at least 1/16-1/4 inch in from edge filler.
b Apply masking tape on leading edge one-eighth (1/8) to one-quarter (1/4) inch
outboard of area initially cleaned and cemented (about 3/4 inch out from deicer
edge). Form neat, straight lines to border edge sealer application.
c Mix edge sealer (A-56-B cement) thoroughly. If desired, dilute with Toluene, not
to exceed 20% by volume.
d Apply an even brush coat of edge sealer to surfaces between tape lines. Ensure
that the conductive edge sealer coating is continuous from the deicer surface to
the wing painted surface.
e Remove tape immediately after applying edge sealer - i.e. - before edge sealer
dries.
2 Edge Sealer Kit No. 74-451-P (See Figure 3.)
inch from edge.
b Apply masking tape on leading edge at least one and three-quarters (1 3/4) inch
outboard of edge of masking tape applied to deicer and outboard of exposed
1300L cement. Form neat, straight lines to border edge sealer application.
c For neoprene deicers, brush one even coat of primer on leading edge and
deicer between tape lines.
d For Estane® deicers, brush one even coat of primer on leading edge surface
only, between the deicer edge and the masking tape. Do not get primer on dicer
surface. Let dry thirty (30) minutes.
PAGE 12
Feb 28/07 30-10-00 3I22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
e Mix cement and accelerator per instructions on container.

f Apply one even brush coat of edge sealer to surfaces between tape lines. Let
dry fifteen (15) minutes.
CAUTION: EDGE SEALER STRIP HAS A PEEL PLY ON BREEZE SIDE.
REMOVE PEEL PLY A LITTLE AT A TIME AS YOU INSTALL
STRIP AS STRIP MAY STICK TO ITSELF ON CONTACT.
CAUTION: DO NOT ALLOW MEK TO COME CONTACT SURFACES OTHER
THAN BACKSIDE OF EDGE SEALER STRIP AS IT WILL ATTACK
ESTANE ® DEICER MATERIAL. DO NOT SATURATE EDGE
SEALER STRIP DURING TACKIFICATION FOR SAME REASON.
g Beginning on the upper spanwise edge of deicer, tackify backside of strip (side
without peel ply) with MEK in a fifteen (15) to twenty (20) inch length and press
strip onto cemented area between tape lines. Make sure strip contacts deicer
surface and leading edge surface. Remove peel ply on breeze side of strip and
roll with rubber roller. Continue until one side of deicer is edged.
h At corners, apply strip about one (1) to one and one-half (1 1/2) inches beyond
deicer end.
i Repeat Steps g & h for lower edge of deicer.
j Repeat Steps g & h for chordwise edges of deicer, overlapping strip on top of
spanwise strips. This arrangement provides aerodynamic flow to minimize drag
and possibility of strip lifting.
Edge Sealer Kit P/N 74-451-P Application

Figure 3
3I23 30-10-00 Feb

PAGE 13
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3 Edge Sealer Kit No. 74-451-K (Estane® deicers only.)

inch from edge. If edge filler has been used, make sure masking tape applied on
deicer is at least 1/16-1/4 inch in from edge filler.
b Apply masking tape on leading edge one-eighth (1/8) to one-quarter (1/4) inch
outboard of area initially cleaned and cemented (about 3/4 inch out from deicer
edge). Form neat, straight lines to border edge sealer application.
c Mix only the amount of edge sealer that can be used in a four (4) hour period.
Mix cement and accelerator per instructions on container.
d Apply one even brush coat of edge sealer to surfaces between tape lines.
Ensure that the conductive edge sealer coating is continuous from the deicer
surface to the wing painted surface.
e Remove tape immediately after applying edge sealer - i.e. - before edge sealer
dries.
(5) Drying Time.
(a) Allow a minimum of four (4) hours drying time before flying airplane.
(b) Allow a minimum of 48 hours drying time before inflating deicers.
(6) Adhesion Test.
(a) Using excess boot material trimmed from the ends of any wing and empennage deicers,
prepare one test specimen for each deicer installed. This specimen should be a one (1) x
four (4) inch full thickness strip of boot material cemented to the wing skin adjacent to
installed boot following the identical procedure used for installation. Leave one inch of the
strip uncemented to attach a clamp. Four (4) hours or more after the installation, attach a
spring scale to the un-cemented end of each strip and measure the force required to
remove strip at the rate of one inch per minute. The pull should be applied 180° to the
surface. (Strip doubled back on itself.)
CAUTION: SUCCESSFUL COMPLETION OF THIS TEST INDICATES INSTALLATION
IS SUITABLE FOR FLIGHT, NOT INFLATION.
(b) A minimum of five pounds tension (pull) shall be required to remove the test strip. If less
than five pounds is required, wait two to three hours and retest. If peel strength is still
lower than five pounds, proceed as follows:
1 Carefully lift one corner of deicer in question sufficiently to attach a spring clamp.
2 Attach a spring scale to this clamp and pull with force 180° to the surface and in
such a direction that the boot tends to be removed on the diagonal.
3 If a force of five pounds per inch of width can be exerted under these conditions, the
installation shall be considered satisfactory. Remember, the width increases as the
corner peels back.
4 Re-cement corner following previous procedure.
5 Failure to meet this requirement shall require reinstallation of the deicer.
NOTE: Possible reasons for failure are: dirty surfaces, cement not reactivated
properly, cement not mixed thoroughly. Corrosion of the metal skin may
occur if good adhesion is not attained, especially around rivet heads and
metal skin splices.
PAGE 14
Feb 28/07 30-10-00 3I24
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C. Inspection.
Perform the following inspection when:
(1) For an uninstalled deicer:
(a) The deicer has been stored for more than 84 months.
(b) There is evidence of damage to original packaging.
(c) The deicer is not in original packaging.
(d) There is evidence that deicer was not stored properly.
(2) For an installed deicer if damage or age is suspected of affecting deicer performance.
(3) Procedure
CAUTION: INSTALLATION OR CONTINUED USE OF A DEICER IN CONDITIONS
SPECIFIED IN (1) OR (2), ABOVE, IS AT USER'S DISCRETION.
NOTE: Check for damage with deicer inflated using leak detector fluid. Air leaking damage
can be located and marked for repair. Deicer should not be inflated at pressures
higher than indicated in Chart 3.
(a) Inspect deicer carefully for surface damage: cuts, tears, abrasions, scuffs, cracking and/or
crazing. Check backside (if uninstalled) and breeze side of deicer carefully. Pay particular
attention to air connection area.
CAUTION: REVIEW REPAIR LIMITS, BELOW, TO DETERMINE IF REPAIR IS
PERMITTED.
(b) Repair surface damage detected per Repair Procedure, below.
(c) Inflate deicer with regulated air source to correct operating pressure (see Chart 3). Check
inflation time. Deicer should inflate to operating pressure within six (6) seconds.
(d) When deicer has reached operating pressure, seal off deicer at air connection. Check
deicer pressure after 60 seconds. Pressure drop should not exceed three (3) psi for
deicers with system operating pressure of 14 psi or higher.
(e) Allow deicer to deflate naturally with no vacuum applied. Deflation time should not exceed
22 seconds. When deicer is deflated, check for pockets of trapped air in tubes.
CAUTION: REVIEW REPAIR LIMITS, BELOW, TO DETERMINE IF REPAIR IS
PERMITTED.
(f) If deicer does not pass these tests, check again for damage, perform appropriate repairs
and retest. If deicer still does not meet test criteria, the deicer should be replaced (if
installed) or scrapped (if uninstalled).
(g) If deicer passes all tests, its usability is on condition and the decision to install is at user's
discretion.
CHART 3
PNEUMATIC BOOT OPERATING PRESSURES
Deicer Operating Pressure (PSI) Inflation Sequence
Wing 14 - 15 Alternating
(Upper and Lower tubes inflate separately)
Vertical Fin 10 - 12 Simultaneous
Horizontal Stabilizer 10 - 12 Simultaneous
3J1 30-10-00 Feb

PAGE 15
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
D. Maintenance
(1) Visually inspect deicers frequently for abrasion, erosion, cracking, tears, pinholes, foreign
object damage (FOD), debonding and other damage. Repair damage immediately, see
Repairs, below.
(2) Clean deicers when the airplane is washed with a mild soap and water solution. In cold
weather, wash the boots with the airplane inside a warm hangar if possible. If the cleaning is to
be done outdoors, heat the soap and water solution before taking it out to the airplane. If
difficulty is encountered with the water freezing on the boots, direct a blast of warm air along
the region being cleaned, using a portable type ground heater.
(3) Goodrich Corp. offers a family of deicer treatment products which reduce weathering effects,
enhance appearance, and enhance performance. Their use is recommended, see below.
(a) AGEMASTER® NO. 1 Application.
AgeMaster® No. 1 is a rubber preservative for neoprene deicers only that protects against
weathering, ozone and ultraviolet rays. Apply AgeMaster® No. 1 initially 6 months after a
new deicer is installed. Reapply every 6 months.
WARNING: AGEMASTER® NO. 1 CONTAINS PETROLEUM DISTILLATES. HARMFUL

OR FATAL IF SWALLOWED. IF SWALLOWED, DO NOT INDUCE
VOMITING; SEE PHYSICIAN IMMEDIATELY. KEEP AWAY FROM OPEN
FLAME. VAPORS MAY IGNITE CAUSING FLASH FIRE OR EXPLOSION.
DO NOT APPLY BY SPRAYING. USE WITH ADEQUATE VENTILATION.
AVOID PROLONGED BREATHING OF VAPOR. IF DIZZINESS OR NAUSEA
OCCURS, OBTAIN FRESH AIR. AVOID CONTACT WITH SKIN AND EYES.
IF EYE CONTACT OCCURS, FLUSH EYES WITH WATER FOR 15
MINUTES, THEN SEE PHYSICIAN. IF SKIN CONTACT OCCURS, WASH
THOROUGHLY WITH SOAP AND WATER. EMPTY CONTAINERS MAY
CONTAIN FLAMMABLE OR EXPLOSIVE RESIDUAL VAPORS. SEE MSDS
FOR ADDITIONAL SAFETY INFORMATION.
CAUTION: AGEMASTER® NO. 1 STAINS SKIN, CLOTHING AND OTHER SURFACES.
WEAR PLASTIC OR RUBBER GLOVES WHEN USING. PROTECT
SURROUNDING AREAS. USE WATERLESS HAND CLEANER TO
REMOVE STAINING.
CAUTION: NOT SUITABLE FOR USE ON ESTANE ® DEICERS. IT WILL NOT BE
ABSORBED BY DEICER, CAUSING RUN BACK AND STAINING ON
AIRCRAFT SURFACE.
NOTE: AgeMaster® No. 1 can be applied to neoprene deicers that have been repaired
with Goodrich P/N 74-451-AA patch kit and/or Goodrich P/N 74-451-AE pinhole
repair kit; however, excess AgeMaster® No. 1 should be wiped off the surfaces of
the repair material, as it will not be absorbed.
NOTE: Store in cool, well-ventilated place. Keep container closed tightly when not in use.
1 One quart covers 90 square feet of deicer, following these directions.
Thoroughly clean deicer surface with mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water
and let dry.
2 Use isopropyl alcohol to remove substances that cannot be removed with soap and
water. Repeat Step 1, above.
3 Wipe one even coat of AgeMaster® No. 1 on deicer surface with lint free cloth. Coat
deicer surface completely and evenly for best results and appearance. Let dry 5-10
minutes. Dry time may vary due to temperature and humidity conditions.
PAGE 16
Feb 28/07 30-10-00 3J2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4 Repeat Step 3, above, so that three even coats have been applied with 5-10 minutes
dry time between each coat.
5 Let dry 24 hours before flying aircraft or applying Icex® II or ShineMaster® products.
(b) ShineMaster® Application.
ShineMaster ® treatment is a cosmetic coating that provides high luster shine.
ShineMaster® Prep cleaner is used to clean deicer for ShineMaster® application, and
remove residual ShineMaster® before reapplication. Application interval for ShineMaster®
depends on operating environment (2 or 3 times per year is typical).
NOTE: ShineMaster® products can be applied to deicers that have been repaired with
Goodrich P/N 74-451-AA patch kit and/or Goodrich P/N 74-451-AE pinhole repair
kit.
NOTE: ShineMaster® cosmetic treatment should not be heavily applied or allowed to
build-up on deicer edges, as it may appear cracked and is very difficult to remove
when reapplication is desired.
1 Clean deicer surface with ShineMaster® Prep cleaner to remove dirt, grease, oil,
silicone products and other contamination. Previous applications of ShineMaster®
treatment must be removed before reapplication to avoid dulling or product build-up.
2 Apply light, even coat of ShineMaster® cosmetic treatment to deicer with clean lint-
free cloth wiping in one direction. Let dry to touch - about 5-15 minutes.
3 Repeat Step 2, above, once or twice to obtain desired shine.
®
(c) Icex II Application.
Icex® II is an ice adhesion inhibitor that enhances deicer performance by lowering
adhesion strength between ice and deicer surface. During icing season, apply Icex® II
every 50 flight hours.
NOTE: Icex® II is not a cure-all for icing problems. Icex® will not prevent or remove ice
formations. Its only function is to keep ice from initially getting a strong foothold,
thus making removal easier.
NOTE: Icex® II can be applied to deicers that have been repaired with Goodrich P/N 74-
451-AA patch kit and/or Goodrich P/N 74-451-AE pinhole repair kit.
NOTE: If Icex® II is applied too heavily, result can be sticky surface that collects dust and
dirt, reducing efficiency of Icex® II. Residue should be completely removed
before reapplication.
1 Clean deicer surface using mild soap and water.
2 Rinse with clean water and let dry.
3 Clean with isopropyl alcohol to remove substances not removed with soap and
water.
4 Repeat Steps 1 and 2, above.
5 Apply Icex® II with clean cloth or pad. Apply lightly and wipe in single continuous
back and forth motion spanwise on deicer.
3J3 30-10-00 Feb

PAGE 17
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(d) Application in Combination.

AgeMaster® No. 1, ShineMaster® and Icex® II are specifically designed to use together
to provide maximum deicer care, appearance and performance.
1 Clean deicer surface to remove previous coatings, dirt, grease, oil and other
contamination. ShineMaster® Prep cleaner should be used to remove ShineMaster®
treatment.
2 Apply AgeMaster® No. 1, see above, and let dry at least 24 hours.
3 Apply ShineMaster® cosmetic treatment, see above, and let dry to touch.
4 Apply Icex® II, see above.
5 Icex® II may be removed with alcohol or warm, soapy water, then reapplied without
affecting ShineMaster® cosmetic treatment.
6 Icex® II and/or ShineMaster® cosmetic treatment can be removed without affecting
AgeMaster® No. 1.
7 Icex ® II and/or ShineMaster ® cosmetic treatment must be removed before
reapplying AgeMaster® No. 1.
E. Repair Limits.
CAUTION: PNEUMATIC DEICERS MUST BE REPLACED IF: (1) CUTS, TEARS OR RUPTURES
CUT THE INFLATABLE TUBE FABRIC AND/OR EXCEED 4 X 9 INCHES; OR, (2)
BROKEN STITCHES OR THREADS ARE APPARENT; OR, (3) DAMAGE LEAKS AIR
AND EXCEEDS THE PATCH AND PINHOLE REPAIR LIMITS SPECIFIED BELOW.
NOTE: In addition to meeting these repair limits, the deicer must also pass the Inspection
(Pneumatic Deicers (Boots)), Procedure, below.
NOTE: If patches and pinhole repairs are mixed within any 12 inch square, a ratio equivalent to the
repair limits should be followed. For example, in a 12 inch square it would be permissible to
have one (1) small patch (33% of repair limit) and 13 pinhole repairs (67% of repair limit).
The net effect is equivalent to 100% of the repair limits.
To maintain optimal functional efficiency of the deicers:
(1) The following patch limits are established:
(a) Three (3) small patches per 12 inch square (Small patch is 2-1/2" X 1-1/4"); or,
(b) Two (2) medium patches per 12 inch square (Medium patch is 5" X 2-1/2"); or,
(c) One (1) large patch per 12 inch square (Large patch is 5" X 10"); or,
(d) Two (2) small patches and one (1) medium patch per 12 inch square.
(2) No more than 20 pinhole repairs are allowed per 12 inch square.
PAGE 18
Feb 28/07 30-10-00 3J4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
F. Repair Procedures.
CAUTION: REVIEW REPAIR LIMITS, ABOVE, TO DETERMINE IF REPAIR IS PERMITTED.
See Chart 2 for materials and supplies. Kits and part numbers referenced below are Goodrich
Corporation, unless otherwise noted.
NOTE: Repair of damage that does not leak air is not mandatory.
(1) Scuff (Surface) Damage: This type of damage will be most commonly encountered and,
fortunately, it is not necessary in most cases to make a repair. Surface damage that leaks air,
but does not cut inflatable tube fabric, and does not exceed 4" X 9" should be repaired with
P/N 74-451-AA patch kit as follows:
CAUTION: PATCH ADHESION IS TEMPERATURE SENSITIVE. IF TEMPERATURE IS
UNDER 50°F (10°C), WARM DEICER SURFACE PRIOR TO APPLYING
PRIMER, AND WARM INSTALLED PATCH WHILE DRYING. TO WARM, HOLD
PLASTIC BAG FILLED WITH HOT WATER ON DEICER SURFACE, AND ON
INSTALLED PATCH. IF SURFACE AND INSTALLED PATCH ARE NOT WARMED,
PATCH MAY NOT ADHERE.
CAUTION: PATCHES HAVE A ONE-WAY STRETCH ACROSS WIDTH OF PATCH SO

PATCH CAN STRETCH WHEN DEICER INFLATES. PATCH MUST BE
INSTALLED WITH LENGTH PARALLEL TO DEICER TUBES. FAILURE TO DO
SO MAY RESULT IN PATCH LIFTING WHEN DEICER INFLATES.
CAUTION: PREPARATION OF DEICER SURFACE TO BE PATCHED IS CRUCIAL FOR

GOOD PATCH ADHESION. FAILURE TO REMOVE, SHINEMASTER®
COSMETIC TREATMENT, WAX, GREASE, OIL, ICEX ® II, AND OTHER
CONTAMINANTS COMPLETELY, CAN RESULT IN POOR PATCH ADHESION.
(a) Trim standard patch sizes to accommodate small areas of damage, leaving at least 1/2
inch beyond damaged area. Mark stretch direction on patch before trimming, so trimmed
patch is installed with stretch in same direction as tube inflation.
(b) Clean deicer surface to be patched with detergent and hot water, using lint free cloths to
remove dirt, grease and cosmetic coatings. Repeat until oil and silicone contamination is
removed.
(c) Use buffing shield or patch as template to outline damaged area. Buff deicer surface with
medium grit emery cloth or equivalent.
(d) Wipe deicer surface with cloth dampened with Toluene or alcohol and let dry.
(e) Apply one coat of primer to deicer surface. Let dry to touch (5-10 min.).
(f) Remove paper backing from patch and press patch on primed deicer surface. Roll with
rubber roller.
(g) Let dry 30 minutes before inflating deicer.
(h) Patch refurbishment:
1 To replace loose or damaged patch, remove old patch by peeling off deicer.
2 Remove adhesive remaining on deicer with Scotch BriteTM soaked in alcohol.
3 Install new patch.
3J5 30-10-00 Feb

PAGE 19
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(2) Tube Area Damage: Use Kit No. 74-451-AA (see application instructions, under Scuff Damage,
above) to repair cuts,tears or ruptures that leak air but do not cut inflatable tube fabric, and do
not exceed 4" X 9". Use Kit No. 74-451-AE to repair pinholes that leak air, but do not exceed
1/16 inch in diameter, as follows:
CAUTION: CUTS, TEARS, OR RUPTURES THAT CUT THE INFLATABLE TUBE FABRIC
REQUIRE DEICER REPLACEMENT.
CAUTION: PATCHES HAVE A ONE-WAY STRETCH ACROSS WIDTH OF PATCH SO
PATCH CAN STRETCH WHEN DEICER INFLATES. PATCH MUST BE
INSTALLED WITH LENGTH PARALLEL TO DEICER TUBES. FAILURE TO DO
SO MAY RESULT IN PATCH LIFTING WHEN DEICER INFLATES.
CAUTION: MIXED REPAIR MATERIAL MUST BE USED WITHIN TWO (2) HOURS.
CAUTION: APPLICATION OF 74-451-AE KIT IS NOT RECOMMENDED BELOW 50°F
(10°C), AS REPAIR MATERIAL MAY NOT DRY.
(a) Clean deicer surface to be repaired with detergent and hot water using lint-free cloth, to
remove dirt, grease and cosmetic coatings. Repeat until oil and silicone contamination is
removed.
(b) Isolate repair area with buffing template. Buff isolated area with Scotch Brite TM or
equivalent.
(c) Wipe isolated area with lint-free cloth dampened with alcohol or equivalent cleaning
solvent and allow to dry.
(d) Secure application template with hole centered over pinhole.
(e) Open foil overpack of 74-451-209 cement. Clip corner of Appli-pak pouch and squeeze
cement into mixing cup. Make sure that all material from pouch is squeezed into mixing
cup to assure proper mix ratio with accelerator.
CAUTION: RECAP ACCELERATOR TIGHTLY AFTER USE AS ACCELERATOR WILL
HARDEN IF NOT SEALED COMPLETELY.
(f) Add seven (7) drops of P/N 74-451-201 accelerator. Mix thoroughly with wooden stir stick
for one minute, making sure material on sides of cup is thoroughly mixed.
CAUTION: REMOVE APPLICATION TEMPLATE AS SOON AS REPAIR MATERIAL IS
APPLIED AND LEVELED TO ASSURE SMOOTH APPEARANCE.
(g) Apply repair material into hole in application template with wooden stir stick. Push repair
material firmly into pinhole. Level repair material with application tool.
NOTE: If repair material is spilled on undamaged deicer surface, remove immediately
with Toluene.
(h) Allow two (2) hours dry time prior to flying the aircraft or inflating deicer.
(3) Loose Surface Ply in Dead Area (i.e. - non-inflatable area): Use P/N 74-451-AA patch kit to
repair cuts, tears or ruptures that do not exceed 4" X 9" per Scuff (Surface) Damage, above.
Surface ply peeling less than 4" X 9" can be repaired by trimming away loose surface material,
and applying the 74-451-AA patch repair as follows:
(a) Peel and trim the loose surface ply to the point where the adhesion of surface ply to the
deicer is good.
(b) Proceed with patch application per 74-451-AA patch kit application instructions, under
Scuff Damage, above.
PAGE 20
Feb 28/07 30-10-00 3J6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
G. Resurfacing
P/N 74-451-L resurfacing kit provides an oil resistant urethane coating. The "L" Kit can be used to
refurbish weathered deicers to extend service life, or to provide oil resistance to newly installed
deicers. Apply the kit as follows:
CAUTION: AFTER KIT NO. 74-451-L IS APPLIED TO A NEOPRENE DEICER, THE DEICER
SHOULD BE TREATED AS AN ESTANE ® DEICER FOR MAINTENANCE
PURPOSES.
CAUTION: DO NOT USE AGEMASTER® NO. 1 AFTER 74-451-L KIT APPLICATION.
NOTE: Deicers coated with 74-451-L kit may be repaired with 74-451-AA patch kit or 74-451-AE
pinhole repair kit.
(1) 74-451-L kit covers 40-50 square feet of deicer surface.
(2) Wash deicer surface with mild soap and warm water to remove contamination.
(3) Remove ShineMaster® cosmetic treatment with ShineMaster® Prep cleaner.
(4) Lightly sand surface with Scotch BriteTM fine grade abrasive material or equivalent.
(5) Clean surface with clear water and dry with lint free cloths to remove soap residue and loose
particles raised from sanding.
CAUTION: DO NOT USE MEK ON ESTANE® SURFACE DEICERS AS MEK WILL ATTACK
ESTANE®.
(6) Wipe surface twice with cleaning solvent. Use MEK or Toluene on neoprene deicers; use only
Toluene on Estane® deicers.
(7) Apply masking tape to leading edge against edges of deicer.
(8) Apply primer:
(a) For Estane® deicers, skip to step (9).
(b) For neoprene deicers only:
1 Mix primer coat with two (2) ounces of accelerator.
2 Apply one even coat of primer mixture to deicer surface. Brush perpendicular to
deicer tubes using short strokes in one direction for smooth finish.
3 Let dry 30 minutes.
(9) Apply protective coat:
(a) For Estane® deicers, use protective coat alone.
(b) For neoprene deicers, mix protective coat with two (2) ounces accelerator.
(c) Apply one even coat of protective coat. If desired, a second coat of protective coat may be
applied within fifteen (15) minutes to one (1) hour of first coat.
(10) Remove masking tape as application is made, about every three (3) feet.
(11) Aircraft may be flown and deicer inflated after 4 hours dry time.
(12) Do not use AgeMaster® No. 1 after 74-451-L kit application.
(13) Deicers coated with 74-451-L kit may be repaired with 74-451 AA patch kit or 74-451-AE
inhole repair kit.
3J7 30-10-00 Feb

PAGE 21
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
5. Pneumatic Deice System Adjustments and Test (PIR-PPS60054-5, -6, -7.)
WARNING: DURING ANY ENGINE OPERATION SPECIFIED HEREIN, EXERCISE CAUTION TO

AVOID HARM OR DAMAGE TO PERSONNEL AND EQUIPMENT BY THE PROPELLER
AND PROPELLER BLAST.
A. Start the engine and operate at 2,500 rpm (except in S/N’s 4636021 thru 4636131 - use 2,000 rpm).
B. Remove the vacuum hose (suction side) from the right vacuum regulator and adjust the left vacuum
regulator to provide a vacuum gauge indication of: 4.8 (min.) (S/N’s 4636132 and up); or, 4.8 to 5.0
(S/N’s 4636001 thru 4636131) inches Hg. of vacuum on the analog gauge and record the reading.
In S/N’s 4636021 and up, verify the VACUUM No. 1 INOP annunciator is illuminated and the
VACUUM No. 2 INOP annunciator is not. In S/N’s 4636001 thru 4636020, the left indicator button in
the vacuum gauge shall be in (indicating pump is operating). Reconnect the right vacuum regulator.
C. Remove the vacuum hose (suction side) from the left vacuum regulator and adjust the right vacuum
regulator to provide a vacuum gauge indication of: 4.8 (min.) (S/N’s 4636132 and up); or, 4.8 to 5.0
(S/N’s 4636001 thru 4636131) inches Hg. of vacuum on the analog gauge and record the reading.
In S/N’s 4636021 and up, verify the VACUUM No. 2 INOP annunciator is illuminated and the
VACUUM No. 1 INOP annunciator is not. In S/N’s 4636001 thru 4636020, the right indicator button
in the vacuum gauge shall be in (indicating pump is operating). Reconnect left vacuum regulator.
D. In S/N’s 4636132 and up, with both regulators connected and both vacuum pumps operating, adjust
the left and right regulators equally to obtain a vacuum gauge analog indication of 4.80 inches of
Hg. Verify that the vacuum gauge indicates from 4.80 to 5.20 inches Hg. with engine operating at
idle and 2,000 rpm.
In S/N’s 4636001 thru 4636131, check that vacuum gauge indication does not exceed 5.2 inches
Hg. with both pumps operating and both regulators connected. If indication exceeds 5.2 inches,
readjust the left and right vacuum regulators, per B and C above, to provide an indication of no
more than 5.2 inches Hg.
E. Check all surface boots and ensure they are down tight against the wing and tail surfaces.
F. Using a vacuum (or combination pressure/vacuum) gauge connected to a hypodermic needle,
measure the vacuum in the pneumatic system by inserting the needle in either right or left wing
hose connections located on cabin side of the forward pressure bulkhead.
G. Remove the vacuum gauge and install a pressure gauge at the same point. (This is not required if
pressure/vacuum gauge is used.)
H. Disconnect one of the vacuum pump pressure hoses from the pressure manifold (fwd of the
firewall) and cycle the SURFACE DE-ICE switch ON to activate the system and check for air
indication of 14 - 0, + 2 pounds per square inch on the pressure gauge. Reconnect the
disconnected pressure hose and disconnect the other pump’s pressure hose from the pressure
manifold and repeat the system cycle to check for air indication of 14 - 0, + 2 psig. Reconnect pump
pressure hose.
I. Cycle the SURFACE DE-ICE switch ON to activate the system and check for air indication of 14 - 0,
+ 2 pounds per square inch on the pressure gauge.
J. Visually check all boots for proper operation. All cells shall inflate fully. Each segment cycle time
shall be 6 + 2 seconds. Cycle sequence is tail, lower wing, upper wing. The SURFACE DE-ICE
annunciator light shall illuminate and: in S/N’s 4636021 and up, neither VACUUM No. 1 INOP nor
VACUUM No. 2 INOP annunciator shall illuminate; in S/N’s 4636001 thru 4636020, both left and
right indicator buttons in the vacuum gauge shall be in during boot operation.
K. Remove the pressure or pressure/vacuum gauge connected in step (f) or (g) above, respectively.
PAGE 22
Feb 28/07 30-10-00 3J8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6. SMARTbootTM Ice Detection System (S/N’s 4636132 thru 4636313 only.)

A. Description
The optional pneumatic wing deice system, as installed in S/N’s 4636132 thru 4636313 only,
incorporates the B.F. Goodrich SMARTbootTM Ice Detection System. This system advises the pilot of
icing conditions on the empennage of the airplane. Electrical sensors integrated directly into the
surface of the pneumatic de-icers on the vertical fin and right horizontal stabilizer advise the
presence of ice and appropriate time to de-ice.
NOTE: The system is installed as and performs only an advisory function.
The addition of the B.F. Goodrich SMARTbootTM Ice Detection System does not change the
form, fit or function of the other approved de-icing systems installed in the Malibu Mirage.
36-inch electrical sensors are vulcanized directly into, and flush with, the surface ply of the
pneumatic de-icer boots for the vertical fin and the right horizontal stabilizer. These sensors are
located in the leading edge of the de-icer boots, are made from the same type of elastomeric
material, and do not change the ice adhesion or the erosion resistance of the boots. Additionally,
the sensors are flush with the surface of the de-icer boots and there is no change to airflow or icing
characteristics of the leading edge surfaces.
All wiring from the sensor to the electrical connector is contained within the de-icer and routed
through non-inflatable regions of the boot to the same location as the air connection for the de-icer
to eliminate the need for any additional installation holes. Inside the wing, the wiring harness is
again routed through the same space as the air lines.
The presence of ice and appropriate time to deice are measured by the sensor installed within the
vertical fin deicer only. The sensor within the right horizontal stabilizer deicer advises the status of
the detection system (ice detect fail annunciator).
These annunciators located within the annunciator panel make up the visual cues of the deice
detector / deicer system. The “select de-ice” annunciator illuminates when approximately 1/4 inch of
ice has accumulated on the sensor located on the vertical fin. The surface de-ice annunciator will
illuminate to advise the pilot of proper boot inflation. The ice detect fail annunciator will illuminate
when a fault is detected in the ice detection system.
To conduct a self test of the system while on the ground turn the battery master switch on. This will
supply power to the system for a complete system self test. During the self test, the select de-ice
and the ice detect fail annunciators will flash momentarily in sequence, activate all at once, and
then extinguish.
The green “select De-ice” annunciator is activated when the ice thickness reaches approximately
1/4 inch or greater over the surface of the sensor in the vertical fin boot. When this occurs, the pilot
may choose to inflate the deice boots by pressing the “surface de-ice” switch or choose to wait until
more ice forms on the wings.
If the ice is removed from the empennage following inflation, the “select De-ice” annunciator will
extinguish. If less than 90% of the ice cap located over the sensor within the right horizontal deicer
has been removed, the “select De-ice” annunciator will remain illuminated. If a fault should develop
with either the sensor or controller, the amber “ice detect fail” annunciator will illuminate.
Because the sensors are installed in the empennage and the smaller radius surfaces there tend to
accumulate ice faster, the “select De-ice” annunciator will occasionally illuminate before the main
wing has accumulated 1/4 to 1/2 inch thickness of ice.
3J9 30-10-00 Feb

PAGE 23
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B. Verification
NOTE: This test can be performed without engine operation.
(1) Pull ICE DETECTOR circuit breaker.
(2) Disconnect the OAT sensor located in the vertical fin fairing. Install a 90 ohm (± 5%) resistor
across pins A and B of the connector of the 3E3176-1 wire harness. Install a wire between pins
B and C so that they are common.
(3) Activate the system circuit breaker and check the operation through the cockpit annunciator
panel.
NOTE: Following activation of the system circuit breaker, the amber SELECT DE-ICE and
amber ICE DETECT FAIL annunciators will flash momentarily in sequence, activate all
at once, and then extinguish as the controller performs its self-check.
(4) Push the annunciator test switch and verify that the amber SELECT DE-ICE, amber ICE
DETECT FAIL, and the green SURFACE DE-ICE lights illuminate.
(5) Align the five wires of the 3E3302-1 test strip over the five sensors in the vertical fin boot and
tape in place or thoroughly saturate two cloths (small dish towel size) with tap water and place
over the vertical fin sensor.
(6) The amber SELECT DE-ICE light should illuminate.
NOTE: The amber SELECT DE-ICE light may take approximately ten minutes to illuminate
while the controller steps through the ice thickness measurement functions. Make sure
the wet cloths remain in contact with the sensor and remain saturated or the 3E3302-
1 test strip wires remain aligned with the fin boot sensor wires.
(7) Disconnect connector J1 from the controller box. Be careful not to disconnect connector J2
from the controller box. The amber ICE DETECT FAIL light should begin flashing immediately.
(8) Reconnect the J1 connector. Remove the resistor and shunt wire from the 3E3181-1
connector, reattach the OAT sensor. Deactivate and reset the system circuit breaker. The
amber ICE DETECT FAIL light should extinguish.
(9) Remove the wet cloths or 3E3302-1 test strip from the vertical fin.
(10) Return the airplane’s wiring, de-ice plumbing, and panels to original configuration.
PAGE 24
Feb 28/07 30-10-00 3J10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3J11 30-10-00 Feb

PAGE 25
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 26
Feb 28/07 30-10-00 3J12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PITOT AND STATIC
Heated Pitot Head

A. Description.
The standard pitot ice protection consists of a heated pitot head located on the lower side of both
the left and right wing, a switch on the De-ice Switch Panel (S/N’s 4636001 thru 4636131 only) or
Environmental / Deice Switch Panel (S/N’s 4636132 and up), a 10-amp circuit breaker, a relay and
the circuit wiring.
B. Removal, Installation and Testing.
See 34-10-00.
3J13 30-30-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 30-30-00 3J14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
WINDOWS AND WINDSHIELDS
Heated Windshield (See Figure 1.)

When installed, the heated windshield consists of an electrically heated left windshield. Circuit protection
is provided by the windshield heat CONTROL and POWER breakers in the ICE PROTECTION section of
the pilot’s circuit breaker panel.
A. Troubleshooting
See Chart 1.
B. Testing
CAUTION: AMBIENT TEMPERATURE OF WINDSHIELD MUST BE BELOW 115° F.
CAUTION: DO NOT ALLOW HEATED WINDSHIELD TO BE ON HIGH POSITION FOR MORE
THAN 20 SECONDS FOR TESTING OR GROUND OPERATION. HEAT DISTORTION
OF THE WINDSHIELD COULD RESULT.
(1) With engine running at 1,500 rpm (or, at idle for S/N’s 4636001 thru 4636020 only), battery
master ON, and one alternator ON: position windshield heat switch to LOW. The ammeter
should indicate an increase.
(2) Position windshield heat switch to HIGH. The ammeter should indicate an additional increase.
(3) If heated windshield does not perform as indicated, see Chart 1.
CHART 1
TROUBLESHOOTING HEATED WINDSHIELD SYSTEM
Windshield fails to heat or Circuit breaker tripped Reset circuit breaker.
no change between LOW
and HIGH position Relay failure Replace relay.
Controller failure Replace controller.
Broken wire in harness. Repair broken wire.
Cannon plug loose or dirty. Clean and re-engage
cannon plug.
Switch defective. Replace switch.
Poor connection on terminal Tighten screws on terminal
strip. strip in console.
CAUTION: SEVERE OVERHEATING OF WINDSHIELD COULD RESULT IN WARPING AND
DISTORTION.
Windshield overheats Timer shorted. Replace timer-temperature
control.
Windshield heat left on Manually turn windshield
too long. heat off.
3J15 30-40-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Effectivity Windshield Heat

4636021 thru 46360131 shown Figure 1
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 30-40-00 3J16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3J17 30-40-00 FebPAGE 3

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 30-40-00 3J18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PROPELLERS
1. Propeller Heat System

The Goodrich Corporation propeller heat system installed on this airplane uses single element
deice boots. In this system each deicer has one electrothermal heating element. When the PROP
HEAT switch is turned ON, the timer directs power through the modular brush assembly and slip
ring to all the heating elements on the propeller for approximately 90 seconds. The timer then
switches power off for approximately 90 seconds (see Figure 1 and 91-30-60). This cycle will
continue as long as the PROP HEAT switch is in the ON position except in S/N’s 4636132 and up.
In S/N’s 4636132 and up, the PROP HEAT system employs a Moritz timer and a squat switch relay
to create a ground test mode which interrupts power to the boots after an initial 30-45 seconds as
long as the squat switch indicates weight on the wheels. During the 30-45 second test cycle, the
PROP HEAT switch will flash at a fast rate and the ship’s ammeter will show an increase. In flight,
the PROP HEAT switch flashes at a slow rate during the 90 second off cycle and is continuously
illuminated during the 90 second ON cycle.
The propeller heat system consists of the following:
In S/N’s 4636001 thru 4636131: electrically heated deicers bonded to the propeller blades; slip ring
assemblies connected to the propeller hub to distribute power to the propeller deicers; a modular
brush assembly which transfers electrical power to the rotating slip rings; a timer to cycle power to
the deicers; a propeller heat ammeter to indicate that the system is functioning correctly; an external
ammeter shunt, a manual ON-OFF switch; and a circuit breaker.
In S/N’s 4636132 and up: electrically heated deicers bonded to the propeller blades; slip ring
assemblies connected to the propeller hub to distribute power to the propeller deicers; a modular
brush assembly which transfers electrical power to the rotating slip rings; when equipped with the
optional composite 3-blade propeller only - a metal oxide varistor (MOV) module to protect the
propeller; a timer to cycle power to the deicers; an LED equipped manual ON-OFF switch; a circuit
breaker; and a squat switch relay.
Prop Heat Cycle Sequence

Figure 1
3J19 30-60-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TROUBLESHOOTING PROPELLER HEAT SYSTEM
Ammeter shows zero current Tripped circuit breaker Locate and correct
both phases of the switch. short before setting
timer cycle. circuit breaker.
No power from airplane. If no voltage into switch,
locate and correct open.
Circuit breaker or switch If no voltage at C/ B output
faulty. with voltage at input and
C/B does not reset, replace
C/B. If voltage is OK at
output, check switch in
same manner. If voltage is
OK at switch output, go to
next step.
Ammeter faulty. (If either Test for voltage up to and
or both deicers heat with out of ammeter. If low
ammeter at zero, replace output and input satis-
the ammeter.) factory, replace ammeter.
If no voltage to ammeter,
locate and fix open
between switch and
ammeter.
Open ammeter to timer. Disconnect harness at
timer and check voltage
at Pin B (of harness) to
ground. If none, locate
and correct open.
Ammeter shows normal Open in wiring between Use heat test to find
current part of cycle, timer and brush block deicers not heating and
zero current rest of cycle. assembly. test for voltage on that
contact of wire harness
plug. (At brush block
assembly.) If zero after
one minute, locate and
fix open in wiring from
timer to wire harness
plug.
Open between brush If there is voltage to brush
block assembly and block wire harness plug,
deicer lead straps. try voltage at junction to
deicer lead and slip ring
lead. If no voltage, find and
correct open in wiring
within brush block or in
contact of brush to slip
ring.
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 30-60-00 3J20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Ammeter shows normal Open or high resistance in Disconnect deicer leads
current part of cycle, deicer or slip ring leads. to check resistance. If not
low current rest of cycle. OK, replace faulty deicer.
If satisfactory, locate and
fix open in slip ring leads.
Check deicer wire harness
leads for continuity. Ohm-
meter needle must not
flicker when leads are
stretched or flexed.
Replace as required.
High resistance in circuit Check for contact of brush
with low current. to slip ring. Check wiring
from timer to deicers for
loose or corroded
connections and partially
broken wiring. Correct as
required.
Ammeter shows low current Aircraft voltage low. Check voltage into switch.
over entire cycle.
Ammeter faulty. Test for voltage up to and
out of ammeter. If low
output and input satis-
factory, replace ammeter.
If no voltage to ammeter,
locate and fix open
between switch and
ammeter.
High resistance up to Check for partially broken
timer. wire, loose or corroded
connection in wiring from
aircraft supply to timer
input.
Ammeter shows excess Ammeter faulty. Test for voltage up to and
current over entire cycle. out of ammeter. If low
output / input satisfactory,
replace ammeter. If no
voltage to ammeter, locate
and fix open between
switch and ammeter.
Ground between ammeter Disconnect harness at
and timer. timer. Use ohmmeter to
check Pin B (of harness) to
ground. If ground indicated,
locate and correct.
3J21 30-60-00 FebPAGE 3

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Ammeter shows normal Ground between timer Disconnect leads at
current part of cycle, and brush block. brush block and with
excess current rest ohmmeter check from
of cycle. power leads to ground.
If ground is indicated,
locate and correct.
Ground between brush If no short exists at brush -
block and deicers. slip ring contact, check for
ground from slip ring lead
to propeller assembly while
flexing slip ring and deicer
leads. If a ground is
indicated, locate and
correct.
Short between two adjacent Check for cuts or low
circuits. resistance between circuits.
If any, locate and correct.
Timer faulty. Test timer.
Ammeter does not “flick” Timer ground open, timer Disconnect harness at
approximately every 90 not cycling. timer and check with
seconds. ohmmeter from Pin G
(of harness) to ground.
If no circuit, fix open
per schematic diagram.
Timer contacts are Test timer. If timer
welded (caused by short does not cycle with voltage
circuit in system). at Pin B, replace timer but
be sure short causing
original failure has been
located and corrected.
Ammeter flicks between Loose connection between Trace wiring from power
90 second phase periods. aircraft power source to timer input to
supply and timer input. ensure that the electrical
contacts at each connec-
tion in the circuit are good.
Loose or poor connection If trouble occurs in part of
timer to deicers. cycle, find which deicer
is affected and check for
rough or dirty slip rings
causing brush to “skip.”
Also, check for loose or
poor connection. (If both
deicers are affected,
check ground circuit.)
Timer cycles erratically. Test timer.
PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 30-60-00 3J22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Radio noise or interference Brushes “arcing.” Check brush alignment
with deicers on. as shown in Figures 3
and 5. Look for rough
or dirty slip rings. If either
condition exists, clean,
machine or replace slip
ring assembly, as required.
Check slip ring alignment.
Loose connection. Refer to “Ammeter flicks
between 90 second phase
period.”
Switch or circuit breaker Place jumper wire across
faulty. switch or circuit breaker.
If radio noise disappears,
replace the switch or circuit
breaker.
Wiring located too close to Relocate deicer wiring at
radio equipment or associated least 8 inches away from
wiring. radio equipment and
wiring.
Rapid brush wear or Brush block out of Check brush alignment.
frequent breakage. alignment. Correct as required.
Slip ring wobbles. Check slip ring alignment
with dial indicator as shown
in Figure 5.
B. Troubleshooting
See Chart 1. See also Testing, below.
3J23 30-60-00 FebPAGE 5

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Effectivity Propeller Heat System Installation

4636001 thru 4636131 shown Figure 2
PAGE 6
Feb 28/07 30-60-00 3J24
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A SLIP RING TO PROP

DEICE BOOTS
MOV MODULE
(NOT INSTALLED IN
S/N'S 4636001 THRU 4636131)
PROPELLER HUB ASSEMBLY
VIEW LOOKING LEFT

MODULAR BRUSH ASSEMBLY
.031-.094 IN.
ION
AT
OT
GR
RIN
B
IP
ADD WASHERS AS REQUIRED

SL
TO ALIGN BRUSHES
2˚0'±0˚30'
VIEW B-B
COCKING OF BRUSHES B
TO SLIP RING SURFACE
VIEW A-A
101124A
Modular Brush Assembly Alignment

Figure 3
3K1 30-60-00 FebPAGE 7

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2. Components
NOTE: Do not attempt internal repairs of the timer, ammeter or switch. If inoperative, these components
must be replaced. For any other repair or maintenance problems not covered herein, inquire at
De-Icing & Specialty Systems Division of the Goodrich Corporation.
A. Deicers (i.e. - Heater Boots)
WARNING: CEMENTS AND SOLVENTS USED TO REMOVE AND INSTALL DEICERS ARE
EXTREMELY FLAMMABLE AND TOXIC. EXTINGUISH OPEN FLAMES. AVOID
SPARKS. USE IN WELL-VENTILATED AREA. AVOID SKIN CONTACT AND/OR
PROLONGED BREATHING OF VAPORS. CONSULT MSDS FOR ADDITIONAL
SAFETY INFO.
CAUTION: PROPELLER DEICER REPAIR IS LIMITED TO REFURBISHMENT OF EDGE
SEALER. SEE LATEST REVISION OF HARTZELL MANUAL NO. 133 (61-13-33 -
ALUMINUM BLADES) OR HARTZELL MANUAL NO. 135 (61-13-35 - COMPOSITE
BLADES), AS APPROPRIATE.
GOODRICH PROPELLER DE-ICERS ARE NOT REPAIRABLE. DEICER SURFACE
DAMAGE, SUCH AS PUNCTURES, CUTS, SCUFFS, EROSION, THAT EXPOSES
THE WIRE OR ETCHED ELEMENT IS GROUNDS FOR REPLACEMENT, AS
ADDITION OF REPAIR MATERIAL COULD AFFECT DEICER PERFORMANCE.
CAUTION: DISPOSE OF UNUSED MEK AND OTHER CHEMICALS AND SOLVENTS IN A
MANNER CONSISTENT WITH LOCAL LAWS AND/OR ENVIRONMENTAL
PROTECTION AGENCY REGULATIONS.
(1) Inspection and Testing
See Inspections, below, and Testing, below.
If tests or inspection show the deicer to have an open circuit, to be the wrong resistance or it
has visible damage, remove it and install a new deicer.
NOTE: Replacement deicers may be ordered from the Goodrich Corporation.
(2) Removal and Installation
NOTE: The following applies to factory propeller installations only.
(a) For Two (2) Blade (Aluminum) Propeller Installations
See latest revision of Hartzell Aluminum Blade Overhaul Manual, Manual No. 133
(61-13-33).
(b) For Three (3) Blade (Composite) Propeller Installations
See latest revision of Hartzell Maintenance Manual for Composite Propeller Blades,
Manual No. 135 (61-13-35).
PAGE 8
Feb 28/07 30-60-00 3K2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Measuring Brush Assemblies

Figure 4
B. Brush Modules
(1) Replacement
Brush wear may be measured as shown in Figure 4. The X - dimension given (in inches)
indicates when the brushes must be replaced.
NOTE: Brushes are not offered individually as replacements. When a brush wears out, the
module containing it should be replaced.
(a) Remove the modular brush assembly from the aircraft, by removing the attachment
hardware, and disconnecting the engine wire harness.
(b) Remove assembly screws and separate modules and spacers.
NOTE: The part number of each module is etched into the surface of the plastic housing;
replace with the same part number module.
(c) Restack modules and spacer as shown in Figure 3.
NOTE: Ascertain flat washer is positioned between star washer and housing.
(d) Reconnect aircraft wire harness and ensure adjacent ring terminals are not touching.
(e) Install assembly on aircraft and check adjustment.
(2) Alignment
Any time the brush block assembly is removed or replaced, alignment at reinstallation must be
checked as described under Inspections, below, and as shown in Figure 3.
3K3 30-60-00 FebPAGE 9

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Suggested Use of Dial Indicator

Figure 5
C. Metal Oxide Varistor (MOV) Module (See Figure 3.) (S/N’s 4636132 and up.)
The MOV module must be replaced in the event of a lightning strike.
(1) Disconnect electrical leads, noting their relative position to facilitate reconnection. Loosen and
remove screws holding module in position. Remove module.
(2) Position new module, place screws in position, tighten. Connect electrical leads.
D. Slip Ring Assembly
(1) Replacement
Slip ring assemblies that are open or shorted electrically, cracked or damaged structurally, or
which have damaged surfaces beyond the scope of minor repair or clean up, should be
replaced.
(2) Alignment
Excessive slip ring run-out will result in severe arcing between the slip ring and brushes and
will cause rapid brush wear. If the run-out is not corrected, rapid deterioration of the slip ring
and brush contact surfaces will result and lead to eventual failure of the heating system. Check
the slip ring run-out with a dial indicator securely attached to the engine with the pointer resting
on the slip ring. (See Figure 5.) Rotate the propeller slowly noting the run-out indicated on the
gauge. The total run-out must not exceed 0.005 inch ± 0.0025 inch and 0.002 inch in any 4
inch interval of slip ring travel.
NOTE: Some error may be induced in the readings by pushing in or pulling out on the
propeller. Care must be taken to exert a uniform push or pull.
Small amounts of run-out may be corrected by varying the torque on the slip ring mounting
bolts between 40 to 100 inch-pounds to obtain the required flatness.
PAGE 10
Feb 28/07 30-60-00 3K4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Deicer Wiring Harness Installation

Figure 6
3K5 30-60-00 Feb

PAGE 11
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
E. Deicer (Heater Boot) Wiring Harness

The propeller deicer wiring harness is secured to the propeller counterweight as follows:
(1) Insert the deicer wire harness thru the 9/32 IN. diameter hole in the prop counterweight.
(2) Connect the plugs of the prop deicers and the deicer wire harness as shown in Figure 6.
(3) Install tie strap (P/N MS3367-1-9) between the leads along the length of the plugs. Do not
tighten at this time.
(4) Install both tie straps (P/N MS3367-2-9) under the tie strap installed in the previous step and
around the counterweight. Do not tighten at this time.
(5) Install transflex tubing over deicer wire harness.
(6) Route transflex tubing under both tie straps (P/N MS3367-2-9) and tighten tie straps.
(7) Tighten the tie strap around the plugs.
(8) Install the terminals on the deicer wire harness.
(9) Install the terminals of the harness to the screws on the spinner bulkhead and tighten the lead
clip over the harness.
(10) To assure balance of the propeller assembly, the original balancing weights or their equivalents
must be reinstalled. The weights must be left in the original position on the propeller hub. The
restrainer and weights should not interfere with any part of the propeller assembly under any
condition. If for any reason balance weights were removed, reinstall safety wire on screws. The
deicer wire harness must be installed on the propeller as just described.
3. Testing
A. Resistance Test
To determine incorrect resistance, short or open at the brush-to-slip ring contact, disconnect
harness at the timer and use low-range ohmmeter to read resistance from each deicer circuit lead
(Pins C, D, E and F of harness plug) to ground; it should read .58 to .67. If this reading is not
obtained, disconnect the deicer lead straps to measure deicer resistances individually. Individual
deicer should be 1.15 to 1.33. If first check is off limits but second check is satisfactory, trouble is
probably in the brush-to-slip ring area; if the second check is off limits, the deicer is damaged and
must be replaced.
B. Ammeter
(1) Using the Ammeter
Whether in flight or during ground testing, the ammeter can be used to indicate the general
nature of most electrical problems. The troubleshooting chart is primarily based on the use of
the ammeter and assumes that the user does understand all normal operating modes of the
system.
NOTE: When troubleshooting, first use the “ammeter test,” below, and “heat test” (see
Inspections - 50 Hour) to determine which circuits are involved. Use circuit diagram for
assistance to check voltages or continuity.
(a) Excess current reading on the ammeter always indicates a power lead is shorted to
ground. Thus, when trouble of this nature is found, it is vital that the grounded power lead
be located and corrected.
(b) A considerable number of timers that have been returned for repair proved to be fully
workable when tested. Accomplish the test described under “BFG Timer,” below, before
concluding that the timer is defective.
(c) Defective wiring in propeller mounted components may be indicated by normal current
readings in ground checkouts (propeller not rotating) but low current with propeller rotating
at cruise RPM.
PAGE 12
Feb 28/07 30-60-00 3K6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 2
DEICER ELECTRICAL RESISTANCE
Maximum Minimum
Two (2) Blade Propeller
Single Blade 4.90 4.70
Both Blades in Parallel 2.45 2.35
Three (3) Blade Propeller
Single Blade 4.56 4.12
All Blades in Parallel 1.52 1.37
(2) Ammeter Test

(a) Check ammeter by connecting calibrated test ammeter or volt-ohmmeter with ammeter
scale, into de-icing system circuit between bus bar and system ammeter. Activate system
and check amperage reading on test ammeter. Reading should agree with reading on
system ammeter. Deactivate system and remove test ammeter or volt-ohmmeter. If
readings are different, and deicing system operates satisfactorily, replace system
ammeter.
(b) If the timer and ammeter tests are satisfactory, circuit breaker and switch are functioning
correctly. If testing is unsatisfactory, and timer and ammeter check out satisfactorily, repair
or replace circuit breaker and/or switch.
C. Propeller Deicers (i.e. - Heater Boots)
(1) Final Electrical Check
(a) Verify that deicers are installed so that blades can be moved throughout the entire blade
pitch range without placing deicer leads or straps under tension. Make certain that all
terminals are tight. Do not over torque.
(b) Check the electrical resistance between terminals or between the slip rings. The reading
should be per Chart 2.
(2) Functional Check
(a) S/N’s 4636001 thru 4636131 only:
CAUTION: DO NOT OPERATE PROPELLER HEAT EQUIPMENT WITH ENGINE NOT
RUNNING FOR MORE THAN 30 SECONDS.
1 Lock brakes, with engine operating at 2,000 rpm, turn PROP HEAT switch ON.
2 De-ice ammeter shall indicate in the green range (8 to 12 amps). Cycle time is 90
seconds ON and 90 seconds OFF.
3 Turn PROP HEAT switch OFF. Turn engine OFF.
3K7 30-60-00 Feb

PAGE 13
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(b) S/N’s 4636132 and up:

1 Lock brakes, with engine operating at 2,000 rpm, and one alternator ON, turn PROP
HEAT switch ON.
2 Verify that the green PROP HEAT switch flashes rapidly for 30 seconds, indicating
the deicer is in the ON cycle. After approximately 30-45 seconds, the flash rate
should reduce, indicating the deicer is in the OFF cycle. The switch will continue to
flash at the reduced rate as long as the airplane remains on the ground or until the
PROP HEAT switch is deselected. Verify that the PROP DE-ICE FAIL annunciator
does not illuminate.
3 Verify that the ship’s total amperage (LH and RH combined) shows an increase of
approximately 15 amps with the 3-bladed propeller, or 10 amps with the 2-bladed
propeller, when the PROP HEAT is cycled ON.
4 Turn PROP HEAT switch OFF. Turn engine OFF.
5 Test PROP DE-ICE FAIL annunciator as specified in Chapter 31.
D. BFG Timer (S/N’s 4636001 thru 4636131 only.)
Field experience indicates that too often the timer is considered at fault when the true trouble lies
elsewhere. Before removing a timer as defective, perform this test:
(1) Disconnect wire harness at timer and, with PROP HEAT switch ON, check voltage from Pin B
of harness plug to ground. If system voltage is not present, the fault is not in the timer. If
system voltage is present at Pin B, check ground circuit using ohmmeter from Pin G to ground.
If no circuit is shown, the fault is in ground lead, not in timer. If ground connection is open, the
timer step switch will not change position.
(2) When power and ground circuits have been checked, connect a jumper wire from Pin B of
harness to B contact of timer socket to power timer. Connect a jumper wire from Pin G of
harness to G contact of timer socket to complete the power circuit. Now use voltmeter from
ground to the timer socket and check that timer is cycling to deliver system voltage to the C
contact. Voltage must be delivered for approximately 90 seconds.
(3) If the timer meets these requirements, it is not the cause of the trouble. If it fails to perform as
indicated, the trouble does lie in the timer and it should be replaced.
4. Inspections
A. 50 Hour
(1) S/N’s 4636001 thru 4636131 only:
(a) Lock brakes and operate engine at near takeoff power. Turn PROP HEAT switch ON and
observe deicer ammeter for at least two minutes. Ammeter needle must rest within the
shaded band, except for a “flicker,” approximately every 90 seconds, as the step switch of
the timer operates. Any movement of the needle other than the normal 90 second flicker
indicates a short or open that must be located and corrected.
(b) Perform “heat test” as follows: with engine stopped, turn PROP HEAT switch ON and feel
deicer on propellers for proper sequence of deicer operation. The deicers should cycle ON
for 90 seconds, then OFF for 90 seconds and repeat. Temperature rise should be
noticeable and each deicer should warm for about 90 seconds. Local hot spots indicate
surface damage of deicers requiring replacement of deicer.
(c) Remove spinner dome and engine cowling. With assistant observing deicer ammeter and
with PROP HEAT switch ON, flex all accessible wiring, particularly the deicer wire
harness, leads from slip ring assembly and the firewall electrical connectors and their
wiring. Any movement of the ammeter needle other than the “90 second flicker” of cycling
indicates a short or open that must be located and corrected.
PAGE 14
Feb 28/07 30-60-00 3K8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(2) S/N’s 4636132 and up:

(a) Lock brakes, with engine operating at 2,000 rpm, and one alternator ON, turn PROP
HEAT switch ON.
(b) Verify that the green PROP HEAT switch flashes rapidly for 30 seconds, indicating the
deicer is in the ON cycle. After approximately 30-45 seconds, the flash rate should
reduce, indicating the deicer is in the OFF cycle. The switch will continue to flash at the
reduced rate as long as the airplane remains on the ground or until the PROP HEAT
switch is deselected. Verify that the PROP DE-ICE FAIL annunciator does not illuminate.
(c) Verify that the ship’s total amperage (LH and RH combined) shows an increase of
approximately 15 amps with the 3-bladed propeller, or 10 amps with the 2-bladed
propeller, when the PROP HEAT is cycled ON.
(d) Turn PROP HEAT switch OFF. Turn engine OFF.
(e) Perform “heat test” as follows: with engine stopped, turn PROP HEAT switch ON and
within 30 seconds feel deicer on propellers to verify ON cycle. Within 30-45 seconds of
switching ON, the system will shut itself OFF - verify that this occurs.Temperature rise
should be noticeable. Local hot spots indicate surface damage of deicers requiring
replacement of deicer.
B. 100 Hour
(1) Remove cowling. Conduct appropriate 50 Hour Inspection, above.
(2) Check for radio noise or radio compass interference by operating the engine at near takeoff
power with radio gear ON while turning PROP HEAT switch ON and OFF. If noise or
interference occurs with PROP HEAT switch ON and disappears when switch is OFF, refer to
troubleshooting chart.
(3) Ascertain that all clamps, clips, mountings and electrical connections are tight. Check for loose,
broken or missing safety wire.
(4) Deicers: Closely check deicers for wrinkled, loose or torn areas, particularly around the
outboard end. Check that terminals and terminal studs are not shorting out to each other or the
propeller hub. Inspect wire harness for evidence of chafing or shorting. Ensure that all clamps
and tie straps are properly installed. Look for abrasion or cuts, especially along the leading
edge and the flat or thrust face. If deicer wires are exposed in damaged areas or if rubber is
found to be tacky, swollen or deteriorated (as from oil or solvent contact), replace the damaged
deicer (see Deicers (Propeller Deice System), below).
NOTE: Operate propeller from full low pitch (high RPM) to feathering and check that deicer
lead wires do not come under tension or are pinched by propeller blade (refer to
Figures 3 and 6).
(5) Slip Rings: Check slip rings for gouges, roughened surface, cracks, burned or discolored
areas, and for deposits of oil, grease or dirt.
CAUTION: DISPOSE OF UNUSED MEK AND OTHER CHEMICALS AND SOLVENTS IN A
MANNER CONSISTENT WITH LOCAL LAWS AND/OR ENVIRONMENTAL
PROTECTION AGENCY REGULATIONS.
(a) Clean greasy or contaminated slip rings with CRC 2-26 solvent or with Stoddard solvent.
If Stoddard solvent is used, wipe off with a clean cloth dampened with MEK to avoid
leaving a film.
(b) If uneven wear is found or if wobble is noticed, set up a dial indicator as shown in Figure 5
and check alignment of the slip rings to the propeller shaft as explained in this section.
3K9 30-60-00 Feb

PAGE 15
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Centering Brushes on Slip Rings

Figure 7
(6) Modular Brush Assemblies - Brushes: Examine mounting brackets and housing for cracks,
deformation or other physical damage.
(a) Test that each brush rides fully on its slip ring over 360°. Figure 7 shows the wear pattern
if this condition is not corrected. If alignment is off, shim where brush block is mounted to
bracket or adjust mounting bracket support arm.
NOTE: The shim is a series of laminates and may be peeled for proper alignment of
brushes to slip ring
(b) Check for proper clearance of brush block to slip rings (see Figure 3). Loosen mounting
screws and move in elongated holes to correct block position and tighten securely.
(c) Visually check brush block for 2° angle of attack (see Figure 3). If not, loosen mounting
screws and twist block, but be sure to hold clearance limits shown when tightening.
1 Note direction of slip ring rotation.
2 Place template against face of brush assembly.
3 Slide brush assembly and remove template.
(7) System Wiring
Visually inspect wiring from brush blocks through firewall, to timer, to ammeter, to switch and to
aircraft power supply for breaks or damage. In such case, check continuity through affected
harness. Use the wiring diagram to trace circuitry.
PAGE 16
Feb 28/07 30-60-00 3K10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3K11 30-60-00 Feb

PAGE 17
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

INTENTIONALLY BLANK
PAGE 18
Feb 28/07 30-60-00 3K12
CARD 4 OF 9
PA-46-350P
(S/N’s 4636001 AND UP)

4A1
Published by

2926 Piper Drive
U.S.A.
Member
General Aviation
4A2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
are as follows:
ORG950712 June 19, 1996 All

PR980101 January 1, 1998 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6
CR981223 December 23, 1998 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6
PR000201 February 1, 2000 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6
PR010515 May 15, 2001 1
CR050730 July 30, 2005 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8
PR060207 February 7, 2006 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8
CR070228* February 28, 2007 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 and 9

02/28/07.
manual.

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 1
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTRODUCTION
CHAPTER CHAPTER


2 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07
5 Feb 28/07
6 Feb 28/07
7 Feb 28/07
8 Feb 28/07
9 Feb 28/07
10 Feb 28/07
11 Feb 28/07
12 Feb 28/07
13 Feb 28/07
14 Feb 28/07
15 Feb 28/07
16 Feb 28/07
Index 1 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07
5 Feb 28/07
6 Feb 28/07
7 Feb 28/07
8 Feb 28/07
9 Feb 28/07
10 Feb 28/07

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTRODUCTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION
General 1 4A9
Effectivity 2 4A10
Pagination 3 4A11
Indexing 3 4A11
INDEX
Index 1 4B1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTRODUCTION

(5-20-00).
2. General
airplane.
correspondence.

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. Effectivity
1995 4636001 thru 4636020 2004 4636349 thru 4636363

1996 4636021 thru 4636076 2005 4636364 thru 4636374
1997 4636077 thru 4636131 2006 4636375 thru 4636399
1998 4636132 thru 4636186 2007 4636400 and up
1999 4636187 thru 4636247
2000 4636248 thru 4636313
2002 4636299, and
4636314 thru 4636338
2003 4636339 thru 4636348

Example:
46 36 001

MODEL CODE

fuel system.
PIPER.
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6. Pagination
with Page 1 (i.e. - 28-40-00, Page 1).
different page.
Example.
9. Indexing
apply.

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Wylie, Texas 75098
P.O. Box 1404
(3) ALTERNATOR:
Airport Complex
P. O. Box 273
(4) AUTOFLIGHT:
Olathe, Kansas 66061-1950 PH: (940) 325-9406
PAGE 4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(5) BATTERY:
(6) BRAKES:
1160 Center Road
Avon, Ohio 44011
(330) 374-3743
FAX: (330) 374-2290
Black Standard
Pneumatic De-Icer
Installation,
Maintenance and
10 Ammon Drive FAX: - (603) 669-0931
or,
55 Old Bedford Road
Lincoln, MA 01773

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

14405 Keil Road NE
(10) ENGINE:
43 Magnolia Ave. #4
20 New King Street
711 Taylor Street
Elyria, Ohio 44036
2600 S. Custer
Wichita, Kansas
(See Brakes, above)
or,
4520 Hampton Rd. FAX: (336) 766-9040
Clemmons, NC 27012
PAGE 6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

2600 Skypark Drive
(18) MAGNETOS:
7575 Baymeadows Way
Olathe, KS 66062
(20) OXYGEN SYSTEM:
2225 Erie Street
Torrance, CA 90504

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Piqua, OH 45356-2634
Propeller
Composite Blade
Propeller Owner’s
Aluminum Blade
Inspection, Repair,
P/N 006-05332-0001
2275 Stanley Ave. FAX: (937) 229-8531
Dayton, Ohio 45404
(26) STARTER:
or,
Granbury, TX 76048
(27) TURBOCHARGER:
Torrance, CA 90505
PAGE 8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(28) VACUUM PUMP:


Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
00 General
10 Time Limits
00 General
10 Jacking

20 Leveling
00 General
10 Towing
20 Taxiing
10 Parking
20 Mooring

12 SERVICING 1I3
00 General
10 Replenishing

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
00 General
20 Painting
00 General
20 Distribution
40 Heating
50 Cooling
22 AUTOFLIGHT 2F11
10 Autopilot
00 General
00 General
30 DC Generation
40 External Power
60 Emergency
20 Extinguishing
00 General
10 Aileron and Tab
20 Rudder and Tab
30 Elevator and Tab
50 Flaps
60 Speedbrakes
PAGE 12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
28 FUEL 3F9
00 General
10 Storage
20 Distribution
40 Indicating
00 General
10 Main
00 General
10 Airfoil
30 Pitot and Static
00 General
50 Steering
33 LIGHTS 4G5
40 Exterior
34 NAVIGATION 5C1
00 General
35 OXYGEN 6C1
10 Crew
20 Passenger

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
37 VACUUM 6C15
00 General
10 Distribution
20 Indicating

51 STRUCTURES 6F1
00 General
70 Repairs
52 DOORS 6G13
10 Passenger/Crew
20 Emergency Exit
30 Cargo
55 STABILIZERS 6H13
00 General
20 Elevator
40 Rudder
56 WINDOWS 6I19
00 General
20 Cabin
30 Door
57 WINGS 6K5
40 Attach Fittings
50 Flight Surfaces
61 PROPELLERS 7C1
20 Controlling
00 General
PAGE 14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
71 POWER PLANT 7D5
00 General
10 Cowling
20 Mounts
70 Engine Drains
10 Distribution
30 Indicating
74 IGNITION 7F5

20 Distribution
10 Power Control
10 Power
20 Temperature
79 OIL 7J3
20 Distribution
30 Indicating
80 STARTING 7J15
10 Cranking
81 TURBINES 7K9
10 Charts


Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

1E23
Ailerons
Balancing: 6L9
Control Column
Installation: 3C24
Control System
Aileron - Rudder
Interconnect: 3D7
Control Cables: 3D2
Installation: 3D3
Wiring: 4C8 4F6
Corrosion Control
Control Wheel C
Wing: 6L3
Installation: 3C21
Installation: 6L7
Tab: 3D5
2D22
Compressor: 2E22
Dipstick: 2E23
Oil Level: 2F1
2E22
Slip Torque: 2F1
Servicing: 2D23
Ambient Temperature
Indication: 2E14
Stand: 2E7
4B1 INDEX FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 INDEX 4B2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

OAT: 9I13 2H19 7J11
4B3 INDEX FebPAGE 3

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Flaps
G Inspection
Warning 6I11
1K5 System: 6C9
PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 INDEX 4B4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Forward: 4H1
4B5 INDEX FebPAGE 5

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
P Propeller Rudder
Pagination: A11
7C11 Control System
Parking: 1G15
Piper
Repair: 7C11 3D13
Pitch Servo: 2G12
Rings: 3K10
Measuring: 3K3
5C11
Installation: 5C12
Pitot Head: 5C18
3K7 Seats
Test: 5C11
Placards: 1G23
Exterior: 1H1
Interior: 1H9
Components: 3I11
R System: 3J9
Limits: 3J4
PAGE 6
Feb 28/07 INDEX 4B6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

4B7 INDEX FebPAGE 7

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Filter: 6D3 Wing
Vertical Fin: 6I11
Y
Yaw Servo: 2G10
W
A11
Weather Radar: 5F1
Weighing: 1F15
Wheels
Bearing Cup: 4F4
Repairs: 4F3
PAGE 8
Feb 28/07 INDEX 4B8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4B9 INDEX FebPAGE 9

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

INTENTIONALLY BLANK
PAGE 10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER
31
INDICATING /
RECORDING
SYSTEMS
4C1
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4C2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 31
CHAPTER CHAPTER


2 Feb 28/07
31-50-00 1 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07
5 Feb 28/07
6 Feb 28/07

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 31 - INDICATING / RECORDING SYSTEMS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CENTRAL WARNING SYSTEMS 31-50-00 1 4C7

Annunciator 1 4C7
Annunciator Removal and Installation 3 4C9
Lamp Replacement 3 4C9
Wiring 3 4C9

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CENTRAL WARNING SYSTEMS
1. Annunciator
The annunciator panel is located in the upper center section of the instrument panel and consists of a
group of warning lights as follows: (shown with optional equipment).
ALTERNATOR NO. 1 INOP When either alternator fails or is selected OFF, the appropriate
ALTERNATOR NO. 2 INOP annunciator light will illuminate.
ANNUNCIATOR INOP Illuminates if the annunciator fail relay switch is faulty and/or the ANNUN
circuit breaker trips.
BOOST PUMP Illuminates when the fuel boost pump in the tank being used fails to
generate sufficient pressure. In normal operation, will also illuminate
briefly when switching tanks. Neither BOOST PUMP will function when
the fuel selector is set to OFF or is positioned between the LEFT and
RIGHT detents.
CABIN ALTITUDE Illuminates if cabin pressure altitude exceeds 10,000 feet.
DOOR AJAR Illuminates if either the forward baggage door or the cabin door is not
closed and latched.
FLAPS Illuminates when the flap motor protection circuit breaker trips.
FUEL PRESS Illuminates when the engine-driven fuel pump fails to generate sufficient
pressure.
FUEL IMBALANCE S/N’s 4636021 and up. Illuminates if a fuel quantity difference of greater
than 10 gallons is detected for more than 60 seconds between the left
and right tanks. Remains lighted until the imbalance is corrected.
GEAR WARN On the ground - illuminates when the landing gear selector is placed in
the UP position with the aircraft weight still on the gear.
In the air - illuminates when the gear is in transit; when all three gear are
not fully down and locked, or when the gear is not fully UP but the gear
doors are closed; when the throttle is reduced below 14 inches of
manifold pressure and the landing gear are not in the DOWN position; or
if the flaps are extended more than 10° and the landing gear are not in
the DOWN position.
HYDRAULIC PUMP Indicates the hydraulic pump is being supplied with electrical power.
Normally illuminated only during landing gear operation.
ICE DETECT FAIL S/N’s 4636132 thru 4636313 only. Illuminates if a fault develops in either
the ice detection sensor or controller.
LOW BUS VOLTAGE Illuminates when system voltage drops below 25 ± 0.3 Vdc. Normally on
when just the airplane’s battery or an external 28 Vdc battery is used for
electrical power.
OIL PRESS Illuminates if oil pressure is below 24 PSI. As oil pressure drops, there
may be as much as an 8 PSI lag (dead band) before the light comes on.
OXYGEN Illuminates whenever one of the oxygen generators has been activated.
Remains lighted until the expended oxygen generator(s) is/are replaced.
4C7 31-50-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PITOT HEAT OFF/INOP S/N’s 4636021 thru 4636374. Self-explanatory.

L PITOT HEAT S/N’s 4636375 and up. Illuminates when the appropriate pitot system
R PITOT HEAT fails.
PROP DE-ICE FAIL S/N’s 4636132 and up only. Illuminates if a fault develops in the PROP
HEAT system.
SELECT DE-ICE S/N’s 4636132 thru 4636313 only. Illuminates when the SMARTbootTM Ice
Detection system calculates the ice buildup on the vertical fin boot in
excess of 1/4 inch. Will remain illuminated until at least 90% of the ice cap
has been removed from the right horizontal stabilizer boot. This
annunciator is advisory only.
STALL WARN FAIL Illuminates if the lift computer fails and/or the STALL WARN circuit
breaker trips.
STARTER ENGAGE Illumination during engine cranking is normal. Illumination at any other
time indicates a problem.
SURFACE DE-ICE Illuminates when the de-ice boots inflate, i.e. - when the SURFACE DE-
ICE switch is depressed and the pneumatic de-ice system cycles in
sequence: tail, lower wing, upper wing.
VACUUM NO. 1 INOP S/N’s 4636021 and up. If either vacuum pump fails, the appropriate
VACUUM NO. 2 INOP annunciator light will illuminate.
WINDSHIELD HEAT FAIL Illuminates when an overtemperature condition exists or the windshield
temperature sensor fails. In normal operation, may also illuminate briefly
when switching from HIGH to LOW windshield heat.
2. Annunciator Removal and Installation
See 33-10-00.
3. Lamp Replacement
See 33-10-00.
4. Wiring
See 33-10-00 and 91-31-50.
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 31-50-00 4C8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Annunciator Panel Effectivity

Figure 1 4636001 thru 4636020

Figure 2 4636021 thru 4636131
Effectivity
Annunciator Panel 4636132 thru 4636313,
Figure 3 less 4636299
VACUUM VACUUM OIL HYDRALIC PITOT HEAT FUEL

NO 1 INOP NO 2 INOP PRESS PUMP OFF/INOP IMABLANCE
ALTERNATOR BOOST FUEL LOW BUS CABIN STALL WARN

NO 1 INOP PUMP PRESS VOLTAGE ALTITUDE FAIL
ALTERNATOR GEAR DOOR FLAPS STARTER WINDSHIELD

NO 2 INOP WARN AJAR ENGAGE HEAT FAIL
PROP DE-ICE OXYGEN ANNUNC SURFACE

FAIL INOP DE-ICE
Effectivity
Annunciator Panel 4636314 thru 4636374,
Figure 4 and 4636299
4C9 31-50-00 FebPAGE 3

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TEST
FUEL BOOST
PRESS PUMP
PRP DE-ICE WINDSHLD

FAIL HTR FAIL
L PITOT R PITOT
HEAT HEAT
GEAR FLAPS
WARN
ALT NO 1 ALT NO 2 RED

INOP INOP
LOW BUS DOOR

VOLTS AJAR
CABIN START
ALT ENGAGE
STALL
WRN FAIL
OIL FUEL
PRESS IMBALANCE
OXYGEN ANNUN
INOP
AMBER
HYD PITOT HTR
PUMP OFF
VAC 1 VAC 2
INOP INOP
SURF
DE-ICE GREEN
Effectivity Annunciator Panel

PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 31-50-00 4C10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4C11 31-50-00 FebPAGE 5

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 6
Feb 28/07 31-50-00 4C12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER
32
LANDING GEAR
4C13
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4C14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 32
CHAPTER CHAPTER
32-List of 1 Feb 28/07 32-30-00 1 Feb 28/07

3 Feb 28/07
2 Feb 28/07 5 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07 6 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07 7 Feb 28/07
8 Feb 28/07
32-00-00 1 Feb 28/07 9 Feb 28/07
2 Feb 28/07 10 Feb 28/07
11 Feb 28/07
32-10-00 1 Feb 28/07 12 Feb 28/07
2 Feb 28/07 13 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07 14 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07 15 Feb 28/07
5 Feb 28/07 16 Feb 28/07
6 Feb 28/07 17 Feb 28/07
7 Feb 28/07 18 Feb 28/07
8 Feb 28/07 19 Feb 28/07
9 Feb 28/07 20 Feb 28/07
10 Feb 28/07
11 Feb 28/07 32-40-00 1 Feb 28/07
12 Feb 28/07 2 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07
32-20-00 1 Feb 28/07 4 Feb 28/07
2 Feb 28/07 5 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07 6 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07 7 Feb 28/07
5 Feb 28/07 8 Feb 28/07
6 Feb 28/07 9 Feb 28/07
7 Feb 28/07 10 Feb 28/07
8 Feb 28/07 11 Feb 28/07
9 Feb 28/07 12 Feb 28/07
10 Feb 28/07 13 Feb 28/07
11 Feb 28/07 14 Feb 28/07
12 Feb 28/07
13 Feb 28/07 32-50-00 1 Feb 28/07
14 Feb 28/07 2 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 32
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES (continued)
CHAPTER CHAPTER
32-60-00 1 Feb 28/07
2 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07
5 Feb 28/07
6 Feb 28/07
7 Feb 28/07
8 Feb 28/07
9 Feb 28/07
10 Feb 28/07
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 32 - LANDING GEAR
TABLE OF CONTENTS
GENERAL 32-00-00 1 4C21

Special Tools 2 4C22
MAIN GEAR AND DOORS 32-10-00 1 4C23

Main Gear Oleo 1 4C23
Disassembly 1 4C23
Assembly 3 4D1
Cleaning, Inspection, and Repair 4 4D2
Main Gear Assembly 4 4D2
Removal 4 4D2
Installation 6 4D4
Adjustment 7 4D5
Alignment 7 4D5
Main Gear Tolerances 7 4D5
Main Gear Door Assembly 10 4D8
Removal 10 4D8
Installation 10 4D8
NOSE GEAR AND DOORS 32-20-00 1 4D11

Nose Gear Oleo 3 4D13
Disassembly 3 4D13
Assembly 3 4D13
Nose Gear Assembly 6 4D16
Removal 6 4D16
Installation 6 4D16
Adjustment 9 4D19
Alignment 9 4D19
Nose Gear Tolerances 10 4D20
Nose Gear Door Assembly 12 4D22
Removal 12 4D22
Installation 12 4D22
Nose Gear Door Adjustments 13 4D23

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EXTENSION AND RETRACTION 32-30-00 1 4E1

Landing Gear Retraction System Functional Test 4 4E4
Nose Gear Actuator Assembly 11 4E11
Removal 11 4E11
Main Gear Actuator Assembly 13 4E13
Removal 13 4E13
Trunnion Modification 15 4E15
Nose Gear Door Actuator Assembly 15 4E15
Removal 15 4E15
Sequence Valve Parts Replacement (Parker Hannifin only) 17 4E17
Emergency Gear Release Valve 18 4E18
Removal 18 4E18
Parker Hannifin Valves Only 19 4E19
Disassembly 19 4E19
Assembly 19 4E19
WHEELS AND BRAKES 32-40-00 1 4F1

Nose Wheel Assembly 1 4F1
Removal and Disassembly 1 4F1
Assembly and Installation 1 4F1
Inspection 2 4F2
Main Wheel Assembly 2 4F2
Inspection 2 4F2
Nose and Main Wheel Assembly Repairs 3 4F3
Bearing Cup 4 4F4
Removal 4 4F4
Installation 4 4F4
Brake Adjustment and Lining Tolerance 4 4F4
Wheel Brake Assembly 4 4F4
Cleaning, Inspection, and Repair 6 4F6
Toe Brake Cylinder Assembly 6 4F6
Removal 6 4F6
Disassembly, Repair, and Installation 7 4F7
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
WHEELS AND BRAKES (continued) 32-40-00

Brake Bleeding Procedure 9 4F9
(Gravity) 9 4F9
(Pressure) 9 4F9
Brake Bleeding After a Unit Has Been Changed 10 4F10
Brake System Leak Check 10 4F10
Parking Brake Valve 10 4F10
Removal 10 4F10
Installation 10 4F10
Disassembly 10 4F10
Assembly 10 4F10
Cleaning, Inspection, and Repair 11 4F11
STEERING 32-50-00 1 4F15

Steering Pushrod 1 4F15
Removal 1 4F15
Installation 1 4F15
Steering Bellcrank 1 4F15
Removal 1 4F15
Installation 1 4F15
Bungee Assembly 1 4F15
Removal 1 4F15
Installation 2 4F16
Steering Pushrod Bellows 2 4F16
Removal 2 4F16
Installation 2 4F16
Steering Arm 2 4F16
Removal 2 4F16
Installation 2 4F16
POSITION AND WARNING 32-60-00 1 4F19

Nose Gear 4 4F22
Up Limit Switch Adjustment 4 4F22
Down Limit Switch Adjustment 4 4F22
Main Gear 5 4F23
Up Limit Switch Adjustment 5 4F23
Down Limit Switch Adjustment 5 4F23
Landing Gear Safety Switch (Squat Switch) Adjustment 7 4G1
Landing Gear Up / Power Reduced Warning Switch 8 4G2
Removal 8 4G2
Installation 8 4G2
Adjustment 8 4G2

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GENERAL
This chapter provides instructions for the overhaul, inspection and adjustment of the various components
of the landing gear and brake systems. Also included are adjustments for the electrical limit, safety and
warning switches.
This airplane is equipped with a retractable tricycle air-oil strut type landing gear which is hydraulically
operated by an electric hydraulic pump. A selector handle or switch on the instrument panel to the left of
the control quadrant is used to select gear UP or DOWN positions.
Gear positions are indicated by a display of three green lights (for gear down and locked) located above
the gear selector and a red warning light (for gear-in-transit or gear-unsafe conditions) in annunciator
panel. There is no separate light to indicate that all gears are fully retracted other than all gear lights
being out.
The landing gear swings to the down position and each actuator extends to its locked position, a switch
located on each actuator activates to indicate by a green light that the individual gear is safely down and
locked. When the gear begins to retract and the hydraulic actuators unlock, the down limit switch
actuates to the NC circuit and, in series with the NC circuit of the up limit switch, allows the gear unsafe
light to come on. The gear unsafe light will remain on until the gear is up and all up limit switches are
actuated to their normally open (NO) circuit.
A gear warning horn will sound when power is decreased to 15 ± 1 In. Hg. manifold pressure unless all
three gears are down. This horn will also sound if the flaps are extended beyond approach position if the
gears are not down and locked.
The red gear unsafe light also operates simultaneously with the warning horn. Their primary purpose is
to give warning when power is reduced below 15 ± 1 In. Hg. manifold pressure and the landing gear has
not reached the down and locked position. This circuit is controlled by three (3) paralleling down limit
switches connected in series with a throttle switch located in the control quadrant (see 91-32-60 for
electrical schematic).
Each landing gear is retracted and extended by a single hydraulic locking cylinder attached to the oleo
strut housing. As the gears retract, doors enclose each gear through mechanical linkage. The gears are
held in their up position by hydraulic pressure on the cylinder.
A hydraulic system modification and power pak upgrade provides a modification to the hydraulic power
pak electrical system which will, under certain conditions, bypass the low pressure switch in the event
the switch fails to operate.
The gear system has a free fall secondary extension system which consists of a valve that is controlled
from the panel. A down spring is incorporated in the nose gear to overcome air loads resisting gear
extension.
The nose gear is steerable through a 60 degree arc by use of the rudder pedals. As the gear retracts,
the steering linkage becomes separated from the gear so that rudder pedal action with the gear
retracted is not impeded by the nose gear operation. The nose gear rotates 90° to stow in the horizontal
position underneath the luggage compartment floor. A steering bungee is also incorporated in the nose
wheel steering mechanism.
The main wheels are equipped with dual piston, single-slotted disc hydraulic brakes.
The parking brake is set by depressing both toe brakes and setting a push-pull valve lock on the
instrument panel.
4C21 32-00-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2. Special Tools
These tools are used at the factory and are recommended where rigging, alignment, or installation
procedures specify “use a suitable tool.” Order them through any Piper Dealer.
Tool (Tool Number) Piper P/N
Rudder Pedal Neutral Alignment Tool (HF 622724) 762-151
Nose Wheel Centering (i.e. - Neutral) Tool (HF 622722) 762-147
Nose Gear Steering Bellcrank Centering (i.e. - Neutral) Tool (TL 622723) 762-148
Nose Gear Steering Horn / Arm Gap Tool (TL 690672) N/A
Nose Gear Actuator Alignment Tool (TL 690672) 762-137
Nose Gear Downspring Disassembly/Reassembly Tool (SK VB1152) 762-155
Nose Gear Downspring Remove/Install Tool (SK VB1153) 762-157
(See also 32-30-00, Figure 3.)
Control Wheel Neutral Tool (HF 622725) N/A
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 32-00-00 4C22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
MAIN GEAR AND DOORS
1. Troubleshooting
See Chart 1.
2. Main Gear Oleo
A. Disassembly
The main gear oleo assembly may be removed from the gear oleo housing and disassembled with
the gear removed from or installed in the airplane.
(1) Place airplane on jacks (refer to 7-10-00).
(2) Place a drip pan under the main gear to catch spillage.
(3) Remove air and fluid from the oleo. Depress the air valve core pin to reduce strut pressure.
Remove the filler plug. With a thin hose, siphon as much hydraulic fluid from the strut as
possible.
CHART 1
TROUBLESHOOTING MAIN LANDING GEAR
Main landing gear shimmies Tire out of balance. Check balance and replace
during fast taxi, tire if necessary.
takeoff, or landing.
Worn or loose wheel Replace and/or adjust
bearings. wheel bearings.
Worn torque link bolts Replace bolts and/or
and/or bushings. bushings.
Excessive or uneven Incorrect operating pressure. Inflate tire to correct
wear on main tires. pressure.
Wheel out of alignment Check wheel alignment.
(toe in or out).
Hydraulic actuator out of Check gear adjustment.
adjustment, allowing gear to
slant in or out. (There is no
adjustment on the extended
length - adjust for retracted
position only).
Strut bottoms on normal Insufficient air and/or Service strut with air
landing or taxiing on rough fluid in strut. and/or fluid.
ground.
Defective internal parts Replace defective parts.
in strut.
Landing gear doors fail Landing gear not retracting Check adjustment of
to completely close. completely. gear.
Door retraction mechanism Check adjustment.
out of adjustment.
4C23 32-10-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Main Gear Oleo Strut Assembly

Figure 1
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 32-10-00 4C24
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(4) Disconnect brake line at the joint located in the wheel well. Disconnect brake line retaining
clamp that attaches the brake line to the upper part of the strut housing.
(5) To remove the piston tube assembly from the oleo housing, remove the bolt that connects the
upper and lower torque link. Note the number and thickness of spacer washer(s) between the
two links.
(6) Compress the piston tube. Reach up into the lower end of the oleo housing and release the
snap ring from the annular slot at the bottom of the oleo housing.
(7) Pull the piston tube with its component parts from the cylinder housing.
(8) The piston tube components may be removed by removing the retainer ring from the top of the
piston tube. Slide the bearing assembly (with its inner O-ring and ring), wiper strip and washer
over the top of the piston tube.
(9) To remove the piston tube plug, located at the bottom of the piston tube assembly, remove the
bolt and insert a rod into the hole in the bottom of the fork and push the plug out of the top of
the piston tube.
(10) To remove the orifice tube, remove the orifice tube locknut, washer, lock washer and roll pin
from the top of the orifice tube (at the top of the trunnion). Slide the orifice tube from the
trunnion.
(11) The orifice tube plug may be removed by removing the snap ring from the slot at the bottom of
the orifice tube.
B. Assembly
(1) Determine that all parts are cleaned and inspected.
(2) To install the piston tube plug, first lubricate the plug O-ring with hydraulic fluid and install it on
the plug. Lubricate the inside wall of the piston tube. Insert the plug into the top of the piston
tube and push it down the tube. Align the bolt holes of the fork, tube and plug. Then install the
bolt assembly.
(3) If desired, cement a cork in the hole in the bottom of the fork body to prevent dirt from entering
between the fork and tube.
(4) To assemble components of orifice tube, insert the orifice plate into the bottom of the tube and
secure it with the snap ring. Install piston tube ring in slot on outer diameter of lower section of
orifice tube.
(5) To install the orifice tube in the oleo housing, install upper O-ring on orifice tube and insert the
tube up through the housing. With the end of the tube exposed through the top of the housing,
install the washer, lock washer, roll pin and locknut. Tighten the locknut only finger tight at this
time.
(6) Assemble components of piston tube on the tube by installing in order, snap ring, washer,
wiper ring, bearing assembly (with outer O-ring and inner O-ring/ring) and retainer ring.
(7) Lubricate the wall of the cylinder oleo housing and piston tube. Carefully insert the piston tube
assembly into the housing, guiding the orifice tube into the piston tube. Slide the washer and
wiper strip into position and secure the assembly with the snap ring in the lower part of the
trunnion.
(8) Torque the locknut at the top of the orifice tube from 530 to 550 inch-pounds.
(9) Ensure that the bushings are installed in the torque links. Bolt the links together making sure
that there is the same thickness of spacer washers between the links as previously removed
(to maintain wheel alignment). Tighten the bolt tight enough to allow no side play in the links
but still be free enough to rotate.
(10) Connect brake line and bleed brakes.
4D1 32-10-00 FebPAGE 3

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(11) Lubricate gear assembly (refer to Lubrication Chart 3, 12-20-00).

(12) Compress and extend the strut several times to ascertain the strut will operate freely. The
weight of the gear wheel and fork should allow the strut to extend.
(13) Service the oleo strut with fluid and air (refer to Oleo Struts, 12-10-00).
(14) Check main gear alignment (refer to Alignment of Main Landing Gear) and gear operation.
(15) Ascertain that gear is down and locked.
(16) Remove the airplane from the jacks.
C. Cleaning, Inspection, and Repair
(1) Clean all parts with a suitable dry type cleaning solvent.
(2) Inspect landing gear oleo assembly components for the following:
(a) Bearings and bushings for excessive wear (refer to Main Gear Tolerance illustration for
specifications), corrosion and overall damage.
(b) Snap rings for cracks, burrs, etc.
(c) Cylinder and orifice tube for corrosion, scratches, nicks and excessive wear.
(d) Orifice plate for hole restriction.
(e) Fork tube for corrosion, scratches, nicks, dents and misalignment.
(f) Air valve for general condition.
(3) Repair of the oleo is limited to smoothing out minor scratches, nicks or dents and replacement
of parts.
3. Main Gear Assembly
A. Removal
(1) Place the airplane on jacks.
(2) Disconnect locking actuator from strut housing.
(3) Disconnect brake line at its upper end in the wheel well.
(4) Disconnect gear door actuating rod at the gear housing.
(5) Remove bolt which retains forward strut housing support to the forward trunnion pin.
(6) Remove the forward trunnion pin by inserting a hook through the pin and drawing it towards
the center of the gear assembly.
NOTE: When withdrawing the pin do not lose the teflon washer and note the amount of shims
(if any) between the mating surfaces of the strut housing support and the support
fitting.
(7) Remove the bolt which retains the aft strut housing support to the aft trunnion pin.
(8) Remove the aft trunnion pin by inserting a hook through the pin and drawing it towards the
center of the gear assembly. Do not lose the teflon washer that was installed between the
mating surfaces of the strut housing support and the support fitting.
(9) Allow the gear to slowly drop from the wing.
PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 32-10-00 4D2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Main Gear Installation

Figure 2
4D3 32-10-00 FebPAGE 5

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B. Installation
NOTE: When assembling components of the landing gear, lubricate bearings, bushings and
friction surfaces with proper lubricant as described in 12-10-00.
(1) Install gear housing in the wheel well of the wing as follows:
(a) Place the gear up into the wheel well and align the holes in the strut support with the
holes in the support fittings.
NOTE: Ensure that one teflon washer is installed between each mating surface of the
strut support and the support fittings. The teflon surface of the washer should
face away from the centerline of the gear assembly.
NOTE: Install any previously removed shims between the mating surf aces of the forward
strut support and the support fittings. There should be 0.002 - 0.004 of trunnion
end play.
(b) Rotate the trunnion pin until the hole in the pin aligns with the hole in the strut support.
(c) Insert bolt (bolt head should be inboard) through strut support and trunnion pin. Secure
bolt with nut and washers.
(d) Repeat steps (b) and (c) for remaining trunnion pin and strut support.
(2) Attach the gear door actuating rod to the gear housing.
(3) Connect brake line at its upper end in the wheel well.
(4) Connect locking actuator to gear housing.
(5) Ensure that the landing gear is lubricated per Lubrication Chart 3, 12-20-00.
(6) Check the alignment of the wheel per instructions in Alignment, below.
(7) Remove the airplane from the jacks.
(1) Clean all parts in a suitable dry type cleaning solvent.
(2) Inspect the gear components for the following unfavorable conditions:
(a) Bolts, bearings and bushings for excessive wear, corrosion and damage.
(b) Gear housing, torque links and attachment plates for cracks, bends or misalignment.
(3) Check the general condition of each limit switch and its actuator. Check the electrical wiring for
fraying, poor connections or conditions that may lead to failures.
(4) Repair of the landing gear is limited to reconditioning of parts such as replacing components,
bearings and bushings, smoothing out minor nicks and scratches and repainting areas where
paint has chipped or peeled.
PAGE 6
Feb 28/07 32-10-00 4D4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
D. Adjustment
(1) Place the airplane on jacks.
(2) Level the airplane laterally and longitudinally (refer to Leveling, 8-20-00).
(3) Disconnect gear door actuating rod from the strut housing by removing the rod attachment
bolt. Secure the door out of the way.
(4) Disconnect the locking actuator from the strut housing.
(5) Adjust the locking actuator to a nominal length of 24.08 inches with no load on the wheel.
Attach locking actuator to strut housing.
(6) Using the hydraulic pump, retract landing gear into wing well.
NOTE: This will require approximately 60 psi of pressure on the rod end part of the actuator
to unlock the cylinder and allow the cylinder to retract.
(7) Adjust the locking cylinder rod end so that the fork is lightly contacting the rubber pad when the
actuator is fully retracted.
(8) Inspect for adequate engagement of the rod end into the locking cylinder and tighten the check
nut.
(9) If the down lock limit switch is properly adjusted, retract and extend the gear hydro-electrically
to ascertain that the gear operates properly.
E. Alignment (See Chart 2 and Figure 3.)
(1) Place a straightedge no less than twelve feet long across the front of both main landing gear
wheels. Butt the straightedge against the tire at the hub level of the landing gear wheels. Jack
the airplane up just high enough to obtain a six and one-half inch dimension between the
centerline of the strut piston and the centerline of the center pivot bolt of the gear torque links.
Devise a support to hold the straightedge in this position.
(2) Set a square against the straightedge and check to see if its outstanding leg bears on the front
and rear side of the brake disc. (It may be necessary to remove the brake assembly to have
clear access to the disc.) If it touches both forward and rear flanges, the landing gear is
correctly aligned. The alignment for the main landing gear wheels is 0° 15' ± 5'.
NOTE: A carpenter’s square, because of its especially long legs, is recommended for
checking main landing gear wheel alignment.
(3) If the square contacts the rear side of the disc, leaving a gap between it and the front flange,
the wheel is toed-out. If a gap appears at the rear flange, the wheel is toed-in.
(4) To rectify the toe-in and toe-out condition, remove the bolt connecting the upper and lower
torque links and remove or add spacer washers to move the wheel in the desired direction.
See Chart 2.
(5) Should a condition exist that all spacer washers have been removed and it is still necessary to
move the wheel further in or out, then it will be necessary to turn the torque link assembly over.
This will put the link connecting point on the opposite side allowing the use of spacers to go in
the same direction.
(6) Recheck wheel alignment. If the alignment is correct, safety the castellated nut with cotter pin.
(7) If a new link on the top left main gear had to be installed or it had to be reversed during the
alignment check, it will be necessary to check the gear safety switch (squat switch) bracket for
engagement and locking in place.
(8) Check adjustment of landing gear safety switch (squat switch).
4. Main Gear Tolerances
See Figure 4.
4D5 32-10-00 FebPAGE 7

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 2
TOE-IN / TOE-OUT CORRECTION CHART
TOE-IN
TOE-OUT SHIM WASHERS WASHERS AN174
ANGLE WASHERS UNDER HEAD UNDER NUT BOLT
0° AN960-416 AN960-416 (3) -14
0 ° 33 ' AN960-416 AN960-416 AN960-416 (2) -14
0 ° 48 ' AN960-416L AN960-416 AN960-416 -14
AN960-416
1 ° 04 ' AN960-416 (2) AN960-416 AN960-416 -14
1 ° 19 ' AN960-416L AN960-416L AN960-416 -14
AN960-416 (2)
1 ° 35 ' AN960-416 (3) AN960-416 AN960-416 (2) -15
2 ° 05 ' AN960-416 (4) AN960-416 AN960-416 -15
Max. Allow.
AN960-416L Washers .031 Thick
AN960-416 Washers .062 Thick
Aligning Main Gear

Figure 3
PAGE 8
Feb 28/07 32-10-00 4D6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Item Manufacturers Service Service

No. Part No. Nomenclature Dimension (1) Dimension (1) Tolerance Remarks
1 82695-59 Upper Actuator .439 /

Attachment Bushing .437
3 16DU24 Trunnion Pin
Bushing
4 Lower Trunnion .314 / NOTES 2 & 3
(FF411-4) Bushing .315
5 31796 Torque Link .3760 / NOTE 2
Bushing .3745
6 67026-7 Strut .313 / NOTES 2 & 3
Bearing .314
NOTES: 1. All dimensions are inside dimensions (ID), unless otherwise noted.
2. Line ream to this dimension after installation of part.
3. Press fit.
Main Gear Tolerances

Figure 4
4D7 32-10-00 FebPAGE 9

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
5. Main Gear Door Assembly

A. Removal
(1) With the landing gear down, disconnect the door retraction rod from the door by removing the
nut, washers and bolt.
(2) Remove the door from the wing panel by cutting the safety wire on the two hinge pins and
driving the pins from the hinges.
B. Installation
(1) Position the door so that the hinges line up and insert the hinge pins. The pins should be
installed with the safety wire holes towards the center line of the door.
(2) Ensure that the ends of the pins which have the safety wire holes protrude approximately 1/4
inch from the hinges. Safety the pins to the wing with MS20995-C41 safety wire.
(3) Attach the door retraction rod to the door with the previously removed bolt, washers and nut.
(1) Clean the door and retraction rod with a suitable cleaning solvent.
(2) Inspect the door for cracks or damage, loose or damaged hinges and brackets.
(3) Inspect the door retraction rod and end bearing for damage and corrosion.
PAGE 10
Feb 28/07 32-10-00 4D8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4D9 32-10-00 Feb

PAGE 11
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 12
Feb 28/07 32-10-00 4D10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
NOSE GEAR AND DOORS
1. Troubleshooting
See Chart 1.
TROUBLESHOOTING NOSE LANDING GEAR
Nose landing gear Internal wear in bungee. Replace bungee.
shimmies during fast taxi,
takeoff or landing. Bungee loose at mounting. Replace necessary parts
and bolts.
Tire out of balance. Check balance and replace
tire if necessary.
Worn or loose wheel Replace and/or adjust
bearings. wheel bearings.
Worn torque link bolts Replace bolts and/or
and/or bushings. bushings.
Excessive or uneven Incorrect operating pressure. Inflate tire to correct
wear on nose tire. pressure.
Wear resulting from shimmy. Refer to preceding “trouble”
for correction.
Nose gear fails to Oleo cylinder binding Lubricate strut housing
steer properly. in strut housing. (refer to 12-10-00).
Cylinder and/or strut housing Determine cause and
bushings damaged. correct.
One brake dragging. Determine cause and
correct.
Rollers not engaged. (Metal Determine cause and
to metal in Gear Down correct.
Position.)
Steering bellcrank loose on Readjust and tighten.
attachment plate.
Steering bellcrank bearing Replace bearing and/or
and/or bolt worn. bolt.
Bungee galling or binding. Replace.
Nose gear fails to Steering arm roller Replace defective
straighten when sheared at top of roller.
landing gear extends. strut.
Incorrect rigging of Check nose gear steering
nose gear steering. adjustment.
4D11 32-20-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TROUBLESHOOTING NOSE GEAR
Nose gear fails to Centering guide roller Replace roller.
straighten when sheared.
landing gear retracts.
Damaged guide. Replace guide.
Strut bottoms on normal Insufficient air and/or Service strut with air
landing or taxiing on rough fluid in strut. and/or fluid.
ground.
Defective internal parts Replace defective parts.
in strut.
Landing gear doors fail Landing gear not retracting Check adjustment of
to completely close. completely. gear.
Door retraction mechanism Check adjustment.
out of adjustment.
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 32-20-00 4D12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2. Nose Gear Oleo

A. Disassembly
The nose gear oleo assembly may be removed and disassembled from the gear oleo housing with
the gear removed from or installed on the airplane.
(1) Place the airplane on jacks. (refer to Jacking, 7-10-00).
(2) Place a drip pan under the nose gear to catch spillage.
(3) Remove air and oil from the oleo strut. Depress the air valve core pin until the strut chamber
pressure has diminished, remove the filler plug and, with a small hose, siphon as much
hydraulic fluid from the strut as possible.
(4) To remove the complete strut and fork assembly from the oleo housing:
(a) Cut the safety wire on the three cap bolts that retain the steering arm to the strut. Remove
the bolts.
(b) Remove the snap ring, thrust washer, and washers (if any) at the top of the strut housing.
(c) Pull the complete strut and fork assembly from the bottom of the housing.
(5) To remove the piston tube and fork from the strut:
(a) Separate the upper and lower torque links by removing the link connecting bolt assembly.
Separate the two links. noting the amount of spacer washers between the two links.
(b) Compress the piston tube. Reach up along the tube and release the snap ring from the
annular slot at the bottom of the strut.
(c) Pull the piston tube with its component parts from the strut.
(d) The piston tube components may be removed from the piston tube by removing the
retainer from the annular slot at the top of the piston tube.
(e) Slide the bearing assembly (with inner O-ring and teflon retainer), wiper ring, washer and
snap ring off of the piston tube.
(6) To remove the orifice tube:
(a) Remove the orifice tube retaining nut from the top of the strut assembly.
(b) Pull the orifice tube down and out of the strut.
(c) The orifice plate is removed from the bottom of the orifice tube by releasing the snap ring
that holds the plate in position.
(7) To remove the piston tube plug with O-ring:
(a) Remove the bolt assembly.
(b) Insert a rod up through the hole in the body of the fork.
(c) Push the plug out through the top of the tube.
B. Assembly
(1) Ascertain that parts are cleaned and inspected.
(2) To install the piston tube plug, first lubricate the tube plug and O-ring with hydraulic fluid (MIL-
H-5606) and install the O-ring on the plug. Lubricate the inside wall of the tube, insert the plug
into the top of the tube and push it to the fork end. Align the bolt holes of the fork, tube and
plug and install the bolt assembly.
(3) If desired, cement a cork in the hole in the bottom of the fork body to prevent dirt from entering
between the fork and tube.
4D13 32-20-00 FebPAGE 3

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Nose Gear Oleo Strut Assembly

Figure 1
PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 32-20-00 4D14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(4) To assemble the components of the orifice tube:

(a) Insert the orifice plate into the bottom of the tube, with the countersunk side of the hole in
the orifice plate exposed.
(b) Secure the plate with the snap ring, lubricate and install the two O-rings on the tube (one
at each end).
(5) Insert the orifice tube up through the bottom of the strut. With the threaded portion of the
orifice tube exposed through the top of the strut, install the washer and insert a roll pin through
the washer into the strut. Install the orifice tube nut finger tight at this time.
(6) The fork and piston tube assembly may be assembled by installing the tube components on the
tube. In order, slide onto the tube the snap ring, washer, wiper ring, bearing assembly (with inner
O-ring and teflon retainer). Reinstall the retainer in the annular slot in the top of the piston tube.
(7) Lubricate the inner wall of the strut with hydraulic fluid. Insert O-ring into bottom of strut.
Carefully insert the piston tube assembly into the bottom of the strut, allowing the orifice tube
to guide itself into the piston tube. Push the tube all the way up in the cylinder. Position wiper
ring and install wiper ring, slide washer up into the strut and secure the assembly by placing
the snap ring into the annular slot in the bottom of the strut.
(8) At the top of the strut, torque the orifice tube retaining nut as specified in Figure 1.
(9) Ascertain that bushings are installed in the upper and lower torque links and then install both
links. Lubricate the torque link bolts and tighten them only tight enough to allow no side play in
the links, yet still be free enough to rotate.
(10) Ensure that the two thrust washers (with their coated surfaces together) are installed in place
on the lower portion of the strut immediately above the boss where the upper torque link
attaches to the strut.
(11) Slide the strut assembly up into the trunnion. Ensure that a thrust washer (with its coated side
down) is placed on top of the trunnion. Place the snap ring in its annular slot in the top of the
strut.
(12) At the top of the oleo strut assembly install the steering arm to the top of the strut with the
three cap bolts. Torque the bolts and safety them with 0.032 safety wire.
(13) Lubricate the gear assembly (refer to 12-20-00, Chart 4).
(14) Compress and extend the strut several times to ascertain that the strut will operate freely.
Weight of the gear wheel and fork should allow the strut to extend.
(15) Service the oleo strut with fluid and air (refer to 12-10-00, Landing Gear Oleo Struts).
(16) Check nose gear for alignment (refer to Nose Gear Assembly - Alignment, below) and gear
operation.
(2) Inspect the landing gear oleo assembly components for the following:
(a) Bearings and bushings for excess wear, corrosion, scratches and overall damage.
(b) Lock rings for cracks, burrs, etc.
(c) Cylinder and orifice tube for corrosion, scratches, nicks and excess wear.
(d) Bushing assembly for looseness or turning in cylinder.
(e) Orifice plate for hole restriction.
(f) Fork tube for corrosion, scratches, nicks, dents and misalignment.
(g) Air valve for general condition.
(3) Repair of the oleo is limited to smoothing out minor scratches, nicks and dents and
replacement of parts.
4D15 32-20-00 FebPAGE 5

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. Nose Gear Assembly

A. Removal
(1) Remove the engine cowling (refer to 71-10-00).
(3) Retract the nose gear slightly to remove it from the down locked position.
WARNING: USE HOSE CLAMPS TO HOLD DOWN SPRING WITHIN THE CONFINES OF
SPECIAL TOOL. DO NOT ATTEMPT TO RELEASE DOWN SPRING WITHOUT
THE USE OF THE SPECIAL TOOL. THE DOWN SPRING ASSEMBLY IS
SPRING LOADED AND WILL FLY APART.
(4) Use the special tool (refer to 32-00-00) to hold down spring at proper length for installation.
Disconnect the actuator and emergency down spring mechanism from the right-hand side of
the trunnion by removing the bolt, spacers and washers.
(5) The landing gear may then be removed by removing the nuts, washers and bolts that attach
the gear trunnion to the attachment points on each side of the engine mount.
B. Installation
NOTE: When assembling any units of the landing gear, lubricate bearings, bushings, and friction
surfaces with the proper lubricant as described in 12-20-00.
(1) To install the landing gear assembly, position the gear so that the bolt attachment points on the
housing align with the attachment points on the engine mount. Install pivot bolts, washers and
nuts. Tighten the nuts to a snug fit, still allowing the gear to swing free.
(2) Connect the actuator and emergency down mechanism to the right-hand side of the trunnion
with the previously removed bolt, spacers and washers. Safety the bolt to the trunnion with
MS20995-C41 safety wire. Remove the down spring retaining tool.
(3) Cycle the gear a minimum of three times to ensure proper operation.
(4) Ascertain that gear is lubricated per 12-20-00, Chart 4.
(5) Check the adjustment of the gear per Nose Gear Assembly - Adjustment, below.
(6) Install engine cowling (refer to 71-10-00).
(7) Retract landing gear and check door operation per Nose Gear Door Adjustments, below.
(8) Check the alignment of the nose gear per Nose Gear Assembly - Alignment, below.
(9) Remove the airplane from the jacks (refer to 7-10-00).
(2) Inspect the gear components for the following unfavorable conditions:
(a) Bolts, bearings and bushings for excessive wear, corrosion and damage.
(b) Gear housing, torque links and down spring for cracks, bends or misalignment.
(3) Check the general condition of each limit switch and its actuator. Check wiring for fraying, poor
connections or conditions that may lead to failures.
(4) The bungee requires no service other than routine inspection. In case of damage or
malfunction, the bungee should be replaced rather than repaired.
(5) Repair to the landing gear is limited to reconditioning of parts such as replacing bearings and
bushings, smoothing out minor nicks and scratches, repainting of areas where paint has
chipped or peeled and replacement of parts.
PAGE 6
Feb 28/07 32-20-00 4D16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Nose Gear Installation

Figure 2
4D17 32-20-00 FebPAGE 7

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
89785 AD
STA STA
60.50 100.00
(REF) (REF)
ENGINE MOUNT
BUNGEE (SEE NOTE)
A A
NOSE GEAR
ACTUATING
BELLCRANK
CYLINDER
(SEE VIEW C)
NOTE: INSTALL BUNGEE BETWEEN FORWARD

STEERING ARM AND TUNNEL BELLCRANK,
STA WITH BELLCRANK IN NEUTRAL POSITION
79.00 (I.E. - NO LOAD ON SPRINGS). ADJUST
DOWN SPRING (REF) LENGTH AS REQUIRED FOR STRAIGHT
AHEAD NOSE WHEEL ALIGNMENT.
NOSE TIGHTEN JAM NUTS.
GEAR MOUNT PLATE
STRUT
STEERING ARM
STEERING MOUNT PLATE

HORN
PADS
B B
LOCKING
ASSY
VlEW B-B
STEERING ARM
VlEW A-A WASHERS

(NAS1149F0863P AND
NAS1149F0832P OR
NAS1149F0863P
0.0˚ TO 0.5˚ VIEW C AS REQUIRED.)
TORQUE BOLT AS SPECIFIED
IN 91-10-00, CHART 2.
Nose Gear Adjustment

Figure 3
PAGE 8
Feb 28/07 32-20-00 4D18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
D. Adjustment
(1) Remove the engine cowl.
(2) Place the airplane on jacks (refer to Jacking 7-10-00).
(3) Place gear in UP position. Gear should retract until it touches gear up stop, located on right
hand side of nose gear wheel well opening.
(4) Adjust gear for retracted position only, as follows:
(a) Loosen locknut where actuator rod-end bearing attaches to trunnion.
(b) Adjust actuator for full retraction.
(c) Tighten locknut.
(5) Repeat step (4) as needed.
(6) Place gear in DN position. Extended position is determined by the cylinder locking (refer to
Nose Gear Actuator Assembly, 32-30-00).
(7) Remove airplane from jacks.
E. Alignment
(1) Place the airplane on a smooth level floor that will accommodate the striking of a chalk line.
(2) Ascertain that the nose gear is properly adjusted as given in Nose Gear Assembly -
Adjustment, above.
(3) With the landing gear in the down locked position, weight proportionally on the nose gear and
the nose wheel facing forward, adjust the steering arm - roller clearance as described in
27-20-00, Rudder Controls, Rigging and Adjustment.
(5) Level the airplane laterally and longitudinally (refer to 8-20-00).
(6) From the center point of the tail skid, extend a plumb bob and mark the contact point on the
floor.
(7) Extend a chalk line from the mark on the floor below the tail skid to a point approximately three
feet forward of the nose wheel. Allow the line to pass under the wheel at the centerline of the
tire. Snap the chalk line.
(8) Clamp the rudder pedals to align them in a lateral position. Ascertain that the rudder pedals
are in their neutral position (refer to Figures 4 and 5).
4D19 32-20-00 FebPAGE 9

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(9) Check to ensure that the steel bellcrank mounted in the nose gear tunnel is perpendicular
(crosswise) to the sides of the tunnel (steering pushrods from the bellcrank to the pedals must
be equal length).
(10) Disconnect steering bungee at the forward end.
(11) To align the nose wheel straight forward, stand in front of the nose gear and align the center rib
of the tire with the chalk line, or lay a straightedge along the side of the tire and parallel the
straightedge with the chalk line.
(12) Adjust the steering bungee length and install with nose wheel straight forward. Check that the
rod ends have sufficient thread engagement by ascertaining that a wire will not go through the
check hole in the rod. Tighten the jam nuts.
(13) To check the nose gear steering for its 30° right and left maximum travel, mark the 30° angles
on each side of the nose wheel from the centerline and wheel pivot point. Turn the wheel to its
maximum travel in both directions to check for allowable travel. Should travel be too much in
one direction but not enough in the other direction, check for possible damage to the gear fork
or torque links.
4. Nose Gear Tolerances
See Figure 6.
Clamping Rudder Pedals in Neutral Position Rudder Pedal Neutral

Figure 4 Figure 5
PAGE 10
Feb 28/07 32-20-00 4D20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Nose Gear Tolerances

4D21 32-20-00 Feb

PAGE 11
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Item Manufacturers Service Service

No. Part No. Nomenclature Dimension (1) Dimension (1) Tolerance Remarks
1 452-857 Lower Strut .312 / NOTES 2 & 4

(FF411-2) Bearing .313
2 452-450 Link Assembly .2495 NOTES 2,
(FF310-5) Bearing .2505 3&4
3 452-857 Upper Strut .314 / NOTES 2 & 5
(FF411-2) Bearing .313
4 82695-18 R/H Roller .660 O.D.
Bushing
5 86700-47 L/H Roller .312 O.D.
Bushing
6 83630-12 Trunnion Support .753 NOTE 4
Bushing
7 82695-3 Trunnion Spacer .501 /
.500
8 83630-4 Steering Arm .501 / NOTE 2
Bearing .502
9 82695-61 Actuator Spacer .377 /
Bushing .375
10 82695-62/108 Emergency Down .377 /
Mechanism Spacer .375
Bushing
11 83630-2 Steering Bellcrank .6245 / NOTE 2
Pivot Bearing .6255
NOTES: 1. All dimensions are inside dimensions (ID), unless otherwise noted.
2. Line ream to this dimension after installation of part.
3. Install with Loctite 290.
4. Shrink fit.
5. Press fit.
Nose Gear Tolerances

5. Nose Gear Door Assembly (See Figure 7.)

A. Removal
(1) With nose gear extended, disconnect door link by removing nut, bolt and washers.
(2) To remove doors from cowl, bend one end of both hinge pins straight and pull out both pins.
B. Installation
(1) Install the gear doors by aligning the hinge halves of the door and the door support assembly
and then inserting the two hinge pins. It is recommended that new pins be used. Bend the
ends of the pins to secure them in place. Rotate the hinge pin ends so that they point into the
wheel well when the doors are closed.
(2) Attach the door link to the door with the previously removed bolt, nut and washers.
PAGE 12
Feb 28/07 32-20-00 4D22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Nose Gear Doors

Figure 7

(1) Clean all parts with a suitable cleaning solvent.
(2) Inspect doors for damage, loose or damaged hinges and brackets.
(3) Inspect door retraction link assemblies and arms for damage or wear.
(4) Check the tension spring (right door) for wear and tension. Reject the spring if the tension does
not maintain the doors in the full open position.
(5) Repairs to the door are limited to replacement of hinges and painting.
(6) Repairs to the retraction mechanism are limited to replacement of parts, removal of light
corrosion and painting.
6. Nose Gear Door Adjustments
A. Place the airplane on jacks (refer to 7-10-00).
B. Disconnect both gear door actuating rods.
C. Retract gear into wheel well.
D. Adjust rod assemblies so that the door assemblies from a straight line at B.L. 0.000. Adjust the right
hand door first by itself, the adjust the left hand door.
4D23 32-20-00 Feb

PAGE 13
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 14
Feb 28/07 32-20-00 4D24
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EXTENSION AND RETRACTION
1. Troubleshooting
See Chart 1.
TROUBLESHOOTING LANDING GEAR EXTENSION AND RETRACTION SYSTEMS
Landing gear system fails Hydraulic pump circuit breaker Reset circuit breaker and
to operate. open. determine cause.
Hydraulic pump circuit wires Check wiring.
broken.
Safety (squat) switch out of Adjust switch.
adjustment.
Squat switch inoperative. Replace switch.
Pressure switch inoperative. Check bypass circuitry.
Replace switch.
Hydraulic pump inoperative. Check ground wire.
Repair or replace pump.
Hydraulic fluid in reservoir Fill reservoir with hydraulic
below operating level. fluid to full level and
investigate cause.
Battery low or dead. Check condition of battery.
Recharge or replace.
Hydraulic fluid leak in system. Isolate leak and repair.
Hydraulic pump electric motor Repair / replace motor top
inoperative. plate assembly.
Hydraulic lines obstructed or Check lines.
leaking.
Landing gear retraction Hydraulic pump motor. Check pump motor.
extremely slow.
below operating level. fluid. Check for leaks.
Internal / external leak in system. Isolate and repair / replace.
Restriction in hydraulic lines. Isolate and check hydraulic
lines.
4E1 32-30-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Pump stops during gear Hydraulic pump circuit breaker Reset circuit breaker and
retraction / extension. opens. determine cause for
overload.
Pressure switch out of Check bypass circuitry.
adjustment.
Remove and readjust or
replace switch.
Bypass circuitry malfunction Check per Landing Gear
or nose gear extension prior Retraction System .
to main gear extension. Functional Test, below.
Pressure relief valve out Adjust / replace pressure
of adjustment. relief valve.
Mechanical restriction or Place airplane on jacks and
obstruction in hydraulic run extension check.
system to allow pressure Isolate and determine
to build up and shut off cause.
pump before gear has
extended / retracted.
Pump fails to shut off Pressure switch inoperative. Repair / replace switch.
though gear has fully
retracted / extended. Pressure switch out of Check bypass circuitry.
adjustment.
Adjust switch.
Pump relay sticking. Replace relay.
below operating level. fluid. Check for leaks.
Pressure relief valve out of Adjust / replace pressure
adjustment. relief valve.
Internal / external leakage Check gear actuating
of system. cylinders for
internal / external leakage.
Check for internal damage
to hydraulic pump.
Check for damaged
hydraulic lines.
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 32-30-00 4E2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Pump running intermittently Pump leaking. Isolate and repair.
after gear has retracted/
extended. Internal leakage of system. Check free fall valve for
internal leakage.
Check pressure relief valve.
Check gear actuating
cylinders for internal
Ieakage.
External leakage of system. Check for leak between
reservoir and pump.
Check gear actuating
cylinders for external
leakage.
Check for broken or
damaged hydraulic lines.
Pump running intermittently Hydraulic fluid low in Fill reservoir and check
after gear has retracted. reservoir. for leaks.
Gear stops part way up, but Hydraulic fluid in reservoir Fill reservoir with hydraulic
pump continues to run. below operating level. fluid.
Internal leakage of system. Check gear actuating
cylinders for internal
leakage.
Check free fall valve for
internal leakage
Check for broken or
damaged hydraulic lines.
Emergency extender pulled. Reset emergency extender.
All gears fail to free fall. Free fall function of selector Check mechanical
fails to operate. connections.
Inspect valve for damage.
Gear pivot points dry. Lube pivot points.
4E3 32-30-00 FebPAGE 3

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2. Landing Gear Retraction System Functional Test (PIR-PPS60033-7, Rev. G/-9, Rev. J/-13, Rev. NEW.)
WARNING: BE SURE AIRPLANE IS ON JACKS BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH THE FOLLOWING

TEST.
The following test verifies that the landing gear retraction system is functioning properly.
A. Set up
(1) Verify that the main and nose gears are properly adjusted (see 32-10-00 and 32-20-00,
respectively).
(2) Place the airplane on jacks per 7-10-00.
(3) Connect a 28 Vdc regulated power source capable of supplying a minimum of 50 amperes to
the aircraft electrical system.
NOTE: With power supplied through the auxiliary power plug the batt-master switch should
remain in the "OFF" position. The APU circuit bypasses the batt-master switch to
energize the ship power circuits.
NOTE: Before starting test, check for adequate clearance of nose gear lights, sequence
valves, actuators, hoses, etc.
NOTE: Never operate the emergency gear release piston with the hydraulic pump circuit
breaker “IN”.
(4) During all tests, add clean filtered MIL-H-5606 (Revision "F" or higher) hydraulic fluid to the
reservoir as necessary to keep fluid level at the "F" (full) mark on the sight gauge with the gear
down.
(5) Bleed the hydraulic system per 29-10-00, Bleeding Hydraulic System.
(6) Set the sequence valve.
Adjust the plunger screw outward until the sequence lever depresses the plunger
approximately .125 inch when the nose gear is fully retracted, and the nose gear door
actuating torque tube rotates. Lock the plunger and screw in place and connect the nose gear
door actuation rods. These rods shall be long initially and shortened progressively until the
nose gear doors seat firmly, but are not distorted when closed. Cycle the gear as required to
ensure proper operation.
(7) Check/adjust switches.
(a) Check/adjust squat switch per Landing Gear Safety Switch (Squat Switch) Adjustment,
32-60-00.
(b) Check to ensure that the gear door closed (gear "UP") switches are wired to the proper
panel indicator light (gear warning annunciator).
PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 32-30-00 4E4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B. Procedure
CAUTION: DO NOT PULL THE EMERGENCY GEAR RELEASE KNOB WHILE THE HYDRAULIC
PUMP IS OPERATING. ALWAYS PULL THE HYDRAULIC PUMP CIRCUIT BREAKER
BEFORE TESTING THE EMERGENCY GEAR RELEASE SYSTEM. FAILURE TO
COMPLY WILL DAMAGE THE EMERGENCY GEAR RELEASE VALVE.
CAUTION: DO NOT OVERFILL AND DO NOT ALLOW HYDRAULIC FLUID LEVEL TO DROP
BELOW THE "L" (LOW) MARK ON THE SIGHT GAUGE WITH THE GEAR IN THE
DOWN POSITION.
NOTE: Perform the following in the sequence given. Any failure of the system to respond as
specified indicates a malfunction which must be corrected before proceeding further.
(1) In S/N’s 4636001 thru 4636374: Pull the throttle aft to the closed position.
In S/N’s 4636375 and up: Jump G8L20 to G8K20 at the manifold pressure switch connector.
(2) Place the gear selector switch in the DOWN position.
(3) Verify that:
(a) Three green safe lights are illuminated.
(b) Red gear warning light is off.
(c) Gear warning horn does not sound.
(d) Hydraulic pump does not operate.
I. E. - Leave the gear down for at least five (5) minutes. Check that the hydraulic pump
motor does not operate. If the pump operates at any time during the five (5) minute
period, check for leaks or malfunctioning components in the system.
NOTE: One momentary pump operation is allowable during this five (5) minute period,
provided that the gear warning light is out and no repeated pump operations for a
subsequent fifteen (15) minute period occur.
(4) Place the gear selector switch in the UP position.
(5) Verify that:
(a) Three green safe lights are out.
(b) Red gear warning light illuminates.
(c) In S/N’s 4636375 and up: The hydraulic pump light illuminates while gear are in transit.
(d) Gear warning horn sounds.
(e) All gear retract fully and the gear doors close.
(f) Hydraulic pump motor stops operating.
(g) In S/N’s 4636375 and up: The hydraulic pump light goes off.
(6) In S/N’s 4636001 thru 4636374: Advance the throttle to the mid-travel position. The warning
horn should stop sounding and the gear warning light should go out.
In S/N’s 4636375 and up: Remove jumper between G8L20 to G8K20 at the manifold pressure
switch connector. The warning horn stops sounding.
(7) With the gear fully retracted extend the flaps to the 10° position. The red “GEAR WARN”
annunciator and gear warning horn should not operate. At flap extension beyond 10° to the full
down position the red “GEAR WARN” annunciator and the gear warning horn should operate
simultaneously and continuously.
Operate the flap extension back to the 10° position and the red “GEAR WARN” annunciator will
turn off and gear warning horn will stop sounding.
4E5 32-30-00 FebPAGE 5

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(8) Leave the gear up for at least five (5) minutes. Check that the hydraulic pump motor does not
operate. If the pump operates at any time during the five (5) minute period, check for leaks or
malfunctioning components in the system.
NOTE: One momentary pump operation is allowable during this five (5) minute period,
provided that the gear warning light is out and no repeated pump operations for a
subsequent fifteen (15) minute period occur.
CAUTION: DO NOT PULL THE EMERGENCY GEAR RELEASE KNOB WHILE THE
HYDRAULIC PUMP IS OPERATING. ALWAYS PULL THE HYDRAULIC PUMP
CIRCUIT BREAKER BEFORE TESTING THE EMERGENCY GEAR RELEASE
SYSTEM. FAILURE TO COMPLY WILL DAMAGE THE EMERGENCY GEAR
RELEASE VALVE.
(9) Pull the “Hydraulic Pump” circuit breaker OUT.
(10) Release the guard and pull the emergency gear release (i.e. - free fall) knob OUT.
(11) Verify that:
(a) The landing gear falls to the down and locked position.
(b) Red gear warning light goes out when the gear locks.
(c) Three green safe lights are illuminated when the gear locks.
(d) In S/N’s 4636314 and up (i.e. - airplanes equipped with Frisby hydraulic pumps only):
allow pressure to bleed off before continuing (approximately two (2) minutes).
NOTE: The main gear may not fall completely into the locked position during ground free fall
tests. Extend the main gear using a side force at the center line of axle that does not
exceed nine (9) pounds. The gear should move easily and then lock in place.
(12) Place the gear selector switch in the DOWN position.
(13) Push in the emergency gear release (i.e. - free fall) knob and engage the guard.
(14) Push the “Hydraulic Pump” circuit breaker IN.
(15) Check that three green lights stay on.
NOTE: Pump may run momentarily.
(16) Cycle gear up and down, one time to verify normal operations.
(17) With the landing gear fully extended operate the flaps to full down position and verify the
warning horn does not sound.
(18) Place the landing light switch ON.
(19) Place the gear selector switch in the UP position.
(20) Verify that:
(a) Hydraulic pump motor operates and the gear retracts.
(b) Three green gear safe lights go out.
(c) Red gear warning light illuminates, until all the gear are up, and then goes out.
(d) The gear retracts fully in:
1 In S/N’s 4636001 thru 4636313 (i.e. - airplanes equipped with Parker Hannifin
hydraulic pumps only) - eight (8) seconds or less.
2 In S/N’s 4636314 and up (i.e. - airplanes equipped with Frisby hydraulic pumps only)
- nine (9) seconds or less.
(e) Hydraulic pump motor stops operating after the gear is up.
(f) Gear warning horn does not sound.
(g) The landing light shuts off as the gear door closes.
PAGE 6
Feb 28/07 32-30-00 4E6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(21) Gear Down Pressure Switch Bypass Relay Circuit Test:

(a) In S/N’s 4636001 thru 4636313 (i.e. - airplanes equipped with Parker Hannifin hydraulic
pumps only):
1 Disconnect the gear down pressure switch circuit and conduct the Gear Selector
Switch DOWN Check, below.
CAUTION: DO NOT PULL THE EMERGENCY GEAR RELEASE KNOB WHILE
THE HYDRAULIC PUMP IS OPERATING. ALWAYS PULL THE
HYDRAULIC PUMP CIRCUIT BREAKER BEFORE TESTING THE
EMERGENCY GEAR RELEASE SYSTEM. FAILURE TO COMPLY
WILL DAMAGE THE EMERGENCY GEAR RELEASE VALVE.
It is acceptable if only the nose gear fully extends down and locked. The main gear
may only extend partially. Complete main gear extension by activating the emergency
gear release valve and moving the main gear to the down and locked position.
2 Reconnect the gear down pressure switch circuit. Disconnect the gear down
pressure switch bypass relay circuit and conduct the Gear Selector Switch DOWN
Check, below.
3 Reconnect the gear down pressure switch bypass relay circuit.
(b) In S/N’s 4636314 and up (i.e. - airplanes equipped with Frisby hydraulic pumps only):
1 Disconnect the gear down pressure switch circuit, see Wire A, Figure 1, and conduct
the following sequence:
a Place the gear selector switch in the UP position. The gear should function
normally.
b Place the gear selector switch in the DOWN position. The pump will shut OFF
before the gears reach the full down position.
CAUTION: DO NOT PULL THE EMERGENCY GEAR RELEASE KNOB
WHILE THE HYDRAULIC PUMP IS OPERATING. ALWAYS PULL
THE HYDRAULIC PUMP CIRCUIT BREAKER BEFORE TESTING
THE EMERGENCY GEAR RELEASE SYSTEM. FAILURE TO
COMPLY WILL DAMAGE THE EMERGENCY GEAR RELEASE
VALVE.
It is acceptable if the nose gear fully extends down and locks. The main gears
may only extend partially. Complete gear extension by pulling the emergency
gear release valve and moving the main gear to the down and locked position.
c Reconnect the gear down pressure switch circuit, Wire A, Figure 1.
d Reset the emergency gear release valve.
2 Disconnect the gear down pressure switch by-pass relay circuit, see Wire B, Figure 1,
and conduct the following sequence:
a Place the gear selector switch in the UP position. The gear should function
normally.
b Place the gear selector switch in the DOWN position. The gear should function
normally.
c Reconnect the gear down pressure switch by-pass relay circuit, Wire B, Figure 1.
4E7 32-30-00 FebPAGE 7

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Down Pressure Switch Bypass Relay

Figure 1
PAGE 8
Feb 28/07 32-30-00 4E8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(22) Gear Selector Switch DOWN Check

Place the gear selector switch in the DOWN position and verify that:
(a) Hydraulic pump motor operates and the gear extends.
(b) All gear return to the down and locked position. Extending fully in:
1 eight (8) seconds or less, in S/N’s 4636001 thru 4636313 (i.e. - airplanes equipped
with Parker Hannifin hydraulic pumps only).
2 nine (9) seconds or less, in S/N’s 4636314 and up (i.e. - airplanes equipped with
Frisby hydraulic pumps only).
(c) Hydraulic pump motor stops operating after the gear is in down and locked position.
CAUTION: ANY MOMENTARY BLINKING OF THE RED OR GREEN GEAR LIGHTS
AFTER THE ACTUATOR IS DOWN AND LOCKED MAY INDICATE AN
IMPROPERLY ADJUSTED SWITCH IN A LOCKING CYLINDER.
(d) Red gear warning light is illuminated while gear is in transit.
(e) Three green safe lights are illuminated as the gear locks.
(f) Gear warning horn does not sound.
(g) Landing light illuminates as the gear door opens.
(23) Turn the landing light switch to the OFF position.
(24) Disconnect the ground power unit.
WARNING: VERIFY GEAR ARE DOWN AND LOCKED BEFORE REMOVING AIRPLANE
FROM JACKS.
(25) Remove airplane from the jacks per 7-10-00.
4E9 32-30-00 FebPAGE 9

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Nose Gear Actuator Installation

Figure 2
PAGE 10
Feb 28/07 32-30-00 4E10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. Nose Gear Actuator Assembly

NOTE: No field repair of landing gear actuators installed in PA-46-350P airplanes is authorized.
Actuator overhaul service is available through Piper distributors.
A. Removal (See Figure 2.)
(a) Place the gear control in the UP position.
(b) Allow gear to retract approximately halfway and pull Hydraulic Pump circuit breaker.
NOTE: Have an assistant stand by nose gear to catch the gear and prevent it from falling
back to a down and locked position. Block the nose gear to hold that position.
(c) Set the BATT MASTER switch to the OFF position.
CAUTION: DO NOT ATTEMPT TO REMOVE OR DISCONNECT EITHER END OF THE
NOSE GEAR DOWNSPRING ASSEMBLY WITHOUT THE USE OF THE
SPECIAL TOOL (P/N 762-157) SHOWN IN FIGURE 3. THE DOWNSPRING
ASSEMBLY IS HEAVILY LOADED.
CAUTION: ONCE THE REMOVE/INSTALL TOOL (P/N 762-157) IS IN PLACE, USE HOSE
CLAMPS TO SECURE IT TO THE DOWNSPRING ASSEMBLY.
(3) Position the special remove/install tool (P/N 762-157) (see Figure 3) so that the nose gear
downspring is within the two end plates. Secure the special tool to the downspring assembly
with hose clamps. Remove bolt holding actuator rod end bearing and downspring assembly to
trunnion. Remove washers, spacers, and bushing.
CAUTION: IF COMPLETE DISASSEMBLY OF THE DOWNSPRING MECHANISM IS
DESIRED, USE OF THE SPECIAL DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY TOOL (P/N
762-155) IS REQUIRED. THE EMERGENCY DOWNSPRING MECHANISM IS
SPRING LOADED AND COULD CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY OR DAMAGE IF THE
SPECIAL DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY TOOL (P/N 762-155) IS NOT USED.
(4) Disconnect electrical leads from downlimit micro-switch.
(5) Disconnect and quickly cap two hydraulic lines at nose gear actuator.
NOTE: If the hydraulic line elbow on the lower end of the nose gear actuator is to be removed
(i.e. - if replacing actuator), it may be necessary to first remove the downlimit
micro-switch. If so, remove only the four screws holding the switch plate to the
actuator. DO NOT move or adjust the jam nuts and lockwire attaching the micro-switch
to the switch plate as that would affect lock engagement verification.
Nose Gear Downspring Remove/Install Tool (P/N 762-157)

Figure 3
4E11 32-30-00 Feb

PAGE 11
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(6) Move landing gear selector to the DOWN position.

(7) Manually extend rod so that actuator assembly locks in down, or fully extended, position.
(8) Measure and record distance from end fitting to center of rod end bearing. This measurement
is important for proper installation.
WARNING: IF EITHER THE NOSE GEAR OR ACTUATOR IS DAMAGED OR MISALIGNED,
THIS MEASUREMENT MAY NOT BE VALID. IN EITHER CASE, REPLACE
DAMAGED COMPONENTS, AS REQUIRED, AND USE MALIBU NOSE GEAR
ACTUATOR ALIGNMENT TOOL (P/N 762-137) DURING INSTALLATION.
(9) Remove rod end bearing from actuator rod. Check that rod end bearing locknut is free of
scoring and nicks. Smooth out if necessary.
(10) Remove actuator from engine mount.
B. Installation (See Figure 2.)
NOTE: If the downlimit micro-switch was previously removed from the actuator, install it and tighten
the four screws in a criss-cross pattern, torquing each 13 to 17 in. lbs. Verify lock indication
in the extended position and unlock indication in the retracted position with a multi-meter or
continuity tester.
(1) Manually extend rod so that actuator assembly locks in down, or fully extended, position.
(2) Install rod end bearing in actuator rod. Adjust to same length as recorded during Removal,
above. (See WARNING above.)
(3) Install upper end of actuator to engine mount.
NOTE: Pay close attention to the nose gear actuator / engine mount connecting hardware to
ensure the correct locknut is used (i. e. - P/N 404-891, MS 20365-720C). Additionally,
check for proper thread engagement between the bolt and nut by ensuring at least
one thread of the bolt protrudes through the nut per AC 43.13-1, latest revision. If
there are not sufficient threads exposed after the lock nut, replace the bolt with a
longer bolt, P/N 401-509 (AN7-15A). Torque to the standard torque value (91-10-00,
Chart 6) for a 7/16-20 AN7 bolt/MS 20365 nut.
(4) Uncap and connect hydraulic lines to actuator.
(5) Connect electrical leads to downlimit micro-switch.
(6) Unlock actuator as follows:
(a) Set the BATT MASTER switch to the ON position.
NOTE: Have an assistant stand by the actuator to observe the rod position and signal as
soon as the rod retracts from the fully extended and locked position.
(b) Place the gear control in the UP position and when signalled by the assistant, pull the
Hydraulic Pump circuit breaker.
(c) Set the BATT MASTER switch to the OFF position.
(7) Install rod end bearing and nose gear down assist spring in trunnion. Torque per Figure 2.
(8) Check adjustment and alignment of nose gear per 32-20-00.
(9) Tighten rod end bearing locknut.
NOTE: If unable to rig nose wheel assembly to proper retracted location with two jam nuts
installed, remove one jam nut. Maximum thread exposure with single nut is 0.28 inch.
(10) Purge air from system per Bleeding Hydraulic System, 29-10-00.
(11) Check that hydraulic pump circuit breaker is on (pressed in), gear control lever is in the DOWN
position, and BATT MASTER switch is in the OFF position.
PAGE 12
Feb 28/07 32-30-00 4E12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(12) Set BATT MASTER switch to the ON position. Cycle landing gear up and down at least three
(3) times. Watch that the gear operates smoothly and check that there are no hydraulic leaks.
(13) Service reservoir as required.
(14) Remove airplane from jacks (see 7-10-00).
4. Main Gear Actuator Assembly
NOTE: No field repair of landing gear actuators installed in PA-46-350P airplanes is authorized.
A. Removal
(1) Place airplane on jacks per 7-10-00.
(a) Place gear control in the UP position.
NOTE: Have assistants standing by each main gear to catch the gear and prevent them
from falling back to a down and locked position. Block each main gear to hold that
position.
(c) Set BATT MASTER switch to the OFF position.
(3) Disconnect and quickly cap hydraulic lines at main gear actuator.
(4) Disconnect actuator from landing gear trunnion by removing washer, bushing, and bolt.
(5) Disconnect upper end of actuator from its mounting bracket by removing bolt and washer.
(6) Remove actuator from airplane.
(7) Remove rod end bearing from actuator rod. Check that rod end bearing lock nut is free of
scoring and nicks. Smooth out if necessary.
(8) Move landing gear selector to the DOWN position.
(9) Manually extend rod so that actuator assembly locks in down, or fully extended position.
B. Installation
NOTE: In S/N’s 4636001 thru 4636195 only, when installing service replacement actuators P/N
89075-015 (RH) or P/N 89075-016 (LH) for the first time, modify the associated original
equipment main gear trunnion per Trunnion Modification, below.
(1) Install rod end bearing on actuator rod.
(2) Bolt upper end of actuator to its mounting bracket. Torque to 210 -270 in.-lbs. Safety the bolt.
(3) Position gear in order to bolt rod end bearing to main gear trunnion. Torque to 260 -320 in.-lbs.
Safety the bolt.
(4) Check adjustment of rod end bearing per 32-10-00, Main Gear Assembly, Adjustment.
(5) Tighten rod end bearing locknut.
(6) Uncap and connect hydraulic lines.
(7) Purge system of air per Bleeding Hydraulic System, 29-10-00.
(8) Check that hydraulic pump circuit breaker is set (pressed in), gear control switch is in the
DOWN position and BATT MASTER switch is OFF.
(9) Remove airplane from jacks (see 7-10-00).
4E13 32-30-00 Feb

PAGE 13
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
45˚
WIDTH OF
CHAMFER
THE CHAMFER WIDTH IS TYPICALLY .25 INCHES

EXCEPT FOR THE .12 INCH CHAMFER WIDTH
SHOWN IN THE PHOTO.
Effectivity Chamfer Details

4636001 thru 4636195 Figure 4
PAGE 14
Feb 28/07 32-30-00 4E14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C. Trunnion Modification (S/N’s 4636001 thru 4636195 only.)

The 89075-015 and 89075-016 actuators incorporate a larger rod end bearing than the actuators
factory installed in S/N’s 4636001 thru 4636195. This larger rod end bearing will not adequately
clear the original equipment main gear trunnion. Accordingly, the first time either original equipment
main gear actuator is replaced with a -015 or -016 actuator, modify the associated original
equipment trunnion as follows:
(1) Remove main gear actuator per Removal, above.
(2) Chamfer the edges of the main gear trunnion as specified in Figure 4.
(3) Re-install the actuator per Installation, above.
(4) Swing the gear and observe to assess rod end/trunnion clearance. If required, repeat steps
(1) - (3), above, adjusting the depth of the chamfer as required to obtain adequate clearance
for normal gear function.
(5) When adequate clearance has been obtained for normal gear function, prime and paint
reworked area to match the remaining trunnion finish.
(6) Make log book entry for completion of this modification.
5. Nose Gear Door Actuator Assembly (See Figure 5.)
NOTE: No field repair of nose gear door actuators installed in PA-46-350P airplanes is authorized.
A. Removal
(a) Place gear control in the UP position.
NOTE: Have an assistant stand by nose gear to catch the gear and prevent it from falling
back to a down and locked position. Block the nose gear to hold that position.
(c) Set BATT MASTER switch to the OFF position.
(3) Disconnect and quickly cap
hydraulic line to nose gear door
actuator. Tie capped line to airframe.
(4) Remove bolt, nut, and washers holding
rod end to nose gear/tube assy.
(5) Remove clevis bolt, four washers,
nut, and bushing from aft end of
actuator.
(6) Remove actuator from airplane.
B. Installation
(1) Position actuator in airplane and
secure aft end of actuator with clevis
bolt, four washers, nut, and bushing.
(2) Bolt rod end to nose gear door tube
assy with bolt, nut, and two washers.
(3) Uncap and connect hydraulic line to
nose gear door actuator. Purge
system of air per Bleeding Hydraulic Nose Gear Door Actuator Tube Assembly
System, 29-10-00. Figure 5
4E15 32-30-00 Feb

PAGE 15
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Sequence Valve (Parker Hannifin)

Figure 6
PAGE 16
Feb 28/07 32-30-00 4E16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(4) Check that hydraulic pump circuit breaker is set (pressed in), gear control switch is in the
DOWN position and BATT MASTER switch is OFF.
(5) Remove airplane from jacks (see 7-10-00.)
6. Sequence Valve Parts Replacement (Parker Hannifin Only) (See Figure 6.)
CAUTION: TAKE CARE NOT TO LOSE ANY SMALL PARTS IN VALVE.
A. Drain valve by removing two plugs. Remove and discard O-rings.
B. Remove retaining ring from restricter port in valve body.
C. Remove plug at restricter port using three-quarter-inch screw with 4-40 threads.
D. Remove and discard O-ring.
E. Remove spring and restricter. Tap valve at restricter port into palm of hand to aid removal of
restricter.
F. Remove retaining ring from plunger port. Remove plug using three-quarter-inch screw with 4-40
threads.
G. Remove spring, spring retainer, and ball from plunger port.
H. Remove and discard O-ring from plunger port.
I. Remove bolt and locknut to remove plunger, seat, and spring. Use a No. 1 Phillips screwdriver to aid
in removal of plunger.
J. Remove and discard O-ring from seat.
K. Remove and discard O-ring from plunger port.
WARNING: USE SOLVENT IN WELL VENTILATED AREA. AVOID CONTACT WITH SKIN. KEEP
AWAY FROM HEAT OR FLAME.
L. Clean parts as needed with solvent.
CAUTION: DO NOT REUSE O-RINGS. COAT REPLACEMENT O-RING WITH HYDRAULIC
FLUID MIL-H-5606.
M. Lubricate all ports with hydraulic fluid.
N. Insert restricter and spring. Install O-ring onto plug and install plug. Secure with retaining ring.
O. Install O-ring, plunger, and spring into valve body. Install O-ring onto seat and install seat.
P. Install O-ring, ball, spring retainer, and spring.
Q. Insert plug and retaining ring.
R. Thread locknut onto bolt and thread bolt into plunger. Torque locknut to 12 - 15 in.-lbs.
S. Upon installation, set the sequence valve as described under Landing Gear Retraction System
Functional Test, above.
4E17 32-30-00 Feb

PAGE 17
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Emergency Gear Release Valve (Parker Hannifin shown)

Figure 7
7. Emergency Gear Release Valve (See Figure 7.)

NOTE: Emergency gear release valve is located beneath floor boards under copilot’s seat.
A. Removal
(1) Remove copilot’s seat, carpet, access panel, and center floorboard.
(2) Remove and quickly cap hydraulic lines.
(3) Loosen nuts at bulkhead fittings.
(4) Disconnect cable.
(5) Remove valve from aircraft.
B. Installation
(1) Position valve in airplane. Secure bulkhead fittings with nuts and tighten.
(2) Connect cable.
(3) Uncap and connect hydraulic lines.
(4) Install access panel and floorboard. Secure with screws. Replace carpet and seat.
PAGE 18
Feb 28/07 32-30-00 4E18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C. Parker Hannifin Valves Only:

(1) Disassembly
(a) Drain valve by removing two caps.
(b) Remove lockwire, two bolts, and two washers that secure bracket. Remove bracket, lever,
and links as one unit.
(c) Pull actuating rod out of end gland. Remove and discard O-ring from actuating rod.
(d) Remove end glands from UP and DN ports. Remove and discard O-rings from end
glands.
(e) Remove bulkhead fittings from UP and DN ports. Remove and discard O-rings from
bulkhead fittings.
(f) Remove check valves. Remove and discard O-ring from inside valve body.
(2) Assembly
WARNING: USE SOLVENT IN WELL VENTILATED AREA. AVOID CONTACT WITH SKIN.
KEEP AWAY FROM HEAT OR FLAME.
CAUTION: DO NOT REUSE LOCKWIRE, COTTER PINS, OR O-RINGS. COAT
REPLACEMENT O-RINGS WITH HYDRAULIC FLUID MIL-H-5606.
(a) Clean parts as needed with solvent. Wipe dry.
(b) Lubricate all parts in valve body with hydraulic fluid.
(c) Install new O-rings onto bulkhead fittings.
(d) Install bulkhead fittings into UP and DN ports. Torque to 60 - 65 in.-lbs.
CAUTION: CHECK VALVES ARE NOT INTERCHANGEABLE. BEFORE INSERTING
VALVES INTO UP AND DN PORTS, CORRECTLY IDENTIFY VALVE BY
PRINTED VENDOR NUMBER.
(e) Insert check valve with rubber seal (2203C-20) into DN port. Arrow on check valve must
point toward end gland. Push seal against valve.
(f) Install O-ring onto end gland assembly.
(g) Thread end gland assembly into DN port. Torque to 60 - 65 in.-lbs.
(h) Insert check valve with teflon seal (2203C-3-5) into UP port. Arrow on check valve must
point toward end gland. Push seal against valve.
(i) Install O-ring onto end gland assembly.
(j) Thread end gland assembly into UP port. Torque to 60 - 65 in.-lbs.
(k) Attach actuating rod to bracket, lever, and links. lubricate actuating rod with hydraulic fluid.
(l) Install O-ring onto actuating rod. Insert rod into end gland assembly.
(m) Slide bracket/lever assembly as far as possible toward check with lever in open position.
NOTE: There should be very little travel.
(n) Torque bolts to 20 - 25 in.-lbs. Lockwire bolts.
4E19 32-30-00 Feb

PAGE 19
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GRIDS 4E20 THRU 4E24

INTENTIONALLY BLANK
PAGE 20
Feb 28/07 32-30-00 4E20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
WHEELS AND BRAKES
1. Nose Wheel Assembly (See Figure 1.)

A. Removal and Disassembly
(1) Jack the airplane enough to raise the nose wheel clear of the ground (refer to Jacking, 7-10-
00).
(2) To remove the nose wheel, first remove the cotter pin and washer that secures the safety clevis
pin of the wheel nut. Next remove the clevis pin and wheel nut. Then slide the wheel from the
axle.
(3) The wheel halves may be separated by first deflating the tire. With the tire sufficiently deflated,
remove the wheel through bolts. Pull the wheel halves from the tire by removing the wheel half
opposite the valve stem first and then removing the other half.
(4) The wheel bearing assemblies may be removed from each wheel half by first removing the
snap rings that secure the grease seal retainers, and then the retainers, grease seals and
bearing cones. The bearing cups should be removed by tapping out evenly from the inside.
B. Assembly and Installation
(1) Ascertain that the bearing cup for each wheel is properly installed. Install the tire with tube on
the wheel half with the valve stem hole and then join the two wheel halves. Install the through
bolts with the washers and nuts to the valve stem side.
NOTE: Torque the nuts on the Cleveland Wheel Assembly to 90 inch-pounds. Torque the nuts
on the McCauley wheel assembly to 140-150 inch-pounds on the McCauley wheel
assembly only. A bushing is required to prevent tube movement.
(2) Lubricate the bearing cones and install the cones, grease seals, felt rings and seal retainer
rings. Secure with snap rings.
Nose Wheel Assembly

Figure 1
4F1 32-40-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(3) Slide the wheel on the axle. While rotating the wheel, tighten the axle nut from 17 to 25 inch-
pounds. Back off the nut to reduce torque to zero. While rotating the wheel, tighten the axle nut
from 10 to 15 inch-pounds. Rotate the axle nut to align the nearest slot with the cotter pin hole.
Install the cotter pin.
C. Inspection
(1) Visually check all parts for cracks, distortion. defects and excess wear.
(2) Check tie bolts for looseness or failure.
(3) Check internal diameter of felt grease seals. Replace the felt grease seal if surface is hard or
gritty.
(4) Check tire for cuts, internal bruises and deterioration.
(5) Check bearing cones and cups for wear and pitting. Then lubricate.
(6) Replace any wheel casting having visible cracks.
2. Main Wheel Assembly (See Figure 2.)
(1) Place the airplane on jacks (refer to Jacking, 7-10-00).
(2) To remove the main wheel, remove the cap bolts that join the brake cylinder housing and the
lining back plate assemblies. Remove the back plate from between brake disc and wheel.
(3) Remove the dust cover, the cotter pin and flat head pin that safeties the wheel nut, and the
wheel nut. Slide the wheel from the axle.
(4) The wheel halves may be separated by first deflating the tire. With the tire sufficiently deflated,
remove the wheel through bolts. Pull the wheel halves from the tire by removing the inner half
from the tire first, and then the outer half.
(5) The wheel bearing assemblies may be removed from each wheel half by first removing the
retainer snap rings that secure the grease seal retainers, and then the retainers, grease seals
and bearing cone. The bearing cups should not be removed except for replacement. Refer to
Nose and Main Wheel Assembly Repairs, below, for bearing cup replacement instructions.
(1) Ascertain that the bearing cup for each wheel is properly installed. Install the tire with tube and
wheel half with the valve stem hole. Ascertain that the index mark is aligned with the index
mark on the tire to ensure proper tire, tube and wheel balance. Join the two wheel halves and
position the brake disc in the inner wheel half. Install the through bolts with nuts on the valve
stem side. Torque the wheel nuts to 150 inch-pounds and inflate the tire.
(2) Lubricate the bearing cones and install the cones, grease seals and seal retainer rings. Secure
retainer with snap ring.
(3) Slide the wheel on the axle and secure with the retainer nut. While rotating the wheel, tighten
the axle nut from 17 to 25 inch-pounds torque. Back off the nut to reduce the torque to zero.
While rotating the wheel, tighten the axle nut from 10 to 15 inch-pounds torque. Rotate the axle
nut to align the nearest slot with the cotter pin hole. Install the cotter pin.
(4) Position the brake lining back plates between the wheel and brake disc and the brake cylinder
on the torque plate. Insert the spacer blocks between the back plates and cylinder, and install
the four bolts to secure the assembly. If the brake was disconnected, reconnect the line and
bleed the brakes.
C. Inspection
(1) Visually check all parts for cracks, distortion. defects and excess wear.
(2) Check tie bolts for looseness or failure.
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 32-40-00 4F2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(3) Check internal diameter of felt grease seals. Replace the felt grease seal if surface is hard or
gritty.
(4) Check tire for cuts, internal bruises and deterioration.
(5) Check bearing cones and cups for wear and pitting. Then lubricate.
(6) Replace any wheel casting having visible cracks.
(7) Inspect brake disc for cracks, excessive wear or scoring, rust, corrosion and warpage.
(8) Remove rust and blend out nicks, using fine 400 grit sandpaper.
(9) Replace disc if cracked or when disc is worn below .405 in. (Wheel Brake Assembly -
Cleaning, Inspection and Repair, below.)
3. Nose and Main Wheel Assembly Repairs
Repairs are limited to blending out small nicks, scratches, gouges and areas of slight corrosion, plus the
replacement of parts which are cracked or badly corroded.
NOTE: Remove corrosion and blend out small nicks, using fine 400 grit sandpaper.
Wheels may also be repainted if the parts have been repaired and thoroughly cleaned. Paint exposed
areas with one coat zinc chromate primer and one coat of aluminum lacquer.
NOTE: Never paint working surfaces of the bearing cups.
Main Wheel Assembly

Figure 2
4F3 32-40-00 FebPAGE 3

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4. Bearing Cup
A. Removal
(1) Insert wheel half into boiling water for 15 minutes or place in an oven not exceeding 250° F
(121° C) for 15 minutes.
(2) Remove from source of heat and invert wheel half. If the cup does not drop out, tap the cup
evenly from the axle bore with a fiber drift pin or suitable arbor press.
B. Installation
(1) To replace a new cup, apply one coat of zinc chromate primer to wheel half bearing bore.
(2) Insert wheel half into boiling water for 15 minutes or place in an oven not exceeding 250° F
(121° C) for 15 minutes. Chill new bearing cup in dry ice for a minimum of 15 minutes.
(3) Remove wheel half from source of heat and bearing cup from dry ice. Install the chilled bearing
cup into the bearing bore of the heated wheel half. Tap gently to seat evenly in place, using a
fiber drift pin or suitable arbor press.
5. Brake Adjustment and Lining Tolerance
No adjustment of the brake lining clearance is necessary as they are self-adjusting. Inspection of the
lining is necessary, and it may be inspected visually while installed on the airplane. The linings are of the
riveted type and should be replaced if the thickness of any one segment becomes worn below 0.100 of
an inch or unevenly worn.
6. Wheel Brake Assembly (See Figures 3 and 4.)
To remove the brake assembly:
(1) Disconnect the brake line from the brake cylinder at the tube fitting.
(2) Remove the cap bolts that join the brake cylinder housing and the lining back plate assembly.
Remove the back plate from between the brake disc and wheel.
Anchor Bolt, Removal and Installation

Figure 3
PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 32-40-00 4F4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(3) Slide the brake cylinder housing from the torque plate.
(4) Remove the pressure plate by sliding it off the anchor bolts of the housing.
(5) Remove piston(s) by injecting low air pressure in the cylinder fluid inlet and forcing the piston
from the housing.
(6) Check anchor bolt for wear.
(a) To remove anchor bolt:
1 Position cylinder assembly on a holding fixture (refer to Figure 3, Step A).
2 Use a suitable arbor press to remove the anchor bolt from the cylinder body.
(b) To install anchor bolt:
1 Support anchor bolt in a holding fixture (refer to Figure 3, Step B).
2 Align cylinder body over anchor bolt (refer to Figure 3, Step C).
3 Use a suitable arbor press and apply pressure on the spot face directly over the
anchor bolt hole (refer to Figure 3, Step D).
(1) Lubricate the piston O-ring(s) with fluid MIL-H-5606 and install on piston(s). Slide the piston(s)
in cylinder housing until flush with surface of housing.
(2) Slide the lining pressure plate onto the anchor bolts of the housing.
(3) Slide the cylinder housing assembly on the torque plate of the gear.
(4) Position the lining back plate between the wheel and brake disc. Install the bolts and torque to
90 inch-pounds to secure the assembly.
(5) Connect the brake line to the brake cylinder housing.
(6) Bleed the brake system as described in Bleeding Brakes.
Wheel Brake Assembly

Figure 4
4F5 32-40-00 FebPAGE 5

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C. Cleaning, Inspection, and Repair (See Figure 4):

(1) Clean the assembly with a suitable solvent and dry thoroughly.
(2) Check the wall of the cylinder housing and piston for scratches, burrs, corrosion, etc, that may
damage O-rings.
(3) Check the general condition of the brake bleeder screw and lines.
(4) Check the brake disc for wear, grooves, scratches, or pits. The minimum disc thickness of Disc
164-46 used on Wheel Assembly 40-120C is .405. A single groove or isolated grooves up to
.030 of an inch deep would not necessitate replacement, but a grooving of the entire surface
would reduce lining life and would necessitate replacement of the disc. Should it be necessary
to remove the wheel disc, see Main Wheel Assembly - Removal and Disassembly.
(5) To remove the snap-on type lining used on the brake assemblies may be by prying loose with a
screwdriver or a thin flat wedge. Install the snap-on type lining by positioning onto the pins and
applying pressure to snap into position.
(6) If a powdery rust appears on the brake disc, one or two taxi braking applications should wipe
the disc clear. Rust allowed to progress beyond this point may require removal of the disc from
the wheel assembly to properly clean both faces. Wire brushing followed by sanding with 220
grit sandpaper can restore the braking surfaces for continued use.
NOTE: To inspect the linings, check the expansion groove. If the groove is not showing,
replace the lining.
NOTE: Replacement brake linings (metallic) used on the brake assembly should be
conditioned by performing three hard braking applications at 45 to 50 mph. Do not
allow the brake discs to cool substantially between stops. This will wear off any high
spots and at the same time generate sufficient heat to glaze the surface of the metallic
linings. Once the linings are glazed, they will provide many hours of maintenance free
service.
7. Toe Brake Cylinder Assembly (See Figure 6.)
A. Removal
WARNING: MAKE CERTAIN AIRPLANE IS PARKED ON LEVEL GROUND WITH WHEELS
CHOCKED.
CAUTION: USE PARKER HANNIFIN REPLACEMENT BRAKE CYLINDERS ONLY.
GAR-KENYON AND PARKER HANNIFIN BRAKE CYLINDERS ARE NOT
INTERCHANGEABLE. PILOT’S LEFT AND RIGHT CYLINDERS MUST BE THE
SAME MANUFACTURER. COPILOT’S LEFT AND RIGHT CYLINDERS MUST BE
THE SAME MANUFACTURER. SEE PIPER PARTS CATALOG, P/N 761-878.
(1) Place chocks under main and nose wheels.
(2) Release parking brake.
(3) Disconnect and quickly cap upper and lower hydraulic lines from cylinder assembly being
removed.
(4) Disconnect clevis from rudder pedal by removing cotter pin and pin.
NOTE: The rod and ring subassembly may be removed at this time without fur ther
disassembly of the toe brake assembly. Refer to Disassembly, Repair, and Installation,
below, steps (1) and (2) for rod and ring removal instructions and steps (9) and (10)
for installation. (See also the CAUTION above step (9).)
(5) (Inboard toe brake assemblies only.) Remove nut, bolt, and washer holding nose wheel
steering rod assembly to pedal.
PAGE 6
Feb 28/07 32-40-00 4F6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Brake System Installation

Figure 5
(6) Remove the two nuts, bolts, and washers holding cylinder assembly to rudder bar.
(7) Remove toe brake and cylinder assembly from airplane.
B. Disassembly, Repair, and Installation
(1) Remove end fitting from cylinder housing.
(2) Slide entire rod and ring assembly with attached piston out of cylinder housing.
NOTE: Repairs to the rod and ring assembly and piston are limited to polishing small
scratches and burrs, and replacement of parts.
(3) Clean cylinder bore, rod and ring assembly, and piston with dry-type solvent.
(4) To replace any of the component parts shown in the parts catalog, remove retaining ring. All
parts will slide off rod and ring assembly.
(5) Soak end fitting O-rings (one internal, one external) and piston O-ring in hydraulic fluid. Coat
with fluid compatible gel.
(6) Install power spring on rod and ring assembly.
4F7 32-40-00 FebPAGE 7

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Toe Brake Cylinder Assembly

Figure 6
(7) Insert rod and ring sub-assembly with spring through end fitting.
(8) Insert, in order: washer seal, piston, piston spring, and bushing. Snap retaining ring into
groove.
CAUTION: PISTON MUST BE INSERTED INTO CYLINDER HOUSING IN SUCH A WAY
THAT ONLY PISTON O-RING CONTACTS THE CYLINDER INNER SURFACE.
OTHERWISE, THE INNER SURFACE MAY BECOME SCRATCHED.
(9) Carefully insert piston and rod and ring assembly into cylinder housing.
(10) Tighten end fitting to a torque of 13-17 inch-lbs.
(11) Connect cylinder assembly to rudder bar with two nuts, bolts, and washers.
(12) (Inboard toe brake assemblies only.) Connect pedal to nose wheel steering rod assembly.
(13) Connect clevis to rudder pedal by inserting pin, washer, and cotter pin.
(14) Uncap and connect upper and lower hydraulic lines to cylinder assembly.
(15) Bleed brakes (refer to Bleeding Brakes, 32-40-00).
PAGE 8
Feb 28/07 32-40-00 4F8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(16) Set parking brakes.

(17) Remove chocks from wheels before moving airplane.
8. Brake Bleeding Procedure
A. (Gravity)
(1) On both main landing gear wheel brake assemblies, attach a clear plastic hose to the brake
bleeders. Extend the hoses into a container partially filled with hydraulic fluid, MIL-H-5606. The
ends of the hoses should be submerged in the fluid. Open both bleeders approximately one
and one-half to two turns.
(2) Fill the brake reservoir on the forward pressure bulkhead with hydraulic fluid, MIL-H-5606.
(3) Pump the toe brakes very slowly approximately 25 times until fluid is observed passing through
the clear plastic hoses at the wheel cylinder.
NOTE: Fluid level in the reservoir must be maintained to prevent air from entering the line.
(4) Tighten both wheel bleeders.
(5) Check per Brake System Leak Check.
B. (Pressure)
(1) Place a small clear plastic hose on the vent tube of the brake reservoir and place a second
small clear plastic hose on the bleeder fitting on one main landing gear. Place the open ends of
these hoses in a suitable container to collect the fluid overflow. Open the bleeder fitting one or
two turns.
(2) On the other main gear, slide the hose of the pressure unit over the bleeder fitting, then open
the fitting one or two turns and pressure fill the brake system with MIL-H-5606 fluid.
(3) With fluid continually flowing through the brake system, SLOWLY and together actuate the
pedals several times.
NOTE: By watching the fluid pass through the plastic hose at the fluid reservoir and the
bleeder fitting on the gear being bled, it can be determined whether any air is left in
the system. If air bubbles are evident, filling of the system shall be continued until all
the air is out of the system and a steady flow of fluid is obtained. Should the toe
brakes remain spongy, it may be necessary to repeat the brake bleeding procedure.
(4) Close the open bleeder fitting on the gear being bled. Close the open bleeder fitting to which
the pressure hose is attached; then close the pressure unit and remove the hoses from the
bleeder fittings and from the reservoir vent. Check the brakes for proper pedal pressure.
Replace the caps over the bleeder fittings.
NOTE: It may be necessary to remove any trapped air in the top of the wheel brake unit by
applying pressure to the system with the toe brakes and slowly opening the bleeder
and releasing the hand lever.
(5) Repeat this procedure, if necessary, on the other gear.
(6) Drain excess fluid from the reservoir to fluid level line with a syringe.
4F9 32-40-00 FebPAGE 9

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C. Brake Bleeding After a Unit Has Been Changed

CAUTION: DO NOT ALLOW PRESSURE TO BLEED OFF BEFORE CLOSING BLEEDERS, FOR
THIS WILL ALLOW AIR TO ENTER THE SYSTEM. REPEAT THE PUMPING AND
BLEEDING APPROXIMATELY 10 OR MORE TIMES OR UNTIL ALL THE AIR IS
RELEASED FROM THE SYSTEM. DURING ALL BLEEDING, FLUID LEVEL OF THE
RESERVOIR MUST BE MAINTAINED.
(1) Actuate the toe brakes until some pressure builds up in the system. At this time crack the
attaching B nuts at any of the hose connections of the replaced unit. Most of the brake pedals’
spongy feeling should be displaced by this action. Tighten B nut.
(2) Actuate the toe brake/ master cylinder on the side on which the unit has been replaced. Bleed
fluid through the wheel brake assembly by pumping pressure and cracking bleeder until the
pressure drops.
9. Brake System Leak Check
A. Push on the toe brakes for a good firm pressure and lock the parking brake mechanism.
B. Allow the system to stand for approximately 10 minutes, then, by pushing the toe brakes, they
should not be able to be pushed forward further then the original set.
C. If the toe brakes can be pushed forward and feel spongy, a leak is present at some point in the
system.
D. This leak may appear at any one of the connections throughout the system or internally in the toe
brake master cylinder or wheel brake assemblies.
10. Parking Brake Valve
A. Removal
(1) Disconnect the parking brake cable from the valve actuating arm.
(2) Disconnect the fluid lines from the valve.
(3) Remove the screws that attach the valve to its mounting bracket.
(4) Place a protective material over the line openings to prevent contamination of the system.
B. Installation
(1) Attach the valve to the bulkhead mounting bracket with screws.
(2) Connect the fluid lines to the valve.
(3) Connect the control cable to the valve lever.
C. Disassembly
(1) Remove the two fittings from the outside of the valve body. A valve spring is held in place by
the fittings. Use caution not to loosen these when removing the fittings.
(2) From the valve body, remove the valve spring and valve.
(3) To remove the valve cam, remove the nut, washer, bushing and spring. Pull the cam from the
valve body.
D. Assembly
(1) Install O-rings on valve cam.
(2) Lubricate O-rings with fluid (MIL-H-5606), insert cam into valve body and secure with spring,
bushings, washer and self-locking nut.
(3) Install O-ring on the valve, insert valve in hole of out port, install valve spring and secure with
outlet fitting.
PAGE 10
Feb 28/07 32-40-00 4F10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
E. Cleaning, Inspection, and Repair

(1) Clean the valve parts with a suitable solvent and dry thoroughly.
(2) Inspect valve and seat surfaces of valve body for excessive wear and corrosion.
(3) Inspect the cam assembly for burrs, scratches, excess wear, loose operating lever, etc.
(4) Check general condition of valves and springs.
(5) Repair to the valve is largely limited to smoothing burred or scratched surfaces and replacing
O-rings.
Parking Brake Valve Assembly (Parker-Hannifin)

Figure 7
4F11 32-40-00 Feb

PAGE 11
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 12
Feb 28/07 32-40-00 4F12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4F13 32-40-00 Feb

PAGE 13
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 14
Feb 28/07 32-40-00 4F14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
STEERING
The nose gear is steered by means of the rudder pedals. Movement of the pedals is transmitted to the
steering arm by two steering pushrods, a steering bellcrank and a steering bungee. Bellows are installed
on the forward portion of the steering pushrods where they pass through the forward pressure bulkhead.
1. Steering Pushrod
A. Removal
(1) Disconnect the aft end of the pushrod from the arm on the rudder bar.
(2) Disconnect the forward end of the pushrod from the steering bellcrank.
(3) Loosen the forward end of the bellows and slip the pushrod through the bellows. The rod end
on the forward end of the bellows will have to be removed to allow the rod to pass through the
opening in the bellows.
B. Installation
(1) Set the length of the steering pushrods to an initial length of 11.90 inches between the centers
of the bolt holes in the rod end bearings. Ensure that the rod ends are positioned 90° to each
other. Loosen the forward jam nut 1/2 turn. Remove the rod end / jam nut without turning the
jam nut on the rod end shaft any more.
(2) Insert the steering rod assembly into the aft end of the bellows. Push the rod through the
sleeve in the forward end of the bellows.
(3) Reinstall the rod end on the end of the pushrod. Then tighten the rod end 1/2 turn.
(4) Attach the forward end of the steering rod to the steering bellcrank.
(5) Attach the aft end of the steering rod to the arm on the rudder bar.
(6) Locate the forward end of the bellows immediately aft of the jam nut on the forward rod end
and tighten the hose clamp on the forward end of the bellows.
2. Steering Bellcrank
A. Removal
(1) Disconnect the forward ends of both steering pushrods from the bellcrank.
(2) Disconnect the aft end of the bungee from the left side of the bellcrank.
(3) Cut the safety wire and remove the bolt that secures the steering bellcrank to the outer support
plate.
(4) Remove the bellcrank.
B. Installation
(1) Ensure that two bushings and spacer are in place in the steering bellcrank.
(2) Place washer over bolt and slide bolt into steering bellcrank.
(3) Place washers over bolt. Insert bolt in support plates, insuring that spacer is in place between
inner and outer support plate. Torque bolt and safety bolt to clip with MS20995-C41 safety wire.
(4) Connect the aft end of the steering bungee to the left side of the steering bellcrank.
(5) Connect the forward ends of both steering pushrods to the bellcrank.
3. Bungee Assembly
A. Removal
(1) Disconnect forward end of bungee from left-hand side of steering arm.
(2) Disconnect aft end of bungee from left-hand side of steering bellcrank.
(3) Remove bungee.
4F15 32-50-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B. Installation
(1) Place bungee in position.
(2) Connect aft end of bungee to left-hand side of steering bellcrank.
(3) Connect forward end of bungee to steering arm. The thinner washer goes under the bolt head,
the thicker washer under the nut.
4. Steering Pushrod Bellows
A. Removal
(1) Loosen hose clamps on forward end of bellows.
(2) Disconnect steering pushrod from steering bellcrank. Remove rod end bearing and jamnut
from forward end of steering pushrod.
(3) Slide pushrod aft.
(4) Remove screws from fire shield. (The fire shield is the plate on the aft side of the pressure
bulkhead which helps to secure the large end of the bellows to the aft side of the pressure
bulkhead.)
(5) Slide fire shield, packing ring/housing/spacer assembly and plate aft on steering rod tube.
(6) Push bellows forward out of cutout in pressure bulkhead.
(7) Remove bellows from steering rod.
B. Installation
(1) Place bellows over forward end of steering pushrod.
(2) Push large end of bellows through cutout in pressure bulkhead.
(3) Slide plate, packing ring/housing/spacer assembly and fire shield forward on steering rod tube.
(4) Line up holes in pressure bulkhead, plate and fire shield; install screws, washers and nuts.
NOTE: Install all screws, except the uppermost one, with their shanks pointing aft. The
uppermost screw’s shank should point forward.
(5) Install steering pushrod per instructions in this chapter.
(6) Reconnect steering rod to steering bellcrank.
(7) Tighten hose clamp on forward end of bellows.
NOTE: With nose landing gear pointing straight ahead, the forward end of the bellows should
be approximately even with the forward end of the steering rod tube.
5. Steering Arm
A. Removal
(1) Disconnect the forward end of the bungee from the left-hand side of the steering arm.
(2) Remove the nut and washer that secures the steering arm to the mount plate.
(3) Lift the steering arm off of the bolt.
B. Installation
(1) Position the steering arm on the bolt, ensuring that a washer is installed above and below the
spacer which goes through the bushing in the steering arm. Install and torque nut.
(2) Attach forward end of bungee to left side of steering arm.
(3) Adjust the clearance between rollers on the nose gear and steering arm as desribed in Rigging
and Adjustment, Rudder Controls, 27-20-00.
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 32-50-00 4F16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4F17 32-50-00 FebPAGE 3

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 32-50-00 4F18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
POSITION AND WARNING
1. Troubleshooting
WARNING: ALWAYS PLACE THE AIRPLANE ON JACKS BEFORE ATTEMPTING ANY
TROUBLESHOOTING OF THE LANDING GEAR. SEE 7-10-00.
TROUBLESHOOTING LANDING GEAR WARNING SYSTEMS
Red gear unsafe light out Indicator lamp burned Replace lamp.
while gear is in transit. out.
Indicator light ground Check ground circuit.
incomplete.
Indicator light circuit Check wiring.
wire broken.
Indicator light circuit Reset circuit breaker
breaker open. and determine cause for
open circuit breaker.
Red gear unsafe light on One or more up limit Isolate and replace
though gear has retracted. switches failed. switch.
Nose gear up limit Check gear up adjustment
switch out of adjustment. and readjust up limit
switch.
Main gear not retracting Check gear up adjustment.
far enough to actuate
switch.
Red gear unsafe light on One or more down limit Isolate and replace switch.
though gear is down switches failed.
and locked.
Nose gear down limit Readjust down limit switch.
switch out of adjustment.
Main gear down limit switch Readjust down limit switch.
out of adjustment.
NOTE: The out of adjustment or failed switch may be determined by noting which down light is not lit.
Red gear unsafe light Light circuit wire loose. Check wiring.
operates on and off
after gear has retracted. Hydraulic system Refer to Chapter 29 and
losing pressure. Section 32-30-00.
Gear up switch out of Check gear up adjustment
adjustment. and then
switch adjustment.
4F19 32-60-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Red gear unsafe light out Lamp burned out. Replace lamp.
and one green gear
down light out though Gear down limit switch Replace switch.
gear is down and locked. failed.
NOTE: Ascertain navigation lights are off (daytime).
Light circuit wire Check wiring.
broken.
Red gear unsafe light and Indicator lights circuit Reset circuit breaker
all green lights out. breaker open. and determine cause for
open circuit breaker.
NOTE: Ascertain navigation lights are off (daytime).
Light circuit wire Check wiring.
broken.
Red gear unsafe light and Landing gear selector Reset circuit breaker
horn fail to operate circuit breaker open. and determine cause
when power is decreased for open circuit breaker.
to approximately 15 IN. HG. MAP
and landing gear is retracted. Micro switch at throttle Adjust micro switch.
out of adjustment.
Micro switch at throttle Replace switch.
failed .
Warning horn and light Check wiring.
circuit wire broken.
Red gear unsafe light and horn Gear selector handle in up Place handle in down
fail to stop when throttle is position. position.
closed and gear has extended.
(Gear extended through the use
of the emergency gear down.)
Red gear unsafe light and horn Warning light and horn circuit Check wiring.
fail to operate when selector wire broken.
switch is moved to up position
with gear extended and throttle
not full forward.
Above condition on ground. Defective safety (squat) switch. Replace switch.
Hydraulic pump shuts off, but Gear not fully retracted. Check gear retraction
red gear unsafe light remains on. adjustments.
Gear not contacting up Check gear up switches.
micro switches.
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 32-60-00 4F20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Green gear down lights Failed instrument panel Replace switch.
dim though position light control switch.
light switch is off. (Lights grounding
and gear is down and through dimming
locked. resistor instead of instrument
panel light control.)
Green gear down light Gear down limit switch Replace switch.
fails to go out with failed.
gear in transit or retracted.
Green gear down lights Green light ground Replace resistor.
will go out and not dimming resistor
dim when position light open.
switch is turned on though gear
is down and locked.
Green gear down lights Micro switch out of Adjust micro switch.
blink momentarily before adjustment.
the down lock is engaged
on roller.
4F21 32-60-00 FebPAGE 3

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Nose Gear Up Switch Adjustment

Figure 1
2. Nose Gear
WARNING: ADJUSTMENT OF ALL LIMIT SWITCHES SHOULD BE MADE WITH THE AIRPLANE ON
JACKS.
A. Up Limit Switch Adjustment (See Figure 1.)
The nose gear up limit switch is located on the right-hand side of the wheel well opening. The right-
hand nose wheel door actuates this switch.
This switch is adjusted by backing off the two nuts on the switch plunger bushing.
B. Down Limit Switch Adjustment
The nose gear down limit switch is mounted on the nose gear locking actuator. The switch is
activated when the cylinder is extended and locked.
No adjustment of this switch is allowed.
PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 32-60-00 4F22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Main Gear Up Switch Adjustment

Figure 2
3. Main Gear
JACKS.
A. Up Limit Switch Adjustment (See Figure 2.)
A gear up limit switch is located in the wing wheel well, beneath the locking actuator. There is no
adjustment of the switch other than that shown in Figure 2; i.e. - 0.0 to 0.03 inch above the flush line
of the lower wing skin.
B. Down Limit Switch Adjustment
The main gear down limit switches are mounted in each main gear locking actuator. The switch is
activated when the cylinder is extended and locked.
No adjustment of these switches is required.
4F23 32-60-00 FebPAGE 5

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 6
Feb 28/07 32-60-00 4F24
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Adjustment of Squat Switch

Figure 3
4. Landing Gear Safety Switch (Squat Switch) Adjustment (See Figure 3.) (PIR-PPS60033-7, Rev. G/-9, Rev. J/-13, Rev. NEW.)
JACKS.
The landing gear safety switch is located on the left main gear housing. It is adjusted to to provide a
closed gear selector "UP" control circuit at a strut extension of 8.00 inches maximum and an open gear
"UP" control circuit at a strut extension of 7.70 inches minimum.
A. Jack the airplane (refer to 7-10-00).
B. Compress the strut until 7.875 inches is obtained between the top of the gear fork and the bottom
of the gear housing. Hold the gear at this measurement.
C. Adjust the switch so that it actuates at this point. Secure the switch with lockwire.
D. Extend and then compress the strut to ascertain that the switch will actuate within the last quarter
of an inch of oleo extension.
4G1 32-60-00 FebPAGE 7

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Effectivity Landing Gear Up / Power Reduced Warning Switch

4636001 thru 4636374 Figure 4
5. Landing Gear Up / Power Reduced Warning Switch (See Figure 4.)

A. S/N’s 4636001 thru 4636374
(1) Removal
The landing gear up / power reduced warning switch is located in the engine control quadrant
assembly. It is on the left side of the throttle lever.
(a) Loosen the control quadrant cover and slide it up the engine control levers and out of the
way.
(b) Disconnect the electrical leads to the switch at the plug.
(c) Remove screws, nuts, and washers that attach the switch to its mounting bracket.
(2) Installation
(a) Attach the switch to its mounting bracket with screws, nuts, and washers.
(b) Reconnect the electrical leads at the plug.
(c) Slide control quadrant cover down the engine control levers and secure it to the top of the
console.
(d) Adjust the switch per the following instructions.
(3) Adjustment (PIR-FTP2001-8, Rev. E.)
This switch is adjusted by backing off the two nuts on the switch mounting bracket to reposition
the switch. Set for horn to sound at 15 ± 1 In. Hg. manifold pressure.
B. S/N’s 4636375 and up (PIR-FTP2001-8, Rev. E.)
Uses manifold pressure to operate a pressure switch to sound the gear warn horn if power is
reduced to or below 15 ± 1 In. Hg with the gear up. No adjustment is required.
PAGE 8
Feb 28/07 32-60-00 4G2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4G3 32-60-00 FebPAGE 9

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 10
Feb 28/07 32-60-00 4G4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER
33
LIGHTS
4G5
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4G6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 33
CHAPTER CHAPTER


2 Feb 28/07
33-10-00 1 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07
5 Feb 28/07
6 Feb 28/07
7 Feb 28/07
8 Feb 28/07
9 Feb 28/07
10 Feb 28/07
33-20-00 1 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07
33-30-00 1 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07
33-40-00 1 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07
5 Feb 28/07
6 Feb 28/07
7 Feb 28/07
8 Feb 28/07

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 33 - LIGHTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
FLIGHT COMPARTMENT 33-10-00 1 4G11

Dimmer Control Unit 1 4G11
Removal 1 4G11
Installation 1 4G11
Post Lights 1 4G11
Removal 1 4G11
Installation 1 4G11
Lamp Replacement 2 4G12
Annunciator Panel 2 4G12
Standby Map Light Removal and Installation 2 4G12
Dimming Rheostat 2 4G12
Removal 2 4G12
Installation 2 4G12
Switch Lamps Removal and Installation 7 4G17
Illuminated Switch Assembly Removal and Installation 7 4G17
Environmental / De-ice Switch Panel 7 4G17
Circuit Breaker Panels Electroluminescent Lighting 7 4G17
Post Installation Setup 8 4G18
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT 33-20-00 1 4G21

Courtesy / Rear Baggage Area Lighting 1 4G21
Description 1 4G21
Courtesy Lights Timer 1 4G21
Removal 1 4G21
Installation 1 4G21
Reading Lights and Lamp 1 4G21
Removal 1 4G21
Installation 1 4G21
CARGO AND SERVICE COMPARTMENTS 33-30-00 1 4H1

Forward Baggage Compartment Lamp Replacement 1 4H1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 33 - LIGHTS
EXTERIOR 33-40-00 1 4H3

Strobe Lights 1 4H3
Description 1 4H3
General Service Information 1 4H3
Position / Strobe Lamps Replacement 2 4H4
Strobe Power Supplies Replacement 3 4H5
Taxi Light Replacement 4 4H6
Landing Light Replacement 5 4H7
Wing Inspection Light 5 4H7
Removal 5 4H7
Installation 5 4H7
Changing Light Bulb 5 4H7
Pulse Lights 5 4H7
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FLIGHT COMPARTMENT
All lighting is 24 Vdc except for the circuit breaker panels, which are lit by electroluminescent means and
use an inverter to convert 24 Vdc input from the 5 amp INSTR PANEL circuit breaker, to 115 Vac 400 Hz.
Cockpit lighting consists of instrument panel post lights which are controlled by a solid state dimmer
control unit. Radio lighting is controlled separately and in any case consists of integral lighting normally
provided in radio equipment. Switches are back lighted for positive identification and visibility. An
overhead light is located in the cockpit ceiling above each of the two front seats providing map lights and
standby panel lighting for each crew member. These standby/ map lights are controlled by an ON-OFF,
dimmer rheostat, located on the overhead, between the two lights. The electroluminescent lighting
receives its power from the PANEL LIGHTS circuit breaker via the panel lights dimmer switch, taper
block TB1 and the electroluminescent panel inverter.
The three dimmer control units are solid state and powered through the 3 amp ANNUN and AVIONICS
DIMMING, and the 5 amp INSTR PANEL circuit breakers. The dimmer controls rheostats control the
dimmer outputs for post lights, circuit beaker panels, switch, and avionics lighting intensity.
All panel lights, except for integral radio equipment lighting, are controlled from the dimmer control unit
and dimming rheostat. Employ conventional troubleshooting methods: panel lights full bright, first
replacing offending individual lamps. If not successful measure socket voltage and repair as required. If
all lamps are “OUT” check power from bus, through circuit breaker, harness, dimmer control, and dimmer
output. Replace or repair as required.
NOTE: Refer to 91-33-10, 91-33-20, and 91-33-40 for schematics on the Lighting systems.
1. Dimmer Control Unit
A. Removal
(1) The dimmer control units are mounted on the aft right side of the forward pressure bulkhead.
Access is gained from beneath the copilot’s instrument panel. The rheostat controls are
mounted on the lower left side of the pilot’s instrument panel just below the main electrical
switch panel.
(2) Disconnect the electric harness connector.
(3) Remove mounting screws and the dimmer control assembly.
B. Installation
(1) Position the dimmer control assembly in place and secure with the mounting screws.
(2) Connect the electrical harness connector to dimmer assembly.
(3) Cycle lighting to verify function.
2. Post Lights
A. Removal
(1) Disconnect wire from rear of socket behind panel.
(2) Unscrew rear contact collar from rear of socket.
(3) Remove mounting washer and nut from light assembly.
(4) Pull assembly from panel mounting hole.
B. Installation
(1) Insert assembly into panel mounting hole.
(2) Install mounting washer and nut onto light assembly.
(3) Screw rear contact collar from rear of socket.
(4) Connect wire to rear of socket behind panel.
4G11 33-10-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C. Lamp Replacement
(1) Pull firmly on the post light hood and remove.
(2) The lamp will be pulled from socket and remain inside hood. Gently pry the lamp base flange
from the hood to remove the lamp.
(3) Push the new lamp into the hood and push the hood back into the socket.
3. Annunciator Panel (See Chart 1 and Figures 1 and 2.)
The annunciator panel, located at the top center of the instrument panel, provides systems visual
warning information. A complete functional description is provided in 31-50-00. Complete electrical
schematics are provided in 91-31-50.
A. In S/N’s 4636001 thru 4636131, it is not necessary to remove the annunciator panel assembly to
replace lamp bulbs. Simply “PUSH-IN” on the function light until it “clicks”, and release pressure.
The cover assembly will be partially ejected from the lamp base assembly. Pull the cover from the
base and rotate to expose the lamp bulb. Replace defective bulb and reverse removal procedure.
Depress “Test” function to verify lamp function.
B. In S/N’s 4636132 thru 4636374, pull evenly on the annunciator panel bezel to access the lamp
bulbs. An extraction tool and four spare bulbs are located behind the bezel. Use the extraction tool
to replace defective bulb and reverse removal procedure. Depress “Test” function to verify lamp
function.
NOTE: Test function only tests the bulbs, not the circuit.
C. In S/N’s 4636375 and up, the annunciator panel is an LED unit. In the unlikely event of LED failure,
the entire unit must be replaced.
4. Standby Map Light Removal and Installation
A. Remove the four lens retainer screws and remove the lens.
B. Remove and replace the bayonet type lamp.
C. Replace the lens and four mounting screws.
5. Dimming Rheostat
A. Removal
(1) Remove the overhead access panel between pilot’s standby-map light and radio speaker.
(2) Remove rheostat mounting screws.
(3) Disconnect and label wiring.
(4) Remove rheostat.
B. Installation
(1) Connect wiring to rheostat.
(2) Position rheostat in proper location and install mounting screws.
(3) Install the overhead access panel.
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 33-10-00 4G12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 1
ANNUNCIATOR PANEL LOCATOR / COLOR
Station Station Station Station

Fig. 2 Fig. 3 Annunciator Color Fig. 2 Fig. 3 Annunciator Color
A G ALTERNATOR RED P -- -------------- GREEN

NO. 1 INOP
R X OIL AMBER
B H BOOST RED PRESS
PUMP
S Y HYDRAULIC AMBER
C J FUEL RED PUMP
PRESS
T Z SURFACE GREEN
D K LOW BUS RED DE-ICE
VOLTAGE
U AA ANNUNCIATOR AMBER
E L CABIN RED INOP
ALTITUDE
-- W PITOT HEAT AMBER
F M STALL WARN RED OFF / INOP
FAIL
-- A VACUUM AMBER
G N ALTERNATOR RED NO. 1 INOP
NO. 2 INOP
-- B VACUUM AMBER
H P GEAR RED NO. 2 INOP
WARN
-- C -------------- GREEN
J R DOOR RED
-- D -------------- GREEN
AJAR
-- E -------------- GREEN
K S FLAPS RED
-- F FUEL AMBER
L T STARTER RED
IMBALANCE
ENGAGE
-- -- SELECT * AMBER
M U WINDSHIELD RED
DE-ICE
HEAT FAIL
-- -- ICE DETECT * AMBER
N V OXYGEN AMBER
FAIL
Fig. 2 = S/N’s 4636001 thru 4636020 only.
Fig. 3 = S/N’s 4636021 thru 4636131 only.
* = S/N’s 4636132 thru 4636313, less 4636299.
Annunciator Wiring Harness Effectivity

Figure 1 4636001 thru 4636131
4G13 33-10-00 FebPAGE 3

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
BRACKET NUT
(SELF LOCKING)
A B C D E F
G H J K L M
N P R S T U
FRONT
F E D C B A
M L K J H G
U T S R P N
SOLDER
SLEEVE
DIODE
(IN2071A)
2 3 14 15 1 13 11 12 10 5 6 8 9 4 7 17 18 16 J328
Tubing 22 gauge bus wire
F E D C B A
M L K J H G
U T S R P N
SOLDER
SLEEVE
DIODE
(IN2071A)
30 31 19 24 10 16 36 22 11 12 26 20 27 21 1 33 29 34 35 17 23 25 18 3 4 J329
Effectivity Annunciator Panel Installation

PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 33-10-00 4G14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
BRACKET NUT
(SELF LOCKING)
A B C D E F
G H J K L M
N P R S T U
V W X Y Z AA
FRONT
Annunciator Panel Installation Effectivity

4G15 33-10-00 FebPAGE 5

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Effectivity
4636132 thru 4636313, Annunciator Panel Installation
PAGE 6
Feb 28/07 33-10-00 4G16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6. Switch Lamps Removal and Installation

A. On the exposed arc of the rocker switch find an indentation and pry the rocker portion of switch from
the switch assembly, using the indentation for leverage, note rocker position.
B. Locate and pull the metal tab. Remove lamp from its socket and replace. It is not necessary to
rotate lamp when removing or installing it.
C. After replacing the lamp, place the rocker portion of the switch in the same position as when
removed, and press it firmly into place noting an audible “snap” as the plastic locks mate into place.
Cycle the switch to confirm rocker is seated.
7. Illuminated Switch Assembly Removal and Installation
CAUTION: ALTHOUGH SMALL SWITCH ASSEMBLIES ARE FAR EASIER TO REMOVE IF WIRING
IS FIRST DISCONNECTED, THE LIMITED WORK SPACE BEHIND THE PANEL CAN
RESULT IN BURNED WIRE INSULATION. DO NOT ATTEMPT TO UNSOLDER THESE
SMALL ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL UNDER ANY
CONDITIONS. IF NECESSARY CUT THE WIRES A T THE POINT OF CONNECTION. IN
ANY CASE IT IS BETTER TO DAMAGE THE SWITCH AT TIME OF REMOVAL AND
REPLACE IT, RATHER THAN DAMAGE THE WIRING HARNESS LEADS.
A. To remove, squeeze metal lock tabs at rear of panel and push switch from the rear sliding assembly
from the front of panel.
B. To install, align the switch from the panel front and push firmly into the panel cutout until the metal
lock tabs snap into position against the rear face of the panel. Make sure the electrical connections
are completed first.
8. Environmental/De-ice Switch Panel (S/N’s 4636132 and up)
The Environmental/De-ice switch panel adjacent to the annunciator, in S/N’s 4636132 and up, is a
sealed unit lighted with LED’s and cannot be repaired in the field. Return failed units to Piper for repair or
replacement.
9. Circuit Breaker Panels Electroluminescent Lighting
Illumination by electroluminescence is accomplished by discharging an alternating current through
phosphor treated material, such as the circuit breaker decal strips. Should any one decal strip fail to
illuminate, the complete strip must be replaced.
Should all decal strips fail to illuminate, the probable fault is with the inverter used to convert 24 Vdc to
115 Vac. The inverter is located on the rib between the pilot’s circuit breaker panels, below the panels.
Replace the inverter.
The 24 Vdc power to the inverter comes through the INSTR PANEL 5 amp circuit breaker. If the
electroluminescence placards and post lights fail to illuminate, check that the INSTR PANEL circuit
breaker has not tripped; reset, if necessary. If the INSTR PANEL circuit breaker has not tripped, check
the PANEL dimmer control unit.
If the PANEL dimmer control unit is good, check that neither MAIN 60 amp Tie Bus circuit breaker has
tripped; reset as necessary.
If none of the above correct the problem, check all related wiring. Refer to Chapter 91 for appropriate
electrical schematics.
4G17 33-10-00 FebPAGE 7

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
10. Post-Installation Set-up (PIR-PPS-60199-2, Rev.G / PPS-60206, Rev. G.)
The GNS-430/-530 NAV/COM/GPS and the GTX-327/-330 Transponder each have lighting configuration
settings which must be adjusted after installation. Whenever a unit is replaced, use the following
procedures to configure the lighting in the new unit.
A. GNS-430/-530
With power applied to the avionics rack and the GNS-430/-530 turned off, press and hold the ENT
key and turn the unit ON. Release the ENT key when the display activates. After the data base
pages, press the ENT key twice (to step through the Data Base Information and Indicator Self Test
Pages). The next page displayed is the MAIN ARINC 429 CONFIG page.
While in Configuration Mode, pages can be selected by ensuring the cursor is off and rotating the
small (inner) right knob. Do this now and select the MAIN LIGHTING PAGE.
To change data on the displayed Main Lighting Page, press the small (inner) right knob (CRSR) to
turn on the cursor. Turn the large (outside) right knob to step through the data fields. Turn the small
(inner) right knob to change the data in the field that the cursor is on. Press the ENT key to accept
the data that is displayed in the selected field.
Configure a newly installed unit as shown in Chart 2.
NOTE: Initial configuration may be done using aircraft battery or external power. Final performance
should be checked with the airplane configured as follows:
Engine - Running Alternator – ON Avionics – ON
Instrument Panel Lights – Full Bright Day/Night Switch – Day
Navigation Lights – ON Strobe Lights – ON Pitot Heat – OFF
Air Conditioning – OFF Cabin Blower Fan – Low Vent Blower – OFF
CHART 2
GNS-430/-530 MAIN LIGHTING CONFIGURATION
DISPLAY KEY
LIGHTING NO SETTING NO SETTING
SOURCE 28 VDC PHOTO
RESP TIME / MIN 4 / 80 4 / 99
SLOPE / OFFSET 50 / 50 50 / 90
PHOTO TRANS % 25
PHOTO SLP / OFST 35 / 35 (See Note)
NOTE: Due to tolerances of electrical components, these settings may vary slightly from unit to
unit. Adjust (±/-10%) if needed, to obtain optimum lighting balance between panel units.
PAGE 8
Feb 28/07 33-10-00 4G18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B. GTX-327/-330
With power applied to the avionics rack and the GTX-327/-330 turned off, press and hold the FUNC
key and turn the unit ON. This provides access to the configuration pages. The FUNC key
sequences forward through the configuration pages. The START/STOP key sequences the
configuration pages backward. The CRSR key will highlight selectable fields on each page. When a
field is highlighted, the numeric data entry will be performed with the 0-9 keys, and list selections
will be performed with the 8 or 9 keys. Press the CRSR key to accept changes. Pressing the FUNC
key moves on to the next configuration page without saving the changes. To exit the configuration
pages, turn the power off and then on again (without holding the FUNC key).
Configure a newly installed unit as shown in Chart 3.
NOTE: For the GTX-330 only: when the unit is turned on for the first time, or an invalid aircraft
address is recognized, the unit will prompt the user to enter a valid aircraft address. See
latest revision of Garmin GTX-330 Installation Manual, P/N 190-00207-02.
CHART 3
GTX-327/-330 LIGHTING CONFIGURATION
Data Element Selection

DISPLAY MODE PAGE
DISPLAY MODE AUTO
LEVEL 75
DISPLAY BACKLIGHT PAGE
BKLT AUTO
LVL Not Selectable
RSP TIME 4
MIN 8
BKLT SRCE PHOTO
SLOPE 50
OFFSET 50
KEY LIGHTING PAGE
KEY AUTO
LVL Not Selectable
RSP TIME 4
MIN 5
KEY SRCE 28V
SLOPE 20
OFFSET 30
CONTRAST MODE AUTO
4G19 33-10-00 FebPAGE 9

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 10
Feb 28/07 33-10-00 4G20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
All lighting is 24 Vdc.

1. Courtesy / Rear Baggage Area Lighting
A. Description
Cabin courtesy, rear baggage area and forward baggage compartment lighting is powered through
an in-line 5 amp fuse from the battery bus. Two switches, an upper and lower, are actuated by the
cabin entrance door. One half of the lower switch controls the cabin courtesy lighting, while the
other half and the upper portion of the switch provides door ajar warning power to the annunciator
panel. The cabin entrance lighting circuit is controlled by a five minute “one-shot” timer to prevent
unnecessary battery discharge if the door is left open unattended. The lights are located to ensure
the entrance steps are illuminated. The forward baggage compartment light is controlled by a switch
in the forward baggage compartment that is activated when the baggage compartment door is
opened.
B. Lamp Replacement
(1) Remove lens mounting screws.
(2) Pull out bayonet base lamp.
(3) Install replacement, check, and reinstall lens.
2. Courtesy Lights Timer
A. Removal
(1) The courtesy lights timer is located on a frame assembly aft of the lower cabin door.
(2) Disconnect electrical wires.
(3) Remove mounting screws and timer assembly.
B. Installation
(1) Position timer assembly in place and secure with mounting screws.
(2) Connect electrical wires.
(3) Test for proper operation of timer.
3. Reading Lights and Lamp
A. Removal
(1) Remove two faceplate mounting screws and gently pull bezel from ceiling cavity, pulling switch
and lamp wires into cabin area until lamp holder is exposed. Be careful magnifying and flood
lens do not drop to floor (refer to Figure 1).
(2) Squeeze lamp holder and withdraw it from cup. Replace bayonet lamp.
(3) Slide switch can also be replaced in bezel after removal.
B. Installation
(1) With new lamp installed in lamp holder, squeeze lamp holder mount tabs and insert holder into
cup. Make sure lamp holder locks securely in place.
(2) Place magnifying lens and flood lens in position on bezel, holding it horizontal, and place cup
in position on bezel.
(3) Holding assembly together, insert entire assembly into ceiling cavity.
(4) Align faceplate mounting holes and reinstall faceplate mounting screws.
4G21 33-20-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
BEZEL MAGNIFYING
LENS FLOOD
LENS
CUP
OFF ON
HEX NUT
SLIDE
STAR
SWITCH
WASHER
(ON/OFF) LAMP
LAMPHOLDER
Reading and Courtesy Light

Figure 1
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 33-20-00 4G22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4G23 33-20-00 FebPAGE 3

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 33-20-00 4G24
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CARGO AND SERVICE COMPARTMENTS
All lighting is 24 Vdc.

Forward Baggage Compartment Lamp Replacement
The forward baggage compartment door actuates the door ajar switch controlling the annunciator panel
door ajar indicator. The baggage light contains its own integral switch.
A. Remove lens.
B. Replace bayonet lamp.
C. Replace lens and check operation.
4H1 33-30-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 33-30-00 4H2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EXTERIOR
External lighting consists of anti-collision strobes, landing, taxi-pulse, position, and wing inspection
lights. All lighting is 24 Vdc, except for the anti-collision strobe lighting, which is powered though a power
supply, which converts 24 Vdc, received from the aircraft bus power, to a very high voltage required to
flash the lights. Refer to 91-33-40 for electrical schematic details of these lighting systems.
1. Strobe Lights
A. Description (See Figure 1 and 91-33-40.)
Each wing tip strobe tube is powered by its individual power supply. Both power supplies receive
power from the main bus through the 5 amp STROBE LIGHTS circuit breaker, and are controlled by
the strobe light switch. If both strobe lights exhibit a fault, first verify that the STROBE LIGHTS
circuit breaker has not opened (reset, if necessary), and then check integrity of the strobe light
switch (replace if required). If either strobe is operating correctly, the strobe switch is considered
good. Check wiring from the strobe light switch to each strobe power supply to verify system wiring
integrity.
The strobe light assembly functions as a capacitor high voltage discharge system. An audible tone
of 1 to 1.5 K Hertz is emitted during the charge cycle of the strobe power supply in a normally
functioning unit. However, the audible tone does not necessarily mean the power supply firing circuit
is good. A voltage of approximately 450 volts is developed on the capacitor, after which the audible
tone ceases. The capacitor is paralleled across the Xenon flash tube which holds off the voltage
until the tube is triggered by a separate pulse generated by a solid state timing circuit.
After the trigger pulse causes ionization of the Xenon gas in the envelope, an intense light is given
off for a brief moment as the capacitor discharges. Following discharge across the tube, the
oscillator again chops up the dc aircraft current into alternating current, and again develops a higher
voltage through transformer action. After full voltage is again impressed on the capacitor the cycle
repeats itself occurring at about 50 flashes per minute.
Since each wing tip strobe is powered by its own power supply, and if both power supplies are
emitting audible tones, simply switch power supplies from each wing tip. If the trouble is one of the
power supplies, replace it. If the faulty strobe still malfunctions replace that strobe tube. Refer to
Replacement of Position / Strobe Lamps and to Replacement of Strobe Power Supplies.
B. General Service Information
(1) Never reverse power supply input connections for even an instant. Reverse polarity will
permanently damage the circuitry. Even though damage may not be immediately apparent, the
power supply will fail in use.
(2) Wait five minutes for high voltage bleed down to occur, before handling a strobe power supply
to avoid electrical shock.
(3) Never allow connection between pins 1 and 2 of the flash tube connector, since this will
discharge the capacitor and destroy the trigger circuit in the power supply.
NOTE: All of the following conditions, except item (6), are considered to require replacement.
(4) A Xenon flash tube can be photo-sensitive. Some may flash normally when exposed to light,
but may become difficult to fire in darkness.
(5) Xenon flash tubes become more difficult to fire with age, or when exposed to very high
temperatures.
(6) A tube with most of the service life left in it, should fire on a reduced voltage of 22 volts.
(7) A tube with little service life left in it, will fire with an engine running, but refuse to fire on battery
voltage.
4H3 33-40-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(8) Under hot and cold cycling during normal operation, “egg-shelling” of the glass envelope can
occur, or leaks may develop in the glass seal.
(9) Xenon strobe tubes can sometimes go into “self-ionization” continuously glowing a light blue,
thus rendering the system inoperative.
C. Position / Strobe Lamps Replacement
(1) Remove the screws securing the plexiglass cover to the wing tip structure, and separate the
cover from the wing tip.
(2) Remove lens retainer screws, retainer, and lens, exposing the light bracket assembly (refer to
Figure 1).
(3) The position lamps can now be replaced.
NOTE: If strobe (Xenon) lamp is to be replaced, proceed to step (5). If not complete step (4).
(4) Install lens, retainer, and cover in reverse of the preceding steps.
(5) Each strobe lamp is powered by its own power supply which is attached to a wing access
panel located on the lower wing surface just inboard of each wing tip.
CAUTION: WHEN DISCONNECTING STROBE POWER SUPPLY, ALLOW FIVE MINUTES
OF BLEED DOWN TIME BEFORE HANDLING A CHARGED UNIT.
(6) Remove the 12 screws securing wing access panel to the underside of the wing. Drop access
panel from the wing exposing the attached strobe power supply.
(7) Remove four attachment screws and eight AN960-10 washers; separate power supply from
access panel. Set wing access panel aside to protect paint etc.
(8) Unplug both power supply connectors, and remove power supply from wing.
(9) Reach into wing and unscrew (P109 left wing / P209 right wing) releasing this connector (refer
to Figure 1).
(10) Remove light bracket assembly mounting screws from wing tip and gently pull entire light
assembly free of wing tip, feeding wiring through wing tip opening until plug (P101 / P201)
three wire connector is pulled outside of wing.
NOTE: If sufficient wire length is not available to continue with the following steps, the
remaining ground wire will have to be disconnected at the plug bracket assembly
ground lug (Figure 1).
(11) Cut the disconnected three wire connector, P111 or P211, at the base of the strobe light
bracket assembly and discard cut wires and connector end.
(12) Remove and destroy Xenon strobe lamp.
(13) Route new wires attached to replacement strobe lamp through hole in bracket assembly and
install new Xenon tube in bracket assembly.
(14) Referring to 91-33-40 schematic of anti-collision strobe lighting insert new wiring terminals into
the replacement connector plug supplied with the new strobe lamp. Wire according to
schematic.
(15) Gently feed cable assembly back into wing and align light bracket assembly in place. Do not
mount assembly.
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 33-40-00 4H4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(16) If ground wire was disconnected from plug bracket ground lug, connect this wire.
(17) Reconnect (P109 or P209) to plug bracket mate.
(18) Connect new three wire connector P-111 or P-211 and the original P-110 or P-210 connectors
to power supply.
(19) Install power supply to access panel with the eight AN960-10 washers and four attachment
screws.
(20) Install wing access panel with power supply attached and wires facing outboard, to the wing
surface with appropriate mounting screws previously removed.
(21) Install the light bracket assembly, lens, lens retainer and plexiglass cover.
D. Strobe Power Supplies Replacement
(1) Each wing tip strobe light is powered by its individual power supply which is attached to a wing
access panel located on the lower wing surface just inboard of the wing tip. Refer to Figure 2.
(2) Remove wing access panel.
(3) Unplug power supply connectors P-111 and P-110 on left wing and P-211 and P-210 on right
wing.
(4) Remove four screws and eight AN960-10 washers attaching power supply to wing access
panel and separate from power supply.
(5) Reverse procedures for installation of strobe power supply.
Position, Strobe, and Taxi Light Installation

Figure 1
4H5 33-40-00 FebPAGE 3

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2. Taxi Light Replacement

A. A 50 watt taxi light is located within the leading edge of each wing inboard of the tip.
B. If the strobes have just been in operation, wait five minutes for high voltage bleed down to occur
before removing wing access panel located on the lower surface of the wing just inboard of the wing
tip by removing the 12 screw securing to the wing. The strobe power supply is attached to this wing
access panel with 4 screws an eight AN960-10 washers.
C. Remove access panel and unplug strobe power supply connectors, so access panel with power
supply still attached can be set aside. This will prevent weight of power supply from pulling on
electrical harness (refer to Figure 1).
D. Disconnect taxi light, and electrical connectors from rear of light.
E. Remove four bracket retaining screws from the assembly. These screw are removed from the
external surface of the wing; 2 on the bottom and 2 on top.
F. Slide the light bracket assembly aft and down and out through access opening.
G. To remove lens, squeeze lens gently and slide forward, out of edge of wing structure, ensuring the
gasket does not slide off and into the wing.
H. To remove lamp from light assembly, snap lens cover off of the reflector and replace the lamp.
I. Installation is reverse of preceding stops.
Recognition / Taxi Light

Figure 2
PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 33-40-00 4H6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. Landing Light Replacement

A 250 watt landing light is attached to the nose gear strut by a support bracket and brace. It functions
independently of the taxi lights.
A. Remove the four lens attachment screws and pull the bezel from the fixture being careful not to
damage the seal. Remove seal and bezel.
B. The lamp will be free to separate from the support bracket. Pull the lamp forward and unscrew the
electrical connections from the lamp.
C. Replace the lamp making sure the electrical connections are secured with the electrical connection
screws previously removed, and push the lamp into the lamp support bracket.
D. Reinstall the seal and bezel with the four attachment screws.
4. Wing Inspection Light
The wing inspection light is located on the left hand side of the fuselage at F.S. 129.60. The light is used
to help the pilot inspect the wing for any ice formation on its leading edge.
A. Removal
(1) Remove pilot’s side panel.
(2) From the outside, remove the four (4) screws (one screw is longer than the other three)
securing the light assembly to the doubler. The longer screw is from the upper aft position.
(3) Push the light assembly inward.
(4) Disconnect the wiring harness from the light. Refer to item C(2), below.
(5) Remove the light assembly.
B. Installation
(1) Clean any remaining sealant from the light assembly, shim and inboard side of doubler.
(2) Apply GE RTV 1508 sealant to both sides of the shim.
NOTE: The thicker end of the shim should face aft.

(3) Install the shim and light assembly. Secure with the four (4) screws. Make sure longer screw is
reinserted into the upper aft position.
(4) Install the electrical connector. Refer to item C(4), below.
(5) Check operation of light.
(6) Install pilot’s side panel.
C. Changing Light Bulb
(1) Gain access to wing inspection light bulb by removing pilot’s side panel.
(2) Locate ice light. Release the two spring clips (at approximately the 9:30 and 7:30 clock
positions) and remove bulb from socket.
(3) Insert a new bulb into socket. (Refer to Parts Catalog for part number.)
(4) Insert socket into lamp assembly. Make sure spring clips engage.
(5) Check light operation. Install pilot’s side panel.
5. Pulse Lights
In S/N’s 4636132 and up, the two position “OFF-Taxi” switch is replaced with a three position “Taxi-OFF-
Pulse” rocker switch. When switched to “Pulse”, a flasher unit (mounted under the pilot’s feet at
FS 108.00) is engaged and the taxi lights illuminate alternately at about 55 pulses per minute.
4H7 33-40-00 FebPAGE 5

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 6
Feb 28/07 33-40-00 4H8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4H9 33-40-00 FebPAGE 7

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GRIDS 4H10 THRU 4L24

INTENTIONALLY BLANK
PAGE 8
Feb 28/07 33-40-00 4H10
CARD 5 OF 9
PA-46-350P
(S/N’s 4636001 AND UP)

5A1
Published by

2926 Piper Drive
U.S.A.
Member
General Aviation
5A2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
are as follows:
ORG950712 June 19, 1996 All

PR980101 January 1, 1998 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6
CR981223 December 23, 1998 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6
PR000201 February 1, 2000 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6
PR010515 May 15, 2001 1
CR050730 July 30, 2005 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8
PR060207 February 7, 2006 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8
CR070228* February 28, 2007 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 and 9

02/28/07.
manual.

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 1
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTRODUCTION
CHAPTER CHAPTER


2 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07
5 Feb 28/07
6 Feb 28/07
7 Feb 28/07
8 Feb 28/07
9 Feb 28/07
10 Feb 28/07
11 Feb 28/07
12 Feb 28/07
13 Feb 28/07
14 Feb 28/07
15 Feb 28/07
16 Feb 28/07
Index 1 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07
5 Feb 28/07
6 Feb 28/07
7 Feb 28/07
8 Feb 28/07
9 Feb 28/07
10 Feb 28/07

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTRODUCTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION
General 1 5A9
Effectivity 2 5A10
Pagination 3 5A11
Indexing 3 5A11
INDEX
Index 1 5B1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTRODUCTION

(5-20-00).
2. General
airplane.
correspondence.

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. Effectivity
1995 4636001 thru 4636020 2004 4636349 thru 4636363

1996 4636021 thru 4636076 2005 4636364 thru 4636374
1997 4636077 thru 4636131 2006 4636375 thru 4636399
1998 4636132 thru 4636186 2007 4636400 and up
1999 4636187 thru 4636247
2000 4636248 thru 4636313
2002 4636299, and
4636314 thru 4636338
2003 4636339 thru 4636348

Example:
46 36 001

MODEL CODE

fuel system.
PIPER.
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6. Pagination
with Page 1 (i.e. - 28-40-00, Page 1).
different page.
Example.
9. Indexing
apply.

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Wylie, Texas 75098
P.O. Box 1404
(3) ALTERNATOR:
Airport Complex
P. O. Box 273
(4) AUTOFLIGHT:
Olathe, Kansas 66061-1950 PH: (940) 325-9406
PAGE 4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(5) BATTERY:
(6) BRAKES:
1160 Center Road
Avon, Ohio 44011
(330) 374-3743
FAX: (330) 374-2290
Black Standard
Pneumatic De-Icer
Installation,
Maintenance and
10 Ammon Drive FAX: - (603) 669-0931
or,
55 Old Bedford Road
Lincoln, MA 01773

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

14405 Keil Road NE
(10) ENGINE:
43 Magnolia Ave. #4
20 New King Street
711 Taylor Street
Elyria, Ohio 44036
2600 S. Custer
Wichita, Kansas
(See Brakes, above)
or,
4520 Hampton Rd. FAX: (336) 766-9040
Clemmons, NC 27012
PAGE 6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

2600 Skypark Drive
(18) MAGNETOS:
7575 Baymeadows Way
Olathe, KS 66062
(20) OXYGEN SYSTEM:
2225 Erie Street
Torrance, CA 90504

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Piqua, OH 45356-2634
Propeller
Composite Blade
Propeller Owner’s
Aluminum Blade
Inspection, Repair,
P/N 006-05332-0001
2275 Stanley Ave. FAX: (937) 229-8531
Dayton, Ohio 45404
(26) STARTER:
or,
Granbury, TX 76048
(27) TURBOCHARGER:
Torrance, CA 90505
PAGE 8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(28) VACUUM PUMP:


Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
00 General
10 Time Limits
00 General
10 Jacking

20 Leveling
00 General
10 Towing
20 Taxiing
10 Parking
20 Mooring

12 SERVICING 1I3
00 General
10 Replenishing

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
00 General
20 Painting
00 General
20 Distribution
40 Heating
50 Cooling
22 AUTOFLIGHT 2F11
10 Autopilot
00 General
00 General
30 DC Generation
40 External Power
60 Emergency
20 Extinguishing
00 General
10 Aileron and Tab
20 Rudder and Tab
30 Elevator and Tab
50 Flaps
60 Speedbrakes
PAGE 12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
28 FUEL 3F9
00 General
10 Storage
20 Distribution
40 Indicating
00 General
10 Main
00 General
10 Airfoil
30 Pitot and Static
00 General
50 Steering
33 LIGHTS 4G5
40 Exterior
34 NAVIGATION 5C1
00 General
35 OXYGEN 6C1
10 Crew
20 Passenger

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
37 VACUUM 6C15
00 General
10 Distribution
20 Indicating

51 STRUCTURES 6F1
00 General
70 Repairs
52 DOORS 6G13
10 Passenger/Crew
20 Emergency Exit
30 Cargo
55 STABILIZERS 6H13
00 General
20 Elevator
40 Rudder
56 WINDOWS 6I19
00 General
20 Cabin
30 Door
57 WINGS 6K5
40 Attach Fittings
50 Flight Surfaces
61 PROPELLERS 7C1
20 Controlling
00 General
PAGE 14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
71 POWER PLANT 7D5
00 General
10 Cowling
20 Mounts
70 Engine Drains
10 Distribution
30 Indicating
74 IGNITION 7F5

20 Distribution
10 Power Control
10 Power
20 Temperature
79 OIL 7J3
20 Distribution
30 Indicating
80 STARTING 7J15
10 Cranking
81 TURBINES 7K9
10 Charts


Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

1E23
Ailerons
Balancing: 6L9
Control Column
Installation: 3C24
Control System
Aileron - Rudder
Interconnect: 3D7
Control Cables: 3D2
Installation: 3D3
Wiring: 4C8 4F6
Corrosion Control
Control Wheel C
Wing: 6L3
Installation: 3C21
Installation: 6L7
Tab: 3D5
2D22
Compressor: 2E22
Dipstick: 2E23
Oil Level: 2F1
2E22
Slip Torque: 2F1
Servicing: 2D23
Ambient Temperature
Indication: 2E14
Stand: 2E7
5B1 INDEX FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 INDEX 5B2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

OAT: 9I13 2H19 7J11
5B3 INDEX FebPAGE 3

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Flaps
G Inspection
Warning 6I11
1K5 System: 6C9
PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 INDEX 5B4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Forward: 4H1
5B5 INDEX FebPAGE 5

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
P Propeller Rudder
Pagination: A11
7C11 Control System
Parking: 1G15
Piper
Repair: 7C11 3D13
Pitch Servo: 2G12
Rings: 3K10
Measuring: 3K3
5C11
Installation: 5C12
Pitot Head: 5C18
3K7 Seats
Test: 5C11
Placards: 1G23
Exterior: 1H1
Interior: 1H9
Components: 3I11
R System: 3J9
Limits: 3J4
PAGE 6
Feb 28/07 INDEX 5B6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

5B7 INDEX FebPAGE 7

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Filter: 6D3 Wing
Vertical Fin: 6I11
Y
Yaw Servo: 2G10
W
A11
Weather Radar: 5F1
Weighing: 1F15
Wheels
Bearing Cup: 4F4
Repairs: 4F3
PAGE 8
Feb 28/07 INDEX 5B8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
5B9 INDEX FebPAGE 9

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

INTENTIONALLY BLANK
PAGE 10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER
34
NAVIGATION
5C1
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
5C2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 34
CHAPTER CHAPTER
34-List of 1 Feb 28/07 34-20-00 (cont) 16 Feb 28/07

18 Feb 28/07
2 Feb 28/07 20 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07 21 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07 22 Feb 28/07
23 Feb 28/07
34-00-00 1 Feb 28/07 24 Feb 28/07
2 Feb 28/07 25 Feb 28/07
26 Feb 28/07
34-10-00 1 Feb 28/07 27 Feb 28/07
2 Feb 28/07 28 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07 29 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07 30 Feb 28/07
5 Feb 28/07 31 Feb 28/07
6 Feb 28/07 32 Feb 28/07
7 Feb 28/07 33 Feb 28/07
8 Feb 28/07 34 Feb 28/07
9 Feb 28/07 35 Feb 28/07
10 Feb 28/07 36 Feb 28/07
11 Feb 28/07 37 Feb 28/07
12 Feb 28/07 38 Feb 28/07
13 Feb 28/07 39 Feb 28/07
14 Feb 28/07 40 Feb 28/07
15 Feb 28/07 41 Feb 28/07
16 Feb 28/07 42 Feb 28/07
17 Feb 28/07 43 Feb 28/07
18 Feb 28/07 44 Feb 28/07
34-20-00 1 Feb 28/07 34-40-00 1 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07 2 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07 3 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07 4 Feb 28/07
5 Feb 28/07
6 Feb 28/07 34-50-00 1 Feb 28/07
7 Feb 28/07 2 Feb 28/07
8 Feb 28/07 3 Feb 28/07
9 Feb 28/07 4 Feb 28/07
10 Feb 28/07 5 Feb 28/07
11 Feb 28/07 6 Feb 28/07
12 Feb 28/07 7 Feb 28/07
13 Feb 28/07 8 Feb 28/07
14 Feb 28/07 9 Feb 28/07
15 Feb 28/07 10 Feb 28/07

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 34 - NAVIGATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
GENERAL 34-00-00 1 5C9

1995 thru 2005 (S/N’s 4636001 thru 4636374.) 1 5C9
2006 and up (S/N’s 4636375 and up.) 1 5C9
FLIGHT ENVIRONMENT DATA 34-10-00 1 5C11

Pitot and Static Systems 1 5C11
Test 1 5C11
Pitot Head 8 5C18
Removal 8 5C18
Installation 8 5C18
Heaters Test 8 5C18
Vertical Speed Indicator 8 5C18
Removal and Installation 8 5C18
Altimeter 9 5C20
Airspeed Indicator 12 5C22
Outside Air Temperature (OAT) 13 5C23
S/N’s 4636021 thru 4636020 13 5C23
Removal 13 5C23
Installation 14 5C24
S/N’s 4636021 thru 4636374 14 5C24
S/N’s 4636375 and up 14 5C24
ATTITUDE & DIRECTION 34-20-00 1 5D5

Attitude Indicator 1 5D5
Removal and Installation 1 5D5
Standby Attitude Indicator 2 5D6
Emergency Power Supply 2 5D6
Horizontal Situation Indicator or Electronic Horizontal Situation Indicator 4 5D8
Air Driven Heading Indicator 5 5D9
5C5 34 - CONTENTS PAGE 1

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ATTITUDE & DIRECTION (continued) 34-20-00

EFIS 6 5D10
Meggitt EFIS 6 5D10
Electronic Attitude Director Indicator (EADI) (i.e. - PFD) 6 5D10
Basic Functional Test 6 5D10
Electronic Horizontal Situation Indicator (EHSI) (i.e. - ND) 10 5D14
Basic Functional Test 10 5D14
Air Data and Attitude Heading Reference System (ADAHRS) 17 5D21
Magnetic Heading Compensation/Calibration 17 5D21
Ground Test Procedure 17 5D21
Avidyne Entegra EFIS 18 5D22
Description 18 5D22
Maintenance 18 5D22
Component Locator 23 5E3
Magnetic Heading Systems - S/N’s 4636160, and 4636248 thru 4636374 26 5E6
Flux Detector 26 5E6
Removal 26 5E6
Installation 26 5E6
Magnetic Heading Compensation / Calibration 26 5E6
Standard Installation 26 5E6
Optional Meggitt EFIS Installation 30 5E10
Magnetic Heading Systems - S/N’s 4636375 and up 34 5E14
Magnetometer/OAT (MAG/OAT) Assemblies 34 5E14
Removal 34 5E14
Calibration 36 5E16
Magnetic Compass 38 5E18
Adjustment 38 5E18
Turn Coordinator 40 5E20
Removal and Installation 40 5E20
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INDEPENDENT POSITION DETERMINING 34-40-00
Color Weather Radar 1 5F1

Removal 2 5F2
Installation 2 5F2
Self-Test 2 5F2
DEPENDENT POSITION DETERMINING 34-50-00
COM/NAV/GPS (GNS 430/530) 1 5F5

Maintenance 1 5F5
Removal and Installation 1 5F5
Post Installation Lighting Setup 1 5F5
Post Installation Setup Procedure 1 5F5
Transponder 5 5F9
S/N’s 4636299, and 4636314 thru 4636348 5 5F9
S/N’s 4636349 and up 5 5F9
Post Installation Setup Procedure 6 5F10
5C7 34 - CONTENTS PAGE 3

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GENERAL
1. 1995 thru 2005 (S/N’s 4636001 thru 4636374.)

A. Standard
Traditional 3.25 inch flight instruments are installed as standard equipment. These instruments are
face mounted, see 39-10-00 for removal and installation.
B. Optional (S/N’s 4636333 thru 4636374; and 4636299 only.)
The Meggitt Avionics next Generation Integrated Cockpit (MAGIC) Electronic Flight Instrument
System (EFIS) is available as an option on the pilot’s side only. When installed, it’s the primary flight
and navigation instrumentation. The MAGIC EFIS consists of three primary components:
(1) Primary Flight Display (PFD) [i.e. - Electronic Attitude Director Indicator (EADI)],
(2) Navigation Display (NAV) [i.e. - Electronic Horizontal Situation Indicator (EHSI)], and
(3) Air Data & Attitude Heading Reference System (ADAHRS) [i.e. - Attitude Heading Reference
System (AHRS)].
AIRCRAFT, MAY RENDER THE AIRCRAFT UNAIRWORTHY. (SEE INTRODUCTION
- SUPPLEMENTARY PUBLICATIONS.)
Line maintenance of this system is limited to basic troubleshooting and that is addressed in 34-20-00.
2. 2006 and up (S/N’s 4636375 and up.)
The Avidyne FlightMax Entegra Electronic Flight Instrument System (EFIS) is installed as standard
equipment.
This system uses three large 10.4-inch diagonal, high-resolution, sunlight-readable full color displays
(PFD and MFD), to provide standard flight instrumentation including attitude direction indicator (EADI),
horizontal situation indicator (EHSI), altitude, airspeed, vertical speed, moving map, weather, terrain and
traffic data, as well as all engine instrumentation. Two-inch standby flight instruments (i.e. - airspeed,
electric attitude indicator, and altimeter) provide redundancy. (See 34-20-00, Figure 2.)
The EFIS installation consists of the following components: pilot and co-pilot Primary Flight Displays
(PFD’s); a single Multifunction Display (MFD); Data Acquisition Unit (DAU), and associated sensors; and
two Magnetometer/OAT Sensor Assemblies.
PUBLICATIONS.)
Line maintenance of this system is limited to basic troubleshooting and that is addressed in 34-20-00.
See 77-40-00 for additional info on the Data Acquisition Unit (DAU).
5C9 34-00-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 34-00-00 5C10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FLIGHT ENVIRONMENT DATA
The instrument air system consists of pitot air and static air sources. The system supplies both pitot and
static air pressure for the airspeed indicator, and static pressure for the altimeter, vertical speed
indicator, and the triple indicator (cabin pressure differential, vertical speed, and altitude). When
installed, pitot and static air pressure is also provided for either the Meggitt EFIS or Avidyne Entegra
EFIS Air Data and Attitude Heading Reference System (ADAHRS).
1. Pitot and Static Systems
The pitot air system consists of pitot mast (located on the underside of the left wing, Avidyne
installations include pitot mast locations on the underside of both the left and right wing) with its
related plumbing. Impact air pressure entering the pitot tube is transmitted from the pitot inlet,
through hose and tubing, routed through the wing to the airspeed indicator(s), located on the
instrument panel; and, if installed, to the ADAHRS unit located on the aft equipment shelf (Meggitt)
or in each PFD (Avidyne). A partially or completely blocked pitot head will give erratic, erroneous, or
zero reading on the instruments.
The static air source consists of either two static ports, one on each side of the fuselage
(S/N’s 4636001 thru 4636374) or four static ports, two on each side of the fuselage (S/N’s 4636375
and up) aft of F.S. 265.80. The static air system is connected to the airspeed indicator(s),
altimeter(s), vertical speed indicator and the triple indicator (cabin pressure differential, vertical
speed, and altitude), located on the instrument panel; and, if installed, to the ADAHRS unit located
on the aft equipment shelf (Meggitt) or in each PFD (Avidyne); by means of hose and tubing routed
through the fuselage. In the event the primary static source becomes blocked, the system
incorporates an external alternate static port located on the bottom of the fuselage aft of
F.S. 241.50. A shutoff valve, located below the instrument panel to the left of the pilot, opens or
closes the alternate static port as required. A placard giving instructions for use of alternate static
pressure, is located on the instrument panel or pilot’s window frame.
WARNING: DO NOT ATTEMPT TO DRAIN STATIC SYSTEM DURING PRESSURIZED FLIGHT.
If one or more of the pitot static instruments malfunction, the system should be checked for dirt,
leaks or moisture. A partially or completely blocked pitot head will give erratic, erroneous, or zero
reading on the instruments. Pitot and static lines can be drained through the drain valve located on
the left lower side of the fuselage interior.
The holes in the sensors for pitot and static pressure must be fully open and free from blockage.
Blocked sensor holes will give erratic or zero readings on the instruments.
The heated pitot head(s) is(are) standard equipment. The pitot heat switch is located on the right
overhead switch panel. Static source pads have been demonstrated to be non-icing; however, in the
event that icing does occur, selecting the alternate static source will alleviate the problem.
B. Troubleshooting
See Chart 1. With the optional Meggitt EFIS installation, see also, Appendix 1 (grid 5K19).
C. Test (PIR-PPS 60035, Rev. M / FTP2001-8, Rev. E.)
This test requires a pitot/static test fixture (i.e. - Aerosonic Air Data Test Set - Model 90000-0168,
Barfield P/N 101-00164, or equivalent) and calibrated air source (i.e. - airspeed simulator) and
should be performed at any time an instrument, fitting, line, pitot head, or static button is
disconnected. The test should be performed prior to the next flight.
NOTE: Ensure the lines and fittings are free of any entrapped moisture or restrictions.
5C11 34-10-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Effectivity Pitot-Static System Installation

PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 34-10-00 5C12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Pitot-Static System Installation Effectivity

Figure 1 (Sheet 2 of 3) with Meggitt EFIS Option
5C13 34-10-00 FebPAGE 3

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PFD #2 STANDBY
PFD #1 AIRSPEED
INDICATOR
(REF.)
PITOT LINE STANDBY

ALTIMETER
(REF.)
STATIC LINE
STATIC LINE
PITOT LINE
CABIN PRESSURIZATION (TRIPLE) INDICATOR (REF.)
AIRSPEED
ALTIMETER
PFD #1 PFD #2
CPI / TRI
DRAIN
DRAIN STATIC SOURCE

SELECTOR VALVE
DRAIN
DRAIN
LH PITOT RH PITOT
DRAIN
ALT STATIC
PFD #1
PRI STATIC PRI STATIC
PFD #1 PFD #1
STATIC AUTOPILOT STATIC

PFD #2 TRANSDUCER PFD #2
105135 G
Effectivity Pitot-Static System Installation

PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 34-10-00 5C14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 1
TROUBLESHOOTING PITOT AND STATIC SYSTEMS
Heating element inoperative. Defective switch. Replace the switch.
Grounded or open circuit. Check for continuity
and repair.
Defective heating element Replace the
in pitot head. pitot-static mast.
Circuit breaker keeps tripping. Grounded wire. Check for continuity
and repair.
Instruments inoperative or Lines clogged. Disconnect lines at
erratic in operation. instruments and blow out
with low pressure air.
Line leaks. Check lines for loose
connections at all
connection points.
NOTE: If any connections in the static system are opened for maintenance, the entire system must be
rechecked per FAR 23.1325. With optional Meggitt EFIS installation, see Appendix 1 (grid 5K19).
(1) Attach the test fixture to the pitot head. Align the holes in the fixture with the holes in the head.
(2) Attach the airspeed simulator hose to the pitot (pressure) port of the fixture.
(3) When equipped with the optional Meggitt EFIS, turn ON the PFD (i.e. - EADI).
(4) When equipped with the Avidyne Entegra, turn ON both PFD’s.
(5) Operate the simulator to obtain a reading of 75 knots on the airplane airspeed indicator(s).
(6) Check that the airspeed indicator needles follow in the same direction as the simulator
airspeed indicator needle.
(7) Raise airspeed to 198 knots and wait 15 seconds to allow the airplane airspeed indicators to
stabilize.
(8) Observe the simulator and airplane airspeed indicators for 15 seconds. If a leak is present, the
indicator needles will move toward zero.
(9) If a leak is present, check the fixture installation, hose connections, and pitot system lines and
fittings. Repair the leak when found, then repeat steps (1) - (8), above.
(10) In S/N’s 4636001 thru 4636374 with standard instrumentation, operate the simulator to indicate
140 knots on the airspeed indicators. Verify that the airspeed indicators show within three (3)
knots of the simulator indication.
(11) When equipped with the optional Meggitt EFIS:
(a) Operate the simulator to indicate 140 knots on the PFD. Verify that the airspeed indicators
show within three (3) knots of the simulator indication on the PFD.
(b) Operate the simulator until the overspeed aural alarm first sounds. Verify that the
simulator indicates an airspeed of 198 to 204 knots.
5C15 34-10-00 FebPAGE 5

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B B
VIEW B - B
MAST
ASSEMBLY
A A
ELECTRICAL
CONNECTOR PINS
DRAIN
HOLE
PART
NUMBER
MARKED "TOP"
VIEW A - A
“L” Shaped Pitot Tube Installation
Figure 2
PAGE 6
Feb 28/07 34-10-00 5C16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(c) Increase the simulator airspeed indication to 210 knots.

(d) Decrease the simulator airspeed indication until the overspeed aural alarm first stops.
Verify that the simulator indicates an airspeed of less than 198 knots.
(e) Turn OFF the PFD (i.e. - EADI).
(12) When equipped with the Avidyne Entegra EFIS:
(a) Turn OFF the copilot’s PFD.
(b) Operate the simulator to indicate 140 knots on the pilot’s PFD. Verify that the pilot’s PFD
indicates within three (3) knots of the simulator indication.
(c) Turn OFF the pilot’s PFD and turn ON the copilot’s PFD.
(d) Repeat step (b) for the copilot’s PFD and for the standby airspeed indicator.
(e) Turn ON the pilot’s PFD and turn OFF the copilot’s PFD.
(f) Operate the simulator until the overspeed aural alarm first sounds. Verify that the
simulator indicates an airspeed of 198 to 204 knots.
(g) Increase the simulator airspeed indication to 210 knots.
(h) Decrease the simulator airspeed indication until the overspeed aural alarm first stops.
Verify that the simulator indicates an airspeed of less than 198 knots.
(i) Turn OFF the pilot’s PFD and turn ON the copilot’s PFD.
(i) Repeat steps (f) - (h).
(13) Remove the test fixture from the pitot head.
(14) Attach static test fixture to the static port and pitot test port of the aircraft. Tape over the other
static button.
(15) When equipped with the optional Meggitt EFIS, turn ON the PFD (i.e. - EADI).
(16) When equipped with the Avidyne Entegra, turn ON the Pilot’s PFD.
(17) Set the aircraft altimeter needles to read zero altitude. Operate the static simulator to cause the
aircraft altimeter needles to read 1,000 feet altitude. Momentarily open the alternate static port.
There should be a decrease in altimeter indication. If no change occurs the system is blocked
and must be repaired prior to further testing.
(18) Increase altitude to 1,050 feet.
(19) Check that the aircraft altimeter shows an increase.
(20) Observe the aircraft altimeter. Loss of indicated altitude shall not exceed 100 feet in one
minute.
(21) Increase altitude to 12,700 feet.
(22) Check that the aircraft altimeter shows an increase.
(23) Observe the aircraft altimeter. Loss of indicated altitude shall not exceed 254 feet in one
minute.
(24) If a leak exceeds the tolerances in step (18) or (21), check the fixture installation, plumbing and
fittings. Repair the leak when found and repeat the static system checks above.
(25) When equipped with the optional Meggitt EFIS, turn OFF the PFD (i.e. - EADI).
(26) When equipped with the Avidyne Entegra, turn OFF the Pilot’s PFD and turn ON the copilot’s
PFD. Repeat steps (17) thru (24) for copilot’s PFD.
(27) Remove the test fixture and tape from the static button.
5C17 34-10-00 FebPAGE 7

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2. Pitot Head (See Figure 2.)

In S/N’s 4636001 thru 4636374, the pitot head is located on the underside of the left wing.
In S/N’s 4636375 and up, a pitot head is located on the underside of each wing.
A. Removal
(1) Remove the four screws which secure the pitot tube to the mast assembly.
(2) Carefully pull the pitot tube from the mast assembly.
(3) Remove the hose from the elbow on top of the pitot tube.
(4) Disconnect the electrical leads at the connector.
B. Installation
(1) Reconnect the electrical leads to the heating elements.
(2) Install the pitot tube into the mast assembly.
(3) Secure the pitot tube to the mast assembly with the four screws.
(4) Reconnect the electrical leads to the gauge.
C. Heaters Test
(1) Remove the pitot head from mast assembly and the wing.
(2) With one of the test leads connected to one of the terminals of the head, ground the other lead
to the metal body of the head assembly. There should be no continuity.
(3) Reinstall the pitot head into the mast assembly and the wing.
3. Vertical Speed Indicator
NOTE: With the Avidyne Entegra EFIS installed, this function is performed by the PFD’s.
The Vertical Speed indicator measures the rate of change in static pressure when the airplane is
climbing or descending. By means of a pointer and dial this instrument will indicate a rate of ascent or
descent of the airplane in feet per minute. But due to the lag of the instrument, the aircraft will be
climbing or descending before the instrument starts to read and the instrument will continue to read after
the aircraft has assumed level flight. This lag should not be considered a malfunction when operating in
turbulent (rough) air.
A. Troubleshooting
See Chart 2.
B. Removal and Installation
See 39-10-00, Face Mounted Instruments - Removal and Installation.
PAGE 8
Feb 28/07 34-10-00 5C18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 2
TROUBLESHOOTING VERTICAL SPEED INDICATOR
Pointer does not set on zero. Aging of diaphragm. Reset pointer to zero by
means of setting screw. Tap
instrument while resetting.
Pointer fails to respond. Obstruction in static line. Disconnect all instruments
connected to the static line.
Clear line.
Pitot head frozen over. Apply pitot heat.
Water in static line. Check individual
instruments for obstruction
in lines.
Obstruction in pitot head. Clean lines and head.
Pointer oscillates when not. Leak in static lines. Disconnect all instruments
operating in turbulent air. connected to the static line.
Check individual
instruments for leaks.
Reconnect instruments to
static line and test
installation for leaks.
Defective mechanism. Replace instrument.
Vertical Speed indicates when Water in static line. Disconnect static lines and
aircraft is banked. blow out lines from cockpit
out to static ports.
Pointer has to be set before Temperature compensator Replace instrument.
every flight. inoperative.
Pointer cannot be reset to zero. Diaphragm distorted. Replace instrument.
Instrument reads very low Case of instrument broken or Replace instrument.
during climb or descent. leaking.
5C19 34-10-00 FebPAGE 9

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4. Altimeter
The altimeter uses pressure differential to indicate altitude in feet. When the barometric pressure scale
on the instrument is set to the current altimeter setting, the altimeter will indicate altitude, in feet, above
sea level. The indicator has three pointers and a dial scale; the long pointer is read in hundreds of feet,
the middle pointer in thousands of feet and the short pointer in tens of thousands of feet. A window in the
lower center of the dial face contains a "barber pole" design to show when the airplane is below 10,000
feet. As the airplane climbs, the barber pole design progressively disappears until, when at or above
10,000 feet, the window is blank. The barometric pressure window, located on the right side of the
indicator dial, is set by the knob located on the lower left corner of the instrument. The altimeter consists
of a sealed aneroid (diaphragm) that is connected to the pointers through a mechanical linkage. The
instrument case is vented to the static air system and as static air pressure decreases, the aneroid
expands, causing the pointers to move through the mechanical linkage.
A. Troubleshooting
See Chart 3.
PAGE 10
Feb 28/07 34-10-00 5C20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 3
TROUBLESHOOTING ALTIMETER
Excessive scale error. Improper calibration adjustment. Replace instrument.
Excessive pointer oscillation. Defective mechanism. Replace instrument.
High or low reading. Improper venting. Eliminate leak in static
pressure system and check
alignment of airspeed tube.
Setting knob is hard to turn. Wrong lubrication or lack of Replace instrument.
lubrication.
Inner reference marker fails to Out of engagement. Replace instrument.
move when setting knob is
rotated .
Setting knob set screw loose or Not tight when altimeter was Tighten instrument screw, if
missing. reset. loose. Replace instrument,
if screw is missing.
Cracked or loose cover glass. Case gasket hardened. Replace instrument.
Dull or discolored markings. Age.
Barometric scale and reference Slippage of mating parts. Replace instrument.
markers out of synchronism.
Barometric scale and reference Drift in mechanism. Refer to the latest revision
markers out of synchronism of AC 43.13-1.
with pointers.
Altimeter sticks at altitude or Water or restriction in static Remove static lines from all
does not change with change of line. instruments, blow line clear
altitude. from cockpit to static ports.
Altimeter changes reading Water in static line. Remove static lines from all
as aircraft is banked. instruments, and blow line
clear from cockpit to static
ports.
Altimeter requires resetting Temperature compensator Change instrument.
frequently. inoperative.
5C21 34-10-00 Feb

PAGE 11
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
5. Airspeed Indicator
The airspeed indicator provides a means of indicating the speed of the airplane passing through the air.
The airspeed indication is the differential pressure reading between pitot air to pressure and static air
pressure. This instrument has the diaphragm vented to the pitot air source, and the case is vented to the
static air system. As the airplane increases speed, the pitot air pressure increases, causing the
diaphragm to expand. A mechanical linkage picks up this motion and moves the instrument pointer to the
indicated speed. The instrument dial is calibrated in knots, and also has the necessary operating range
markings for safe operation of the airplane.
A. Troubleshooting
See Chart 4.
CHART 4
TROUBLESHOOTING AIRSPEED TUBES AND INDICATOR
Pointers on instruments stick Leak in instrument case or Check for leak and seal.
or do not indicate properly. in pitot lines.
Pointer of instrument Defective mechanism. Replace instrument.
oscillates.
Instrument reads high. Pointer not on zero. Replace instrument.
Leaking static system. Find leak and correct.
Instrument reads low. Pointer not on zero. Replace instrument.
Leaking static system. Find leak and correct.
Pitot head not aligned Realign pitot head.
correctly.
Airspeed changes as aircraft Water in pitot line. Remove lines from static
is banked. instruments and blow out
lines from cockpit to pitot
head.
PAGE 12
Feb 28/07 34-10-00 5C22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6. Outside Air Temperature (OAT)

A. S/N’s 4636001 thru 4636020
The OAT indicator is located just forward of the pilot’s side window at F.S. 122.30 (see Figure 3).
The probe of the direct reading gauge screws into a bracket and protrudes through the airplane’s
skin.
(1) Removal
(a) Disconnect the electrical leads from the gauge.
(b) Turn the gauge counterclockwise to screw it out of the sunshield. It may be necessary to
have an assistant hold the sunshield to prevent it from turning with the gauge.
(c) Remove the gauge, washers, and rubber grommet from inside the airplane.
(d) Remove the sunshield and lock washer from outside the airplane.
Outside Air Temperature Indicator Effectivity

Figure 3 4636001 thru 4636020
5C23 34-10-00 Feb

PAGE 13
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(2) Installation
(a) Place the two washers and rubber grommet over the stem of the gauge.
(b) Slide the gauge into its support bracket in the airplane.
(c) Slide the lock washer and sunshield over the stem of the gauge (from the outside).
(d) Screw the gauge clockwise into the sunshield.
(e) Reconnect the electrical leads to the gauge.
B. S/N’s 4636021 thru 4636374
A remote OAT probe is located on the underside of the right wing:
- mounted to a cover plate at W.S. 86.50 in S/N’s 4636021 thru 4636369; and,
- mounted in the wing skin at W.S. 244.3 in S/N’s 4636370 thru 4636374.
OAT measurement is accomplished by an OAT sensor and the Transicoil Electronic Module
Instrument System (EMIS). See 77-40-00 for more information.
C. S/N’s 4636375 and up
A remote OAT probe is located on the underside of the right wing at W.S. 244.3.
The Data Acquisition Unit (DAU) collects the OAT sensor data and sends it to the Primary Flight
Displays (PFD’s) and the Multifunction Display (MFD).
Effectivity OAT Probe Installation

PAGE 14
Feb 28/07 34-10-00 5C24
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
5D1 34-10-00 Feb

PAGE 15
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 16
Feb 28/07 34-10-00 5D2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
5D3 34-10-00 Feb

PAGE 17
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 18
Feb 28/07 34-10-00 5D4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ATTITUDE & DIRECTION
1. Attitude Indicator
The Attitude Indicator is essentially an air driven gyroscope rotating in a horizontal plane and is operated
on the principal of rigidity in space. Due to the gyroscopic inertia, the spin axis continues to point in the
near vertical direction, providing a constant visual reference to the attitude of the airplane relative to
pitch and roll axis. A bar across the face of the indicator represents the horizon, and aligning the
miniature airplane to the horizon bar simulates the alignment of the airplane to the actual horizon. Any
deviation simulates the deviation of the airplane from the true horizon. The Attitude Indicator is marked
for different degrees of bank.
A. Troubleshooting
See Chart 1.
CHART 1
TROUBLESHOOTING ATTITUDE INDICATOR
Bar fails to respond. Insufficient vacuum. Check pump and tubing.
Vacuum System Filter dirty. Clean or replace filter.
Bar does not settle. Insufficient vacuum. Check line and pump.
Adjust valve.
Incorrect instrument. Check part number.
Defective instrument. Replace.
Bar oscillates or shimmies Instrument loose in panel. Tighten mounting screws.
continuously.
Vacuum too high. Adjust valve.
Instrument does not indicate Instrument not level in Loosen screws and level
level flight. panel. instrument.
Aircraft out of trim. Trim aircraft.
Bar high after 180° Normal, if it does not Self correcting.
turn. exceed 1/16th inch.
Instrument tumbles in Low vacuum. Reset regulator.
flight.
Dirty Vacuum System filter. Clean or replace filter.
Line to filter restricted. Replace line.
Plug missing or loose in Replace or tighten plug.
instrument.
5D5 34-20-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2. Standby Attitude Indicator

In S/N’s 4636375 & up, an electric standby attitude indicator is installed to the left of the pilot’s Primary
Flight Display (PFD).
Other than removing and replacing the unit itself (see 39-10-00), the only line replaceable part is the
emergency power battery which is located in the aft section of the radar pod.
A. Troubleshooting
See Chart 2.
CHART 2
TROUBLESHOOTING STANDBY ATTITUDE INDICATOR
Bar fails to respond. No power. Check power.
Faulty instrument. Check/replace instrument.

Bar does not settle. Incorrect instrument. Check part number.
Defective instrument. Replace.
Bar oscillates or shimmies Instrument loose in panel. Tighten mounting screws.
continuously.
Instrument does not indicate Instrument not level in Loosen screws and level
level flight. panel. instrument.
Aircraft out of trim. Trim aircraft.
Bar high after 180° Normal, if it does not Self correcting.
turn. exceed 1/16th inch.
C. Emergency Power Supply

A 24Vdc battery operated power supply (i.e. - B.F. Goodrich PS-834A) is installed in the aft radar
pod compartment to provide emergency power for the standby attitude indicator. The unit is
connected to the main electrical bus and its sealed lead-acid cells are automatically charged and
recharged by its built-in charging system.
(1) System Test.
The power supply may be tested locally using its integral test switch and light, or, remotely,
using the annunciator (i.e. - STBY ATT IND TEST) and instrument panel mounted remote
switch (i.e. - Standby Gyro Test Switch).
In either case, place the switch in TEST position for a minimum of five (5) seconds. The test
light must remain illuminated the entire time. The built-in-test function checks for operation of
the up-converter with an internal load applied. During the built-in-test, the input power is
automatically switched off and then the voltage of the battery pack is compared to a
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 34-20-00 5D6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
temperature compensated reference. If the battery capacity is greater than 50% and the built-
in-test monitors are valid, a green “TEST” LED on the connector end of the unit and the remote
test lamp will remain on as long as the unit is in test mode.
While in the remote activated built-in-test mode, the 28 Vdc output will maintain 0.24 ± 0.1
Amp at 24 ± 0.2 Vdc for 4.0 ± 1.0 seconds. Six seconds after remote activation, the 28 Vdc
output will time-out and drop to 24 - 0.1, + 0.5 Vdc and less than 0.1 Amp.
If the test light fails to illuminate as required during the test, one or more of the following
conditions may exist:
1 the power supply batteries are less than 50% charged;
2 the test lamp is burned out; or,
3 the power supply unit is defective.
To determine which condition(s) exist(s), first check the test lamp and then proceed to the
Capacity Test, below.
(2) Capacity Test.
Each twelve months, verify the B.F. Goodrich PS-834A Emergency Power Supply battery
capacity as follows:
(a) Required Equipment
Power Supply - variable, 0-32 Vdc @ 6.0 amps continuous output.
Voltmeter - Fluke 8050A or equivalent
Load Resistors - 100.0 ohm ± 2%, 10.0 W (28.0 V load)
- 13.0 ohm (or equivalent) ± 2%, 5.0 W (5.0 V load)
(b) Procedure
1 Disconnect and remove power supply from radar pod.
2 Ground J1 pin E or F.
NOTE: Connect directly to the pin(s) or via a test harness equipped with a
MS3106F20-27S (or equivalent) connector.
3 Apply 28.0 ± 0.5 Vdc to J1 pin A for two (2) hours.
4 After two (2) hours, remove 28 Vdc input.
5 Apply 100.0 ohm ± 2%, 10.0 W, load resistor to J1 pin C.
6 Apply 13.0 ohm ± 2%, 5.0 W, load resistor to J1 pin H.
NOTE: The 13 ohm resistor can consist of two five (5) watt resistors whose series
ohm value is equal to 13 ohms.
7 Ground J1 pin I to turn unit ON.
8 Using the voltmeter:
a Monitor the output voltage from J1 pin C for a minimum of 45 minutes. Voltage
must be 24.0 ± 1.0 Vdc for at least 45 minutes after the load is applied.
b Check the output voltage from J1 pin H. Verify 5.0 ± 0.3 Vdc.
9 If the unit meets the standards in step 8, proceed to step 10. If the unit fails the
standards in step 8, replace it.
10 Disconnect all loads (i.e. - J1 pin C and J1 pin H) and the ground from J1 pin I.
11 Repeat step 3. When the unit is fully charged, disconnect it from the test set-up and
reinstall it.
5D7 34-20-00 FebPAGE 3

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI) or Electronic Horizontal Situation Indicator (EHSI)

The HSI or EHSI, which combines pictorial VOR/ILS Localizer indications with an electrical heading
indicator, is the pilot's primary heading indicator. The gyro is not in the instrument case, but is located on
the accessory shelf in the tail section of the airplane. The gyro is slaved to the earth's magnetic field
through a flux detector (i.e. - flux gate compass) installed in the leading edge of the vertical stabilizer.
Should the slaving mechanism become inoperative, the heading gyro can be deslaved through a switch
on slave controlled unit mounted on the extreme upper left section of the pilot's instrument panel. Once
deslaved, the heading gyro becomes free running, making it susceptible to gyroscopic precession. The
compass control unit includes a spring loaded to OFF switch marked as CW (clockwise) or CCW
(counterclockwise), used to electrically drive the remote gyro to correct the heading indication for any
precession. The system is protected through the 3 amp COMPASS circuit breaker located on the
copilot's C/B panel
A. Troubleshooting
See Chart 3.
CHART 3
TROUBLESHOOTING ELECTRIC HEADING INDICATOR
Heading card "frozen" 3 amp COMPASS circuit Reset breaker, if open.
regardless if gyro is slaved breaker open.
or deslaved.
Faulty remote gyro unit. Replace gyro unit.
Break in wiring between remote Check and repair broken
gyro and instrument. wire(s).
Faulty Indicator (Instrument). Replace Indicator.
Heading card "frozen" or Bad flux detector. Replace flux detector.
erratic when slaved, but
works satisfactorily when Faulty remote gyro unit. Replace gyro unit.
deslaved.
Compass card erratic whether Faulty remote gyro unit. Replace gyro unit.
slaved or deslaved.
Faulty Indicator (Instrument). Replace Indicator.
When deslaved, compass card Faulty compass control unit. Replace compass control
will not respond to CW or CCW control unit.
commands.
Faulty remote gyro unit. Replace gyro unit.
PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 34-20-00 5D8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4. Air Driven Heading Indicator (i.e. - Directional Gyro)

The air driven heading indicator is offered as an option for the copilots navigation instrument package.
The air driven heading indicator is a flight instrument incorporating an air driven gyro stabilized in the
vertical plane. The gyro is rotated at high speed by lowering the pressure in the air tight case and
simultaneously allowing atmospheric air pressure to enter the instrument against the gyro buckets. Due
to gyroscopic inertia, the spin axis continues to point in the same direction, even though the aircraft yaws
to the right or left. This relative motion between the gyro and the instrument case is shown on the
instrument dial, which is equipped with a 360° compass card. The card, when set to agree with the
airplane's magnetic compass, provides a positive indication free from acceleration/deceleration and
turning errors. However, the heading indicator has no sense of direction, and must be set to the
magnetic compass. Since the magnetic compass is subject to errors due to magnetic fields, electric
instruments, etc, the directional gyro is only accurate for the heading it has been set for. If the gyro is set
on 270°, for instance, and the aircraft is turned to some other heading, there can be a large error
between the gyro and the magnetic compass due to the error in compass compensation. This will appear
as gyro precession. The gyro should frequently be checked precession. Due to internal friction, span axis
error, air turbulence and airflow, the gyro should be set at least every 15 minutes for accurate operation,
whether it has drifted or not.
A. Troubleshooting
See Chart 4.
CHART 4
TROUBLESHOOTING AIR DRIVEN HEADING INDICATOR
Excess drift in either Setting error. Review Directional Gyro (4).

direction.
Defective instrument. Replace instrument.
High or low vacuum. If
vacuum is not correct,
check for the following:
1. Relief valve improperly 1. Adjust.
adjusted.
2. Incorrect gauge reading. 2. Replace gauge.
3. Pump failure. 3. Repair or replace.
4. Vacuum line kinked or 4. Check and repair. Check
leaking. for collapsed inner wall
of hose.
Dial spins during turn. Limits (55° bank) of gimbal Recage gyro in level flight.
exceeded.
Dial spins continuously. Defective mechanism. Replace.
5D9 34-20-00 FebPAGE 5

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
5. EFIS
A. Meggitt Electronic Flight Instrument System (EFIS) - (Optional in S/N’s 4636349 thru 4636374.)
(1) Electronic Attitude Director Indicator (EADI) [i.e. - Meggitt MAGIC EFIS Primary Flight Display
(PFD)]
The Primary Flight Display (PFD) is a microprocessor-based color, liquid crystal (LCD) display
system. Information displayed includes Airspeed, Altitude, Attitude, Vertical Speed, Heading
and Instrument Landing System data. The information is conveyed via predefined display
formats. In addition, the PFD includes built-in test, performance and health monitoring
functions and display brightness control. The PFD provides Gillam Code Altitude Output for the
transponder (Mode C altitude).
AIRCRAFT, MAY RENDER THE AIRCRAFT UNAIRWORTHY. (SEE
INTRODUCTION - SUPPLEMENTARY PUBLICATIONS.)
Descriptions of the operator controls and basic operating modes and screens are in the
appropriate Pilot’s Operating Handbook Supplement.
(a) Troubleshooting
See Chart 5. See also Appendix 1 (grid 5K19).
(b) Basic Functional Test
CAUTION: IF, DURING THE FOLLOWING TEST, ANY COMPONENT DOES NOT
PRODUCE THE EXPECTED RESULTS, THAT COMPONENT MUST NOT
BE USED IN FLIGHT UNTIL THE PROBLEM IS CORRECTED.
1 Before applying power, verify proper voltage inputs and ground connections as well
as all system interfaces.
2 Start the PFD in Test Mode by pressing and holding the Baro Pushbutton while
applying power until the Initialization page is shown. Verify that the Initialization page
displays 'MIRAGE PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY' at the top of the screen and is
replaced by the Configuration Data page after approximately five (5) seconds.
3 Verify that the Configuration Data page Configuration Discrete Parity Status and
Power On Self Test results both show results of Pass. If the result is FAIL, further
diagnostic effort is required to determine if the failed indication is the result of
improper installation, a faulty PFD, or both.
4 Verify that the Configuration Data page displays the correct installation location
(primary or secondary).
5 Remove power from the PFD to terminate Test Mode. Re-apply power to the PFD
and start the display in Mission Operational Mode.
6 Verify that the PFD displays the Initialization page for approximately five (5) seconds
prior to displaying the PFD Screen Format. If power has not been applied to the
ADAHRS then the PFD screen format will be replaced by failure indications.
7 Apply power to the Air Data Attitude Heading Reference System (ADAHRS) (i.e. -
AHRS).
8 Verify that the PFD Screen Format is displayed (if the ADAHRS is performing
initialization then the ADAHRS Initialization screen will replace the attitude sphere). If
any of the failure indications are displayed refer to Chart 5.
PAGE 6
Feb 28/07 34-20-00 5D10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
9 Verify that the ADAHRS has completed initialization by observing that the attitude
sphere replaces the ADAHRS Initialization screen. If the ADAHRS has not completed
initialization within 180 seconds after application of power to the ADAHRS refer to
Chart 5.
10 Apply power to the Navigation Display (ND) (i.e. - EHSI).
11 If installed, apply power to the Radar Altimeter. Perform a functional test on the
Radar Altimeter system and verify that the PFD Rad Alt Indication and Decision
Height Annunciation are displayed correctly.
12 Apply power to the VOR radio. Perform a functional test on the VOR Radio system
and verify that the PFD Localizer/Glideslope and Backcourse/Localizer Sensing
Indications are displayed correctly.
13 Apply power to the Marker Beacon system. Perform a functional test on the Marker
Beacon system and verify that the PFD Marker Beacon indications are displayed
correctly.
14 Apply power to the Autopilot system. Place the Autopilot Master Switch in the Flight
Director position and verify that the flight director bars are displayed correctly.
15 Press the Baro pushbutton and verify that the barometric correction displays 'STD'.
Rotate the Baro Rotary Control clockwise and verify that the barometric correction
increases. Rotate the Baro Rotary Control counter-clockwise and verify that the
barometric correction decreases.
16 On the overhead switch panel, decrease the Panel LCD’s dimmer switch and verify
that the PFD brightness decreases.
17 On the overhead switch panel, increase the Panel LCD’s dimmer switch and verify
that the PFD brightness increases.
18 Press the EADI Display Down switch. Verify that the PFD screen blanks and that the
PFD screen format is displayed on the Navigation Display (ND) (i.e. - EHSI) .
19 Press the EADI Display Down switch again. Verify that the PFD screen format is
displayed on the PFD and that the PFD screen format is removed from the ND.
(c) Removal and Installation
See 39-10-00.
5D11 34-20-00 FebPAGE 7

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TROUBLESHOOTING EADI (i.e. - PFD)
No display visible at power up. +28 VDC power missing. Check wiring & bus voltage.
+28 VDC Return missing. Check wiring.
Failed PFD. Replace PFD.
EADI Display Down mode Check EADI Display Down
selected. switch.
Test mode visible at power up. Stuck Baro pushbutton. Check Baro pushbutton.
PFD failed self test. Replace PFD.
Display brightness does not 28 VDC lighting bus not Check wiring and 28 VDC
change when PFD brightness connected or not functional. lighting bus.
control operated.
Brightness control not functional. Check Brightness control.
Barometric correction does not PFD in test mode. Ensure PFD in mission
change when BARO Rotary operational mode.
control is rotated.
Barometric correction does not PFD in test mode. Ensure PFD in mission
change to standard setting when operational mode.
Baro pushbutton is pressed.
Unable to enter test mode when Airspeed equal to or greater Ensure airspeed is less
Baro pushbutton is pressed. than 40 knots detected. than 40 knots.
Unit not powered off before Ensure unit is powered off
Baro Pushbutton is pressed. before Baro Pushbutton is
pressed.
Baro Pushbutton pressed and Ensure Baro Pushbutton is
held for insufficient time. pressed and held until
initialization page displays.
Test page does not change when PFD in mission operational mode. Ensure PFD in test mode.
Baro Rotary Control is rotated.
Power on self test status on Failed PFD. Replace PFD.
Configuration Data page is
indicated as FAIL.
Configuration discrete parity Parity input (Configuration Check configuration
status on Configuration Data Discrete 7) not wired correctly. discrete setting.
page is indicated as FAIL.
Check wiring.
PAGE 8
Feb 28/07 34-20-00 5D12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Installation location on Configuration discretes 0 and 1 Check configuration
Configuration Data page incorrect. not wired correctly. discrete setting.
Check wiring.
ADAHRS initialization screen is ADAHRS not completing Perform ADAHRS test.
not removed from the display initialization.
after 3 minutes have elapsed
since ADAHRS power on.
Rad Alt indication and/or Failed Radar Altimeter. Perform Rad Alt test.
decision height annunciation
are not displayed correctly. Failed PFD. Replace PFD.
Localizer/Glideslope and/or Failed VOR radio. Perform VOR radio test.
Backcourse/Localizer sensing
indications not displayed correctly. Failed PFD. Replace PFD.
Marker beacon indications Failed marker beacon system. Perform marker beacon
not displayed correctly. system test.
Flight director bars not Failed Autopilot system. Perform Autopilot system
displayed correctly. test.
FD/AP switch Check FD/AP switch and
not functional/wired correctly. wiring.
Full Field Red, Green, Blue, Failed PFD. Replace PFD.
Black, and White pages are
not displayed correctly.
ND Interface Data page shows Failed PFD. Replace PFD.
valid data is not being transmitted.
ND Interface Data page shows RS422 Receive A and B lines Check wiring.
valid data is not being received. are not connected or are wired
incorrectly.
Failed ND. Replace ND.
ADAHRS Interface Data pages ARINC IN A and B lines are not Check wiring.
show valid data is not being connected or are wired incorrectly.
received.
Failed ADAHRS. Replace ADAHRS.
5D13 34-20-00 FebPAGE 9

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Selecting the EADI Display EADI Display Down switch not Check EADI Display Down
Down switch to EADI Display functional/wired correctly. switch and wiring.
Down does not remove
the PFD display. Failed PFD. Replace PFD.
PFD screen format not displayed EADI Display Down switch not Check EADI Display Down
on the PFD when the EADI functional/wired correctly. switch and wiring.
Display Down switch selected
to normal. Failed PFD. Replace PFD.
(2) Electronic Horizontal Situation Indicator (EHSI) [i.e. - Meggitt MAGIC EFIS Navigation Display (ND)]
The Navigation Display (ND) is, like the Meggitt Primar y Flight Display (PFD), a
microprocessor-based color, liquid crystal (LCD) display system. Information displayed
includes Navigation Data, Airspeed, Altitude, Attitude, Vertical Speed, Heading and Instrument
Landing System data. The information is displayed via a series of predefined display formats
(HSI, ARC, MAP). In addition, the ND includes built-in test, performance and health monitoring
functions and display brightness control.
AIRCRAFT, MAY RENDER THE AIRCRAFT UNAIRWORTHY. (SEE
INTRODUCTION - SUPPLEMENTARY PUBLICATIONS.)
Descriptions of the operator controls and basic operating modes and screens are in the
appropriate Pilot’s Operating Handbook Supplement.
(a) Troubleshooting
See Chart 6. See also Appendix 1 (grid 5K19).
(b) Basic Functional Test
The following test procedure should be performed with the aircraft in a suitable position to
receive valid VOR/ILS/GPS/DME signals. If this is not possible, then use the appropriate
test sets to simulate the signals as required.
CAUTION: IF, DURING THE FOLLOWING TEST, ANY COMPONENT DOES NOT
PRODUCE THE EXPECTED RESULTS, THAT COMPONENT MUST NOT
BE USED IN FLIGHT UNTIL THE PROBLEM IS CORRECTED.
1 Before applying power, verify proper voltage inputs and ground connections as well
as all system interfaces.
2 Start the ND in Test Mode by pressing and holding the MNU Pushbutton while
applying power until the Initialization page is shown. Verify that the Initialization page
displays 'MERIDIAN NAVIGATION DISPLAY' at the top of the screen and is replaced
by the Configuration Data page after approximately five (5) seconds.
3 Verify that the Configuration Data page Configuration Discrete Parity Status and
Power On Self Test results both show results of Pass. If the result is FAIL, further
diagnostic effort is required to determine if the failed indication is the result of a fault
in the wiring, a faulty ND, or both.
PAGE 10
Feb 28/07 34-20-00 5D14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TROUBLESHOOTING EHSI (i.e. - ND)
No display visible at power up. +28 VDC power missing. Check wiring & bus voltage.
+28 VDC Return missing. Check wiring.
Display powers-up in EADI EADI Display Down mode Check EADI Display Down
Display Down mode. selected. switch.
Test mode visible at power up Stuck MNU button Check MNU button
ND failed self test Replace ND
Display brightness does not 28 VDC lighting bus not Check wiring and 28 VDC
change when Panel LCD’s connected or not functional lighting bus
dimmer switch operated
Panel LCD’s dimmer module Check/replace module
not functional
Panel LCD’s dimmer switch Check/replace switch.
not functional
Failed ND Replace ND
Menu does not appear when Stuck MNU button Check MNU button
MNU button is pressed
Menu cursor does not change Stuck and/or buttons Check and buttons
when and/or buttons
are pressed Failed ND Replace ND
Unable to select menu options Stuck SEL button Check SEL button
when SEL button is pressed
Unable to enter Test mode Airspeed equal to or Ensure airspeed is less
when MNU button is pressed greater than 40 knots than 40 knots
detected
Unit not powered off before Ensure unit is powered off
MNU button is pressed before MNU button is
pressed
MNU button pressed and held Ensure MNU button is
for insufficient time pressed and held until
initialization page displays
Test menu does not change ND in mission operational mode Ensure ND in test mode
when the and/or buttons
are pressed Stuck and/or buttons Check and/or buttons
Unable to select Test pages Stuck SEL button Check SEL button
when the SEL button is pressed
5D15 34-20-00 Feb

PAGE 11
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Barometric setting does not Stuck and/or buttons Check and buttons
change in EADI Display Down
mode when the and/or Failed ND Replace ND
buttons are pressed
Selected CRS does not change Stuck CRS knob Check CRS knob
when CRS knob rotated
Selected HDG does not change Stuck HDG knob Check HDG knob
when HDG knob rotated
Selected CRS does not align Stuck CRS knob Check CRS knob
with present heading when
CRS knob pushed Failed ND Replace ND
Selected HDG does not align Stuck HDG knob Check HDG knob
with present heading when
HDG knob pushed Failed ND Replace ND
Failure flags present on display Equipment supplying relevant Check status of equipment
data to ND failed supplying data to ND
Failed ND Check data on relevant
ND test page
Power on self test status on Failed ND Replace ND
Configuration Data page is
indicated as FAIL
Configuration discrete parity Parity input (Configuration Check configuration
status on Configuration Data Discrete 7) not wired correctly discrete setting
page is indicated as FAIL
Check wiring
Installation location on Configuration discretes 0 and 1 Check configuration
Configuration Data page incorrect not wired correctly discrete setting
Check wiring
PFD Interface Data Page shows RS422 Receive and/or Check wiring
valid data is not being Transmit lines are not connected
received/transmitted or wired correctly
Failed PFD Replace PFD
ADAHRS Interface Data pages ARINC IN A and B Bus 1 lines Check wiring
show valid data is not being are not connected or are wired
received incorrectly
Failed ADAHRS Replace ADAHRS
PAGE 12
Feb 28/07 34-20-00 5D16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
NAV Interface Data Page shows ARINC In A and B Bus 2 lines Check wiring
valid data is not being Received are not connected or are wired
incorrectly
Failed Nav radio Replace Nav radio
GPS Interface Data Pages show ARINC In A and B Bus 4A and/or Check wiring
valid data is not being Received 4B lines are not connected or are
wired incorrectly
Failed GPS Receiver Replace GPS Receiver
Cross Side Input Interface Data ARINC In A and B Bus 3 lines Check wiring
Page shows valid data is not are not connected or are wired
being Received incorrectly
Failed cross-side ND Test cross-side ND
Cross Side Output Interface ARINC Out A and B Bus 2 lines Check wiring
Data Page shows valid data is are not connected or are
not being Transmitted wired incorrectly
NAV/GPS Output Interface ARINC Out A and B Bus 1 lines Check wiring
Data Page shows valid data is are not connected or are
not being transmitted wired incorrectly
Analog Interface Data Page Failed ND Replace ND
shows valid data is not being
Received or Transmitted Failed Autopilot Input Perform Autopilot Test
Failed DME Input Perform DME Test
Failed Audio Panel Input Perform Audio Panel Test
Failed Rad Alt Input Perform Rad Alt Test
Failed ADF Input Perform ADF Test
Failed Autopilot outputs Check ND inputs
Discrete Interface Data Page Failed ND Replace ND
shows valid data is not being
Received or Transmitted Failed Autopilot Input Perform Autopilot Test
Failed DME Input Perform DME Test
Failed Rad Alt Input Perform Rad Alt Test
Failed Autopilot output Check Nav inputs
5D17 34-20-00 Feb

PAGE 13
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 7
NAVIGATION DISPLAY (ND) DEFAULT SETTINGS
Screen Format HSI
Element Setting
CDI VOR1
RMI1 OFF
RMI2 OFF
RANGE 2.5NM
GPS SEL GPS1
APORTS Disabled
NAVAIDS Disabled
WPTS Disabled
NDB Disabled
Selected Heading Last Known Setting
Selected Course /
Desired Track Last Known Setting
Barometric Setting Last Known Setting
CHART 8
NAVIGATION DISPLAY (ND) COLOR CODING
Display Parameter
Color Mission Operational Mode EADI Display Down Mode
White A/C Symbol, Scales, Range
Rings, Digital Readouts, Scales, Digital Readouts
RMI1 Pointer and Annunciation
Grey N/A Scale Tapes
A/C Symbol N/A Aircraft Symbol, Lubber Line
Amber Failures and Annunciation's Stall Warning,
Failures and Annunciation's
Red N/A Airframe Limits
Sky N/A Sky
Ground N/A Ground and Radar Altimeter
ground reference
Green N/A Baro Correction
Magenta Deviation Bar, Sel HDG/CRS Flight Director Command
Bugs, CDI Pointer and Annunciation Bars and Deviation Pointers
Cyan RMI2 Pointer and Annunciation N/A
PAGE 14
Feb 28/07 34-20-00 5D18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4 Verify that the Configuration Data page displays the correct installation location
(primary or secondary).
5 Remove power from the ND to terminate Test Mode. Re-apply power to the ND and
start the display in Mission Operational Mode.
6 Verify that the ND displays the Initialization page for approximately five (5) seconds
prior to displaying the HSI Screen Format. If power has not been applied to the
ADAHRS then the HSI screen format will display the heading failure indication.
7 Apply power to the Air Data Attitude Heading Reference System (ADAHRS) (i.e. -
AHRS).
8 Apply power to the Primary Flight Display (PFD) (i.e. - EADI).
9 Verify that the HSI Screen Format is displayed and the installation specific defaults
as shown in Chart 6 apply. If any of the failure flags are displayed refer to Chart 6.
10 Enable the Mission Operational Mode/Rev Mode menu by pressing the bezel
mounted 'MNU' button. Verify that the menu is displayed correctly.
11 Ensure that the Nav Radios are selected off. Use the bezel mounted “”, “” and
“SEL” buttons to navigate through the menu, selecting RMI1 to display VOR1 and
RMI2 to display VOR2. Verify that the RMI1 and RMI2 second level menus are
displayed correctly and the RMI1 and RMI2 source annunciations match the
selections.
12 Verify that the RMI1, RMI2 and CDI source annunciations are amber in color. Verify
that the associated frequency annunciations are replaced with amber dashes. Verify
that both RMI pointers and the CDI pointer are removed from the display.
13 Apply power to the Nav radios. Select valid VOR frequencies on the Nav Radios and
verify that the RMI1, RMI2 and CDI source and frequency annunciations are
displayed in the correct colors (see Chart 8). Verify that the ND displayed frequencies
match the Nav radio frequencies (i.e. RMI1 frequency matches Nav Radio 1 and
RMI2 frequency matches Nav Radio 2. The CDI frequency should match the
currently selected CDI source frequency). Verify that both RMI pointers and the CDI
pointer are displayed correctly.
14 Select valid ILS frequencies on the Nav Radios and verify that the RMI1, RMI2 and
CDI source annunciations display VOR1, VOR2 and ILS1/ILS2 (dependent on
current selected CDI source) respectively in the correct colors (see Chart 8). Verify
that the ND displayed frequencies match the Nav radio frequencies (i.e. RMI1
frequency matches Nav Radio 1 and RMI2 frequency matches Nav Radio 2. The CDI
frequency should match the currently selected CDI source frequency). Verify that
both RMI pointers are removed and the CDI pointer is displayed correctly.
15 Apply power to the GPS Receivers. Use the bezel mounted “”, “” and “SEL”
buttons to navigate through the menu, selecting RMI1 and RMI2 to display GPS and
CDI (verify that the CDI second level menu is displayed correctly) to display GPS
(GPS1 or GPS2 will be available dependent on GPS source selection). Verify that the
RMI1, RMI2 and CDI source annunciations reflect the selections.
16 Refer to the GPS Installation Manual and display the self test page on the on-side
GPS. Verify that the applicable ND parameters display the correct self test values as
listed in the GPS Installation Manual during the display of the self test page.
17 Verify that the GPS source annunciation displays the currently selected GPS source
in white. Use the bezel mounted “”, “” and “SEL” buttons to navigate through the
menu, selecting the GPS source to the off-side GPS. Verify that the GPS second
level menu is displayed correctly. Verify that the GPS source annunciation displays
the currently selected GPS source in white.
5D19 34-20-00 Feb

PAGE 15
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
18 Refer to the GPS Installation Manual and display the self test page on the off-side
GPS. Verify that the applicable ND parameters display the correct self test values as
listed in the GPS Installation Manual during the display of the self test page.
19 Press the EADI Display Down switch to select EADI Display Down mode and verify
that the ND displays the PFD (i.e. - EADI) screen format. Verify that the PFD screen
blanks.
20 If installed, apply power to the Radar Altimeter. Perform a functional test on the Rad
Alt system and verify that the ND Rad Alt Indication and Decision Height
Annunciation are displayed correctly.
21 Perform a functional test on the VOR Radio system and verify that the ND Localizer /
Glideslope and Backcourse / Localizer Sensing indications are displayed correctly.
22 Apply power to the Marker Beacon system. Perform a functional test on the Marker
Beacon system and verify that the ND Marker Beacon indications are displayed
correctly.
23 Apply power to the Autopilot system. Place the Autopilot Master Switch in the Flight
Director position and verify that the flight director bars are displayed correctly.
24 Press the bezel mounted “” button once and verify that the barometric correction
increases by 0.01in.Hg/1hPa. Press and hold the bezel mounted “” button and
verify that the barometric correction continuously increases in increments of
0.01in.Hg/1hPa until the button is released or the maximum barometric correction is
reached.
25 Press the bezel mounted “” button once and verify that the barometric correction
decreases by 0.01in.Hg/1hPa. Press and hold the bezel mounted “” button and
verify that the barometric correction continuously decreases in increments of
0.01in.Hg/1hPa until the button is released or the minimum barometric correction is
reached.
26 Press the EADI Display Down switch to shift back to normal mode and verify that the
HSI screen format is displayed on the ND. Verify that the PFD screen format displays
on the PFD.
27 Use the bezel mounted “”, “” and “SEL” buttons to navigate through the menu,
selecting the Arc screen format. Verify that the Arc screen format is displayed
correctly.
selecting the Map screen format. Verify that the Map screen format is displayed
correctly.
selecting the HSI screen format. Rotate the CRS Rotary Control clockwise and verify
that the selected CRS pointer rotates clockwise around the compass card and the
selected course digital readout increases and mirrors the pointer heading. Rotate the
CRS Rotary Control anti-clockwise and verify that the selected CRS pointer rotates
anti-clockwise around the compass card and the selected course digital readout
decreases and mirrors the pointer heading. Push the CRS Pushbutton and verify that
the selected course pointer and digital readout align to the current aircraft heading.
30 Rotate the HDG Rotary Control clockwise and verify that the selected HDG bug
rotates clockwise around the compass card and the selected heading digital readout
increases and mirrors the bug heading. Rotate the HDG Rotary Control anti-
clockwise and verify that the selected HDG bug rotates anti-clockwise around the
compass card and the selected heading digital readout decreases and mirrors the
bug heading. Push the HDG Pushbutton and verify that the selected heading bug
and digital readout align to the current aircraft heading.
PAGE 16
Feb 28/07 34-20-00 5D20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
31 On the overhead switch panel, decrease the Panel LCD’s dimmer switch and verify
that the ND brightness decreases.
32 On the overhead switch panel, increase the Panel LCD’s dimmer switch and verify
that the ND brightness increases.
(c) Removal and Installation
See 39-10-00.
(3) Air Data & Attitude Heading Reference System (ADAHRS) [i.e. - Attitude Heading Reference
System (AHRS)].
The ADAHRS unit is located on the aft equipment shelf behind the cabin rear closeout panel.
NOTE: When installing the ADAHRS unit; first, level the airplane per 8-20-00; and then, use
NAS1149FN816P washers as required to level the ADAHRS unit.
(a) Magnetic Heading Compensation / Calibration
Perform the Magnetic Heading Compensation/Calibration procedure in Magnetic Heading
Systems, below, whenever the ADAHRS unit is installed or replaced.
(b) Ground Test Procedure
This test procedure (included as Appendix 1 - grid 5K19) verifies the integrity and
accuracy of the air data and pitot-static systems and shows that these systems comply
with the applicable airworthiness regulations. Perform this procedure:
1 each 24-months,
2 to proof test the static system in accordance with FAR 23.1325 each time any
connections in static system are opened for maintenance, or
3 following installation or maintenance on the ADAHRS unit, the primary flight display
(PFD), or the transponder Mode C interface.
5D21 34-20-00 Feb

PAGE 17
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B. Avidyne Entegra Electronic Flight Instrument System (EFIS) (S/N’s 4636375 and up.)
AIRCRAFT, MAY RENDER THE AIRCRAFT UNAIRWORTHY. SEE INTRODUCTION -
SUPPLEMENTARY PUBLICATIONS.
The Avidyne FlightMax Entegra Electronic Flight Instrument System (EFIS) is installed as standard
equipment. See 28-40-00 and 34-10-00 for more info.
(1) Description (See Figure 1.)
This system uses two large 10.4-inch diagonal, high-resolution, sunlight-readable full color
displays (PFD and MFD), to provide primary flight and engine information as well as a wide
variety of other data. Standard primary flight instruments (i.e. - airspeed, electric attitude
indicator, and altimeter) provide redundancy.
The EFIS installation consists of the following components: Primary Flight Display (PFD),
Multifunction Display (MFD), Data Acquisition Unit (DAU), and associated sensors, and
Magnetometer/OAT Sensor Assembly.
(2) Maintenance
The Instructions for Continued Airworthiness (ICA) published by Avidyne provide the
necessary information for maintaining this system as installed in Piper airplanes, except as
noted below.
(a) Primary Flight Display (PFD) (PIR-PPS60227, Rev. B.)
Use 700-00006-0XX PFD & 700-00011-000 Mag/OAT ICA, Avidyne Document No.
AVPFD-174, latest revision, with the following exceptions:
1 In para 6, Troubleshooting Information, in the chart where it says “OAT (Optional),”
cross out “optional.” The OAT is standard in the Piper installation.
2 In para 7.2 and Figure 7, where the standard Avidyne installation describes
alignment pins and retaining clips on the sides of the PFD, the Piper installation uses
a single alignment pin on the top of the PFD engaging a slot in the upper rear cross
bracket.
3 In para 7.5.2.2, in the “Main RS232 Configuration Page” table, for CHNL 3 under GNS-
430 No 2, both Input and Output should read “Crossfill” instead of “Off.”
4 In para 7.5.4.3, below the heading “Autopilot Unit - STEC Autopilots,” insert the
following:
“If the PFD is replaced, the IRU calibration and Magnetometer calibration must be
completed before continuing with the following steps.”
5 Replace para 7.5.5.1, Barometric Unit Setting, with the following:
a Press LSK L1, labeled “Trim Ann”, as required until “Show” is displayed.
b Press LSK L2, labeled “A/P Annun”, as required until “Show” is displayed.
c Press LSK L3, labeled “V-Speeds”, as required until “Show” is displayed.
d Press LSK R1, labeled “Baro Unit”, as required until “in.Hg”, or “mb” if foreign, is
displayed.
e Press LSK R2, labeled “Horiz Marks”, as required until “Show” is displayed.
f Press LSK R3, labeled “ARS”, as required until “Delta” is displayed.
PAGE 18
Feb 28/07 34-20-00 5D22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(b) Multifunction Display (MFD) (PIR-PPS60226, Rev. A.)
Use 700-00004-0XX-() Multifunction Display ICA, Avidyne Document No. AVMFD-167,

with the following exceptions:
1 In para 2, items 7 and 8 are standard in the Piper installation.
2 In para 7.3.1, Maintenance Mode Access, replace 3 and 4 with the following:
a At the prompt “Press any bezel key to continue”, press any Line Select Key
(LSK). This places the screen at the exceedance page. Press OK to
acknowledge exceedances and to continue to the Initial Usable Fuel Page.
Depress the “Fuel Done” LSK R4.
b Rotate the right outer concentric knob clockwise until the AUX page is
displayed.
3 Replace 7.3.2.1, GAMA 429 Graphics Setup (EX5000 only) with the following:
a From the maintenance page, depress the LSK L1 to access the GPS setup
page.
b Using the right outer concentric knob to select the configuration field and the
right inner concentric knob to select the desired configuration; configure the
GPS Setup page for the following conditions:
Receiver 1: GAMA 429 FORMAT
Port: ARINC 429 RX 1
Speed: LOW
Receiver 2: GAMA 429 FORMAT
Speed: Low
c Press SAVE button.
4 Replace 7.3.4, Lightning Sensor Interface and Setup, with the following:
a From the maintenance page, depress LSK (L3) to access the Lightning Set-up
page.
right inner concentric knob to select the desired configuration. Configure the
Lightning Setup page for the following conditions:
Sensor: WX-500
Operating Mode: Weather
Port: RS232 3 – (Lightning Default)
Stabilization type: Use Map Heading / Track
Enable lightning
ahead: box CHECKED
Antenna on top: box NOT CHECKED
5 Replace 7.3.10, Engine Sensor, with the following:
a From the maintenance page, depress LSK (L4) to access the Engine Set-up
page.
Engine Setup page for the following conditions:
Aircraft Model: PA-46-350P (Mirage)
Serial Port: RS232 4
5D23 34-20-00 Feb

PAGE 19
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
c When setting up a MFD for the first time only the following set up box appears.
"Select ACFT Model and Port (s)" Press "Resync".
6 Replace 7.6.3.1, TAWS Setup, with the following:
a From the maintenance page, depress LSK (L5) to access the TAWS Set-up
page.
TAWS Setup page for the following conditions:
Sensor: Honeywell EGPWS
ARINC 429 Port: ARINC 429 TX 2
ARINC 453 Port: ARINC 453 2 – (TAWS Default)
Altitude
Annunciation on: box CHECKED
7 Replace 7.3.8, Map Heading, with the following:
a From the maintenance page, depress LSK (R1) to access the MAP Heading
page.
right inner concentric knob to select the desired configuration; configure the
Map Heading page for the following conditions:
Map Heading: FMS/GPS
8 Replace 7.3.11.1, Auxiliary Data; 7.3.12, Datalink; 7.3.12.1, Narrowcast Datalink
Setup; and 7.3.12.2, Broadcast Datalink Setup with the following:
a From the maintenance page, depress LSK (R2) to access the AIRCRAFT Set-
up page.
Aircraft Setup page for the following conditions:
Narrowcast: Quake SC
Port: RS232 6 (Data link Default)
Broadcast: XM Radio
Port: RS232 1
Aux Data: Entegra PFD
Dimming Bus
Voltage: Shows Current Voltage with aircraft Day/Night switch in
“Night”
Brightest Dimming
Voltage: 24.0 Volts
Darkest Dimming
Voltage: 5.0 Volts
PAGE 20
Feb 28/07 34-20-00 5D24
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
9 Replace 7.3.7, Radar Sensor; and 7.3.12.7, Radar Setup, with the following:
Setup
If configuring a replacement MFD, start with step (a). In all other cases start with step (f).
a From the maintenance page, depress LSK (R3) to access the RADAR Set-up
page.
right inner concentric knob to select the desired configuration.
c From the RADAR Set-up Page select the following:
Sensor: AlliedSignal ART-2000 ARINC 429
Port: ARINC 429 Tx 1 ARINC 453
Port: ARINC 453 1
d Press SAVE. (After pressing SAVE, MFD goes to maintenance Setup Page)
e From the Maintenance Setup Page, press Restart System.
f Re-enter Maintenance Setup Page, depress LSK R3 to access the RADAR
Setup Page.
g Using the right outer concentric knob to select the configuration field and the
Radar Setup page for the following conditions:
Radar Sensor: AlliedSignal ART-2000
Park Position: Centered
Beam Width: 7.0 °
Beam Height: 7.0 °
All boxes CHECKED, except “Disable Stabilization” is NOT CHECKED.
Press SAVE. (After pressing save, MFD goes to Maintenance Setup Page)
Calibration
The R/T Configuration Module must be configured using the Allied Signal KPA 900
Configuration Module Programmer Kit (Part Number 050-03311-0002) in conjunction
with a personal computer. See the configuration module user data for detailed setup
instructions. Follow the instructions for the programmer.
Perform radar R/T calibration as follows: Reference AlliedSignal (Bendix/King) 2000
Radar Sensor installation manual.
Antenna Clearance Check
a From the Maintenance Set Up Page Select RADAR.
b Set the radar park position to Full Up. Enter SAVE.
c Restart the MFD. (SYSTEM) (R5)
d From the Radar Page, set the Radar Function to SBY. (L3)
e Set the Radar Mode to GND. (R1) Set KNOB to gain (L5)
f Reduce the gain until the gain indicator shows the minimum setting.
5E1 34-20-00 Feb

PAGE 21
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
g Set the Antenna Tilt to full Up (U 15.0)

h Set Range to 240 NM.
i From the Aux Page, enter Maintenance Mode, as described in Section 6.3,
"Using the Maintenance Mode Page" on page 25.
j Press "Radar Setup".
k Press "Calibration" to display the RT CALIBRATION DATA page. Upon display of
the RT CALIBRATION DATA page with the system in calibration mode, all fault
fields will flash briefly. This verifies that the system is in calibration mode.
l Starting at -30 , slowly adjust the gain control downward until the antenna
clearance scan begins. This should take place at a gain value no lower that -26.
The antenna will move to each of the extreme positions to determine that there
is no interference with antenna movement and all scan motors are working
properly.
Calibrate Radar Pitch and Roll.
a Use the right outer knob to set ROLL TRIM to 0 degrees.
b Calibrate AHRS ARINC 429 Pitch Offset.
Level aircraft.
Adjust the GAIN buttons for a GAIN POT /2 setting to 11- or 12-.
Set the PITCH ANGLE field to 0.0 +/- 1.0 degrees.
To increment the value of the PITCH ANGLE, use the left inner knob to change
the TILT SETTING to between 5 and UP. When the TILT SETTING is set to
between 5 and 10 UP, the value of the PITCH ANGLE field will slowly increase.
To decrement the value of the PITCH ANGLE, use the left inner knob to change
the TILT SETTING to between 5 and 10 DOWN. When the TILT SETTING is set
to between 5 and 10 DOWN, the value of the PITCH ANGLE field will slowly
decrease.
When the desired setting is reached, quickly adjust the TILT SETTING to above
10 UP to lock in the setting.
c Calibrate AHRS ARINC 429 Roll Offset.
Verify that the aircraft is level.
Adjust the GAIN buttons for a GAIN POT setting to 7- or 9-.
Set the ROLL ANGLE field to 0.0 +/- 1.0 degrees.
To increment the value of the ROLL ANGLE, use the left inner knob to change
the TILT SETTING to between 5 and 10 UP. When the TILT SETTING is set to
between 5 and 10 UP, the value of the PITCH ANGLE field will slowly increase.
To decrement the value of the ROLL ANGLE, use the left inner knob to change
the TILT SETTING to between 5 and 10 DOWN. When the TILT SETTING is set
to between 5 and 10 DOWN, the value of the ROLL ANGLE field will slowly
decrease.
When the desired setting is reached, quickly adjust the TILT SETTING to above
10 UP to lock in the setting.
PAGE 22
Feb 28/07 34-20-00 5E2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
d Save Configuration:
Adjust the GAIN controls for a GAIN POT /2 setting to 4- or 5-.
The FAULTS field will display GYRO.
Set the TILT SETTING to 15.0 DOWN. The fault fields will flash indicating that
your settings are being saved. If the save procedure is successful the GYRO fault
will disappear and the azimuth count will cycle through its entire number range.
NOTE: Transmitter FAULTS with the Radar OFF.
If the GYRO fault remains, set the TILT to 0 and repeat the previous step.
Enter EXIT.
After the Calibration is completed then enter SAVE.
Return to the RADAR Setup Page and change Park Position to Centered and
SAVE.
10 See Chart 9 for Port Information.
(c) Data Acquisition Unit (DAU)
The DAU is mounted underneath the instrument panel on the right aft side of the forward
pressure bulkhead (F.S. 100.00) (see Figure 1). Maintenance is on condition.
Use 200-00041-000 DAU ICA, Avidyne Document No. AVSIU-011, with the following
exceptions:
1 In para 6, in “Table 2 - DAU Pinout,” pins J1-2 and J1-21 have “No Connection” in the
Piper installation.
2 In para 6, in “Table 4 - DAU Sensor Compatibility,” parameter “VAC” is not used in the
Piper installation.
Configuration/calibration procedures are in 28-40-00.
(d) Magnetometer/OAT Sensor Assembly
See information under Primary Flight Display, above. Removal, installation, and calibration
instructions are provided under “Magnetic Heading Systems - S/N’s 4636375 and up,”
below.
(3) Component Locator
See Figures 1 and 5.
CHART 9
PORT INFORMATION PAGE
Port Used By Port Used By
RS232 1 Broadcast ARINC 429 TX1 Radar
RS232 2 ARINC 429 TX2 TAWS
RS232 3 Lightening ARINC 429 TX3
RS232 4 Engine ARINC 429 TX4
RS232 5 Datalink ARINC 453-1 Radar
RS232 6 Datalink ARINC 453-2 TAWS
ARINC 429 RX1 GPS 1
ARINC 429 RX2 GPS 2
ARINC 429 RX3 Traffic
ARINC 429 RX4 PFD Link
5E3 34-20-00 Feb

PAGE 23
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
STANDBY
INSTRUMENTS
PFD
MFD
PFD
INSTALL MFD WITH 4 CAPTIVE DZUS FASTENERS
INSTALL PFD(S) WITH 4 CAPTIVE SCREWS (TORQUE - 31 TO 32 IN. LBS.)
BLACK WIRES BLACK WIRES

MULTI-FUNCTION DISPLAY TO EXISTING
TO EXISTING
GROUND BLOCK GROUND
CONNECTORS BLOCK
PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY P551 CONNECTORS
P7322
J7322
P530
J7321
P7321
J7312
J530
P7312 DC-50 P7311

J7332
J7311
J7331
J730
P730
XMJ1 P730
P7332 P7331
P551
P552
INDUSTRIES
POSITRONICS
INDUSTRIES
POSITRONICS
P3401
R
P3402
COM
P43022 COM
P43021
P43012
GPS
P43011
P1061
GPS P2271
GS NAV GS
P43062 NAV
P43061 P871
P5721
P3302 P3301
POSITRONICS
INDUSTRIES
-37
MA
DCM
DC
A-37
P501 VIEW LOOKING AFT
VIEW LOOKING DOWN
TO TOP COMM ANT.

DC COUPLER HARNESS
FWD
TO MFD
DC-50 ANTENNA COUPLER TO GNS-430 #2 105121 H/M
Effectivity Avidyne EFIS Component Locator

PAGE 24
Feb 28/07 34-20-00 5E4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INSTRUMENT PANEL (REF)
DATA ACQUISITION UNIT (DAU)
STALL AND GEAR WARN

HORN ASSY (REF)
DE-ICE TIMER
(REF)
F.S. DEICE LIGHT

100.00 (REF)
Avidyne EFIS Component Locator Effectivity

5E5 34-20-00 Feb

PAGE 25
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6. Magnetic Heading Systems - S/N’s 4636160, and 4636248 thru 4636374

NOTE: The slaving magnetic compass installed in S/N’s 4636001 thru 4636247, less 4636160, were
installed as part of the Bendix/King Autopilot/Flight Director installations in those airplanes and
are serviced and adjusted per Bendix/King literature. See 22-10-00.
A. Flux Detector (See Figure 2.)
A flux detector installed in the leading edge of the vertical fin is used to provide heading data to the
HSI/EHSI and, if installed, the ADAHRS.
(1) Removal
CAUTION: PERFORM MAGNETIC HEADING COMPENSATION / CALIBRATION, BELOW,
WHENEVER THE FLUX DETECTOR IS CHANGED.
(a) Remove the dorsal fairing to expose the flux detector.
(b) Disconnect the wiring harness(es) from the top of the flux detector to be removed.
(c) Unscrew and remove the three brass screws and washers and remove the flux detector.
(2) Installation
CAUTION: THE FLUX DETECTOR IS SECURED TO THE MOUNTING BRACKET WITH
BRASS SCREWS. ENSURE ONLY BRASS SCREWS ARE USED WHEN
REINSTALLING.
(a) Place the flux detector into position on its mounting bracket and secure with brass screws
and washers (3 ea.)
(b) Connect wiring harness to the connector on top of the flux detector.
(c) Seal the connector backshell and base (see Figure 2, View A) with DOW Corning 4
Electrical Insulating Compound.
(d) Reinstall the dorsal fairing.
NOTE: Ensure correct hardware is used when reinstalling vertical fin dorsal fairing over
flux detector.
B. Magnetic Heading Compensation / Calibration
(1) Standard Installation (PIR-PPS60191, Rev. New.)
Accuracy of the entire heading system is dependent on the location of the flux detector and
proper calibration. Accuracies of plus or minus one degree are possible when care is taken
during installation and calibration. To obtain such results:
-- The flux detector must be positioned so that it points in the direction of aircraft flight; and,
-- The north-south and east-west correctors must be adjusted to compensate for extraneous
magnetic fields near the location of the flux detector.
PAGE 26
Feb 28/07 34-20-00 5E6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
SEE VIEW A
BRASS SCREW (MS 35214-27)

BRASS WASHER (AN960-B6)
(3 EACH)
FAIRING - DORSAL
UP
FLUX DETECTOR
FORWARD
F.S.
282.372
W.L.
91.446
VIEW LOOKING INBOARD (LEFT HAND SIDE)
Effectivity
Flux Detector Installation 4636160, and
Figure 2 4636248 thru 4636374
5E7 34-20-00 Feb

PAGE 27
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(a) Required Equipment

Instrument Flight Research Corp. RF signal generator NAV-40IL or equivalent.
Characteristics of the signal generator include: Frequency ranges 108 to 118 MHz, 117 to
136 Mhz, 328 to 336 MHz; +1/-0.01% accuracy, output level continuously adjustable from
1 .0uV to 0.1V into a 50 ohm load; 50 ohm output impedance; and internal adjustable or
stepped VOR, LOC, and GS modulation. The RF signal generator should be portable and
convenient for use while sitting in the aircraft cockpit.
(b) Procedure
1 Apply power to the Model ST-180 HSI System. Allow at least three (3) minutes for the
gyro to erect and synchronize.
2 Prior to actual alignment of the flux sensor, turn the aircraft to both north and east
headings. Apply power to electrical equipment such as navigation and beacon lights
and verify that the compass system is not affected.
3 Align the aircraft to an approximate magnetic north heading. On Chart 10, record the
actual magnetic heading and the HSI heading card reading.
4 Determine and record on Chart 10 the deviation between the actual magnetic
heading and the heading card heading. If the heading card reads high, the deviation
is a plus.
5 Repeat steps (3) and (4) for east, south, and west headings. Record actual magnetic
headings, heading card readings, and deviations on Chart 10.
6 Plot deviations on the initial deviation graph in Figure 3.
7 Realign the aircraft to north. Adjust the north-south corrector on the Slaving Panel,
for one half of the difference between the north and south deviations. Record the new
deviation for north and south on the initial deviation graph in Figure 3.
8 Realign the aircraft to east. Adjust the east-west corrector on the Slaving Panel, for
one half the difference between the east and west deviations. Record the new
deviation for east and west on the initial deviation graph in Figure 3.
9 If the pattern is not centered around zero, rotate the flux sensor clockwise to correct
for minus deviations or counterclockwise for plus deviations. Plot final deviations on
the final deviation graph in Figure 3.
10 The deviations should now center around the zero reference line of the graph. If the
error exceeds the specified system error limits (± 3 degrees), repeat the complete
procedure.
PAGE 28
Feb 28/07 34-20-00 5E8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 10
DEVIATION CHART
Approx. Magnetic Actual Magnetic Heading Card
Heading Heading Reading Deviation
North
East
South
West
Effectivity
ST-180 Deviation Graphs 4636160, and
Figure 3 4636248 thru 4636374
5E9 34-20-00 Feb

PAGE 29
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(2) Optional Meggitt EFIS Installation (PIR-PPS 60189-1, Rev. New.)
The Air Data & Attitude Heading Reference System (ADAHRS) unit mounted on the aft
equipment shelf provides the other components of the Meggitt Magic EFIS system with
magnetic heading data derived from the flux detector installed in the leading edge of the
vertical fin. The ADAHRS unit should be swung (checked for changes in deviation) whenever
the ADAHRS unit, flux detector, or either cabin recirculation blower is changed, and at least
once a year.
Use the following procedure to compensate and calibrate the magnetic heading indication
portion of the Meggitt Magic EFIS installation:
(a) Setup
1 Level the airplane within ± 1 degree laterally and longitudinally at the top surface of
the seat rails.
2 Configure the airplane as follows:
External Power Applied to Aircraft Avionics - ON
Instrument Panel Lights - Full Bright LCD Displays - Full Bright
Day/Night Switch - Day Navigation Lights - ON
Strobe Lights - ON Pitot Heat - OFF
Windshield Heat - OFF Air conditioning - OFF
Cabin Blower Fan - Low Vent Blower - OFF
(b) ADAHRS Unit Alignment Procedure
1 Place the EHSI in the "TEST MODE" by applying power with the "MNU" button held
in the depressed position until the initialization page is displayed.
2 Select ADAHRS test page 2 from the EHSI menu selections.
3 Allow the ADAHRS to complete the initialization period and display an attitude
sphere on the EADI.
4 Verify that the pitch and roll errors, as displayed on the EHSI test page, are less than
± 0.5 degrees in either axis.
5 If required for ADAHRS leveling, install shims under the ADAHRS mounting feet and
re-secure the unit to the mounting structure.
6 Repeat the alignment procedure until the minimum acceptable criteria is met.
(c) Compass System Calibration Procedure
1 Flux Detector Indexing
CAUTION: THE TEST CABLE P/N 101453-002 IS REQUIRED EQUIPMENT. NO
OTHER TEST CABLE IS AUTHORIZED. SEE FIGURE 4.
a Install the ADAHRS test cable and verify that the ADAHRS test cable calibration
switch is in the "NORMAL" (open) position.
b Place the EHSI in the "TEST MODE" by applying power with the "MNU" button
held in the depressed position until the initialization page is displayed.
c Select the ADAHRS interface test page 2 from the Navigation Display (ND)
menu selection. The ADAHRS must be in the "INITIALIZATION" mode for the
indexing procedure.
PAGE 30
Feb 28/07 34-20-00 5E10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
NOTES: 1. COVER 153-633 WIRE WITH WHITE SHRINK SLEEVE 189-601.
2. USE RAYCHEM SPLICES, 588-731 TO CONNECT TO SWITCH TO WIRES SHOWN IN WIRING DIAGRAM.
3. LABEL SWITCH CALIBRATION POSITION WITH "CAL".
4. LABEL ASSEMBLY AS FOLLOWS "FOR CALIBRATION PURPOSE ONLY,"NOT APPROVED FOR PERMANENT INSTALLATION.
P2 P1
28 VDC POWER
13 13
28 VDC POWER
14 14
POWER GROUND
15 15
POWER GROUND
16 16 WIRING DIAGRAM
CHASSIS GROUND
12 12
FLUX GATE EXC HI
4 4
FLUX GATE EXC LO
3 3
FLUX GATE X
31 31
FLUX GATE Y CALIBRATE
20 20
FLUX GATE Z 1
19 19
ARINC BUS 1A 2
23 23
ARINC BUS 1B
7 7
ARINC BUS 2A NORMAL
33 33
ARINC BUS 2B
32 32
PARITY SELECT
8 8
COPILOT LOCATION
24 24
CALIBRATE ENABLE
10 10
CONFIGURATION COMMON
9 9
2X
(588-731)
REF
SEE NOTE 2
12.0 IN. ± 1.0
588-731, SPLICES
P1 P2
TO
AIRCRAFT TO
ADAHRS 153-601, WIRE
WIRING
SEE NOTE 3
S1
153-633, WIRE
189-601, SLEEVE SEE NOTE 4
168.0 IN. ± 1.0
1 602-513 SWITCH, SPDT MTL-106D 9

1 599-698 CONNECTOR, RECEPTACLE MS27473T14B-35S 8
1 599-697 CONNECTOR, STRAIGHT PLUG MS27508E14B35P 7
2 588-731 SPLICES PS10025-16-2 6
A/R 189-601 SLEEVE, PTFE SHRINK, WHT M23053/12-203-3 5
A/R 153-633 WIRE, PTFE, 22AWG WHT M22759/11-22-9 4
A/R 153-601 WIRE, CABLE-EL PMS-E0017-22-24 3
2
-002 HARNESS ASSEMBLY-ADAHRS CALIBRATION 3400 M 1530 1
CODE NO. MATERIAL HEAT E-ITEM ITEM ITEM POS.
ITEM NO. ITEM NAME MATERIAL STOCK SIZE FINISH SPECIFICATION NOTE ZONE
SPEC CONTROL DWG SPECIFICATION TREAT GROUP TYPE GROUP NO.
THIS DRAWING IS THE PROPERTY OF THE NEW PIPER AIRCRAFT, INC. AND ITS
INSTL, ASSY, SUB ASSY, OR KIT
REVISION DRAFTSMAN T TAYLOR 5/28/02 POSSESSION BY UNAUTHORIZED PERSONS SHALL NOT BE CONSTRUED AS
PERMISSION TO REPRODUCE FOR SALE IN WHOLE OR IN PART, ANY DEVICES
A REV DESIGN ENGR SHOWN THEREON.
ADAHRS CALIBRATION
DC BY
6/16/03 DATE
CHECKER
THE NEW PIPER AIRCRAFT, INC. HARNESS ASSEMBLY
PROGRAM MGR
APPD VERO BEACH, FLORIDA
SCALE LAST SECTION OR VIEW REF. LAYOUT NO. (S)
REV
MANUFACTURING PRACTICES - SEE PIPER REPORT VB-9 SH

BY WT. DRAWING SIZE
D 1
DATE
APPD
TOL.
.XXX = +/- .010 .XX = +/- .030 .X = +/- .10
MANUFACTURING
MATERIALS
OF
1 101453 A
ADAHRS Calibration Harness Assembly Effectivity
Figure 4 with Meggitt EFIS installed
5E11 34-20-00 Feb

PAGE 31
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
d Place the ADAHRS test cable calibration switch in the "CAL" (closed) position.
Ensure that the heading system flag comes into view on the EADI, replacing the
heading scale tape and the digital readout.
NOTE: If no calibration has ever been entered into the ADAHRS memory, a
heading flag will be in view at the time of the unit initial power-up.
e Position the aircraft on the NORTH heading of the compass rose and record the
indicated "MAGHDG" as displayed on the ND. Record the heading indication in
Chart 11. (This is the raw data output from the flux detector). Repeat this step
for EAST, SOUTH, and WEST headings.
f After recording the raw heading information, calculate and record the index
heading errors in Chart 11. Refer to Figure 5 to calculate the errors. The
following logic applies to calculating heading errors:
N
For N, if indication is +, then error is +
- + For N, if indication is -, then error is -
+ - For E, if indication is more than 90, then error is +
For E, if indication is less than 90, then error is -
W E
For S, if indication is - and less than 180, (i.e. -179) then error is +
- + For S, if indication is + and less than 180, (i.e. +179) then error is -
+ - For W, if indication is - and less than 90, (i.e. -89) then error is +
For W, if indication is - and greater than 90, (i.e. -91) then error is -
S
Calculating Heading Error
Figure 5
Enter the errors for the four cardinal headings in Chart 11. Add the errors and
enter the sum in the "TOTAL ERROR" block in Chart 11. Divide the Total Error
by 4 and enter the result in the "INDEX ERROR" block in Chart 11. This result is
the "Index Error" of the flux detector.
g If the index error is greater than one (1) degree, loosen the flux detector and
adjust out the index error by rotating the flux detector.
h Repeat steps (e) through (g) until the index error is less than one (1) degree.
NOTE: Upon completion of the flux detector indexing procedure, apply torque
stripe to each of the flux detector mounting screws.
i This completes flux detector indexing, proceed to Heading System Calibration /
Compensation, below.
2 Heading System Calibration / Compensation
a Heading system calibration / compensation should be performed upon
completion of flux detector indexing, above, and using the same aircraft
configuration specified in setup, above.
b Place the Navigation Display (ND) in the "NORMAL" or mission operational
mode (normal power-up).
PAGE 32
Feb 28/07 34-20-00 5E12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 11
INDEXING DATA
Aircraft S/N: Registration No.:
ND ND Compass
Error (+) Heading Rose
W
Total Error
(N+E+S+W)
Index Error
(Total Error ÷ 4)
CHART 12
HEADING SYSTEM CALIBRATION
ND Compass
Heading Rose
30
60
120
150
210
240
300
330
5E13 34-20-00 Feb

PAGE 33
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
c With the ADAHRS test cable installed, and the calibration switch in the
"CALIBRATE" (closed) position, slowly taxi the aircraft in two (2) complete 360-
degree turns. The direction of the turn does not matter; however, a minimum
time of one (1) minute for each 360-degree turn (two (2) minutes minimum for
the full 720 degrees) is required for the calibration process. The slow turn rate
permits more data point samples for constructing the compensation curve. Make
sure that the turns are continued until the heading flag is replaced by a normal
heading indication.
d Upon completing the two turns, the magnetic heading will automatically be
displayed on both the EADI and EHSI. Place the ADAHRS test cable calibration
switch in the "NORMAL" (open) position. Allow the compass system to stabilize
for one (1) minute.
e With the ADAHRS test cable calibration switch in the NORMAL (open) position,
perform a complete heading system "swing". A settling time of two (2) minutes
must be used at each heading to ensure heading stabilization. After two (2)
minutes of settling, record the indicated heading against the known compass
rose heading for all twelve compass rose points in Chart 12. The heading
system error should not exceed ± 2 degrees on any compass point.
7. Magnetic Heading Systems - S/N’s 4636375 and up
Two Magnetometer / OAT Sensor Assemblies (Mag/OAT) feed magnetic heading information to the
Primary Flight Displays (PFD’s) and the Multifunction Display (MFD). The Mag/OAT’s are mounted under
the dorsal fairing atop the aft fuselage at F.S. 282.372. See Figure 6.
NOTE: The OAT sensors in the Mag/OAT assemblies are not used. See Outside Air Temperature in
34-10-00.
A. Magnetometer/OAT (MAG/OAT) Assemblies
(1) Removal
(a) Remove the dorsal fairing to expose the magnetometers.
(b) Disconnect the wiring harness(es) from the aft fuselage harness.
(c) Unscrew the three screws securing the OAT probe mounting plate to the mounting
bracket.
(d) Remove the OAT probe mounting plate and unscrew and remove the OAT probe nut(s)
from the bottom of the mounting plate and remove the OAT probe(s).
(e) Unscrew and remove the three brass screws and washers securing the magnetometer to
its mounting bracket and remove the magnetometer(s).
(2) Installation
CAUTION: THE MAGNETOMETERS ARE SECURED TO THE MOUNTING BRACKET
WITH BRASS SCREWS. ENSURE ONLY BRASS SCREWS ARE USED WHEN
REINSTALLING.
(a) Place the magnetometer(s) into position on its mounting bracket, with the arrow on the
magnetometer pointing forward, and secure with brass screws and washers (3 ea).
(b) Place the OAT probe(s) into position on its mounting plate and secure with nut(s) from
bottom.
(c) Place OAT probe mounting plate into position on mounting bracket and secure with brass
screws and washers (3 ea.)
(d) Connect wiring harness(es) to the aft fuselage harness.
PAGE 34
Feb 28/07 34-20-00 5E14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Magnetometer/OAT Sensor Assemblies Effectivity

5E15 34-20-00 Feb

PAGE 35
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(e) Reinstall the dorsal fairing.

NOTE: Ensure correct hardware is used when reinstalling vertical fin dorsal fairing over
flux detector.
B. Calibration (PIR-PPS60227, Rev. B.)
Calibration can be accomplished using either of the following two methods.

NOTE: LSK L1 “Perform IRU Mx” and LSK L3 “Perform ADU Cal” are to be performed by Avidyne
Service Technicians only. These functions are for bench test only.
(1) Bore sight reference compass (2 technicians)
NOTE: A hand-held bore sight reference compass is required for this procedure.
(a) Apply external power to the aircraft to allow the PFD’s to align while conserving the
battery for the remaining calibration procedure.
(b) Allow 3 minutes for the PFD’s to align, until the ADAHRS countdown timer expires and the
Gyro Warm-up box is removed from view.
NOTE: The PFD countdown timer might automatically restart its count before the
countdown expires. This is a normal operation and does not indicate a problem
with the PFD.
(c) Allow an additional 10 minutes in the aligned state to ensure complete stability.
(d) Place Battery Master Switch “ON”.
(e) Remove external power from the aircraft.
(f) Position the aircraft in an area located away from metal structures and magnetic
interference such as that caused by underground power lines, etc.
(g) Using the bore sight compass, align the aircraft to a heading of 360° +/- 1°.
(h) Enter the System Setup mode on the pilot and copilot PFD’s.
(i) Press the “Perform Mag Cal” Line Select Key (L2).
(j) Follow the directions on the “Magnetometer Calibration Page” and press the “Calibrate
Heading” button and wait until “Done” is displayed.
(k) Align the aircraft to each of the remaining 11 consecutive 30° headings using steps (g)
through (j) and press the “Calibrate Heading” LSK (R4) at each of these alignment points
after satisfactory alignment is achieved.
(l) At the final alignment point (330°), remain stationary until “Done” is displayed. This could
take up to one minute as data from the 12 calibration points is loaded onto the PFD’s.
(m) When complete, the following message appears:
MAG CAL COMPLETE - YOU MUST CYCLE POWER ON THE PFD IN ORDER FOR
THE MAGNETOMETER CALIBRATION TO TAKE EFFECT.
(n) Cycle power by pulling the following circuit breakers.
1 Main bus: Pilot PFD and Copilot PFD
2 Non Essential Bus: PFD/MFD Power Converter
3 Avionics 1 Bus: Pilot PFD
4 Avionics 2 Bus: Copilot PFD
NOTE: Wait 20 seconds before applying power.
(o) Verify the calibration by aligning the aircraft with consecutive 90° headings, starting with
360°. Use the same alignment procedure as before and view the digital heading display
on the pilot and copilot PFD’s at each of these headings.
PAGE 36
Feb 28/07 34-20-00 5E16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(2) Magnetometer Calibration Using Compass and Engine Run

(a) Perfor m nor mal engine star t and tur n on Avionics Master if needed for taxi
communications.
(b) Remain stationary and allow the pilot and copilot PFD’s to align for approximately
3 minutes until the ADAHRS countdown timer expires and the Gyro Warm-up box is
removed from the PFD screen.
NOTE: The PFD countdown timer might automatically restart its count before the
countdown expires. This is a normal operation and does not indicate a problem
with the PFD.
(c) Allow an additional 10 minutes in the aligned state to ensure complete stability.
(d) Taxi to the compass rose with a technician to act as a spotter to aid in the alignment.
(e) Enter the System Setup mode on the pilot and copilot PFD’s.
(f) Press the “Perform Mag Cal” Line Select Key (L2).
(g) Align the aircraft with magnetic north on the compass rose with the assistant to within +/- 1°.
(h) Follow the directions on the “Magnetometer Calibration Page” and press the “Calibrate
Heading” button and wait until “Done” is displayed.
(i) Align the aircraft to each of the remaining 11 consecutive 30° headings using steps (g)
through (h) and press the “Calibrate Heading” LSK (R4) at each of these alignment points
after satisfactory alignment is achieved.
(j) At the final alignment point (330°), remain stationary until “Done” is displayed. This could
take up to one minute as data from the 12 calibration points is loaded onto the PFD’s.
(k) When complete, the following message appears:
MAG CAL COMPLETE - YOU MUST CYCLE POWER ON THE PFD IN ORDER FOR
THE MAGNETOMETER CALIBRATION TO TAKE EFFECT.
(l) Cycle power by pulling the following circuit breakers.
1 Main bus: Pilot PFD and Copilot PFD
2 Non Essential Bus: PFD/MFD Power Converter
3 Avionics 1 Bus: Pilot PFD
4 Avionics 2 Bus: Copilot PFD
NOTE: Wait 20 seconds before applying power.
(m) Verify the calibration by aligning the aircraft with consecutive 90° headings, starting with
360°. Use the same alignment procedure as before and view the digital heading display
on the pilot and copilot PFD’s at each of these headings.
5E17 34-20-00 Feb

PAGE 37
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
8. Magnetic Compass
The magnetic compass is a self-contained instrument. This instrument has an individual light which is
connected to the instrument lighting circuit. The compass correction card is located in the card holder
mounted on the instrument. The compass should be swung (checked for changes in deviation) whenever
instruments or radios are changed, and at least once a year.
A. Troubleshooting
See Chart 13.
B. Adjustment
Before attempting to compensate compass, every effort should be made to place the aircraft in
simulated flight conditions; check to see that the doors are closed, flaps in retracted position, engine
running, throttle set at cruise position and aircraft in level flight attitude. Aircraft master switch,
alternator switch, and all radio switches should be in the ON position. All other cockpit controlled
electrical switches should be in the OFF position.
(1) Set adjustment screws of compensator on zero. Zero position of adjusting screws is when the
dot of the screw is lined up with the dot of the frame.
(2) Head aircraft on a magnetic North heading. Adjust N-S adjustment screw until compass reads
exactly North.
(3) Head aircraft on a magnetic East heading and do the same as step (2), adjusting E-W
adjusting screw.
(4) Head aircraft on a magnetic South heading and note resulting South error. Adjust N-S
adjusting screw until one-half of this error has been removed.
(5) Head aircraft on magnetic West and do same as step (4), adjusting E-W adjustment screw.
(6) Head aircraft in successive magnetic 30° degree headings and record compass readings on
appropriate deviation card. Deviations must not exceed +10° on any heading.
PAGE 38
Feb 28/07 34-20-00 5E18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 13
TROUBLESHOOTING MAGNETIC COMPASS
Excessive card error. Compass not properly Compensate instrument.
compensated.
External magnetic Locate magnetic
interference. interference and eliminate
if possible.
Excessive card oscillation. Insufficient liquid. Replace instrument.
Card sluggish. Weak card magnet. Replace instrument.
Excessive pivot friction or Replace instrument.
broken jewel.
Liquid leakage. Loose bezel screws. Replace instrument.
Broken cover glass. Replace instrument.
Defective sealing gaskets. Replace instrument.
Discolored markings. Age. Replace instrument.
Defective light. Burned out lamp or broken Check and replace lamp.
circuit. Check continuity of wiring.
Card sticks. Altitude compensating Replace instrument.
diaphragm collapsed.
Card does not move when The gears that turn Replace instrument.
compensating screws are compensating magnets are
turned. stripped.
Compass swings erratically. Normal.
when radio transmitter is
keyed.
5E19 34-20-00 Feb

PAGE 39
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
9. Turn Coordinator
Unlike the conventional turn and slip indicator, the electrically operated gyroscope in the turn coordinator
is canted. However, like conventional turn and slip indicator, it works on the principal of precession. By
canting the gyro, the instrument not only measures rate of turn, but also measures rate of roll. With this
indicator, if the aircraft is rolled right and left rapidly, the indicator will move, measuring the rate at which
the airplane is rolled by indicating a turn in the direction of the roll. If the aircraft is held in a bank, and
rudder is applied (such as when slipping), the needle indicator will come back to neutral, indicating no
turn.The slip/skid portion of the indicator is a ball sealed in a curved glass tube filled with damping fluid.
In the previous example, It would indicate the airplane is slipping. By utilizing rudder and aileron to
establish the airplane in a desired rate of turn will eventually establish the airplane in a coordinated turn
at the desired rate.
A. Troubleshooting
See Chart 14.
CHART 14
TROUBLESHOOTING TURN COORDINATOR
Instrument fails to respond Foreign matter lodged in Replace instrument.
when power is being applied instrument.
to instrument.
Incorrect sensitivity. Out of calibration. Replace instrument.
Incorrect turn rate. Out of calibration. Replace instrument.
Ball sticky. Flat spot on ball. Replace instrument.
Ball not in center when aircraft Instrument not level in panel. Level instrument.
is correctly trimmed in wings
level flight.
Instrument will not run. No power to instrument. Check appropriate circuit
breaker on pilot's circuit
breaker panel.
Check circuit and repair.
Instrument malfunction. Replace instrument.
PAGE 40
Feb 28/07 34-20-00 5E20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
5E21 34-20-00 Feb

PAGE 41
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 42
Feb 28/07 34-20-00 5E22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
5E23 34-20-00 Feb

PAGE 43
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 44
Feb 28/07 34-20-00 5E24
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INDEPENDENT POSITION DETERMINING
Color Weather Radar

Maintenance instructions included in the manual are limited to description, removal, replacement, and
self-test. Work exceeding this scope should be conducted by a qualified avionics repair facility in
accordance with the component manufacturer’s maintenance instructions.
PUBLICATIONS.)
AlliedSignal’s Bendix/King RDR 2000 Vertical Profile Radar system is installed as standard equipment.
It consists of the IN-182A radar display indicator in the center of the instrument panel and the ART 2000
antenna transceiver, AA2010H antenna array, and CM 2000 configuration module mounted in a teardrop
shaped pod hung from the right wing at the joint between the outboard and center wing sections.
(See Figure 1.)
NOTE: In S/N’s 4636375 and up, the IN-182A display is replaced by the Avidyne Entegra MFD. See
34-20-00, Avidyne Entegra EFIS, Maintenance, Multifunction Display (MFD), for setup and
calibration.
The antenna transceiver and antenna array are assembled as a single unit and are mounted to the
forward side of the bulkhead inside the radar pod. The configuration module is separately mounted to the
pod bulkhead.
The antenna transceiver and array assembly are covered by a removable radome secured to the
circumference of the pod bulkhead with screws.
A door in the right rear of the pod provides access to the void aft of the bulkhead, which can be used for
miscellaneous lightweight storage, such as the ground protection equipment.
Color Weather Radar Pod

Figure 1
5F1 34-40-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
WARNING: AIRBORNE WEATHER RADAR SHOULD BE OPERATED ON THE GROUND ONLY BY

QUALIFIED PERSONNEL.
WARNING: THIS INSTRUMENT GENERATES MICROWAVE RADIATION.
-- DO NOT ALLOW PERSONNEL TO STAND NEAR OR CROSS IN FRONT OF A
TRANSMITTING RADAR ANTENNA.
-- DO NOT ALLOW PERSONNEL TO LOOK INTO A WAVEGUIDE, OR INTO THE OPEN
END OF A COAXIAL CONNECTOR OR LINE CONNECTOR TO A RADAR
TRANSMITTER OUTPUT.
WARNING: DO NOT OPERATE RADAR WHILE AIRCRAFT IS IN A HANGAR OR OTHER
ENCLOSURE UNLESS THE RADAR TRANSMITTER IS NOT OPERATING OR THE
ENERGY IS DIRECTED TOWARD AN ABSORPTION SHIELD WHICH DISSIPATES THE
RADIO FREQUENCY (RF) ENERGY.
A. Removal
(1) Remove screws (13) and remove the radome.
(2) Disconnect ground wires, antenna transceiver connector, and configuration module connector.
(3) Remove screws (4) and remove the antenna transceiver / array assembly.
(4) Remove screws (2) and remove the configuration module.
B. Installation
(1) Position the configuration module and secure with screws (2).
(2) Position the antenna transceiver / array assembly and secure with screws (4). Torque screws
60 to 70 inch pounds.
(3) Connect ground wires, antenna transceiver connector, and configuration module connector.
(4) Position the radome and secure with screws (13).
C. Self-test (S/N’s 4636001 thru 4636374 only.)
The following displays basic system fault information and tests antenna clearance. Use the GAIN,
TILT, and function knobs and the RNG and mode buttons on the IN-182A indicator.
(1) Set the radar function knob to TST.
(2) Turn GAIN knob to minimum.
(3) Set antenna TILT to full up and select a range (RNG) of 240 NM.
(4) At the same time, depress the Wx/WxA and VP mode buttons to display the maintenance
menu. (See Figure 2.)
(5) Press the range up (RNG ^ ) to display the RT CALIBRATION DATA page. (See Figure 3.)
(6) As the RT CALIBRATION DATA page comes up, all fault fields will flash briefly. When the
display stabilizes, the only fault field displayed should be XMITTER. If any other fault fields are
displayed, further investigation is required.
(7) To initiate the antenna clearance test, rotate the GAIN knob to obtain a GAIN POT %2 value of
-26.5 to -28. The antenna will then move to each of its extreme positions to verify that there are
no physical interference and to ensure that all scan motors are working properly.
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 34-40-00 5F2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
BENDIX/KING LOG
BRT
ON
TST
SELECT TEST SBY
OFF
Wx R/T CALIB RNG

WxA RETURN
GATE ARRAY TEST RNG

VP
MAP SWITCHES TRK
NAV CROSS HATCH TRK

NAV DATA
UP
TILT
GAIN DN
PULL STAB OFF
IN-182A Maintenance Menu Effectivity

Figure 2 4636001 thru 4636374
BENDIX/KING LOG
BRT
ON
RT CALIBRATION DATA TST
SBY
(PRESS Wx TO RETURN) OFF
Wx GAIN POT %2: 31.0- FAULTS: RNG

WxA
PITCH ANGLE: 0.0U 400 REF
TILT SETTING: 0.0U GYRO RNG
VP ROLL ANGLE: 0.0R H.V.
ROLL TRIM: 0.0R AFC
MAP 400 HZ REF: 0.0+ AGC TRK
AZIMUTH COUNT: +45 XMITTER
ANTENNA ELEVATION: ELV TRK
NAV
L = 0.0U C = 0.0U R = 0.0U
UP
TILT
GAIN DN
PULL STAB OFF
IN-182A RT Calibration Data Display Effectivity

Figure 3 4636001 thru 4636374
5F3 34-40-00 FebPAGE 3

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 34-40-00 5F4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
DEPENDENT POSITION DETERMINING
1. COM/NAV/GPS (GNS 430/530)

PUBLICATIONS.)
A. Maintenance
Dual Garmin GNS-430 or Dual Garmin GNS-530 COM/NAV/GPS systems are installed as standard
equipment. Each installation consists of the GNS-430 or GNS-530 transceiver/display units,
associated wiring, and antennas.
Maintenance of the GNS-430 is “on condition” only and, with the exception of swapping complete
units, should be performed only by a qualified avionics shop in accordance with the GARMIN Series
400 Maintenance Manual (Garmin P/N - 190-00140-05).
Maintenance of the GNS-530 is “on condition” only and, with the exception of swapping complete
units, should be performed only by a qualified avionics shop in accordance with the GARMIN Series
500 Maintenance Manual (Garmin P/N - 190-00181-05).
Information provided in this manual is intended solely to aid the removal and installation of the
GNS-430/530 transceiver/display units, their associated wiring and antennas.
See 39-10-00.
C. Post-Installation Lighting Set-up
See 33-10-00, Post-Installation Lighting Set-up.
D. Post Installation Setup Procedure (PIR-PPS 60199, Rev. New., PIR-PPS 60199-2, Rev. I.)
(1) Aircraft Preparation and Configuration

Setup and preliminary checks may be made using the aircraft battery or external power
supplied by an external power cart. Final checks (OBS/CDI or HSI accuracy) should be made
with the engine running and the aircraft configured as in Chart 1.
(2) Configuration Setup Procedure
Access the Configuration Mode of the unit by depressing and holding the ENT key while
applying power to the unit. Release the ENT key when the display activates. After the data
base pages, press the ENT key twice to display the MAIN ARINC 429 CONFIG page. Pages
may be selected by ensuring the cursor is off and rotating the inner concentric knob on the
right side of the unit.
CHART 1
FINAL CHECK CONFIGURATION
Engine running, alternators On Avionics On

Instrument Panel Lights Full Bright Day/Night Switch Day
Navigation Lights On Strobe Lights On
Pitot Heat Off Air Conditioning Off
Cabin Blower Fan Low Vent Blower Off
5F5 34-50-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
To change data on the displayed Configuration Page, the cursor must be selected. Press the
inner concentric knob on the right side of the unit to activate the cursor. Rotating the outer
concentric knob on the right side of the unit changes the selected data field. Rotating the inner
concentric knob changes the data within the selected field. To accept entry of the desired
selection, press the ENT key.
(a) Press the ENT key twice to display the MAIN ARINC 429 CONFIG page. Setup per Chart
2, 3, or 4, as applicable.
(b) Deselect the cursor and rotate the inner concentric knob on the right side of the unit to
display the MAIN RS232 CONFIG page. Configure per Chart 5
(c) Deselect the cursor and rotate the inner concentric knob on the right side of the unit to
display the MAIN LIGHTING page. Configure per Chart 6.
CHART 2
MAIN ARINC 429 CONFIG PAGE
- WITH DUAL 530 AND MECHANICAL INDICATORS (PIR-PPS-60199-2, REV. I.)
MAIN ARINC 429 #1 GNS #2 GNS

CONFIG Page 530 530
BUS SPEED DATA SPEED DATA
GPS ARINC IN 1 HIGH GARMIN GTX 330 HIGH GARMIN GTX 330
“AIRDATA” “AIRDATA”
HIGH HIGH
W/IHAS W/IHAS
GPS ARINC IN 2 HIGH OFF HIGH OFF
GAMA 429
GPS ARINC OUT HIGH HIGH OFF
GRAPHICS W/INT
GAMA 429 GRAPHICS
HIGH
W/INT W/DUAL XPOND
SDI LNAV 1 LNAV 2
CHART 3
MAIN ARINC 429 CONFIG PAGE - WITH MEGGITT EFIS (PIR-PPS-60199-2, REV. I.)

CONFIG Page 530 530
GPS ARINC IN 1 HIGH GARMIN GTX 330 HIGH GARMIN GTX 330
“AIRDATA” “AIRDATA”
HIGH HIGH
W/IHAS W/IHAS
GPS ARINC IN 2 HIGH SANDEL EHSI HIGH SANDEL EHSI
GAMA 429 GAMA 429
GPS ARINC OUT HIGH HIGH
GRAPHICS W/INT GRAPHICS W/INT
SDI LNAV 1 LNAV 2
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 34-50-00 5F6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 4
MAIN ARINC 429 CONFIG PAGE - WITH AVIDYNE ENTEGRA (PIR-PPS-60199-2, REV. I.)

CONFIG Page 430 430
GPS ARINC IN 1 LOW SANDEL EHSI LOW SANDEL EHSI
GPS ARINC IN 2 LOW “EFIS/AIRDATA” LOW “EFIS/AIRDATA”
GAMA 429 GAMA 429
GPS ARINC OUT LOW LOW
GRAPHICS GRAPHICS
SDI LNAV 1 LNAV 2
CHART 5
MAIN RS-232 CONFIG PAGE (PIR-PPS-60199-2, REV. I.)
MAIN RS232 #1 GNS #2 GNS

CONFIG page 530/430 * 530/430 *
INPUT OUTPUT INPUT OUTPUT
CHNL 1 OFF AVIATION NO ALT ** OFF OFF
CHNL 2 OFF OFF OFF OFF
“HW-EGPWS”
W/IHAS
CHNL 3 CROSSFILL CROSSFILL CROSSFILL CROSSFILL
* Dual 530 w/Meggitt or w/Mechanical Indicators. Dual 430 w/Avidyne Entegra
** “OFF” with Avidyne Entegra
CHART 6
MAIN LIGHTING PAGE (PIR-PPS 60199, Rev. New., PIR-PPS-60199-2, REV. I.)
MAIN LIGHTING PAGE DISPLAY KEY

LIGHTING NO SETTING NO SETTING
SOURCE PHOTO PHOTO *
RESP TIME/MIN 4 ** 80 ** 4 ** 99 **
SLOPE/OFFSET 50 ** 50 ** 50 ** 90 **
PHOTO TRANS % 25
PHOTO SLP/OFST 35 *** 35 ***
* Prior to EFIS: “28V DC” / ** Prior to EFIS: retain factory setting.

*** Settings may vary slightly from unit to unit. Adjust as required.
5F7 34-50-00 FebPAGE 3

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(d) Deselect the cursor and rotate the inner concentric knob on the right side of the unit to
display the MAIN CDI/OBS CONFIG page. Setup is only required for selected course
calibration.
Adjust the OBS or HSI course needle to indicate a selected course of 150 degrees. The
SELECTED COURSE field on the GNS unit should indicate very close to 150 degrees.
Select the “Calibrate to 150?” field and press ENT. Verify the OBS (or HSI course)
operation by checking that the course displayed on the GNS unit is within 2° of the
selected course. Verify the accuracy at cardinal headings around the OBS card.
(e) Deselect the cursor and rotate the inner concentric knob on the right side of the unit to
display the COM SETUP page. Change only the “SPACING” setting to display “Select 25.0
KHz”.
(f) Deselect the cursor and rotate the inner concentric knob on the right side of the unit to
display the VOR/LOC/GS/CDI page. Change only the “DME CHNL MODE” setting to
display “Parallel 2x5”.
(g) VOR/LOC/GS ARINC 429 CONFIG Page Setup per Chart 7 or 8.
CHART 7
VOR/LOC/GS ARINC 429 CONFIG PAGE
- WITHOUT AVIDYNE ENTEGRA (PIR-PPS-60199-2, REV. I.)
#1 GNS RX TX
SPEED HIGH HIGH
SDI VOR/ILS 1
DME MODE DIRECTED FREQ 1
#2 GNS RX TX
SPEED HIGH HIGH
SDI VOR/ILS 2
CHART 8
VOR/LOC/GS ARINC 429 CONFIG PAGE
- WITH AVIDYNE ENTEGRA (PIR-PPS-60199-2, REV. I.)
#1 GNS RX TX
SPEED LOW LOW
SDI VOR/ILS 1
#2 GNS RX TX
SPEED LOW LOW
SDI VOR/ILS 2
PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 34-50-00 5F8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2. Transponder
PUBLICATIONS.)
A. GTX-327 (S/N’s 4636299, and 4636314 thru 4636348.)
A Garmin GTX-327 Transponder is installed as standard equipment. Maintenance of the GTX-327 is
“on condition” only and, with the exception of swapping complete units, should be performed only by
a qualified avionics shop in accordance with the GARMIN GTX-327 Maintenance Manual (Garmin
P/N - 190-00187-05).
Information provided in this manual is intended solely to aid the removal and installation of the GTX-
327 transceiver/display unit, its associated wiring and antenna.
See 39-10-00.
(2) Post-Installation Lighting Set-up
B. GTX-330 (S/N’s 4636349 and up.)
A Garmin GTX-330 Transponder is installed as standard equipment. Maintenance of the GTX-330 is
“on condition” only and, with the exception of swapping complete units, should be performed only by
a qualified avionics shop in accordance with the GARMIN GTX-330 Maintenance Manual (Garmin
P/N - 190-00207-02).
Information provided in this manual is intended solely to aid the removal and installation of the GTX-
330 transceiver/display unit, its associated wiring and antenna.
See 39-10-00.
(2) Post-Installation Lighting Set-up
5F9 34-50-00 FebPAGE 5

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(3) Post Installation Setup Procedure (PIR-PPS-60206 REV. H.)
Access the Configuration Mode of the unit by depressing and holding the FUNC key while
applying power to the unit. Release the FUNC key when the display activates. The FUNC key
sequences forward through the configuration pages. The START/STOP key reverses through
the pages, stopping at the Menu page. The CRSR key highlights selectable fields on each
page. When a field is highlighted, the 0-9 keys enter numeric data and the 8 or 9 keys move
through list selections. Press the CRSR key to accept changes. When a field is highlighted,
pressing the FUNC key moves to the next configuration page without saving the changes. To
exit the configuration pages, turn the power off and then turn the unit on again without holding
the FUNC key for normal operation.
NOTE: When the unit it turned on for the first time, or an invalid address is recognized, the
unit will prompt the user to enter a valid aircraft address. See Mode S Address (ICAO
Aircraft Address Code) and FLIGHT ID Entry Page paragraph, below.
(a) Configuration Menu
The JUMP TO menu page provides the capability to select a configuration mode starting
page without having to step through all of the pages. Press the CRSR key and sequence
through to the desired section with the 8 and 9 keys. Jump to the selection by pressing the
CRSR key again with the desired selection highlighted. The FUNC key steps to the next
configuration page, after which the START/STOP key reverses until stopping at the JUMP
TO menu page. Following is a list of selections and their descriptions
SELECTION DESCRIPTION
DIAGNOSTICS Jumps to Gray Code Input Page
DISPLAY/AUDIO Jumps to Audio Volume Page
I/O CONFIG Jumps to ARINC INPUT #1 Page
ACFT CONFIG Jumps to Operation Configuration #1 Page
(b) Refer to Charts 9-15 for required settings on the configuration pages.
CHART 9
VOICE AND VOLUME
Function Selection Description
VOLUME MAX
VOICE MALE
MESSAGE (0-5) Selected Audio Tones and Messages
0= Toggle a continuous tone on and off
1= Attention Tone, precedes voice messages to
attract the pilot’s attention.
2= “Leaving Altitude”, when altitude monitor is
active and the altitude deviation is exceeded.
3= “Traffic”, when a TIS traffic alert is received.
4= “Time Expired”, when the countdown expires.
5= “Traffic Not Available”, when TIS service is not
available or out or range of an operating TIS
MODE S site.
6-9 are not used.
ALTITUDE MONITOR OFF When Altitude Pre-Select is installed.
TONE When Altitude Pre-Select is not installed.
PAGE CHANGE ENABLE
COUNTDOWN TIMER TONE
PAGE 6
Feb 28/07 34-50-00 5F10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 10
DISPLAY MODE AND KEY LIGHTING
DISPLAY MODE AUTO
LEVEL 75
BKLT AUTO
LVL Not Selectable
RSP TIME 4
MIN 8
BKLT SRCE PHOTO
SLOPE 50
OFFSET 50
KEY AUTO
LVL Not Selectable

RSP TIME 4
MIN 5
KEY SRCE 28V
SLOPE 20
OFFSET 30
CONTRAST MODE AUTO
CHART 11
ARINC 429 CONFIGURATION PAGE - STANDARD INSTALLATION (S/N’s 4636001 THRU 4636374)
#1 GTX 330 #2 GTX 330
429 INPUT SPEED DATA SPEED DATA
CHANNEL 1 HIGH GPS/FMS HIGH GPS/FMS
CHANNEL 2 LOW OFF LOW OFF
CHANNEL 4 OFF OFF
429 OUTPUT DATA DATA

CHANNEL 1 OFF OFF
CHANNEL 2 GARMIN W/TIS GARMIN W/TIS
GARMIN W/IHAS GARMIN W/IHAS
5F11 34-50-00 FebPAGE 7

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 12
ARINC 429 CONFIGURATION PAGE - MEGGITT EFIS OPTION (S/N’s 4636349 THRU 4636374)
#1 GTX 330 #2 GTX 330
CHANNEL 1 HIGH GPS/FMS HIGH GPS/FMS
CHANNEL 2 HIGH ADC W/ALT HIGH ADC W/ALT
CHANNEL 4 OFF OFF

CHANNEL 1 OFF OFF
CHANNEL 2 GARMIN W/TIS GARMIN W/TIS
GARMIN W/IHAS GARMIN W/IHAS
CHART 13
ARINC 429 CONFIGURATION PAGE - AVIDYNE ENTEGRA (S/N’s 4636375 AND UP)
#1 GTX 330 #2 GTX 330
CHANNEL 1 LOW GPS/FMS LOW GPS/FMS
CHANNEL 2 HIGH ADC W/ALT HIGH ADC W/ALT
CHANNEL 4 OFF OFF

CHANNEL 1 OFF OFF
CHANNEL 2 “OFF” W/IHAS “OFF” W/IHAS
“GARMIN W/TIS” “GARMIN W/TIS”
W/O IHAS W/O IHAS
CHART 14 CHART 15
RS-232 INPUT AND OUTPUT OPERATION CONFIGURATION
RS-232 CONFIG GTX VS RATE 500
232 INPUT INPUT OUTPUT FORMAT FEET
VFR ID 1200
CHANNEL 1 OFF OFF ALTITUDE ALERT DEVIATION 200
CHANNEL 2 OFF OFF SQUAT SWITCH YES
SENSE LOW
DELAY TIME 24
AUTO FLIGHT TIMER MANUAL
PAGE 8
Feb 28/07 34-50-00 5F12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(c) On the TEMPERATURE Page, select “NO” for SENSOR INSTALLED.

(d) MODE S Address (ICAO Aircraft Address Code) and FLIGHT ID Entry Page
When the unit is turned on for the first time, or an invalid address is recognized, the unit
will prompt the user to enter a valid aircraft address.
NOTE: U.S. registered aircraft ICAO Aircraft Address Code (ADDRESS HEX) is the
“N number” and is displayed as such on the ATC-601. On Non-U.S. registered
aircraft, verify only that the hexadecimal code displayed on ATC-601 matches the
“ADDRESS HEX” code programmed on the GTX-330.
1 U.S. Registered Aircraft
a To highlight the “U.S. Tail #” address field, press the CRSR key one time.
b Enter the registration number using the number keys. Press a key repeatedly to
scroll through the digit/alpha characters for that entry field.
c Press the CRSR key to select the numeric entry field. Enter the next character
as stated in step b , then move onto the next one, repeating the process until
the complete number is entered.
d When finished, press the CRSR key to accept the number entry.
e For entering the Flight ID number, press the CRSR key one time.
f Repeat steps b and c.
g When finished, press the CRSR key to accept the number entry.
2 Non-US Registered Aircraft
a For entering Non-U.S. Aircraft Registration, press the CRSR key one time, then
8 or 9 to select ADDRESS HEX.
b Non-U.S. Aircraft Registry normally supplies a 24 bit binary code, known as the
ICAO Aircraft Code for the Mode S address in lieu of directly entering the N# for
U.S. registered aircraft.
c The GTX 330 only accepts a hexadecimal format for the Non-U.S. Registered
Aircraft, so the 24 bit binary code must be converted to a hexadecimal format.
d Convert the 24 bit binary code to hexadecimal as follows:
1) 24 bit binary code: 11100100011111101101101
2) Separate for hex conversion: 1110 / 0100 / 0111 / 1110 / 1110 / 1101
3) Apply the hexadecimal values found in Chart 16.
E 4 7 E E D
1110/ 0100/ 0111/ 1110/ 1110/ 1101
4) “ADDRESS HEX” = E47EED
CHART 16
HEXADECIMAL CONVERSION
Binary Hexadecimal Decimal Binary Hexadecimal Decimal
/0000 0 0 /1000 8 8
/0001 1 1 /1001 9 9
/0010 2 2 /1010 A 10
/0011 3 3 /1011 B 11
/0100 4 4 /1100 C 12
/0101 5 5 /1101 D 13
/0110 6 6 /1110 E 14
/0111 7 7 /1111 F 15
5F13 34-50-00 FebPAGE 9

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
e Enter the hexadecimal address using the number keys. Press a key repeatedly
to scroll through the digit/alpha characters for that entry field.
f Press the CRSR key to select the numeric entry field. Enter the next character
as stated in step e , then move onto the next one, repeating the process until
the complete number is entered.
g For FLIGHT ID select “CONFIG ENTRY” and enter the Hex code or select
“POWER UP ENTRY”.
h When finished, press the CRSR key to accept the number entry.
(e) On the “MODE S Aircraft Type” Page, select “<15.5k Lb” for AC TYPE, and “<=300 kt” for
MAX AIRSPEED.
(f) When entries are complete, cycle unit power and check for entries.
PAGE 10
Feb 28/07 34-50-00 5F14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
5F15 34-50-00 Feb

PAGE 11
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GRIDS 5F16 THRU 5K18

INTENTIONALLY BLANK
PAGE 12
Feb 28/07 34-50-00 5F16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
APPENDIX
1
GROUND TEST
PROCEDURE
MEGGITT MAGIC
AIR DATA & HEADING REFERENCE SYSTEM
(ADAHRS)
AND
PITOT-STATIC SYSTEM
5K19
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
5K20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
APPENDIX 1
CHAPTER CHAPTER
APP1 - List of 1 Feb 28/07

APP1 1 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07
5 Feb 28/07
6 Feb 28/07
7 Feb 28/07
8 Feb 28/07
9 Feb 28/07
10 Feb 28/07
11 Feb 28/07
12 Feb 28/07
13 Feb 28/07
14 Feb 28/07
15 Feb 28/07
16 Feb 28/07
17 Feb 28/07
18 Feb 28/07
19 Feb 28/07
20 Feb 28/07
21 Feb 28/07
22 Feb 28/07
23 Feb 28/07
24 Feb 28/07
25 Feb 28/07
26 Feb 28/07
5K21 APPENDIX 1 - LOE PAGE 1

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 APPENDIX 1 - LOE 5K22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(PIR-Meggitt/S-TEC Doc. No. 97-9001-001, Rev. 3.)
Ground Test Procedure - Meggitt MAGIC ADAHRS and Pitot-Static System Ground Test Procedure (Sheet 1 of 24)
Meggitt MAGIC Air Data and Heading Reference System (ADAHRS) and Pitot-Static System
5K23 APPENDIX 1 FebPAGE 1
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Ground Test Procedure (Sheet 2 of 24)
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 APPENDIX 1 5K24
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
5L1 APPENDIX 1 FebPAGE 3
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 APPENDIX 1 5L2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
5L9 APPENDIX 1 Feb
PAGE 11
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
5L11 APPENDIX 1 Feb
PAGE 13
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
5L13 APPENDIX 1 Feb
PAGE 15
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
5L15 APPENDIX 1 Feb
PAGE 17
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
5L17 APPENDIX 1 Feb
PAGE 19
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
5L19 APPENDIX 1 Feb
PAGE 21
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
5L21 APPENDIX 1 Feb
PAGE 23
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 24
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
5L23 APPENDIX 1 Feb

PAGE 25
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 26
CARD 6 OF 9
PA-46-350P
(S/N’s 4636001 AND UP)

6A1
Published by

2926 Piper Drive
U.S.A.
Member
General Aviation
6A2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
are as follows:
ORG950712 June 19, 1996 All

PR980101 January 1, 1998 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6
CR981223 December 23, 1998 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6
PR000201 February 1, 2000 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6
PR010515 May 15, 2001 1
CR050730 July 30, 2005 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8
PR060207 February 7, 2006 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8
CR070228* February 28, 2007 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 and 9

02/28/07.
manual.

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 1
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTRODUCTION
CHAPTER CHAPTER


2 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07
5 Feb 28/07
6 Feb 28/07
7 Feb 28/07
8 Feb 28/07
9 Feb 28/07
10 Feb 28/07
11 Feb 28/07
12 Feb 28/07
13 Feb 28/07
14 Feb 28/07
15 Feb 28/07
16 Feb 28/07
Index 1 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07
5 Feb 28/07
6 Feb 28/07
7 Feb 28/07
8 Feb 28/07
9 Feb 28/07
10 Feb 28/07

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTRODUCTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION
General 1 6A9
Effectivity 2 6A10
Pagination 3 6A11
Indexing 3 6A11
INDEX
Index 1 6B1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTRODUCTION

(5-20-00).
2. General
airplane.
correspondence.

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. Effectivity
1995 4636001 thru 4636020 2004 4636349 thru 4636363

1996 4636021 thru 4636076 2005 4636364 thru 4636374
1997 4636077 thru 4636131 2006 4636375 thru 4636399
1998 4636132 thru 4636186 2007 4636400 and up
1999 4636187 thru 4636247
2000 4636248 thru 4636313
2002 4636299, and
4636314 thru 4636338
2003 4636339 thru 4636348

Example:
46 36 001

MODEL CODE

fuel system.
PIPER.
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6. Pagination
with Page 1 (i.e. - 28-40-00, Page 1).
different page.
Example.
9. Indexing
apply.

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Wylie, Texas 75098
P.O. Box 1404
(3) ALTERNATOR:
Airport Complex
P. O. Box 273
(4) AUTOFLIGHT:
Olathe, Kansas 66061-1950 PH: (940) 325-9406
PAGE 4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(5) BATTERY:
(6) BRAKES:
1160 Center Road
Avon, Ohio 44011
(330) 374-3743
FAX: (330) 374-2290
Black Standard
Pneumatic De-Icer
Installation,
Maintenance and
10 Ammon Drive FAX: - (603) 669-0931
or,
55 Old Bedford Road
Lincoln, MA 01773

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

14405 Keil Road NE
(10) ENGINE:
43 Magnolia Ave. #4
20 New King Street
711 Taylor Street
Elyria, Ohio 44036
2600 S. Custer
Wichita, Kansas
(See Brakes, above)
or,
4520 Hampton Rd. FAX: (336) 766-9040
Clemmons, NC 27012
PAGE 6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

2600 Skypark Drive
(18) MAGNETOS:
7575 Baymeadows Way
Olathe, KS 66062
(20) OXYGEN SYSTEM:
2225 Erie Street
Torrance, CA 90504

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Piqua, OH 45356-2634
Propeller
Composite Blade
Propeller Owner’s
Aluminum Blade
Inspection, Repair,
P/N 006-05332-0001
2275 Stanley Ave. FAX: (937) 229-8531
Dayton, Ohio 45404
(26) STARTER:
or,
Granbury, TX 76048
(27) TURBOCHARGER:
Torrance, CA 90505
PAGE 8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(28) VACUUM PUMP:


Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
00 General
10 Time Limits
00 General
10 Jacking

20 Leveling
00 General
10 Towing
20 Taxiing
10 Parking
20 Mooring

12 SERVICING 1I3
00 General
10 Replenishing

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
00 General
20 Painting
00 General
20 Distribution
40 Heating
50 Cooling
22 AUTOFLIGHT 2F11
10 Autopilot
00 General
00 General
30 DC Generation
40 External Power
60 Emergency
20 Extinguishing
00 General
10 Aileron and Tab
20 Rudder and Tab
30 Elevator and Tab
50 Flaps
60 Speedbrakes
PAGE 12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
28 FUEL 3F9
00 General
10 Storage
20 Distribution
40 Indicating
00 General
10 Main
00 General
10 Airfoil
30 Pitot and Static
00 General
50 Steering
33 LIGHTS 4G5
40 Exterior
34 NAVIGATION 5C1
00 General
35 OXYGEN 6C1
10 Crew
20 Passenger

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
37 VACUUM 6C15
00 General
10 Distribution
20 Indicating

51 STRUCTURES 6F1
00 General
70 Repairs
52 DOORS 6G13
10 Passenger/Crew
20 Emergency Exit
30 Cargo
55 STABILIZERS 6H13
00 General
20 Elevator
40 Rudder
56 WINDOWS 6I19
00 General
20 Cabin
30 Door
57 WINGS 6K5
40 Attach Fittings
50 Flight Surfaces
61 PROPELLERS 7C1
20 Controlling
00 General
PAGE 14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
71 POWER PLANT 7D5
00 General
10 Cowling
20 Mounts
70 Engine Drains
10 Distribution
30 Indicating
74 IGNITION 7F5

20 Distribution
10 Power Control
10 Power
20 Temperature
79 OIL 7J3
20 Distribution
30 Indicating
80 STARTING 7J15
10 Cranking
81 TURBINES 7K9
10 Charts


Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

1E23
Ailerons
Balancing: 6L9
Control Column
Installation: 3C24
Control System
Aileron - Rudder
Interconnect: 3D7
Control Cables: 3D2
Installation: 3D3
Wiring: 4C8 4F6
Corrosion Control
Control Wheel C
Wing: 6L3
Installation: 3C21
Installation: 6L7
Tab: 3D5
2D22
Compressor: 2E22
Dipstick: 2E23
Oil Level: 2F1
2E22
Slip Torque: 2F1
Servicing: 2D23
Ambient Temperature
Indication: 2E14
Stand: 2E7
6B1 INDEX FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 INDEX 6B2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

OAT: 9I13 2H19 7J11
6B3 INDEX FebPAGE 3

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Flaps
G Inspection
Warning 6I11
1K5 System: 6C9
PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 INDEX 6B4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Forward: 4H1
6B5 INDEX FebPAGE 5

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
P Propeller Rudder
Pagination: A11
7C11 Control System
Parking: 1G15
Piper
Repair: 7C11 3D13
Pitch Servo: 2G12
Rings: 3K10
Measuring: 3K3
5C11
Installation: 5C12
Pitot Head: 5C18
3K7 Seats
Test: 5C11
Placards: 1G23
Exterior: 1H1
Interior: 1H9
Components: 3I11
R System: 3J9
Limits: 3J4
PAGE 6
Feb 28/07 INDEX 6B6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

6B7 INDEX FebPAGE 7

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Filter: 6D3 Wing
Vertical Fin: 6I11
Y
Yaw Servo: 2G10
W
A11
Weather Radar: 5F1
Weighing: 1F15
Wheels
Bearing Cup: 4F4
Repairs: 4F3
PAGE 8
Feb 28/07 INDEX 6B8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6B9 INDEX FebPAGE 9

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

INTENTIONALLY BLANK
PAGE 10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER
35
OXYGEN
6C1
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6C2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 35
CHAPTER CHAPTER


2 Feb 28/07
35-10-00 1 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07
35-20-00 1 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07
5 Feb 28/07
6 Feb 28/07

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 35 - OXYGEN
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CREW 35-10-00 1 6C7

Fixed Oxygen Generator System 1 6C7
PASSENGER 35-20-00 1 6C9

Description 1 6C9
Fixed Oxygen Generator System 1 6C9
100 Hour Inspection 1 6C9
Removal 2 6C10
Installation 2 6C10

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CREW
Fixed Oxygen Generator System

The oxygen generator system will deliver constant flow upon demand for approximately 15 minutes
(i. e. - long enough for the airplane to be flown to an altitude of 10,000 feet or less).
The pilot’s and copilot’s oxygen generators are located in a tray under the copilot’s seat. A drawer
containing two masks opens inboard. The basic system is the same as that installed for the passengers.
See 35-20-00 for detailed information on removal, installation, and inspection.
6C7 35-10-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 35-10-00 6C8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PASSENGER
1. Description
The chemical oxygen generator system used in this airplane is a single-use system, which will deliver
constant flow upon demand for approximately 15 minutes (i.e. - long enough for the airplane to be flown
to an altitude of 10,000 feet or less) after ignition.
Passenger oxygen is installed in the cabin under the passenger seat directly behind the copilot’s seat,
and contains four masks and two oxygen generators.
The generators are activated individually by removing a mask from the storage drawer and pulling the
lanyard attached to the mask. This action pulls the firing pin allowing the hammer to strike the percussion
cap and ignites the generator. Once activated, the oxygen will continue to flow until the particular
generator is expended. An indicator light is located in the annunciator panel and illuminates whenever
any one of the generators has been activated.
2. Fixed Oxygen Generator System (See Figures 1 and 2.)
PUBLICATIONS.)
Take care when handling the oxygen generators. Even though they are not under high pressure, they do
generate very high temperatures. Inadvertent ignition due to careless handling is to be avoided. The
generators have a percussion cap igniter on one end which must be protected with a plastic cover when
the generator(s) are removed from the mounting tray/drawer. Do not remove this plastic protective cover
until the generator is installed/reinstalled in the mounting tray/drawer and the system is rearmed.
NOTE: Installed generators are normally removed only when expended, damaged, or at the end of their
twelve (12) year service life (as indicated by the date of manufacture on the individual unit
dataplate).
A. 100 Hour Inspection
(1) Turn master switch ON. Inspect the annunciator panel display to ensure “Oxygen” warning light
remains OFF. If warning light is ON, check first for an expended generator. If no generator is
expended, check that the hammer has properly captured the microswitch at each generator
location.
(2) Inspect each firing pin and hammer. If firing pin has been pulled and hammer is in contact with
percussion cap, consider the generator to be expended and replace.
(3) Inspect each percussion cap:
(a) Verify that the plastic protective cover has been removed from each percussion cap. If not,
remove plastic protective cover.
(b) If the normally smooth surface of the percussion cap exhibits any evidence of indentation,
replace the generator.
(4) Check each generator for security within its mounting points.
(5) Check each generator for any obvious physical damage (i.e. - punctures, dents, deep
scratches, etc.). If damage present, replace generator.
CAUTION: DO NOT PULL ON THE LANYARD. THE GENERATOR MAY IGNITE IF THE
LANYARD IS PULLED.
(6) Check lanyard cords for fraying and security at both ends.
6C9 35-20-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Oxygen System Installation

Figure 1
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 35-20-00 6C10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(7) Check oxygen lines for security of connections to mask and generator outlet fitting. Verify that
each mask lanyard and oxygen line are connected to the same generator.
(8) Check the manufacturer’s data plate on each oxygen generator for date of manufacture. If date
is twelve (12) years or older, replace generator.
B. Removal
WARNING: WHEN ACTIVATED, THE EXTERIOR SURFACE OF THE GENERATOR WILL REACH
VERY HIGH TEMPERATURES (UP TO 500° F) UNTIL DEPLETION. IF REMOVING
AN UNEXPENDED GENERATOR, TAKE CARE TO AVOID INADVERTENT
ACTIVATION.
(1) Disconnect the wiring harness and remove the mounting tray/drawer from the aircraft.
(2) Remove the screws (3) securing the heat shield over the generator.
(3) Disconnect the oxygen lines from the generator outlet fitting.
(4) Untie the lanyards from the masks. Retain the sleeves installed over the knots for reuse.
(5) If generator has not been expended, place a plastic protective cover over the percussion cap
and coil and secure the lanyard to ensure the firing pin is not pulled during removal and
handling.
(6) Remove generator from mounting tray/drawer.
C. Installation
NOTE: New generators are delivered from the factory with the lanyards and firing pin installed and
the hammer armed. A plastic protective cover protects the percussion cap from being
ignited if the firing pin is inadvertently pulled during handling.
If the firing pin has been pulled during handling, verify that the generator has not been
expended and then rearm the generator by pulling the hammer back and inserting the
firing pin attached to the end of the lanyard in front of the hammer. Ensure the firing pin
covers at least 2/3 of the hammer.
(1) Place a new generator into position in
the mounting tray/drawer, ensuring
proper indexing of locator pins to the
mounting brackets - i. e. - two down, one
up.
(2) Ensure that the hammer is in contact
with the micro switch.
(3) Connect the oxygen lines to the
generator outlet fitting.
(4) Place the heat shield over the generator.
Verify insertion of the indexing pin in the
heat shield and secure with screws (3).
CAUTION: ENSURE THAT THE
LANYARD AND TUBE
FROM EACH MASK ARE
CONNECTED TO THE
SAME GENERATOR.
(5) Trim lanyard lengths to 30 inches ± 1.
Using a square knot, tie lanyards to the
appropriate masks and cover knots with
sleeves. New Generator Fresh from the Box
Figure 2
6C11 35-20-00 FebPAGE 3

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(6) Coil up each mask and related oxygen line and lanyard and install in the storage compartment
of the mounting tray/drawer.
CAUTION: FAILURE TO REMOVE THE PLASTIC PROTECTIVE COVER FROM THE
PERCUSSION CAP WILL PREVENT THE GENERATOR FROM IGNITING
WHEN THE LANYARD IS PULLED.
(7) Remove the plastic protective cover (see Figure 2) from the percussion cap on the newly
installed generator.
(8) Install mounting tray/drawer in aircraft.
(9) Connect the wiring harness, turn ON the master switch, and verify the annunciator panel
warning light remains out. If not recheck that the hammer has properly captured the
microswitch.
PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 35-20-00 6C12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6C13 35-20-00 FebPAGE 5

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 6
Feb 28/07 35-20-00 6C14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER
37
VACUUM
6C15
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6C16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 37
CHAPTER CHAPTER


2 Feb 28/07
37-00-00 1 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07
5 Feb 28/07
6 Feb 28/07
37-10-00 1 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07
5 Feb 28/07
6 Feb 28/07
7 Feb 28/07
8 Feb 28/07
37-20-00 1 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 37 - VACUUM
TABLE OF CONTENTS
GENERAL 37-00-00 1 6C21

Description 1 6C21
DISTRIBUTION 37-10-00 1 6D3

Hoses and Clamps 1 6D3
Gyro Filter 1 6D3
Vacuum Pump(s) 2 6D4
Inspection 2 6D4
Removal 3 6D5
Installation 3 6D5
Replacing Pump Fittings 3 6D5
Vacuum Regulator(s) 4 6D6
Removal 4 6D6
Installation 4 6D6
Service Tips 4 6D6
Adjustment 4 6D6
INDICATING 37-20-00 1 6D11

Vacuum (Suction) Gauge (S/N’s 4636001 thru 4636020 only) 1 6D11
Service Tips 4 6D11

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GENERAL
1. Description
The vacuum system consists of 2 continuously operating engine-driven dry air pumps; 1 rotating
clockwise and 1 rotating counterclockwise. Either pump can independently support the system. Also
included are two regulators, an air inlet filter, and a manifold that connects the autopilot, pilot's attitude
indicator, cabin pressure controller, vacuum solenoid valve, and optional copilot instruments.
In S/N’s 4636001 thru 4636020 only, a vacuum gauge incorporating two red flow buttons is mounted on
the pilot's instrument panel. When both pumps are operating satisfactorily, neither flow button is visible.
The left flow button will protrude should the clockwise rotating pump fail. The right flow button will
protrude should the counterclockwise rotating pump fail. The total vacuum pressure, which is displayed
on the vacuum gauge, is normally regulated between 4.8 and 5.2 inches of mercury (in. Hg).
In S/N’s 4636021 and up, the vacuum gauge has been incorporated into the Transicoil Electronic Module
Instrument System (see 77-40-00). A transducer mounted on the rear of the forward pressure bulkhead
provides input to the Vacuum Pressure Indicator (VAC) which is co-located with the Cylinder Head
Temperature (CHT) indicator The VAC indicator provides an analog display in the 3.0 - 6.0 in. HG range.
Normal operating pressures are between 4.5 - 5.2 in. hg. or 4.8 - 5.2 in. hg, depending on the gauge
installed in the particular aircraft. Vacuum pressure may also be displayed digitally on the Quad Digital
Indicator/Enhanced Digital Indicator by pressing the function switch next to the analog display.
If aircraft is equipped with a pneumatic deicing system, refer also to 30-10-00.
2. Troubleshooting
See Chart 1.
6C21 37-00-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
COUNTER CLOCKWISE
CLOCKWISE ROTATING ROTATING VACUUM PUMP
VACUUM PUMP
VACUUM
PRESSURE
SWITCH
FIREWALL
VACUUM REGULATOR
AIR INLET FILTER
PRESSURE BULKHEAD
TO CABIN
PRESSURE
SYSTEM
INSTRUMENT VACUUM MANIFOLD/

PANEL CHECK VALVE
CABIN CO-PILOTS
PRESSURE AIR DRIVEN
CONTROLLER GYROS
(OPTIONAL)
VACUUM GAUGE
C AIRCRAFT
L
ATTITUDE GYRO
89680 AJ
Effectivity Vacuum System

PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 37-00-00 6C22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
COUNTER CLOCKWISE
VACUUM PUMP
VACUUM
PRESSURE
SWITCH
FIREWALL
VACUUM REGULATOR
AIR INLET FILTER
VACUUM
PRESSURE BULKHEAD
TRANSDUCER
TO CABIN
PRESSURE
SYSTEM
INSTRUMENT VACUUM MANIFOLD/

PANEL CHECK VALVE
PILOT’S ATTITUDE GYRO CO-PILOTS

AIR DRIVEN
GYROS
CABIN (OPTIONAL)
PRESSURE CONTROLLER
C AIRCRAFT
L
VACUUM GAUGE
(Located in EMIS stack)
89680 AJ
Vacuum System Effectivity

6C23 37-00-00 FebPAGE 3

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
COUNTER CLOCKWISE
VACUUM PUMP
FIREWALL
VACUUM VACUUM REGULATOR

PRESSURE
SWITCH
AIR INLET FILTER
PRESSURE BULKHEAD
TO CABIN
PRESSURE
SYSTEM
VACUUM MANIFOLD/
CHECK VALVE
VACUUM TRANSDUCER
C AIRCRAFT
L
89680 AJ
Effectivity Vacuum System

PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 37-00-00 6C24
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TROUBLESHOOTING VACUUM SYSTEM
(for S/N’s 4636021 thru 4636374, see also Chart 1 in 77-40-00)
Attitude gyro(s) not receiving Filter clogged or dirty. Clean or replace filter.
sufficient vacuum for proper
operation. Low reading on Line from gyro to filter Check line.
vacuum gauge. restricted.
No vacuum gauge indication, Faulty gauge. Replace gauge.
but gyro instrument(s) operating
satisfactorily.
Low vacuum system Filter dirty. Clean or replace filter.
pressure indicated by low
reading on vacuum gauge. Vacuum regulator valve Adjust regulator valve in
incorrectly adjusted. accordance with
Adjustments in this section.
Line from gyros to filter Repair or replace line.
restricted.
Line between pumps and Check all lines and
manifold, or between gyros fittings.
and manifold leaking.
In S/N’s 4636001 thru 4636020
only:
Vacuum gauge reading 4.8 to Clockwise rotating vacuum Replace lower vacuum
5.2 in. Hg, but left red button pump inoperative. pump.
on gauge protruding
or
Vacuum gauge reading 4.8 to Counterclockwise rotating Replace upper vacuum
5.2 in. Hg, but right red vacuum pump inoperative. pump.
button on gauge protruding.
Zero vacuum gauge reading. Both pumps faulty. Replace pumps.
Both red buttons protruding. Faulty vacuum pressure switch. Replace switch.
Normal pressure indication, Faulty instrument. Replace instrument.
but sluggish operation
of instruments.
High system pressure. Vacuum regulator Adjust regulator.
Vacuum regulator sticking Clean and check operation
or dirty screen. of regulator.
6D1 37-00-00 FebPAGE 5

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TROUBLESHOOTING VACUUM SYSTEM
(for S/N’s 4636021 thru 4636374, see also Chart 1 in 77-40-00)
Regulator cannot be adjusted Lines leaking. Check lines and fittings.
to produce correct
pressure. Vacuum pump(s) malfunctioning. Replace pump(s).
Vacuum correct on ground, Vacuum pump(s) malfunctioning. Replace pump(s).
but will not maintain pressure
at altitude. Regulator sticky. Clean regulator.
Vacuum correct, but pilot Regulator sticky. Clean regulator.
reports pressure erratic or
shows complete loss in flight. Oil in pump due to leaky Replace pump.
engine seal or cleaning fluid
blown into pump while
cleaning engine.
Pressure can only be maintained Leak in system. Repair or replace lines.
at full throttle on ground.
Worn pump. Replace pump.
Stuck regulator. Clean or replace regulator.
Gauge indication Foreign matter on Raise regulator(s)
follows engine rpm. regulator(s) seat. diaphragm with thin, blunt
tool (tongue depresser).
Remove the contaminant.
Reset regulator. If no
foreign matter is present
on the regulator seat, test
regulator function.
PAGE 6
Feb 28/07 37-00-00 6D2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
DISTRIBUTION
The following information is intended to acquaint field service personnel with a means to diagnose
vacuum system service symptoms on those components which are serviced by removal and
replacement. These items include hoses, clamps, gyro filters. vacuum regulating valves, and vacuum
gauges.
1. Hoses and Clamps
A. These items should be examined periodically and inspected carefully whenever maintenance
activities cause hose disconnections to be made at the pumps, manifold, regulators, tube
assemblies, gyros and/or vacuum gauge.
B. Ends of hoses should be examined for rubber separation and slivers of rubber on inside
diameter of hoses. These slivers can and do become detached. If this happens, the vacuum
pump(s) will suck in the loose particles and eventually ingest them. This can cause pump failure.
C. Replace old, hard, cracked or brittle hose. Sections of the inner layers may separate, causing pump
failure.
D. Ensure hoses are clear and clean by blowing them out with shop air. Remove from aircraft as
required.
CAUTION: DO NOT WIGGLE HOSE FROM SIDE TO SIDE DURING INSTALLATION. WIGGLING
COULD CAUSE PARTICLES TO BE CUT FROM INNER WALL OF HOSE WHICH
WOULD DAMAGE THE PUMP.
E. Where hose clearance is tight, making it difficult to reinstall it onto a fitting or barb, spray the fitting
or barb with silicone. Let dry, then install hose by pushing it straight on.
CAUTION: WHEN REPLACING ANY OF THE THREADED FITTINGS, DO NOT USE PIPE
DOPE, THREADLUBE, OR TAPE. PIPE DOPE / TAPE PARTICLES INGESTED BY
THE VACUUM PUMP COULD CAUSE THE PUMP TO FAIL. USE ONLY SILICONE
SPRAY, LETTING IT DRY BEFORE ASSEMBLY.
F. Hose clamps and fittings should be replaced when broken, damaged or corroded.
2. Gyro Filter
A. Gyro filters must be serviced on a scheduled basis, not to exceed 100 hours, or sooner as condition
indicates.
B. The system installation employs a large central filter and differential vacuum gauge that
continuously monitors the filter condition while indicating vacuum readings.
NOTE: A decline in panel gauge reading indicates the filter is becoming clogged. Filters should be
replaced when gauge reading declines; DO NOT adjust regulator(s).
6D3 37-10-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. Vacuum Pump(s)
Two (2) engine-driven dry-air pumps are mounted on the accessory section at the rear of the engine.
Each vacuum pump is a rotary vane, positive displacement type. These units consist of an aluminum
housing, a carbon rotor and carbon vanes. They are driven by means of a coupling mated to an engine-
driven gear assembly.
A. Inspection (See Figure 1.)
NOTE: Aero Accessories (Tempest) Dry Air (Vacuum) Pumps are factory installed in S/N’s
4636339 & up, and as service replacements. The following inspection applies only to those
pumps.
The vacuum pump(s) feature a wear indicator inspection port on the back cover which allows direct
observation of pump vane wear. Beginning at 500 hours time-in-service, and each 100 hours
thereafter, remove the inspection port plug and observe vane wear as shown in Figure 1.
(1) As the vanes wear, they slide outboard in the vane slots in the rotor.
(2) When the portion of the vane that can be observed in the inspection hole covers approximately
1/8 TH of the inspection hole, replace the pump.
Vacuum Pump Vane Wear Inspection

Figure 1
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 37-10-00 6D4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B. Removal
(1) Remove engine cowling. (Refer to Chapter 71.)
(2) Loosen hose clamp and remove hose from pump fittings.
(3) Remove four retaining nuts, lock washers and plain washers used to secure pump to engine;
then remove pump.
C. Installation
NOTE: Change the vacuum system filter when installing a new pump.
(1) If required, install fittings on pump per Replacing Pump Fittings, below.
CAUTION: ONLY PUMP MOUNTING GASKET AUTHORIZED AND APPROVED FOR USE
ON AIRBORNE VACUUM PUMP IS AIRBORNE GASKET B3-1-2, PIPER PART
NUMBER 751-859. USE OF ANY OTHER GASKET MAY RESULT IN OIL
SEEPAGE OR LEAKAGE AT MOUNTING SURFACE.
(2) Place pump gasket in its proper place and align spline on pump drive with spline on engine
drive assembly.
(3) Secure pump to engine with four plain washers, lock washers and retaining nuts. Torque nuts
50 to 70 inch-pounds.
(4) Connect hoses to pump and secure with hose clamps.
(5) Reinstall engine cowling.
D. Replacing Pump Fittings
CAUTION: WHEN REPLACING ANY OF THE THREADED FITTINGS, DO NOT USE PIPE
DOPE, THREADLUBE, OR TAPE. PIPE DOPE / TAPE PARTICLES INGESTED BY
THE VACUUM PUMP COULD CAUSE THE PUMP TO FAIL. USE ONLY SILICONE
SPRAY, LETTING IT DRY BEFORE ASSEMBLY.
(1) Before installing any fittings on pump, check for any external damage. A pump that has been
damaged or dropped should not be installed.
CAUTION: DO NOT APPLY VISE PRESSURE TO OUTSIDE DIAMETER OR OVERALL
LENGTH OF PUMP.
(2) When a vise is used to hold pump while installing fittings, suitable caution must be exercised to
avoid pump damage. Square mounting flange must be held between soft wood blocks and only
at right angles to vise jaws. Use only enough vise pressure to hold pump firmly.
(3) The ports of AIRBORNE pumps have been treated with a dry film lubricant and AIRBORNE
fittings are cadmium plated thus eliminating any need for thread lubricants. If thread lubricant is
required, use only a silicone spray. Apply sparingly to external threads of fittings only and let
dry before assembly.
6D5 37-10-00 FebPAGE 3

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4. Vacuum Regulator(s)
Two (2) vacuum regulators are incorporated in the system to control vacuum pressure to gyro
instruments. The regulators are located above the overhead trim panel in the forward baggage
compartment.
A. Removal
(1) Remove inlet hose from aft side of valve.
(2) Remove outlet hose from forward side of valve.
(3) Remove nut that secures valve to firewall.
(4) Pull valve rearward out of firewall.
B. Installation
(1) Insert valve into hole in rear of firewall.
(2) Secure valve to firewall with nut.
(3) Attach inlet hose to forward fitting of valve.
(4) Attach outlet hose to aft fitting of valve.
C. Service Tips
(1) The vacuum regulating valve seldom needs replacement. Symptoms that suggest replacement
are:
(a) Chatter as indicated by rapid fluctuation of the vacuum gauge needle or an audible sound.
(b) Non-repeatability of the vacuum gauge reading when the panel gauge is not suspect or
has been checked against a known test gauge (cruise rpm only).
(2) All modes of regulator malfunction tend to increase the vacuum power applied to the gyros.
Thus, although excess vacuum is applied, a loss of vacuum does not occur.
(3) The gyros themselves act as a limiting device to keep the vacuum power applied from
exceeding safe levels.
NOTE: If the panel gauge has been checked and found “OK” and the vacuum gauge reading
does not repeat within the normal operating range as marked on the gauge, then the
regulating valve should be changed. Observe the usual precautions for maintaining
system cleanliness to avoid premature pump service.
D. Adjustment
NOTE: Do not reset the regulator until the filter and lines have been checked
(1) Disconnect inlet line going to one of the vacuum regulator valves.
(2) Wrap or cap the end of line with a clean, porous cloth to prevent foreign matter and debris from
NOTE: Do not attempt to adjust these valves with the engine in operation without a qualified
pilot or other responsible person at the controls of the airplane.
(3) Start the engine, allow it to warm up and run the engine at magneto check rpm.
(4) While running the engine at magneto check rpm, the suction gauge (or vacuum pressure
indicator) should indicate within the normal operating range as marked on the gauge. If the
reading is not in this range, shut down the engine and adjust the valve. (Turn the valve
adjustment screw clockwise to increase pressure and counterclockwise to decrease pressure.)
(5) Start the engine and repeat the check.
(6) After the system has been properly adjusted, bend the locking tabs on the valve down over the
adjustment screw.
PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 37-10-00 6D6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(7) Uncap the line that goes to the vacuum regulator valve and connect it to the valve.
(8) Disconnect line going to the other vacuum regulator valve.
(9) Wrap or cap the end of line with a clean, porous cloth to prevent foreign matter and debris from
(10) Repeat Steps (3) through (7).
6D7 37-10-00 FebPAGE 5

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 6
Feb 28/07 37-10-00 6D8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6D9 37-10-00 FebPAGE 7

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 8
Feb 28/07 37-10-00 6D10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INDICATING
Vacuum (Suction) Gauge (S/N’s 4636001 thru 4636020 only.)

NOTE: S/N’s 4636021 and up incorporate Integrated Engine Instrumentation Systems. Refer to Section
77-40-00 for more information.
The vacuum (suction) gauge is mounted on the left-hand side of the instrument panel. This gauge is
calibrated in inches of mercury, and indicates the amount of vacuum created by the engine-driven
vacuum pumps. The total vacuum pressure, which is displayed on the vacuum gauge, is normally
regulated between 4.8 and 5.2 inches of mercury (in. Hg).
The vacuum gauge also incorporates two red flow buttons. When both pumps are operating satisfactorily,
neither flow button is visible. The left flow button will protrude should the clockwise (lower) rotating pump
fail. The right flow button will protrude should the counterclockwise (upper) rotating pump fail.
If the system filter becomes clogged or, as the lines become obstructed, the gauge will show a decrease
in pressure. Do not reset the regulator until the filter and lines have been checked. Should the vacuum
pressure from any one pump fall below the minimum pressure required, its red button will protrude from
the instrument face.
Service Tips
(1) The suction gauge seldom requires service and usually is replaced when malfunctions occur.
NOTE: Suction gauge failure in a properly operating vacuum system does not impair safety of
flight.
NOTE: Two different models of vacuum gauge may be installed in PA-46-350P airplanes. One
is marked with a normal operating range of 4.8 to 5.2 in. hg. and the other is marked
with a normal operating range of 4.5 to 5.2 in. hg. The vacuum system in a particular
airplane should be adjusted to operate in the pressure range indicated on the gauge
installed in that aircraft.
(2) If the suction gauge malfunctions in a manner to cause an incorrect reading in normal cruise
conditions, the gauge must be checked by comparing the reading with a gauge of known
accuracy. If the gauge is indicating correct values and the system vacuum level is not in
accordance with the specified vacuum, then, and only then, should the regulator be reset.
(3) Visual examination of the gauge performance should cover the following steps:
(a) With engine stopped and no vacuum supplied to the gauge, its pointer should rest against
the internal stop in the 9 o’clock position. Any displacement from this position suggests
need for replacement.
(b) A slight overshoot during engine start-up, not to exceed half an inch of Hg. (1/2 in. of
mercury, is normal and is not cause, to replace gauge)
(c) The gauge should read in the normal operating range as marked on the vacuum gauge
with engine operating at normal cruise rpm.
(d) At 1,200 rpm, the vacuum gauge reading should be more than four inches of mercury.
6D11 37-20-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 37-20-00 6D12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER
39
ELECTRICAL /
ELECTRONIC PANELS
6D13
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6D14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 39
CHAPTER CHAPTER
39 - List of 1 Feb 28/07

39 - Table of Contents 1 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07
39-10-00 1 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07
5 Feb 28/07
6 Feb 28/07
7 Feb 28/07
8 Feb 28/07
9 Feb 28/07
10 Feb 28/07
11 Feb 28/07
12 Feb 28/07
39-20-00 1 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07
5 Feb 28/07
6 Feb 28/07
7 Feb 28/07
8 Feb 28/07
9 Feb 28/07
10 Feb 28/07
11 Feb 28/07
12 Feb 28/07
6D15 39 - LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES PAGE 1

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 39 - LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES 6D16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 39 - ELECTRICAL / ELECTRONIC PANELS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INSTRUMENT AND CONTROL PANELS 39-10-00 1 6D19

General 1 6D19
Face-Mounted Instruments 1 6D19
Removal 1 6D19
Installation 3 6D21
Rack-Mounted Avionics 3 6D21
Removal 3 6D21
Installation 3 6D21
Circuit Breaker Panels 3 6D21
Switch Panels 7 6E1
ACCESSORY COMPARTMENTS 39-20-00 1 6E7

Electrical Shelf and Panels 1 6E7
6D17 39 - CONTENTS FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 39 - CONTENTS 6D18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INSTRUMENT AND CONTROL PANELS
1. General
A. Face-Mounted Instruments
Most instruments are face-mounted and secured to the instrument panel by screws from the front of
the panel. Most instruments are removed out the back of the panel, but a few are removed through
the front of the panel. Take special care when any operation pertaining to the instruments is
performed.
(1) Removal
(a) Disconnect the plumbing and / or electrical connectors from the back of the instrument.
Where two or more lines connect to an instrument, identify and tag each line to facilitate
installation. Attach a dust cap to each fitting.
NOTE: For those instruments which remove through the front of the panel, disconnecting
and tagging plumbing and / or electrical connectors can be done after the
instrument retaining screws are removed and the instrument is slid gently forward
to expose the connections at the rear.
(b) Remove the screws that secure the instrument in the panel cutout.
(c) Remove the instrument from the panel.
OVERHEAD SWITCH PANEL

(S/N'S 4636021 AND UP)
GLARESHIELD
TRANSICOIL EMIS STACK AVIONICS PANEL

(S/N'S 4636021 THRU 4636374)
COPILOT'S
PILOT'S INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT PANEL
AFT CIRCUIT
BREAKER PANEL
FORWARD CIRCUIT O
P
E
N
P
O
W
E
R
L
E
V
E
R
S
I
N
C
R
P
R
O
P
E
L
E
H
I
G
H
I
D
L
E
L
O
W
COPILOT'S CIRCUIT
BREAKER PANEL
I
BREAKER PANEL
D R I
L
E D
L
R E
E
V
E
R S
S T
E O
T P
H
E
R
TIE BUS PANEL TIE BUS PANEL

(S/N'S 4636001 THRU 4636374) (S/N'S 4636375 AND UP)
Flight Deck View

Figure 1
6D19 39-10-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TIE BUS (S/N's 4636001 THRU 4636020 ONLY)

CIRCUIT BREAKER PANEL
Instrument Panel Installations (Typical)

Figure 2
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 39-10-00 6D20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(2) Installation
(a) Place the instrument in its proper panel cutout and secure with screws.
NOTE: For those instruments which install through the front of the panel, connecting
plumbing and / or electrical connectors can be done from the front of the panel
before the instrument retaining screws are installed. After the connections are
secure, slide the instrument into place and install the retaining screws.
(b) Connect the plumbing and/or electrical connectors to back of instrument.
(c) Check instrument operation.
B. Rack-Mounted Avionics
Most avionics are rack-mounted front-removable units generally secured to the instrument panel
tray/rack by a single jackscrew located in the center of their faceplate.
(1) Removal
(a) Insert an appropriate size (generally 3/32 inch) allen wrench into the jackscrew access
hole in the faceplate.
(b) Unscrew the jackscrew in a counterclockwise direction.
(c) Slide the avionics unit aft and out of the instrument panel tray/rack.
(2) Installation
NOTE: Inspect the front of the panel-mounted avionics tray/rack to verify it is not significantly
inset from the panel. If so, correct the tray/rack installation before proceeding.
NOTE: The high insertion forces required to seat a unit with "high density" connectors tend to
limit the effectiveness of the first seating attempt. Accordingly, the following procedure
requires sequential applications of force, and subsequent tightening of the jackscrew,
to ensure all connectors seat properly.
(a) Slide the avionics unit into the instrument panel rack and forward applying a moderate
insertion force.
(b) Insert an appropriate size (generally 3/32 inch) allen wrench into the jackscrew access
hole in the faceplate and tighten to remove any slack, but do not try to "pull" unit into place
with the jackscrew.
(c) Apply additional insertion force to front of unit.
(d) Tighten jackscrew again.
(e) Apply additional insertion force to front of unit.
(f) Finish tightening jackscrew.
(g) Ensure that bezel is "tight" against panel.
2. Circuit Breaker Panels (See Figure 3.)
Circuit breakers are installed on both the pilot’s and copilot’s side. Should a circuit breaker be replaced or
added, exercise extreme caution ensuring the breakers are in proper mechanical alignment, any
insulators that are called out are installed correctly, and all electrical wiring and connections meet
aviation standards. Do not deviate from the parts manual requirements when replacing circuit breakers.
6D21 39-10-00 FebPAGE 3

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Screw
Circuit Breaker
Placard
Screw
Profile View
Circuit Breaker Panel
PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 39-10-00 6D22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EMERG L BOOST R BOOST FUEL FUEL ELEC ENGINE ENGINE

FUEL PUMPS QTY FLOW TAC GAUGES MONITOR
ENGINE SYSTEMS
TURN STANDBY LANDING GEAR HYDRAULIC PUMP STALL FUEL

COORD VAC INDICATION WARNING CONTROL POWER WARN. MGT
FLIGHT SYSTEMS
ALTERNATOR MAP FLAP FLAP HOUR

NO 1 NO 2 LIGHT MOTOR WARN METER
CABIN ENGINE COPILOT CABIN CABIN AIR CONDITIONING

PRESS START TURN LIGHTS FANS CONTROL POWER
DUMP COORD
Front View
(Typical Pilot's Fwd Panel Shown)
Circuit Breaker Panel

6D23 39-10-00 FebPAGE 5

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 6
Feb 28/07 39-10-00 6D24
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. Switch Panels
NOTE: This airplane uses lighted switches which snap in from the front of the instrument panel and
overhead switch panels.
In S/N’s 4636001 thru 4636020, switches are of the rocker type and are mounted in the instrument
panel.
In S/N’s 4636021 thru 4636131, switches are of the rocker type and are mounted in the instrument panel
and in overhead switch panels.
In S/N’s 4636132 and up, most switches are of the rocker type and are mounted in the instrument panel
and in overhead switch panels. The Environmental / Deice switch panel (see Figure 4), however, is a
sealed unit.
A. Rocker-type Electrical Switches
(1) Removal
(a) Gain access to the switch from behind the instrument panel or overhead switch panel. If
switch is in an overhead switch panel, gain access by removing four screws which attach
the panel to the cockpit overhead panel.
(b) Squeeze retainer blades on top and bottom of the switch together and push switch from
the panel.
(c) Make note of the placement of wires on the switch to facilitate installation.
(d) Disconnect wires from the switch. Remove switch.
(2) Installation
(a) Connect wires to switch.
(b) Push switch into the panel. Squeeze retainer blades on top and bottom of the switch
together, if required.
(c) If switch is in an overhead switch panel, reinstall overhead switch panel with four screws.
B. Environmental / Deice Switch Panel (S/N’s 4636132 and up)
The Environmental / Deice Switch Panel in these airplanes is a front-mounted sealed unit which
can not be repaired in the field.
(1) Removal
(a) Unscrewing the four (4) #4 socket head cap screws and remove.
(b) Pull the unit out of the instrument panel enough to access the connectors attaching the
unit to the wiring harness.
(c) Note arrangement of the connectors for re-installation. Disconnect the wiring harness and
remove the unit.
(2) Installation
(a) Connect the wiring harness and position the unit in the instrument panel.
(b) Secure with the four (4) #4 socket head cap screws.
6E1 39-10-00 FebPAGE 7

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Effectivity Environmental / Deice Switch Panel

4636132 thru 4636374 Figure 4
PAGE 8
Feb 28/07 39-10-00 6E2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Tie Bus Panel Connections

Figure 5
6E3 39-10-00 FebPAGE 9

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 10
Feb 28/07 39-10-00 6E4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6E5 39-10-00 Feb

PAGE 11
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 12
Feb 28/07 39-10-00 6E6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ACCESSORY COMPARTMENTS
Electrical Shelf and Panels

The electrical panel is installed vertically under the floor of the forward baggage compartment, located
outside the forward pressure bulkhead. This panel should be unplugged from the aircraft harness for
service due to the tight quarters involved, and to prevent unnecessary tugging on the electrical cable
pressure seal where it passes through the pressure bulkhead.
89802 AA
104410 E SPKR CIG
AMP LIGHTER COMM
A A COURTESY
CLOCK LIGHTS STEREO
External
Power
Contactor
K403
VIEW A-A
Start
Contactor
Current
Limiter
F401
Current
Limiter
F409
K404
Battery
Master
Contactor
LOOKING INBOARD FROM LEFT,

UNDER THE FORWARD
X1 X2
BAGGAGE COMPARTMENT FLOOR
A1 K401 A2
Electrical Shelf (Typical) Effectivity

6E7 39-20-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
105134 A
SPKR CIG
AMP LIGHTER COMM
A A COURTESY
CLOCK LIGHTS STEREO
K403
EXT
PWR
CONTACTOR
VIEW A-A
K404
START
CONTACTOR
K401
BATTERY MSTR
CONTACTOR
LOOKING INBOARD FROM LEFT,

UNDER THE FORWARD
X1 X2
BAGGAGE COMPARTMENT FLOOR
A1 A2
Effectivity Electrical Shelf (Typical)

PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 39-20-00 6E8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
104310 B
104088 NEW
89799 F
FLASHER ASSY. PANEL

(S/N'S 4636248 AND UP)
F.S.
108.00
ANNUNCIATOR
DIMMING
ASSY.
CURRENT SENSOR CURRENT SENSOR

(S/N'S 4636021 THRU 4636247 ONLY) F.S.
117.00
START START
VIBRATOR RELAY
STARTING VIBRATOR ASSY.

COVER
Relay Installation - Pilot’s Side Effectivity

Figure 2 4636001 thru 4636186
6E9 39-20-00 FebPAGE 3

28/07
Feb 28/07
PAGE 4
104310 B FLAP CONTROL CABLE (REF.)
104088 NEW
89799 F
101309 F PANEL
39-20-00
F.S.
108.00
J317
P317
GROUND
(MAIN HARN.) STRAP *
K1 thru K8 Relay Installation - Co-Pilot’s Side
K2 K1 K6 K3
DAY/NIGHT
TERMINAL
ANNUN.
PTT
GROUND
CLEAR.
ANNUN.
INOP
K4

BOARD STALL
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FAIL

EMERGENCY GEAR RELEASE CABLE

(REF.)
F.S.
117.00 (MAIN HARN.)
K8* K7 K5 P3 TO SB-J3
SPEEDBRAKE LOGIC CONTROL SQUAT SQUAT LANDING
SW NO. 2 SW NO. 1 LIGHT P2 TO SB-J2
RELAY RELAY GROUND
J1 TO SB-P1 STRAP *
6E10
WITH SPEEDBRAKE OPTION

(IN S/N'S 4636187 & UP) * S/N'S 4636299 AND 4636314 & UP.
COVER
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
K1 thru K8 Relay Installation - Co-Pilot’s Side Effectivity
6E11 39-20-00 FebPAGE 5
28/07
Feb 28/07
PAGE 6
4636187 thru 4636247

Effectivity
101305 E/G SHT 1
25 27 29 31 32 3 4 5 13 1110 1 14 21 23 22 24 2 8 26 20 19 28 6 9 7 J317
39-20-00
TO R317
N.C.

1 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
2 TO R329
N.O.
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3 4 3 4 6

3 4 5 6 7 8 5 7 8
TO R329
C. TO
5 5 9 10 11 12
6 6 5 6 9 10 11 12 TERMINAL
COIL BOARD
A B A B A B A B A B
TO R317
K4 K3 K6 K1 K2
IN2071A DIODE
(6 REQ.) RESISTOR (CHT SCANNER LIGHTS DIMMING)
RESISTOR (SPEEDBRAKE ANNUN DIMMING)
TO K2-5
R317
R329
TERMINAL
BOARD
TO K2-1
TO K2-3
TO K2-7
6E12
6E13
101305 E/G SHT 2
25 27 29 31 32 15 12 3 4 5 131110 1 14 21 23 22 24 2 8 26 20 1928 6 7 J317
RESISTOR
TO
TERMINAL
BOARD
TO R317
N.C.
1 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
2 TO R329
TERMINAL
N.O.
BOARD
3 4 3 4 3 4 5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8
C.
TO
5 6 5 6 5 6 9 10 11 12 9 10 11 12
COIL

A B A B A B A B A B
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

TO R317
K4 K3 K6 K1 K2
IN2071A DIODE
(6 REQ.)
RESISTOR (CHT SCANNER LIGHTS DIMMING)

39-20-00 FebPAGE
TO K2-5
TO J317-15 TO J317-3
4636248 thru 4636374
R317
R329
IN4719 DIODE (2 REQ.)
TO J317-12 TO J317-12
TO K2-1
TO K2-3
TO K2-7
Effectivity
TERMINAL
BOARD
28/07
7
Feb 28/07
PAGE 8
4636375 and up
Effectivity
101305 G/G SHT 3
25 27 29 31 32 15 12 3 4 5 13 1110 1 14 21 23 22 2 8 26 20 19 28 6 7 J317
39-20-00
TO
TERMINAL RESISTOR
BOARD
TO TERMINAL BOARD
TO R317
N.C.

1 2 1 2 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
1 2
N.O.
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3 4 3 4 5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8

3 4
C.
5 6 5 6 5 6 9 10 11 12 9 10 11 12
COIL
A B A B A B A B A B
TO R317
K4 K3 K6 K1 K2
IN2071A DIODE
(6 REQ.)
TO J317-15 TO K2-5
TO J317-3
R317
IN4719 DIODE (2 REQ.)
TO J317-12
TO J317-12
TO K2-1
TERMINAL
6E14
BOARD
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
J387 89896 E
10
11
1 2 1 2
12 3 4 4
3
13 6 6
5 5
8 K7 K5
A B A B

6E15 39-20-00 FebPAGE 9

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
J387 89896 F
15
16
14
10
11
1 2 4 1 2
3
12 5 7 8 4
6 3
13 11 12 6
9 10 5
8 K7 K5
A B

PAGE 10
Feb 28/07 39-20-00 6E16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
MIL-W-81044/12/18/9
COM.
N.O.
N.C.
B
2
K5
4
3
5
3
A
5
7
2
1
12
4
8
11
3
K7
7
14 16
10
2
6
5
9
1
9
12 11 10
13
8
23
12
24
4
8
11
3
K8
18
10
2
6
17
9
20
COM.
N.O.
N.C.
J387
1N2071A DIODE
104311 A/B
Figure 3 (Sheet 8 of 8) 4636299, 4636314 and up
6E17 39-20-00 Feb
PAGE 11
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GRIDS 6E18 THRU 6E24

INTENTIONALLY BLANK
PAGE 12
Feb 28/07 39-20-00 6E18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER
51
STRUCTURES
6F1
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6F2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 51
CHAPTER CHAPTER


2 Feb 28/07
51-00-00 1 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07
51-10-00 1 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07
5 Feb 28/07
6 Feb 28/07
7 Feb 28/07
8 Feb 28/07
51-70-00 1 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07
5 Feb 28/07
6 Feb 28/07
7 Feb 28/07
8 Feb 28/07
9 Feb 28/07
10 Feb 28/07
11 Feb 28/07
12 Feb 28/07
13 Feb 28/07
14 Feb 28/07
51-80-00 1 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 51 - STRUCTURES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
GENERAL 51-00-00 1 6F7
INVESTIGATION, CLEANUP
AND AERODYNAMIC SMOOTHNESS 51-10-00 1 6F11
Corrosion Control 1 6F11
Forms of Corrosion 1 6F11
Conditions Affecting Corrosion 1 6F11
Inspection 3 6F13
Corrosion Removal and Control 3 6F13
Corrosion Prone Areas 4 6F14
REPAIRS 51-70-00 1 6F19

Fiberglass Repairs 1 6F19
Touch-up and Surface Repairs 1 6F19
Fracture and Patch Repairs 2 6F20
Thermoplastic Repairs 3 6F21
Pressure Sensitive Safety Walk Installation 10 6G4
Metal Wire Stitch Repair 11 6G5
ELECTRICAL BONDING 51-80-00 1 6G9

General 1 6G9
100 Hour Inspection 1 6G9
On Condition Inspection 1 6G9

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GENERAL
9 11
15 9 11 6
8 6
15
11 11 5
5 6 11 6 11
5
6 15
10 9
1
11
6 15 11 9
12 9
6 15
15
5 11
10 6 11 11
5 7 11 5
6
11
9
10
NUMBER MATERIAL THICKNESS
1 2024-0 .020
2 2024-0 .025
3 2024-0 .032
4 2024-0 .040
5 2024-0* .025
6 2024-0* .032
7 2024-0* .040
8 2024-0* .063
9 2024-T3 .020
10 2024-T3 .025
11 2024-T3 .032
12 2024-T3 .040
13 2024-T3* .040
14 5052-H34 .025
15 FIBERGLASS
16 2024-T3 .016
* HEAT TREAT TO T42
Skin Material Specifications

6F7 51-00-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
15
15
6 11 11 11
5
9 12 11 11
12 6
9
5 6 6 6
11 11
15 15
4
11
6 11 11
11 11 11
9 10
10 11
9
11
11
11 11
12
11 11
10 10
10 10 10 10
12 12
16 16
11 11
10 10
10 10 10 10
12 12 16
16
Skin Material Specifications

PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 51-00-00 6F8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6F9 51-00-00 FebPAGE 3

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 51-00-00 6F10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INVESTIGATION, CLEANUP AND AERODYNAMIC SMOOTHNESS
Corrosion Control
Corrosion is the deterioration of metal by chemical or electrochemical attack. Water which is allowed to
remain on the aircraft and industrial pollution are the major causes of corrosion in aircraft. The two
general types of corrosion are:
-- Direct chemical attack (i.e. spilled battery acid).
-- Electrochemical attack which requires a medium (usually water).
The latter is the most common and is responsible for most forms of aircraft corrosion.
Since corrosion is a constant threat, the only effective method to control it is a routine of regular
inspection, cleaning, and surface refinishing.
A. Forms of Corrosion (See Chart 1.)
The following are the most common forms of corrosion:
(1) Surface Corrosion appears as a general roughening or pitting on the surface usually
accompanied by a powdery deposit of corrosion products. It may spread under the surface and
not be recognized until the paint or plating is lifted off the surface in small blisters.
(2) Dissimilar Metal Corrosion may occur when two dissimilar metals are contacting each other.
This type may be serious because it usually takes place out of sight. The only way to find it
before structural failure is by disassembly and inspection. Insulating is necessary between two
contacting dissimilar surfaces (2 to 3 coats of zinc chromate on each surface; plus, if one of the
surfaces is magnesium, a 0.003 inch thick piece of vinyl tape).
(3) Intergranular Corrosion is difficult to detect in its early stages. When severe, it causes the
surface of the metal to exfoliate (flake or lift).
(4) Stress Corrosion is the result of sustained tensile stresses and corrosive environment. It
usually occurs in assemblies such as aluminum alloy bellcranks with pressed in bushings;
landing gear shock struts with pipe thread grease fittings, clevis pin joints and shrink fit parts.
(5) Fretting Corrosion takes place when two parts rub together, constantly exposing fresh active
metal to the corrosive effects of the atmosphere.
(6) Filiform Corrosion is the appearance of numerous meandering thread like filaments of
corrosion on the surface of various types of metal.
B. Conditions Affecting Corrosion
Some conditions which affect the occurrence of corrosion are:
(1) Heat and humidity increase corrosion.
(2) Different (i.e. - dissimilar) metals and their relative sizes affect resistance or susceptibility to
corrosion.
(3) Frequent contributing factors to corrosion:
(a) Soil and atmosphere dust.
(b) Oil, grease, and exhaust residues.
(c) Salt water and salt moisture condensation.
(d) Spilled battery acids and caustic cleaning solution.
(e) Welding, brazing, and soldering flux residue.
6F11 51-10-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 1
TYPES OF METAL CORROSION
Type of Material Type of Corrosion Remedy (2)
Steel. Rust (1). Complete removal of
corrosion by mechanical
means.
Aluminum. White to grey powdery material. Mechanical polishing or
brushing with material
softer than aluminum.
Magnesium White powdery snow-like Mechanical polishing or
(highly susceptible mounds and white spots. brushing for a smooth
to corrosion). finish.
Cadmium (plating). White to brown to black mottling Mechanical removal of
of surface (plating is still corrosion is limited to metal
protecting until iron appears). surfaces from which
cadmium has been
depleted.
Chromium (plating). May pit in chloride environment. Polishing and buffing.
— NOTES —
(1) Red rust generally shows on bolts, nuts, and other aircraft hardware. Rust in these areas is
generally not dangerous, however, it shows a need for maintenance and the possibility of
corrosive attack in more critical areas. Any surface corrosion on highly stressed steel parts is
potentially dangerous. A careful removal of corrosion using mild abrasives (rouge or fine grit
aluminum oxide paper) is necessary. Do not overheat metal when removing corrosion.
(2) For abrasion, do not use dissimilar material (for example steel wool on aluminum). Remove
only material required to clean affected area.
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 51-10-00 6F12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(4) A clean aircraft will resist corrosion better than a dirty one. Cleaning frequency depends on
several factors, including geographical location, type of operation, etc. Remove soil as soon as
possible, especially when in a high temperature area.
(5) After cleaning, verify that no cleaning solution remains in any holes, crevices, or joints as it
may lead to increased corrosion. All exposed areas (landing gear, flap tracks, control surface,
hinge parts, etc) must be lubricated after cleaning.
C. Inspection
CAUTION: INSPECTION FOR CORROSION MUST BE PERFORMED BY PERSONS FAMILIAR
WITH CORROSIVE PROBLEMS AND REMEDIES.
NOTE: Some areas of the airplane have been treated with a corrosion inhibiting compound which
requires re-treatment at five (5) year intervals. See Each Five (5) Years, Per Calendar Year,
5-30-00.
Check for corrosion at every inspection. In trouble areas, inspection frequency must be increased.
In addition to routine inspections:
(1) Aircraft operating around a marine environment must be given special inspections on a weekly
basis. See Per Specific Operation / Operating Environment, 5-30-00.
(2) Aircraft operating in semi-acid conditions must be inspected monthly. Semi-acid conditions are
likely to occur in industrialized areas where sulphur-bearing particles in dust, smoke, and smog
will attack painted surfaces. See Per Specific Operation / Operating Environment, 5-30-00.
(3) Inspection for corrosion must be performed by personnel familiar with corrosive problems and
remedies.
(a) Daily and preflight inspection must include engine frontal areas, all intake vents, engine
compartments, gaps, seams, and faying surfaces in exterior skins, wheel and wheel well
areas, battery compartment, fuel cell, all other drains, and any bilge areas not requiring
extensive removal of inspection access covers.
(b) Detailed inspection must include above referenced areas along with areas requiring
removal of inspection plates and panels to thoroughly inspect internal cavities of aircraft.
(4) Paint tends to hide corrosion in its initial stages. The results of corrosion can sometimes be
seen as blisters, flakes, chips, and other irregularities in paint.
D. Corrosion Removal and Control
CAUTION: THE DEPTH OF MATERIAL REMOVED MUST NOT EXCEED SAFE LIMITS.
CAUTION: REMOVAL OF SEVERE CORROSION MAY BE CONSIDERED A MAJOR REPAIR.
ANY REPAIR OF THIS TYPE MUST BE APPROVED BY THE FAA BEFORE THE
AIRPLANE CAN BE RETURNED TO SERVICE.
Corrosion cannot be prevented or eliminated on aircraft; it can only be reduced to an acceptable
level by proper control methods.
All corrosion products must be removed prior to refinishing. If not removed, corrosion will begin
again, even though affected area is refinished.
(1) Before beginning any rework:
(a) Position airplane in a wash rack or provide some type of washing apparatus for rapid
rinsing of all surfaces.
(b) Connect static ground line to airplane.
(c) Remove airplane battery if required.
6F13 51-10-00 FebPAGE 3

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(d) Protect pitot-static ports, engine openings, airscoops, louvers, wheels, tires, and other
portions of airplane from moisture and chemical brightening agents.
(e) Protect surfaces next to rework areas from chemical paint strippers, corrosion removal
agents, and surface treatment materials.
(2) Evaluate corrosion damage to determine type and extent of repairs required. Proceed as
follows:
(a) Light Corrosion: discoloration or pitting. Remove by light hand sanding or a small amount
of chemical treatment.
(b) Moderate Corrosion: similar to light corrosion except there is blistering or evidence of
scaling and flaking. Remove by extensive hand or mechanical sanding.
(c) Severe Corrosion: similar to moderate corrosion with severe blistering, exfoliation, scaling,
or flaking. Remove by extensive mechanical sanding or grinding.
E. Corrosion Prone Areas
Certain areas are more prone to corrosion than others. The following list is a general guide to areas
where corrosion is frequently found.
(1) Areas around steel fasteners are susceptible to corrosion. The paint on these areas cracks
which allows moisture to seep in and corrode the underlying metal. Each time the fastener is
removed, it should be coated with zinc chromate (or equivalent) before reinstallation. The paint
should be wet when the fastener is installed.
(2) Fluids tend to seep into faying surfaces, seams and joints due to capillary action. The effect of
this type of intrusion is usually detectable by irregularities in the skin’s surface.
(3) Spot welded assemblies are particularly prone to corrosion. The only means to prevent this
type of corrosion is by keeping potential moisture entry points in the spot weld filled with a
sealant or preservative compound. On an aluminum spot welded assembly, a chromate
conversion coating before paint is applied will help prevent corrosion.
(4) Areas exposed to exhaust gases may have their finish damaged by deposits. These deposits
may result in an aggressive attack on the metal by corrosion. Heat from the exhaust may also
blister or otherwise damage the paint. Gaps, seams, hinges and fairings are some places
where exhaust gas deposits may be trapped and not reached by normal cleaning methods.
(5) The wheel well and landing gear are the most exposed parts of the aircraft. Due to the
complexity of its shape, assemblies and fittings, maintaining a protective coverage is difficult.
The especially troublesome areas are:
(a) Magnesium wheels: around bolt heads, lugs and wheel well areas:
(b) Exposed rigid tubing, B-nuts, ferrules, under clamps and tubing identification tape:
(c) Exposed position indicator switches and other electrical equipment:
(d) Crevices between stiffeners, ribs and lower skin surfaces.
(6) Flaps, flight control slots and equipment installed in these areas may corrode unnoticed unless
a careful surveillance is maintained.
(7) Engine frontal areas, air inlet ducts and the leading edge of wings, because they are constantly
exposed to abrasion by dirt, dust, gravel and rain, should be checked frequently for the
beginning of corrosion.
(8) Hinges (piano hinges especially) are extremely vulnerable to corrosion. Their protective
coatings wear away and they naturally trap dirt, salt and moisture.
(9) Control cables may have bare spots in their preservative coating which will lead to corrosion.
Cables having external corrosion must be checked for internal corrosion. If internal corrosion is
present, replace the cable. If only external corrosion is present, remove corrosion with wire
brush and recoat cable with preservative.
PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 51-10-00 6F14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(10) Check and clean drain holes regularly.

(11) Battery compartment and vent openings are especially prone to corrosion due to spilled
electrolyte. Fumes from overheated battery electrolyte will spread to adjacent areas and cause
rapid corrosion of unprotected surfaces. Frequent cleaning and neutralization of deposits will
minimize corrosion in this area.
(12) Magnesium parts are prone to corrosion. Special attention must be given to their surface
treatment, proper insulation (due to dissimilar metal corrosion), and paint coatings.
(13) Electrical components and connectors must be checked. Inspection frequency is based on
operational environment and past trouble.
(14) Skin joints and lap-overs are two areas that can trap and hold moisture. Corrosion in these
areas may go unnoticed unless particular attention is paid to them during inspection.
(15) Hoses, having an internal wire braid, which are located in a position where they are frequently
water soaked, need a protective treatment.
(16) Drilled holes and trimmed ends of sandwich panels must be protected. Use an inhibitor
solution or sealant application. Any gaps or cavities which allow dirt or moisture to enter must
be filled with sealant.
6F15 51-10-00 FebPAGE 5

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 6
Feb 28/07 51-10-00 6F16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6F17 51-10-00 FebPAGE 7

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 8
Feb 28/07 51-10-00 6F18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
REPAIRS
Structural repair methods used must be in accordance with regulations set forth in FAA Advisory Circular
43.13-1, latest revision. To assist in making repairs and/or replacements, Figure 1, 51-00-00, identifies
type and thickness of various skin material used.
WARNING: NO ACCESS HOLES ARE PERMITTED IN ANY CONTROL SURFACE. USE OF PATCH
PLATES FOR REPAIRS OF ALL MOVABLE TAIL SURFACES IS PROHIBITED. USE OF
ANY FILLER MATERIAL NORMALLY USED FOR REPAIR OF MINOR DENTS AND/OR
MATERIALS USED FOR FILLING INSIDE OF SURFACES IS ALSO PROHIBITED ON ALL
MOVABLE TAIL SURFACES.
Never make a skin replacement or patch plate from material other than type of original skin, or of a
different thickness than original skin. Repair must be as strong as original skin. However, flexibility must
be retained so surrounding areas will not receive extra stress.
1. Fiberglass Repairs
The repair procedure in this section will describe the methods for the repair of fiberglass reinforced
structures. This section describes Touch-up and Surface Repairs such as blisters, open seams,
delaminations, cavities, small holes and minor damages that have not harmed the fiberglass cloth
material. Also covered are Fracture and Patch Repairs such as puncture, breaks and holes that have
penetrated through the structure and damaged the fiberglass cloth. A repair kit, Piper P/N 766-222, that
contains the necessary material for such repairs, is available through Piper Distributors.
NOTE: Very carefully follow resin and catalyst mixing instructions furnished with repair kit.
A. Touch-up and Surface Repairs
(1) Remove wax, oil and dirt from around the damaged area with acetone. Methylethylketone or
equivalent and remove paint to gel coat.
(2) The damaged area may be scraped with a fine blade knife or a power drill with a burr
attachment to roughen the bottom and sides of the damaged area. Feather the edge
surrounding the scratch or cavity. Do not undercut the edge. (If the scratch or cavity is shallow
and penetrates only the surface coat, continue to step (8)
(3) Pour a small amount of resin into a jar lid or on a piece of cardboard, just enough to fill the
area being worked on. Mix an equal amount of milled fiberglass with the resin, using a putty
knife or stick. Add catalyst, according to kit instruction, to the resin and mix thoroughly. A
hypodermic needle may be used to inject gel into small cavities not requiring fiberglass millings
mixed with the gel.
(4) Work the mixture of resin, fibers and catalyst into the damaged area, using the sharp point of a
putty knife or stick to press it into the bottom of the hole and to puncture any air bubbles which
may be present. Fill the scratch or hole above the surrounding undamaged area about .062 of
an inch.
(5) Lay a piece of cellophane or waxed paper over the repair to cut off air and start the cure of gel
mixture.
(6) Allow the gel to cure 10 to 15 minutes until it feels rubbery to the touch. Remove the
cellophane and trim flush with the surface, using a sharp razor blade or knife. Replace the
cellophane and allow to cure completely for 30 minutes to an hour. The patch will shrink slightly
below the structure surface as it cures. (If wax paper is used, make sure the wax is removed
from surface.)
(7) Rough up the bottom and edges of the hole with the electric burr attachment or rough
sandpaper. Feather hole into surrounding gel coat, do not undercut.
6F19 51-70-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(8) Pour out a small amount of resin, add catalyst and mix thoroughly, using a cutting motion
rather than stirring. Use no fibers.
(9) Using the tip of a putty knife or fingertips, fill the hole to about .062 of an inch above the
surrounding surface with the gel coat mixture.
(10) Lay a piece of cellophane over the patch to start the curing process. Repeat step (6), trimming
patch when partially cured.
(11) After trimming the patch, immediately place another small amount of gel coat on one edge of
the patch and cover with cellophane. Then, using a squeegee or the back of a razor blade,
level with area surrounding the patch; leave the cellophane on patch for one to two hours or
overnight, for complete cure.
(12) After repair has cured for 24 hours, sand patched area, using a sanding block with fine wet
sandpaper. Finish by priming, again sanding and applying color coat.
B. Fracture and Patch Repairs
(1) Remove wax, oil and dirt from around the damaged area with acetone, methylethylketone or
equivalent.
(2) Using a key hole saw, electric saber saw, or sharp knife cut away ragged edges. Cut back to
sound material.
(3) Remove paint three inches back from around damaged area.
(4) Working inside the structure, bevel the edges to approximately a 30 degree angle and rough-
sand the hole and the area around it, using 80 grit dry paper. Feather back for about two
inches all around the hole. This roughens the surface for strong bond with patch.
(5) Cover a piece of cardboard or metal with cellophane. Tape it to the outside of the structure,
covering the hole completely. The cellophane should face toward the inside of the structure. If
the repair is on a sharp contour or shaped area, a sheet of aluminum formed to a similar
contour may be placed over the area. The aluminum should also be covered with cellophane.
(6) Prepare a patch of fiberglass mat and cloth to cover an area two inches larger than the hole.
(7) Mix a small amount of resin and catalyst; enough to be used for one step at a time, according
to kit instructions.
(8) Thoroughly wet mat and cloth with catalyzed resin. Daub resin on mat first, and then on cloth.
Mat should be applied against structures surface with cloth on top. Both pieces may be wet out
on cellophane and applied as a sandwich. Enough fiberglass cloth and mat reinforcements
should be used to at least replace the amount of reinforcements removed in order to maintain
the original strength. If damage occurred as a stress crack, an extra layer or two of cloth may
be used to strengthen area.
(9) Lay patch over hole on inside of structure, cover with cellophane, and squeegee from center to
edges to remove all air bubbles and assure adhesion around edge of hole. Air bubbles will
show white in the patch and they should all be worked out to the edge. Remove excess resin
before it gels on the part. Allow patch to cure completely.
(10) Remove cardboard or aluminum sheet from outside of hole and rough-sand the patch and
edge of hole. Feather edge of hole about two inches into undamaged area.
(11) Mask area around hole with tape and paper to protect surface. Cut a piece of fiberglass mat
about one inch larger than the hole and one or more pieces of fiberglass cloth two inches
larger than the hole. Brush catalyzed resin over hole, lay mat over hole and wet out with
catalyzed resin. Use a daubing action with brush. Then apply additional layer or layers of
fiberglass cloth to build up patch to the surface of structure. Wet out each layer thoroughly with
resin.
(12) With a squeegee or broad knife, work out all air bubbles in the patch. Work from center to edge
pressing patch firmly against the structure. Allow patch to cure for 15 to 20 minutes.
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 51-70-00 6F20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(13) As soon as the patch begins to set up, but while still rubbery, take a sharp knife and cut away
extra cloth and mat. Cut on outside edge of feathering. Strip cut edges of structure. Do this
before cure is complete, to save extra sanding. Allow patch to cure overnight.
(14) Using dry 80 grit sandpaper on a power sander or sanding block, smooth patch and blend with
surrounding surface. Should air pockets appear while sanding, puncture and fill with catalyzed
resin. A hypodermic needle may be used to fill cavities. Let cure and resand.
(15) Mix catalyzed resin and work into patch with fingers. Smooth carefully and work into any
crevices.
(16) Cover with cellophane and squeegee smooth. Allow to cure completely before removing
cellophane. Let cure and resand.
(17) Brush or spray a coat of catalyzed resin to seal patch. Sand patch, finish by priming, again
sanding and applying color coat.
NOTE: Brush and hands may be cleaned in solvents such as acetone or methylethylketone. If
solvents are not available, a strong solution of detergent and water may be used.
2. Thermoplastic Repairs
The following procedure will assist in making field repairs to items made of thermoplastic which are used
throughout the airplane. Chart 1 lists materials needed to perform these repairs along with suggested
suppliers. Common safety precautions should be observed when handling some of the materials and
tools used while making these repairs. Refer to Vendor Information, Chapter 91, for supplier addresses.
A. Surface Preparation
(1) Surface dirt and paint if applied must be removed from the item being repaired. Household
cleaners have proven most effective in removing surface dirt.
(2) Preliminary cleaning of the damaged area with perchlorethylene or V M & P Naphtha will
generally ensure a good bond between epoxy compounds and thermoplastic.
B. Surface Scratches, Abrasion or Ground-in-Dirt (See Figure 1.)
(1) Shallow scratches and abraded surfaces are usually repaired by following directions on
containers of conventional automotive buffing and rubbing compounds.
(2) If large dirt particles are embedded in thermoplastic parts they can be removed with a hot air
gun capable of supplying heat in the temperature range of 300° to 400° F. Use care not to
overheat the material. Hold the nozzle of the gun about 1/4 of an inch away from the surface
and apply heat with a circular motion until the area is sufficiently soft to remove the dirt
particles.
(3) The thermoplastic will return to its original shape upon cooling.
C. Deep Scratches, Shallow Nicks and Small Holes - Less than 1 inch in diameter (See Figure 2.)
(1) Solvent cements will fit virtually any of these applications. If the area to be repaired is very
small, it may be quicker to make a satisfactory cement by dissolving thermoplastic material of
the same type being repaired in solvent until the desired paste like consistency is achieved.
(2) This mixture is then applied to the damaged area. Upon solvent evaporation, the hard durable
solids remaining can easily be shaped to the desired contour by filing or sanding.
(3) Solvent adhesives are not recommended for highly stressed areas, or thin walled parts or for
patching holes greater than 1/4 inch in diameter.
(4) For larger damages, an epoxy patching compound is recommended. This type material is a
two part, fast curing, easy sanding commercially available compound.
(5) Adhesion can be increased by roughing the bonding surface with sandpaper and by utilizing as
much surface area for the bond as possible.
6F21 51-70-00 FebPAGE 3

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Surface Scratches - Abrasions or Ground in Dirt

Figure 1
Deep Scratches, Shallow Nicks and Small Holes

Figure 2
PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 51-70-00 6F22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Mixing of Epoxy Patching Compound

Figure 3
Welding Repair Method

Figure 4
6F23 51-70-00 FebPAGE 5

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 1
LIST OF MATERIALS (THERMOPLASTIC REPAIRS)
Items Descriptions Suppliers
Buffing and Rubbing Automotive Type - DuPont #7 DuPont Company
Compounds
Ram Chemical #69 x 1 Ram Chemicals
Mirror Glaze #1 Mirror Bright Polish Co., Inc.
Cleaners Fantastic Spray Obtain From Local Suppliers
Perchlorethylene
V M & P Naphtha (Lighter Fluid )
ABS-Solvent Cements Solarite #11 Series Solar Compounds Corp.
Solvents Methylethylketone Obtain From Local Suppliers
Methylene Chloride
Acetone
Epoxy Patching Solarite #400 Solar Compounds Corp.
Compound
Hot Melt Adhesives Stick Form 1/2 in. dia. Sears Roebuck & Co. or
Polyamids and Hot 3 in. long Most Hardware Stores
Melt Gun
Hot Air Gun Temp. Range 300° to 400° F Local Suppliers
(6) The patching compound is mixed in equal portions on a hard flat surface using a figure eight
motion. The damaged area is cleaned with perchlorethylene or V M & P Naphtha prior to
applying the compound (see Figure 3).
(7) A mechanical sander can be used after the compound is cured, providing the sander is kept in
constant motion to prevent heat buildup.
(8) For repairs in areas involving little or no shear stress, the hot melt adhesives, polyamids which
are supplied in stick form, may be used. This type of repair has a low cohesive strength factor.
(9) For repairs in areas involving small holes, indentations or cracks in the material where high
stress is apparent or where thin walled sections are used, the welding method is suggested.
(10) This welding method requires a hot air gun and ABS rods. To weld, the gun should be held to
direct the flow of hot air into the fusion (repair) zone, heating the damaged area and rod
simultaneously. The gun should be moved continuously in a fanning motion to prevent
discoloration of the material. Pressure must be maintained on the rod to ensure good adhesion
(see Figure 4).
(11) After the repair is completed, sanding is allowed to obtain a surface finish of acceptable
appearance.
PAGE 6
Feb 28/07 51-70-00 6F24
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
D. Cracks (See Figure 5.)

(1) Before repairing a crack in the thermoplastic part, first determine what caused the crack and
alleviate that condition to prevent it from recurring after the repair is made.
(2) Drill small stop holes at each end of the crack.
(3) If possible, a double plate should be bonded to the reverse side of the crack to provide extra
strength to the part.
(4) The crack should be “V” grooved and filled with repair material, such as solvent cement, hot
melt adhesive, epoxy patching compound or it should be hot air welded, whichever is
preferred.
(5) After the repair has cured, it may be sanded to match the surrounding finish.
E. Repairing Major Damage - Larger than 1 inch in diameter (See Figure 6.)
(1) If possible, a patch should be made of the same material, and cut slightly larger than the
section being repaired.
(2) When appearances are important, large holes, cracks, tears, etc, should be repaired by cutting
out the damaged area and replacing it with a piece of similar material.
(3) When cutting away the damaged area, under cut the perimeter and maintain a smooth edge.
The patch and/or plug should also have a smooth edge to ensure a good fit.
(4) Coat the patch with solvent adhesive and firmly attach it over the damaged area.
(5) Let the patch dry for approximately one hour before any additional work is performed.
(6) The hole, etc, is then filled with the repair material. A slight overfill of the repair material is
suggested to allow for sanding and finishing after the repair has cured. If patching compound is
used, the repair should be made in layers, not exceeding a 1/2 inch thickness at a time. This
will allow the compound to cure and ensure a good solid buildup of successive layers as
required.
Repairing of Cracks
Figure 5
6G1 51-70-00 FebPAGE 7

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Various Repairs
Figure 6
PAGE 8
Feb 28/07 51-70-00 6G2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
F. Stress Lines (See Figure 7.)

(1) Stress lines produce a whitened appearance in a localized area and generally emanate from
the severe bending or impacting of the material (see Figure 8).
(2) To restore the material to its original condition and color, use a hot air gun or similar heating
device and carefully apply heat to the affected area. Do not overheat the material.
G. Painting the Repair
(1) An important factor in obtaining a quality paint finish is the proper preparation of the repair and
surrounding area before applying any paint.
(2) It is recommended that parts be cleaned prior to painting with a commercial cleaner or a
solution made from one-fourth cup of detergent mixed with one gallon of water.
(3) The paint used for coating thermoplastic can be either lacquers or enamels, depending on
which is preferred by the repair facility or customer.
NOTE: It is extremely important that solvent formulations be considered when selecting a
paint, because not an lacquers or enamels can be used satisfactorily on
thermoplastic. Some solvents used in the paints can significantly affect and degrade
the plastic properties
(4) Another important matter to consider is that hard, brittle coatings that are usually best for
abrasion resistance should not be used in areas which incur high stress, flexing or impact.
Such coating may crack, thus creating a weak area.
Repair of Stress Lines

Figure 7
6G3 51-70-00 FebPAGE 9

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Repair of Impacted Damage

Figure 8
3. Pressure Sensitive Safety Walk Installation

Each of the steps on the lower cabin door have an 11.75 in. x 7.50 in. piece of pressure sensitive safety
walk installed on them.
A. Surface Preparation
(1) Allow newly painted surfaces to dry a minimum of 2 hours prior to applying the safety walk.
(2) If the paint becomes contaminated, remove the contamination with clean dry rags or paper
wipers moistened with MIL-S-18718 Safety Solvent.
(3) Prior to applying the safety walk, wipe the applicable surface with a clean dry cloth, ensuring
that no moisture remains on the surface.
B. Application Procedure
(1) Do not apply when surface temperature is below 50°.
(2) Peel back the full width of the protective liner leading edge approximately two inches.
(3) Adhere this edge of the safety walk to the inboard edge of the step.
(4) Remove the remaining protective lines as the safety walk is being adhered to the step.
(5) Roll firmly with a long handled cylindrical brush in both lengthwise directions.
PAGE 10
Feb 28/07 51-70-00 6G4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4. Metal / Wire Stitching Repair (See Figure 9.) (PIR-PPS20024, Rev. A.)
CAUTION: METAL/WIRE STITCHING (AND THE ALTERNATE METHOD OF JOINING DESCRIBED

BELOW) SHALL ONLY BE USED FOR NON-STRUCTURAL, NON-LOAD CARRYING
APPLICATIONS.
A metal/wire stitching process is used to staple fabric and rubber seal materials to engine baffles and
some composite materials. The following alternate method of joining is approved for field use when
replacing these fabric and rubber seal materials.
Alternate (Rivet) Method of Joining.
(1) Substitute two rivets in lieu of each staple where stitching was previously used or is specified.
Maintain a minimum of .75 inch spacing between rivets.
(2) When materials being joined include Stainless Steel, Galvanized Steel or Steel, use:
(a) MS20615M4 Rivet (Monel) and NAS1149CN432R Washer (See Figure 9.)
(b) Install with manufactured (factory) head against hardest material. Install washer against
opposite side of joint and upset rivet (bucktail) against washer.
(3) When materials being joined include only aluminum and nonmetallic materials use:
(a) MS20470A4 Rivet and NAS1149DN432H Washer (See Figure 9.)
(b) Install with manufactured (factory) head against hardest material. Install washer against
opposite side of joint and upset rivet (bucktail) against washer.
6G5 51-70-00 Feb

PAGE 11
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Metal / Wire Stitching Repair

Figure 9
PAGE 12
Feb 28/07 51-70-00 6G6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6G7 51-70-00 Feb

PAGE 13
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 14
Feb 28/07 51-70-00 6G8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ELECTRICAL BONDING
1. General (See also 23-60-00.) (PIR-PPS55006, Rev. T.)
All electrical and electronic equipment and specified components shall be installed in such a manner as
to provide a continuous low resistance path (bonds) from the equipment enclosure/component to the
airplane structure. Bonds must be installed to ensure that the structure and equipment are electrically
stable and free from the hazards of lightning, static discharge, electrical shock, etc.
A. All parts shall be bonded with as short a lead as possible.
B. All bonding surfaces shall be cleaned prior to the installation of the bonded joint.
C. All nuts used in bonding shall be of the self-locking type. (Do Not use fiber-locking type).
D. All electrical bonding shall be accomplished without affecting the structural integrity of the airframe.
2. 100 Hour Inspection (PIR-AC 43.13-1, Rev. B.)
Each 100 hours, visually inspect shield and shield terminations of each electrical harness for integrity,
condition, and security. If electrical arcing is evident, check for intermittent contact between conducting
surfaces. Arcing can be prevented by bonding or insulation, as appropriate.
Inspect the components listed in Chart 1 as follows:
A. Bond connections shall be secure and free from corrosion.
B. Bonding jumpers installed so as not to interfere in any way with the operation of moveable
components of the aircraft.
C. No self-tapping screws used for bonding purposes.
D. Exposed conducting frames or parts of electrical or electronic equipment should have a low
resistance bond of less than 2.5 millohms to structure. If the equipment design includes a ground
terminal or pin, which is internally connected to such exposed parts, a ground wire connection to
such terminal will satisfy this requirement.
E. Parts shall be bonded directly to the primary structure rather than to other bonded parts.
F. Where aluminum or copper is bonded to dissimilar metallic structures, ensure installed hardware
(typically washers) is as called out in the parts catalog to minimize electrolytic corrosion and ensure
the hardware should corrode first.
3. On Condition Inspection
Whenever any electrically bonded component (see Chart 1) is removed and reinstalled, or visual
inspection reveals the electrical bonding to be suspect, measure resistance between component and
aircraft structure.
To ensure proper operation and suppression of radio interference from hazards, electrical bonding of
equipment must not exceed the maximum allowable resistance values specified in Chart 1.
A. Measurements should be performed after the grounding and bonding mechanical connections are
complete to determine if the measured resistance values meet the basic requirements.
B. A high quality test instrument (an AN/USM-21A or equivalent) will accurately measure the very low
resistance values specified.
C. Another method of measurement is the millivolt drop test as shown in Figure 1.
6G9 51-80-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 1
ELECTRICAL BONDING RESISTANCE INDEX
Maximum Allowable
Component Resistance Value in Ohms
Engine Mount(s) .003
Generator(s) .010
Ailerons .003
Elevator / Stabilator .003
Rudder .003
Alternator(s) .010
Trim Tab(s)
Conventional Hinge .003
Piano Hinge .010
Instrument Panel Inserts .010
Exterior Lights Mounted on Non-Conductive Material .003
Avionics ‘Black Boxes’ .003
NOTE: Harnesses should be installed and connected for this check, internal chassis
wiring through the connector to ground is permissible for this grounding.
Battery Ground Point .010
Static wick mounting plates (TCO Model B-4) P/N 452-094 1.00
NOTE: Where jumper wires or cables are used to accomplish a proper bond, resistance between
the jumper terminal and the component or structure shall not exceed .001 ohms. The
controlling points for measuring resistance will be within the limits of the cleaned area to be
bonded and within 1/4 inch of the exterior limits of the bonding jumper terminal or material
called for in the bill of materials of the drawing.
Resistance to ground will be measured from wire terminal to structure for electrical /
electronic equipment not internally grounded and from mounting flange to structure for
equipment that is internally grounded.
COMPONENT SURFACE VOLT METER AIRCRAFT STRUCTURE SURFACE
MV
BONDING STRAP
Adjust rheostat (R1) so that ammeter (A)

reads 10 Amps.
28 VDC SOURCE
- Resistance in milliohms is then the reading
on the volt meter (i.e. - millivolts (MV))
divided by the amps (10) set on the
+ ammeter. For example, where MV equals
30:
A
AMMETER
R1 30 MV
= .003 OHMS RESISTANCE
10 AMPS
Millivolt Drop Test

Figure 1
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 51-80-00 6G10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6G11 51-80-00 FebPAGE 3

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 51-80-00 6G12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER
52
DOORS
6G13
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6G14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 52
CHAPTER CHAPTER


2 Feb 28/07
52-10-00 1 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07
5 Feb 28/07
6 Feb 28/07
7 Feb 28/07
8 Feb 28/07
9 Feb 28/07
10 Feb 28/07
52-20-00 1 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07
52-30-00 1 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07
52-70-00 1 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 52 - DOORS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PASSENGER / CREW 52-10-00 1 6G19

Description 1 6G19
Cabin Door 1 6G19
Upper Half 1 6G19
Removal 1 6G19
Installation 1 6G19
Lower Half 1 6G19
Removal 1 6G19
Installation 1 6G19
Door Support 1 6G19
Upper Half 1 6G19
Removal 1 6G19
Installation 2 6G20
Lower Half 2 6G20
Removal 2 6G20
Installation 2 6G20
Door Latching Mechanism 2 6G20
Description 2 6G20
Upper Door 2 6G20
Removal 2 6G20
Installation 5 6G23
Adjustment 5 6G23
Lower Door 5 6G23
Removal 5 6G23
Installation 6 6G24
Door Seal 6 6G24
Removal 6 6G24
Installation 6 6G24
EMERGENCY EXIT 52-20-00 1 6H5

Emergency Exit Door 1 6H5
Removal 1 6H5
Installation 1 6H5
Seal 1 6H5
CARGO 52-30-00 1 6H7

Baggage Compartment Door 1 6H7
Removal 1 6H7
Installation 1 6H7
Seal Installation 1 6H7

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 52 - DOORS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
MONITORING AND OPERATION 52-70-00 1 6H9

Cabin Door Ajar Warning 1 6H9
Switches 1 6H9
Removal 1 6H9
Installation 1 6H9
Adjustment 2 6H10
Checks 2 6H10
Baggage Door Ajar Warning 2 6H10
Adjustment 2 6H10
Checks 2 6H10
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PASSENGER / CREW
1. Description
This airplane is provided with a cabin door on the left side of the fuselage between the passenger seats.
The cabin door is in two sections, the upper door having a window and the lower door having two
boarding steps that assume their proper position when the door is lowered. Signal flags are incorporated
in each of the cabin door’s locking pins to show the pin’s position.
The emergency exit is on the right-hand side of the fuselage at the center seat. See 52-20-00.
NOTE: See 51-70-00 for instructions on installing the pressure sensitive safety walk strips on the lower
cabin door steps.
2. Cabin Door
A. Upper Half
(1) Removal
(a) Rotate the handle to the unlocked position and open the door.
(b) Open the lower door.
(c) Disengage the door holder assembly from the door.
(d) Hold the door partly open and relieve the weight of the door from the hinge pin to facilitate
hinge pin removal.
(e) Remove the hinge pin and lift off the door.
(2) Installation
(a) Align the door hinge with the fuselage hinge and insert the hinge pin.
(b) Attach the door holder assembly to the door.
B. Lower Half
(1) Removal
(a) Open both upper and lower doors to full open position.
(b) Remove the screw, washers and nut which secures the cable assembly to the lower door.
(c) Relieve the weight of the door from the hinge and remove the hinge pin.
(d) Lift the door off of the lower hinge.
(2) Installation
(a) Align the door hinge with the fuselage hinge and insert the hinge pin.
(b) Attach the cable assembly to the door with the previously removed screw, washers and
nut.
3. Door Support
A. Upper Door Half
The upper door half is held open by a hydraulic door support located at its upper left-hand corner.
The unit is designed to provide 65 to 80 pounds of pressure when fully extended.
(1) Removal
(a) Open the upper door. Relieve door weight on the door support.
(b) Support the door and remove the retaining nuts and washers from both ends of the door
support.
(c) Remove the door support.
6G19 52-10-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(2) Installation
(a) Position the door support on the door and fuselage.
(b) Secure the door support to the door and to the door frame with the previously removed
nuts and washers.
B. Lower Door Half
When open, the lower door half is supported by a cable assembly attached to lugs on the door’s
frame.
(1) Removal
(a) Open the lower door.
(b) Support the lower door and remove the cable retaining screws, washers, and nuts from
the door lug and door frame lug.
(c) Remove the cable assembly.
(2) Installation
(a) Attach the eye end of the cable to the door frame lug.
(b) Attach the yoke end of the cable to the door lug.
4. Door Latching Mechanism
A. Description
The upper door locking mechanism consists of an external and internal handle which actuate two
locking pins in the lower corners of the door and two locking hooks which protrude out of the lower
edge of the door. When the handle is rotated to the open position, the guide pins and latch hooks
are disengaged and withdrawn into the door.
An auxiliary lock is installed in the upper door under the interior handle to prevent inadvertent
opening of the door. When opening the door from inside the airplane, the auxiliary lock handle must
be pulled inboard to allow the door handle to rotate.
The lower door locking mechanism is similar to the upper mechanism except that it has no latch
hooks and only one handle. Lifting the latch handle up withdraws the two pins into the door.
B. Upper Door (See Figure 1.)
(1) Removal
(a) To remove the door handle bellcrank:
1 Remove the pin which retains the interior door handle to the bellcrank assembly.
Remove the handle.
2 Remove the bellcrank support from the interior of the door by removing the rivets
from the bellcrank support.
3 Remove the pins which attach the bellcrank to the pushrods.
4 Remove the bellcrank retaining screw from the bellcrank.
5 Pull the bellcrank assembly from the door.
(b) To remove the pushrod assemblies and the door retaining pins:
1 Remove the pin which connects the pushrod assembly to the bellcrank assembly.
2 Disconnect the pins and washer which secures the pushrod assembly to the door
retaining pins.
3 Slide the pushrod and door retaining pin out of the door.
4 Repeat Steps 1, 2, and 3 for the remaining side.
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 52-10-00 6G20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Door Locking Mechanism

6G21 52-10-00 FebPAGE 3

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Door Locking Mechanism

PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 52-10-00 6G22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(2) Installation
(a) To install the door handle bellcrank:
1 Position the bellcrank assembly in the door. Ensure that a washer is at each end of
the bellcrank.
2 Secure the bellcrank assembly with the screw, nut and washer.
3 Attach the pushrod clevises to the bellcrank with the pins and washer.
4 Rivet the interior bellcrank support to the door.
5 Attach the door handle to the bellcrank assembly with the pin.
(b) To install the door retaining pins and pushrod assemblies:
1 Slide the door retaining pin into position.
2 Place the pushrod assembly into position (the threaded section should point towards
the door handle).
3 Align the holes in the pushrod clevis, door retaining pin and latch hook. Secure with
the pins and washer.
4 Attach the remaining pushrod clevis end to the door handle bellcrank with the pins
and washers.
NOTE: The door retaining pins should protrude out of the door 1.00 inch with the
door handle in the closed position. Make adjustments at the pushrod
assembly as required.
(3) Adjustment
(a) Shut and latch both doors.
(b) Check gap of hook and latch plate.
(c) Hook may be filed .053" max. (maintaining the same ramp contour) to provide
engagement with plate on lower door assembly. A gap of up to 0.030" maximum between
hook and latch plate (with hook fully engaged and without cabin pressure) is acceptable.
C. Lower Door (See Figure 1.)
(1) Removal
(a) To remove the door handle bellcrank:
1 Disconnect the pushrod clevises from the bellcrank by removing the pins and
washer.
2 Remove the bellcrank retaining bolt.
3 Remove the rivets which retain the interior bellcrank support to the door channel.
4 Remove the screws and nuts which retain the handle to the bellcrank.
5 Remove the bellcrank.
(b) To remove the pushrod assemblies and the door retaining pins:
1 Disconnect the pushrod clevis from the handle bellcrank by removing the pins and
washer.
2 Disconnect the pushrod clevis from the door retaining pin by removing the pins and
washer.
3 Slide the retaining pin out of the door and remove the pushrod assembly.
6G23 52-10-00 FebPAGE 5

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(2) Installation
(a) To install the door handle bellcrank:
1 Position the bellcrank in door.
2 Attach the lever to the bellcrank with the screws, washers and nuts.
3 Ensure that washers are positioned at each end of the bellcrank. Insert the bolt
through the interior bellcrank support.
4 Rivet the support in place and tighten the bolt.
(b) To install the pushrod assemblies and the door retaining pins:
1 Position the pushrod assembly in the door. The threaded portion of the pushrod
should point towards the bellcrank assembly.
2 Secure the pushrod with the pins and washer.
3 Slide the door retaining pin into the door.
4 Attach the door retaining pin to the pushrod with the pins and washer.
NOTE: The door retaining pins should protrude from the edge of the door
approximately 1.00 inch. Make adjustments to the pushrod assembly as
required. After installation mechanism must rotate and operate easily
through full cycle without friction and binding.
5. Door Seal (See Figure 2.)
NOTE: In S/N’s 4636001 thru 4636313 only, if door seal has been damaged by upper door latch pins
being extended while the door is moved towards the closed position, install Piper Kit No. 767-387
to preclude reoccurrence.
A. Removal
To remove the door seal, pull the cemented surfaces free of the retainer and/or door edge, applying
MEK as needed to help loosen the bond.
B. Installation
(1) Remove any traces of the previous seal and cement.
(2) Thoroughly clean the areas to be cemented with MEK.
(3) Bond the seal to the door and/or angle per Figure 2.
C. Bonding (PIR PPS45009, Rev. C.)
(1) Use Adhesive Silicone RTV 157 (Piper Code 279-021).

(2) Clean surfaces to be bonded or sealed with a clean, lint-free cloth or wiper dampened with
isopropyl alcohol. Wipe dry using a dry wiper before the alcohol evaporates.
(3) Apply adhesive to only one of the surfaces to be joined. Thickness of the adhesive shall be
0.015 inch minimum and 1/8 inch maximum. Press surfaces to be joined together firmly. No
“squeeze out” of adhesive should be left around the edges of the joint.
(4). Apply sealant as required to specified areas, however the maximum section of the sealant
shall be 1/8 inch.
PAGE 6
Feb 28/07 52-10-00 6G24
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Door Seal Installation

Figure 2
6H1 52-10-00 FebPAGE 7

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 8
Feb 28/07 52-10-00 6H2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6H3 52-10-00 FebPAGE 9

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 10
Feb 28/07 52-10-00 6H4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EMERGENCY EXIT
1. Emergency Exit Door

The airplane’s emergency exit door is located on the right-hand side of the airplane at the center seat.
A. Removal
To remove the emergency exit door, pull down on the release at the top of the door, bring the top of
the door slightly down and lift the entire door towards the center of the aircraft.
B. Installation
To install the door, insert the lower lip of the door on the outboard side of the two stops and push
the door outwards until the handle snaps into place on the catch assembly.
2. Seal
A. Removal
Remove the seal by pulling it away from the skin.
B. Installation
(1) Prepare the surface by removing any remaining trace of the old seal or old cement with a clean
rag moistened with MEK.
(2) Apply a small bead of FAS BOND 10 adhesive or equivalent on the outside radius of the door
seal flange and cement the seal in place.
6H5 52-20-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 52-20-00 6H6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CARGO
Baggage Compartment Door

The forward baggage compartment is accessed via a separate door located on the left-hand side of the
fuselage between the forward pressure bulkhead and the firewall.
A. Removal
(1) Unlock and unlatch the door.
(2) Disconnect the door support from the door.
(3) Lift the door slightly and support it while removing the hinge pin.
B. Installation
(1) Align the door hinge with the hinge on the fuselage and install the pin. It is recommended that
a new pin be used.
(2) Reconnect the door support to the door.
(3) Lubricate the pin and close the door.
C. Seal Installation
(1) Remove any traces of the old seal.
(2) Clean the surface to be bonded with methylethylketone (MEK) to remove any dirt, oil, and
grease.
(3) Bond the door seal to the retainer with General Electric RTV 157 (Piper Code 279-021).
6H7 52-30-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 52-30-00 6H8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
MONITORING AND OPERATION
1. Cabin Door Ajar Warning

A. Description
The cabin door ajar warning system consists of two switches mounted in the W.L. 76.15 and W.L.
71.47 longerons. These switches are activated by the two forward door locking pins pushing on two
switch actuating pins. A DOOR AJAR light is provided in the annunciator panel.
B. Troubleshooting
See Chart 1.
CHART 1
TROUBLESHOOTING CABIN DOOR AJAR WARNING SYSTEM
Cabin door unsafe light will Latching relay sticking in the Lubricate the mechanical
not go out. open position. parts (sparingly).
Switch or switches in door Adjust.
frame out of adjustment.
Short to ground. Check wiring and repair.
Cabin door unsafe light will Circuit breaker open. Reset circuit breaker.
not come on.
Broken wire or loose Check wiring and repair.
connection.
C. Switches
(1) Removal
(a) Gain access to the switches. They are located approximately four (4) inches in front of
each of the forward door locking pins.
(b) Disconnect the two electrical leads (per switch).
(c) Loosen the jam nut on the switch and turn the switch body out of the pin support tube
assembly.
(2) Installation
(a) Turn the switch body into the pin support tube assembly. Do not tighten the jam nut at this
time.
(b) Adjust the switches per the following paragraph.
(c) Reconnect the two electrical leads (per switch).
6H9 52-70-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(3) Adjustment
(a) Ensure that the door retaining pins protrude out the side of the door 1.00 inch when the
latch mechanism is in the closed position. (See View A, Figure 1, 52-10-00.)
(b) Close the door and turn the latch mechanism to its locked position.
(c) Turn the switch body into the pin support tube assembly until the switch activates.
(d) Tighten the switch jam nut.
(e) Connect the two leads to the switch.
(f) Repeat Steps (a) thru (e) for the other switch.
(4) Checks
Periodically check the action of the cabin door switches as follows:
(a) Insert a small blunt object into the pin support tube receptacle.
(b) Push on the switch actuating pin until an audible click is heard. Release the pin, noting
another audible click.
(c) Replace any switch in which the click action and mechanical function is doubtful.
(d) Ensure that the DOOR AJAR light in the annunciator panel comes on when the switch is
activated.
2. Baggage Compartment Door Ajar Warning
The baggage door ajar switch is located behind the baggage door latch in the longeron at W.L. 55.46. A
DOOR AJAR light is provided in the annunciator panel.
A. Adjustment
Adjust the switch by loosening one of the two locking nuts on the switch body and turning the switch
in or out until a slight lifting of the baggage door latch activates the switch.
B. Checks
Periodically check the action of the baggage door switch as follows:
(1) Slightly lift the baggage door latch, listening for audible clicks when the switch activates and
deactivates.
(2) Ensure that the DOOR AJAR light in the annunciator panel comes on when the switch is
activated.
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 52-70-00 6H10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6H11 52-70-00 FebPAGE 3

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 52-70-00 6H12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER
55
STABILIZERS
6H13
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6H14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 55
CHAPTER CHAPTER


2 Feb 28/07
55-00-00 1 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07
55-10-00 1 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07
55-20-00 1 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07
5 Feb 28/07
6 Feb 28/07
7 Feb 28/07
8 Feb 28/07
55-30-00 1 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07
55-40-00 1 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 55 - STABILIZERS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
GENERAL 55-00-00 1 6H19
HORIZONTAL STABILIZER 55-10-00 1 6H23

Horizontal Stabilizer 1 6H23
Removal 1 6H23
Installation 1 6H23
Attach Fittings Corrosion Control 1 6H23
ELEVATOR 55-20-00 1 6I3

Elevator 1 6I3
Removal 1 6I3
Installation 1 6I3
Balancing 1 6I3
Balancing Equipment 2 6I4
Elevator Trim Tab Push Rods Attach Brackets 4 6I6
Elevator Trim Tab Rods Corrosion Control 4 6I6
VERTICAL STABILIZER 55-30-00 1 6I11

Vertical Fin 1 6I11
Removal 1 6I11
Installation 1 6I11
Attach Fitting Corrosion Control 1 6I11
RUDDER 55-40-00 1 6I15

Rudder 1 6I15
Removal 1 6I15
Installation 1 6I15
Balancing 1 6I15

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GENERAL
Empennage Installation
6H19 55-00-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
RUDDER TORQUE TUBE
VERTICAL FIN
AN4-23A
AN6-7A NAS1149F0432P (UNDER HEAD)
NAS1149F0663P (2 REQ.) NAS1149F0463P (UNDER NUT)
MS21042-6 MS21042-4
TORQUE 240-270 IN.-LBS. TORQUE 80-100 IN.-LBS.
(2 PLACES)
AN3-11A
NAS1149F0363P (2 REQ.)
RUDDER SECTOR MS21042-3
TORQUE 38-43 IN.-LBS.
(3 PLACES)
A
AN6-10A
NAS1149F0663P (2 REQ.)
MS21042-6
TORQUE 160-200 IN.-LBS. NAS1149F0463P AND/OR
(2 PLACES) NAS1149F0432
USE ANY COMBINATION OF
THICK AND THIN WASHERS
TO ELIMINATE GAP BETWEEN
BOTTOM OF RUDDER TORQUE
TUBE AND TOP OF QUADRANT.
MS21250-06008
MS21299-C6 (UNDER HEAD)
NAS1149F0663P (2 REQ.)
(UNDER NUT)
NAS 1804-6
TORQUE 300-320 IN.-LBS.
B (4 PLACES)
HORIZONTAL STABILIZER SPAR

O
82218 AW
Empennage Installation
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 55-00-00 6H20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6H21 55-00-00 FebPAGE 3

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 55-00-00 6H22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
HORIZONTAL STABILIZER
1. Horizontal Stabilizer (Refer to Figure 1, 55-00-00)

A. Removal
(1) Remove the elevator (refer to 55-20-00).
(2) Remove the nut, bolt and washer that attaches the stabilizer forward support to the bulkhead
(each side).
(3) Support the stabilizer and remove the nuts, bolts and washers that attach the stabilizer spar to
the bulkhead. Remove the stabilizer.
B. Installation
(1) Position the horizontal stabilizer on the tail section.
(2) Attach the horizontal stabilizer spar to the bulkhead. Torque the four nuts as specified in Figure 1,
55-00-00.
(3) Attach the two horizontal stabilizer forward supports to the bulkhead. The bolts should be
installed with their heads pointing aft. Torque the bolts as specified in Figure 1, 55-00-00.
(4) Install the elevator (refer to 55-20-00).
(5) Check elevator trim and elevator operation (refer to 27-30-00).
2. Attach Fittings Corrosion Control
Each five years, inspect the attach fittings shown in Figures 1 and 2 for corrosion and condition.
Repair/replace as required. When inspection and repair/replacement is completed, reapply Dinitrol AV 8
(P/N 89500-800) Corrosion Inhibiting Compound.
NOTE: For all fittings, inspection of the exposed portion is sufficient unless obvious or extensive
corrosion is apparent.
NOTE: Any part exhibiting flaking of the metal due to rust must be replaced.
NOTE: If aluminum skin or structure is corroded (beyond a light surface oxidation), the area must be
repaired or replaced.
NOTE: On any part being replaced, dip rivets in zinc chromate or equivalent primer and install wet.
A. When inspection and repair or replacement are completed, allow sufficient time for primer to dry,
and apply Dinitrol AV 8 to:
(1) Forward horizontal stabilizer attach points. Inside and outside fuselage. See Figure 2 to add an
access hole.
(2) Aft horizontal stabilizer attach points.
(3) Entire surface of tail cone interior.
CAUTION: READ PRECAUTIONS ON CONTAINER LABEL AND WEAR A CHARCOAL

FILTER MASK WHEN APPLYING DINITROL AV 8.
B. Apply Dinitrol by spraying or brush. Use an air or airless spray gun if available. A hand aspirator
bottle may be used if a sufficient fan spray pattern can be developed. Product should not be
thinned.
C. Cover safety and outflow valves, air conditioning condenser, and other components on the pressure
bulkhead. Cover autopilot servos, electrical connectors, and cable pulleys.
6H23 55-10-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
WARNING: DO NOT GET DINITROL INTO AUTOPILOT SERVOS OR CLUTCHES.

D. Spray directly into faying surfaces and mating points.
E. Ensure entire attach fitting is treated. Spray inside where the fitting is attached to the structure.
F. Apply to approximately .8 mils in thickness. Avoid puddling and running. Allow to dry 1 to 1 1/2
hours before airplane use. Full drying takes 6 to 8 hours.
Horizontal Stabilizer Attach Fittings

Figure 1
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 55-10-00 6H24
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Horizontal Stabilizer Forward Attach Fitting Access

Figure 2
6I1 55-10-00 FebPAGE 3

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 55-10-00 6I2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ELEVATOR
1. Elevator (See Figure 1, 55-00-00.)

CAUTION: CONTROL SURFACE SKINS MUST BE REPLACED IF THEY SUSTAIN DAMAGE OR
EXHIBIT CRACKS.
A. Removal
(a) Disconnect the elevator trim actuating rods at the clevis on the actuator.
(b) Disconnect the elevator actuating arm at the elevator actuating plate.
(c) Support the elevator and remove the attaching bolts.
(d) Remove the elevator from the airplane.
B. Installation
WARNING: ALL CONTROL SURFACES THAT HAVE BEEN REPLACED OR REPAINTED MUST
BE BALANCED BEFORE INSTALLATION PER INSTRUCTIONS IN BALANCING,
BELOW.
(a) Position the elevator in place on the horizontal stabilizer.
(b) Attach the elevator to the horizontal stabilizer. Torque the nuts as specified in Figure 1, 55-00-00.
(c) Connect the elevator actuating arm to the elevator actuating plate.
(d) Connect the elevator trim actuating rods to the actuator clevis.
(e) Check elevator trim and elevator operation (refer to 27-30-00).
C. Balancing (See Figure 1.)
To balance the elevator, the assembly must be complete including the trim tab (without the tab
pushrods), elevator tips and all attaching screws. Before balancing, tape the trim tab in its neutral
position with a small piece of tape. Ensure that there are no drafts in the balancing room. Place the
complete assembly on the knife edge supports of a balancer with the beam perpendicular to the
hinge centerline. Do not place the tool on the trim tab. Calibrate the tool per Balancing Equipment,
below. Read the scale when the bubble level has been centered by adjustment of the movable
weight and determine the static balance limit (see Chart 1). There are no adjustment provisions on
the elevator.
CHART 1
ELEVATOR STATIC BALANCE LIMITS (PIR-PPS50060, Rev. I.)
Leading Edge Heavy Trailing Edge Heavy

(Inch-Pounds) (Inch-Pounds)
— -25 to -50
NOTE: Elevator is balanced with tab installed but without the tab pushrods.
6I3 55-20-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Balancing Elevator
Figure 1
D. Balancing Equipment
Balancing must be done using a suitable tool capable of measuring unbalance in inch-pounds from
the centerline of the control surface hinge pin. See the tool configuration in Figure 2. Other tool
configurations may be used if accuracy is maintained and recalibration capability is provided.
To use this tool:
(1) Ensure that the control surface is in its final Flight configuration, static wicks, trim tabs, trim tab
push pull rod and control surface tip (as applicable) should be installed. The surface should be
painted and trim/servo tabs should be in the neutral position.
NOTE: Because paint is a considerable balance factor, it is recommended that existing paint
be removed prior to repainting a control surface.
(2) Place hinge bolts through control surfaces and place control surface on a holding fixture.
(3) Calibrate the tool.
(a) Avoiding rivets, place the balancing tool on the control surface with the tool’s hinge
centerline directly over the hinge line of the control surface.
(b) Adjust the movable trailing edge support to fit the width of the control surface. Tighten the
set screw on the trailing edge support.
(c) Adjust the trailing edge support vertically until the beam is parallel with the control surface
chord line.
(d) Remove the tool from the control surface and balance the tool itself by adding or removing
nuts or washers from the beam balancing bolt. When balancing the tool, the movable
weight must be at the bar’s hinge centerline.
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 55-20-00 6I4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Control Surfaces Balancing Tool

Figure 2
6I5 55-20-00 FebPAGE 3

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(4) After balancing the tool, reattach it to the control surface per Figures 1 and 2. Keep the beam
positioned 90° from the control surface hinge line.
(5) Determine balance of control surface by sliding movable weight along the balance beam.
(6) Read the scale when the bubble level has been centered. Multiply by three to determine inch-
lbs. (i.e. - Since the movable weight weighs three pounds, every inch it is moved from the
center of the beam equals three inch-lbs of force.)
2. Elevator Trim Tab Push Rods Attach Brackets
If the elevator trim tab push rods attach brackets are removed and replaced or reinstalled, ensure that a
coat of wet zinc chromate primer is applied between the tab skin and the brackets to eliminate surface
corrosion.
3. Elevator Trim Tab Rods Corrosion Control
Each five years, remove the elevator trim tab rods from the airplane and inspect as shown in Figure 3
for corrosion and condition. Repair/replace as required. When inspection and repair/replacement is
completed, reapply Dinitrol AV 8 (P/N 89500-800) Corrosion Inhibiting Compound.
NOTE: Any part exhibiting flaking of the metal due to rust must be replaced. The elevator trim tab
actuator push rods must be replaced if rust is evident extending from inside the tubes.
A. When inspection and repair or replacement are completed, apply Dinitrol AV 8 to elevator trim tab
actuator push rod tubes.
CAUTION: READ PRECAUTIONS ON CONTAINER LABEL AND WEAR A CHARCOAL FILTER
MASK WHEN APPLYING DINITROL AV 8.
thinned.
C. Spray directly into mating points. Pour inside the lower (curved) elevator trim tab actuator push rod
tubes until full and drain.
D. Apply to approximately .8 mils in thickness. Avoid puddling and running. Allow to dry (6 to 8 hours)
before reinstalling elevator trim tab rods.
PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 55-20-00 6I6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Elevator Trim Tab Rods

Figure 3
6I7 55-20-00 FebPAGE 5

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 6
Feb 28/07 55-20-00 6I8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6I9 55-20-00 FebPAGE 7

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 8
Feb 28/07 55-20-00 6I10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
VERTICAL STABILIZER
1. Vertical Fin (See Figure 1, 55-00-00.)

A. Removal
(1) Remove the aft fuselage access panel.
(2) Remove the dorsal fairing.
(3) Remove the rudder per instructions in this chapter.
(4) Remove the forward vertical fin attaching bolt.
(5) Support the fin and remove the aft vertical fin attaching nuts, bolts and washers. Remove the
fin from the airplane.
B. Installation
(1) Position the vertical fin on the airplane.
(2) Attach the aft vertical fin spar to the fuselage spar with the bolts, nuts and washers. Torque
from 160 to 200 in. lbs.
(3) Attach the forward vertical fin spar to the fuselage spar. Torque the bolt as specified in Figure 1,
55-00-00.
(4) Attach the rudder to the vertical fin per instructions in this chapter.
(5) Check the rigging of the rudder (refer to 27-20-00).
(6) Install the dorsal fairing (seal fairing to skin and fairing recess angle using Bostik Chem-Calk®
Urethane No. 915 - remove excess sealant) and the aft fuselage access panel.
2. Attach Fitting Corrosion Control
Each five years, inspect the attach fittings shown in Figure 1 for corrosion and condition. Repair/replace
as required. When inspection and repair/replacement is completed, reapply Dinitrol AV 8 (P/N 89500-
800) Corrosion Inhibiting Compound.
and apply Dinitrol AV 8 to forward vertical fin attach point.
CAUTION: READ PRECAUTIONS ON CONTAINER LABEL AND WEAR A CHARCOAL FILTER
MASK WHEN APPLYING DINITROL AV 8.
thinned.
C. Cover safety and outflow valves, air conditioning condenser, and other components on the pressure
bulkhead. Cover autopilot servos, electrical connectors, and cable pulleys.
6I11 55-30-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Vertical Stabilizer Attach Fittings

Figure 1
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 55-30-00 6I12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6I13 55-30-00 FebPAGE 3

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 55-30-00 6I14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
RUDDER
Rudder (See Figure 1, 55-00-00.)

EXHIBIT CRACKS.
A. Removal
(1) Remove the aft fuselage access panel.
(2) Remove the rudder cables from the rudder sector, or loosen them if not removing the sector.
(3) Disconnect the sector from the rudder torque tube by removing 3 bolts, nuts and washers.
(4) Remove the sector retaining nut, bolt and washers, if sector is to be removed.
(5) Support the rudder and remove the two sets of rudder hinge retaining bolts, nuts and washers.
Remove the rudder from the airplane.
B. Installation
BELOW.
(1) Position the rudder on the airplane.
(2) Install the two sets of rudder hinge bolts. Torque the nut as specified in Figure 1, 55-00-00.
(3) If previously removed, install the sector retaining bolt, nut and washers. Torque the nut as
specified in Figure 1, 55-00-00.
(4) Attach the rudder sector to the rudder torque tube. Torque the three (3) nuts as specified in
Figure 1, 55-00-00.
(5) Attach the rudder cables to the sector (if the cables were previously removed).
(6) Set tension on cables per 27-20-00.
(7) Check rigging and operation of rudder control system per 27-20-00.
(8) Install the aft fuselage access panel.
To balance the rudder, the assembly must be complete. Place the complete assembly horizontally
on the knife edge support of a balancer. Ensure that there are no drafts in the balancing room.
Place the tool on the rudder with the beam perpendicular to the hinge centerline. Calibrate the tool
per Balancing Equipment, 55-20-00. Read the scale when the bubble level has been centered by
adjustment of the movable weight and determine the static balance limit. If the static balance is not
within the limits given in Chart 1, proceed as follows:
(1) Nose Heavy: This condition is highly improbable: recheck calculations and measurements.
(2) Nose Light: In this case, the rudder is too heavy because of painting or repairs; it will be
necessary to strip the paint and repaint the rudder. If the rudder is too heavy as a result of
repairs, the repair must be removed and the damaged parts replaced.
CHART 1
RUDDER STATIC BALANCE LIMITS (PIR-PPS50060, Rev. I.)

0 -32.0
6I15 55-40-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Balancing Rudder
Figure 1
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 55-40-00 6I16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6I17 55-40-00 FebPAGE 3

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 55-40-00 6I18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER
56
WINDOWS
6I19
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6I20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 56
CHAPTER CHAPTER


2 Feb 28/07
56-00-00 1 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07
5 Feb 28/07
6 Feb 28/07
7 Feb 28/07
8 Feb 28/07
9 Feb 28/07
10 Feb 28/07
11 Feb 28/07
12 Feb 28/07
13 Feb 28/07
14 Feb 28/07
56-10-00 1 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07
5 Feb 28/07
6 Feb 28/07
7 Feb 28/07
8 Feb 28/07
9 Feb 28/07
10 Feb 28/07
56-20-00 1 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07
56-30-00 1 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 56 - WINDOWS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
GENERAL 56-00-00 1 6J1

Limitations 1 6J1
Definitions 1 6J1
Inspection and Repair 2 6J2
Heated Glass Windshield (Pilot’s Side) Inspection 2 6J2
Acrylic Windshield (Co-Pilot’s Side) Inspection 4 6J4
Acrylic Window (Cockpit) Inspection 6 6J6
Acrylic Window (Cabin) Inspection 7 6J7
Crack Inspection - Acrylic Windows and Windshields 8 6J8
Window / Windshield Repair / Rework Procedure 10 6J10
Water Leak Check 12 6J12
FLIGHT COMPARTMENT 56-10-00 1 6J15

Windshield 1 6J15
Removal 1 6J15
Installation 1 6J15
Pilot’s / Copilot’s Window 4 6J18
Removal 4 6J18
Installation 4 6J18
Storm Window (S/N’s 4636001 thru 4636076 only) 6 6J20
Removal 6 6J20
Installation 6 6J20
Storm Window (S/N’s 4636077 and up) 7 6J21
CABIN 56-20-00 1 6K1

Passenger Windows 1 6K1
Removal 1 6K1
Installation 1 6K1
DOOR 56-30-00 1 6K3

Door Window 1 6K3
Removal 1 6K3
Installation 1 6K3

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GENERAL
The airplane is equipped with a two piece windshield and eight cabin windows (one is in the door and
one is the emergency exit window).
The pilot’s windshield is made of two-ply laminated glass and is heated. The co-pilot’s windshield and
windows are made of clear stretched acrylic. They are installed with sealant and fasteners as necessary
to retain them and prevent water or air leaks.
1. Limitations
A. If this airplane must be flown with a cracked or crazed window or windshield it must not be flown in
a pressurized condition.
B. Pressurized flights with discoloration or haze should be avoided but, if absolutely necessary while
awaiting replacement, flights may be made if careful inspection for crazing is implemented before
each flight.
2. Definitions
The following apply to all cockpit and cabin windows and windshields.
Critical The viewing area of the windshields used for taxiing, takeoff, climb, cruise, and
landing.
Semi-Critical The viewing area used for general flight vision.
Non-Critical Viewing areas not normally used for flight operations.
Distortion Lines in windows or windshields that cause waviness in objects when looking
through the window or windshield.
Crack Critical narrow break, fissure, or separation extending through the entire
thickness of the transparent material.
Craze Fissure on the surface of the transparent material that does not penetrate the
full thickness of the material.
Crazing Mesh of fine hairline cracks that do not penetrate the full thickness of the
material, located on the surface or within the structure of the transparent
material.
Star Craze A condition where several fissures radiate from a central point.
Wedge A condition in a piece of optical glass having a progressive variation in
thickness or absorption from one side to the other.
Scratch An abrasion on the surface of the material caused by contact with rough
abrasives or sharp objects.
Hairline Scratch Visible scratch undetectable when passing a fingernail over the scratch.
Considered non-critical other than being an appearance defect.
Light Scratch A scratch measuring less than 0.010 inch (0.254 mm) deep. Can be detected
when passing a fingernail over the scratch. Considered non-critical except for
appearance.
Heavy Scratch A scratch measuring more than 0.010 inch (0.254 mm) deep. Can be detected
when passing a fingernail over the scratch. This type of scratch may be
accompanied by chipping along the edge. Considered critical when occurring to
inner glass ply. Considered semi-critical when occurring to outer glass ply
within certain limitations (see inspection criteria). Considered non-critical within
certain limitations (see inspection criteria) when occurring to acrylic surfaces.
Chip A chip is considered a small scratch.
6J1 56-00-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Peel Chip Peel chips, also known as adhesion chips or cold chips, occur on the laminated
surface of a glass ply when the vinyl interlayer pulls a chip of glass out of the
glass ply.
Haze A foggy appearance located on the surface of the transparent material.
Blemish Speck, air bubble, or other minor imperfection imbedded in the transparent
material.
Mark-Off An almost nonexistent shallow depression on the surface possessing
practically no depth. Discernible only due to a noticeable rim or roughened
surface caused by mold surface defects transferred to the surface during the
forming operation.
Delamination Visible evidence of a physical break of the bond between the plastic interlayer
and either glass ply. Delamination may be caused by laminating stresses,
preload on installation, or excessive heat. Cloudy or milky appearance in the
delamination indicates moisture or solvent penetration.
3. Inspection and Repair
CAUTION: DAMAGE LIMITS AND REPAIRS STATED HEREIN MUST BE APPLIED
CONSERVATIVELY. REWORK OF MULTIPLE CHIPS OR SCRATCHES SHOULD NOT BE
ATTEMPTED IN ANY CASE WHERE, WHEN FINISHED, A LINEAR PATTERN WILL HAVE
BEEN CREATED.
A. Heated Glass Windshield (Pilot’s Side) Inspection
CAUTION: PRESSURIZED FLIGHT PROHIBITED WITH CRACKED OR CRAZED WINDSHIELD.
The pilot’s windshield is a two-ply laminated glass containing a heating element.
(1) Critical Area Inspection. The area of the laminated glass windshield used for taxiing, takeoff,
climb, cruise, and landing.
(a) Cracks can occur in either the inner, outer, or both glass plies. Cracking in either ply is
critical and cause for immediate replacement.
(b) Blemishes.
1 Blemishes in windshields form in the vinyl plastic interlayer bonding the two glass
plies together.
2 Blemishes in the critical or semi-critical portion of the windshield are not acceptable
unless 0.062 inch (1.575 mm) or smaller in circumference, including distorted area.
3 No more than two blemishes, at least 12 inches (30.48 cm) apart are acceptable in
the windshield.
4 No more than two blemishes within a two inch (5.08 cm) area along the upper
portion of the windshield are acceptable.
(c) Haze or foggy appearance on the glass is not acceptable if the amount of haze/fog
causes an obstruction of vision in the area used for operation of the aircraft.
(d) Scratches.
1 Scratches in the outboard surface of the outer glass ply no longer than 0.062 inch
(1.575 mm) and no deeper than 0.020 inch (0.508 mm) are allowable.
2 Scratches in the inboard surface of the inner glass ply with a depth less than or equal
to 0.002 inch (0.05 mm) are allowable.
3 Scratches which obstruct vision required for safe operation of the aircraft or exceed
the above limits are cause for immediate windshield replacement.
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 56-00-00 6J2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(e) Delamination.
Delamination is primarily a vision issue. Cloudy or milky appearance in the critical area
(i.e. - obstructing vision required for safe operation of the aircraft) is cause for immediate
replacement.
(f) Peel Chips.
1 Delaminated areas characterized by irregular or jagged boundaries indicate uneven
separation of the vinyl and glass. This condition may cause the vinyl to pull chips
from the inner glass ply, resulting in failure of the glass ply. Conduct periodic
inspections to determine if the damage is progressive or if chipping of the inner glass
ply is present.
2 Replace windshield if any of the following conditions are noted:
a Evidence of chipping of inner glass ply.
b Area of vision required for safe operation is affected.
c Windshield heat system inoperative.
(g) Mark-Off of such low intensity that vision quality is not impaired and that is not visible
when looking through the windshield is acceptable.
(h) Distortion. Slight horizontal distortion is acceptable, if: there are no more than two lines;
they do not occupy more than 25 percent of the windshield area, and; they are separated
by a minimum of six inches (15.24 cm).
(2) Semi-Critical Area Inspection. The perimeter area of the heated glass windshield used for
general flight vision.
(a) Blemishes.
1 Blemishes in windshields form in the vinyl plastic interlayer bonding the two glass
plies together.
2 Blemishes in the critical or semi-critical portion of the windshield are not acceptable
unless 0.062 inch (1.575 mm) or smaller in circumference, including distorted area.
3 No more than two blemishes, at least 12 inches (30.48 cm) apart are acceptable in
the windshield.
4 No more than two blemishes within a two inch (5.08 cm) area along the upper
portion of the windshield are acceptable.
(b) Haze or foggy appearance on the glass is not acceptable if the amount of haze/fog
(c) Scratches.
1 Scratches in the outboard surface of the outer glass ply no longer than 0.062 inch
(1.575 mm) and no deeper than 0.020 inch (0.508 mm) are allowable.
2 Scratches in the inboard surface of the inner glass ply with a depth less than or equal
to 0.002 inch (0.05 mm) are allowable.
3 Scratches which obstruct vision required for safe operation of the aircraft or exceed
the above limits are cause for immediate windshield replacement.
(d) Delamination.
Delamination is primarily a vision issue.
1 Delamination is allowable up to two inches along the perimeter of the daylight
opening of the windshield. In the corners, up to four inches is allowable.
2 Windshields exhibiting delamination must be monitored as the condition is usually
progressive.
6J3 56-00-00 FebPAGE 3

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3 Replace windshield if any of the following condition are noted:

a Delamination exceeds allowable limits.
(e) Peel Chips.
1 Delaminated areas characterized by irregular or jagged boundaries indicate uneven
separation of the vinyl and glass. This condition may cause the vinyl to pull chips
from the inner glass ply, resulting in failure of the glass ply. Conduct periodic
inspections to determine if the damage is progressive or if chipping of the inner glass
ply is present.
2 Replace windshield if any of the following condition are noted:
a Evidence of chipping of inner glass ply.
(f) Mark-Off of such low intensity that vision quality is not impaired and that is not visible
(g) Distortion.
1 A moderate amount of distortion is acceptable along the lower portion of the
windshield if no more than 1.5 inches (3.81 cm) above the windshield retainer strip.
2 Distortion may not be so severe that it restricts vision or diverts runway lines or
section lines more than 45°.
3 Slight horizontal distortion is acceptable, if: there are no more than two lines; they do
not occupy more than 25 percent of the windshield area, and; they are separated by
a minimum of six inches (15.24 cm).
B. Acrylic Windshield (Co-Pilot’s Side) Inspection
CAUTION: PRESSURIZED FLIGHT PROHIBITED WITH CRACKED OR CRAZED WINDSHIELD.
The co-pilot’s windshield is formed from 0.312 inch thick acrylic.
(1) Critical Area Inspection. The area of the acrylic windshield used for taxiing, takeoff, climb,
cruise, and landing.
(a) Cracking in the windshield is critical and cause for immediate replacement. Inspect per
Crack Inspection - Acrylic Windows and Windshields, below.
(b) Crazing.
1 Crazing in the windshield is critical.
2 Determine depth of craze using a calibrated depth gauge or scale (see Figure 1).
3 A craze of 0.062 inch (1.575 mm) depth is cause for immediate replacement. A craze
of 0.031 inch (0.787 mm) depth is cause for replacement at the earliest opportunity.
4 Crazing in any portion of the windshield requires replacement.
(c) Haze or foggy appearance is not acceptable if the amount of haze/fog causes an
obstruction of vision in the area used for operation of the aircraft.
PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 56-00-00 6J4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(d) Scratches.
1 Limits:
1.5 inch (38.1 mm) long
0.031 inch (0.787 mm) deep
0.2 inch (5.080 mm) wide
0.25 in2 (1.613 cm2) total area
2 No more than two allowed per 10 in 2 (64.516 cm 2 ) of area (i.e. - an area
approximately 3.16 inch by 3.16 inch).
3 Scratches exceeding these limits are cause for immediate windshield replacement /
rework (see Window / Windshield Repair / Rework, below).
(e) Mark-Off of such low intensity that vision quality is not impaired and that is not visible
(f) Distortion. Slight horizontal distortion is acceptable, if: there are no more than two lines;
they do not occupy more than 25 percent of the windshield area, and; they are separated
by a minimum of six inches (15.24 cm).
(2) Semi-Critical Area Inspection. The perimeter area of the acrylic windshield used for general
flight vision.
(a) Crazing.
1 Crazing in the windshield is critical.
3 A craze 0.031 inch (0.787 mm) deep is cause for replacement at the earliest
opportunity.
4 Crazing in any portion of the windshield requires replacement.
(b) Haze or foggy appearance is not acceptable if the amount of haze/fog causes an
(c) Scratches.
1 Scratches in acrylic windshields may be reworked per Window / Windshield Repair /
Rework, below, if:
a They are less than 0.030 inch (0.762 mm) deep.
b Windshield is a minimum of 0.279 inch (7.087 mm) thick after rework.
c No vision distortions in critical and semi-critical areas as a result of rework.
2 Replace acrylic windshields with scratches that cannot be reworked in accordance
with these standards.
(d) Mark-Off of such low intensity that vision quality is not impaired and that is not visible
(e) Distortion.
windshield if no more than 1.5 inches (3.81 cm) above the windshield retainer strip.
6J5 56-00-00 FebPAGE 5

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Determining Depth of Craze

Figure 1
C. Acrylic Window (Cockpit) Inspection

CAUTION: PRESSURIZED FLIGHT PROHIBITED WITH CRACKED OR CRAZED WINDOW.
(1) The cockpit windows are formed from 0.250 inch thick acrylic.
(2) Semi-Critical Area Inspection. The areas of cockpit acrylic windows used for general flight
vision.
(a) Cracks.
Inspect for cracks per Crack Inspection - Acrylic Windows and Windshields, below.
(b) Crazing.
1 Crazing in the windows is critical.
3 A craze 0.050 inch (1.270 mm) deep is cause for immediate replacement. A craze
0.025 inch (0.635 mm) deep is cause for replacement at the earliest opportunity.
4 Crazing in any portion of a window requires replacement.
(c) Haze or foggy appearance is not acceptable if the amount of haze/fog causes an
PAGE 6
Feb 28/07 56-00-00 6J6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(d) Scratches.
1 Limits:
1.5 inch (38.1 mm) long
0.025 inch (0.635 mm) deep
0.2 inch (5.080 mm) wide
0.25 in2 (1.613 cm2) total area
2 No more than two allowed per 10 in 2 (64.516 cm 2 ) of area (i.e. - an area
approximately 3.16 inch by 3.16 inch).
3 Scratches exceeding these limits are cause for immediate windshield replacement /
rework (see Window / Windshield Repair / Rework, below).
4 Scratches in acrylic cockpit windows may be reworked per Window / Windshield
Repair / Rework, below, if:
a They are less than 0.025 inch (0.635 mm) deep.
b Window is a minimum of 0.225 inch (5.715 mm) thick after rework.
c No vision distortions in critical and semi-critical areas as a result of rework.
5 Replace acrylic windows with scratches that cannot be reworked in accordance with
these standards.
(e) Mark-Off of such low intensity that vision quality is not impaired and that is not visible
(f) Distortion.
windshield if no more than 1.5 inches (3.81 cm) above the windshield retrainer strip.
D. Acrylic Window (Cabin) Inspection
CAUTION: PRESSURIZED FLIGHT PROHIBITED WITH CRACKED OR CRAZED WINDOW.
(1) The cabin windows are formed from 0.210 inch thick acrylic.
(2) Non-Critical Area Inspection. Any portion of a window not used for flight vision.
(a) Cracks.
Inspect for cracks per Crack Inspection - Acrylic Windows and Windshields, below.
(b) Crazing.
1 Crazing in the windows is critical.
3 A craze of 0.043 inch (1.092 mm) depth is cause for immediate replacement. A craze
0.021 inch (0.533 mm) deep is cause for replacement at the earliest opportunity.
4 Crazing in any portion of a window requires replacement.
(c) Haze or foggy appearance on the glass is not acceptable if the amount of haze/fog
(d) Mark-Off in moderate amounts is acceptable provided that visibility is not impaired.
6J7 56-00-00 FebPAGE 7

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(e) Distortion.
1 Distortion along the sides of the window within 0.5 inches (12.70 mm) or less of the
retainer is acceptable.
2 Distortion along the upper portion of the window is acceptable if distortion does not
extend downward more than 2.00 inches (50.8 mm) from the top and does not impair
vision.
3 Distortion of the main body of the side window is acceptable providing the distorted
area does not exceed 25 percent of the window area.
E. Crack Inspection - Acrylic Windows and Windshields
CAUTION: PRESSURIZED FLIGHT PROHIBITED WITH CRACKED OR CRAZED
WINDOW/WINDSHIELD.
(1) Perform this inspection annually or each 1,000 hours, whichever occurs first.
NOTE: This inspection should also be performed after repainting when any chemical stripping
agent was used. Use the prism method described in step (3), below, to inspect the
entire circumference of the window for stripper damage/etching; especially in areas
concealed by window frames, retainers, plates, or collars.
(2) Inspect window panes as follows:
(a) Inspect sealant for signs of wear, deterioration, and positive contact with mounting
surfaces.
(b) Inspect window frames, retainers, plates, and collars for cracks, loose rivets or screws,
corrosion, and structural defects.
(3) Inspect bolt holes in windows and co-pilot’s windshield as follows, using Window Inspection Kit
- P/N 766-294. (A 45° acrylic prism and glycerin may be used if kit not available.)
(a) Clean area to be inspected with soap and water to ensure surface is free of oil, dirt, and
wax.
(b) Determine which immersion oil to use: Type A in cold weather; Type B in hot weather.
(c) Apply a small amount of oil to the surface of window adjacent to bolt hole. On initial
application, use a small amount of oil applied directly to one 90° face of inspection prism
in contact with glass or acrylic (see Figure 2).
(d) Press oiled face of prism to glass or acrylic. Slide prism around until a constant film of oil
extends across prism face and window surface.
(e) Look into 90° face of prism (see Figure 2). The image of an unfractured fastener hole will
appear as a frosty cylinder.
(f) If hole is countersunk, cylinder will appear to have a cone setting on one end as seen in
Figure 2.
(g) The image of a cracked hole will appear as a frosty or reflective projection extending from
the hole (see detail A-A, Figure 3).
(h) The image of a crack from one hole to another will appear as a frosty or reflective
irregular surface (see detail B-B, Figure 3).
(4) Crack Limitation.
(a) The maximum acceptable length of a crack from any single screw hole is 0.300 inch
(7.62mm).
(b) The maximum combined length of multiple cracks into the space between two adjacent
bolt holes is 0.300 inch (7.62mm) (see Figure 3).
PAGE 8
Feb 28/07 56-00-00 6J8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Visual Inspection
Figure 2
6J9 56-00-00 FebPAGE 9

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(c) If a crack less than 0.300 inch (7.62mm) is left unrepaired, reinspect the window each
additional 25 hours of aircraft operation.
(d) A maximum of three bolt holes with cracks less that 0.299 inch (7.59mm) long are
acceptable in any one window pane before that window pane must be replaced.
(e) Replace window pane if a single crack or combination of adjacent facing cracks exceed
0.300 inch (7.62mm) in length.
(5) Chips, Scratches, and Crazing Limitations.
CONSERVATIVELY. REWORK OF MULTIPLE CHIPS OR SCRATCHES SHOULD
NOT BE ATTEMPTED IN ANY CASE WHERE, WHEN FINISHED, A LINEAR
PATTERN WILL HAVE BEEN CREATED.
(a) Scratches in acrylic windows and the co-pilot’s windshield may be reworked (see Window
/ Windshield Repair / Rework, below) as follows:
1 Co-pilot’s windshield - scratch is less than 0.030 inch (0.762 mm) deep and
windshield is a minimum of 0.279 inch (7.087 mm) thick after rework.
2 Cockpit side windows - scratch is less than 0.025 inch (0.635 mm) deep and window
is a minimum of 0.225 inch (5.715 mm) thick after rework.
3 Cabin side windows - scratch is less than 0.021 inch (0.533 mm) deep and window is
a minimum of 0.189 inch (4.800 mm) thick after rework.
4 No vision distortions in critical and semi-critical areas as a result of rework.
(b) Replace acrylic windows with scratches that cannot be reworked in accordance with these
standards.
F. Window / Windshield Repair / Rework Procedure (Acrylic Windows / Co-Pilot’s Windshield Only).
The following methods should be used for repairs:
CAUTION: ANY ACRYLIC WINDOW WHICH MAY HAVE BEEN DAMAGED BY PAINT THINNER,
PAINT REMOVER OR OTHER SOFTENING AGENT MUST BE REPLACED. NO
REPAIR IS PERMITTED FOR THIS TYPE OF DAMAGE.
CONSERVATIVELY. REWORK OF MULTIPLE CHIPS OR SCRATCHES SHOULD
NOT BE ATTEMPTED IN ANY CASE WHERE, WHEN FINISHED, A LINEAR
PATTERN WILL HAVE BEEN CREATED.
Rework the damaged area to the depth of the damage, approximately twice the length and three
times the width, removing all sharp edges.
(1) Areas with small scratches:
(a) Clean the window, using generous amounts of water and a mild detergent.
(b) Polish the window with an approved compound and soft cloth.
(c) Clean and wax the polished area.
(2) Areas with large scratches, gouges, and nicks: Areas with damages exceeding .003 of an inch
depth or those with less than .003 of an inch in depth, having sharp edges which cause
hanging of fingernail should be locally rounded out or buffed.
(a) Clean the window using generous amounts of water and a mild detergent.
(b) Use a scratch removal kit, such as the type supplied by Micro-Surface Finishing Products
Inc., P.O. Box 456, Wilton, Iowa, to remove the defective area, blend and buff.
(c) Using 400A wet or dry abrasive paper wrapped around a smooth rubber block and
generous amounts of water, lightly sand over and around the defected area in a circular
motion, extending in a diameter equal to two or three times the defected area.
PAGE 10
Feb 28/07 56-00-00 6J10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(d) Continue sanding until the initial defect is no longer apparent. Thoroughly flush the area
with water.
(e) Using 600A wet or dry abrasive paper, repeat step (c). Continue sanding only until the
hairline scratches caused by the coarse sanding are no longer apparent. Sand a larger
area than that covered by the original sanding operation. Thoroughly wash the area.
(f) Finish the repair using instructions given in paragraph (1), above.
Crack Limitations
Figure 3
6J11 56-00-00 Feb

PAGE 11
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
G. Water Leak Check (PIR-PPS60047, Rev. C.)
The check shall be accomplished using a standard garden hose and a nozzle capable of
adjustment.
(1) Attach hose with nozzle to water tap at city water pressure. Check to ensure that there are no
leaks in the hose or fittings which would impair the check or cause other damage, with the tap
full open.
(2) The check shall be conducted with an observer inside the aircraft.
(3) All cabin and baggage compartment doors and other controllable external closures shall be
closed and latched during rainfall simulation.
(4) The spray shall be aimed directly at the openings around windows for a period of one-half to
one and one-half minutes for each window. The nozzle shall be held three to ten feet from point
of water contact.
(5) If a leak allowing water to enter the cockpit/cabin is detected, the seal or caulking shall be
reworked as required, and the check shall be repeated in the area where the leak was noted.
PAGE 12
Feb 28/07 56-00-00 6J12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6J13 56-00-00 Feb

PAGE 13
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 14
Feb 28/07 56-00-00 6J14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FLIGHT COMPARTMENT
1. Windshield
A. Removal
(1) If removing the pilot’s windshield (i.e. - heated), disconnect the battery and remove external
power connections, if any.
(2) Remove all screws which attach the windshield to the retainer and the retainer to the fuselage.
(3) If removing heated windshield, disconnect black ground wire from tooling hole near instrument
panel support clip.
(4) Remove the retainer.
(5) Remove the windshield.
B. Installation
(1) If the old retainer is being reused, remove all traces of the old sealant from its inside surface.
(2) Remove all traces of the old sealant from the shims, windshield mounting angles and retainer
mating surfaces.
(3) All corners must be broken and all edges smooth and free of tool marks.
(4) Check fit the windshield to the fuselage to ensure that it will fit the contour of the fuselage. If
replacing the co-pilot’s windshield (i.e. - acrylic), trim excess material as required.
(5) If using a new retainer:
(a) Check fit and trim to fit as required. The areas most likely to require trimming are the lower
left outboard side and along the bottom edge near the center post.
(b) Using the old retainer as a template, drill .191 inch screw holes. Countersink the screw
holes .380 in. dia. x 100 degrees.
NOTE: For the pilot’s heated glass windshield, apply a parting agent (Polyvinyl Alcohol,
P/N 915-936, or equivalent) to the faying surface of the retainer and do not install
silicone rubber tubes in the screw holes as described in step (6), below.
(6) Apply sealant per Figure 1 and install windshield insuring that a silicone rubber tube is installed
in each tooling hole in the windshield. Torque any fasteners which penetrate the windshield as
specified in Figure 1.
(7) If installing glass heated windshield, connect black ground wire to tooling hole near instrument
panel support clip with a MS35206-215 screw, AN960-4 washer, MS35338-41 lock washer,
and a MS21044N04 nut.
(8) Install the retainer.
(9) Conduct the Pressurization System Test, 21-30-00.
(10) Reconnect the battery and, if desired, external power.
(11) Conduct the Heated Windshield Test, 30-40-00.
(12) Prime and paint as desired.
(13) Make a proper logbook entry documenting this installation.
6J15 56-10-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
82288 AP
D
A D
NOTES: 1. APPLY SEALANT HERE.
2. TORQUE ALL FASTENERS WHICH
PENETRATE THE WINDSHIELD
A FROM 19 TO 22 INCH POUNDS.
3. TUBING NOT REQUIRED
WHEN GLASS HEATED
WINDSHIELD IS INSTALLED.
4. FOR PILOT'S HEATED GLASS
WINDSHIELD ONLY, IT IS
B
PERMISSABLE TO REMOVE
UP TO .10 INCH OF FIBERGLASS
FRAME EDGE TO ACHIEVE
SEE NOTE 4 .03/.06 INCH EDGE CLEARANCE
B BY SANDING PERPENDICULAR
TO EDGE WITH (MAX) 220 GRIT,
IN AREA SHOWN ONLY. REFINISH
SANDED EDGE WITH FLAT BLACK
ENAMEL PAINT.
WINDSHIELD
SILICONE SEE
RUBBER NOTE 1
TUBES
SHIM SHIM SEE
(RIGHT AND NOTE 1
LEFT SIDE)
SEE
SHIM NOTE 1
SILICONE (RIGHT
SEE RUBBER AND LEFT
NOTE 1 TUBE SIDE)
SECTION A - A
SECTION B - B
SECTION C - C
SILCONE
RUBBER SEE
TUBE NOTE 1
PILOTS TYPICAL VIEW OF
WINDOW SILCONE RUBBER TUBE
WINDSHIELD IN WINDSHIELD
(REF)
(SEE NOTE 3)
LENGTH OF TUBING TUBE

SHIM (RIGHT TO EQUAL THICKNESS
AND LEFT SIDE) OF WINDSHIELD
SECTION D - D
FASTENER
HOLE
Windshield Installation
Figure 1
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 56-10-00 6J16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A B
A
C C
E
REFER TO FIGURES 4 & 5
STORM WINDOW
STRAP
WINDSHIELD SEE NOTE 1
(REF) SEE NOTE 1
SHIM
(RIGHT AND STRAP
LEFT SIDE)
SILICONE RUBBER TUBE SILICONE
RUBBER TUBE
SECTION A - A SECTION C - C
SILICONE
SEE RUBBER
NOTE 1 TUBE
TYPICAL VIEW OF
SEE NOTE 1 TUBE IN WINDSHIELD
(REFER TO FIGURE 1
FOR DETAILS)
SILICONE
RUBBER TUBE
SECTION B - B
SECTION D - D SILICONE RUBBER
TUBE
NOTES: 1. APPLY SEALANT HERE. SEE 91-10-00, CHART 10, SEALANT, WINDOWS AND WINDSHIELDS.
2. ALL FASTENERS WHICH PENETRATE THE WINDOW SHALL BE TORQUED TO 19 - 22 INCH POUNDS.
Pilot’s / Copilot’s Window Installation

Figure 2
6J17 56-10-00 FebPAGE 3

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2. Pilot’s / Copilot’s Window

A. Removal
(1) Remove the screws, nuts, washers and strap that retain the window to the fuselage.
(2) Remove the window.
B. Installation
NOTE: In S/N’s 4636001 thru 4636076 only, if installing a service replacement pilot’s side window,
order Kit No. 767-355.
(1) Remove all traces of old sealant from the outboard side of the strap and the inboard side of the
fuselage window frame.
(3) Check fit the window to the fuselage window frame to ensure that it will fit. Trim excess material
as required.
(4) Apply sealant to the inboard side of the fuselage window frame.
(5) Position the window in its frame, apply sealant to the outboard side of the strap. Secure the
window to the frame and strap with the previously removed nuts, bolts and washers. Torque
any fasteners which penetrate the window as specified in Figure 2.
C. 50 Hour Pilot’s Side Cockpit Window Inspection
For airplanes with pilot’s side cockpit windows which have accumulated 350 hours time-in-service,
upon reaching 350 hours and each 50 hours time-in-service thereafter, inspect as follows:
(1) Examine the exterior of the pilot’s side cockpit window in the area between the storm window
hinge and the fuselage skin.
(2) If sealant exists between the storm window hinge and the airframe skin, remove the sealant in
that area only, very carefully with a plastic scraper, ensuring that the window is not scratched.
NOTE: Replacing sealant after inspection is not required.
(3) Inspect the pilot’s side cockpit window in the area between the storm window hinge and the
fuselage skin for cracks. Especially examine the areas highlighted in Figure 3.
(a) If no cracks are found, make an appropriate logbook entry documenting completion of this
inspection and return airplane to service.
CAUTION: PRESSURIZED FLIGHT PROHIBITED WITH CRACKED WINDOW.
(b) If any crack is found, pressurized flight is prohibited until window is replaced as described
above.
NOTE: Unpressurized flight operations are authorized pending replacement of a cracked
window.
(4) In either case, for airplanes with pilot’s side cockpit windows which have accumulated 350
hours time-in-service, continue repetitive 50 hour inspections until such time as a permanent
solution is released (see future revisions of Piper Service Bulletin No. 1175).
PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 56-10-00 6J18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
HINGE FUSELAGE SKIN
S/N’S 4636077 AND UP
LOOKING INBOARD FROM LEFT
Pilot’s Side Cockpit Window Inspection

Figure 3
6J19 56-10-00 FebPAGE 5

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. Storm Window (S/N’s 4636001 thru 4636076 only) (See Figure 4.)
A. Removal
(1) Rotate the latch to open the storm window.
(2) Remove the nuts, washers, bolts and screws that attach the storm window hinge to the pilot’s
window.
(3) Remove the pilot’s window.
B. Installation
(1) Position the storm window in the hole in the pilot’s window.
(2) Torque the fasteners that attach the storm window hinge to the window as specified in Figure 4.
(3) Rotate the latch to lock the storm window.
NOTE: The storm window retainer is bonded to the storm window with General Electric
RTV1508 adhesive or equivalent (i.e. - G.E. RTV-108, DOW RTV-732, etc.). The latch
assembly upper half is bonded to the pilot’s window with Dexter Hysol 9446.
PILOT'S SIDE
BOND UPPER HALF WINDOW
OF LATCH ASSEMBLY
TO PILOT'S WINDOW RETAINER
WITH 9446 (DEXTER
CORP.)
LATCH
PILOT'S STORM
WINDOW
BOND RETAINER TO
WINDOW USING G.E.
RTV 1508 ADHESIVE
NOTE: TORQUE ALL FASTENERS WHICH PENETRATE

THE WINDOW FROM 19 TO 22 INCH POUNDS.
Effectivity Storm Window

4636001 thru 4636076 only Figure 4
PAGE 6
Feb 28/07 56-10-00 6J20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4. Storm Window (S/N’s 4636077 and up) (See Figure 5.)

A. Replacing the storm window in an existing pilot’s side window.
(1) Removal
(a) Push button on latch and pull latch to open the storm window.
(b) Remove hinge pin.
(c) Remove storm window.
(2) Installation
(a) Align storm window hinge half with hinge half on the pilot’s window.
(b) Install hinge pin.
(c) Push latch onto latch pin to close the storm window.
B. Installing a storm window in a new pilot’s side window.
(1) Position the hinge in the notch at the base of the storm window cut-out. With the storm window
in a closed position, center the storm window in the cut-out and mark the pilot’s window to
indicate the outer edges of the hinge.
(2) Bond the hinge half to the pilot’s side window with Dexter Hysol 9446 (see A-A, Figure 5). Take
care to ensure the inside edge of the hinge half is bonded flush to the pilot’s window. Also,
ensure that a .030 inch gap is left between the bottom edge of the cut-out and the inside of the
hinge half and that the gap is filled with adhesive.
(3) When the hinge to window bond is cured, slide the latch pin assembly over the rear upper
edge of the storm window cut-out and push the storm window to a closed and latched position.
Mark the position of the latch pin assembly on the pilot’s side window.
(4) Bond the latch pin assembly to the pilot’s side window with Dexter Hysol 9446 (see B-B, Figure 5).
Ensure that the latch pin assembly is aligned to the markings previously made on the pilot’s
side window.
NOTE: The storm window retainer is bonded to the storm window with PRC PR-1422
Sealant. The latch pin assembly and hinge are bonded to the pilot’s window with
Dexter Hysol 9446.
6J21 56-10-00 FebPAGE 7

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
STORM WINDOW ASSY.

100877 J - BOND HINGE TO WINDOW PRIOR
100879 H
TO BONDING LATCH PIN ASSY.
- MAINTAIN .030 INCH MINIMUM GAP
BETWEEN STORM WINDOW RETAINER
AND PILOT'S SIDE WINDOW.
- CENTER HINGE HALF IN THE CUTOUT
AREA SO THAT IT DOES NOT
FWD RIDE INTO CORNER RADII.
B NOTE 2
B FILL GAP BETWEEN WINDOW

AND HINGE HALF WITH
DEXTER HYSOL 9446 ADHESIVE
NOTE 2
THIS SURFACE OF
HINGE HALF
MUST BE BONDED FLUSH
AGAINST WINDOW
NOTE 1
A APPLY PR1422-B4
SEALANT HERE
SILICONE
RUBBER
TUBE
VIEW OUT INSTALL MS 20470AD3-3 RIVET
IN EACH END OF HINGE WITH
LOCTITE 420 TO RETAIN HINGE PIN
WASHER(S)
(TWO MAX.) NOTE 1
(BEFORE BONDING, REMOVE KNOB FROM STORM WINDOW
ASSY. AND CENTER LATCH PIN TO THE .5 IN. DIAMETER HOLE
IN THE STEEL RETAINER. PIN MUST BE CENTERED WITHIN
.015 INCH. AFTER BONDING, WINDOW MUST OPERATE
SMOOTHLY WITHOUT DRAG OR BINDING.)
LATCH PIN
ASSY.
NOTE 2
.06/.12 INCH FILLET SEAL WITH PR-1422
SECTION B-B SECTION A-A

NOTES: 1. BOND WITH DEXTER HYSOL 9446.
2. BOND WITH PR-1422.
3. IF STORM WINDOW FAILS “WATER LEAK CHECK,” ADD UP TO 0.15 RTV-732 (P/N 279-195) BETWEEN
SEAL AND WINDOW RETAINER AND PERFORM “WATER LEAK CHECK” AGAIN.
Effectivity Storm Window

PAGE 8
Feb 28/07 56-10-00 6J22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6J23 56-10-00 FebPAGE 9

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 10
Feb 28/07 56-10-00 6J24
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CABIN
Passenger Windows
A. Removal
(1) Drill out the rivets which fasten the window retainer to the fuselage skin.
(2) Push the window and retainer inward until it is free of the fuselage skin.
(3) Remove the retainer from the window.
(4) Save the old window for a template if a new window is to be installed.
B. Installation
(1) Remove all traces of old sealant from the retainer, inboard edge of the window opening, and
old window.
(3) If a new window is being installed, ensure that it is the same dimensions as the old window.
(4) Apply PRC 1422-B4 sealant to the outboard surface of the window where it mates with the
inboard edge of the window opening. Also apply sealant to the outboard surface of the retainer
where it mates with the inboard edge of the window opening and where it mates with the
inboard edge of the window.
(5) Line up the rivet holes and rivet the retainer to the skin and to the window.
6K1 56-20-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 56-20-00 6K2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
DOOR
Door Window
A. Removal
(1) Drill out the rivets which fasten the window retainer to the inner frame of the door.
(2) Remove the retainer.
(3) Remove the door window.
B. Installation
(1) Remove all remaining traces of a sealant from the inner surface of the door window frame and
outboard-facing side of the retainer.
(2) Fit-check the new window before applying sealant.
(3) Apply PRC1422-B4 sealant to the inner surface of the frame and outboard-facing side of the
retainer. Rivet the retainer to the frame.
RETAINER
CABIN DOOR
WINDOW
SEALANT
(PR1422-B4)
Section View of Cabin Door Window

Figure 1
6K3 56-30-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 56-30-00 6K4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER
57
WINGS
6K5
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6K6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 57
CHAPTER CHAPTER


2 Feb 28/07
57-40-00 1 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07
5 Feb 28/07
6 Feb 28/07
7 Feb 28/07
8 Feb 28/07
9 Feb 28/07
10 Feb 28/07
11 Feb 28/07
12 Feb 28/07
13 Feb 28/07
14 Feb 28/07
15 Feb 28/07
16 Feb 28/07
17 Feb 28/07
18 Feb 28/07
19 Feb 28/07
20 Feb 28/07
57-50-00 1 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07
5 Feb 28/07
6 Feb 28/07

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 57 - WINGS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
ATTACH FITTINGS 57-40-00 1 6K11

General 1 6K11
Outboard Wing 1 6K11
Removal 1 6K11
Installation 5 6K15
HI-LOK Removal and Installation 7 6K17
Inboard Wing 9 6K19
General 9 6K19
Removal 11 6K21
Installation 14 6K24
Attach Fittings Corrosion Control 17 6L3
FLIGHT SURFACES 57-50-00 1 6L7

Aileron 1 6L7
Removal 1 6L7
Installation 1 6L7
Balancing 2 6L8
Balancing Equipment 2 6L8
Wing Flaps 5 6L11
Removal 5 6L11
Installation 5 6L11

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ATTACH FITTINGS
1. General (See Figure 1.)

This chapter contains removal and installation procedures for the wing and related components.
The wing is comprised of three separate sections. The center section is comprised of the inboard portion
of each wing joined by a continuous main spar. The outboard edges of each inboard portion of the wing
are fitted with an outer panel splice. The outboard panel has a mating splice plate and an integral fuel
tank from its center splice to an area 18 inches from the wing tip.
NOTE: Replacement wing sections built for service are direct replacement parts for current production
aircraft only (S/N’s 4636196 and up). When replacing an outboard wing section in these
airplanes, order Piper Service Kit No. 88398-002 (Left) or 88398-003 (Right) in addition to the
appropriate outboard wing assembly.
S/N’s 4636001 thru 4636195 must order Service Hardware Kits as listed below to enable
installation of a new replacement wing or section(s):
To Install a New Order Hardware Kit No.
Left Outboard Wing Section 766-662
Right Outboard Wing Section 766-663
Center (Inboard) Wing Section 766-665
Complete Wing 766-675
See the PA-46-350P Illustrated Parts Catalog (P/N 761-878) for further details.
2. Outboard Wing
A. Removal (See Figures 1 and 2.)
(1) Drain the fuel from both wings (refer to Draining Fuel System, 12-10-00).
(2) Remove the aileron per 57-50-00. If replacing the wing section, remove the aileron sector.
(3) Remove the flap per 57-50-00.
(4) Carefully remove the wing splice skin (W.S. 107.56 - W.S. 115.25 ) that covers the inboard /
outboard wing splice. This old skin may be used as a template for the new skin.
(5) Remove the screws from the fuel access panels.
NOTE: The fuel access panels are installed with low adhesive sealant and will not come off
without some method of separating them from the wing.
(6) Using a fabricated laminated fiberglass wedge, carefully remove the fuel panels so they may
be reused.
(7) Disconnect the fuel lines by removing clamps and cutting the flexible connections.
(8) Disconnect the fuel quantity sender lead. If replacing the wing section, remove fuel quantity
sender per 28-40-00.
(9) Disconnect the taxi/recognition and navigation/strobe light leads. If replacing the wing section,
remove the taxi/recognition and navigation/strobe lights per 33-40-00.
(10) Support the outboard wing. Drill out rivets and remove the Hi-Lok pins and collars from the
splice plate.
(11) Carefully remove the outboard wing, being certain that all electrical leads, fuel and vent lines,
and control cables are disconnected.
6K11 57-40-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Wing Installation
Figure 1
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 57-40-00 6K12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Outboard Wing Installation Effectivity

6K13 57-40-00 FebPAGE 3

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
83000 U W.S. W.S.

107.50 116.00
SPLICE SKIN AREA (REF)
HL18-6-6 (20 PLACES) A HL18-8-7 (2 PLACES)
SPLICE PLATE
IS PART OF
OUTBOARD
WING ASSY.
SPLICE ANGLE
IS PART OF
OUTBOARD
WING ASSY.
A OUTBOARD
B B (SEE SHEET 3)
STRAP
FWD SPLICE ANGLES

ARE PART OF
OUTBOARD
WING ASSY.
STRAP
HL18-6-4 (22 PLACES)
SECTION A - A
(LOOKING INBOARD)
Effectivity Outboard Wing Installation

4636196 & up Figure 2 (Sheet 2 of 3)
PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 57-40-00 6K14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
89640 AP
W.S.
107.50
SKIN
HL19-6-10
HL19-6-9
HL19-6-8
SPLICE ANGLE FWD

IS PART OF
OUTBOARD
WING ASSY.
SKIN
OUTBOARD
SECTION B - B
(ROTATED 90˚)
(LOOKING DOWN)
Outboard Wing Installation Effectivity
Figure 2 (Sheet 3 of 3) 4636196 & up
B. Installation
NOTE: When installing a “replacement” wing or wing section, perform Stall Warning Flight Test
Procedure, 27-30-00, upon completion of wing installation.
(1) Carefully position the outboard wing in alignment with the splice plates on the inboard wing
main and rear spars.
(2) Using a string of suitable length extended from the inboard wing leading edge next to the
fuselage out to the outboard wing tip to help maintain true alignment of the wing sections. Also,
extend a string from the wing tip to the stabilizer, marking its length and checking this with the
opposite wing and stabilizer, using the same reference points on both wings and stabilizers.
(3) While maintaining proper alignment of the wing, install the Hi-Lok pins and rivets into the spars
and splice plates per Figure 3. Refer to the PA-46-350P Illustrated Parts Catalog, P/N 761-878,
for correct rivet part numbers and locations.
6K15 57-40-00 FebPAGE 5

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
DEBURR IF COUNTERSINK
DEBURR HERE TOOL DOES NOT HAVE
(SEE NOTE) THIS FEATURE (SEE NOTE)
(R) HEAD RADIUS (R) HEAD RADIUS
NOTE: The HI-LOK pin has a slight radius under its head.
After drilling, deburr the edge of the hole. This
permits the head to fully seat in the hole. See the
list in this figure for head radius dimensions. For
example, the 3/16 protruding head (HL 18-6 series)
TYPE OF HI-LOK PIN (R) has a .015/.025 radius while the 3/16 flush head
HL18-5 SERIES .025 (HL 19-6 series) has a .025/.030 radius.
HL18-6 SERIES .015
HL18-8 SERIES
HL18-10 SERIES .030

HI-LOK PROTRUSION
HL19-6 SERIES .020 GAUGE (HI-SHEAR
P/N 2-1522) MAY BE
USED WITH OR WITHOUT
COLLAR INSTALLED
EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE MAX
MIN
P (.490)
P1 (.572) 1/16 i.e. 5/16
i.e. 5/16
MAXIMUM
MINIMUM THICKNESS
THICKNESS
MINIMUM GRIP MAXIMUM GRIP

(MAXIMUM PROTRUSION) (MINIMUM PROTRUSION)
EXAMPLE
HL18-10-10
MAXIMUM GRIP LENGTH OF PIN IN 1/16ths
(10/16" OR 5/8" GRIP LENGTH FOR THIS EXAMPLE)
STANDARD HI-LOK PIN MINIMUM MAXIMUM

FIRST DASH NOMINAL PROTRUSION PROTRUSION
NUMBER DIAMETER P P
1
-5 5/32 .302 .384
-6 3/16 .315 .397

-8 1/4 .385 .467
-10 5/16 .490 .572
HI-LOK Fasteners Installation

Figure 3
PAGE 6
Feb 28/07 57-40-00 6K16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(4) Connect the leads from the taxi/recognition and navigation/strobe lights. If installing a
replacement wing section, install the taxi/recognition and navigation/strobe lights first per
33-40-00.
(5) Connect the fuel and vent lines, using new flexible connections.
(6) Connect the fuel quantity sender leads. If installing a replacement wing section, install the fuel
quantity sender first per 28-40-00.
NOTE: When installing the fuel area access panels with the sender units mounted, strict
attention should be payed to avoid having the sender unit wires from becoming
wrapped around the sender unit arm and immobilizing the sender when it is finally
installed.
(7) Install the wing splice skin at W.S. 107.56 - 115.25.
(8) Install the flap and aileron per 57-50-00. If installing a replacement wing section, install the
aileron drive sector on the aft spar first. Torque sector mounting bolt per Figure 4, 27-10-00.
(9) Check fuel system for leaks and flow (see 28-10-00).
(10) Check operation of the taxi/recognition lights and navigation/strobe lights.
(11) Fill the fuel system per Filling Fuel Cells, 12-10-00.
(12) Make appropriate logbook entry.
3. HI-LOK Removal and Installation
NOTE: Refer to Hi Shear Catalogs for further information and a complete list of power and hand tools to
aid in removal and installation of the Hi-Lok fasteners.
A. Hi-Lok pins and collars are used at various points in the wing installation. Refer to the Piper Parts
Catalog, P/N 761-878, for locations and proper pin and collar part numbers.
B. To remove the Hi-Lok pin and collar:
(1) Grasp the collar with pliers.
(2) Insert an Allen hex wrench in the hex in the end of the pin.
(3) Turn the collar with pliers.
(4) Remove the collar and pin.
(5) If not damaged during removal, the Hi-Lok pin can be reused.
C. To install the Hi-Lok pin and collar:
(1) Insert the Hi-Lok pin in the hole (after hole has been deburred if new).
(2) Manually turn the Hi-Lok collar onto the pin.
(3) If using Hi-Lok power tools, insert the hex wrench tip of the power driver into the pin’s hex
recess, and the socket over the collar hex. Press the power driver against the collar and
operate the power driver until the collar’s wrenching device has been torque off.
(4) If using shop tools, insert an Allen wrench into the pin’s hex recess and turn the collar hex with
an open end wrench until the collar’s wrenching device has been turned off.
(5) Check the protrusion of the threaded end for the limits given in Figure 3. Hi-Lok Protrusion
Gauges (P/N 2-1522) offer a convenient method to check the pin protrusion limits.
6K17 57-40-00 FebPAGE 7

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Special Equipment for Wing Removal and Installation

Figure 4
PAGE 8
Feb 28/07 57-40-00 6K18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4. Inboard Wing
A. General
If it is necessary to replace the entire wing structure, you will need special equipment. Allow time for
setting up as follows:
(1) Determine whether wing will be lowered or fuselage raised to remove wing. Equipment will
vary accordingly.
(2) Fabricate the following special equipment prior to starting the procedure (see Figure 4).
(a) Cradle to support fuselage: Create slings from industrial nylon lifting strap, six (6) inches
wide. Lifting capability needed only if raising fuselage away from wing.
(b) Dolly to cradle wing: A single jack may be specially adapted for this procedure in order to
lower wing away from fuselage.
(c) Hoist assembly: To be attached to ceiling, with sufficient weight-bearing capacity. Position
clamps so that straps will cradle fuselage at bulkheads (see Figure 4) for best support.
(d) Lifting pins (left and right) and cable: Suitable to attach to engine mount for additional
steadying.
(e) Tools for removing rivets and cutting sealant: May be standard or fabricated.
Removal and Installation of Inboard Wing

6K19 57-40-00 FebPAGE 9

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Removal and Installation of Inboard Wing

PAGE 10
Feb 28/07 57-40-00 6K20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B. Removal
(1) Remove all fuel from the wing.
(2) Prepare hoist and fuselage supports.
(3) Set up dolly under wing.
NOTE: Perform steps (4) thru (6) inside airplane.

(4) Remove interior furnishings as follows:
(a) Forward and center seats, left and right.
(b) Cabinets, left and right.
(c) Floor carpet.
(d) Forward side panels below window line, left and right.
(5) Remove floor panels from forward cockpit area to entrance door (F.S. 117.00 to F.S. 89.60).
(6) Remove lines and cables as follows:
(a) Remove relief tube, located under center left floorboard.
(b) Derig aileron, rudder, and stabilator cables. Remove from below spar.
NOTE: Do not disconnect hydraulic lines at this time.
(c) Remove fuel crossover valve cover and close-out, located on right side. Remove fuel
crossover lines across front of spar. Remove fuel line (tear drop) crossover cover on left
side.
(d) Remove fuel crossover valve.
NOTE: Perform steps (7) and (8) outside airplane.
(7) Remove wing to fuselage fairings, left and right wing roots. Remove bottom fuselage skin
panels at wing spar, left, center, and right. Remove tee channels and angles below spar.
(8) Disconnect/remove lines as follows (Figure 5, Detail A):
(a) Disconnect flap drive. Remove rods, left and right (see Figure 2, 20-00-00).
(b) Pull aileron cables through wing root and secure cables (refer to 27-00-00).
(c) Clear fuel lines from wing root area.
(d) Disconnect electrical cannon plugs, left and right.
NOTE: Perform step (9) with one man inside airplane at wing spar and one outside assisting.
Use special tools to remove rivets and Hi-Loks.
(9) Remove rivets and hardware (see Figure 5, Detail B).
(a) Remove pilot seat belt supports, each side of forward spar
(b) Remove six forward and six aft Hi-Loks, each side above spar.
(c) Remove five rivets thru fuselage skin and angle each side above spar.
(d) Remove sealant between fuselage, frame, and angle each side above spar.
(e) Remove floor board clips attached to aft spar.
NOTE: It may be necessary to cut sealant several times to get complete separation. Sealant
after 28 days has 260 psi adhesion.
6K21 57-40-00 Feb

PAGE 11
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(10) Break sealant loose forward and aft of spar each side.
(a) Use a sharp putty knife and cut away excess sealant top and bottom of spar.
(b) Use piano wire between spar and frame pulling from inside and outside thru seals like a
saw. The wire will cut the sealant but not the aluminum. Drip PSS solvent on piano wire as
you cut and this will help separation.
NOTE: Perform the following steps to support the fuselage for wing removal. Use fabricated
hoist, cradle, and lifting pin.
(11) Attach straps, as shown in Figure 4, at indicated fuselage stations.
CAUTION: PROTECT AIRPLANE FINISH BY PLACING CLOTH OR PADDING UNDER
STRAPS.
(12) Anchor fabricated lifting pins to engine mount tubes to secure nose and prevent fuselage from
rotating (see Figure 4).
WARNING: DO NOT ENTER AIRPLANE BEFORE ATTACHING LIFTING PINS TO KEEP
FUSELAGE FROM ROTATING IN SLINGS.
(13) Suspend fuselage with hoist. Attach cable to lifting pins.
NOTE: Dolly should already be in place under wing.
NOTE: Perform step (14) both inside and outside airplane.

(14) Retract landing gear and remove hydraulic lines as follows:
(a) Using hydraulic pressure, release gear down locks.
(b) Retract and tie back main landing gear.
(c) Drain off hydraulic pressure.
(d) Remove hydraulic lines from wing root and below spar (Figure 5).
NOTE: The following final steps may require additional manpower.
(15) Remove forward and aft wing attach bolts, each side. If sealant is completely free, wing will be
ready to remove.
WARNING: MAKE CERTAIN THAT FUSELAGE LIFTING DEVICE AND LIFTING STRAPS
ARE STRONG AND POSITIONED PROPERLY. SPAR FITS TIGHTLY IN
CANTED SPAR BOX IN FUSELAGE. EVEN AFTER SEALANT HAS BEEN CUT,
A HEAVY AMOUNT OF LIFTING PRESSURE (TO BREAK SEALANT GRIP)
MAY BE REQUIRED. TAKE EXTREME CARE NOT TO DAMAGE FUSELAGE
AND WING.
(16) Additional pressure will be necessary to separate wing from fuselage. Proceed as follows:
(a) Have one man on each wing tip to steady the airplane and apply downward pressure.
(b) Observe spar area inside airplane.
(c) Strike spar with dead blow mallet until wing is completely released.
(17) With wing resting on dolly, lift fuselage to clear spar or lower wing.
(18) Remove wing.
PAGE 12
Feb 28/07 57-40-00 6K22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Hole and Slot Fillets

Figure 6
6K23 57-40-00 Feb

PAGE 13
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C. Installation
WARNING: FUSELAGE MUST BE CRADLED.
NOTE: When installing a “replacement” wing or wing section, perform Stall Warning Flight Test
Procedure, 27-30-00, upon completion of wing installation.
(1) Clean surfaces and all parts to be installed using PSS or other suitable solvent. Pay special
attention to frame area inside airplane where sealant was broken or rivets removed. Remove
all old sealant residue. Remove all corrosion inhibiting surface paint. This will ensure good
sealant grip.
(2) Place new wing on dolly and position under fuselage.
(3) Raise wing or lower fuselage over wing.
(4) Secure forward and aft wing attach bolts, each side.
(5) Align spar with frames. Drill holes. Align angles with top of spar and with frames each side.
Mark holes thru angles in top of spar each side.
CAUTION: KEEP SURFACES FREE OF METAL SPLINTERS.
(6) Remove wing attach bolts and separate fuselage from wing. Move wing away from fuselage to
work on each independently.
(7) Drill wing spar top each side for angles that attach to fuselage and frame.
(8) Use a vacuum or air hose to clean away all metal splinters in both wing spar and fuselage.
(9) Apply sealant to top spar and angles each side. Use R4 sealant.
(10) Attach angles to top spar each side with cherry rivets. (Two #6/11, two #6/9, two #6/10 and two
#6/11).
CAUTION: PROPER SEALING IS CRITICAL TO MAINTAIN PRESSURIZATION OF
COCKPIT. BE GENEROUS WITH SEALANT PARTICULARLY IN CORNERS
WITH WIDE GAPS. USE B4 SEALANT.
(11) Apply sealant to wing spar aft, forward, left and right plates and angles as shown in Figures 6
and 7.
(12) Apply sealant to canted frames as shown in Figure 7.
(13) Position wing under fuselage for installation.
(14) Lower fuselage onto wing spar. Some sealant will squeeze out.
(15) Secure wing with wing attach bolts. Install forward bolts, then aft Hi-Loks with nuts forward.
(16) Tighten forward nuts to a torque of 550 inch - pounds and tighten aft nuts (Hi-Loks) till they
shear off.
NOTE: Two people are needed to buck and shoot rivets.
(17) Clean off excess sealant with PSS solvent.
(18) Rivet canted frames to left and right aft spar. (Ten #6/9, ten #5/8, and ten #5/7.)
(19) Rivet floorboard clips to aft spar.
(20) Rivet canted frame at left forward spar. (Ten #6/9, ten #5/8, six #5/7 and four #5/8 thru
floorboard clip.)
(21) Rivet canted frame to spar at right forward spar. (Ten #6/9, seven #5/8, three #5/9 thru lower
intercostal, six #5/7, and four #5/8 thru floorboard clip.)
(22) Install five (5) rivets in angle on top of spar each side thru fuselage skin from outside fuselage.
PAGE 14
Feb 28/07 57-40-00 6K24
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Application of Sealant
Figure 7
(23) Install four (4) Hi-Lok bolts thru each intercostal, frame, angle and two (2) thru frame and wing
spar, just under intercostal. All four locations are left, right, fwd and aft of top wing spar. See
Figures 5 and 7.
(24) Install four (4) angles that form two (2) tee’s in bottom of fuselage. Tap with a plastic mallet thru
aft channels in the frame under wing spar until they clear the fwd frame under spar. Then using
small vise grips attach to angles and tap thru fwd frame channels an equal amount.
(25) Inside fuselage align angles evenly with Kleco fasteners to existing holes one on each side of
stringer.
(26) Below fuselage place short tee angles between floor angles and rivet together with four (4)
rivets on top. Then go inside and rivet both ends to bottom stringer.
(27) Ensure there are no metal splinters on chips between skins prior to installing close outs.
(28) Apply sealant to all skins and close out skins on bottom of aircraft. See Figure 6. Apply sealant
1/4 inch each side of rivets.
(29) Install close outs in place with Kleco fasteners and insert rivets from bottom.
(30) Inspect rivets.
(31) Install fwd pilot’s seat belt brackets with bolts.
(32) Install cat grommets on all passage holes in bottom spar.
(33) Inside fuselage at spar all newly installed rivets and Hi-Loks must be brush sealed with A-4
sealant.
(34) Make adjustments as follows:
(a) Control cables (refer to Aileron Control - Rigging and Adjustment, 27-10-00).
(b) Fuel crossover lines and valve (refer to 28-20-00).
6L1 57-40-00 Feb

PAGE 15
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(c) Hydraulic lines (refer to Hydraulic System Testing and Bleeding Hydraulic System,
29-10-00).
1 Put pressure on system.
2 Allow gear to extend.
3 Test and bleed system.
4 Perform gear cycle test (refer to Landing Gear Retraction System Functional Test,
32-30-00).
5 Be sure that all three landing gear are down and locked.
(35) Remove support straps.
(36) Remove dolly.
(37) Install wing to fuselage fairings and bottom skin panels.
(38) Install interior furnishings.
(39) Reinstall lines and cables as follows: (Figure 5, Detail A)
NOTE: Reinstall electrical, fuel and hydraulic lines first. Then, reinstall control cables.
(a) Outside airplane.
1 Install hydraulic lines in wing root and below spar.
2 Connect electrical cannon plugs, left and right.
3 Install fuel lines in wing root area.
4 Pull aileron cables through wing root and secure cables (refer to 27-00-00).
5 Connect flap drive. Reinstall rods, left and right (see Figure 2, 20-00-00).
(b) Inside airplane.
1 Reinstall fuel crossover valve.
2 Reinstall fuel crossover lines across front of spar.
3 Reinstall fuel line (tear drop) crossover cover on left side.
4 Reinstall fuel crossover valve cover and close-out, located on right side.
5 Reconnect aileron, rudder, and stabilator cables. Rig per Chapter 27.
6 Reinstall relief tube, located under center left floorboard.
PAGE 16
Feb 28/07 57-40-00 6L2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
5. Attach Fittings Corrosion Control

Each five years, inspect the attach fittings shown in Figure 8 for corrosion and condition. Repair/replace
as required. When inspection and repair/replacement is completed, reapply Dinitrol AV 8 (P/N 89500-
800) Corrosion Inhibiting Compound.
and apply Dinitrol AV 8 to:
(1) Forward wing spar attach fittings.
(2) Aft wing spar attach fittings.
NOTE: Includes wing and fuselage fittings.
CAUTION: READ PRECAUTIONS ON CONTAINER LABEL AND WEAR A CHARCOAL
FILTER MASK WHEN APPLYING DINITROL AV 8.
thinned.
C. Cover autopilot servos, electrical connectors, and cable pulleys.
6L3 57-40-00 Feb

PAGE 17
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Wing Attach Fittings Corrosion Control

Figure 8
PAGE 18
Feb 28/07 57-40-00 6L4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6L5 57-40-00 Feb

PAGE 19
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 20
Feb 28/07 57-40-00 6L6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FLIGHT SURFACES
1. Aileron (See Figure 1.)

EXHIBIT CRACKS.
A. Removal
(1) Remove the nut and bolt which secures the aileron drive sector to the yoke in the aileron.
(2) Support the aileron and remove the two aileron hinge bolts.
(3) Remove the aileron.
B. Installation
BELOW.
(1) Position the aileron on the trailing edge of the wing.
(2) Install the attaching nuts, bolts and washers.
(3) Attach the aileron drive sector to the yoke in the aileron with the previously removed nut, bolt
and washers.
(4) Actuate the aileron controls to ensure freedom of movement.
Aileron Installation
Figure 1
6L7 57-50-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

To balance the aileron, the assembly must be complete, including the trim tab and all attaching
screws. Before balancing, bend the trim tab into its neutral position. Place the aileron assembly on
the knife edge supports in a draft free room with the beam perpendicular to the hinge centerline. Do
not place the tool on the trim tab. Calibrate the tool as described in Balancing Equipment, below.
Read the scale when the bubble level has been centered by adjustment of the movable weight and
determine the static balance limit (see Chart 1).
There is no adjustment provision for the ailerons.
2. Balancing Equipment
Balancing must be done using a suitable tool capable of measuring unbalance in inch-pounds from the
centerline of the control surface hinge pin. See the tool configuration in Figure 3. Other tool
configurations may be used if accuracy is maintained and recalibration capability is provided.
To use this tool:
A. Ensure that the control surface is in its final Flight configuration, static wicks, trim tabs, trim tab push
pull rod and control surface tip (as applicable) should be installed. The surface should be painted
and trim/servo tabs should be in the neutral position.
NOTE: Because paint is a considerable balance factor, it is recommended that existing paint be
removed prior to repainting a control surface.
B. Place hinge bolts through control surfaces and place control surface on a holding fixture.
C. Calibrate the tool.
(1) Avoiding rivets, place the balancing tool on the control surface with the tool’s hinge centerline
directly over the hinge line of the control surface.
(2) Adjust the movable trailing edge support to fit the width of the control surface. Tighten the set
screw on the trailing edge support.
(3) Adjust the trailing edge support vertically until the beam is parallel with the control surface
chord line.
(4) Remove the tool from the control surface and balance the tool itself by adding or removing nuts
or washers from the beam balancing bolt. When balancing the tool, the movable weight must
be at the bar’s hinge centerline.
D. After balancing the tool, reattach it to the control surface per Figures 2 and 3. Keep the beam
positioned 90° from the control surface hinge line.
E. Determine balance of control surface by sliding movable weight along the balance beam.
F. Read the scale when the bubble level has been centered. Multiply by three to determine inch-lbs.
(i.e. Since the movable weight weighs three (3) pounds, every inch it is moved from the center of the
beam equals three (3) inch-lbs of force.)
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 57-50-00 6L8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 1
AILERON STATIC BALANCE LIMITS (PIR-PPS50060, Rev. I.)

0 -5.2
Balancing Aileron
Figure 2
6L9 57-50-00 FebPAGE 3

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Control Surfaces Balancing Tool

Figure 3
PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 57-50-00 6L10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. Wing Flaps (See Figure 4.)

EXHIBIT CRACKS.
A. Removal
(1) Extend the flap and disconnect the flap drive push rods (2 places each flap).
(2) Support the flap and remove the flap hinge bolts, nuts and washers.
(3) Pull the flap straight back off the wing.
B. Installation
(1) Position the flap on the trailing edge of the wing.
(2) Ensure that spacers are in place in the flap tracks.
(3) Insert bolts, washers and nuts. Torque the nuts from 38 - 43 inch pounds and safety with cotter
pins. Install the teflon faced washers on the center tracks so that the teflon side faces the flap
track.
(4) Connect the two flap drive push rods to the aileron.
(5) Cycle the flaps several times to make sure that they are operating freely (refer to Flap Rigging
and Adjustment, 27-50-00).
Wing Flap Installation

Figure 4
6L11 57-50-00 FebPAGE 5

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GRIDS 6L12 THRU 6L24

INTENTIONALLY BLANK
PAGE 6
Feb 28/07 57-50-00 6L12
CARD 7 OF 9
PA-46-350P
(S/N’s 4636001 AND UP)

7A1
Published by

2926 Piper Drive
U.S.A.
Member
General Aviation
7A2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
are as follows:
ORG950712 June 19, 1996 All

PR980101 January 1, 1998 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6
CR981223 December 23, 1998 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6
PR000201 February 1, 2000 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6
PR010515 May 15, 2001 1
CR050730 July 30, 2005 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8
PR060207 February 7, 2006 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8
CR070228* February 28, 2007 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 and 9

02/28/07.
manual.

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 1
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTRODUCTION
CHAPTER CHAPTER


2 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07
5 Feb 28/07
6 Feb 28/07
7 Feb 28/07
8 Feb 28/07
9 Feb 28/07
10 Feb 28/07
11 Feb 28/07
12 Feb 28/07
13 Feb 28/07
14 Feb 28/07
15 Feb 28/07
16 Feb 28/07
Index 1 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07
5 Feb 28/07
6 Feb 28/07
7 Feb 28/07
8 Feb 28/07
9 Feb 28/07
10 Feb 28/07

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTRODUCTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION
General 1 7A9
Effectivity 2 7A10
Pagination 3 7A11
Indexing 3 7A11
INDEX
Index 1 7B1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTRODUCTION

(5-20-00).
2. General
airplane.
correspondence.

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. Effectivity
1995 4636001 thru 4636020 2004 4636349 thru 4636363

1996 4636021 thru 4636076 2005 4636364 thru 4636374
1997 4636077 thru 4636131 2006 4636375 thru 4636399
1998 4636132 thru 4636186 2007 4636400 and up
1999 4636187 thru 4636247
2000 4636248 thru 4636313
2002 4636299, and
4636314 thru 4636338
2003 4636339 thru 4636348

Example:
46 36 001

MODEL CODE

fuel system.
PIPER.
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6. Pagination
with Page 1 (i.e. - 28-40-00, Page 1).
different page.
Example.
9. Indexing
apply.

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Wylie, Texas 75098
P.O. Box 1404
(3) ALTERNATOR:
Airport Complex
P. O. Box 273
(4) AUTOFLIGHT:
Olathe, Kansas 66061-1950 PH: (940) 325-9406
PAGE 4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(5) BATTERY:
(6) BRAKES:
1160 Center Road
Avon, Ohio 44011
(330) 374-3743
FAX: (330) 374-2290
Black Standard
Pneumatic De-Icer
Installation,
Maintenance and
10 Ammon Drive FAX: - (603) 669-0931
or,
55 Old Bedford Road
Lincoln, MA 01773

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

14405 Keil Road NE
(10) ENGINE:
43 Magnolia Ave. #4
20 New King Street
711 Taylor Street
Elyria, Ohio 44036
2600 S. Custer
Wichita, Kansas
(See Brakes, above)
or,
4520 Hampton Rd. FAX: (336) 766-9040
Clemmons, NC 27012
PAGE 6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

2600 Skypark Drive
(18) MAGNETOS:
7575 Baymeadows Way
Olathe, KS 66062
(20) OXYGEN SYSTEM:
2225 Erie Street
Torrance, CA 90504

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Piqua, OH 45356-2634
Propeller
Composite Blade
Propeller Owner’s
Aluminum Blade
Inspection, Repair,
P/N 006-05332-0001
2275 Stanley Ave. FAX: (937) 229-8531
Dayton, Ohio 45404
(26) STARTER:
or,
Granbury, TX 76048
(27) TURBOCHARGER:
Torrance, CA 90505
PAGE 8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(28) VACUUM PUMP:


Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
00 General
10 Time Limits
00 General
10 Jacking

20 Leveling
00 General
10 Towing
20 Taxiing
10 Parking
20 Mooring

12 SERVICING 1I3
00 General
10 Replenishing

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
00 General
20 Painting
00 General
20 Distribution
40 Heating
50 Cooling
22 AUTOFLIGHT 2F11
10 Autopilot
00 General
00 General
30 DC Generation
40 External Power
60 Emergency
20 Extinguishing
00 General
10 Aileron and Tab
20 Rudder and Tab
30 Elevator and Tab
50 Flaps
60 Speedbrakes
PAGE 12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
28 FUEL 3F9
00 General
10 Storage
20 Distribution
40 Indicating
00 General
10 Main
00 General
10 Airfoil
30 Pitot and Static
00 General
50 Steering
33 LIGHTS 4G5
40 Exterior
34 NAVIGATION 5C1
00 General
35 OXYGEN 6C1
10 Crew
20 Passenger

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
37 VACUUM 6C15
00 General
10 Distribution
20 Indicating

51 STRUCTURES 6F1
00 General
70 Repairs
52 DOORS 6G13
10 Passenger/Crew
20 Emergency Exit
30 Cargo
55 STABILIZERS 6H13
00 General
20 Elevator
40 Rudder
56 WINDOWS 6I19
00 General
20 Cabin
30 Door
57 WINGS 6K5
40 Attach Fittings
50 Flight Surfaces
61 PROPELLERS 7C1
20 Controlling
00 General
PAGE 14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
71 POWER PLANT 7D5
00 General
10 Cowling
20 Mounts
70 Engine Drains
10 Distribution
30 Indicating
74 IGNITION 7F5

20 Distribution
10 Power Control
10 Power
20 Temperature
79 OIL 7J3
20 Distribution
30 Indicating
80 STARTING 7J15
10 Cranking
81 TURBINES 7K9
10 Charts


Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

1E23
Ailerons
Balancing: 6L9
Control Column
Installation: 3C24
Control System
Aileron - Rudder
Interconnect: 3D7
Control Cables: 3D2
Installation: 3D3
Wiring: 4C8 4F6
Corrosion Control
Control Wheel C
Wing: 6L3
Installation: 3C21
Installation: 6L7
Tab: 3D5
2D22
Compressor: 2E22
Dipstick: 2E23
Oil Level: 2F1
2E22
Slip Torque: 2F1
Servicing: 2D23
Ambient Temperature
Indication: 2E14
Stand: 2E7
7B1 INDEX FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 INDEX 7B2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

OAT: 9I13 2H19 7J11
7B3 INDEX FebPAGE 3

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Flaps
G Inspection
Warning 6I11
1K5 System: 6C9
PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 INDEX 7B4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Forward: 4H1
7B5 INDEX FebPAGE 5

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
P Propeller Rudder
Pagination: A11
7C11 Control System
Parking: 1G15
Piper
Repair: 7C11 3D13
Pitch Servo: 2G12
Rings: 3K10
Measuring: 3K3
5C11
Installation: 5C12
Pitot Head: 5C18
3K7 Seats
Test: 5C11
Placards: 1G23
Exterior: 1H1
Interior: 1H9
Components: 3I11
R System: 3J9
Limits: 3J4
PAGE 6
Feb 28/07 INDEX 7B6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

7B7 INDEX FebPAGE 7

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Filter: 6D3 Wing
Vertical Fin: 6I11
Y
Yaw Servo: 2G10
W
A11
Weather Radar: 5F1
Weighing: 1F15
Wheels
Bearing Cup: 4F4
Repairs: 4F3
PAGE 8
Feb 28/07 INDEX 7B8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
7B9 INDEX FebPAGE 9

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

INTENTIONALLY BLANK
PAGE 10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER
61
PROPELLER
7C1
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
7C2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 61
CHAPTER CHAPTER


2 Feb 28/07
61-00-00 1 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07
61-10-00 1 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07
5 Feb 28/07
6 Feb 28/07
7 Feb 28/07
8 Feb 28/07
61-20-00 1 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 61 - PROPELLER
TABLE OF CONTENTS
GENERAL 61-00-00 1 7C7

Description 1 7C7
PROPELLER ASSEMBLY 61-10-00 1 7C9

Propeller 1 7C9
Removal 1 7C9
Installation 1 7C9
Blade Track 3 7C11
Cleaning, Inspection, and Repair 3 7C11
Propeller Blade Inspection and Repair 3 7C11
All-Metal Blades 3 7C11
Kevlar-Composite Blades 3 7C11
CONTROLLING 61-20-00 1 7C17

Propeller Governor 1 7C17
Removal 1 7C17
Installation 2 7C18
Rigging and Adjustment 2 7C18

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GENERAL
Description
The PA-46-350P, Malibu Mirage, is equipped with a Hartzell two-bladed all-metal constant-speed
propeller as standard equipment. In S/N’s 4636132 and up, a Hartzell three-bladed Kevlar-composite
constant-speed propeller is available as an option. Both blade models have an 80 inch diameter.
In all installations, the propeller is controlled by an engine mounted Hartzell V-5-2 governor which
supplies oil through the propeller shaft. Oil pressure increases the blade pitch (reduces rpm) and blade
centrifugal forces reduces the blade pitch (increase rpm).
When propeller heat is installed, a B.F. Goodrich single-element system is used as described in section
30-60-00.
7C7 61-00-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 61-00-00 7C8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PROPELLER ASSEMBLY
1. Propeller
A. Removal
(1) Ensure master and magneto switches are off.
(2) Move fuel selector to off position.
(3) Place mixture control in idle cut-off.
(4) Note position of each component to facilitate reinstallation.
(5) Remove the screws from around the spinner assembly and remove the spinner.
(6) Place a drip pan under the propeller to catch oil spillage.
(7) Remove the six propeller mounting bolts and remove propeller.
B. Installation
(1) Ensure master and magneto switches are off.
(2) Move fuel selector to off position.
(3) Place mixture control in idle cut-off.
(4) Observe the starter ring gear to make sure it is mounted properly on the engine crankshaft
flange. One of the bushings on the crankshaft is stamped with an “O” mark and must be
inserted in the starter ring gear hole, likewise identified with an “O” mark.
Spinner Installation
Figure 1
7C9 61-10-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(5) Wipe crankshaft and propeller pilot to ensure that no chips or foreign matter enter the propeller
mechanism.
(6) Check interior of propeller hub for proper seating of O-ring. Wipe inside of hub to remove any
traces of dirt. Check to see that O-ring is covered with grease.
(7) Install propeller with blades aligned with mounting bolt hole marked “O”.
(8) If not installed already, install rear spinner bulkhead using four (4) or six (6) hub clamping bolts,
two and three blade installations, respectively. Torque 20 to 24 FT.-LBS.
(9) Slide propeller carefully over pilot, taking care that O-ring is not damaged.
(10) Install the six propeller mounting bolts and torque 60 to 70 FT.-LBS.
(11) Check propeller blade track.
(12) Safety the propeller mounting bolts with safety wire.
(13) Grease propeller per Lubrication Chart in 12-20-00.
(14) Wrap hub cylinder as required with 289-788 Teflon tape. Refer to Figure 1.
(15) Install spinner.
Typical Nicks and Removal Method for All-Metal Blades

Figure 2
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 61-10-00 7C10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C. Blade Track
Blade track is the ability of one blade tip to follow the other, while rotating, in almost the same plane.
Excessive difference in blade track - more than 0.0625 inch - may be an indication of bent blades or
improper propeller installation. Check the blade track as follows:
(1) With the engine shut down and blades vertical, secure a smooth board to the airplane just
under the tip of the lower blade. Move the tip fore and aft through its full blade-shake travel,
making small marks with a pencil at each position. Then center the tip between these marks
and scribe a line on the board for the full width of the tip.
(2) Carefully rotate the propeller by hand to bring the opposite blade down. Center the tip and
scribe a pencil line as before and check that the lines are not separated more than 0.0625
inch.
(3) Propellers having excess blade track should be removed and inspected for bent blades, or for
parts of sheared O-rings, or foreign particles, which have lodged between the hub and
crankshaft mounting faces. Bent blades will require repair and overhaul of assembly.
D. Cleaning, Inspection, and Repair
(1) Check for oil and grease leaks.
(2) Clean the spinner, propeller hub interior, exterior, and blades with a non-corrosive solvent.
(3) Inspect the hub parts for cracks.
(4) Steel hub parts should not be permitted to rust. Use aluminum paint to touch up if necessary,
or replate during overhaul.
(5) Check all visible parts for wear and safety.
(6) Check the blades to determine whether they turn freely on the hub pivot tube. This can be
done by rocking the blades back and forth through the slight freedom allowed by the pitch
change mechanism. If they appear tight and are properly lubricated, remove the pitch change
mechanism so that each blade can be checked individually. If the blades are tight, the propeller
should be disassembled.
2. Propeller Blade Inspection and Repair
A. All-Metal Blades
(1) Inspect the blades for damage or cracks. Nicks in the leading edges of the blades should be
filed out and all edges rounded, to prevent formation of cracks. Use fine emery cloth for
finishing.
(2) Refer to Figure 2 for all-metal propeller blade care.
B. Kevlar-Composite Blades
CAUTION: SEE LATEST REVISION HARTZELL MANUAL NO. 135, MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FOR COMPOSITE PROPELLER BLADES, FOR SPECIFIC DAMAGE LIMITS AND
APPROVED REPAIR PROCEDURES. THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION IS
ADVISORY ONLY.
(1) Description.
The composite blade is composed of a metal blade shank retention section into which is
molded a low-density foam core that supports built-up layers of composite laminate. An erosion
shield of electroformed nickel is adhesively bonded to the blade leading edge to protect it from
impact damage. A finish covering of polyurethane paint protects the entire blade from erosion
and ultraviolet damage.
7C11 61-10-00 FebPAGE 3

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(2) Inspection.
Inspect entire blade for nicks, gouges, looseness of material, erosion, cracks and debonds,
and lightning strikes. Each 500 hours coin tap the erosion shield. Each 1000 hours coin tap the
entire blade surface. Defects or damage discovered during inspection must be evaluated in
accordance with the following criteria to determine: if repairs are required prior to further flight;
and, if so, whether or not repairs may be conducted locally or must be performed by a qualified
propeller shop.
Coin-Tap Test:
(a) Composite blades can be inspected for delaminations and debonds by tapping the blade,
or cuff (if applicable), with a “metal washer.”
(b) Use a washer-shaped metal tapper, approximately 2.5 inches O.D. x 1.25 inches I.D. x
0.25 inch thick, and weighing no less than 3 oz. Tap the surface. If an audible change is
apparent, sounding hollow or dead, a debond or delamination is likely.
NOTE: Blades which incorporate a “cuff” will have a different tone when coin-tapped in
the cuff area. To avoid confusing sounds, the cuff area and the transition area
between cuff and blade should be coin-tapped separately from the blade area.
(c) Mapping of the area being inspected is recommended. Coin-tap within an imaginary grid
or matrix consisting of 2 inch squares during scheduled aircraft inspections. During blade
overhaul, a more thorough inspection is required by using a smaller, 0.5 inch, grid.
(d) The metal erosion shield is more likely to have problems than the blade, therefore a more
thorough coin-tapping of the erosion shield is desirable. Also, slight deformations in the
erosion shield may be noticed by careful visual and manual (touch) inspection. Such
deformations may be the result of a debond and should be given a careful coin-tap
inspection.
(e) If a suspected delamination or debond is discovered, a localized, thorough coin-tap
inspection is required to define the precise area of delamination or debond.
(f) Outline any suspect areas with a grease pencil to determine approximate size of damage.
If repairable, proceed per Hartzell Manual No. 135, latest revision.
(3) Definitions.
Airworthy Damage Damage that does not affect the safety or flight characteristics of the
propeller blade. Although a blade may continue in service with
airworthy damage, this type of damage should be repaired at the
earliest practical time to prevent further damage to the blade.
Unairworthy Damage Damage that exceeds the maximum limits of airworthy damage.
Unairworthy damage can affect the safety or flight characteristics of
the propeller blade. This type of damage must be repaired at prior to
the next flight. Exceptions may be possible, but require written
authorization from Hartzell.
Minor Repair Correction of damage that may be safely performed in the field by a
certified aircraft mechanic (preferably one who has completed Hartzell
composite blade training).
Major Repair Correction of damage that cannot be performed by elementary
operations. Major repairs must be performed by a Hartzell Propeller
Inc. approved repair station. Exceptions may be possible, but require
written authorization from Hartzell.
PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 61-10-00 7C12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(4) Airworthy Damage Limits.

CAUTION: SEE LATEST REVISION HARTZELL MANUAL NO. 135, MAINTENANCE
MANUAL FOR COMPOSITE PROPELLER BLADES, FOR SPECIFIC DAMAGE
LIMITS.
(5) Minor Repairs.
CAUTION: SEE LATEST REVISION HARTZELL MANUAL NO. 135, MAINTENANCE
MANUAL FOR COMPOSITE PROPELLER BLADES, FOR SPECIFIC DAMAGE
LIMITS AND APPROVED REPAIR PROCEDURES. THE FOLLOWING
INFORMATION IS ADVISORY ONLY.
Procedures for the following minor repairs are provided in latest revision Hartzell Manual
No. 135 - Maintenance Manual for Composite Propeller Blades.
(a) Nickel Erosion Shield.
-- Debond extending to trailing edge or crack.
-- Gouge.
-- Missing area of trail side or inboard end.
(b) Blade Cuff.
Cracks at the root end of cuff.
-- Nick or scratch.
-- Cracks.
-- Delamination.
(c) Kevlar Blade.
-- Gouges or loss of material.
-- Crushed trailing edge.
-- Split trailing edge.
-- Frayed trailing edge.
(d) Lightning Strike.
7C13 61-10-00 FebPAGE 5

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 6
Feb 28/07 61-10-00 7C14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
7C15 61-10-00 FebPAGE 7

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 8
Feb 28/07 61-10-00 7C16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CONTROLLING
1. Propeller Governor
A. Removal
The propeller governor is mounted on the upper forward portion of the crankcase. Remove the
governor as follows:
(1) Remove the upper cowl and left side of the nose cowl to gain access to the governor.
(2) Disconnect the governor control cable end from the governor control arm.
(3) Remove the governor mounting nuts and withdraw the governor, with control bracket, from the
mounting pad. Cover the mounting pad to prevent foreign material from entering the engine.
Propeller Governor
Figure 1
7C17 61-20-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B. Installation
(1) Clean the mounting pad and the governor drive shaft thoroughly.
(2) Coat the mounting gasket with Dow Corning release agent or equivalent.
(3) Lubricate the drive shaft with engine oil and install the governor, with control mounting bracket.
on the mounting pad.
(4) Tighten the mounting bolts evenly and tighten to a final torque as shown in Figure 1.
(5) Connect the control cable to the control arm. Check to be sure the attachment bolt and
hardware are installed properly and do not contact the governor body while moving the control
arm through its full travel.
C. Rigging and Adjustment (PIR-FTP2001-8, Rev. E., -8-1, Rev. A.)
(1) Start the engine; park the airplane 90° to the wind direction and warm in a normal manner until
the oil temperature reaches 180°F.
(2) To check the high rpm, low pitch setting, move the propeller control all the way forward. At this
position the governor speed control arm should be against the high rpm fine adjusting screw.
With the throttle full forward, observe engine rpm, which should stabilize between 2,460 and
2,500 rpm. A takeoff must be conducted during which the engine rpm should reach 2,460 -
2,500 rpm and remain steady.
(3) If the engine rpm does not read 2,460 - 2,500 rpm in flight, the high rpm setting must be
adjusted as follows:
(a) Land and shut down the engine.
(b) Adjust the governor by means of the fine adjustment screw for 2,460 - 2,500 rpm. To do
this, loosen the high rpm fine adjustment screw locknut and turn the screw in a clockwise
direction to decrease engine speed or in a counterclockwise direction to increase engine
speed.
NOTE: One revolution of the fine adjustment screw will increase or decrease the engine
speed approximately 20 rpm.
(c) Repeat step (b), above, as required to obtain proper rpm setting.
(d) After setting the proper high rpm adjustment, run the self-locking nut on the fine
adjustment screw against the base projection to lock.
(4) With the high rpm adjustment complete, the control system should be adjusted so that the
governor control arm will contact the high rpm stop when the cockpit control knob is 0.032 to
0.047 of an inch from its full stop forward. Reconnect the cable end and tighten the jamnut.
(Upper cowl must be removed to accomplish this adjustment.)
(5) It is usually only necessary to adjust the high rpm (low pitch) setting of the governor control
system, as the action automatically takes care of the positive low rpm (high pitch) setting.
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 61-20-00 7C18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
7C19 61-20-00 FebPAGE 3

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 61-20-00 7C20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER
70
STANDARD
PRACTICES - ENGINE
7C21
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
7C22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 70
CHAPTER CHAPTER


2 Feb 28/07
70-00-00 1 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 70 - STANDARD PRACTICES - ENGINE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
GENERAL 70-00-00 1 7D3

Procedures 1 7D3

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GENERAL
Procedures
Use the following procedures whenever applicable:
A. To facilitate and ensure proper installation, tag and/or mark all parts and hardware as to their
location before they are removed or disassembled.
B. When removing any tubes or engine parts, look for indications of scoring, burning or other
undesirable conditions. Tag any unserviceable parts or units for investigation and possible repair.
C. Take extreme care to prevent foreign matter (lockwire, nuts, washers, dirt, etc.) from entering the
engine whether it is on or off the aircraft. Make use of protective caps, plugs, and covers to ensure
openings are not exposed.
CAUTION: DUST CAPS USED TO PROTECT OPEN LINES SHOULD ALWAYS BE INSTALLED
OVER THE TUBE ENDS AND NOT IN THE TUBE ENDS. FLOW THROUGH THE
LINES MAY BE BLOCKED OFF IF LINES ARE INADVERTENTLY INSTALLED WITH
THE DUST CAPS IN THE TUBE ENDS
D. If anything is dropped into the engine, work should be stopped immediately and the item removed
even if considerable time and labor is required.
E. Ensure all parts are thoroughly clean before assembling, especially during engine build-up.
F. Never reuse any lockwire, lock washers, tablocks, tab washers, or cotter pins.
G. All lockwire and cotter pins must fit snugly in holes drilled in specific hardware. On castellated nuts,
the cotter pin head must fit into a recess of the nut with the other end bent such that one leg is back
over the stud and the other is down flat against the nut. Use only corrosion resistant steel for cotter
pins or lockwire.
H. When replacing gaskets, packings, or rubber parts, use the same type or composition as that of the
gasket that was removed.
I. Make sure replacement nonmetallic parts show no sign of storage deterioration.
J. Use only a mallet of plastic or rawhide when installation of a part requires such force.
CAUTION: ENSURE THAT ANTI-SEIZE COMPOUNDS ARE APPLIED IN THIN EVEN COATS
AND THAT EXCESS COMPOUND IS COMPLETELY REMOVED TO AVOID
CONTAMINATION OF ADJACENT PARTS.
K. Loose fitting spline drives external to the engine which have no means of lubrication should be
lubricated with an anti-seize lubricant such as molybdenum disulfide.
7D3 70-00-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 70-00-00 7D4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER
71
POWER PLANT
7D5
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
7D6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 71
CHAPTER CHAPTER


2 Feb 28/07
71-00-00 1 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07
5 Feb 28/07
6 Feb 28/07
7 Feb 28/07
8 Feb 28/07
9 Feb 28/07
10 Feb 28/07
11 Feb 28/07
12 Feb 28/07
13 Feb 28/07
14 Feb 28/07
71-10-00 1 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07
71-20-00 1 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07
5 Feb 28/07
6 Feb 28/07
71-70-00 1 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07
7D7 71 - LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES PAGE 1

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 71 - LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES 7D8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 71 - POWER PLANT
TABLE OF CONTENTS
GENERAL 71-00-00 1 7D11

Description 1 7D11
Engine 7 7D17
Removal 7 7D17
Installation 8 7D18
COWLING 71-10-00 1 7E1

Engine Cowling 1 7E1
Removal 1 7E1
Installation 1 7E1
Cleaning, Inspection, and Repair 1 7E1
MOUNTS 71-20-00 1 7E5

Engine Mount 1 7E5
Inspection 1 7E5
100 Hour 1 7E5
Corrosion Inspection, Immersion in Water 3 7E7
Installation 4 7E8
Engine Shock Mounts Replacement 4 7E8
DRAINS 71-70-00 1 7E11

Cylinder Head Drain 1 7E11

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GENERAL
1. Description
The PA-46-350P, Malibu Mirage, is powered by a Textron Lycoming TIO-540-AE2A series six cylinder,
direct drive, wet sump, horizontally opposed, fuel injected, dual turbocharged, air cooled engine with a
compression ratio of 7.3:1, rated at 350 hp at 2,500 rpm and designed to operate on 100 or 100LL
(minimum) octane aviation grade fuel.
The engine cowling is cantilevered from the firewall with secondary supports from the nose gear door
frame. The engine cowling consists of an upper and dual lower sections which are fabricated from sheet
metal with bonded stiffeners. The metal nose cowl is split through the vertical propeller centerline to
permit complete cowl removal without removing the propeller.
The induction system consists of a dry type air filter, an alternate air door, a Bendix servo regulator
continuous flow type RSA-10ED1 fuel injector and an AN type fuel supply pump as an integral part of the
fuel injector system. Dual AiResearch turbochargers are mounted as an integral part of the engine which
incorporate bleed air sources for cabin pressurization. Automatic waste gate control of the turbochargers
provides constant air pressure at the fuel injector inlet from sea level to critical altitude.
This engine is equipped with dual pressurized Slick type 6360 and 6363 magnetos. One magneto has a
retard breaker providing fixed retard, long duration boosted spark for starting. A source of dc power and
a starting vibrator are required to complete the installation. The spark advance is 20° BTC.
In addition to the aforementioned components, each engine is equipped with dual alternators, geared
starter, and dual pneumatic vacuum pumps. Engine mounts are steel tubing construction attached at the
firewall and incorporate vibration absorbing dynafocal mounts. From the exhaust stacks, gases are
directed to individual turbocharger exhaust plenums, through or around the turbo turbine, as required,
and overboard at bottom rear of the engine cowling on each side.
The lubrication system is of the pressure wet sump type. The oil pump, which is located in the accessory
housing, draws oil through a drilled passage leading from the oil suction screen located in the sump. The
oil from the pump then enters a drilled passage in the accessory housing which feeds the oil to a
threaded connection on the rear face of the accessory housing, where a flexible line leads the oil to the
external oil cooler. Pressure oil from the oil cooler travels thru tubing to a remote pressure oil filter and
then is returned thru tubing to a threaded connection on the accessory housing and into the engine. In
the event that cold oil or an obstruction should restrict the oil flow through the cooler, an oil cooler
bypass valve is provided to pass the oil directly from the oil pump to the oil pressure filter.
The oil filter element, located on the engine mount frame, provides a means of filtering from the oil any
solid particles that may have passed through the suction screen in the sump. After being filtered, the oil
is fed through a drilled passage to the oil pressure relief valve, located in the upper left side of the
accessory housing at the rear of the engine. This relief valve regulates the engine oil pressure by
allowing excessive oil to return to the sump, while the balance of the pressure oil is fed to the main oil
gallery in the right half of the crankcase. Residual oil is returned by gravity to the sump, where after
passing through a screen it is again circulated through the engine.
2. Troubleshooting
See Chart 1.
7D11 71-00-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TROUBLESHOOTING ENGINE
Failure of engine to start. Lack of fuel. Check fuel system for
leaks. Fill fuel tank. Clean
dirty lines, strainers or fuel
valves.
Over priming. Leave ignition OFF and
mixture control in idle
cut-off, open throttle and
unload engine by cranking
for a few seconds. Turn
ignition switch on and
proceed to start in a
normal manner.
Incorrect throttle setting. Open throttle to one fourth
of its range.
Defective spark plugs. Clean and adjust or replace
spark plugs.
Defective ignition wire. Check with electric tester
and replace any defective
wires.
Defective battery. Replace with charged
battery.
Improper operation of Clean points. Check
magneto breaker. internal timing of
magnetos.
Lack of sufficient fuel Disconnect fuel line at fuel
flow. injector and check fuel flow.
Water in fuel injector. Drain fuel injector or fuel
lines.
Internal failure. Check oil screens for metal
particles. If found, complete
overhaul of engine may be
indicated.
Engine is hard starting. Low voltage or defective Measure voltage between
vibrator. vibrator terminal marked IN
and the ground terminal
while operating starter.
There must be at least
13 volts.
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 71-00-00 7D12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Engine is hard starting. Inoperative or defective If voltage is adequate,
(continued) vibrator. listen for buzzing of vibrator
during starting. If no
buzzing is heard, either the
vibrator is defective or the
circuit from the Output
terminal on the vibrator to
the retard contact assembly
is open. Check both Switch
and Retard circuits. Also
check for good electrical
ground.
Retard contact assembly in Retard points may not be
magneto not operating closing due to wrong
electrically. Engine may adjustment, or may not be
kick back during cranking electrically connected in
due to advance timing of circuit due to a poor
ignition. connection. Inspect retard
points to see if they close.
Check for proper contact at
the Switch and Retard
leads at magneto and at
the vibrator. Check wiring.
Vibrator-magneto Turn engine in proper
combination not putting direction of rotation until
out electrically. retard points just open No.
1 cylinder position. Remove
input connection from
starter to prevent engine
turning and, while holding
No. 1 plug lead 0.19 of an
inch from ground, energize
vibrator by activating the
starter switch. Plug lead
should throw a 0.19 of an
inch spark. If spark is weak
or missing, try new vibrator.
If this does not correct
trouble, check magneto for
improper internal timing or
improperly meshed
distribution gears.
Magneto improperly timed Check magneto to engine
to engine. timing.
7D13 71-00-00 FebPAGE 3

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Engine is hard starting. Advance contact assembly Check magneto timing.
(continued) out of adjustment (internal
timing off).
Retard points opening too Check timing of retard
late. points.
Failure of engine to idle Incorrect idle mixture. Adjust mixture.
properly.
Leak in the induction Tighten all connections in
system. the induction system.
Replace any parts that are
defective.
Incorrect idle adjustment. Adjust throttle stop to
obtain correct idle.
Uneven cylinder compression. Check condition of piston
rings and valve seats.
Faulty ignition system. Check entire ignition
system.
Insufficient fuel pressure. Adjust fuel pressure.
Leak in air bleed nozzle Check connection and
balance line. replace if necessary.
Plugged fuel injector nozzle. Clean or replace nozzle.
Flow divider fitting plugged. Clean fitting.
Low power and uneven Mixture too rich as indicated Readjustment of fuel
running. by sluggish engine injector by authorized
operation, red exhaust personnel is indicated.
flame at night. Extreme
cases indicated by black
smoke from exhaust.
Mixture too lean; indicated Check fuel lines for dirt
by overheating or or other restrictions. Check
backfiring. fuel injection nozzles.
Readjustment of fuel
injector by authorized
personnel is indicated.
Leaks in induction system. Tighten all connections.
Replace defective parts.
Defective spark plugs. Clean and gap or replace
spark plugs.
Improper fuel. Fill tank with fuel of
recommended grade.
PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 71-00-00 7D14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Low power and uneven Magneto breaker points Clean points. Check
running. (continued) not working properly. internal timing of magnetos.
Defective ignition wire. Check wire with electric
tester. Replace defective
wire.
Defective spark plug Replace connectors on
terminal connectors. spark plug wire.
Fuel injector nozzles clogged. Clean or replace nozzle.
Failure of engine to Leak in the induction Tighten all connections and
develop full power. system. replace defective parts.
Throttle lever out of Adjust throttle lever.
adjustment.
Improper fuel flow. Check strainer, gauge and
flow at fuel injector inlet.
Restriction in air scoop. Examine air scoop and
remove restrictions.
Improper fuel. Drain and refill tank with
recommended fuel.
Plugged fuel injector nozzle. Clean or replace nozzle.
Propeller out of rig. Adjust propeller.
Faulty ignition. Tighten all connections.
Check system with tester.
Check ignition timing.
Rough engine. Cracked engine mount. Repair or replace mount.
Defective mounting Install new mounting
bushings. bushings.
Uneven compression. Check compression.
Defective spark plugs. Try new spark plugs.
Defective plug leads. Check plug leads for con-
tinuity and break down.
Check distributor block
for moisture and carbon
tracking. Check contact
springs in distributor
block. Check magneto
contact assemblies for
burning or dirt (Main
and Retard). Check
distributor timing.
7D15 71-00-00 FebPAGE 5

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Rough engine. Magneto check out-of- Check magneto-to-engine
(continued) limits. timing. Inspect contact
assemblies for proper
opening.
Blocked fuel injector Clean or replace nozzles.
nozzles.
Low oil pressure. Insufficient oil. Fill sump to proper level
with recommended oil.
Air lock or dirt in Remove and clean oil
relief valve. pressure relief valve.
Leak in suction line or Check gasket between
pressure line. accessory housing and
crankcase.
Dirty oil strainers. Remove and clean oil
strainers.
High oil temperature. See High Oil Temperature
in Trouble column, below.
Defective pressure gauge. Replace gauge.
Stoppage in oil pump Check line for obstruction.
intake passage. Clean suction strainer.
High oil temperature. Insufficient air cooling. Check air inlet and outlet
for deformation or
obstruction.
Insufficient oil supply. Fill oil sump to proper
level with specified oil.
Low grade of oil. Replace with oil conforming
to specifications.
Clogged oil lines or Remove and clean oil
strainers. strainers.
Excessive blow-by. Usually caused by worn
or stuck rings.
Failing or failed bearings. Examine sump for metal
particles. If found, overhaul
of engine is indicated.
Defective temperature gauge. Replace gauge.
Defective thermostatic Replace.
bypass valve.
PAGE 6
Feb 28/07 71-00-00 7D16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Excessive oil consumption. Low grade of oil. Fill sump with oil
conforming to
specifications.
Failing or failed bearings. Check sump for metal
particles.
Piston rings worn. Install new rings.
Incorrect installation of Install new rings.
piston rings.
Failure of rings to seat. Use mineral base oil. Climb
(New nitrided cylinders.) to cruise altitude at full
power and operate at 75%
cruise power setting until
oil consumption stabilizes.
High fuel flow indicated Plugged fuel injector Clean or replace nozzle.
on fuel gauge. nozzle.
3. Engine
A. Removal
WARNING: PLACE A TAIL STAND UNDER THE TAIL OF THE AIRPLANE BEFORE REMOVING
THE ENGINE.
NOTE: All hoses, lines, and wires should be tagged (identified) to facilitate installation. Open fuel,
oil, and vacuum lines and fittings should be covered to prevent contamination.
(1) Turn off all electrical switches in the cockpit and then disconnect the battery ground wire at the
battery.
(2) Move the fuel selector lever in the cockpit to OFF.
(3) Remove the engine cowling.
(4) Remove the propeller (refer to 61-10-00).
(5) Discharge the air conditioning system and disconnect the air conditioning compressor lines
(refer to 21-50-00).
(6) Disconnect the starter positive and ground leads at the starter. Remove the lead attachment
clamps.
(7) Disconnect the propeller governor control cable at the governor. Remove the cable attachment
clamps.
(8) Disconnect the heated air hose from the heat muff.
(9) Disconnect the throttle and mixture cables at the injector.
(10) Remove the turbocharger air inlet ducts from both turbochargers.
7D17 71-00-00 FebPAGE 7

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(11) Disconnect the fuel pump supply line.

(12) Disconnect both engine oil lines.
(13) Disconnect the magneto P leads at the magnetos.
(14) Disconnect the engine vent tubes at the engine.
(15) Disconnect the engine oil temperature lead at the aft end of the engine.
(16) Disconnect the tachometer leads at the engine magneto sensors.
(17) Untie the ignition harness, hoses and lines at the aft end of the engine.
(18) Disconnect the vacuum pump lines at the pumps and remove the fittings from the pumps.
(19) Disconnect oil pressure line at the engine.
(20) Disconnect the manifold pressure line from the engine on the right side intake manifold.
(21) Disconnect the alternator leads and the cable attachment clamps.
(22) Attach a one-half ton (minimum) hoist to the hoisting straps and relieve the tension from the
engine mounts.
(23) Check the engine for any attachments remaining to obstruct its removal.
(24) Drain the engine oil, if desired, and then close drain.
(25) Remove the four engine mount assemblies and swing the engine free, being careful not to
damage any attaching parts.
(26) Place the engine on a suitable stand.
B. Installation
NOTE: Prior to installing the engine, install all items that were removed from the engine after the
engine was removed from the aircraft. Remove any protective caps and identification tags
as each item is installed.
(1) Attach a one-half ton (minimum) hoist to the engine and swing the engine into alignment with
its attaching points.
NOTE: Refer to Figure 1 for the arrangement of the shock mount assemblies. The top shock
mounts are assembled so the silver shocks are aft and the gold shocks are forward.
The bottom shock mounts are installed opposite of the top shock mounts.
(2) Insert an engine mount bolt with washer against head into bottom motor mounts. Then insert
heat shields, aft shock mount, and then spacer onto bolt.
(3) Lower engine against aft shock mount and add forward shock mount over bolt and spacer onto
engine mount bracket.
(4) Place large wide washer then small washer over bolt, add nut and start only a few threads.
(5) Insert an engine mount bolt with washer against head into top motor mounts. Then insert aft
shock mount and then spacer onto bolt.
(6) Raise engine against aft shock mount and add forward shock mount over bolt and spacer onto
engine mount bracket.
(7) Place large wide washer then two small washers over bolt, add nut and start only a few
threads.
(8) Tighten engine shock mounts (4) to torque specified in Figure 1.
(9) Tighten engine mount assembly bolts (5) to 240-270 inch pounds (torque bolt head).
(10) Connect alternator leads and secure the leads with the cable clamps.
(11) Connect the manifold pressure line to the right bottom side of the engine.
PAGE 8
Feb 28/07 71-00-00 7D18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(12) Connect the oil pressure line.

(13) Install the fittings in the vacuum pumps (refer to 37-10-00) and attach the lines to the pumps.
(14) Connect the tachometer leads at the engine magneto sensors.
(15) Connect the engine oil temperature lead to the aft end of the engine.
(16) Connect engine vent tube to the engine.
(17) Connect the magneto p-leads to the magnetos.
(18) Connect oil filter lines to the oil cooler and engine.
(19) Connect the fuel pump supply line to the fuel pump.
(20) Attach the turbocharger air inlet ducts to the turbochargers.
(21) Connect the throttle and mixture cables to the injector.
(22) Connect the heated air hose to the heat muff.
(23) Connect the propeller governor control cable to the governor. Secure the control cable with the
clamps.
(24) Connect the starter positive and ground leads to the starter. Secure the leads with the clamps.
(25) Connect the air conditioning compressor lines, if the air conditioning is installed.
(26) Ensure that any other lines, hoses or electrical leads that were disconnected during removal of
the engine are now reconnected.
(27) Reinstall the propeller (refer to 61-10-00).
(28) Reinstall the engine cowling.
(29) Add the proper grade and amount of engine oil (refer to 12-10-00).
(30) Turn on the fuel valve, open the throttle full and turn on the electric fuel pump. Check the fuel
lines for leaks.
(31) Service the air conditioning system.
(32) Refer to 81-20-00 for information on pre-lubricating the turbochargers.
(33) Perform an engine operational check. Inspect for any leaks and make final adjustments to
engine controls as required.
7D19 71-00-00 FebPAGE 9

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Engine Installation
PAGE 10
Feb 28/07 71-00-00 7D20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Engine Installation
7D21 71-00-00 Feb

PAGE 11
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 12
Feb 28/07 71-00-00 7D22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
7D23 71-00-00 Feb

PAGE 13
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 14
Feb 28/07 71-00-00 7D24
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
COWLING
Engine Cowling (See Figure 1.)

A. Removal
(1) Upper
(a) Release the fasteners that attach the upper cowl to the nose cowl and lower cowls.
(b) Release the fasteners that attach the upper cowl to the fire wall flange.
(c) Remove the upper cowl.
(2) Lower
NOTE: Support lower cowl before removing any attaching hardware.

(a) Release clamp attaching heater muff hose to the NACA inlet on right cowl.
(b) Release clamp attaching hose from NACA inlet on right cowl to air modulator box.
(c) Remove screws that attach the lower cowl to the nose cowl.
(d) Remove the screws that attach the lower inboard edges of the lower cowls to the
induction air panel assembly.
(e) Release the fasteners that attach the upper cowl to the fire wall flange.
(f) Remove lower cowl.
(3) Nose Bowl
(a) Remove the screws that attach the lower inboard edges of the nose cowl to the induction
air panel assembly.
(b) Remove the five upper and two lower screws attaching the right half of the nose cowl to
the left half.
(c) Remove nose bowl cowl.
B. Installation
(1) Place the nose cowl halves around the propeller drive shaft and secure them to each other and
to the induction air panel assembly.with MS24695-S50 screws.
(2) Position both halves of the lower cowling in place and secure them to the nose cowl and
firewall flange. with the MS24694-49 screws.
(3) Install screws attaching induction air panel assembly to the lower inboard edges of the lower
cowls
(4) Install the screws that attach the lower inboard edges of the nose cowl to the induction air
panel assembly.
(5) Attach hose from NACA inlet on right cowl to air modulator box. Tighten clamp.
(6) Attach heater muff hose to the NACA inlet on right cowl. Tighten hose clamp.
(7) Place the upper cowl in place and secure it to the nose cowl, lower cowlings and firewall
flange.
C. Cleaning, Inspection and Repair
(1) Clean the cowling with a suitable solvent and then wipe dry with a clean cloth.
(2) Inspect the cowling for dents, cracks, loose rivets, damaged or missing fasteners, and
damaged areas.
(3) Repair all defects to prevent further damage.
7E1 71-10-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
QUICK
DISCONNECT
FASTENERS
ENGINE OIL
DIPSTICK
ACCESS
UPPER
COWLING
NOSE
COWL
HALVES
MS24694-S50
SCREWS
LOWER
COWLING
MS24694-S49
SCREWS
Engine Cowling
Figure 1
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 71-10-00 7E2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
7E3 71-10-00 FebPAGE 3

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 71-10-00 7E4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
MOUNTS
1. Engine Mount
A. Inspection
(1) 100 Hour
In serial numbers 4636001 through 4636319 with the original factory-installed engine mount,
each 100 hours time-in-service:
NOTE: Installation of a current production engine mount (see Figure 1, Sheet 2) will relieve
the requirement for this repetitive inspection.
(a) Clean the nose gear actuator attach feet (see Figure 1).
(b) Remove protective coating (paint or Dinitrol AV8) from the actuator attach feet.
(c) Inspect the welded area of the nose gear actuator attach feet (see Figure 1, Sheet 2) for
cracks:
1 First inspect visually. If no cracks are detected using that method; then,
2 Perform a ‘liquid penetrant inspection’ per latest revision of AC 43.13-1.
(d) If cracking is detected in either of the actuator attach feet, the entire engine mount
assembly must be replaced before further flight.
(e) If no cracks are found, the engine mount can continue in service until the next 100 hour
inspection.
(f) Clean the actuator attach feet and apply Dinitrol AV8 (P/N 89500-800) to the area where
the protective coating was previously removed.
(g) Make an appropriate logbook entry documenting this inspection.
100 Hour Engine Mount Inspection

7E5 71-20-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
100 Hour Engine Mount Inspection

PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 71-20-00 7E6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(2) Corrosion Inspection, Immersion in Water

The following guidance is general in nature and should be applied or varied to fit the individual
situation based on water level during immersion, length of time immersed, length of time since
exposure, etc. Proceed as follows:
(a) Inspection
1 Level the aircraft per 8-20-00.
2 In the two lower tubes as
indicated in Figure 2; drill a
3/16 inch hole in each tube,
at the approximate mid-
point.
3 Visually inspect the interior
surface of each tube through
the 3/16 inch hole for
evidence of inter nal
corrosion.
4 Should evidence of
corrosion be detected in
step (3), above, replace the
engine mount. If no
corrosion is detected,
proceed with corrosion
prevention, paragraph B,
below. Engine Mount Corrosion Inspection Points
(b) Corrosion Prevention Figure 2
If no evidence of corrosion is
detected in step (3), above, proceed as follows:
1 Place a drip pan below the inspection holes in each engine mount tube.
2 Insert a plastic tube thru each inspection hole and feed it up to the high point of the
engine mount tube.
3 Using a syringe inserted into the end of the plastic tube, pump linseed oil into the
upper end of the engine mount tube while rotating the syringe / plastic tube assembly
to assure maximum coverage. Continue pumping until the lower end of the engine
mount tube is filled with linseed oil to the level of the inspection hole.
4 Now, draw the plastic tube out of the upper end of the engine mount tube and reinsert
it in the opposite direction, feeding it to the lower end of the engine mount tube.
5 Suck excess linseed oil out of the engine mount tube with the syringe / plastic tube
assembly.
6 When linseed oil can no longer be picked up by the syringe / plastic tube assembly,
remove it and allow the engine mount tube to drain into drip pans for approximately
two hours.
7 Purge excess oil from tubes by applying air pressure to each 3/16 inch inspection
hole, one at a time.
8 Ensure that roughly the same amount of linseed oil that was pumped in is retrieved
in the drip pans.
9 Apply a liberal coating of an approved fuel tank sealant (see Chart 3, 91-10-00) to
each inspection hole and seal the hole with an appropriate blind rivet. After installing
the rivet, apply a liberal coating of the approved fuel tank sealant over the head of
the rivet.
7E7 71-20-00 FebPAGE 3

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B. Installation
CAUTION: WHEN INSTALLING A REPLACEMENT ENGINE MOUNT ASSEMBLY, ENSURE IT
CONFORMS TO THE LATEST DESIGN AS SHOWN IN FIGURE 1, SHEET 2.
Pay close attention to the nose gear actuator / engine mount connecting hardware to ensure the
correct locknut is used (i. e. - P/N 404-891, MS 20365-720C). Additionally, check for proper thread
engagement between the bolt and nut by ensuring at least one thread of the bolt protrudes through
the nut per AC 43.13-1, latest revision. If sufficient threads are not exposed after the lock nut,
replace the bolt with a longer bolt, P/N 401-509 (AN7-15A). Torque to the standard torque value
(91-10-00, Chart 6) for a 7/16-20 AN7 bolt/MS 20365 nut.
2. Engine Shock Mounts Replacement
The engine shock mounts may be replaced with the engine installed as well as removed from the
airplane. Refer to Figure 1, 71-00-00, for the arrangement of the shock mount assemblies. The top
shocks are assembled so the silver colored shocks are aft and the gold colored shocks are forward. The
lower shock mounts are installed opposite of the top shock mounts. The procedure described in this
paragraph is with the engine installed.
A. Remove the engine cowling.
B. Attach a one-half ton (minimum) hoist to the engine hoisting hooks and relieve tension from the
shock mounts.
C. Loosen the upper shock mount attachment nuts.
D. Remove the lower mount attachment nuts, washers, forward shock mounts and spacers.
E. Remove the lower attachment bolts just far enough to allow the aft shock mounts to be removed.
The bushing in each lower mount must be removed with the bolt.
CAUTION: CARE SHOULD BE TAKEN NOT TO INTRODUCE ADVERSE STRESSES ON THE
CONTROL CABLES, ELECTRICAL CABLES, HOSES AND OTHER ITEMS
ATTACHED TO THE ENGINE, WHILE HOISTING THE ENGINE.
F. Raise the nose of the engine enough to remove the lower aft shock mounts and replace with new
ones.
G. Lower the engine, slide the attachment bolts with bushings into place and install the spacers,
forward shock mounts, washers and nuts. Start nuts only a few threads.
H. Rotate the heat shields on the lower mounts to provide the greatest protection against exhaust
heat.
I. Remove the upper mount attachment bolts, nuts, washers, forward shock mounts and spacers.
J. Lower the engine enough to replace the upper aft shock mounts. Raise the engine into position.
K. Install the spacers, forward shock mounts, mounting bolts, washers and nuts.
L. Tighten engine shock mounts (4) to torque specified in Figure 1, 71-00-00.
PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 71-20-00 7E8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
7E9 71-20-00 FebPAGE 5

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 6
Feb 28/07 71-20-00 7E10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
DRAINS
Cylinder Head Drain

The cylinder head drain valve is located on the bottom forward right hand air intake plenum. The drain
valve is connected to the cylinder head drain lines which come from both banks of cylinders. A drain tube
goes from the drain valve through the lower cowling.
The drain valve is closed by manifold pressure when the engine is running. When the engine is shut
down, the lack of manifold pressure allows the drain valve to open, thus draining any excess fuel from
the cylinder heads.
7E11 71-70-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 71-70-00 7E12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER
73
ENGINE FUEL
& CONTROL
7E13
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
7E14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 73
CHAPTER CHAPTER


2 Feb 28/07
73-10-00 1 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07
5 Feb 28/07
6 Feb 28/07
73-30-00 1 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07
7E15 73 - LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES PAGE 1

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 73 - LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES 7E16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 73 - ENGINE FUEL AND CONTROL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DISTRIBUTION 73-10-00 1 7E19

Fuel Injection System 1 7E19
Description 1 7E19
Maintenance 1 7E19
Lubrication 1 7E19
Fuel Injector 1 7E19
Removal 1 7E19
Installation 3 7E21
Storage Preparation 3 7E21
Fuel Air Bleed Nozzle 3 7E21
Removal 3 7E21
Installation 4 7E22
Cleaning and Inspection 4 7E22
INDICATING 73-30-00 1 7F1

Fuel Flow Gauge 1 7F1
Removal 1 7F1
Installation 1 7F1
Fuel Pressure Low Warning Light 1 7F1
Fuel Pump 1 7F1
Adjustment 1 7F1
Pressure Operational Check 2 7F2
Fuel Flow Transducer 2 7F2
Removal 2 7F2
Installation 2 7F2
7E17 73 - CONTENTS FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 73 - CONTENTS 7E18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
DISTRIBUTION
1. Fuel Injection System

A. Description
The PA-46-350P is powered by a Textron Lycoming (TIO-540-AE2A) engine and is fuel injected to
achieve even fuel distribution to all cylinders for a smooth and efficient running engine.
A vaned, positive displacement, engine driven fuel pump supplies fuel under pressure to the fuel
injector servo metering unit. This metering unit determines the proper amount of fuel to be sent to
the flow divider where the fuel flow is distributed equally among the six injector nozzles.
To atomize the fuel in the injector nozzles prior to entering the cylinder, turbocharged compressed
air pressure (deck pressure) is picked up just prior to the throttle valve injector metering unit and
distributed evenly to each injector nozzle where it atomizes the fuel prior to entering the cylinders.
The nozzles continuously spray and atomize the metered fuel into the intake valve port of the
engine cylinder heads in proportion to induction airflow.
B. Maintenance
(1) Little attention is required between scheduled injector overhauls. Check the following items
during periodic inspection of the engine:
(a) Check tightness and lock of all nuts and screws which fasten the injector to the engine.
(b) Check all fuel lines for tightness and evidence of leakage. A slight fuel stain adjacent to
the air bleed nozzles is not cause for concern.
(c) Check throttle and mixture control rods and levers for tightness and lock.
(d) Remove and clean the injector fuel inlet strainer at the first 25 hour inspection and each
50 hour inspection thereafter. Damaged strainer O-rings should be replaced.
(2) Tests prove that gasoline, which becomes stale due to prolonged storage, absorbs oxygen
rapidly. This stale oxidized gasoline acquires a very distinctive odor similar to varnish, causes
rapid deterioration of synthetic rubber parts, and forms a gummy deposit on internal metal
parts. This condition does not occur during normal operation of the injector where fresh fuel is
being constantly circulated.
C. Lubrication
(1) The clevis pins used in connection with the throttle and manual mixture control levers should
be checked for freedom of movement and lubricated, if necessary. There is no need for
lubrication of the injector in the field between scheduled overhauls.
(2) Place a drop of engine grade oil on the end of the throttle shaft in such a manner that is can
work into the throttle shaft bushings.
2. Fuel Injector
A. Removal
(1) Remove the lower cowl panel.
(2) Disconnect the throttle and mixture control cables at the injector. Disconnect the control rod
that comes from the absolute pressure controller.
(3) Disconnect the fuel inlet, flow, pressure and discharge lines at the injector.
7E19 73-10-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
View A - A Nozzles vented

Rotated 90˚ clockwise to Deck Pressure
Vapor Line
Fuel Nozzle
Fuel Line
(3 places)
Metering
To Intake Unit Flow Divider
Manifold
Fuel Flow Deck
Transducer
Turbochargers
Engine Driven Fuel Pump Differential

Seal Drain Pressure
Switch
Firewall
Manifold Pressure
Filter Electric Emergency
and Flow Gauge
and Drain Fuel Pump
Supply Line
Fuel Pressure
LEFT RIGHT Switch
ON
OFF
Fuel Selector Handle
Fuel Selector Valve
Fuel Boost
Pump Fuel Lines Filler
A Cap
Right
Left
Tank
Tank
A Collector Vent Line

Tank Drain Finger
NACA Vent Screens
Fuel Quantity
Guage
Fuel System Fluid Diagram

Figure 1
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 73-10-00 7E20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(4) Remove the bolts securing the injector to the air box and induction duct.
(5) Remove the fuel injector.
B. Installation
(1) Attach the injector to the air box and induction duct.
(2) Connect the fuel inlet, flow, pressure and discharger lines to the injector.
(3) Connect the throttle and mixture control cables to the injector. Attach the control rod that
comes from the absolute pressure controller to the fuel injector. Rig controls.
(4) Pressure check for leaks.
(5) Adjust idle speed and mixture.
(6) Replace cowling.
C. Storage Preparation
CAUTION: BECAUSE FLUID CAN EASILY ENTER THE AIR SECTION OF THE INJECTOR
THROUGH THE IMPACT TUBES OR THE ANNULAR GROOVE AROUND THE
VENTURI, INSTALL A PROTECTIVE PLATE ON THE SCOOP MOUNTING FLANGE
WHEN PERFORMING ROUTINE MAINTENANCE ON THE ENGINE, SUCH AS
WASHING DOWN THE ENGINE AND AIR SCOOP, SERVICING THE AIR FILTER
(SURPLUS OIL ON THE ELEMENT), OR WHEN INJECTING PRESERVATIVE INTO
THE ENGINE PRIOR TO STORING OR SHIPPING.
Any unit taken out of service, or units being returned for overhaul, must be flushed with preserving
oil (Specification MIL-0-6081, Grade 1010), using the following procedure:
CAUTION: DO NOT EXCEED 15 PSI AIR PRESSURE AS INTERNAL DAMAGE TO THE
INJECTOR MAY RESULT.
(1) Remove plugs and drain all fuel from the injector. If available, apply 10 - 15 psi air pressure to
the fuel inlet until all fuel is discharged from the injector.
(2) Replace plugs and apply flushing oil filtered through a 10 micron filter at 13 - 15 psi to the
injector fuel inlet until oil is discharged from the outlet.
(3) Replace fuel inlet shipping plug.
(4) After filling with preservative oil, the injector should be protected from dust and dirt and given
such protection against moisture as climactic conditions at the point of storage require. In most
cases, storing the unit in a dry area will be sufficient.
(5) If the unit is to be stored near or shipped over salt water, the following precautions should be
observed:
(a) Spray the exterior of the injector with an approved preservative oil.
(b) Pack in a dustproof container. Wrap the container with moisture and vapor-proof material
and seal. Pack the wrapped unit in a suitable shipping case. Pack a one-half pound bag of
silica gel crystals in the dustproof container with injector. The bag must not touch the
injector.
3. Fuel Air Bleed Nozzle
A. Removal
The nozzles must be carefully removed as they or the cylinders may be damaged.
(1) Remove the lower engine cowl.
(2) Disconnect the fuel line from the nozzle.
(3) Remove the spring retainer and spring from the nozzle stem.
7E21 73-10-00 FebPAGE 3

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(4) Disconnect the nozzle shroud from the vent hose and remove it from the nozzle.
(5) Carefully remove the nozzle, using the correct size deep socket.
B. Installation
(1) Install the nozzles and torque to 60 inch - pounds.
(2) Ascertain that the O-rings are properly installed on the nozzle stem and install the nozzle
shroud (refer to Figure 2).
(3) Connect the vent to the nozzle shroud.
(4) Install the spring and spring retainer on the nozzle stem.
(5) Connect the fuel line to the nozzle and clamp the fuel lines as described in latest revision of
Lycoming Service Bulletin No. 335.
(6) Install the engine cowl.
C. Cleaning and Inspection
(1) Clean the nozzle with acetone or equivalent and blow out all foreign particles. Do not use wire
or other hard objects to clean orifices. (Refer to the latest revision of Lycoming Service
Instruction No. 1275)
(2) Inspect and replace nozzle O-rings if found to be cracked, brittle or distorted.
(3) A test procedure for air bleed nozzles is described in latest revision of Lycoming Service
Instruction No. 1275.
Fuel Air Bleed Nozzle

Figure 2
PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 73-10-00 7E22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
7E23 73-10-00 FebPAGE 5

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 6
Feb 28/07 73-10-00 7E24
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INDICATING
NOTE: Serial numbers 4636021 and up incorporate Integrated Engine Instrumentation Systems. See
Section 77-40-00 for more information.
1. Fuel Flow Gauge
The fuel flow gauge is mounted to the right of center in the upper section of the instrument panel, and is
electrically operated by the flow transducer.
A. Troubleshooting
See Chart 1.
B. Removal
(1) Gain access to the instrument form behind the instrument panel. Disconnect the electrical
connection from the instrument.
(2) Remove the post light(s) by turning off nut.
(3) Remove the screws securing the instrument to th e panel.
(4) Remove the instrument from the panel.
C. Installation
(1) Place the instrument in its proper panel cutout and secure with screws.
(2) Install the post light(s) and secure. Do not overtighten the nut.
(3) Connect the electrical connector to the gauge.
2. Fuel Pressure Low Warning Light
Illumination of the FUEL PRESS annunciator light indicates impending fuel starvation due to insufficient
fuel pressure to the engine. See also 31-50-00 and 91-31-50.
3. Fuel Pump
A. Adjustment
To adjust the fuel pump output pressure:
(1) Loosen the jamnut on the adjustment screw to allow free movement.
(2) Adjust the pump pressure by turning screw in or out.
(3) Tighten fuel pump jamnut and perform operation check.
CHART 1
TROUBLESHOOTING FUEL FLOW GAUGE
Pointer oscillates. Air in fuel line. Purge line.
7F1 73-30-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B. Pressure Operational Check

WARNING: MAKE SURE ALL PERSONNEL AND EQUIPMENT ARE CLEAR OF THE
PROPELLER ROTATIONAL AREA DURING ENGINE START AND RUN UP.
CAUTION: SHOULD EXCESSIVE FUEL PRESSURE OCCUR, IMMEDIATELY SHUT DOWN
ENGINE AND ADJUST FUEL PUMP.
(1) Pull the submerged boost pump circuit breaker.
(2) Run engine to maximum power and observe fuel pressure gauge for 38 ± 2 psi.
4. Fuel Flow Transducer
The fuel flow transducer is located on the engine accessory case just below the left magneto.
A. Removal
(1) Disconnect electrical leads going to transducer.
(2) Disconnect B-nut on transducer fuel outlet line.
(3) Remove the nuts, washers, and bolts securing transducer to mounting bracket.
(4) Remove transducer mounting bracket from engine.
(5) Disconnect transducer from fuel pump.
B. Installation
(1) Coat all pipe threads with PST 563 sealant. Do not coat the orifice in the parts.
(2) Position transducer in place. Connect fuel IN port to fuel pump.
(3) Install transducer mounting bracket to engine.
(4) Attach transducer to mounting bracket with two each AN4-12A bolts, AN960-416 washers, and
MS21042-4 nuts.
(5) Install AN816-6 adapter into transducer OUT port and connect B nut.
(6) Connect electrical leads to transducer.
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 73-30-00 7F2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
7F3 73-30-00 FebPAGE 3

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 73-30-00 7F4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER
74
IGNITION
7F5
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
7F6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 74
CHAPTER CHAPTER


2 Feb 28/07
74-10-00 1 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07
5 Feb 28/07
6 Feb 28/07
7 Feb 28/07
8 Feb 28/07
9 Feb 28/07
10 Feb 28/07
11 Feb 28/07
12 Feb 28/07
13 Feb 28/07
14 Feb 28/07
15 Feb 28/07
16 Feb 28/07
17 Feb 28/07
18 Feb 28/07
19 Feb 28/07
20 Feb 28/07
74-20-00 1 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07
5 Feb 28/07
6 Feb 28/07
7 Feb 28/07
8 Feb 28/07
9 Feb 28/07
10 Feb 28/07

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 74 - IGNITION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
ELECTRICAL POWER SUPPLY 74-10-00 1 7F11

Ignition System 1 7F11
Description 1 7F11
Replacement Magnetos 1 7F11
Overhaul 1 7F11
Magnetos 1 7F11
100 Hour Inspection 1 7F11
Removal 4 7F14
500 Hour Inspection and Cleaning 4 7F14
Disassembly 6 7F16
Assembly 10 7F20
Testing 17 7G3
Installation 18 7G4
DISTRIBUTION 74-20-00 1 7G7

Harness 1 7G7
Inspection 1 7G7
Removal 1 7G7
Installation 1 7G7
Disassembly 1 7G7
Assembly 2 7G8
Spark Plugs 6 7G12
Removal 6 7G12
Installation 7 7G13
Inspection and Cleaning 7 7G13

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ELECTRICAL POWER SUPPLY
1. Ignition System
A. Description
Ignition of the fuel charge in each cylinder is accomplished by two spark plugs independently
excited by one of two Slick magnetos. Each magneto separately generates, times and distributes
high tension (voltage) through leads to each cylinder. Both magnetos are pressurized by turbo
compressor bleed air taken from the induction duct downstream from the right intercooler through
an in-line filter to improve magneto efficiency at altitude.
The magnetos are controlled by two switches on the pilot’s instrument panel. With the switch OFF,
the magneto is grounded and will not produce spark. The right magneto fires the lower left and
upper right spark plugs. The left magneto fires the lower right and upper left spark plugs.
The right magneto is standard and the left magneto is a retard breaker type with a fixed retard and
long duration boosted spark for starting. A DC power source and a remote starting vibrator are
required for operation. The magnetos incorporate an integral feed-through capacitor. The retarded
magneto must have the right or standard magneto grounded during the starting cycle.
B. Troubleshooting
See Chart 1.
C. Replacement Magnetos
NOTE: Check the magneto dataplate to verify the specific model number and series of the
magneto being worked on.
D. Overhaul
Overhaul is required as conditions indicate, but in no case may Slick 6300 series magnetos time-in-
service exceed the TBO for the engine. Magnetos must also be overhauled after a lightning strike or
following a sudden engine stoppage.
NOTE: An alternative to overhaul is complete magneto replacement with a new Slick magneto.
New Slick magnetos incorporate all the latest design features and may be a cost effective
alternative to overhaul.
Information provided in this section is intended to support magneto removal, cleaning, inspection,
replacement and timing. For magneto overhaul procedures, see Slick’s F-1100 Master Service
Manual, available from:
Slick Aircraft Products
(See Introduction, Supplementary Publications, Vendor Publications, Magnetos.)
2. Magnetos (See Figure 4.)
A. 100 Hour Inspection
Every 100 hours or at annual inspection, whichever comes first, perform the following checks.
WARNING: BE SURE IGNITION SWITCH IS IN THE “OFF” POSITION AND THE CONDENSER
P-LEAD IS GROUNDED.
(1) Adjust timing to engine. (See Figure 1.)
(a) Turn the engine crankshaft in the normal direction of rotation until the No. 1 cylinder is in
the full-advance firing position.
1 Cover spark plug hole of number one cylinder with thumb. Rotate crankshaft until
pressure is felt on thumb.
7F11 74-10-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 1
TROUBLESHOOTING IGNITION SYSTEM
Failure of engine to start. Defective spark plugs. Clean and adjust or
replace spark plugs.
Defective ignition wire. Check with electric tester
and replace any defective
wires.
Improper operation of Check timing of magnetos.
magneto.
Improper switch wiring Reverse magneto switch
for left magneto starting. wires.
Frozen spark plug Replace spark plugs or
electrodes. dry out removed plugs.
Shorted ignition switch Check and replace or
or loose ground. repair.
Defective vibrator. Replace vibrator.
Failure of engine to idle Faulty ignition system. Check entire ignition
properly. system.
Improper spark plug Check spark plug gap.
setting for altitude.
Low power and uneven Defective spark plugs. Clean or replace sparkplug.
running engine.
Magneto not working Check timing of magneto.
properly.
Defective ignition wire. Check wire with electric
tester. Replace defective
wire.
Defective spark plug Replace connectors or
terminal connections. spark plug wire.
Improper ignition timing. Check magnetos for timing
and synchronization.
Failure of engine to develop Faulty ignition. Tighten all connections.
full power. Check system. Check
ignition timing.
Rough running engine. Lead deposit on spark Clean or replace plugs.
plug.
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 74-10-00 7F12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2 Rotate crankshaft slowly until the advance timing mark on the starter ring gear is in
alignment with the small hole located at the two (2) o’clock position on the front face
of the starter housing. When the 20° mark on the gear is aligned with the small hole,
number one piston is at 20° BTC.
NOTE: Always verify correct BTC on the engine dataplate.
(b) Scribe a reference mark on the magneto mounting flange and engine accessory case.
(c) Loosen the magneto mounting bolts, and connect a standard timing light between engine
ground and the magneto condenser terminal.
WARNING: DO NOT ROTATE PROPELLER WHEN IGNITION SWITCH IS IN THE “ON”
POSITION. THE MAGNETOS WILL FIRE THE SPARK PLUGS IF THE
PROPELLER IS ROTATED - FATAL INJURY IS POSSIBLE.
(d) Turn ignition switch ON.
(e) Rotate the magneto, in its mounting, in the direction of normal operating rotation until the
timing light indicates the contact breaker points are open.
(f) Slowly rotate the magneto opposite normal rotation of the magneto on the engine
mounting until the timing light (or audible signal) goes out.
(g) Measure the distance from the reference mark previously scribed on the accessory case
and the corresponding reference mark on the magneto. If this measurement is more than
1/8 inch, remove the magneto per Removal, below, and inspect/adjust the contact breaker
points as described in 500 Hour Inspection and Cleaning; and, Assembly - Time the
magneto internally; respectively, below. A 1/8 inch change corresponds to an approximate
5° change in internal magneto timing.
Engine Timing Marks (Typical)

Figure 1
7F13 74-10-00 FebPAGE 3

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(h) Secure the magneto in this position, alternately tightening the magneto mounting clamps -
first to 8 ft-lbs. and finally to 17 ft-lbs. of torque.
(i) Turn ignition switch OFF.
(2) Inspect harness. See Section 74-20-00.
(3) Inspect P-lead attachment. The P-lead connects the magneto primary circuit to the ignition
switch. If the P-lead is disconnected, the magneto will be “HOT” and will fire the spark plug if
the propeller is rotated. Verify that the P-lead is attached to the condenser stud. Torque to 13 to
15 in-lbs.
(4) Inspect switch wire (left magneto only). This retard breaker lead connects the retard contact
points to the ignition vibrator. If disconnected, the starting circuit will be inoperative. Torque to
13 to 15 in-lbs.
(5) Inspect turbo filter. Look for yellow or red color, condensation, water, or foreign matter in the
filter element. If the filter is contaminated: replace filter; inspect and repair pressurization
system; and remove and inspect magnetos.
(6) Inspect and clean inlet nozzle. Yellow or white particles or any oily film indicates moisture
contamination and possible lack of pressurization. Inspect and repair pressurization system.
(7) Inspect and clean orifice vent. Maximum orifice diameter is .025 inch.
B. Removal
CAUTION: ASCERTAIN THAT THE PRIMARY CIRCUIT OF THE ENGINE IS GROUNDED
BEFORE WORKING ON THE ENGINE.
Before removing the magnetos, make sure the magneto switches are OFF.
WARNING: THE MAGNETO IS NOT INTERNALLY GROUNDED, WHEN THE GROUND LEAD IS
DISCONNECTED THE MAGNETO IS HOT. REMOVING THE HARNESS ASSEMBLY
FIRST AND INSTALLING THEM LAST, MINIMIZES THE DANGER OF STARTING
THE ENGINE ACCIDENTALLY WHEN THE GROUND LEAD IS REMOVED FROM
THE MAGNETO.
(1) Turn the engine crankshaft in the normal direction of rotation until the No. 1 cylinder is in the
full-advance firing position.
(2) Remove the harness cap from the magneto. Before doing this, place an index mark on the
harness cap and distributor housing to ensure proper alignment upon reassembly.
(3) Disconnect the P-lead and pressurization tube from magneto. Disconnect the retard breaker
lead to the starting circuit from the left magneto.
(4) Remove the nuts, washers and clamps, and remove the magnetos from the engine.
(5) Cover the magneto accessory opening with suitable material to prevent internal engine
contamination.
C. 500 Hour Inspection and Cleaning
Each 500 hours, remove magneto per Removal, above, and disassemble magneto, as necessary,
per Disassembly, below. Inspect and clean magneto as follows:
(1) Inspect ball bearing assembly by rotating rotor shaft. Shaft should rotate freely without binding
or sticking, but should not appear loose. If not, replace bearings.
(2) Inspect rotor for damage or worn keyway. Check rotor surfaces for wear.
(a) Inspect oil seal location on shaft.
(b) Assemble bearings and rotor per Assembly, steps (1) & (2), below.
PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 74-10-00 7F14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(3) Inspect coil for visible radial cracks. Replace coil if cracks evident. Inspect coil for primary and
secondary circuit resistance and continuity, as follows: primary coil - .50 to 1.2 ohms;
secondary coil - 13,000 to 20,500 ohms. Replace, if required.
(4) Inspect primary contact points for signs of pitting and discoloration. If points are not discolored
and have a white, frosty surface around the edges, points are functioning properly and can be
reused. If points are blue (indicating excessive arcing) or pitted, they should be discarded.
Replace primary contact point assembly, condenser and cam.
NOTE: For left magneto only (i.e. - retard breaker magneto), the primary contact points are
secured by a BLACK anodized screw.
(5) For left magneto only, inspect retard breaker contact points for signs of pitting and
discoloration. If points are not discolored and have a white, frosty surface around the edges,
points are functioning properly and can be reused. If points are blue (indicating excessive
arcing) or pitted, they should be discarded. Replace retard breaker contact point assembly and
cam.
NOTE: The retard breaker contact points are secured by a SILVER screw.
(6) Clean and inspect condenser.
(a) If the external surfaces of the condenser are dirty, clean with light soapy water. Rinse
thoroughly with clear water and pat dry before reinstalling into the magneto housing.
(b) Using a magnifying lens, examine the glass bead end seals of the capacitor for broken
glass or for glass separation from the retaining steel rings. Replace, if required.
(c) Inspect the condenser for signs of corrosion. Replace, if required.
(d) Inspect the condenser P-lead stud for twisting or "pulled" condition. Replace, if required.
(e) Test the electrical properties of the condenser using appropriate calibrated test
equipment. Test for capacitance value with condenser charged to 400 volts DC. Service
limit: .35 microfarad + 10 percent. Test for resistance, measured between condenser lead
wire and condenser shell. Resistance should be greater than 10 megaohms.
NOTE: No field repairs of any type to the condenser are approved.
(f) Install condenser per Assembly, step (10), below.
(7) Clean and Inspect Distributor Block.
CAUTION: DO NOT PUT CLEANER IN EITHER BRONZE OILITE BUSHING. THESE
BUSHINGS ARE IMPREGNATED AT THE FACTORY AND CLEANER WILL
DRAW THE LUBRICANT OUT OF THE BUSHING.
(a) Disassemble and clean the distributor block bearing bar. Use standard non-filming non-
conductive cleaner. Clean distributor gear with soapy water and rinse with clean water.
(b) Clean all surfaces free of dirt, oil, carbon dust and other contaminants using a cotton
swab or "Q-Tip".
(c) Inspect the distributor block for cracks or other physical damage. Replace, as required.
(d) Inspect the brass electrode posts for signs of physical wear. Replace block assembly, as
required, but note that during normal operation, the post will experience an electrical-
metal transfer with the distributor gear electrode.
(e) Inspect oilite bushing for gumming oil. The bushing should be free of contamination and
the gear should turn freely in the distributor block with no appreciable drag. If the bushing
is gummed, wipe the bushing with MEK and lubricate with one drop of Exxon Teresstic
100 or Slick P/N M-3306. No other oils should be placed in these bushings.
(f) Ensure the distributor block surfaces are free of all oil and carbon dust prior to
reassembly.
7F15 74-10-00 FebPAGE 5

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(g) Inspect distributor gear teeth for wear and general integrity. Replace block assembly as
required.
(h) Inspect the electrode finger for looseness. The electrode should be held securely to the
shaft when tested with light finger pressure. If loose, replace block and gear.
(i) Clean the end of the electrode to remove electrical deposits.
(j) Inspect bearing bar for cracks or other physical
damage. Replace as required.
(k) Ensure the bearing bar is free of all and carbon dust
prior to reassembly.
(8) Inspect the carbon brush. Overall length must be greater
than 19/64 (.297) inch and the outside diameter must be
uniform (see Figure 2). Replace as required.
(9) Inspect the loading spring. Overall free standing length
should be greater than 19/32 (.594) inch. Springs that Carbon Brush Assembly
appear worn, that have flat spots or are too short must Figure 2
be replaced.
(10) Inspect and clean inlet nozzle. Yellow or white particles or any oily film indicates moisture
contamination and possible lack of pressurization. Inspect and repair pressurization system.
(11) Inspect and clean orifice vent. Maximum orifice diameter is .025 inch.
(12) Inspect frame gasket for wear. Replace as required. Use only Slick replacement gaskets as
gasket contains a metal mesh to ensure proper ground between magneto frame and housing.
Inspect screw gaskets for wear. Replace as required.
(13) Inspect harness cap O-ring for wear. Replace as required.
D. Disassembly (See Figures 3 and 4.)
NOTE: Use of the Slick T - 100 Assembly and Timing Kit (Figure 3) is strongly recommended. The
tools contained in this kit will greatly facilitate magneto disassembly/assembly and help
prevent damage to parts.
(1) Remove Woodruff key by prying key from rotor shaft using pliers.
(2) Remove distributor housing assembly.
(a) Remove three long screws and single short screw from distributor housing.
(b) Separate distributor housing from magneto frame.
(c) Disconnect condenser lead from contact breaker assembly.
(d) Left magneto only - disconnect retard breaker switch lead from contact breaker assembly.
(3) Remove the distributor block assembly by removing two screws and remove distributor bearing
bar, distributor gear and distributor block from the housing.
(4) Remove condenser.
(a) When removing the condenser from the distributor housing, carefully rotate the condenser
wire counterclockwise in the same direction as the condenser to eliminate twisting the
condenser lead.
(b) For left magneto only, remove the screw that secures the retard contact breaker switch
wire to the distributor housing.
(5) Remove rotor gear by prying it out of the end of the rotor assembly using two flat-blade
screwdrivers.
PAGE 6
Feb 28/07 74-10-00 7F16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Slick T - 100 Assembly and Timing Tool Kit

Figure 3
7F17 74-10-00 FebPAGE 7

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(6) Remove contact breaker assembly - Direct Drive Magnetos (i.e. - right magneto only).
(a) Disconnect coil lead wire from contact breaker assembly.
(b) Remove screws and washers from breaker assembly.
(c) Remove contact breaker assembly from bearing cap.
(d) Remove cam by prying straight up with a screwdriver blade.
(7) Remove contact breaker assembly - left magneto only (i.e. - retard breaker magneto).
NOTE: In a retard breaker magneto, the primary contact points are secured by a BLACK
anodized screw. The retard breaker contact points are secured by a SILVER screw.
(a) Disconnect coil lead wire from primary contact breaker assembly.
(b) Remove cam by prying straight up with a screwdriver blade.
(c) Remove screws and washers from primary contact breaker assembly.
(d) Remove primary contact breaker assembly.
(e) Remove screws and washers from retard breaker contact breaker assembly. Remove
retard breaker contact breaker assembly and spacer.
(f) Remove retard breaker contact breaker assembly and spacer.
(8) Remove rotor assembly.
(a) Remove two screws and two bearing plate clamps.
(b) Press against the drive end of the rotor shaft and withdraw the rotor and bearing cap
assembly from the drive frame.
Exploded View of Magneto

Figure 4
PAGE 8
Feb 28/07 74-10-00 7F18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Removing Coil Wedges

Figure 5
(9) Remove bearings from shaft and discard.

CAUTION: DO NOT DISASSEMBLE BEARING CAP ASSEMBLY SLICK PART NUMBER M-
3485. THIS ASSEMBLY HOLDS A DOUBLE-SHIELDED BEARING CAPTIVE IN
THE BEARING CAP AND IS PRE-LUBRICATED AT THE FACTORY WITH
SPECIAL GREASE THAT TOLERATES THE OZONE RICH ENVIRONMENT
WITHIN THE MAGNETO.
(a) Place rotor on T-152 spacer with drive end down. Using T-125 assembly fixture, press
rotor shaft, removing bearing cap assembly.
(b) Reverse rotor shaft and insert T-121 bearing puller (both halves) between the drive end
bearing and the rotor magnet head.
(c) Place rotor and T-121 on T-152 spacer.
CAUTION: DO NOT ALLOW ROTOR TO COME INTO CONTACT WITH METAL CHIPS
OR FILINGS. ROTOR IS MAGNETIZED.
(d) Press rotor shaft and remove drive end bearing.
(10) Remove coil.
(a) Remove coil primary ground screw.
(b) Using coil wedge extractor T-122, remove coil wedges and lift out coil (see Figure 5).
(11) Remove air vent/pressure vent plug from magneto.
(12) Remove oil seal from magneto.
7F19 74-10-00 FebPAGE 9

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
E. Assembly
NOTE: The following parts MUST BE REPLACED at engine overhaul (refer to Slick Service
Bulletin No. SB-2-80C). Condenser, drive end bearing, bearing cap assembly, impulse
coupling, coil, rotor gear, oil seal, contact point kit and distributor block and gear assembly.
Refer to Slick Part List for part numbers. At each 500 hour inspection replace parts that are
worn or damaged.
(1) Assemble new bearings onto shaft (see Figure 6).
(a) Insert the base plate (T-117) and adapter plate bushing (T-119) into T-125 assembly
fixture.
(b) Place one drive-end bearing and one bearing cap assembly onto the rotor shaft.
(c) Insert the rotor shaft into the adapter plate bushing (threaded end down).
(d) Place the bearing assembly plug (T-101) onto the exposed end of the rotor shaft.
(e) Turn T-handle screw to seat the bearings against the bearing shoulders on the rotor shaft.
(f) Remove the rotor shaft, adapter bushing, adapter plate and bearing assembly plug from T-125
assembly fixture.
(2) Install rotor shaft assembly (see Figure 6).
(a) Place magneto frame in T-125 assembly fixture (flange down).
(b) Position rotor shaft assembly in the magneto frame.
(c) Insert rotor and frame assembly plug (T-102) into the T-handle.
(d) Turn T-handle until the bearing cap bottoms in the frame. Place cap over end of rotorshaft
first.
(e) Place T-151 cam and rotor set onto the end of the rotor shaft and turn T-handle until the
shaft bottoms in magneto frame.
(f) Install bearing clamps and the hold-down screws.
(g) Torque screws to 20-24 in-lbs.
(3) Install oil seal (see Figure 7).
(a) Lubricate oil seal with engine oil.
(b) Reverse the magneto on the T-125 assembly fixture so the flange is facing up.
(c) Insert the oil seal over the rotor shaft.
(d) Press the oil seal flush into the frame using the oil seal assembly plug (T-103) and the
T-handle screw.
(4) Install Woodruff key by pressing woodruff key into the key slot of the rotor shaft.
(5) Install coil.
(a) Place the frame on the T-125 assembly fixture. Insert the coil into the frame, being sure
that it is back against the stops. Insert coil wedges between the bridge and the frame.
(b) Drive the two wedges tight, using a hammer and flat punch. Attach the ground wire coil
(either black or white - depending on coil type) to the frame with a screw. Torque to 20 in-lbs.
CAUTION: IF THE HIGH TENSION LEAD PROTRUDES ABOVE THE MAGNETO
FRAME, IT CAN MAKE DIRECT CONTACT WITH THE DISTRIBUTOR
GEAR AND CAUSE THE MAGNETO TO MALFUNCTION.
(c) Position the coil high tension lead flush to 1/32 (.031) inch below the parting surface of the
magneto frame.
PAGE 10
Feb 28/07 74-10-00 7F20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Bearing Installation with T - 125 Assembly Fixture

Figure 6
Oil Seal Installation with T - 125 Assembly Fixture

Figure 7
7F21 74-10-00 Feb

PAGE 11
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(6) Install primary contact points - Both magnetos.

CAUTION: RETARD BREAKER MAGNETOS USE DIFFERENT LENGTH SCREWS TO
SECURE THE CONTACT BREAKER ASSEMBLIES. USE OF INCORRECT
MOUNTING SCREWS WILL DAMAGE UPPER MAGNETO BEARING AND
CAUSE POSSIBLE MAGNETO FAILURE.
Attach contact point assembly on the bearing cap using appropriate screw.
NOTE: In left magnetos only (i.e. - retard breaker magnetos), the primary points are secured
with a black anodized screw.
(7) For left magneto only - Install retard breaker contact point assembly.
NOTE: Install primary point assembly before installing retard point assembly.
(a) Place spacer on bearing cap and attach retard contact points assembly using silver screw
and plain washer.
(b) Do not tighten screws until magneto is timed.
(8) Install rotor cam.
(a) Install cam using a light hammer and T-151 cam and rotor set.
(b) Drive the cam until it bottoms in the rotor cam slot.
(9) Time the magneto internally
(a) Set primary points - All magnetos.
NOTE: In left magneto only (i.e. - retard breaker magnetos), the primary points must be
set first. The retard (i.e. - secondary) points are set in reference to the primary
points and, accordingly, the primary points must be set correctly or the retard
contact settings will not be accurate.
1 Place the magneto on the T-125 assembly fixture, flange down, with the T-509 timing
base adapter removed.
2 Install the T-123 timing plug on the rotor shaft before placing the magneto on the T-
125 assembly fixture.
3 Looking directly down on the magneto, align the magneto so that the coil is oriented
in the 12 o'clock position.
4 Insert T-150 "E" Gap Gauge between the pole laminations in the rotor shaft and the
pole laminations in the frame. Read the magneto dataplate for magneto rotation.
a For old style rotor (i.e. - no slots on the magnet head), insert flat end of T-150
"E" Gap Gauge. Insert the "E" Gap Gauge against the right lamination for right-
hand rotation magnetos and against the left laminations for left-hand rotation
magneto.
b For new style rotors (with slots on magnet head), insert notched end of T-150
"E" Gap Gauge. Locate the appropriate "L" or "R" timing slot on the rotor
magnet head and insert the notched end of the "E" gap gauge. Use the "L" slot
for left-hand rotation magnetos and the "R" slot for right-hand rotation
magnetos.
5 Rotate the magneto frame on the T-125 assembly fixture until the T- 150 "E" Gap
Gauge rests against the pole lamination in the magneto frame. Rotate the magneto
frame clockwise for left-hand rotation magnetos and counterclockwise for right-hand
rotation magnetos. The magneto rotor shaft is now in "E" Gap position.
6 Using a timing light, adjust the contact points to be just opening when the frame is
against the T-150 gauge. This will provide a point gap opening of .008-.012 inches.
PAGE 12
Feb 28/07 74-10-00 7F22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
7 For right magneto only: Secure the points in this position by tightening the screws.
Torque adjusting screw to 18-20 in-lbs. Torque the pivot screw to 15-18 in-lbs.
8 For left magneto only: Secure primary points by tightening the adjusting screw.
Torque to 15-18 in-lbs. Proceed to Set secondary points - left magneto only, below.
9 Apply cam grease sparingly to each lobe of the cam.
10 Attach coil lead wire to the vertical bronze male terminal of the primary point
assembly.
(b) Set secondary points - left magneto only
NOTE: In left magneto only (i.e. - retard breaker magnetos), the primary points must be
set first. The retard (i.e. - secondary) points are set in reference to the primary
points and, accordingly, the primary points must be set correctly or the retard
contact settings will not be accurate.
1 Set primary points according to instructions, above. Do not remove T-150 "E" Gap
Gauge and do not remove magneto frame from T-125 assembly fixture.
NOTE: Retard points are set in reference to primary point settings. The lag angle on
the magneto dataplate is the retard breaker’s retard angle measured in
degrees. Use the following procedure to set the retard points the required
number of degrees from the primary points.
2 Holding magneto securely in base (in "E" gap position), tip magneto and T-125
assembly fixture and loosen timing disk retaining screws. Timing disk should rotate
freely.
Magneto Internal Timing

Figure 8
7F23 74-10-00 Feb

PAGE 13
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Index Plate and Timing Plug

Figure 9
3 Ensure that the T-150 "E" gap gauge is still positioned against the correct lamination.
Rotate magneto frame until it contacts the pin in the T-125 assembly fixture. Rotate
the magneto frame clockwise for left-hand rotation magnetos, counterclockwise for
right-hand rotation magnetos.
4 Hold magneto securely in base and tip magneto and T-125 assembly fixture. Tighten
one timing disk retaining screw to hold the timing disk in place. Remove magneto
from T-125 assembly fixture.
5 Turn T-125 assembly fixture over so that timing disk is facing you. Loosen timing disk
retaining screw. Scribe a mark on the timing disk corresponding to the index mark on the
T-125 base. This represents a point-of-reference for primary point "E" gap. (See Figure 9.)
NOTE: The actual number at the timing disk index mark is not critical. This index
mark will be used as a point of reference for setting the retard points a
specified number of degrees from the primary points.
6 Note the lag angle and direction of rotation from the magneto dataplate.
7 The ticks on the timing disk each represent 5° To set the timing disk in the proper
position, rotate the timing disk counterclockwise for left-hand rotation magnetos and
clockwise for right-hand rotation magnetos. Rotate the disk the appropriate number
of ticks for the lag angle noted on the magneto dataplate.
EXAMPLE:
Lag angle as noted from dataplate: 25°
Rotation as noted from dataplate: L
To set timing disk, turn the timing disk 5 ticks (5 x 5° = 25°) counterclockwise
using scribed mark as reference point.
PAGE 14
Feb 28/07 74-10-00 7F24
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
8 Tighten timing disk retaining screws. Reverse T-125 assembly fixture and place
magneto in it, flange down (use T-123 timing plug). Remove T-150 "E" Gap Gauge
from magneto.
9 Rotate magneto against the direction of normal rotation (clockwise for left-hand
rotation magnetos and counterclockwise for right-hand rotation magnetos) until the
magneto bumps against the pin in the T-125 assembly fixture. The magneto rotor
shaft is now retarded from E-gap position the number of degrees indicated on the
magneto dataplate.
10 Using a timing light, adjust the retard contact points to where they are just opening.
Tighten the adjusting screws to secure the retard points in this position. Torque
adjusting screws to 18-20 in-lbs.
11 Apply cam grease sparingly to each lobe of the cam.
12 Attach coil lead wire to the male terminal of the primary point assembly.
13 Install retard contact breaker lead by inserting ignition switch screw through eyelet
end of retard breaker lead wire and then through magneto housing. Secure screw
using nut and lockwasher.
CAUTION: RETARD BREAKER LEAD WIRE MUST BE CHANNELED SECURELY UNDER
CONDENSER. FAILURE TO DO SO MAY CAUSE THE LEAD WIRE TO
INTERFERE WITH ROTOR GEAR MOVEMENT OR POINT OPERATION.
(10) Assemble the condenser into the distributor housing, being sure to rotate the condenser wire
the same rotation as the condenser is tightened in the housing. For left magneto only, ensure
retard breaker contact lead is channeled underneath condenser.
(11) Distributor gear assembly.
(a) Install carbon brush into spring.
1 Insert small end of carbon brush tapered end of spring.
2 Turn carbon brush clockwise until shoulder of carbon brush seats spring.
(b) Install carbon brush assembly into distributor gear.
1 Insert the open end of the spring into open end of the distributor gear shaft.
2 Gently press the carbon brush and spring assembly into the shaft until the spring
seats on the bottom of the shaft. The top of the carbon brush should protrude from
the top of the shaft approximately 1/4 inch.
(12) Install distributor block.
(a) Assemble the distributor gear in the
distributor block with the L&R facing
you.
(b) Assemble the bearing bar to the
distributor block as shown in Figure 10.
(13) Connect condenser wire.
(a) Connect condenser wire to the
remaining terminal of the contact
assembly.
(b) Attach the terminal with the lead
pointing left.
(14) Connect retard terminal wire to retard
contact points. Bearing Bar Assembly
(15) Install rotor gear onto shaft. Figure 10
7G1 74-10-00 Feb

PAGE 15
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Rotor Gear Alignment

Figure 11
(16) Align the "L" or "R" (depending on the rotation of the magneto—look at dataplate) on the rotor
gear so that it points up, toward the high tension lead of the coil. Secure rotor shaft to prevent
rotation during assembly. Alignment of rotor gear is critical. (See Figure 11.)
(17) Align the "L" or "R" hole in the distributor gear with the "L" or "R" in the distributor block. Use
"L" for left-hand rotation and "R" for right-hand rotation magnetos.
CAUTION: DO NOT ROTATE MAGNETO ROTOR SHAFT WITH THE T-118 TIMING PIN
INSERTED IN THE DISTRIBUTOR BLOCK. IF ROTOR SHAFT IS ROTATED
WITH TIMING PIN INSERTED, THE MAGNETO MUST BE DISASSEMBLED
AND INSPECTED FOR DISTRIBUTOR BLOCK AND GEAR DAMAGE.
(18) Lock the distributor gear in place with the T- 118 timing pin through the appropriate hole in the
block and gear. Then:
(a) Place distributor block spacers on magneto frame.
(b) Place distributor block on magneto frame. The distributor gear and rotor gear are properly
meshed when the index mark on the rotor gear aligns with the index mark on the
distributor block.
(c) Secure distributor block to frame with screws provided.
(19) Install the distributor housing gasket.
(20) Insert the top boss of the distributor housing into its mating pilot on the magneto frame.
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THE CARBON BRUSH IS CONTAINED WITHIN THE
DISTRIBUTOR SHAFT DURING ASSEMBLY. IF THE CARBON BRUSH
CATCHES ON THE SIDE OF THE DISTRIBUTOR SHAFT, THE COIL STRAP
WILL BE BENT INTO THE WRONG POSITION DURING ASSEMBLY.
(21) Gently rotate the distributor housing onto the magneto frame.
(22) Secure the housing with three long screws and one short screw. Torque all four to 24 in-lbs.
(23) Remove T-118 timing pin.
PAGE 16
Feb 28/07 74-10-00 7G2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
F. Testing
Complete Magneto Reassembly, above. Verify that the T-118 Timing Pin has been removed.
(1) Mount the magneto on a suitable test stand in the same relative position as installed on the
engine.
CAUTION: DO NOT OPERATE THE MAGNETO UNLESS THE IGNITION HARNESS IS
INSTALLED AND THE OUTPUT LEADS ARE CONNECTED TO THE 5MM GAP.
(2) Install a Slick High-Temperature Ignition Harness on the magneto and connect each output
lead to a 5mm spark gap.
(3) Coming-in Speed
(a) Determine the lowest speed at which the magneto can be turned and still spark all 5mm
gaps without missing.
(b) The test gap must fire consistently at 200 RPM on both magnetos.
(4) Pressure Testing
After magneto reassembly, install a pressurized harness cap and apply 15 psi filtered air to the
inlet nozzle of the magneto (see Figure 12). Air flow at 15 psi is not to exceed 40 standard
cubic feet per hour (SCFH). If flow is excessive, reposition gaskets and retorque housing and
harness cap screws. Screws should be torqued to 21-25 in-lbs. for 6300 series magnetos.
Testing should be conducted with magneto at room temperature.
Magneto Pressure Test Set-up

Figure 12
7G3 74-10-00 Feb

PAGE 17
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
G. Installation
WARNING: BE SURE SWITCH IS IN OFF POSITION AND THE P LEAD IS GROUNDED.
When installing new or adjusting breaker points and before timing the magneto to the engine, it is
important that the internal timing of the magneto be correct. To find number one tower, the following
instructions should be performed:
NOTE: No need to spark out these magnetos.
(1) Insert the T - 118 timing pin in the L or R hole in the distributor block (depending on rotation of
the magneto).
(2) Turn rotor opposite the rotation of the magneto until the pin engages the gear.
(3) If the pin is binding and will not go in the hole in the gear, you have hit the pointer on the gear.
Pull the pin out, enough to continue opposite rotation until the pointer has passed, re-insert
pin.
(4) When the pin sticks through the hole in the gear about 1/4 inch, you are now ready to fire
number one cylinder.
(5) Turn the engine crankshaft in the normal direction of rotation until the No. 1 cylinder is in the
full-advance firing position.
(a) Cover spark plug hole of number one cylinder with thumb. Rotate crankshaft until
pressure is felt on thumb.
(b) Remove plug in front of number six cylinder. Rotate crankshaft slowly to observe timing
mark on alternator drive gear. When the mark on the gear is centered in the viewing hole,
number one piston is at 20° BTC.
NOTE: Verify correct engine timing for the airplane being worked on by checking the
engine dataplate.
(6) Place a new gasket on magneto flange. Install magneto carefully so drive coupling lugs mate
with slots of drive bushings. Install holding washers, lockwashers, and nuts.
NOTE: Do not tighten completely. Allow for turning magneto for final timing.
(7) After the magneto is installed on engine, remove the timing pin. The magneto is now ready to
be timed to the engine.
(8) Complete magneto to engine timing procedure listed under 100 Hour Inspection, above.
WARNING: THE MAGNETO IS NOT INTERNALLY GROUNDED, WHEN THE GROUND
LEAD IS DISCONNECTED THE MAGNETO IS HOT. REMOVING THE
HARNESS ASSEMBLY FIRST AND INSTALLING IT LAST, MINIMIZES THE
DANGER OF STARTING THE ENGINE ACCIDENTALLY WHEN THE GROUND
LEAD IS REMOVED FROM THE MAGNETO.
(9) Replace the harness cap onto the magneto. Align the index marks made on the harness cap
and distributor housing when removed.
(10) Connect the P-lead and pressurization tube to magneto. Connect the retard breaker lead to the
starting circuit to the left magneto.
PAGE 18
Feb 28/07 74-10-00 7G4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
7G5 74-10-00 Feb

PAGE 19
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 20
Feb 28/07 74-10-00 7G6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
DISTRIBUTION
1. Harness
A. Inspection
(1) Check lead assemblies for nicks, cuts, mutilated braiding, badly worn section or any other
evidence of physical damage. Inspect spark plug sleeves for chafing or tears and damage or
stripped threads on coupling nuts. Check compression spring to see if it is broken or distorted.
Inspect grommet for tears. Check all mounting brackets and clamps to see that they are secure
and not cracked.
(2) Using an ohmmeter, buzzer, or other suitable low voltage device, check each lead for
continuity. If continuity does not exist, wire is broken and must be replaced.
(3) For electrical test of harness assembly, use a high voltage, direct current tester such as the
TAKK Model 86 or 86A or an equivalent direct current high voltage tester capable of delivering
a test potential of 10,000 volts. Connect ground lead to high voltage tester to outer shielding
braid of a single lead. Connect plug terminal. Turn tester ON and apply 10,000 volts. The
insulation resistance should be 100 megohms minimum. Proceed to check other leads of
harness in same manner.
(4) Minor repair of the harness assembly, such as replacement of contact springs, spring retainer
assemblies, insulating sleeves or of one lead assembly, can be accomplished with the harness
assembly mounted on the engine. However, should repair require replacement of more than
one lead assembly or of a cable outlet plate, the harness should be removed from the engine
and sent to an overhaul shop.
B. Removal
(1) Disconnect the clamps that secures the wires to the engine and accessories.
(2) Loosen the coupling nuts at the spark plugs and remove the insulators from the spark plug
barrel well. Use caution when withdrawing the insulator not to damage the insulator spring.
(3) Place a guard over the harness insulators.
(4) Remove the harness assembly terminal plate from the magneto.
(5) Remove the harness from the airplane.
C. Installation
Before installing harness on magneto, check mating surfaces for cleanliness.
(1) Place the harness terminal plate on the magneto and tighten nuts around the plate alternately
to seat cover squarely on magneto.
NOTE: The right magneto fires the lower left and upper right spark plugs. The left magneto
fires the lower right and upper left spark plugs.
(2) Route ignition wires to their respective cylinders per markings on wire insulation.
(3) Clamp the harness assembly in position and install the magneto terminal plate.
(4) Connect the leads to the spark plugs.
D. Disassembly
(1) To remove spring from a damaged lead, turn the spring counterclockwise while pulling gently.
This will remove the spring and the M-1498 Electrode Screw from the end of the coiled
conductor.
(2) To separate the spring and the screw, hold the electrode screw with a pair of pliers and turn
the spring clockwise until it is through the threaded portion.
7G7 74-20-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(3) Remove the insulator sleeve from the end of the wire.
(4) To remove a lead from the M-1568 Harness Cap, use diagonals or cutting pliers and cut the
lead off close to the housing. A drift or punch can be used to tap the ferrule loose from the
housing.
NOTE: Further service on the Slick harness wires require the use of Slick M-1495 Service
Tool Kit, obtained from:
Slick Aircraft Products PH: 815-965-4700
Unison Industries
530 Blackhawk Park Avenue
Rockford, IL 61104
E. Assembly
(1) Cut a piece of harness wire to the length required. Do not stretch the wire when measuring it.
(2) On the magneto end, make a final mark 0.75 inch from the end of the wire. A 0.937 inch mark
should be made from the spark plug end of the wire.
(3) Flare out shielding, then without allowing any of the shielding to fold under, insert Slick M-
1743 Stripping Tool under the braided shielding (refer to Figure 1).
(4) Make sure the stripping tool is inserted past the cutting mark, then cut the shielding with a
sharp knife using a rolling motion and remove the shielding and stripping tool. Take care not to
cut the silicone insulation (refer to Figure 2).
(5) Cut exposed insulation 0.062 inch back from end and roll the insulation clockwise to remove it.
Do not pull the insulation off the wire. Trim the end of the coiled conductor to make a clear hole
for inserting the stud (refer to Figure 3).
(6) Using M-1742 Pin Vise, insert M-1741 Drill (72 drill), drill out the silicone rubber from inside of
coiled conductor approximately 0.375 inch deep (refer to Figure 4).
(7) On spark plug end of wire install M-1462 Nut followed by M-1459 Female Taper Hex Ferrule
(refer to Figure 5).
(8) After installation of nut and ferrule, bend and rotate the silicone insulation as illustrated in
Figure 6 to flare out the shielding so a drive ferrule can be inserted. Take care not to cut the
silicone insulation with the sharp braiding while the wire is being rotated (refer to Figure 6).
(9) On spark plug end of wire install M- 1458 Male Tapered Drive Ferrule over silicone insulation
and under shielding to within 0.062 inch from flange of ferrule. Make certain that shielding is
away from ferrule flange then slide Ferrule M-1459 over the M-1458 Drive Ferrule until tight
(refer to Figure 7).
NOTE: Do not reuse the M-1458 Drive Ferrule.
(10) For spark plug end, mount M-1747 Drive Plate in a bench vise. Set the hex ferrule in the slot of
the drive plate. Drive the M-1458 Drive Ferrule flush against the hex ferrule using the M-1744
Drive Tool (refer to Figure 8).
(11) For magneto end of wire, insert wire through approximate hole in the M-1568 Harness Cap so
the shielding is through the hole as shown in Figure 9.
(12) Install an M-1458 Male Tapered Drive Ferrule over insulation and under shielding as in Step
(9), then drive the ferrule into the M-1568 Harness Cap using the M-1744 Drive Tool, similar to
Step (10) (refer to Figure 10).
(13) Clamp the threaded end of the M-1498 Electrode Screw in the M-1742 Pin Vise. Insert the
tapered pin of the electrode screw into the center of the coiled conductor by turning the pin
vise counterclockwise and pushing at the same time until the screw is flush with the insulation.
This is done at both ends of the wire assembly (refer to Figure 11).
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 74-20-00 7G8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Stripping Tool Inserting Stripping Tool

Figure 1 Figure 2
Cutting Insulation Removing Silicone Rubber from Wire

Figure 3 Figure 4
7G9 74-20-00 FebPAGE 3

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Installation of Plug Endnut Flaring Out the Shielding

Figure 5 Figure 6
Installation of Ferrule Driving Tool

Figure 7 Figure 8
PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 74-20-00 7G10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Installation in Housing Securing Wire in Housing

Figure 9 Figure 10
Installation of Electrical Screw Installation of Insulator Screw

Figure 11 Figure 12
7G11 74-20-00 FebPAGE 5

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(14) On the magneto end of the wire, place

M-3168 Insulator Sleeve over the
silicone insulation. On the spark plug
end of the wire, use K-3300 Insulator
Sleeve Assy (refer to Figure 12).
(15) Turn M-1455 Spring clockwise on the
electrode screw three full turns until the
end is flush with the first large coil of the
spring. This applies to both ends of the Installation of Spring
wire (refer to Figure 13). Figure 13
2. Spark Plugs
A. Removal
(1) Loosen the coupling nut on the harness lead and remove the terminal insulator from the spark
plug barrel well. A crows foot adapter is needed to remove the lower spark plugs and special
spark plug wrench P/N 8160 for upper plug blocked by the intercoolers (see Note).
NOTE: The special spark plug wrench P/N 8160 can be obtained from:
Borroughs Tool and Equipment Corp.
2429 North Burdick St.
Kalamazoo, Ml 49007-1897
NOTE: When withdrawing the ignition cable lead connection from the plug, care must be
taken to pull the lead straight out and in line with the center line of the plug barrel;
otherwise, a side load will be applied which frequently results in damage to the barrel
insulator and connector. If the lead cannot be removed easily in this manner, the
resisting contact between the neoprene collar and the barrel insulator will be broken
by a rotary twisting of the collar. Avoid undue distortion of the collar and possible side
loading of the barrel insulator.
NOTE: Do not use a torque wrench to remove spark plugs.
(2) Remove the spark plug from the engine. In the course of engine operation, carbon and other
combustion products will be deposited on the end of the spark plug and will penetrate the
lower threads to some degree. As a result, greater torque is frequently required for removing a
plug than for installing it. Accordingly, the torque limitations given do not apply to plug removal,
and sufficient torque must be used to unscrew the plug. The higher torque in removal is not as
detrimental as in installation, since it cannot stretch the threaded section. It does, however,
impose a shearing load on this section and, if sufficiently severe, could produce a failure in this
location.
(3) As soon as they are removed, place spark plugs in a tray that will identify their position in the
engine.
NOTE: Spark plugs should not be used if they have been dropped.
(4) Removal of seized spark plugs in the cylinder may be accomplished by application of carbon
dioxide by a conical metal funnel adapter with a hole at the apex just large enough to
accommodate the funnel of a CO2 bottle (refer to Figure 14). When a seized spark plug cannot
be removed by normal means, the funnel adapter is placed over and around the spark plug.
Place the funnel of the CO2 bottle inside the funnel adapter and release the carbon dioxide to
chill and contract the spark plug. Break the spark plug loose with a wrench. A warm cylinder
head at the time the carbon dioxide is applied will aid in the removal of an excessively seized
plug.
(5) Do not allow foreign objects to enter the spark plug hole.
PAGE 6
Feb 28/07 74-20-00 7G12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Removing Frozen Spark Plug

Figure 14
B. Installation
Before installing spark plugs, ascertain that the threads within the cylinder are clean and not
damaged.
CAUTION: MAKE CERTAIN THAT THE DEEP SOCKET IS PROPERLY SEATED ON THE SPARK
PLUG HEXAGON AS DAMAGE TO THE PLUG COULD RESULT IF THE WRENCH IS
COCKED TO ONE SIDE WHEN PRESSURE IS APPLIED.
(1) Apply anti-seize compound sparingly on the threads and install the gasket and spark plugs.
Torque the plugs to 420 inch-pounds.
(2) Carefully insert the terminal insulator in the spark plug and tighten the coupling unit.
C. Inspection and Cleaning
(1) Visually inspect each spark plug for the following non-repairable defects:
(a) Severely damaged shell or shield threads nicked up, stripped or cross-threaded.
(b) Badly battered or rounded shell hexagons.
(c) Out-of-round or damaged shielding barrel.
(d) Chipped, cracked or broken ceramic insulator portions.
(e) Badly eroded electrodes worn to approximately 50 percent of original size.
(2) Clean the spark plug as required, removing carbon and foreign deposits.
(3) Set the electrode at 0.016 to 0.021 inches. (See Lycoming Service Instruction No. 1042.)
(4) Test the spark plug, both electrically and for resistance.
7G13 74-20-00 FebPAGE 7

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 8
Feb 28/07 74-20-00 7G14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
7G15 74-20-00 FebPAGE 9

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 10
Feb 28/07 74-20-00 7G16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER
76
ENGINE CONTROLS
7G17
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
7G18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 76
CHAPTER CHAPTER


2 Feb 28/07
76-10-00 1 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 76 - ENGINE CONTROLS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SUBJECT CHAPTER PAGE GRID NO.
POWER CONTROL 76-10-00 1 7G23

Engine Setup Procedures 1 7G23
Idle Speed and Mixture Adjustment 1 7G23
Variable Pressure Controller 2 7G24
Controller / Throttle Rigging 2 7G24
Adjustment for Manifold Pressure 2 7G24

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
POWER CONTROL
1. Engine Setup Procedures

WARNING: BEWARE PROPELLER BLAST AND ROTATING PROPELLER BLADES DURING ENGINE
OPERATION. EXERCISE CAUTION TO AVOID DAMAGE TO PERSONNEL AND
EQUIPMENT.
CAUTION: BEFORE ATTEMPTING FULL POWER CHECKS, BE SURE THAT THE BRAKES ARE
PROPERLY MAINTAINED AND SET, AND THAT THE GROUND CONDITIONS WILL NOT
PERMIT THE WHEELS TO SLIP DURING FULL POWER CHECK.
2. Idle Speed and Mixture Adjustment
CAUTION: IT IS EXTREMELY IMPORTANT THAT THE ENGINE BE THOROUGHLY WARMED UP.
HOWEVER, EXCESSIVE ENGINE TEMPERATURES MUST BE AVOIDED.
NOTE: Allow for the effect of weather conditions and field altitude when making idling adjustment.
A. Start and warm up the engine until the oil temperature reaches 170°F to 190°F.
B. Check magnetos. If the magneto drop is normal, proceed with idle adjustment.
C. Set throttle stop screw so that the engine idles at 700 rpm. If the rpm changes appreciably after
making idle mixture adjustment during the following steps, readjust the idle speed to the desired
rpm.
D. When the idling speed has stabilized, move the cockpit mixture control, with a smooth steady pull,
toward the Idle Cut-Off position and observe the tachometer for any change during the leaning
process. Caution must be exercised to return the mixture control to the Full Rich position before the
rpm drops to a point of engine cut out. An increase of more than 50 rpm while leaning out indicates
an excessively rich idle mixture. An immediate decrease in rpm (if not preceded by a momentary
increase) indicates the idle mixture is too lean.
E. If step (D) indicates that the idle mixture is too rich or too lean, turn the idle mixture adjustment in
the direction required for correction and check this new position by repeating step (D).
F. Make additional adjustments as necessary until a mixture check step (D) results in a momentary
pick up of approximately 50 rpm. Each time the adjustment is changed the engine should be run up
to 2,000 rpm to clear the engine before proceeding with the rpm check.
G. Make final adjustment of the idle speed adjustment to obtain an idle speed of 700 ± 25 rpm with
closed throttle and air conditioner off.
H. The above method aims at a setting that will obtain maximum rpm with minimum manifold pressure.
In case the setting does not remain stable, check the idle linkage; any looseness in this linkage
would cause erratic idling.
7G23 76-10-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. Variable Pressure Controller

A. Controller / Throttle Rigging
With the controller lever against the stop in full boost position, adjust the linkage rod to maintain
0.015 / 0.020 inch clearance between the fuel injector throttle lever and the full throttle stop.
See also Textron Lycoming Service Instruction No. 1431, Supplement 2.
B. Adjustment for Manifold Pressure
(1) Warm up the engine until the oil temperature is 170°F to 190°F.
(2) Ensure mixture control is full rich and propeller control is at full rpm (2,500 rpm).
(3) Slowly advance the throttle lever to full throttle or 42.0 in. Hg. manifold pressure.
(4) If the throttle reaches full forward prior to the manifold pressure reaching 42.0 in. Hg.,
INCREASE manifold pressure by turning the controller adjustment bolt counterclockwise.
NOTE: A general relationship between the number of turns on the controller adjustment and
manifold pressure is one turn per 1.0 inch of manifold pressure.
(5) If the manifold pressure reaches 42.0 inches prior to the throttle reaching full forward position,
DECREASE manifold pressure by turning the controller adjustment bolt clockwise.
(6) Repeat steps (3), (4), and (5) as required to establish 42.0 in. Hg. manifold pressure at full
throttle. Tighten adjustment bolt jam nut.
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 76-10-00 7G24
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
7H1 76-10-00 FebPAGE 3

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 76-10-00 7H2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER
77
ENGINE INDICATING
7H3
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
7H4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 77
CHAPTER CHAPTER
77-List of 1 Feb 28/07 77-40-00 1 Feb 28/07

3 Feb 28/07
2 Feb 28/07 5 Feb 28/07
6 Feb 28/07
77-10-00 1 Feb 28/07 7 Feb 28/07
2 Feb 28/07 8 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07 9 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07 10 Feb 28/07
11 Feb 28/07
77-20-00 1 Feb 28/07 12 Feb 28/07
2 Feb 28/07 13 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07 14 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07 15 Feb 28/07
5 Feb 28/07 16 Feb 28/07
6 Feb 28/07 17 Feb 28/07
7 Feb 28/07 18 Feb 28/07
8 Feb 28/07 19 Feb 28/07
9 Feb 28/07 20 Feb 28/07
10 Feb 28/07 21 Feb 28/07
11 Feb 28/07 22 Feb 28/07
12 Feb 28/07 23 Feb 28/07
24 Feb 28/07
25 Feb 28/07
26 Feb 28/07

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 77 - ENGINE INDICATING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
POWER 77-10-00 1 7H9

Manifold Pressure Gauge 1 7H9
Description 1 7H9
Tachometer Indicator 2 7H10
Description 2 7H10
TEMPERATURE 77-20-00 1 7H13

Turbine Inlet Temperature (TIT) Gauge 1 7H13
Description 1 7H13
Gauge and Probe Cleaning and Inspection 1 7H13
Gauge 2 7H14
Removal 2 7H14
Installation 2 7H14
Probe Replacement 2 7H14
System Calibration and Test 2 7H14
Combustion Analyzer Gauge 4 7H16
Description 4 7H16
Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Scanner 7 7H19
Description 7 7H19
CHT Indicator Calibration Check 8 7H20
Testing 8 7H20
Adjustment 8 7H20
Validation 10 7H22
Securing the System 10 7H22
INTEGRATED ENGINE
INSTRUMENT SYSTEMS 77-40-00 1 7I1
Transicoil Electronic Module Instrument System (EMIS) 1 7I1
Dual Analog Module Indicator 1 7I1
Features 1 7I1
Performance 1 7I1
Quad Digital Indicator / Enhanced Digital Indicator Module 5 7I5
Functions 5 7I5
Front Display and Pushbutton Controls 5 7I5
Remote Switch Controls, External Alarm, External Interface Overview 8 7I8
Power Up Characteristics 8 7I8
Normal Digital Enhancement Mode, Analog Indicator 8 7I8
Display Blanking 10 7I10
Fuel Management Mode 10 7I10

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 77 - ENGINE INDICATING
INTEGRATED ENGINE
INSTRUMENT SYSTEMS (cont) 77-40-00 (cont.)
Fuel Load Entry Mode 12 7I12
Outside Air Temperature (OAT) 14 7I14
Fuel Imbalance Alarm 14 7I14
Automatic Exceedance Warning Mode 17 7I17
Exceedance Review Mode 17 7I17
Remote Exceedance Memory Reset Control 21 7I21
Servicing 21 7I21
Percent Power 23 7I23
Calibration 23 7I23
Avidyne FlightMax Entegra EFIS 25 7J1
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
POWER
NOTE: In S/N’s 4636375 and up, engine data is collected by the Data Acquisition Unit (DAU) and is
displayed on the Multi-Function Display (MFD) and Primary Flight Display (PFD). See Electronic
Flight Instrument System, 34-20-00; 77-40-00, and 91-77-40 for more information.
Manifold Pressure Gauge
NOTE: Serial numbers 4636021 thru 4636374 incorporate the Transicoil Electronic Module Instrument
System (EMIS). See 77-40-00.
A. Description
The manifold pressure gauge is a vapor proof, absolute pressure type instrument. Pressure from
the intake manifold of the engine is transmitted to the instrument through a line. A pointer indicates
the manifold pressure available at the engine in inches of mercury. A manual drain is provided in the
line. The drain line leads from a tee on the back of the manifold air pressure gauge to the drain
which is mounted forward of the elevator trim wheel on the left hand side.
B. Troubleshooting
See Chart 1.
CHART 1
TROUBLESHOOTING MANIFOLD PRESSURE GAUGE
Excessive error at existing Pointer shifted. Replace instruments.
barometric pressure.
Excessive error when engine Line leaking. Tighten line connections.
is running.
Sluggish or jerky pointer Defective instrument. Replace instrument.
movement.
Dull or discolored marking. Age. Replacement instrument.
Incorrect reading. Moisture or oil in line. Disconnect lines and blow
out.
7H9 77-10-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2. Tachometer Indicator
NOTE: S/N’s 4636021 and up incorporate Integrated Engine Instrumentation Systems. See 77-40-00.
A. Description
The tachometer is electrically connected to the engine magnetos. The tachometer provides an
indication of crankshaft speed in revolutions per minute. The instrument has a recording mechanism
for recording the time that the engine is in actual operation. A calibration check on the tachometer is
performed every 100 hours. The correct tolerance at 2,500 rpm is (-) 25 rpm (+) 0 rpm.
B. Troubleshooting
See Chart 2.
CHART 2
TROUBLESHOOTING TACHOMETER INDICATOR
No reading on indicator, Inoperative instrument. Replace instrument.
either permanent or
intermittent. Loose cable connections. Tighten cable.
Pointer oscillates Inoperative instrument. Replace instrument.
excessively. Excessive friction in Replace instrument.
instrument.
Indicator changes in Excessive cleanup in Replace instrument.
climb. speed cup.
Pointer goes all the way Excessive lubricant in Replace instrument.
to stop, more noticeable instruments.
in cold weather.
Pointer jumps at idle. Speed cup hitting rotating Replace instrument.
magnet.
Tachometer cable breaks. Cable bent too sharply. Reroute cable.
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 77-10-00 7H10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
7H11 77-10-00 FebPAGE 3

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 77-10-00 7H12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TEMPERATURE
NOTE: In S/N’s 4636375 and up, engine data is collected by the Data Acquisition Unit (DAU) and is
displayed on the Multi-Function Display (MFD) and Primary Flight Display (PFD). See Electronic
Flight Instrument System, 34-20-00; 77-40-00, and 91-77-40 for more information.
1. Turbine Inlet Temperature (T.I.T.) Gauge
NOTE: Serial numbers 4636021 thru 4636374 incorporate the Transicoil Electronic Module Instrument
System (EMIS). See 77-40-00.
A. Description
This instrument is used to monitor the temperature of the exhaust gases as they leave the cylinders
(but before they enter the turbocharger turbine).
Although the gauge is adjustable, if it is found defective after checking with the troubleshooting
chart, it should be replaced. Replace any faulty leads to the gauge. Because the resistance of the
leads is critical for the proper operation of the gauge, use the same type and length of wire as the
original when replacing leads.
B. Troubleshooting
See Chart 1.
C. Gauge and Probe Cleaning and Inspection
CAUTION: DO NOT CONNECT OHMMETER ACROSS METER. IT WILL BURN OUT THE
MOVEMENT OF THE METER.
Unless mechanical damage is evident (broken glass, bent or broken pointer, or broken case) the
following checks should be performed before removing the instrument:
(1) Remove the engine cowling as necessary to expose the exhaust transition.
(2) Loosen the nut which secures the probe to the waste gate transition assembly. Remove the
probe.
(3) Check for a broken weld (at tip end) or a burnt off end. The measured resistance of probe
should be 0.73 ± 0.01 ohms. Clean the connections with steel wool.
(4) Disconnect the lead wires at the instrument and measure the resistance. Resistance with the
lead wires connected to probe should be 8 ohms. Clean connections with steel wool.
CHART 1
TROUBLESHOOTING TURBINE INLET TEMPERATURE (T.I.T.) GAUGE
Gauge inoperative. Defective gauge, probe or Check probe and lead
wiring. wires for chafing, breaks or
shorting between wires
and/or metal structure.
Adjusting potentiometer Reset potentiometer.
turned off scale.
Fluctuating reading. Loose, frayed or broken Clean and tighten
electrical leads or faulty connections. Repair or
connections. replace defective wire.
7H13 77-20-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(5) Make sure that the adjustment screw, located at the rear of the instrument case, is in the
center of its travel. If this screw has been turned to either end of full travel, it will shut the
instrument off and no indication will be shown on the pointer. With the leads connected to
instrument, heat probe using an Alcor testing unit. The meter should read up to the fourth
graduation of approximately 1,500° F. If meter still does not read, replace it.
D. Gauge
(1) Removal
(a) Disconnect wires from the gauge at the instrument panel.
(b) Remove four screws which secure the gauge to the instrument panel and remove the
gauge.
(c) Remove wires from the wire harness going to the gauge.
(2) Installation
(a) Route the thermocouple wires along with the existing wire harness to the instrument
panel.
(b) Install the gauge into the instrument panel and secure it with four screws.
(c) Connect the thermocouple wires to the rear of the gauge.
F. Probe Replacement (See Figure 1.)
NOTE: The normal service life (limit) for the T.I.T. probe is two hundred-fifty hours time in service.
NOTE: If the probe time is unknown, initial replacement should occur within the next one hundred
hours time in service. If system inaccuracy is suspected, the probe should be replaced
immediately.
(1) Remove the engine cowling as required to expose the exhaust transition.
(2) Remove the existing T.I.T. probe mounted in a boss welded to the upper portion of the exhaust
transition.
(3) Install a new T.I.T. probe into the hole in the waste gate transition assembly and tighten.
(4) Run the aircraft and operationally check for a proper T.I.T. reading.
(5) Re-install the engine cowling.
G. System Calibration and Test
This procedure is applicable to the Lewis T.I.T. Indicators, either the standard analog P/N 471-008
or the optional digital P/N 548-811, and is required each time a T.I.T. Indicator is replaced or if
system error is suspected. It should be noted that T.I.T. probe replacement must occur at cylinder
changes, engine overhauls or should other T.I.T. system maladies become apparent.
EQUIPMENT REQUIRED: A variable D.C. millivolt power supply and a digital volt-ohm meter. If a
millivolt power supply is not available the following items will be required. One 5K Potentiometer
JS1N056S502UA (Allen-Bradley part number 481-239) or equivalent. One 27K OHM Resistor ±
10% 1/2 Watt. (See Figures 2 & 3.)
(1) Place the aircraft in an enclosed hanger where the temperature may be stabilized between 50
- 90° F. (Please take note that the successful completion of this calibration procedure is
dependent upon stabilizing the aircraft temperature prior to starting calibration.)
(2) Disconnect the leads of the existing T.I.T. probe which is mounted in a boss welded to the
exhaust transition. (See Figure 1.)
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 77-20-00 7H14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CAUTION: TO AVOID ERRONEOUS INDICATIONS, DO NOT USE ANY ADDITIONAL

WIRING BETWEEN THE MILLIVOLT POWER SUPPLY AND THE T.I.T. WIRING
HARNESS EXCEPT AS SHOWN IN FIGURE 2.
(3) Connect a stable millivolt power supply directly to the T.I.T. wiring harness. It should be noted
that the yellow harness wire is “positive.”
NOTE: If a millivolt power supply is not available, it is permissible to construct the circuit
shown in Figure 2 and connect this circuit to the aircraft battery as shown in Figure 3.
(4) Once this calibration configuration is established, allow the aircraft to remain in the hanger for
at least 3 hours for the system temperature to stabilize.
CAUTION: DO NOT TOUCH THE CONTACTS ON THE BACK OF THE T.I.T. INDICATOR
WITH YOUR HANDS. IF CONTACT IS MADE, ALLOW THE SYSTEM TO
STABILIZE FOR AT LEAST ONE HOUR BEFORE MAKING THE ADJUSTMENT
TO THE INDICATOR.
(5) Gain access to the back of the T.I.T. indicator. (Remove the glareshield if necessary.)
(6) Adjust the variable D.C. millivolt power supply so the input voltage to the T.I.T. harness is
37.1 ± .1 m.v. It should be noted that this value does not correspond to the standard Alumel-
Chromel Tables for “K”- Type thermocouples due to the electrical load of the harness and
indicator.
100546 U
(+) YELLOW SLEEVE (2 REQ)
CABLE TIE,
HIGH TEMP.,
(4 PLACES)
A
LEAD ASSY
(-) RED
ENCLOSE TERMINAL WITH
3M 27 GLASS CLOTH ELECTRICAL TAPE
A PROBE ASSY
1.36
1.42
(REF)
VIEW A-A
T.I.T. Probe Installation
Figure 1
7H15 77-20-00 FebPAGE 3

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Locally Manufactured Milli-volt Power Supply

Figure 2
(7) For the standard analog indicator, vary the adjustment screw on the backplate of the indicator
until indicator pointer is at the lower edge of the red radial (1750° F.). For the optional
analog/digital indicator, verify that the pointer is at the lower edge of the red radial (1750° F.) - if
not, replace indicator.
(8) Re-install the glareshield.
2. Combustion Analyzer Gauge (S/N’s 4636001 thru 4636020 only.)
A. Description
In S/N’s 4636001 thru 4636020 only, a multi-channel combustion analyzer is optional. When
installed, it is located on the instrument panel. The combustion analyzer measures the cylinder
head temperature in each cylinder head. The combustion analyzer is an electrical instrument and is
wired through the instruments circuit breaker.
B. Troubleshooting
See Chart 2.
PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 77-20-00 7H16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TIT System Calibration Set-up

Figure 3
7H17 77-20-00 FebPAGE 5

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 2
TROUBLESHOOTING COMBUSTION ANALYZER GAUGE
(S/N’s 4636001 thru 4636020 only)
75° - 100° rise for Spark plug not firing due to Check spark plug. Clean or
one cylinder. fouling, faulty plug, lead, replace if necessary. Check
or distributor in magneto. lead. Replace if necessary.
Check magnetos.
Repair if necessary.
75° - 100° rise for One magneto not operating. Repair faulty magneto.
ALL cylinders.
Increase or decrease, Improper timing - Increase in Check magneto timing.
especially after ignition EGT means retarded ignition.
system maintenance. Decrease means advanced
ignition.
Loss of peak EGT. Poor ignition or vapor in fuel Check magnetos. Repair if
injection system. necessary.
Purge fuel injection system
if necessary.
Decrease in EGT for Decrease in total airflow Check alternate air system.
ALL cylinders. carburetor ice or induction ice.
Decrease in EGT for Intake valve not opening Check valve lift.
one cylinder. fully - faulty valve lifter.
Scored cylinder or broken Check spark plugs. Clean
ring to cause low compression or replace if necessary.
(EGT may increase due to Check compression.
plug fouling from oil
consumption).
Slow rise in EGT. Burned exhaust valve. Check compression.
Decrease in peak and Detonation - usually the Check to make sure proper
flat. result of 80 octane fuel in octane fuel is used.
100 octane engine.
Sudden off scale rise Pre-ignition During takeoff - Abort if
for any cylinder. possible. Go to full rich.
Check fuel injector flow for
proper operation.
Any EGT decrease. If none of the above causes Check calibration with
is evident, suspect a low reading ALCOR System Tester.
probe or faulty connection.
Any increase in EGT. TROUBLE - because any Check probe & leads with
malfunction of probe, lead, or ALCOR System Tester.
meter will cause a decrease. Replace any found to be
faulty.
PAGE 6
Feb 28/07 77-20-00 7H18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Scanner

The following information describes the Cylinder Head Temperature Scanner used in the Malibu Mirage.
This scanner, when connected to the cylinder head temperature gauge and six resistive temperature
probes, scans the six probes, determines the hottest cylinder, connects that probe to the gauge and
outputs a signal that can be used to indicate which cylinder is the hottest.
A. Description
(1) Electrical
The Cylinder Head Temperature Scanner gives a discrete output to indicate which cylinder out
of six is the hottest. The scanner, momentarily disconnects the CHT gauge and connects all of
the probes to measuring circuits that measure the resistance of each probe. The scanner then
makes appropriate determinations based upon those measurements, reconnects the gauge to
a selected probe, and outputs a discrete output.
An external cycle switch may be used to manually select which cylinder head temperature
probe is connected to the gauge. Momentarily grounding the proper pin will step the scanner to
Cylinder No. 1. Cylinder No. 1 will be displayed on the gauge for approximately 8 seconds (the
"heartbeat" period). Upon the next heartbeat the gauge will again display the hottest cylinder.
Again momentarily connecting this pin to ground before the heartbeat will step the scanner to
Cylinder No. 2. Now Cylinder No. 2 will be displayed on the gauge for the heartbeat period.
Upon the next heartbeat the gauge will again display the hottest cylinder. Continuing to
momentarily connect this pin to ground before the heartbeat will step the scanner to the next
cylinder in rotation (3, 4, 5, 6, etc.). By maintaining a ground on this pin, any particular cylinder
being displayed will continue to be displayed until the ground is removed and the heartbeat
cycle occurs. Heartbeat will not occur so long as this pin is grounded.
Six discrete lamps are used to display the hottest cylinder (1 through 6), and are mounted
adjacent to the external cycle switch.
An alarm output is also generated when any cylinder is over the preset limit for a "Hot"
cylinder. This alarm output is interfaced with the Exceedance Audio Alert Horn. When the
external cycle control is in use, the alarm will maintain the last condition displayed when in the
automatic mode, regardless of the current condition during the manual external cycling.
(2) Physical
The Cylinder Head Temperature Scanner is a single unit with an integral heat sink and requires
no forced cooling. The internal circuits are arranged on two printed circuit boards mounted
parallel to the each other. All connections between boards are made by means of two part
connectors.
B. Troubleshooting
In the event of a detectable scanner failure, the scanner will automatically connect the gauge to the
probe for cylinder number 3.
7H19 77-20-00 FebPAGE 7

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4. Cylinder Head Temperature Indicator Calibration Check (PIR-PPS60182, Rev. A.)

(S/N’s 4636021 thru 4636374.)
All equipment necessary for the proper operation of the CHT, including the CHT/VAC Dual Analog
Module Indicator, the cylinder head temperature scanner, and all six CHT probes with proper harnesses,
must be installed in the aircraft and be operational prior to the test, adjustment, and validation described
below.
A. Testing
(1) Remove CHT probe from #1 cylinder.
(2) Disconnect harness from probe for #1 cylinder.
(3) Connect test box (see Figure 4, construct locally if required) to the two leads removed from
probe for #1 cylinder.
(4) Turn switch on test box to 100° F and turn on aircraft power. The CHT indicator should read
100° F ± 10° F. Record displayed value.
NOTE: Engine temperature must be less than 100° F. If temperature is higher than 100° F,
press CHT scanner cycle switch repeatedly until lamp for #1 cylinder on instrument
panel is illuminated. Hold switch in until temperature is displayed on Quad Digital
Indicator (QDI) / Enhanced Digital Indicator (EDI) (see 77-40-00).
(5) Turn switch on test box to 450° F. The CHT indicator should read 450° F ± 10° F. Record
displayed value.
NOTE: CHT scanner must be operating during these tests.
(6) If the CHT indicator meets the specified limits, go to Securing the System, below. If the CHT
indicator does not meet the specified limits, proceed to Adjustment or Validation, below,
depending on aircraft serial number.
B. Adjustment (P/N 599-588 only - original equipment in S/N’s 4636021 thru 4636131 only.)
NOTE: P/N’s 602-299 or 602-247, installed as original equipment in S/N’s 4636132 thru 4636374
are backward compatible and may be encountered in S/N’s 4636021 thru 4636131 as
service spares. They can be identified by the lack of potentiometers and are not adjustable.
If encountered, validate per paragraph C, below.
(1) With test box connected per Testing steps (1) - (3), above, select 100° F on test box. Remove
CHT/VAC dual analog module indicator from the instrument panel far enough to remove foil
sticker from the side of the CHT indicator. Adjust (z) zero potentiometer so that the QDI
displays 100° F.
(2) Select 450° F on test box. Adjust (s) span potentiometer so that the QDI displays 450° F.
(3) Return test box switch to 100° F setting and check that CHT indicator reads 100° F ± 10° F. If it
does not, readjust the (z) zero potentiometer.
(4) Set switch on test box to 450° F setting and check that CHT indicator reads 450° F ± 10° F. If it
does not, readjust the (s) span potentiometer.
(5) Repeat steps (3) and (4) until no adjustment is required to repeat 100° F and 450° F readings
when the test box is set to the corresponding switch position.
PAGE 8
Feb 28/07 77-20-00 7H20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHT Test Box Construction and Lead Connection Effectivity

7H21 77-20-00 FebPAGE 9

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C. Validation (P/N’s 602-299 or 602-247 - original equipment in S/N’s 4636132 thru 4636374.)
(1) Pull circuit breaker for engine monitor (i.e. - scanner) and repeat test in Testing, above, except
test #3 cylinder in lieu of #1.
(2) If CHT indicator fails to meet the specified limits on #3 cylinder also, replace CHT/VAC dual
analog module indicator.
(3) If CHT indicator meets the specified limits on #3 cylinder, troubleshoot CHT probe and harness
on #1 cylinder and repeat test in Testing, above.
D. Securing the System
(1) Replace foil sticker over trim potentiometers, if removed.
(2) Reinstall CHT/VAC dual analog module indicator in instrument panel, if removed.
(3) Disconnect and remove test box.
(4) Reconnect harness to probe(s) and reinstall probe(s) in correct cylinder(s).
PAGE 10
Feb 28/07 77-20-00 7H22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
7H23 77-20-00 Feb

PAGE 11
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 12
Feb 28/07 77-20-00 7H24
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTEGRATED ENGINE INSTRUMENT SYSTEMS
1. Transicoil Electronic Module Instrument System (EMIS) (S/N’s 4636021 thru 4636374.)
The Transicoil Electronic Module Instrument System (EMIS) is a precision measurement and display
system containing both analog and digital displays of engine related parameters (See Figure 2). The
EMIS is comprised of two parts:
-- Dual Analog Module Indicators, and
-- Quad Digital Indicator (QDI) (S/N’s 4636021 thru 4636131), or
Enhanced Digital Indicator (EDI) (S/N’s 4636132 thru 4636374) display.
Both Dual Analog Module Indicators and the QDI/EDI are face-mounted instruments and may be
removed and installed per 39-10-00.
A. Dual Analog Module Indicator (See Figure 1 and Chart 2.)
The Dual Analog Module Indicator is a precision micro-processor based instrument for displaying
engine parameters. Each module consists of two completely independent analog indicators. Each
indicator displays its respective engine parameter reading on the analog dial as well as transmits
digital data to the QDI/EDI via the data bus. A rear connector is provided for system interface and
analog sensor inputs. Alarm outputs are provided where applicable.
(1) Features
Each Dual Analog Module Indicator features the following (See Figure 1):
(a) Two parallax free dials, each featuring "Return to Zero" pointers which hold just below "0",
or the lowest graduation, when power is removed.
(b) Four status indicator LEDs, two green and two red, with the exception of the Dual Fuel
Quantity Module which has green and yellow.
(c) Two front-accessible buttons which provide a simple user interface.
(2) Performance
(a) Stand Alone
1 Power Up Characteristics
When power is first applied, a stand alone Dual Analog Module will simply drive its
pointers towards the correct reading after a short power up delay (less than 0.5 sec).
2 Exceedance Characteristics
The traditional "Red Line", if present, corresponds to a preset limit for that parameter.
If the reading exceeds the preset customer specified limit (that may differ from the
Red Radial) for more than a specified time delay, the red or yellow LED
corresponding to that indicator will illuminate, and the external audible alarm output
will turn on.
3 Pressing the switch next to the analog indicator in exceedance will mute the external
audible alarm.
NOTE: Additional features, if any, shall be found on the respective analog drawings.
7I1 77-40-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Dual Analog Module Indicator (Typical)

Figure 1
(b) System
The Dual Analog Module can be operated as part of a system when a Quad Digital
Indicator (QDI)/Enhanced Digital Indicator (EDI) is connected to the data bus.
1 Power Up Characteristics
When power is applied to the system, a seven (7) second power-up self-test is
initiated by the QDI/EDI as communication is established between it and the dual
analog indicator. The following test functions will occur:
a Both pointers will drive to the 9 o'clock position.
b All indicator LEDs illuminate.
c External audible alarm(s) sound for the last two (2) seconds of self-test.
2 Normal Digital Display Characteristics
Press the select button adjacent to the analog indicator that is to be displayed
digitally on the QDI/EDI. When the indicator is being displayed digitally, its green LED
will illuminate, indicating that it has been selected.
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 77-40-00 7I2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3 Exceedance Characteristics
The "Red Line" (if present) on the dial face corresponds to a preset limit for that
parameter. If the reading exceeds the preset customer specified limit (that may differ
from the Red Radial for more than a specified time delay, the red or yellow LED
corresponding to that indicator will illuminate and the external audible alarm will
sound. The QDI/EDI will automatically select the exceeding indicator to be displayed
digitally. This will turn on the green LED for that indicator. The audible alarm will
remain on until the reading moves to the normal range, or the select switch next to
the parameter in exceedance is pressed. This will mute the external alarm. The red or
yellow LED will remain on until the reading returns to the normal range. Once the
parameter in exceedance is acknowledged, the exceeding indicator will return to its
normal display operation.
4 Retrieval of Exceedances Characteristics
The QDI/EDI stores data concerning an exceedance event which can be retrieved at
any time. While the QDI/EDI is displaying this data, both LEDs will flash on the
analog indicator corresponding to that data.
5 Self-Test Characteristics
a Power Up - See Power Up Characteristics, above.
b Manual - With power applied to the system, press the adjacent select button of
the indicator to be tested for two seconds. The indicator's pointer will drive to 9
o'clock and both LEDs will illuminate. Continue to press button (approx. 5
seconds more) until the external alarm sounds. The audible alarm will remain
activated until the select button is released. During this test the digital display
will continue to display the actual indicator value.
(3) Troubleshooting
See Chart 1.
7I3 77-40-00 FebPAGE 3

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TROUBLESHOOTING DUAL ANALOG MODULE INDICATORS
During system self test, analog Stuck pointer or faulty Return module to factory.
pointer(s) does not drive to drive circuit.
9 o'clock position but red and
green LEDs turn on.
During system self test, analog Loss of power to module. Check module circuit
module does not respond. breaker.
Check module connector.
Check aircraft wire
harness.
Return module to factory.
Loss of communication Check module connector.
data bus. Check aircraft wire
harness.
Analog pointer always drives Open or shorted sensor Check sensor connections.
to the lowest or highest lines.
graduation point.
Faulty sensor. Change sensor.
Oil pressure analog instrument Faulty connection between Check aircraft wire
goes into exceedance when RPM module connector pin harness.
RPM instrument is below 1400 5 and VAC module connector
RPM. pin 4.
Faulty internal circuit in either Return RPM and OP
RPM or OP module(s). instrument modules to
the factory.
VAC analog instrument goes into Faulty connection between Check aircraft wire
exceedance when RPM is below RPM module connector pin harness.
zero. 5 and VAC module connector
pin 4.
Faulty internal circuit in either Return RPM and VAC
RPM or VAC module(s). instrument modules to
the factory.
Analog instrument cannot be Loss of power to the Check module circuit
selected by QDI/EDI. instrument. breaker.
Check module connector.
Loss of communication Check module connector.
data bus. Check aircraft wire
harness.
Reset QDI/EDI.
Faulty select switch. Return module to factory.
PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 77-40-00 7I4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TROUBLESHOOTING DUAL ANALOG MODULE INDICATORS
Audio alarm does not function Loss of connection to Check connection from
during exceedance. alarm. instrument to alarm.
Faulty alarm. Change alarm.
Faulty internal alarm Return module to factory.
circuit in module.
Non-uniform lighting. Faulty light bulb. Return module to factory.
Pointer does not return to Sticky pointer or faulty Return module to factory.
zero with power-off. return to zero mechanism.
C. Quad Digital Indicator (QDI) / Enhanced Digital Indicator (EDI) Module

The Quad Digital Indicator (QDI) / Enhanced Digital Indicator (EDI) is a precision microprocessor
based instrument which contains two Dichroic Liquid Crystal Displays (LCDs) with two lines (QDI),
or three lines (EDI), each for display, and an annunciator in the lower left corner of each LCD. The
LCDs are backlit for use in low ambient light conditions, and contain heaters for low temperature
operation. The QDI and EDI are capable of displaying four or six engine parameters at one time,
respectively. The QDI lower half is dedicated to engine manifold pressure and RPM while the upper
half will digitally display a selected analog indicator reading. The EDI top line is dedicated to engine
manifold pressure and RPM, the middle displays selected analog indicators, and the lower displays
OAT and % PWR.
Electrical interface is provided by a single 25 pin male “D” subminiature connector. The QDI/EDI
contains EMI and RFI protection.
An independent signal conditioning circuit is provided for Outside Air Temperature (OAT).
(1) Functions include:
(a) Automatically posts exceedance warnings.
(b) Stores analog indicator exceedance data for future maintenance review.
(c) Digitally enhances any selected analog indicator in the EMIS system stack.
(d) Performs and posts "Real Time" fuel management calculations.
(e) Automatically posts fuel imbalance using an external panel annunciator.
(2) Front Display and Pushbutton Controls (See Figure 3.)
The QDI/EDI contains two LCDs, one in each window, with two or three lines, respectively, for
numerical display. The display is capable of posting four or six parameters at one time. In
addition, there are four or six front-accessible buttons to select and/or control the following
display modes:
(a) Display Blanking (e) Maximum Fuel Load Entry
(b) Fuel Management (f) Exceedance Review
(c) Outside Air Temperature (g) Percent Power (EDI only - S/N’s 46360132
thru 4636374)
(d) Manual Fuel Load Entry
A summary of these pushbutton functions for the QDI only are listed in Figure 3 for easy
reference. These controls are explained within this section.
(3) Remote Switch Controls, External Alarm, External Interface Overview
7I5 77-40-00 FebPAGE 5

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Transicoil Electronic Module Instrument System (EMIS)

Figure 2
PAGE 6
Feb 28/07 77-40-00 7I6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 2
DUAL ANALOG MODULE INDICATOR SPECIFICATIONS
Indicator Markings
Manifold Pressure Indicator Range: 10 - 45 in. Hg.
Housed in the dual manifold pressure/RPM analog module. In addition, Green Arc: 10 - 42 in. Hg.
the manifold pressure is continuously displayed on the QDI/EDI Yellow Arc: None
display. Red Radial: 42 in. Hg
Tachometer Indicator Range: 500 - 2700 RPM
Housed in the dual manifold pressure/RPM analog module. In addition, Green Arc: 600 - 2500 rpm
the RPM is continuously displayed on the QDI/EDI display Yellow Arc: None
Red Radial: 2500 RPM
Turbine Inlet Temperature Indicator Range: 0 - 1850° F
Housed in the dual turbine inlet temperature/fuel flow analog module. Green Arc: 1200 - 1750° F
Turbine inlet temperature may also be displayed in digital form on the Yellow Arc: None
QDI/EDI display by pushing the function switch adjacent to the Red Radial: 1750° F
analog dial.
Fuel Flow Indicator Range: 8 to 45 GPH
Housed in the dual turbine inlet temperature/fuel flow analog module. Green Arc: None
Fuel flow may also be displayed in digital form on the QDI/EDI Yellow Arc: None
display (QDI) by pushing the function switch adjacent to the analog dial. Red Radial: None
Oil Temperature Indicator Range: 0 - 270° F
Housed in the dual oil pressure/oil temperature analog module. The Green Arc: 100 - 245° F
oil temperature may also be displayed in digital form on the QDI/EDI Yellow Arc: None
display by pushing the function switch adjacent to the analog dial. Red Radial: 245° F
Oil Pressure Indicator Range: 0 - 120 PSI
Housed in the dual oil pressure/oil temperature analog module. The Green Arc: 55 - 95 PSI
oil temperature may also be displayed in digital form on the QDI/EDI Yellow Arc: 25 - 55 and
display by pushing the function switch adjacent to the analog dial. 95 - 115 PSI
Red Radial: 25 and 115 PSI
Cylinder Head Temperature Indicator Range: 100 - 500° F
Housed in the dual cylinder head temperature/vacuum pressure analog Green Arc: 200 - 500° F
module. Cylinder head temperature may also be displayed in digital Yellow Arc: None
form on the QDI/EDI display by pushing the function switch adjacent Red Radial: 500° F
to the analog dial.
Vacuum Pressure Indicator Range: 3.0 - 6.0 in.Hg.
Housed in the dual cylinder head temperature/vacuum pressure analog Green Arc: 4.5 or 4.8 - 5.2 in. Hg.
module. Vacuum pressure may also be displayed in digital form on the Yellow Arc: None
QDI/EDI display by pushing the function switch adjacent to the Red Radials: 4.5 or 4.8 and
analog dial. 5.2 in. Hg.
Fuel Quantity Indicator Range: Empty to Full -
Housed in a dual analog module, left and right fuel tank quantities are 60 Gal. Usable
indicated independently. Fuel quantity may also be displayed in digital Green Arc: None
form on the QDI/EDI display by pushing the function switch adjacent Yellow Arc: None
to the analog dial. Red Radial: None
7I7 77-40-00 FebPAGE 7

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
The rear connector provides access to interface:

(a) A remote (normally open) switch to reset the exceedance memory.
(b) An outside air temperature sensor interface.
(c) An open collector output, capable of sinking 2.3 watts max. resistive load, is provided as
an output for a fuel imbalance indicator and/or alarm.
(4) Power Up Characteristics
When power is first applied to the EMIS system stack, the following events take place:
(a) First, an automatic system self test is initiated by the QDI/EDI.
1 All analog pointers will be driven clockwise to the 9 o'clock position for approximately
seven (7) seconds.
2 All analog indicator LEDs will illuminate.
3 All external alarms will be activated for about 2 seconds at the end of the self test
cycle.
4 All active segments of the displays will be energized.
(b) After the self-test is complete, the QDI/EDI steps into its normal digital enhancement
mode (see paragraph E.). If the entire EMIS stack is connected, the QDI/EDI will
automatically select and display the "MAP", "RPM", "TIT" and "FF" indicators. The EDI will
also display the “OAT” and, as long as the aircraft is on the ground, a nulled % PWR.
NOTE: Any exceedances that have previously been recorded must be called up
manually by the operator.
(c) Upon reaching the 9 o'clock self-test pointer position, any analog indicator(s) can be taken
out of self-test by depressing and then releasing the select switch associated with the
analog indicator(s) you wish to see. The selected indicator(s) will display current sensor
readings. The rest of the system stack will complete the self-test cycle.
(5) Normal Digital Enhancement Mode, Analog Indicator
In normal operation mode, the QDI/EDI posts a digital enhancement of the selected analog
indicators. When the QDI/EDI is in this mode, four or six parameters are posted
simultaneously. In the QDI, two of them are posted in the upper half of the LCDs. The lower
half of the display is dedicated to the MAP and RPM analog indicators. (See Figure 4.) In the
EDI, two of them are posted in the middle of the LCDs, the top line of the display is reserved
for the MAP and RPM analog indicators, and the bottom line displays OAT and % PWR.
To post the corresponding digital reading for an analog indicator, momentarily press the button
adjacent to that analog indicator. The selected analog indicator will have its GREEN LED
illuminated. The left analog readings will be posted in the upper or middle left LCD and the
right analog reading will be posted in the upper or middle right LCD.
NOTE: At power-up the TIT and FF are the default indicators automatically selected for the
digital enhancement mode.
PAGE 8
Feb 28/07 77-40-00 7I8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Quad Digital Indicator Overview Effectivity

Figure 3 4636021 thru 4636131
7I9 77-40-00 FebPAGE 9

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(6) Display Blanking

The LCD can be blanked at the operator's discretion. To select this operation, press the "BLK"
button. To exit this mode, select any analog indicator from the EMIS system stack or select any
other QDI/EDI function.
NOTE: Since the pushbutton designated for blanking the display has secondary functions
during exceedance review and fuel management mode, the display blanking function
is disabled during these modes of operation.
If an exceedance occurs, the blank mode will end and the exceedance will
automatically be posted.
(7) Fuel Management Mode
(a) QDI (S/N’s 4636021 thru 4636131 only). The QDI is linked to the fuel flow indicator in the
system stack through the data bus. Having this information available allows the QDI to
perform "Real Time" fuel management calculations. Fuel remaining, flight time remaining,
and fuel consumed can be selected on the display.
To enter the fuel management (posting) mode, momentarily press the "FUEL" button.
1 See Fuel Load Entry Mode, below, for the fuel load entry procedure.
2 If a fuel value had previously been entered into the fuel computer, the fuel remaining
will be displayed in gallons. (See Figure 5A).
3 To view the flight time remaining, momentarily press the "FUEL" button a second
time. (See Figure 7A).
NOTE: In the event no fuel flow is detected, the flight time remaining will be
displayed as "----". (See Figure 7B). When the calculated flight time
remaining has expired, "0.0" will be displayed. (See Figure 7C).
4 To view the fuel consumed, momentarily press the "FUEL" button a third time. The
fuel consumed will be displayed in gallons (See Figure 8A). As long as fuel flow is
detected, the fuel computer will continue to update the fuel used.
5 Continuing to press the "FUEL" button repeatedly will simply cycle through the three
fuel management displays.
6 To exit the fuel management mode, return to the normal digital enhancement mode
and select any analog indicator in the EMIS system stack or any other function of the
QDI.
NOTE: The memory allocated for the fuel management mode is non-volatile.
(b) EDI (S/N’s 4636132 thru 4636374). The EDI is linked to the fuel flow indicator in the
system stack through the data bus. Having this information available allows the EDI to
perform "Real Time" fuel management calculations. Fuel remaining, flight time remaining,
and fuel consumed can be selected on the display.
1 To enter the fuel management (posting) mode (see Figure 8B), momentarily press
the "FUEL" button. If a fuel value had previously been entered into the fuel computer,
the Fuel Remaining (REM) will be displayed in gallons, as well as: Endurance
(ENDUR), Nautical Miles Per Gallon (NMPG), Total Fuel Used (USE), Gallons To
Destination (GAL TO DEST) and Gallons At Destination (GAL AT DEST).
2 To exit the fuel management mode and return to the normal digital enhancement
mode push the “INST” button.
PAGE 10
Feb 28/07 77-40-00 7I10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Digital Enhancement Mode (i.e. - Normal Display)

Figure 4
7I11 77-40-00 Feb

PAGE 11
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(8) Fuel Load Entry Mode

(a) QDI (S/N’s 4636021 thru 4636131 only).
1 To select fuel load entry mode, press "S" and "UP ARROW" buttons simultaneously.
a The LCD will display "FUEL 000" or present fuel remaining with the most
significant digit found flashing along with a flashing "Pro"gramming prompt in
the lower left. (See Figure 5B).
b Pressing the "UP ARROW" button will increment the flashing digit. Pressing the
"S"elect button will advance to the next digit. The digits will increment up to nine
or the capacity of the aircraft fuel tanks (120 gallons). To enter this fuel load into
memory, depress and hold the "S"elect button for approximately 2 seconds. The
QDI will automatically enter the normal fuel management mode which will be
evident by the absence of the flashing "Pro"gramming prompt and flashing
selected digit.
NOTE: The Manual Fuel Load Entry can be re-entered at any time. In this
mode, the QDI will post the last fuel remaining (will not update).
Depressing and holding the "S"elect button for approximately 2
seconds will:
-- Update fuel load data, if new data is manually entered.
-- Will display updated fuel remaining if no change is made.
2 Max Fuel Load
While in the fuel entry mode, press and release the "E" button with "FILL" adjacent to it.
The LCD will display "FUEL 120" and return to the fuel management mode. (See
Figure 5C).
(b) EDI (S/N’s 4636132 thru 4636374).
1 Prior to engine start, a new fuel loading can be entered into the EDI by selecting the
fuel posting mode. Press the "S" button on the left side of the display. Once in the
fuel posting mode, enter the fuel loading mode by simultaneously pressing the "S"
and "Up Arrow" buttons (Figure 5D and 5E). The digital display will show "000" or
present fuel remaining with the left most digit flashing. Pressing the "UP ARROW"
button will increment the flashing digit up while the "DOWN ARROW" will increment
the flashing digit down. Pressing "T" button will toggle between flashing parameter
digits. This sequence is repeated until the new fuel loading is displayed in the EDI
window. To enter this fuel load into memory, depress the "S" button on the left side of
the display. At this point the CDI will return to the fuel posting mode automatically.
NOTE: During fuel loading entry sequence, the three digits must display 120 gallons
or less at all times to permit fuel load entry into the EDI.
2 Max Fuel Load
If the fuel tanks are filled to max capacity (120 gallons usable), the pre-set full fuel
valve can be entered by depressing the "E" button while in the fuel entry mode
(Figure 5E).
PAGE 12
Feb 28/07 77-40-00 7I12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Fuel Modes
Figure 5
7I13 77-40-00 Feb

PAGE 13
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(9) Outside Air Temperature “OAT”

(a) QDI (S/N’s 4636021 thru 4636131 only).
1 The “OAT” reading will be posted on the LCD when this function is manually
selected.
2 To post the “OAT” reading, press the “N” button with the “OAT” adjacent to it. The
“OAT” reading is displayed in degrees C. (See Figure 6.)
3 To exit from this mode, select any analog indicator from the EMIS system stack, or
any other function button of the QDI.
NOTE: Since the pushbutton designated for the "OAT" display has a secondary
function during exceedance review mode, the "OAT" display mode is
disabled during that mode of operation.
(b) EDI (S/N’s 4636132 thru 4636374).
1 “OAT” is the default display in the left LCD when in the INST mode. (See Figure 4.)
2 When in INST mode, the “OAT” display can be cycled from “° F” to “° C” by pressing
the SET button.
(10) Fuel Imbalance Alarm
If a fuel imbalance greater than 10 gallons is sensed between the left and right fuel tanks, the
alarm output (for an external annunciator) will be activated after 60 seconds. As soon as the
imbalance is corrected, the alarm will deactivate.
(11) Automatic Exceedance Warning Mode
(a) The exceedance warning mode has the highest priority. When an exceedance is detected,
the QDI/EDI will automatically select that indicator and display the readings on the LCD.
The peak exceedance value of the indicator will flash in the display.
NOTE: The QDI/EDI will automatically select and display exceedances in the order they
are detected. Low exceedance recording and the alarm outputs of the VAC and
OP analog indicators will be suppressed until the engine reaches a speed of
1400 RPM.
Effectivity OAT Display - QDI

4636021 thru 4636131 Figure 6
PAGE 14
Feb 28/07 77-40-00 7I14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Flight Time Remaining - QDI Effectivity

Figure 7 4636021 thru 4636131
7I15 77-40-00 Feb

PAGE 15
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Fuel Used
Figure 8
PAGE 16
Feb 28/07 77-40-00 7I16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1 When an analog indicator is in exceedance, its red or yellow LED will illuminate and
remain on until the unit is no longer in exceedance.
2 The external audible alarm will sound and the LCD display will flash until the operator
acknowledges each exceedance by pressing the switch adjacent to the exceeding
instrument.
(b) During the entirety of the exceedance (up to 10 minutes or 599.9 seconds), the QDI/EDI
will record the peak value of the exceedance, the average value of the exceedance, and
the time duration of the exceedance. This data is stored in non-volatile memory for future
recall.
(c) If more than one exceedance occurs at the same time, all will be recorded in the non-
volatile memory with only the last exceedance being displayed. The operator must
acknowledge each exceedance to mute the external audible alarm. Acknowledgment of
each exceedance can be random.
(12) Exceedance Review Mode
(a) The QDI/EDI contains non-volatile memory for future examination of recorded
exceedances. The memory size is sufficient to record a total of 238 exceedance events.
Each event contains the Peak, Average and Time duration of exceedance. The
exceedance history is presented in reverse chronological order for each indicator during
review, with the most recent exceedance event listed first.
CAUTION: WHEN THE MEMORY ALLOCATED FOR EXCEEDANCE RECORDING IS

FULL, NO NEW EXCEEDANCES WILL BE RECORDED. IT WILL BE
NECESSARY FOR THE OPERATOR TO HAVE A QUALIFIED MECHANIC
PERIODICALLY RESET THIS MEMORY. THIS MEMORY CAN BE RESET
BY USE OF THE REMOTE SECURITY RESET SWITCH. REFER TO
PARAGRAPHS C(1), ABOVE, AND M, BELOW.
(b) To enter the exceedance review mode, depress both right hand buttons (with the word
"EXCEED" between them) on the front of the QDI/EDI. The operator can exit this mode at
any time by selecting any analog indicator.
(c) Display Messages
1 The QDI/EDI will post four possible messages during the exceedance review
operation.
a "E Clr" (See Figure 9, View A)
This message indicates that no exceedances were found in the exceedance
memory.
b "END ind" (See Figure 9, View B)
This message indicates that all of the exceedance events for the indicator under
examination have been displayed.
c "END ALL" (See Figure 9, View C) This message indicates that all of the
exceedance events for all indicators have been displayed.
d "END ind" and "E FUL" (See Figure 9, View D)
These messages indicate that all of the exceedance events for the indicator under
examination have been displayed and exceedance memory is full.
7I17 77-40-00 Feb

PAGE 17
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(d) Pushbutton Functions

1 QDI (S/N’s 4636021 thru 4636131).
a The "E"xceedance Button
This button will cause the QDI to display all the exceedance events for the
indicator under examination. Each time this button is pressed, the displayed
data will change from the "Exceedance Peak" to the "Average and Duration of
Exceedance" for each event in memory until the "END ind" message is
displayed. Continuing to press the button will repeat the list.
b The "UP ARROW" Button
This button will display only the "Exceedance Peaks". The "END ind" message
is posted to signify that all peak events have been displayed. Continuing to
press this button will repeat the list.
c The "N"ext Button
This button allows the operator to manually select another indicator to be
reviewed. This option is convenient when only the last exceedance peaks for all
of the exceeding indicators in memory are required to be reviewed. The "END
ALL" message will be posted when all the indicators have been displayed.
Continuing to press this button will repeat the list.
2 EDI (S/N’s 4636132 thru 4636374).
a The push button functions used to review the limitation exceedance events in
the exceedance review mode "PEAK DISPLAY" (Figure 10) are:
Down Arrow - This button will cause the EDI display to post all the exceedance
events for the indicator under examination. Each time the down arrow button is
pressed, the posted data will change to the next peak exceedance for the same
indicator.
"N" (Next) - This button allows the operator to manually select another indicator
to be reviewed. The "END ALL" message will be posted when all the indicators
have been posted. Further depressions will repeat the list.
"E" (Exceedance) - This button allows the operator to enter the exceedance
review mode average display.
b The push button functions used to review the limitation exceedance events in
the exceedance review mode "Average Display" are: (See Figure 11.)
"E" (Exceedance) - This button will cause the EDI display to post all the average
exceedance events for the indicator under examination. Each time "E" is
pressed, the posted data will change to the next average exceedance for the
same indicator.
"N" (Next) - This button allows the operator to manually select another indicator
to be reviewed. The "END ALL" message will be posted when all the indicators
have been posted. Further depressions will repeat the list.
Up Arrow - This button allows the operator to enter the instrument mode display.
PAGE 18
Feb 28/07 77-40-00 7I18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Exceedance Review
Figure 9
7I19 77-40-00 Feb

PAGE 19
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(e) Upon entry into the exceedance review mode, two possible presentations will be
displayed based on the status of the QDI/EDI's exceedance memory.
1 No Exceedance Data Found In Memory
In the event no exceedance data is found, an "E Clr" prompt will be displayed. (See
Figure 9, View A). At this point, the operator can exit the exceedance review mode.
2 Exceedance Data Found In Memory
When exceedance data is found in memory, the QDI/EDI will display the peak
exceedance data for the first indicator found in memory.
(e) Peak Exceedance Display
1 The peak exceedance display format for an analog indicator is illustrated in Figure
10. An analog indicator with an exceedance displayed is identified by both the red or
yellow and green LEDs flashing. The operation of the analog indicator is not affected
during exceedance review.
2 The peak value of the exceedance will be displayed digitally above the analog
indicator under review.
3 The opposite display window will contain an "E" and two numbers. The top number
represents the exceedance event being reviewed for that indicator. The lower number
represents the number of exceedance events that are in memory for that indicator.
(f) Exceedance Average and Time Display
One side of the display will post the average exceedance value in memory, above the
prompt "-A-". The other side of the display will post the exceedance time in seconds above
the prompt "SEC". (See Figure 11.)
Effectivity Peek Exceedance Display

4636132 thru 4636374 Figure 10
PAGE 20
Feb 28/07 77-40-00 7I20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(13) Remote Exceedance Memory Reset Control

WARNING: ALL EXCEEDANCE HISTORY DATA WILL BE LOST DURING THIS RESET
OPERATION, AND CANNOT BE RETRIEVED.
The QDI/EDI is configured to accept a remote exceedance memory reset control (See Remote
Switch Controls, External Alarm, External Interface Overview; above). Upon receipt of the
control signal, the QDI/EDI will reset (clear) its NVRAM exceedance memory. This control can
be initiated at any time.
(14) Servicing
The Quad Digital Indicator/Enhanced Digital Indicator cannot be serviced in the field. Should
any of the preceding checks indicate a failure, return the unit to the factory for service.
Exceedance Average and Time Display

Figure 11
7I21 77-40-00 Feb

PAGE 21
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Exceedance Review - Analog Indicator

Figure 12
PAGE 22
Feb 28/07 77-40-00 7I22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Percent Power Mode Effectivity

Figure 13 4636132 thru 4636374
(15) Percent Power (EDI only - S/N’s 4636132 thru 4636374)

(a) Another feature of the EDI is the percent power mode (Figure 2B). To enter this mode
momentarily depress the percent power (% PWR) button (middle button on the right side
of the EDI). This will bring up the percent power page with the following parameters listed.
Manifold Pressure (MAP), RPM, Approximate Fuel Flow (~FF) and Percent Power (%
PWR). A desired percent power setting can be chosen by first depressing the set button
on the lower right side of the EDI. Depressing this button toggles between the percent
power and RPM parameters, causing the active parameter to flash. Once the percent
power parameter is active the power can be cycled up or down by depressing the
appropriate up and down arrow keys on the left side of the display. The % power range is
that which can be selected is from 45% to 80% in 5% increments.
(b) As % power is changed, a suggested approximate value for manifold pressure and fuel
flow will be displayed. If a different RPM is desired, the select button can be depressed to
toggle the active parameter to the RPM display, and the up/down arrow buttons can be
used to vary the RPM in 100 RPM increments. This variation in RPM changes expected
values of MAP and Fuel Flow accordingly. Once the desired % PWR and RPM
combination are chosen pressing of the instrument button (INST) will return to the
instrument display mode.
D. Calibration
Transicoil Electronic Module Instrument System (EMIS) components (i.e. - QDI/EDI and Dual
Analog Module Indicators) can be calibrated against the criteria in Chart 3, except for Fuel Quantity
and Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT).
Fuel Quantity calibration specifications and procedures are in Section 28-40-00.
CHT indicator calibration specifications and procedures are in Section 77-20-00.
7I23 77-40-00 Feb

PAGE 23
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 3
Electronic Module Instrument System (EMIS) CALIBRATION
INDICATOR SENSOR FULL SCALE OUTPUT CALIBRATION POINTS
TYPE (UNLESS NOTED) EACH INDICATOR SHALL MEET THE CRITERIA SPECIFIED BELOW
WITH ITS APPLICABLE SENDER UNIT
84.23 TO 121.32 OHMS TEST POINT °C - 40 -20 0 20 55

OAT (- 40 TO 55 °C) MAXIMUM OHMS 85.07 93.00 100.84 108.63 122.16
MINIMUM OHMS 83.47 91.32 99.16 106.95 120.48
1.786 TO 4.536 VDC TEST POINT IN HG(ABS) 10 20 30 42 45

1
MAP (10 TO 45 IN HG) MAXIMUM VDC 1.814 2.599 3.385 4.328 4.564
MINIMUM VDC 1.759 2.544 3.330 4.273 4.509
12.50 HZ TO 67.50 HZ TEST POINT RPM 500 1400 2000 2500 2700
2
RPM (500 TO 2700 RPM) MAXIMUM HZ 13.05 35.55 50.55 63.05 68.05
MINIMUM HZ 11.95 34.45 49.45 61.95 66.95
0 TO 1850 °F TEST POINT °F 200 1200 1600 1750 1800

TIT - 0.692 mV TO 41.657 mV MAXIMUM °F 218.5 1218.5 1618.5 1768.5 1818.5
MINIMUM °F 181.5 1181.5 1581.5 1731.5 1781.5
53.831 TO 302.8 HZ TEST POINT GPH 8 15 25 35 45

FUEL FLOW (8 TO 45 GPH) MAXIMUM HZ 56.321 103.423 170.712 238.001 305.290
MINIMUM HZ 51.341 98.443 165.732 233.021 300.310
60.09 TO 143.80 OHMS

CHT 3 (NON-LINEAR) SEE SECTION 77-20-00
417.87 mV TO 1.00 V
CHT 4 (NON-LINEAR) SEE SECTION 77-20-00
OIL 84.50 TO 143.45 OHMS TEST POINT °F 0 140 180 245 270
TEMPERATURE (NON-LINEAR) MAXIMUM OHMS 85.00 112.88 121.92 137.71 144.15
MINIMUM OHMS 84.01 111.70 120.66 136.35 142.75
1.0 TO 4.2 VDC TEST POINT PSI 0 25 70 115 120

OIL PRESSURE (0 TO 120 PSI) MAXIMUM VDC 1.032 1.699 2.899 4.099 4.232
MINIMUM VDC 0.968 1.635 2.835 4.035 4.168
TEST POINT IN HG 3.0 4.8 5.0 5.2 6.0

5, 6
VAC MAXIMUM VDC 3.020 4.220 4.353 4.487 5.020
3.0 TO 5.0 VDC MINIMUM VDC 2.980 4.180 4.313 4.447 4.980
(3.0 TO 6.0 IN HG)
TEST POINT IN HG 3.0 4.5 5.0 5.2 6.0
5, 7
VAC MAXIMUM VDC 3.020 4.020 4.353 4.487 5.020
MINIMUM VDC 2.980 3.980 4.313 4.447 4.980
FUEL
QUANTITY SEE SECTION 28-40-00
(PIR-PS50183 S.)
Calibrate with 28Vdc at room temperature.

1. When the MAP indicator receives a signal from 41.1 IN HG to 42.9 IN HG, the digital indicator will snap to 42 IN HG.
The analog MAP indicator will continue to display the actual IN HG. When calibrating MAP indicator, shorting pins 23
and 25 on the QDI/EDI will result in a digital increment of 0.1 IN HG, allowing a more accurate set point.
2. When the RPM indicator receives a signal from 2460 RPM to 2540 RPM, the digital indicator will snap to 2500 RPM.
The analog RPM indicator will continue to display the actual RPM.
3. P/N 599-588.
4. P/N’s 602-229 or 602-247.
5. When the vacuum indicator receives a signal below 3.0 IN HG, the digital indicator will snap to 0 IN HG.
6. P/N’s 599-588 or 602-229.
7. P/N 602-247.
PAGE 24
Feb 28/07 77-40-00 7I24
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2. Avidyne FlightMax Entegra EFIS

In S/N’s 4636375 and up, engine instrumentation is integrated into the Primary Flight Display (PFD) and
Multi-Function Display (MFD). The Data Acquisition Unit (DAU) collects and processes the raw sensor
input and provides a refined data stream to the PFD and MFD which actually display the data.
See 28-40-00 and 91-77-40 for more information.
PUBLICATIONS.)
Line maintenance of this system is limited to basic troubleshooting and that is addressed in vendor
publications referenced in 34-20-00.
7J1 77-40-00 Feb

PAGE 25
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 26
Feb 28/07 77-40-00 7J2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER
79
OIL
7J3
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
7J4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 79
CHAPTER CHAPTER


2 Feb 28/07
79-20-00 1 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07
79-30-00 1 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 79 - OIL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DISTRIBUTION 79-20-00 1 7J9

Oil System 1 7J9
INDICATING 79-30-00 1 7J11

Engine Oil Pressure Gauge 1 7J11
Description 1 7J11
Engine Oil Temperature Gauge 2 7J12
Description 2 7J12

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
DISTRIBUTION
Oil System
Oil is drawn from the sump through a suction tube to the intake side of the engine driven, gear type, oil
pump. Outlet oil is directed to a full flow replaceable element oil filter. A bypass valve is incorporated in
the filter. The oil pump has an oil pressure relief valve in the housing. A second gear driven pump located
below the starter, scavenges oil from the turbochargers.
Engine oil is cooled by ram air passing through the oil cooler on the rear of the engine. Oil is distributed
throughout the engine providing lubrication, cooling and oil supply to the propeller governor. Oil
temperature and pressure information is available from the combination gauge on the bottom right of the
pilot’s instrument panel. Engine crankcase gases are discharged to an air/ oil separator behind the oil
cooler and are then vented out the left exhaust stack.
TO PROPELLER
P
R
P
O
E
L
L
E
R
PROP
GOVERNOR
TO ENGINE
ACCESSORIES,
BEARINGS,
VALVE
TRAIN,
ETC.
FILLER
CAP AND DIPSTICK
SUMP PRESSURE
SCREEN RELIEF
SCAVENGE PUMP
VALVE
RESTRICTOR TEE
L TURBOCHARGER R TURBOCHARGER
OIL PUMP
TO WASTE GATE
CONTROLLER
OIL
COOLER
OIL COOLER ENGINE
GAUGE
BYPASS VAVLE
TEMP UNIT
BULB
FULL
FLOW
FILTER PRESSURE OIL
Engine Oil System Fluid Diagram

Figure 1
7J9 79-20-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 79-20-00 7J10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INDICATING
NOTE: In S/N’s 4636375 and up, oil temperature and pressure data is collected by the Data Acquisition
Unit (DAU) and is displayed on the Multi-Function Display (MFD) and Primary Flight Display
(PFD). See Electronic Flight Instrument System, 34-20-00, and 91-77-40 for more information.
1. Engine Oil Pressure Gauge
A. Description
NOTE: Serial numbers 4636021 thru 4636374 incorporate the Transicoil Electronic Module
Instrument System (EMIS). See 77-40-00 for more information.
The oil pressure gauge is mounted next to the landing gear lever on the instrument panel. This
gauge will indicate the amount of oil pressure available at the pressurized engine oil passage.
B. Troubleshooting
See Chart 1.
CHART 1
TROUBLESHOOTING ENGINE OIL PRESSURE GAUGE
Excessive error at zero. Pointer loose on shaft. Replace instrument.
Excessive scale error. Improper calibration Replace instrument.
adjustment.
Excessive pointer Air in line or rough Disconnect line and fill
oscillation engine relief. with light oil. Check for
leaks. If trouble persists,
clean and adjust relief
valve.
Sluggish operation of Engine relief valve open. Clean and check.
pointer or pressure fails
to build up.
7J11 79-30-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2. Engine Oil Temperature Gauge

A. Description
NOTE: S/N’s 4636021 thru 4636374 incorporate the Transicoil Electronic Module Instrument
System (EMIS). See 77-40-00 for more information.
The oil temperature indicator is mounted next to the landing gear lever on the instrument panel. This
instrument will provide a temperature indication of the engine oil in degrees Fahrenheit. The
instrument has a temperature bulb (heat sensitive probe) located between the magnetos.
B. Troubleshooting
See Chart 2.
CHART 2
TROUBLESHOOTING ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE GAUGE

Instrument fails to show Broken or damaged bulb. Check engine unit and
any reading. Wiring open. wiring to instrument.
Excessive scale error. Improper calibration Repair or replace.
adjustment.
Pointer fails to move as Broken or damaged bulb Check engine unit and
engine Is warmed up. or open wiring. wiring.
Dull or discolored marking. Age Replace instrument.
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 79-30-00 7J12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
7J13 79-30-00 FebPAGE 3

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 79-30-00 7J14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER
80
STARTING
7J15
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
7J16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 80
CHAPTER CHAPTER


2 Feb 28/07
80-10-00 1 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07
5 Feb 28/07
6 Feb 28/07
7 Feb 28/07
8 Feb 28/07
9 Feb 28/07
10 Feb 28/07
11 Feb 28/07
12 Feb 28/07

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 80 - STARTING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CRANKING 80-10-00 1 7J21

Cranking Limitations 1 7J21
Kelly Aerospace Starter 1 7J21
Description 1 7J21
Removal 1 7J21
Installation 2 7J22
Cranking Tests 5 7K1
Sky-Tec Starter 6 7K2
Description 6 7K2
Troubleshooting 6 7K2
Installation as a Service Replacement 8 7K4
Removal 9 7K5
Installation 9 7K5
Shear Pin Replacement 10 7K6
Starter Control Circuit 11 7K7
Starting with External Power 11 7K7

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CRANKING
1. Cranking Limitations
Starter manufacturers recommend limiting cranking to no more than ten (10) second periods. Allow two
(2) minutes for cool-down between cranking attempts. Lengthy cranking will shorten the starter’s life.
Repeat no more than five (5) times. If start not achieved in the fifth attempt, let starter cool for thirty (30)
minutes before reattempt.
2. Kelly Aerospace Starter (aka Electrosystems, Prestolite)
PUBLICATIONS.)
S/N’s 4636001 thru 4636402.
A. Description
When the starting circuit is energized, battery current is applied to the starting motor terminal.
Current flows through the field coils creating a strong magnetic field. At the same time, current also
flows through the brushes and commutator, and finally through the armature to ground. The result is
a high cranking torque, for a limited period of time, with a high current flow at a minimum loss of
voltage.
The drive end gear of the armature mates with the reduction gear which drives the Bendix shaft.
The Bendix drive is held in position on the shaft by a spiral pin. As the armature turns the reduction
gear, the Bendix drive pinon meshes with the starter drive gear by inertia and action of the spiral
grooves within the Bendix unit. A detent pin engages in a notch in the screw threads which prevents
demeshing if the engine fails to start. When the engine does start and reaches a predetermined
speed, centrifugal action forces the detent pin to release and allows the pinion to demesh from the
starter drive gear.
B. Troubleshooting
See Chart 1.
NOTE: In Chart 1, for any remedy which requires disassembly and cleaning or repair of the starter;
replacement with a new, or known good, unit is always an alternative solution.
NOTE: NEVER USE JUMPER CABLES to test voltage to the starter. The "toothed" jaws of jumper
cables are meant to "bite" into soft, leaded terminals on car batteries, and simply WILL
NOT provide enough contact with the starter terminal to supply the needed amperage to
engage the starter properly.
NOTE: Use an analog voltage meter if you can. Digital meters take intermittent 'snap shots' of
voltage. In situations where voltage is being supplied intermittently (even in rapid cycles),
the digital meter will simply not provide the correct 'picture' of the aircraft's voltage
situation.
C. Removal
CAUTION: TO PREVENT SHORT CIRCUITING, DISCONNECT THE GROUND CABLE FROM
THE BATTERY BEFORE REMOVING THE STARTER FROM THE ENGINE.
(1) Disconnect starter cable from starter terminal post.
(2) Remove one (1) each mounting bolt, internal tooth “star” lock washer, and flat washer; and
three (3) each mounting nuts, internal tooth “star” lock washers, and flat washers.
(3) Lift off starter motor.
7J21 80-10-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
D. Installation
NOTE: In S/N’s 4636001 thru 4636402, if installing a Sky-Tec 31B23592 Starter, order Piper
Service Kit No. 88405-002.
NOTE: In S/N’s 4636001 thru 4636326, if installing a Lycoming 31B22474 Starter, order Piper Kit
No. 767-337.
(1) Clean all traces of rust, corrosion, or dirt from all mounting surfaces and mounting hardware.
All ground points or straps must be clean and tight.
(2) Place starting motor in position with no stresses or binding forces being present and install
three (3) each flat washers, internal tooth “star” lock washers, and mounting nuts; and one (1)
each flat washer, internal tooth “star” lock washer, and mounting bolt. Torque bolt and nuts to
204 in.-lbs. or as specified in Lycoming SSP-1776.
(3) Reinstall starter cable to starter terminal post. Torque to 24 in.-lbs. or as specified in Lycoming
SSP-1776.
(4) Reconnect ground cable to negative post of battery.
(5) Perform cranking tests, below.
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 80-10-00 7J22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TROUBLESHOOTING - KELLY AEROSPACE STARTER
Starter fails to operate. Low battery charge. Check and recharge if
necessary.
Defective or improper Refer to wiring diagram
wiring or loose connections. and check all wiring.
Defective starter solenoid Replace faulty unit.
or control switch.
Binding, worn, or Brushes should be a free fit
improperly seated brush, in the brush boxes without
or brushes with excessive excessive side play. Binding
side play. brushes and brush boxes
should be wiped clean with
a gasoline (undoped)
moistened cloth. A new
brush should be run in until
at least 50% seated;
however, if facilities are not
available for running in
brushes, then the brush
should be properly seated
by inserting a strip of No.
0000 sandpaper between
the brush and commutator
with the sanded side next
to the brush.
CAUTION: DO NOT USE COARSE SANDPAPER OR EMERY CLOTH.

Pull sandpaper in the
direction of rotation, being
careful to keep it in the
same contour as the
commutator.
After seating, clean
thoroughly to remove all
sand and metal particles to
prevent excessive wear.
Keep motor bearing free
from sand or metal
particles.
Dirty commutator. If commutator is rough or
dirty, smooth and polish
with No. 000 sandpaper. If
too rough and pitted,
remove and turn down.
Blow out all particles.
7J23 80-10-00 FebPAGE 3

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TROUBLESHOOTING - KELLY AEROSPACE STARTER
Starter fails to operate. Shorted, grounded, or Remove and replace with
(continued) open armature. an armature known to be in
good condition.
Grounded or open field Test and then replace with
circuit. new part.
Starter operates at proper Faulty Bendix drive. Remove Bendix drive
speed but fails to crank. assembly. Clean and
check engine. Reinstall.
Low starter and cranking Worn, rough, or improperly Disassemble, clean,
speed. lubricated motor or starter. inspect and relubricate,
replacing ball bearings,
if worn.
See electrical causes See remedies listed for
listed under “Stater fails “Stater fails to operate,”
to operate,” above. above.
Excessive arcing of starter Binding, worn, or improperly See information above
brushes. seated brush or brushes, dealing with this trouble.
with excessive side play.
Dirty, rough, pitted or Clean as outlined above.
scored commutator.
Grounded or open field Test and replace defective
circuit. parts.
Excessive wear and arcing Rough or scored commutator. Remove and turn
of starter brushes. commutator down on a
lathe.
Armature assembly not Reface commutator.
concentric.
PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 80-10-00 7J24
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
E. Cranking Tests
NOTE: NEVER USE JUMPER CABLES to test voltage to the starter. The "toothed" jaws of jumper
cables are meant to "bite" into soft, leaded terminals on car batteries, and simply WILL
NOT provide enough contact with the starter terminal to supply the needed amperage to
engage the starter properly.
NOTE: Use an analog voltage meter if you can. Digital meters take intermittent 'snap shots' of
voltage. In situations where voltage is being supplied intermittently (even in rapid cycles),
the digital meter will simply not provide the correct 'picture' of the aircraft's voltage
situation.
The starting circuit should be inspected at regular intervals. The frequency should be determined by
the type of starting conditions and the amount of starter usage. In any case, it is recommended that
the following tests be conducted each six months or every 100 hours time-in-service.
(1) Check the battery with a hydrometer to make sure it is fully charged and filled to the proper
level. A load test should be made on the battery to verify proper condition before proceeding.
(2) Check all starter circuit wiring, making sure all connections, including battery terminals, are
clean and tight and that all insulation is sound and complete.
(3) A voltage loss test should be made to locate any high-resistance connections that would impair
starting motor electrical efficiency. Using a low-reading voltmeter scale while cranking engine
(or at approximately 100 amperes current flow) measure for the following limits:
(a) Voltage loss from the insulated (positive) battery post to the starter motor terminal = 0.3
volt maximum.
(b) Voltage loss from the battery negative (ground) terminal to the starter motor frame = 0.1
volt maximum.
NOTE: If voltage loss exceeds the above limits, measure the voltage drops across all
connections to discover the faulty connection. When within the maximum limits
proceed to next step.
(4) The starter motor should be operated for several seconds with the ignition OFF. The starter
motor engagement should be prompt and the motor should turn freely at a uniform speed
without binding or producing unusual sounds.
(5) Re-engage the starter two or three times, listening for prompt engagement, without the
clashing of gears, and to determine that the pinion disengages properly when the starter
switch is released.
7K1 80-10-00 FebPAGE 5

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. Sky-Tec Starter (See Figure 1.)

Factory installed 2007 and up; and authorized as service replacments in S/N’s 4636001 and up.
NOTE: In S/N’s 4636001 thru 4636402, if installing a Sky-Tec 31B23592 Starter, order Piper Service Kit
No. 88405-002.
A. Description
The Sky-Tec 149-NL high-performance starters have significant differences from the earlier starters
made by Kelly Aerospace, Electrosystems, and Prestolite. The Sky-Tec starters use a more
modern, more reliable, bendix-free, design. No periodic maintenance is required. The
recommended TBO is 2700 hours. Engine cranking speed may be up to twice as fast as with
previous starters. The light weight of these starters does, however, provide less mass to extract heat
from starter components. Accordingly, strict adherance to cranking limitations, below, is essential to
prevent overheating.
B. Troubleshooting
See Chart 3.
Sky-Tec High-Torque Inline Starter

Figure 1
PAGE 6
Feb 28/07 80-10-00 7K2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 2
TROUBLESHOOTING - SKY-TEC STARTER
Pretest Considerations: If possible, visually inspect the starter and/or interview pilot/operators for starting history. Indications of long
cranking periods, burning odor or smoke from the starter, kickback(s), a cracked starter mount, a fast spinning starter w/no prop
movement (replace shear pin), oil in starter, grinding noise or a damaged ring gear are generally indications that the starter is in need
of repair and the following tests will not be helpful. Remove the starter for repair or overhaul (the shear pin is FIELD REPLACEABLE -
do not return to Sky-Tec for shear pin repair).
Testing Relevance: The following testing procedure is most relevant to starters that are low performing including slow cranking and/or
failure to crank the engine over a compression stroke. If a starter is damaged by overcranking or a stuck firewall solenoid, voltage in step
one may read below acceptable levels thus incorrectly indicating a potential battery problem. Therefore, in such cases some consideration
must be to the pretest conditions noted above (if it smells burned...). If the only effect of energizing the starter results only in an audible
“click” with no prop movement, confirm step 2 to isolate problem to starter or starter contactor.
TEST RECORD RESULT ANALYSIS

Record voltage at the Below 20.0 volts? Questionable battery. See Testing Relevance above
battery while cranking as a shorted (cooked) starter will pull voltage down
the starter in its failure Above 20.0 volts? appreciably. However, if starter rotates at all, this is
mode. - Proceed to Step 2 generally not a shorted starter condition.
Record voltage at the No voltage recorded Starter OK. Test Starter Solenoid or switch (Step 3)
starter while cranking
the starter in its failure Above 18.0 volts? Suspect Starter.
mode. Below 18.0 volts and:
- Difference between Suspect Cables, terminals and/or solenoids - proceed
Step 1 and Step 2 to Steps 3 & 4
exceeds 4.0 volts
- Difference between Borderline Condition - Call Sky-Tec with test
Step 1 and Step 2 results to discuss. If happens more when cold, suspect
less than 4.0 volts battery. When hot, suspect cables/terms/sols.
OPTIONAL:
Record voltages between each and Assuming the voltage difference noted in Step 2 exceeded 4.0 volts, flush out any
every cable terminal and across appreciable loss in voltage in any cable or solenoid by placing the meter along each link in
solenoids while cranking the starter the diagram. A tight electrical system will lose no more than 0.5 volts between the battery
in its failure mode. and starter. Be sure to conduct these tests while cranking the starter in its failure mode.
Record voltages between battery & If no appreciable loss of voltage is noted in Step 3, flush out the integrity of all electrical
ground and starter & ground while system grounds. Pay close attention to battery and engine grounds. Clean up or repair
cranking the starter in its failure mode. any questionable ground connections and re-test.
7K3 80-10-00 FebPAGE 7

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C. Installation as a Service Replacement

NOTE: In S/N’s 4636001 thru 4636402, if installing a Sky-Tec 31B23592 Starter, order Piper
Service Kit No. 88405-002.
Engines with high-time magnetos and weak electrical systems should be thoroughly inspected prior
to installing any lightweight, high-torque starter. Failure to do so may make your aircraft susceptible
to poor starter performance or damage from kickbacks.
(1) Ensure the jumper between the small “S” terminal and the larger power terminal is removed as
shown in Figure 2. Cover each terminal with a MS2571-1S or MS2571-2S (or equivilent)
terminal nipple, as appropriate.
(2) Inspect the Magneto system thoroughly.
Make sure that the magnetos are in compliance with all service bulletins. Make sure that the
magneto impulse coupling is within service specifications. Kickbacks will shear a drive pin.
Check the impulse couplers prior to attempting even a single start.
(3) Inspect the voltage supply system.
If the Sky-Tec starter fails to turn the engine significantly faster than the OEM starter,
immediately inspect the aircraft’s voltage supply system. Lightweight starters can require as
much as 45% more output from the battery – or as many as 300 Amps during initial cranking.
(4) Troubleshoot the entire voltage system
All Sky-Tec starters are tested to verify power output before leaving the factory. If a new starter
does not spin quickly or seems weak, see Chart 3. Do not return a “weak” starter without first
completing the troubleshooting procedure in Chart 3.
Jumper Removal for 24 Volt Applications

Figure 2
PAGE 8
Feb 28/07 80-10-00 7K4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
D. Removal
CAUTION: TO PREVENT SHORT CIRCUITING, DISCONNECT THE GROUND CABLE FROM
THE BATTERY BEFORE REMOVING THE STARTER FROM THE ENGINE.
(1) Disconnect starter cable from power terminal post.
(2) Remove one (1) each mounting bolt, internal tooth “star” lock washer, and flat washer; and
three (3) each mounting nuts, internal tooth “star” lock washers, and flat washers.
(3) Lift off starter motor.
E. Installation
(1) Clean all traces of rust, corrosion, or dirt from all mounting surfaces and mounting hardware.
All ground points or straps must be clean and tight.
(2) Place starting motor in position with no stresses or binding forces being present and install
three (3) each flat washers, internal tooth “star” lock washers, and mounting nuts; and one (1)
each flat washer, internal tooth “star” lock washer, and mounting bolt. Torque bolt and nuts to
100 in.-lbs.
CAUTION: TAKE CARE NOT TO OVER-TORQUE THE POWER TERMINAL POST NUT.
THE POWER TERMINAL POST IS COPPER AND CAN EASILY BE STRIPPED.
(3) Reinstall starter cable to power terminal post using an internal tooth “star” lock washer or split
lock washer, as desired. Torque the power terminal post nut as specified in Figure 2 and
reinstall terminal nipple.
(4) Reconnect ground cable to negative post of battery.
7K5 80-10-00 FebPAGE 9

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
F. Shear Pin Replacement (See Figure 3.)

The shear pin is designed as the weak link to minimize starter and ring gear damage in the event of
a premature ignition misfire event (i.e. - kickback). If the starter pinion engages the flywheel and the
starter motor spins (or sounds like it’s spinning) and the starter's pinion gear does not rotate (and
neither does the flywheel, engine, and propeller) then the shear pin has done its job and must be
replaced.
(1) Remove starter from airplane per Removal, above.
(2) Lift the insulating boot on the motor lead and remove the M8 locking nut with a 12mm wrench
and remove the motor lead wire from the stud.
(3) Remove the two M5 x 25MM hex screws and locking tab washers holding the motor adapter to
the main mount.
(4) Separate the two assemblies being careful not to dislodge the solenoid plunger residing in the
main mount.
(5) Replace the shear pin in the lay-shaft.
(6) Reassemble the motor adapter and main mount, installing the two M5 screws and torquing
them as specified in Figure 3.
(7) Reconnect the motor lead, secure with the M8 locking nut, and cover with the insulating boot.
(8) Install starter in airplane per Installation, above.
1 7
2
3 4
5
1. MOTOR ADAPTER
2. MAIN MOUNT
3. INSULATING BOOT
4. NUT (M8 LOCKING)
5. HEX SCREWS (M5 X 25MM ) AND LOCKING TAB WASHERS
(TORQUE TO 50 IN.-LBS.)
6. SOLENOID PLUNGER
7. LAY-SHAFT (SHEAR PIN GOES HERE)
Shear Pin Replacement

Figure 3
PAGE 10
Feb 28/07 80-10-00 7K6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4. Starter Control Circuit

A. Inspect the control circuit wiring between the battery, solenoid and manual starting switches for
breaks, poor connections and faulty insulation. Tighten all connections and make sure solenoid is
firmly mounted and makes a good ground connection.
B. Check the voltage loss across the switch contacts during normal starting. If loss is in excess of 0.2
volts per 100 amperes, the solenoid should be replaced.
C. If solenoid fails to operate when the manual starting switch is turned on or if it fails to release when
the manual starting switch is released, it should be removed and tested to specifications, if
available. If either opening or closing voltages are not to specifications, or tests cannot be
performed, replace the solenoid.
5. Starting with External Power
See 24-40-00.
7K7 80-10-00 Feb

PAGE 11
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 12
Feb 28/07 80-10-00 7K8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER
81
TURBINES
7K9
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
7K10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 81
CHAPTER CHAPTER


2 Feb 28/07
81-20-00 1 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07
5 Feb 28/07
6 Feb 28/07
7 Feb 28/07
8 Feb 28/07
9 Feb 28/07
10 Feb 28/07

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 81 - TURBINES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SUBJECT CHAPTER PAGE GRID NO.
TURBO-SUPERCHARGER 81-20-00 1 7K15

Turbocharger System 1 7K15
Description 1 7K15
Troubleshooting 1 7K15
Turbocharger Pre-Lubrication 1 7K15
Inspections 6 7K20
Turbocharger and Exhaust System - Visual Inspection 6 7K20
Intercooler Attachment Clips Inspection/Replacement 7 7K21
V-Band Coupling 100 Hour Inspection 8 7K22

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TURBO-SUPERCHARGER
1. Turbocharger System
A. Description
This chapter contains information on the removal, installation and adjustment of the various
components of the turbocharging and exhaust system.
The Lycoming TIO-540-AE2A engine is equipped with dual AiResearch (Garret) turbochargers, one
on each side of the engine. Each turbocharger extracts exhaust energy from its respective bank of
cylinders to pressurize the induction air.
Air is taken from the induction inlet louvers into the induction air box. Here it is filtered and divided
for distribution to the left and right turbocharger compressors. The compressed air then flows
through an aftercooler where its air temperature is reduced. Downstream from the aftercoolers, the
air flows join at the Y junction of the intake tubes, then passes through the throttle butterfly valve
and is divided to individual intake pipes to each cylinder.
Metered fuel is injected into the cylinder head upstream of the intake valve. After combustion in the
cylinder, exhaust gases flow into the exhaust manifold, to the turbocharger turbines where exhaust
energy is extracted to drive the turbines which, in turn, drives or turns the compressor.
B. Troubleshooting
See Chart 1.
2. Turbocharger Pre - Lubrication
Following engine oil and filter changes, and following any prolonged period of non-operation, pre -
lubricate the turbochargers as follows:
A. Temporarily disconnect the engine oil supply lines from the turbocharger oil inlet ports and the
engine air duct from the compressor housing inlets.
B. Fill the turbocharger oil inlet ports with clean engine oil and manually turn the compressor wheels
several revolutions to coat all journal and bearing surfaces with oil. Reconnect the air ducts.
C. Place suitable containers under the disconnected engine oil supply lines to avoid spilling oil on the
engine.
D. Crank the engine, without allowing it to start.
E. When a steady flow of oil is obtained from the supply lines to show that air has been purged from
the system, stop cranking. Reconnect the oil supply lines.
7K15 81-20-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TROUBLESHOOTING TURBOCHARGER SYSTEM
Excessive noise or vibration. Improper bearing lubrication. Supply required oil
pressure.
Clean or replace oil line;
clean oil strainer. If
trouble persists, overhaul
turbocharger.
Leak in engine intake or Tighten loose connections
exhaust manifold. or replace manifold gaskets
as necessary.
Dirty impeller blades. Disassemble and clean.
Engine will not deliver Clogged manifold system. Clean all ducting.
rated power.
Foreign material lodged in Disassemble and clean.
compressor impeller or
turbine.
Excessive dirt build-up Thoroughly clean
in compressor. compressor assembly.
Service air cleaner and
check for leakage.
Leak in engine intake or Tighten loose connections
exhaust. or replace manifold
gaskets as necessary.
Rotating assembly bearing Overhaul turbocharger.
seizure.
Restriction in return lines Remove and clean lines.
from actuator to exhaust
bypass controller.
Exhaust bypass controller Have exhaust bypass
is in need of adjustment. controller adjusted.
Oil pressure too low. Tighten fittings. Replace
lines, or hoses, increase oil
pressure to desired
pressure.
Inlet orifice to actuator Remove inlet line at
clogged. actuator and clean orifice.
Exhaust bypass controller Replace unit.
malfunction.
Exhaust bypass butterfly Low pressure. Clogged
not closing. orifice in inlet to actuator.
Butterfly shaft binding.
Check bearings.
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 81-20-00 7K16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Engine will not deliver Turbocharger impeller Check bearings. Replace
rated power. (continued) binding, frozen or turbocharger.
fouling housing.
Piston seal in actuator Remove and replace
leaking. Usually actuator or disassemble
accompanied by oil and replace packing.
leakage at drain line.
Critical altitude Controller not getting Check pump outlet
lower than specified. enough oil pressure to pressure, oil filters, external
close the exhaust bypass. lines for leaks or
obstructions.
Chips under metering valve Replace controller.
in controller holding it open.
Metering jet in Remove actuator and
actuator plugged. clean jet.
Actuator piston seal If there is oil leakage at
failed and leaking actuator drain, clean
excessively. cylinder and replace piston
seal.
Exhaust bypass valve sticking. Clean and free action.
Engine surges or smokes. Air in oil lines or actuator. Bleed system.
Controller metering valve stem Replace controller.
seal leaking oil into manifold.
Clogged breather. Check breather for
restrictions to air flow.
NOTE: Smoke would be normal if engine has idled for a prolonged period.
High deck pressure. Controller metering valve Replace controller
(Compressor Discharge not opening, aneroid assembly or replace
Pressure) bellows leaking. aneroid bellows.
Exhaust bypass sticking Shut off valve in return
closed. line not working.
Butterfly shaft binding.
Check bearings.
Replace exhaust bypass
valve or correct linkage
binding.
Controller return line Clean or replace line.
restricted.
7K17 81-20-00 FebPAGE 3

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
High deck pressure. Oil pressure too high. Check pressure 75 to 85
(Compressor Discharge psi (80 psi desired) at
Pressure) exhaust bypass actuator
inlet. If pressure on outlet
side of actuator is too high,
have exhaust bypass
controller adjusted.
Exhaust bypass valve actuator Remove and disassemble
piston locked in full closed actuator, check condition
position. (Usually accompanied of piston and packing or
by oil leakage at actuator replace actuator assembly.
drain line.)
NOTE: Exhaust bypass normally closed in idle and low power conditions. Should open when
actuator inlet line is disconnected.
Exhaust bypass controller Replace controller.
malfunction.
F. If the turbochargers are installed on a new or overhauled engine, with the initial run-in period not
completed, proceed as follows:
CAUTION: BECAUSE CLEANING OF THE EXTRA SCREENS IS NOT PROVIDED FOR IN
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES FOR THE ENGINE, THE SCREENS
MUST NOT BE LEFT IN PLACE AFTER THE INITIAL RUN-IN PERIOD. OPERATION
OF THE TURBOCHARGERS WITH CLOGGED SCREENS WILL CAUSE
TURBOCHARGER FAILURE DUE TO LACK OF LUBRICATION.
CAUTION: MAKE ENTRY IN AIRPLANE LOGBOOK TO ENSURE THAT SCREENS ARE
REMOVED AFTER THE INITIAL ENGINE RUN-IN PERIOD HAS BEEN
COMPLETED.
CAUTION: TAG LINES WITH A SUITABLE TAG TO REMIND MECHANIC THAT THE
TEMPORARY SCREENS HAVE BEEN INSTALLED IN THE LINES.
(1) TEMPORARILY install a screen of 100 mesh or finer in the oil supply line to each turbocharger
to trap metal particles from the engine during the initial run-in.
WARNING: OPERATION OF THE TURBOCHARGER WITHOUT ALL NORMALLY
INSTALLED INLET DUCTS AND FILTERS CONNECTED WILL RESULT IN
INJURY TO PERSONNEL AND DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT FROM FOREIGN
OBJECTS ENTERING THE TURBOCHARGER.
CAUTION: OPERATION OF THE ENGINE AT ANY SPEED FASTER THAN IDLE
IMMEDIATELY AFTER START-UP CAN RESULT IN OIL LAG FAILURE OF
TURBOCHARGER BEARINGS, ESPECIALLY IN COLD WEATHER OR AFTER A
PROLONGED NON-OPERATIVE PERIOD.
(2) Remove the extra screens from the oil supply lines after the initial run - in period.
G. Verify that all air and exhaust inlet ducts and filters are properly installed.
PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 81-20-00 7K18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Turbocharger System Diagram

Figure 1
7K19 81-20-00 FebPAGE 5

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
H. Start engine and operate for 3 - 4 minutes at idle to allow engine oil pressure and flow to stabilize.
I. Check all oil connections for leakage, and tighten or repair as needed.
3. Inspections
A. Turbocharger and Exhaust System - Visual Inspection
(1) With the engine shut down, inspect all components of the air induction system for loose
connections, cuts, cracks, punctures, corrosion or other evidence of deterioration. If evidence is
found of any condition that could permit air leakage between the air cleaner and the
turbocharger compressor, proceed as follows:
(1) Disconnect the air duct from the compressor air inlet and inspect the edges of the
compressor wheel blades for damage. Also examine the wheel for excessive dirt buildup
and oiliness which would indicate seal leakage, and check for evidence of wheel rub on
the compressor housing.
(2) Replace damaged air ducting components.
(3) Reconnect the air ducting to the compressor air inlet and tighten attaching parts securely.
(2) Check the air duct connections between the compressor and the engine intake manifold and
between the intake manifold and engine. Tighten any loose connections.
(3) Verify the engine air cleaner has been properly serviced (see Induction Air Filter, 12-10-00).
(4) Inspect the exhaust system for leakage, especially at the exhaust manifold connection to the
turbocharger turbine inlet and at the engine exhaust manifold gasket.
(5) Disconnect the exhaust ducting from the turbine outlet and examine the turbine wheel blades
for damage. Look for oil in the turbine wheel housing (indicative of seal leakage), and check for
evidence of wheel rub on the housing.
(6) Check for oil leakage at the connections to the turbocharger oil inlet and drain ports. Tighten
connections or replace gaskets, fittings, etc. as required.
(7) On left-hand tail pipe, disconnect the engine crankcase breather tube and remove the lower
tube assembly from the tail pipe at the slip joint. Remove any contaminate buildup
accumulated. Accumulation may be very hard and may require scraping or sanding to remove.
Ensure balance of breather is free of any restrictions to air flow.
Effectivity Flange Support Shim Installation

PAGE 6
Feb 28/07 81-20-00 7K20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B. Intercooler Attachment Clips Inspection/Replacement (S/N’s 4636001 thru 4636194 only.)

The factory installed clips which hold the intercoolers to the engine baffles in these aircraft may
occasionally fracture. An improved intercooler clip (P/N 89082-005) is available and should be
installed as required to provide longer service life. Additionally, flange support shims (P/N 89082-
010) should be installed on both intercoolers and two more intercooler clips should be added to the
left intercooler (See latest revision Piper Service Letter No. 1018).
To coincide with any event inspection or at owner/operator discretion:
(1) Remove the engine cowling.
(2) Remove and inspect the left and right intercooler clips for evidence of cracks or damage.
(3) Replace any damaged intercooler clips, as required, with the improved P/N 89082-005 clips.
(4) Install four flange support shims (P/N 89082-010), one under each intercooler flange as shown
in Figure 2. Ensure that the radius side of the shim faces the intercooler flange.
(5) Install intercooler clips and tighten screws to standard torque.
NOTE: When installing the clips, tightening the screws will tend to twist the clip leaving gaps.
Ensure that the flat side of the intercooler hold down clip lays flat against the
intercooler wall with no gap visible on either side of the clip.
(6) On the left (pilot’s side) intercooler, install two new clips (P/N 89082-005) in between the
existing clips as shown in Figure 3. Locate the existing holes in the engine baffle (see Figure 4)
and drill a .191 inch hole through the intercooler flange at those locations.
(7) Re-install the engine cowling and make an appropriate logbook entry.
Adding Intercooler Clips to Left Engine Baffle Effectivity

Figure 3 4636001 thru 4636194 only
7K21 81-20-00 FebPAGE 7

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Effectivity Left Engine Baffle Hole Locations

C. V-Band Coupling 100 Hour Inspection (See Figure 5.)

Each 100 hours, inspect lockwiring on V-band couplings for condition and security. If lockwiring is
found broken, inspect T-bolt for stretching, cracking, or any other damage. Replace coupling as
required.
Lockwiring V-Band Couplings

Figure 5
PAGE 8
Feb 28/07 81-20-00 7K22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
7K23 81-20-00 FebPAGE 9

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

INTENTIONALLY BLANK
PAGE 10
Feb 28/07 81-20-00 7K24
CARD 8 OF 9
PA-46-350P
(S/N’s 4636001 AND UP)

8A1
Published by

2926 Piper Drive
U.S.A.
Member
General Aviation
8A2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
are as follows:
ORG950712 June 19, 1996 All

PR980101 January 1, 1998 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6
CR981223 December 23, 1998 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6
PR000201 February 1, 2000 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6
PR010515 May 15, 2001 1
CR050730 July 30, 2005 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8
PR060207 February 7, 2006 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8
CR070228* February 28, 2007 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 and 9

02/28/07.
manual.

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 1
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTRODUCTION
CHAPTER CHAPTER


2 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07
5 Feb 28/07
6 Feb 28/07
7 Feb 28/07
8 Feb 28/07
9 Feb 28/07
10 Feb 28/07
11 Feb 28/07
12 Feb 28/07
13 Feb 28/07
14 Feb 28/07
15 Feb 28/07
16 Feb 28/07
Index 1 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07
5 Feb 28/07
6 Feb 28/07
7 Feb 28/07
8 Feb 28/07
9 Feb 28/07
10 Feb 28/07

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTRODUCTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION
General 1 8A9
Effectivity 2 8A10
Pagination 3 8A11
Indexing 3 8A11
INDEX
Index 1 8B1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTRODUCTION

(5-20-00).
2. General
airplane.
correspondence.

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. Effectivity
1995 4636001 thru 4636020 2004 4636349 thru 4636363

1996 4636021 thru 4636076 2005 4636364 thru 4636374
1997 4636077 thru 4636131 2006 4636375 thru 4636399
1998 4636132 thru 4636186 2007 4636400 and up
1999 4636187 thru 4636247
2000 4636248 thru 4636313
2002 4636299, and
4636314 thru 4636338
2003 4636339 thru 4636348

Example:
46 36 001

MODEL CODE

fuel system.
PIPER.
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6. Pagination
with Page 1 (i.e. - 28-40-00, Page 1).
different page.
Example.
9. Indexing
apply.

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Wylie, Texas 75098
P.O. Box 1404
(3) ALTERNATOR:
Airport Complex
P. O. Box 273
(4) AUTOFLIGHT:
Olathe, Kansas 66061-1950 PH: (940) 325-9406
PAGE 4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(5) BATTERY:
(6) BRAKES:
1160 Center Road
Avon, Ohio 44011
(330) 374-3743
FAX: (330) 374-2290
Black Standard
Pneumatic De-Icer
Installation,
Maintenance and
10 Ammon Drive FAX: - (603) 669-0931
or,
55 Old Bedford Road
Lincoln, MA 01773

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

14405 Keil Road NE
(10) ENGINE:
43 Magnolia Ave. #4
20 New King Street
711 Taylor Street
Elyria, Ohio 44036
2600 S. Custer
Wichita, Kansas
(See Brakes, above)
or,
4520 Hampton Rd. FAX: (336) 766-9040
Clemmons, NC 27012
PAGE 6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

2600 Skypark Drive
(18) MAGNETOS:
7575 Baymeadows Way
Olathe, KS 66062
(20) OXYGEN SYSTEM:
2225 Erie Street
Torrance, CA 90504

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Piqua, OH 45356-2634
Propeller
Composite Blade
Propeller Owner’s
Aluminum Blade
Inspection, Repair,
P/N 006-05332-0001
2275 Stanley Ave. FAX: (937) 229-8531
Dayton, Ohio 45404
(26) STARTER:
or,
Granbury, TX 76048
(27) TURBOCHARGER:
Torrance, CA 90505
PAGE 8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(28) VACUUM PUMP:


Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
00 General
10 Time Limits
00 General
10 Jacking

20 Leveling
00 General
10 Towing
20 Taxiing
10 Parking
20 Mooring

12 SERVICING 1I3
00 General
10 Replenishing

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
00 General
20 Painting
00 General
20 Distribution
40 Heating
50 Cooling
22 AUTOFLIGHT 2F11
10 Autopilot
00 General
00 General
30 DC Generation
40 External Power
60 Emergency
20 Extinguishing
00 General
10 Aileron and Tab
20 Rudder and Tab
30 Elevator and Tab
50 Flaps
60 Speedbrakes
PAGE 12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
28 FUEL 3F9
00 General
10 Storage
20 Distribution
40 Indicating
00 General
10 Main
00 General
10 Airfoil
30 Pitot and Static
00 General
50 Steering
33 LIGHTS 4G5
40 Exterior
34 NAVIGATION 5C1
00 General
35 OXYGEN 6C1
10 Crew
20 Passenger

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
37 VACUUM 6C15
00 General
10 Distribution
20 Indicating

51 STRUCTURES 6F1
00 General
70 Repairs
52 DOORS 6G13
10 Passenger/Crew
20 Emergency Exit
30 Cargo
55 STABILIZERS 6H13
00 General
40 Rudder
56 WINDOWS 6I19
00 General
20 Cabin
30 Door
57 WINGS 6K5
40 Attach Fittings
50 Flight Surfaces
61 PROPELLERS 7C1
20 Controlling
00 General
PAGE 14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
71 POWER PLANT 7D5
00 General
10 Cowling
20 Mounts
70 Engine Drains
10 Distribution
30 Indicating
74 IGNITION 7F5

20 Distribution
10 Power Control
10 Power
20 Temperature
79 OIL 7J3
20 Distribution
30 Indicating
80 STARTING 7J15
10 Cranking
81 TURBINES 7K9
10 Charts


Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

1E23
Ailerons
Balancing: 6L9
Control Column
Installation: 3C24
Control System
Aileron - Rudder
Interconnect: 3D7
Control Cables: 3D2
Installation: 3D3
Wiring: 4C8 4F6
Corrosion Control
Control Wheel C
Wing: 6L3
Installation: 3C21
Installation: 6L7
Tab: 3D5
2D22
Compressor: 2E22
Dipstick: 2E23
Oil Level: 2F1
2E22
Slip Torque: 2F1
Servicing: 2D23
Ambient Temperature
Indication: 2E14
Stand: 2E7
8B1 INDEX FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 INDEX 8B2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

OAT: 9I13 2H19 7J11
8B3 INDEX FebPAGE 3

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Flaps
G Inspection
Warning 6I11
1K5 System: 6C9
PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 INDEX 8B4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Forward: 4H1
8B5 INDEX FebPAGE 5

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
P Propeller Rudder
Pagination: A11
7C11 Control System
Parking: 1G15
Piper
Repair: 7C11 3D13
Pitch Servo: 2G12
Rings: 3K10
Measuring: 3K3
5C11
Installation: 5C12
Pitot Head: 5C18
3K7 Seats
Test: 5C11
Placards: 1G23
Exterior: 1H1
Interior: 1H9
Components: 3I11
R System: 3J9
Limits: 3J4
PAGE 6
Feb 28/07 INDEX 8B6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

8B7 INDEX FebPAGE 7

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Filter: 6D3 Wing
Vertical Fin: 6I11
Y
Yaw Servo: 2G10
W
A11
Weather Radar: 5F1
Weighing: 1F15
Wheels
Bearing Cup: 4F4
Repairs: 4F3
PAGE 8
Feb 28/07 INDEX 8B8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
8B9 INDEX FebPAGE 9

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

INTENTIONALLY BLANK
PAGE 10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER
91
CHARTS & WIRING
DIAGRAMS
8C1
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
8C2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 91
CHAPTER CHAPTER
91-List of 1 Feb 28/07 91-21-20 1 Feb 28/07

3 Feb 28/07 3 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07 4 Feb 28/07
5 Feb 28/07
6 Feb 28/07 91-21-30 1 Feb 28/07
2 Feb 28/07
2 Feb 28/07 4 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07 91-21-40 1 Feb 28/07
5 Feb 28/07 2 Feb 28/07
6 Feb 28/07 3 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07
91-10-00 1 Feb 28/07
2 Feb 28/07 91-21-50 1 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07 2 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07 3 Feb 28/07
5 Feb 28/07 4 Feb 28/07
6 Feb 28/07 5 Feb 28/07
7 Feb 28/07 6 Feb 28/07
8 Feb 28/07
9 Feb 28/07 91-22-10 1 Feb 28/07
10 Feb 28/07 2 Feb 28/07
11 Feb 28/07 3 Feb 28/07
12 Feb 28/07 4 Feb 28/07
13 Feb 28/07
14 Feb 28/07 91-23-00 1 Feb 28/07
15 Feb 28/07 2 Feb 28/07
16 Feb 28/07 3 Feb 28/07
17 Feb 28/07 4 Feb 28/07
18 Feb 28/07 5 Feb 28/07
19 Feb 28/07 6 Feb 28/07
20 Feb 28/07
21 Feb 28/07 91-23-30 1 Feb 28/07
22 Feb 28/07 2 Feb 28/07
23 Feb 28/07
24 Feb 28/07 91-23-50 1 Feb 28/07
25 Feb 28/07 2 Feb 28/07
26 Feb 28/07 3 Feb 28/07
27 Feb 28/07 4 Feb 28/07
28 Feb 28/07 5 Feb 28/07
6 Feb 28/07

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 91
CHAPTER CHAPTER
91-24-30 1 Feb 28/07 91-27-60 1 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07 2 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07 3 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07 4 Feb 28/07
5 Feb 28/07
6 Feb 28/07 91-28-20 1 Feb 28/07
7 Feb 28/07 2 Feb 28/07
8 Feb 28/07 3 Feb 28/07
9 Feb 28/07 4 Feb 28/07
10 Feb 28/07
11 Feb 28/07 91-28-40 1 Feb 28/07
12 Feb 28/07 2 Feb 28/07
13 Feb 28/07 3 Feb 28/07
14 Feb 28/07 4 Feb 28/07
15 Feb 28/07
16 Feb 28/07 91-29-10 1 Feb 28/07
17 Feb 28/07 2 Feb 28/07
18 Feb 28/07 3 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07
91-25-10 1 Feb 28/07
2 Feb 28/07 91-30-10 1 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07 2 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07 3 Feb 28/07
5 Feb 28/07 4 Feb 28/07
6 Feb 28/07 5 Feb 28/07
7 Feb 28/07 6 Feb 28/07
8 Feb 28/07 7 Feb 28/07
9 Feb 28/07 8 Feb 28/07
10 Feb 28/07
11 Feb 28/07 91-30-30 1 Feb 28/07
12 Feb 28/07 2 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07
91-27-30 1 Feb 28/07 4 Feb 28/07
2 Feb 28/07 5 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07 6 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07
91-30-40 1 Feb 28/07
91-27-50 1 Feb 28/07 2 Feb 28/07
2 Feb 28/07 3 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07 4 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 91
CHAPTER CHAPTER
91-30-60 1 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07
5 Feb 28/07
6 Feb 28/07
91-31-30 1 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07
91-31-50 1 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07
5 Feb 28/07
6 Feb 28/07
7 Feb 28/07
8 Feb 28/07
9 Feb 28/07
10 Feb 28/07
11 Feb 28/07
12 Feb 28/07
13 Feb 28/07
14 Feb 28/07
15 Feb 28/07
16 Feb 28/07
17 Feb 28/07
18 Feb 28/07
19 Feb 28/07
20 Feb 28/07
21 Feb 28/07
22 Feb 28/07
23 Feb 28/07
24 Feb 28/07
91-32-60 1 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 91 - CHARTS & WIRING DIAGRAMS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHARTS 91-10-00 1 8C15

Torque Requirements 3 8C17
Conversion Tables 3 8C17
Hose Specifications 3 8C17
Consumable Materials 3 8C17
Vendor Contact Information 3 8C17
Electrical Wire Coding 3 8C17
Electrical Symbols 3 8C17
WIRING DIAGRAMS (SCHEMATICS) 91-21-20 & up (See Note Below)
ATA Code Grid No. ATA Code Grid No.

2120 8D19 7420 9G20
2130 8D23 7710 9H2
2140 8E3 7720 9H4
2150 8E7 7740 9H14
2210 8E13 7930 9I18
2300 8E17
2330 8E23 Subject Grid No.
2350 8F1
Air Conditioning 8E7
2430 8F7
Airspeed, Standby 9E19
2510 8G1
Altimeter, Radar 9F14
2730 8G13
Altimeter, Standby 9E19
2750 8G17
Annunciator 8J1
2760 8G21
Attitude Indicator, Standby 9E19
2820 8H1
Autopilot 9E23, 9F2
2840 8H5
Autopilot, 55X 8E14
2910 8H9
Avionics Cooling 8D19
3010 8H13
Avionics Dimming 9D7
3030 8I1
Avionics Lighting 9D7
3040 8I7
Baggage Compartment Lights 9D15
3060 8I11
C/B Panel Lights 9C15
3130 8I17
Cabin Heater 8E3
3150 8J1
Cabin Lights 9D11, 9D15
3260 8K1
Cabin Pressurization 8D23
3310 9C11
CHT Indicator 9I5, 9I13
3320 9D11
CHT Scanner 9H9
3340 9D19
Cigar Lighter 8G2
3420 9E16
Clocks 8G4, 8G6
3440 9F9
Combustion Analyzer 9H6
3450 9F17
Courtesy Lights 9D15
3510 9G10
Data Acquisition Unit 9I13
3720 9G14
DAU 9I13
5270 9G16
DC Coupler 9G2
7330 9G18

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
WIRING DIAGRAMS (SCHEMATICS) (continued) (See Note Below)
Subject Grid No. Subject Grid No.

Deice Ice Detection System 8H18
Detection 8H18 Ice Light 9E5
Pitot and Lift Detector 8I1 IHAS - Integrated Hazard Alert System 9F12
Propeller 8I11 Instrument Panel Switch Lights 9C23
Surface 8H13 Junction Blocks 8F22
Windshield 8I7 KMC 850 9F12
Digital Voice Recorder Clock 8G6 KMH-820 9F12
Door Ajar Warning 9G16 KN-63 9F24
Door Lights 9D15 KPA 900 9F10
EFIS KR-87 9G1
ADAHRS 9E23, 9F4 KRA 10A 9F14
Avidyne Entegra 9F2 Landing Gear Position and Warning 8K1
DAU 9F4, 9F7 Landing Light 9E9
Meggitt 9E20 Lift Computer 8G16
MFD - Multi-Function Display 9F7, 9F10 Lighting Blocks 8F24
ND - Navigation Display 9E22 MAP Indicator 9H19, 9I13
PFD - Primary Flight Display 9E22, 9F2, Map Lights 9C11
9F4 OAT 9I13
Electroluminescent Panel Lighting 9C15 Oil Pressure Indicator 9I9, 9I13, 9I18
Engine Ignition 9G20 Oil Temperature Indicator 9I9, 9I13, 9I18
Engine Start 9G20 Oxygen System 9G10
Enhanced Digital Indicator (EDI) 9H16 Position Lights 9D19
Exceedance Alert Horn 9F7 Post Lights 9C19
Exceedance Audio Alert 8J19 Power Distribution and Control 8F7
Fin Strobe (Optional) 9D23 Power Monitor and Meters 8F15
Flaps 8G17 Power Point 8G2
Fuel Flow Gauge(s) 9G18 Quad Digital Indicator (QDI) 9H14
Fuel Flow Indicator 9I1, 9I13 Radar Altimeter 9F14
Fuel Pumps 8H1 Radar, Weather 9F9
Fuel Quantity Indicator 8H5 Radio Master Switch 8F13
GMA-340 8F2 RDR 2000 9F10
GNS 430 9F2, 9F17 RPM Indicator 9H2, 9H19
Ground Blocks 8F20 Skywatch 9E23
Ground Clearance 8E17 SMARTboots 8H18
GTX 330 9F3, 9F22 SpeedBrakes 8G21
Hour Meter 8I17 Stall Detection and Warning 8G13
Hydraulic Pump 8H9 Standby Instruments 9E18
NOTE: Card 9 grid numbers, above, may be erroneous if Card 9 has been updated subsequent to this
revision of Card 8. See Chapter 91 (Continued) Table of Contents on Card 9.
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Subject Grid No.

Stereo 8G8
Stormscope 9F11
Strobe Lights 9D19
Summing Amp 8F4, 9F12, 9F14
Tachometer 9H2, 9H19, 9I13
Tail Light (Optional) 9D22, 9E1
Taxi Lights 9E9
TIT Indicator 9H4, 9I1, 9I13
Turn Coordinator(s) 9E16
Vacuum Indicator 9I5, 9I13
Vacuum Low Indicator 9G14
Vent Blowers 8E7
Vent Defogger 8E3
Weather Radar 9F9
Wing Inspection Light 9E5
WX-500 9F11
XM Receiver 8E23
revision of Card 8. See Chapter 91 (Continued) Table of Contents on Card 9.

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHARTS
1. Torque Requirements (PIR-PPS20015-1, Rev. S.)
CAUTION: DO NOT OVERTORQUE FITTINGS.

Chart 1 lists the torque values for flared fittings of various sizes and material.
NOTE: When installing flared fittings, verify that male threads are properly lubricated.
The torque values given in Chart 2 are derived from oil-free cadmium-plated threads and are
recommended for all airframe installation procedures where torquing is required, unless other values are
specified in subject chapter/section. Engine torque values are found in the latest revision of Lycoming
Service Table of Limits SSP-1776; and propeller torque values are found in 61-10-00.
NOTE: If normal operation requires movement between any of the components being clamped
together, tighten the nut (or bolt) enough to insure intended operation of the assembly.
A. Calibrate the torque wrench periodically to assure accuracy, and recheck frequently.
B. If the fastener, screw, or nut is listed in Chart 2, but the mating fastener is not listed, tighten only to
the low end of the torque range specified for the listed fastener. In addition, the following limitations
shall apply:
(1) Fastener and nut threads shall be clean and dry (free of lubricants). If the subject
chapter/section requires the fastener and/or nut to be lubricated prior to tightening and does
not specify a torque requirement, use the Chart 2 torque range reduced 50 percent.
(2) Chart 2, Sheet 1, shall be used for free running nuts, provided minimal friction drag is
determined as specified below.
CHART 1
FLARE FITTING TORQUE VALUES
Torque — Inch-Pounds
Tubing Aluminum - Alloy Steel Tubing Hose End Fitting
OD Tubing Flare - and Flare and
Inches 10061 or 10078 and 10061 Hose Assemblies
Minimum Maximum Minimum Maximum Minimum Maximum
1/8 ——— ——— ——— ——— ——— ———
3/16 ——— ——— 90 100 70 100
1/4 40 65 135 150 70 120
5/16 60 80 180 200 85 180
3/8 75 125 270 300 100 250
1/2 150 250 450 500 210 420
5/8 200 350 650 700 300 480
3/4 300 500 900 1000 500 850
1 500 700 1200 1400 500 1150
1-1/4 600 900 ——— ——— ——— ———
1-1/2 600 900 ——— ——— ——— ———
1-3/4 ——— ——— ——— ——— ——— ———
2 ——— ——— ——— ——— ——— ———
8C15 91-10-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(3) The friction drag torque can be determined as follows: Run the nut down to near contact (but
not in contact) with the bearing surface and check the "friction drag torque" required to turn the
nut.
NOTE: Check the friction drag torque by attaching a scale type torque wrench to the nut and
determining the torque required to turn the nut on the bolt. (Before the nut makes
contact with the bearing surface.)
(4) The friction drag torque (if any) shall be added to the desired torque specified in Chart 2,
Sheet 1. This final torque should register on the indicator or be the setting for a snap-over
torque limiting device.
(5) Torque requirements do not apply to cross recessed or slotted screws or to fasteners installed
into rivnuts, pressnuts or other nuts not designed to rotate for wrenching at the fastener unless
otherwise specified in the subject chapter/section.
(6) Fasteners listed in Chart 2 installed into nutplates, and which are accessible to be torqued at
the fastener, must be tightened to the low end of the torque range specified in the appropriate
“shear” column. Torque requirements do not apply if the fastener can not be torqued due to
torque device accessability.
NOTE: When the fastener is stationary and the nut is torqued, use the lower side of the torque
range.
When the nut is stationary and the fastener is torqued, use the higher side of the torque
range. In this case, ensure one (1) washer is installed under the head as follows:
(a) If the subject chapter/section does not specify the use of a washer under the head,
install one (1) NAS1149 .032 thick washer under the head. If additional washers are
required under nut to adjust for grip length variation as described under Threaded
Fastener Installation in 20-00-00: reduce them .032 to allow for the additional .032
washer now installed under head. Check to ensure threads are not bearing loads, due
to the added .032 washer thickness.
(b) All added washers are to be of the correct diameter, material and finish that matches
the fastener being installed.
(7) Apply a smooth even pull when applying torque pressure. If chattering or a jerking motion
occurs during final torque, back off and re-torque.
(8) When installing a castellated nut, start alignment with the cotter pin hole at minimum
recommended torque, and do not exceed maximum recommended torque. If the hole in the
fastener shank and the nut castellation do not align within this range, change washers and try
again. Do not exceed the maximum recommended torque. If self-locking castellated nuts are
used, include friction drag torque.
(9) Unless otherwise specified in the subject chapter/section, when castellated nuts are used with
a cotter pin on moving joints, the nut shall not be torqued to Chart 2 values. Nuts shall be
tightened to remove looseness in the joint and then the cotter pin installed.
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 91-10-00 8C16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C. Gap Conditions Between Parts Attached with Threaded Fasteners

If a gap condition exists between mating parts where a threaded fastener is to be installed, install
fasteners and associated hardware per subject chapter/section or to buildup noted during removal.
Then, torque to a value 10% of the final torque required plus the friction drag torque.
For example, if Chart 2, Sheet 2, torque is 190 in.-lbs. and the friction drag torque of the nut is 80
in.-lbs. (i.e. - Chart 2, Sheet 2, torque minus Chart 2, Sheet 1, torque), torque to a value of:
Maximum Permissible
Gap Closing Torque = (Chart 2, Sheet 1, torque x .10) + (Sheet 2 - Sheet 1) torque
Example: 3/8-24 (190 x .10) + (270-190) = 19 + 80 = 99 in.-lbs.
Accomplish this for all fasteners common to the gapped interface. If no gap exists after
accomplishing the above, finish torquing to final torque. If a gap remains consult your Piper Dealer’s
Service Advisor (DSA) for further assistance.
D. After the final torque, apply a slippage mark to the nut or bolt or screw head as applicable.
NOTE: For more details on torquing, refer to FAA AC 43.13-1, latest revision.
2. Conversion Tables
The following charts contain various conversion data that may be useful when figuring capacities,
lengths, temperatures, and various weights and measures from the English system to the metric system
or back again:
Chart 3, Torque Conversion
Chart 4, Decimal Conversions
Chart 5, Temperature Conversion
Chart 6, Weights and Measures Conversion
Chart 7, Metric Conversion
Chart 8, Drill Sizes
3. Hose Specifications
See Chart 9.
4. Consumable Materials
See Chart 10.
5. Vendor Contact Information
See Chart 11.
6. Electrical Wire Coding
See Chart 12.
7. Electrical Symbols
See Chart 13.
8C17 91-10-00 FebPAGE 3

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
RECOMMENDED NUT TORQUES
Bolts - Steel Bolts - Aluminum
AN 3 thru AN 20 MS 20004 AN 3DD Series
AN 42 thru AN 49 NAS 333 thru NAS 340
AN 525 NAS 464
MS 20033 thru MS 20046 NAS 624 thru NAS 644
MS 20073 NAS 1580
MS 20074 NAS 6203 thru NAS 6220
MS 24694 NAS 6603 thru NAS 6620
MS 27039 NAS 6703 thru NAS 6720
Nuts - Steel Nuts - Aluminum
Tension Shear Tension Shear Tension Shear
AN 310 AN 320 AN 310 AN 320 AN 310D AN 320D
AN 315 MS 20364 AN 315 MS 20364 AN 315D
MS 20365 MS 21083 MS 20365 MS 21083
MS 21042 MS 21245 MS 21042 MS 21245
MS 21044 MS 21044
MS 21045 MS 21045
NAS 679 NAS 679
FINE THREAD SERIES - ADD FRICTION DRAG
Nut-Bolt Torque Limits Torque Limits Torque Limits Torque Limits Torque Limits Torque Limits
Size In.-Lbs. In.-Lbs. In.-Lbs. In.-Lbs. In.-Lbs. In.-Lbs.
Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max.
8-36 12 15 7 9 5 10 3 6
10-32 20 25 12 15 25 30 15 20 10 15 5 10
1/4-28 50 70 30 40 80 100 50 60 30 45 15 30
5/16-24 100 140 60 85 120 145 70 90 40 65 25 40
3/8-24 160 190 95 110 200 250 120 150 75 110 45 70
7/16-20 450 500 270 300 520 630 300 400 180 280 110 170
1/2-20 480 690 290 410 770 950 450 550 280 410 160 260
9/16-18 800 1,000 480 600 1,100 1,300 650 800 380 580 230 360
5/8-18 1,100 1,300 660 780 1,250 1,550 750 950 550 670 270 420
3/4-16 2,300 2,500 1,300 1,500 2,650 3,200 1,600 1,900 950 1,250 560 880
7/8-14 2,500 3,000 1,500 1,800 3,550 4,350 2,100 2,690 1,250 1,900 750 1,200
1-14 3,700 4,500 2,200 3,300 4,500 5,500 2,700 3,300 1,600 2,400 950 1,500
1-1/8-12 5,000 7,000 3,000 4,200 6,000 7,300 3,600 4,400 2,100 3,200 1,250 2,000
1-1/4-12 9,000 11,000 5,400 6,600 11,000 13,400 6,600 8,000 3,900 5,600 2,300 3,650
COARSE THREAD SERIES - ADD FRICTION DRAG
Nut-Bolt Torque Limits Torque Limits
Size In.-Lbs. In.-Lbs.
Min. Max. Min. Max.
8-32 12 15 7 9
10-24 20 25 12 15
1/4-20 40 50 25 30 NOTE: Unless otherwise specified, torque size No. 6
5/16-18 80 90 48 55 screws used with self-locking nutplates to no greater
3/8-16 160 185 95 110 than 4 to 5 in.-lbs.
7/16-14 235 255 140 155 Use an appropriately calibrated driver.
1/2-13 400 480 240 290
9/16-12 500 700 300 420
5/8-11 700 900 420 540
3/4-10 1,150 1,600 700 950
7/8-9 2,200 3,000 1,300 1,800
1-8 3,700 5,000 2,200 3,000
1-1/8-8 5,500 6,500 3,300 4,000
1-1/4-8 6,500 8,000 4,000 5,000
PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 91-10-00 8C18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
RECOMMENDED NUT TORQUES
Bolts - Steel Bolts - Aluminum
AN 3 thru AN 20 MS 20004 AN 3DD Series
AN 42 thru AN 49 NAS 333 thru NAS 340
AN 525 NAS 464
MS 20033 thru MS 20046 NAS 624 thru NAS 644
MS 20073 NAS 1580
MS 20074 NAS 6203 thru NAS 6220
MS 24694 NAS 6603 thru NAS 6620
MS 27039 NAS 6703 thru NAS 6720
Nuts - Steel Nuts - Aluminum
Tension Shear Tension Shear Tension Shear
AN 310 AN 320 AN 310 AN 320 AN 310D AN 320D
AN 315 MS 20364 AN 315 MS 20364 AN 315D
MS 20365 MS 21083 MS 20365 MS 21083
MS 21042 MS 21245 MS 21042 MS 21245
MS 21044 MS 21044
MS 21045 MS 21045
NAS 679 NAS 679
FINE THREAD SERIES - INCLUDES FRICTION DRAG
Nut-Bolt Torque Limits Torque Limits Torque Limits Torque Limits Torque Limits Torque Limits
Size In.-Lbs. In.-Lbs. In.-Lbs. In.-Lbs. In.-Lbs. In.-Lbs.
Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max.
10-32 38 43 30 33 43 48 33 38 28 33 23 28
1/4-28 65 100 60 70 110 130 80 90 60 75 45 60
5/16-24 160 200 120 145 180 205 130 150 100 125 85 100
3/8-24 240 270 175 190 280 330 200 230 155 190 125 150
7/16-20 550 600 370 400 620 730 400 500 280 380 210 270
COARSE THREAD SERIES - INCLUDES FRICTION DRAG
Nut-Bolt Torque Limits Torque Limits
Size In.-Lbs. In.-Lbs.
Min. Max. Min. Max. NOTE: Unless otherwise specified, torque size No. 6
8-32 27 30 22 24 screws used with self-locking nutplates to no greater
10-24 38 43 30 33 than 4 to 5 in.-lbs.
1/4-20 70 80 55 60 Use an appropriately calibrated driver.
5/16-18 140 150 108 115
3/8-16 240 265 175 190
7/16-14 335 355 240 255
8C19 91-10-00 FebPAGE 5

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 3
TORQUE CONVERSION
INCH POUNDS (IN.-LBS.) TO CENTIMETER KILOGRAMS (CMKG.)

CENTIMETER KILOGRAMS (CMKG.) TO INCH POUNDS (IN.-LBS.)
FOOT POUNDS (FT.-LBS.) TO METER KILOGRAMS (MKG.)
METER KILOGRAMS (MKG.) TO FOOT-POUNDS (FT.-LBS.)
IN.-LBS. CMKG. FT.-LBS. MKG. FT.-LBS. MKG. MKG. FT.-LBS.

5 5.76 2.5 .346 115 15.900 1 7.23
10 11.52 5 .691 120 16.591 2 14.46
15 17.28 7.5 1.037 125 17.282 3 21.69
20 23.04 10 1.383 130 17.974 4 28.98
25 28.80 12.5 1.728 135 18.665 5 36.16
30 34.56 15 2.074 140 19.356 6 43.39
35 40.32 17.5 2.419 145 10.047 7 50.63
40 46.08 20 2.765 150 20.739 8 57.86
45 51.84 22.5 3.111 155 21.430 9 65.09
50 57.60 25 3.456 160 22.121 10 72.32
55 63.36 27.5 3.802 165 22.813 11 79.56
60 69.12 30 4.148 170 23.504 12 86.79
65 74.88 32.5 4.493 175 24.195 13 94.02
70 80.64 35 4.839 180 24.887 14 101.26
75 86.40 37.5 5.185 185 25.578 15 108.49
80 92.16 40 5.530 190 26.269 16 115.72
85 97.92 42.5 5.876 195 26.960 17 122.95
90 103.68 45 6.222 200 27.652 18 130.19
95 109.44 47.5 6.567 105 28.343 19 137.42
100 115.20 50 6.913 210 29.034 20 144.65
105 120.96 52.5 7.258 215 29.726 21 151.89
110 126.72 55 7.604 220 30.417 22 159.12
115 132.48 57.5 7.950 225 31.108
120 138.24 60 8.295 230 31.800
62.5 8.641 235 32.491
CMKG. IN.-LBS. 65 8.987 240 33.182
67.5 9.332 245 33.873
50 43.4
70 9.678 250 34.565
100 86.8
72.5 10.024 255 35.256
150 130.2
75 10.369 260 35.947
200 173.6
77.5 10.715 265 36.639
250 217.0
80 11.060 270 37.330
300 260.4
82.5 11.406 275 38.021
350 303.8
85 11.752 280 38.713
400 347.2
87.5 12.097 285 39.404
450 390.6
90 12.443 290 40.095
500 434.0
92.5 12.789 295 40.786
550 477.4
95 13.134 300 41.478
600 520.8
97.5 13.480
650 564.2
100 13.826
700 607.6
105 14.517
110 15.208
PAGE 6
Feb 28/07 91-10-00 8C20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 4
DECIMAL CONVERSIONS
8C21 91-10-00 FebPAGE 7

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 5
TEMPERATURE CONVERSION
CENTIGRADE - FAHRENHEIT
Example: To convert 20°C, to Fahrenheit, find 20 in the center column headed (°F - °C);
then read 68.0°F, in the column (°F) to the right. To conver t 20°F, to
Centigrade; find 20 in the center column and read -6.67°C, in the (°C) column
to the left.
°C °F - °C °F °C °F - °C °F
-56.7 -70 -94.0 104.44 220 428.0
-51.1 -60 -76.0 110.00 230 446.0
- 45.6 -50 -58.0 115.56 240 464.0
- 40.0 -40 -40.0 121.11 250 482.0
- 34.0 -30 -22.0 126.67 260 500.0
- 38.9 -20 -4.0 132.22 270 518.0
- 23.3 -10 14.0 137.78 280 536.0
- 17.8 0 32.0 143.33 290 554.0
-12.22 10 50.0 148.89 300 572.0
-6.67 20 68.0 154.44 310 590.0
-1.11 30 86.0 160.00 320 608.0
4.44 40 104.0 165.56 330 626.0
10.00 50 122.0 171.11 340 644.0
15.56 60 140.0 176.67 350 662.0
21.11 70 158.0 182.22 360 680.0
26.67 80 176.0 187.78 370 698.0
32.22 90 194.0 193.33 380 716.0
27.78 100 212.0 198.89 390 734.0
43.33 110 230.0 204.44 400 752.0
38.89 120 248.0 210.00 410 770.0
54.44 130 266.0 215.56 420 788.0
60.00 140 284.0 221.11 430 806.0
65.56 150 302.0 226.67 440 824.0
71.00 160 320.0 232.22 450 842.0
76.67 170 338.0 257.78 460 860.0
82.22 180 356.0 243.33 470 878.0
87.78 190 374.0 248.89 480 896.0
93.33 200 392.0 254.44 490 914.0
98.89 210 410.0 260.00 500 932.0
PAGE 8
Feb 28/07 91-10-00 8C22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 6
WEIGHTS AND MEASURES CONVERSION
MULTIPLY BY TO OBTAIN MULTIPLY BY TO OBTAIN

CENTIMETERS 0.3937 IN. KILOGRAMS 2.205 LB.
0.03281 FT. 35.27 OZ.
1000 GRAMS
CU. CENTIMETERS 0.001 LITERS
0.06102 CU. IN. LITERS 1000 CU. CM.
0.0002642 U.S. GAL. 61.03 CU. IN.
0.03532 CU. FT.
CU. FT. 28.320 CU. CM.
0.2642 U.S. GAL.
1.728 CU. IN.
0.22 IMPERIAL GAL.
7.481 U.S. GAL.
1.057 QUARTS
28.32 LITERS
METERS 39.37 IN.
CU. IN. 16.39 CU. CM.
3.281 FT.
0.01639 LITERS
1000 MM.
0.004329 U.S. GAL.
0.01732 QUARTS METER-KILOGRAM 7.233 FT.-LB.
9.807 JOULES
CU. METERS 1000000 CU. CM.
35.314 CU. FT. OUNCES, AVDP 0.0625 LB., AVDP
61.023 CU. IN. 28.35 GRAMS
264.17 GAL. 437.5 GRAINS
999.97 LITERS
OUNCES, FLUID 29.57 CU. CM.
FEET 0.3048 METERS 1.805 CU. IN.
12.000 MILS
LB., AVDP 453.6 GRAMS
304.8 MM.
7000 GRAINS
0.3333 YARDS
16.0 OUNCES
FT.-LB. 0.1383 M-KG
SQUARE INCH 6.4516 SQ. CM.
0.001285 BTU
0.000000376 KW-HR POUND PER 0.0703 KG.-CM
SQUARE INCH SQUARED
FLUID OZ. 8 DRAM
(PSI)
29.6 CU. CM.
STATUTE MILE 1.609 KILOMETER
GAL., IMPERIAL 277.4 CU. IN.
0.8684 NAUTICAL MILE
1.201 U.S. GAL.
4.546 LITERS NAUTICAL MILE 1.151 STATUTE
MILE
GAL., U.S. DRY 268.8 CU. IN.
0.1556 CU. FT. QUART .9463 LITER
1.164 U.S. GAL., LIQ.
4.405 LITERS MILLIMETER 1000 MICRON
GAL., U.S. LIQ. 231.0 CU. IN. MICRON 0.001 MILLIMETER

0.1337 CU. FT. 0.000039 INCH
3.785 LITERS INCH 11.521 METER
0.8327 IMPERIAL GAL. POUNDS GRAMS
128 FLUID OZ.
INCH 0.72 METER
IN. 2.540 CM. OUNCES GRAMS
.08333 FT.
POUNDS 0.453 KILOGRAMS
JOULES 0.000948 BTU
0.7376 FT.-LB.
8C23 91-10-00 FebPAGE 9

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 7
METRIC CONVERSION
Example: Convert 1.5 inches to millimeters.
(1) Read down inches column to 1. inches.
(2) Read across top inch column to 0.5.
(3) Read down and across to find millimeters (1.5 inches is 38.10 millimeters).
INCHES TO MILLIMETER
INCHES 0.0000 0.0001 0.0002 0.0003 0.0004 0.0005 0.0006 0.0007 0.0008 0.0009
MILLIMETER
0.000 0.0025 0.0050 0.0076 0.0101 0.0127 0.0152 0.0177 0.0203 0.0228
0.001 0.0254 0.0279 0.0304 0.0330 0.0355 0.0381 0.0406 0.0431 0.0457 0.0482
0.002 0.0508 0.0533 0.0558 0.0584 0.0609 0.0635 0.0660 0.0685 0.0711 0.0736
0.003 0.0762 0.0812 0.0838 0.0863 0.0889 0.0914 0.0939 0.0965 0.0965 0.0990
0.004 0.1016 0.1041 0.1066 0.1092 0.1117 0.1143 0.1168 0.1193 0.1219 0.1244
0.005 0.1270 0.1295 0.1320 0.1346 0.1371 0.1397 0.1422 0.1447 0.1447 0.1498
0.006 0.1524 0.1549 0.1574 0.1600 0.1625 0.1651 0.1676 0.1701 0.1727 0.1752
0.007 0.1778 0.1803 0.1828 0.1854 0.1879 0.1905 0.1930 0.1955 0.1981 0.2006
0.008 0.2032 0.2057 0.2082 0.2108 0.2133 0.2159 0.2184 0.2209 0.2235 0.2260
0.009 0.2286 0.2311 0.2336 0.2362 0.2387 0.2413 0.2438 0.2463 0.2489 0.2514
INCHES 0.000 0.001 0.002 0.003 0.004 0.005 0.006 0.007 0.008 0.009
MILLIMETER
0.00 0.025 0.050 0.076 0.101 0.127 0.152 0.177 0.203 0.228
0.01 0.254 0.279 0.304 0.330 0.355 0.381 0.406 0.431 0.457 0.482
0.02 0.508 0.533 0.558 0.584 0.609 0.635 0.660 0.685 0.711 0.736
0.03 0.762 0.787 0.812 0.838 0.863 0.889 0.914 0.939 0.965 0.990
0.04 1.016 1.041 1.066 1.092 1.117 1.143 1.168 1.193 1.219 1.244
0.05 1.270 1.295 1.320 1.346 1.371 1.397 1.422 1.447 1.473 1.498
0.06 1.524 1.549 1.574 1.600 1.625 1.651 1.676 1.701 1.727 1.752
0.07 1.778 1.803 1.828 1.854 1.879 1.905 1.930 1.955 1.981 2.006
0.08 2.032 2.057 2.082 2.108 2.133 2.159 2.184 2.209 2.235 2.260
0.09 2.286 2.311 2.336 2.362 2.387 2.413 2.438 2.463 2.489 2.514
INCHES 0.00 0.01 0.02 0.03 0.04 0.05 0.06 0.07 0.08 0.09
MILLIMETER
0.0 0.254 0.508 0.762 0.016 1.270 1.524 1.778 2.032 2.286
0.1 2.540 2.794 3.048 3.302 3.556 3.810 4.064 4.318 4.572 4.826
0.2 5.080 5.334 5.558 5.842 6.096 6.350 6.604 6.858 7.112 7.366
0.3 7.620 7.874 8.128 8.382 8.636 8.890 9.144 9.398 9.652 9.906
0.4 10.160 10.414 10.668 10.922 11.176 11.430 11.684 11.938 12.192 12.446
0.5 12.700 12.954 13.208 13.462 13.716 13.970 14.224 14.478 14.732 14.986
0.6 15.240 15.494 15.748 16.002 16.256 16.510 16.764 17.018 17.272 17.526
0.7 17.780 18.034 18.288 18.542 18.796 19.050 19.304 19.558 19.812 20.066
0.8 20.320 20.574 20.828 21.082 21.336 21.590 21.844 22.098 22.352 22.606
0.9 22.860 23.114 23.368 23.622 23.876 24.130 24.384 24.638 24.892 25.146
INCHES 0.00 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9
MILLIMETER
0.0 2.54 5.08 7.62 10.16 12.70 15.24 17.78 20.32 22.86
1.0 25.40 27.94 30.48 33.02 35.56 38.10 40.64 43.18 45.72 48.26
2.0 50.80 53.34 55.88 58.42 60.96 63.50 66.04 68.58 71.12 73.66
3.0 76.20 78.74 81.28 83.82 86.36 88.90 91.44 93.98 96.52 99.06
4.0 101.60 104.14 106.68 109.22 111.76 114.30 116.84 119.38 121.92 124.46
5.0 127.00 129.54 132.08 134.62 137.16 139.70 142.24 144.78 147.32 149.86
6.0 152.40 154.94 157.48 160.02 162.56 165.10 167.64 170.18 172.72 175.26
7.0 177.80 180.34 182.88 185.42 187.96 190.50 193.04 195.58 198.12 200.66
8.0 203.20 205.74 208.28 210.82 213.36 215.90 218.44 220.98 223.52 226.06
9.0 228.60 231.14 233.68 236.22 238.76 241.30 243.84 246.38 248.92 251.46
PAGE 10
Feb 28/07 91-10-00 8C24
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 8
DRILL SIZES
Decimal/Millimeter Equivalents of Drill Sizes From 1/2" to No. 80
Size Decimal Millimeter Size Decimal Millimeter Size Decimal Millimeter Size Decimal Millimeter
Equiv. Equiv. Equiv. Equiv. Equiv. Equiv. Equiv. Equiv.
1/2 0.500 12.7000 G 0.261 6.6294 5/32 0.1562 3.9687 51 0.067 1.7018
31/64 0.4843 12.3031 F 0.257 6.5278 23 0.154 3.9116 52 0.0635 1.6129
15/32 0.4687 11.9062 E-1/4 0.250 6.3500 24 0.152 3.8608 1/16 0.0625 1.5875
29/64 0.4531 11.5094 D 0.246 6.2484 25 0.1495 3.7973 53 0.0595 1.5113
7/16 0.4375 11.1125 C 0.242 6.1468 26 0.147 3.7338 54 0.055 1.397
27/64 0.4218 10.7156 B 0.238 6.0452 27 0.144 3.6576 55 0.052 1.3208

Z 0.413 10.4902 15/64 0.2343 5.9531 9/64 0.1406 3.5719 3/64 0.0468 1.1906
13/32 0.4062 10.3187 A 0.234 5.9436 28 0.1405 3.5687 56 0.0465 1.1811
Y 0.404 10.2616 1 0.228 5.7912 29 0.136 3.4544 57 0.043 1.0922
X 0.397 10.0838 2 0.221 5.6134 30 0.01285 3.2639 58 0.042 1.0668
25/64 0.3906 9.9212 7/32 0.2187 5.5562 1/8 0.125 3.1750 59 0.041 1.0414
W 0.386 9.8044 3 0.213 5.4102 31 0.120 3.048 60 0.040 1.016
V 0.377 9.5758 4 0.209 5.3086 32 0.116 2.9464 61 0.039 0.9906
3/8 0.375 9.5250 5 0.2055 5.2197 33 0.113 2.8702 62 0.038 0.9652
U 0.368 9.3472 6 0.204 5.1816 34 0.111 2.8194 63 0.037 0.9398
23/64 0.3593 9.1262 13/64 0.2031 5.1594 35 0.110 2.794 64 0.036 0.9144
T 0.358 9.1281 7 0.201 5.1054 7/64 0.1093 2.7781 65 0.035 0.899
S 0.346 8.7884 8 0.199 5.0546 36 0.1065 2.7051 66 0.033 0.8382
11/32 0.3437 8.7300 9 0.196 4.9784 37 0.104 2.6416 1/32 0.0312 0.7937
R 0.339 8.6106 10 0.1935 4.9149 38 0.1015 2.5781 67 0.032 0.8128
Q 0.332 8.4328 11 0.191 4.8514 39 0.0995 2.5273 68 0.031 0.7874

21/64 0.3281 8.3337 12 0.189 4.8006 40 0.098 2.4892 69 0.029 0.7366
P 0.323 8.2042 3/16 0.1875 4.7625 41 0.096 2.4384 70 0.028 0.7112
O 0.316 8.0264 13 0.185 4.699 3/32 0.0937 2.3812 71 0.026 0.6604
5/16 0.3125 7.9375 14 0.182 4.6228 42 0.0935 2.3749 72 0.025 0.635
N 0.302 7.6708 15 0.180 4.572 43 0.089 2.2606 73 0.024 0.0696

19/64 0.2968 7.5387 16 0.177 4.4958 44 0.086 2.1844 74 0.0229 0.58166
M 0.295 7.4930 17 0.173 4.3942 45 0.082 2.0828 75 0.021 0.5334
L 0.290 7.3660 11/64 0.1718 4.3656 46 0.081 2.0574 76 0.020 0.508
9/32 0.2812 7.1425 18 0.1695 4.3053 47 0.0785 1.9939 77 0.018 0.4572
K 0.281 7.1374 19 0.166 4.2164 5/64 0.0781 1.9844 1/64 0.0156 0.3969
J 0.277 7.0358 20 0.161 4.0894 48 0.076 1.9304 78 0.016 0.4064
I 0.272 6.9088 21 0.159 4.0386 49 0.073 1.8542 79 0.0145 0.3683
H 0.266 6.7564 22 0.157 3.9878 50 0.070 1.778 80 0.0135 0.3429
17/64 0.2656 6.7462
DRILL SIZES AVAILABLE

Drill may be obtained in regular sizes to a 4 inch diameter, and increase in 64ths of an inch. The regular metric drills vary
from 2 to 76mm and increase in 0.5mm variations.
8D1 91-10-00 Feb

PAGE 11
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 9
HOSE SPECIFICATIONS
SINGLE WIRE BRAID FABRIC COVERED
TUBE HOSE HOSE RECOMMENDED MIN MAX MIN

MIL SIZE SIZE SIZE OPER. BURST PROOF BEND
PART NO. O.D. I.D. O.D. PRESS PRESS PRESS RADIUS
MIL-H-8794- 3-L 3/16 1/8 .45 3,000 12,000 6,000 3.00

MIL-H-8794- 4-L 1/16 3/16 .52 3,000 12,000 6,000 3.00
MIL-H-8794- 5-L 5/16 1/4 .58 3,000 10,000 5,000 3.38
MIL-H-8794- 6-L 3/8 5/16 .67 2,000 9,000 4,500 4.00
MIL-H-8794- 8-L 1/2 13/32 .77 2,000 8,000 4,000 4.63
MIL-H-8794-10-L 5/8 1/2 .92 1,750 7,000 3,500 5.50
MIL-H-8794-12-L 3/4 5/8 1.08 1,500 6,000 3,000 6.50
MIL-H-8794-16-L 1 7/8 1.23 800 3,200 1,600 7.38
MIL-H-8794-20-L 1 1/4 1 1/8 1.50 600 2,500 1,250 9.00
MIL-H-8794-24-L 1 1/2 1 3/8 1.75 500 2,000 1,000 11.00
MIL-H-8794-32-L 2 1 13/16 2.22 300 1,400 700 13.25
MIL-H-8794-40-L 2 1/2 2 3/8 2.88 200 1,000 300 24.00
MIL-H-8794-48-L 3 3 3.56 200 800 300 33.00
Construction: Seamless synthetic Uses: Hose is approved for use in

rubber inner tube reinforced with aircraft hydraulic, pneumatic, coolant,
one fiber braid, one braid of high fuel and oil systems.
tensile steel wire and covered with
an oil resistant rubber impregnated Operating Temperatures:
fiber braid. Sizes -3 thru -12: Minus 65°F. to plus
Identification: Hose is identified by 250°F.
specification number, size number, Sizes -16 thru -48: Minus 40°F to
quar ter year and year, hose plus 275°F.
manufacturer's identification.
NOTE: Maximum temperatures and
pressures should not be used
simultaneously.
MULTIPLE WIRE BRAID RUBBER COVERED
TUBE HOSE HOSE RECOMMENDED MIN MAX MIN

MIL SIZE SIZE SIZE OPER. BURST PROOF BEND
PART NO. O.D. I.D. O.D. PRESS PRESS PRESS RADIUS
MIL-H-8788- 4-L 1/4 7/32 .63 3,000 16,000 8,000 3.00

MIL-H-8788- 5-L 5/16 9/32 .70 3,000 14,000 7,000 3.38
MIL-H-8788- 6-L 3/8 11/32 .77 3,000 14,000 7,000 5.00
MIL-H-8788- 8-L 1/2 7/16 .86 3,000 14,000 7,000 5.75
MIL-H-8788-10-L 5/8 9/16 1.03 3,000 12,000 6,000 6.50
MIL-H-8788-12-L 3/4 11/16 1.22 3,000 12,000 6,000 7.75
MIL-H-8788-16-L 1.00 7/8 1.50 3,000 10,000 5,000 9.63
Hose Construction: Seamless synthetic rubber inner tube reinforced with Uses: High pressure hydraulic,
one fabric braid, two or more steel wire braids, and covered with a pneumatic, coolant, fuel and oil.
synthetic rubber cover (for gas applications, request perforated cover).
Operating Temperature:
Identification: Hose is identified by specification number, size number,
quarter year and year, hose manufacturer's identification. Minus 65°F to plus 200°F.
PAGE 12
Feb 28/07 91-10-00 8D2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CONSUMABLE MATERIALS
MATERIAL SPECIFICATION PRODUCT VENDOR

ABS-Solvent/ Solarite, #11 Series Solar Compounds Corp.
Cements
Adhesive EC 801 Minnesota Mining and
EC 807 Manufacturing
EC 1357 Adhesive Coating and
Scotch Grip 210 Sealers Division
(Rubber Adhesive)
Anti-Galling MIL-A-907 Ease-Off Taxacone Company
Solution
Anti-Seize Compound MIL-T-5544 Armite Product Armite Laboratories
(Graphite Petrolatum)
Anti-Seize Compound Exxon Oil Company
Royco 44 Royal Lubricants Co.
Anti-Seize Compound TT-A-580 Armite Product Armite Laboratories
(White Lead Base) (JAN-A-669)
Anti-Seize Thread Fel-Pro C5-A Fel-Pro Incorporated
Compound “HIGH
TEMPERATURE”
Buffing and Rubbing Automotive Type DuPont Company
Compounds DuPont #7
Ram Chemical #69 Ram Chemicals

Compound for Mirror Glaze Mirror Bright Polish
Polishing Co., Incorporated
Plexiglas Polish P-P-560 Part Number 403D Permatex Co., Inc.
and Cleaner Kansas City, Kansas
66115
Cleaners Fantastic Spray Local Supplier
Perchlorethylene
VM&P Naphtha
(Lighter Fluid)
Deicer Boot Surface Agemaster B.F. Goodrich
Coatings
Dry Lubricant MIL-L-60326 MS-122-6075 Local Supplier
Epoxy Patching Solarite #400 Solar Compounds Corp.
Compound
Gasket Cement Permatex No. 2 Permatex Company, Inc.
Grease, Actuator 2196-74-1 Dukes Astronautics Co.
8D3 91-10-00 Feb

PAGE 13
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Grease, Aircraft MIL-G-23827A Supermil Grease Amoco
Instrumentation, (See Note at end.) No. A72832
Gear and Actuator
Screw (Temp. Range - Royco 27A Royal Lubricants Co.
(100°F to +250°F)
Shell 6249 Grease Shell Oil Company
RR-28 Socony Mobil Oil Co.
Castrolease A1 Burmah-Castrol LTD.
Low-Temp. Grease E.P. Texaco Incorp.
5114 E.P. Grease Standard Oil of Calif.
AV55
Aeroshell Grease 7 Shell Oil Company
Braycote 627S
Mobil Grease 27 Mobil Oil Corporation
B.P. Aero Grease 31B B.P. Trading Limited
Grease, Aircraft MIL-G-3278 Unitemp E.P. Texaco Incorporated
Instrumentation,
Gear and Actuator RPM Aviation Grease Standard Oil of Calif.
Screw (Temp. Range - 5, Supermil Grease
65°F to +250°F) No. 8723
Aeroshell Grease 7A Shell Oil Corporation
Royco 78 Royal Lubricants
Company
L-1212 Sinclair Refining Co.
1916 Uni-Temp California Texas Oil
Grease Corporation
Grease Ball and MIL-G-18709 Regal ASB-2 Formula Texaco Incorporated
Roller Bearing TG-10293
Andok B Exxon Company, U.S.A.
Code 1-20481, Darina Shell Oil Company
Grease 1 XSG-6213
Code 71-501, Darina
Grease 2 XSG-6152
Code 71-502, Alvania
Grease 2 XSG-6151
Code 71-012, Cyprina
Grease 3 XSG-6280
Code 71-003
PAGE 14
Feb 28/07 91-10-00 8D4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Grease, General MIL-G-81322 Marfax All Purpose Texaco Incorporated
Purpose Wide
Temperature Aeroshell No. 6 Shell Oil Company
or Mobilux EP2
Shell Alvania EP2 Shell Oil Company
Royco 22 Royal Lubricants
Company
Aeroshell No. 22 Shell Oil Company
Grease, High MIL-G-3545 High Temp. Grease, Texaco Incorporated
Temperature Marfak All Purpose
Shellaire Grease HT Shell Oil Company
Alvania E.P. Grease 2
Aeroshell Grease 5
Grease 77, Mobilux Mobil Oil Corporation
E.P. 2
Royco 45A Royal Lubricants Co.
L-1231 Sinclair Refining
Company
Grease, Aircraft MIL-G-7711 Regal AFB2 Regal Texaco Incorporated
General Purpose Starfak Premium
PED 3040 Standard Oil of Calif.
Aeroshell Grease 6 Shell Oil Company
Royco II Royal Lubricants Co.
Grease, Lubricating, MIL-G-21164 Aeroshell Grease Shell Oil Company
Molybdenum No. 17
Disulfide, Low and
High Temperature Royco 64C Royal Lubricants Co.
Castrolease MSA (c) Burmah Castrol LTD.
Grease, Lubricating, MIL-G-6032 Royco 32 Royal Lubricant Co.
Plug Valve, Gasoline
and Oil Resistant Castrolease PV Burmah Castrol LTD.
Parker Fuel Lube 44 Parker Seal Company
B.P. Aero Grease 32 B.P. Trading Limited
L-237 Lehigh Tenneco
Chemicals Co., Inc.
Rockwell 950 Rockwell International
8D5 91-10-00 Feb

PAGE 15
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Grease, Waterproof, Aero Lubriplate Fiske Brothers
High and Low Refining Company
Temperature
“Hot Melt” Adhesive Stick Form 1/2 in. Sears, Roebuck and
Polyamids and “Hot diameter, 3 in. Company or most
Melt” Gun. long hardware stores.
Hydraulic Fluid MIL-H-5606 Brayco 756D Bray Oil Company
TL-5874 Texaco Incorporated
PED 3565 Standard Oil Company
of California
Aircraft Hydraulic Texaco Incorporated
Oil AA
RPM Aviation Oil Standard Oil Company
No. 2 Code of California
PED 2585
PED 3337
3126 Hydraulic Oil Exxon Company U.S.A.
(Univis 40)
Aeroshell Fluid 4, Shell Oil Company
SL-7694
Aero HF Mobil Oil Corporation
Royco 756, 756A Royal Lubricants Co.
and 756B
Isopropyl Alcohol Fed. Spec. TT-I-735 Local Supplier
Isocryl Tape (PMS-C1012-2) Schnee Moorehead
Chemicals, Incorporated
Kevlar Kevlar Kevlar Special Products
Leak Detector MIL-L-25567 ALPHA 73 U.S. Gulf Corporation
Solution for Oxygen Leak Detector
Oxygen Systems Type 1
Leak Tec #16-OX American Gas and
Chemical Co. LTD.
Loctite MIL-S-22473 Loctite 290 Loctite Corporation
Grade AA
MIL-S-22473 Loctite 222
Grade H and HV
Methylethylketone Fed. Spec. TT-M-261 Local Supplier
PAGE 16
Feb 28/07 91-10-00 8D6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Molybdenum MIL-M-7866 Molykote-Type G Dow Corning Corp.
Disulfide (Paste)
Molykote - Type 2
(Powder)
Oil, Air Conditioner, R12 Frigidaire #525 Virginia Chemical
Suniso #5 Sun Oil Company of
Pennsylvania
Texaco Capilla "E" Texaco Incorporated
Oil, Air Conditioner, Piper P/N 923-384 PAG-21941
HFC-134a
Oil Lubricating, MIL-L-7870 Caltex Low Temp. Caltex Oil Products
General Purpose, Oil Company
Low Temperature
Sinclair Aircraft Sinclair Refining
Orbit Lube Company
1692 Low Temp Oil Texaco Incorporated
Aviation Instrument Standard Oil Company
Oil of California
Royco 363 Royal Lubricants Co.
Rain Repellent FSCM 50150 Repcon Unelco Corporation
Safety Walk Flextred 300 Wooster Products,
Pressure Sensitive Incorporated
Sealant MIL-S-11031B PRC 5000 Products Research
PRC 383 Company
Sealant, Fuel *RS-36b, Stripper CEE BEE Chemical Co.
Tank Sealing (thin)
*RS-24b, Stripper
(thick)
*PR 1422 A-2 Sealant Products Research
(Brushing Consistency) Company
*PR 1422 B-2 Sealant
(Trowling Consistency)
*PR 1431G, Faying
Surface Seal, Type 1
* PR 1321-B 1/2,
Access Panel Sealant
* PR 1560 MK, Primer Products Research
(Anti-Bacteriological Company
Coating)
8D7 91-10-00 Feb

PAGE 17
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Sealant, Fuel * BJO-0930, Phenolic Union Carbide Plastics
Tank Sealing(continued) Balloons Division
* ERL-2795, Epoxy
Resin
* 22LA-0340
Polyamid Hardener
Class A-2 * Thiokol MC-236
* NOTE: Use of Equivalent Sealant Approved.
Sealant, Fuselage Class A-1/2, A-2, B-2 H.S. Bancroft Corp.
Structure B-4, B-6, B-8
EC 1239 Minnesota Mining and
Manufacturing
Industrial Specialties
Division
EC 612 (Leak Marker or
Weather Stripping, etc)
RTV-157 General Electric
(Piper P/N 279-021) Silicone Products
Department
G.E.-SS-4004 (Primer) General Electric
RTV-88 with Silicone Products
RTV-9811 Department
Sealant, AMS 3333 Type II, EC-801/1063 3M Company
Windshield & Windows Class B-2 (Piper P/N 279-047)
PR 1425 Products Research
(Piper P/N 279-019) Company
CS3247 Chem Seal
(Piper P/N 279-227)
Sealing Compound, Tite-Seal Radiator Specialty Co.
Gasket and Joint
Sealer PR 1321 B-1/2 Products Research
Company
Silicone Compound MIL-S-8660 DC-4, DC-6 Dow Corning
(MIL-C-21567) Compound
G-624 General Electric Co.
Silicone Products
Department
PAGE 18
Feb 28/07 91-10-00 8D8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Solvents Methylethyl Ketone Local Suppliers
Methylene Chloride
Acetone
Y2900 Union Carbide; Plastic
Division
Fed. Spec. PD 680 Local Supplier
Type I - Stoddard
Solvent
Type II - High Local Supplier
Temperature
Propeller Slip Ring CRC-2-26 Corrosion Reaction
Cleaning Solvent Consultants, Inc.
Toluol TT-M-261 Local Supplier
Trichlorethylene MIL-T-7003 Perm-A-Clor Dextrex Chemical
Industries, Inc.
Turco 4217 Turco Products, Inc.
Teflon Tape .003" x .5" wide/-1 Minnesota Mining and
Manufacturing Company
Shamban W.S. and Co.
.003" x .25" wide/-2 Johnson & Johnson, Inc.
Permacel Division
Thread Sealant MIL-T-27730 Permacel 412 Johnson & Johnson, Inc.
for High Pressure Permacel Division
Oxygen System
Vinyl Foam 1 in. x 1/8 in. 530 Series, Type I Norton Tape Division
Vinyl, Foam Tape 1/8 in. x 1 in. 501 Series, Type II Norton Tape Division
Vinyl, Black Plastic 2 in. x 9 mil. and/or
1 1/2 in. x 9 mil.
Corrosion Retardant MIL-C-16173 D LPS-3 Heavy Duty Holt Lloyd Corp.
Compounds Rust Inhibitor
(Piper P/N 197-508)
Metal Parts Protector Chemi-Cap. Chemical
Protector Flex Packaging Corp.
(Piper P/N 197-509)
NOTE: Take precautions when using MIL-G-23827 and engine oil. These lubricants contain chemicals
harmful to painted surfaces.
8D9 91-10-00 Feb

PAGE 19
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 20
Feb 28/07 91-10-00 8D10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
VENDOR CONTACT INFORMATION
A Corrosion Reaction H
Consultants, Inc.
American Gas and H. S. Bancroft Corp.
Limekin Pike
Chemical Co. LTD One Rockhill
Dresher, PA 19025
220 Pegasus Avenue Industrial Park
Northvale, NJ 07647 D Cherry Hill, NJ 08003
201-767-7300 609-854-8000
Dextrex Chemical
Amoco Oil Co. P. O. Box 501 Holt Lloyd Corp.
200 E. Randolph Drive Detroit, MI 48232 4647 Hugh Howell Rd.
Chicago, IL 60601 Tucker, GA 30084
Dow Corning Corporation
312-856-5111 404-934-7800
Alpha Molykote Plant
Armite Laboratories 64 Harvard Avenue J
1845-49 Randolph Street Stanford, CT 06902
Johnson & Johnson, Inc.
Los Angeles, CA 90001
Dukes Astronautics Co. Permacel Division
213-587-7744
7866 Deering Avenue 501 George Street
B Canoga Park, CA 91304 New Brunswick, NJ 08901
201-524-0400
BP Trading Limited DuPont Company
Moore Lane Finishes Div. K
Brittanic House DuPont Building
Kevlar Special Products
London E.C. 2 Wilmington, DE 19898
E.I. DuPont de Nemours & Co.,
England 302-774-1000
(Inc.)
Bray Oil Company E Textile Fibers Department
1925 N. Marianna Avenue Centre Road Building
Exxon Oil Company
Los Angeles, CA 98103 Wilmington, DE 19898
1251 Avenue of the Americas
213-268-6171 302-999-3156
New York, NY 10020
Burmah - Castrol Inc. 212-398-3093 L
30 Executive Avenue
F Lehigh - Tenneco Chemicals Co.,
Edison, NJ 08817
Inc.
201-287-3140 Fel-Pro Incorporated
Chestertown, MD 21620
7450 N. McCormick Blvd.
C 301-778-1991
Box C1103
California Texas Oil Corp., Skokie, IL 60076 Loctite Corporation
380 Madison Avenue 312-761-4500 777 N. Mountain Road
New York, NY 10017 Newington, CT 06111
Fiske Brothers
800-243-8160
Caltex Oil Products Co. Refining Company
In CT 800-842-0225
New York, NY 10020 120 Lockwood Street
Newark, NJ 07105
CEE BEE Chemical Co.
201-589-9510
9520 E. CEE BEE Drive
Box 400 G
Downey, CA 92041
General Electric Co.
Chemi-cap Silicone Products Dept.
Chemical Packaging Corp. Waterford, NY 12188
1100 N.W. 70th Street 518-237-3330
Ft. Lauderdale, FL 33309
305-665-9059
8D11 91-10-00 Feb

PAGE 21
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
VENDOR CONTACT INFORMATION
M R Sun Oil Company of Penna

5 Penn Center Plaza
Minnesota Mining and MFG Radiator Specialty Co.
Philadelphia, PA 19103
3M Center P.O. Box 34689
215-972-2000
St. Paul, MN 55144 Charlotte, NC 28234
612-733-1110 704-377-6555 T
Mirror Bright Polish Co., Inc. Ram Chemicals Taxacone Company
Irvine Industrial Complex 201 E. Alondra Blvd. P.O. Box 10823 TR
P.O. Box 17177 Gardena, CA 90248 Dallas, TX 75208
Irvin, CA 92713 213-321-0710
Texaco, Inc.
714-557-9200
Rockwell International 2000 Westchester Avenue
Mobil Oil Corporation 600 Grant Street White Plains, NY 10650
150 E. 42nd Street Pittsburgh, PA 15219 914-253-4000
New York, NY 10017 412-565-2000
Turco Products Inc.
212-883-4242
Royal Lubricants Company 24600 S. Main Street
Morton Inc. River Road Box 6200
7341 Anacona Ave E. Hanover, NJ 07936 Carson, CA 90749
Garden Grove, CA 92641 201-887-3100 213-835-8211
724-373-2837
S U
Fax 724-373-1913
Schnee Moorhead Chemicals, Inc. U.S. Gulf Corp.
N
P.O. Box 233
Shamban W.S. and Co.
Norton Tape Division Stoney Brook, NY 11790
1857 Centinela Avenue
Department 6610 212-683-9221
Santa Monica, CA 90404
Troy, NY 12181
213-397-2195 Unelko Corporation
518-273-0100
727 E. 110th Street
Shell Oil Company
P Chicago, IL 60628
909 Fannin St STE 700
Parker Seal Company Houston TX 77010-1016 Union Carbide; Plastic Div.
17325 Euclid Avenue 713-220-6697 270 Park Avenue
Cleveland, OH 44112 New York, NY 10017
Sinclair Refining Co.
216-531-3000 212-551-3763
600 Fifth Avenue
Permatex Co., Inc. New York, NY 10020 V
P.O. Box 11915
Socony Mobil Oil Co. Virginia Chemical
Newington, CT 06111
Washington 5, DC 20005 3340 W. Norfolk Rd.
203-527-5211
Portsmouth, VA 23703
Solar Compounds Corp.
Products Research Co. 703-484-5000
1201 W. Blancke Street
2919 Empire Avenue
Linden, NJ 07036 W
Burbank, CA 91504
201-862-2813
213-849-3992 Wooster Products, Inc.
Standard Oil of California 1000 Spruce Street
225 Bush Street Wooster, OH 44691
San Francisco, CA 94104 800-321-4936
415-894-7700 In OH 216-264-2844
PAGE 22
Feb 28/07 91-10-00 8D12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 12
ELECTRICAL WIRE CODING
CIRCUIT FUNCTION CIRCUITS

LETTER
A AUTOPILOT
C CONTROL SURFACE
E ENGINE INSTRUMENT
F FLIGHT INSTRUMENT
G LANDING GEAR
H HEATER - VENTILATING & DEICING
L LIGHTING
P POWER
Q FUEL & OIL
RP RADIO POWER
RZ RADIO AUDIO
J IGNITION
W WARNING
K STARTER
8D13 91-10-00 Feb

PAGE 23
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS
AIRCRAFT LOCATION SYMBOLS ADJUSTABILITY BATTERIES BUS
FS WL BL
+ -
GENERAL GENERAL MULTICELL
FUSELAGE STATION WATER LINE BUTT LINE
CABLES AND CONDUCTORS

P T
OR
SHIELDED
COAXIAL SHIELDED TWO SHIELDED
TWISTED TWISTED SINGLE
CABLE CONDUCTOR TWISTED
GROUPING OF LEADS PAIR TRIPLE CONDUCTOR
W / GROUND PAIR
CAPACITOR CIRCUIT BREAKERS

CONNECTORS
CURRENT LIMITER
A
CB PUSH PUSH-PULL SWITCH B
GENERAL BASIC BREAKER BREAKER BREAKER
RECEPTACLE PLUG MATED PLUG
& RECEPTACLE
DIODES FUSE GROUNDS
-A
GENERAL ZENER, ZENER,

UNIDIRECTIONAL BIDIRECTIONAL GROUND OR GROUND TO
OR
CIRCUIT CHASSIS
RETURN (WITH TERMINAL)
HORN HEATED ELEMENT SQUIB ELECTRIC LAMPS

IGNITER A*
INDICATOR LIGHT
(* LETTER DENOTES INCANDESCENT FLUORESCENT
COLOR - ASTERISK LAMP LAMP
IS NOT PART OF SYMBOL)
METER POLARITY POTENTIOMETER

MOTOR
A
M + -
* LETTER DENOTES THE
TYPE OF METER POSITIVE NEGATIVE
i.e. A = AMMETER
RESISTOR
SPLICE
TERMINAL BOARD
RELAY COIL RHEOSTAT
1
PERMANENT 2
3
4
DISCONNECT
TRANSISTORS
TRANSDUCER TRANSFORMERS
GENERAL PNP TYPE NPN TYPE
THERMAL ELEMENT COILS

(TRANSDUCER)
SINGLE PHASE
(3) WINDING NON SATURATING
W/CORE GENERAL GENERAL ADJUSTABLE
PAGE 24
Feb 28/07 91-10-00 8D14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS
PUSH BUTTON MOMENTARY OR
CONTACT SWITCH ASSEMBLIES SPRING RETURN
BASIC
(MAKE) (BREAK)
CLOSED OPEN TRANSFER CIRCUIT CIRCUIT TWO
CONTACT CONTACT CLOSING OPENING CIRCUIT
MOMENTARY OR LOCKING AND NON-LOCKING

NON-LOCKING
SPRING RETURN
OFF
OFF
(MAKE) (MAKE OR BREAK) (BREAK)
CIRCUIT CIRCUIT CIRCUIT TWO TRANSFER THREE POSITION THREE POSITION
CLOSING CLOSING OR OPENING OPENING CIRCUIT ONE POLE TWO POLE
TEMPERATURE ACTUATED
PRESSURE OR VACUUM ACTUATED SWITCH
NOTE: "t" symbol
shall be replaced by
data giving the
operating
V P OR OR temperature of the
t t t t device.
CLOSES ON OPENS ON
RISING PRESSURE RISING PRESSURE CLOSES ON OPENS ON
RISING TEMPERATURE RISING TEMPERATURE
t THERMAL SWITCHES
LIMIT SWITCH, DIRECTLY ACTUATED - SPRING RETURN
NORMALLY OPEN t
CLOSES ON
RISING TEMPERATURE
NORMALLY NORMALLY OPEN NORMALLY NORMALLY CLOSED t

OPEN HELD CLOSED CLOSED HELD OPEN
NORMALLY OPEN
NORMALLY CLOSED INTERNAL HEATER
OPENS ON SHOWN
RISING TEMPERATURE
SELECTOR OR MULTI - POSITION SWITCH EXAMPLE

ON-ON-ON SWITCH ACUTATION
TOGGLE IN THE TOGGLE IN THE

DOWN POSITION UP POSITION
ANY NUMBER OF TRANSMISSION PATHS MAY BE SHOWN
SWITCHES WITH TIME/DELAY FEATURE
ROTARY
SWITCH
NOTE: Viewed from end
OPEN CLOSED opposite control knob.
TIME-DELAY TIME-DELAY
CLOSING OPENING
OPEN CLOSED
TIME-DELAY TIME-DELAY
OPENING CLOSING
EXAMPLE OF
RELAY ARROW INDICATES DIRECTION
OF SWITCH OPERATION
IN WHICH CONTACT
ACTION IS DELAYED
8D15 91-10-00 Feb

PAGE 25
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 26
Feb 28/07 91-10-00 8D16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
8D17 91-10-00 Feb

PAGE 27
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 28
Feb 28/07 91-10-00 8D18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Item # Designation Description
1 B303 Blower
2 CB393 Circuit Breaker (3 Amp)
Avionics Cooling
8D19 91-21-20 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
AVIONICS
COOLING
P327 / J327 +
RC1A 22 1 1 WHITE
3A RC2A 22 2 2 BLACK M
CO-PILOT'S
CB393
-
CB PANEL
GB2 R BLOWER
B303
89801 AH 37.0
85508 L
101238 E
101301 C
104051 C
Effectivity
4636001 thru 4636313, Avionics Cooling
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 91-21-20 8D20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
AVIONICS
COOLING P327
J327
AV BUS
3A RC1A22 1 WHITE BLOWER

CB393
RC2A22N 2 BLACK B303
GB2-R
RED
BLACK
AV5
1 RED MUFFIN
2 BLACK FAN
104301 H/S 37.0
Effectivity
Avionics Cooling 4636299 and
8D21 91-21-20 FebPAGE 3

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
AVIONICS
COOLING
AV BUS #1
J 3C P AV4
CB391A22 6 RC1A22 1 WHT
3A B303 BLOWER
RC2A22N 2 BLK
CB391
GB2-R
RC2B22N
RC1B22
AV5
1 RED MUFFIN
2 BLACK FAN
105115 A 17.0
Effectivity Avionics Cooling

PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 91-21-20 8D22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1 CB333 3 Amp Circuit Breaker

2 A312 Cabin Pressurization Dump Solenoid
3 S310 Cabin Pressurization Dump Switch
4 K7 Squat Switch Relay
5 A314 Cabin Pressure Sensor
6 S103 Squat Switch Assembly
1
5 6
2
4
Cabin Pressurization
8D23 91-21-30 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
MAIN
BUS
CABIN PRESSURE DUMP P330

CP14A 22 A
3A DUMP
SOLENOID
1
CP17A 22 CP14B 22 B 2
DUMP
2
3 CP16B 22
CP15A 22N CP17B 22
1 CP15B 22 Y P301*
NORM
P387 J301
GB5-A CABIN 9 10 8 7 11 J387 Y P101*
PRESSURIZATION
SWITCH 3
(NORMAL POSITION) CP17C 20
2 4 A B
CP17D 20N
P104
6
J104 7 9
SQUAT SWITCH
RELAY K-7 4
9
7
8
LEFT MAIN
SQUAT
SWITCH
6
C NO
ANNUNCIATOR PNL. W6A 22 W6B 22N
(P329-24)
P
CABIN
ALTITUDE
SENSOR 5
89801 AH 29.0
Effectivity Cabin Pressurization

PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 91-21-30 8D24
8E1
CABIN PRESSURE
DUMP
P330
CP14A22 A
3A DUMP
CB333 SOLENOID
S310 CP14B22 B (GND TO DUMP)
3 DUMP P384 R384 A312
R384 P384 CP16B22 88
2
CP15B22N 77 CP15A22N CP17B22
1 NORM
GB5-A P384 R384
CP15C22 66 Y P301
CP17A22
CP15D22
CP16C22
J301 (J101*)

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Y P101

CABIN
PRESSURE * P387
16 14 9 10 8 7 11
SENSOR
CP17C20
J387
** CP17D20N
C NO (SEE
91-77-40,
P FIGURE 2) CR7
P104
W6B22N
7 7 9
W6A22
3 2 6 A B
J104
A314 11 10 K7 9
7
SQUAT SW S103
8
GB3-M
* 4636132 AND UP RELAY
91-21-30 FebPAGE
TO (SHN ON GND) L MAIN (SHN ON GND)

ANNUNCIATOR SQ SW
P329-4 ** (SHN WT ON WHEELS)
** SQUAT SW RELAY NO. 2
4636021 thru 4636374
(SHN WT ON WHEELS)
** 4636314 AND UP
85508 L 29.0
101238 E
101301 C
Effectivity
104051 C
104301 NEW/S
28/07
3
Feb 28/07
PAGE 4
4636375 and up
Effectivity
104 7 8
CABIN PRESSURE P J LEFT MAIN
C NO CP17C20 7
DUMP P329-4 W6A22 P101 9 SQUAT SW
MAIN BUS
CB333 Y CP17D20N 9
W6B22N
91-21-30
1E J101 S103
J P P
CB333A22 10 CABIN PRESS Y 387
3A P301 P J B
SENSOR CP17B22 7
CP14A22
A314 SQUAT SW
CR7
GB3-M K7
CRX RELAY #1
P330 CP17A22 8
A
A CP14B22 11
DUMP
CP16C22 9 6
SOLENOID
B CP15D22 10 2 10
A312 P903-11 E3U22 14

375 E3V22N 16 7
S310 J P

CP16B22 8 GB7-K 3 11
3
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CP15C22 6 M5B20 13

2
CP15A22N 7 M5D20 12 5
1
1 9
CABIN PRESS CP15B22N
D14A22N 2
DUMP SW GB5-A
8
GB7-L
P303-p D14B22 1 4 12
B
2
HOUR METER
NON-ESS BUS
SQUAT SW
CR8
CB332 CRX
K8
1D HOUR RELAY #2
J P M310 CP17C22 20
CB332A20 7 METER A
3A AV1F22 AV1G22 17
1
6
GB1-M TO JB3-A CP14C22 18 10
2
M6A20
GB3-B
OIL PRESSURE P402 P304
SWITCH 7
e e
NOT USED 3 11
M6B20 j j
E6B20 S S E6A22 P328-11
5
E6C20N
J402
P 1 9
AV1E22 23
8
A404 105115 A 7.0 SPLICE D4E22 24 12
4
8E2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

2 S333 Vent/Defog Switch
3 B402 Vent/Defog Blower
4 S344 Cabin Heat Switch
5 F401 100 Amp Current Limiter
6 K407 Cabin Heater Relay
7 A429 Temperature Sensors
8 F409 35 Amp Current Limiter
9 R401 Heater Assembly
2&4
6
3, 7 & 9
8&5
Vent Defogger and Cabin Heater

8E3 91-21-40 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Effectivity Vent Defogger and Cabin Heater
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 91-21-40 8E4
8E5
BATTERY BUS
CABIN
HEATER
EH1B10 EH1E10
35A
F409
R401
K407
B A
EH3D18 A
Vent Defogger and Cabin Heater

CABIN
HEATER H S
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
429 CR406

P J RELAY E S
18 1
B A A E
TEMPERATURE EH3E18N T M
EH3B18
SENSORS E B
CABIN HEAT A429
R L
SWITCH 392 P303 P401 Y
J P
10 EH3A18 Z Z P422
9 GB1B18 a a GB1C18 1 GRN
B402
EH1G10
8 J401 BLK
VENT/DEFOG VENT/DEFOG
SWITCH BLOWER
GB1A18
VENT/DEFOG
91-21-40 FebPAGE
MAIN BUS
2E
J P
CB357A18 3
10A
CB357 WITH AVIDYNE ENTEGRA OPTION ONLY
4636132 and up
101238 E 30.0
101301 C
104051 C
104301 NEW/S
Effectivity
105115 A 26.0
28/07
3
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 91-21-40 8E6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1 S321 Recirculation Blower Switch

2 B301 Left Blower Fan Motor
3 S322 Air Conditioner Switch
6 B302 Right Blower Fan Motor
7 A320 High Pressure Switch
8 K501 Condenser Blower Relay
9 K405 Compressor Clutch Assembly
10 A321 Low Pressure Switch
12 B501 Condenser Blower Motor Assembly
13 CR405 Diode
14 CR501 Diode
6 2
6 2
3
1
12
11 8
4 7 10
5
Vent Blowers and Air Conditioning

8E7 91-21-50 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Effectivity Vent Blowers and Air Conditioning
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 91-21-50 8E8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Vent Blowers and Air Conditioning Effectivity
8E9 91-21-50 FebPAGE 3
28/07
Feb 28/07
PAGE 4
4636187 thru 4636374

Effectivity AIR
COND BLOWER BLOWER
CABIN FANS SWITCH HI SW LO SW
91-21-50
101301 C 28.0
104051 C
P397 104301 NEW/S
AC1A16 1
15A P397
CB338 2
AC3B16
AIR CONDITIONER
CONTROL
P392
3 AC2B16 A3 A4 LEFT
AC1B20 1
TB303 BLOWER

5A 2 AC4A20 P397 (HI)
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CB339 1

P392 AC2D16 ORG
A2 A1
P333 B301 BLK
2
RED
AC2E20
1 AC11A16 AC3D16
P 3 (LOW)
AC2C16
AC3C16
HI 2
TB303 X1
3 (HI)
K502 1
P CR HI/LO ORG
LO 502 BLWR B302 BLK
P304 P402 RELAY 2
A320 J402 X2 RED
(LOW)
AC6C16 g g AC6D16 TB304 RIGHT
AC2F20N BLOWER
P419
J419
1 AC6E16 AC5A16
COMPRESSOR
K405 X1
CLUTCH CR K501
405 COND CR
501
BLWR
AIR CONDITIONER RELAY AC5B16N
POWER X2
A1 A2
AC7A12 WHT B501 BLK
25A AFT PRESS
CB340 BKHD FEEDTHRU
CONDENSOR
BLOWER
8E10
8E11
AIR
CABIN COND BLOWER BLOWER 105115 A 25.0
FANS SWITCH HI SW LO SW
1C P395
J P P J
CB338A16 3 AC1A16 1
15A
CB338 3
2
NON-ESS BUS
A3 A4
AC3B16 RIGHT
355 BLOWER
AC2B16 P J (HI)
AC2D16 1 ORG
AIR COND A2 A1 B302 BLK
CONTROL AC3D16 2 RED
AC2E20

1D 392 (LOW)
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
AC2C16
J P P J

AC1B20 K502
CB339A20 8 1 LEFT
AC3C16
5A 351 BLOWER
CB339 2 X1
P J (HI)
HI/LO 1 ORG
BLWR B301 BLK
AC4A20
CR502 2 RED
RELAY
(LOW)
X2
AC2F20N
P333
1 AC11A16 AC5A16
P P304 P402
HI 2
AC6A16 g g AC6D16
J402
P 419
LO J P
1 AC6E16 AC5A16 AIR COND
91-21-50 FebPAGE
X1
A320 BLOWER RLY
K405
CR405
CR501
AIR COND
POWER AC5B16N
NON-ESS BUS
K501 X2
1B
J P A1 A2
CB340A12 1 AC7A12WHT WHT B501 BLK
25A
4636375 and up
CB340 AC7A12BLU
CONDENSOR
AFT PRESS
BLOWER
BKHD FEEDTHRU
Effectivity
28/07
5
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 6
Feb 28/07 91-21-50 8E12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
8E13 91-22-10 FebPAGE 1

28/07
Feb 28/07
PAGE 2
4636375 and up
Effectivity
105130 D/F 6
P555 P564
TRIM MONITOR
TRIM POWER IN 2 WHT WHT 3
TRIM LAMP 4 BLU BLU 2
LAMP PWR 9 ORG ORG 1 TRIM
MASTER
91-22-10
FAIL LAMP 7 GRN GRN 1

GB3A-D 3 SWITCH
SHIELD GND 12 BLK
(SEE *) (TRIM CB) RED 2
TO P1E-3
P565
CENTER PEDESTAL
AUDIO 11 JB1-J (SEE **)
REF TRIM SONALERT
AUTO TRIM GND 10 BLK GB3A-A (SEE *) GB3A-B
BLK -
A/C GND 13
PANEL LIGHTS 1 BLU (SEE *)
LB2-C (SEE ***) +
+HORN 15
P559
TRIM SOL 6 WHT WHT 1
TRIM SERVO +DN 5 BLU BLU 3 TRIM
TRIM SERVO +UP 3 ORG ORG 4
SERVO
SHIELD GND 14 GRN 2
TRIM POWER OUT 8 9

MAINTENANCE MANUAL

55X A/P
P552
55X Autopilot
TRIM POWER IN 50
SOL + 33 WHT
MTR + DN 17 BLU
MTR + UP 32 ORG
SOL GND 48 GRN
SHIELD GND 47
P551 P318 P418 P461

PITCH SOLENOID GND 2 WHT Y Y WHT 2
PITCH MOTOR 21 BLU X X BLU 4
TRIM SWITCH DN 4 ORG W W ORG 8
PITCH SOLENOID 20 GRN V V GRN 1
PITCH MOTOR 3 WHT Z Z WHT 3
TRIM SWITCH UP 22 BLU a a BLU 6 PITCH
TRIM SWITCH COM. 23 ORG b b ORG 7 SERVO
SHIELD GND 40 P562 c c 9 YAW AMPLIFIER
R0LL MOTOR 1 1 WHT 4 P460
ROLL SOLENOID 18 BLU 1 WHT d d WHT 13
ROLL MOTOR 2 19 3 BLU e e BLU 4
ORG f f
ROLL SOL. GND 36 GRN 2 WHT 7
SHIELD GND 39 9 SHIELD GND g g BLU 10
h h ORG 8
(89848-072 SWITCH CAP) WHT ROLL SERVO i i
(8941K700 SWITCH) BLK P456
(YAW
3 WHT 1
ORG
BLU
WHT
SWITCH) YAW SERVO 4 BLU 2
1 ORG 3
P553 YAW POT 2 GRN 6
P553
1 A B 7 SHIELD GND 9 19
2 8 TO A/P C/B 2
JUMPER Y2A22 (SH 2)
3 5
3 (105117-011)
4 TAIL SECTION
4 BLU
P552 5 1
6 WHT
6
YAW ENABLE 3
AUDIO 27 JB1-N (SEE **)
REFERENCE DRAWING: * 91-24-30, FIG. 3
8E14
** 91-24-30, FIG. 4
INSTRUMENT PANEL *** 91-24-30, FIG. 5
8E15
105130 D/F 7
P561
55X A/P (P/N 39326-4) CO-PILOT C/W
P566
2
3 11
1 BLK BLK 3
P551 STALL WARN TRIGGER 5 AV2B22 TO JB14-B 8
4 6
2
7
A/P DISCONNECT 17 4
A/P+ 34 RED 5
9
RELAY
P552 P567
TRIM INTERRUPT 14 2 2
MAN TRIM +DN 15 6 6
4 4
1
1
MAN TRIM +UP 16 5 5
3 3
1 1 1 A
2 2 2 A

3 3 3 B
B
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4 4 4

5 5 5
BLK GB3A-P (SEE *)

6 6 6
DOWN POS CENTER POS
BLK
UP POS PILOT C/W
55X Autopilot
OFF FD FD/AP P554

MSTR
5
DETAIL A 9
8
11
CWS 5 2
CWS GND 6 6
BLK 3
RED 7
GB4A-H 4
(SEE *) LB4-F
L23W20 TO P565-2 TRIM
HRS
ADA RED
XPNDR
LT
P1E-3
T
DA
AL
YAW
FD ENABLE 8
L23WW20 D
RA
A
R PNDR
X
P551 YAW BLK BLK BLK
WHT
91-22-10 FebPAGE
AD
AH
RS GB3A-R
89848-071 CAP SWITCH (SEE *)
LIGHTS 15 BLU LB2-D (SEE ***) (8941K1005 SWITCH)
AIRFRAME GND 35 BLK GB3A-E (SEE *) A B AUTOPILOT
1
P558 TURN 2
WHT RED P1E-2
RATE GYRO TACH 5 E COORDINATOR RED 3
RATE GYRO REF 6 BLU D 4 S551
RATE GYRO SIG 24 ORG C 5
SHIELD GND GB2A-L (SEE *) BLK
41 6 Y2A22 TO P553-8
P557 BLK B
4636375 and up
TRANSDUCER A GB3A-C (SEE *) (SH 1)

TRANSDUCER GND 16 WHT 2 A/P-F/D
SEE
10 VDC 33 BLU 3 MASTER
TRANSDUCER SIG ORG 1 DETAIL A
50 SWITCH
SHIELD GND 46
Effectivity
T&B
INSTRUMENT PANEL RED REFERENCE DRAWING: * 91-24-30, FIG. 3
28/07
P1E-4
** 91-24-30, FIG. 4
*** 91-24-30, FIG. 5
3
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 91-22-10 8E16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1 CB376-1 10 Amp Circuit Breaker

2 CB374 2 Amp Circuit Breaker*
3 F402 5 Amp Fuse
F404 5 Amp Fuse
F405 5 Amp Fuse
4 K6 Ground Clearance Relay
5 S313 Ground Clearance Switch
Ground Clearance Switch Cap
CR6 Diode
* 3 Amp Circuit Breaker (4636001 thru 4636020 only)
4&5
1&2
3 4
Ground Clearance
8E17 91-23-00 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Effectivity Ground Clearance
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 91-23-00 8E18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Ground Clearance Effectivity
8E19 91-23-00 FebPAGE 3
28/07
Feb 28/07
PAGE 4
4636248 thru 4636374

Effectivity
AVI
BUS#1 P317
J317
COMM#1 104051 C 35.0
104301 B/S
91-23-00
10A RP8A18 10 18
CB376-1
AUDIO/AMP MKR
*
2A RP6A22 5 20
CB374 * 5A IN S/N'S 4636314 AND UP
NAV/GPS 1
5A RP16A20 15
CB375-1

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
NAV/GPS 1 GPS/N-1 12

COMM 1 COM-1
Ground Clearance
1 18
P401 P303 2
J401 6
5A F404/405 4
RP10A20 e e RP10B22 11 18
5A
1 5
RP7A20 E E RP7B22 13 20
5A 3
F402
BATT 2 RP12A22
BUS P366 K6
3 22
CR6
RP14A22
2
1 3
P366 4 20
GROUND 3
CLEARANCE
SEE
SWITCH 91-31-50,
FIGURE 1
SPKR/AUDIO AMP
(J317-2)
8E20
8E21
COMM #1
105115 A 21.0
J 3A P
10A CB376A18 1 RP8A18
CB376
AV BUS #1
AUDIO/AMP MKR
J 3B P
5A CB373A22 1 RP6A22
CB373 8 TO AUD1-13 (AVIONICS)
NAV/GPS 1 317
P J
10 18
5A CB375A20 3 RP16A20
5 20
CB375

15
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Ground Clearance
TO P1061-20 GPS/N-1
TO P43011-19 GPS/N-1 12
TO P43011-20 GPS/N-1
TO P43021-11 COMM 1 1 18
TO P43021-12 COMM 1
2
5A F404/405 6
J401
4
BTTY BUS
RP10A18 e e RP10B20 11 18
5A 5
1
RP7A18 E E RP7B20 13 20
3
91-23-00 FebPAGE
5A P401 P303
A
F402 3 22
2
RP12A22 CR6 K6
3
RP14A22
B
GROUND
4636375 and up
CLEARANCE
SWITCH
TO P3402-8 4 20
Effectivity
TO P3402-9
28/07
5
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 6
Feb 28/07 91-23-00 8E22
8E23
105130 B/F 24
XMDR
XM SATELITE RCVR 20 RED
XMP1
+28 VDC ACFT PWR 19 20 RED P3C-7

SWITCHED 28V DC ENABLED 18
P530 CIRCUIT BREAKER PANEL
MFD
ACFT GND 37 20 BLK

XMP1
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

RS232 1A TX 10 W 4 RS232 RX GB1A-N
B (SEE *)
RS232 1A RX 11 22 RS232 TX
XM Receiver
O
RS232 1A GND 12 23 RS232 GND
Figure 1
CABLE REF
XMRANT-01
RX ANTENNA
INSTRUMENT PANEL
XMP4
91-23-30 FebPAGE
4636375 and up
Effectivity

28/07
1
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 91-23-30 8E24
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
8F1 91-23-50 FebPAGE 1

28/07
Feb 28/07
PAGE 2
4636375 and up
Effectivity
105130 B/F 16
INSTRUMENT PANEL
GMA-340
P3402
11-33 VDC POWER INPUT 8 22RED AUDIO
91-23-50
11-33 VDC POWER INPUT 9 22RED AUDIO 22RED P317-4

POWER GROUND 10 22BLK GB1A-C (SEE *)
POWER GROUND 11 22BLK GB1A-D (SEE *)
14V LGT LO / 28V LGT LO 5 22BLK GB1A-E (SEE *)
14V LGT / 28V LGT LO 6
14V LGT / 28V LGT 7 22BLU LB2-H (SEE ***)
P34012
SPEAKER OUT 44 1
"SPKR" CONNECTOR
SPEAKER GND 43 2 C-PILOT PHONE
J34019
3
CO-PILOT PHONE AUDIO 4 WHT 2
PHONE AUDIO RETURN 2 BLU 1

GMA-340 Audio/Mkr/Intercom
C-PILOT MIC
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
J34020

4
CO-PILOT MIC AUDIO 32 WHT 3
CO-PILOT MIC KEY 33 BLU 2
CO-PILOT MIC RETURN 34 ORG 1
P566
CW15J 10 P/O COPILOT CONTROL WHEEL
CW16J 12 PILOT PHONE
J34016
3
PILOT PHONE AUDIO 16 WHT 2
PILOT AUDIO RETURN 1 BLU 1
TO P3402 SHIELDS ON SH 17
PILOT MIC
P3401 J34018
4
PILOT MIC AUDIO 33 WHT 3
PILOT MIC KEY 34 BLU 2
PILOT MIC RETURN 35 ORG 1
P554
CW15 10
P/O PILOT CONTROL WHEEL
CW16 12
JB CENTER RACK
UNMUTED AUDIO IN 31 JB2-T (SEE **)
TO P3401 SHIELDS ON SH 17
MKR BCN ANT 1
** 91-24-30, FIG. 4
8F2
*** 91-24-30, FIG. 5

8F3
105130 A/F 17
INSTRUMENT PANEL
GMA-340 P3402 PASSENGER AUDIO
PASSENGER #1
TO P3402 SHIELDS ON SH 16 J3403
PAX-1 MIC IN 35 WHT 2
PAX-1 MIC GND 36 BLU 3
1
J3407 PASSENGER #2
1
PASSENGER #3
J3406
1

J34011 PASSENGER #4
GMA-340 Audio/Mkr/Intercom
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

P34013
MUSIC #2 INPUT L 26 WHT 3
MUSIC #2 INPUT R 27 BLU 2
MUSIC #2 INPUT GND 28 ORG 1
P3401 PASSENGER #1
TO P3401 SHIELDS ON SH 16 J3404
PAX HDST RT 41 WHT 1
STEREO PAX HDST LT 40 BLU 2
PAX HDST GND 42 ORG 3
4
PASSENGER #2
J3409
WHT 1
BLU 2
ORG 3
4
91-23-50 FebPAGE
PASSENGER #3
J3405
WHT 1
BLU 2
ORG 3
4
PASSENGER #4
J34010
WHT 1
4636375 and up
BLU 2
ORG 3
4
Effectivity
28/07
3
Feb 28/07
PAGE 4
4636375 and up
Effectivity
105130 B/F 26
91-23-50
SUMMING AMP
M1019
AUD1
+28 VDC POWER 13 20RED

P3B-8
POWER GROUND 12 22BLK GB4A-A (SEE *)
CHASSIS GROUND 25 22BLK CIRCUIT BREAKER PANEL

GB4A-B (SEE *)

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
XPNDR#1 AUDIO IN 1 XPNDR #1 (JB1-D, SEE **)

SHIELD 2
Summing Amp
Figure 2
SUMMED AUDIO OUT 23 JB1-Y (SEE **)
SHIELD 24 JB2-K (SEE **)

** 91-24-30, FIG. 4
8F4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
8F5 91-23-50 FebPAGE 5

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 6
Feb 28/07 91-23-50 8F6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1 CB325, CB326 Circuit Breaker (3 Amp or 5 Amp)

4 CB302, CB303, CB308 Circuit Breaker (70 Amp or 80 Amp)
6 F408 Fuse (5 Amp)
7 CB304, CB305 Circuit Breaker (40 Amp)
8 S314 Radio Master Switch
9 K310, K315 Radio Master Contactor
10 A334, A335 Voltage Regulator
11 Day Night Switch
12 J420 External Power Receptacle
13 Alternator (1)
14 K403 External Power Contactor
15 (2)
16 (2)
17 Battery
18 K401 Battery Contactor
19 S315 Battery Switch
20 (2)
21 S316, S323 Alternator Switch
22 R304, R305 Shunt
23 (2)
24 CB395 Avionics Bus Tie Circuit Breaker (25 Amp)
(1) Alternators supplied by Textron Lycoming
(2) See Power Monitor and Meters
1&3
9 & 24
13 13
2, 4, 5, 6, & 7 11, 19, & 21
14 & 18 17 12 10 & 22
Power Distribution and Control

8F7 91-24-30 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Effectivity Power Distribution and Control
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 91-24-30 8F8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Power Distribution and Control Effectivity
8F9 91-24-30 FebPAGE 3
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Effectivity Power Distribution and Control
PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 91-24-30 8F10
8F11
101301 C 2.0
104051 C ALT#1 ALT#2
104301 E/S MASTER MASTER
R383 P383 P383 R383
6 5 5 6
P32C20L 3 3 P32B20L P32A20 P32B20R 6 6 P32C20R
J359 J360
P359 P383 R383 R383 P383 P360
R383 P383 P383 R383
3 2 2 3
RED 1 P8B20L 5 5 P8A20L P7A20L 4 4 7 7 P7A20R P8A20R 8 8 P8B20R 1 RED
S316 S323
GRN 5 5 GRN
P7B20R
P7B20L
TO P384-3 TO P384-4
A GRY 4 P8D20L P8D20R 4 GRY A
VOLT ANNUN-RELAY ANNUN-RELAY VOLT
3 LAV 9 (SEE 91-31-50) CB CB (SEE 91-31-50) 9 LAV 3
REG 325 326 REG
3
#1
YEL 6 WHT ****5A
5A
WHT 6 YEL
#2
3
4 ORN 7 RED RED 7 ORN 5
P17C6L P17C6R
MAIN BUS
BLU 2 CR331L R308 CR331R 2 BLU
15A
BRN 3 CB349 CB 395 3 BRN
BLK 8 8 BLK
RP1B8L AV #1 AV #2 RP1B8R
P17B6R
P17B6L **

P365 RADIO
(TO A/P INSTL.)

MASTER K315
AFCSGND22 3
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
BLK P365 BLK
P35A20R
P30A20R
P31A20R
SW
P31A20L
P30A20L
P35A20L
K310

5 RP3A22R
OFF 1 3 4 6
2
ON * 1A CR315
RP3A22L 5
2
J401
CR310 1A * P365 4
P365
RP4A22RN
J402
1 RP4A22LN
P31B20L d
_ d
_ GB1-R d
_ d
_ P31B20R
NON-ESS P5A8 P365
P30B20L _f _f GB2-N b
_ b
_ P30B20R
P401 P303 RP1A8L RP1A8R P304 P402
50mv CB CB CB CB CB CB CB 50mv
SHUNT 1A 302 306 304 308 305 307 303 1A SHUNT
F2
+ ***P16A6L R304 80A 80A 40A 70A 40A 80A 80A R305 *** +
F2
AUX P17A6L P17A6R P16A6R AUX
ALT TIE BUS ALT
#1 TO ANNUN #2
F1 CB301 5A F1
INOP RELAY
F402
F403
F405
F406
F407
F404
***
P4A6
F307 CABIN 80A
EH1B10 FUSES
2A HEAT
91-24-30 FebPAGE
F409
P16A6RN
P16A18RN
35A CR499
EXT PWR BATTERY BATT BUS
P16A6LN
P16A18LN
CONTACTOR F401 CONTACTOR P1C18

P22A20 250A
A2 A1
P20A6 P1A6 P1B6N
J420 P21A6N CR498
4636187 thru 4636374
X1
TO
EXTERNAL CR402 CR CR
403 STARTER 401 P401 P303
POWER J401 R383 P383
RECEPTACLE X2
P22A20N P2A20 _a _a P2B22 1 1 P2C22
K403 K401
5A R383 P383 S315
3 2
(SEE 91-25-10, FIGURE 4) P2E22N 2 2 P2D22
Effectivity
BATTERY
* 1A FUSE IN S/N'S 4636248 AND UP F408
MASTER
** S/N'S 4636187 THRU 4636247 ONLY STEREO GB5-H
28/07
*** FORWARD PRESSURE BULKHEAD FEEDTHRU (3 PLACES)

**** 3A FUSE IN S/N'S 4636187 THRU 4636247 ONLY
5
Feb 28/07
PAGE 6
4636375 and up
Effectivity
ALT#2
ALT NO.2
MASTER 105115 A 2.0
1D 383 S323
J P J P 2 3
5A CB326A20 5 P7B20R 7 P7A20R P8A20R
5 6
91-24-30
CB326 P32B20R
ALT NO.1 5 6
P32A20 P32B20L
2 3
5A CB325A20 4 P7B20L 4 P7A20L P8A20L
S316
CB325 ALT#1
MAIN BUS
R308 MASTER
LTNG P
CB349A16
PROT 5 3 6 8 383
J 359 P J P
360
J
RED 1 P8B20L P8B20R 1 RED
15A
CB349 GRN 5 P32C20L P32C20R 5 GRN
GRY 4 P8D20L P8D20R 4 GRY

VOLTAGE VOLTAGE
LAV 9 9 LAV
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
REGULATOR YEL 6 6 YEL REGULATOR
P35A20L
P35A20R

TO P384-3
TO P384-4
#1 ORN 7 7 ORN #2
BLU 2 2 BLU
BRN 3 3 BRN
P17C6R
P17C6L
A334 BLK 8 8 BLK A335
P30A20R
P31A20R
P31A20L
P30A20L
P11B22
P11A22
P12A22
P12B22
P11C22N 1A 1A P12C22N
F309 F310
J401 J402
P35B20L
P35B20R
CR331R CR331L P31B20L d d d d P31B20R
P30B20L f f b b P30B20R
5A P401 P303 P304 P402 5A
F411 F412
F2 50mV 50mV F2
+ * * +
AUX P16A6L SHUNT SHUNT P16A6R AUX
ALT R304 R305 ALT
#1 P16A6LN P16A6RN #2
P17A6R
F1 F1
P17A6L
P16A18LN 5A F302 5A F304 P16A18RN
F301 5A F303 5A
TO P901-7 P5B20WHT 2 P5A18L P5A18R 2 P5C20WHT TO P902-7

TO P901-25 P5B20BLU 1 P6A18L CB 80A 80A CB P6A18R 1 P5C20BLU TO P902-25
J P 302 303 P J
307 315
TIE BUS
CB 80A 80A CB
306 307 * FORWARD PRESSURE BULKHEAD FEEDTHRU
P17B6L
8F12
P17B6R
8F13
CB301 35A F409

P4A6 * EH1B10 TO CABIN HEATER RELAY
80A
5A F416 J401
SHUNT
P6C20 P6D20 S S P6E20BLU TO P901-24
50mV
R403
5A F415
P6A20 P6B20 R R P6E20WHT TO P901-6
P401 P303
EXT PWR
250A F401 CONTACTOR P22A20
P20A6
P21A6N J420
CR402
EXTERNAL
TO STARTER CR403
CONTACTOR POWER
P22A20N RECEPTACLE

K403
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

CR499
BATTERY
CONTACTOR P1C18 BTTY BUS
TIE BUS
A2 A1
P1A6 P1B6N
F408 CR498
TO P402-h ST1A20 X1 P401 P303

P2A20 A A P2B22 1 P2C22 S315
5A CR401
2 3
J401 P2E22N 2 P2D22
X2 J P BATTERY
383
K401 GB5-H MASTER
CB304
K310
RP1A8L RP1B8L AV #1 BUS
40A A3 A4
CB305 X1
K315 25A CB393
CR310
91-24-30 FebPAGE
RP1A8R
40A A4 A3
1A RADIO MASTER AV #2 BUS
X2
SWITCH
CB308 CR315
X2 1 S365
1A 2
70A RP3A22L 3
X1
RP3A22R
NON-ESS
4636375 and up
RP4A22RN 4
P5A8 5
RP4A22LN
GB1-R 6
Effectivity
GB2-N
28/07
* FORWARD PRESSURE BULKHEAD FEEDTHRU RP1B8R 105115 A 2.1

7
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 8
Feb 28/07 91-24-30 8F14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Item # Designation Part Number Description
1 - 3*
5*
6 F408 Fuse (5 Amp)
7 - 14*
15 M311, M312 Ammeters
16 M301 Volt Meter
17 - 19*
20 K323 Day/Night (Bright Dim) Relay
21*
22 R304, R305 Shunt
23 F301 - F304 Fuse (5 Amp)
* See Power Distribution and Control
4&6 15 & 16 20
22 & 23
Power Monitor and Meters Effectivity

8F15 91-24-30 FebPAGE 9

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Effectivity Power Monitor and Meters
PAGE 10
Feb 28/07 91-24-30 8F16
8F17
TO ANNUNCIATOR
LOW GRN X P34B20 (P329-6)
VOLTAGE 101238 E 2.1
MONITOR BLK X P34C20N 101301 C
104051 C
A333 RED P34A20
F306
1A GB4-A
TO ALTERNATOR 50mv 50mv TO ALTERNATOR
NO. 1 SHUNT SHUNT NO. 2
R304 R305
P16A6L P17A6L P17A6R P16A6R
F301 F304
5A TIE BUS 5A
F302 F303
5A 5A
F308 P5A18R
F310
5A F305 5A
5A P6A18R
P5A18L
P6A18L

A339A A339B A339C
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Power Monitor and Meters

2 1 P10B20 1 2 P11B20 1 2
P307 P315
P11C20N
P10C20N
4 3 4 3 3 4
2 1 1 2
TO DAY / NIGHT
SWITCH
P5G20
P5F20N
2 1 1 2
P5E20
P5J20
P11D20
P11E20
P10D20
(SEE 91-31-50)
P10E20
J307 M311 M301 M312 J315

K K K
P10M20
P11L20
P6A20
P10L20 L L L
9 9 9
P5K20N
P5C20
P5D20
J380
8 8 8
5 5 5
H H H
P11M20
P380
P11G20
P5H20
P11F20
B B B
P10G20
P10F20
91-24-30 Feb
1 1 1
GB4-K
P6B20
4636001 thru 4636313,
CR323 B2 C2 D2
X2 X1
P6C20N
B1 B3 C1 C3 D1 D3
less 4636299
BRT/DIM
GB1-A RELAY
Effectivity
PAGE 11
K323 R314 R315 R316

28/07
Feb 28/07
PAGE 12
4636314 and up
4636299 and
Effectivity
TO ALTERNATOR 50mv 50mv TO ALTERNATOR
NO. 1 SHUNT SHUNT NO. 2
R304 R305
P16A6L P17A6L P17A6R P16A6R
F301 80A 80A F304
5A TIE BUS 5A
F302 F303
91-24-30
5A 5A
F399 5A
P5J20 C/B INSTALLED ON PILOTS

FWD C/B PANEL
CB327
1A
P6A18L 1 1 1 1 P6A18R

P5A18L 2 2 2 2 P5A18R
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Power Monitor and Meters

P315
J315
P307
J307
P6C20
P6D20
P5C20
P5B20
P5E20
P5G20 TO P329-6, LOW BUS VOLTAGE ANNUNCIATOR
TO TB2 (SEE 91-31-50, FIGURE 1.)
L28C20
(SEE 91-33-10, FIGURE 5.)
P399 5 1 2 8 4 3 7 9 6
P5H20N
+28VDC LIGHTING HIGH
ALTNR 1 MV HIGH
ALTNR 1 MV LOW
28 VDC INPUT & SIGNAL IN HI
ALTNR 2 MV LOW
ALTNR 2 MV HIGH
PWR INPUT RETURN & SIGNAL INPUT LO

LIGHTING RETURN & CASE GND
LO BUS MONITOR
P5F20N
GB4-A
GB1-A
8F18
104301 D/S 2.1

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
8F19 91-24-30 Feb

PAGE 13
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GB1A 105130 B/F 28
A GI-106A (P1061-21, 91-34-50, FIGURE 1)

B GI-106A (1061P-18, 91-34-50, FIGURE 1)
C GMA-340 (P3402-10, 91-23-50, FIGURE 1)
D GMA-340 (P3402-11, 91-23-50, FIGURE 1)
E GMA-340 (P3402-5 & 6, 91-23-50, FIGURE 1)
F KR-87 (P871-S, 91-34-50, FIGURE 4)
H KR-87 (P871-E, H, M, P & R, 91-34-50, FIGURE 4)
J
K
L
M IHAS ANNUN (P411-9, 21, & 22, 91-34-40, FIGURE 3)
N XM RECEIVER (XMP1-37, 91-34-40, FIGURE 4)
P DC COUPLER (P501-8, 91-34-50, FIGURE 5)
R
LH/FWD
GB2A
A ADAHRS SW (SW-2, 91-34-20, FIGURE 4)

B PFD #1 (A2, 91-34-20, FIGURE 4)
C PFD #1 (A2, 91-34-20, FIGURE 4)
D PFD #1 (D1, 91-34-20, FIGURE 4)
E PFD #1 (A4, 91-34-20, FIGURE 4)
F PFD #1 (A4, 91-34-20, FIGURE 4)
H PFD #1 (D2, 91-34-20, FIGURE 4)
J GNS430 #1 (P43011-21, 91-34-50, FIGURE 1)
K GNS430 #1 (P43011-22, 91-34-50, FIGURE 1)
L TURN COOR (P558-B, 91-22-10, FIGURE 1)
M GNS430 #1 (P43011-77, 91-34-50, FIGURE 1)
N GNS430 #1 (P43011-40 & 78, 91-34-50, FIGURE 1)
P GTX-330 #1 (P3301-27, 91-34-50, FIGURE 2)
R XPDR SW (SW-2, 91-34-50, FIGURE 2)
LH/FWD
GB3A
A TRIM MONITOR (P555-10 &13, 91-22-10, FIGURE 1)

B TRIM HORN (GND, 91-22-10, FIGURE 1)
C SWITCH LIGHT GND (A/P MAS SW-5, 91-22-10, FIGURE 1)
D TRIM MASTER SW (P565-3, 91-22-10, FIGURE 1)
E AUTOPILOT (P551-35, 91-22-10, FIGURE 1)
F PFD #2 (A2, 91-34-20, FIGURE 4)
H PFD #2 (A2, 91-34-20, FIGURE 4)
J PFD #2 (D3, 91-34-20, FIGURE 4)
K PFD #2 (A4, 91-34-20, FIGURE 4)
L PFD #2 (A4, 91-34-20, FIGURE 4)
M PFD #2 (D4, 91-34-20, FIGURE 4)
N MFD (P530-60, 61, & 62, 91-34-20, FIGURE 5)
P TRIM RELAY GND (P567-B, 91-22-10, FIGURE 1)
R SWITCH LIGHT GND (A/P MAS SW-B, 91-22-10, FIGURE 1)
RH/FWD
Effectivity Ground Blocks

PAGE 14
Feb 28/07 91-24-30 8F20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
105130 B/F 28
GB4A
A SUMMING AMP (AUD1-12, 91-22-10, FIGURE 1)

B SUMMING AMP (AUD1-25, 91-22-10, FIGURE 1)
C GNS430 #2 P43012-21 (91-34-50, FIGURE 1)
D GNS430 #2 P43012-22 (91-34-50, FIGURE 1)
E JB6-Z (91-24-30, FIGURE 4)
F TAS SW (91-34-40, FIGURE 3)
H CONTROL WHEEL (P554-3, 91-22-10, FIGURE 1)
J GNS430 #2 (P43012-77, 91-34-50, FIGURE 1)
K GNS430 #2 (P43012-40 & 78, 91-34-50, FIGURE 1)
L CONTROL INHIBIT (SW-3, 91-34-20, FIGURE 4)
M
N
P
R
RH/FWD
GB5A
A KN-63 (P631-1 & A, 91-34-50, FIGURE 3)

B WX-500 (P5001-5, 91-34-40, FIGURE 2)
C KMH-820 (P10-1, 91-34-40, FIGURE 3)
D KMH-820 (P10-127 & 128, 91-34-40, FIGURE 3)
E TDIAG (P8202-5, 91-34-40, FIGURE 3)
F EDIAG (P8203-5, 91-34-40, FIGURE 3)
H KMH-820 (P10-SHIELD, 91-34-40, FIGURE 3)
J KMH-820 (P10-SHIELD, 91-34-40, FIGURE 3)
K KMH-820 (P10-84, 91-34-40, FIGURE 3)
L KMH-820 (P10-83, 91-34-40, FIGURE 3)
M KRA10A (P1001-11, 91-34-40, FIGURE 4)
N
P
R
AFT
Ground Blocks Effectivity

8F21 91-24-30 Feb

PAGE 15
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
JB1
105130 E/F 29
A GTX-330 #1 (P3301-15, 91-34-50, FIGURE 2)

B
C
D SUMMING AMP (AUD1-1, 91-34-50, FIGURE 5)
E
F
G
H
J TRIM MONITOR (P555-11, 91-22-10, FIGURE 1)
K
L
M
N 55X A/P (P552-27, 91-22-10, FIGURE 1)
P
R
S
T
W
Y SUMMING AMP (AUD1-23, 91-34-50, FIGURE 5)
Z
CTJ1-22E-05E (REF) 330 OHM 1/4 WATT
RESISTOR (3 REQ)
JB2
AUDIO ALERTS
N
J
E
A
T GMA-340 (P3401-31, 91-23-50, FIGURE 1)
B
F
K
P
W
CTJ1-22E-04F (REF)
JB3
A CP14C22 SQUAT SW GND (P387-18 FROM 105117 ELECTRICAL HARNESS)

B GTX-330 #1 (P3301-17) OR GTX-330 #1 & #2 (P3302-17) (91-34-50, FIGURE 2)
C KMH-820 (P10-4, 91-34-40, FIGURE 3)
D
E
F
G
H
J KN-63 (P631-K, 91-34-50, FIGURE 3)
K KMH-820 (P10-68, 91-34-40, FIGURE 3)
L GTX-330 #1 (P3301-31) OR GTX-330 #1 & #2 (P3302-31) (91-34-50, FIGURE 2)
M
N KN-63 (SUPPRESSION SHIELD, 91-34-50, FIGURE 3)
P KMH-820 (SUPPRESSION SHIELD, 91-34-40, FIGURE 3)
R GTX-330 #1 (SUPPRESSION SHIELD) OR
S GTX-330 #1 & #2 (SUPPRESSION SHIELD), (91-34-50, FIGURE 2)
CTJ1-22E-05E (REF)
Effectivity Junction Blocks

PAGE 16
Feb 28/07 91-24-30 8F22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
JB4
A PFD #1 (P7321-68, 91-34-20, FIGURE 4) 105130 E/F 29

B KMH-820 (P10-62, 91-34-40, FIGURE 3)
C
D
E PFD #1 (P7321-67, 91-34-20, FIGURE 4)
F KMH-820 (P10-63, 91-34-40, FIGURE 3)
G
H
J #2 GNS 430 (P43012-46, 91-34-50, FIGURE 1)
K GTX-330 #2 (P3302-32, 91-34-50, FIGURE 2)
L
M
N #2 GNS 430 (P43012-47, 91-34-50, FIGURE 1)
P GTX-330 #2 (P3302-35, 91-34-50, FIGURE 2)
R
S
CTJ1-22E-05E (REF)
JB5
A PFD #1 (P7321-22, 91-34-20, FIGURE 4)

E KMH-820 (P10-60,91-34-50, FIGURE 2)(-100 ONLY)
N XP 1/2 -1 (91-34-50, FIGURE 2)(-107 ONLY)
J
T
B PFD #1 (P7321-21, 91-34-20, FIGURE 4)
F KMH-820 (P10-61, 91-34-50, FIGURE 2)(-100 ONLY)
K XP 1/2 -2 (91-34-50, FIGURE 2)(-107 ONLY)
P
W
C PFD #2 (P7322-22, 91-34-20, FIGURE 4)
G XP 1/2 -5 (91-34-50, FIGURE 2)(-107 ONLY)
L
R
Y
D PFD #2 (P7322-21, 91-34-20, FIGURE 4)
H XP 1/2 -6 (91-34-50, FIGURE 2)(-107 ONLY)
M
S
Z
CTJ1-22E-04F (REF)
JB6
A GTX #1 (P3301-30) OR GTX-330 #1 & #2 (P3302-30), (91-34-50, FIGURE 2)

B
C
D
E GTX #1 (P3301-28) OR GTX-330 #1 & #2 (P3302-28), (91-34-50, FIGURE 2)
F
G
H
J MFD (P530-8, 91-34-20, FIGURE 5)
K KMH-820 (P10-54, 91-34-40, FIGURE 3)
L
M
N MFD (P530-28, 91-34-20, FIGURE 5)
P KMH-820 (P10-55, 91-34-40, FIGURE 3)
R
S
T GTX-330 #1 (P3301-46, 91-34-50, FIGURE 2)
W GTX-330 #2 (P3302-46, 91-34-50, FIGURE 2)
Y
Z GB4A-E (91-24-30, FIGURE 3)
CTJ1-22E-05E (REF)
Junction Blocks Effectivity

8F23 91-24-30 Feb

PAGE 17
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
105130 A/F 30
LB2
AVIONICS LIGHTS
A L28C20 (P313-F)
B RAD ALT
C TRIM MON
D AUTOPILOT
E GNS-430 #1
F GNS-430 #2
G GI-106A
H GMA-340
J XPNDR #1
K XPNDR #2
L ADF RECEIVER
M ADF IND
CTJ1-20E-01B (REF)
LB3
AVIONICS LIGHTS
A L28D20 (P313-F)
B
C DME
D KMH-820 ANNUN
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
M
CTJ1-20E-01B (REF)
LB4
SWITCH LIGHTS
A L33A20
B L23S20
C L23T22
L23V22
D L23P22
E L23Y22 TO P317-19
G L23Z22 TO P317-28
H PFD #1 (P730-15, 91-34-20, FIGURE 4)
J MFD (P530-18, 91-34-20, FIGURE 5)
K PFD #2 (P730-15, 91-34-20, FIGURE 4)
CTJ1-20E-02C (REF)
Effectivity Lighting Blocks

PAGE 18
Feb 28/07 91-24-30 8F24
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
8G1 91-25-10 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1 R307 Cigar Lighter (1)

or
R307 Power Point (2)
2 F403 5 Amp Fuse
(1) - 4636001 thru 46360247 only

(2) - 4636248 and up
Effectivity Cigar Lighter / Power Point

PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 91-25-10 8G2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CIGAR
CIGAR LIGHTER
LIGHTER P401 / P303 ASSEMBLY
J401
CL6A 18 c c CL6B 18
1 2
5A R 307
BATTERY
BUS F403
89801 AH 41.0
85508 L
101238 E 46.0 S/N'S 4636001 THRU 4636247 ONLY
101301 C
POWER POINT
P401 / P303 RECEPTACLE
J401
1
CL6A 18 c c CL6B 18
5A
BATTERY
BUS F403 CL6C 18N
2
R 307
GB-3A
104051 C 46.0 S/N'S 4636248 AND UP

104301 NEW/S
Cigar Lighter / Power Point Effectivity

8G3 91-25-10 FebPAGE 3

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1 F406 5 Amp Fuse

2 LC-2 Digital Quartz Clock
3 LC-6 Digital Quartz Clock
2 or 3
Effectivity Electric and Digital Clocks

PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 91-25-10 8G4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
89801 AH 39.0/39.1
P357
J357
6 6
BATTERY
BUSS P401 / P303 CL3A 20N 4 4
J401 ELEC.
GB5-B 1 1 CLOCK
CL1A 20 h h CL1B 20 3 3
5A 1 5 5
F406 2 2
STANDARD
DIGITAL CLOCK (OPTIONAL)
P357
J357
TO 91-33-10,
FIGURE 3, CL4A 20 6
BATTERY TAPER BLOCK 1
BUSS P401 / P303 CL3A 20N 4
J401 GB5-B 1 LC-2
CLOCK
CL1A 20 h h CL1B 20 3
2
5A 1 5
F406 2
P357
J357
TO 91-33-10,
FIGURE 3, CL4A 20 6
BATTERY TAPER BLOCK 1
BUSS P401 / P303 CL3A 20N 4
J401 GB5-B 1 LC-6
CLOCK
CL1A 20 h h CL1B 20 3
3
5A 1 5
F406 13 CL5A 22 2 +
P387 TO HOUR METER

M5B 22
J387
Electric and Digital Clocks Effectivity

8G5 91-25-10 FebPAGE 5

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1 F406 Fuse (5 Amp)

2 CB394 Circuit Breaker (1.5 Amp)
3 Digital Quartz Clock
2&3
Effectivity Digital Voice Recorder Clock

PAGE 6
Feb 28/07 91-25-10 8G6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
S/N'S 4636021 THRU 4636247 ONLY
CLOCK
DVR-300i-XT
85508 L 33.0
101238 E
101301 C
104051 C 1 GROUND
104301 NEW/S
2 BATT BUS PWR
6 AUDIO LO
7 AUDIO OUT
9 AVI BUS PWR
13 AUDIO LO
14 AUDIO IN
S/N'S 4636248 AND UP
CLOCK
DVR-300i-XT
BATT
BUS
F406 P401 P303 1 GROUND
CL1A20 h
_ h
_ CL1B20 2 BATT BUS PWR
5A PWR TO ELT-110-4 (SEE 25-60-00, FIGURE 2)
PILOT
PHONE JACK 1A
AUDIO LO
CL3A22S
7 AUDIO OUT
CL5A20 9 AVI BUS PWR

AVIONICS 1.5A
BUS CB394 AUDIO LO
CL4A22S
14 AUDIO IN
CL-P1
3 1 2
3 1 2
CL-J1
AUDIO/INTERCOM
3 AUDIO OUT
22 AUDIO LO
(REF. AUDIO/INTERCOM HARNESS)
Digital Voice Recorder Clock Effectivity

8G7 91-25-10 FebPAGE 7

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1 F408 5 Amp Fuse
Stereo (Optional)
PAGE 8
Feb 28/07 91-25-10 8G8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
P402 89801 AH 42.0

BATTERY J402
BUS P304
P1
ST1A 20 h h ST1B 20 1
5A
F408 P2
SEE 91-24-30, ST1B 20N BLK 1
FIGURE 1
S/N'S 4636001 THRU 4636020 ONLY
P402 P304 85508 E/L 42.0

J402
TO BATTERY BUSS STIA20 h _

_ h
(91-24-30, FIGURE 1) 5A
F408
P1 (28V) (14V)
ST1B20 RED RED RED
BLACK BLACK
ST1B20N BLACK
(BLK) P2
YEL
AM / FM RED
RED 1 1
CD
BLACK 2 2 BLACK
PLAYER
STEREO CONSOLE
S/N'S 4636021 THRU 4636076 ONLY
Stereo (Optional) Effectivity

8G9 91-25-10 FebPAGE 9

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
85508 L
101238 E 42.0
P402 P304 101301 C
104051 C
J402 104301 NEW/S 41.0

_ h
(91-24-30, FIGURE 1) 5A
F408
P1 (28V) (14V)
ST1B20 RED RED 1 1 RED
2 2 WHITE
BLACK 3 3 BLACK
ST1B20N BLACK
(BLK) P2
YEL
AM / FM RED
RED 1 1
CD
BLACK 2 2 BLACK
PLAYER
STEREO CONSOLE
Effectivity Stereo (Optional)

PAGE 10
Feb 28/07 91-25-10 8G10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
P402 P304 105115 A 31.0

J402

_ h
(91-24-30, FIGURE 1) 5A
F408
CONTROLLER
A B C D E F
POWER
(28V) (14V)
SWITCH
P1
ST1B20 RED RED 1 1 RED
2 2 WHITE
BLACK 3 3 BLACK
GROUND POINT
YEL (LARGE)
YEL (SMALL)
RED 1 1 RED
BLACK 2 2 BLACK
CD PLAYER
STEREO CONSOLE
Stereo (Optional) Effectivity

8G11 91-25-10 Feb

PAGE 11
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 12
Feb 28/07 91-25-10 8G12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

2 S347 Stall Test Switch
4 S349, S350 Actuator Switch (2 each)
5 S348 Throttle Lever Switch Assembly
6 A305 Horn - Dual Warn Unit
7 K4 Relay Assembly
8 Lift Computer
9 Lift Transducer
7
2
9
6
1 3
8
Stall Detection and Warning

8G13 91-27-30 FebPAGE 1

28/07
Feb 28/07
PAGE 2
less 4636299
4636001 thru 4636313,
Effectivity
P376 STALL DETECT
10 S1A22 3A CB323
28VDC PWR
91-27-30
1
P301 P101 J105 AIR
J101 P105 FLOW L
24 WHT S S WHT B I
PRIMARY S2B22 S3B20 F
25 WH/BL b b WH/BL E T
T
26 WHT d d WHT A R
A
SECONDARY 27 S2E22 WH/BL f f WH/BL S3E20 D N
28 WH/ORG h h WH/ORG C S
D
L U
SELF TEST 16 S2G22 j j S3G20 F

I C
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
F E

11
T R
10
C ENABLE 7 S2H22 K K S3H20 10 S103
O 1 2 12
M TEST SW 8 S2M22 S2M22N S3H20N 12 (CLOSED IN AIR)
S347
P L. MAIN
STALL TEST P104
U GB4-C J348 SQUAT SW
T THROTTLE POS 3 S2N22 6
E PWR
NC ON S348
R EXECUTE 4 S2T22 S2L22 4
THROTTLE
P382 5 C LEVER SW
FLAPS C S350 NO G4H22N
S2S22 3 PWR GB4-F
(8°)
OFF
FULL 6 S2R22 2 C A305
S349 GEAR
10°/20° 5 S2P22 1 (25°) HORN
STALL
WARN DEVICE 12 S2J22 HORN
FAIL 9 S2Z22 S2A22
P317
J317 25 27 89801 AH 25.0
TO 85508 L
ANNUNCIATOR 101238 E
101301 C
COMPUTER (P329-3) * 104051 C
FAIL LOGIC (SEE 91-31-50)
8G14
RELAY K4
GND * (P329-31) IN S/N'S 4636001 THRU 4636131 ONLY
8G15
STALL DETECT
P376 104301 R/S 25.0
10 S1A22 3A CB323
28VDC PWR
1
P301 P101 J105 AIR L
PWR GND 2 J101 P105
FLOW I
24 WHT S S WHT B F
L T
PRIMARY S2B22 S3B20
I
25 WH/BL b b WH/BL E
F T
T 26 WHT d d WHT A R
A
C SECONDARY 27 S2E22 WH/BL f f WH/BL S3E20 D N
O S
M 28 WH/ORG h h WH/ORG C
D
P U
U
SELF TEST 16 S2G22 j j S3G20 F

C
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
E

11
E
10 R
R ENABLE 7 S2H22 K K S3H20 10 S103
1 2 12 (CLOSED IN FLT.)
TEST SW 8 S2M22 S2M22N S3H20N 12
S347 L. MAIN
STALL TEST P104 SQUAT SW
GB4-C J348
THROTTLE POS 3 S2N22 6 PWR
NC ON
EXECUTE 4 S2T22 S2L22 4 S348
C
THROTTLE
P382 5 LEVER SW
NO
FLAPS PWR G4H22N
C S350
3 OFF
S2S22 (8°)
FULL 6 S2R22 2 C S349 A305 GB4-F

(25°)
S2P22 1 GEAR
10°/20° 5 SEE 91-32-60, { HORN
91-27-30 FebPAGE
FIGURE 1 G8C22
STALL
WARN DEVICE 12 S2J22 HORN
S2Z22 S2A22
4636314 thru 4636374
FAIL 9
P317 AV2A22 TO AUTOPILOT SYSTEM
25 27 AV2 (SEE AUTOPILOT INSTL.)
J317
TO ANNUNCIATOR
4636299 and
COMPUTER (P329-3 - SEE 91-31-50) TO EFIS SYSTEM

Effectivity
AV3 (SEE EFIS INSTL.)

FAIL LOGIC
RELAY K4
28/07
GND
3
Feb 28/07
PAGE 4
4636375 and up
Effectivity
STALL
91-27-30
WARN
MAIN BUS
1E P376
J P
CB323A22 7 S1A22 1
3A 28 VDC POWER
CB323 10
105 P101 P301
P J
F S3G20 j j S2G22 16 SELF TEST
TRANSDUCER
B S3B20WHT S S S2B22 24
PRIMARY
E S3B20BLU b b S2C22 25
LIFT
A101
A S3E20WHT d d S2D22 26
L
D S3E20BLU f f S2E22 27 SECONDARY
I
S103
C S3E20ORG h h S2F22 28
F
11
T

L. MAIN 10
S3H20 S2H22
10 K K 7 ENABLE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
SQUAT SW 12
C

12 S3H20N J101
S347
104
P
S2M22N 2 1
S2M22 8 TEST SWITCH O
348
J STALL TEST M
6 S2N22 3 THROTTLE POSITION P
THROTTLE S348 NC 4 S2L22 S2T22 4 EXECUTE U
LEVER SW C NO 5 S350 C
J
382
P
T
3 S2S22 FLAPS E
2 S2R22 6 FULL R
397 S2P22
J P 1 5 10° / 20°
A305 GND 4 G4H22N C
S349 S2U22 2 GROUND
STALL - GB4-F GB6-E

HORN + 1 S2J22 12 WARN DEVICE
AV2A22 TO P329-16 S2A22 S2Z22 9 FAIL
P
27 25 317
P/O JB14 J
A B
TO P561-5 AV2B22 B G
2
COMPUTER FAIL
LOGIC RELAY
6 K4
105115 A 22.0
8G16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

3 K321 Current Sensor
4 MT302 Actuator Motor Assembly
5 K320 Relay
6 A337 Time Delay Module
7 S340, S341 Flap Control Switch
CR330 Diode Assembly
R310 Resistor Assembly
Capacitor Assembly
5
3 6
7 4
Electric Flaps
8G17 91-27-50 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(4) CURRENT
CB330 1
FLAP MOTOR SENSOR
5
CW1A 18 CW1B 18
10 A K321 3
(1)
FLAP WARN
WC1A 22 WC5A 22 2
3A 6
(5) WC1B 22
CB331
4
WC3A 22
S/N'S
4636001
S/N'S 4636248 AND UP THRU
4636247
ONLY
A
CR330 WC4A 22
CR K320
329
WC5B 22
B
+ 4.7 uf (2) WC3B 22
50wv
-
+ R310
TIME DELAY
TO 470 k
(2.3 SEC)
ANNUNCIATOR - ohms
(3)
(P329-24) A337
(SEE 91-31-50)
WC3B 22N
(1) - "FLAP ANNUN." IN S/N'S 4636001 THRU 4636131 ONLY

(2) - 5.0 uf IN S/N'S 4636001 THRU 4636020 ONLY
(3) - (P328-9) IN S/N'S 4636001 THRU 4636131 ONLY CW1C 18
(4) - CB330 IN S/N'S 4636299 AND 4636314 AND UP
(5) - CB331 IN S/N'S 4636299 AND 4636314 AND UP
CW1F 18 BLK
MT302
FLAP
MOTOR
CW1K 18N CW1G 18 RED
P346
2 1 5 6
J346
89801 AH 11.0
85508 L
101238 E
101301 C CW1E 18
104051 C
104301 NEW/S CW1D 18
S340
UP FLAP
CW1J 18 CONTROL
DN
CW1H 18
S341
Effectivity Electric Flaps

PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 91-27-50 8G18
8G19
CURRENT
SENSOR 1
FLAP MOTOR
J
1C
P 5 CW1C18 CW1F18 BLK
10A CB329A18 2 CW1A18 CW1B18
CB329 3
FLAP WARN K321 MT FLAP
J
1E
P 302 MOTOR
CB330A22 11 WC1A22 WC5A22
2
3A 6
CB330 WC1B22
4 CW1K18N CW1G18 YEL
WC3A22
P
A 346 2 1 5 6
WC4A22
J
CW1D18
CW1H18
CW1E18
CR330
CW1J18
CR K320
MAIN BUS
329

R310
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C301 470K

WC5B22
B
4.7uf
50wv TIME DELAY
WC3B22 + -
Electric Flaps
A337 (2.3 SEC)

S340 UP
WC3B22N
P328-17 FLAP
CONTROL
S341 DOWN
FLAP
INDICATOR
FLAP INDICATOR
1 2 3 4 6 5
1E P393
J P
91-27-50 FebPAGE
2A CB328A22 9 CW2A22 L28B22 TO LB1-F

CW2B22N
CB328 CW2E22N
RXXX
GB4-B P 377 J
CW2D22 A
FLAP
CW2C22N B POTENTIOMETER
CW2F22N
4636375 and up
Effectivity
28/07
105115 A 9.0 GB4-K

3
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 91-27-50 8G20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

2 SpeedBrake Cartridge(s)
3 Up/Down Switch (on yoke)
4 Annunciator Light
5 Asymmetric Logic Switching Unit
2 5 2
SpeedBrakes Effectivity
8G21 91-27-60 FebPAGE 1

28/07
Feb 28/07
PAGE 2
4636187 thru 4636374

Effectivity
SPEED
BRAKE NOTE: WING HARNESS'S ARE WIRED THE SAME AND
UP-DOWN
SWITCH HAVE THE CONNECTORS IDENTIFIED THE SAME.
UP
SB6 2 1
DOWN SB5 2 1 317
P J
91-27-60
SB2E22 14
29
SB4 1 2 3
SB2A22
SB2C22
SB3 1 2 3 P/O K1
DN1V22
(PTT)
(SEE 91-31-50)
SB1C22
SB1D22
SB1F22
317
J P
26
R-317 20 TO ANNUN. C/B (REF)

560 ohm (SEE 91-31-50)
SB2 1 2 3
SB1 1 2 3 P/O K2
(DAY/NIGHT)
(SEE 91-31-50)
SB1B22
SB1E22
SB1G22
GB6-C SB2B22
SB2D22 3 3

SPEEDBRAKES GB6-B 4 4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

6 6
MOTOR & ASYMMETRIC LOGIC CONTROL
7 7
3A
CB324 SB1H22 5 5
SpeedBrakes
1 1
2 2
8 8
SB-P1 P1
P3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 P2
SB-J3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 SB-J2
SEE NOTE SEE NOTE
ORANGE AAA SB3A22 SB4A22 AAA ORANGE
GREEN BBB SB3B22 SB4B22 BBB GREEN
BLUE CCC SB3C22 SB4C22 CCC BLUE
BLACK DDD SB3D22 SB4D22 DDD BLACK
RED EE E SB3E22 SB4E22 EE E RED
WHITE FFF SB3F22 SB4F22 FFF WHITE
BROWN GG G SB3G22 SB4G22 GG G BROWN
YELLOW HH H SB3H22 SB4H22 HH H YELLOW
JJ J JJ J
KK K KK K
P115 P398 P308 P115
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 P116 J115 (FEEDTHRU) (FEEDTHRU) J215 P116 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
101301 C 47.0
LEFT SPEEDBRAKE 104051 C
104301 NEW/S RIGHT SPEEDBRAKE
CARTRIDGE CARTRIDGE
8G22
8G23
ANNUNCIATOR
DWN
NOTE: WING HARNESS'S ARE WIRED THE SAME AND HAVE
SPEED THE CONNECTORS IDENTIFIED THE SAME.
BRAKE
UP
SB6
SPEEDBRAKE 2 1
SWITCH SB5
SB2E22 P317-14 (PG 12.1)
SB4
1 2 3
SB2C22
SB2A22
SB3
P317-26 (PG 12.1)

SB1B22
SB1E22
SB1G22

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
SB2D22 3
SPEEDBRAKES

MAIN BUS
GB6-B
4
CB324 6 MOTOR & ASYMMETRIC LOGIC CONTROL
CB324A22 8 7
SpeedBrakes
3A 1E SB1H22 5
J P
1
2
8
SB-P1 P1
P3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 P2
SB-J3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 SB-J2
ORANGE A A A SB3A22 SB4A22 A A A ORANGE

GREEN B B B SB3B22 SB4B22 B B B GREEN
BLUE CC C SB3C22 SB4C22 CC C BLUE
BLACK DD D SB3D22 SB4D22 DD D BLACK
RED EE E SB3E22 SB4E22 EE E RED
WHITE F F F SB3F22 SB4F22 F F F WHITE
BROWN GG G SB3G22 SB4G22 GG G BROWN
YELLOW HH H SB3H22 SB4H22 HH H YELLOW
91-27-60 FebPAGE
J J J J J J
KK K KK K
P115 P398 P308 P115
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 P116 J115 (FEEDTHRU) (FEEDTHRU) J215 P116 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
4636375 and up
LEFT SPEEDBRAKE RIGHT SPEEDBRAKE

CARTRIDGE CARTRIDGE
Effectivity
105115 A 32.0
28/07
3
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 91-27-60 8G24
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

2 MT101, MT201 Fuel Pump
3 A315, A316 Fuel Pressure Switch
5 S305 Emergency Fuel Pump Switch
6 MT401 Emergency Fuel Pump
4
5
1
3
6
Fuel Pumps
8H1 91-28-20 FebPAGE 1

28/07
Feb 28/07
PAGE 2
4636001 thru 4636020

Effectivity
P301 / P101 P108 MT101
J101 J108 1
Main V V Q11B 20 1 RED LEFT
Bus BOOST 2
Q11D 20N 2 BLU PUMP
2 S332
91-28-20
LEFT BOOST PUMP P302 / P201 J204

J201 P204
5A Q16B 20 X X Q16A 20 1 LEFT
1 Q17B 20 Y Y Q17A 20 2
RIGHT BOOST
PUMP
Q19B 20 d d Q19A 20 3 RT.
F
4 OF
5A
1
P208 S331
J208 1
FUEL SELECTOR
RIGHT VALVE CAM
Q12B 20 1 RED
BOOST 2

Q12D 20N 2 BLU PUMP
2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

MT201
TO P304 / P402
ANNUNCIATOR J402
Fuel Pumps
P329-12 Q13C 20 C C Q13B 20

P329-29 Q14C 20 k k Q14B 20 Q14A 20N
Q13A 20N
PRESSURE SWITCHES
LEFT 3 P424
PUMP P423
A B A315 ENGINE
A316 C B
SELECTOR EMERGENCY DRIVEN
VALVE FUEL PUMP PUMP
RIGHT
PUMP
EMERG. EMERG
BUS PUMP 5
P304 / P402 MT401
SW
EMERGENCY 2
J402
+
PUMP Q10B 16 B B Q10C 16 EMERG.
3 PUMP
6
Q10A 16 Y Y Q10D 16N -
15 A
4
CB309
8H2
89801 AH 10.0
8H3
P301 P101 P108

85508 L 10.0
101238 E
J101 J108 MT101
101301 C
104051 C
1
Q16B20 V V Q11B20 1 RED LEFT
104301 NEW/S
BOOST
Q11D20N 2 BLU PUMP
2
P302 P201
J201
CB310 Q16B20 X X Q16A20 1

S332
L BOOST PUMP
Q17B20 Y Y Q17A20 2
5A LE
FT
R BOOST PUMP
Q19B20 _d _d Q19A20 3 .
5A RT

OF
S331
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CB311

4
P304 P402
J402
J204 FUEL SELECTOR
Q12B20
P204
Fuel Pumps
VALVE CAM
P329-13 *
{
Q13C20 C C
TO P208
ANNUNCIATOR J208 MT201
P329-17 ** Q14C20 _k _k
1
1 RED RIGHT
* P329-12
Q14A20N
Q13B20N
BOOST
Q14B20
Q13B20
& IN S/N'S 4636021 THRU 4636131 ONLY
** P329-29 Q12D20N 2 BLU PUMP
PRESSURE SWITCHES 2
LEFT
P423 P424
PUMP
A315 A316
A B C B
SELECTOR EMERGENCY ENGINE

DRIVEN
VALVE FUEL PUMP
91-28-20 FebPAGE
PUMP
RIGHT
PUMP P304 P402
J402
4636021 thru 4636374
S305 MT401
P380 R380 20 B B 20
R380 P380 2 +
EMERGENCY PUMP 3 Q10C16 4 4 Q10D16 Q10E16
Q10A16 3 3 Q10B16
15A 20 Y Y 20 EMERGENCY
EMERG
CB309 Q10D16N PUMP
PUMP SW -
Effectivity
28/07
3
Feb 28/07
PAGE 4
4636375 and up
Effectivity P301 P101 108 MT101
J P 1
91-28-20
V V Q11B20 1 RED LEFT

BOOST
J101 Q11D20N 2 BLU 2 PUMP
P302 P201 204

CB310 P J
L BOOST PUMP 1D Q16B20 X X Q16A20 1
J P
5A CB310A20 1 Q17B20 Y Y Q17A20 2
FUEL
LE
FT
R BOOST PUMP SELECTOR
5A CB311A20 2 Q19B20 d d Q19A20 3 RT
. VALVE
MAIN BUS
F
OF
CB311 J201 Q12B20 4 CAM

208 MT201
J P
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1 RIGHT
1 RED

EMERG PUMP
BOOST
1C Q12D20N 2 BLU 2 PUMP
J P
15A CB309A16 1 Q10A16
Fuel Pumps
CB309
EMERG P304 P402

PUMP SW P329-8
Q13C20 C C Q13B20
3
Q10B16 3
2
20 B B 20
Q10C16 4 Q10D16 Q10E16
S305 P J 20 Y Y 20
380 P329-13
Q14C20 k k
Q14A20N
Q13B20N
Q14B20
J402
LEFT
PUMP P423 +
MT401 P424
A B C B
EMERG ENGINE
SELECTOR FUEL DRIVEN
VALVE FUEL PUMP
PUMP
-
RIGHT Q10D16N
105115 NEW/A 8.0 PUMP
8H4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1 CB312 * Circuit Breaker (3 Amp)

or
CB372 Circuit Breaker (3 Amp)
2 M305 Dual Fuel Indicator
3 Inboard Fuel Quantity Senders
4 Outboard Fuel Quantity Sender, Left
5 Outboard Fuel Quantity Sender, Right
* S/N’s 4636001 thru 4636020 only
In S/N’s 4636375 and up, see 91-77-40, Figure 7, Sheet 3.
5 3 4
Fuel Quantity Indicator

8H5 91-28-40 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Main
Bus FUEL
QUANTITY
Q1A 22
3A
1
+
FUEL QUANTITY GAGE
2
LEFT RIGHT
SENDER GRND SENDER
Q2AL 22 Q2AR 22
Q3AL 22N Q3AR 22N
WX P301 Q3ALR 22N P302 j h
J101 J201
WX P101 P201 j h
GB4-R
Q2BL 20 Q2BR 20
Q3BL 20N Q3BR 20N
* NOTE: *
J113 A C B J213
P113
* INDICATES TEST POINT B C A P213
OB IB IB
1 1 1 1 OB
2 2 2 2
4 3 3 5
89801 AH 9.0
Effectivity Fuel Quantity Indicator

PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 91-28-40 8H6
8H7
FUEL QUANTITY GAUGE
DATA BUS "D" XMIT LO

DATA BUS "C" XMIT HI
DATA BUS "B" REC LO

DATA BUS "A" REC HI
SIGNAL LO, RIGHT
PWR. RETURN, RT
SIGNAL HI, RIGHT
PWR. RETURN, LT
CASE GROUND
28VDC, R/FUEL
28VDC, L/FUEL
LIGHTING LO
LIGHTING HI
SIGNAL LO
SIGNAL HI
KEYWAY
ALARM
ALARM
FUEL P336 8 6 21 24 7 2 5 14 4 20 19 25 9 18 16 17 11 10
QTY
Q2L22
Q3D22N
Q1B22
Q2L22N
Q3A22N
5A
WHT/BL
WHT
Q2C22
Q2B22
WHT/BL
WHT
Q1A22
CB372

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GB4-R TB-1 13

GB7-D
WHT/BL
GB7-C
Q2AR20
Q2AL22
WHT/BL
Fuel Quantity Indicator
WHT
WHT
18
(1)
12
22
SEE EXCEEDANCE
T W X P301 P302 g
_ _j h
_ Q3A22 AUDIO ALERT
(91-31-50)
J101 J201
T W X P101 P201 g
_ _j h
_
INBD INBD
91-28-40 FebPAGE
1 2 2 1
WHT/BL
WHT/BL
Q2BR20
Q2BL20
(1) TO 91-77-40:
WHT
WHT
-- QDI IN S/N'S 4636021 THRU 4636131 ONLY
J113 P113 P213 J213 -- EDI IN S/N'S 4636132 AND UP
B B
4636021 thru 4636374
LEFT RIGHT
C SENDERS SENDERS C
A A
85508 L 9.0
101238 E
1 2 2 1 101301 C
Effectivity
104051 C
104301 P/S
28/07
OUTBD OUTBD
3
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 91-28-40 8H8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

3 S342 Gear Selector Switch
4 A332, A331 Pressure Switch Assembly
5 MT301 Hydraulic Pump
1&2 4&5
6
Hydraulic Pump
8H9 91-29-10 FebPAGE 1

28/07
Feb 28/07
PAGE 2
4636001 thru 4636374

Effectivity
FUSE RELAYS ARE INTERLOCKED
HOLDER TO PREVENT
TO
ANNUNCIATOR W4A 22 SIMULTANEOUS OPERATION
(P329-7 *)
91-29-10
* P328-6 IN S/N'S 4636001 THRU 4636131 ONLY

22
B2 B1 B3 B4
Main
22 22
Bus
HYDRAULIC
PUMP POWER
DOWN * UP
G10A 10
25 A
CB322 G10B 12
HYDRAULIC 1 DOWN A2 A3 A4
A1
PUMP CONTROL 2 G12A 20
X1 Y1
G9A 20 UP K312B WHT

3A K312A
G11A 20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CB321 S342 RED

3 X2 Y2
GEAR G11D 20
SELECT
Hydraulic Pump
SWITCH P301 F M
J101 RED RED
F M MT HYD
P101
301 PUMP
G13A 22 PUMP-DN C PUMP-UP C
2 G11C 20 PRESS SW PRESS SW BLK
6 G11B 20 P P
G13B 22 NC NO NC NO
4 P104 A332 A331
5 4 6
G13C 22
A
4
K313
CR313
B LEFT MAIN S103
SQUAT SWITCH 22
TO LANDING 5 6 22
G13D 22
GEAR POSITION
INDICATOR
(RELAY SHOWN SQUAT SWITCH SHOWN WITH DOWN * UP
GEAR DOWN & WEIGHT ON WHEELS
LOCKED)
G10B 12
A2 A1 A3 A4
89801 AH 13.0 (IN S/N'S 4636132 THRU 4636186 ONLY)

85508 L
101238 E
101301 C
104051 C
8H10
104301 NEW/S
8H11
RELAYS ARE INTERLOCKED TO PREVENT

* SIMULTANEOUS OPERATION
F313
TO P328-14 W4A22
(TO 91-31-50, 5A
FIGURE 1, SHEET 16)
HYD PUMP POWER B2 B1

22 B3 B4
22
1A
J P
22
25A CB322A10 1 G10A10 *
CB322
MAIN BUS
G10B12
A2 A1 A3 A4
GEAR SELECT
SWITCH G12A20
HYD PUMP CONTROL X1 Y1
WHT
RED
S342 1 DN
1D CR312 CR311
J P 2

3A CB321A20 3 G9A20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
X2 Y2

CB321 3 K312B K312A

UP
Hydraulic Pump
G11A20 G13A22
MT HYDR
RED
RED
2
6 301 PUMP
G13B22N
4 PUMP-DN PUMP-UP
PRESS SW PRESS SW
BLK
A
C C
CR313
G13C22
B NC NO NC NO
G11D20
K313 P A332 P A331
BLK
BLK
G13D22
91-29-10 FebPAGE
TO SPLICE L. MAIN
AT JB13-G RELAY SHOWN GEAR
SQUAT
(TO 91-31-50, DOWN AND LOCKED
SWITCH
FIGURE 1, SHEET 15) P 104 J S103
M M G11C20 6
6
F F G11B20 4
4636375 and up
4 5
P301 J101 P101 5
105115 A 11.0 (SHOWN WEIGHT ON WHEELS)
Effectivity
28/07
3
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 91-29-10 8H12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1 A318 Timer Assembly

2 A415, A416 Pressure Control Valve
3 A417, A418, A419 De-Ice Valve
4 A430, A431, A432 Pressure Switch
6 S319 Switch
1, 2, 3 & 4 5&6
Surface Deice (Optional)

8H13 91-30-10 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Effectivity Surface Deice (Optional)
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 91-30-10 8H14
8H15
J416
101238 E 34.0
1 D26D20 101301 C
A416 104051 C
2 D26F20 104301 A/S
DEICE
D22B20
D22B20N
PRESSURE
CONTROL
VALVES J415 TO
1 D22D20 ANNUNCIATOR D29E20 A A
A415 (P329-22)
2 D26E20N J402
P304 P402
J409 J J
D29A20
LOWER 1 D23A20 D D
WING A418 G G LOWER D29D20

2 D23A20N
WING A430
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
D29D20N
F F

PRESSURE SWITCHES
DEICE VALVES
J408 J402
P402 P304
UPPER 1 D24A20
WING A419 UPPER D29C20
2 D24A20N A431
WING
D29C20N
TO
J407
SMARTBOOT
1 D25A20 CONTROLLER*
TAIL A417 D29B20
2 D25A20N TAIL A432
D29B20N
P394 1
D29A20N
J311
YEL 4 D25B20
91-30-10 FebPAGE
VIOL 6 D24B20
SURFACE SURFACE
TIMER WH/BL 5 D23B20 DE-ICE DE-ICE
SWITCH
BLU 3 D22A20 P392 P392
4636132 thru 4636374
ORG 2 D21A20 5 3 D20A20

5A
RED 1 D20B20 4 CB362
A318 BLK 7 D20B20N P392
(MOMENTARY SWITCH)
Effectivity
* IN S/N'S 4636132 THRU 4636313 ONLY

28/07
3
Feb 28/07
PAGE 4
4636375 and up
Effectivity
SURFACE
DE-ICE
MAIN BUS
J 2D P 105115 A 29.0
CB362A20 6
91-30-10
5A
D20A20
CB362
J 392 P
3 311
SURFACE P J
DE-ICE 4 D20B20 1 RED
SWITCH 5 D21A20 2 ORG
D22A20 3 BLU
TIMER
TO P329-21 D29E20 D23B20 5 WH/BLU
(91-31-50, D24B20 6 VIOL
FIGURE 1, SHEET 16)
D25B20 4 YEL

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
D20B20N 7 BLK A318

LOWER D29D20
A430
WING D29D20N J407
D25A20 1
A417 TAIL
D25A20N 2
DE-ICE VALVES
PRESSURE SWITCHES
J408
D24A20 1
P304 P402 A419 UPPER
UPPER D29C20 D24A20N 2 WING
A431 F F
WING D29C20N
G G J409
D D D23A20 1
A418 LOWER
J J D23A20N 2 WING
K K
J402
D22B20
J415
D22D20 1
A415
D29B20N D29A20 D26E20N 2
TAIL A432
D29B20 D22B20N DE-ICE
PRESSURE
CONTROL
VALVE
D29A20N J416
D26D20 1
A416
D26F20N 2
8H16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
8H17 91-30-10 FebPAGE 5

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

2 De-icers with Integral Detectors
3 OAT Sensor
4 Controller
5 A318 Surface De-ice Timer
5
1
Effectivity Ice Detection System (SMARTbootsTM) (Optional)

PAGE 6
Feb 28/07 91-30-10 8H18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
P2
BLK 2
ICE DETECTOR
P395 GRN 17
D32A20 1 RED 1 28VDC PWR
2A
WHT 7
CB358
1 1 8
T P329-18 DN1H22 8 8 9
{
O
P329-23 DN1E22 7 7 15
A
P394 N 3 3 11
1 N 4 4 12
U
J311 N P329-31 DN1C22 5 5 13
SURFACE
DE-ICE
4 D25B20 { SEE
SURFACE
6 6
2 2
14
10
TIMER 7 D20B20N DEICE
P391 P2 16
AFT PRESSURE
P2 BULKHEAD
CONTROLLER
O A 31 31 31
A B 32 32 32
T
C 33 33 33
36 36 36
P3
7 4 4 4
10
V 11 5 5 5
D
E E 20 20 20
R
F
T I 5 14 14 14
I 6
I C
N 3 15 15 15
C E 4
A R 1 16 16 16
L 2
9 17 17 17
13
18 18 18
7 6 6 6
H S 10
O T D 11 7 7 7
R A E
I B 8 8 8
Z I I 5 13 13 13
O L C 6
N I 3 12 12 12
E 4
T Z R 1 11 11 11
A E 2
L R 9 10 10 10
13
9 9 9
P4
P1
101238 E 39.0
101301 C
104051 C
Ice Detection System (SMARTbootsTM) (Optional) Effectivity

8H19 91-30-10 FebPAGE 7

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GRIDS 8H20 THRU 8H24

INTENTIONALLY BLANK
PAGE 8
Feb 28/07 91-30-10 8H20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1 CB361 Circuit Breaker (10 Amp) - Pitot Heat

2 S308 Pitot Heat Switch
3 AN5812 Pitot Head Assembly - Heated
(Left and Right Wings with Avidyne Entegra)
4 CB360 Circuit Breaker (25 Amp) - Stall Warn
5 S309 Stall Warn Heat Switch
6 R103 Resistor - Heated Stall Warn
7 A101 Lift Transducer
8 S101 Switch Assembly - Main Gear Uplock - Left
9 K101 Relay Assembly - Heated Stall Warning
6&9
8
7
1&4
2&5
Pitot and Lift Detector Heat

8I1 91-30-30 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PITOT P301 P101

HEAT J101 J107 P107
2
D4A 18 D5A 18 e e D5B 18 1
10 A 3
CB361 PITOT HEAT
SWITCH
MAIN S308 D5B 18N 2
BUS
AN5812
PITOT
MAST
LEFT WING LIFT

PRESSURE TRANSDUCER
L.D. S309 BULKHEAD 9 Ohm 160W J106
HEAT 3% P106
2 3 VANE
D1A 14 D2A 14 D2B 14 D2E 16 A
25 A LIFT J381 R103
CB360 DETECTOR P381
HEAT SWITCH P
D2D 16 L
MAIN A
BUS D2C 14
FLT CASE T
D2F 16 C E
J103 16
S101 P103 D2G 14N
GND
5 5 D3A 20
4 A101
D3B 20 HEAT
6 4 CR CONTROL
309 RELAY
LEFT D3C 20N
UP LOCK K101
SWITCH
89801 AH 26.0
Effectivity Pitot and Lift Detector Heat

PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 91-30-30 8I2
8I3
PITOT HEAT
SWITCH
2 3
D4A18 D5A18
S308 TO
IN S/N'S 4636021 THRU 4636131 ONLY
ANNUNCIATOR
AN5812
P329-35
PITOT MAST
R390 P390 TO
LIFT DETECTOR
1 1 D28A20 ANNUNCIATOR
HEAT SWITCH
P329-5
2 3 N.C.
D1A14 D2A14 GRN
P107 1 2
S309 J107
BLK C
18
D5B18N
N.O.

PITOT
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
HEAT

P392 P392 R390 P390 P301 P101

WHT WHT
D4A18 6 7 D5A18 2 2 3 3 D5C18 e
_ e
_ D5B18
10A
PITOT HEAT P390 R390 J101
CB361 SWITCH CURRENT SENSOR
NOTE: R103 - 9 ohms 160 watts 3%
LEFT WING
PRESS. BLKHD. LIFT
STALL TRANSDUCER
HEAT J106
P106
P397 P397 J381 R103
D1A14 4 5 D2A14 D2B14 D2E16 A
25A P381 VANE
STALL WARN
D2D16
CB360
D2C14
HEAT SWITCH
91-30-30 FebPAGE
PLATE
FLT
16 CASE
D2F16 C
4636021 thru 4636374
5 D3A20 GND
5
4
S101 4 D3B20
85508 L 26.0 HEAT
6 CR
101238 E J103 CONTROL
D2G14N
309 A101
101301 C P103
LEFT RELAY
Effectivity
104051 C
104301 NEW/S D3C20N
UP LOCK
K101
28/07
SWITCH
(SHOWN ON GROUND, NO POWER)
3
Feb 28/07
PAGE 4
4636375 and up
Effectivity
NOTE: PITOT HEAT WILL CYCLE AT A 30 SECOND RATE WHEN AIRCRAFT IS ON THE GROUND WITH SWITCH ON.
PITOT HEAT WILL BE ON CONSTANTLY IN THE AIR WHEN SWITCH IS ON.
X2 NOTE: IF POWER INPUT IS LOST,

91-30-30
18 RED RELAY WILL TURN ON R. PITOT HEAT RIGHT

R/PITOT K311 ANNUNCIATOR. PITOT
HEAT MAST
RIGHT PITOT X1
P302 P201
MAIN BUS
J
2G
P HEAT J 118 P J 207 P
CB361A18 2 18 BUS LOAD D5B18R F F D5C18R 1 D5D18R 1
10A
J201 D5E18N 2
D8A22
CB361
D5A18R ELECT
CONTROL
MODULE A3
A2
A1
BRN
GRY
BLK
ORG
PITOT HTR OFF

TO P328-25
D8B22
D4F22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(91-31-50, 4 3 2 1

D5B22 FIGURE 1,
SHEET 16) P5F22

SWITCH PANEL
R. PITOT HEAT ANNUN
ASSY P392 A3
C303 A2 D4B22 TO P328-20 (91-31-50, FIGURE 1, SHEET 15)
6 D5A22 D18A22
A1 D4E22 TO P387-24 (SQUAT SW - 91-21-30, FIGURE 1, SHEET 4))
C304 B3 BLK22 D8E22 GB1-H
D18B22
D5C22
B2 D10A22
B1 D4C22 L. PITOT HEAT ANNUN
TO P328-19 (91-31-50, FIGURE 1, SHEET 15)
X2
7 D5B22N
PITOT K317
D8C22
D4D22
D18C22N
HEAT SW
X1
D11A22N
4 3 2 1
BRN
GRY
BLK
ORG LEFT
GB1-C A1
L/PITOT PITOT
HEAT A2 MAST
GB1-J A3
LEFT PITOT P301 P101
MAIN BUS
J
2G
P HEAT J 118 P J 107 P
CB360A18 1 18 BUS LOAD D5B18L e e D5C18L 1 D5D18L 1
10A
J101
D8D22
2
CB360
D5A18L ELECT NOTE: IF POWER INPUT IS LOST,
CONTROL RELAY WILL TURN ON L. PITOT HEAT D5B18N
MODULE X1 ANNUNCIATOR.
K309
SEE SHEET 5 18 RED
105115 A 23.0 FOR LIFT HEAT. X2
8I4
8I5
STALL A101
HEAT 9 OHMS, 160W
MAIN BUS
2B 381 R103 106

J P J P
TRANSDUCER
J P
CB359A14 1 D2A14 1 D2B14 D2E16 A
25A
LIFT
C
D2D16
D2C14
CB359
D1A14
P

STALL WARN 117
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
J

HEAT SW
S347 395 B3
J P
D2G14N
B2 FLT
4
5 A3
16
103 D2F16
J P
LEFT 5 D3A20 A2 GND
5 4 X1
UPLOCK 4 D3B20
SWITCH 6 HEAT
S101
CR309 CONTROL
RELAY
(SHOWN GEAR DOWN) D3C20N K101
X2
91-30-30 FebPAGE
105115 A 33.0 SEE SHEET 4 FOR PITOT HEAT.

4636375 and up
Effectivity
28/07
5
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 6
Feb 28/07 91-30-30 8I6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1 A310 Controller
2 A427 Heated Windshield
5 K314 Controller Relay
6 K322 Heat Relay
7 S320 Heat Switch
1, 5, 6 & 7 2
3&4
Heated Windshield (Optional)

8I7 91-30-40 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Effectivity Heated Windshield (Optional)
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 91-30-40 8I8
8I9
HEATED WINDSHIELD
D15A12 A427
25A
CB364 P3
D15E12
CONTROLLER P1
D15B12
A310 A1 A2
7 D16G20
X1
6 D16B20 CR
K314 P2
316 D15D12
5 D17A20N
X2
TO ANNUN BLK
4 D17B20
P329-21 GB5-R
D16A20N

3 D16J20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

S2
2 D16C20
S1
1 D16D20
D16K20
15 P392 HEATED
P392 14
P392 13 WINDSHIELD
HI LO
HEATED WINDSHIELD
91-30-40 FebPAGE
CONTROL LO
A3 A4
D16E20 11 HI
5A
P392 A1 A2
4636132 thru 4636374
CB363 P392
12 D16F20
X1
CR
D15C12N K322
WINDSHIELD 322
HEAT SWITCHES X2
101238 E 31.0
Effectivity
101301 C D16H20N
104051 C
104301 NEW/S
28/07
3
Feb 28/07
PAGE 4
4636375 and up
Effectivity
A427
HEATED P3
WINDSHIELD D15E12
2A
MAIN BUS
J P P1
91-30-40
CB364A12 1 D15A12 D15B12

25A A1 A2
CB364
X1
CR
K314 P2
316 D15D12
A310
X2
C 7 D16G20 BLK
O
N 6 D16B20 D16A20N
T 5 D17A20N
R WSHLD HEAT - TO P328-23 S2
O 4 D17B20
L (91-31-50, FIGURE 1, SHEET 16) GB5-R
L 3 D16J20 S1

E
2 WHT/BLU D16C20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
R

LO
1 BLU D16C20 A3 A4 HEATED

D16K20 WINDSHIELD
A1 A2
HI
D16F20
X1
CR
HEATED K322
322
D16E20
WINDSHIELD P X2
CONTROL
392 11 13 14 15 12
2D
MAIN BUS
P R D16H20N
CB363A20 7 J
5A D15C12N
CB363
HI LO
105115 A 27.0 WINDSHIELD HEAT SWITCHES

8I10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1 A411 Brush Block

2 A428 Timer
4 M303 Ammeter
5 R306 Shunt
6 S318 Switch
7 Prop Heater
8 Slip Ring
7 6
2, 4 & 5
1, 8 3
Propeller Heat (Optional)

8I11 91-30-60 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
89801 AH 32.0
85508 L
PROP PROP HEAT

HEAT 6
SWITCH
D6A 16
15 A 2 3
3
MAIN
BUS
D7A 16
AMMETER 4
A
P304
D11A 16 D12A 16 J402
P402
D8A 16 e e D8B 16
1 SHUNT 2
5
PROP
HEATER
7 BRUSH
BLOCK 1
A
SLIP D9A 16 D14A 16N
RING
D13A 16N
8
B
C B G
PROP TIMER
HEATER
2
7
Effectivity Propeller Heat (Optional)

PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 91-30-60 8I12
8I13
TO ANNUNCIATOR n n
P329-35 D12A22 D12B22
P303 P401 TIMER

PROP HEAT PROP HEAT J401 D A428
SWITCH
P397 P397 (16) k k (16)
D6A12 * 6 7 D7A12 * D7B12 * A F
20A (16) m m (16)
CB359 E C B
P392 18
D13A22 j j D13B22
SQUAT SW RELAY
(SHOWN WEIGHT
FOR RELAY ON WHEELS)
4 p p D14C22
COIL WIRING 1 D14B22
SEE 91-21-30 K7 12

FIGURE 1 2 D14A22N
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
8
* WIRE SIZE #14

J387/P387 GB7-L 4636132 THRU 4636186 ONLY
< NOTE: EACH BOOT RESISTANCE

PROP 4.74 OHMS MIN.
NOTE: EACH BOOT RESISTANCE > HEATER
PROP (M.O.V.) 4.90 OHMS MAX.
4.12 OHMS MIN. HEATER
4.56 OHMS MAX. A A
B B A411
A411 A
A SLIP D9A12 *
SLIP RING
91-30-60 FebPAGE
RING B
D13A12N
B D13A12N BRUSH
BRUSH BLOCK
4636132 thru 4636313,
BLOCK
less 4636299
Effectivity
101238 E 32.0
101301 C
28/07
104051 C
(3 BLADE) (2 BLADE)
3
Feb 28/07
PAGE 4
4636314 thru 4636374

4636299 and
Effectivity
TO ANNUNCIATOR n n
P329-35 D12A22 D12B22
P303 P401 TIMER

PROP HEAT PROP HEAT J401 D A428
91-30-60
SWITCH
P397 P397 (16) k k (16)
20A D6A12 6 7 D7A12 D7B12 A F
(16) m m (16)
CB359
E C B
P392 18
D13A22 j j D13B22
SQUAT SW RELAY NO. 1
(SHOWN WEIGHT
FOR RELAY ON WHEELS)
4 p p D14C22
COIL WIRING 1 D14B22
K7
SEE 91-21-30, 12

FIGURE 1 2 D14A22N
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
8

J387/P387 GB7-L
< NOTE: EACH BOOT RESISTANCE

PROP 4.74 OHMS MIN.
HEATER 4.90 OHMS MAX.
NOTE: EACH BOOT RESISTANCE >

4.12 OHMS MIN. (M.O.V.)
4.56 OHMS MAX. A A
D9A12 A411
A
SLIP D9A12
B B RING
C
A411 B
B
D13A12N
A
BRUSH
SLIP BLOCK
RING
B D13A12N
BRUSH PROP
BLOCK HEATER
104301 K/S 32.0
(3 BLADE) (2 BLADE)
8I14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PROP HEAT
MAIN BUS
2C
J P PROP DE-ICE FAIL
CB358A12 1 TO P329-23
20A D12A22
CB358 (91-31-50, FIGURE 1,
D6A12
SHEET 16)
P303 P401
TIMER
n n D12B20 A428
J
395
P D
6
16 k k 16
7 D7A12 D7B12 A F
16 m m 16
J
392
P
E C B
PROP HEAT
SWITCH 18 D13A22 j j D13B20
D13A12N
387
J P
SQUAT 4 12
1 D14B22 p p D14C22
SWITCH 2 D14A22N J401
8
RELAY #1 K7
(SHOWN WEIGHT ON WHEELS) GB7-L
NOTE: EACH BOOT RESISTANCE >

4.12 OHMS MIN. (M.O.V.)
4.56 OHMS MAX. A A
D9A12
B B
C
A411
B
A
D13A12N
SLIP
RING
B
BRUSH
BLOCK
(3 BLADE)
105115 A 28.0
Propeller Heat (Optional) Effectivity

8I15 91-30-60 FebPAGE 5

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 6
Feb 28/07 91-30-60 8I16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1 A404 Oil Pressure Switch

3 K7 Squat Switch Relay
4 M310 Flight Hour Meter
In S/N’S 4636375 and up, see 91-21-30, Figure 1, Sheet 4.
1 4 2
Flight Hour Meter

8I17 91-31-30 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
OIL PRESSURE
P402 P304
SWITCH J402
A404 M6B20 j j M6A22
E6C20N TO
E6B20 OIL CL5A22 DIGITAL
P PRESS ANNUN CLOCK
(SEE 91-79-30)
1
M HOUR
310 METER
M5B22
1 HOUR METER
5
13
3 12 M5D22 3A
SQUAT SW CB332
RELAY P387
K7 J387
(SEE 91-21-30)
89801 AF/AH 8.0
Effectivity Flight Hour Meter

PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 91-31-30 8I18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
S/N'S 4636021 THRU 4636186 ONLY
J402
P402 P304 S/N'S 4636314 AND UP
32 32
GB3-B
S/N'S 4636187 AND UP
S/N'S 4636314 AND UP J402

P402 P304
M6B20 j j M6A20
E6C20N
E6B20 OIL PRESS ANNUN
P (SEE 91-79-30)
1
M HOUR
310 METER
A404
2
SQUAT SWITCH
RELAY
M5B22
K7
(SHOWN WEIGHT ON WHEELS)
(SEE 91-21-30)
1
HOUR METER
9*
K7 13
** 5 12 M5D22 3A
CB332
P387
J387
* 5 IN S/N'S 4636021 THRU 4636131 ONLY

** 3 IN S/N'S 4636021 THRU 4636131 ONLY
85508 L 8.0
101238 E
101301 C
104051 C
104301 L/S
IN S/N’S 4636375 AND UP, SEE 91-21-30, FIGURE 1, SHEET 4.
Flight Hour Meter Effectivity

8I19 91-31-30 FebPAGE 3

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

INTENTIONALLY BLANK
PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 91-31-30 8I20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

8J1 91-31-50 FebPAGE 1

28/07
Feb 28/07
PAGE 2
4636001 thru 4636020

Effectivity
ALT #1 INOP ALT #2 INOP BOOST PUMP FUEL PRESS LO BUS VOLTS CABIN ALT DOOR AJAR FAIL STALL OXYGEN OIL PRESS SURF DE-ICE
91-31-50
J329 1 17 23 3 4 33 29 11 12 36 32 19 24 27 21 30 31 25 18 34 35 26 20 10 16
P329 1 17 23 3 4 33 29 11 12 36 32 19 24 27 21 30 31 25 18 34 35 26 20 10 16
DN1E 22 DN2M 22 DN3K 22 DN4K 22 DN5K 22 DN6K 22 DN4M 22 DN13M 22 DN8M 22 DN9M 22 DN10M 22 DN12M 22
DN2K 22 P8E 20R Q14C 20 Q13C 20 P34B 20 W6A 22 W17A 22 S2A 22 0X1A 22 E6A 20 D29E 20
P8E 20L
DN1M 22

MAINTENANCE MANUAL

PRESS
TO TEST
Annunciator Panel
ANNUNCIATOR 1 2
DN1P 22
3A DN1D 22 DN2F 22 *
DN1T 22 DN1N 22 DN1R 22
* * * P383
TO TIE BUS DN1A 22 A D
2A DN15A 22
DN1G 22 * DN15C 22 DN15B 22 F I
RP15A 22N DN1S 22 DN1H 22 DN1J 22 B M
C M
P317 2 31 32 29 23 22 24 9 6 7 20 8 560 Ohms E
GB1-P D
2 R
J317 31 32 29 23 22 24 9 6 7 20 8
DN15D 22N
2 4 GB6-M
6 8
12
4
2 1 2 * FOR CONTINUATION
SEE NEXT PAGE
6
3 5 9
4
A A 5 A
R317
K3 K1 K2
TO
GROUND B B B 80801 AH 14.2
CLEARANCE
8J2
8J3
ANNUN INOP HYD PIMP START ENG FLAP WSHL HEAT GEAR WARN LEFT NOSE RIGHT
J328 1 2 3 4 5 6 10 11 12 7 8 9 13 14 15 16 17 J361 1 2 3 9 4 5 8 6 7
18
P328 1 2 3 4 5 6 10 11 12 7 8 9 13 14 15 16 17 18 P361 1 2 3 9 4 5 8 6 7
DN2F 22 DN15K 22 DN15L 22 DN15M 22 DN15E 22 DN15F 22 W22A 22 DN15G 22 DN15H 22 DN15J 22
DN1G 22 DN11M 22 DN6M 22 DN5M 22 DN7M 22 DN3M 22 G2H 22 G2E 22 G2D 22

DN7K 22 W4A 22 W2C 22 WC5B 22 D17B 20
DN2L 22 DN3L 22 DN4L 22
DN1K 22 DN1L 22
ANNUNCIATOR DN1J 22

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
*

3A
Annunciator Panel
DAY / NIGHT
SWITCH
2 TO PWR
P6A 20 MONITOR
P8E20L TO DN1B 22 AND METERS
329-23 DN1B 22 DN1C 22 DN1F 22
3
P8D20L TO GB1-P
P359-4 DN1B 22
DN1R 22 *
P8D20R TO
P360-4 DN1B 22
P8E20R TO DN1B 22 DN1T 22 *
P329-4
5 4 3 6 7 9 8 10 1 11 12 13 14 15 2 P384
5 4 3 6 7 9 8 10 1 11 12 13 14 15 2 J384
91-31-50 FebPAGE
K301 K300 * FOR CONTINUATION

SEE PREVIOUS PAGE
4636001 thru 4636020
K303
K302
Effectivity
89801 AH 14.1
28/07
3
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 91-31-50 8J4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
8J5 91-31-50 FebPAGE 5
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 6
Feb 28/07 91-31-50 8J6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
8J7 91-31-50 FebPAGE 7
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 8
Feb 28/07 91-31-50 8J8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
8J9 91-31-50 FebPAGE 9
28/07
Feb 28/07
PAGE 10
less 4636299
4636248 thru 4636313,
Effectivity
LANDING
GEAR
WSHLD HEAT
ANNUN INOP
GEAR WARN
START ENG
HYD PUMP
PRESS TO TEST
28VDC OUTPUT
FLAP
RIGHT
NOSE
LEFT
91-31-50
CR11
CR12
CR13
CR14
CR15
CR16
J329 J361
25 7 20 1 24 21 33 18 1 2 3 9 4 5 8 6 7
P329 P361
DN1H22 91-30-10
WC5B22
DN1G22
W22A22
D15G22
DN2L22
D15H22
DN3L22
DN4L22
D17B20
D15J22
W2C22
W4A22
G2H22
G2D22
G2E22
ANNUNCIATOR
DN1N22
DN5C22

** ** ** 3A
*
91-29-10 91-74-20 91-27-50 91-30-40 91-32-60

*
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TO P329-37
DN1B22
*
DN1J22
*

TO P359-4 CB355
(SEE 91-24-30)
Annunciator Panel
TO P360-4
(SEE 91-24-30) DN5D22
** 91-32-60
*
TO P329-36 R384 P384
DN1B22
DN2D22 DN1D22 5 5 DN1E22
P8D20R
P8E20R
P8D20L
P8E20L
* DN5A22
1
(DAY)
P384 R384
2 DN1C22 3 3
3
P384 4 DAY/NIGHT
5 4 3 6 8 1 9 12 13 14 15 2 5 S334
6
DN1T22
J384
CR332 P6B20
DN1U22N
(NIGHT) P384
4
4
R323
R324
R325
K300 R384
*
DAY/NIGHT
K303 ALT #1
INOP
P6A20
CR335
GB6-L
K302 ALT #2
CR334 INOP
SEE
91-24-30
NOTES: 1. P329 PINS 7, 20, 21, 24, 25 & 33

REQUIRES 28VDC TO TURN LIGHTS ON.
*
104051 B/C 14.0 2. FOR CONTINUATION SEE NEXT PAGE.

8J10
8J11
*
FUEL IMBALANCE
*
ICE DETECT FAIL

STALL WARN FAIL
SELECT DE-ICE
PROP HEAT FAIL
LO BUS VOLTS
BOOST PUMP
FUEL PRESS
SURF DE-ICE
VAC #1 INOP
ALT #2 INOP
VAC #2 INOP
ALT #1 INOP
PITOT HEAT
DOOR AJAR
OIL PRESS
CABIN ALT
OXYGEN
(PTT POWER)
J329
26 2 35 15 16 19 37 36 17 13 6 4 32 3 34 5 14 22 31 23
P329
DN8M20N
W17A22
DN1C22
DN1E22
P8E20R
Q14C20
Q13C20
OX1A22
Q21A22
D12A22
D30A20
D28A20
D29E20
D30F20
P8E20L
P34B20

W6A22
S2A22
E6A22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Annunciator Panel
91-77-40 91-30-60 91-37-20 91-37-20 91-28-20 91-28-20 91-24-30 91-21-30 91-52-70 91-27-30 91-35-10 91-30-30 91-77-40 91-30-10 91-30-10 91-30-10
* *
GB5-B DN1P22
ANNUNCIATOR
*
2A F307
DN1T22
* 91-27-60 91-27-60
DN1V22
3A
* * *
DME DWG.
91-27-60 91-77-20 91-77-20
DN1A22 CB355
SEE
TO TIE BUS
DN1G22
DN1N22
DN1S22
DN5A22
SB2E22
SB2A22
SB2B22
DN1J22
E7H22
E7E22
RP15A22N
}
P317
2 31 32 29 23 22 24 14 21 8 26 19 6 7 28 20
J317
GB1-P 3 4
91-31-50 Feb
11 12
7 1 KOHM
NOTES:
8
2 4 3 1. ABOVE ANNUNCIATORS ARE GROUND.
6 12 11
R329
8 7 APPLY 28 VDC TO TURN LIGHTS ON.

4
**
4636248 thru 4636313,
A 1
K3 5
9 1
9
2.
* FOR CONTINUATION SEE PREVIOUS PAGE.
R317
SEE K6 B
CR30
2 10 *** 5 3.
** FOR CHT SCANNER LIGHTS DIMMING.
(91-23-00)
6 4.
*** FOR SPEEDBRAKE LIGHT DIMMING.
less 4636299
(ANNUN INOP) A A
K1 K2
Effectivity
PAGE 11
CR31 CR32
28/07
B B
104051 B/C 14.1 (PTT) (DAY/NIGHT)

Feb 28/07
PAGE 12
4636314 thru 4636374

4636299 and
Effectivity
ANNUNCIATOR PANEL
91-31-50
DAY/NIGHT DIMMING
LANDING
GEAR
ANNUN INOP
WSHLD HEAT
GEAR WARN
HYD PUMP
START ENG
PRESS TO TEST
28VDC OUTPUT
FLAP
NOSE
RIGHT
LEFT
}
CR11
CR12
CR13
CR14
CR15
CR16
J329 J361
25 7 20 1 24 21 33 18 1 2 3 9 4 5 8 6 7
P329 P361

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
WC5B22
DN1G22
W22A22
D15G22
DN2L22
D15H22
DN3L22
DN4L22
D17B20

D15J22
W2C22
W4A22
G2H22
G2D22
G2E22
ANNUNCIATOR
DN1N22
Annunciator Panel
DN5C22
6 TO P329-37 3A
91-29-10 91-74-20 91-27-50 91-30-40 91-32-60 91-32-60 91-32-60 91-32-60
5 3
DN1B22
TO P359-4 4 DN1J22 CB355
(SEE 91-24-30)
TO P360-4
(SEE 91-24-30)
DN5D22
7 TO P329-36 R384 P384
DN1B22
DN2D22 DN1D22 5 5 DN1E22
P8D20R
P8E20R
P8D20L
P8E20L
2 DN5A22 (DAY)
1 S334 P384 R384
2 DN1C22 3 3
3
P384 4 DAY/NIGHT
5 4 3 6 8 1 9 12 13 14 15 2 5
6
DN1T22
J384
# P6B20
DN1U22N
(NIGHT) P384
4
K300
R323
R324
R325
DAY/NIGHT SEE
1 91-24-30
K303 ALT #1
CR335 INOP
GB6-L
K302 ALT #2
CR334 INOP
8 NOTES: 1. P329 PINS 7, 20, 21, 24, 25 & 33
REQUIRES 28VDC TO TURN LIGHTS ON.
104301 A/S 14.0
9
2. FOR CONTINUATION SEE SHEET 13 OR SHEET 14.
3. # (HAS INTERNAL SUPPRESSION)
8J12
8J13
WITH OPTIONAL
ANNUNCIATOR PANEL MEGGITT EFIS INSTALLATION
ONLY
STBY ATT BATT HTR FAIL
STBY ATT IND TEST

FUEL IMBALANCE
PROP HEAT FAIL
LO BUS VOLTS
STALL WARN FAIL

FUEL PRESS
BOOST PUMP
ALT #2 INOP
VAC #1 INOP
VAC #2 INOP
SURF DE-ICE
ALT #1 INOP
DOOR AJAR
PITOT HEAT
CABIN ALT
OIL PRESS
OXYGEN
(PTT POWER)
J329
26 2 35 15 16 19 37 36 17 13 6 4 32 3 34 5 14 22 31 23
P329
DN8M20N
SEE
W17A22
P8E20R
Q14C20
Q13C20
OX1A22
Q21A22
D12A22
D30A20
D28A20
D29E20
D30F20
P8E20L
W6A22
P5G20
S2A22
E6A22
EFIS INSTALLATION

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GB4-E

91-77-40 91-30-60 91-37-20 91-37-20 91-28-20 91-28-20 91-24-30 91-21-30 91-52-70 91-27-30 91-35-10 91-30-30 91-77-40 91-30-10
Annunciator Panel
6 7
DN1P22 ANNUNCIATOR
GB5-B
DN1V22 3A
1 DN1T22 5 91-27-60 91-27-60 91-77-20 CB355
SEE "IHAS" INSTL.

2A F307
DME DWG.
4 3 2 91-77-20 91-27-60
DN1A22
SEE
TO TIE BUS
DN1G22
DN1N22
DN1S22
DN5A22
SB2E22
SB2A22
SB2B22
DN1J22
E7H22
E7E22
RP15A22N
}
P317
2 31 32 29 23 22 24 14 21 8 26 19 6 7 28 20
GB1-P
J317
3 4
11 12
91-31-50 Feb
7 1K
OHM 8
2 4 3
6 12 11
R329
4 8 7
A 1
4636314 thru 4636374
K3 5
9
** 1
9
NOTES: 1. ABOVE ANNUNCIATORS ARE GND.
APPLY 28VDC TO TURN LIGHTS ON.
R317
CR30 5
2 10 2. FOR CONTINUATION SEE SHEET 12.
SEE K6 B
(91-23-00)
6
*** 3. * * FOR CHT SCANNER LIGHTS DIMMING.
4636299 and
(ANNUN INOP) A A
K1 K2 4. *** FOR SPEEDBRAKE LIGHT DIMMING.
Effectivity
PAGE 13
CR31 CR32
104301 N/S 14.1
B B
28/07
(PTT) (DAY/NIGHT)
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
SEE AVIONICS (COMM/NAV HARNESS)
SEE AVIONICS (COMPASS HARNESS)
P384
16 11 7 10
J384
9
X1 # 8
X2
K301
R331
DAY/NIGHT
47K OHMS
NOTES: 1. FOR CONTINUATION SEE SHEET 12.
104301 E/S 14.2 2. # (HAS INTERNAL SUPPRESSION)
Effectivity
4636299 and Annunciator Panel
4636314 4636374 Figure 1 (Sheet 14 of 16)
PAGE 14
Feb 28/07 91-31-50 8J14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
8J15 91-31-50 Feb

PAGE 15
28/07
Feb 28/07
PAGE 16
4636375 and up
Effectivity
STBY ATT BTTY WARN IN

ANNUNCIATOR PANEL
STBY ATT IND TEST IN
DAY/NIGHT DIMMING
LANDING GEAR
ALT NO 2 INOP
ALT NO 1 INOP
R PITOT HEAT
L PITOT HEAT
ANNUNCIATOR
91-31-50
(6) P302-G
(6) P302-H
D15G22
PTT POWER
LEFT
DN1JC22
G2HA22
D15H22
NOSE
DN1JB22
P328 6 18 8 3 20 19 22 24
G2EA22
(2) K313-A
RP108B22 D15J22
DN1P22
RIGHT
D4C22
D4B22
RP109B22 DN1JA22
G2DA22
ANNUNCIATOR
MAIN BUS
J P
1F

P/O JB14
(3) SPLICE
(3) SPLICE
CB355A22 2 DN1V22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3A E K

CB355 3
G13C22
DN1B22
Annunciator Panel
1
(4) P317-29
DAY/NIGHT 4 JB13
SWITCH A F
1 375
2 J P
DN1C22 3 B G
3
P6B20 4 C H
DN5C22
DN1E22 5 DN1D22 DN2D22 D J
E K
(4) P317-8 DN5A22
G2D22
G2H22
G2E22
DN1J22
(4) SPLICE W/DN1A22 DN1T22
P8E20R
DN1U22N
P8E20L
(4) P317-22
GB6-L
(5) P301-C
(5) P302-U
(5) P304-Z
P
P8D20R
P8D20L
5 4 3 6 2 1 9 12 13 14 15 384
ALT 1 INOP J
K303
CR335 K300
R351
R323
R324
R325
DAY/NIGHT NOTES:
(1) P359-4
(1) P360-4
(1) TO 91-24-30, FIGURE 1, SHEET 6

(2) TO 91-29-10, FIGURE 1, SHEET 3
CR334 (3) TO 91-30-30, FIGURE 1, SHEET 4
(4) TO 91-31-50, FIGURE 1, SHEET 16
K302 (5) TO 91-32-60, FIGURE 1, SHEET 4
8J16
(6) TO 91-34-20, FIGURE 2, SHEET 2

105115 A 12.0 ALT 2 INOP
28/07 8J17
PAGE 17
91-31-50 Feb
TIE BUS ANNUNCIATOR PANEL
P328
P7321-39 F2A22
9
F2C20 FUEL IMBALANCE
105115 A 12.1
P901-4 P6A22 P7322-39 F2B22
DN1A22
14
F313 W4A22 HYD PUMP
GB1-P
P384-2
F307
5A
CR330 WC5B22 17 FLAPS
VAC 2 INOP
21
P303-N D30F20
RP15A22N
DN1T22
DN1A22
VAC 1 INOP
16
P303-M D30A20
2 31
DN1S22
6
OIL PRESS
11
P304-S E6A22
K3
2
B
A
ANNUN INOP
15
4
DN1G22
ANNUN INOP
CR30
WSHLD HTR FAIL
23
A310-4 D17B20
32 29
DN1V22 P1F-3
2
SPLICE W22A22 GEAR WARN
23
PTT 28 VDC OUTPUT
12
DN1N22
CR31
4
2
3
6
8
5
7
B
A
9
10
12
11
SURF DE-ICE
21
P304-A D29E20
K1
PTT
DN1J22 SPLICE
CR317
PRP DE-ICE FAIL
23
P303-n D12A22
22 14
SB2E22 SB5-1
SEE IHAS P7321-58 D1A22
2
INSTL D1C20 LOW BUS VOLTS

P7322-58 D1B22
DN5A22 SPLICE
10
SB2A22 SB5-2 P303-T W2C22 START ENGAGE

21 8 26 19
L23Y22 LB4-E
R317
BOOST PUMP
13
P304-k Q14C20
R350
SEE DME
6
CR32
INSTL
8
P304-C Q13C20 FUEL PRESS

4
5
7
8
B
A
9
12
11
CABIN ALT
15
A314 W6A22
SEE DME
INSTL
K2
4
L23Z22 LB4-G SPLICE W17A22 DOOR AJAR

DAY/NIGHT
J
P
STALL WRN FAIL

16
P317-27 S2A22
7 28 20 317
6
SPLICE OX1A22 OXYGEN

SB2B22
PITOT HTR OFF

25
SPLICE P5F22
GB6-C
7
DN8M20N GND
GB5-B
J
P
P329
334 2
STBY ATT IND TEST ORG RP108C22

5
STBY ATT IND TEST

3
STBY ATT
STBY ATT BATT HTR FAIL BLU RP109C22 STBY ATT BTTY HTR FAIL
ANNUNCIATOR
1
+ VDC
4 13
RED RP109D22
P328
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 18
Feb 28/07 91-31-50 8J18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1 F341 Fuse (2 Amp)

(5 Amp with Avidyne Entegra)
(½ Amp in S/N’s 4636021 thru 4636247 only)
2 Resistor
3 Horn
2&3 1
Exceedance Audio Alert Effectivity

8J19 91-31-50 Feb

PAGE 19
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2 A (1/2 A IN 4636021 THRU 4636247 ONLY)
EG1A22 EG1B22
F341
RESISTOR
3K, 1/2 WATT
P340-9 & 18
E8D22 (SEE 91-77-40,
FIGURE 3)
P338-9 & 18
E4E22 (SEE 91-77-40,
FIGURE 6)
HORN EG1C22
P336-9 & 18
Q3A22 (SEE 91-28-40,
FIGURE 1)
P337-9 & 18
E10D22 (SEE 91-77-40,
FIGURES 5 & 6)
P339-9
E15B22 (SEE 91-77-40,
FIGURE 4)
85508 L 5.0
101238 E
101301 C
104051 C
104301 NEW/S
Effectivity Exceedance Audio Alert

PAGE 20
Feb 28/07 91-31-50 8J20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
MFD
MAIN BUS
R306
CB352A20 2 20 RED E3M20 20 HORN
7.5A J P
2D
CB352 M306
RESISTOR
3K, 1/2 WATT
E3L22 (EXCEDANCE HORN) P530-14 (P/O AVIONICS HARNESS)
105115 A 13.0
Exceedance Audio Alert Effectivity

8J21 91-31-50 Feb

PAGE 21
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 22
Feb 28/07 91-31-50 8J22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
8J23 91-31-50 Feb

PAGE 23
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 24
Feb 28/07 91-31-50 8J24
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1 S102, S202, S402 Left, Right Main and Nose Gear

Down Lock Switch Assembly
2 S101, S201, S401 Left, Right Main and Nose Gear
Up Lock Switch Assembly
5 S342 Gear Selector Switch
6 A305 Dual Warning Horn
8 S325 Throttle Switch Assembly
(S/N’s 4636001 thru 4636374 only)
9 S330 Flap Switch
10 S405 MAP Switch
(S/N’s 4636375 and up)
9
2
2
3&4
7
1 6
10
5
8
10
2 1
Landing Gear Position and Warning

8K1 91-32-60 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
DOWN LOCK
SWITCHES
P301 P101 J102
J101 P102
1
G1E22 B B G1J20 1
3
G2H22 C C G2C20 3
S102
L.MAIN
LANDING GEAR
INDICATION
P304 P402 J410
J402 P410
1
3A G1A22 G1C22 H H G1H20 1
CB319 3
G2E22 Z Z G2B20 3
S402
NOSE
P302 P201 J202

J201 P202
1
G1D22 T T G1G20 1
3
G2D22 U U G2A20 3
S202
G13C22
P361 R.MAIN
3 5 7
J361 SWITCHES SHOWN
GEAR DOWN AND LOCKED
L R SEE 91-29-10
N
M O M
A S A
I I
N E N
SEE 91-31-50
89801 AH 12.0
85508 L
101238 E
101301 C
104051 C
104301 NEW/S
Effectivity Landing Gear Position and Warning

PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 91-32-60 8K2
8K3
P301 P101 J102

GEAR WARN J101 P102 5
D
3A G7A22 G7C22 U U G7E20 4 L.MAIN O
4
CB320 6 W
G3F22 P P G3C20 5
2 S102 N
L
5 P304 P402 J410 O
TO W22A22 J402 P410 C
5
ANNUN. K
P329-33 * G7B22 n n G7F20 4 NOSE
3 4 S
(91-31-50) m m 6 W
G3E22 G3B20 5
UP S402 I
GEAR 6 T
SELECT 5 P302 P201 J202 C
SWITCH S342 J201 P202 5 H
E
4 n n R.MAIN S
G7D22 G7G20
G8F22
DN 4
4
6
G3D22 S S G3A20 5

GEAR S202
6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
HORN

CR
320 P301 P101 J104

J101 P104 3 AIR S S
CR QW
GND
U I
G8C
314 G1F22 G G G1K20 1 L.MAIN A T

1
A305 2
T C
22
G4H22N G6E22 H H G5A20 2 GND

S103 H
GB4-F P301 P101 J103
S325 J101 P103
8
3
1 G3R22 G3J22 D D G3M20 1 L.MAIN
1 U
G8A22 2
2 G4F22 E E G4C20 2 P
THROTTLE 7 S101
J348 L
P348 P304 P402 J403 O
G8B22
J402 P403 C
3 K
91-32-60 FebPAGE
MAP SWITCH 9
B G8L20 B B G3H22 K K G3L20 1 NOSE S
1 W
S405 2
A G8K20 F F G4E22 L L G4B20 2 I
S401 T
C P401 P303 C
4636001 thru 4636374
P302 P201 J203

P405 H
J201 P203 3 E
S/N’S 4636375 AND UP 10
R.MAIN S
J346 J347 G3G22 V V G3K20 1 1
FLAP P346 P347 2
G4D22 W W G4A20 2
S201
G8E22 8 G8D22 1
Effectivity
89801 AH 15.0
85508 L
G3U22 7 G3T22 3 G3S22 101238 E
NOTES: INDICATES TERMINAL BOARD 301#'S.
28/07
101301 C
P328-18 IN S/N'S 4636001 THRU 4636131 ONLY. 104051 C
S330 * 104301 S
3
Feb 28/07
PAGE 4
4636375 and up
Effectivity
CB319 P301 J101 P101 L.MAIN
J 1E P P 102 J 2
3A CB319A22 5 G1A22 G1E22 B B G1J20 1
1 DN LOCK
MAIN BUS
3
LANDING GEAR IND G2H22 C C G2C20 3
5 S102
91-32-60
G7A22 G7C22 U U G7E20 4

4 6
CB320 P P G3C20 5
3A CB320A22 6 P 103 J 3
GEAR WARN G3J22 D D G3M20 1 UP LOCK
1 2
G4F22 E E G4C20 2 S101
GEAR P 104 J 3
UP G G G1K20 1
SELECT 1 2
SWITCH 6 G6E22 H H G5A20 2
S342 5 4 (3) K312A-Y1 G11D20 M M G11C20 6
DN 6
(3) S342-3 G11A20 F F G11B20 4
G8F22 4 5
5 SQUAT
9
J 397 P (1) P387-7 CP17B22 Y Y CP17C20 7 S103

7 8
GEAR +

2 CP17D20N 9
HORN
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3 G8C22
G3P22

12
-
(2) P376-7 S2H22 K K S3H20 10

10 11
S3H20N 12
A305 GND 4 G4H22N
P304 J402 P402 NOSE

P 403 J 3
GB4-F K K G3L20 1
1 2 UP LOCK
(5) P328-2 W22A22 G4E22 L L G4B20 2
6 S401
P387-5 G2F20 M M G2J20 4
4 5
P/O JB14 SPLICE AT P2F-3 G2G20 p p G2K20 5
F G8J22
A P 410 J 2
G8H22 G1C22 H H G1H20 1
1 3 DN LOCK
G2E22 Z Z G2B20 3
5 S402
P401 P303 G7B22 n n G7F20 4
S405 4 6
B G8K20 F F G8A22 G3E22 m m G3B20 5
A G8L20 B B G3R22
G8B22
P302 J201 P201 R.MAIN

C P 202 J 2
J P G1D22 T T G1G20 1
405 1 3 DN LOCK
G2D22 U U G2A20 3
J 346 P P 347 J 5 S202
G8E22 8 G8D22 1 G7D22 n n G7G20 4
4 6
G3U22 7 G3T22 3 G3S22 S S G3A20 5
S330 P 203 J
FLAP 3
G3G22 V V G3K20 1
1 2 UP LOCK
G4D22 W W G4A20 2
NOTES: 6 S201
AV1B22 b b AV1C22 4
4 5
(1) TO 91-21-30, FIGURE 1, SHEET 4 TO AVIONICS (IHAS) f f AV1D22 5
(2) TO 91-27-30, FIGURE 1, SHEET 4 GB1-N
(3) TO 91-29-10, FIGURE 1, SHEET 3 (4) JB13-J
(4) TO 91-31-50, FIGURE 1, SHEET 15 (4) JB13-G
105115 A 10.0 (5) TO 91-31-50, FIGURE 1, SHEET 16 (4) JB14-K
8K4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
8K5 91-32-60 FebPAGE 5

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GRIDS 8K6 THRU 8L24

INTENTIONALLY BLANK
PAGE 6
Feb 28/07 91-32-60 8K6
CARD 9 OF 9
PA-46-350P
(S/N’s 4636001 AND UP)

9A1
Published by

2926 Piper Drive
U.S.A.
Member
General Aviation
9A2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
are as follows:
ORG950712 June 19, 1996 All

PR980101 January 1, 1998 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6
CR981223 December 23, 1998 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6
PR000201 February 1, 2000 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6
PR010515 May 15, 2001 1
CR050730 July 30, 2005 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8
PR060207 February 7, 2006 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8
CR070228* February 28, 2007 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 and 9

02/28/07.
manual.

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 1
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTRODUCTION
CHAPTER CHAPTER


2 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07
5 Feb 28/07
6 Feb 28/07
7 Feb 28/07
8 Feb 28/07
9 Feb 28/07
10 Feb 28/07
11 Feb 28/07
12 Feb 28/07
13 Feb 28/07
14 Feb 28/07
15 Feb 28/07
16 Feb 28/07
Index 1 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07
5 Feb 28/07
6 Feb 28/07
7 Feb 28/07
8 Feb 28/07
9 Feb 28/07
10 Feb 28/07

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTRODUCTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION
General 1 9A9
Effectivity 2 9A10
Pagination 3 9A11
Indexing 3 9A11
INDEX
Index 1 9B1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTRODUCTION

(5-20-00).
2. General
airplane.
correspondence.

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. Effectivity
1995 4636001 thru 4636020 2004 4636349 thru 4636363

1996 4636021 thru 4636076 2005 4636364 thru 4636374
1997 4636077 thru 4636131 2006 4636375 thru 4636399
1998 4636132 thru 4636186 2007 4636400 and up
1999 4636187 thru 4636247
2000 4636248 thru 4636313
2002 4636299, and
4636314 thru 4636338
2003 4636339 thru 4636348

Example:
46 36 001

MODEL CODE

fuel system.
PIPER.
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6. Pagination
with Page 1 (i.e. - 28-40-00, Page 1).
different page.
Example.
9. Indexing
apply.

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Wylie, Texas 75098
P.O. Box 1404
(3) ALTERNATOR:
Airport Complex
P. O. Box 273
(4) AUTOFLIGHT:
Olathe, Kansas 66061-1950 PH: (940) 325-9406
PAGE 4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(5) BATTERY:
(6) BRAKES:
1160 Center Road
Avon, Ohio 44011
(330) 374-3743
FAX: (330) 374-2290
Black Standard
Pneumatic De-Icer
Installation,
Maintenance and
10 Ammon Drive FAX: - (603) 669-0931
or,
55 Old Bedford Road
Lincoln, MA 01773

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

14405 Keil Road NE
(10) ENGINE:
43 Magnolia Ave. #4
20 New King Street
711 Taylor Street
Elyria, Ohio 44036
2600 S. Custer
Wichita, Kansas
(See Brakes, above)
or,
4520 Hampton Rd. FAX: (336) 766-9040
Clemmons, NC 27012
PAGE 6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

2600 Skypark Drive
(18) MAGNETOS:
7575 Baymeadows Way
Olathe, KS 66062
(20) OXYGEN SYSTEM:
2225 Erie Street
Torrance, CA 90504

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Piqua, OH 45356-2634
Propeller
Composite Blade
Propeller Owner’s
Aluminum Blade
Inspection, Repair,
P/N 006-05332-0001
2275 Stanley Ave. FAX: (937) 229-8531
Dayton, Ohio 45404
(26) STARTER:
or,
Granbury, TX 76048
(27) TURBOCHARGER:
Torrance, CA 90505
PAGE 8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(28) VACUUM PUMP:


Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
00 General
10 Time Limits
00 General
10 Jacking

20 Leveling
00 General
10 Towing
20 Taxiing
10 Parking
20 Mooring

12 SERVICING 1I3
00 General
10 Replenishing

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
00 General
20 Painting
00 General
20 Distribution
40 Heating
50 Cooling
22 AUTOFLIGHT 2F11
10 Autopilot
00 General
00 General
30 DC Generation
40 External Power
60 Emergency
20 Extinguishing
00 General
10 Aileron and Tab
20 Rudder and Tab
30 Elevator and Tab
50 Flaps
60 Speedbrakes
PAGE 12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
28 FUEL 3F9
00 General
10 Storage
20 Distribution
40 Indicating
00 General
10 Main
00 General
10 Airfoil
30 Pitot and Static
00 General
50 Steering
33 LIGHTS 4G5
40 Exterior
34 NAVIGATION 5C1
00 General
35 OXYGEN 6C1
10 Crew
20 Passenger

Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
37 VACUUM 6C15
00 General
10 Distribution
20 Indicating

51 STRUCTURES 6F1
00 General
70 Repairs
52 DOORS 6G13
10 Passenger/Crew
20 Emergency Exit
30 Cargo
55 STABILIZERS 6H13
00 General
20 Elevator
40 Rudder
56 WINDOWS 6I19
00 General
20 Cabin
30 Door
57 WINGS 6K5
40 Attach Fittings
50 Flight Surfaces
61 PROPELLERS 7C1
20 Controlling
00 General
PAGE 14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
71 POWER PLANT 7D5
00 General
10 Cowling
20 Mounts
70 Engine Drains
10 Distribution
30 Indicating
74 IGNITION 7F5

20 Distribution
10 Power Control
10 Power
20 Temperature
79 OIL 7J3
20 Distribution
30 Indicating
80 STARTING 7J15
10 Cranking
81 TURBINES 7K9
10 Charts


Feb 28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

1E23
Ailerons
Balancing: 6L9
Control Column
Installation: 3C24
Control System
Aileron - Rudder
Interconnect: 3D7
Control Cables: 3D2
Installation: 3D3
Wiring: 4C8 4F6
Corrosion Control
Control Wheel C
Wing: 6L3
Installation: 3C21
Installation: 6L7
Tab: 3D5
2D22
Compressor: 2E22
Dipstick: 2E23
Oil Level: 2F1
2E22
Slip Torque: 2F1
Servicing: 2D23
Ambient Temperature
Indication: 2E14
Stand: 2E7
9B1 INDEX FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 INDEX 9B2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

OAT: 9I13 2H19 7J11
9B3 INDEX FebPAGE 3

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Flaps
G Inspection
Warning 6I11
1K5 System: 6C9
PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 INDEX 9B4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Forward: 4H1
9B5 INDEX FebPAGE 5

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
P Propeller Rudder
Pagination: A11
7C11 Control System
Parking: 1G15
Piper
Repair: 7C11 3D13
Pitch Servo: 2G12
Rings: 3K10
Measuring: 3K3
5C11
Installation: 5C12
Pitot Head: 5C18
3K7 Seats
Test: 5C11
Placards: 1G23
Exterior: 1H1
Interior: 1H9
Components: 3I11
R System: 3J9
Limits: 3J4
PAGE 6
Feb 28/07 INDEX 9B6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

9B7 INDEX FebPAGE 7

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Filter: 6D3 Wing
Vertical Fin: 6I11
Y
Yaw Servo: 2G10
W
A11
Weather Radar: 5F1
Weighing: 1F15
Wheels
Bearing Cup: 4F4
Repairs: 4F3
PAGE 8
Feb 28/07 INDEX 9B8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
9B9 INDEX FebPAGE 9

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

INTENTIONALLY BLANK
PAGE 10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER
91
CHARTS & WIRING
DIAGRAMS
(Continued)
9C1
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
9C2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 91 (Continued)
CHAPTER CHAPTER
91 (Cont.)-List of 1 Feb 28/07 91-33-40 1 Feb 28/07

3 Feb 28/07 3 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07 4 Feb 28/07
5 Feb 28/07
91 (Cont.) 1 Feb 28/07 6 Feb 28/07
-Table of Contents 2 Feb 28/07 7 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07 8 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07 9 Feb 28/07
10 Feb 28/07
91-33-10 1 Feb 28/07 11 Feb 28/07
2 Feb 28/07 12 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07 13 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07 14 Feb 28/07
5 Feb 28/07 15 Feb 28/07
6 Feb 28/07 16 Feb 28/07
7 Feb 28/07 17 Feb 28/07
8 Feb 28/07 18 Feb 28/07
9 Feb 28/07 19 Feb 28/07
10 Feb 28/07 20 Feb 28/07
11 Feb 28/07
12 Feb 28/07 91-34-20 1 Feb 28/07
13 Feb 28/07 2 Feb 28/07
14 Feb 28/07 3 Feb 28/07
15 Feb 28/07 4 Feb 28/07
16 Feb 28/07 5 Feb 28/07
17 Feb 28/07 6 Feb 28/07
18 Feb 28/07 7 Feb 28/07
19 Feb 28/07 8 Feb 28/07
20 Feb 28/07 9 Feb 28/07
21 Feb 28/07 10 Feb 28/07
22 Feb 28/07 11 Feb 28/07
23 Feb 28/07 12 Feb 28/07
24 Feb 28/07 13 Feb 28/07
14 Feb 28/07
91-33-20 1 Feb 28/07 15 Feb 28/07
2 Feb 28/07 16 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07 17 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07 18 Feb 28/07
5 Feb 28/07
6 Feb 28/07
7 Feb 28/07
8 Feb 28/07
9C3 91 (CONT.) - LOE FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 91 (Continued)
CHAPTER CHAPTER
91-34-40 1 Feb 28/07 91-77-10 1 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07 2 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07 3 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07
5 Feb 28/07 91-77-20 1 Feb 28/07
6 Feb 28/07 2 Feb 28/07
7 Feb 28/07 3 Feb 28/07
8 Feb 28/07 4 Feb 28/07
5 Feb 28/07
91-34-50 1 Feb 28/07 6 Feb 28/07
2 Feb 28/07 7 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07 8 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07 9 Feb 28/07
5 Feb 28/07
6 Feb 28/07 91-77-40 1 Feb 28/07
7 Feb 28/07 2 Feb 28/07
8 Feb 28/07 3 Feb 28/07
9 Feb 28/07 4 Feb 28/07
10 Feb 28/07 5 Feb 28/07
11 Feb 28/07 6 Feb 28/07
7 Feb 28/07
91-35-10 1 Feb 28/07 8 Feb 28/07
2 Feb 28/07 9 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07 10 Feb 28/07
11 Feb 28/07
91-37-20 1 Feb 28/07 12 Feb 28/07
2 Feb 28/07 13 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07 14 Feb 28/07
15 Feb 28/07
91-52-70 1 Feb 28/07 16 Feb 28/07
2 Feb 28/07 17 Feb 28/07
18 Feb 28/07
91-73-30 1 Feb 28/07 19 Feb 28/07
2 Feb 28/07 20 Feb 28/07
21 Feb 28/07
91-74-20 1 Feb 28/07 22 Feb 28/07
2 Feb 28/07 23 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07 24 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07 25 Feb 28/07
5 Feb 28/07 26 Feb 28/07
91-79-30 1 Feb 28/07

2 Feb 28/07
3 Feb 28/07
4 Feb 28/07
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 91 (CONT.) - LOE 9C4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
9C5 91 (CONT.) - LOE FebPAGE 3

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 91 (CONT.) - LOE 9C6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 91 - CHARTS & WIRING DIAGRAMS (Continued)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
WIRING DIAGRAMS (SCHEMATICS) 91-21-20 & up (See Note Below)
ATA Code Grid No. ATA Code Grid No.

2120 8D19 7420 9G20
2130 8D23 7710 9H2
2140 8E3 7720 9H4
2150 8E7 7740 9H14
2210 8E13 7930 9I18
2300 8E17
2330 8E23 Subject Grid No.
2350 8F1
Air Conditioning 8E7
2430 8F7
Airspeed, Standby 9E19
2510 8G1
Altimeter, Radar 9F14
2730 8G13
Altimeter, Standby 9E19
2750 8G17
Annunciator 8J1
2760 8G21
Attitude Indicator, Standby 9E19
2820 8H1
Autopilot 9E23, 9F2
2840 8H5
Autopilot, 55X 8E14
2910 8H9
Avionics Cooling 8D19
3010 8H13
Avionics Dimming 9D7
3030 8I1
Avionics Lighting 9D7
3040 8I7
Baggage Compartment Lights 9D15
3060 8I11
C/B Panel Lights 9C15
3130 8I17
Cabin Heater 8E3
3150 8J1
Cabin Lights 9D11, 9D15
3260 8K1
Cabin Pressurization 8D23
3310 9C11
CHT Indicator 9I5, 9I13
3320 9D11
CHT Scanner 9H9
3340 9D19
Cigar Lighter 8G2
3420 9E16
Clocks 8G4, 8G6
3440 9F9
Combustion Analyzer 9H6
3450 9F17
Courtesy Lights 9D15
3510 9G10
Data Acquisition Unit 9I13
3720 9G14
DAU 9I13
5270 9G16
DC Coupler 9G2
7330 9G18
revision of Card 9. See Chapter 91 Table of Contents on Card 8.
9C7 91 (CONT.) - CONTENTS FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Subject Grid No. Subject Grid No.

Deice Ice Detection System 8H18
Detection 8H18 Ice Light 9E5
Pitot and Lift Detector 8I1 IHAS - Integrated Hazard Alert System 9F12
Propeller 8I11 Instrument Panel Switch Lights 9C23
Surface 8H13 Junction Blocks 8F22
Windshield 8I7 KMC 850 9F12
Digital Voice Recorder Clock 8G6 KMH-820 9F12
Door Ajar Warning 9G16 KN-63 9F24
Door Lights 9D15 KPA 900 9F10
EFIS KR-87 9G1
ADAHRS 9E23, 9F4 KRA 10A 9F14
Avidyne Entegra 9F2 Landing Gear Position and Warning 8K1
DAU 9F4, 9F7 Landing Light 9E9
Meggitt 9E20 Lift Computer 8G16
MFD - Multi-Function Display 9F7, 9F10 Lighting Blocks 8F24
ND - Navigation Display 9E22 MAP Indicator 9H19, 9I13
PFD - Primary Flight Display 9E22, 9F2, Map Lights 9C11
9F4 OAT 9I13
Electroluminescent Panel Lighting 9C15 Oil Pressure Indicator 9I9, 9I13, 9I18
Engine Ignition 9G20 Oil Temperature Indicator 9I9, 9I13, 9I18
Engine Start 9G20 Oxygen System 9G10
Enhanced Digital Indicator (EDI) 9H16 Position Lights 9D19
Exceedance Alert Horn 9F7 Post Lights 9C19
Exceedance Audio Alert 8J19 Power Distribution and Control 8F7
Fin Strobe (Optional) 9D23 Power Monitor and Meters 8F15
Flaps 8G17 Power Point 8G2
Fuel Flow Gauge(s) 9G18 Quad Digital Indicator (QDI) 9H14
Fuel Flow Indicator 9I1, 9I13 Radar Altimeter 9F14
Fuel Pumps 8H1 Radar, Weather 9F9
Fuel Quantity Indicator 8H5 Radio Master Switch 8F13
GMA-340 8F2 RDR 2000 9F10
GNS 430 9F2, 9F17 RPM Indicator 9H2, 9H19
Ground Blocks 8F20 Skywatch 9E23
Ground Clearance 8E17 SMARTboots 8H18
GTX 330 9F3, 9F22 SpeedBrakes 8G21
Hour Meter 8I17 Stall Detection and Warning 8G13
Hydraulic Pump 8H9 Standby Instruments 9E18
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 91 (CONT.) - CONTENTS 9C8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Subject Grid No.

Stereo 8G8
Stormscope 9F11
Strobe Lights 9D19
Summing Amp 8F4, 9F12, 9F14
Tachometer 9H2, 9H19, 9I13
Tail Light (Optional) 9D22, 9E1
Taxi Lights 9E9
TIT Indicator 9H4, 9I1, 9I13
Turn Coordinator(s) 9E16
Vacuum Indicator 9I5, 9I13
Vacuum Low Indicator 9G14
Vent Blowers 8E7
Vent Defogger 8E3
Weather Radar 9F9
Wing Inspection Light 9E5
WX-500 9F11
XM Receiver 8E23
9C9 91 (CONT.) - CONTENTS FebPAGE 3

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 91 (CONT.) - CONTENTS 9C10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

(CB331 in S/N’s 4636314 and up)
2 XDS308, XDS309 Map Light
1 2
Map Lights
9C11 91-33-10 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
MAIN
BUS
MAP LIGHT
3A
1
L50A 22
P326
J326
L50E 22 2 WHITE
L50C 22 1 BLACK
XDS
R327 309
75 Ohm,
P325 25 Watt
J325
1 L50H 22 L50J 22
2 L50K 22
L50G 22N
P324 XDS
GB4-L J324 308
L50D 22 1 BLACK
L50F 22 2 WHITE
89801 AH 23.0
Effectivity Map Lights

PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 91-33-10 9C12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
XDS309
P 326 J
NON-ESS BUS
1 WHT
MAP LIGHT
325 2 BLK
J 1E P P J
CB331A22 12 L50A22 2
3A
CB331 L50G22N 1
P 324 J
GB4-L 2 BLK
1 WHT
S/N’S 4636375 AND UP,
WITH AVIDYNE ENTEGRA XDS308
P326
J326
MAP LIGHT 325 1 BLK
P J 2 WHT
L50A22 1
3A
XDS309
CB329 * L50G22N 2
GB4-L
* CB331 IN S/N’S 4636314 AND UP 2 WHT

1 BLK
J324
XDS308
P324
85508 L 23.0
101238 E
101301 C
104051 C
104301 NEW/S
105115 A 18.0
Map Lights Effectivity

9C13 91-33-10 FebPAGE 3

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 91-33-10 9C14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1 A338 Inverter
Electroluminescent Panel Lighting (C/B Panels)

9C15 91-33-10 FebPAGE 5

28/07
Feb 28/07
PAGE 6
4636001 thru 4636374

Effectivity
LEFT AFT PANELS LEFT FWD PANELS RIGHT PANELS
P364 P368 P372
91-33-10
1 L40A22 1 L41A22 1 L42A22

2 L40B22 2 L41B22 2 L42B22
P365 P369 P373

1 L40C22 1 L41C22 1 L42C22
2 L40D22 2 L41D22 2 L42D22
P366 P370 P374

1 L40E22 1 L41E22 1 L42E22
2 L40F22 2 L41F22 2 L42F22

MAINTENANCE MANUAL

P367 P371 P375

1 L40G22 1 L41G22 1 L42G22
2 L40H22 2 L41H22 2 L42H22
L41J22 L42J22
L40H22N L41H22N L42H22N
GB4-B GB2-H
P363
J363
L40J22 2 BLK
TO TB1 L40K22 1 BLK * E L PANELS
(SEE POST LIGHTS, INVERTER
FIGURE 3)
A338
* RED IN S/N'S 4636001 THRU 4636131 ONLY.

89801 AH 44.0
85508 L
101238 E 43.0
101301 C
104051 C
104301 NEW/S
9C16
9C17
PILOT SIDE AFT PILOT SIDE FWD C0-PILOT SIDE
WHT WHT WHT

BLK BLK BLK
WHT WHT WHT

BLK BLK BLK
WHT WHT WHT

BLK BLK BLK

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
WHT

BLK
L40B22N
L41B22N
L42B22N
L40A22
L41A22
L42A22
1F 1F 3C
J P J P J P
7 L40K22 5 L41K22 8 L42K22
8 L40L22N 6 L41L22N 9 L42L22N
GB4-B GB4-C GB2-H

91-33-10 FebPAGE
J 363 P
BLK 2 L43J22
BLK L43K22 TO LB1-G
E L PANELS 1
TO 91-33-10, FIGURE 3, SHEET 4
INVERTER
115AC TO 28VDC
4636375 and up
A338
Effectivity
28/07
105115 A 14.2
7
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 8
Feb 28/07 91-33-10 9C18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1 A302 Dimmer Control

2 R301 Panel Light Dimmer Rheostat
Post Light Assembly
3
1
Post Lights
9C19 91-33-10 FebPAGE 9

28/07
Feb 28/07
PAGE 10
4636001 thru 4636020

Effectivity
PANEL - LIGHTS P315
L20A 20 A
DIMMER
PILOT'S 5A TO SWITCH LIGHT L21A 22 B CONTROL
L30A 20 PANEL LIGHT 5k CW
FWD DIMMER DIMMING REOSTAT L22A 22
CB PANEL 3 C
91-33-10
L23A 20 F 1
2
L24A 22N D
L23A 20
GB2-E
CL4A 20 TO DIGITAL CLOCK (91-25-10, FIGURE 2)
L40K 22 TO EL PANELS (FIGURE 2)
TO DIGITAL T.I.T. (91-77-20, FIGURE 1)
OPTIONAL
L23M 22 COMPASS
OXYGEN
L23F 20 LIGHT
GAUGE
GB-1 L23C 20
OR L23G 20

GB-2 L23M 22N
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
L23D 20

TAPER
BLOCK
GB2-P
Post Lights
TB1
CENTER
INSTRUMENT
PANEL
CO-PILOT'S
INSTRUMENT
PANEL
O.A.T.
PILOT'S INSTRUMENT
PANEL R.H.SIDE
1 1 WHITE TO ENGINE
L23N 22 COMBUSTION
2 2 BLACK ANALIZER
9C20
89801 AH 20.0
PILOT'S INSTRUMENT
PANEL L.H. SIDE P385 / J385
9C21
PILOT INSTR. PNL. PILOT INSTR. PNL. CENTER CO-PILOT COMPASS

L.H. SIDE R.H. SIDE INSTR. PNL. INSTR. PNL. LIGHT
L23M22
S/N'S 4636132
& UP ONLY
L23M22
BEZEL
LIGHTING
GB2-P

MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Post Lights
L23N20N
TAPER
BLOCK
TB1
L23F20 L23N20
L23G20
E10H22 (SEE 91-77-40,
L23C20 FIGURES 5 & 6)
L23D20 Q2L22 (SEE 91-28-40,

91-33-10 Feb
INSTR. PANEL LIGHTS FIGURE 1)

TO
E4H22 (SEE 91-77-40,
EL PANELS L40K22
5A FIGURE 6)
(SEE FIGURE 2)
4636021 thru 4636374
CB354 TO SWITCH A L20A20

L30A20 LIGHTS DIMMER E8H22 (SEE 91-77-40,
F
DIMMER
L23A20 FIGURE 3)
(SEE FIGURE 4) 2 5K
B L21A22
E15E22 (SEE 91-77-40,
C L22A22 1 CW
85508 L 20.0 FIGURE 4)
101238 E
A302 D L24A22N
Effectivity
101301 C
PAGE 11
104051 C E3H22 (SEE 91-77-40,

104301 NEW/S P315 FIGURES 1 & 2)
GB2-E
28/07
Feb 28/07
PAGE 12
4636375 and up
Effectivity
PILOT POST LIGHTS COPILOT POST LIGHTS 105115 A 14.1
91-33-10
NOTES:
(1) TO 91-27-50, FIGURE 1, SHEET 3
(2) TO 91-33-10, FIGURE 2, SHEET 3
(3) TO 91-34-20, FIGURE 2, SHEET 2
(4) TO 91-33-10, FIGURE 4, SHEET 7

MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Post Lights
LB1
B
C
L23D20 D
L23E20 E
TO P393-5 (1) L28B22 F
TO P363-1 (2) L43K22 G
TO K10-2 (3) RP116A22 H
P306 J
2 R301 5K
B L21A22 VVVVV K
1
C L22A22 L
DIMMER
CW
A L20A20 TO P2D-4 (4) M
F L23A20 A
D L24A22N
A302
POST LIGHT GB2-E
DIMMER
9C22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

3
1
Instrument Panel Switch Lights

9C23 91-33-10 Feb

PAGE 13
28/07
Feb 28/07
PAGE 14
4636001 thru 4636020

Effectivity
PANEL - LIGHTS P358 89801 AH 19.0
L30A 20 A
DIMMER
PILOT'S 5A SWITCH LIGHT L31A 22 B CONTROL
FWD DIMMING REOSTAT 5 K CW
3 L32A 22 C
CB PANEL 2
91-33-10
L33A 20 F 1
L20A 20 D
L34A 22N
SURF PROP
TO PANEL DEICE HEAT GB2 F
LIGHT DIMMER
CONTROL P315
L23L 22N RADIO
ELT AVIONICS AVIONICS MASTER GND CL
GB6 D
STALL WARN
ICE LT PITOT HEAT W / SHLD HEAT
HEAT
L28D 22N

REFER TO GROUND
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CLEARANCE SWITCH RP7E 22

GB6 H
SCHEMATIC
TAPER
BLOCK
L23L 22 TB3
L33A 20
L28C 22
L23K 22
SWITCH
L23J 22 LIGHT
L23H 22 DIMMER
BUS
CABIN EMERG
PRESSURE FUEL PUMP ALT #2 ALT #1 BATT. MAST. STARTER
L23H 22N
DAY / DIM NAV LT STROBE LT TAXI LT LDG. LT MAG - L MAG - R GB6 A
L23J 22N
VENT / DEFOG FAN AIR COND. CABIN HEAT GB6 B
L23K 22N
9C24
GB6 C
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Instrument Panel Switch Lights Effectivity
9D1 91-33-10 Feb
PAGE 15
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Effectivity Instrument Panel Switch Lights
PAGE 16
Feb 28/07 91-33-10 9D2
9D3
INSTR. 104051 C 19.0

TO
PANEL
POST LIGHTS
5A LIGHTS
DIMMER
(SEE FIGURE 3) CB354
L20A20
P358
P392 R309
5k 2
20 L35A20 L31A22 B D
TAPER 19 D4K20N 1 I
L32A22 C
BLOCK CW M
TB3 GB5-E L30A20 A
M
L33A20 F E
GB2-F L34A22N D R
A329
P392

L23S20 21 TO SW. PANEL
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

DITIGAL
IND. CABIN
LDG LT TAXI LT NAV LT STROBE LT DAY/NIGHT RESET PRESSURE
91-33-10 Feb
BATTERY
STARTER MASTER FUEL PUMP MAG L MAG R ALT #1 ALT #2
4636248 thru 4636313,
R387 P387
L23J22N 2 2 BLK 2
less 4636299
1
Effectivity
GB6A
PAGE 17
P J
28/07
R387 P387 388

L23P22 1 1 WHT
Feb 28/07
PAGE 18
4636314 thru 4636374

4636299 and
Effectivity
INSTR.
TO PANEL
POST LIGHTS DIMMER 5A LIGHTS 104301 C/S 19.0
(SEE FIGURE 3) CB354
L20A20
91-33-10
P392 P358
R309
20 L35A20 5k 2
L31A22 B D
19 D4K20N
TAPER 1 I
L32A22 C
BLOCK TO SWITCH PANEL CW M
ON INSTR. PANEL GB5-E L30A20 A
TB3
M
L33A20 F E
GB2-F L34A22N D R
A329
P392

L23S20 21 TO SW. PANEL INSTALLED WITH EFIS OPTION ONLY
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

RADIO MASTER
P365 DIGITAL
P365 IND. CABIN
L23T22 8 LDG LT TAXI LT NAV LT STROBE LT DAY/NIGHT RESET PRESSURE
9 L23U22N
GND CLEARANCE GB7-R
P366
P366
8
9
BATTERY
STARTER MASTER FUEL PUMP MAG R MAG L ALT #1 ALT #2
R387 P387
L23J22N 2 2 BLK
GB6A
2
R387 P387
L23P22 1 1 WHT 1
9D4
P 388 J
9D5
INSTR PNL 105115 A 14.0

LIGHTS
MAIN BUS
J 2D P L20A20 TO P306-A (1) P392
5A CB354A20 4 L35A20 20
20 21 SWITCH PANEL
CB354 ASSY
D4K20N 19
GB2-C
SWITCH LIGHTS
DIMMER
P358
R309
2 5K LB4
B L31A22 VVVVV SWITCH
DIMMER
1
C L32A22 LIGHTS S365
CW A
RADIO MASTER

A L30A20 B
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
F L33A20 L23T22

C
D L34A22N L23W22N
D
A329 GB2-F E
G L23V22
H PFD #1 L23U22N
J MFD
K PFD #2 GB7-R S366
GND CLEARANCE
TO P317-28 (2) L23Z22

TO P317-19 (2) L23Y22
P 378 J
1 L23P22 NOTES:
91-33-10 Feb
(1) TO 91-33-10, FIGURE 3, SHEET 4

2 L23J22N
(2) TO 91-31-50, FIGURE 1, SHEET 16
J 379 P
WHT 1 WHT
GB6-A
BLK 2 BLK
BLK
4636375 and up
WHT
Effectivity
PAGE 19
STARTER BATTERY FUEL MAG R MAG L ALT #1 ALT #2 LANDG LT TAXI LT NAV LT STROBE LT NIGHT/DAY CABIN
28/07
MASTER PUMP PRESS

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 20
Feb 28/07 91-33-10 9D6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

3
1
Avionics Lighting
9D7 91-33-10 Feb

PAGE 21
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
P313 AVIONICS
R302
2 5K DIMMING
B L26A22
1
C L27A22 TAPER
CW BLOCK
DIMMER
3A
A L25A20 TB2
CB356
F L28A20
D L29A22N
A301 GB2-D
S/N'S 4636299 AND 4636314 & UP
TO FLAP INDICATOR L28B20
TO VOLT/AMP METER L28C20

(91-24-30, FIGURE 2)
89801 AH 36.0
85508 L
101238 E
101301 C
104051 C
104301 NEW/S
Effectivity Avionics Lighting

PAGE 22
Feb 28/07 91-33-10 9D8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
R302 2 P313
AVIONICS 5K
VVVVV L26A22 B
DIMMING
MAIN BUS
DIMMER
1 AVIONICS LIGHTS
L27A22 C
J 2D P CW
DIMMER
CB356A20 5 L25A20 A
3A
L28A20 F
CB356
L29A22N D
A301
GB2-D
LB2
A L28C20
B RAD ALT
C TRIM MONITOR
D AUTOPILOT
E GNS-430 #1
F GNS-430 #2
G GI-106A
H GMA-340 AUDIO
J TRANSPONDER #1
K TRANSPONDER #2
L ADF RECEIVER
M
LB3
A L28D20
B
C DME
D IHAS ANNUN
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
M 105115 A 17.0
105130 A 30.0
Avionics Lighting Effectivity

9D9 91-33-10 Feb

PAGE 23
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 24
Feb 28/07 91-33-10 9D10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Cabin Lights
9D11 91-33-20 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2 1 1 2
P338 P339
2 1 1 2
L16E 22 1 1
L15E 22 L16G 22N 2 2
P352
P350
1 1 L16B 22 L16F 22 1 1
2 2 L16D 22N L16H 22N 2 2
P353
L15D 22
CABIN J337
LIGHTS P337
L15A 22 L15B 22
5A
CB337
L15C 22
P354
1 1 L16J 22
2 2 L16L 22N
P356
L15F 22 L16N 22 1 1
L16P 22N 2 2
2 1 1 2
P340 P341
2 1 1 2
89801 AH 22.0
85508 L
101238 E
101301 C
104051 C
104301 NEW/S
Effectivity Cabin Lights

PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 91-33-20 9D12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2 1 P338 1 2 P339
P350 P352
1 L16B22 L16E22 1
2 L16D22N L15E22 L16G22N 2
L15D22 P353
L16F22 1
CABIN 2
L16H22N
LIGHTS
NON-ESS BUS
J 1E P J
337
P
CB337A22 13 L15A22 1 L15B22
5A
CB337
L15C22
P354 P356
1 L16J22 L16N22 1
2 L16L22N L16P22N 2
L15F22
2 1 P340 1 2 P341
105115 A 16.0
Cabin Lights Effectivity

9D13 91-33-20 FebPAGE 3

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 91-33-20 9D14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1 A323 Timer
2 Baggage Compartment Light Assembly
3 Courtesy Light Assembly
4 S352 Timer Reset Switch
5 Cabin Door Lock Switch
6 S403 Baggage Door Switch
7 F407 Fuse (5A)
7 3
6 1
4 5
Courtesy Lights (Baggage Compartments, Door, & Cabin)

9D15 91-33-20 FebPAGE 5

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
BATTERY
BUSS
P401 P303
5A J401 J342 P342
L60K 20 L60A 20 D D L60C 20 22 22
F407
L60B 20 J417 S403 CABIN DOOR
L60F 20 LOCK SWITCH
2
J413 1
P413 2 1
W17C 20
W17D 20N
BAGGAGE
COMPARTMENT
LIGHT TO 91-52-70
FWD BAGGAGE DOOR SWITCH
A323
J332 P332 J344 P344 TIMER
22 22 RED 28 V
TIMER RESET LOAD
SWITCH
S352 GND
BLACK
WHITE
NOTE: SHOWN WITH DOORS OPEN.
P345 J345
L16S 22 L16R 22 L16P 22
L16V 22N L16U 22N L16T 22N

1 2 1 2 1 2
1 2
1 2 AFT ENTRANCE
BAGGAGE DOOR
COMPARTMENT
FORWARD
CABIN
2 1 2 1 89801 AH 21.0
85508 L
2 1 2 1 101238 E
101301 C
104051 C
104301 NEW/S
Effectivity Courtesy Lights (Baggage Compartments, Door, & Cabin)

PAGE 6
Feb 28/07 91-33-20 9D16
9D17
CABIN DOOR
INSTR PNL LOCK SWITCH TIMER RESET
LIGHTS SWITCH
(SHOWN DOOR OPEN)
BTTY BUS
F407 P401 P303

J 342 P J 332 P S352 J 344 P
L60K20 L60A20 D D L60C20 1 22 22 22 22
b b W17B22
5A
J401
Courtesy Lights (Baggage Compartments, Door, & Cabin)
L60B20
W17D22
W17C20
W17A22 TO P329-4
(TO 91-31-50, FIGURE 1, SHEET 16)
P 413 J J 417 P S403 UPPER
W17F22
2 1 DOOR
W17E22
1 L60F20 2 W17D20N S327

RED
FWD BAGGAGE J 316 P
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
BAGGAGE TIMER

DOOR SWITCH BLK
COMPARTMENT 2 A323
LIGHT (SHOWN DOOR OPEN) 1 (SHOWN DOORS OPEN) WHT
S326
LOWER
P
DOOR
345
J
L16S22 L16R22 L16P22
L16V22N L16U22N L16T22N
1 2 1 2 1 2
P
91-33-20 FebPAGE
1 2
J FWD FWD
CABIN CABIN
AFT BAGG AFT BAGG ENTRANCE
COMP COMP DOOR
2 1 2 1
4636375 and up
Effectivity
105115 A 15.0
28/07
7
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 8
Feb 28/07 91-33-20 9D18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

2 S303, S304 Nav & Strobe Lights Switch
3 XDS 202, XDS 203 Nav & Strobe Light, Right
4 XDS 102, XDS 103 Nav & Strobe Light, Left
5 A103, A201 Strobe Light Power Supply
3 5 5 4
1&2
Position and Strobe Lights

9D19 91-33-40 FebPAGE 1

28/07
Feb 28/07
PAGE 2
4636001 thru 4636020

Effectivity P301
P101 J109
91-33-40
J101 P109 P110 P111

Z Z WH/ORG 3 3 LEFT
a a WH/BLU 2 2 3 3
c c 1 PWR 1 STROBE
L5B 18 WHITE 1 1 L5D 18
2 SUP. 2 LIGHT
STROBE 4 4
4
LIGHTS L9B 18N
2 3 P302
L4A 18 L5A 18 P201 J209
5A STROBE J201 P209
c c P210 P211
1 LT. SW. WH/ORG 3 3 RIGHT
2 Z Z WH/BLU 2 2 3 3
PWR
1 SUP. STROBE
L5E 18 a a WHITE 1 1 L5D 18 1
LIGHT

4 4 2 2
3
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

L9C 18N
MAIN
BUS
P301
P101 J109
J101 P109
Z Z WH/ORG 3 3
L2B 18 a a WH/BLU 2 2 L2D 18 LEFT
c c WHITE 1 1 POSITION
POSITION 4 4 LIGHT
LIGHTS 2 3 4
L9B 18N
L1A 18 L2A 18 P302
5A NAV. P201 J209
LT. SW. J201 P209
1
2 c c WH/ORG 3 3
L2E 18 Z Z WH/BLU 2 2 L2D 18 RIGHT
a a WHITE 1 1 POSITION
4 4 LIGHT
L9C 18N 3
89801 AH 17.0
9D20
9D21
* P101 P109
STROBE LT. P301 J101 J109 LEFT
SWITCH STROBE
Z Z WH/ORG 3 P110 P111
2 3
a
_ a
_ WH/BLU 2 3 3
S304 c c_ PWR
L5C18 _ WHITE 1 L5D18 1 SUP 1
4 2 2
STROBE STROBE LT. A103 XDS
LIGHTS SWITCH L9B18N
P386 R386 102
3
R386 P386 2 4 4
L5A18 L5B18
L4A18 3 3 L4B18 P201 P209
5A P302 J201 J209 RIGHT
1
S304 c c STROBE
CB345 _ _ WH/ORG 3 P210 P211
Z Z WH/BLU 2 3 3
PWR

L5E18 a
_ a
_ WHITE 1 L5D18 1 SUP 1
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

4 2 2
A201 XDS
L9C18N
203
* P101 P109
NAV LTS. P301 J101 J109 LEFT
SWITCH
POS'N
2 3 Z Z WH/ORG 3
L2C18 a
_ a
_ WH/BLU 2 L2D18
S303 c
_ c_ XDS
WHITE 1
102
4
POSITION NAV LTS.
LIGHTS SWITCH L9B18N
P386 R386
91-33-40 FebPAGE
3
R386 P386 2 2 2
L2A18 L2B18
L1A18 1 1 L1B18 P201 P209
5A P302 J201 J209 RIGHT
1
POS'N
4636021 thru 4636313,
CB344 S303 c c
_ _ WH/ORG 3
L2E18 Z Z WH/BLU 2 L2D18 XDS
203
a
_ a
_ WHITE 1 (XDS
4 202 *)
less 4636299
85508 L 17.0
101238 E
L9C18N
Effectivity
101301 C
104051 C
* IN S/N'S 4636021 THRU 4636247 ONLY
28/07
3
Feb 28/07
PAGE 4
4636314 thru 4636374

4636299 and
Effectivity
91-33-40
J101 P109
P301 P101 J109 LEFT
STROBE
Z Z WH/ORG 3 P110 P111
a a WH/BLU 2 3 3
c c POWER
L5C18 WHITE 1 L5D18 1 SUPPLY 1
OVERHEAD SW. PANEL
4 2 2
STROBE A103
STROBE XDS
LIGHTS L9B18N
P388 R388 102
R388 P388 3
2 L5A18 4 4 L5B18
L4A18 3 3 L4B18 J201 P209
7.5A L5F18 1 1 P302 P201 J209 RIGHT
1

CB345 STROBE
c c
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
WH/ORG 3 P210 P211
FIN

Z Z WH/BLU 2 3 3
a a POWER
L5E18 WHITE 1 L5D18 1 SUPPLY 1
4 2 2
A201 XDS
L9C18N
203
L5G18
AUTOPILOT CONN.
FIN
104301 NEW/S 17.0 IN
AFT. PRESSURE BULKHD. FLASHING LIGHT
t t L5H20 1 1 1
L5L20 LIGHT
L5J20N 2 2 2 ASSY.
L5K20N 3 3 3
P J P431
430
9D22
9D23
J101 P109
P301 P101 J109
LEFT
Z Z WH/ORG 3
L2C18 a a WH/BLU 2 L2D18
– –
c c XDS
– – WHITE 1
102
4
L9B18N

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
AUTOPILOT CONNECTOR

IN AFT PRESSURE BULKHEAD

POSITION NAV LTS. TAIL
LIGHTS SWITCH LIGHT
R386 P386 2 3 P386 R386
L1A18 1 1 L1B18 L2A18 2 2 L2B18 L2F18 g _
_ g L2G18
5A S303
CB344
OPTIONAL
91-33-40 FebPAGE
J201 P209
P302 P201 J209
c c RIGHT
– – WH/ORG 3
L2E18 Z Z WH/BLU 2 L2D18
4636314 thru 4636374
a a XDS
– – WHITE 1
203
4
L9C18N
4636299 and
Effectivity
104301 NEW/S 17.1

28/07
5
Feb 28/07
PAGE 6
4636375 and up
Effectivity
LEFT LEFT
POSITION 112 TAXI LIGHT
LIGHTS J P STROBE & POSITION
2F 1 LIGHTS
J P P301 P101 XDS101
CB344A18 1 2
5A Z Z WHT/ORG 3 BLU WHT POS (-)
CB344
91-33-40
a a WHT/BLU 2 BLU WHT POS (+)

c c WHT 1 L2D18 RED RED POS (+)
MAIN BUS STROBE J101 4 BLK RED POS (-)
LIGHTS J P
1 1
L9B18N
109 L5D18
L9D18
L2C18
L5C18
2F POWER
J P 2 2 STROBE
CB345A18 2 SUPPLY
7.5A 3 A103 3
CB345
P110 P111
L1A18
XDS102
TAXI
LIGHTS
2F
J P
L4A18
5A CB347A18 4

CB347
RIGHT
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
RIGHT
L8A18

212 TAXI LIGHT
POSITION J P STROBE & POSITION

LIGHTS 1 LIGHTS
P302 P201 XDS201
SWITCH 2
L1B18 1 L9C18 c c WHT/ORG 3 BLU WHT POS (-)
S303 3 L2A18 2 L2B18 L2E18 Z Z WHT/BLU 2 BLU WHT POS (+)
J P
2 1 386 L5E18 a a WHT 1 L2D18 RED GRN POS (+)
J201 4 BLK GRN POS (-)
L4B18 3 J P
L9C18N
209 L5D18 1 1
L5A18 4 L5B18 POWER
2 2 STROBE
S302 SUPPLY
L2F18
2 3
3 A201 3
CR302 P210 P211
1 XDS203
STROBE AXXX
LIGHTS L5F18 1 L5G18 L2G18 OPTIONAL
SWITCH J P TAIL LIGHT
388
s
L8B18 1 t L5H20 1 WHT 1 LIGHT FIN
S301 3 L9A18 2 L9B18 ASSY FLASHING
A/P CONN. IN L5J20N 2 WHT/BLU 2
J P
2 385 L5K20N P431
LIGHT
1 AFT PRESS BH 3
P J
TAXI 430
20BLK
LIGHTS
SWITCH
L8C18 2 L8D18 2 GRN FLASHER

L8F18 1 L8G18 1 RED ASSY
9D24
J P P J
343 367 105115 A 19.0
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

2 S303 Nav Lights Switch
In S/N’s 4636299 and 4636314 & up, see Figure 1, Sheets 5 and 6.
1&2
Tail Light (Optional)

9E1 91-33-40 FebPAGE 7

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
When this option is installed,

Wire L2A18 (see Figure 1)
is disconnected from
NAV LIGHT Switch Post #3.
POSITION
LIGHTS
2
L1A 18 L2F 18
5A 3
S303 NAV.
CB344 LT. SW.
MAIN
BUS
TAIL
AUTOPILOT CONNECTOR LIGHT
g g L2G 18
89801 AH 17.1
Effectivity Tail Light (Optional)

PAGE 8
Feb 28/07 91-33-40 9E2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
POSITION NAV LTS.

LIGHTS SWITCH
R386 P386 2 P386 R386
3
L1A18 1 1 L1B18 L2A18 2 2
5A
CB344 S 303
AUTOPILOT CONNECTOR
L2C18
TAIL
LIGHT
L2B18 L2F18 g
_ g
_ L2G18
L2E18
85508 L 17.1
101238 E
101301 C
104051 C
Effectivity
Tail Light (Optional) 4636021 thru 4636313,
Figure 2 (Sheet 3 of 3) less 4636299
9E3 91-33-40 FebPAGE 9

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 10
Feb 28/07 91-33-40 9E4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1 XDS307 Ice Light

2 S324 Ice Light Switch
3 1
Wing Inspection (Ice) Light (Optional)

9E5 91-33-40 Feb

PAGE 11
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Effectivity Wing Inspection (Ice) Light (Optional)

PAGE 12
Feb 28/07 91-33-40 9E6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ICE LIGHT
MAIN BUS
J 1E P
CB348A22 15
3A
L65A22
CB348
392
J P
ICE LIGHT 16
SWITCH 17
S/N’S 4636375 AND UP, WITH AVIDYNE ENTEGRA
105115 A 18.0
ICE LIGHT XDS307

ICE LIGHT SWITCH
P392 P392 P349 J349
3A L65A22 16 17 L66A22 2 2
CB348 L66B22N 1 1
GB6-P ICE LIGHT

(IN LEFT SIDE
OF FUSELAGE)
101238 E 24.0
101301 C
104051 C
104301 NEW/S
Wing Inspection (Ice) Light (Optional) Effectivity

9E7 91-33-40 Feb

PAGE 13
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 14
Feb 28/07 91-33-40 9E8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1 XDS401 Landing Light

2 K5 Landing Light Relay
3 S401 Nose Gear Up Lock Switch
4 S302 Landing Light Switch
5 CB346 Circuit Breaker (10 Amp.)
6 XDS101, XDS201 Taxi Lights
7 S301 Taxi Lights Switch
8 CB 347 Circuit Breaker (7.5 Amp.)
In S/N’s 4636375 and up, see Figure 1, Sheet 6 for Taxi Lights.
4&7 5&8
3
2
1
6 6
Landing and Taxi Lights

9E9 91-33-40 Feb

PAGE 15
28/07
Feb 28/07
PAGE 16
4636001 thru 4636020

Effectivity
P101
P109
P301 J101 J109 J112
P112 XDS101
L9B18 Z Z WH/ORG 3 1
91-33-40
TAXI 2
LIGHT a a WH/BLU 2
TAXI LIGHT SWITCH
c c LEFT
WHITE 1
2 3
L8A 18 L9A18
7.5A
CB347 S301 P201
P209 P212
P302 J201 J209 J212 XDS201
PILOT'S AFT
CB PANEL c c WH/ORG 1
L9C18 3
Z Z WH/BLU 2
2

RIGHT
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
a a WHITE

1
P402
P304 J402
XDS401
L10B18 a a L10C18
LANDING LIGHT NOSE

3 1 GEAR
5 ASSY L12A18N
4 3
10A L10A18
CB346 A
G2F22 5 LANDING
PILOT'S AFT CR LIGHT LANDING LIGHT
LANDING 2 3 5
CB PANEL L11B22 6 RELAY
LIGHT S302 (K5)
SWITCH L10B22N P387
J387 B P402 J403 NOSE UP LOCK
GB4-P P304 J402 P403 SWITCH
4 6
M M G2J20 4
S401
G2G22 p p G2K20 5 5
9E10
89801 AH 18.0
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Landing and Taxi Lights Effectivity
9E11 91-33-40 Feb
PAGE 17
28/07
Feb 28/07
PAGE 18
4636132 thru 4636374

Effectivity
P101 P109
P301 J101 J109 J112
P112 XDS101
WH/ORG
91-33-40
L9D18 Z Z 3 1
TAXI a a WH/BLU 2 2
(TAXI)
LIGHT c c WHITE 1
P385 R385 LEFT
(S301) 3
R385 P385 2 L9A18 2 2 L9B18
L8A18 1 1 L8B18 L8C18
5A P201 P209
P302 J201 J209 P212
CB347 1 L8F18 J212 XDS201
(PULSE) 1 2 P343 L9C18 c c WH/ORG 3 1
R343
Z Z WH/BLU 2 2
a a
L8G18
L8D18
WHITE 1 RIGHT

P367
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

FLASHER RED 1
ASSY GRN P402
2
P304 J402
XDS201
L10B18 a a L10C18
LANDING
LIGHT
3 1 NOSE L12A18N
5 3 GEAR
L10A18 4
10A A ASSY
G2F22 5
CB346 LANDING
LANDING L11B22 6 LANDING
CR5 LIGHT
LIGHT SWITCH LIGHT
P387 RELAY
2 3 P384 R384
L11C22 2 2 B K5
P384 R384
L12A22 1 1 L10B22N NOSE UP LOCK
P402 J403 SWITCH
GB4-P P304 J402 P403
6
4
M M G2J20 4 S401
G2G22 p p G2K20 5 5
SHOWN GEAR DOWN

101238 E 18.0
101301 C
104051 C
104301 G/S
9E12
9E13
LANDING LANDING LIGHT RELAY

LIGHT
MAIN BUS
1
2F 387 LANDING LIGHT
J P P J 5
CB346A18 3 L10A18 18 4 18
10A 3 XDS201
18 5 20
CB346 A

L11B20 6 20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CR5 NOSE
L10B18

3
LANDING B GEAR
LIGHT SW ASSY L12A18N
K5
S384 375 18
J P
2 3 L11C22 2 G2F20
L12A22 1 L12B20N J402 L10C18
a a 403 GEAR UP
GB4-P P J 6 NOSE
M M G2J20 2 UP LOCK
4 5
L11B20 p p G2K20 1 SWITCH
GEAR DOWN
P304 P402 S401
91-33-40 Feb
105115 A 18.0
SEE FIGURE 1, SHEET 6, FOR TAXI LIGHTS.

4636375 and up
Effectivity
PAGE 19
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 20
Feb 28/07 91-33-40 9E14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
9E15 91-34-20 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1 Pilot's Turn Coordinator (Standard)

Copilot's Turn Coordinator (Optional)
2 CB318*, CB336 Circuit Breaker (3 Amp)
* CB317 in 4636001 thru 4636131 only
Turn Coordinator(s)
PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 91-34-20 9E16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PILOT'S
TURN
TURN
COORD
P306 COORDINATOR **
F1A 22 A
3A
PILOT'S FWD CB317 *
CB PANEL F2A 22N B
C
GB4-E
* CB318 IN S/N'S 4636001 THRU 4636131 ONLY.

** IN S/N' 4636248 AND UP, SEE AUTOPILOT C.I.P. FOR PILOT'S TURN COORDINATOR WIRING.
CO-PILOT'S CO-PILOT'S
TURN TURN
COORD P307 COORDINATOR
F3A 22 A
3A
PILOT'S FWD CB336
CB PANEL F4A 22N B
C
GB2-B
OPTIONAL
89801 AH 38.0
85508 L
101238 E
101301 C
104051 C
104301 NEW/S
Turn Coordinator(s)
9E17 91-34-20 FebPAGE 3

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

3 K-1 Lighting Relay
4 S356 Standby Gyro Switch
5 PS-834A Power Supply
4 1-2
3
4 1-2
Effectivity Standby Instruments

PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 91-34-20 9E18
9E19
ALTIMETER
VIB STBY ALTIMETER
1E L312
J P
3A CB341A22 14 RP101A22 A 28 VDC PWR
CB341 RP110A22 D LIGHTING +
RP111C22N E LIGHTING -
LIGHTING RELAY
RP111A22N
RP117A20 RP112A20N B GND
MAIN BUS
A3
A2 GB5-N
A1 RP110B22
TO LB1-H RP116A22
(SEE 91-33-10, FIGURE 3, SHEET 4)
B3 ATTITUDE IND
GB5-M L313
STBY A 28 VDC PWR
ATTITUDE B2
INDICATOR A1 RP110C22 C LIGHTING +
2D

J P RP111D22N E LIGHTING -
X1
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
7.5A CB342A20 1 RP102A20 RP113A20N B GND

CB342
Standby Instruments
RP105C20
CR6 K10
X2 GB5-K
RP102B20N RP114A22
STBY AIRSPEED
L311
GB5-P
RP110D22 A LIGHTING +
RP103A20 RP111B22N B LIGHTING -
POWER SUPPLY
PS-834A P201 P302 3 ON
2 S356
28VDC POWER A RP103B20 i i
+24/28VDC OUT C RP105A20 m m RP105B20 1
OFF MAG COMPASS
ON/OFF CONTROL I RP106A22 k k RP106B22 6 450 451
P J P
REMOTE TEST IN K RP107A22 e e RP107B22 1 1 LIGHTING +
5
REMOTE TEST LAMP J G G 2 2
RP119A22N
RP108A22 LIGHTING -
RP118A20N
4 TEST RP115A20N
91-34-20 FebPAGE
REMOTE WARN LAMP L RP109A22 H H

STANDBY GB6-D
GND RETURN E RP104A20N p p
GYRO
J201 SWITCH
GB4-H GB5-F
RIGHT WING RADAR POD
RP108B22 TO P328-6
}
4636375 and up
(SEE 91-31-50, FIGURE 1, SHEET 15)

RP109B22 TO P328-18
Effectivity
105115 A 20.0
28/07
5
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1 S-TEC 6446 Flux Sensor

2 ADAHRS Select Relay
3 Meggitt 37002-01-02 ADAHRS Unit
4 ADAHRS Select Switch
5 Meggitt 84-133-5 PFD Unit
6 Meggitt 84-134-5 ND Unit
2-3
4-5-6
4-5-6
Electronic Flight Instrument System (EFIS) - Meggitt

PAGE 6
Feb 28/07 91-34-20 9E20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PRESSURE BULKHEAD DISC

AUTOPILOT
HARNESS FLUX VALVE
A A
B B
C D
n
D E
E H
SW-1
EFIS SWITCH
7
3
1
6 8
10
6
4
9 11
16
7
15 8
17
13
INSTR PANEL 5
12
FS: 108.00 14
1 2 3
2
2 6 7 8 3 22 WH (TYP)
9 10 11 4
12 13 14
1 15 16 17 5
SWITCH DETAIL
1
A L7A20
2
D L7B20N
2 5K N/C
"EFIS LIGHT DIM" B L7C20
1 (SEE DETAIL A)
C L7D20
F L7E20
HARNESS ASSY DETAIL A
104291 M

9E21 91-34-20 FebPAGE 7

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
-002 HARNESS ASSY
PRIMARY FLIGHT NAVIGATION

DISPLAY 1 DISPLAY 1
PFD1-P1 PFD1-P2 ND1-P1 ND1-P2 ND1-P3 FUNCTION
3 28VDC POWER A
22 28VDC POWER
4 28VDC RETURN
23 28VDC RETURN
A/P DISC PWR
A/P SW PWR
3 28VDC POWER A
22 28VDC POWER B
4 28VDC RETURN
23 28VDC RETURN
35 35 28VDC LIGHTS+
17 17 LIGHTS GROUND
5 CHASSSIS GND
5 CHASSSIS GND
1 2 422 BUS A
20 21 422 BUS B
CONN GND
2 1 422 BUS A
21 20 422 BUS B
6 24
422 BUS SHIELD
429 IN 1A BUS A
B
25 6 429 IN 1A BUS B
429 BUS SHIELD
CONN GND
27 CONFIGURE 0
9 CONFIGURE 1
28 CONFIGURE 2
10 CONFIGURE 3
29 CONFIGURE 4
11 CONFIGURE 5
30 CONFIGURE 6
12 CONFIGURE 7
31 CONFIGURE RETURN
27 CONFIGURE 0
9 CONFIGURE 1
28 CONFIGURE 2
10 CONFIGURE 3
STANDARD 29 CONFIGURE 4
CONFIGURATION 11 CONFIGURE 5
SEE FIG. 1 30 CONFIGURE 6
FOR OPTIONS 12 CONFIGURE 7
31 CONFIGURE RETURN
25 429 IN2 BUS A
C
7 429 IN2 BUS B
429 IN2 SHIELD GROUND
13 429 IN4A A BUS
32 429 IN4A B BUS
429 IN4B SHIELD GROUND
36 429 OUT1 BUS A
18 429 OUT1 B BUS
429 OUT1 SHIELD GROUND
14 429 IN4B BUS A
33 429 IN4B BUS B
429 IN4A SHIELD GROUND
26 429 IN3A BUS A
8 429 IN3B BUS B
37 429 OUT2A BUS A
19 429 OUT2B BUS B
13 REVERSIONARY MODE
1 AC EXC HI
14 AC EXC REF
AC REF SHIELD
15 CRS HDG REF
3 FD ROLL SIG
16 FD PITCH SIG
4 PITCH STR SIG
17 FD REF
SHIELD
6 HDG ERROR SIG
19 CRS ERROR SIG
SHIELD
CONN GND
8 DEV CT RT
21 DEV CT LT
SHIELD
10 DEV GS UP
23 DEV GS DN
SHIELD
11 GS FLG P
24 GS FLG N
12 NAV FLG P
25 NAV FLG N
13 LOC SW
104291 M, SHT 2 15 FD SEL SW

PAGE 8
Feb 28/07 91-34-20 9E22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A/P
INTERCONNECT REV REV F/D
RADAR AUTOPILOT NAV 1/GPS NAV 2/GPS SW-1 SKYWATCH ADAHRS 1 DISC SWITCH
ADAHRS/FSD EFIS-AP1 EFIS-NAV 1 EFIS-NAV 2 SW-1 EFIS-SKY AD1-P1 AV3 AP/SW
1
A 3 20R EADI
20BLK
7 20RED 3
8 20WHT 1
4
20R EHSI CB
20R EHSI BUS 2
20BLK
20 RED/WHT
20BLK
22BLK
22BLK
22BLK
B 1 1 23
2 2 7
3 3
22BLK
27 27 27 27
9 9 9 9
28 28 28 28 (ADD FOR METRIC)
10 10 10 10 (SHOWN WTIH NO OPTIONS)
29 29 29 29
11 11 11 11
30 30 30 30
12 12 12 12
31 31 31 31
ADF1 DME ADF1/DME METRIC
FIGURE 1
C 1 CONFIGURATION WITH VARIOUS OPTIONS SELECTED
2
3
4
5
6
26 7
27 8
28 9
4
5
6
1
2
3
7
8 5 20R/W
9
6
1
2 2 22B
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
13
22BLK
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

9E23 91-34-20 FebPAGE 9

28/07
Feb 28/07
PAGE 10
-002 HARNESS ASSY
INTERCONNECTS
PRIMARY FLIGHT PRIMARY FLIGHT NAVIGATION ADAHRS 1 AUTOPILOT PRESSURE
DISPLAY 1 DISPLAY 1 DISPLAY 1 BULKHEAD CONNECTOR AUDIO RAD ALT DME 1 ADF 1 XPNDR 1
PFD1-P1 PFD1-P2 ND1-P3 AD1-P1 FUNCTION EFIS-PB1 EFIS-AUDIO EFIS-RA EFIS-DME EFIS-ADF1 EFIS-XPNDR 1
1 ADF1 SIN A 1
91-34-20
20 ADF1 SIN B 2
2 ADF1 COS A 3
21 ADF1 COS B 4
SHIELD 5
6 DME1 OUT SIG 1
25 DME1 OUT RTN 2
SHIELD 3
9 RAD ALT SIG 2
28 RAD ALT RTN 3
31 RAD ALT VALID 4
SHIELD 1
36 DH FLAG 5
17 DH FLAG RTN 6
29 MKR I SIG 1
11 MKR M SIG 2
30 MKR O SIG 3
12 MKR RTN 22B
32 DME1 FLG 4
14 DME SEL SW2 5

33 DME SEL SW1 6
35 HOLD ANNUN 7
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

CONN GND 22BLK

1 ALT A1 1
9 ALT A2 2
2 ALT A4 3
SHIELD GROUND 4
3 ALT B1 5
11 ALT B2 6
4 ALT B4 7
SHIELD GROUND 8
5 ALT C1 9
13 ALT C2 10
6 ALT C4 11
SHIELD GROUND 12
7 ALT D4 13
15 ALT RETURN 14
SHIELD GROUND 15
13 28VDC POWER
14 28VDC POWER 20R ADAHRS PWR
15 28VDC RETURN
16 28VDC RETURN 20BLK
8 PARITY
9 CONFIG RETURN
31 SIG X A
20 SIG Y B
19 SIG Z C
SHIELD D
4 EXC HI E
3 EXD LO F
CONN GND 22BLK

12 CHASSIS GND 22BLK
1N4005 PILOT AIRSPEED WARNING

W1A22 PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY (EADI) CB
W1B22 SONALERT POS

13 W1E22 AIRSPEED WARN W1E22 SONALERT GND
9E24
104291 M, SH 3
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
9F1 91-34-20 Feb

PAGE 11
28/07
Feb 28/07
PAGE 12
4636375 and up
Effectivity
105130 B/F 8
P43012 P552 55X AUTOPILOT

GNS 430 #2 43 SHIELD GND
GPS ARINC 429 IN 1A 48 36 ROLL STEER 429 A
GPS ARINC 429 IN 1B 49 37 ROLL STEER 429 B
K17
GPS ARINC 429 IN 2A 50
91-34-20
1
GPS ARINC 429 IN 2B 51 9
5
2
10 P530
6 MFD
GNS 430 #1 P43011 3 48 ARINC 429 CH 4 RX A
GPS ARINC 429 IN 1A 48 11 68 ARINC 429 CH 4 RX B
GPS ARINC 429 IN 1B 49 7
4 22 SHIELD GND
GPS ARINC 429 IN 2A 50 12
GPS ARINC 429 IN 2B 51 8 K17
13
9
14 10
JB5-D (SEE **)
PFD #2 (CO-PILOT) P7322 JB5-C (SEE **)
DETAIL B
CH 0 TX A 22 1
CH 0 TX B 21 2
EFIS - Avidyne Entegra - PFD #1 & 2
SHIELD GND 25
DISCRET INPUT 12 14

JB5-B (SEE **)
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
SEE DETAIL B
JB5-A (SEE **)

PFD #1 (PILOT) P7321
CH 0 TX A 22 5
CH 0 TX B 21 6
SHIELD GND 25
DISCRETE INPUT 12 14 WHT 7
GROUND 55 BLU 11
DISCRETE OUTPUT 5 38 ORG 14
SHIELD GND 59
18 RED 13
P2E-1
TO SHIELD JUMPER OF P552 WIRING P552 55X AUTOPILOT
TO D2 (91-34-20, FIG. 4) (91-34-20, FIG. 4) 41 SHIELD GND
ALT ENGAGE 76 W W 20 ALT ENGAGE
ALT SEL 18 B B 21 ALT SEL
G/S FLAG + 37 W W
B B 1 G/S FLAG +
G/S FLAG - 36 2 G/S FLAG -
SHIELD GND 30 TO SHIELD JUMPER OF P7321 WIRING (91-34-20, FIG. 4) P551

LOC SWITCH 56 32 LOC SWITCH
NAV FLAG + 17 W 13 NAV FLAG +
NAV FLAG - 16 B W
B 14 NAV FLAG -
SHIELD GND 20
P7331 P552
G/S + UP 9 W W 18 G/S + UP
G/S - DN 37 B B 19 G/S - DN
45 SHIELD GND
VS CMD 42 22 VS CMD
SHIELD GND 21 P551
L-R + RT 24 W W 30 L-R + RT
L-R + LT 23 B B 31 L-R + LT
45 SHIELD GND
DC HDG HI 26 W W 28 DC HDG HI
HDG RETURN 27 B B 29 HDG RETURN
DC CRS HI 40 W W 11 DC CRS HI
CRS RETURN 41 B B 12 CRS RETURN
44 GND
P552
23 ALT SEL JUMPER
44 GROUND
38 GPSS ENABLE

INSTRUMENT PANEL ** 91-24-30, FIG. 4
9F2
*** 91-24-30, FIG. 5

9F3
105130 D/F 9
P7301 P318
PFD #1 (PILOT)
MAG/OAT 24VDC OUT 31 W WHITE A
MAG/OAT PWR GND 32 B BLUE B
C
MAG/OAT 422 TX + 6 W WHITE D
MAG/OAT 422 TX - 14 B BLUE E
F
MAG/OAT 422 RX + 5 W WHITE G
MAG/OAT 422 RX - 13 B BLUE H
J
CH_ID0 16
CH_ID1 17 TAIL DISCONNECT
CH_ID2 18
GND 25
AWG-20
28VDC INPUT A1 16 AWG RED 16 AWG RED P3D-1
GND A2 16 AWG BLACK 1
D1
2
20BLK
BEZEL DIMMING 15 BLUE LB4-H (SEE ***) GB2A-B GB2A-C R/H INST PNL
(SEE *) (SEE *)
GB2A-D
(SEE *)

AWG-20
28VDC INPUT A3
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
16 AWG RED 16 AWG RED
P2E-1

1
GND A4 16 AWG BLACK
2 D2
20BLK
GB2A-E GB2A-F L/H INST PNL CIRCUIT BREAKER PANEL
GB2A-H (SEE *) (SEE *)
(SEE *)
TO K17-13 (SH 8)
TO IHAS OPTION
DOT DENOTES PIN 1
P7321 JB RACK CENTER
SHIELD GND 69
ARINC 429 CH 7 TX A 68 W W JB4-A (SEE **)
ARINC 429 CH 7 TX B 67 B B JB4-E (SEE **)
91-34-20 Feb
P302 D1 THRU D4 DETAIL

W C
B D TO RADAR (91-34-40, FIG. 1)
E
GTX-330 TRANSPONDER
4636375 and up
P3301 #1
33 ARINC 429 CH 2 RX A
36 ARINC 429 CH 2 RX B
Effectivity
PAGE 13
28/07

** 91-24-30, FIG. 4
INSTRUMENT PANEL
*** 91-24-30, FIG. 5
Feb 28/07
PAGE 14
4636375 and up
Effectivity
105130 B/F 10
PFD #1 (PILOT) P7311 P7312 PFD #2 (CO-PILOT)

FQ RS232 RX (DAU) 25 25 FQ RS232 GND (DAU)
D5 D7
FQ RS232 GND (DAU) 18 18 FQ RS232 RX (DAU)
91-34-20
D6 D8
P901 DAU
19
P7321 18
36 P7322
TO P7321-30 (SH 8)
ANNUN LOAD 50 50 ANNUN LOAD
ANNUN CLK 11 11 ANNUN CLK
ANNUN DATA 31 31 ANNUN DATA
P552 30 SHIELD GND
55X AUTOPILOT
TO P552-41 (SH 8)
24 ANNUN LOAD
25 ANNUN CLK
26 ANNUN DATA
P7332
P7331
PITCH STR 15 15 PITCH STR
ROLL STR 30 30 ROLL STR
P552
55X AUTOPILOT
13 PITCH STR

12 ROLL STR
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
SIG REF 28 28 SIG REF

GROUND 29 29 GROUND
P552 55X AUTOPILOT
7 SIG REF 35 SHIELD GROUND
SHIELD GROUND 35 42 GROUND
P7321 P7322
DISCRETE INPUT 11 72 72 DISCRETE INPUT 11
P552 55X AUTOPILOT
4 FD LOGIC
FUEL IMBALANCE 39 F2A22 F2B22 F2B22 39 FUEL IMBALANCE

P328 ANNUNCIATOR
F2C20 F2C20 9 FUEL IMBALANCE
P329
D1C20 D1C20 2 LOW BUS VOLTS
LOW BUS VOLTS 58 D1A22 D1B22 D1B22 58 LOW BUS VOLTS
P7301 P7302
BYTEFLIGHT + 1 1 BYTEFLIGHT +
BYTEFLIGHT - 9 9 BYTEFLIGHT -
GND 8 WHT 8 GND
P7321 BLK
P7322
DISCRETE INPUT 14 53 ADAHRS 2 SELECT
ADAHRS 1 SELECT ADAHRS 2 SELECT 53 DISCRETE INPUT 14
DISCRETE INPUT 13 34
ADAHRS 1 SELECT 34 DISCRETE INPUT 13
A B
1
2
22 BLK
INSTRUMENT PANEL GB2A-A (SEE *) INSTRUMENT PANEL

3
ADAHRS 1 / 2
SELECT SWITCH
INSTRUMENT PNL REFERENCE DRAWING: * 91-24-30, FIG. 3
** 91-24-30, FIG. 4
9F4
*** 91-24-30, FIG. 5

9F5
105130 B/F 11
P7302 P318
PFD #2 (CO-PILOT)
MAG/OAT 24VDC OUT 31 W WHITE K
MAG/OAT PWR GND 32 B BLUE L
M
MAG/OAT 422 TX + 6 W WHITE N
MAG/OAT 422 TX - 14 B BLUE P
R
MAG/OAT 422 RX + 5 W WHITE S
MAG/OAT 422 RX - 13 B BLUE T
U
CH_ID1 17 TAIL DISCONNECT
CH_ID2 18
GND 25 AWG-20
28VDC INPUT A1 16 AWG RED 16 AWG RED P3D-3
GND A2 16 AWG BLACK 1
2 D3
20BLK
BEZEL DIMMING 15 BLUE LB4-K (SEE ***) GB3A-F GB3A-H R/H INST PNL
(SEE *) (SEE *)
GB3A-J
(SH28)

AWG-20
28VDC INPUT A3 16 AWG RED 16 AWG RED
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

1 P2E-2
16 AWG BLACK
GND A4
2 D4
20BLK
L/H INST PNL
GB3A-K GB3A-L CIRCUIT BREAKER PANEL
GB3A-M (SEE *) (SEE *)
(SEE *)
SEE DETAIL C
CONTROL
INHIBIT SW MTA106D SWITCH
P7322
1
COPILOT PFD 13 2
CONTROL INHIBIT 3 GB4A-L
(SEE *) (CONTROL INHIBIT SW)
91-34-20 Feb
O O
F N
1
F
2
O
N
3
(KEYWAY) (KEYWAY)
(BACKVIEW)
4636375 and up
DETAIL C
INSTRUMENT PANEL
Effectivity
PAGE 15

28/07
** 91-24-30, FIG. 4
*** 91-24-30, FIG. 5
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 16
Feb 28/07 91-34-20 9F6
9F7
105130 B/F 12
INSTRUMENT PANEL EXCEEDANCE RC 1/2G302JT

ALERT HORN (3K 1/2 WATT)
P530 (REF)
MFD (2 REQ'D) 20 GA JUMPER
DISC OUT 1 14 E3L22 (EXCEEDANCE HORN) - + E3M20

20 GA RED JUMPER
+28 VDC 40 22RED 20 AWG RED P2D-2

+28 VDC 41 22RED
+28 VDC 42 22RED
GND 60 22BLK 20 AWG BLK GB3-N (SEE *)
GND 61 22BLK
GND 62 22BLK CIRCUIT BREAKER PANEL
LIGHTING 18 22BLU LB4-J (SEE ***)

EFIS - Avidyne Entegra - MFD
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

JB RACK CENTER
Figure 5
HS ARINC 429 CH 3 RX A 8 W JB6-J (SEE **)

HS ARINC 429 CH 3 RX B 28 B JB6-N (SEE **)
SHIELD GND 21
91-34-20 Feb
P902
W DAU
RS232 D IN (DAU) 70 19
RS232 D OUT (DAU) 69 B 37
RS232 D GND (DAU) 71 O
18
36
4636375 and up
Effectivity
PAGE 17
INSTRUMENT PANEL
28/07
** 91-24-30, FIG. 4
*** 91-24-30, FIG. 5
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 18
Feb 28/07 91-34-20 9F8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1 IN-182A or MFD Radar Indicator

2 ART 2000 Radar Antenna Transceiver
Radar Antenna Array
Configuration Module
Weather Radar
9F9 91-34-40 FebPAGE 1

28/07
Feb 28/07
PAGE 2
4636375 and up
Effectivity
105130 B/F 18
RDR 2000
WEATHER RADAR
91-34-40
P5001
P201/P302
+28V DC AIRCRAFT POWER 34 20RED A A 20RED P3B-6

+28V DC AIRCRAFT POWER 35 20RED
DC AIRCRAFT PWR/CHAS GND 36 20BLK

20BLK KPA 900
DC AIRCRAFT PWR/CHAS GND 37
CONFIGURATION MODULE
MODULE GND 50 1 POWER GROUND

CONFIG DATA RX 49 4 CONFIG DATA TX
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHIP SELECT 1 46 2 CHIP SELECT 1

47 9 CHIP SELECT 2
CHIP SELECT 2
CONFIG CLOCK 45 6 CONFIG CLOCK
CONFIG DATA TX 48 8 CONFIG DATA RX
Weather Radar
5V DC PWR 44 5 5V DC PWR
RADAR POD
P201/P302
8 W W TO P7321-68 (91-34-20, FIG. 4)

429 PITCH/ROLL RX A C C
9 B B
429 PITCH/ROLL RX B D D TO P7321-67 (91-34-20, FIG. 4)
E E
MFD
P530
W W
429 CNTRL RX A 2 J J 43 LS ARINC 429 TX1 A
B B
429 CNTRL RX B 3 K K 63 LS ARINC 429 TX1 B
L L 64 429 GND
M M
W W
453 CNTRL TX A 42 N N 75 453 CH 0 RX A
B B 78 453 CH 0 RX B
453 CNTRL TX B 43 P P
R R 67 453 GND
024-0064-00 CABLE
ON/OFF 31 B B 1 R/T ON/OFF
RADAR POD
9F10
9F11
105130 B/F 21
AFT EQUIPMENT SHELF

WX-500
STORMSCOPE
P5001
14/28 VDC 1 20RED 20RED P3C-4

6 20RED
GND 5 20BLK 20BLK
9 20BLK GB5A-B
(SEE *) CIRCUIT BREAKER PANEL
P5003
MFD

P530
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

WX-500 Stormscope
RS 232 TX 20 WHT 50 RS232 C RX

RS 232 RX 8 BLU 49 RS232 C TX
ORG 51 RS232 C GND
Figure 2
1
HEADING CONFIG
2
INSTRUMENT PANEL
P5002
CONFIG GND 6
RS 232 GND 5 STORMSCOPE ANTENNA
(BFG P/N 803-10950-005 CABLE)
P5004
X LOOP 3 ORANGE C X LOOP

+12 V 16 RED D +12 V
91-34-40 FebPAGE
SENSE 17 BROWN B SENSE

ANT_REF 2 BLACK J ANT_REF
-12 V 15 YELLOW F -12 V
Y LOOP 4 GREEN G Y LOOP
ANT TEST 14 BLUE H ANT TEST
ANT COM 1 DRAIN A ANT COM
WIRE BRAID FROM ANTENNA CONNECTOR
20BLK
4636375 and up
LOWER FUSELAGE FS 206.00

Effectivity

28/07
** 91-24-30, FIG. 4
*** 91-24-30, FIG. 5
3
Feb 28/07
PAGE 4
4636375 and up
Effectivity
105130 A/F 22
INTEGRATED HAZARD ALERT SYSTEM (IHAS)

KMH-820
TRAFFIC/TERRAIN
P10 (1) THESE CONNECTORS ARE TO BE
LOCATED FOR EASY ACCESS.
+28V DC AIRCRAFT PWR 59 22RED 20RED CONNECTORS ARE TO BE BAGGED AND
P3C-5
91-34-40
+28V DC AIRCRAFT PWR 82 22RED STOWED WHEN NOT IN USE, OR THEY MAY
ON 1 22BLK GB5A-C (SEE *)
BE MOUNTED.
DC AIRCRAFT PWR/CHAS GND 127 22BLK 20BLK GB5A-D (SEE *) CIRCUIT BREAKER PANEL
DC AIRCRAFT PWR/CHAS GND 128 22BLK
(1) IHAS DIAG PORT
P8202
DIAG RS232 TX 38 W W 2 RD
DIAG RS232 RX 39 B B 3 TD
DIAG RS232 TERM RDY 41 W W 4 DTR

DIAG RS232 READY 40 B B 8 CTS
P8201 BLK 5 SG
CFG MODL VCC (+5VDC) 76 W W 1 VCC (+5VDC)
B B GB5A-E
77 3 GND
Integrated Hazard Alert System (IHAS)
CFG MODL GND (SEE *)

CFG MODL CHIP SELECT 74 W W CHIP SELECT
B B 5
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CFG MODL CLOCK 75 4 CLOCK

SERIAL DATA IN 72 W W SERIAL DATA OUT

B B 2
SERIAL DATA OUT 73 6 SERIAL DATA IN
W W
CFG MODL SERIAL DATA OUT 108 9 CS
CFG MODL CS 107 B B 8 CLK
CFG MODL CLK 105 W W 10 SERIAL DATA IN

CFG MODL SERIAL DATA IN 106 B B 7 SERIAL DATA OUT
KCM 850
CONFIGURATION MODULE
AFT EQUIPMENT RACK
(1) EGPWS DIAG PORT
P8203
RS232 TX MON 99 W W 2 RD
RS232 RX MON 100 B B 3 TD
AUD1 SUMMING AMP BLK 5 SG
W W
500 OHM AUDIO HI OUT 20 15 IHAS AUDIO IN
500 OHM AUDIO LO OUT 21 B B
BLK GB5A-F
GB5A-H (SEE *) 16 SHIELD (SEE *)
(101437-003 ASSY) KA-815 (TOP)

TOP DIR ANT (YELLOW) J1 SUM
(101437-004 ASSY) DIRECTIONAL ANTENNA
TOP DIR ANT (BLACK) J2 (101437-005 ASSY) DELTA-1
TOP DIR ANT (BLUE) J3 (101437-006 ASSY) DELTA-2
TOP DIR ANT (RED) J4 TEST
(101437-007 ASSY) SUM KA-815 ((BOT)

BOTTOM DIR ANT (YELLOW) J5
(101437-008 ASSY) DIRECTIONAL ANTENNA
BOTTOM DIR ANT (BLACK) J6 DELTA-1
J7 (101437-009 ASSY) DELTA-2
BOTTOM DIR ANT (BLUE) (101437-010 ASSY)
BOTTOM DIR ANT (RED) J8 TEST
9F12
** 91-24-30, FIG. 4
*** 91-24-30, FIG. 5
9F13
105130 D/F 23
INTEGRATED HAZARD ALERT SYSTEM (IHAS)
1 1 1 (TAS SW)
2 2 2
1 4
KMH-820 3 3 3
O O O
N F N
TRAFFIC/TERRAIN P10 4 4 4 2 5
5 5 5
F
3 6
6 6 6
DOWN POS CENTER POS UP POS (KEYWAY) (KEYWAY)

W W JB6-K (SEE **) (TEST) (STDBY) (ON) (BACKVIEW)
TRFC CDU 429 TX A 54 B B MOMENTARY ON ON
TRFC CDU 429 TX B 55 JB6-P (SEE **) DETAIL D
P530 MFD
GPWS CTL 429 RX A 95 6 LS ARINC 429 CH 2 TX A
GPWS CTL 429 RX B 96 26 LS ARINC 429 CH 2 TX B
24 SHIELD
GPWS DATA 453 TX A 103 56 ARINC 453 CH 1 RX A
GPWS DATA 453 TX B 104 59 ARINC 453 CH 1 RX B
Integrated Hazard Alert System (IHAS)
27 SHIELD
CHASSIS GND 84 22 BLK GB5A-K (SEE *)

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EGPWS PWR GND 83 22 BLK GB5A-L (SEE *) SEE DETAIL D
TAS SW

6
TAS STANDBY 23
5 BLK
4
3 22BLK GB4A-F (SEE *)
FUNCTIONAL TEST 2 BLK
2
1
P43011 GNS 430 #1
RS232 GPS IN 88 58 RS232 GPS OUT
SUPPRESSION 68 JB3-K (SEE **)
JB3-P (SEE **)

P411 ANNUN CTL UNIT
TERR N/A ANNUN 120 10 TERR N/A ANNUN
TERR AWRN ANNUN 116 11 TERR AWRN ANNUN
TERR CAUTION ANNUN 117 5 TERR CAUTION ANNUN
SELF TEST INPUT 121 19 TERR PTT
TERR INHIBIT INPUT 126 20 TERR INHIBIT OUTPUT
BLK 9 LIGHTING LO
LANDING GEAR RETRACT 3 AV1E22 (SEE *) GB1A-M 22 BLK BLK 21 AIRCRAFT GROUND
91-34-40 FebPAGE
(GND = EXTENDED) P302-f BLK 22 AIRCRAFT GROUND

(SEE ***) LB3-D 22 BLU 8 PANEL LIGHTING HI
AIR/GND 4 JB3-C (SEE **) 22 RED 6 ANNUN PTT

(GND = ON GROUND) P317-21 (GND = TEST)
13 ANNUN PWR
P1F-4
12 PHOTOCELL DIM OUT
CIRCUIT BREAKER PANEL 7 BRT/DIM PWR IN
4636375 and up
HDG 429 RX A 62 W W JB4-B (SEE **)

B B
HDG 429 RX B 63 JB4-F (SEE **) INSTRUMENT PANEL
Effectivity
GB5A-J (SEE *)

28/07
AFT EQUIPMENT RACK ** 91-24-30, FIG. 4

*** 91-24-30, FIG. 5
5
Feb 28/07
PAGE 6
4636375 and up
Effectivity
105130 B/F 24
WHT
RAD ALT SW
BLK
KRA 10A
91-34-40
RADAR ALTIMETER A B
P1001
3
20 RED P3C-3
27.5VDC 5 20 RED
2
1
GROUND 11 20 BLK GB5A-M (SEE *)

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
KRA 10A Radar Altimeter

KI 250
RADAR ALT INDICATOR
P2501
Figure 4
(SEE ***) LB2-B 22 BLU 4
AUD1
SUMMING AMP
DH AUDIO HI 7 7 RAD ALT IN
8 SHIELD
20VDC 9 20 VDC 2
SELF TEST 7 SELF TEST 9
28VDC FILTERED 6 28VDC FILTERED 6
ANALOG ALTITUDE 2 ANALOG ALTITUDE 10

RAD ALT LO 12 RAD ALT LO 1
LIGHT COMMEN 5

INSTRUMENT PANEL
9F14
** 91-24-30, FIG. 4
*** 91-24-30, FIG. 5
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
9F15 91-34-40 FebPAGE 7

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 8
Feb 28/07 91-34-40 9F16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1 Garmin GNS-430 Global Navigation System

2 Garmin GI-106 Course Deviation (NAV) Indicator
3 NAV Antenna Coupler
4 GPS#1 Antenna (i.e. -left side)
GPS#2 Antenna (i.e. -right side)
5 COM#1 Antenna
6 COM#2 Antenna
7 NAV Antenna
2
3
4 5
7
GNS-430 - COM/NAV/GPS Effectivity

9F17 91-34-50 FebPAGE 1

28/07
Feb 28/07
PAGE 2
4636375 and up
Effectivity
105130 B/F 13
#1 GNS 430
NAV/COMM/GPS P43011 22 GA RED JUMPER
+ 28VDC GPS POWER 19 22RED GPS/N-1 P7322

+ 28VDC GPS POWER 20 22RED GPS/N-1 PFD #2
P317-12
91-34-50
4 CH 2 RX A
GROUND 77 22BLK GB2A-M (SEE *) 3 CH 2 RX B
GROUND 78 22BLK 20BLK GB2A-N (SEE *) TO GI-106A-20 (SH 15) 5 SHIELD GND
LIGHTING BUS LO 40 22BLK
LIGHTING BUS HI 39 22BLU LB2-E (SEE ***)
P43061 P7321
PFD #1
VOR/ILS ARINC 429 OUT A 24 W 4 CH 2 RX A
VOR/ILS ARINC 429 OUT B 23 B 3 CH 2 RX B
5 SHIELD GND
P3401 GMA 340 (STD)

NAV AUDIO HIGH 16 W 17 NAV 1 AUDIO HIGH
NAV AUDIO LOW 17 B 18 NAV 1 AUDIO LOW
P43021 18 GA RED JUMPER
+ 28VDC POWER 11 18RED COM-1
+ 28VDC POWER 12 18RED COM-1
P317-1
GROUND 21 18BLK GB2A-J (SEE *)

GROUND 22 18BLK GB2A-K (SEE *)
COMM AUDIO HI 7 W 9 COMM 1 AUDIO HIGH
GNS 430 - COM/NAV/GPS
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
COMM AUDIO LO 19 B 10 COMM 1 AUDIO LOW

MIC AUDIO 6
11 COMM 1 MIC AUDIO

MIC KEY 4 12 COMM 1 MIC KEY
TRANSMIT INTERLOCK 14 30 COMM 2 MIC KEY
P501
DC COUPLER
5 XMTR PTT
P43022
GNS430 #2
4 MIC KEY
14 TRANSMIT INTERLOCK
P43011
P43012
CROSSFILL 41 W 42 CROSSFILL
CROSSFILL 42 B 41 CROSSFILL
P3301 GTX-330 TRANSPONDER

#1
GPS ARINC 429 OUT 1A 46 W
B 32 ARINC 429 CH 1 RX A
GPS ARINC 429 OUT 1B 47 35 ARINC 429 CH 1 RX B
P530
MFD
5 LS ARINC 429 CH 1 RX A
25 LS ARINC 429 CH 1 RX B
3 SHIELD GND
P7321
PFD #1
41 CH 1 RX A
40 CH 1 RX B
44 SHIELD GND
P7322
PFD #2
41 CH 1 RX A
40 CH 1 RX B
44 SHIELD GND
INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT PANEL REFERENCE DRAWING: * 91-24-30, FIG. 3

9F18
** 91-24-30, FIG. 4
*** 91-24-30, FIG. 5
9F19
105130 B/F 14
#2 GNS 430
NAV/COMM/GPS P43012
+ 28VDC GPS POWER 19 22 RED 22 RED GPS/NAV-2 P3B-4
+ 28VDC GPS POWER 20 22 RED
GROUND 77 22BLK GB4A-J (SEE *)
GROUND 78 22 BLK 20BLK GB4A-K (SEE *)
GROUND 40 22 BLK
28V DIM 39 22BLU LB2-F (SEE ***)
P43022
+ 28VDC POWER 11 18 RED 18RED COM-2 P3A-2
+ 28VDC POWER 12 18 RED
GROUND 21 18BLK GB4A-C (SEE *)
GB4A-D (SEE *) CIRCUIT BREAKER PANEL
GROUND 22 18BLK
P43062
P3401 GMA 340 (STD)

NAV AUDIO HIGH 16 WHT 19 NAV 2 AUDIO HIGH
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
NAV AUDIO LOW 17 BLU 20 NAV 2 AUDIO LOW

P43022
COMM AUDIO HI 7 WHT 13 COMM 2 AUDIO HIGH
COMM AUDIO LO 19 BLU 14 COMM 2 AUDIO LOW
MIC AUDIO 6 15 COMM 2 MIC AUDIO
P7321 PFD #1
W
B 7 CH 4 RX A
6 CH 4 RX B
10 SHIELD GND
P43062 P7322
PFD #2
VOR/ILS ARINC 429 OUT A 24 W W 7 CH 4 RX A
B B 6 CH 4 RX B
VOR/ILS ARINC 429 OUT B 23
10 SHIELD GND
P43012
64 SHIELD GND
GPS ARINC 429 OUT 1A 46 W W 43 CH 3 RX A
B B
91-34-50 FebPAGE
GPS ARINC 429 OUT 1B 47 42 CH 3 RX B
P7321
JB4-J (SEE **) W PFD #1
43 CH 3 RX A
JB4-N (SEE **) B 42 CH 3 RX B
64 SHIELD GND
P530
MFD
W 45 LS ARINC 429 CH 2 RX A
4636375 and up
B 65 LS ARINC 429 CH 2 RX B
23 SHIELD GND
INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT PANEL
Effectivity

28/07
** 91-24-30, FIG. 4
*** 91-24-30, FIG. 5
3
Feb 28/07
PAGE 4
4636375 and up
Effectivity
105130 B/F 15
GNS 430 #1
NAV/COMM/GPS
91-34-50
P43061 P1061 GI-106A

NAV INDICATOR
TO P317-12 (SH 13) GPS/N-1 20RED 20 28 VDC ANNUN POWER

(SEE *) GB1A-A 22BLK 21 PANEL LAMPS GROUND
(SEE ***) LB2-G 22BLU 22 28 VDC PANEL LAMPS

(SEE *) GB1A-B 22BLK 18 VLOC ANNUNCIATOR
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

+ TO 1 WHT 9 + TO
+ FROM 2 BLU 10 + FROM
OBS RES H 10 WHT 1 OBS RES H

OBS RES C 9 BLU 2 OBS RES C
OBS RES D 13 WHT 3 OBS RES D
OBS RES E 11 BLU 5 OBS RES E
OBS RES F 12 WHT 4 OBS RES F
OBS RES G BLU 6 OBS RES G
+ UP 32 WHT 13 + UP
+ DOWN 31 BLU 14 + DOWN
VERTICAL FLAG + 30 ORG 15 VERTICAL FLAG +
VERTICAL FLAG - GRN 16 VERTICAL FLAG -
+ LEFT 5 WHT 11 + LEFT

+ RIGHT 6 BLU 12 + RIGHT
LATERAL FLAG + 3 ORG 7 LATERAL FLAG +
LATERAL FLAG - 4 GRN 8 LATERAL FLAG -
INSTRUMENT PANEL

INSTRUMENT PANEL
9F20
** 91-24-30, FIG. 4
*** 91-24-30, FIG. 5
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
9F21 91-34-50 FebPAGE 5

28/07
Feb 28/07
PAGE 6
4636375 and up
Effectivity
105130 B/F 19
GTX-330 TRANSPONDER
#1 P3301
91-34-50
AVIONICS MASTER ON 1 22RED

28VDC PWR 21 22RED 20RED P3B-2
28VDC PWR 42 22RED
P/O P554
EXT. IDENT. 12 CW7H22 13
PWR GROUND 43 22BLK CW8H22 14
PWR GROUND 27 22BLK 20BLK GB2A-P (SEE *) PILOT CONTROL WHEEL

P10
GTX-330 - Single Transponder
KMH-820
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
DIM 14 22BLU LB2-J (SEE ***)

60 JB5-E (SEE **)
61 JB5-F (SEE **)
JB CENTER RACK
SQUAT SWITCH 17 JB3-B (SEE **)
SUPPRESSION 31 JB3-L (SEE **)

JB3-R (SEE **)

** 91-24-30, FIG. 4
*** 91-24-30, FIG. 5
ARINC 429 TX 30 W W JB6-A (SEE **)

ARINC 429 TX 28 B B JB6-E (SEE **)
TIS SELECT 46 JB6-T (SEE **)

AUDIO OUT HI 15 JB1-A (SEE **)
AUDIO OUT LO 16
ANTENNA
INSTRUMENT PANEL
9F22
LOWER FUSELAGE STA 56.11

9F23
105130 B/F 27
GTX-330 TRANSPONDER GTX-330 TRANSPONDER
#1 #2
P3301 P3302
AVIONICS MASTER ON 1 22 RED

28VDC PWR 21 22 RED 20 RED P3B-2
28VDC PWR 42 22 RED
AVIONICS MASTER ON 1 22 RED

28VDC PWR 21 22 RED 20 RED 20 RED P3B-5
28VDC PWR 42 22 RED
P/O P554
EXT. IDENT. 12 12 CW7H22 13 PILOT
CONTROL
PWR GROUND 43 43 22 BLK CW8H22 14
WHEEL
PWR GROUND 27 27 22 BLK 20 BLK
DIM 14 22 BLU LB2-J (SEE ***) KMH-820 XP 1/2

DIM 14 22 BLU LB2-K (SEE ***) P10
60 9
61 10
JB CENTER RACK

JB5-G (SEE **)
GTX-330 - Dual Transponder
SQUAT SWITCH 17 17 JB3-B (SEE **) 5
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
JB5-H (SEE **) 6

SUPPRESSION 31 31 JB3-L (SEE **)

JB3-R (SEE **)
JB5-N (SEE **) 1
P7322 JB5-K (SEE **) 2
PFD #2
ARINC 429 CH7 RX A 33 W W 68 ARINC 429 CH 7 TX A
ARINC 429 CH7 RX B 36 B B 67 ARINC 429 CH 7 TX B
20 RED 14
69 SHIELD GND
13
AUDIO OUT HI 15 JB1-A (SEE **)

16 AUD1 SUMMING AMP
AUDIO OUT HI 15 4 XPNDR #2 AUDIO IN
16
5 SHIELD

TIS SELECT 46 JB6-T (SEE **) ** 91-24-30, FIG. 4
91-34-50 FebPAGE
TIS SELECT 46 JB6-W (SEE **) *** 91-24-30, FIG. 5
ARINC 429 TX 30 W 30 W JB6-A (SEE **)

ARINC 429 TX 28 B 28 B JB6-E (SEE **) INSTRUMENT PANEL XPDR #1/#2
SELECT
SWITCH
WHT
BLK
ARINC 429 CH1 RX A 32 W JB4-K (SEE **)
ARINC 429 CH1 RX B 35 B JB4-P (SEE **)
A B
4636375 and up
#1 XPDR
1
STANDBY ALERT 13 2
22BLK GB2A-R
STANDBY ALERT 13 (SEE *)
3
Effectivity
#2 XPDR
ANTENNA #1
28/07
ANTENNA #2
7
Feb 28/07
PAGE 8
4636375 and up
Effectivity
105130 F/F 20
P5721
P631 KDI 572
KN-63 GB5A-A
(SEE *)
GROUND 1 22BLK (SEE ***) LB3-C 22BLU 9 28V LIGHTING
GROUND A 22BLK 20BLK
91-34-50
A+ IN 2 22RED 20RED DME P3C-1

A+ IN 3 22RED
DME REQUEST D 15 DME REQUEST

CLOCK BUS F 12 CLOCK BUS
DATA BUS 6 11 DATA BUS
GROUND 12 40 GROUND
HOLD E 2 HOLD
ON 11 19 ON
+9.25 V 9 3 +9.25 V
+192 V 10 1 +192 V
P3401
GMA-340
AUDIO HI C WHT DME AUDIO HI

21
AUDIO LO N BLU 22 DME AUDIO LO
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

KN-63 - DME
SUPPRESSION K JB3-J (SEE **)

31 M20
Figure 3
JB3-N (SEE **)

32 NAV 2 COMMON
30 M20
P632 47 NAV 1 COMMON
50 NAV 1 CODE SELECT
7 2 x 5 CODE PROGRAM
P43062
16 NAV 2 CODE SELECT
22 WHT 49 NAV 2 COMMON
43 GRY 27 2 x 5 0.01 MHZ
(KA60 ANTENNA) 39 YEL 24 2 x 5 0.1 MHZ E
#2 GNS-430 42 GRE 26 2 x 5 0.1 MHZ D
40 BLU 25 2 x 5 0.1 MHZ C
37 VIO 36 2 x 5 0.1 MHZ A
20 BLK 22 2 x 5 1 MHZ E
33 BRO 4 2 x 5 1 MHZ D
21 RED 21 2 x 5 1 MHZ C
14 ORG 34 2 x 5 1 MHZ A
(102307-004 COAX ASSY)
P43061
22 WHT 48 NAV 1 COMMON

43 GRY 44 2 x 5 0.01 MHZ
39 YEL 41 2 x 5 0.1 MHZ E
42 GRE 43 2 x 5 0.1 MHZ D
#1 GNS-430
40 BLU 42 2 x 5 0.1 MHZ C
37 VIO 37 2 x 5 0.1 MHZ A
20 BLK 39 2 x 5 1 MHZ E
33 BRO 20 2 x 5 1 MHZ D
21 RED 38 2 x 5 1 MHZ C
REFERENCE DRAWING: * 91-24-30, FIG. 3 14 ORG 35 2 x 5 1 MHZ A
9F24
** 91-24-30, FIG. 4
*** 91-24-30, FIG. 5
9G1
105130 A/F 25
KR-87 REFERENCE DRAWING: * 91-24-30, FIG. 3

P871
ADF RECEIVER ** 91-24-30, FIG. 4
*** 91-24-30, FIG. 5
28VDC PWR 13 20RED
P3C-2
PWR GND S 20BLK GB1A-F (SEE *)
22BLU LB2-L (SEE ***) KI-227-00

P2271
ADF INDICATOR
28V DIMMER 9 A +28V LIGHTING

DC SIN OUT A C DC SIN OUT
DC COS OUT B E DC COS OUT

4.5V COMMON D B +4.5V COMMON
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

BOT. MOUNT ANT E H A/C GND
H 20 BLK GB1A-H (SEE *)
GROUND M
KR-87 - ADF
P
Figure 4
GMA-340
P3401
AUDIO OUT 10 7 ADF AUDIO HI

8 ADF AUDIO LO
(200-02586-0003)
P441 KA-44B ADF

ANTENNA
ANT PWR 12 WHITE/RED WHITE/RED 1 ANT PWR

91-34-50 FebPAGE
LOOP ENABLE 8 WHITE/GREEN WHITE/GREEN 2 LOOP ENABLE

32HZ < ± 90° 6 WHITE WHITE 4 32HZ < ± 90°
32HZ < 0° F WHITE/ORANGE WHITE/ORANGE 5 32HZ < 0°
GROUND 15 WHITE/BLUE WHITE/BLUE 7 GROUND
9 OUTER SHIELD
4636375 and up
RF INPUT 3 RF OUTPUT
8 INNER SHIELD
Effectivity
28/07
(TRIAXAL CABLE)
9
Feb 28/07
PAGE 10
4636375 and up
Effectivity
105130 B/F 26
91-34-50
DC 50 ANT COUPLER P501

MAINTENANCE MANUAL

DC Coupler
+28 VDC ACFT PWR 1 20RED P3A-3

Figure 5
ACFT GND 8 20BLK

GB1A-P
(SEE **)

** 91-24-30, FIG. 4
*** 91-24-30, FIG. 5
9G2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GRIDS 3G3 THRU 3G9

INTENTIONALLY BLANK
9G3 91-34-50 Feb

PAGE 11
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1 S335, S336, S337 Switch (3 each)
Oxygen System (Optional)

PAGE 1
Feb 28/07 91-35-10 9G10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TO OX1A22
* P329-18 IN S/N'S 4636001 THRU 4636131 ONLY
ANNUNCIATOR P329-6 WITH AVIDYNE ENTEGRA
(P329-34*)
P321
J321 OXYGEN
BOTTLE #3
OX3D22N 1 OX3C22
S337 NC
OX3A22 2 OX3B22
GB6-K C
NO
OX1B22
SWITCHES SHOWN IN ARMED POSITION
P322
J322 OXYGEN
BOTTLE #2
OX2D22N 1 OX2B22
S336 NC
OX2A22 2 OX2C22
GB6-J C
NO
OX1F22N 3 OX1E22
S335 NC
OX1C22 4 OX1D22
GB6-H C
NO
OXYGEN
BOTTLE #1
OX2C22
S336 NC
OX2B22
C
NO
OX1D22
S335 NC
OX1E22
C
NO
89801 AH 40.0
85508 L IN S/N'S 4636075 AND UP
101238 E
101301 C
WITH AVIDYNE ENTEGRA
104051 C
104301 NEW/S
105115 A 30.0
Oxygen System (Optional)

9G11 91-35-10 FebPAGE 2

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 3
Feb 28/07 91-35-10 9G12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
9G13 91-37-20 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Information Pending - See Parts Catalog
Vacuum Low Indicator

PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 91-37-20 9G14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
* P329-6 IN S/N'S 4636021 THRU 4636131 ONLY

#1 P328-16 WITH AVIDYNE ENTEGRA
VAC REG (SEE 91-31-50, FIGURE 1)
PUMP
TO ANNUNCIATOR
P401 P303 (P329-16*)
D30B20 M M D30A20
A424 D30C20 L L D30D20N
GB5-J
#2
VAC REG
PUMP
TO ANNUNCIATOR
P401 P303 (P329-15**)
D30G20 N N D30F20
A425 D30H20 P P D30J20N
J401
GB5-C
** P329-8 IN S/N'S 4636021 THRU 4636131 ONLY

P328-21 WITH AVIDYNE ENTEGRA
(SEE 91-31-50, FIGURE 1)
85508 L 27.0
101238 E
101301 C
104051 C
104301 NEW/S
105115 A 24.0
Vacuum Low Indicator Effectivity

9G15 91-37-20 FebPAGE 3

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1 S403 Nose Baggage Door Switch

2 S326, S327 Door Ajar Switch (Lower & Upper)
1 2
Door Ajar Warning

PAGE 1
Feb 28/07 91-52-70 9G16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TO
ANNUNCIATOR
(P329-32*) W17A22 W17D22
W17E22 W17F22
* P329-21 IN S/N'S 4636001 THRU 4636131 ONLY
P329-4 IN S/N’S 4636375 AND UP
J316
1 P316 2
LOWER UPPER
DOOR DOOR
S326 AJAR AJAR S327
SWITCH SWITCH
S/N'S 4636132 THRU 4636374
b b
NOSE P401 P303

BAGGAGE J401
DOOR P417
SWITCH J417
1 W17C20 b b W17B22
2 L60F20
S403
(SWITCHES SHOWN
NORMALLY CLOSED,
W17D20N WITH DOORS OPEN)
TO BAGGAGE
LIGHT
(SEE COURTESY LIGHTS)
89801 AH 16.0
85508 L
101238 E IN S/N’S 4636375 AND UP, SEE ALSO 91-33-20, FIGURE 2, SHEET 3.
101301 C
104051 C
104301 NEW/S
105115 A 15.0
Door Ajar Warning

9G17 91-52-70 FebPAGE 2

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1 A413 Flow Transducer

2 M308 Manifold Pressure and Fuel Flow Gauge
4 M306 Fuel Flow & Totalizer
3&5
1, 2 & 4
Fuel Flow Gauge(s)

PAGE 1
Feb 28/07 91-73-30 9G18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FUEL FLOW
TO ENGINE
MANIFOLD
PILOT'S 3A
FWD P310
CB PANEL 3 A 2
E15A 22
MANIFOLD
PRESSURE
CA401 CA301 AND
U U
FUEL FLOW
RED 1 WHITE V V WHITE F
GAUGE
WHT 2 WHT/BLU W W WHT/BLU H
BLK 3 WHT/ORG P P WHT/ORG D
L
J411 P402 / P304
B
FLOW J402
TRANSDUCER E16A 22N
VENDOR-SUPPLIED
1 HARNESS & INTERFACE GR5-D
L.TXD SIG
2 K2 DAY/NIGHT RELAY
(SEE ALSO 91-31-50)
K2 10
R328
L.TXD GND
39K ½
1/4 W
5 L.TXD GND
J317 / P317 7 L.TXD SIG
26 26 DN8B 22 8 BRIGHTNESS
FUEL
6 SDA +
MGT
9 SDB -
FUEL FLOW POWER 1 28V dc
PILOT'S 5A 2 GND
FWD
CB PANEL 5
FUEL FLOW &
4 TOTALIZER
(OPTIONAL)
GR5-C
89801 AH 6.0
Fuel Flow Gauge(s) Effectivity

9G19 91-73-30 FebPAGE 2

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

2 F410 Fuse (2 Amp)
3 K404 Starter Contactor
4 Start Relay
5 S311 (L), S312 (R) Magneto Switch
6 Start Switch
7 A336 Vibrator
5&6
2, 3, 4 & 7
Engine Start and Ignition

PAGE 1
Feb 28/07 91-74-20 9G20
9G21
TO FUSE 2
2A
ANNUNCIATOR W2B 20 W2A 20
P329-12 STARTER
START BUS BAR
MAIN 6
SWITCH P303 / P401 TO BATTERY K4A 4 K4B 4N
BUS
START 11 J401 CONTACTOR
K2A 18 W2C 22 T T
5A 6 STARTER
1 16 K3B 20 C C K3A 20
CONTACTOR
12 K2B 20 K404
17
IN VIBRATOR 3
7
K2C 18 A336
7
13 BO

18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
c c
J1B 18 J1A 18

14
f f
J3D 18N J402
19 9 P304 / P402
GB3-R
J4B 18 i i J4A 18
X X
J402 RIGHT LEFT
P304 / P402 MAG MAG
J3B 18 g g J3A 18 R LR L
Y Y
J401
P303 / P401
J3E 18N J1D 18N
RIGHT
2 ON 5
91-74-20 FebPAGE
J3C 18 J4A 18N

OFF
1
GB5-P
MAG SWITCHES
4636001 thru 4636020
2 ON 5
J1C 20 J2A 18N

1 OFF
LEFT GB5-N
Effectivity
28/07
89801 AH 3.0
2
Feb 28/07
PAGE 3
4636021 thru 4636374

Effectivity
* P329-12 IN S/N'S 4636021 THRU 4636131 ONLY
91-74-20
BUS BAR TO
BATTERY
CONTACTOR
F410
TO ANNUNCIATOR 2A
P329-20* W2C22 W2B20 W2A20
ENGINE START STARTER
START RELAY R389 P389
P389 R389 1
9 K3C20 3 3 K3B20 K4A4 B401 K4B4N
K2A18 2 2 K2B18 T T
5A 5
K2B20 C C K3A20
P389 R389 2
CB334 10 K404
4 4 J1E20 J401 CR403
6
K2C18 P303 P401
2.0
K5A20
11 3 STARTER
7 BO IN CONTACTOR
J4C18

4 VIBRATOR
12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
J3H18 R389
8 P389 P304 P402

P380 1 P389 R389 5 5 _i

A J4B18 J4A18
1 1 K5E20 X RIGHT
J402 MAG
K5B20
J1D20
P304 P402
g
_ J3A18 R
B Y
1
START J401
J3E18N
SW
3 R389 8
J3B18 3 J3G18
P389 8 S312
K5D20
K5C20
ON
R389 P389
J3F18N 2 1
J3E18 6 6 J3D18 2 J3C18 J5A18
S/N'S 4636132 & UP 7 7 4 OFF P382
2 GB7-J R P 1
P R R389 P389 382
380 LEFT R382
MAG R. MAG
J5B18N
SWITCH
P304 P402
J1B18 c
_ J1A18 L LR
_f
S311 J402 GB5-P
2 J1C18 ON
J1D18N
2 1
3 J1C20 J6A18 1 J6B18N
OFF P R
381
4 GB5-N
R P L. MAG
381
85508 L 3.0 SWITCH
101238 E
101301 C
104051 C
104301 NEW/S
9G22
9G23
ENGINE
START
MAIN BUS
1D
P 389 J3H18
J P J
5A CB334A20 6 K2A20 2 K2B18
CB334 J1D20 4 J1E20
J3F18N 8 J3F18N
K5A20
K5D20 1 K5E20
CR389 12 11 10
J3D18 9
START 6 B A
5 START
SW S380
8 4 7 3 6 2 5 1 RELAY
GB7-J 3
K5B20 1 K389
3 1 7 J3E18
2
P J J4C18
380
K2B20
K5C20 K3C20
P329-10 (SEE 91-31-50, K2C18

FIGURE 1, SHEET 16)
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

BO VIBRATOR IN
TO EXT PWR CONTACTOR

(SEE 91-24-30, FIGURE 1,
W2C22
K3B20
J4B18
SHEET 7) 2A F410
W2B20 W2A20
K4A4 B401 K4B4N
J401 CR404 STARTER

K404
T T
LEFT MAG SW
ON
C C K3A20 STARTER RIGHT
S311
J1D18 3 Y Y CONTACTOR MAG
1
J1C18 2 J1B18 g g J3A18 R
OFF P303 P401
4
J402
91-74-20 FebPAGE
J6A18 1 J6B18N
P J
361 i i J4A18
LEFT
J3E18N
GB3-R
X X MAG
ON S312
J3C18 2 c c J1A18 L LR
1
J3G18 3 J3B18 f f
OFF P304 P402
4
J5A18 1 J5B18N J1D18N
4636375 and up
RIGHT MAG SW P J
362
GB3-P
Effectivity
105115 A 3.0
28/07
4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 5
Feb 28/07 91-74-20 9G24
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
9H1 91-77-10 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1 M304 Tachometer Indicator

2 Magneto Sensor
1
3
2
Effectivity RPM Indicator (Tachometer)

PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 91-77-10 9H2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TACHOMETER
PILOT'S 3A
FWD
CB PANEL 3
E8A 22
TACHOMETER
INDICATOR
A
G G D
BLU 2 WHT/ORG H H WHT/ORG B 1
BLK 4 WHT/BLU J J WHT/BLU C
RED 1 WHITE K K WHITE E
CA 402 CA 302 P308
LEFT P401 / P303
MAGNETO P421 J401
SENSOR E8E 22N
2
GB4N
89801 AH 5.0
RPM Indicator (Tachometer) Effectivity

9H3 91-77-10 FebPAGE 3

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1 M307 Turbine Inlet Temperature Indicator

2 A403 Turbine Inlet Temperature Probe
4
3 1&2
Effectivity Turbine Inlet Temperature (TIT) Indicator

PAGE 1
Feb 28/07 91-77-20 9H4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
RED (ALUMEL)
PROBE FEED THROUGH

A 403 PRESSURE BULKHEAD
RED (ALUMEL)
2
-
ANALOG
+
YELLOW (CHROMEL)
TURBINE INLET
YELLOW (CHROMEL) TEMPERATURE
INDICATOR
8 OHMS ± 2 % F.S.
1
STANDARD
OPTIONAL
RED (ALUMEL)
PROBE FEED THROUGH

A 403 PRESSURE BULKHEAD
RED (ALUMEL)
2
-
+
YELLOW (CHROMEL)
ANALOG/DIGITAL
YELLOW (CHROMEL)
TURBINE INLET
DIGITAL WHT A TEMPERATURE
SEE PANEL TEST WHT B INDICATOR
LIGHTS DIMMING, C 8 OHMS ± 2 % F.S.
91-33-10, FIGURE 3 39 K OHMS 1/4 W E
1
BLK D
ENGINE
GAUGES BLK F
PILOT'S 3A
FWD 3
CB PANEL TO ENGINE
E1A 22 GAUGES
SEE 91-79-30
89801 AH 7.0
Turbine Inlet Temperature (TIT) Indicator Effectivity

9H5 91-77-20 FebPAGE 2

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

2 M309 Combustion Analyzer
Effectivity Combustion Analyzer (Optional)

PAGE 3
Feb 28/07 91-77-20 9H6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
WHT 1 TO POST LIGHTS P385

BLK 2 REFER TO 91-33-10
P364 J385
9 BLK
BLACK
15 YEL PRESSURE
10 BLK BULKHEAD
16 CHT 1
YEL
COMBUSTION
ANALYZER 11 BLK CHT 2
17 CHT 3 YELLOW
YEL
12 BLK CHT 4
2
18 YEL CHT 5
13 BLK CHT 6
19 YEL
14 BLK
20 YEL
23 BLK
6 WHT
GB3-L
ENGINE
MONITOR
1.5A 1
MAIN
BUS
89801 AH 43.0
Combustion Analyzer (Optional) Effectivity

9H7 91-77-20 FebPAGE 4

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 5
Feb 28/07 91-77-20 9H8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

2 K2 Day/Night Relay
3 R329 Resistor
4 S353 Cycle Control Switch
5 Scanner
5 1, 4
CHT Scanner Effectivity

9H9 91-77-20 FebPAGE 6

28/07
Feb 28/07
PAGE 7
4636001 thru 4636131

Effectivity
91-77-20
R329
220ohm, 1/2 W
*** S/N'S 4636021 THRU 4636131 ONLY
317
*** TO P319-D, 3-UNIT ENGINE GAUGE P J
IN S/N'S 4636001 THRU 4636020 ONLY 3 7
19 E7F22
*** CB316 IN S/N'S 4636001 THRU 4636020 ONLY K2
28 E7G22 DAY/NIGHT
11 RELAY
309
P J
*
2 1 E7H22 7
TO P337-24
CHT GAUGE 6 6

4 3 5 5
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

TO P337-21 ** 4 4
CHT GAUGE
6 5 3
CHT Scanner
ENG. MONITOR 2 2
E9G20
E9C20
E9E20
E9A20
1
E9L20
E9J20
1.5A
CB312 *** 8
S353
9
CYCLE
CONTROL
E10L20
E9M20
E7M22
E9D20
E9H20
E7N22
E7C22
E7A22
E7B22
E9K20
E9B20
E7E22
E7K22
E7P22
E9F20
E7L22
E7J22
E7D22N
20
E7R22N
P386 14 13 11 5 7 2 12 8 6 4 15 23 21 24 20 17 25 19 10 GB4-D GB3-K
SCANNER
89801 AH 43.1
85508 L 43.0
9H10
9H11
R329
220ohm, 1/2 W
317
P J
3 7
TO P337-24 19 E7F22
(91-77-40, FIGURE 5) K2
28 E7G22 DAY/NIGHT
11 RELAY
TO P337-21
(91-77-40, FIGURE 5) 309
P J
2 1 E7H22 7
6 6
ENG. MONITOR

4 3 5 5
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

1.5A
4 4
CB312
6 5 3
CHT Scanner
3
TO P337-23 2
2
(91-77-40, FIGURE 5)
1 1
TO P337-13
(91-77-40, FIGURE 5) 8
S353
9
TO P337-22
CYCLE
E10L20
(91-77-40, FIGURE 5)
E9M20
E7M22
E9G20
E9D20
E9H20
E7N22
E7C22
E7D22
E9C20
E9B20
E7K22
E9K20
E7E22
E7P22
E9E20
E9A20
E9F20
E7L22
E9L20
E7J22
E9J20 CONTROL
E7R22*
E7S22
E7A22
E7B22
E7T22
22 E7R22N
91-77-20 FebPAGE
P386 12 33 35 19 23 22 4 6 10 3 5 9 7 20 1 8 21 2 11 31 30 29 28 27 26 36 34 18 17 GB4-D
SCANNER
4636132 thru 4636374
* E7U22 IN S/N'S 4636132 THRU 4636247 ONLY

101238 E 42.0
101301 C
104051 C
104301 NEW/S
Effectivity
28/07
8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 9
Feb 28/07 91-77-20 9H12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
9H13 91-77-40 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

2 OAT Sensor
3 Quad Digital Indicator
3 1 2
Effectivity Quad Digital Indicator (QDI)

PAGE 2
Feb 28/07 91-77-40 9H14
9H15
3 DIGITAL
1 RESET
2 SWITCH
SELECT
TO
MAP
CAL
E3AC20
E3AB20
ANNUNCIATOR
P329 22 DATA BUS
P392
}
TO GAUGES.
EXCEEDANCE
1 2 SEE
(RESET SW)
P385 3 4 FIGURES
DIGITAL LIGHTING HI 3, 4, 5, & 6;
DISPLAY R385 3 4 TB-1 AND
Q21A22
WH/BL
WH/BL
E8G22
91-28-40.
E8E22
WHT
WHT
E3R22
E3P22
E3A20
E3AD20

E3H22
3A
{
Quad Digital Indicator (QDI)
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

CB365
P341 16 1 3 8 15 23 25 6 7 20 21 19 18 13 12 22 2 14
E3M22
E3N22
E3K22
E3L22
E3J22N
E3C22
E3D22
FUEL IMBALANCE
DATA BUS "B" XMIT LO
DATA BUS "D" REC LO

DATA BUS "A" XMIT HI
E3B20N
DATA BUS "C" REC HI
P302 _r s
_ q
_ _t
J301
GB7-D GB7-H
P201 _r s
_ q
_ _t
LIGHTING LO
E3R20
E3P20
E3S20
E3T20
2
91-77-40 FebPAGE
1 3 P214
D EXC. LO
4636021 thru 4636131
A EXC. HI
OAT
85508 C/L 46.0 C SIG. LO SENSOR
B SIG. HI
Effectivity
28/07
3
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Information Pending - See Parts Catalog
Effectivity Enhanced Digital Indicator (EDI)

PAGE 4
Feb 28/07 91-77-40 9H16
9H17
ENHANCED DIGITAL INDICATOR
DATA BUS "B" XMIT LO
RS232 (IN FROM GPS)

DATA BUS "D" REC LO
DATA BUS "A" XMIT HI
DATA BUS "C" REC HI

FUEL IMBALANCE
% POWER LOGIC
EXCEEDANCE
CASE GROUND
(RESET SW)
PWR. RETURN
(OAT) EXC. LO
(OAT) SIG. LO
(OAT) EXC. HI
LIGHTING LO
28VDC PWR.
(OAT) SIG. HI
LIGHTING HI
SELECT
MAP
CAL
{
{
P341 1 16 3 8 15 5 23 25 6 7 20 21 19 18 13 12 22 2 14 11 4
DIGITAL
E3AD20
E3J22N
E3H22
DISPLAY
E3D22
E3C22
E3R22
E3P22
E3B20N
E3S20
Q21A22
Enhanced Digital Indicator (EDI)

3A E3A20 JUMPER
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
E8F22**
CB365

E8G22
R385 3 4 TB-1
GB7-D
(91-33-20) GB7-H
P385 3 4 P329 2
1 2
TO
E3M22
4 3 1
E3N22
FMGT
E3K22
E3L22
2
E3AC20
E3AB20
P396* ANNUNCIATOR
(91-31-50)
WH/BL
WH/BL
WHT
WHT
1 3
P302 _r s
_ q
_ _t
E3U22
DIGITAL 2 BEHIND INSTR.
}
RESET 1 J201 DATA BUS TO GAUGES.
PANEL
SWITCH 3 q SEE
P201 _r s
_ _ _t FIGURES 3, 4, 5, & 6;
S350 AND
E3V22N
E3R20
E3P20
E3S20
E3T20
91-28-40, FIGURE 2.
16 14 P387
P214
91-77-40 FebPAGE
D EXC. LO
3 NC
GB7-K
C 11 A EXC. HI
OAT
7 NO SENSOR
C SIG. LO
4636132 thru 4636374
SQUAT SW. RELAY

(SHOWN WITH A/C B SIG. HI
WEIGHT ON WHEELS)
(SEE 91-21-30)
101238 E 45.0
101301 C
Effectivity
104051 C * P392 IN S/N'S 4636132 AND 4636186 ONLY

104301 NEW/S
** E8E22 IN S/N'S 4636132 AND 4636186 ONLY
28/07
5
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 6
Feb 28/07 91-77-40 9H18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1 Magneto Sensor
3 Transducer
1&3 2
MAP / RPM Indicator (Tachometer) Effectivity

9H19 91-77-40 FebPAGE 7

28/07
Feb 28/07
PAGE 8
4636021 thru 4636131

Effectivity
TO GAUGE ALERT HORN
E8D22
(SEE 91-31-50, FIGURE 2)
91-77-40
EXCEEDANCE SUPPRESSION RPM

E8C22
{
(SEE FIGURES 5 & 6)
}
13
TO
EXC
18 QUAD DIGITAL
SIG LO
SIG HI
MAP LIGHTING HI
E8B22 INDICATOR (P341)
22
3A (SEE FIGURE 1)
TB-1 12
CB366
WHT/BL
WHT/BL
E8G22
WHT
WHT
E8F22
RPM
KEYWAY
E8H22
E8A22
3A
CB367
MAP / RPM Indicator (Tachometer)

P340
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
21 24 25 6 8 5 9 18 23 14 15 4 3 10 11 16 17 7 19 20

E8M22
E8E22N
DATA BUS "B" REC LO

WHT/BL
E8H22N
DATA BUS "A" REC HI

CA302
WHT
E8K22
WHT
WHT/BL
MP1A20
GB4-N
GB7-D
LITES (LO)
_r q
_ s
_ _t P304
P303 K G H J
J402
J401
_r q
_ s
_ _t P402
P401 K G H J
P414 LEFT
MP1B20 P421 MAGNETO
WHT/BL D SIG LO CA402
WHT/BL 4 BLK
WHT B SIG HI MANIFOLD
PRESSURE WHT 2 BLU SENSOR
E8N20 A EXCITATION TRANSDUCER
E8L20 1 RED
C SPARE
85508 C/L 6.0

9H20
9H21
MAP/RPM GAUGE
EXCEED. SUPPRESSION

DATA BUS "B" REC LO

DATA BUS "A" REC HI
PWR. RETURN, RPM
PWR. RETURN, MAP

ALARM OUT, RPM
ALARM OUT, MAP
SIGNAL RETURN
CASE GROUND
LIGHTING LO
LIGHTING HI
28VDC RPM
28VDC MAP
SIGNAL HI
KEYWAY
SIG LO
SIG HI
EXC
P340 6 8 14 21 24 5 9 18 7 19 20 23 15 4 3 10 11 16 17 25
RPM
E8H22
E8H22N
E8A22
3A
CB367
WHT/BL
WHT/BL
MAP / RPM Indicator (Tachometer)
E8F22
E8G22
WHT
WHT

WHT/BL
MAP TB-1
E8E22N
CA302
WHT
E8K22
GB7-D
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

E8B22
3A
}
12
CB366
E8C22
22
WHT
*
E8M22
GB4-N 18
WHT/BL 13
E8D22
MP1A20
K G H J P303
J401
_r q
_ s
_ _t P304 SEE K G H J P401
FIGURES
J402 5&6
_r q
_ s
_ _t P402 LEFT
P421 MAGNETO
CA402
SEE 91-31-50, WHT/BL 4 BLK
FIGURE 2 RPM
WHT 2 BLU SENSOR
M/PRESS
91-77-40 FebPAGE
XDUCER E8L20 1 RED

MP1B20
WHT/BL D SIG LO
4636132 thru 4636374
WHT B SIG HI
E8N20 A EXCITATION
C SPARE
101238 E 6.0
101301 C P414 * TO ENHANCED DIGITAL INDICATOR (P341)
(SEE FIGURE 2)
Effectivity
104051 C
104301 NEW/S
28/07
9
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GRIDS 9H22 THRU 9H24

INTENTIONALLY BLANK
PAGE 10
Feb 28/07 91-77-40 9H22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

2 A413 Flow Transducer
3 TIT Probe
2&3 1
TIT and Fuel Flow Indicator Effectivity

9I1 91-77-40 Feb

PAGE 11
28/07
Feb 28/07
PAGE 12
4636021 thru 4636131

Effectivity TO GAUGE ALERT HORN
E15B22
(SEE 91-31-50, FIGURE 2) (LIGHTING HI)
91-77-40
}
13
TO
TB-1 18 QUAD DIGITAL
TIT INDICATOR (P341)
ET1A22 22
(SEE FIGURE 1)
3A 12
CB368
WHT/BL
WHT/BL
E15D22
E15C22
WHT
WHT
FUEL
E15E22
CHROMEL(+)
FLOW
KEYWAY
ALUMEL(-)
E15A22
3A
CB369

P339 6 8 22 9 25 14 21 24 3 4 15 10 11 16 17 7 19 20
TIT and Fuel Flow Indicator
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

RED
E15F22N
YEL

DATA BUS "B" REC LO

DATA BUS "A" REC HI
E16A22N
WHT/BL
E15H22
CA301
WHT
GB5-D
GB7-D
(LIGHTING LO)
P W V U P304
RED J402
P W V U P402
TIT FLOW
TRANSDUCER
PROBE J411
YEL E15J20 1 RED
FEED THRU WHT 2 WHT

PRESS BLKHD
WHT/BL 3 BLK
CA401
A413
85508 C/L 7.0
9I2
9I3
TURBINE INLET TEMP/FUEL FLOW GAUGE

DATA BUS "B" REC LO

DATA BUS "A" REC HI
PWR. GROUND, F/F
PWR. GROUND, TIT
SIGNAL RETURN
ALARM OUT, TIT
CASE GROUND
LIGHTING LO
CHROMEL(+)
LIGHTING HI
28VDC, F/F
28VDC, TIT
ALUMEL(-)
EXC. HIGH
SIGNAL HI
KEYWAY
P339 8 6 9 22 25 14 7 19 20 21 24 3 4 15 10 11 16 17
YEL
RED
E15F22N
TIT

TIT and Fuel Flow Indicator
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
E16A22N
E15E22

ET1A22
E15C22
E15D22
WHT/BL
WHT/BL
3A
WHT
WHT
WHT/BL
E15H22
CB368
CA301
WHT
FUEL FLOW TO
}
GB7-D 12 ENHANCED
E15A22 GB5-D 22 DIGITAL
3A
INDICATOR
CB369 TB-1 18 (P341)
13 (SEE
P W V U P304 FIGURE 2)
SEE 91-31-50, E15B22 J402

FIGURE 2 P W V U P402
FLOW
J411 TRANSDUCER
RED
E15J20 1 RED
TIT
91-77-40 Feb
PROBE WHT 2 WHT
YEL WHT/BL 3 BLK

FEED THRU CA401
A413
4636132 thru 4636374
PRESS BLKHD
101238 E 7.0
101301 C
104051 C
104301 NEW/S
Effectivity
PAGE 13
28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 14
Feb 28/07 91-77-40 9I4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHT and Vacuum Indicator Effectivity

9I5 91-77-40 Feb

PAGE 15
28/07
Feb 28/07
PAGE 16
4636021 thru 4636131

Effectivity
85508 H/L 45.0
TO GAUGE ALERT HORN

E10D22
(SEE 91-31-50, FIGURE 2)
91-77-40
}
TO 22
91-77-20, TO
VAC FIGURE 3 12 QUAD DIGITAL
3A V1A22
18 INDICATOR (P341)
CB313 11 13 P386 (SEE FIGURE 1)
LIGHTING HI 13
TB-1
CHT
WHT/BL
WHT/BL
E10G22
E10F22
E10L20
WHT
WHT
(KEYWAY)
E10A22
E7B22
3A
CB371
E10H22

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHT and Vacuum Indicator

P337 19 20 25 8 6 12 9 18 4 14 2 5 24 21 16 17 11 10 7
E10C22N
E10J22N
(DATA BUS "D" XMIT LO)

(DATA BUS "C" XMIT HI)
(DATA BUS "B" REC LO)

(DATA BUS "A" REC HI)
V2A22
ALARM (CHT)
ALARM (VAC)
E10B22N
V3A22-WHT
GB7-F
V3A22-WH/BL
(CHT LO)
(CHT HI)
GB7-D TO
LIGHTING LO P340-5
GB7-E (SEE FIGURE 3,
EXCEEDANCE
SUPPRESSION)
C (SPARE)
VAC D SIG LO
XDUCER B SIG HI
A307
V3B22
9I6
28/07 9I7
PAGE 17
91-77-40 Feb
Effectivity CHT and Vacuum Indicator
3A
3A
104051 C
101301 C
104301 N/R
CB371
CB313
101238 E 44.0
VAC
CHT
V1A22
E10A22
P337
8
28VDC PWR (CHT)
V3B22
6
12 28VDC PWR (VAC)
(KEYWAY)
TO GAUGE
FIGURE 2)
GB7-D
ALERT HORN
(SEE 91-31-50,
25
E10J22N LIGHTING LO
VAC
A307
XDUCER
GB7-E
19
E10B22N PWR RETURN (VAC)
B
C
A
20
PWR RETURN (CHT)
E10D22
9
ALARM (CHT)
18
ALARM (VAC)
14
E10H22 LIGHTING HI
TB-1
SIG HI
SIG LO
(SPARE)
4
V2A22 EXCEED SUPSN. (VAC)

TO
P340-5
(SEE FIGURE 3)
2
V3A22-WH/BL SIG LO (VAC)

5
V3A22-WHT SIG HI (VAC)
35
23
E7T22 * SIG LO (VOLT)

24
22
E10L20 (CHT LO RES)
21
23
E7B22 (CHT HI RES)
CHT & VAC GAUGE
22
12
E7R22 STATUS
E7S22 SIG HI (VOLT)

33
13
(SEE 91-77-20, FIGURE 3)
E10F22
16
WHT (DATA BUS "C" XMIT HI)

P386
17
WHT/BL (DATA BUS "D" XMIT LO)

11
WHT (DATA BUS "A" REC HI)

10
WHT/BL (DATA BUS "B" REC LO)

E10G22
22
12
18
13
7
E10C22N CASE GROUND

TO
(P341)
GB7-F
DIGITAL
INDICATOR
ENHANCED
* E10L20 IN S/N'S 4636132 THRU 4636186 ONLY

(SEE FIGURE 2)
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 18
Feb 28/07 91-77-40 9I8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

2 A405 Oil Pressure Transducer
3 A407 Oil Temperature Sensor
4
1, 2 & 3
Oil Pressure and Temperature Indicator Effectivity

9I9 91-77-40 Feb

PAGE 19
28/07
Feb 28/07
PAGE 20
4636021 thru 4636131

Effectivity
85508 C/L 4.0 TO GAUGE ALERT HORN
}
E4E22 22 TO
(SEE 91-31-50, FIGURE 2)
12 QUAD DIGITAL
TO PIN P340-5 INDICATOR
(SEE FIGURE 3) 18 (P341)
OT & OP 13 (SEE FIGURE 1)
91-77-40
LIGHTING HI
E1A22
KEYWAY
WHT/BL
WHT/BL
SIGNAL LO
5A TB-1
SIGNAL HI
E4G22
E4F22
WHT
WHT
CB370
E4H22
(SEE P304 PIN T)
P338 24 21 25 6 8 4 13 9 18 14 2 5 16 17 11 10 7 19 20
Oil Pressure and Temperature Indicator
E4K22N
E2A22-WH/BL

E2A22-WHT
SUPPRESSION
E5A22N
EXCEEDANCE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
DATA BUS "B" REC LO

DATA BUS "A" REC HI
GB7-D
E4A22-WHT
LIGHTING LO
E4A22-WH/BL
GB4-M
P303 X W V
J401
P401 X W V E4L22 (SEE PIN 6)
P411
E R N T P304
OIL A E2B20-WH/BL J402
TEMP
B E2B20-WHT E R N T P402
SENSOR OIL
A407 PRESS
P409 XDUCER
OIL E4M20 A EXCITATOR

PRESSURE
J402 E4B20-WHT B SIG. HI
P304 P402 SWITCH
TO ANNUNCIATOR E4B20-WH/BL D SIGNAL RET.
E6A22 S S E6B20 NC
(OIL PRESS) P329-20
(SEE 91-31-50, FIGURE 1) J J W6B20 E6C20N A405
P
TO HOURMETER
(SEE 91-31-30)
A404
9I10
9I11
101238 E 4.0
101301 C OIL PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE GAUGE
104051 C

DATA BUS "B" REC LO

DATA BUS "A" REC HI
104301 N/R
SIGNAL RETURN
POWER RET. OP
POWER RET. OT
ALARM OUT, OP
ALARM OUT, OT
CASE GROUND
SUPPRESSION
EXCEEDANCE
LIGHTING LO
LIGHTING HI
SIGNAL LO
SIGNAL HI
SIGNAL HI
28VDC OP
28VDC OT
KEYWAY
P338 6 8 9 18 4 14 7 19 20 24 21 13 2 5 16 17 11 10 25
E4K22N
(SEE P304 PIN T)
E4H22
WHT/BL
WHT/BL
E4G22
E4F22
Oil Pressure and Temperature Indicator
WHT
WHT
E2A22-WH/BL
E2A22-WHT
E5A22N
OT & OP
GB7-D
E4A22-WHT
TB-1

E4A22-WH/BL
E1A22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
5A TO

}
13
CB370 ENHANCED
GB4-M 18 DIGITAL
INDICATOR
12
(P341)
22 (91-77-40,
P303 X W V FIGURE 2)
TO GAUGE ALERT HORN E4E22
J401 E4L22 (SEE PIN 6)
(91-31-50, FIGURE 2)
P401 X W V
E R N T P304
TO PIN P340-5 J402
(FIGURE 3) OIL
E R N T P402
PRESS
P411 P409 XDUCER
OIL A E2B20-WH/BL E4M20 A EXCITATOR

TEMP
E4B20-WHT B SIG. HI
91-77-40 Feb
SENSOR B E2B20-WHT
A407 E4B20-WH/BL D SIGNAL RET.

OIL A405
PRESSURE
4636132 thru 4636374
J402 SWITCH
P304 P402
TO ANNUNCIATOR - P329-14
(OIL PRESSURE) NC
E6A22 S S E6B20
(91-31-50, FIGURE 1)
J J W6B20
P
E6C20N
Effectivity
PAGE 21
TO HOURMETER
(91-31-30)
28/07
A404
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 22
Feb 28/07 91-77-40 9I12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1 Data Acquisition Unit (DAU)

2 RPM Sensor (on Left Magneto)
4 A407 Oil Temp Sensor
5 OAT Sensor
6 Fuel Senders (Left & Right; Inboard & Outboard)
7 MAP Transducer
8 A413 Fuel Flow Transducer
9 A441 thru A446 CHT Sensors
10 TIT Sensor
11 A307 Vacuum Transducer
11
5 12 & 13
6 6
1
7
2, 4, & 8
3 10
2, 3, 4, & 8
7 11 12 & 13
9 & 10
Data Acquisition Unit (DAU) Effectivity

9I13 91-77-40 Feb

PAGE 23
28/07
9I14 91-77-40 Feb 28/07
PAGE 24

MAIN BUS
2A
OIL
DAU
CB353
105115 A 4.0
PRESS
TRANSDUCER
A405
CB353A20
J
3
2D
P
SIGNAL HI B
SIGNAL LO D
EXCITATION A
P406
J402
E1A20
P402
P304
P901
1
E4M20 E4L20 +28 VDC POWER

E4B20WHT E4A22WHT OIL PRESS SIG (+)
E4B20BLU E4A22BLU OIL PRESS SIG (-)
8 26
T N R E
T N R E
POWER GND
20
E5A22N
GB1-A
TO 91-24-30, J307-2 P5B20WHT ALT 1 mV HI

FIGURE 1, SHEET 6 J307-1 P5B20BLU ALT 1 mV LO
7 25
JUMP TO P901 SHIELDS (SEE SHEETS 3 AND 4) SHIELD

36
E2B20BLU E2A22BLU OIL TEMP SIG (-)

DATA ACQUISITION UNIT
27 9
E2B20WHT E2A22WHT OIL TEMP SIG (+)

X W V G
X W V G
J
J
CA402BLU CA302BLU RPM SIG (-)

P412
23 5
CA402WHT CA302WHT RPM SIG (+)

H K
H K
E8L20 E8K22
4
2
1
P421
P401
P303
A SIGNAL HI
J401
P903
A407
2
EXC OUT (12 VDC)

q
q
E3S20 E3M22 OAT EXC HI

BLK
OIL
BLU
RED
TEMP
t
t
OAT EXC LO
3 14
B SIGNAL LO SENSOR
E3T20 E3N22
r
r
E3P20 E3K22
s
s
E3R20 E3L22
SIGNAL HI
SIGNAL LO
EXCITATION
P201
P302
J402
P214
OAT SIG HI
RPM
D GND
OAT SIG LO
11 29
SENSOR
B SIGNAL HI
C SIGNAL LO
A EXCITATION
P902
OAT
SENSOR
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
28/07 9I15
PAGE 25
91-77-40 Feb
Effectivity Data Acquisition Unit (DAU)
MAIN BUS
2A
DAU
105115 A 5.0
CB343
2
2
CB343A22
1
1
INBD
RIGHT
OUTBD
J
SENDERS
8
2D
J
P
B
C
A
213
P
J201
E1B20
P201
P302
h
h
Q2BR20WHT Q2AR20WHT R FUEL QTY SIG HI
j
j
Q2BR20BLU Q2AR20BLU R FUEL QTY SIG LO
P901 10 28
g
g
2
2
INBD
1
1
LEFT
OUTBD
(SEE SHEET 2)
SENDERS
SHIELD GROUND
JUMP TO P901-36
B
C
A
113
P
P902
J101
P101
P301
Q2BL20WHT Q2AL20WHT L FUEL QTY SIG HI

W X
W X
L FUEL QTY SIG LO

10 28
Q2BL20BLU Q2AL20BLU
T
T
TO 91-24-30, J315-2 P5C20WHT ALT 2 mV HI

FIGURE 1, SHEET 6 J315-1 P5C20BLU ALT 2 mV LO
JUMP TO P902 SHIELDS (SEE SHEET 4) SHIELD
7 25 36
E10A22N POWER GND

20
rGB1-C
r
1
E8N20 E8M22 20 +28 VDC POWER

s
s
MP1B20WHT MP1A22WHT MAP SIG HI

t
t
MAP SIG LO
8 26
MP1B20BLU MP1A22BLU
CA401A20BLU CA301BLU F/F SIG LO

P414
23 5
CA401A20WHT CA301WHT F/F SIG HI

q P W V U
q P W V U
E15J20 E15H22
3
2
1
P402
P304
J402
B SIGNAL HI
J411
D SIGNAL LO
F/F SENSO EXC

P387-14
(SEE 91-21-30, FIGURE 1, SHEET 4) E3U22 WOW SIG
BLK
RED
WHT
E16A22N AIRCRAFT TYPE DES

MAP
A EXCITATION TRANSDUCER
1 11 10 P903
GB1-B
SENSOR
SIGNAL HI
SIGNAL LO
FUEL FLOW
EXCITATION
A413
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
9I16 91-77-40 Feb 28/07
PAGE 26

MAIN BUS
3A
VAC
105115 A 6.0
CB312
(SEE SHEET 2)
SHIELD GROUND
JUMP TO P901-36
P901
CB312A22
YEL WHT CHT #1 (+)
J
CHT CYL #1 A441
RED GRN CHT #1 (-)
1
1E
YEL WHT CHT #2 (+)
P
CHT CYL #2 A442
RED GRN CHT #2 (-)
YEL WHT CHT #3 (+)

CHT CYL #3 A443
RED GRN CHT #3 (-)
YEL WHT CHT #4 (+)

CHT CYL #4 A444
RED GRN CHT #4 (-)
YEL WHT CHT #5 (+)

CHT CYL #5 A445
RED GRN CHT #5 (-)
YEL WHT CHT #6 (+)

CHT CYL #6 A446
CHT #6 (-)
17 35 16 34 15 33 14 32 13 31 12 30
RED GRN
E9N20YEL YEL (+)

TIT
RED (-)
11 29
SENSOR E9P20RED
V3B22
P6E20WHT BAT AMP HI
TO 91-24-30, P303-R
BAT AMP LO
6 24
FIGURE 1, SHEET 7 P303-S P6E20BLU
SPLICE AT F307
6
P6A22 VDC1 INPUT HI

TO 91-31-50, FIGURE 1, SHEET 16
DE-ICE SIG LO
21
V3A22BLU
2
V3A22WHT DE-ICE SIG HI

P902
A307
(SEE SHEET 3)
SHIELD GROUND
JUMP TO P902-36
B SIGNAL HI
D SIGNAL LO
A EXCITATION
A307
VACUUM
TRANSDUCER
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
9I17 91-79-30 FebPAGE 1

28/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

2 M30 3-Unit Engine Gauge
5 A407 Oil Temperature Sensor
6 Oil Pressure Sensor
Effectivity Oil Pressure and Temperature Indicators

PAGE 1
Feb 28/07 91-79-30 9I18
9I19
89801 AH 4.0
3 UNIT ENG. GAUGE
STANDARD OIL 0IL
2 CHT 28V TEMP PRES GND
INSTALLATION
E E E E
TO CYL.HEAD 1 2 4 4
TEMP. SCANNER E7B 22 B E E D
P386-13 / / / /
2 2 2 2
MAIN ENGINE
2 2 2 2
BUS GAUGE
E1A 22
3A 1
E2A 22
E2D 22
Oil Pressure and Temperature Indicators
E4A 22 WHT

E4A 22 WHT / BLU
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
OIL PRESSURE E4A 22 WHT / ORG

SENSOR 6
E5A 22N
P
GB4-M
P318 B H G E C D A F
TO HOURMETER
(SEE 91-31-30) B H G E C D A F
OIL PRESS / TEMP
E6A 22 (OPTIONAL)
TO OPTIONAL INSTALLATION
ANNUNCIATOR
P303 XW E N T R J S P304 (OIL PRESS)
J401 J402 (SEE 91-31-50,
5 P411 XW E N T R J S P402 FIGURE 1)
P401
E2B 20 OIL PRESS
91-79-30 FebPAGE
OIL TEMP. B 3
SWITCH
SENSOR A E2D 20N
E2C 20N E6B 20
E6C 20N
M6B 20
4636001 thru 4636020
E4C 20
P409
E4B 20 WHT
P
OIL B
PRESSURE C E4B 20 WHT / BLU
TRANSDUCER E4B 20 WHT / ORG
A
(OPTIONAL)
D E4B 20N
Effectivity
4
28/07
2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GRIDS 9I20 THRU 9L24

INTENTIONALLY BLANK
PAGE 3
Feb 28/07 91-79-30 9I20

Manual de Mantenimiento

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual de Mantenimiento

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual de Mantenimiento

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

AIRPLANE MAINTENANCE MANUAL

(S/N’s 4636001 AND UP)

PIPER AIRCRAFT, INC.

©Piper Aircraft, Inc.

AEROFICHE REVISION STATUS

Revision Publication Date Aerofiche Card Effectivity

ORG950712 June 19, 1996 All

* COMPLETE REVISION OF MAINTENANCE MANUAL 761-876

1A3 AEROFICHE EFFECTIVITY PAGE 1

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

Intro-List of 1 Feb 28/07

Intro-Table of Contents 1 Feb 28/07

Introduction 1 Feb 28/07

Index 1 Feb 28/07

1A5 INTRO - LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES FebPAGE 1

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

SUBJECT SECTION PAGE GRID NO.

1A7 INTRO - CONTENTS FebPAGE 1

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

1. Instructions for Continued Airworthiness

1A9 INTRODUCTION PAGE 1

Model Year Serial Numbers Model Year Serial Numbers

1995 4636001 thru 4636020 2004 4636349 thru 4636363

4. Serial Number Explanation

TYPE CERTIFICATE DESIGNATION SEQUENCE NUMBER

5. Assignment of Subject Material

1A11 INTRODUCTION PAGE 3

12. Accident/Incident Reporting

1A13 INTRODUCTION PAGE 5

(9) EMERGENCY LOCATOR TRANSMITTER:

(16) HI-LOK FASTENERS AND TOOLS:

1A15 INTRODUCTION PAGE 7

(23) PROPELLER AND PROPELLER GOVERNOR:

(28) VACUUM PUMP:

1A17 INTRODUCTION PAGE 9

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

13. Chapter/Section Index Guide

CHAPTER SECTION TITLE GRID NO.

4 AIRWORTHINESS LIMITATIONS 1C1

5 TIME LIMITS/MAINTENANCE CHECKS 1C9

6 DIMENSIONS AND AREAS 1E13

7 LIFTING AND SHORING 1F1

8 LEVELING AND WEIGHING 1F9

10 Weighing and Balancing

9 TOWING AND TAXIING 1F21

10 PARKING AND MOORING 1G9

11 PLACARDS AND MARKINGS 1G19

20 Exterior Placards and Markings

1A19 INTRODUCTION PAGE 11

CHAPTER SECTION TITLE GRID NO.

20 STANDARD PRACTICES - AIRFRAME 1J19

21 ENVIRONMENTAL SYSTEMS 2C1

24 ELECTRICAL POWER 2H11

26 FIRE PROTECTION 2K15

27 FLIGHT CONTROLS 3C1

CHAPTER SECTION TITLE GRID NO.

29 HYDRAULIC POWER 3H1

30 ICE AND RAIN PROTECTION 3I3

31 INDICATING/RECORDING SYSTEMS 4C1